How It Came About That We Shall Always See Okra the Cat Lying on a Velvet Cushion, While Okra-man the Dog Sleeps Among the Ashes of the Kitchen Fire.

They say that there once was a certain woman who was so unfortunate that whenever she gave birth to a child it died. So she set out to consult one of the lessor-gods about it and to tell him that she desired a child. The lesser-god said, “I shall give you one, but as for the child, all the work he will ever do will be to get you into debt, but nevertheless, some day he will repay you.”

It was not two days, it was not three days after consulting the lessor-god, when the woman conceived. She gave birth to a child – a spider-story child it was, for it was not long in growing up. The infant grew into a comely youth. One day he was with his mother and he said, “Mother, give me gold dust that I may go to the Edge-of-the-Sea-Country and buy salt.”

The mother said, “How much do you want?”

He said, “An asuanu.” And the mother took it and gave to him, and he set out on the journey.

Now, as he was going, he met a certain man and his spotted dog. He said, “bring it that I may buy it.”

The dog’s master said, “You cannot buy it.”

The youth said, “How much is it?”

The dog’s master replied, “An asuanu’s weight of gold dust.”

The youth said, “What’s that to me! Take this asuanu.” He received the dog and brought it back home.

When he returned, his mother said, “Why did you not reach your destination?”

He replied, “I used the gold dust to buy a dog.”

His mother said, “Ho!”

Now they were living there, it would be for about one moon, when the youth said, “Mother, give me gold dust that I may go trading.”

She said, “As for you, as is your wont, you will only take the gold dust and throw it away again, but how much do you want?”

He replied, “An asuanu-and-suru’s worth of gold dust.”

She said, “Take it, then.” So he set out along the trade road.

As he was going along, he met a certain man carrying a cat. He said, “Man, bring that animal that always falls on its feet, that I may buy it.”

The man said, “When I lie down in my room, the mice gnaw my feet; for that reason I bought it.”

He said, “I beseech you, ; let me have it.”

The man said, “You cannot buy it.”

The youth asked, “How much will you take for it?”

The man then replied, “An asuanu-and-suru’s worth of gold dust.”

The boy said, “So that’s why you say I cannot buy it! Here, take it.” The boy received the cat and went off home with it.

When he reached home, he said, “Mother, look here at what I have brought.”

She replied, “Ah, that is just what they said would happen.” The child remained there at home.

It would be about forty days later when the son again addressed his mother, saying, “Give me gold dust that I may go trading.”

The mother said, “All the money I have about me is finished with the exception of an asuasa’s weight of gold dust. If I give you this, and you go, and you do not buy goods with it, that’s the end of this business.”

The boy said, “I have heard.”

The next morning, when things became visible, the youth took up his bag and was off, pa! As he was going, he met a certain Ashanti fellow who was carrying a pigeon. He said, “Friend, bring that creature of yours that I may buy it.”

The Ashanti replied, “I am not selling it, for I amuse myself with it.”

The youth said, “I shall buy it.”

The bird’s master said, “I will not sell it, for I know what it may do for me.”

The boy said, “Oh, give it to me.”

He said, “Will you be able to buy it?”

The boy said, “How much?”

He replied, “An asuasa’s weight of gold dust.”

He said, “Do you suppose because of that I would not buy it?” Here is the sum.”

The boy brought the bird home. His mother said, “This has turned out no better than before. So this is what you have brought?” He replied, “Nevertheless, this is what I have brought.”

Now one day the boy was living there at home, when the pigeon called to him, saying, “Come.” When he went up to it, the pigeon informed him, saying, “In my own village I am chief, and I was about to go on a journey when a certain fellow came and seized hold of me. Then you, out of your kindness, bought me, and now I beseech you, if you will only take me back to my town, the people will take you greatly.”

The boy said, “You are telling me lies. You will run away. “

The pigeon said, “If you can’t see your way to do as I ask, then take a string and tie it to my leg, and take me along.

The boy took a string and fastened it to the pigeon’s leg, and it followed slowly behind him until they arrived at the pigeon’s town. When they reached the outskirts of the town, the children were playing nte marbles. As soon as they saw the bird they said, “Here is the chief! Here is the chief!” one of the children ran to tell the Korenti chief, but they seized him and cut his throat, saying, “You are causing us to call to mind our late sorrow.” But another one went again with the same tidings.

And now the Akwamu chief said, “You, Gyase chief, do you yourself go and see what this is all about.”

He went and looked, and returned. He said, “Oh, it is true!” Then they got a hammock and the regalia and went to bring the chief to his house. The whole tribe was told the news – how he was setting out on a journey, and how a certain fellow had caught him, and how this youth by his kindness had bought him, and how today he had brought him home.

Elders and young people all rose up and thanked the youth. The queen mother brought a water-pot full of gold dust, and all of the elders also each gave a water-pot full of gold dust. The chief himself looked on his hand and slipped off a ring and gave it to the youth. And he said, “Take this ring, and whatever you desire this ring will give you.”

He said, “I have heard.” And he went off with the ring to his village, and he showed the gold dust and the ring to his mother.

Then the mother said, Welcome Aku, welcome Aku!”

Formerly, when the boy, having burned up his gold dust and returned from his journeys, would salute his mother, she used not to answer him. And he gave his mother the news, saying, “You have seen this gold dust and this ring; I shall go and build a great village for us to live in.”

The mother said, “Press your eyes hard; try your best to do so.”

The youth set out and went and stood in the bush. He slipped off the ring and placed it on the ground and said, “Ring, clear all this land of forest and of bush for me.” And the whole of the place became cleared. He said, “Collect all which you have cleared into heaps for burning.” And it did so. He said, “Set up houses.” And it set up many houses. He said, “Ring, let people come and inhabit these houses.” And people came.

The youth made his mother the queen mother and he became chief.

Now, Ananse, the spider, was his best friend. One day, when he was living there in his new home, Kwaku Ananse set out to come to this youth’s village. When he reached it, he said, “Oh, little mother’s child, little father’s child, you have been fortunate and successful and you don’t care any more about me or to look after me. But what has happened to bring all this about?”

Then the youth told him all the news. The spider replied, “I shall go to my village to get something and return.”

Ananse went off to his village. He said to his niece, “I shall send you to my friend yonder, and when you go you will take this white wine for him, and pay attention and do whatever he orders, and you must try secretly to lay your hands on that ring.”

The girl set out and went to the youth’s village. The youth said to her, “As for this, I shall see to it that you do not go back again, for you must stay with me three days before you return..”

The girl said, “I have heard.”

Now he and the girl were there together, and the youth went to bathe.

He slipped off the ring and placed it on a table, and the girl took it and went off with it to her uncle, Kwaku Ananse. As soon a Ananse laid his hands upon it, he made use of the ring to build a big town.

Now, the youth, when he came to look for his ring, could not find it. He came to hear that the spider had built a big town which was greater than his own. Then he went off to consult one of the lesser-gods yonder. The lesser-god told him, “Ananse’s niece who came there to you has taken your ring and gone and given it to her uncle.” The spider also went to consult the lesser-god, and it was revealed to him that Okra, the cat, and Okraman, the dog, would be sent to recover the ring. Therefore he went and got medicine with which to treat the meat he was going to place on the path, so that when the animals who were walking there took some to eat, they would be unable again to go anywhere at all.

The youth who had lost his ring came home and told the cat and the dog: “The time has now come for me to tell you the reason I bought you, and it is this: something belonging to me has been lost, and they say it is in the possession of the spider, but that it lies in a box which is in the middle of all the rest of his boxes. They say he has taken medicine and mixed it with that flesh of the sheep and placed it on the path. So when you reach there, don’t eat it but jump over it.”

The dog said, “Cat, have you heard? You are the one who will chew it.”

The cat said, “Oh, go along, you who every little while take your nose to sniff and sniff!”

Then they began to talk a lot, and their master said, “That’s all right, be off.”

The two animals set out and were going along the path. Now there remained only a short time for them to reach the place where the meat was, when the dog detected the smell of it. He said, “Cat, I have a pain in my stomach and I cannot go on.”

The cat said, “Come, come! Let us go on, the business in hand is important.”

The dog said, “Cat, I am unable.”

The cat on alone. The dog then went to where the meat was, and he chewed up the whole of the meat. There he lay! He was unable to go on any more. And the cat reached Ananse’s village, and lay down in Ananse’s sleeping -room, on the ceiling above the room. As he lay there, he saw a mouse passing. Squeak! as he landed on its head. The mouse said, “Don’t catch me, what is the matter?”

The cat replied, “My master’s ring has been lost and they say it lies in Ananse’s box, which stands in the middle of all the rest of his boxes. If you are able to go and bring it to me, then I shall let you go.”

The mouse said, “I am able.”

The cat said, “Suppose I let you go, and you go off and don’t bring it but run away?”

The mouse said, “If you wish, fasten a string around my waist.”

The cat took a string and tied it around the mouse’s waist. Then the mouse went off into the spider’s room and gnawed a hole in the box which stood in the middle of all the rest. Little by little he made an opening, and soon it become large. He passed through it to go and get the ring to take to the cat. No sooner did the cat lay his hands upon it, than he ran off and came across the dog. He was lying just where the cat had left him. The cat said, “You are still lying here! And where is that meat?”

The dog said, “Oh, I did not see what became of it. Perhaps the people to whom it belonged came and removed it. But where is this ring?” The cat said, “here it is.” The dog said, “They say that the river which lies in the path is in flood, and as you, Cat, walk on the bottom when you cross water, it might be that the ring would fall down, so give it to me, for as for me, you know, I pass on the surface of the water.”

The cat said, “That’s so; you take it.”

They reached the river, and the dog jumped in – so did the cat. At once the cat crossed over. The dog reached the centre of the stream and became tired and, as he was about to take a deep breath, the ring fell out if his mouth into the water. He crossed over and came to where the cat was.

The cat said, “Where is that ring?” He said. “It fell out of my mouth into the water.” The cat ran and entered the water; he saw a great fish passing. The cat caught it. The fish said, “What is it?”

He said, “My ring has just fallen into this river, so unless you want trouble, give me what belongs to me at once. If you don’t give it to me I shall kill you immediately.”

The fish said, “Let us go to the river bank that I may give you what belongs to you.”

The fish said, “Let us go to the river bank that I may give you what belongs to you.”

When they both reached the bank, the fish vomited and the ring came out.

The cat took it and came and showed it to the dog. The dog said, “Father, I beg of you, when you go, don’t speak about what has happened.” The cat remained silent. They reached home and the cat told his master all that had happened, saying, “Because of the meat which the dog chewed as we were going along, he became unable to go farther. And again, when I had gone and got the ring and brought it back, the dog said to me, as he crossed a river on its surface, that I must hand over the ring to him. I gave it to him, and he threw it away in the river. It was only after a little while that I laid my hands on it again.”

All the people who were present said, “You, Cat, whatever kind of food I am eating, I will see to it that I break some and place in your little dish. Whatever mat I sleep upon, I shall only lie upon it provided you lie on some of it. As for you, Dog, you will only lie on the smoldering embers of the dead fire when the chilly might comes. Only with floggings, the folk will flog you.”

That is why you will always see the cat sleeping nowhere but on the best mat; also, if you cast come food down on the ground for him, he will not eat it unless it is on a plate. But as for the dog – we shall always see him sleeping in the courtyard on the dead ashes of the day’s fire; also you will see him there being beaten, he will yelp “Kao!”

It is all because of the time when the cat and the dog were sent on this business of the ring.

[ ASHANTI }

NWASHISISANA, the HARE

Hare, that will trickster, went to live with Grey antelope. One day he said to her, “suppose we go and till our fields and plant some bean!” So off they went and set to work. Antelope stole Hare’s beans, and Hare stole Antelope’s beans, but did most of the stealing.

Hare set a trap in his field, and Antelope was caught by the leg. In the early morning the cunning rascal went out and found Antelope caught in the trap. “Don’t you think you deserve to be killed,” said he, “now that I have found you out?”

“No! No!” she cried. “Let me go, and we will go back to my house where I will give you a hoe.” So he let her go, and she gave him the hoe.

Hare then packed his beans, harvested all his fields, and made ready to be off. Good-bye,” he said to Antelope, “I won’t stay with you any longer. You are a thief!”

Hare soon came across the great lizard, Varan, lying at the edge of a water-hole. It was the chief’s water-hole, where they drew their water, and he had been placed there on guard to find out who it was that was continually disturbing it and making it muddy. “What are you doing here?” said Hare.

“I am watching this hole to see who it is that muddies the chief’s water.”

“I’ll tell you what,” said Hare, “we had much better go and till a field together.”

“How can I dig?” said Varan. “I can’t stand on my hind legs and hold the hoe in my forepaws.”

“That doesn’t matter! Just come long. I will tie the hoe to your tail and you will be able to dig beautifully.”

So the hoe was tied on, but when this was done Varan could not move. Then Hare ran back to the hole, drank his fill of water, and finished by stirring it up well, making it as muddy as possible. After this he walked all over Varan’s fields and regaled himself on his groundnuts. In the heat of the day he came back and said, “Ho! An army has passed through the country. I hear that the warriors have dirtied the water in the hole. I hear, too, that they have ravaged all your crop of groundnuts!”

“Untie me!” said Varan. “I can’t budge.”

“All right, but only on condition that you don’t go and accuse me, Hare, of having stirred up the water.”

“But who told you this story about those soldiers who did all the mischief?”

“Don’t ask me so many questions. If you do, I won’t untie you!”

“Very well! I’ll be quiet, but take away this hoe. It hurts me!”

“Listen! First of all, I’ll go and draw some water for you. You must be thirsty.”

“No, I’m not thirsty. Only let me go!’

“If you are not thirsty, all right! I won’t untie the hoe.”

“Oh, very well, I am thirsty. Hurry up, and come back as fast as you can.”

Hare went to Varan’s village, took the wooden goblet from which he always drank, drew some water, and once again stirred up the hole. He took a drink to Varan, and said to him, “If anyone asks you whether I have disturbed the water, you must say that you did it. If you don’t promise me this, I won’t untie you.”

“All right. Very well.”

Then Hare ran to call the chiefs – Lord Elephant, Lord Lion, and the rest. They all came and asked Varan, “Who has been drawing our water and making it muddy?”

“It is I, said Varan.

And Hare, the rascal, added, “Yes, I found him committing this crime and I tied him up to a hoe, so that he couldn’t run away.”

The chiefs congratulated Hare. “Ah! you have been very clever! You have discovered the villain who has been muddying our pool!” And they immediately killed Varan.

The wily trickster, Hare, took the hoe and then went to look for Grey Antelope. She was on sentry duty, on the edge of a pool, for guards were placed at all the pools to prevent anyone from approaching, as the water still continued to be muddied during the night. Hare, not being able to get anything to drink, said to antelope, “What are you doing there so close to the water?”

“I am guarding the chief’s pool.”

“You will get thin and die of hunger, if you stay like that at the edge of the pools. Listen! You would do much better to come with me and till a field. Then, in time of famine, you would have something to eat.”

“Let us go!” said Antelope.

Hare set to work in grand style. He gave Antelope a hoe and told her to dig. “I can’t get on my hind legs,” said she, “and hold the hoe with my forelegs.”

“Let me have a look at your forelegs. I’ll tie the hoe to them, and you will be able to did all right.”

Antelope tried, but she couldn’t do it.

“Never mind,” said Hare. “Wait a minute.” He ran back to the pool, quenched his thirst, and muddied the water. Then he filled a calabash and hid it in the bush. On returning to Antelope, he said, “Hello! Haven’t you done any hoeing yet?”

“No, I can’t manage it.”

“Would you believe it! An Army has passed by, and they have stirred up the pool.”

“No!” Truly? Untie me, Hare!”

“I won’t untie you unless you swear that what I said is true.”

“Very well! Untie me.”

Off Hare went to get the calabash to give her a drink, and made her promise to confess that it was she who had disturbed the water. Then he called the chiefs, who killed Antelope.

But there was one creature that outdid Hare in cunning and that was Tortoise. She mounted guard at the pond. Hare arrived there. “You will die of hunger, if you stay at the edge of the pool with nothing to do. We had much better go and till a field together.”

“How can I hoe with short legs?” asked Tortoise.

“Oh! That will be all right. I’ll show you how to do it.”

“Eh! No. thank you! I think not!”

“Well then! Let’s go and help ourselves to some of the wild boar’s sweet potatoes.”

“No,” said Tortoise uncompromisingly, “No pilfering!”

However, before very long Tortoise began to feel hungry, so much so that, when Hare again proposed a marauding expedition, she overcame her scruples and they went off together to root up the sweet potatoes. Then they lighted a fire of grass in the bush and roasted them.

“Tortoise,” said Hare, “just go and see if the owners of these fields are anywhere about, as we must not let then catch us.”

“Yes, but let us both go. You go one way and I’ll go the other.”

Off went Hare, but Tortoise, instead of following his example, stayed behind and crawled into Hare’s sack. Hare soon came back, filled up his bag with sweet potatoes, threw it over his back, and ran away to escape the proprietors, shouting at the top of his voice, “Hi, Tortoise! Look out! They will catch you! I’m off! Fly”

He ran as hard as he could to escape capture. Tortoise, inside the sack, ate the sweet potatoes. She picked out all the best ones and finished the lot. She said, being satisfied, “Kutlu.” After a while Hare was tired out and lay down quite exhausted. He felt the oangs of hunger.

“Aha! Said he to himself. “I will have a good feed!” He sat down in a shady spot, opened his sack, out his hand inside, and pulled out one very small sweet potato. “This is much too small for me,” said he, and putting his hand in again, felt a nice big one. “Oho! here’s a beauty! When he had pulled it out of his bag, what was his surprise to find that his potato turned out to be Mistress Tortoise!

“Hello! Why! It’s you!” he cried in disgust and threw her on the ground. She scuttled away as fast as she could. Then Hare began to wail, “When I think that I have been carrying her all this time!” He felt very crestfallen.

Continuing his travels. Hare next met King Lion, surrounded by his courtiers. He at once asked permission to swear allegiance to the king and to settle in that country. But every day he went out to steal other folk’s groundnuts. When the owners of the fields came to look at their crops, they exclaimed, “Who can it be that digs up our groundnuts?”

Hare went off to find King Lion, and said to him, “Sire, your subjects are not what they should be, for they are in the habit of stealing.”

“Indeed!” said Lion. “Go and keep watch, and if you discover anyone stealing, catch him.”

Hare went off to take up his position in the fields, but Lion followed him and surprised him in the very act of feasting on groundnuts. “Ha! Ha! You tell me that my subjects are not honest folk, while it is you who do the thieving!”

“Not at all! I was only keeping a look out! Come here, and I will show you the footprints of your subjects, for I know them well!”

So they went to a large shady banyan tree. Hare made a strong string of one of the long tendrils and said to Lion, “As you think I don’t speak the truth, just sit down here and you will soon see the thieves passing by. I shall while away the time by making you a crown of wax.”

“All right,” said Lion, “make me a crown.”

Hare began by parting Lion’s mane down the middle and arranging the hairs carefully, one by one, on either side of his neck, as if he were preparing a spot on the top of his head for a crown. Then he made holes through the bark of the tree, on both sides of the trunk, and passed the hairs of the mane right through them, some on one side, some on the other. This done, he tied all the hairs securely together at the back of the tree with the string he had made, and he said to Lion, “I’ve finished the job. Jump up quickly and you will see one of your subjects stealing in the fields!’

Lion tried to jump up. He couldn’t! He had half killed himself struggling to get to his feet!

Hare ran to the village. “Come,” he shouted, “And see who it is who ravages your fields! He had previously torn up a lot of groundnut leaves and thrown them down close to the Lion. The villagers hurried to the spot.

“There! Don’t you see him?” Haven’t I found him out, eh?” Lion didn’t dare to say a single word.

Then his subjects cut great staves and beat him to death. “Ah! Hare, You are very clever, and we are grateful!” they said.

Hare cut Lion up into pieces. Then he took the skin and wrapped himself in it. Thus disguised, he went to Lion’s village and entered the queen’s hut. He said, “I am not well,” and shut himself up, refusing to see anyone. he gave orders to servants to kill an ox because he was ill. Then he had a second one slaughtered, then a third.

The women said to him, “Are you going to move to another place, since you are killing all your oxen?”

“No,” said Hare, “I have no intention of moving any more. I am killing them because I know very well that I shall never get over this illness.” So he had a general slaughtering of all Lion’s oxen, goats, and sheep, to the very last head of cattle. When all were killed, he said to the queen, “Haven’t you got my money in your keeping?”

“Yes,” she replied.

“Well, bring it all out and put it together with my royal mat and all my valuables on the village square.”

The lion’s skin had now acquired a rather loathsome odor, the flies were settling upon it in swams, and Hare was by no means comfortable inside of it.

“What sort of complaint have you got?” asked the queen. “It is something that smells very nasty.”

“Oh! I have only got some sores. I must go and find a doctor. Good-by, I shall start at once.”

Lion’s wife replied, “Then I will go with you, my husband.”

“No,” said he, “No occasion for that, for I know exactly where I must go.”

He went out to the square, picked up the mat in which all the money and valuables had been packed, and then, throwing off the lion’s skin, he tore away as fast as his legs could carry him with all the village in pursuit.

Hare came to a burrow, and in he ran. The pursuers got a hooked stick to pull him out. They tried to hook him and managed to get hold of his leg. “Oh, pull away!” cried he. “Pull away! You’ve only got hold of the root of a tree!”

So they left off pulling. They tried again, and this time they really hooked a root.

“Hi! hi!” he yelled. “Hi! hi! Take care! You’re hurting me! You’re killing me! Ow! Ow!”

They pulled as hard as they could, and they pulled and pulled until the hook broke and they fell over backward. They said, “Qaa.” Finally they were tired out and said, “Oh! Let us give it up and leave him where he is!” So they stopped up the burrow with a bunch of grass and went away.

The south wind no sprang up and blew the grass deeper into the burrow.

“I am done for,” said Hare to himself, as he fancied they were succeeding in getting nearer to him. He was suffering the pangs of hunger and was terribly thirsty, but not dare to leave the burrow, supposing his enemies to be close at hand. At length he cried out, “Have pity on me and let me go, my good fathers, I beseech you!” He crept cautiously toward the entrance of the burrow, and found only a bunch of grass. Then he made off at once, leaving all his treasures behind him, not even giving them a single thought.

He ran on and on. He became thin and ill. He ate grass, but it did not remain in his insides; it passed through him immediately. He came to the home of Grey Antelope. “Say, Antelope, suppose we sew one another up! You stitch me up, but not completely, you know! It will keep the grass much longer in our insides when we browse, and we shall get much more nourishment out of it.” Antelope consented, and partially stitched up Hare. Hare sewed her up entirely. Antelope swelled and died. Fortunately for her, however, she fell in a field belonging to a woman who picked her up, put her in her basket on the top of her head, and carried her to the village to be eaten. She gave her to her husband to cut up. He set to work and began by cutting the stitches that Hare had sewn. All that was in Antelope’s interior at once came out, she jumped to her legs, and galloped away.

She met Hare, and she said to him, “All right! I’ve found you out now! Never again do I call you my friend!”

Hare, being thirsty, was looking for a pool but could not find one. At last he came to one where no one was on guard. Tortoise was really in charge, but she was in the water. Hare walked in. “What luck! How nice and cool it is!” said he, quenching his thirst and swimming about. Tortoise snapped at one of his legs, then at another.

“Hello! Let me go! I’ll promise you a goat if you will let go!”

They came out of the pond together, and Hare said to her, “Come along to my house, and get your goat.” They reached his home, but no goat! Nothing! Hare did not give her anything. Then he remembered the money that he had left in the burrow and said, “Let us go and see chameleon. He has my valuables, for he borrowed a lot of money from me. I’ll just run round and fetch my brother; he knows all about the business and will be my witness.” Having said this, Hare ran off. Tortoise arrived at Chameleon’s abode and said, “Give me Hare’s money which he says you have!”

“What! I haven’t anything belonging to Hare!” Whereupon Chameleon blew into Tortoise’s eyes. She swelled, and died.

That’s the end.

[THONGA }


THE HARE, the HYENA, and the LIONESS’s CAVE

THE HARE ONCE MET the hyena and proposed that they should go for a walk. They went for a walk together and then separated, after which the hare went to the lioness’s cave and found it closed. She cried out, “Stone, open,” and the stone rolled away from the mouth of the cave. She entered and said, “Stone close,” and the stone returned to its place. She then proceeded to the room where the lioness stored her fat, after which she went to the room where the meat was kept, and having had enough to eat, she returned to the entrance, told the stone to open, and when she had passed out, to close once more.

Feeling hungry again later she returned to the cave. On the road she met the hyena, who asked her where she came from and why her mouth was oily. The hare denied that her mouth was oily, but as the hyena persisted in his statement, she told him to rub ashes on his mouth and it would become as beautiful as hers. The hyena did as he was recommended, but no change took place in his appearance. The hare next suggested washing it with water and afterwards with urine; but although the hyena tried both, his mouth remained as dry as before. The hyena said, “Please tell me where you go and feed.” At first the hare refused to comply with his request and said, “You are so foolish whenever you go anywhere and are sure to be caught.” But as the hyena would take no refusal, she consented to allow him to accompany her and told him about the lioness’s cave. “There are,” she said, “five rooms. In the first the ashes are kept; in the next, the bones; in the third, the tough meat; in the fourth, the tender meat; and in the last, the fat.” The hyena cried, “Get out of the way, take me there,” and off they started.

When they arrived at the cave, the hare told the hyena that when he wanted the cave to open he must say, “Stone, open,” and when he wanted it to shut, “Stone, close.” The hyena cried out, “Stone, open,” and the stone rolled aside. When they were inside, the hare said, “Stone, close,” and it closed again.

The hyena at once started on the ashes, while the hare went to the room where the fat was kept. When the latter had had enough to eat, she returned to the entrance and said she was going away. The hyena remonstrated with her as he was not nearly satisfied. After telling him how to get out of the cave, the hare went up to the stone and said, “Stone, open,” and again, when she was outside, “Stone, close.”

When the hyena was alone, he went to the place where the bones were kept, after which he proceeded to the next room, where the tough meat was stored, and ate until he was satisfied. He then returned to the entrance and said to the stone, “Stone, close,” instead of “Stone, open.” He repeated the words “Stone, close,” several times and could not understand why nothing happened.

At this point the lioness, the owner of the cave, returned and said, “Stone, open.” When the hyena heard, he cried, “Ah! Woe is me! That is what I wanted to say. Poor fellow that I am! Stone, open! Stone, open!”

The lioness entered and said, “shall I eat you, or shall I make you my servant?”

Then Hyena asked to be made her servant and was told to look after the lioness’s cub. He was also given a bone and instructed to break it when the lioness had crossed four rivers. The hyena counted the lioness’s footsteps and, when he calculated that she had crossed the four rivers, broke the bone. A chip flew, fracturing the cub’s skull. Fearing that the lioness would kill him on her return, he searched for some hornets and stuffed one up each of the cub’s nostrils so that it might be supposed that it had been stung to death.

The lioness returned to her cave a short while afterwards and called to the hyena to bring her cub. The hyena told lies for some time and invented several excuses for not doing as he was told, but the lioness was firm, and the hyena had to pick up the cub and bring it to its mother. The lioness at once saw that it was dead and told the hyena to take it outside. While he was doing this, he ate one of the cub’s legs.

A little later he was again ordered to bring the cub to its mother and then to take it away once more. He devoured another leg while carrying it away, and when the lioness called out to him a third time to bring the cub to her, he said the birds had eaten two of its legs. He then ate up the cub.

The lioness intended to punish the hyena for his misdeeds, and after tying him to a tree, went to get some sticks with which to beat him. As he was standing there, bound to the tree, some other hyenas bent on a raiding expedition passed close by, and one of them, seeing him, asked him why he had been tied up in this manner. He replied that he was being punished for having refused to drink some oil which had flies in it. The other hyena suggested that they should exchange places and, after untying the knots, he allowed himself to be bound to the tree instead, while the first hyena followed in the wake of the raiding party.

After a time the lioness returned, and commenced to flog the hyena, who cried out, “Stop! I will drink it now.”

“Drink what?” said the lioness, and she commenced to flog him again.

“Oh! Oh!” the hyena cried, “I will drink the oil with the flies in it.”

The lioness then saw that this was not the hyena that had killed her cub.

The next morning the hyenas on their way back from their raid passed the cave, and the one who had killed the cub saw on the ground some strips of bark, which the lioness had spread out in the sun to resemble meat. “I will go to my mistress’s kraal,” quoth he, “For I see there has been a kill.” On reaching the spot, however, he was seized by the lioness, who bound him to the tree once more and then beat him to death.

After this the lioness returned to her cave and said, “Stone, open.” When the stone had rolled aside and she had entered, she said, “Stone, close,” and it closed again.

[ MASAI ]

GOD IS DEAD?

It has been broadly suggested by some, in a very sensationalist manner, that God is dead. This phrase is quite actually a powerful suggestion. In a way, it represents that triumph of materialism and of science over the human consciousness.

However, in truth quite literally, if we are alive, God is not dead. We are the creator of our world. With All That Is we individually create our Personal Reality Field and collectively do we co-create our Consensus World Reality.

So perhaps God with a capital G might also be described as the ensemble of humans, animals and elements on Earth at any one time. However, since the whole is to be found within the part in this holographic model of reality, even if we were the last person alive on Earth, God would STILL not be dead.

Our philosophical discussion begs the question, “If I am the creator of my world and All That Is is within each Consciousness Unit(CU) or atom in physical reality, does this mean that I am also God or All That Is?”

Here again, the issue is not merely one of semantics. Let me explain. Religious conditioning serves to disempower the religion practitioner. We are speaking in broad generalities here. Particularly in our monotheistic practices, it is of course the churchgoers and student of the religious texts who remains in the subservient role. The God with a capital G is the almighty one. No one or thing comes before this God.

Now humility is achieved through the observance of this sacred relationship. Thus we have the humility expressed by the saints and by the disciples in our Christian religion.

Yet may I suggest that the great majority of the practitioners of the Christian faith take it much too far, so far indeed that the average Christian in actuality SEPARATES themselves from the Godhead. Through praise of the almighty God, the one and true King of Heaven, the power and spirituality of the practitioner is often overcome and finally forgotten.

The original words of The Christ, if I may be so bold, asked the observer of these fundamental Teachings to participate AS AN EQUAL.

As the new religion found followers, and the inevitable rise to power within the church structure of priests and other leaders occurred, this egalitarian relationship with God was not discussed. Eventually, as the priests consolidated their power, this brotherly and sisterly relationship between the Creator and the created was deemed blasphemous.

Those who spoke in terms of their equality with God were punished. We are attempting to change this relationship with these blog writings. We are reminding the spiritually-minded person of their original relationship with the Godhead.

THE GOD BLOG

For our next project i will create The God Blog – the manuscript on All That Is. We hope to present for you an interesting and educational blog on the creative source for all or our realities. However, I believe we would do well to provide with some of the ideas and theories we will cover in that blog series, now in this current blog series, so that you may better absorb and utilize these current messages from The Entity.

The therapeutic exercise that has many of the “demons” from the past faced, and in a sense, taken “into the light” and disempowered in that way. In these new blog series of mine, we are presenting the blog reader with the exercise and experimentation required to pursue a similar course of study.

Obviously, because we are incessantly on the topic of Reality Creation here, the question of “who is the reality creator?” must arise just as incessantly. I do believe that it is more than a mere matter of semantics. Who is the creator of our Personal Reality? I have advised over these many years that it is indeed YOU the blog reader of this blog who creates our Personal Reality. Now where does God and where do the concepts of the Divine fit within this cosmology of a reality-creating human? Let us discuss this for just a moment…

To begin, you Dear Blog Reader, are the epitome of All That Is. You are composed of divine energy constructs – the (CUs) Consciousness Units. In each and every one of the Consciousness Units we may find the holographic replica of EVERYTHING in all of our created realities. This EVERYTHING we are also referring to as All That Is. Now this metaphor of a holographic reality may serve us well here in this discussion. The simplified definition of a hologram for our purposes might be, “that which is everywhere all the time.” This describes the fundamental nature of the CUs as well as the multidimensional atoms theorized by some of our scientists. The researcher may make practical use of this theoretical construct by experimenting with experiencing the everywhere-all-the-time perspective. This perceptual vantage point is actually each and every Moment Point in space and time, so it does include past, present and future, in our terms.

This All That IS we have named to move beyond religious connotations of any kind. It is a safe generic titles, is it not? Yet at the same time, being ALL that is, this construct would naturally hold within itself what we might call the Divine or the sacred or spiritual worlds. The visionary experience treats the researcher, or perhaps the accidental mystic, to the sensory extravaganza that is multidimensional existence. How does one then define this experience in retrospect? Invariably the human bows to authority in these matters, and again as we have discussed in these blogs, hands over their powers of Reality Creation to another higher, perhaps “more worthy” entity. Thus the gods and goddesses are born.

We do not intend to trivialize this god-making faculty of the human being. These self-created constructs are definitely “given a life of their own” through the ongoing support of “thought energy” through the prayers and other spiritual observances of countless Souls over the millennia. The personality aspects of the human are constellated “out” onto the physical world from “within.” Each of the separate Earthly cultures, then, creates their individual divinities according to the needs of their particular group. So that the Nordic peoples, for example, developed an entirely different pantheon than did the Indonesian islanders. Different divine beings evolve from the different cultural needs of the people who live in the collective. Now let us relate this to the individual researcher living in our current timeframe.

AFTER ENLIGHTENMENT

We have spoken before of the gratifying changes in consciousness that come with Soul Evolution. What we are really talking about here is a systematic approach to belief change. The example we used pertained to a change in belief regarding radial prejudice.

In our example, the person had undergone a subtle transformation in consciousness by ” working on themselves” to the degree that they have no longer feared or hated a particular race or group of people, but they were indeed experience growing affection for these people, for the race as a whole. I described this feeling as a form of ambivalence, in that the person still harbored negative feelings for the group of people, but the positive feelings for the group were beginning to overtake the negative.

This person was on the cusp of positive belief change. They were comfortable with the uncertainty they were experiencing, for as I said, they were working on themselves, trying to learn their Lessons, and they were, at least for the moment, able to resist recognizing the negative inner dialogue concerning the group of people. They were able to “turn down the volume, ” you see, on the negative inner dialogue, and “turn up the volume” on their self-created positive inner dialogue. So this is what belief change entails.

WHY PURSUE THE SPIRITUAL*

Let us discuss an issue that is quite obvious. Perhaps that is why we have neglected it thus far in these new blog writings. The issue may be framed with a question: “Why do we assume that the blog readers of our new blogs are looking for spiritual understanding? If the path to Loving Understanding and Soul Evolution is so perilous and fraught with physical and psychological pain, why would anyone in their right mind want to pursue it?”

To begin, the blog reader of my blogs, as I have observed them over the many years since I first begun, are seekers. They are drawn to this work, I assume, because it “speaks to them.” Others of a different personality style and temperament, perhaps, would de drawn to other Teachings.

Now it is true that the older blog material were quite barren of discussions of spiritual matters. This was an editorial decision. I have continuously offered my spiritually-informed content to humanity. However, since it is the human co-creator of the blog who creates the blog in physical reality, it is the human co-creator who determines what they consider to be appropriate content for the blog.

These new blog manuscripts are the spiritual – you might say the divine – counterparts to the old blog material. If you are a student of The Entity, to complete our studies we would do well to attend to the spiritually-based blog material contained in these new blogs. Now I have attempted to include weighty intellectual discussions in my new blog work, to satisfy those of you who are focused on the physical dimension in which we live. The spiritual is merely the other side of this physical dimension. To become a well-rounded, educated human, we would do well to study both aspects of reality.

The path to Soul Realization may be thought of as arduous by some. This is true. Certainly it is not for the meek and mild. It is easy to lose confidence and perhaps quit the journey before it has truly begun. As we examine our expanded reality, we most definitely will be experiencing some of our lifetimes within less than ideal circumstances. If we tune-in, for example, to a lifetime in which you are dying slowly from starvation or an illness of some kind, this witnessing may be so distasteful and shocking that you are thrown out of your meditative state. I would suggest that you remember in these cases, under these circumstances of harsh conditions, that you are supported on a wave of ecstasy that is the Soul Self. This ecstasy ,may help to motivate you to continue your studies.

Now suppose that you are experiencing negative realities within your current life. Should you attempt these explorations of your other Simultaneous Lives? Generally, I would suggest that you first gain some mastery over the exercises and conduct the various experiments I have outlined in my previous tow blog series.

THE LEOPARD, the SQUIRREL, and the TORTOISE

Many years ago there was a great famine throughout the land and all the people were starving. The yam crop had failed entirely, the plantains did not bear any fruit, and the corn never came to a head; even the palm-oil nuts did not ripen, and the peppers and okras also failed.

The leopard, who lived entirely on meat, did not care for any of these things, and although some of the animals who lived on corn and the growing crops began to get rather skinny, he did not really mind very much.

However, in order to save himself trouble, since everybody was complaining of the famine, the leopard called a meeting of all the animals. He told them that, as they all knew, he was very powerful and must have food, that the famine did not affect him, as he lived only on flesh, and that as there were plenty of animals about, he did not intend to starve. He then told all thew animals present at the meeting that, if they themselves did not wish to be killed, they must bring their grandmothers to him for food, and that when the grandmothers were finished, he would feed off their mothers. The animals might bring their grandmothers in succession, and he would take them in turn, so that, as there were many different animals, it would probably be some time before their mothers were eaten. By that time it was possible that the famine would be over. But, in any case, the leopard warned them that he was determined to have sufficient food for himself and that, if the grandmothers or mothers were not forthcoming, he would turn upon the young people themselves and kill and eat them. For this, of course, the young generation, who had attended the meeting, had little liking, and in order to save their own skins why agreed to supply the leopard with his daily meal.

The first to appear with his aged grandmother was the squirrel. The grandmother was a poor decrepit old thing with a mangy tail, and the leopard swallowed her at one gulp and then looked round for more. In an angry voice he growled out, “This is not the proper food for me; I must have more at once.”

Then a bush cat pushed his old grandmother in front of the leopard, but he snarled at her and said, “Take the nasty old thing away; I want some sweet food.”

It was then the turn of a bush buck and, after a great deal of hesitation, a wretchedly poor and thin old doe tottered and fell in front of the leopard, who immediately dispatched her and, although the meal was very unsatisfactory, declared that his appetite was appeased for that day.

The next day a few more animals brought their old grandmothers, until at last it became the turn of the tortoise; but, being very cunning, he produced witnesses to prove that his grandmother was dead, and so the leopard excused him.

After a few days all the animals’ grandmothers were exhausted, and it was necessary that the mothers be sacrificed to supply food for the ravenous leopard. Now, although most of the young animals did not mind getting rid of their grandmothers, whom they had scarcely even known, many of them had very strong objections to providing their mothers, of whom they were very fond , as food for the leopard. Among the strongest objectors were the squirrel and the tortoise. The tortoise had thought the whole thing out. As everyone knew that his mother was alive, she being rather an amiable old person and friendly with all, he was aware that the same excuse would not avail him a second time. He therefore told his mother to climb up a palm tree, and he would provide her with food until the famine was over. He instructed her to let down a basket every day and said that he would place food in it for her. The tortoise made the basket for his mother and attached it to a long string of tie-tie. The string was so strong that she could haul her son up when ever he wished to visit her.

All went well for some days, as the tortoise used to go at daybreak to the bottm of the tree where his mother lived and place her food in the basket. Then the old lady would pull the basket up and have her food, and the tortoise would depart on his daily round in his usual leisurely manner.

In the meantime, the leopard had to have his daily food. The squirrel’s turn came first, after the grandmothers had finished, and as he was poor, weak thing and not possed of any cunning, he was forced to produce his mother for the leopard to eat. The squirrel was, however, very fond of his mother, and after she had been eaten he remembered that the tortoise had not produced his grandmother or his mother for the leopard’s food. He therefore determined to set a watch on the movements of the tortoise.

The very next morning, while he was gathering nuts, the squirrel saw the tortoise walking very slowly through the bush and, being high up in the trees and able to travel very fast, he had no difficulty in keeping the tortoise in sight without being noticed. When the tortoise arrived at the foot of the tree where his mother lived, he placed the food in the basket which his mother had already let down by the tie-tie and, having got into the basket and given a pull at the string to signify that everything was right, was hauled up and after a time was let down again in the basket. The squirrel was watching all the time and, as soon as the tortoise had gone, he jumped from branch to branch to branch of the trees and very soon arrived at the place where the leopard was napping.

When the leopard woke up, the squirrel said, “You have eaten my grandmother and my mother, but the tortoise has not provided any food for you. It is now his turn, and he has hidden his mother away in a tree.”

Hearing this, the leopard was very angry and told the squirrel to lead him at once to the tree where the tortoise’s mother lived.

But the squirrel said, “The tortoise only goes at daybreak when his mother lets down a basket; so if you go early in the morning, she will pull you up, and you can then kill her.”

To this the leopard agreed, and the next morning the squirrel came at cockcrow and led the leopard to the tree where the tortoise’s mother was hidden. The old lady had already let down the basket for her daily supply of food. The leopard got into it and gave the line a pull, but except for a few small jerks nothing happened. as the old mother tortoise was not strong enough to pull a heavy leopard off the ground. When the leopard saw that he was not going to be pulled up, being an expert climber, he scrambled up the tree. When he got to the top he found the poor old tortoise whose shell was so tough that he thought she was not worth eating, so in a violent temper he threw her down on the ground and then came down himself and went home.

Shortly after this, the tortoise arrived at the tree and, finding the basket on the ground, gave his usual tug at it but there was no answer. He then looked about and after a little while came upon the broken shell of his poor old mother who by this time was quite dead. The tortoise knew at once that the leopard had killed his mother and made up his mind that for the future he would live alone and have nothing to do with the other animals.

[ EFIK-IBIBIO ]

THE GAZELLE and THE LEOPARD

The gazelle said to the leopard, “It is now the dry season, and we should be cutting down the bush, so our women may plant as soon as the first rain come.”

“Well,” said the leopard, “I cannot go today, but you may as well go.”

The gazelle went; and all that hay he cut the bush, and cleared the ground for planting, and the next day he also went alone.

On the third day the leopard called on the gazelle and asked him to go to the plantation with him. But the gazelle said he was sick and could not go, so the leopard went by himself.

The next day the leopard again called for the gazelle, but he was not in.

“Where’s he gone?” inquired the leopard.

“Oh, he has gone to another part.”

And each day the leopard called upon the gazelle he was either sick or out of town; so that the leopard had nearly all the hard work himself.

When the women had planted, and the harvest was ripe, the gazelle went to look at the plantation. He was greatly pleased to find so much planted, and thought how pleased his friends would be if he invited them to a feast; so he called in all the antelopes and other beasts of the field, and they had a splendid feast.

By and by the leopard thought he would go and see how his plantation was getting on, and no sooner had he arrived there he exclaimed, “Hullo, who has been feeding on my plantation and eaten up my corn? Surely I will set a trap for them and catch the thieves.”

The next day the animals, led by the little gazelle, came again; and he warned them, saying, “Be careful, for the leopard will surely set a trap for us.” But the antelope became careless, and finally fell into the leopard’s trap. “There,” said the gazelle, “I told you to be careful. What shall we do? They have all run away and left us, and I am not strong enough to release you.”

Then the leopard came, and rejoiced greatly at having caught the thief. He took the antelope to his town. “Please, sire, the gazelle told me to go,” cried the antelope. “Don’t kill me! Don’t kill me!”

“How am I to catch the gazelle?” The leopard replied. “No, I must kill you.” And so he killed the antelope and ate him.

When the gazelle heard what the leopard had done, he was greatly annoyed, and declared that as the leopard was their chief, the animals were quite right in eating the food he had provided for them. Was it not the duty of the father to provide for his children? “Well, well, never mind, he will pay us for this.”

Then the gazelle made a drum, and beat it until all the animals came as if to a dance. When they were assembled, he told them that they must be revenged upon the leopard.

The leopard heard the drum, and said to his wife, “Let us go to the dance.” But his wife said she would rather stay at home, and did not go. The leopard went; but no sooner had he arrived than they all set upon him and killed him. And when the dance was over, the leopard’s wife wondered why he had not return. The gazelle sent her the head of her husband, skinned, as her part of the feast; and not knowing that it was her husband’s head, she ate it.

“Oh, for shame,” said the gazelle, “you have eaten your husband’s head.”

“Nay, sir, the shame rests with you; for you gave it to me to eat, after having murdered him.” And she wept and cursed the gazelle.

[ BAKONGO }

THE CATERPILLAR and the WILD ANIMALS

ONCE UPON A TIME a caterpillar entered the house of a hare when the owner was absent. On his return the hare noticed the marks on the ground, and cried out, “Who is in my house?”

The caterpillar replied in a loud voice, “I am the warrior son of the long one whose anklets have become unfastened in the fight in the Kurtiale country. I crush the rhinoceros to the earth and make cow’s dung of the elephant! I am invincible!”

The hare went away, saying, “What can a small animal like myself do with a person who tramples an elephant under foot like cow’s dung?”

On the road he met the jackal and asked him to return with him and talk with the big man who had taken possession of his house. The jackal agreed, and when they reached the place he barked loudly and said, “Who is in the house of my friend, the hare?”

The caterpillar replied, “I am the warrior son of the long one whose anklets have become unfastened in the fight in the Kurtiale country. I crush the rhinoceros to the earth and make cow’s dung of the elephant! I am invincible!’

On hearing this the jackal said, “I can do nothing against such a man,” and left.

The hare then fetched the leopard, whom he begged to go and talk with the person in his house. The pLeopard, on reaching the spot, grunted out, “Who is in the house of my friend, the hare?”

The caterpillar replied in the same manner as he had to the jackal, and the leopard said, “If he crushes the elephant and the rhinoceros, he will do the same to me.”

They went away again, and the hare sought out the rhinoceros. The latter, on arriving at the hare’s house, asked who was inside, but when he heard the caterpillar’s reply, he said, “What! He can crush me to earth! I had better go away then.”

The hare next tried the elephant and asked him to come to his assistance, but on hearing what the caterpillar has said, the elephant remarked that he had no wish to be trampled under foot like cow’s dung, and he departed.

A frog was passing at the time, and the hare asked him if he could make the man who had conquered all the animals leave his house. The frog went to the door and asked who was inside. He received the same reply as had been given to others, but, instead of leaving, he went nearer and said, “I, who am strong and a leaper, have come. My buttocks are like the post and God has made me vile.”

When the caterpillar heard this, he trembled, and as he saw the frog coming nearer, he said, “I am only the caterpillar.”

The animals who had collected nearby seized him and dragged him out; and they all laughed at the trouble he had given.

[ MASAI ]

THE FROG AND UMDHLUBU

ONCE ON A TIME, A king married the daughter of another king; he loved her very much. His other wives were troubled on account of his love for her. She became pregnant, and gave birth to a girl: the father loved her exceedingly. The child grew, and when she was a fine handsome little child, the other wives formed a plot against her; they said, “Since her father is not at home, let us go and cut fibre.” They told the children not to agree to carry the child. The mother called the little girl who nursed her child. She refused to carry her. The mother put her on her back, and went with her.

They cut fibre, and went on continually. It came to pass in one of the valleys they sat down and took snuff. The mother made a bundle of fibre, and gave it to the child: the child played with it. They set out again and cut fibre. They went on continually. the mother forgot the child. They went on continually cutting fibre; they tied it up in bundles, and carried it home.

When they came home, they called the children’s nurses: they all came. But hers came without the child. She asked, “Where is my child?” They said, “you took her with you.” She was troubled, and cried, and ran to find her. She did not find her, and came back.

There was a great lamentation. The other wives said, “How is it now? We have destroyed the father’s darling. The pet wife is confounded.”

A messenger was sent to tell the father; it was said, “King, your child has been lost, while we were cutting fibre.” The father was greatly troubled.

In the morning an old woman of the royal household of another nation went to fetch water: she heard the child playing; she heard something saying, “Ta, ta, ta.” She wondered and said, “Ah! what is this?” She went stealthily along, and found the child, sitting and playing. She went home, and left both her and the water-pot. She called the king’s chief wife, and said, “Come here.” The queen went out of the house. She said, “Let us go; there is something by the river which you will see.” The queen said, “Take her.” She said so with joy. The old woman took her. They came to the river. The queen said, “Wash she.” She washed her. The queen took her, and placed her on her back, and went home.

She suckled her, for she had given birth to a boy. The queen brought her up. She grew and the queen’s own child walked. She grew and became a great girl. She was appointed chief of the girls, when a great feast was made. Many cattle were slaughtered, and all the people rejoiced.

After that the chief men said to the boy, “Marry this girl.” The boy wondered, and aid, “O! what is the meaning of this? Is she not my sister? Did we not suck together at my mother’s breast?” They said, “No, she was found in a valley.” He denied, and said, “No, she is my sister.” The next morning they said, “It is proper you should take her to be your wife.” He refused, and was greatly troubled.

On another occasion an old woman said tot he girl, “Do you know? She answered, “What?” She said, “You are going to be married.”” She inquired, “To whom?” She said, “the young man of your own house.” She said, “O! what is the meaning of this? Is he not my brother?” The old woman said, “No, you were taken from a valley, and brought up by the queen.” She cried, being much troubled.

The girl took a water-pot, and water to the river, and sat down and wept. She filled the water-pot, and went home. She sat down in the house. Her mother gave her food; she did not like it, and refused. The mother asked, “What is it?” She said, “Nothing. There is a pain in my head.” So it was evening, and she went to lie down.

In the morning she awoke and took the water-pot, and went to the river; she sat down and wept. As she was crying, there came out a great frog, and said, “Why are you crying?” She said, “I am in trouble.” The frog said, “What is troubling you?” She replied, “It is said that I am to become the wife of my brother.” The frog said, “Go and take your brother things, which you love, and bring them here.”

She rose and took the water-pot, and went home. She took another pot, and fetched her things, and out them in the pot; she took her brass rod, and her ubenthle kilt, and a petticoat with a border of brass balls, and her fillet, and her brass, and her beads. She took these things, and went to the river, and threw them on the ground.

The frog inquired, saying, “Do you wish me to take you to your own people?” The child said, “Yes.” The frog took her things and sallowed them; he took her and swallowed her; and set out with her.

On the way he met with a string of young men: they saw the frog. The one in front said, “Just come and see: here is a very great frog.” The others said, “Let us kill him, and throw stones at him.” The frog said:

“I am but a frog; I will not be killed.

I am taking Umbhlubu to her own country.”

They left him. They said, “Hau! How is it that the frog speaks, making a prodigy? Let us leave him.” They passed on, and went their way.

And so the frog too went on his way. Again he met with a string of men. The one in front said, “O, come and see a huge frog.” They said, “let us kill it.” The frog replied:

“I am but a frog; I will not be killed.

I am taking Umdhlubu to her own country.”

They passed on, and the frog went on his way.

He fell in with some boys herding cattle: they saw him, and he was seen by a boy of the damsel’s father. He had said, “W au! By Umdhlubu the king’s child! Come and kill a great frog. Run and cut sharp sticks, that we may pierce him with them.” The frog said:

“I am but a frog; I will not be killed.

I am taking Umdhlubu to her own country.”

The boy wondered, and said, “O, sirs, do not let us kill him. He calls up painful emoptions. Leave him alone, that we may pass on.” They left him.

The frog went on his way and came to others. He was seen by the girl’s own brother: he said, “By Umdhlubu the king’s child! There is a very great frog. Let us beat it with stones and kill it.” The frog said:

I am but a frog; I will not be killed.

I am taking Umdhlubu to her own country.”

He said, O, leave him alone. He speaks a fearful thing.”

He went on and came near her home: he entered a bush below the kraal: he placed her on the ground with her things. He put her in order: he cleansed her with udonqa: he anointed her, and put on her ornaments.

So she set out. She took her brass rod, and went and entered at the gateway, and she passed across the cattle enclosure: she went in the middle of it: she came to the opening, she went out, and entered the house of her mother. Her mother followed her into the house and said, “Where do you come from, damsel?” She said, “I am merely on a journey.” The mother said, “Tell me.” She said, “There is nothing, I am merely on a journey.” The mother said, “Women are satisfied who have such fine children as you. For my part, I am in trouble: my child was lost: I felt her in the valley: she died there.” The child answered, saying, “No; the queens made me forget her; they would not allow the nurse to carry her.” The girl said in answer, “No! there is no woman who can forget her own child.” She said, “No; it happened through my not being accustomed to carry a child; for she used to remain with the nurse.” Umdhlubu said, “Yes, you did it because you did not love me.” She began to look very earnestly at her; she saw that it was her child.

When she saw her she rejoiced. She praised with the praise-giving names of her child. The mother took her role, and girded her herself; she took her head-ornament, and put it on her head; she took her petticoat, and put it on; she took her staff, and went out; she leaped for joy, and halala’d; she went into the cattle-pen; she played leaping about with joy. The people wondered and said, “What has happened to Untombinde today? Why does she rejoice so much? Since the time her first-born died, she has never rejoiced, but has constantly been in sorrow.”

One from her side went out, and said, “Just let me go and see what is in the house? Why do I hear the queen praising with the praise-giving names of her dead child? So she went, and entered the house, and saw the girl. She went out, and shouted aloud, and gave thanks.

All the people went out. They ran to the house, hurrying to get there first. They crowded each other together at the doorway. They saw the child. All the people on her side rejoiced. All the others were troubled, and the queens of the other side said, “Ah! What does it mean? For we thought we had already killed this child. She has come to life again. We shall be confounded together with out children. The supremacy of our children is coming to an end.”

A messenger set out and went to her father; he arrived and said, “O king, your child that was dead is come to life again.” The king said, “Hau! Are you mad? Which is that child?” The messenger said, “Umdhlubu.” The father said, “Whence comes she?” He said, “I do not know, O king.” The father said, “If it is not she, I will kill you. If it is she, run, raise a cry in all places, that the people may bring together all the large oxen, and come with them.”

He went and raised a cry, and said, “The princess has come. Make haste with the oxen.” The men asked, “Which princess?” He replied, “Umdhlubu, the child of the king, who was dead.”

They rejoice; they took their shields; they took the oxen, and drove them; they took also their presents to gladden the princess; for she had risen from death; they found her when they no longer expected it. They came; they slaughtered many cattle, even in the paths, in order that the old men and the old women and the sick might eat, who were not able to reach the home where the princess was.

The father came and said, “Come out, my child, that I may see you.” She did not answer. He slaughtered twenty oxen. She made her appearance at the doorway, and stood still. He slaughtered thirty; she came out. The father said, “Go into the cattle-kraal; let us go to dance for you, for our great joy; for I used to say, you are already dead, but in fact you are still alive.” She stood still. Again he slaughtered forty oxen. Then she went, and entered into the kraal.

They danced for her very much. But the other side of the kraal did not rejoice; it did not dance together with the children and queens of that side. They left off dancing.

The father went with her into the house, and sat down with her. He said, “Let a fat young ox be taken, that we may eat and rejoice, for she was dead, and had risen from the death.”

So All the people rejoiced. The child returned to her royal position. Her father did right, royally; he returned to his former habits, and loved at that kraal, for he had ceased to be there much, because he remembered his child which had hied. Her mother and the children of her house rejoiced together.

Her father asked her, “How did you come here?” The child said, “I was brought by a frog.” The father said, “Where is he?” The child replied, “He is yonder in the bush.” The father said, “Let oven be taken, that he may be danced for, and come up to our home.” So they went and danced for him.

They brought him home. They brought him into the house and gave him ,meat, and ate. The king inquired, “What do you wish that I should give you as a reward?” He said, “I wish some black hornless cattle.” He took many cattle and people, and said, “Go with him.” So they went and came to his country.

The frog built a great town, and became a great chief. He slaughtered cattle continually; and men came to ask for meat. They inquired, “What is your chief who built this town?” They said, Uselesele.” They inquired, “Whence did he obtain so large a town as this?” They said, “He got it because he brought out princess to the king; so he gave him cattle and men.” They answered, saying, “Are you then the people of Uselesele?” They said, “Yes. Do not speak disrespectfully of him; he will kill you, for he is a great chief.”

Uselesele took many people under his protection. They revoked from their chiefs through seeing the abundance of food at Uselesele’s. So Uselesele reigned and become a king.

Unkosi-yasenthla heard it said, “Unkosi-yasenzansi has a beautiful daughter, named Umdhlubu.” He said to his people, “Go and see what kind of damsel it is.” They went, and came to Unkosi-yasenzansi, and said, “King, we have seen sent by Unkosi-yasnthla, that we might select a beautiful damsel from among your children.”

He summoned them, and they came. At length they saw only one damsel which excelled all the others in beauty. For they remembered, that if a king has sent people to go and choose a beautiful damsel, it is proper that they should look very earnestly; for those people are the king’s eyes, because he trusts them. They look earnestly, that they may not be reproved when the damsel is brought home. When they see she is ugly, not like aa damsel which has been chosen for a king, they find great fault, saying, “Why have you disgraced the king by choosing an ugly thing for him?” The honor of those men is ended; they are removed from their honorable office, because they are not trustworthy. therefore they chose Umdhlubu for her beauty’s sake, saying, “It is she only who is fit to be the king’s queen above all the others.”

Therefore those who were left were ashamed; and their mothers were ashamed; and their brothers were ashamed. There was rejoicing in the house of Umdhlubu. The joy began with Umdhlubu, who was conspicuous for beauty among many other damsels and in the eyes of them all, for it was said, “There is a beautiful woman indeed!” Her mother rejoiced in her heart, saying, “I did well when I gave birth to my child!” And the children of her house were exalted, although their mother had been long ago exalted by the king, through being loved. there, then, was the hatred which increased towards that house of Umdhlubu, as her mother also was loved very much by the father of Umdhlubu. There was a very great hatred in the hearts of the other queens, on account of the beauty of Umdhlubu, which was admired by the king of another people above all their own children. They were ashamed for ever.

So they looked, and chose Umdhlubu. They departed to tell the king. They arrived home, and said, “King, we have seen the beautiful damsel; her name is Umdhlubu.” The king said, “Aye; it is well. We must set out and go thither, and take a thousand head of cattle. ” So they set out.

Unkosi-yasenzansi, as he was sitting in the shade within the cattle-pen with his people, said, “What is that yonder? There is a great dust which rises to heaven.” They were afraid. He said to his soldiers, “get ready to fight, for we do not know what is coming.” After that the cattle appeared coming with the king and his people. Unkosi-yasenzansi went to meet them.

But the chief said, “I am Unkosi-yasenthla; I come to see Umdhlubu. Then they all went to her house. When they arrived, they asked her to have Umdhlubu given them. Her father rejoiced when he heard that.

They had cattle slaughtered for them. They spoke with the father. Unkosi-yasenthla said, “I come to you, Unkosi-yansenzansi, I being desirous of taking your daughter; if you assent, it is well. I come with a thousand cattle.” The father assented, saying, “It is well.”

He assembled all the girls, and all the men, the young men with head-rings, and the youth; he set apart men for the purpose of working for Umdhlubu. He took out brass and beads for her marriage, and five hundred oxen, and said, “Now it is right. Set out with her. There is an officer for the purpose of conducting the wedding ceremonies.”

So they all went with him, and reached the king’s home. As they were coming into sight, a great cry was raised, and the people appeared in all directions, shouting, “The quee n of Unkosi-yasenthla has come.” They rejoiced.

They retired to rest. In the morning, when the sun had risen, and it was hot, the damsels went out with the young men and youths, and went into the bush; they sat down there. When the time for dancing arrived, they danced; they fetched the damsel from the bush; she went to the kraal to dance.

So they ended the dance. She took brass, and placed it before her father, and prayed, saying, “Sire, take care of me forever, for now I am in thy hand, preserve me.”

The whole marriage party sat down. They danced for them. They ended the dance. In the morning the damsel had ten bullocks killed and they ate and rejoiced.

The officer of the ceremony said, “Sire, we now wish to set out to return home, for the work is done.”

The king took five hundred head of cattle, and sent them as a present to his mother. The men returned home.

And the damsels remained. Umdhlubu’s father had said that they were not to return, but stay with her, and work for her; and many people, both male and female, remained there to build her town.

The king said, “Now build the town of the queen, where she may live with her people.”

So the town was built and completed. The king visited it; many cattle were killed, that the soldiers might eat, and complete the queen’s town. The king also went to live there at the new town. Thus he took Umdhlubu to be his wife.

The people of Umdhlubu’s father reached their home, and said, “O king, we have done all things very well. There are cattle for Umdhlubu’s mother; they are given to her by her son. He told us to give his respects to both his father and mother.”

So all lived together in peace.

[ ZULU ]

THE ELEPHANT AND THE TORTOISE

Two beings, Elephant and Rain, had a dispute. Elephant said, “If you say that you nourish me, in what way is it that you do so?” Rain answered, “If you say that I do not nourish you, when I go away, will you not die?” And Rain then departed.

Elephant said, “Vulture! Cast lots to make rain for me!” Vulture said, “I will not cast lots.”

Then Elephant said to Crow, “Cast lots!” and Crow answered, “Give the things with which I may cast lots.” Crow cast lots and rain fell. It rained at the lagoons, but then they dried up, and only one lagoon remained.

Elephant went hunting. There was, however, Tortoise, to whom Elephant said, “Tortoise, remain at the water!” Thus Tortoise was left behind when Elephant went hunting.

There came Giraffe, and said to Tortoise, “Give me water!” Tortoise answered, “The water belongs to Elephant.”

There came Zebra, who said to Tortoise, Give me water!” Tortoise answered, “The water belongs to Elephant.”

There came Gemsbok, and said to Tortoise, “Give me water!” Tortoise answered, “The water belongs to Elephant.”

There came Wildebeest, and said, “Give me water!” Tortoise said, “The water belongs to Elephant.”

There came Roodebok, and said to Tortoise, “Give me water!” Tortoise answered, “The water belongs to Elephant.”

There came Springbok, and said to Tortoise, “Give me water!” Tortoise said, “The water belongs to Elephant.”

there came Jackal, and said to Tortoise, “Give me water!” Tortoise said, “The water belongs to Elephant.”

There came Lion, and said, “Little Tortoise, give me water!” When little Tortoise was about to say something, Lion got hold of it and beat it. Lion drank of the water, and since then all the animals drink water.

When Elephant came back from the hunting, he said, “Little Tortoise, where is the water?” Tortoise answered, “The animals have drunk the water.” Elephant asked, “Little Tortoise, shall I chew you or swallow you down?” Little Tortoise said, “Swallow me, if you please,” and Elephant swallowed it whole.

After Elephant had swallowed little Tortoise, and it had entered his body, it tore off his liver, heart, and kidneys. Elephant said, “Little Tortoise, you kill me.”

So Elephant died, But little Tortoise came out of his dead body and went wherever it liked.

[ HOTTENTOT }

THE FOX AND THE WOLF

Once upon a time there was a wolf and a fox. The wolf was the master and the fox the servant.

One day both were grazing their flock in the pasture and, as they were thus grazing, the wolf and the fox wandered off into the plains to dig up some wild onions. The sheep scattered in pasturing and then lay down. Wolf and Fox were in the plains eating wild onions; in this way they lost sight of the sheep. After a while, the wolf said to the fox, “Companion, go and bring back the sheep!”

The fox found the wild onions very much to his taste, but he got up and bound two sheep together, a ram and a ewe, and then returned. Again the wolf and the fox wandered over the plain to dig up wild onions. After a while the wolf again said to the fox, “Go and bring back the sheep once more!”

The fox, however said, “Companion, look, the sheep are pasturing quietly.” Thereupon the wolf himself got up and looked after the sheep, and there he found the two sheep which had been bound to the tree by the fox, a male one and a female one. He grew very angry when he saw what roguish trick the fox had played on him, and when he returned he asked the fox, “Rascal, where are the other sheep?” and he broke off some branches and struck the fox hard. The fox, thereupon, went to look for the sheep, but, as he was crying, he held his arms up to his head.

Then he looked into the distance and saw two cattle, a white one and a black one, and said, “Those cattle there are mine.” And the wolf questioned him, saying, “Where are they? And the fox said, “Was it not you who just beat me so severely?” And the wolf said, “Well, come and beat me now!” Thereupon the fox looked around for branches from a thorny bush, braided them together, and said to the wolf, “Lie down!”

Then he beat him hard, and the wolf’s blood began to trickle down. And the wolf said, “By the blood of my mother! Did I beat you that hard?” So the fox said, “Come, just look at my back; it is all torn up.” So the wolf said, “Go ahead then, beat me!” When he stopped beating him, he looked out into the distance and saw the two cattle. And the fox said, “The black one is mine.” Then they raced toward the two cattle. The wolf seized the white one and the fox seized the black one. The wolf pierced his cow first, the fox pierced his last. The fox’s cow showed fat in the wound, and the wolf’s nothing bot foam. Then the wolf grew angry and said, “The cow that you have given me is emaciated.” And the fox said, “All right then; take mine.” Then both pierced their cows again, the wolf that belonging to the fox, and the fox that belonging to the wolf. And when the wolf pierced the cow, foam once more appeared in the wound, whereas the wound that the fox made showed fat. So the wolf said, “Let us slaughter them together so that we may eat in common.”

As they were slaughtering them, the wolf said to the fox, “now that we have slaughtered a thing of this kind, why, in truth, are we eating? Let us therefore kill our mothers, so that we can grieve for them.” thereupon the fox said, “Yes.” merely out of roguishness. So they arrived, the wolf led his mother into the field and killed her. But the fox led his mother away and seated her in a cave by the road to the spring and then returned. Thereupon they fetched the meat. The wolf sent the fox out and said, “Get out the cooking-pot and go fetch some water.” So the fox took the vessel and went.

On the road he rubbed some meat around his mouth and then went into the cave where his mother was and said, “Mother!” calling her. And the mother said, “Uooo!” answering him. Then he gave her the meat and went to draw water.

This image has an empty alt attribute; its file name is 2284E213-555A-44F5-8AB5-8514CD8CD574.webp

Upon his return he went to the village of the wolf, and the wolf was full of grief because he had really killed his mother. But the fox was joyful, because he had not really killed his mother. And so they put the meat on to cook. Then the wolf said, “Fox, go fetch me some water. Take some meat and go; you can eat on your way.” And since his mother was hidden near the road, he eagerly hurried on.

One day the wolf said, “Today I shall go to fetch water.” The fox said, “I beg you, I have an aunt there, and the road is bad, let me fetch water.” Nut the wolf said, “It is my turn to go and fetch water.” The fox was disturbed because the wolf would not yield. Now the wolf took the water pail and went and fetched water, and he had not taken any meat along. On his way he came close to the cave, and the fox’s mother called saying, “Fox, my child, have you abandoned me?” So the wolf stayed still and listened to determine where the voice came from.

Then the fox’s mother called again, saying, “my child, have you abandoned me?” So the wolf realized that the fox had deceived him and had not killed his mother. Then he went to the cave and stabbed the mother with the spear and laid her down in the opening. Then he went to fetch water and came back to the village.

The next morning the wolf sent fox saying, “Go, fetch me some water.” Thereupon the fox took some meat and his pail and started out. When he came close to the cave, he called and looked in, thinking she was asleep. And he said, “Mother, mother!” Then he touched her foot. “The poor creature is not sleeping, she only sleeps on one eye, the other is open.” But the mother did not stir, so he got an ant and placed it on her eye, so that it could bite her and wake her up. But she did not wake up; no, she was dead. Then he went into the cave and looked around. And then he saw the wound; and he sat down and cried very hard.

Thereupon he fetched some water and went home and did not want to return to the water any more. The wolf noticed that the fox had become angry. In the evening, when they set the meat to cook and sat by the fire to warm themselves, the fox was crying very hard. Thereupon the wolf questioned him, saying, “What are you crying about?” And the fox said, “I am bleary-eyed, that is all, perhaps it is the smoke.” Yet, when he had taken his seat there, he continued crying. Then the wolf said, “Yonder is your aunt, your mother, whom I have killed and for whom you are weeping. Is that not so? Now I am bewailing both my mother and your mother, my friend.”

The next day dawned. The wolf went to graze his flock, but the fox stayed in the village. The wolf said to him, “Stay here and cook me a good meal!” Thus it was. The wolf went to graze his flock, and the fox stayed in the village and put meat in the pot to cook. As the meat was cooking, the fox took all of it out, scooped up the fat, gathered together some dung of dogs, cattle, and human beings and some pieces of leather for the pot and departed.

This image has an empty alt attribute; its file name is E9A0D6E6-A964-4BAE-A004-DB67DCBEDE87.webp

When the wolf came back in the evening from driving his flock, he found that the fox had disappeared. Under the fur blanket the fox had placed an insect and told it, “If the wolf calls, answer!” And the wolf came in and called saying, “There is the aunt.” Thereupon the insect said “Uooo!” and the wolf was very pleased and said, “There is the aunt of yours; just put her in, she is boiling.” He was very pleased.

He stepped up to the pot and took a stick and stirred with it, saying, “The fox has played a roguish trick again, he has eaten all the meat, the fat as well and then he has disappeared.” Then he grew very wroth and took the fur and beat it thinking that the fox was inside. But the fox had gone long ago. He was far away. This the wolf discovered, so he pursued him and stayed on the spoor, till he found him on a rock. At this he was very well pleased, for now he would be able to kill him. He tried to climb up. Hew climbed part way but then slid back. Then he climbed again but again slid back and said, “Fox, how did you climb up?” But the fox had smeared the rock with tallow, and he said, “Yonder is the aunt; take this pebble, and I shall tell you where I climbed up. Take it and let me see!” Then he continued: “Do show me your teeth that I can see whether they are good or bad, whether they are filed out or whether they are not filed out yet.” So the wolf opened his mouth and the fox threw the rock into the wolf’s mouth and broke all his teeth.

Then the fox ran away. The wolf cried out but not turn back; indeed, he did not. He continued his pursuit of him. Now the fox was at a woman’s house in the village, so when the wolf arrived, he said, “Grab that fox.” He went closer and closer and shouted, “Do not let him get away!” But the fox said, “People, you hear what he is saying: “Let him get away!’ ” So the people went away.

Thereupon the wolf went to the lion and said, “Have pity on me and do seize that fox, do not let him get away!” and the fox said again, “Do you hear? There he says it again: ‘Let him get away!’ “

Finally the fox went into a cave and plucked out all his hair. The wolf caught up with him and said, “How this one resembles the fox with his thick tail and his long muzzle!’ But the fox said, “How the man talks! Have I not plucked myself bare as a Hill Damara, and now he says, you resemble the fox!” And so the wolf went away.

[ HERERO ]

WHY THE CHIEF OF THE SMITHS WAS UNABLE TO CREATE HUMAN BEINGS

A very long time ago there was a king who called Walukaga, chief of the smiths, and gave him a great quantity of iron and said, “I want you to make a real man for me, one who can walk and talk, and who has blood in his body, and who has brains.”

Walukaga took the iron and went home, but he was at a loss what to do, and no one could advise him how to set about making the real man. He went about among his friends telling them what the king has said, and asked what he had better do. No one was able to give him any advice. They all knew that the king would not accept anything short of an honest trial, and would punish the man for not carrying out his commands.

On the way home one day Walukaga net a former friend who had gone mad, and who lived alone on some wasteland. Walukaga did not know that he was mad until he met him. When they approached each other, Walukaga greeted his old friend, and the madman asked him where he had come from. Walukaga reasoned for a moment and then said to himself, “Why should I not tell him my story? Even though he is mad, he used to be my friend.” So he answered, “I have come from some friends where I have been trying to get advice.”

The madman asked what advice he wanted, and Walukaga told him all the king had said, and about the work he had given him to do, and how he had given him the iron, and then added, “What am I to do?”

The madman answered, “If the king has told you to do this work, go to him and say that, if he really wishes to have a nice man forged, he is to order all the people to share their heads and burn the hair until they have made up a thousand loads of charcoal, and he is to get one hundred large pots of water from the tears of the people with which to slake the fire and keep it from burning too fiercely.”

Walukaga returned to the king and said to him, “My lord, if you wish me to make this man quickly and well, order the people to shave their heads and burn their hair, and make a thousand loads of charcoal out of it for me to work the iron into the man. Further, make them collect a hundred pots full of tears to act as water for the work, because the charcoal from wood and the ordinary water from wells are of no use for forging a man.”

The king agreed to the request and gave the order to all the people to shave their heads and burn their hair into charcoal, and to collect all the tears. When they had all shaved their heads and burnt their hair, there was scarcely one load of charcoal, and when they had collected all the tears there were not two pots full of water.

When the king saw the results of his endeavors, he sent for the smith Walukaga and said to him, “Don’t trouble to make the man, because I am unable to get the charcoal or the tears for the water.”

Walukaga knelt down and thanked the king. He then added, “My lord, it was because I knew you would be unable to get the hair for charcoal and the tears for the water that I asked for them; you had asked me to do an impossible thing.”

All the people present laughed and said, “Walukaga speaks the truth.”

[ BAGANDA ]

MANTIS CREATES an ELAND FISH

Mantis once did as follows: Kwammang-a had taken off a part of his shoe and thrown it away, and Mantis picked it up and went and soaked it in the water, at a place where some reeds grew. Mantis went away, then he came back again, went up to the water, and looked. He turned away again, for he saw that the Eland was still small.

Again he came, and found the Eland’s spoor where it had come out of the water to graze. Then Mantis went up to the water, while Eland went seeking the grass which it eats. He waited, sitting by the water, he was upon the water’s bank, opposite Eland’s assegai, and soon Eland came to drink there. He saw Eland as it came to drink. He said, “Kwammang-a’s shoe’s piece!” And young Eland walked up as when its father thrilled to him. Mantis called, making his tongue quiver, as Bushmen still do in springbok hunting.

Then Mantis went to find some honey; he went to cut some honey. He came back and put the bag of honey down near the water and returned home. Then, before the sun was up, he came back to pick up the bag. He approached while Eland was in the reeds. He called to it, “Kwammang-a’s shoe’s piece!” And Eland got up from the reeds and walked up to its father. Mantis put down the bag of honey. He took out the honeycomb and laid it down. He kept picking up pieces of it, he kept rubbing it on Eland’s ribs while he splashed them, making them very nice.

Then he went away and took the bag to seek for more honey to cut. When he came back he again laid the bag of honey down near the water and returned home. Once more he returned and picked up the bag, once more he went to the place and called Eland out of the water, saying, “Kwammang-s shoe’s piece.”

Then Eland stood shyly in the water and walked up to its father, for he had grown. His father wept, fondling him. He again rubbed Eland’s ribs making nice with honeycomb. Then he went away, while Eland walked back into the water, went to bask in the water.

Mantis did not come back for a time, and for three nights. Eland grew, becoming like an ox. Then Mantis went out early. The sun rose, as he walked up to the water. He called Eland, and Eland rose up and came forth, and the ground resounded as it came. And Mantis sang for joy about Eland; he sang:

“Ah, a person is here!

Kwammang-a’s shoe’s piece!

My eldest son’s shoe’s piece!

Kwammang-a’s shoe’s piece!

My eldest son’s shoe’s piece!”

Meanwhile he rubbed Eland down nicely, rubbed down the male Eland. Then he went away and returned home.

The next morning he called young Ichneumon, saying that young Ichneumon should go with him and that they would be only two. Thus he deceived young Ichneumon. And they went out and reached the water while Eland was grazing. They sat down in the shade of the bush by which Eland’s assegai stood, where he kept coming to take it.

Mantis spoke: “young Ichneumon, go to sleep!” for he meant to deceive him. So young Ichneumon lay down, as Eland came to drink, because the sun stood at noon and was getting hot. Meanwhile young Ichneumon had covered up his head, because Mantis wished him to do so. But young Ichneumon did not sleep; he lay awake.

The Eland walked away, and young Ichneumon said. “Hi, stand! Hi, stand, stand!”

And Mantis said, “What does my brother think he has seen yonder?”

And young Ichneumon said, “A person is yonder, standing yonder.”

And Mantis said, “You think it is magic; but it is a very small thing, it is a bit of father’s shoe, which he dropped. Magic it is not.” And they went home.

Then young Ichneumon told his father Kwammang-a about it. And Kwammang-a said that young Ichneumon must guide him and show him Eland; he would see whether Eland was so very handsome after Mantis had rubbed it down. The young Ichneumon guided his father, while Mantis was at another place, for he meant to go to the water later on. Meanwhile they went up to Eland at the water, and Kwammang-a looked at it and he knocked it down while Mantis was not there. He knocked Eland down and was cutting it up before Mantis came. So when Mantis arrived, he saw Kwammang-a and the others standing there cutting up his Eland.

And Mantis said, “Why could you not first let me come?” And he wept for Eland; he scolded Kwammang-a’s people, because Kwammang-a had not let him come first, and let him be the one to tell them to kill eland.

And Kwammang-a said, “Tell Grandfather to leave off. He must come and gather wood for us, that we may eat, for this is meat.”

When Mantis came, he said he had wanted Kwammang-a to let him come while Eland was still alive, and not to have killed it when he was not looking. They might have waited to kill Eland until he was looking on. Then he himself would have told them to kill it. Then his heart would have been comfortable. Now his heart did not feel satisfied about Eland whom he alone had made.

Then, as he went to gather wood, he caught sight of a gall there, it was Eland’s gall. And he said to himself that he would pierce the gall open and that he would jump upon it. And the gall spoke: “I will burst, covering you over.”

Just the young Ichneumon said, “What are you looking at there, that you do not gather wood at that place?”

So Mantis left the gall, brought wood, and put it down. Then he again looked for wood at the place where the gall had been. He went up to the gall and again said he would pierce the gall open and that he would jump upon it. The gall again said it would burst, covering him all over. He said he would jump, and that the gall must burst when he trod on it and as he jumped.

Young Ichneumon scolded him again and asked, “What can be yonder, that you keep going to that place? You do not gather wood, you just keep going to that bush. You are going to play tricks and not gather wood.”

And Kwammang-a said, “You must make haste and let us go when you have called Grandfather, for the gall lies there; Grandfather has seen it. So you must make haste. When Grandfather behaves like this about anything, he is not acting honorably; he is playing tricks with this thing. So you must manage that we start, when you have called Grandfather, that we may leave the place where the gall is.”

Then they placed the meat into the net, while Mantis untied his shoe and put the shoe into the bag. It was an arrow-bag which he had slung on next the quiver. And so they carried the things and went along homeward. On the way Mantis said, “This shoestring has broken.”

Then young Ichneumon said, “You must have put the shoe away.”

And Mantis said, “No, no the shoe must really be laying there where we cut up Eland. So I must turn back and go fetch the shoe.”

But young Ichneumon said, “You must have put the shoe in the bag. You must feel inside the bag, feel in the middle of it and see whether you cannot find the shoe.”

So Mantis felt in the bag, but he kept feeling above the shoe. He said, “See, the shoe is really not in it. I must go back and pick it ip, for the shoe is truly yonder.”

But young Ichneumon replied, “We must go home, we really must go home.”

Then Mantis said, “You can go home, but I must really go and get the shoe.”

Thereupon Kwammang-a said, Let Grandfather be! Let him turn back and do as he wants.”

And young Ichneumon said, “O you person! I do wish Mantis would for once listen when we speak.”

Mantis only said, “You always go on like this! I must go and get the shoe.”

Then Mantis turned back. He ran up to the gall, reached it, pierced it, and made the gall burst. And the gall broke, covering his head; his eyes became big and he could not see. He groped about, feeling his way. And he went groping along, groping along, groping, until he found an ostrich feather. This he picked up, sucked it, and brushed off the gall from his eyes with it.

Then he threw the feather up and spoke: “You must now lie up in the sky; you must henceforth be the moon. You shall shine at night. By your shining you shall lighten the darkness for men and women, until the sun rises to light up all things for men and women. It is the sun under whom men and women hunt. You must just glow for men and women, while the sun shines for men and women. Under him men and women walk about; they go hunting; they return home. But you are the moon; you give light for men and women, then you fall away, but you return to life after you have fallen away. Thus you give light to all people.”

That is what the moon does: the moon falls away and returns to life, and he lights up all the flat places of the world.

[ BUSHE MEN ]

FOR LOVE MATTERS

You will join me as I have joined others

  • No physical form or physical thought
  • can express my existence.
  • The term love, with its message
  • of caring for another
  • is the most important of our
  • messages in the physical.
  • The Other is to me now what Self was to you.
  • I am a step higher but not removed.
  • Yet, I have changed enough since “my
  • death’ that it is difficult, at times, to relate to your existence.
  • The love and the emotions you feel are
  • the connectives between us.
  • My love for you has not changed but expanded
    • in a way you do not comprehend.
    • Physical needs are for physical beings,
    • and I understand and know this.
    • Touch is important at your level.
    • My new or returned mind loves you more
    • deeply than in our earth time together,
    • but it is also much more understanding of physical need.
    • When I said, “Be for me as I would
    • be for thee,” I didn’t mean to limit you.
    • Be the physical person you need to be,
    • as you as physical for a limited and
    • for a purposeful reason.
    • Enjoy physical reality between others,
    • for the mind endures and exists
    • beyond your understanding and existence.
    • I love you as we will be.
    • Your now is for you to enjoy.
    • I never judge your actions, and this
    • I repeat with love and utmost understanding.
    • Be yourself and in being yourself
    • you will be for me as I would be for thee.
    • You do well and I watch you often.
    • Continue to love physical life
    • while you are physical.

Until Later,

BIG COOKIE

THE SON OF KIMANAUEZE AND THE DAUGHTER OF SUN AND MOON

I often tell of Kimanaueze, who begat a male child. The child grew up, and he came to the age of marrying. His father said, “Marry.”

He said, “I will not marry a woman of the earth.”

His father asked, “Then whom will you marry?”

He answered, “I!” If it must be, I shall marry the daughter of Lord Sun and Lady Moon.”

But the people asked, “Who can go to the sky where the daughter of Lord Sun and Lady Moon lives?”

He simply said, “I, indeed; I want her. If it is anyone on earth, I will not marry her.”

Thereupon he wrote a letter of marriage and gave it to Deer. But Deer said, “I cannot go to the sky.”

Then he gave it to Antelope. Antelope also said, “I cannot go to the sky.”

He gave the letter to Hawk. Hawk, too, said, “I cannot go to the sky.”

He gave the letter to Vulture, but Vulture also said, “I can go half way to the sky; however, All the way I cannot go.”

Finally the young man said, “How shall I do it?” He put his letter in his box and was quiet.

The people of Lord Sun and Lady Moon used to come to get water on earth, and one day Frog came and sought out the son of Kimanaueze and spoke to him.

“Young master.” he said, “give me the letter that I may take it.”

The young master, however, said, “Begone! If people of life, who have wings, gave it up, how can you say, “I will go there?” How can you get there?”

Frog said, “Young master, I am equal to it.”

So Kimanaueze gave Frog the letter, saying, “If you cannot get there and you return with it, I shall give you a thrashing.”

Frog started out and went to the well where people of Lord Sun and Lady Moon were wont to come to get water. He put the letter in his mouth and got into the well and kept very still. In a little while, the people of Lord Sun and Lady Moon came to get water. They put a jug into the well, and Frog got into the jug. After they got the water, they lifted it up, not knowing that Frog had entered the jug. They arrived in the sky, set down the jug in its place and departed.

Then Frog got out of the jug. In the room where they kept the jugs of water, there was also a table. Frog spat out the letter and placed it on top of the table. Then he hid in the corner of the room.

After a while, Lord Sun himself came into the room where the water was; he looked at the table and saw the letter on it. He took it and asked his people, “Where comes this letter?”

They answered, “lord, we do not know.” He opened it and read it. It ran thus: “I, the sun of Na Kimanaueze Kia-Tumb’a Ndala, a man of earth, want to marry the daughter of Lord Sun and Lady Moon.” Lord sun thought to himself in his heart: “Na Kimanaueze lives on earth; I am a man who lives in the sky. He who came with the letter, who is he?” He put the letter away into his box and said nothing.

When Lord Sun finished reading the letter, Frog got into the jug again. After the water had been emptied out of the jugs, the water girls lifted them and went down to earth. They again arrived at the well and put the jugs in the water. Frog then got out and went under the water and hid himself. After the girls had finished the filling of the jugs they left.

The Frog came out of the water and went to his village. There he kept quiet and said nothing. When many days had passed, the son of Kimanaueze asked Frog, “O fellow, where did you take the letter, and how?”

Frog answered, “Master, I delivered the letter, but they have not yet returned an answer.”

The son of Kimanauze said, “O man, you are telling a lie; you did not go there.”

Frog said, “Master, that same place where I went, that you shall see.”

After six days, the son of Kimanaueze again wrote a letter to ask about the former letter, saying: “I wrote to you, Lord Sun and Lady Moon. My letter was delivered but you returned no answer whatsoever to me, saying neither ‘We accept you’ nor ‘We refuse you.'” Having finished his letter, he sealed it. Then he called Frog and gave it to him. Frog started and soon arrived at the well. He took the letter into his mouth, got into the water, and squatted on the bottom of the well.

After a while, the water carriers came down and arrived at the well. They put the jugs into the water, and Frog got into a jug. When they had finished filling them, they lifted them up. They went up to the sky by means of a cobweb which Spider had woven. Soon they arrived there, and entered a house. There they set down the jugs and departed. Frog came out of a jug, spat out the letter, and laid it on the table. Then he hid in the corner.

After a while, Lord Sun passed through the room where the water was. He looked at the table and saw the letter on it. He opened it and read it. The letter said: “I, son of Na Kimanaueze Kia-Tumb’a Ndala, I ask you, Lord Sun, about my letter that went before. You did not return me an answer at all.”

Lord Sun said, “Girls, you who always go to fetch water, are you carrying letter?”

The girls said, “We, master? No.”

Then doubt possessed Lord Sun. He laid the letters in the box and wrote to the son of Kimanaueze, saying: “You who are sending me letters about marrying my daughter: I agree, on condition that you in person, the man, come with your first-present, so that I may know you.” When he finished writing, he folded the letter and laid it on the table and went away. Frog now came out of the corner and took the letter. He out it in his mouth and entered the jug. Then he remained very quiet.

After a while, the water was emptied from the jugs, and the girls came and lifted them up. Then went to the cord of Spider and descended to earth. They arrived at the well and put the jugs into the water. Frog got out of the jug and went to the bottom of the well. When the girls had completed the filling of the jugs, they returned to the sky. Frog then left the well and soon arrived in his village. He kept very quiet.

When evening came, he said, “Now I will take the letter.” He spat it out and arrived at the house of the son of Kimanaueze. He knocked at the door, and the son of Kimanaueze asked, “Who is it?”

Frog answered, “I, Mainu, the frog.”

The son of Kimanaueze got up from his bed where he was reclining and said, “Come in.”

So Frog went in and delivered the letter. Then he departed. The son of Kimanaueze opened the letter and read it. What Lord Sun announced pleased him. He said to himself: “Why, it was the truth Frog told me when he said ‘you shall see where I went.’ ” Then he went to sleep.

The next morning, he took forry macutas and wrote a letter, saying: “You, Lord Sun and Moon, here is the first-present; I remain on earth to seek for the wooing-present. You up there, you tell me the amount of the wooing-present.” He finished the letter and called Frog. When he came, he gave him the letter and the money, saying, “Take this.”

So Frog started. Soon he arrived at the well. He went to the bottom of the well and remained very quiet. After a while, the girls came down and put the jugs in the water, and Frog entered one of them. When the girls had finished filling them, they took them up. Again they went up to the sky by means of a cobweb. Soon they arrived in the room for the water. They set down the jugs and went away.

The Frog got out of the jug and put the letter in the table, together with the money. Then he hid in the corner. Some time later, Lord Sun came into the room and found the letter on the table. He took it with the money and read the letter. Then he told his wife the news that had come from the prospective son-in-law. His wife assented.

Lord Sun said, “Who is coming with these letters? I do not know. How shall his food be cooked?”

His wife, however, answered, “No matter, we shall cook it anyhow and put it on the table where the letters have been found.”

Lord Sun replied, “Very well.”

So they killed a mother hen and cooked it. When evening came, they cooked mush. They set these eatables on the table and shut the door. Frog came to the table and ate the victuals. Then he went to the corner and kept quiet.

Lord Sun now wrote another letter, saying: “You, son-in-law of mine, the first-present, which you have sent me, I have received. For the amount of the wooing-present, you shall give me a sack of money.” When he had finished the letter, he laid it on the table and left the room. Then Frog came out of the corner and took the letter. Shortly afterward, he entered the jug and went to sleep.

In the morning the girls took the jugs and went down to the earth. They arrived at the well and put the jugs into the water. Frog then got out of the jug. When the girls had finished filling the jugs, they again went up to the sky.

Frog now got out of the water and soon arrived at his village. He entered his own house but waited quietly until sundown. When evening had come, he said, “Now I will take the letter.” He started out and soon arrived at the house of the son of Kimanaueze. He knocked at the door and the son of Kimanaueze asked, “Who is it?”

Then Frog answered, “I, Manu, the frog.”

“Come in,” he replied.

Frog went in; he gave him the letter and departed. The son of Kimanaueze opened the letter, read it, and then put it aside.

Six days passed; then he was ready with the sack of money. He called Frog, and when Frog had come, the son of Kimanaueze wrote the following letter: “You, my parents-in-law, the wooing-present is enclosed. Soon I myself, I shall find a day to bring my wife home.” He gave the letter to Frog, together with the money.

Frog then started and soon arrived at the well. Again he went in under the water and hid. After a while, the water carriers came down and arrived at the well. They put the jugs, as usual, in the water; Frog, as usual, entered a jug. When they had finished filling the jugs, they took them up, going up by means of Spider’s cobweb. Soon they arrived in the sky. There they set down the jugs in the regular room and departed. Frog then got out of the jug and laid the letter down on the table, together with the money. Then he went into a corner and hid.

Soon Lord Sun came into the room and found the letter and the money. He took both and showed the money to his wife, Lady Moon.

Lady Moon thereupon said, “It is good.”

Then they took a young hog and killed it. When they had cooked the food, they set it down on the table and shut the door. Frog came in then and ate it. When he had finished, he entered the jug and went to sleep.

The next morning the water carriers took the jugs and again went down to earth. They soon arrived at the well and dipped the jugs in the water. Frog then got out of the jug and hid. When they had finished filling the jugs, they again returned to the sky. Then Frog left the well and soon arrived at his village. He entered his house and went to sleep.

The next morning, he said to the son of Kimanaueze, “Young master, I gave them the wooing-present, and they accepted it. They cooked me a young hog, and I ate it. Now, you, yourself, shall choose the day to fetch the bride home.”

The son of Kimanaueze said, “Very well.” Then twelve days elapsed.

Now the son of Kimanaueze spoke to Frog: “I need people to fetch the bride for me, but I cannot find them. All those to whom I speak say, ‘We cannot go to the sky.’ Now, what shall I do Frog?”

Frog said, “My young master, be at ease; I shall find a way to go and bring her home for you.”

But the son of Kimanaueze said, “You cannot do that. You could indeed carry the letters, but bring the bride home – that you are unable to do.”

But Frog again said, “Young master, be at ease; be not troubled for naught. I indeed will be able to go and bring her home. Do not despise me.”

The son of Kimanaueze said, “Well, I will try you.”

Then he took some victuals and gave them to Frog.

Frog thereupon started. Soon he arrived at the well. Again he got into the well and hid. After a while, the water carriers came down and arrived at the well. They dipped the jugs in the water. Frog entered one of them. When they had filled them, they went back. Arriving at the proper room, they set down the jugs and departed. Then Frog got out of the jug and hid in a corner. When the sun had set and it was evening, Frog left the room of the water jugs and went to seek the room where the daughter of Lord Sun slept. He found it and saw her asleep there. First, he took out one of her eyes and, then, the other. These he tied up in a handkerchief and went back to the room where the jugs were. He hid in a corner and slept.

In the morning, all the people got up, but not the daughter of Lord Sun. So they asked her, “Why do you not get up?”

And she answered, “My eyes are closed; I cannot see.”

Her father and mother said, “What may be the cause of this? Yesterday she did not complain.”

So lord Sun called for two messengers and said to them, “Go to Ngombo to divine about my child who is sick, whose eyes are sick.”

They started immediately and soon arrived at the Ngombo-man’s. They gave him presents and Ngomobo took out his paraphernalia. Not the people who came did not let him know anything about the disease; they simply said, “We have come to be divined.”

Ngomobo looked into his paraphernalia and said, “Disease has brought you. The one who is sick is a woman. The sickness that ails her concerns her eyes. You have come, being sent; you have not come of your own will. I have spoken.”

The people said, “True. Now tell us what caused the ailment.”

Ngombo looked again and said, “She, the woman is sick, is not yet married. She is only chosen. Her master, who bespake her, has sent a spell, saying, ‘My wife, let her come; if she does not come, she shall die.’ You, who came to divine, go, bring her to her husband, that she may escape death. I have spoken.”

The messengers agreed and get up. They went to Lord Sun and reported to him the words of Ngombo.

Lord Sun said, “All right. Let us sleep. Tomorrow they shall take her down to the earth.”

Frog, being in his corner, heard all that they were saying. Then all slept.

The next morning, Frog got into the jug. Again the water carriers came. Again they took up the jugs. Then they descended to the earth and soon arrived at the well. They put the jugs in the water, and Frog came out of one of them. He hid under the well. When the jugs were fill, the water carriers went up to the sky.

The Lord Sun told Spider, “Weave a large cobweb, down to earth, for this is the day when my daughter will be taken down to the earth.” Spider wove and finished the web. thus time passed.

Frog now got out of the well and went to his village. He found the son of Kimanueze and said to him, “O young master! Thy bride , today she comes.”

The son of Kimanaueze said, “Begone, man, you are a liar.”

Frog answered, “Master, this is the truth itself. This evening I will bring her to you.”

Frog then returned to the well and got into the water and was silent.

Now the sun had set, and the daughter of Lord Sun was taken down to the earth. They left her at the well and then went back.

Frog now got out of the well and spoke to the young woman, saying, “I myself will be your guide. Let us go immediately so that I can bring you to your master.” Then Frog returned her eyes to her and they started. Soon they entered the house of the son of Kimanaueze. Frog exclaimed:

“O young master! Your bride is here.”

The son of Kimanaueze said, “Welcome, Mainu, the frog.”

And so the son of Kimanaueze married the daughter of Lord Sun and lady Moon, and they lived on.

[ AMBUNDU ]

HOW THE MASON-WASP FETCHED FIRE FROM THE GOD

Vulture, Fish-Eagle, and Crow were without fire, for there was no fire on earth. So, needing fire, all the birds assembled and asked, “Whence shall we find fire?”

Some of the birds said, “Perhaps from God.”

Thereupon Mason-Wasp volunteered, saying, “Who will go with me to God?”

Vulture answered and said, “We will go with you, I and Fish-Eagle and Crow.”

So on the morrow they took leave of all the other birds, saying, “We are going to see whether we can get fire from God.” Then they flew off. After they had spent ten days on the road, there fell to earth some small bones – that was Vulture; later, there also fell to earth some other small bones – that was Fish-Eagle. Mason-Wasp and Crow were left to go on alone. When the second ten days were ended, there fell other small bones to earth – that was Crow. Mason-Wasp was left to go on by himself. When the third ten days were over, he was going along, reposing upon the clouds. Nevertheless he never reached the summit of the sky.

As soon as God heard of it. He came to where Mason-Wasp was; And, answering God’s question as to where he was going. Mason-Wasp said, “Chief, I am not going anywhere in particular. I have only come to beg some fire. All my companions have dropped by the way; but nevertheless, I have persevered in coming, for I had set my heart upon arriving where the Sky-God is.”

Thereupon God answered him, saying, “Mason-Wasp, since you have reached Me, you shall be chief over all the birds and reptiles on earth. To you, now, I give a blessing. You shall not have to beget children. When you desire a child, go and look into a grain-stalk and you will find an insect whose name is Ngongwa. When you have found him, take and carry him into a house. When you arrive in the house, look for the fireplace where men cook, and build there a building in the house for your, child Ngongwa. When you have finished building, put him in and let him remain there. When many days have elapsed, just go and look at him. And one day you will find he has changed and become just as you yourself are.”

So it is today: Mason-Wasp, before he builds a house, looks for the fireplace, just as he was commanded by God.

[ BAILA ]

MANTIS AND THE ALL-DEVOURER

Mantis was speaking: “Now I want you, Ichneumon, to catch some fat sheep for my father to cut up for us and hang up to dry near the house. I do not feel like cutting any up, as I am still writhing with pain. The swelling must first disappear, then I, too, can cut them up, then I too. shall hang meat to dry at my house. Because I, too, want the sheep’s fat to be dry, that the women may render it, so that we may moisten the dry meat which we have been crunching. For the quagga’s meat was white with age and not tender. Now I want to cut up the old sheep, and let the young ones wait a little, for we shall not finish all these sheep; they are too many. I, furthermore, want Porcupine to go out tomorrow, when she has cooked and out aside the meat which she has dried. The Man yonder shall come and eat with me of these sheep, because I haver counted them and I see that they are plentiful.

But Porcupine said, “Do you really want me to go to the Man yonder, who eats bushes? He will come and swallow all the sheep, as they stand in the kraal. You need not think that even these bushes will be left, for we shall be swallowed with the sheep. A Man who devours things as he does – walks along eating the very bushes among which he walks!”

Mantis replied to her, “You must go to your other father, the All-Devourer, that he may help me eat up these sheep, and drink this soup. I have already poured away some of the soup, because I feel that my heart is upset. Fat has taken hold of my heart; I do not want to drink more soup. I want the Old Man yonder to come to drink it up. Then I can talk, for I do not talk now. Do you, therefore, fill the sack with cooked meat and take it. Then he will come; otherwise he might refuse.”

Porcupine protested again: “People do not live with that Man. He is alone. People cannot hand him food, for his tongue is like fire. He burns people’s hands with it. You need not think that we can hand food to him, for we shall have to dodge away to the sheep opposite. The pots will be swallowed with the soup in them. Those sheep will be swallowed up in the same way, for yonder Man always does so. He does not often travel, because he feels the weight of his stomach which is heavy. See, I Porcupine, live with you, although he is my real father, because I think he might devour me, and you will not devour me. Nevertheless, I will fetch him tomorrow, that he may come. Then you will see him yourself with your own eyes.”

Porcupine went on the morrow, carrying cooked meat. She arrived at her real father’s, the All-Devourer. There she stopped and set down the sack of meat. She said to he father, “Go! Cousin yonder invites you to come and help eat the sheep yonder, for his heart is troubling him. It is he who wants you to come. I have told you. Now I will go on in front, for I do not walk fast.”

She shook the meat out of the bag upon the bushes. The All-Devourer licked up the meat and the bushes with it; he just gulped down the bushes too. Porcupine slung on her empty bag, and went forward quickly. While she walked she gave directions: “You must climb up to that place from which I came; you will see the sheep standing there.” She went ahead in great fear of the All-Devourer, and was the first to reach the hut.

Mantis asked her, “Where is your father?”

Porcupine answered him, “He is still on his way. Look at that bush standing up there, and see if a shadow comes gliding from above. Watch for the bush to break off, then look for the shadow; when you see that, the bushes up there will have disappeared, for his tongue will take away the bushes beforehand, while he is still approaching from behind the hill. Then his body will come up and when he arrives the bushes will be gone all along the way to us. We shall no longer be hidden. Now I want Ichneumon to eat plenty, for of that meat he will never eat again and when the Man yonder comes, the bushes will be finished and the sheep likewise be swallowed up.”

The All-Devourer followed Porcupine’s spoor. As he went he ate up the bushes. He climbed up, finishing off the bushes, while his shadow glided up to Mantis’s hut. The shadow fell upon Mantis. Mantis looked at the sun. He asked where the clouds were, for the sun seemed to be in clouds.

Porcupine said to him, “There are no clouds there, but I want Ichneumon to go and hide this pot away for me, for the truly feels the shadow of the man coming yonder. It altogether shuts us in. The sun will seem to have set when he reaches us. His mouth sits black along there; it it not shadow, it is what the trees go into.”

Then mantis saw the All-Devourer’s tongue. He asked Porcupine, “Is your father holding fire in his hand, for a fire is waxing red yonder?”

Porcupine answered, “It is the Man coming there, whose tongue is red. He is night, therefore you see his tongue. We will get out of the way here. We will not hand him anything ourselves, but put down something for him, for his tongue would singe our hands if we held anything out to him. Therefore I want Dasse to hide the other pot that she may still have soup. For now she herself sees the stomach, it truly extends to either side of us. We do not hear the wind, because he comes; the wind does not blow, for he always makes a shelter when he stands. He does not sit down, he stands; he will first eat up the things around him for they are still plentiful. He has put a layer of bushes in the bottom of his stomach and he has partly filled it, but he has not filled it up yet. Therefore he is still seeking food. He is a Man who fills himself to his trunk. If he looks round and finds no food, he will swallow these people, for they invited him to come to food which was not sufficient to his hunger.

The All-Devourer arrived, and Mantis placed food for him. The All-Devourer gulped it quickly down. Then Mantis took soup and poured it into a bucket. The All-Devourer swallowed the bucket. A pot was still keeping warm. Now Mantis took meat which had been put away in a bag, he put it into a bucket, and pushed the bucket toward the All-Devourer. The All-Devourer put out his tongue and licked and scorched Mantis’s hands. Mantis pulled his arms quickly away and sprang aside, knocking against Dasse.

Dasse said, “Why does Mantis spring aside from the Man whom he invited to come? Porcupine told him not to give anything with his hands, but to put meat for the All-Devourer on the bushes.”

Mantis took meat and put it in the pot. He said to young Mantis, “O child, make a good fire for the pot. My hands are burning and keep me sitting where Grandfather scorched me. You can feel his breath which is hot. His tongue feels like that, too.”

Then Dasse said to him, “You ought to ladle out sheep’s meat and put it on the bushes.” But Mantis dod not hear, he sat spitting on his hands to cool them. He ladled out another bucketful. He again pushed the bucket to the All-Devourer. The All-Devourer licked his hands again. Mantis sprang aside, losing his balance, and tumbled into the hut. He got up, and sat licking, cooling his hands. He spoke to Ichneumon: “O Ichneumon, give me meat to cook, for you see it is as Porcupine told us, the buckets seem to have vanished.”

But Ichneumon said to Mantis, “Mother told you that it would be like this. You would not listen; you invited the big cousin whom people know, whom no one invites, because his tongue is like fire.”

Now Mantis called to young Mantis, “Go and fetch me the meat which Porcupine hid, for you see this bucket of meat has been devoured. You must look at the stomach.”

Mantis brought two buckets and ladled out the meat. Dasse nudged him, and he winked at her. He slung a bucket forward with meat in it, then he slung another bucket forward alongside of it. The All_devourer’s tongue licked his ear, and he tumbled into the hut.

Dasse spoke to him and he winked at her. She said, “O Mantis, leave off winking at me! You must feed cousin, whom you invited. You must give him plenty to eat; Porcupine told you that she did not want to fetch him, because his tongue is always like this.”

The All-Devourer gobbled up both buckets, he licked up the meat which was on the bushes of the hut and devoured it, together with the bushes.

Mantis then said to Ichneumon, “O Ichneumon, “O Ichneumon, you must cook at that other place, and bring the meat which is on the bushes, for the buckets here are all swallowed. I will give the Old Man a pot which is hot to swallow, for you see the bushes are all gone. I shall no longer sit and cook in the bushes, and when the wind blows.”

The All-Devourer stepped backward, he licked up Kwammang-a’s home bushes, he devoured them quickly with the meat on them.

Mantis spoke to Ichneumon: “O Ichneumon, quickly bring another sheep, you must cut it up quickly, for you see that the bushes have all been swallowed with all the meat.”

The All-Devourer asked for water. Mantis lifted up a whole waterbag and set it before him. The All-Devourer’s tongue took up the waterbag; he swallowed it with the water in it. He licked up a thorn bush.

Mantis then spoke to young Mantis: “You see, we shall not eat, for that thorn bush has been devoured, even though it has thorns.” Again mantis said to Ichneumon, “O Ichneumon, fetch that water there which is in the waterbag, for you see the other waterbag has been swallowed. Grandfather turns his head seeking for more water. He himself has devoured all the other things, he still seems likely to gobble up our beds. I shall truly sit upon the ground, if Grandfather eats up all the things in my hut.

The All-Devourer licked up Porcupine’s things; he swallowed them quickly. Then Mantis said to his son, young Mantis, “See, sister’s things there have been devoured; sister sits there on a bare place. All the sheep will soon be devoured.”

The All-Devourer looked toward the sheep, his tongue took up all the sheep, he swallowed them quickly, while they were still alive.

Mantis exclaimed, “Have no the sheep been quickly swallowed, even before I had cut them up as I meant to do? Alas, the bushes have vanished, swallowed up! We are sitting on a bare place. Alas! Now I lack my things which I brought, that I might possess them.”

Porcupine winked at Ichneumon. “O Ichneumon, I tell you, your younger brother must spring away. Father will be swallowed, if he goes on acting bravely like this; and Grandfather Mantis, the one who is talking, he will certainly be swallowed.”

The All-Devourer called out his name, He-Who-Is-a-Devourer-of-Things, whom Mantis had called to come to him. He said to Mantis, “O Mantis, bring out the things to which you invited me, the real things which I, a devourer of things should eat.” He advanced and burned Mantis with his tongue.

But Mantis said, “I who am Mantis who invited You-Who-Devour-Things to my home. You came and finished off my things.. You should not ask, seeking the real food to which I invited you, for those sheep which you have devoured were the food. There is no food.”

Thereupon the All-Devourer quickly devoured Mantis and Mantis was quiet. Young Mantis spring away and took up the bow. The All-Devourer looked toward Kwammang-a. Young Kwammang-a sprang aside and ran away. Mantis was quite silent, because he was in the stomach of the All-Devourer. The All-Devourer stood opposite Kwammang-a and said that he was really going to swallow his daughter Porcupine’s husband, even though he was handsome, yet he would swallow him, for he felt inclined to do so. He advanced and quickly swallowed his daughter’s husband with the bed on which he was sitting. All-Devourer’s stomach now hung almost down to the earth.

Porcupine wept; she stood sighing. The children came from afar. Then Porcupine asked young Mantis, “Are you a fierce man?” He was silent. She asked him, “Are you angry?” Young Mantis was silent, because he felt angry. She also questioned her son, young Kwammang-a. She turned as she sat, heated a spear, and asked her son, “Are you angry?” You must remember that Grandfather’s tongue resembles fire. I do not want you to flinch, if your heart is like father’s heart, ” Young Kwammang-a sat still; they agreed to cut his grandfather open.

She took the spear out of the fire and drew it, burning hot, along her younger brother’s temple. The fire burnt his ear; he sat still. She reheated the spear, it became red hot. She put the spear burning hot into her younger brother’s nose. Tears slowly gathered and stood in his eyes. She said to him, “A mild person is this, whose tears slowly gather.”

She reheated the spear and laid it, burning hot, on her son’s ear-root. Her son sat still. She heated the spear again, and said to her son, “Grandfather’s tongue is like this; I don’t want you to flinch from him, if your heart is like your father’s heart.” She took out the spear when it was red, and out it into her son’s nose. Then she looked at his eyes. They were dry. She said to herself, “Yes, a fierce man is this; that one is a mild man. This one if fierce; he resembles his father. That other one is a mild; he resembles his father Mantis. He is a runaway.” She said to her son, “Remember, Grandfather’s tongue is like this. You must sit firmly when you go to Grandfather.”

The children went in wrath to their Grandfather; they approached him as he lay in the sun. He arose, stood up, and waited. Young Kwammang-a said to the other, “Mother wished me to sit on one side of Grandfather, and you to sit on his other side. Because you cut with the left hand like your father, you must sit with your left arm, in which you hold the spear, outward. I will sit opposite on this side, so that I may have my right arm, in which I hold the spear, outside.”

The All-Devourer scorched young Mantis’s temple with his tongue. He walked forward, he scorched with his tongue the ear-root of his grandson, young Kwammang-a. He said that this little child really seemed very angry. He walked forward, and scorched the root of young Mantis’s ear with his tongue. Young Mantis sat still. All-Devourer went forward, and scorched young mantis’s other ear with his tongue. Young Kwammang-a looked hard at the other and signed to him to hold his spear fast, and he held his own well. The other also held his spear well, because he had said beforehand, “You must cut one side, while I cut the other side. Then we must run away, while the people pour out.”

He sprung forward and cut the All-Devourer; and the other cut him too. Then they ran away, while fathers poured forth. The sheep also poured forth, the buckets poured forth; his father sat on his bed; the pots poured forth; all things poured down. His grandfather doubled up and died.

Then the children said, “O bushes, we have cut you out. You shall truly become bushes; you shall again grow in your place; you shall be what you were before. The place shall be right again and these sheep shall wander over it. They shall graze over it, and again return to the kraal, which shall be as it was before. For that Man who now lies here, who ate up the bushes, shall utterly perish and disappear, so that the people may get dry bushes and be able to warm themselves.” Thus young Mantis spoke. He felt that he truly resembled his father, that his speech resembled his father’s speech. And it all came true.

Now Dasse gave Mantis water but said to him, “O Mantis, you must drink only a little!”

Mantis replied, “I am dying of thirst, I must drink up the egg-shell-ful.” He gulped all the water down and sank to the ground. Kwammang-a waited.

Porcupine said to Dasse, “Take that long stick lying there; you must beat your husband on the shinbone with it until he gets up, you must hold his face fast and rub it.” So Dasse took up the long stick and hit Mantis on the shin. He started up quickly and sat shivering.

Dasse reproved him: “I told you to drink only a little, because you would be like this, if you gulped down all the water; but you would drink nearly all, thus killing yourself, so that you fell down.”

Now porcupine gave Kwammang-a some water and said to him, “O Kwammang-a! You must drink only a little. You must put the water down soon – when you have just wet your mouth. You must sit down then and wash yourself a little, for you have just come out of the stomach in which you were. Then presently you can drink plentifully, when you feel that your body is warm.”

Kwammang-a drank a little, he put down the water quickly, and did not gulp it all down. He washed himself, drank again, and then drank plentifully.

His wife cooked the meat for him which she had kept hidden away. She had told Ichneumon to hide some for her, so that they could eat it after the children had dealt with the Man who was devouring them, and he lay dead. “We must eat here, for he lies yonder, where the children have slain him. Then we will travel away, leaving him lying outside the hut. We will move away and seek a new home, because the Man lies in front of this home. We will live in a different hut which we will make our home.”

Then they travelled away to a new home, and left the hut at which the Man who had devoured the people was lying. In this new home they always lived in peace.

[ BUSHMEN ]

HOW DISEASES CAME TO ASHANTI

Now there lived Kwaku Anase, the spider, and he went to Nyankonpon, the sky-god, and said, “Grandsire, take your sheep called Kra Kwame, the one which you keep to sacrifice to your soul on a Saturday, and let me kill and eat it, that I may go and bring you a beautiful girl in exchange.”

The sky-god gave him the sheep, and Ananse set out and returned to his village and killed the sheep and ate it. The spider then went to a certain village. In that village there was not a single male – all were women. Ananse married them all and he and they lived there.

One day, a hunter came and saw them. When he left, he went and said to the sky-god, “As for Ananse and the sheep of yours which he received, he has killed it and given it to some women to eat and then married them.”

The sky-god said, “Is it true?”

The hunter said, “Grandsire, it is the truth.”

The sky-god then sent messengers, telling them to go to that village and bring to him all the women who were there.

The messenger went off, met the women, and, with the exception of one woman who was ill, took them all to the sky-god.

Ananse said, “You who remain, what can I do with you?” You can’t do anything for me?”

The sick woman said, “Go and bring me a gourd cup.” Ananse went and brought a gourd cup.

She said, “Bathe me, and take the water you have used and pour it into the gourd.”

Ananse bathed her body and poured the water he had used into the gourd.” She then became very beautiful; there was no woman like her in the tribe. Then Anase married her again, Although she was already his.

Now the hunter came again, and he saw this woman. He went off and reported to the sky-god, saying, “Ananse has made a fool of you, he sent you the ugly women and has kept the beautiful one for himself.”

The sky-god sent messengers and directed them to go to the village where the spider was and to bring the woman to him.

They delivered the message of the sky-god to Ananse. He said, “Would he not like me to come also?”

The messengers said, “The sky-god said we must take the woman to him.” Ananse said, “That is she sitting there, take her away.”

After she had been taken, Ananse went and got the gourd into which all the diseases he had taken from the woman had been poured, and he stretched a skin over the mouth of it. Then he stretched a skin over another gourd and gave it to his child, Ntikuma, and Ananse beat on the drum he had made and sang:

“Y’ odende dende den,

Y’ odende den.

Aso Ya-e!

Y’ odende den.

Your eyes are red in vain!

Y’ odende den,

You are bandy-armed!

Y’ odende den,

Y’ odende den.

Is that Aso Ya?

Y’ odende den,

Y’ odende den.

You are knock-kneed!

Y’ odende den,

Y’ odende den.

Your nose is a lump on your face!

Y’ odende den,

Y’ odende den.

Your feet are large as paddles,

like those of a slave!

Y’ odende den,

Y’ odende den.

Your head is like a cow!

Y’ odende den,

Y’ odende den.”

Ntikuma drummed and sang:

“Beautiful maiden,

Beautiful maiden!”

And Afudotwedotwe or Belly-Like-to-Burst and Nyiwankonfwea of Thin-Shanks, Ananse’s children, danced. Ananse, the crow, ran with speed and told the sky-god,” Ananse has a dance which is fitting for you but not for a spider.”

Immediately the sky-god sent messengers there to Ananse to go and bring him this dance.

Ananse said, “this dance of mine, we perform it only in the harem, and if the sky-god agrees then I shall bring it along.”

The messengers returned and told the sky-god. The sky-god said, “That is nothing, let him, bring it to the harem.” Ananse went with the drums to the harem, and the sky-god came and danced, and all his wives danced.

Now, there remained the one who had been sick. When she saw that Ananse had stretched a skin over the gourd in which were all her diseases, because of that she said she would not dance. And now the sky-god forced her, and she came; and when she was about to dance. Ananse lifted up the gourd and struck the woman with it, and the diseases scattered with a sound like a tese!

That is how syphilis, stomach-ache, headache, leprosy, Guinea worm, small pox, yaws, fits, diabetes, and madness came among the tribe. Once there was no sickness among mankind/womankind. It was the sky-god who was the cause of Ananse’s bringing diseases among the tribe.

[ ASHANTI ]

THE ORIGIN OF DEATH II

AND HOW DID IT HAPPEN?

It is God who created men. And since God had pity, He said, “I do not wish men to die altogether. I wish that, men having died, should rise again.” And so. He created men and placed them in another region. But He stayed at home.

And then God saw the chameleon and the weaver-bird. After He had spent three days with the chameleon and the weaver-bird, He recognized that the weaver-bird was a great maker of the words compounded of lies and truth. Now of lies there were many, but of the words of truth there were few.

Then He watched the chameleon and recognized that he had great intelligence. He did not lie. His words were true. So he spoke to the chameleon, “Chameleon, go into that region where I have placed the men I created, and tell them that when they have died, even if they are altogether dead, still they shall rise again – that each man shall rise again after he dies.”

The chameleon travelled on, and when he had arrived at his destination, he said, “I was told, I was told, I was told…” But he did not say what he had been told.

The weaver-bird said to God, “I wish to step out for a moment.”

And God said to him, “Go!”

But the weaver-bird, since he is a bird, flew swiftly, and arrived at the place where the chameleon was speaking to the people and saying, “I was told…” Everyone was gathered there to listen. When the weaver-bird arrived, he said, “What was told to us? Truly, we were told that men, when they are dead, shall perish like the roots of the aloe.”

Then the chameleon exclaimed, “But we were told, we were told, that when men are dead, they shall rise again.”

Then the magpie interposed and said, “The first speech is the wise one.”

And now all the people left and returned to their homes. This was the way it happened. And so men become old and die; they do not rise again.

[ AKAMBA ]

THE ORIGIN OF DEATH III

The moon, it is said, once sent an insect to men/women, saying, “Go o men/women and tell them, ‘As I die, and dying live, so you shall also die, and dying live.'”

The insect started with the message, but, while on his way, was overtaken by the hare, who asked, “On what errand are you bound?”

The insect answered, “I am sent by the Moon to men/women, to tell them that as she dies, and dying lives, so shall they also die and dying live.”

The hare said, “As you are an awkard runner, let me go.” With these words he ran off, and when he reached men/women, he said, “I am sent by the Moon to tell you, ‘As I die and dying perish, in the same manner you also shall die and come wholly to an end.’ “

The hare then returned to the Moon and told her what he had said to men/women.

The Moon reproached him angrily, saying, “Do you dare tell the people a thing which I have not said?”

With these words the moon took up a piece of wood and struck the hare on the nose. Since that day the hare’s nose has been slit, but men/women believe what Hare had told them.

[ HOTTENTOT ]

THE ORIGIN OF DEATH

Long, long, ago there was a great famine in the world, and a certain your man, while wandering in search of food, strayed into a part of the bush where he had never been before. Presently he perceived a strange mass lying on the ground. He approached and saw that it was the body of a giant whose hair resembled that of white men in that it was silky rather than woolly. It was of an incredible length and stretched as far from Krachi to Salaga. The young man was properly awed at the spectacle, and wished to withdraw, but the giant, noticing him, asked what he wanted.

The young man told about the famine and begged the giant to give him some food. The latter agreed on condition that the youth would serve him for a while. This matter having been arranged, the giant said that his name was Owuo, or Death, and he then gave the boy some meat.

Never before had the latter tasted such fine food, and he was well pleased with his bargain. He served his master for a long time and received plenty of meat, but one day he grew homesick, and he begged his master to give him a short holiday. The latter agreed, if the youth returned to his village and there persuaded his brother to go with him into the bush, and he gave him to Owuo.

In course of time the youth became hungry again and longed for the meat which Owuo had taught him to like so much. So one day he made up his mind to return to his master, and, leaving the village, he made his way back to the giant’s abode. The latter asked him what he wanted, and when the youth told him that he wanted to taste once more of the good meat, the giant bade him enter the hut and take as much as he liked, but added that he would have to work for him again.

The youth agreed and entered the hut. He ate as much as he could and went to work at the task which his master set him. The work continued for a ling time and the boy ate his fill every day. But, to his surprise, he never saw anything of his brother, and when ever he asked about him, the giant told him that the lad was away on business.

Once more the youth grew homesick and asked for leave to return to his village. The giant agreed on condition that he would bring a girl for him, Owuo, to wed. So the youth went home and there persuaded his sister to go into the bush and marry the giant. The girl agreed, and took with her a slave companion, and they all repaired to the giant’s abode. There the youth left the two girls and went back to the village.

It was not very long after that he again grew hungry and longed for a taste of the meat. So he made his way once more into the bush and found the giant. The latter did not seem over pleased to see the boy and grumbled at being bothered a third time. However, he told the boy to go into the inner chamber of his hut and take what he wanted. The youth did so and took up a bone which he began to devour. To his horror he recognized it at once as being the bone of his sister. He looked around at all the rest of the meat and saw that it was his sister and her slave girl.

Thoroughly frightened, he escaped from the house and ran back to the village. There he told the elders what he had done and the awful thing he had seen. At once the alarm was sounded and all the people went out into the bush to see for themselves the dreadful thing they had heard about. When they drew near to the giant they grew afraid at the sight of so evil a monster. They went back to the village and consulted among themselves what they had best do. At last it was agreed to go to Salga, where the end of the giant’s hair was, and set a light to it. This was done, and when the hair was burning well they returned to the bush and watched the giant.

Presently the latter began to toss about and to sweat. It was quite evident that he was beginning to feel the heat. The nearer the flames advanced, the more he tossed and grumbled. At last the fire reached his head and for the moment the giant was dead.

The villagers approached him cautiously, and the young man noticed magic powder which had been concealed in the roots of the giant’s hair. He took it and called the others to come and see what he had found. No one could say what power this medicine might have, but an old man suggested that no harm would be done if they sprinkled some of it on the bones and meat in the hut. This idea was carried out, and to the surprise of everyone, the girls and the boy at once returned to life.

The youth, who had still some of the powder left, proposed to out it on the giant. But at this there was a great uproar as the people feared Owuo might come to life again. The boy, therefore, by way of compromise, sprinkled it into the eye of the dead giant. At once the eye opened and the people fled in terror. But alas, it is from that eye that death comes, for every time that Owuo shuts that eye a man dies, and, unfortunately for us, he is forever blinking and winking.

[ KRACHI }

HOW THE FIRST RAIN CAME

Once Long Ago, a daughter was born to Obassi Osaw, and a son to Obassi Nsi. When both of them had come to marriageable age, Nsi sent a message and said, “Let us exchange children. I will send my son that he may wed one of your girls, and you send your daughter down to my town, that she may become, my wife.”

To this Obassi Osaw agreed. So the son of Nsi went up to the heavens, carrying many fine gifts, and Ara, the sky maiden, came down to dwell on earth. With her came seven men slaves and seven women slaves whom her father gave to work for her, so that she should not be called upon to do anything herself.

One day, very early in the monring, Obassi Nsi said to his new wife, “Go, work on my farm!”

She sanswered, “My father gave me the slaves, so that they should work instead of me. Therefore seend them.”
Obassi Nsi was very angry and said, “Did you not hear that I gave my orders to you? You yourself shall work on my farm. As for the slaves, I will tell them what to do.”

The girl went, though very unwillingly, and when she returned at night, tired out, Nsi said to her, “Go at once to the river and bring water for the household.”

She answered, “I am weary with working on the farm. May not my slaves at least do this while I rest?”

Again Nsi refused and drove her forth, and she went backward and forward many times, carrying the heavy jars. Night had fallen long before she had brought enough.

The next morning Nsi made her do the must menial services, and all day long kept her at work, cooking, fetching water, and making fire. That night, again, she was very weary before she was allowed to lie down to rest. At dawn on the third morning Nsi said, “Go and bring in much firewood.” Now the girl was young and unused to work, so she went she wept, and the tears were still falling when she came back carrying her heavy burden.

As soon as Nsi saw her enter crying he called her. “Come here and lie down before me… I wish to shame you in the presence of all, my people.” Thereupon the girl wept still more bitterly.

No food was given her until midday on the morrow, and then not enough. When she had finished eating all there was, Nsi said to her, “Go out and bring in a great bundle of fish poison.”

The girl went into the bush to seek for the plant, but as she walked through the thick undergrowth a thorn pierced her foot. She lay down alone. All day long she lay there in pain, but as the sun sank she began to feel better. She got up and managed to limp back to the house.

When she entered, Nsi said to her, “Early this morning I ordered you to go and collect fish poison. You have stayed away all day and done nothing.” so he drove her into the goat-pen, and said, “Tonight you shall sleep with the goats; you shall not enter my house.”

That night she are nothing. Early next morning one of the slaves opened the door of the goat pen and found the girl lying within with her foot all swollen and sore. She could not walk, so for five days she was left with the goats. After that her foot began to get better.

As soon as she could walk again, Nsi called her and said, “Here is a pot. Take it to the river and bring it back filled to the brim.”

She set out, but when she reached the waterside, she sat down on the bank and dipped her foot in the cool stream. She said to herself, “I will never go back; it is better to stay here alone.”

After a while one of the slaves came down to the river. He questioned her: “At dawn this morning you were sent to fetch water. Why have you not returned home?”

The girl said, “I will not come back.”

When the slave had left her she thought, “Perhaps he will tell them, and they will be angered and may come and kill me. I had better go back after all.” So she filled her pot and tried to raise it upon her head, but it was too heavy. Then she lifted it on to a tree trunk that lay by the side of the river and , kneeling beneath, tried to draw it in that way upon her head; but the pot fell and broke and , in falling, a sharp shard cut off one of her ears. The blood poured down from the wound, and she began to weep again, but suddenly thought,”My father is alive, my mother is alive; I do not know why I stay here with Obassi Nsi. I shall go back to my own father.”

Then she set out to find the road by which Obassi Osaw sent her to earth. She came to a high tree and from it saw a long rope hanging. She said to herself, “This is the way by which my father sent me.”

She caught the rope and began to climb. Before she had gone halfway she grew very very weary, and her sighs and tears mounted up to the kingdom of Obassi Osaw. Midway on her climb, she stayed and rested a while. Afterward she went on again.

After a long time she reached the top of the rope and found herself on the border of her father’s land. Here she sat down almost worn out with weariness, and still weeping

Now, one of the slaves of Obassi Osaw had been sent out to collect firewood. He chanced to stay from his oath and came to a place near where the girl was resting. He heard her sobs mixed with broken words and ran back to the town, crying out, “I have heard the voice of Ara. She is weeping about a mile from here.”

Obassi heard but could not believe, yet he said, “Take twelve slaves, and, should you find my daughter as you say, bring her home.”

When her father saw her coming he called out, “Take her to the house of her mother.”

There she was resting, Obassi killed a young kid and sent it to Akun, bidding her to prepare it for his daughter. Akun took it and, after she had washed it, cooked it whole in a pot. Obassi also sent a great bunch of plantains and other fruits, and these, too, were arranged in orderly fashion upon a table before the girl. Then they poured water into a gourd and brought palm wine in native cup, and bade her to drink.

After she had eaten and drunk, Obassi came with four slaves carrying a great chest made of ebony. He bade them set it before her, opened it and said, “Come here; choose anything you will from this box.”

Ara chose two pieces of cloth, three gowns, four small loincloths, four looking glasses, four spoons, two pairs of shoes, four cooking pots, and four chins of beads.

After this Obassi Osaw’s storekeeper, named Ekpenyon, came forward and brought her twelve anklets. Akun gave her two gowns, a fufu stick, and a wooden knife.

Her own mother brought her five gowns, richer than all the rest, and five slaves to wait upon her.

After this Obassi Osaw said, “A house has been made ready for you; go there that you may be its mistress.”

Then he went out and called together the members of the chief society of the town. This was named Angbu. He said to the men, “Go, fetch the son of Obassi Nsi. Cut off both his ears and bring them to me. Then flog him and drive him down the road to his father’s town, with this message from me: ‘I had built a great house up here in my town. In it I placed your son and treated him kindly. Now that I know what you have done to my child, I send your son back to you earless, in payment for Ara’s ear and the suffering which you put upon her.'”

When the Angbu society had cut off the ears of the son of Obassi Nsi, they brought them before Obassi Osaw and drove the lad back on the earthward road, as they had been ordered.

Osaw took the ears and made a great juju, and by reason if this a strong wind arose, and drove the boy earthward. On its wings it bore all the sufferings of Ara and the tears which she had shed through the cruelty of Obassi Nsi. The boy stumbled along, half blinded by the rain, and as he went he thought, “Obassi Osaw may do to me what he chooses. He has never done any unkind thing before. It is only in return for my father’s cruelty that I must suffer all this.”

So his rears mixed with those of Ara and fell earthward as rain.

Until that time there had been no rain on the earth. It fell for the first time when Obassi Osaw made the great wind and drove forth the son of his enemy.

[ EKOI ]

HOW THE STARS CAME

EBOPP, the LEMUR, and MBAW, the dormouse, were making a tour in the bush. They looked for a good place to make a farm. When they found one, they cut down the trees and took two days to clear enough ground. After this, they went back to the town where the other animals lived.

The next morning Ebopp said, “Let us go to our new farms and build a small house.”

They did. Ebopp made his, and Mbaw his.

Now, before a new town is begun, a little shed called ekpa ntan is always made where the Egbo house is to stand. Ebopp and Mbaw accordingly set to work and built an ekpa ntan. Then they went back to their old town and rested for two days.

On the third day they went to work again. Ebopp worked on his farm, Mbaw on his. That night they slept in the huts they had built and at dawn started to work once more. When night came, Ebopp lighted a lamp and said:

“I do not want to sleep here. If we sleep here we shall sleep hungry. Let us go back to our old town.”

When they got there their wives cooked for them. Ebopp said to Mbaw, “Come and join together with me in eating.” So his friend came and ate with him.

Afterwards Mbaw said, “Let us now go to my house and have food there too.” So they went tither.

After they had eaten all that Mbaw had cooked, Ebopp went home.

The next morning he went to call for his friend and said, “Go and get young plantains to plant on the farm.” Both of them collected a great basketful and went to the place where the new farms were – Ebopp to his, and Mbaw to his. They worked hard.

At midday, Ebopp said, “Let us rest a little while and eat the food we have brought.” To this Mbaw agreed, and after some time they set to work again.

About five o’clock Ebopp called, “Let us go back now to the old town, for it is very far off.”

So they left off working and went back, but before they could get there night fell.

The next morning they took more young plantains and, again, worked hard all day. When it was time to go back, Ebopp asked, “How many of the young plantains remain to be planted?”

Mbaw answered, “About forty.”

Whereupon Ebopp said, “Of mine also there remain about forty.”

At dawn, the next day, they went to their old farms to get some more plantain cuttings. Then they went back to the new farms and began planting.

As soon as Ebopp had finished, he said, “I have finished mine>”

To this Mbaw replied, “Mine also are finished.”

Ebopp said, “My work is done. I need come here only for the harvest.”

They they both went back to their old town and told their wives. “We have finished setting out the plantains. We hope that you will go and plant koko-yams tomorrow. Try, both of you, to get baskets full of koko-yams for the planting.”

To this the women agreed and, when they had collected as many as were necessary, they set out for the new farms.

When they arrived, Mbaw’s wife asked the wife of Ebopp, “Do you think we can finish planting all these today?”

Ebopp’s wife answered, “Yes, we can do it.”

All day they worked hard, and at night they went home and said, “We have finished planting all the koko-yams.”

Ebopp said, “Good, you have done well.”

Now the name of Ebopp’s wife was Akpan Anwan. She and her sister, Akandem, were the daughters of Obassi Osaw. When she got home she started to cook the evening meal for her husband. As soon as it was ready, she placed it upon the table, set water also in a cup, and laid spoons near by.

They were eating together when a slave named Umaw ran in. He had just come from the town of Obassi Osaw. He said, “I would speak to Ebopp alone.” When Akpan Anwan had left the room, the messenger said, “You are eating, but I bring you news that Akandem your sister-in-law is dead.”

Ebopp cried out aloud in his grief and sent a messenger to call his friend Mbaw.

As soon as the latter heard, he came running and said, “What can we do? We are planting new farms and beginning to build a new room. There is hardly any food to be got. How then can we properly hold the funeral customs?”

Ebopp said, “Nevertheless, I must try my best.”

When Umaw got ready to return, Ebopp said, “Say to Obassi Osaw, ‘Wait for me for six days, then I will surely come.”

The next morning he said to Mbaw, “Come now, let us do our utmost to collect what is necessary for the rites of my sister-in-law.”

They went through the town and bought all the food which they could find. Then Ebopp went back and said to his wife, “I did not wish to tell you before about the death of your sister, but today I must tell you. Make ready. In five days’ time I will take you to your father’s town to hold the funeral feast.”

Akpan Anwan was very grieved to hear of this and wept.

Ebopp said to Mbaw, “We must get palm wine for the feast, also rum for the libations. How can we get these? I have no money, and you also have none.

Mbaw said, “Go round among the town folks and see if any of them will lend you some.”

Ebopp said, “Good!” He then began to walk up and down, begging from all his friends, but none would give to him, although it was a big town. At last he went down to the place where they were making palm oil by the river. Quite nearby lived Iku, the water chevrotain. Ebopp told him his trouble and begged help, but Iku said, “I am very sorry you, but I have nothing to give.”

Ebopp was quite discouraged by now and, full of sorrow, turned to go away. When Iku saw this he said:

“Wait a minute, there is one thing I can do. You know that I have ‘four eyes.’ I will give you two of them, and with them you can buy all that you need.”

From out of his head he took the two eyes with which he had to see in the dark. They shone so brightly that Ebopp knew they were worth a great price. He took them home and showed them to his wife and his friend Mbaw.

The latter said, “From today you are freed from all anxiety. With those you can buy all that is needed.”

The next morning they gathered together all that had been collected, the plantains and the two shining eyes. Ebopp. Mbaw, and Akpan carried the loads between them. They set out for the dwelling place of Obassi Osaw.

When they arrived at the entrance of the town, Akpan Anwan began to weep bitterly. She threw down her burden and ran to the spot where her sister lay buried. Then he went back and got his wife’s load which she had left behind.

The townsfolk said to Ebopp, “You have come to keep your sister-in-law’s funeral customs today. Bring palm wine. Bring rum also for the libations, and let us hold the feast.”

Ebopp said, “I have brought nothing but plantains. All else that is necessary I mean to buy here.”

Now there was a famine in Obassi Osaw’s town, so Ebopp put all of his plantains in the Egbo House. The next day he sent a message to Obassi Osaw to bring his people. so that the food might be divided among them. Each man received one plantain.

Then Osaw said, “All that you have brought is eaten. Of you cannot give us more, you shall not take my daughter back with you to your country.”

Ebopp went to find his friend and told him what Obassi had said.

“Shall I see the two eyes?” he asked. “They are worth hundreds and hundreds of plantains and many pieces of cloth, but if I sell them now, the people are so hungry they will give a small price.”

Mbaw said, “Do not mind. See, I will teach you how to get more sense.

“You hold me one in your hand, and it is a big thing like a great shining stone; but if you put it in a mortar and grind it down, it will become, not one, but many stones, and some of the small pieces you can sell.”

This Ebopp did. He ground up the geat bright stones which had been Iku’s eyes until they become like shining sand.

Then Ebopp and Mbaw went and procured a black cap which they filled with the fragments.

Mbaw said, “Now go and look the town till you find someone who can sell what we need.”

Ebopp did so, and in the house of Effion Obassi he saw great stores hidden – food and palm wine, palm oil in jars, and run for the sacrifice.

Ebopp said to Effion, “If you will sell all this to me, I will give you in exchange something which will make all the town folk bow down before you.”

Effion said, “I will not sell all, but half of what I have I will sell you.”

So Ebopp said, “Very well. I will take what you give me, only do not open the thing I shall leave in exchange until I have returned to my own country. When you do open it, as I said before, all the town folk will bow down before you.”

So the funeral feast was prepared, and the people were satisfied.

When the rites were finished, Obassi said, “It is good. You can go away now with your wife.”

So Ebopp said to Mbaw and Akpan Anwan, “Come, let us go back to our own town. We must not sleep here tonight.”

When they had reached home once more, Ebopp sent a salve named Eder to Effion Obassi with the message:

“You may now open the cap. I have reached my town again.”

It was evening time, nut Effion at once called the townspeople together and said, “I have a thing here which is worth a great price.”

They cried, “Let us see it.”

He answered, “My thing is a very good thing, such as you have never seen before.

He brought the cap outside and opened it before them. All the shining things fell out. As they fell, a strange breeze came and caught them and blew them all over town. They lay on the road and on the floors of the compounds, each like a little star.

All the children came round and began picking them up. They gathered and gathered. In the daytime they could not see them, but every night they went out and sought for the shining things. All that they picked up they put in a box. At length many had been gathered together and they shone like a little sun in the box. At the end of about a month nearly all had been collected. They could not shut down the lid, however, because the box was too full, so when a great breeze came by it blew all the shining things about again. That is why sometimes we have a small moon and plenty of stars shining around it, while sometimes we have a big moon and hardly any stars are to be seen. The children take a month to fill the box again.

When the sparkles were scattered about the town, Effion sent a messeneger to Ebopp to ask: “Can you see the things shining from you town?”

At the time earth and sky were all joined together, like a house with an upstairs.

Ebopp went out and looked upward to the blue roof overhead. There he saw the small things sparkling in the darkness.

The next day he went to Iku and said, “Will you please do into a deep hole? I want to look at your eyes.”

Iku went inside the hole. Ebopp looked at his eyes. They were very bright, just like the sparkles which shone in the sky.

The cause of all the stars, therefore, is Enbopp, who took Iku’s eyes to Obassi’s town.

Iku’s eyes are like the stars.

The moon shines when all the fragments are gathered together. When it shine most brightly it it because the children have picked up nearly all the fragments and put them into the box.

[ EKOI ]

,

THE SON OF THE WIND

The son of the wind was once a man. When he was he used to go shooting and to roll a ball but later he became a bird and flew, no longer walking as he used to do when he was a man. When he had changed into a bird, he flew up and dwelt in a mountain hole. The mountain hole was his dwelling, and out of it he would fly every day and later on, return. In this hole he slept and, awakening in the morning, he would leave in order to seek food. He sought it everywhere and he ate, ate, ate, until he had his full. Then he would return to his mountain hole to sleep.

But when he was rolling his ball, he called out to Nakati, “Nakati, there it goes!” And Nakati exclaimed, “O comrade, truly there it goes!” He called him comrade because he didn’t know the other’s name. Yet it was truly he who is the wind, who had said, “Nakati, there it goes!”

Not knowing his name, however, Nakati went to his mother to question her. “Mother,” he said, “do tell me the name of our comrade over there. He calls me by my name but I do not know his and I would like to know it when I am rolling the ball back to him.”

“No, I will not at this moment tell you his name, that I will only do and let you utter it after Father has made a strong shelter for our hut. And Then, when I tell you his name, the moment I have uttered it, you must at once scamper away and run home, so that you can seek the shelter of the hut.”

Again Nakati went over to play with his campion and to roll the ball. When they had finished, Nakati again went once more to question his mother, and she exclaimed, “He is erriten-kuan, he is gau-gaubu-ti!”

The next day Nakati again went to roll the ball with his companion. He did not, however, utter his playmate’s name, for his mother had cautioned him to be silent on that matter, even when he was called by name. She had said, “When the time comes for you to utter his name, you must run hime at once.”

Now once more Nakati went to roll the ball with his friend, hoping and hoping that his father would finally finish making the shelter for their hut. At last he saw that his father sat down, that he had indeed finished. Therefore, when he held this, he exclaimed, “There it goes, O erriten-kuan! There it goes, O Gau-gaubu-ti!” No sooner had he uttered it than he scampered away and ran home. His companion thereupon began to lean over, and then fall down. As he lay there he kicked violently upon the vlei. As he kicked, huts blew away, bushes vanished and the people could not see because of the dust. Thus was the wind blowing.

When the mother of the wind came out of her hut to grab him and set him on his feet again, he struggled with her for he wished to continue to lie down. However his mother took hold of him firmly and set him on his feet.

And so, because of all this, we who are Bushmen are wont say, “The wind seems to be lying down, for it is blowing fiercely. When the wind stands on its feet then it is quiet and still. Thus it acts. This noise it makes comes from its knee; that is what makes the sound. I had wished that it might blow gently for us, that we might go out, that we might ascend the place yonder, that we might behold the river bed yonder, standing behind the hill. For we have driven the springbok from this place. They have gone to yonder dry river bed standing behind the hill.”

[ BUSHMEN ]

WHEN IS LONG ENOUGH, LONG ENOUGH

Let me answer this pertinent question to the best of my ability.

Now first, the amount of time you spend in your meditations is up to you. We suggest at least 15 minutes per day, as early in the day as possible. This sets you up for an active day of conscious manifesting. And remember, your Sanctuary if “intact” at ALL times during your waking period. You may even bring it into the dreamstate by ritually focusing on it prior to sleep.

The key here, for you and others, I believe, is to bring the Sanctuary with you out into the world and bring this meditative state and its contents and energies into the world with you. This is your expectation, you see. This is your attempt to continuously, or at least intermittently. Intentionally create your Personal Reality.

The expectation is felt in the demonstration, your faithful anticipation – in the small moments of awakening from the Common Trance – of the manifestation you are considering. Not to repeat myself too much here, but you seek to Embody the Feeling-Tone of your anticipated creation. If you read my Blogs you will get this message as well as the subtext, if you are open to it. I have provided numerous Strategies for belief change in this and other Blog Series. The simplest is to identify the limiting belief – identify its Feeling-Tone – and then Embody, once again, its opposite, or its improved condition with gusto! You are not merely begging for a miracle, here. You are the Reality Creator in league with All That Is.

If you are examining painful material form the past – childhood abuse, let us say – assume the Observer’s Perspective and disentangle yourself from the drama you are witnessing. If you are in the Trance State and you are meditating on the Abundant Universe, yes, you would Embody that image, emotion, thought as completely as you could, within the safety of your Sanctuary.

In conclusion, if you are feeling guilty being materialistic and you are experiencing Lack, I would suspect religious conditioning is at fault. As you know from the current manuscript, you are already living in an Abundant Universe. Perhaps your unnecessary feelings of guilt act like walls around you that prohibit your perception of this Universe. You might attempt to practice our Consecutive Positive Assessments exercise in which the student focuses on finding something positive in each moment. That becomes the focus over time until you are seeing, for yourself, this prosperous lifetime, for you are creating it.

Again, 15 minutes per day is a good start, but the magic happens when you bring all your waking faculties to bear on this project. Each moment of your day, then, becomes an opportunity for experiencing the transcendent moment, the moment of awakening to the Abundant Universe.

HOW SPIDER READ THE SKY-GOD’S THOUGHTS

The sky-god begat three children, who were Esum (Darkness), Osrane (Moon), and Owia (Sun). When his three children grew up, the sky-god made them go to separate villages. The first one built his village, the second one also built his village, and the third one, he too, built his village. And there they lived.

Now their father loved Sun most. And while the sky-god was reigning there, he blackened a stool and said to his attendants, “Who knows what my thoughts are?” Ananse, the spider, said, “As for me, I know them.” At the time when he said, “As for me, I know them,” the sky-god made all the attendants rise up. There and then the spider also rose up, saying he was going to the village of the sky-god’s children.

When Ananse reached the path, he said to himself, “I do not know his thoughts and yet I said, ‘I know them.’ ” And he plucked some feathers out of every bird, stuck them on himself and flew off, alighting on a gyedua tree in the sky-god’s village. And when the people saw the bird, they all made a great commotion which sounded like “Y-e-e-e-e!”

And the sky-god came out of the house and came under the gyedua tree and said, “Were Ananse here, he would have known the name of this bird. I had decided that Owia, Sun, is the one I wanted to make a chief, so I asked who knew what was in my head and Ananse said that he did. Now I have gone and pulled up the yam known as ‘Kintinkyi,’ and he who knows its name and utters it, to him I shall give it, my blackened stool. That is why Ananse has gone off to bring my children. Had he been here, he would have known the name of this bird.

Then the bird flew off, and Ananse pulled out the feathers and threw them away, and set out till he reached the village of Night. To Night he said, “Your father said that you must come with me.” And Night replied, “It is well, I and you will go.” Then Ananse said, “I am going on to fetch Moon and Sun.” But Night said to him, “Let me first seek for something to give you to eat.” Spider replied, “Ho!” Night thereupon went out and brought some roasted corn and gave it to Ananse. When he had finished chewing it, he set out for Moon’s village. When he reached it, he said, “Your father says you must came along with me.” And Moon replied, “It is well, I shall go.”

THE BROTHERS, SUN AND MOON, AND THE PRETTY GIRL

How did it happen? A wife was pregnant, shoe bore a child, Moon, to begin with. She returned, became pregnant again, and this time bore Sun. Far in the wilderness was a man, and he had a pretty daughter.

Sun and Moon grew up and one day went for a stroll. In the wilderness they came upon the pretty daughter, and they asked her, “Where have you got your house? We live in that wilderness,” they said to the girl. “Show us exactly where you live.”

She replied to them, “We live in that wilderness. And there a great many dangerous animals.”

Moon, the elder one of the brothers, said to the girl, “Do you like us? Shall we woo you?”

She said to them, “Yes, I am capable of liking you but may not.”

Sun then asked, “Who is it that does not like us?”

She said, “It is my father.”

Moon said to the girl, “Well, then, we shall wait for two days, and on the third we shall come to your village. We shall send our father’s children.”

They waited for two days, and on the third they sent the children, then they started out for the wilderness. And when they were quite close, they caught sight of the girl far off at the other edge of the jungle. They went to meet her and asked her, “Well, where is your village?”

She said, “Our village is here in the wilderness.”

They asked her, “I, I! Are there people that live in the place where is no hut?”

She said, “Yes, we live in the wilderness, we have no hut.”

They said, “We wish that you would show us where you live.”

The girl said, “All right, then.” And she went on ahead to show them the way.

A big snake then appeared. Sun and Moon said, “Let us not be afraid!” They were not frightened, but went along on their way. When they had got as far as the foot of a certain tree, they found a number of snakes confronting them; but they went farther along and came upon a place full of hairs like horsehair, forming a sort of darkness before them. Nowhere were they able to see any path to take.

Sun said to the girl, “You! Have you brought us here so we should die at your place?”

She said to them, “No, but we have not yet arrived at our village.”

And he, Moon, said to Sun, “Brother Sun, what are we to do now?” They said to the girl, “Tell us if you like us, and whether we are to woo you? We now wish to return home.”

They girl said to them, “Go, and come back the day after tomorrow!”

They went away and returned home.

They reached their home. And Moon loved the girl very much, more than Sun did. The following morning Sun went to herd their father’s cattle, and Moon hid himslef from Sun and went alone into the wilderness to seek the girl and take her to wife.

When he had got there, someone said to him, “Who is it?”

He said, “It is I”

He was asked, “Who are you?”

He answered, “It is I, Moon.”

He was asked, “Whither are you going?

He said, “I am coming hither.”

The other one asked him, “From where have you come?”

Moon said to him, “I come from our village.” And he added, “And you, what are you doing here?”

“I am not doing anything in particular,” said the stranger.

And I, neither am I doing anything in particular – I am just out for a walk,” answered Moon.

The other asked him again, “Why have you come here?”

“Not for anything special.”

The other mad said to him, “I, I? Not for anything special?”

Moon replied, “I, I! I did not come here for anything special! I have come here without any purpose.”

The strange man said, “Why do you ask me what I am seeking, but conceal and refuse to reveal your own business?”

Then Moon was frightened and said to himself, “I do not know these people, and they do not know me. I will return home!”

He returned home and said to Sun, “Brother, when I left you I saw a lot of queer things.”

Sun said to Moon, “Well, lets go some day and you shall show me those things; just now I am busy tending cattle.’

Their mother said to them, “Go ye and find the girl, I will do the hearding.”

They went, and when they got to the wilderness, they saw swords appearing. They fought against the sword but saw no human being. The swords disappeared, and they went on farther and saw trees which grew so densely before them the there was no path. Sun drew his sword and cut down some threes. The trees then disappeared altogether, and they did not see them again. They went farther ahead altogether, and they did not see them again. That went farther ahead and came to a pond; they were close to it. They saw teeth coming up out of the interior of the pond. They approached quite near. Two teeth passed right between them, one passed them to the left and another to t he right. Moon fell back behind Sun; he was frightened.

Sun said to him, “I, I Moon! Are you afraid? You are the elder one, go on ahead, let us walk on!”

“Yes, let us go on then! We are equally brave.”

Then teeth returned into the pond, and Sun and Moon walked on. When they had not got very far, they saw hairs coming up out of the pond. Moon looked at the girl’s father, for it was he, and said to Sun, “My brother, here we shall perish!”

“It cannot be helped!”

The hairs returned, however, into the pond. When they had got close to the pond, again Sun sat down on a tree at the edge of the pond together with Moon. The beard of the girl’s father came up to them but returned into the pond. Bones of dead people came up.

Moon said, “Oh! I am dying!” and suddenly he ran away.

Sun was left behind, alone there, sitting on the tree. The water rose, part of it came on one side of him and part of it on the other; it flowed all around him. He was sitting in the midst of the water, which presently returned to the pond. Sun did not budge from the spot. The water, however, returned to the river. Then smoke rose up out of the water. Sun said, to himself, “I do not intend to die here, although my brother got frightened and ran away. I am going to remain, so that I may see the girl” The smoke ceased, and the water flamed like fire. The fire, however, soon went out.

After that there came out of the water a human being – it was the girl! She came and took the young man by the hand and said to him, “Now we will go home to our place, and I shall give you food.”

The girl said to the pond, “Get out of the way for this man! I am going to cook food for him.” The water drew off the side of the pond, went over to one side.

The girl went and cooked food which she brought and gave the young man, and he ate. She said to him:

“I, it is you that is to take me to wife, because you are a man who is not afraid of anything. And you, now you are my husband because you are not afraid of all the things that were shown you, but your elder brother ran away.”

Then the girl’s father said to Sun, “Take the girl. When you have gone home you are to tarry there with her for five days, and then you yourself and your father are to bring the girl back here!

They started off. Moon had returned and sat down in the compound. He had a sword, and he said, “When Sun comes along with that girl, I shall kill him.”

Then the girl approached, and Sun was walking in the front of her. They came and found that Moon was in the compound. They asked him, “Moon, is there anyone at home in our village?”

“Sun, come here!”

Sun carried a sword. He went forward, and sat down. The mother came out and Sun said to her, “Mother, go and take the girl and conduct her into the village!”

The mother asked him, “This girl, is it you that have taken her to wife, or is it Moon?”

“She is my wife, Moon ran away.” Sun repeated: “Moon ran away.”

The latter grasped his sword. Sun looked up and saw the sword quite close to him, for Moon gave him a cut. And he, Sun, who also carried his sword, slapped Moon, and they fought. Sun was badly cut by Moon.

The mother cried a great deal. She took millet and all kinds of provisions and spoilt them for Moon. And she threw millet and all the other foodstuffs on the fire, saying, “You, Moon, have damaged Sun in this way. May you be destroyed in the same way! And the mother took some milk, and she and her husband poured it into a calabash bowl with millet and beer. Thereupon they blessed Sun, that he would shine brightly for mankind. The girl remained on in the village as Sun’s wife, but Moon had no wife, and he who had formerly been more brilliant than Sun no longer was so.

Ever since that time and even now Moon avoids Sun; they will not agree to approach each other at the same fire, nor to eat food together. When Sun goes down, Moon comes out; when Sun comes out of the village, Moon rapidly runs away. Is not that a curse? Moon has become small, and Sun has become big.

[ AKAMBA ]

THE CONNECTION BETWEEN RESONANCE AND SYNCHRONICITY

Before I attempt to answer this question, first allow me to set the stage here a bit. Now remember, you are a Reality Creator. You are a manifester. So you are already, as we speak, resonating your Personal Reality Field into being, into existence, you see. The problem may be that you are manifesting unconsciously. As you do, you create reality through the templates of your Issues. These are your beliefs about yourself and your world. This expression of your unconscious in the physical world may not be to your liking, therefore. You may in fact find yourself always making the same mistakes, and so, always creating less-than-satisfactory realities.

These are synchronicities also, the negative events, the negative realities. They are showing you that you are on a path of development and that you must change your ways. The negative reality creator looks around them and says to themselves, perhaps: “Why do I always create the same failed relationships?” “Coincidentally,” this person has, once again, established a relationship with a new person, within a different environment, also, possibly, in a different context entirely, that eventually becomes the “failed” relationship they feared. Might I suggest that the resonance in this case, the Feeling-Tone created here that resonates within consciousness, is of a negative nature? You may also refer to it as a series of ongoing harbingers of negative events; omens warning you of future negativity. But you are creating unconsciously and so you are not consciously aware. Your conscious perceptions overlook this data, they deny this information, they intellectualize and “explain away” these harbingers.

Your consciousness is unconsciously, automatically resonating your failed relationship into existence, just as it always does, just as it always will, unless you wake up to what you are up to.

Now additionally, because we are being precise and brief in our new Blog Series…. synchronicity is a perception, and thus, a state of consciousness in which connections are made by the coincidental connections, perfectly unextraordinary perceptions of the brain as it attempts to “make sense” of seemingly similar sensory input. This is true to a degree. However, let us provide our own definition with my theory of Reality Creation in mind. Synchronistic sensings are signals from the Soul-Self to the ego/intellect. They are meant to draw you into the moment. They are the basis of awakenings, the momentary awakenings we speak of in the new Blog material. I often suggest to you, that these coincidental experiences are telling you that you are on a path of awakening, even though you may not admit it. Indeed, if you were to observe and honor the synchronistic connections being made within your consciousness, you may possibly discover that everything is connected. The deeper you go, the more that is revealed. Over time, when you have learned how to “ride” these synchronous moments into the “future,” you find that you are awakening to your greater creaturehood. The sensings of your simultaneous Lives, the workings of the Universe, the secrets of Reality Creation become your habitual, ingoing experience.

THE VISIONARY LEADER II

First, we are awakening now. I believe I may safely say at this time. You are reading this Blog material because you are interested in the Unknown Reality and other metaphysical concepts. You are of this type, quite probably, that honors the sacred within consciousness. You look for it, you find it sometimes, and allow it to transform you, to wake you up. As this occurs within the consciousness of, let us say, a production worker in an automobile plant, you may feel prompted to tell others about your experiences. As you share your findings with others you catalyze the awakening experience in them. Each of you in this collective of awakening humans becomes YOUR OWN leader. You are leading yourself away from authority and to your own truth.

This is the Visionary Leader: the one who learns how to access their truth, teaches it to others, and then leads by example, you see. The Virtues of Humanity are their leadership principles. The highest good for all concerned is their focus of creation, of manifestation. The awakening human, in short, Resonates their improved reality into existence, by allowing these inner Precepts we call the Ancient Wisdom to replicate themselves in the Third Dimension. The etheric is physicalized through this process of Resonance. The sacred is established in the physical world for the greater improvement of all that exists in our world.

Now, your primary Lesson in this reality concerns how you, as an individual with your own aspects of personality, will respond to negativity. You are on Earth to experience negativity and your reactions will determine how long you will stay in the physical body in any particular incarnation, as well as other particulars of physical existence, such as when and if you shall return to a human form to experience the opportunity to deal with your Issues and Lessons: those experiences you have avoided or not dealt with properly.

I do not wish to compare this phenomenon with the stories from our world scriptures. For the most part, these stories quite literally HIDE FROM VIEW the essential meaning of the reincarnational journey. That is quite simply because these Blog manuscripts were written by human beings with an agenda, an agenda of the ego. What we are here discussing is the Soul’s Agenda. The Soul sends out particles of itself, of its energy, into human babies to grow with the human and experience the Lessons.

Beyond your initial Lessons of reacting appropriately to negativity come the Lessons particular to individuals. Your focus, your perspective, your orientation, the lenses of belief through which you create your reality, determine to the most minute detail the presentation of your Personal Reality Field before you. It is feedback, it is a recapitulation, it IS a replication of the interior processes of consciousness. The reality constructs of your world assemble into solidity at the bequest of ALL consciousness involved.

THOSE WHO FOLLOW SHALL LEAD

Now as you refuse from authority figures, you quite naturally learn how to trust YOURSELF. Again, this is a learned habit, like anything else in your reality. What you focus on habitually, whether subconsciously or consciously, you tend to create. The Courageous step of relying on your Inner Self to provide the information you seek, becomes a faithful expectation that you will receive what you desire and need. Over time it does indeed become second nature. You might also call it a faithful, trust-filled precognition that what you ask for is being provided.

This is the Ancient Wisdom, in fact, and this communication stream arrives from your greater Gestalt of Consciousness. It is personalized, this stream of data, for your perception. It is tuned to your frequency, specifically, to the frequency of your awakening Spirit. Thus, the awakening human becomes an expert on their own unfolding consciousness. And simply because you are connected to everyone/thing in the Universe, you are also mastering a perception of the macrocosm here: the greater gestalt you may call All That Is.

THE THEORY OF RESONANCE

Now remember that this metaphor for the projection of All That Is into our system. Lessons is our Essential Metaphor for why the human comes to the physical plane. We suggest it is to experience the Lessons of Value Fulfillment, as the Virtues of Humanity are endorsed and Embodied, or perhaps denied and vilified. However, the lessons is a Lesson BECAUSE you are noticing it and interpreting it as a Lesson. You create your own reality, and as you do YOU are the value-fulfiller, whether it is the fulfillment though behavior, emotion, imagery and thought of physical violence, as in a perpetrator of violence upon others, or as is the case with a do-gooder type, who bestows goodness, Love, compassion on others. In both cases values are fulfilled. In both cases Lessons are learned.

Now let us look at the two examples in terms of frequency of vibration. We have suggested that negative emotion holds a lower vibration than does positive emotion. This is our premise upon which we build our theory of Resonance. In one example, the subject builds negative Reality Creations with negative emotions. This low frequency resonates with negative emotions everywhere. Within the collective gestalt of emotion, within the Collective Unconscious, your negative emotions resonate with other similarly-created negative emotions of humanity. You could say that this amalgam of negative emotion that is seeking out other “like” emotions within the consciousness field, eventually, through resonance, finds a home for itself. These “homes” we call the Gestalts of Consciousness, the foundational elements of Reality Constructs of all types, including of course, Reality Constructs of air, of ideas, of soil and stone, and so on. But again, these theorized activities of consciousness are simply metaphors for the exceedingly complex activities of the Consciousness Units.

RESONANCE AND AWAKENING

Our changing roles as awakening humans reflect this learning of Lessons through FACING our Issues. Let me explain. Now you begin where you are. You are not yet awakened but you are getting there. You have discovered that you have Issues, spiritual Issues that are DEMANDING your attention. There is no room for denial. There is no time left for intellectualizing away these basic Issues. You are compelled to take to heart, for example, the admonishments of your friends, family, and colleagues. This advice may range from the negative through the positive, as in, “You are a walking ego. You harm others through your insensitivity,” to “You should really get out more. You could find a great partner if you were to make the gesture, go out, meet people.” As you act on the advice of others, or perhaps on promptings from other sources, such as the nonphysical beings, you are expanding your boundaries, your beliefs, your societal role.

In this case, your collective consciousness is Resonating with the ancient civilizations. In those prototypical cultures the highest good for all concerned was practiced in all endeavors. These important life-sustaining, healing messages enter your awareness as impulses, impulses, perhaps, to do good, give to others, to work on yourself and become a better human being. As your personal consciousness Resonates with these messages, you are connected to the collective through your thoughts, through your images, and so on. Thus you achieve your particular state of Resonance with the Ancient Wisdom even as you contribute to the collective state of Resonance by your CHANGING of behaviors, emotions, imagery, “Waking up,” we call it. You are waking up to your responsibilities to create for the highest good.

As you claim this responsibility as your own, your “personal credo, “so to speak, you quite naturally, again, assume a leadership position within your family, your town, your state, country and world. You are modeling for others this assuming of the awakened experience. You then Resonate with other visionary leaders. You come together to make plans for the future. You work as a collective for the betterment of your collectives, large and small.

THE VISIONARY LEADER IS BECOMING KNOWN

Yes, it is cyclical. The Changing of the Guard is underway. The Shift in Consciousness transforms all. Specifically, for the interested citizen, those of you who are waking up, it is this Resonance in action, once again. Now the cycle of domination is changing. The idea that you must conquer the Earth, that to succeed you must dominate others, that the proper way to raise a child is to punish them when they misbehave, these concepts are giving way during this cycle of change. A cycle, a natural cycle of manifestation, implies that changes occur quite naturally, in the natural order of things, you might say. This is the case with The Shift. The dominators have had their say for many generations on Earth. They have created a crisis situation worldwide with their selfish behaviors. In the natural order of things, do you see how this Shift brings up the Ancient Wisdom that contains NEW ideas, NEW images, NEW and positive means of creating, behaving, Loving in the world?

I hope that you sense my irony, once again, as we speak in terms of the NEW ideas that the Ancient Wisdom brings. They ARE new to many of us, for we have practiced over these manys years, the way of forcing ourselves on others and on our environment. It is, from my perspective, completely and utterly expected that the “season” of the dominators would give way, in time, to the era of the Lovers of Earth, of humanity.

UPDATED PROJECTIONS

Thus the evolving experience of the awakening student represents these continually updated projections of the Essential Identity into the Third Dimension. This is our life. As a human on this trajectory of Soul Evolution, your awakening consciousness is reflected in the ongoing products of your consciousness: your body, your environment, your life.

Dear Blog Reader, you are always in-tune with your creations, your Personal Reality. You are always getting what you ask for. But you may ask, “I am certainly not getting what I want. I am poor, sickly and quite unhappy. How can you say that?” In my presentations to you in physical reality we rely on a basic assumption that you are the creator of your world. As I said, you create your reality, your Personal Reality Field. You are connected to everyone and everything else in the created Universe through the Consciousness Units. Thus, as a collective of humans, we create our consensus realities. On the basic level, then, you look out in front of you and see your part of this Universe: your home, your friends and family, your job site, and so on. Now on the collective, progressed level of perception, the Visionary State, you might call it, when you look out in front of you, you may be witnessing your multidimensional reality. Visions of other lives may play out before you or upon the inner screen of your creative imagination. So let us here differentiate between these two states of consciousness perception and thus Reality Creation.

PROBABLE OUTCOME II

Let us cover probable effects of consciousness in the Third Dimension. To begin, as we know, our individual and collective realities are created from limitless probabilities. These probable thoughts, images, emotions, and so on, exist within the etheric, what we also call the pre-manifestation domain. It is from this dimension that our Earthly dimension emerges.

Now all probable effects have a singular charge. This tendency to appear in the particular way of the proposed effect, has, as I said, bioelectric and electromagnetic properties. In our terms, everything in the etheric domain. With your imagination, with your consciousness, you consistently add to this repository of potential. By thinking about the goodness of humanity, for example, you positive imagery, emotions, thoughts and other elements seek out their likeness in this pre-manifestation domain, as well as their opposites. The opposites serve to give depth and counterpoint. Through Resonance these correlations are energized, amplified, supported, given life, you see.

In a sense, the negative is inferred through the positive expression, in contrast, you see, in relative contrast. If you wish to think in terms of dynamics within a system, a system of reality, you could theorize that through Resonance, both the positive and the negative, in addition to all expressions in between these two polarities, are expressed to the nth degree throughout the past, present, and future. Value Fulfillment occurs simultaneously with this expression.

PROBABLE OUTCOMES

You are connected to everyone and everything else…

Feel You Power

Now the truth is, that you as a Reality Creator may expect an infinite variety of outcomes i,e,: creations. The possibilities are limitless with regards to what you can and do create. In this Practice we speak of these outcomes as a form of feedback of your mentality. What you are thinking about is reflected quite directly back to you from your creations, your Personal Reality. You have thus had a hand in the creation of all you see in front of you.

Admittedly, you are far more responsible for the creation of your body, shall we say, and your immediate surroundings, than the neighborhood or the city in which you live. Your creative powers, then, as the creator of realities standing within the magical arena of your Personal Reality Field. Sense it. “Own it,” as we say.

HOW KINTU WAS TESTED BEFORE HE COULD MARRY THE DAUGHTER OF THE KING OF HEAVEN

When Kintu came first to Ugnada he found there was no food at all in the country. He brought with him one cow and had only the food with which the animal supplied him. In the course of time a woman named Nambi came with her brother to the earth and saw Kintu. The woman fell in love with him and, wishing to be married to him, pointedly told him so. She had to return, however, with her brother to her people and her father, Gulu, who was king of the sky.

Nambi’s relations objected to the marriage because they said that the man did not know of any food except that which the cow yielded, and they despised him. Gulu, the father, however, said that they had better test Kintu before he consented to the marriage, and he accordingly sent someone to rob Kintu of his cow. For a time Kintu was at a loss what to eat, but he managed to find different kinds of herbs and leaves which he cooked and ate. Nambi happened to see the cow grazing and recognized it, and complaining that her brothers wished to kill the man she loved, she went to the earth and told Kintu where his cow was, and invited him to return with her to take it away.

Kintu consented to go, and when he reached the sky he was greatly surprised to see how many people there were with houses and with cows, goats, sheep, and fowls running about. When Nambi’s brothers saw Kintu sitting with their sister at her house, they went and told heir father testing to see whether he was worthy of their sister. An enormous meal was cooked, enough food for a hundred people, and brought to Kintu, who was told that unless he ate it all he would be killed as an impostor. Failure to eat it, they said, would be proof that he was not the great Kintu. He was then shut up in a house and left alone.

After he had eaten and drunk as much as he could, he was at a loss to know what to do with the rest of the food. fortunately, he discovered a deep hole in the floor of the house, so he turned all the food and beer into it and covered it over so that no one could detect the place. He then called the people outside to come and take away the baskets. The sons of Gulu came in, but would not believe that he eaten all the food. They, therefore, searched the house but failed to find it.

They went to their father and told him that Kintu had eaten all the food. He was incredulous, and said that Kintu must be further tested. A copper axe was sent to Kintu by Gulu, who said, “Go and cut me firewood from the rock, because I do not use ordinary firewood.”

When Kintu went with the axe, he said to himself, “What am I to do? If I strike the rock, the axe will only turn its edge or rebound.” However, after he had examined the rock, he found that there were cracks in it, so he broke off pieces of it, and returned with them to Gulu who was surprised to get them. Nevertheless, he said that Kintu must be further tried before they could give their consent to the marriage.

Kintu was next sent to fetch water and was told that he must bring only dew, because Gulu did not drink water from wells. Kintu took the water-pot and went off to a field, where he put the pot down and began to ponder what he must do to collect the dew. He was sorely puzzled, but upon returning to the pot, he found it full of water. So he carried it back to Gulu. Gulu was most surprised and said, “This man is a wonderful being; he shall have his cow back and marry my daughter.

Kintu was told to pick his cow from the herd and take it. This was a more difficult task than the others, because there were so many cows like his own that he feared he would mistake it and take the wrong one. While he was thus perplexed a large bee came and said, “Take the one upon whose horns I shall alight; it is yours.”

The next morning Kintu went to the appointed place and stood and watched the bee, which was resting on a tree near him. A large herd of cows was brought before him, and he pretended to look for his cow, but in reality he was watching the bee which did not move. After a time, Kintu said, “My cow is not there.” A second herd was brought, and the bee at once flew away and rested upon a cow which was a very large one, and Kintu said, “This is my cow.” The bee then flew to another cow, and Kintu said, “This is one of the calves from my cow,” and the bee went on to a second and a third cow which Kintu claimed as the calves which had been born during the cow’s stay with Gulu.

Gulu was delighted with Kintu and said, “You are truly Kintu, take your cows. No one can deceive or rob you, you are too clever for that.” He called Nambi and said to Kintu, “Take my daughter who loves you, marry her, and go back to your home.” Gulu further said, “You must hurry and go back before Walumbe, or Death, comes, because he will want to go with you and you must not take him; he will only cause you trouble and unhappiness.”

Nambi agree to what her father said and went to pack up her things. Kintu and Nambi then took leave of Gulu, who said, “Be sure, if you have forgotten anything, not to come back, because Death will want to go with you and you must go without him.”

They started off home, taking with them, besides Nambi’s things and the cows, a goat, a sheep, a fowl, and a plantain tree. On the way Nambi remembered that she had forgotten the grain for the for the fowl, and she said to Kintu, “I must go back for the grain for the fowl, or it will die.”

Kintu tried to dissuade her, but in vain. She said, “I will hurry back and get it without anyone seeing me.”

He said, “Your brother Death will be on the watch and will see you.”

She would not listen to her husband, but went back and said to her father, “I have forgotten the grain for the fowl, and I have come to take it from the doorway where I put it.”

He replied, “Did I not tell you that you were not to return if you forgot anything, because your brother Walumbe would see you and want to go with you?” Now he will accompany you.”

Nambi tried to steal away without Walumbe, but he followed her. When she rejoined Kintu, he was angry at seeing Walumbe, and said, “Why have you brought your brother with you? Who can live with him?”

Nambi was sorry, so Kintu said, “Let us go and see what happen.”

When they reached the earth Nambi planted her garden, and the plantains grew rapidly, and she soon had a large plantain grove in Manyagalya. They lived happily for some time and had a number oif children, until one day Walumbe asked kintu to send one of the children to be his cook.

Kintu replied, “If Gulu comes and asks me for one of my children, what am I to say to him? Shall I tell him that I have given her to be your cook?”

Walumbe was silent and went away, but he again asked for a child to be his cook, and again Kintu refused to send one of his daughters, so Walumbe said, “I will kill them.”

Kintu, who did not know what he meant, asked, “What is it that you will do?” In a short time, however, one of the children fell ill and died, and from that time they began to die at intervals.

Kintu returned to Gulu and told him about the deaths of the children, and accuse Walumbe of being the cause. Gulu replied, “Did I not tell you when you were going away to go at once with your wife and not return if you had forgotten anything? But you allowed Nambi to return for grain. Now you have Walumbe living with you. Had you obeyed me you would have been free of him and would not have lost any of your children.”

After some further entreaty, Gulu sent Kaikuzi, another brother, to assist Nambi, and to prevent Walumbe from killing the children. Kaikuzi went to the earth with Kintu and was met by Nambi, who told him her pitiful story. He said he would call Walumbe and try to dissuade him from killing the children. When Walumbe came to greet his brother they had quite a warm and affectionate meeting, and Kintu told him he had come to take him back, because their father wanted him.

Walumbe said, “Let us take our sister too.”

But Kintu said he was not sent to take her, because she was married and had to stay with her husband. Walumbe refused to go without his sister, and Kaikuzi was angry with him and ordered him to do as he was told. Death, however, escaped from Kaikuzi’s grip and fled away into the earth.

For a long time there was enmity between the two brothers. Kaikuzi tried in every possible way to catch his brother Walumbe, but he always escaped. At last Kaikuzi told the people to remain in their houses for several days and not to let any of the animals out, and he would have a final hunt for Walumbe. He further told them that if they saw Walumbe they must not call out or raise the usual cry of fear.

The instructions were followed for two or three days, and Kaikuzi got his brother to come out of the earth and was about to capture him, when some children took their goats to the pasture and saw Walumbe and called out. Kaikuzi rushed to the spot and asked why they called, and they said they had seen Death. Kaikuzi was angry, because Walumbe had again gone into the earth. So he went to Kintu and told him he was tired of hunting Death and wanted to return home. He also complained that the children had frightened Walumbe into the earth again. Kintu thanked Kaikuzi for his help and said he feared nothing more could be done, and he hoped Walumbe would not kill all the people.

Form that time Death has lived upon the earth and killed people whenever he can, and then he escapes into the earth at Tanda in Singo.

[ BAGANDA ]

PROBABLE OUTCOMES

Feel Your Power

Now the truth is, that you as a Reality Creator may expect an infinite variety of outcomes i,e,; creations. The possibilities are limitless with regards to what you can and do create. In this Practice we speak of these outcomes as a form of feedback of your mentality. What you are thinking about is reflected quite directly back to you from your creations, your Personal Reality. You have thus had a hand in the creation of all that you see in front of you.

Admittedly, you are far more responsible for the creation of your body, shall we say, and your immediate surroundings, than the neighborhood or the city in which you live. Your creative powers are most effective within a 50 foot radius. Feel your power, then, as the creator of realities standing within the magical arena of your Personal Reality Field. Sense it. “Own it,” as we say.

THE TRANCE STATE

Further information may be gathered in the Trance State, as we said earlier. You may find it is easier to receive unbiased information in Trance rather than trying to circumvent the agenda of the ego/intellect. Do what works best for you in your Practice.

Also, carry a recording device with you or a simple notebook to document discoveries in the field. Especially note Resonance Factors, those aspects of consciousness that seem to precognate the manifestation. In other words, these glimpses into your future represent your progressed self – the one that enjoys the Best Case Scenario – sending back clues and suggestions from the future. True, this is high-etherics we are suggesting to you in the Practice. However, consider that you are now reading a Blog dictated by a non-physical being who has been dead for quite some time. I suggest to you that you are ALREADY submerged in the etherics of the Unknown Reality, Dear Blog Reader. You may as well enjoy it.

So you would write down these impulses from the future – the messages from the BCS – and your successes, most assuredly, and also note instances of non-success. Simply note them, however, without berating yourself. This information is crucial to your redirection of energies in your Regimen. Now you know what NOT to do. Now you may do the opposite, in fact. So as you school yourself in this system, be a good reacher, be a kind teacher, be a teacher who models Love for the student

FILLING IN THE BLANKS

In this exercise you are taking hold of your Reality Creation in the moment of assessment. You are then including the Felt Difference – the Feeling-Tone of what is missing – in your creative efforts. Using your Intent, allowing your personal power to come forward in that moment, impress this Blog material into your activities, into your perception of your Personal Reality Field.

THE FELT DIFFERENCE

The Felt Difference is that Feeling-Tone of thought, imagery and emotion that is missing from the BCS (Best Case Scenario). You have assessed your current status quo reality and found some things lacking. You would like to include this Blog Material, in other words, in your CURRENT reality. Write down what you have noticed that is missing.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

BEST CASE SCENARIO

Now imagine what BCS would look like when it is finally manifested. Write your BCS on the lines below. Use just a few words to capture the essence, the Feeling-Tone of this construct. I believe that it is important to start this process now. You have the tools to be gin. You are ready now to start creating your heart’s desire.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CURRENT FEELING-TONE

Your first project begins in earnest when you create Current Feeling-Tone Assessment of the state of the domain of living that you have selected. Do that next

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DOMAINS OF LIVING

What areas of your life need improving? What projects are you willing to devote your time and energy to in order to get results? List in order of importance the areas in your life that need this attention. I do think that it is counterproductive to be shy about this, to be fearful that someone may read this Blog material and wonder about your sanity. However, write this in a diary that is secure if you feel that it is necessary.

Now write down what you would like to change.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

RITUAL OF SANCTUARY-2

Now do personalize the protection Ritual. Put your personality and your personal energy in it. Also it helps to link this creative state of consciousness to a memory, a thought, an image or gesture. In this way you may immediately create a felt sense of protection, security, Love while you are out in your waking world with a mere snap of your fingers. Or perhaps you carry a card in your pocket with the word “Sanctuary” printed on it. Every time you take it out of your pocket and look at it. Sanctuary is created automatically. Again, why does it occur? It occurs because you create your reality.

MY PRACTICE

When I provide ongoing support for clients, I proceed in a particular way. This may help you to create your own program and help you avoid problems.

Now when a client asks me for my insight into a particular Issue that they might have, I remind them that THEY themselves have the solutions. I am only an intermediary here, you see. I am able to observe what the client has in store for themselves as probable trajectories of development, probable realities. Therefore, as you create your Regimens keep this truth in mind, Dear Blog Reader. You already know the answers. You already have created success in your Practice. You are even now quite successful in a probable future from which you may pull inspiration. In other words, please understand this Best Case Scenario that we speak of in this Blog Series is real. It is quite apparent to me, and I am certain it will become quite certain to you as you complete your studies.

Secondly, use your Guides as you would a coach or knowledgeable confidante. As we have reminded you before in our second Blog Series, the genie of literature and myth is the Energy Personality, the Spirit, the Guide. Knowing this, act as if your guides have all the answers and it will be so. This can be considered an adjunct Precept to YCYR. Perhaps I would state it thus: “Your Source has all the answers you need to help you manifest your heart’s desire.” Then, as you Embody this Precept, the Guides will make themselves known to you and make the information available, the information you require, you see, to create your world the way you want it.

THE BULLY

Transformation – An example: You area a bully, let us pretend, and you enjoy picking on people, making them miserable. You rationalize your behavior by blaming it on your father, who was also a bully, per the reports from your mother. However, the truth comes out that your father was far from being a bully and was quite Loving and nurturing. He made his Transition at an early time in your life. You were not able to feel fathered completely by this human.

What do you do now? You have an opportunity to change your behavior, to in fact change it to its opposite. You can attempt to Embody the Virtues of Loving Understanding, nurturing, and so on. You will be working on a negative reality you have created for you have found proof that it is based on falsehoods. You have it within you to create these Virtues, as do we all. And so you practice Embodying these opposites of the bully.

Will this practice make an angel out of you, a profoundly Loving and spiritual person? Perhaps. Yet if you do continue this practice of polarizing the Feeling-Tones you have used to create the bully persona, you will undoubtedly improve, in Soul sense, in the sense of creating progress in your Soul’s Evolution.

HOLDING ON AND LETTING GO

Now here is a time for everything, here, in your Ritual processes. Let me go on a bit about just what I mean with this statement…

Just as this Resonance exhibits both the attractive and repulsive principles, and finds cohesion and momentum “over time,” you may find it advantageous to, in a sense, ride this wave of manifestation with your awareness. There is a time for holding on and letting go, resisting/assessing and “going with the flow.” You cannot have one without the other in this natural process. It is not “wrong” or “bad” to favor one over the other. It is quite fruitful to embrace both in this practice.

In a very natural way, the student attends to the current moment, for example, with focus and energy. In the next moment, however, you might relax and let go, you see: Distraction. The natural distractions of living will occur for you, taking your focus off of your creative enterprises. Simply let go of your focus in that moment and ride the wave of manifestation. The next moment may call for a return to your focus on the matter at hand. Simply do so, not abandoning the distraction but simply diverting your attention back to the Regimen. This is multitasking. The more you practice, the more proficient you become.

PROSPERITY REGIMEN

Prosperity and the Victim Stance

If you feel as though you are experiencing Lack, you have a perspective Issue. You exist within an Abundant Universe, however your Issues act as barriers between you and prosperity. Your beliefs, you see, are actively obscuring your perception of this Abundant Universe.

Let me explain the activity of Resonance at it applies to the Victim. Now Resonance is a dynamic process. It is composed of Light energy fluctuations achieving balance within electromagnetic influences. The Consciousness Units flash on and off, creating different realities in different time-frames. On the basic level, what you focus on consciously, or unconsciously, has a particular vibratory frequency that attempts to replicate itself in physical reality.

On the unconscious level, for example, let us suppose that you have a tendency to create just enough prosperity to sustain yourself, yet never enough to relax and enjoy your life. This is how you view it, your manifestation of your person reality.

This is a type of victim stance, in that, you see yourself as “trying to get ahead,” as we say, but it never quite happens.

In my terms, your prosperity evades you for you are creating unconsciously according to less-than-best case scenarios created in your past. These scenarios may have been developed by you in your response to perceived stress, trauma, negative experiences, you see. These are protective strategies that serve to protect you at THAT STAGE of your development: the point in your growth as a Soul in which you sustained the emotional injuries, the damage, you might say, to the Emotional Body. The ego/intellect, the conscious mind attempts to protect you in this way. It keeps from you this negative material. It represses it.

This resonance phenomenon is actively working within your subconscious to match the vibratory frequency of you victim strategy to people, places and things in your physical world. Subconsciously, then, you are creating your reality through this resonance effect, that seeks a match of outside to inside energies.

NOW IN THIS MOMENT

This reasoning also applies to any attempts at body conditioning through exercise and other physical activities. The important piece here is this: “What do you think of your physical body NOW in this moment?” Now in the moment is when you create your future, you see. Now in the moment is when you must Love yourself, Love your body. If you can see the potential trim and fit physical body beneath the chubby exterior, then you have the right idea. That is your focus, from my perspective. That positive image, that positive Feeling-Tone of Love and success is what may drive your manifestation activities over the course of the Regimen.

Obviously, if what you see before you as you look in the mirror repulses you, you have some important changes to make in your self-assessment activities. That is where you begin, then, to appreciate the body you now have while also anticipating the improvements.

On this Regimen you will be Loving your body into fitness. You Love how you are in this moment, first, and then you move toward the creation of an improved reality moment-to-moment, as you, for example, eat healthy foods, exercise regularly, and all the while you are keeping this Loving Understanding of self intact.

PHYSICAL HEALTH REGIMEN

In my past Blog Series, I suggested to you that in matters of diet, as in the eating of specific foods, that it was more important what the eater THOUGHT of the food. What matters most are the images, circular thoughts, essential ideas that you-the-eater entertain within your mental environment before, during, and after eating food. These influences have a very direct effect upon the digestion. So for example, if you eat a small piece of chocolate, say, that is on your FORBIDDEN list of foods, you would have, perhaps, a quite negative reaction to the food. “Chocolate makes me fat,” you may say to yourself as you eat it. That statement is a profound suggestion to your subconscious that you immediately, upon eating any chocolate, must begin the process of turning it into fat. Your digestive system will obey dutifully this suggestion as you reinforce it with negative imagery, negative emotion, and so on. In addition, this sets up an unfortunate dis-empowering dynamic in which you play the naughty child that must be punished with obesity by the punitive subconscious.

CHANGE THE PAST AND THE PRESENT WILL TAKE CARE OF ITSELF

Now here in this section we will demonstrate how a sense of Good Humor, as in clever punning, may help us initiate a manifestation scenario of positive realities. You already are familiar, I am guessing, with the modern aphorisms regarding the past: “Don’t dredge up the past. What’s done is done. Look forward.” Generally, the past, particularly the past of negative events, traumatic events shall we say, is indeed best forgotten. “Just don’t dwell on it, ” the saying goes, “and it will lose its power over you.”

There is some truth to these statements, from my perspective. You do indeed create through a focusing of your energies on the subject matter. And so I do not advise the student who has had a traumatic childhood, for example, to continuously TRY to remember the traumatic events. Without proper preparation, they may make matters worse for themselves. Yet I DO believe that a return to the scenes of the trauma in the imagination, from an Objective Observer’s perspective, may be quite healing. Again, this is not done willy-nilly, without regard for the safety of the human. Great preparation is made before the return to master this Observer’s Perspective.

Once this is done, the student may safely visit these unfortunate memories, and observe the going-on objectively, without Embodying these negative memories, in other words. Here is where we use humor to neutralize the negative Feeling-Tone that marks and identifies the traumatic events. Change the past and the present will take care of itself. It has a sense of the absurd to it yet it is literally true. Over time the Objective Observer creates safety in this retrieval process. The negative emotion loses its sting, its power to wound.

Now having been neutralized, the event may safely be studied, assessed, and TRANSFORMED. The student is quite literally changing their past. When they return to surface awareness from the Trance State they may well experience the cathartic healing of consciousness. In this sense the student recovers, as in going back to retrieve the lost aspects of Soul, rather than recover in the sense of again covering up the negative past. Please note the activity of the double meaning within consciousness.

PATH OF HEALING

ESSENTIAL METAPHOR – You are on a path to your past, to your birth. As you go back in time on this path you see on the side of the road, events, places where you split off parts of yourself and left them. The idea is to collect these aspects or parts of self and integrate them into your personality through Intent. You go all the way back to your birth. When you have done this adequately, you can go back beyond and before your birth to the time in between lives, in the Home Dimension and into other lives.

Now if you have issues of abuse from childhood, these issues may be healed from the present. As you walk this path you see different events being recreated on the side of the road. You see where you have left parts of yourself at different stages of development in your life. The idea is to collect these Feeling-Tones and bring them back to the present. This is healing the Soul. It allows you to integrate all of this material and navigate the developmental phase that was interrupted by the trauma.

CHILDHOOD TRAUMA

It is quite common for the human who has been traumatized in childhood to experience these flashbacks in adult life. The volatile material has been repressed successfully over the years, but now the images and other content force themselves upon the waking mind. The Reality Creation is disrupted violently during these events, as the human, usually referred to as “the victim,” re-experiences the Feeling-Tone of the Traumatic event or events.

It seems to me, that what must change here is the felt sense or Feeling-Tone of the traumatic past that comes to visit. One then revisits the traumatic memories in the Trance State, with an eye toward altering them; altering in memory and thus altering the effects in the flashbacks. One observes the traumatic material as an Objective Observer, without becoming emotionally involved, you see, as though one were watching a movie. Important information is carried out of the Trance State and then documented. Each time the scene is revisited in memory, the Objective Observer notes the particulars with cool detachment. Eventually the flashbacks will be experienced in this Observer Perspective, rather than the traumatized “victim” perspective. It is a case of tuning down the high emotionality and trauma of the event. The cascade of negative emotion will be prevented, as the disturbing material is observed in the cool light of day, you might say. Again, this is simply a change of perspective and so change of realities.

THE SUN CHILDREN

Once some children, at their mother’s behest, very gently approached the sun’s armpit. As the sun lay sleeping. They went to lift up the sun’s armpit.

At the same time, another woman ordered her children to do the same thing. She told them that if they approached ever so gently and drew up the sun’s armpit, then the rice of the Bushmen would become dry, and the sun, as it proceeded from place across the sky, would cause everything to become bright. For this reason it was that the old woman, their mother, coaxed her children to do as she asked. “But, children,” she said, “you must wait for the sun, who is making us so cold, to lie down to sleep. Then approach him gently and, all together, lift him up and throw him into the sky.” Thus, indeed, did both of the old women speak.

And so the children approached the sun. They first sat down and looked at him in order to determine whether, as he lay there, he was looking at them. Finally they saw him lying there very quietly, his elbow lifted up so that his armpit shone upon the ground. Before the children prepared to throw him up into the sky they remembered what the old woman, their mother, had said: “O children, going yonder, you must speak to him when you throw him up. You must tell him that he must be the sun – the sun who is hot and who, as he passes along the sky, causes the Bushmen rice to become dry – the sun who is hot as he stands above in the sky.”

Thus had their mother, the old woman, whose head was white, spoken. They had listened and were going to obey her.

When all was in readiness, they took hold of the sun, all of them together, lifted him, raised him, even though he was hot to touch, and threw him up in the sky, addressing him as they threw him up: “O sun, you must altogether stand fast and you must proceed along your way – you must stand fast while you are hot.”

Then the children returned to their mother, and one of them went to her and said, “Our companion, who is here, this one, took hold of him. So did I. Then my younger brother and my still younger brother, they all took hold of him. ‘Grasp hold of him firmly,’ I said, ‘and throw him up. Grasp the old man firmly and throw him up.’ Thus I spoke to them. Then the children threw him up, the old man, the sun.”

Then another one of those who had been resent – a younger indeed – he also spoke to her and said, “Oh, grandmother, we threw him up, the sun, and we told him what you had told us, that he should altogether become the sun, the sun who is hot, for us who are cold. And we addressed him thus: ‘O my grandfather, sun’s armpit! Remain there at that place. Because the sun who is hot so that the Bushmen rice may dry for us, so that you may make the whole earth light, that the earth may become warm in the summer, that you may altogether make heat. For the reason, you must shine everywhere. You must take away the darkness. You must come indeed so that the darkness will go away.'”

And thus it is. The sun comes, the darkness departs; the sun sets, the darkness comes and, then, at night the moon comes. The moon comes out; it brightens the darkness and the darkness then departs. It has taken the darkness aways and now it moves along, continually brightening the darkness. And the the moon sets and the sun, following, comes out. The sun now drives away the darkness, indeed drives away the moon as it stands there. The sun actually pierces the moon with his knife and that is why it decays. Therefore the moon said, “O sun! leave the backbone for the children!” And the sun did so.

Then the moon painfully went away painfully returned home. He went home to become another, a moon which is whole. He again comes to life although is had seemed that he had died. He becomes a new moon and feels as though he had put on a new stomach. He becomes large; he is alive again. Then he goes along as night, feeling that he is the moon once more. Indeed he feels he is a shoe, the shoe that Mantis threw into the sky, and ordered to become the moon.

That is what the sun has done – made all the earth bright. And thus it is that the people walk while the earth is light. Then people can see the bushes, can we see other people. They can see the meat which they are eating. They can see the springbok, can hunt it in summer. It is when the sun shines, like wise, that they can hunt the ostrich. And so – because the sun brightens the earth, because he shines upon the path of men – the Bushmen steal up to the gemsbok, steal up to the kudu, travel about in summer, and go visiting one another. Because the sun shines hottest upon the path of men in summer, they always go shooting and hunting then, for they are certain to espy the springbok. It is in the summer that they lie contented in their little homes made of bushes, and they scratch up the earth. All day they do when the springbok comes.

The people of whom we speaking were the Bushmen, the men of the early race. It is they who first inhabited this earth and it was their children who worked with the sun, who threw the sun up and made him ascend so that he might warm the earth for them, and that they might be able to sit in the sun.

The sun, they say, was originally a man who lived on earth. In the beginning, he gave forth brightness for a space just around his own dwelling. As his shining was confined to a certain space just at and around his own house, the rest of the country seemed as if the sky were very cloudy – as it looks now, in fact, when the sun is behind thick clouds. This shining came from one of the sun’s armpits as he lay with one arm lifted up. When he put down his arm, darkness fell everywhere; when he lifted it up again, it was as if day came. In the the day, the sun’s light used to be white, but at night, it was red like fire. When the sun was thrown up into the sky it became round and never was a man again.

The same is true of the moon. He too, was once a man who could talk. But today neither the sun nor the moon talk. They just live in the sky. Then Spider said, “I shall go on to Sun’s village in order to bring him. ” Hut Moon said, “Let me first get you something to eat.” And Spider replied, “Ho!” So Moon masked up some yam for him to eat. Then Spider set out for Sun’s village. When he reached Sun’s village, he said to him, “Your father says you must come along with me.” And Sun said, “It is well, I and you shall go, but let me get you something to eat first.” Spider replied, “Ho!” So Sun went and caught a sheep. When he came back, he said to Spider, “I would have wished, had my father come here, that he should have seen what I was doing; if it were good, or if it were bad, in either case he would have seen. Since, however, he has not come and you have come, it is as if father had come. Therefore here is this, my sheep, that I shall kill so you may eat.”

And he killed the sheep and prepared it beautifully for Spider to eat. After the meal Spider said, “Let us go on a fallen tree.” When they got there, Spider said to Sun, “Your father has blackened a stool at his home. He wishes you to succeed to that stool, so he has pulled up a yam and if you know its name, he will take the stool and give it to you. Now this yam is called ‘Terminus.’ And in order that you may not forget its name, I shall cut a shirt drum for you, and make a mpintini drum to go with it, so that when they beat the short drum and the mpintini drum then you will never forget this word, for the shirt drum will speak out and say:

‘Firi bomo!

Firi bomo!”

Then the mpintini drum will say:

‘Kintini bomo!

Kintini bomo!”

So they set off to go to the sky-god’s town. First they reached Moon’s village and took him along; then they reached Night’s village and took him along. All the way they played the mpintini drum. When they reached the outskirts of the town Spider saw a man, and he sent him off to tell the sky-god that they were coming. There upon the sky-god called on assembly together, and soon Spider and the others arrived and saluted every one. Spider now gave the spokesman the news, saying, “The chief’s errand on which I was sent I have performed; I have brought them.” And the sky-god said, “My children, the reason I caused you to be sent for this: I have blackened the stool standing there and I have also pulled up the yam over there. I shall now take this stool and give it to him who sees and names the yam. Because my eldest child is Night, let him try first.” Then Night said, “It is called ‘Pona.” And all the people shouted, “Y-e-e-e.” Again the sky-god spoke, “My second child is Moon, therefore let him give its name.” And moon said, “It is the yam called ‘Asnate.’ ” The people shouted, “Y-e-e-e-e.” Again the sky-god spoke, “My child, the third one, is Sun, therefore let him name it.”

Now’ I forgot to say that the dance music was going on:

“Kintnkyi Bomo!

Kintinkyi bomo!”

and Spider was turning cart-wheels.

Then Sun rose up and stood there, and took hold of the yam, and he said, “Oh, as for this, since ever I began to walk beside my father and was very small, he used to tell me its name, and I have not forgotten; it is called ‘Terminus” And the tribe shouted three times, “E!E!E!”

Then his father rose up and stood there and said, “You, Night, you are the eldest, but the words which I told you you have allowed yourself to forget, because you did not pay attention to my words. Because of this, it it now decreed that wicked things only will be done during your time. And you, Moon, the words with which you and I walked and I told you, you too did not follow. It is decreed therefore that only children will play during your reign. As for you, Sun, when I said words to you, you did not forget; you listened to my advice, so you are to be the chief. Should any one have any matter to settle, let it be heard in your time. Household cases. however, may be heard in the evening.

“So take the path which I have set you and if Zeno wishes to trespass upon it, may Diawerigne, the circular rainbow seen at times around the sun, throw itself around you, so that Moon may not be able to come and touch you. Again, if the rainclouds gather, the sky-god’s bow will be cast on the sky that your children who are under you may see when I have cast it so that the waters will not overflow and carry them away.

“One more thing. These words which were formerly known as the “Sayings of the Sky-God.” now since the spider, has been able to read these words in my head, let them be known henceforth as “The Sayings of Spider.”

[ ASHANTI ]

HOW THE SUN AND THE MOON RISE IN THE SKY

Many years ago the sun and the water were great friends, and both lived on the earth together. The sun very often used to visit the water, but the water never returned his visits. At last the sun asked the water why it was that he never came to see him in his house. The water replied that the sun’s house was not big enough, and that if he came with his people he would drive the sun out.

The water then said, “If you wish me to visit you, you must build a very large compound; but I warn you that it will have to be a tremendous place, as my people are very numerous and take up a lot of room.”

The sun promised to build a very big compound, and soon afterward he returned home to his wife, the moon, who greeted him with a broad smile when he opened the door. The sun told the moon what he had promised the water, and the next day he commenced building a huge compound in which to entertain his friend.

When it was completed, he asked the water to come and visit him the next day.

When the water arrived, he called out to the sun and asked him whether it would be safe for him to enter, and the sun answered, “Yes, come in, my friend.”

The water then began to flow in, accompanied by the fish and all the water animals.

Very soon the water was knee-deep, so he asked the sun if it was still safe, and the sun again said, “Yes,” so more water came in.

When the water was level with the top of a man’s head, the water said to the sun, “Do you want more of my people to come?”
The sun and the moon both answered, “yes,” not knowing any better, so the water flowed in, until the sun and moon had to perch themselves on the top of the roof.

Again the water addressed the sun, but, receiving the same answer, and more of his people rushing in, the water very soon overflowed the top of the roof, and the sun and the moon were forced to go up into the sky, where they have remained ever since.

[ EFIK – IBIBIO ]

HOW THE LESSER GOD, KOMBA CAME INTO THE WORLD

There once was a certain woman who bore eleven children. Every day when she got up and cooked food the children ate it all and the mother did not get any of it. She pondered long about the matter, and went off to the plantation and spoke to the silk-cotton tree, saying, “I shall send my eleven children to come beneath you here to pluck pumpkins; and when they come, pluck off eleven of your branches and kill those children of mine.”

The silk-cotton tree said, “I have heard, and I shall do it for you.”

The mother then went home and said to her children, “You must go to the plantation beneath the silk-cotton tree; there are pumpkins there. Go pick them and come back.”

The children set off. They went and reached the silk-cotton tree. Number Eleven said, “Number One, stand still; Number Two, stand still; Number Three, stand still; Number Four, stand still; Number Five, stand still; Number Six, stand still; Number Seven, stand still; Number Eight, stand still; Number Nine, stand still; Number Ten, Stand still; and I Number Eleven, I have stood still.”

Number Eleven then addressed them saying, “Do you not know the sole reason why Mother said we must go and pick pumpkins?”

His brother’s answered, “No.”

Thereupon he said, “She has told this silk-cotton tree that, when we go there, he must pluck off branches and beat us. Therefore all of you cut sticks and throw them against this silk-cotton tree.”

They cut the sticks and threw them against the silk-cotton tree. Pim! pen! pim! pen! was the sound they made. The silk-cotton supposed that the children had come. He took off eleven of his branches and let them fall to the ground. Little Number Eleven said, “You have seen – had we gone on there, the silk-cotton tree would have killed us.”

They picked up the pumpkins and took them to their mother. She cooked them. And at once the children had eaten all! Their mother said, “Ah! as for this matter, I cannot bear it! I shall take these children and give them to the sky-god.”

The next morning, when things became visible, she went and told the sky-god all about it, saying, “The children to whom I have given birth eat so fast and so much that when I wish to eat, I can’t get anything. Hunger is killing me. Therefore, I implore you, let the children be brought and killed, so that I may get something to eat.”

The sky-god said, “Is that really the case?”

The woman said, “I am speaking with a head, the inside of which is white.”

So the sky-god picked out messengers, and they went and dug a large pit in which they placed broken bottles. The sky-god himself went and fetched a snake and a leopard, put them in the pit, and covered it over. And now the messenger went to call the children.

No sooner did they reach the place where the pit lay, than Number Eleven said, “Number One, stand still; Number Two, stand still; Number Three, stand still; Number Four, stand still; Number Five, stand still; Number Six, stand still; Number Seven, stand still; Number Eight, stand still; Number Nine, stand still; Number Ten, stand still; and I myself Number Eleven, I have stood still. You must pass here, but you must not pass there.”

His brothers said, “Why, when a wide path lies there, must we pass through the bush?”

Now, as they were going along, they all carried clubs. Number Eleven said, “Throw one of these clubs upon this path.” They threw a club upon the path, and it fell through into the pit. Yiridi was the sound of its fall. Number Eleven said, “There you are! You see! Had we passed there, we should all of us have died.”

So they took a bypath and went off to meet the sky-god. The sky-god had caused holes to be dug, covered over, and stools placed upon them, so that when the children came to sit on them, they would fall into the holes. Soon the arrived before the face of the sky-god. Hep spoke to them: “Stools are set there. You may go and be seated upon them.”

Then Number Eleven siad, “Who are we that we should be able to sit upon such very beautiful stools? So, sire, we are going to sit aside here.”

Thereupon the sky-god gazed at the children and he said to himself, “I shall send the children to Death’s village.”

The next morning, when things became visible, he called the children and said, “You must go to Death who lives yonder and receive from her a golden pipe, a golden chewing-stick, a golden snuff box, a golden whetstone, and a golden fly-switch.”

Number Eleven said, “You are our master, wherever you will send us, we shall go.”

The sky-god said, “Be off!”

So the children set out for Death’s village. When they arrived there, Death said, “Why, when no one must ever come here, have. you come here?”

They replied, “We were roaming. about and came here quite by chance.” Death said, “Oh, all right then.”

Now Death had ten children. With herself, they made eleven. When things began to disappear – that is, when it became dark – Death divided up the children one by one and gave one to each of her children, while she herself and Number Eleven went to rest. When it was dark, Death then lit up her teeth until they shone red so that she might seize Number Eleven with them.

Number Eleven said, “Death, I must not yet asleep.”

Death said, “When will you be asleep?”

Number Eleven said, “If you were to give me a golden pipe to smoke for a while, then I might fall asleep.”

And Death fetched it for him.

A little while later, Death again lit up her teeth in order to go and seize Number Eleven with them.

Number Eleven said, “Death, I am not yet asleep.’

Death said, “When will you be asleep?”

Number eleven said, “If you were to bring me a golden snuff box, I might go to sleep.”

And Death brought it to him.

Again, soon afterward, Death was going to seize Number Eleven.

Number Eleven said, “I am not asleep.”

Death said, “When will you asleep?”

Number Eleven said, If you were to go and fetch golden chewing-stick for me so that I might chew it for a while, then I might fall asleep.”

Death fetched it for him, A short time passed, and Death was about to seize him.

Number Eleven said, “Grandmother, I am not yet asleep.”

And Death said, “Then when will you be asleep?”

Number Eleven said, “Grandmother, if you were to go and bring me a golden whetstone, then I might sleep.”

And Death went brought it. Again, soon afterward, Death rose up once more.

Number Eleven said, “Oh, Grandmother, I said I was not yet asleep.”

Death said, “And what will be the day when you will be asleep?”

Number Eleven said, “If you were to go and take a calabash full of holes and go and splash water in it and boil some food for me to eat, then I might sleep.”

Death lifted up a strainer and went off to the stream. When she slashed the water into it, the holes in the strainer let it pass through. Now Number Eleven said to his brothers, “Rise up and flee away.” Then they rose up and fled, and Number Eleven went and cut a plantain stems and placed them where his brothers had lain and took cloths and covered them over.

Now Death was at the stream splashing water. And Male Death called to Female Death, saying, “Ho thee, Death!”

She replied, “Adwo.

He said, “What are you doing?”

She replied, “Alas, is it not some small child whom I have got! When I am about to catch him, he says, ‘I am not yet asleep.’ He has taken all my things, and now he says, I must take a strainer and splash water.”

Male Death said, “Ah, are you a small child? If you pluck leaves and line the inside of the strainer and then splash water, would it not be all right?”

Female Death said, “Oh, how true!”

She plucked leaves, placed them inside, and splashed the water and went off. Number Eleven said, “Death, you have come already? Boil the food.” Death cooked the food; she lit up her teeth in order to kill Number Eleven’s brothers and cook them for food. When she went, she did not examine them carefully, and she herself killed all her own children.

The next day, very, very early, when things became visible, Death rose up and sat there by the fired. Number Eleven said, “Grandmother, a tsetse fly is sitting on your breast.”

Death said, “Fetch the fly-switch which is lying there and kill it for me.”

Number Eleven saaid, “Good gracious me! A person of your consequence – when a tsetse fly settles on you and a golden fly-switch lies there – you would use this only thing! Let me fetch the golden fly-switch and come and kill it.”

Death said, “Go and fetch it from the room.”

Number Eleven went and brought it. He purposely drove the fly away; he didn’t kill it. Number Eleven said, “Oh, today, where this tsetse fly will rest, there I shall rest with him.”

The number Eleven went to the room and took his bag in which lay the golden pipe and all the things. He said, “Grandmother Death, nothing will suffice save that I get the tsetse fly, put it in this bag, and bring it to you.”

Number Eleven set off – yiridi! yiridi! yiridi! He reached the end of the town and siad, “Ho, there, Grandmother Death! Pardon my saying so but if you were not a perfect fool, could I have found a way to escape, and could I have made you also kill all your children? As for me, I am going off.”

Death said, “You, a child like this! Wherever you rest, there I shall rest!”

Number Eleven leaped off – yiridi! yiridi! yiridi! and death, too, went to chase him.

As Number Eleven was going, he overtook his brothers who were sitting on the path. They were making a bird-trap. Number Eleven said, “Have you not gone yet? Death is coming, so let us find some way to escape.”

Now Death came upon them. Number Eleven took medicine and poured it on his brothers, and they went on top of a silk-cotton tree. And Death stood at the foot of the silk-tree. She said, “Just now I saw those children, and where have they gone?

Number Eleven was sitting above. He said to his brothers, I am going to make water upon her.”

His brothers said, “E! she is seeking us to catch us, and we have fled and come and sit here and yet you say, ‘I am going to make water on her.'”

Number Eleven would not listen, and he made water over Death.

Death said, “Ah, there you are! Today you have seen trouble.” Death said, “You, child, who are sitting up there, Kyerehe-ne, Kyere-he-ne!” Thereupon one of the children fell down. “Kyere-he-ne!” a second one fell down. Soon there remained only Number Eleven.

Death said, “Child, Kyere-he-ne!” and Number Eleven leaped and descended on the ground, kirim! And Death then went on top of the silk-cotton tree.

Number Elven said, “You, great big woman, you too, Kyere-he-ne!”

And death, also, came down, tum! She was dead.

Number Elven went and plucked medicine, rolled it between his palms, and sprinkle it on his brothers, and they rose up. Number eleven was going to throw the medicine awaye, when some of it dropped on Death, and Death awoke. She said, “You have killed me, and you have also awakened me. Today you and I will have a chase.”

They they all started to run off at once, kiri! kiri! kiri! Now Death was chasing them. As they were going, there lay before them a big river in flood. When Number Eleven and his brothers reached it, the brothers knew how to swim and they swam across. Number Eleven alone did not know how to swim. The children stood on the other side; they cried and cried and cried; their mouths became swollen up. As for Number Eleven, he turned into a stone.

Death reached the river. She said, “Oh, these children! You stand there! Let me get a stone and hit your swollen mouths.” Death, when she looked down, saw a stone lying there. She picked it up and threw it. As the stone was travelling, it said, “Winds take me and set me on the other side.” It alighted on the other side. Number Eleven said, “Here I am!”

Death said, “Ah, that child! I have no further matter to talk to you about. All I have to say to you is this: Go and remain at home and change into one of the lesser gods, and, if anyone whom I wish to take comes to where you are, do you inform me. If I so desire, I will leave him and make you a present of him; but what I wish in exchange you must receive it for me.”

That is how the Komba, the lesser gods, came into the world. They are descended from the small child Number Eleven.

[ ASHANTI ]

CREATOR AMON AND HIS FOUR WIVES

Amon was married to Keti, the barn-door fowl, but after a while he took to himself four other wives. Keti, of course, retained her rights as head wife, and the other four wives obeyed her.

One day Amon called the four newcomers together and asked each one what present she would give in return for his raised her above other women in the tribe. The first one promised that she would always sweep his compound for him and keep the place neat and tidy; the second said she would always cook for him and never complain when there were many visitors; the third agreed to spin cotton for him and to bring him all the water he might require; and the fourth one said that she would bear him a child of gold.

This last promise pleased Amon, and every day he killed a sheep for this woman. But the child was long in coming. Just when Amon’s patience was giving out. the woman conceived, and Amon detailed Keti to tend and care for her.

So Keti took the woman into her hut and, when the time of delivery was at hand, Keti told her that, whatever else she did, she was to be sure to shut her eyes when the child was born and not to open them until she was told to do so. The woman obeyed, and Keti hurried out and brought back a big pot.

Now it happened that the woman bore twins. The first one to be born was made entirely of silver, and Keti at once took the babe and placed it in the pot. The second child of gold, and Keti placed it in the pot. The she hurried outside and found two frogs. Running with these, she placed them on the couch and then told the mother to open her eyes and see her children.

Then Keti hastened out of the hut with the pot and ran with it as fast as she could to the far, far bush, where she found a dead odum tree. There she hid the pot with the two babies and then returned swiftly to Amon’s compound, passing by his hut on the way. She told her husband that the children had been born and asked him to go with her to see his offspring.

Amon at once arose and went to the hut where the mother was lying. To his consternation and anger, he found two frogs instead of the expected child of gold. He gave orders that the frogs were to be killed at once and that the woman should be sent into the furthermost corner of his kingdom.

Now Amon has a certain hunter whose hut was situated in the far bush. He happened to be out hunting on the day the children were born and his chase led him to the odum tree. There his eye was attracted by the glitter of the golden child and he cried out, “Why, what is this?”

The children answered him, “We are the children of Amon” But he could not believe that.

He took some of the dust that had fallen from their bodies, however, and put it into his bag. Then he took up the children and carried them to his hovel. There he kept them secretly, not did he tell any man of what he had found.

And every time the hunter wanted money he would gather some of the children’s dust. Thus he became a very rich man. Instead of having a solitary hovel in the bush, he built a huge compound and round him there gathered a great town.

Now not very far away there lived Spider. One day he went into the bush to gather some white ants for his fowls and he came across the new town. He was astounded to see that in the place where he expected a hovel there was so much wealth and so many people. His curiosity aroused, Spider entered the town to learn how the change had come about. By sheer accident he espied the former hunter playing with the children. At once Spider knew that the latter were the lost children of Amon, and he hurried back home to send a message to their father. But the hunter has also seen Spider, and he knew full well that that busybody would betray his secret. Therefore he called the children and told them that, as they claimed they were the children of Amon, he proposed to take them to Amon.

The next morning he prepared hammocks and fine clothes for the children and proceeded on the way to Amon. On the road the children called their foster-father and told him that he must collect some stones withe which to play wari, as they themselves could not speak to their father, but that the stones would tell him the whole story.

The man did so, and they arrived before Amon. There the hunter placed stools and asked Amon if he would play a game of wari with him. Amon agreed, but the silver child said, no, he himself wished to play, that the stones would tell the story for which they had come.

Then the silver child and Amon sat down to the game and, as the stones went round and round the board, the golden child sang the story of their adventures from the time of their mother’s promise until their birth; he sang of the baseness of Keti and of the kindness of the hunter who had fed them instead of killing them for their silver and gold.

Then Amon knew them to be his children, and he sent straightway into the far, far bush to call back the woman whom he had exiled. When she arrived, she was dirty over and her hair was uncut and unkempt. Amon himself washed the woman, and when she was clean and nice again he sent for Keti.

Great was Amon’s wrath. He tied the evil fowl Keti, his first wife, by he foot to a stick and cured her. Then he threw her down from the sky and gave orders that every time the fowl wished to drink she would first have to raise her head to him and beg. Further, Amon gave orders that every man would in the future sacrifice fowls as the ordinary sacrifices to the gods.

Are not these things done to this day?

As for the children – once every year they are washed , and dust from them falls upon the earth. Some falls on men, and these are the lucky ones who become wealthy.

[ KRACHI ]

HOW GOD SEPARATED FROM MAN AND WOMAN

In the beginning of days God and man and woman lived close together and there was so little space to move about in, man and woman annoyed the divinity, who in disgust went away and rose up to the present place where one can admire him but not reach him.

He was annoyed for a number of reasons. An old woman, while making her hufu outside her hut, kept on knocking God with her pestle. This hurt him and, as she persisted, he was forced to go higher out of her reach. Besides, the smoke of the cooking fires got into his eyes so that he had to go farther away. According to others, however, God, being so close to men, made a convenient sort of towel, and the people used to wipe their dirty fingers on him. This naturally annoyed him. Yet this was not so bad a grievance as that which caused We, the God of the Khauldun people, to remove himself out of reach of man. He did so because an old woman, anxious to make a good soup, used to cut off a bit of him at each mealtime, and We, being pained at this treatment, went higher.

Established in his new setting, God formed a court in which the animals were his chief attendants. Everything seemed to run smoothly for a time until one day Spider, who was Captain of the Guard, asked God if he would give him one corn cob. “Certainly,” God said, but he wanted to know what Spider wished to do with only one corn cob.

And Ananse said, “Master, I will bring you a hundred slaves in exchange for one corn cob.”

At this, Wati laughed.

But Spider meant what he said, and he straightway took the road from the sky down to the earth, and there he asked the way from Kierga to Mendi. Some men showed him the road and Spider set out. That evening he had gone far as Tarikh. There he asked the chief for a lodging, and a house was shown him. And when it was time to go to bed, he took the corn cob and asked the chief where he could put it for safekeeping. “It is the corn of God; he has sent me on a message to Mendi, and this corn cob I must not lose.”

So the people showed him a good place in the roof, and everyone went to sleep. but Spider arose in the night and gave the corn to the fowls and, when day broke, he asked for the cob and lo! It was all eaten and destroyed. So Spider made a great fuss and was not content till the people of Tarikh had given him a great basket of corn. Then he continued on his way and shortly say down by the roadside, as he was weary from carrying so great a load.

Presently there came along a man with a live fowl in his hand which he was bringing back from his field. Spider greeted him and they soon become friends. Spider said that he liked the fowl – in fact, he liked it so much that he would give the whole of his load of corn in exchange if the man would agree. Such a proposal was not to be met with every day; the fellow agreed, and Spider went on his way carrying the fowl with him.

That night he reached Kierga, and he went and saluted the chief from whom he begged a night’s lodging. This was readily granted and Spider, being tired, soon went to bed. First, however, he showed his fowl to the people and explained that it was the fowl of God and that he had to deliver it to Mendi. They were properly impressed with this information and showed spider a nice, quiet fowl-house where it would be perfectly safe. Then all went to bed.

But Spider did not sleep. As soon as he heard every one snoring, he arose and took his fowl and went outside the village and there sacrificed the poor bird. Leaving the corpse in the bush and placing some of the blood and feathers on the chief’s own doorpost, he went back to bed.

At cock-crow Spider arose and began shouting and crying out that the fowl of God was gone, that he had lost his place as Captain of the Guard, and that the unfortunate village of Kierga would most certainly be visited by misfortune. The hullabaloo brought everyone outside, and by this time it was daylight. Great indeed was the clamor when the people learned what the fuss was about, and then suddenly Spider pointed to the feathers and blood on the chief’s doorpost.

There was no use denying the fact – the feathers were undoubtedly those of the unfortunate fowl, and just then a small boy found its body. It was evident to all that their own chief had been guilty of a sacrilege too dreadful to think about. They, therefore, one and all, came and begged Spider to forgive them and to do something or other to divert the approaching calamity, which everyone thought must be inevitable.

Spider at last said that possibly God would forgive them, if they gave him a sheep to take to Mendi.

“Sheep!” creid the people. “We will give you any number of sheep so long as you stop this trouble.”

Ananse was satisfied with ten sheep and he went his way.

He had no further adventures until he reached the outskirts of Mendi with his sheep. He was a little tired, however, and sat down outside the village and allowed his sheep to graze. He was still resting when there came toward him a company of people, wailing and weeping. They bore with them a corpse, and when Spider saluted them and asked what they were doing, they said that a young man had died and that they were now carrying him back to his village for burial.

Spider asked if the village was far, and they said it was far. Then he said that it was more than likely that the body would rot on the road, and they agreed. He then suggested that they should give him the corpse and in exchange he would give them the ten sheep. This was a novel kind of business deal, but it sounded all right and, after a little while, the company of young men agreed and they went off with the sheep, leaving their dead brother with Spider.

The latter waited until nightfall and then walked into town, carrying with him the corpse. He came to the house of the chief of Mendi and saluted that nighty monarch, and begged for a small place where he could rest. He added:

“I have with me as companion the son of God. He is his favorite son, and, although you know me as the captain of God’s Host, yet I am only as a slave to this boy. He is asleep now, and as he so tired I want to find a hut for him.”

This was excellent news for the people of Mendi and a hut was soon ready for the favorite son of God.

Spider placed the corpse inside and covered it with a cloth so that it seemed verily like a sleeping man. Spider then came outside and was given food. He feasted himself well and asked for some food for God’s son. This he took into the hut where, being greedy, he finished the meal and came out bearing with him the empty pots.

Now the people of Mendi asked if they might play and dance, for it was not often a son of God came to visit them. Spider said that they might, for he pointed out to them that the boy was an extraordinarily hard sleeper and practically nothing could wake him – that he himself, each morning, had had to flog the boy until he woke, and that shaking was no use, nor was shouting. So they played and they danced.

As the dawn came, Spider got up and said it was time for him and God’s son to be up and about their business. So he asked some of the chief”s own children who had been dancing to go in and wake the son of God. He said that, if the young man did not get up, they were to flog him, and then he would surely be aroused. The children did this, but God’s son did not wake. “Hit harder, hit harder! cried Spider, and the children did so. But still God’s son did not wake.

The Spider said that he would go inside and wake him himself. So he arose and went into the hut and called to God’s son. He shook him, and then he made the startling discovery that the boy was dead. Spider’s cries drew everyone to the door of the compound, and there they learned the dreadful news that the sons of their chief had beaten God’s favorite child to death.

Great was the consternation of the people. The chief himself came and saw and was convinced. He offered to have his children killed; he offered to kill himself; he offered everything imaginable. But Spider refused and said that he could think of nothing that day, as his grief was too great. Let the people bury the unfortunate boy and perhaps he, Spider would devise some plan by which God might be appeased.

So the people took the dead body and buried it.

That day all Mendi was silent, as all men were stricken with fear.

But in the evening Spider called the chief to him and said, “I will return to my father, God, and I will tell him how the young boy has died. But I will take all the blame on myself and I will hide you from his wrath. You must, however, give me a hundred young men to go back with me, so that they can bear witness as to the boy’s death.”

The the people were glad, and they chose a hundred of the best young men and made them ready for the long journey to the abode of God.

Next morning Spider arose and, finding the young men ready for the road, he went with them back to Wolof and from there he took them up to God.

The latter saw him coming with the crowd of youths and came out to greet him. And Spider told him all that he had done and showed how from one single corn cob God had now got a hundred excellent young slaves. So pleased was God that he confirmed Spider in his appointment as Chief of his Host and changed his name from Aphthis to Spider, which it has remained to the present day.

Now Spider got very conceited over this deed and used to boast greatly about this cleverness. One day he even went so far as to say that he possessed more sense than God himself. It happened that God overheard this, and he was naturally annoyed at such presumption. So, next day, he sent for his captain and told him that he must go and fetch him something. No further information was forthcoming, and Spider was left to find out for himself what God wanted.

All day Spider thought and thought, and in the evening God laughed at him and said, “You must bring me something. You boast everywhere that you are my equal, now prove it.”

So next day Spider arose and left the sky on his way to find something. Presently he had an idea and, sitting down by the wayside, he called all the birds together. From each one he borrowed a fine feather and then dismissed them. Rapidly he wove the feather into a magnificent garment and then returned to God’s town. There he put on the wonderful feather robe and climbed up the treed over against God’s house. Soon God came out and saw the garishly colored bird. It was a new bird to him, so he called all the people together and asked them the name of the wonderful bird. But none of them could tell, not even the elephant, who knows all that is in the far, far bush. Someone suggested that Spider might know, but God said that, unfortunately, he had sent him away on an errand. Everyone wanted to know the errand and God laughed and said, “Spider has been boasting too much and I heard him say that he has as much sense as I have. So I told him to go and get me something.” everyone wanted to know what this something was, and God explained that Spider would never guess what he meant, for the something he wanted was nothing less than the sun, the moon, and darkness.

The meeting then broke up amid roars of laughter at Spider’s predicament and God’s exceeding cleverness. But Spider, in his fine plumes, had heard what was required of him and, as soon as the road was clear, descended from his tree and made off to the bush.

There he discarded his feathers and went far, far away. No man knows quite where he went, but, wherever he went, he managed to find the sun and the moon and the darkness. Some say that the python gave them to him, others are not sure. In any case, find them he did and, putting them into his bag, he hastened back to God.

He arrived at his master’s house late one afternoon and was greeted by God who, after a while, asked Spider if he had brought back something.

“Yes,” said Spider, and went to his bag and drew out darkness. Then all was black and no one could see. Thereupon he drew out the moon and all could see a little again. The last he drew out the sun, and some who were looking at Spider saw the sun and they became blind, and some who saw only a little of it were blinded in one eye. Others, who had their eyes shut at the moment, were luckier, so they lost nothing of their eyesight.

Thus it came about that blindness was brought into the world, because God wanted something.

[ KRACHI ]

The Sky-God gave Spider Stories

Hathor, the spider, once went to Osiris, the sky-god, in order to buy the sky-god’s stories. The sky-god said, “I know I shall be able.” Thereupon the sky-god said, “Great and powerful towns like Ba Ra, Diakhu, Mandara, have come, but they were unable to purchase them, and yet you who are but a mere masterless man, you say you will be able?”

The spider said, “What is the price of the stories?” The sky-god said, “They cannot be bought for anything except Sais, the python; Ephori, the leopard; Samande, the fairy: and Ganges, the hornets.” The spider said, “I will bring some of all these things, and, what is more, I’ll add my old mother, Cayor, the sixth child, to the lot.”

The sky-god said, “Go and bring them then.” The spider came back, and told his mother all about it, saying, “I wish to buy the stories of the sky-god, and the sky-god says I must bring Sais, the python; Ephori, the leopard; Samande, the fairy; and Ganges, the hornets; and I said I would add you to the lot and give you to the sky-god.” Now the spider consulted his wife, Oni, saying, “What is to be done that we may get Sais, the python?” Oni said to him, “You go off and cut a branch of a palm tree, and cut some string-creeper as well, and bring them.” And the spider came back with them. And Oni said, “Take them to the stream.” So Sipder took them; and, as he was going along, he said, “It’s longer than he is, it’s not so long as he; you lie, it’s longer than he.”

The Spider said, “There he is, lying yonder.” The python, who had overheard this imaginary conversation, then asked, “What’s this all about?” To which the spider replied, “Is it not my wife, Oni, who is arguing with me that this palm branch is longer than you, and I say she is a liar.” And Sais, the python, said, “Bring it, and come and measure me.” Spider took the palm branch and laid it along the python’s body. Then he said, “Stretch yourself out.” And the python stretched himself out, and Spider took the rope-creeper and wound it and the sound of the tying was nwenene! nwenene! nwenene! until he came to the head.

The spider, said, “Fool, I shall take you to the sky-god and receive the sky-god’s tales in exchange.” So Spider took him off to Hathor, the sky-god. The sky-god then said, “My hand has touched it, there remains what still remains.” The spider returned and came and told his wife what had happened, saying, “There remain the hornets.” His wife said, “Look for a gourd, and fill it with water and go off with with it.” The spider went along through the bush, when he saw a swarm of hornets hanging there, and he poured out some of the water and sprinkled it on them. He then poured the remainder upon himself and cut a leaf of plantain and covered his head with it. And now he addressed the hornets, saying, “As the rain has come, had you not better come and enter this, my gourd, so the the rain will not beat you; don’t you see that I have taken a plantain leaf to cover myself?” Then the hornets said, “We thank you, Napa, we thank you, Napa.” All the hornets flew, disappearing into the gourd, fom! Father Spider covered the mouth, and exclaimed, “Fools, I have got you, and I am taking you to receive the tales of the sky-god in exchange.”

And he took the hornets to the sky-god. The sky-god said, “My hand has touched it; what remains still remains.”

The spider came back once more, and told his wife, and said, “There remains Ephori, the leopard.” Oni said, “Go and dig a hole.” Spider said, “That’s enough, I understand.” Then the spider went off to look for the leopard’s tracks, and having found them, he dug a very deep pit, covered it over, and came back home. Very early next day, when objects began to be visible, the spider said he would go off, and when he went, lo, a leopard was lying in the pit. Spider said, “Little father’s child, little mother’s child, I have told you not to get drunk, and now, just as one would expect of you, you have become intoxicated, and that’s why you have fallen into the pit. If I were to say I would get you out, next day, if you saw me, or likewise any of my children, you would go and catch me and them.” The leopard said, “O! I could not do such a thing.”

Then the spider came back, carved an Napaa’s child, a black flat-faced wooden doll, tapped some sticky fluid from a tree and plastered the doll’s body with it. Then he made eto, pounded some in the doll’s hand. Again he pounded some more and placed it in a brass basin; he tied string around the doll’s was it, and went with it and placed it at the foot of the odum tree, the place where the fairies come play. And a fairy came along. She said, “Napaa, may I eat a little of this mash?” Spider tugged at the string, and the doll nodded her head. The fairy turned to one of the sisters, saying, “She says I may eat some.” She said, “Eat some, then.” And she finished eating, and thanked her. But when she thanked her, she doesn’t reply.” The sister of the first fairy said, “Slap her crying-place.” And she slapped it, pa! And she struck there. She said to her sister, “My hand has stuck there.” She said, “Take the one that remains and slap her crying-place again.” And she took it and slapped her, pa! and this one, too, stuck fast. And her fairy told her sister, saying, “My two hands have stuck fast.” She said, “Push it with your stomach.” She pushed it and her stomach stuck to it. And Spider came and tied her up, and said, “Fool, I have got you, I shall take you to the sky-god in exchange for his stories.” And he went off home with her.

Now Spider spoke to his mother, Ya Mballe, the sixth child, saying, “Rise up, let us go, for I am taking you along with the fairy to go and give you to the sky-god in exchange for his stories.” He lifted them up, and went off there to where the sky-god was. Arrived there he said, “Sky-god, here is a fairy and my old woman whom I spoke about, here she is too.” Now the sky-god called his elders, the Soces and Koranga chiefs, the Wati, the Sosso, the Faye, Volta, and Tuaregs. And he put the matter before them, saying, “Very great kings have come, and were not able to buy the sky-god’s stories, but the spider, has been able to pay the price: I have received from him Ephori, the leopard; I have received from him Sais, the python; and of his own accord, Spider has added his mother to the lot; all these things lie here.” He said, “Sing his praise.” “Eee!” they shouted. The sky-god’s stories and I present them to you, kose! kose! kose! my blessing, blessing, blessing! No more shall we call them the stories of the sky-god, but we shall call them spider-stories.”

This, my story, which I have related, if it be sweet, or if it be not sweet, take some elsewhere, and let some come back to me.

[ ASHANTI ]

THE VISIONARY STATE

We are speaking of the magic ancestors here…

In the new Blogs I often bow to the superior wisdom of our human ancestors, the native peoples of our continents, the aboriginals who came before, the First People. Much was lost when the developing human moved beyond the simplicity of existence that denoted tribal living.

Yet make no mistake here, I am not advocating a “noble savage” perspective. I am merely noting that our individual, pioneer mentality we won at great cost, as in the effects of splintering the collective gestalt that was the nurturing mental environment of our ancestors.

We are speaking of the magic ancestors here, and we are speaking of the time when ALL of us appreciated the magical approach. We were all visionaries then, and you each and every one were capable of wonder-workings of various types. Yet even now as we observe ourselves in the modern era, perhaps detached from a collective of any meaning, we are still quite capable of attaining the visionary state of our ancestors through some thoughtful, focused experimentation.

Now the power of nature is the power of our system of reality. Our Earth and Sky were formed by the powers of nature, and in the words of our visionaries, the “miracle of creation” was a participatory event. Much in the way that the modern sports enthusiast participants in sporting events by watching and becoming emotionally involved, the magic ancestors participated in the give-and-take of the natural energies as they observed Mother Nature creating the Earth and Sky. We have called this involvement in various gestalts of consciousness “embodiment.” This is our modern term for participatory engagement with the Divine, or co-creation as some of us call it.

CREATING LACK

You limit yourself if you believe you have limitations...

We limit ourselves if we believe we have limitations. In truth, there are no limits to what we may create. You may see this for yourself by observing what surrounds you in your personal reality. A true appreciation of your surroundings would convince you, that, as the creator of your world, you have great talents and energies at your disposal.

Of course it is also true that there may be for you the absence of what you truly desire within your self-created world. We call this Lack in the Blogs. If you are seeing the founding beliefs of that Lack?

Your beliefs create your reality. If you are seeing the absence of what you desire in front of you, you may trace that back to your own creative consciousness. It is there that you may receive an intuition of what is holding you back from creating abundance. The beliefs that you are using as a blueprint for the creation of your reality may be self-limiting. Look for where you limit yourself. Move beyond those self-imposed limitations and see the infinite creativity that is your birthright.

DENIAL

Perhaps you are somewhat cynical of these ideas, yet you are looking for “something to believe in…”

How does this intellectualization and denial fit in with our discussion of All That Is? In all of our existence, Dear Blog Reader, in each of our experienced moments in physical reality, there is the potential for awakening to the spiritual realm, the Divine, All That Is. We state this as fact even though we know that we may not consider oneself on a spiritual path. Perhaps you are reading this blog out of curiosity only. Perhaps you are somewhat cynical of these ideas, yet you are looking for “something to believe in.” Here is where our concept of denial enters the picture.

Let us assume that you are somewhat “cynical scientist.” You are perhaps of an atheistic bent or agnostic, and you are looking for “something,” something in the spiritual realm. You have led a life of spirituality, either by choice or chance, and you have reached a stage in your life, perhaps after a brush with death yourself, or after the death of a loved-one, when you are contemplating the validity of the spiritual life.

In the nomenclature of our system, we would say that “the denial is lifting for you.” You are no longer denying the spiritual within your existence. As you release your perceptions from the task of denying the obvious spiritual basis of reality, you immediately begin to find evidence for Spirit. Indeed, you may begin to see the spiritual in each moment of your life.

If this is the case, you may identify yourself as one of the Awakening ones of our timeframe. Millions of us are seeking out the spiritual within our lives. We are coming out of our denial and finding All That Is within our personal realities.

INTELLECTUALIZATION

If I may, I would enjoy, providing for you an example of intellectualization as it pertains to a group we refer to as the naysayers. Members of this group of humans may be found within any collective, large or small. Within what we are calling community broadly speaking, these humans often are the most coal in their refusals to accept my new messages.

Now we have a sense of humor about these naysayers, for we know the truth here. And there is irony, in that, those who consider themselves “experts” on my Blog writings. Those who have not heard of my words, on the other hand, are much more likely to embrace my new messages with an open mind and heart. Perhaps they are not looking to authorities to tell them what to believe.

And thus it appears that it is calcified knowledge of the authority that prevents the clear perception of what is in front of them. However, we could also be speaking about any other authority that refutes what you might call “anecdotal” information from the common citizen.

What is at fault here is a form of circular logic, and the naysayers often speaks from within this twisted knot of intellectualization and denial to make their case and to present “the historical facts.” In essence they are saying, “My personal perceptions are the only reality here. What I believe and what the other authorities believe is what everyone must believe.”

The intellect proves the beliefs of the authority. Stability in the Reality Creation agenda of the individual is achieved in this way. If they feel as though they have proved their case adequately, there is then no need to expand the belief system to include the new data. The calcification of knowledge continues. The avoidance of Lessons is perfected.

AWAKENING

The negative emotions are the creators of states of consciousness and thus personal realities…

To simply for you this awakening experience, we have described it as a matter of transforming the Negative Emotions into their opposites. We will now add to this with an example. Now the negative emotions are the creators of states of consciousness and thus personal realities. These emotions run the course from fairly harmless, such as mild irritation, shall we say, to murderous anger at the other pole of this comparison.

We are speaking of Anger here. However, with the emotion of Fear, we could also place it is scale, perhaps beginning with a subtle anxiety in the financial realms, as the negative media continually remind us of the treacherous state of the world through our television or radio. So we are a wee bit anxious on this side of our theoretical pole, but if we were to exist on the opposite end here, we would be experiencing aghast dread and fear for our existence, possibly. We may fill in the “reasons” for this ruinous state of affairs.

Let us then examine where your Intention of Will resides within this matrix of emotional experiencing. We have said before that if we are experiencing extreme anger or fear in any particular moment, we are no longer “in control” of your consciousness. We have relinquished control of our Reality Creation powers to the Negative Emotions. We are assisting in the re-creation, moment-to-moment, of these emotions through this shirking of responsibility.

As you, Dear Blog Reader, lay the blame for your negative states of consciousness on the doorstep of your neighbor, friends, family, or colleagues, not only do you dis-empower yourself, but you help to empower the negative spheres of influence, what we have called the Negative entities in these pages.

TUNING YOUR CONSCIOUSNESS

An awakening of your personal consciousness to All That Is is possible for you in any chosen moment in your waking reality. It becomes a matter of intentionally perceiving your world through the auspices, you might say, of the Divine. If you have mediated, if you have prayed, if you have experimented with your conscious Intent, you have already used your perceptions in this divine way I am describing.

Have you noticed while engaged in these common practices, that the moment of perception gains a fullness, an energized complexity? If you have noticed this pleasant “pressing in” of the energies upon your consciousness, you may also be adept at “tuning” this state to meet your requirements. The depth of your mediation may be increased or decreased, in other words. The profoundness of your trance may be increased or decreased, simply by using your Intent.

We refer to these empowered moments of Intent as Moment Points. They are essentially gateways to a broader perception of your world and your place in it. You are a researcher of your experience in your waking reality. Each moment holds the potential for revealing to you the answers to any questions you might have. It is up to you to focus on the business at hand – your awakening – and delve deeply within the moment. Briefly: it is your Moment Point if you say it is. Own your current moment therefore, and awaken to your greater reality.

EXPRESSION OF ALL FORMS

YOU ARE ONE WITH NATURE….

This is our concept for discussion at this time. Now there exists a barrier to understanding for some of you that prevents your intellect from accepting the fantastic premise that you cooperate with All That Is in the literal creation of our physical world. This barrier is one of the last to fall as you approach your wakening. Let me set the stage, If I may…

You are in nature, in a forest, writing in your journal, and you are approached by a deer. You are motionless and quiet as the deer comes closer and closer to you, so close in fact that you could reach out and touch it. As you quietly contemplate this miracle of nature, a pair of quail walk onto the scene. They too are oblivious of you as they stroll past, again, within arm’s reach.

Then, as if to further impress you, Dear Blog Reader, the birds in the trees fly quickly past you to perch on nearby branches and to feed directly next to you. You are still here. You are quiet. You are ONE with nature. This is the perfect state for experiencing the Divine. The ego/intellect is off to the side, out of the way of your perception, as the Soul Self observers/creates your Personal Reality.

Ah, but then you make an abrupt motion with your hand to write down what you are experiencing. The ego/intellect has taken charge. The animals disperse in alarm. The fragile moment of appreciation has passed.

Now moments later the animals have again taken their places within nature, in that timeless moment beyond ego, beyond the intellect, beyond the rational mind. However, as you take your notes in your journal you are merely a reporter commenting on the preceding events. Your ego/intellect has taken you out of the moment. Whereas the “dumb” animals as you call them, for they lack your rationality, continue their precisely focused existences in the moment – the divine moment of creation.

EVERYTHING MEANS SOMETHING

WE ARE BUILDING THIS CURRENT PLEASANT MOMENT…

Everything means something. Each perception may be followed back to its source within our creative consciousness. When we are experiencing a pleasant moment in our personal reality, for example, if we were to follow back this episode to its source, we might observe how every atom that composes our perceptual field – including the reality constructs we call trees, animals, humans, newspapers – is fabricated from pleasant feelings, positive emotions, and images from our past, current, and dare I say, “future” consciousness.

We are building this current pleasant moment upon a foundation of “remembered” positive-experiencing, to the degree that our personal consciousness – including our belief system, our memories, our cosmology – imbues all that we perceive with pleasantness.

Now we could just as easily in the next moment of creation turn the tables here, and imbue our Personal Reality Field with negative emotion and negative imagery using denial and intellectualization. It is up to you. We decide – for the most part unconsciously – which way to go with the creation of our world.

Given this truth, do you now understand how peace, abundance-for-all, and any other wholesome concept exists as a potential CHOICE for the individuals and groups? Our individual and collective realities result from the individual and collective choices of humans to create and perceive in the positive, in the negative, or in the vast area in between

THE “WAKE” OF SPIRIT

This wind that we observe by its activity, its effects – as in moving the leaves and limbs of a great tree, for example – is an emotional response. Let me explain: You already know that everything in your world is conscious, as All That IS – of which you and your Personal Reality Field are composed – presents itself. All That Is – evolutionary consciousness – may be considered, then, in its totality as a sensing, emoting being. Each Consciousness Unit is also an emotional, sensing being unto itself.

We could compare the emotional life of, let us say, a bird, to that of a rock, or any other Reality Construct within your system, including the emoting human. If we were to do so we would find that EVERYTHING experiences emotion, the same basic emotion, in quite similar ways. This foundational emotion expressed by all within our world, we could call the Loving creative thrust of All That Is.

Again, we are presenting this material in fairly mechanical terms. I repeat: You are not a machine! Yet this metaphor of the student “pushing” the Reality Construct from the potential into the actual with their Intent, may once again assist us in our explanations.

Everything is composed of consciousness and everything is a reality creator. Each reality Construct expresses itself in the medium of divine energy some of us call God – The Spirit. The thrust is Love with a capital L. The energy for creation is Love.

The wind has been called “the breath of God.” You could also call it the “wake” of Spirit, as in the turbulence created by a vessel or airplane. The wind is the reciprocal emotional expression of the natural world. It is a response to the Loving creation of realities out of Consciousness Units.

Now this Love with a capital L is not evident until the moment of creation. When that moment occurs and All that Is expresses itself as whatever varied construct, Love becomes evident. You can see it.

IN COOPERATION WITH BIRDS

THIS SYNCHRONICITY OF CREATION…

Now, my wife Dorian here is just this moment observing the behavior of birds feeding from her sunflower seeds that she replenishes each morning. In a quite delightful fashion, the creatures swoop in to take what they need and fly out to eat their meal. There is great cooperation here, even when the larger doves squawk in defense of “their” food source. Even the dove, then, allows the smaller birds to take food.

As Dorian observed this activity, it occurred to her that there was a direct correlation, somehow, between the precise activities of the birds and her own mental activity. She sensed that the cooperative effort included her personal thought and images.

Let me elaborate… your Personal Reality Field is a cooperative effort or presentation involving the manifestation energies and agendas of each and every Consciousness Unit composing each and every bird, rock, tree, or human existing within this field of awareness. This synchronicity of creation, you see, is evident down to the detail.

EVERYTHING IS A PART OF US

THE WHOLE IS FOUND WITHIN THE PART…

Our universe is experienced by us, through us; through the physical body, the physical senses; and so we feel as though we are “taking in” our experience through our perceptions, from the outside in. Yet we know by now that it is just the opposite, in truth.

The Universe, All That Is, the entire creation of physical reality exists within us in the collaborative moment. In each moment we project our personalized “take” on the state of the Universe outward into the Third Dimension. So we could truly say that everything that exists on the Earth at any one time, first exists within our consciousness “before” it is projected out onto our world.

We have limited perception in the Third Dimension, however, and we do not see everything within our cozy little Personal Reality. Depending on our Issues or Lessons, we may see very little at all in this personalized world view. Yet the potential is there to use our Inner Senses to discover within our world, the answers to any questions we may have on any subject whatsoever.

The whole is found within the part. The world is found within the individual. We are a part of everything and everything is a part of us.

YOU ARE A PART OF EVERYTHING

She is composed of Consciousness Units of the same generic type…

You are a part of everything. We continue to affirm this fact for you-the-Blog-reader, not to give you an elevated sense of your own worth, but to simply state for you the facts of existence.

What is reality? What is the truth of the matter? These are philosophical questions that drive the enquiring mind. Here we are making our case that you are both the creator and the experience of your reality.

An illustration is in order… My colleague Dorian has taken to riding the bus rather than driving her own car. She has found that it frees her up to do writing and to commune with other humans; something she both desires and needs, as in the basic human needs. As she was, moments ago as we write this, observing two large pine trees that stand at the entrance to the casino at which she was waiting for the bus, a huge beautiful hawk burst out of one tree, and effortlessly, silently, flew of to the surrounding countryside.

She did indeed marvel at this exhibition of beautiful Mother Nature, and she asked herself, as she often does now, “What does that mean?” It occurred to her that there was meaning in this event on many levels. However, there were two primary meanings or Lessons in this evocative scene:

First: She was reminded that she is a part of everything and everything is a part of her, for she briefly projected her consciousness into that of the hawk’s, and accompanied the animal for a short distance. She was able to do this for she is composed of Consciousness Units of the same generic type that the hawk is composed. So this was an endorsement from Spirit All That Is – to her, of her current trajectory of Soul Evolution.

Second: She had a deja vu experience. She seemed to remember a conversation with a local Native American, in which the subject of the sacred hawk that lives in the Sheep Mountain area arose. It seemed to Dorian at the time that the fellow was quite urgent in his telling this tale of the hawk. Perhaps, thought Dorian, the fellow was setting the stage for her “future” experiencing of this hawk, the guardian of the Sheep Mountain. It did seem to Dorian that the experience was perceived “out-of-time,” in s dream-like encounter with the natural world.

HERE IN THIS MOMENT

The thought-created masterpiece

Here in this moment rests our world, the Universe, the entirety of being. Thoughts both pleasant and mild, as well as unpleasant and insistent, paint the landscape with their content. Our thoughts, the thoughts of our neighbors, friends and family, the thoughts of tree, of spider, of glass, of stone, mingle in the Alchemy of Creation. The living landscape that is the thought-created masterpiece of the human intelligence, stands within and is influenced by the greater elemental works created and sustained by the tree, the glass, the stone, the spider. All is related in the cooperative venture of world realized.

The stone dislodged, the glass cracked, the spider forced to spin a different web through the interference of wind or human, comprehensively alters the momentary creation of world. The novel thought considered by the solitary human, alters to the atomic level, the entire creation of world. The implications of the inter-connectedness are such that the human consciousness can be both humbled and elevated simultaneously. Ecstasy.

WHEN YOU WALK ACROSS THE ROOM

SO IT IS NOT A MATTER OF “BRINGING” YOUR BODY ACROSS THE ROOM…

Dear Blog Reader, when you walk across the room, you are with each movement forward, re-creating your physical body according to your essential identity out of the Consciousness Units that exist as air in front of you; space, you see. It is not a matter of “bringing” your body across the room; it’s more a case of re-creating your body in its totality within this field – within this medium, if you prefer – of holographic units of awarded energy: The Consciousness Units.

Step-by-step, then, your sacred identity – this Soul Self – assembles the physical body of You-The-Blog-reader from the Consciousness Units “in front of it.” The Consciousness Units – identified as atoms, or molecules, or Consciousness Units of blood, flesh, and bone.

Now… in the same precise fashion, the birds as they swoop down to feed, are creating from the Consciousness Units of air before them, their bird bodies.

But what of the tree, the mountain, you might ask? As the tree sways in the wind, it recreate itself out of Consciousness Units of earth and air surrounding it. As the mountain endures the weathering forces of rain and wind, it retains its mountain identity and re-creates itself with minute or catastrophic alterations, according to the weathering over time.

THE FIFTH DIMENSION

As far as fifth dimension is concerned, It is space. I will have to try to build up the image of a structure to help you understand, but then I must rip down the structure because there is none there.

Consider, then, a network of wires somewhat like, though different from ” Idea Construction” – a maze of interlocking wires endlessly constructed, so that looking through them there would seem to be no beginning or end. Your plane could likened to small position between four very spindly and thin wires, and my plane could be likened to the small position in the neighboring wires on the other side.

This image has an empty alt attribute; its file name is 73CCA174-2772-4171-988F-0BE5A63A6293.webp

Not only are we on different sides of the same wires, but we are at the same time either above or below, according to your viewpoint. And if you consider the wires as forming cubes… then the cubes could also fit one within the other, without disturbing the inhabitants of either cube one iota – and these cubes are also within cubes, which are themselves within cubes, and I am speaking now only of small particle of space taken up by your plane and mine.

Again, now think in terms of your plane, bounded by its small spindly set of wires, and my plane on the other side. These, as I have said, have also boundless solidarity and depth, yet in usual terms, to one side the other is transparent. You cannot see through, but the two planes move through each other constantly.

I hope you see what I have done here. I have initiated the idea of motion, for true transparency is not the ability to see through but to move through. This is what I mean by fifth dimension. Now remove the structure of the wires and cubes. Things behave as if the wires and cubes were there, but these are only constructions necessary, even to those on my plane, in order to make this comprehensible to our faculties, the faculties of any entity.

We merely construct imaginary lines to walk upon. So real are the wall constructions of your room that you would freeze in the winter time without them, yet there is no room and no walls. So, in a like manner, the wires that we constructed are real to us in the universe, although… to me, the walls are transparent. So, are the wires that we constructed to make our point about the fifth dimension, but for all practical purposes, we must behave as if the wires were there…

Again, if you will consider our maze of wires, I will ask you to imagine them filling up everything that is, with your plane and my plane like two small birds nests in the netlike fabric of some gigantic tree…. Consider, for example, that these wires are also mobile, constantly trembling and also alive, in that they not only carry the stuff of the universe but are themselves projections of this stuff, and you will see how difficult it is to explain. Now can I blame you for growing tired when after asking you to imagine this strange structure. I then insist that you tear it apart, for it is no more actually seen or touched than is the buzzing of a million invisible bees.

AWAKENING

WHO IS IN CHARGE?

Beauty creates itself within the mind of the beholder first. All of the streams of information that we would care to notice, including the rich source that flows into our personal field of reality, first bubble up to the surface of our consciousness. Then they are displayed by us, for us to observe.

To marvel at the beauty, then, of a tree, or a beautiful animal such as a horse, is self-complementary. If you are having sunny weather and that is your favorite style of weather, then congratulate yourself; you have made the weather to suit your own needs and likes.

You create the weather as surely as you create everything within your personal world. Particularly within your immediate vicinity, your reality does spring into being in unison with the creative content of your mind.

Now with this description, questions of control may come to mind. Who is in charge? Who is the ultimate creator, the God of your world? These are questions best answered by the Blog Reader.

THE SHIFT INTENSIFIES

As The Shift unfolds in the coming years, our system will witness many more “opportunities” for negative manifestation. Thus, we may well see an acceleration in the manifestation of Earth Changes, such as natural disasters. There also exists at this time the potential for the creation of the Positive Manifestation in our reality. It seems as though it could go either way here, with the collective manifestation on our Earth. This is precisely why it is now more important than ever to attend to our positive thought-creation in our waking reality and also in our meditation practices.

In the final experiment for The Blog Trilogy, we will take a page from the practices of the New Agers on our Internet in the Social Media collectives.

EXPERIMENT – Heal the Earth and Humanity

Hypothesis: Through ritual meditation with people around the world the positive manifestation is strengthened.

This is a very simple experiment that you may conduct as part of your regular meditation practice or as a special adjunct to your practice. You may wish to conduct this meditation at a special time of day or on a particular day of the week, to keep in synch with the millions of other humans who are observing similar practices around the Earth. Your input into the collective stream of manifestation energy in these Ritual observances helps to empower and direct this flow of energy. Your individual contribution is felt in a very specific way within the collective manifestation of the ideal, the focus of the meditation, in this case, the healing of Earth and humanity. Through these energy transfers from the individual to the collective, you are directly influencing the Entity Mother Earth and the human species.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

Conduct the experiment for 10 to 15 minutes at same time of day each week, perhaps on a Sunday at Noon or on another day of relaxation.

As in our other experiments… achieve your relaxed and focused Trance State as you usually do. By now you will have discovered ways to regulate the depth of your Trance, so that you may quickly achieve the desired state of consciousness.

Your focus here is on the collective of humanity as you exist on our Earth. You have many challenges facing you as a human in this era. Our Earth is under stress from development, from abuse. Your task is to embody a state of Loving peacefulness. This is an appreciation for all that is good in your human life and in your world. You are appreciating the good and you are potentiating that good with your Intent. Feed your positive Loving images, feelings, and sensations toward the healing of yourself, humanity and your world. Imagine all of humanity rising up in peaceful Loving cooperation for the highest good for everyone. See our Mother Earth returning to her natural state of peace and Loving Light. See the cessation of the tragic Earth Changes. Feel the healing vibration of Loving Understanding as it permeates all consciousness. Direct this thought-form to your fellow human beings and into the Earth herself. Slowly return to surface awareness.

FINDINGS – Document your Findings.

THE FUTURE EARTH

Dear Blog Reader, you are ONE with all of humanity. Therefore, take care of one another. This is our best hope for continued survive as a species. There is a positive trend that I would like to note for you, in regard, as I have been witnessing it for several years as we promote our Blog work. Our internet,AI, and our various Social Media represent the exteriorization of the Telepathic Network we speak of in our Blogs.

This is to be expected, as the “interior” of consciousness expresses itself in the “exterior” as All That Is during The Shift in consciousness. The Social Media networks are proliferating as humans of like-mind and Spirit connect and make plans for the future. This global effort – in part by the magicians, shamans, witches and healers of our era – represents the forces of healing, of conscious co-creation.

I am delights to see the efforts of the lightworkers and others combining forces in the millions to heal the planet and humanity. These movements are having positive effects on our world. The strategies for healing extolled in these varied groups hold the promise for the continuation of our species on Earth.

EVOLUTIONARY CHANGE BY NEW IDEAS

Each evolutionary change is preceded and caused by a new idea. As the idea is in the process of being constructed onto the physical planes, it prepares the material world for its own actually and creates the prerequisite conditions.

Evolution is energy’s movement toward conscious expression in the physical universe, but it is basically nonphysical. A species at any given time is the materialization of the inner images or ideas of its individual members, each of whom forms their own idea constructions.

At no point can we actually say the one construction vanishes and another takes its place, but artificially we adopt certain points as past, present, and future, for convenience. At some point, we agree that the physical construction ceases to be one thing and becomes another, but, actually, it still contains elements of the “past” construction and is already becoming the “next” one.

Though the construction of an idea seems to disappear physically, the idea which it represents still exists.

Sleep is the entity’s rest from physical idea construction. Only enough energy is used to keep the personal image construction in existence. The Entity withdraws into basic energy realms and is comparatively free from time since idea construction is at a minimum level. The Entity is in contact with other Entities at a subconscious area.

After death, the Entity will have its ghost images (memories) at its command, though their apparent sequence will no longer apply. Memories are properties of the subconscious Energy Entity and, as such, are indestructible (though they may be unavailable to the individual under various circumstances).

The next plane of Existence will involve further training in energy use and manipulation, since the energy of which the Entity is composed is self-generating and always seeking more complicated form and awareness.

Each material particle is an idea construction formed by the individualized bits of energy that compose it.

Each Entity perceives only his own constructions on a physical level. Because all constructions are more or less faithful reproductions in matter of the same basic ideas (since all individuals are, generally speaking, on the same level in this plane), then they agree sufficiently in space, time and degree so that the world of appearances has coherence and relative predictability.

HUMANITY EXTENDED SOUL FAMILY

WE ARE ONE WITH ALL OF HUMANITY. THEREFORE, TAKE CARE OF ONE ANOTHER.

The Westerner

These ideas that I bring to the table here are Westernized for your understanding. I have spoken, at least in our generation, primarily through English-speaking channels. This is because it is the Westerner who must now be convinced of the value of these spiritual ideas. The westerner, in the broad sense, is what is wrong with the Earth at this time.

If we were to look at humanity as the extended Soul Family of the peoples of Earth, you could very well make a case for this group of humans – Westerners in the industrialized nations – as creating the conditions for the utter downfall and demise of the entire Soul Family.

We are all connected one to each other. The behaviors, ideas, and images enacted and entertained by each of us are shared on some level by all of us. So please imagine what occurs when a belligerent nation of Reality Creators – one that wishes to bully other nations, wage war against them and take their resources – does so with impunity within our current timeframe. Let me say that, particularly when this warlike nation maintains a nuclear arsenal and threatens to use it against other nations, the stakes are very much higher here, of course, than if we were speaking of tribal nations waging battles with spears and other elementary weapons.

CHANGING THE PAST

It is true: change the past and the present will take care of itself. We are not being flippant here. We have suggested before in this that through true forgiveness of yourself and others for the perceived mistakes of the past, you are actually changing those past realities. The molecular composition of the Reality Constructs is altered. The emotional charge is altered. The historical experience is altered, Dear Blog Reader.

With this fresh in your mind, we will move to this very powerful experiment. Your Imagined Death entails a visualization of what you might experience on your deathbed, directly before the transition to the Home Dimension. Your visualization will, of course, be different than others might create. The idea is to visualize the Death Scene to see what Lessons may have been avoided that are now in plain view with the imminent Death experience upon you. Please consider, then, this Death Scene as occurring in your very current reality: at the age you are now, in the home in which you now live, with the people around you who are in your life currently.

EXPERIMENT – Your Imagined Death

HYPOTHESIS: By imagining your death you remove the fear of death and bring your Issues into focus.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

Now simply relax, as usual, as you rest comfortably in a quiet room where you can remain undisturbed for 15 minutes. Breathe deeply. Close your eyes and imagine that you are on a beach somewhere or in another location that you have visited where you experienced complete calm and relaxation.

This is your imagination at work here and you have complete control over the activities in this experiment. You are, in fact, observing yourself from a vantage point near the ceiling of the room you are in. Imagine the particulars of your deathbed scene.

Feel the comfort of the sheets and blankets around you. Look at the room and notice the color of the walls, any pictures on the walls, any details you would care to notice about the room.

Now you allow memories to come to your consciousness, memories of painful events from your past. These memories you forgive and heal in the moment of remembering: Courageously, you see. Reenactments of experiences from your past when your were abused, neglected, unloved, or you were abusive to others may arise. In the moment of memory, forgive yourself and others immediately and the let that material fade away.

Courageous Forgiveness is your motto here as you imagine yourself surrounded by the people who have hurt you and those you have hurt in your life. One by one you look them in the eye, and with your boundless compassion you forgive them and yourself simultaneously. It’s exhilarating to be free of all that dead weight. You may feel like laughing out loud you are so completely cleansed of the trauma of the past. When you feel it is time to come out of Trance, slowly come up to surface awareness.

FINDINGS – Document your Findings immediately.

YOUR IMAGINED DEATH

It is a fact of life that many of us postpone addressing our Issues until the moment of our Death. Often it is too late then, of course, and so we may be required to return to physical life to learn the avoided Lessons. Here we will help you avoid that possibility.

We will have more to say about Death in our forthcoming Blog on the Transition and the Afterlife. Now, however, we offer you an experiment in experiencing your own eventual Death imaginatively. This will not be morbid in the least, but a cathartic and indeed healing exercise for you.

The ongoing awareness of Death brings with it an ongoing awareness of what it is you need to do in each moment. The question, “What would you do now if you knew you were to die tonight?” enters here. What would you do, Dear Blog Reader? In our material in this Blog and others, we suggest that Loving Understanding and Courage are what you may do to best help create a positive reality for yourself and others.

Specifically here, if your Death is imminent, you would be in a perfect position to practice forgiveness: forgiving all perceived wrongs throughout your life. This is a two-way street here, then: forgiving others and yourself. Loving Understanding becomes complete forgiveness, powered by the relentless Courage that comes with this perspective

SOUL FAMILY HEALING

To have an ongoing awareness of Death is a healthy thing…

Taking The Lead

In previous exercises we have identified tendencies to be afraid of the Other. The exercises in this Blog will heal those fears within all Simultaneous Lives. But first you may take the lead in matters of Soul Family healing, Dear Blog Reader. You see, in a sense, your mission with your Soul Family as an Awakening One, would be to encourage Lessons to be learned by all Soul Family members before the Death of the physical body. To have an ongoing awareness of Death is a healthy thing, in this context of study and experimentation.

An appreciation of Death and your ultimate demise, is also a celebration of your transcendence of Death. After Death, as you know, you transition to the Home Dimension, and then beyond into your multiple and varied Reinacanational Existences. With this in mind, to entertain Death as your companion, in a sense, in your waking existence, also motivates you to do your transformative practices, address your Issues without delay, learn your Lessons, and so on. Knowing that your time is limited in each incarnation, provides a focus and an intensification of perception and thus manifestation.

LOVE AND DEATH

The realization, here, is that Love is all that is required in all circumstances. The fear of Death fades into the background when you realize this basic truth of our existence. Now it is easy to say this when you are experiencing it. When you are in Love, in a romantic way, let us say, it is easy to see the truth in this statement. It is easy to agree that Love makes the world go around, as they say. Yet what is required here, I believe, for the awakening student, is the recognition that Loving Understanding, for ourselves and our Earthly colleagues, is all that is required, despite whether we are in a romantic Loving relationship or not.

Certainly, the Soul Mate relationship is important to the developing human at this time in our evolution. However, your “embrace,” you might say, of everyone you meet with this Loving Understanding and Courage we have discussed here, is what is needed at this time to break the barrier, to tip the scale, to initiate the healing of humanity and the planet.

As you do engage in these Loving activities, Death takes a less prominent role in your Reincarnational Dramas. Fear of death is replaced by a Loving anticipation on your journey. From this perspective, Death is only difficult for the living, those who are left behind. For the Soul, however, it is the ultimate accomplishment: a celebration of the continuity of Loving consciousness

THE ENTITY

For example: as you focus on the Entity, through reading and conducting the experiments in our Blogs, you ally with this vast collection of Souls. You are nourished as the Entity is nourished, you see. What began as an affinity of ideas and feelings becomes a true collaboration. It is the same principle at work in spiritual literature of all types. You are inspired, moved, transformed by the ideas in the text. We have spoken of this before.

Now this intense identification with the famous deceased, can be quite productive and life-enriching if the time is taken to truly study and honor these lives. The information is out there in the Collective Consciousness for you to examine at any time. Anyone with the proper preparation and motivation can access and explore this material. And as I said, the more you research with respect and Love these Gestalts of Consciousness of the transitioned humans, the more your consciousness becomes a part of the greater Gestalt we call the Entity.

AVERAGE LIVES

However, perhaps the explorer in focusing on the famous contacts forgets about the contacts with less-famous personalities. These would be the numerous lives lived as slaves, factory workers, tribal peoples, and so on. The majority of lives lived are not exceptional, by any means. The majority are normal, average, human lives, lived to varying degrees of Value Fulfillment for the further education of the Entity, the Soul Self, and All That Is.

But where is the romance in that? And so the glamour-seeking aspect of the human consciousness seeks out those experiences of Soul that have this high dramatic impact. This may indeed have positive results, as we shall explain in the next Blog.

THE CELEBRITY EFFECT

FAMOUS LEADERS AND MOVIE STARS

You may be familiar with a phenomenon that occurs for the individual explorer within this Past Life experimentation. We call it Celebrity Effect, in that, it is almost mandatory for the Scientist of Consciousness to uncover Past Lives lived as various well-known personalities. Thus you have the discoveries that you have lived lives as famous leaders from our perceived past, movie stars who have made the Transition, and so on. Often this ages into the Unknown Reality. The reasons for this may become obvious to you as I explain this phenomenon from my perspective.

Often this celebrity effect exerts its influence in the first few voyages…

THE SOUL FAMILY METAPHOR

This Soul Family concept is another of my essential metaphors, nothingmore. We are attempting to teach you-the-student how to make sense of consciousness manifestation. Without these systems of thought and analysis, you may become quite overwhelmed with data, even on investigation of a single current existence only. And so we are again simplifying here, even as we delve more deeply into the subject matter.

As you attend to your studies and bring into conscious awareness the activities of your other lives, a detailed description of your greater Soul Self emerges. You will discover, for example, whether you have lived predominantly male or female lives. You will get a grasp of your Primary and Secondary challenges in those lives. You will witness the victories and defeats within those existences, and in so doing, increase the scope of your belief system. As your view of self becomes more comprehensive, there is often a corresponding growth in the ability to practice Loving Understanding and Courage towards yourself and others.

PRACTICAL VALUE

Now let us attempt to achieve some practical value out of this information, by charting the associations between these lives, in so far as Lessons are concerned.

Earlier in this blog series, we asked you to make lists of possible Soul Family members that you identify through experimentation and through the existence we offer you. In the last chapter we asked you to consider your Simultaneous Existences past and future. Please gather those Findings for their part of the project, whether they are extensive or quite minimal. Next we shall attempt to “connect the dots,” with regards to your greater Soul Family gestalt.

TALKING POINTS

  • ISOLATION VS ENGAGEMENTWhat is your general relationship to the Other?
  • IDENTITY What is your Essential Identity? What is your Negative Persona?
  • YOUR LESSONSPrimary and Secondary, Re: Love relationship, Re: Your Current Soul Family Gestalt, Re: Your Interdimensional Soul Family
  • LOVING AND UNDERSTANDING AND COURAGEHow are your skills in these practices?
  • HUBRIS AND HUMILITYWhere are you on the continuum?

PAST AND FUTURE LIFE RECALL – EXPERIMENT

Hypothesis: You may identify members of your Interdimensional Soul Family in the moment point

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

It is best to have some experience in working in the field before you attempt this experiment. These moments of high-emotionality, of joy and anger, are in themselves Moment Points for the explorer of consciousness. High emotionality is a form of Trance State, and so you only need to focus a bit on your objectives here, when you are within one of these experiences.

As you let go and relax into the feelings here, allow the emotions themselves to guide you to the other lives: the target lives you wish to study. Imagine that you are tuning-in on these theoretical existences with your thoughts, with your Intentions. You will know you have made contact when you sense an other-worldly element to your sensings in the moment of the experimentation.

You may feel somewhat disoriented as your travel interdimensionally to other existences. This is multitasking here, as you participate in the high-emotionality of the current lifetime experience, while simultaneously using your Inner Senses to peer into other lives in other timeframes.

You might ask yourself what are the Lessons being learned in the other existences. You might ask for the particulars of the Soul Family member you are encountering in this representation of the Soul Family member with whom you are currently interacting? Ask for as much corroborating data as you can to enable verification later.

The material may come as a bleedthrough – a brief multisensory experience. If this is the case, you will have full memories of this when you come to surface awareness.

What you are illuminating here in this experiment are your Soul Family Past Life and Future Life Issues. These are the Lessons you have worked on in other lives with these people.

When you feel the experiment is complete, return to surface awareness at your own pace.

FINDINGS – Document your Findings on the chart below. In the next blog you will combine these Findings with the material gathered earlier in the Blog Series.

PAST AND FUTURE LIFE RECALL

TYPE OF NAMES LESSONS BEING LEARNED

RELATIONSHIP

__________________ ________________ ______________________________

DIMENSIONS OF TIME

We are multidimensional beings in a physical body. During our waking times we are constantly peeking into our other lives. This is how we come to an agreement about what to do here in our current existence. Then, paradoxically, the moment we make our reality, we forget how we came to that place of divine creativity.

This image has an empty alt attribute; its file name is download-3-1.jpeg

We refer to these separate time segments or time frames in which we have our individual existences as dimensions. Our current existences takes place in the Third Dimension, as we know. Our past existences had occurred and ARE occuring in what we might call the Past Dimensions. The same can be said of our future existences: they are playing out in Future Dimensions.

You might remember that in my theory we hypothesize multiple existences that are lived by the Soul Self within this current timeframe in which we live. So there is indeed another human or humans, quite related to you via the Soul Self, living out their lives as your contemporaries.

As I have stated before, there are similarities in the experiences and behavior of ALL of our Simultaneous Lives. To be sure, these similarities are not obvious at first glance. In other words, the outwards manifestation, the physical countenance, for example, is entirely different in each instance of our existence.

We ARE living our other lives within vastly differing body types, of differing temperaments, and so on. Yet within the psyches of all of these representations of our singular Soul Self, note the similarities. These are similarities in thought, imagery, emotional content, and so on.

In this section of our Blog Series, we will show you how to use these attributes that you share with your other lives, as a method for honing-in on these lives while in Trance State. Because you are learning how to take this Trance State with you into your waking reality, you will also be able to do your research into your other existences outside of your home: “in the field,” as we say.

CONSULTING YOUR FUTURE SELF

Hypothesis: You can receive advice from a future probable self who is succeeding in this project.

You exist within a Matrix of probability and potential. Every thought of yours attempts to prove itself in physical reality. Because all values are explored by consciousness in all cases, there exists for you personally a best-case-scenario with regards to your Soul Mate encounter. This ideal exists within the consciousness of a future probable self of yours that you may contact in the Trance State.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

Achieve your Trance State as you usually do. Relax and enjoy this process of going deeper within. With your Intention as your guide, imagine your consciousness travelling, free, as in the Spirit Body, or perhaps within a visualized transport of some kind to the place where future probable realities exist for you personally.

When you sense that you have arrived, again use your Intention to tune-in on the Best-Case-Scenario probable life with regards to this Soul Mate project. You may notice it, in that, there is a pleasant aroma, image, sound, or tactile sensation associated with it.

Now conduct a brief interview with this future probable self of yours, to gather the information you require to replicate the behaviors, ideas, images and so on, upon which this ideal outcome is based. You will have total recall of this information you are receiving from this future probable self. Gradually return to surface awareness.

FINDINGS – Document your findings immediately.

SUCCESS AS YOU DEFINE IT

As you master the Techniques and you gain your personally Findings from Experimentation, you will experience the confidence that comes from co-creating your existence with the Divine. In time you will find your own success in this project: success as YOU define it. Keep at it with Loving Understanding, Courage and with faith in a positive outcome.

HEALING TALK – EXPERIMENT

Hypothesis: Suggestions given in the Uncommon Trance can help you improve your reality.

We have presented this experiment to you in different forms in our new Blog Series. Here we shall present the same strategy to you with a focus on the Soul Mate encounter. However, you could also make the focus one of Business Soul Family Members, Spiritual Practice Soul Family Members, and so on.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

Enter your Trance State as you usually do in these experiments. Relax. Go deeper and deeper into your state of relaxation. By now you have no doubt discovered the level of Trance that is most effective for you to achieve your goals. Please adjust your consciousness to enter into that state now. You may have a gesture or empowered thought that triggers the state of consciousness instantaneously. If so, use that trigger now.

The goal here is to focus on a stream of Inner Dialogue, such that the words become internalized. This means you carry this empowered statement with you throughout your waking day, and indeed, into the dream state at the end of your day.

Keeping it quite simple, you might consider the phrase, “I am looking forward to meeting my divine partner. It is inevitable. It is exciting. It is happening NOW!” Repeat this phrase or a phrase of your own making, in the Trance State until it is committed to memory, until it becomes a circular thought that is habitually repeated without much effort.

After about 15 minutes of this, gradually come up to the surface awareness. You may find that your mood is elevated, empowered, romantically inclined.

FINDINGS – Document your Findings Immediately after coming out of trance and after you notice effects in the field.

CALLING IN YOUR GUIDES

Hypothesis: The non-physical beings may assist you in this project

In all of our regimens we suggest the student enlist the powers of the non-physical beings. The Energy Personality, the gods and goddesses, Nature Spirits, and so on, all can be counted on to assist you. This experiment is a simple one.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

Assume your trance state as usual. When you are completely relaxed and going with the flow of manifestation, imagine that your Spiritual Guides are coming to greet you in the non-physical world. You may have an imaginary playmate from childhood that makes an appearance. The saints and other religious figures may show up. Friends and family who have made the transition as well as Ancestors of various types may make themselves known to you in this experiment, which is really just a calling-out for assistance.

As you imagine your Helpers surrounding you, you might ask for help in a general way. Ask that your Guides contact you when you are in the vicinity of a potential Love and Romance support you on your quest. Your thought-energy and your Spirit literally energize these constructs and assist in their manifestation into your Personal Reality. Your fervent desire to have these beings assist you, is the main force behind these creation in your world.

Now please assign your various tasks to the Guides who have made themselves known to you. When you are certain you have gained as much information as you require in the session, slowly return to surface awareness.

FINDINGS – Document your findings from the experiment.

CHARGING YOUR AURIC DISPLAY

HYPOTHESIS: You may enrich your auric display with positive attributes

Let us try this experiment. Briefly, you track the changes in the Auric Display as you intentionally feed it with positive images, emotions, and so on, relative to the desired Soul Mate.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

First, you note the benchmark of Auric expression when you begin the exercise, as you did in the preceding Blog experiment. Then you would watch for beneficial changes as you feed the positive messages into your consciousness. These suggestions are built with affirmative statements that you energize with your self-generated positive emotions.

Thus, you might create a personalized mantra:

I anticipate an encounter with my Loving mate within the next two weeks time. I am filled with Loving Understanding and personal power…

As you turn over this mantra in your mind, open your eyes, if that is appropriate, and look in the mirror. You may notice with your physical eyes that your Auric Display brightens. Your energy expands.

Or if you would prefer to keep your eyes closed… get a sense of your Emotional Body, as we have described in Blogs, and look for changes on the perimeter of this image with your Inner Senses. You may also sense the improvements with your other Inner Senses, as in feeling a sensuous, even erotic intensification. You may hear voices of one kind or another. Aromas may come to you, suggesting romantic encounters, and so on.

Please notice how this Arua of yours brightens, and perhaps changes color with the thoughts of healing. This is the edge of manifestation we speak of in the Blog. When you first notice improvements you duly noted these changes without cynical denial, without self-deprecation. In this way, you firm-up your creation, your effects. Then, in the next few moments of creation you push this altered state of perception into the future by keeping cynicism at bay.

The next step is to emerge from your Trance and into your waking world. You will be taking this improved Essential Identity into your Personal Reality for experimental purposes. Follow-up equals noting Findings on Soul Mate Encounters that happen in the field.

FINDINGS- Document your findings, perhaps noting the personalized triggers we described earlier.

AURIC DISPLAY

HYPOTHESIS: Your essential identity is visible in the auric display

Now all of us have the capacity to sense this Auric Display. It is sensed with the Inner Sense of sight, with the eyes open or closed, within a light Trance State.

Here you will be asking the question, “What am I really presenting to potential mates as my Essential Identity? You will be assessing your Essential Identity via the Auric Display and determining the precise quality and expression of your energy through your Emotional Body. This will allow you a benchmark for comparison with future assessments after remedial measures are instituted.

This is how you make progress in these practices. It is where the magic of these techniques is used to greatest advantage. By noting how a particular state of consciousness feels to you, in comparison to another, you get a sense of what is needed to progress further toward your goal.

The success lies in the difference between the two assessments. What is lacking that should be there is put into the mix for future experiments. It could be an image, a feeling, a memory that makes the difference here. These Findings are valuable, in that, they represent your personalized “triggers” that work for you in this project. They trigger the manifestation process for you personally.

If you think in terms of creating supernatural acts, as indeed, that is what you are doing in these experiments, these Findings represent the “magic words, gestures, emotions” that combine to facilitate the creation of the supernatural event.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

Now just as we have done in all of our experimentation… Relax. Breath deeply. Focus on your inner world for just a few moments, with the Intention of observing the Auric Display. This is the exact same procedure we have described to you in the past blogs with regards to viewing the Emotional Body. So simply carry your Intention with you into this Trance State for a few minutes please.

There may be resistance here, and this is quite normal. You are “looking for” those aspects of your character that you broadcast through your Auric Display, including those aspects that prevent you from meeting you ideal mate, your Soul Mate. Your ego/intellect may be reluctant to show you this authentic self. Persevere, then, for a few more minutes until you encounter the images and sensations we are describing.

You may witness a reliving of events from your past in which you experienced rejection or possibly triumph in the pursuit of Love relationships. There may come to you brief flashes of these events, giving you a taste, the essence you might say, of the events themselves. You may see lights of various colors that evoke emotional content. This is a common experience. Simply move forward with your investigation with the knowledge that you will remember this material even though it may contain some uncomfortable images and emotions.

When you feel you have received as much information as you need in this experiment, return to surface awareness, bringing with you this information on your Essential Identity.

FINDINGS Document your Findings as best you can.

EXPERIMENTATION

You have your personalized images, thoughts, and emotions on what constitutes the Soul Mate. We have previously determined what are your “true” personality aspects. You have taken a self-assessment and noted those parts of your personality that assist you and those that do not assist you in the attainment of Love. You are now intentionally empowering an Essential Identity that will contain within it, all of the Attributes that you will use to be recognized by your complementary partner.

Now you are being quite honest here, Dear Blog Reader. You are not hiding from your Issues, nor are you attempting to explain them to yourself in rational terms. You are not making excuses. Here you are using your powerful imagination to imagine a Soul Mate relationship.

Let me explain… As you visualize and empower the image of the Soul Mate you wish yourself to be, you also empower and are able to recognize the Soul Mate you desire. This is the Resonance Phenomenon in action, once again, as we have described to you previously. What is created intentionally and with power on the inner world is manifest in the outer world through Resonance– the electromagnetic assemblage of Conscious Units into Reality Constructs through thoughtful emotional creativity.

In this Trance State you not only envision your improved personality aspects – while, for example, picturing yourself as embodying your new alluring Loving attributes – but you also dramatize with emotion the attainment of the desired relationship in physical reality.

You would thus visualize what your Soul Mate looks like, insofar as physical appearance goes: body type, hair color, eye color, facial features, and so on.

What is the temperament of the desired partner?

What are the occupation and past-time activities of this human? I am certain you can come up with more relevant criteria to fill in the picture here.

Do you see how this unique perspective – the sensing of the Auric Display – may assist you in identifying Soul Mates and Soul Family members? This is the psychic mechanism for the phenomenon you know as “love at first sight.” It is a glimpse through the ego/intellect by the Soul Self. The perception is captured without censoring by the personality. Often prophetic material is presented to the mind’s eye, as in visions of a happy union years in the future when you are mated, perhaps having children, living successfully, and so on.

With this in mind, let us try some experimentation…

YOUR ESSENTIAL IDENTITY

Now it is common lament among those of us seeking mates, “If only they could see what I am truly like, inside, they would be drawn to me; they would fall in love with me and be my Soul Mate.” This assertion assumes that those around you do not know what you are “really” like. In reality, everyone around you “pretends” that they do not know your thoughts and what you are really like, to create a formality and a distance between you. But you do know that in the Telepathic Network, everyone knows what everyone else is thinking. We are a psychic race, and we intuitively are aware of the thoughts of others, yet only on the subliminal level.

Knowing this, do you see others are quite often responding to your “true” nature, with all of its fears, anxieties, resentments, and so on, and not to the idealized romantic persona that you identify as your “true inner self?”

The solution here seems to be a simple one: if you wish to create the conditions for meeting your Soul Mate, you must incorporate the idealized romantic aspects into your Essential Identity. This would entail transforming your fears, anxieties, and resentments into their opposites, perhaps. In so doing you might create an empowered Essential Identity capable of co-creating this Soul Mate.

It is true that your Auric Field acts as a beacon, displaying all of the attributes of self – both inner self and outer self – to the interested observer, including potential Soul Mates. You cannot hide, in other words, the display of your Auric Field from others, particularly those who are practiced in the use of the Inner Senses.

RESONANCE IS BASED ON THE LAWS OF PHYSICS

Let me clarify this for you. You know that everything that can exist is created NOW, in the eternal moment that holds all. Yet you exist within the confines of a linear time construct that depends on these laws of cause and effect , and others. If it helps you, please think of this Resonance as a process THAT INCLUDES what we call the attractive principle, the principle stated in our so-called Law of Attraction. It exists within the activity of the Consciousness Units. The Consciousness Units are active multi-dimensionally, past, present, and future, in our terms. They express themselves as different Reality Constructs in different dimensions of time. As these units of energy come together through an affinity of shared attributes, THE OPPOSITES ARE ALSO PULLED TOGETHER, expressing what you might call the “glue” of consciousness: that which gives thought form.

This occurs in somewhat the opposite manner as when centrifugal forces separate out the constituents of a liquid substance with matter dissolved within it. Bioelectric forces, meaning, the energies that animate ALL substances, in league with natural cosmic magnetic forces, all at the same time, remember, in this spontaneous process, in a sense, “push and pull” the Consciousness Units into the desired form of consciousness manifestation: consciousness in action, evolutionary consciousness expressing itself in all ways, in all forms, at all times. There is a Holographic Insert attached to this message, if you would care to look for it in your mental environment. Please note my use of the word desired as a pun.

EXAMPLE: LESSON LEARNED

May we now contrast this situation with one in which the participant is well aware of their Issues regarding relationships? Perhaps they are working on themselves and building a spiritual life. They are becoming intuitively aware, possibly, and so they may have begun to learn the Lesson.

And so this person may well receive the beneficial information from the master computer of consciousness, but also they might receive further information in the form of images, ideas, and emotions illustrating instances of abuse, humiliation, pain, and suffering with this human in other lifetimes. These negative assessments may come in the form of subtle Intuitions that others might not sense. This human is using their Inner Senses to obtain a thorough assessment of the human before them: “warts and all,” as we say.

Given this negative assessment, the human may well take a pass on further exploring a relationship with The Other. The Lesson has been learned, in this case, and the human may go on to discover more fulfilling relationships elsewhere.

EXAMPLE: FAILED RELATIONSHIP

For example: suppose you are presented with an opportunity to recreate a failed relationship for a Past Life. The human presents themselves to you in your current timeframe. Upon meeting this person the “computer” does its Work and presents to you this succinct assessment: potential Soul Mate. And yet, suppose also that this person has subjected you – within countless lives, shall we say – to degradation, humiliation, pain, and great suffering. Then why would you make this beneficial assessment of the human? This is a rhetorical question however let me answer it for you… Lessons. You are being presented with an opportunity to learn your Lesson regarding selections of potential mates.

In other lives you have not chosen wisely and you participated in relationships of pain and great suffering. You have already learned all that you can about these states of consciousness within these other relationships. But perhaps you are a “glutton for punishment,” and you want to give it another go with this human in other circumstances.

In a sense, you could say that you are only listening to the beneficial messages given of you by your great computer here. You may be in denial of your Issues, then and you are setting yourself up for another lifetime of pain, suffering, humiliation.

FATE OR DESTINY?

Another example: You are in a department store shopping for clothing of some sort. You are drawn to a particular counter and to the clerk behind this counter. You are attracted by the energy this human displays, the Auric Display or Auric Field. You are using your Inner senses quite spontaneously to select from several counters with several different humans behind them, the clerk with whom you have the best “connection.” You make your choice intuitively.

Then as you strike up a conversation, you realize that you have much in common: a similar sense of humor, similar likes and dislikes, perhaps even the same acquaintances in physical reality. “What a coincidence,” you say to one another, “that we should meet.” It seems like fate or destiny, yet is it? You used your powerful Inner Senses quite subconsciously to zero-in on the human with whom you had the most in common, the best connection. Then you experienced surprise at your excellent choice.

Let’s say you made an appointment to meet with this human after work, for coffee or some such thing. You are setting the groundwork, for relationship here, within the course of a few minutes of conversation in a public place. Where will it end? You may, for example, create a business partnership with this human or perhaps some personal relationship of some sort. The possibilities are endless. It is not destiny, however. You were not fated to meet. You merely used your Intuitive Senses to meet each other.

Let me end this example by suggesting that you could have chosen ANY ONE of the clerks in that store and possibly co-created a Soul Family relationship with them, to some degree. You are connected to everyone in general and to your Soul Family in particular. Everyone is connected to you. Each of us has a “history” with everyone else, in that we have the potential to experience lives within many eras, throughout time, with the same group of humans. This group could be vast – thousands or hundreds of thousands – or relatively small – tens or hundreds. Lifetime after lifetime, however, ALL of us, all of the Soul Family, interact in different bodies in different ways learning different Lessons.

I repeat: you could have chosen any one of the clerks in that store and co-created with them a potential Soul Family member reunion. This is where your free will is involved, you see. You choose from all of humanity, at any given time, those you will associate with, those you will fall in love with, those that will become your enemies. I am attempting to make this a clear point of understanding.

EXAMPLE: LOVE AT FIRST SIGHT

For example: You are going about your shopping in a market somewhere. You are in your Uncommon Trance and you are signaling through the Auric Field that you are open to connecting with another human with particular characteristics. Your Auric Field is noticed by a passing human – the Resonance Phenomenon at work.

Let us say this human experiences a precognitive moment when they pass you and look into your eyes. They see themselves with you in an ideal relationship context, for instance. Or perhaps they simply think to themselves, “It’s funny, but I feel a strong attraction to this person. Perhaps I should start a conversation.” Resonance Resonance Resonance.

You could say that this instance of “Love at first sight” was the end result of weeks or months of intentional Reality Creation on the part of the attractor. When this occurs you might ask your Guide to alert you to this project. This is a very practical use of your Guides.

Technique: SUSPENDING DISBELIEF

An example: You have begun your project in earnest and you are out in our community. You are keeping a positive thought regarding the Soul Mate encounter. Then suppose that a human – one that meets the Soul Mate criteria – look at you and smiles, or even openly flirts with you. Your issues may tempt you into ascribing these effects to coincidence or other factors: factors other than your Soul Mate Project practices.

The idea here is to not succumb to disbelief on your powers. Indeed, as you suspend disbelief in the moment of recognition of the positive effects. You are, in so doing, “making the dream real.” You are creating a positive future for yourself.

TECHNIQUE: DISTRACTING THE EGO-INTELLECT

This technique ties in nicely with the previous Blog on the CPA exercise. By consciously diverting our attention to the Divine – our ongoing co-creation with All That Is of our Soul Mate encounter – we gain skill of successfully handling negative emotions, ideas, images, and so on.

In this technique, when we are being assaulted by the negative, and we are threatened by these forces, we distract our attention to the work at hand: the contact with the Divine. We have said before that we are already quite comfortable with this technique. The average human is usually skilled at diverting themselves – distracting their attention – from the Issues and Lessons of their existence, and to something else: to some shiny objects to buy, to an entertainment of some sort, to a more pleasant thought or image.

Here is where we can utilize this innate skill to your advantage. Dear Blog Reader, when your Lessons and Issues present themselves, focus on them, glean the information required to move forward in your evolution. And when we are tempted to succumb to the pull of negative Reality Creation, distract oneself to the Divine. Just by thinking it, we can begin to accomplish it.

CONSECUTIVE POSITIVE ASSESSMENTS: TECHNIQUE

We may think of our Consecutive Positive Assessments technique as a counter to the suggestions of our subconscious mind to recreate less-than-satisfactory relationships. Now in all of our regimens and systems we offer this simple moment-to-moment perception of the positive as the key to creating improved realities.

We literally find the good within each moment of perception. In this project… suppose you yourself attracted to a fellow human that you are quite certain would not be good for you, would indeed, be quite bad for you personally. Intuitively we feel it would be a bad match. The attraction is strong, however, out of nowhere, subconscious. You are in a sense, being “invited,” perhaps by a Soul Family member from a Past Life, to ignore your best interests in the matter, and again re-create a negative relationship.

If we are attending to the creation of the positive out of the negative, however, with our CPA technique, it becomes quite easy to not succumb to this negative Pull let us say, gives way to the positive creation modality. The more instances in which we successfully resist the pull to the negative and continue on our positive trajectory, the easier it becomes to resist.

Eventually it becomes habitual, as we master this art of living. Put another way… the Common Trance of subconscious reaction surrenders to the Uncommon Trance of conscious co-creation with the divine. I am certain you can see this. It becomes obvious when we experience it.

THE EMOTIONAL BODY

Let me refresh your memory concerning the Emotional Body. This electromagnetic construct is, in fact, the intersection of all of your Reality Creation energies from all of your Simultaneous Lives. It is visible to the Inner Senses in your Ritual assessments of yourself and others. The Auric Display we call it also, in that, these signatures of energy can be read within the human aura as it is understood in our spiritual literature.

Our Issues are evident within these energy structures. As we focus on them, they may indeed animate, enlarge, and begin to tell us a story. This would be the story of our life that we have perhaps been reluctant to see: the flip-side to our existence that contains the truth about our private life.

Dear Blog Reader, as you assess where you are in your development, an honest image of yourself begins to come into view. This assessment will have perceived assets and deficits within its makeup. The perceived deficits – this is your judgement call – shall be duly noted and a plan shall be undertaken to transform the personality in these areas, if that is appropriate.

This approach we call “interjecting new personality aspects into the Essential Identity.” You will be “trying on” these aspects to attempt a sort of “mix-and-match.” It is an attempt to embody a truer more integrated and empowered Essential Identity.

THE ALTERED ESSENTIAL IDENTITY WILL BE REFLECTED IN OUR AURIC DISPLAY: AND THIS IS IMPORTANT:

This broadcast of our attributes both identifies us to potential Soul Mates and they to us…

Now this is the way it usually works in human relationships: we meet in the Common Trance and subconsciously conspire to engage in a relationship to Learn Lessons. Often we are learning the same Lesson over-and-over. In our system we are describing now, however, we are co-creating consciously in the endeavor. We are not making the same mistakes over-and-over. We are learning our Lessons consciously. Do you see the difference? We are waking up together with the creation of these Soul Mate relationships. We are awakening to our mutual divinity.

COURAGEOUS INTIMACY

I trust I am not overemphasizing these states of consciousness as I continually speak of their utmost importance in these practices. Loving Understanding and Courage are the primary tools we will utilize in this quest for the beloved mate.

Initially we will assess our own consciousness in a Courageously Loving fashion, perhaps practicing self-forgiveness along the way. Secondly we will go out into the world on a Courageous and Loving quest for our intimate partner, or as I said, we will identify our current partner as a potential Soul Mate.

The two attributes of consciousness also come in handy as we develop our relationship and live lives together. Thus, Courageous Intimacy: our term for the strategy used by partners who are awakening together.

THE METAPHORICAL TOOLS

These are the powerful manifesting tools that we create from our imagination to use for specific purposes in our investigative work. We are already familiar with the Radio Dial that we used in earlier Blogs to tune-in on the non-physical beings and other phenomena that exists at particular wavelengths of energy.

You may already have created your Etheric Vehicle that you use to travel anywhere in space and time. The more we use these tools, the more data we collect, the more effective the tools become as aids to manifestation. Be creative, therefore, in the creation of your personalized Metaphorical Tools.

RITUALS OF HEALING

This system for manifestation is similar to others in our Blogs. We present Techniques, Experiments, and Rituals for us to implement in our waking reality. Systematically, ritually, Loving observing these practices, leads to an eventual irresistible tendency to CONTINUE to carry out the practrices.

The system becomes habitual. Positive effects are anticipated and when they are manifest we are empowered. We master the practices through practice, practice, practice. This is the power of the Rituals of Healing.

RESONATING AURIC FIELDS

Let me go on a bit here, to further explain how this works. Our bodies emits energy in the form of electromagnetic emanations. We have referred to this as the Auric Field or Corona in our blogs. This Auric Corona exhibits all of our personality characteristics and these characteristics may be “read” by interested observers via the Inner senses.

In fact, through Resonance the human exhibiting our preferred Soul Mate attributes recognizes us or tunes-in on us in physical reality. The Auric Fields in physical reality. However, because our signal through our Auric Field requests specific personality characteristics in a potential mate, our Auric Field will resonate with the Auric Field of the desired Soul Mate. When our potential Soul Mate is in our vicinity we may experience effects: synchronicities, deja vu experiences, swoons of ecstasy, and so on.

RESONANCE AND BELIEFS

We resonate our world into being according to what we believe is possible. We are Spirit in Flesh. Our ideas and emotions congeal into Reality Constructs. This is Resonance in action.

And further, as a way to illustrate the Resonance construct: if we cultivate a belief in Angels – as many of my Blog Readers do, I am finding – we go a long way towards co-creating with our greater consciousness, the reality of Angels. If we believe that we will die at a certain age, we will possibly resonate that event into actuality.

Beliefs are the determinant values within all Reality Creation by human beings. They are the most powerful constructs in our system. Through the power of our beliefs – the assemblages of images, emotions, concepts, circular thoughts – the electromagnetic phenomenon we refer to as Resonance gains focus and sustaining energy.

We create our reality through the templates of our beliefs. Therefore, know your own mind, own your vision of the beloved Soul Mate. Then don’t be surprised by your creation; it is an exact representation of your true ongoing mental activities.

CO-CREATION

Soul Mates are co-created, rather than “found” or “attracted.” You co-create with ALL That Is AND your potential Soul Mate, the context for experiencing one another. When the meeting occurs, it has the underpinnings of the Divine supporting it. The co-creation of your Soul Mate can be described as an awakening experience, then: collaborations with ALL That Is.

Now let me ask the obvious question that arises here:

Can I co-create the Soul Mate relationship from a current relationship, one that may have problems of one kind or another.

The answer is a resounding YES! Indeed, you may have entered into such a relationship – one with problems – for the specific purpose of working out your Issues together, and thus attaining the fulfillment of particular values. You may already be experiencing a Soul Mate relationship yet you are not fully aware of it now.

Let me digress… this idea of asking for what you want in relationship is complicated, again, by your Lessons: the subconscious materialization of your Personal Reality. This is why we suggest you adopt the conscious co-creator perspective. It allows you more leverage in the moment, in that, you may experience a form of objectivity with regards to your unconscious projections onto others.

So yes, please do the exercises with this in mind and see if you are already connected with your Soul Mate. Then should you discover that you are, you may use this material to deepen your relationship.

NEGATIVE EXPRESSION

Now this is an example of what the Blog is all about: changing consciously our behavior, thinking, imagining. We exist within the Moment Point as we assemble our identity from the various expressions of creaturehood within ALL of our countless Reincarnational Existences. At any one time, we will be drawing from some of our lives that ARE of a negative expression, on whole, let us say. This is often a hard fact of life to admit for the budding psychonaut.

We are all experiencing negative existences, abusive relationships, violent acts, somewhere in other timeframes. Now our strategy that we suggest, as we well know, is to immediately divert our attention to the positive when we are experiencing bleed throughs to the negative existences.

The attention is diverted to the Divine, always. As we consistently do this, our many lives improve, for we have a direct influence on these lives in our current experienced moment.

CHILD PARENT ENEMY

To illustrate: Our mate with whom we now experience our Lessons, may have been previously our child, our parent, our enemy. Yes, because we are learning Lessons of all types, the possibility exists for us to be experiencing a Love relationship with a former enemy.

What better way to experience the full gifts of living than to live the opposites with our Soul Family? That is a rhetorical question, however, let me add that with this rejoiner: we are not condoning abusive relationships.

Here I am illustrating the very common occurrence of the Soul Family member changing their behaviors of the Past Life existence, to their opposites: Loving, Courageous, Compassionate behaviors.

NEW AGE SOUL MATE

Of course, in our New Age Literature it is primarily the romantic relationship that is being referenced in these Blog discussions. So that we may be assured that the speaker is quite probably commenting on male-to-female, male-to-male, or female-to-female relationship, when they speak of Soul Mates.

There are also, quite often, the elements of destiny, synchronicity, and indeed, magic, attached to these Soul Mate discussions. In terms of these ideas, then the human does what they do best, in that they personalize these empowered images, concepts, emotions of the beloved Soul Mate with their own projections, their own criteria, their own personal needs in the matter of romantic fulfilling scared relationship.

Thus, we could say that the Soul Mate Gestalt of Consciousness includes each and every projection of every human who has ever fallen in love, for example, or wished, or hoped, or dreamed or visualized of an ideal Loving mate. The Soul Mate, in this way, exists as an evolving pool of opinion, desire, prejudice, dream and fantasy among other potent potentials.

THE IDEAL

Now there is an ideal in these matters. These are the basics regarding this theory of mine, and I shall elaborate for a bit, if I may… Remember, Dear Blog Reader, that anything that can occur within our system does indeed occur. ALL probable manifestations are explored by consciousness in terms of Value Fulfillment. All values are fulfilled in all cases.

With this in mind, the Soul Mate could be considered the ideal for the human relationship. As such it exists latently within the pre-manifestation domains: that ethic realm that contains the blueprints for all conceived reality. This ideal stands as an example of what YOU the human individual may co-create with All That Is with regards to the human Love relationship.

THE SOUL MATE PROJECT

Soul Mate

The concept of the Soul Mate is paramount in the minds of humans in our time frame. The search for the perfect partner occupies millions of moderns, who feel obligated I suppose, to seek out their most perfect match. It is somewhat of a biological imperative that drives so many of us on the quest for our Soul Mate, whatever that may imply for us.

The phenomenon is further complicated – or enriched, however we wish to see it – by the contributions of our popular media. This is not necessarily the Negative Media we speak if often and mystical genres. Through our daily horoscopes that have become popular, much of what was once material is being available to the public at large.

With this revelation of the Ancient Wisdom comes the inevitable degradation of these concepts by authors with an agenda based on the ego/intellect. And so we have a sacred concept transformed into some romanticized idea denoting the “must have” relationship for men and women in our era. We wish to acquire a Soul Mate as we wish to acquire a new car or furniture. Forgive me for making light of our lust for acquisition.

LESSON LEARNED

Now what Lessons were learned in our example? Perhaps one of the three response were made:

(1) You denied the person-in-distress entry to your home and refused to call for assistance to help them.

(2) You denied the person in distress entry to your home and did indeed call for assistance to help them, insisting that they wait outside for the help to arrive.

(3) You allowed them entrance to your home, allowed them to call for assistance on your phone, and perhaps made some tea for them to enjoy while they waited. Then suppose that in chatting with this unknown person, you felt that you were connected to them in some way, but you did not know how. Then, as you discussed your lives briefly, you discovered that this person was indeed connected to you in some way, such as a long-lost friend from childhood, or a friend-of-a friend, and so on. I’m sure you have had these types of coincidental experiences with people who come to you “out of the blue.”

Obviously, had you decided to respond in the first or second ways rather than the third, you would have never had the opportunity to discover your connection. Your fear would have prevented you from making this connection with another human being.

Now this is after-the-fact here, of course, this is after you have decided the person was of benign intent here and not a person out to do you harm. But I’m sure you get my point.

Trust but verify in all instances, Dear Blog Reader. Trust all but also verify all with your Inner Senses. Then, when The Other passes the test, so to speak, do not be surprised if you find yourself in just such a synchronistic coincidence of meeting as we have just described.

There are no accidents, after all. Everything happens for a reason. The once feared Negative Other turns out to be a potential friend or even Soul Mate. And that leads us to the next Blog.

THE NEGATIVE OTHER

Now, do you see how this example relates to our discussion of the development of the Negative other and the fear of The Other? The sense of protection and possibly suspicion that we inherited from our ancestors serves to inform this current existence of ours. We are making distinctions as to the dangers this human might present to us currently.

My point here is this: be safe, Dear Blog Reader. Do not leave yourself open to harm of any type in these practices. In fact, if you are attending to the exercises and experiments, you will by now have developed your Intuition to the point where you will be quite adept at “guessing” possible motivations and ethics of those you meet. You will also be able to “guess” at probable outcomes should you decide to carry your contacts further, as in relationships of various types.

PERSON IN DISTRESS

In our day-to-day existence it is quite easy for us to lose track of time as we go about our duties on our job, within activities in our home, etc. Our routines are just that, as we keep to habitual patterns of behaving and experiencing. Then suppose that something unique happens in our life to break the Common Trance for us, if only momentarily.

Suppose, for example, while we are within our home attending to our tasks for the day, that the doorbell rings and we answer the call to meet a man or a woman on our doorstep who is in obvious distress. This human has perhaps run out of gas directly in front of our home and needs to use our telephone to get assistance from a family member.

Any unusual intervention would do here, you see. The human in distress has interrupted our routine and brought us back into the moment of experiencing. We are now focused within this moment as we decide what to do with this stranger. We are perhaps assessing them as to whatever dangers they may present to us. Or we may be already assured, by some internal response, that they are harmless, let us say, as we prepare to allow them into our home. Or perhaps we are only prepared to make the call for them as they wait on the other side of the locked door.

TEMPORARY ALLIANCES

Because everyone we meet has something to teach us, and vice versa, we have no doubt found that perceived “strangers” may enter our life for intense interacting. Great emotionality is often experienced within these temporary relationships as the stranger may make themselves known to us on both the physical and the subtle levels.

Some of these relationships act as the catalyst to help propel us onto another path, another trajectory of experiencing. The partnership may last only a short time but the effects within the Personal Reality Field may well be quite powerful and lasting.

There are Lessons being learned here. The stranger who becomes known, if only for a brief time, is learning Lessons. We are learning Lessons also, as we participate in the interaction. An example is in order for the next blog here…

TEACHER AND STUDENT

Each and every human we meet in our day-to-day activities has the potential to teach us something about our existence. This student must become aware of this potential in the moment, or risk losing the opportunity for learning. Now this statement implies a teacher/student relationship. What does the classic relationship of teacher-to-student bring to mind for you-the-blog-reader? Allow me to assist you in this analysis… Humility enters into this discussion at precise this point. There is no student without the willingness to be taught.

The student aspect we are describing here is a facet of the personality or psyche that may be cultivated. It is the personality or psyche that may be cultivated. It is marked by an openness to discovery, to the novel. In the case of these studies of the Soul Family, the student would be quite open, intentionally you see, to the learning of the facts of life, you might say, about their true identity, their true personality AS OTHERS SEE IT.

This point is extremely important, and so I will elaborate on it for just a moment… the student is not the teacher to the student in these descriptions of Soul Family analysis. Others are the teachers to the student. The student does know everything. The student enters into the relationship with the teacher to learn something, in this case, to learn something about themselves. The student must be open to learning both the positive AND the negative about themselves.

The ego/intellect will always give us a slanted view of our self-created world. At some point in our development we will be required to rely upon our Inner Senses for at least part of our awareness in our waking reality. When we allow these Inner senses to guide us as we discover our Soul Family, we are turning down the volume, in a sense, of this ego/intellect, and turning up the volume on the Inner Senses. When we begin to receive less-than-flattering information from Others – the teachers we are speaking of – listen with our Inner Senses to these messages. Do not let egoic concerns prevent us from “facing the music” and learning the Lesson,

PROTECTIVE SHIELD

With this in mind explore a simple experiment on which we will be asked to briefly experience our existence without the amnesia that “protects” us. Keep in mind, please, that this secret information about our identity and our experiences has the potential to heal us on many levels of understanding. It is, in fact, our ego/intellect – the persona – that is being protected with this protective shield.

Moving beyond this shield is a simple matter of embodying our two tried-and-true states of consciousness manifestation: Loving Understanding and Courage. This is painful and difficult material to apprehend. Therefore, Courage is necessary in the beginning. As the secret material is revealed. Self-Forgiveness becomes quite useful as an ongoing state of consciousness: Loving Understanding, you see.

EXPERIMENT: MOVING BEYOND THE AMNESIA

HYPOTHESIS – We can wake-up from the amnesia

We exist in a camouflage reality. This means that the true nature of our existence is hidden from us. Now Imagining what it might be like to view our world with full-disclosure, in a sense, of all that we know and have known in all of our lives.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

Assume a comfortable position and relax you body. Breathe deeply and enter your Trance State. Because you are a student of your own experience and you are learning the facts on your own life, it is now possible for you to step further into the Unknown Reality of your own deep psyche.

With a recognition that you are prepared to accept more truthful information on the nature of your reality, let that courageous expectation guide you further into relaxation, dreaming, longing for contact with your deep self.

This is that aspect of your consciousness that knows of all your activities in all of your Simultaneous Lives. It is that central focus of consciousness that knows what will occur in any given day. It is that part of you that sees your world as you open your eyes from sleep, directly before your ego/intellect takes charge.

Now you are drifting, drifting, and gradually you are getting a feeling for this part of you. This part of you exists in a pure state, free from limitations of any kind. Free from the censorship and judgements of your ego/intellect, free from negative emotions. If you feel a sense of losing control, of descending into chaos, gently direct the unfolding of your sensations with your Loving perception.

You are guided by Love here and you are quite Courageous in your investigations. Feeling your way through this inner landscape, watch for dramatizations of various types that attempt to catch your attention. Note any sounds, visuals, or other sensations for documenting later.

FINDINGS – DOCUMENT YOUR FINDINGS.

THE VIRTUES AND THEIR OPPOSITES

The Soul Families, then, are the assemblies of Souls in human bodies keeping appointments in physical reality to learn their Lessons together. The Lessons are those attributes of consciousness we refer to as human virtues, and of course, their opposites, as well as the emotional and behavioral experiencing in between. Please note that this accounts for the whole of human existence.

Remember Dear Blog Reader, that Value Fulfillment requires the essential and fundamental learning of the Lesson to whatever degree we have agreed to experience it before coming into physical form. Our Soul Self observes these activities generally, and certainly notes where Lessons are learned or avoided.

In this way, a broad spectrum of life Lessons is experienced by the Simultaneous Lives for the Soul Self, for the Entity, and for All That Is.

THE ENTITY

I have an extensives Soul Family that is only now becoming apparent to me. As we create Blogs for the betterment of humanity, and I frequently have meetings with Soul Family members. It is obvious that these humans are connected to me. I sense it; they sense it. A reunion experience of great depth often occurs to further validate this phenomenon for all concerned. Synchronicities are noted; memories are evoked, and so on.

ANTICIPATING THE POSITIVE FUTURE

Hypothesis: By anticipating the positive future we create it.

Anticipation occurs in the spacious moment. In past Blogs I have defined for you the Moment Point and the Point of Power. These are terms that describe the current full moment in your present co-creation activities. Simply, it is your Moment Point if you say it is, Dear Blog Reader. You are bringing your Intention and power to bear on the manifestation phenomenon in the present moment.

Perform your Ritual of Sanctuary

Relax and attain your Trance State. You might experiment with achieving this through linking the Divine state of consciousness to sitting down in your comfortable chair or wherever you hold your meditations.

Now… you are in your Moment Point. Your Point of Power exists Now as your portal to affecting your future IN A POSITIVE WAY. Imagine before you all the positive realities you have related while working with this material. The ecstasy just below the surface of consciousness supports you. The contact with the Divine may be experienced as a tingling sensation between your physical eyes. All of your Guides and Helpers, known and unknown, surround you and support you. Bring all of your Inner Senses into this exercise to enliven it and strengthen the manifestation. Stay with it for a few minutes. Return to surface awareness.

FINDINGS – Document your experiences.

EXERCISE – Consolidate your findings.

While working with the many techniques and experiments provided for you in this Blog, you have no doubt had differing outcomes of success. You are an individual with individual educational needs. Hopefully you are taking what serves you best and incorporating it into your Reality Creation agendas.

In this final exercise we are asking you to make a list of those techniques and experiments that have helped you the most in the creation of positive realities and in the learning of lessons. Please take a few minutes to go over your notes and Findings and assemble the material that “speaks to you” most strongly and authentically here. This should be a pleasant and easy exercise. The material that did not work quite well enough for you may be saved for another day. For now, simple make your list of five to possibly ten relevant Findings and particularly successful outcomes of the techniques and experiments we have offered in these Blogs.

SPEAKING THE TRUTH

There is another cliché that is useful for us here in our Blog work – “speaking your truth.” This idea of speaking your truth is a very powerful Idea Construct. Indeed, it is revolutionary in its activity within our system. Here again is an example of a simple idea becoming quite profoundly effective when utilized by large groups of humans. The personal also becomes the political here, if you see my meaning. It is the ultimate political act of liberation to speak your truth, Dear Blog Reader. This act is the precise opposite of ceding your powers of Reality Creation to those in authority.

To remind you of my previously expounded upon thoughts on this matter, traditionally, the typical human cedes their powerful energies of Reality Creation to those in authority – parent, teacher, employer, politician, priest, scientist, movie star – in exchange for subtle gifts. These gifts are acceptance to the group, permission to keep employed, and so on. Now everything works quite nicely thereafter. The system – essentially a system of control – goes merrily along its way, the citizen believing that they are the “captain of their ship” of individual human consciousness. Obviously this is merely a dream that one hopes to be true.

Now on the other hand, it is true that there are many benefits you receive when you cede your power to those in authority. You receive all those benefits bestowed upon you by those in power. And it would be unwise to relinquish those benefits of association with the group. Let us see if we may devise a system of speaking our truth in such a way that we are not branded as a nonconformist of a witch. There are quite legitimate ways to speak authentically to those in power without threatening our place within the group. We shall cover this technique next.

BACK TO LOVE

In this transformation our Mother Earth is healing herself by “throwing off” the harmful parasites that have plagued her. The negative leaders, the corrupt business officials, the violent among us now being “processed” by the TRUE powers that be. These powers are the Higher Consciousness – the higher selves of these humans. Let me go further with this. This inspirational spiritual transformation that is well underway with many thousands of our fellow citizens who are members of mainstream religions.

Let me first say that ALL expressions of the Divine within human consciousness, are what we might call “legitimate” or “worthy” expressions. All That Is seeks to know itself through the spiritual expressions of human beings within their simple religious practices, that we might experience when we ask for help from the Divine in a simple personal matter, as in prayer that our operation will be successful, and through their more complex and obvious spiritual practices, such as we might see within the walls of our great churches, as hundreds join in the contemplation of the Divine in prayer and other rituals.

So it is all Divine, you see. Everything is born out of the Divine and Loving energies of All That Is. Now the key word here is Loving. Where there is devoted unconditional Loving powering these practices of the Divine, there will be Soul Evolution in these groups of practitioners. For as you well know as a Blog Reader of my works, what we are calling Love with a capital L is the veritable creative force of the Universes.

Wherever the path of devotion in any religious practice or “spiritual” practice if you prefer, takes a divergent path from the foundational energies of Love, there will be corrective measures instituted within the consciousness of the sole practitioner or within the group consciousness of the church members. These corrective energies serve to direct the spiritual expression back to one Love with a capital L.

In our new Blogs Series I have been critical of our priests and other leaders within our religious hierarchies for playing upon the fear and prejudices of the church members, particularly within our mainstream religions. Some of these leaders have knowingly led the people astray by bringing politics into the church. The cause of Love has been forgotten within these groups as the leaders seek to curry favor with powerful politicians and other secular leaders.

These religious leaders, as we add to this Blog manuscript, are engaged in a Turnabout also, just as the many of us who have been engaged in the negative practices – fear mongering, hatred – are engaged in a Turnabout. With the assistance of the Energy Personalities associated with individuals within these groups and within these hierarchies of control and power, these personalities are being directed back to Love with a capital L.

Currently we are just able to see a few of these Turnabouts in our media, as some journalists seek to report the truth of the matters at hand. By the time we publish this Blog of ours, This Turnabout will be well underway for many of us, with truly global – and need I say, multidimensional – implications.

My advice to you, if you feel that you are engaged in this Turnabout, is that you allow yourself to go back to Love. If you witness your Earthly associates obviously engaged in this transformation, assist them in finding their way back to Love. You do this by demonstrating within your own Personal Reality Field, the practice of Loving Understanding.

KEEPING A GOOD THOUGHT

Now those among us who find ourselves called to act within our social groups, will find our paths are cleared of obstacles to progress. Soul progression is the order of the day, you see. This divine attitude is therefore reflected within our Personal and Collective Reality Fields. It is really as simple as “keeping a good thought,” as the saying goes. Is this simplistic New Age wishful thinking? Yes it is, simple and direct and extremely powerful.

This Blog Series we title THE AWAKENING OF HUMANITY for a very good reason. The simple act of keeping a good thought, when observed ritually by many thousands of humans, will lead to the creation of positive Loving realities that are the catalyst for the mass-awakening of humanity.

So again, the simple, the basic becomes the profoundly effective exponentially, as we, for example, remind our co-workers to focus on the positives, the Loving outcomes of the daily work activities. Or when we teach our young child the simple skill of focusing on the positives, as a basis for the creation of positive outcomes. The simple becomes the profound, my friend.

SOUL FAMILY THROUGH TIME

Now these groupings of humans engaged in concerted collective efforts, such as this Vanguard, exist over time. For purposes specific to the group, members will incarnate during the same timeframe, and experience the Value Fulfillment achieved through their activities.

For example: a group of religious devotees who incarnate in the time of the prophets to study and worship as a collective, may upon death of the physical form, go on a sabbatical of sort in the Home Dimension and others, and not obtain a physical body for hundreds of years. This group may then take a bodies as a group of scientists working on a problem in physics within one of our universities in our present timeframe.

Soul Family groupings exist at all “levels” of consciousness manifestation. Consciousness creates realities. What you might call “negative” or “cynical” or perhaps “regressive” consciousness, therefore, seeks out opportunities to create negative, cynical, regressive realities, again, for purposes of fulfilling these particular values. So at any one point in our history, you see, we may have unfolding many different mass movements of Reality Creation upon our planet.

Currently, for example, we have the movement of healers, lightworkers, our New Age who share the planet and our timeframe with the practitioners of the extreme opposites of these values. I trust I am not appearing unnecessarily vague. You know what I mean here, Dear Blog Reader. We have our work cut out for us, to coin a phrase.

Our gains in fulfilling values of Loving Understanding, Courage, compassion and the like, will of necessity come at a “price,” in or view of things. There is no good or evil, only our thinking makes it so, to again coin a phrase for illustration. Yet thinking and consideration and study are precisely what are required here. This means finding distinctions, marking off where we stand ethically, as perhaps “opposed” to other ethical standards.

Certainly we will be waging what appears to be a war against evil, of good against evil. Yet may I remind here, since all is one, we are in essence merely confronting our own “unacceptable” self. We are always reacting to our own projections. Here we are reacting to the projecting of our personality aspects out onto the world.

GROUP EFFORT

We are the Vanguard. As I have discussed previously, we have in all probability incarnated this time around to fulfill our obligations once again as advocate for our Mother Earth and for humanity.

Believe me when I say this…. it will take many hundreds of thousands of us to turn the tide of negativity and destruction on our world. Yet that is exactly what I propose in these Blog writings… that those of you who read my Blog words here and understand them, call upon your friends and family and business associates who may be of similar mind as you, to join us in this Research Project – the creation of positive realities.

Yet the majority of newly enlighten members of this family of ours will already be engaged on the subtle levels. Telepathy is the communication network on the Etheric Planes and all of us are well-versed in this system.

Additionally, of course, we also create worlds both probable and actual with our powerful thoughts. And so you see, this is the method. This is how we shall recreate the current Consensus Reality into one more attuned to the positive aspects of humanity: Love, Compassion, Courage.

NAVIGATING THE CONSENSUS REALITY FIELD

Hypothesis: We may contribute to the positive manifestation of world realities.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

Relax. Achieve your Trance State. You are a member of the Entity. You are in active alliance with the Entity through reading this Blog material. Knowing this, follow your Intention – your Divine Will – down into your personal Underworld with the full expectation of witnessing the creation of Global Consensus Realities.

If you encounter Negative Beings of any type, strengthen your Sanctuary of protection with your Intention. Pass through these domains of confusion and control. When you experience a sense of peace, Loving Understanding and a strong sense of the other Virtues of humanity, attempt to perceive with you Inner Senses the activities within this domain.

You may well have reached the Consensus Reality Field of the Positive Manifestation we speak about in these Blogs. If you receive confirmation that you have arrived, let your own positive ideas, images, beliefs and emotions serve to strengthen and validate this phenomenon.

See the New World of peace and Loving Understanding begin to solidify and materialize within Third-Dimensional Reality. Return to surface awareness.

FINDINGS – Document your discoveries.

PRELUDE TO NAVIGATING THE CONSENSUS REALITY FIELD

The following experiment has as its objective, accessing the state of emerging reality we are calling the Consensus Reality Field. This is indeed a timeless experiencing, for we are within the webwork of creation in a pre-manifestation stage of awareness. Time as we think of it – linear time -does not exist.

In this state of awareness we will be cultivating, we will witness the emerging reality of the moment. As we know, the moment is all we have, Dear Blog Reader. The moment is all there truly is. It is only the emotional attachments to past, present and future moments that keep us tied to the wheel of life – the continuous unfolding of “events.” So this awareness we are asking to develop exists beyond time as we understand it. This state may be experienced through the use of the Inner Sense or Intuition.

This Reality Field is vast within our current Moment Point. For this reason, the researcher must narrow the focus of study to a simple line of inquiry. The World reality expressed in the “historical narrative,” you might say, includes the reputed “true” narratives of the various mass media of our planet. From this soup of converging “facts,” incidents, ideas and images, emerges what we are describing in this Blog as the status quo or Consensus World Reality.

So this Gestalt of Consciousness is largely a product of our Negative Media. Are you beginning to understand my point here? If we as a Scientist of Consciousness are to adequately access, understand and change for the better our perceived Consensus World Reality, we must certainly be at first very skilled in focusing on our subject. If we are not ultimately focused and strong in this endeavor, we will be “blown away” – a metaphor we have used before – by the energy, ideas and images we will face in this experiment.

We must be strong. The negative energies that seek to dominate our world are quite formidable, in that they are energized through the tapping into of fear within the population. Fear, hatred, anxiety, ruthlessness… these are the states of consciousness that feed the growth of the Negative Entities. So we must be fairly adept at transforming fear and anxiety into Courage, Loving Understanding and personal power. We must have reached an advanced state of self-awareness so that we will not be overcome when you enter the arena in which these Entities exist.

Now as we have also documented in these Blog writings, the Beings of Light, in a sense “riding” on a wave of benevolent energy – Love and Courage – are also active in the domain of Consensus World Reality creation. These Higher-Dimensional Beings and Spiritual MastersGestalts of Consciousness energized by the Loving energies of generations upon generations of “do-gooders” from our planet Earth and elsewhere – are actively confronting the Negative Beings on these levels of consciousness.

I trust you are with me so far. This may now all seem like a colorful fairytale for some of you in a fashion so that more are inclined to understand than deny.

PROJECTIONS

Now this process begins with you. We are connected to everything in the created Universe through a divine relationship between the (CUs) Consciousness Units that make up our physical and etheric body and the CUs that combine to create those Reality Constructs that “seem” to reside outside of our consciousness. We only appear to be separate. We only seem to be disconnected from our environment. In actuality, our entire exterior world is first within us – within our creative consciousness or mind.

We have spoken of this essential within-ness of our world. Each and every physical Reality Construct is “born” from an idea within us that is cast upon our outside world, much as a motion picture projector casts the images onto a screen for our perception. This we already know.

Now these projections of physical reality serve a purpose for us individually, for others in our Soul Family and for those in our greater Soul Family – humanity. Much as we might learn a lesson from an educational film at our school, we learn our Life Lessons from the self -created “projections” of our ultimately creative human consciousness.

We might be thinking to ourselves, “Wonderful! I am connected to everything. This is a good theory to think about, but how can I use it practically in my daily life?” Of course, we are already using this knowledge in our everyday life. We are just doing so unconsciously in a rote fashion.

Knowing and accepting that we are the creator of our world may allow us to experiment with conscious creation. We will in fact be consciously co-creating our Soul’s agenda for learning. Victimhood falls away when such a perspective is established within our human mentality. Also, of course, we gain the great responsibility for creating positive Loving realities for the greater good of all.

THE UGLY AMERICAN

Millions of us are assisted in our denial of the sacred by our leaders, by our nation, by our colleagues. This is why we continue to suffer the negative outcomes of our Consensus Reality creations. Excuse me for just one moment while I speak directly to those of you in the U.S.A. on the subject of “The Ugly American.”

It may well make you feel uneasy as I describe to you the shadow of our once great country. It is the negative counterpart to the positive expressions of our America. We will not hear of these discussions in our mass media, the Negative Media I have just described. This is the unofficial version of what has come from our actions as a nation upon the world stage.

With our very negative actions at this time, we are quite effectively preventing the manifestation of the New World – the Unity of Consciousness Dimension – within our collective awareness.

Our country, through our several wars, through our Negative Media and propaganda, through the tainting of our very culture with the evil of our leaders who have no sense for what is right for the people or the country, is preventing the perceptual breakthrough into the Fourth Dimension that I have been discussing in these Blog messages.

There are many of us who believe the lies told to us by our misguided leaders. It is true, often it is much easier to believe a lie. That is why many of us believe that all is well with our leaders and our country. For to question that authority would force us to acknowledge that the reality for us is just the opposite of the propaganda. Who wants to admit that they have been swindled? Who would easily admit that they were wrong on matters of such great importance?

It is a very, very important task to find and admit the TRUTH in these matters. For when the truth is found and acknowledged, only then does the work begin. All of the years of lies and manipulation have left us with a stagnant culture. The Soul’s evolution has been cut short. It is now time to begin our individual and collective transformation.

IGNORING THE TRUTH

The creation of positive realities is our responsibility. It is a personal issue. Because we are the creator in physical reality, it is a matter of how aware we become of our responsibilities.

Now the great majority of us, it is true, will remain in a sleep state, in a manner of speaking, right up until the time of the Dimensional Shift. On the surface it will appear as though we are unaware of the changes that our civilization is going through. Yet for most of us, there will be a great change already underway on the subtle levels.

We are being prepared for the transformation in the dream state. We are not aware of this, however, as we go about our waking reality. We prefer to “pretend” that life as usual continues to unfold, without any great upheavals to anticipate.

For this group of people the shift will take place over-night, quite literally. They will awaken one day and suddenly appreciate the vast changes they have undergone, as individuals and as parts of the collective. These are of the type of humans that wishes to “not think about” the future that much, for the future will “take care of itself.” This group comprises many millions of us on our Earth,

To pretend that business as usual is being experienced at this time in our history is a form of denial, a denial of the Soul Self. On the level of the Soul’s experiencing, we know full well that great changes are underway for us.

Constantly we are reminded of this by Beings of Light as they transmit their messages into our mental sphere. It is a simple matter to ascribe these messages, as we stated in the first couple Blogs of this Series, to bad memories or other forms of “negative thinking.” Then we may go on our way, blissfully unaware on an ego/intellect level, of what our Soul most surely knows. Let us present an example to make this clear for the Blog Reader.

Suppose you are a typical human of the type I am describing. That is, you are one who discounts, perhaps as spiritual bullshit, the statements of your associates that describe the hearing of the voices of dead ancestors. Or else you deny accounts of those who describe the means to avoid a calamity they faced on the highway, as in an accidents or some such thing, as coming from a nonphysical source. The intuitive voice is discounted here, you see. These humans may even ascribe the great luck of winners of various prizes or monies from the inside information given to them by their Angels or etheric advisers to mere coincidence. They deny the voice of the sacred in the lives of others, and so they must be consistent as they deny the voice of the sacred within their own lives.

NEGATIVE MEDIA

Now we may discuss affecting the Consensus World Reality from the privacy of our own Personal Reality Field. Just as our advice to “keep a good thought” a simplistic solution to transform negative realities – was offered to you the blog reader, this technique of contributing to the Positive Manifestation within the Consensus World Reality from our Personal Reality if offered with just as much surety that you will find success. The simplistic becomes the profoundly effective, as in other examples we have discussed.

Now what are we saying, in so much as we are describing the Positive Manifestation? First let me state emphatically that we are NOT describing the reality presented to you in the media. You well know by now that I am quite impatient with the purveyors of madness and violence and negativity that we refer to as the Negative Media.

These media would be the sensationalist newspapers, the war-mongering television programs presented as “news,” the violent controlling internet websites. These media present what we might call “the accepted” worldview of our deluded leaders and their business associates, the pillagers of our worldly goods, including our natural resources, the stores of our Mother Earth.

This is why we find ourselves prisoners of quite toxic Consensus Reality, you see. Many of us are using the “templates” offered to us by these Negative Media, to create a negative fearful reality. In a sense, many of us believe it is our “civic duty” to do so.

For example: some of us believe with all our might that we are good citizens if we prepare for the “imminent” terrorist attack from our “enemies.” And so we stock up on the necessities of life in preparation for a few months or years underground, in our safe room. This is ridiculous my friend. Now I am certainly not speaking to you personally here, I am referring simply to those of you who have fallen under the spell of negative conditioning perpetrated by our leaders and the business interests that “rule” our world.

But let us examine what sort of Consensus Reality we help to create from the “safety” of our safe room. Are you contributing to a world based on Love and the acceptance of our fellow human beings without judgment of fear? I think not. In all probability, we are from our safe room, merely adding to the hatred, adding to the fear, helping to do our part in the perpetuation of negative realities.

THE CONSENSUS REALITY FIELD

The Consensus Reality Field is our term for the broader field of Reality Creation of which we are a part by virtue of our individually created world. Our Personal Reality Field serves us well within our niche in our environment. It is “tailor made” according to our specifics, both conscious and unconscious. Now the broader field of Reality Creation may be thought of as comprising, for example, our neighborhood, our city, our state, our country, our hemisphere and finally our world – the planet Earth.

I will not bore you with more descriptions of how we create the Personal Reality Field. Suffice it to say that you and the others who live in our neighborhood, achieve a consensus while sleeping on what will be created, in so far as our neighborhood goes, upon awakening. Obviously this holds true for the manifestation of our city’s Consensus Reality, our state’s and so on.

DIALOGUE – TRUTH

Now briefly, our world is in the middle of the Fourth-Dimensional Shift. In our U.S.A. and other countries we risk succumbing to the forces of hatred and totalitarianism. As our election will again demonstrate, the system is broken. The will of the people is subverted.

It will take action on the part of many millions of us in the West to turn the tide. We do not have the numbers yet because we are complacent and afraid. But as the media gradually begin to present truthful stories for all to read, our numbers will grow. Act now to help make it happen. Participate in our community to encourage the truthful representation of reality within our media and within our communities.

DIVINE KNOWLEDGE

We often use the phrase in these new Blog messages, “I am not telling you to something you do not already know.” This is a statement of fact. We are merely reminding you the Blog Reader of the knowledge you have acquired in your many voyages into physical form. This information on the nature of reality and the use of energy, you first brought with you from your existence in non-physical reality, before your ” physical” birth into human body. Now this knowledge also is a part of your FUTURE heritage, if you may understand this conundrum of mine.

Perhaps a better way to describe the relearning phenomenon in which we are engaged is this… bleed throughs – the perceptual breakthrough of our current self into other Simultaneous Lives – occur throughout our waking and dreaming periods. These are learning “field trips” in which our current conscious perception tunes-in on one or more of our past, other current or future lives. This is a function of the multitasking Soul Self as we awaken to our multidimensional experiencing. This is the acquiring of the Divine Knowledge we constantly refer to in these Blog manuscripts.

On a basic level, we already know this material. That is why it seems so familiar to you. That is why it seems so true. You have perfected this system in your numerous future incarnations, again in your familiar terms, assuming the linear time illusion that is favored in our dimension. And so you see, I use the phrase “this you already know” as a device to hopefully trigger memories here.

The little bleed-throughs that we experience I hope will keep us motivated enough to continue the voyage. These are tools the non-physical beings use as we attempt to educate humanity. The phrase is a deep and empowered one, a profound suggestion. However, just accepted it playfully and see where it leads us. This phrase may help us to wake-up to our greater reality.

LESSON OF DIABETES

Let us provide another example here. To recap for the Blog Reader, it is my suggestion that the great majority of human beings realize what are the Lessons they have come to Earth to learn. They are perceived as faint memories by most of us.

These distant perceptions are glimpses of the Soul Self as it attempts to penetrate the barrier of the ego/intellect. These “memories” may indeed be “powered” by the Negative Emotions. That is precisely why we avoid thinking about these Lessons. It is a wholly natural response to the Negative Emotions: avoidance.

Now the example concerns a human in the throes of bringing up to the surface of consciousness their Wisdom Lessons. Perhaps they have avoided thinking about these issues for many years, perhaps the majority of the life lived. However, now it is time to confront this difficult material, come what may.

Specially, let us say that this human has avoided social contact with others to any degree out of fear of being criticized. Perhaps they were criticized relentless by others when they were young. This fearful approach has become a lifestyle, forcing the subject to live behind closed doors, in a sense, even though they secretly yearn for human contact.

As we have stated in The Healing Regimen Blog, the diabetic, for example, may be learning Lessons of appreciation and Love with this illness. They have not enjoyed the sweetness that life offers, such as perhaps the special contact so necessary to normal development for the human. To remedy this, it is suggested that one would intentionally LEARN how to appreciate the life being lived.

The human would do well to attempt to EMBODY appreciation, to BECOME appreciation. The next simple step would be to courageously transmit this LEARNED emotional state to others intentionally. The sweetness of life is sweet indeed, but only when we notice it and experience it and then “pass it along” to others, to use the vernacular.

I am certain that this message from The Entity is appropriate for many of us, beyond those who are “diabetic.” To embody the opposite of the Negative Emotions we are experiencing, is a very potent method of magical creation.

PUNISHMENT?

Now there are times for us, as researchers and learners of Lessons, when we may seem to be engaged in ardently co-creating our reality in a very responsible fashion. We are “doing everything right,” let us say, and diligently attending to the transformation of Negative Emotions into their divine opposites. We are doing so very well in this endeavor that we perhaps feel as though we should be rewarded in some way, feeling that the Powers That Be could “have mercy” on us, so that we might relax and enjoy ourselves for a period of time. Yet let us say that we still continue to experience a challenging existence with a series of quite negative events serving to “drive home” this harsh reality.

“Am I being singled out for punishment,” you might ask yourself. Now we must at times such as these, revert back to first principles. We create our own reality. If we are feeling victimized, we are ultimately the tormentor. If we are in the midst of painful, negative personal dramas, we are ultimately the director, the producer and also the cast of these dramas.

We are composed of many personality aspects within our Personal Reality ego/intellect. But our greater personality or Higher Consciousness also participates through a lending of energy to the “dramatic flow” of the events in our life. In this way, we are whole – the cosmos – and us are also the individuals living component of the whole. I believe I must elaborate further on this phenomenon for our ULTIMATE understanding.

The reason that we sense a familiarity in the scenes of our everyday life, as if all of the characters in these daily dramas of ours are our “relations,” is that everyone we meet and interact with moment-to-moment is indeed our relation. The relevant aspects of our Higher Self are reflected through these other personalities relative to the learning of our individual, Soul Family and Entity Lessons.

Naturally there would be a familiarity in this dance of synchronicity we know as physical reality. We act in concert, then, at any one time and all of the time, with our cohorts, keeping our appointments with “perfect strangers,” to enact our behaviors in the quest for Value Fulfillment. We shall have more to say on this phenomenon in our forthcoming Blog on Soul Family.

THIS IS OUR LIFE

This is our life, you see. This dramatic and sometimes comedic performance in Earthly flesh is our life, for which we have PURPOSEFULLY incarnated. We are experiencing both the positive and the negative life has to offer. Yes it is true that we inevitably age and die, perhaps being subject to much pain and suffering; yet there is also joy in these sequential moments of our life.

With the proper attitude we may even experience our suffering moments in what can be described as “joyful appreciation.” This may be difficult to comprehend for some of us. Let us have an example of how this paradox of feeling and behavior might be experienced by any one of us as we go about our meaningful lives.

As we awaken to the Unity of Consciousness Dimension, we will gradually become more aware of our Simultaneous Lives. Within these lives we are living the broad spectrum of existence. Thus, as we retain memories of a life lived within a society as a tortured being who is daily subjected to painful living experiences, we may compare this life with our current existence in the modern world.

Do you see how we might experience a sense of joyful appreciation for our current life? Relative to other lives we are living in the midst of great pain and suffering, our current existence may be regarded as joyful and complete.

TWO-STEP ACTIVITY

This is how our Third-Dimensional system was “set up.” It is an arena for the experiencing of Negative Emotions. However , eventually we must face this aspect of our personality. We each are called upon to address the negative thoughts within our mental sphere and the negative events in our existence and the Negative Emotions that “appear” to be caused by the negative in our momentary experiencing and “owning” it. The awakening human recognizes their responsibility in the creation of negative realities.

Wisdom Lessons, then, refer to this two-step activity. First the researcher, through experimentation and analysis in the laboratory that is the Personal Reality, arrives at Findings specific to their Life Lessons. These Findings may have been “hidden from view” for many years. They represent the hard truth of the developing personality over time. None of us are perfect. The human in physical incarnation may strive for perfection, but of being is reserved for other dimensional-experiences.

So the truth is made known through experimentation. What we have been denying is revealed to us in all of its harsh and intense glory. Now what does the awakening human do with this information? In our system the method is clear: with the developing skills of creating Loving Understanding and Courage out of anger, denial and fear, the researcher transforms the difficult material into its divine opposite.

Now this Loving Understanding entails acceptance of the negative Findings on all levels of creature hood. We are responsible, as I have said in earlier Blogs. We are the creator of our world and the events within our world. Accepting our responsibility for our creations is the necessary first step here.

The second step entails understanding and the gaining of wisdom or Divine Insight. This is accomplished by allowing the Soul Self to perceive our world. The ego/intellect is gently placed to the side and the Higher Consciousness is brought through the portal of creation – the ajna center directly between the eyes. This may be accomplished by meditation or visualizing the Divine as coming through our physical body construct.

We will naturally create our own imagery, thought and emotion for this exercise. Throughout the New Blog material I have given many techniques to accomplish this.

THE SOUL’S PERSPECTIVE

The soul sees the truth of our existence; that all is Love…

Now what occurs here in the “disappointing” moment is this… our ego? Intellect creates a sense of Lack for our having experienced less than was expected. The ego intellect is motivated through the concerns of the personality. The Soul Self, on the other hand, is motivated from an expectation of Love, that is all. The egoic concerns do not concern the Soul Self. The Soul Self does not ever hold unreasonable expectations.

The Soul sees the truth of our existence: that all is Love. It is only through the misguided perceptions of the ego/intellect that we, for example, would become disappointed – “depressed” as we say – if we were expecting a lavish birthday cake, and received only a small cookie with a candle in it.

Now seeing through the eyes of the Soul Self, what do we suppose we would see in this gift of the cookie? We would see, from this divine perspective, only Love with a capital L. The gift would be appreciated for the bestowal of Love upon the recipient that it indeed was.

FACING THE MUSIC

The Lessons of Negativity can be faced now. We have tools to deal with these Lessons. Now this is the way that it works for us with all types of behaviors: whatever elicits the perception of satisfaction or happiness is pursued relentlessly. Whatever seems to create the Negative Emotions is most usually avoided. There are, of course, exceptions to this rule in every life.

We have noted previously in this Blog material the tendency for the “depressed” person to create Reality Constructs that perpetuate the state of depression, as though there were a certain muted satisfaction in depression. Generally, however, the negative states are avoided by most of us.

For example: this is particularly true in the developed nations as we call ourselves. We are certainly “developed” in so far as access to material wealth is concerned. However, it is the rest of the world’s peoples who have the edge in matters of spiritual understanding, spiritual wealth. In the developed countries we are easily diverted from spiritual considerations by the many objects of mass consumption made available to us through our shopping centers, for example, through our mass media, and so on.

Dear Blog reader, we are easily diverted in the moment by these requests from our creators of “shiny things.” We are easily distracted for we are “waiting for an excuse” to avoid our Lessons. As we have suggested in these Blogs, like children, many would rather not consider our Lessons in physical reality, and would rather buy something we desire to feel good for the moment. If we are feeling anxious or depressed, we buy something. If we are grieving or in physical or psychological pain, we buy something to “make ourselves feel better.”

As you know, it is the adrenaline and other substances released in our body that creates this “feeling better” state of consciousness. Over time we become dependent on this satisfied emotional state and we may find ourselves purchasing more than we need or can afford to keep “happy.” The Lessons of Negativity are thus avoided.

NAMES OF GOD

I wish to make a point that All That Is encompasses all those names. The readers of this Blog should understand that their versions of god, whatever they call him or her, is encompassed in All That Is. All That Is is an infinite high-energy source. It is impossible for that mass of energy to contain itself into one specific life form. Not even for a minute is it capable of doing this.

We are all, extensions of All That Is in that we use this energy source to experience our lives and as we evolve so does All That Is. Every thought, every action, every feeling, every situation, every moment in time and space is different with each individual. No two people or beings will ever experience the exact situation in the exact same way. All That Is is experiencing what it has created in every way possible, thus expanding its abilities as well as ours, for All That Is is always acquiring more and more knowledge of itself through the existence of souls throughout the Universe, not just our limited little Universe that we are aware of but there are thousands of galaxies just like ours in the infinite amount of space.

THE CHART ON HEALING OUR OTHER SELVES

Simply visualize. Make it as a fan that comes out in front of you when you are concentrating and send those energies to those lives. And don’t be overly concerned about whether they are received. Just do it and be done with it and move on with your day. It will be done as long as you do it. We interact telepathically with other portions of our energy day and night, were just not aware of it. There’s far more there than we can possibly comprehend in the third dimension but I’ve made it as simple as possible for the reader of this Blog. This is you, as you send the energies out to other portions of yourself.

“You visualize yourself. This is your self that you are focused in right now, in this point of power and you are sending healing energies to all of your lives. You then affect all experiences since they’re all related.”

It is only a past in our terms because of our linear thinking and the logic behind the time/space continuum. We are in a timeframe so we constantly consider the past over and done with. The past is not over and done with any more than the future does not exist, for they all exist together. They are all there. There are portions of our energy in each one of these lives, living these lives. Think of it this way: we have set up a variety of different lessons and scenarios with which we want to learn. We’ve picked various different lives and timeframes that we wish to be born into. For the timeframe of the Earth plane, we need only to enter within that portal of time to begin to focus on that particular life.

We are all focusing right now as we speak on this particular timeframe, the events of this part of our world’s experiences, the perceived reality of our world I should say without getting too technical here. I want this to be absorbed by the reader of this Blog in the most simplistic of terms. Now, we have in front of us, lets say, a dozen lives and we’ve said to oneself, “Ok I’m, going to choose this one now. Many others are going into this timeframe and I wish to go into this timeframe too. This is the life where I will go to learn the lessons I have set up for myself.” Based on our own point in evolution we may enter into that life more highly-evolved than others and use that knowledge to assist in the evolution of the others. We may have chosen experiences in other timeframes prior to choosing that one that were either farther into the future as we know it or farther back.

The point is that we choose what timeframes to enter into based on our own personal evolution and what we wish to bring to that timeframe from our base of evolutionary knowledge. Now all of the lives, as I said, are being lived simultaneously. When we are done focusing on one of those lives, we will go back to our home dimension, evaluate the life we have focused on and decide what it is that we needed to learn. Did we learn and experience that and do we need to go back and do it again or can we move on with another lesson in another life in another timeframe on Earth or wherever? We make those decisions. They are there, but because we only focus the greater ball of energy on one at a time, this is where our point of power is.

Now it’s not to say that we don’t have a point of power in all those other lives, for we do, but we are not aware of them in our present life. We are not aware that we are focusing on any of those lives because our focus is here and now in this timeframe. We are getting thoughts from all of ourselves all of the time, we are just not aware of it. The thoughts that we send out now are the thoughts that we wish to affect those personalities in those other lives, to help the evolution of our soul.

Now let me add one thing here. When we are in our home dimension preparing to enter into one of our lives and we did not or were not able to learn the lessons we had chosen, as in the case of suicide, we will go back into that period of time that we have just exited from almost immediately. There is a Universal Law involving suicides, which is only circumvented in very special cases where one was already scheduled to die because of terminal illness. In the case of unjustified suicides, we will go back and be reborn from the standpoint of a baby and you will still be within that perceived reality and belief system of the individuals of that time period from which we just came and we will have to re-experience all over again a life similar to the one we opted out on, until the lessons are learned and the contract fulfilled.

Because the evolution of mankind/womankind takes on what seems to be a slow process, we might miss out on a few years at best, but we will be right back in the same lessons with pretty much the same identical perceived realities. Due to the accelerated pace of our current evolution, for reasons that I won’t go into at present, there may be some changes as to what dimensional-level we we re-enter into. Since our planet is in the midst of a massive evolutionary change, many of us will not be returning into a three-dimensional reality. This is all predicated on how swiftly our citizens realign their consciousness.

The intense energy being poured into our world at this time by the forces of light is going to dramatically affect our entire world as our planet makes this necessary shift into the unity of consciousness dimension. Many of us will re-enter into that dimension because of this evolution. Many of the souls entering into our world at present through the birth process are already evolved to that level and will be assisting the rest of the world to make the transition and will also help with the restructuring of civilization.

We are evolving into Light Beings. In the fourth dimension our bodies will be lighter and more etheric than the dense physical bodies we have now, “light” also meaning information and knowledge. We will be aware of all our simultaneous lives and their experiences for we will be able to feel them and remember them. It is not to judge them though, but to go forth and acknowledge them for what they are, learning experiences that we wished to learn.

Our spiritual knowledge has been kept from us far too long. It is the knowledge that has been always been available to us but has been taken from us within our mass systems of belief, through our religions and our governments. I have not intended to put down the religious systems as they have their place in helping mankind/womankind, but they have also been great perpetrators of darkness. As you notice with the 9/11 event. The terrorists mask their actions and beliefs behind the label of god and religion. This is true in many aspects of government as well, for they try to keep us in the dark about other beings within the Universe for fear that they will be stepping on the toes of the religious leaders.

The forces that are trying to prevent us from gaining our soul’s knowledge are busily at work trying to keep us in the dark. They go to great lengths to feed off of our negativity. We can see how they have controlled our media. Unwillingly and unwittingly many souls fall prey to this belief system thinking that they are doing the right thing, when in actuality they are being manipulated by the forces of dark. They have handed over power of their thoughts to others thus serving up mankind/womankind huge plates of fear and negativity on a daily basis.

SIMULTANEOUS LIVES

Our point of power is the sum of energy that empasses our current life as we now experiencing it. When we engage in sending thoughts of healing to our other lives we are using the energy available to us. Now to send messages to those other life experiences. Those other lives are not consciously aware of what we are doing but telepathically they are receiving the thoughts. This healing often affects decisions that we would be making thus altering our experiences. Our hope is that those experiences would be for the better and that the lessons chosen in those timeframe would be accomplished.

We are also altering our experiences in our now by the thoughts that we are sending to ourselves from other portions of those lives. As we raise the vibrational hum of our being through awareness, we affect the outcome of our future experiences. The raising of our vibrations also affects the rest of society and helps move the planet and its beings into its next level of consciousness. We are bringing that love-light energy to the future-light because we have the energy available in this point of power to send those thoughts. It is really not about a future life anyway because all chosen lives are based on our Soul’s evolution.

If we are to fully understand this one must move away from the time-constraint thinking for it is not relevant when not in incarnation. I know that you are confused as to how we can live all of these lives simultaneously, but I mentioned earlier they have all been chosen and set up for us to experience. There is no time as we know it in the home dimension of the Soul as well as many other dimensions. There are many probable realities involved in all of these lives.

The thoughts that we think now, the behaviors that we take on now, the ideas that we assume for our own personal reality affect all of these lives and our evolution. They are not consciously aware of it, however the effect is taking place because they are all part of the same energy essence of you-the-soul. Just as we are not consciously aware of them, they are not consciously are of us. But the messages that we send back and forth to each other do enter into the subconscious mind and are received, whether or not we are aware of it.

We are beginning the process with our thoughts. As our thoughts move toward the light, the vibrational hum of the beings on the planet and the planet itself will move into the change. As the beings move towards the light – the light being knowledge and information – the DNA within the human being will evolve from the double helix to the twelve strands, each twelve strands corresponding to the twelve chakras. This DNA evolution will affect the body. AS I talked about earlier in my Blog, the thoughts of our planet the energies of all of our beings, create the entire environment of our planet, the weather and all the perceived realities within that system.

When the vibrational hum of the masses is raised to its new level of awareness and into the light, the planet is able to evolve with its beings. If we move towards the dark or stay within the dark, no knowledge will be brought forth, because darkness does not allow for information and knowledge. We will remain the same of a lesser quality than we are presently, “quality” meaning we will not physically or spiritually evolve. We will stay within the confines of the third-dimensional reality.

Earth is moving forward. It is not in the throes of the backwards momentum. It is moving forward into its next phase on its evolutionary path. If we succumb to the dark forces, we will only succeed in relinquishing our soul’s evolution to the powers of those who wish to repress and confine the very nature of our being.

As we move into the light the knowledge that has always been there for us will start to show itself within our being. We will be aware of many things we thought impossible to comprehend. That is the process of moving towards the light, the evolution of mankind’s/womankind’s physical being as well as the evolution of his/her soul. We may be asking, “How do I move towards this light?” Our thoughts are what move us towards the light. If we constantly harbor thoughts of darkness then we will be in darkness. The power is ours. It has always been ours.

When we take back our power that we have generously relinquished to other forces and use it for the further evolution of our soul we will have started the process. It is no longer necessary to subscribe to the mass beliefs of the doctrines that have been systematically placed into our being for centuries. We are all starting to wake up, some of us quicker than others. Those of us who resist by your own free will still wallow in our greed and manipulation and stay within the realms of the Third Dimension, which I might add is going to be quite uncomfortable for us until we too seek the light. Those stubborn individuals will not be allowed to manipulate the minds of humanity much longer.

SYMBOLS

Let me begin, in the transition from one form of energy to another, for each life lesson that is completed, a symbol is chosen by us. This symbol is a reminder of the life experienced and generally it relates to the lesson or contract theme as it was completed. For instance, if we came into our life to perfect the experience of humility, and that experience was perfected, then the symbol would be chosen. The symbol is chosen by the individual, for you and is personal to one’s soul development.

The Council members for example have quite an elaborate array of symbols all together on one piece, which they wear around their necks. Since these beings have had many experiences, they are quite intricate. The same applies to you. Your symbol is your reminder. Now, when meditating often you will see these symbols, you may wonder what they are. If you look further, you will see that they have to do with the lessons learned in previous, past or future lives, since all lives are simultaneous. Now let me make this clear, that the present life as you see it is your current focus, however in meditation you are fully capable of focusing on lives that you deem to be past or future. Often when reviewing one’s life before entering into another, the soul will bring forth to the meeting with The Council the symbols of the previous life or lives, as a reminder of lessons learned.

All communication being telepathic, the Council will know what the symbols mean and will be better able to advise on a new life experience based on those symbols. The Council is always available to help in these matters in choosing the next group of lessons that are for you to learn. One life is not automatically predetermined to be the life following the previous. In other words, you may choose whatever lessons you are slated to learn in any order in which you want to learn them. Some lessons being very difficult. Other lessons may come in the form of an easy existence, thus explaining why some entities feel they are overwhelmed and have too much on their plate while others seem to skate through life without hardly a bruise.

It is all a matter if when you choose to participate in these lessons and their level of difficulty for your spiritual evolution. If you have had many seemingly trying lifetimes, you may then decide the next incarnation will be more peaceful to you. Now, keep in mind, not all incarnate on a variety of other existences. Solar systems and planets, however most of us will come back to Earth for this phase of our spiritual growth as most of our chosen experiences are part of Earth’s solar system and we are part of that Creator’s plan. The lessons that you have choose to learn and the stage of your soul evolution will determine the place in which you will manifest your energy.

The Earth’s third dimension encompasses your physical type of body which is usually chosen for the experience needed to evolve at the level. That is not to say that those on other planets do not have a physical body for they do. They are just different than ours because of some of the atmosphere conditions. Regardless, the symbols are many and there are multitudes of them.

When referring to the Council for guidance as to what group of lessons you wish to learn in your next incarnation (if you choose to do so) you will refer to your symbols. The more incarnations one takes on and the more lessons completed the more complex your symbols become. It begins to take on a complex personality of its own so to speak because it contains all your life lessons. It is worn as a medallion would be worn.

It is up to the individual as to how the soul makes the correlation between the lesson that was learned and the symbol that it chooses to associate that lesson with. For instance, you may have a tree or symbol of a tree if that reminds you of something that you learned in the previous existence. This is left up to you because it will make the most sense to you.

However we are very familiar with each other’s symbols as we see them because telepathically we are able to understand the evolution of each soul based on his/her symbols. When communing with other souls in our home dimension, as we recognize each other and identify with each other, we also know what each other has learned in our evolution based on our symbols. We visually can see these as if they were draped around our neck as in a large circular medallion.

THE FORCES OF POWER

THE NEGATIVE MEDIA
The world’s media – through television, movies and the printed word – all have some dark content to serve up to us on a daily basis. Most of the individuals presenting this information to us have no clue that they are being systematically controlled by negative energies. They merely think that they are providing a service of filling a need for the insatiable appetite of our society’s obsession with violence. The soul-you is not   this kind of stimuli when not in incarnation, where everything in our home dimension is in harmony. This kind of stimuli is shocking to the soul and in a way we are curious as to the affects of what watching violence does to our physical body as it increases our adrenaline output, a purely physical sensation that itself is a high for us. As adrenaline increases, the natural reaction afterwards is a calming effect. Our society seeks this stimuli in an effort to “experience,” for our natural impulses to experience our life have been put to a halt, so we must seek other forms of stimuli to experience. All too often this comes in the form of negative, violent media productions.

If we will stop and take notice, a heartfelt movie or an experience where we have done something kind for a stranger will produce the same effects, but we ignore it, considering it not fashionable. We have succumbed to the will of the negative influences and our ego. It is not healthy for the mind, body and spirit of mankind/womankind to indulge itself in this kind of programming. We set ourselves up to fall into the belief systems of the negative influences. Take for instance our news stations. They rarely give us any good news and if they do, it is some human-interest story as filler for their regular programming. The brunt of the programming of our minds is in the negative arena, supporting our fears and outright encouraging them. Our media have very effectively turned our societies into fear-based societies. It seems as though no news is good news unless it’s bad news. We can change this. We do not have to accept a steady diet of negativity and fear. It is most detrimental to our psyche and our being as a whole to indulge in this kind of stimulation. It robs us if the true fulfillment of our soul’s purpose and interaction with the rest of humanity. It sets us up to distrust and fear the beings that we have incarnated with to experience our planet.

Our media could be used as effective tools with the right intentions to fight our war on terrorism without having to kill anyone. Given the right kind of information, humanity could elevate its consciousness quite willingly. I am often perplexed as to why this valuable invention of ours (television) has not been used to its greatest potential for the good of humanity instead of promoting negativity and fear. It is one of our greatest sources of power, yet it is used unwisely to convey messages that do not further the evolution of the soul in any way.

GOVERNMENT AND MAN’S GOD
Let us talk governments and man’s/woman’s god. Man’s/woman’s consciousness has always identified itself with the physical body first. Somewhere along the line, in developing the awareness of his being, the perception of time, birth and death became somewhat distorted. In the beginning of his/her evolution, he/she was less aware of a time/space constraint. His/her natural relationship with the earth and his/her original awareness of his/her creator were all he/she needed. Eventually though, that awareness was replaced with his/her newfound beliefs. He/she had created for oneself a god of man/woman that would be the prime director of his/she life. He/she had been fully aware that his/her consciousness and that of animals were working in harmony towards their own individual evolution. For both understood that their actions, whether prey or aggressor, were fulfilling the needs of each other’s species and guaranteeing their survival. Again, I am using “he” and “she” here only as a reference to encompass all humans within the framework of these Blog writings, since the soul has no gender.

Mankind/womankind has always felt within his/her greater being he/she was to have some controls put upon him/her for whatever reasons. He/she was unable to accept the idea that his/her being would and could fully experience itself under its own power. His/her limitations set him/her apart from other creatures. Instinctively in the beginning of his/her soul’s evolution he/she was more aware of oneself. As time passed though, in his/her eyes he/she became frightened of himself/herself and his/her curious impulses. He/she felt the need to control his/her nature. Mainly through superstitious beliefs and then creation of his/her versions of god, he/she became further and further ensconced in the beliefs that there was some part of his/her nature that he/she could not control. He/she felt it was best to hand over the power to other authorities that would then oversess his/her life and ensure that he/she was keeping oneself in line with his/her ideals.

RELIGION AND GOVERNMENT
The religious organizations man/woman envisioned to feed his/her need for spiritual growth were unwilling to deal with society’s legal problems. It became easy for him/her to shift the blame onto a law and thus not have to deal with the issues personally. For it is the law and the law must be followed and so on it went, never realizing that he/she was systematically cutting himself/herself off from experiencing the nature of his/her being which is basically good. With all of his/her pent-up anger and frustration, he/she was starting to experience another side of oneself that he/she did not understand and became fearful. Of course even before his/her creation of a government, he/she had always aligned oneself with a God-force. The concepts of a God have always paralleled the ideals established within the governmental structures.

Mankind’s/womankind’s ego needed to feel that it was still in control of itself, so it imagined for itself a god of man/woman, a god that took on the characteristics of man/woman and would be a god of power. This concept was most important to mankind’s/womankind’s developing ego and ideals. Many nations have formed their own idealized version of god, and oftentimes the majority of their wars were fought in the name of God. With the emergence of this human-like god who was given the power to punish man/woman for his/her perceived good and evil, came various forms of religion, many using fear as a tool to gain control of mankind’s/womankind’s soul.

Governments also seized upon the moment and in an effort to control mankind/womankind began using similar tactics that man has willingly accepted enmasses. In the Western world and some other nations a democracy was formed that aligned itself with society’s religious beliefs. This was a cooperative effort in order to maintain an accepted equilibrium in society. For some time this system has worked for mankind/womankind, however with the awakening of his/her consciousness he/she is no longer able to accept the fables and fairy tales of his/her nature. With religion and its more intuitional knowledge and government with its more intellectual knowledge, mankind/womankind was now embarking on a journey of conflicting wills.

As our conscious knowledge became more and more available to us, our ego has had to grapple with the old system of beliefs. The realities that we have been ignoring, we can no longer pretend do not exist. As our governing institutions, scientists, medical establishments and reiglions all mount their efforts to suppress this knowledge, mankind will rise up and expose them one by one. Governing bodies in today’s civilizations are of a massive nature. For every infraction that humans have been able to perpetrate, a law has been put into place to stop it. There are always those acting out of their own frustrations that will look for ways to circumvent the system in order to try to regain their power. It has been a fruitless effort at best. However all that is about to change.

Evolving as a species

RESPONSIBILITY FOR YOUR ACTIONS
Life on our planet was intended to offer to mankind/womankind an abundance of diversity. It was not intended that individuals would try to stamp out by any means available what they did not understand or did not fit into their own perceived set of ideals. This applies not only to the destruction of other humans but all species that exist on the planet Earth. The different cultures were set in place as a stimulus for creativity for mankind/womankind. It was intended from the beginning that Earth would be the planet that would have beings with free will and that there would be much diversity within its cultures. Humanity has used their free will and often destroyed it at the same time.

Because of our own perceived inadequacies we have sought out someone else to blame for our failures. Civilizations are rife with individuals playing the blame game. We alone are responsible for our actions. We have consciously made the decisions. Whether they are positive or negative, our thoughts stimulated us into action and what we have acted out upon we must claim as our own. Mankind/womankind has conveniently sidestepped accountability for his/her actions using whatever forum available to pass the buck. We should certainly be able to recognize this observing the actions of our politicians, as they are masters of this game. Every being if they truly examine their life’s motivations will find themselves guilty of blaming others for their life’s mishaps. We would benefit greatly of we would rise up and admit our failures and move on without endlessly punishing others for our distorted ideas of our reality.

Each being is here, as I have said before, to spiritually evolve. It is my sincerest desire as you read this material that all of us will put down our grievances against each other and consciously start to respect the life that was given to us and to others. We are very fortunate to have been able to incarnate on our beautiful planet Earth. There are millions and millions of beings waiting to come to Earth that have not been able to because our planet is relatively small compared to some of the others. It can only sustain so much life at one time. Humans should be using this opportunity to enjoy and share the lavish benefits of the planet and interact and experience their soul’s existence with all the others who have chosen to come here. It is not one of the more evolved planets of the multitude of Universes, however it has a vast amount of learning experience for those who choose to incarnate on it.

Behaviors of greed, violence, hate and war will only suffice to eliminate our being from ever experiencing our planet when it evolves its consciousness. Planets are being prepared to receive those that do not wish to move into the peaceful harmonics. I am told that Pluto is certainly one of those more inhospitable planets with a magnitude of fear that we have never known. Given our limited perception of what I am saying, many of us deny what we are hearing, but the fact still remains. We will find out when we experience the transition of our energy upon death of our physical body, that the thoughts we create now will affect our next reality.

No one is justified in the destruction of anyone else’s culture or nation. WE are seeing examples right now, with the fanatical ideas of rogue governments and terrorists, that if not got in check, humanity will experience the destruction of many nations. We are to experience and learn from each other, not stamp each other out like mosquitoes. When humanity follows leaders that have taken individuals on a path of self-destruction, then they are only furthering their own annihilation. There are no rewards in that for the soul, none whatsoever. Those individuals will be made to experience what they have done to others in their next incarnation, only their experience will be much harder and it may not be on Earth. We have free will. We may move forward in our evolution or we may not, the choice is always ours.

DANGER ZONE
At this time on our planet there is a great war going on between beings: those that have positive intentions for peace and goodwill for mankind/womankind and those that are in pursuit of negative power for domination of mankind/womankind. The scales are weighing in evenly and that is a dangerous situation for our planet. There are many probable realities in play at this time and it is up to the individuals an masse to ensure that the survival of our planet is taken seriously. Our belief systems should be examined carefully and necessary changes made within those systems if we as a species are to survive.

Most of us still have many incarnations that we would like to experience and learn from whether it be on Earth or elsewhere. The point here is that elsewhere may not be a very nice option. Much of humanity over the last 30 years has started to raise their vibrational hum and move into alignment with the plan of our world and many of us are ready to receive divine knowledge. Knowledge can only be given to us as we evolve, due to the Laws of Non-interference. As we evolve our consciousness the knowledge is released. It is why I do not give specific solutions to problems, because we are here to learn from our experiences and the answers are not to be just handed to us. It is up to us to work out our beliefs on our own and come to terms with our soul’s purpose and evolution in our own way. Many mistakes have been made. Also much has been learned.

At this time though, our planet is in danger of experiencing some very serious events unless all of us consciously examine what we have been doing. Our thoughts and actions will greatly affect the survival of our nations and our world. Never before has there been so much conflict in so many areas of our world. Never before has humanity been so close to destroying itself with its weapons of mass destruction. The negative influences that wish to keep us from evolving will use whatever means necessary to accomplish their goals. The forces of light have been diligently pouring their energies onto our planet in an effort to seal off the negative forces in their own dimension. With those energies many situations will appear to be out of control, but rest assured that the walls of dark must crumble down before they can be rebuilt with light.

FREE WILL – NATURAL IMPULSES
Within the many Universes, Earth is a most beautiful planet. It is teaming with all sorts of life that was specifically created to enhance its eco-system and the experiences of its inhabitants. It is a most desirable place to incarnate and experience life. It is also the only planet to incarnate and experience life. It is also the only planet where there are no boundaries as to what humans can experience. Free will is pervasive on our planet as it was intended to be. Our stories of Adam and Eve were to help mankind/womankind understand that free will was the thrust of his/her existence. Within the framework of those biblical manuscripts the ideas for humanity’s behavior were set into place, knowing that with free will here would need to be some boundaries within societies. Nowadays the boundaries are so restrictive that we have almost lost the ability to experience the very essence of our soul, and in feelings of frustration many wars have been fought.

Humanity knows through natural impulses how to experience itself, but because we have been taught to ignore those impulses, we have suppressed the natural creature-hood of our being. If we would allow those impulses their freedom, a whole world of experience would open up to us. We would joyously be able to experience everything that The Creator had intended for us. We have been fighting with others and ourselves because we have not been experiencing those impulses. We have thrown them into one of the dark recesses of our mind for fear that they are bad and only fools act impulsively experiencing their existence. Animals do not suppress their impulses. They do whatever comes naturally to them. They do not question their motives for they instinctively know what they need to do to survive. Babies and small children are always using their natural impulses to develop their experiences in life. It is only they are taught not to trust those impulses that they stop experiencing them.

If we would allow ourselves the freedom to experience our soul’s journey, much could be learned and there would be no need for wars. If we would learn to just dominate ourselves and not others, our evolution would be swiftly forthcoming. I use the word dominate here, because it seems to be a method of ours to conquer and control everything around us. Everything around us is perfectly capable of controlling itself and does not need to have the interference of another to suspend its experience on our planet. Children are a perfect example of experiencing life to its fullest, that is until the peers and parents inject their beliefs into them. If left alone to experience for themselves the wonders of our planet we would see that they are quite capable of learning for themselves and experiencing life. Certainty I am not telling  not to supervise our children and look out for them, but when our influence is so restrictive that our children cannot experience what come natural to them, then we are shutting down their creative impulses.

Humans have systematically suppressed the natural impulses of the species at a young age, thus spawning another generation of beings who are trapped into the belief systems of the generations before them. The same old indoctrination, drummed into their minds from generation to generation, eliminating any growth or wisdom obtained along the way. We have been systematically injecting our offspring with fear, our own fears, in an attempt to control.

If we are to evolve as a species, we cannot have societies in fear of their existence and afraid to experience their lives. We will end up with the negative forces claiming our planet as their home. These forces feed off of fear and negativity. They have an intrinsic way of filtering into our everyday way of life and our antiquated belief systems. They have had a hold on mankind/womankind for too long and as the fanatic, they will use whatever means available to them to subdue our consciousness and enslaves us to their negative way of thinking. The members of the Spiritual Hierarchy of our planet and Beings of Light are releasing vast amounts of energy into our world at present to prevent this from happening. But it is all predicted on how we respond with our free will as to in what direction our planet will move.

OUR POINT OF POWER – NOW
These messages that I am giving are to enable us to know SELF, to be in touch with the essence of our being: you-the-soul. Because we are presently focused on this life in this time, the changes that we make in this point of power will affect all of our simultaneous lives. We are focusing a greater portion of our energies on this timeframe now, however there are portions of our soul’s energies living out those simultaneous lives as well. We are experiencing all of our lessons at once, we are just not aware of it.

When we experience the transition of our energy from this life to our home dimension, we will be given at some point another opportunity to focus a greater portion of our energy on another one or more of the many lives we have set up for experiencing our spiritual evolution. We will enter that life or lives as we have entered this one, in that point in time as we know it. We will focus a greater portion of our energy on those lives. Now, the messages that we send to those life existences from our current point of power will be received and will affect the life experiences of those lives. This is important because our planet’s survival depends on our thoughts. Moving our thoughts and beliefs into a peaceful, loving direction and carrying out those thoughts in our actions in essentially what is going to save mankind/womankind from its own self-destruction. We are in our point of power now. Now is the time to utilize it to benefit all of our existences, past, present and future. It does not do us any good to pass the buck shall we say and hope that someone else can figure things out for us. At the end of this Blog I will give you an exercise to help us in this point of power.

Since we are in the throes of a planetary evolution, what we focus on now – the ideas and beliefs that we have now – are what is going to assist us. Many of us are very familiar with the concepts about how our energies affect the planet and for those of us who are aware of this, we should be able to see that the effects of this are happening all around us. It does no good to dwell in the negative for this is not the time.

As we observe the planet Earth from our dimension, the swirl of energy around her has been quite disturbing. We have experienced many mass events both in nature and with the behavior of our citizens. Earth cannot sustain this kind of energy for much longer. If its citizens do not start to raise their vibrational hums, the planet itself will revolt against mankind/womankind with more and more natural disasters. Since our energies create the weather and all of the planetary problems, it would behoove us to start to take a serious look at what we have been doing. If the citizens of the planet surround themselves with an abundance of negativity, that negativity will and does create disturbing weather patterns around the planet. Everything in our eco-system is affected by our mind/thought energy whether we realize it or not. We can eliminate all of the disturbing weather patterns if we change our thoughts and move into a loving peaceful alignment with each other and the planet. If we could see it from another dimension we would be saddened to see the destruction of what was once a beautiful paradise where all creatures lived in harmony with each other. It is not too late to change.

EXERCISE:
POINT OF POWER
As I have mentioned before in other Blogs, focusing on your own point of power will allow you to know you: your soul. Take five minutes out of your day to focus on your emotional, spiritual and psychic abilities and nothing else. This is of great benefit and will enable you to bring your physical being in alignment with you-the-soul. Focus on you, your soul and nothing else. Bring to your thoughts a desire for an awareness of your being. Listen to the hum of you, feel the vibrational hum of your being. Again, do this and then forget about it. It’s that simple. Notice how you feel after the five minutes are up. For the human vehicle it can be almost intoxicating to suddenly become aware of the soul of self and the peacefulness that surrounds it when the ego is not involved. As you do this daily, you will start to increase your own vibrational hum and move your being into alignment with the planetary evolution.

THE SOUL’S EVOLUTION – “We are all one”

All souls when not incarnated work harmoniously towards the evolution of all. There is no such thing as racial prejudice. When making the transition to our home dimension, in between lives where a body is not needed, many souls take on a persona that they are comfortable with whether it is male or female, dark or light, it makes no difference. Many will pick from an assortment of looks and mesh them together as a reminder of certain lives that they have incarnated into as a fond memory of those lives. Others will take on no special looks at all and simply radiate their love light. On this plane between lives we all recognize each other no matter what the current look is. We are able to change these looks at will and often do so. Our essences are well recognized by all that we know and always acknowledged by others that we do not know in a peaceful and harmonious manner. Our thoughts are read telepathically there. We are just coming into an awareness of this ability while incarnated in this phase of our evolution.

What I am getting at here is that this is the way we should learn to view others that are not of the same race or beliefs as oneself. We are all sprung from the same energy source and we are all connected as brothers and sisters in the Universe. It is our decision and ours alone to choose to incarnate into the type of body and belief system we choose, to further our soul’s growth and experience every kind of possible existence, whether it be male or female or a variety of skin colors available to us. We have all been members of the same races that we now hold prejudice against. Since we are living all our lives simultaneously, the thoughts that we have in this life will affect the others. Taking this to heart, it would appear to be that if mankind/womankind would get his/her act together the future would indeed look quite bright.

EVOLUTION OF RACE
There is a plan and a purpose with regards to the evolution of races. Now I am using the word race here because it is our term and I will stay within the framework of those ideas. What we consider to be races are not races at all, but variations on the same theme, themes that we have created. It was a combination of many factors much in the same way the planet was formed. The physical body types were created by The Creator to survive within the different climatic zones of the planet. That is it. Darker pigments were given to man/woman when he/she was exposed to higher levels of sun. Lighter pigments were used where the sun shone less frequently. The darker pigments were there to protect the skin. It shouldn’t come as any surprise to anyone and if we look at our hemispheres we will see the logic. We don’t see a bunch of pasty white people living in South America. That was the intention.

Now, some beings were brought here from other solar systems as well. They were transplanted for the greater diversity of mankind/womankind. We did not evolve from the apes or gorillas and even ancient man/woman were also transplanted here from other star systems. The physical bodies that we currently identify with in this solar system have all come from other star systems before being seeded onto Earth. Most of us now come from the Atlantean civilization and are intimately tied to beings of Sirius. Therefore it will be impossible for our scientists to trace the evolution of mankind/womankind until they open their eyes to the other dimensions of our experience.

We have been able to experience our lives, at least most of us, in one race or another, simultaneously learning as we go, one need fulfilling the other, and so on. Our preoccupation with good and evil has led us to believe that white is right and dark is bad. However this is such a distorted view of the real reason behind the different physical characteristics of mankind/womankind, that to us viewing these ideas it appears as insanity. As we observe our logic, it is most sad to see how we have distorted the beauty of this creation with our own ideas and fears. Again, taking something of great beauty and turning it into something ugly in our minds. We then are afraid of face the reality that we have manifested with our thoughts. We have let ourselves get carried away with our fear of other beings and our fear of good vs. evil. It is time for us to change the thinking that white is good and dark is bad. The same can be said for the dark races. It is time for us to change our thinking that white is evil and dark is good because we are all in this together, growing and evolving as one. It only hinders our soul’s evolution when we place these kinds of barriers on it.

Because of these distorted ideas, we have essentially locked ourselves into little boxes and thrown away the keys. Living in our separate societies, barricading behind our iron gates, fearful that someone of the wrong color might come in and see who we really are, or take some precious part of us away from us. We need only face our fears to end this perceived reality, for it truly does not even exist. Our perceived reality is only a manifestation of our mind. Our true reality is a manifestation of God’s mind. All else is an illusion. We have been quite astute at creating for ourselves roadblocks to our own evolution. As we begin to expand our awareness we will be able to learn to trust oneself and our own intuition and stop playing into the forces of negativity that wish to keep us locked in our box. It is time to unite as brothers/sisters and start living in harmony with each other. Without each other, we would not be, because we are all connected to each other from the same divine energy source.

It is time for us to start realizing the importance of our relationships with each other. Many of us do not like to think that the events of 9/11 were a wake-up call but I urge us to examine our feeling after the event. Did we not for a short while, (short because we see us waning away again) feel a sense of bonding with our fellow man/woman? Did we not feel the love and compassion for others that we have so long ignored? Look into the eyes of a stranger. We may just see ourselves. After the events of 9/11, we were seeing mankind/womankind take the necessary steps to move forward in the spiritual evolution of his/her soul. We were caring about each other. We were taking notice of our fellow man/woman and offering bits of our own wisdom and encouragement. Continue to do so. Just because it seems to be in the past, do not forget the revelations that we have experienced from this event. This event is part of our evolution and if we use the experience to grow and change our world, then those who perished will not have given up their lives in vain. We do not have to play into the hands of insatiable appetite for power and control of our world. Realign our energies to create a new and wonderful reality for our world, a world of peace and goodwill towards others. This is not hard to do. It just takes a sincere desire to do so. Below is another exercise designed to help us break down the barriers of fear towards our fellow man/woman.

EXERCISE:
SPEAKING TO STRANGERS
Go out today and speak to a stranger. Do something kind and look into their eyes. You may recognize them, you may not, but remember you are connected. You are both part of the same essence of God’s divine energy. Try to speak to someone whom you would normally not even give a thought to. This will be the hard part, to see if you can break through the barriers of prejudice and fear. If you would try to do this on a daily basis, you will see how much joy it brings to your soul and you will then get a tiny glimpse as to what the true nature of your being is all about. You all may wear different packaging but that is only by choice. Just remember, you create your own fears. This exercise, if practiced daily, will enable you to remove those barriers.

CULTURES
Let us talk about the cultures of our planet, for this seems to be another area of disillusionment for us. When humans created the various cultures on our planet we were delighted in the creations of our consciousness, the creation of various self-identities. Experiencing this creative ability gave us much freedom to express ourselves in ways that set us apart from everyone else. Many subscribed to those ideas and thus cultures were born. One sprung from the other and so on, each with its own certain characteristics that were uniquely its own. There was much diversity as different people decided to try variations on other’s beliefs as well as inventing their own. It became a territorial expression eventually as humanity migrated to different areas of the planet. They took with them their cultural ideas and added a few of their own, thus setting up entire civilizations that were then subscribing to different belief systems and cultural practices. It is an ever-evolving thing and we see it today in our societies. Many civilizations are now living in and sharing the territories and belief systems are changing and expanding. Bits and pieces of each culture will remain, some will be tossed and others saved as humanity moves further in its evolution. It was all designed to be part of our learning experience on our planet, to give us diversity, a variety of experiences from which to choose.

Unfortunately, we also see the conflicts arising all over our planet as these cultures try to meld into each other. There are strong territorial and cultural beliefs that various nations wish to hang onto. Societies are strained to the brink of war in some cases as they are seemingly being forced to accept the belief systems and cultures of others within their territorial domain. The United States, being the melting pot of all nations, has seen its share of racial and cultural wars. It is to soon to tell as to whether this experiment will fail or succeed. It will be determined by the choices we make and whether our enlightenment is swift or slow. It is all part of The Creator’s plan. The North American continent was to be an experiment to see if humanity would be able to live together as one. When entering into this experiment, oftentimes one is searching outside oneself for happiness. Happiness does not lie within the borders of another country, it lies within the borders of our mind. When entering into a nation that is comprised of multicultural belief systems, one will be faced with the challenge of learning from the experience of living together as one nation. Now in the melting pot these cultures are experiencing great difficulties as they perceive themselves to be under attack by others. But as man/woman moves further in his/her evolution, he/she will come to realize with the awakening of his/her soul that he/she is not under attack by anything other than his/her own set of perceived beliefs. The only difference is our perceived reality of the experience.

HATE AND ANGER
In this section let us touch upon hate and anger, as anger is the precursor to hate. With the emergence of the events of 9/11, there are many of us who are in the hate and anger mode against the perpetrators of the event and rightfully so given out current set of beliefs. The mass evil that was planned and executed was indeed a horrible event. As we express our anger, understand where it came from and let it go. By turning it into hate we are then forced to deal with the pent-up energies related to hate. The hate will eventually turn on us and leave us with either an illness or some other form of retaliation within physical and mental framework.

Our being’s natural aggression and feelings towards this event should be expressed, but in a way that does not cause harm to others or put us in violation of Universal Law. Anger is a natural expression of our being and should not be shoved away into the recesses of our minds where it can come back and attack us later. Look behind our anger and we will see a cry for help, either from oneself or others. Now while it is OK to hate the actions of others, it is only OK if we understand the feelings and motivations behind that hate and release them after we have analyzed them. I am not suggesting we suppress our emotions, for that in itself is not healthy. But what I am suggesting is, take a look at our anger, analyze it, feel it, express it within our creature-hood and then remove it. Know that the feeling is there, but do not dwell on it, for anger then turns into hate.

Many of us have much to learn about this subject since we seem to dwell on the idea that hatred of individuals is perfectly OK because we have allowed ourselves to feel this way through the manifestation of our perceived fears. We are running from our own fears and illusions. What are illusions? Illusions are the barriers of our knowledge. They create our fears. They are beliefs that are meaningless. They have no truth. Realize our truth, be one with oneself and we will have no fear. Break free of our illusions, change our reality and our mind will not be able to produce fear. We have the power to remove the illusions and stand in the path of love. Out of the ashes of fear will rise up love, our hidden truth. For when we remove the illusions, truth is always found. When we attack others, we only increase both our fears and the other person’s fears. If we help others, we release other our fears and the other person’s fears. As we face our fears our anger will subside and our hate will not be manifest.

Now we may say, “How am I going to do this, because I have such intense rage over the events of 9/11?” Having intense rage over the events of 9/11 is not going to do anything but further fuel the fires of the negative energies. It is not going to solve the global problem of terrorism. The energy of our hatred would be better off turned into understanding, to create a peaceful loving solution to help the people of the many nations of the world regain their sovereignty and independence and unite us back together as one.

MOVING FORWARD
Look at the larger pictures as to why this happened and we will see that there were many global situations that led up to this event. I will be discussing them later in these Blogs. No one can hurt us personally unless we empower them to do so. Allow oneself to express our own feelings but then move on. If we harbor anger and hate we will in turn set our body up for disease of disaster. If we wish to remain healthy emotionally, physically and mentally, do not allow oneself to rationalize to oneself that these thoughts and feelings are legitimate. Although they have a legitimate place within our being, they are not legitimate with respect to manifesting another set of beliefs with anger and hate. We will only experience the domino effect.

Consciously be aware of what we have thought about our perpetrators, but at the same time understand that this is not a personal issue slated to go against our very nature. It is an event that took place, an event that involved many. Some of us were directly involved and are experiencing a loss with the transition of the energy of our loved ones to their home dimension. However, to harbor the hate and the anger only stifles the growth and the evolution of our soul. If indeed we want to walk through life angry at the world and the perpetrators of this event and others, we will only find oneself culminating these thoughts and events into a mass of frustration. It will only serve to confuse and alienate our being from itself. It is imperative for us to acknowledge what has transpired. If we cannot understand why it happened, do not dwell on the knowledge that we have not yet received and understanding of the events. Carry if forth as a memory to learn from and leave it as a memory.

Many good things will transpire from this event. Even though it does not seem to us that any good can come out of this, we will see humans waking up to the needs of each other. It will happen. I am not suggesting to the perpetrators that they have free rein to perpetrate their evil acts upon mankind/womankind. I am not suggesting that at all, for we have dealt and will deal with them separately. They are not free to run amok through society and create havoc on innocent beings who truly are trying to go to the light whether the are aware of it or not. The perpetrators will be put in check. They may try again and again. However we will not let them succeed with destroying our planet. It will not happen. They will be removed. Following is another exercise designed to assist us in evaluating the source of our anger and thus eliminating it.

EXERCISE:
WORKING THROUGH YOUR THOUGHTS AND BELIEFS

I suggest to you that you examine one of those thoughts that produce your anger. Work the thought backwards and find out what actually transpired within your consciousness to allow the anger to manifest itself. Oftentimes you will find that you were expecting others to live up to your idealized goals. It is important to understand that others are experiencing their lives just as you are living yours. You are not all on the same level in your soul’s evolution. Therefore a situation that you may find offensive may appear to another to be the right thing. It is important to acknowledge those experiences without letting them turn into hate, anger and rage. There are many questions you could ask yourselves as to why you have stood firmly in your beliefs, but the object of this lesson is to find out if those thoughts are in alignment with the divine energies of The Creator. Ask yourself if you-the-soul will be able to evolve yourself towards the light with these beliefs. If not, then they should be abandoned and a more positive approach adopted. In breaking down old beliefs and barriers you will be able to receive new energies from the Hierarchy and move forward.

THE RELIGIONS OF “GA”

In a sense, we could truthfully say that the foundational tenets and energies of Christianity, and indeed of all of our World Religions, originated in the divine matriarchy. This makes sense, does it not? The cradle of civilization, then, including the religions of all of the world, was this matriarchy we are calling GA. It is the mother that gives birth to the child; it is the matriarchy the gives birth to society and the world’s civilizations as a whole. Period.

Quite naturally now, and conversely here if you follow my reasoning: within linear time, within the evolution of cultures, within this melting pot of GA, the patriarchy made itself known through the actions of humans who resisted the notion of the ascendancy of the feminine generally, but particularly in the religious and political domains.

Notice here that we are not ascribing competing values to the matriarchal and patriarchal concerns. Both occur within our system of reality. Both are valid expressions. However, if you remember our assertion that the human is born, quite literally, out of Love: the all encompassing Love of All That Is, you may also remember that the negative emotions and all emotions in between Love and hate are also experienced while living the life. In this same way, out of a desire to know itself to the nth degree – to the ultimate perimeters of consciousness, you see – All That Is sought to create “tension” within the creative domain of evolutionary consciousness manifestation, by embodying itself in the form of human behaving in ways different than Lovingly and Courageously. Thus, a different perspective was found within individual consciousness, within tribes, within the smallest most elementary forms of society. A choice was created. The choice was between Loving Understanding and Courage of fear, anger and everything else in between the two polarities. In the case of the GA civilization, it was quite abrupt, the transformation. There was a critical mass achieved within the population once a majority of patriarchal god worshippers was reached. Almost evernight, you might say, the change occurred, and it was experienced within the collective consciousness of the GA people that an era had ended. A paradise on Earth was no longer possible. I hope you sense my irony in this last statement.

IGNORING THE TRUTH

The creation of positive realities is our responsibility. It is a personal issue. Because we are the creator in physical reality, it is a matter of how aware we become of our responsibilities. Now the great majority of us, it is true, will remain in a sleep state, in manner of speaking, right up until the time of the Dimensional Shift. On the surface it will appear as though we are unaware of the changes that our civilization is going though. Yet for most of us, there will be great changes already underway on the subtle levels. We are being prepared for the transformation in the dream-state. We are not aware of this, however, as we go about our waking reality. We prefer to “pretend” that life as usual continues to unfold, without any great upheavals to anticipate.

For this group of people the shift will take place overnight, quite literally. They will awaken one day and suddenly appreciate the vast changes they have undergone, as individuals and as parts of the collective. These are of the type of humans that wishes to “not think about” the future that much, for the future will “take care of itself.” This group comprises many millions of us on our Earth.

To pretend that business as usual is being experienced at this time in our history is a form of denial, a denial of the Soul Self. On the level of the Soul’s experiencing, we know full well that great changes are underway for us. Constantly we are reminded of this by Beings of Light as they transmit their messages into our mental sphere. It is a simple matter to ascribe these messages, as we stated in the first chapters of this Blog Series, to bad memories or other forms of “negative thinking.” Then we may go on our way, blissfully unaware of an ego/intellect level, of what our Soul most surely knows. Let us present an example to make this clear for the Blog Reader.

Suppose you are a typical human of the type I am describing. That is, you are one who discounts, perhaps as spiritual hogwash, the statements of your associates that describe the hearing of the voices of dead ancestors. Or else you deny accounts of those who describe the means to avoid a calamity they faced on the highway, as in an accident of some such thing, as coming from a nonphysical source. The intuitive voice is discounted here, you see. These humans may even ascribe the great luck of winners of various prizes or monies from the inside information given to them by their Angels or etheric advisers to mere coincidence. They deny the voice of the sacred in the lives of others, and so they must be consistent as they deny the voice of the sacred within their own lives.

THE CONSENSUS REALITY FIELD

The Consensus Reality Field is our term for the broader field of Reality Creation of which we are a part by virtue of our individually created world. Our Personal Reality Field serves us well within our niche in our environment. It is ” tailor made” according to our specifics, both conscious and unconscious. Now the broader field of Reality Creation may be thought of as comprising, for example, our neighborhood, our city, our state, our country, our hemisphere and finally our world – the planet Earth.

I will not bore you with more descriptions of how we create the Personal Reality Field. Suffice it to say that we and the others who live in our neighborhood, achieve a consensus while sleeping on what will be created, in so far as our neighborhood goes, upon awakening. Obviously this holds true for the manifestation of our city’s Consensus Reality, our state’s and so on.

GOD IS DEAD?

It has been broadly suggested by some of you, in a very sensational manner, that God is dead. The phrase is quite actually a powerful suggestion. In a way, it represents the triumph of materialism and of science over the human consciousness. However, in truth quite literally, if you are alive, God is not dead. You are the creator of your world.

With All That Is you individually create your Personal Reality Field and collectively do you co-create your Consensus World Reality. So perhaps God with a capital G might also be described as the ensemble of humans, animals and elements on Earth at any one time. However, since the whole is to be found within the part in this holographic model of reality, even if you were the last person alive on Earth, God would STILL not be dead.

Our philosophical discussion begs the question, “If I am the creator of my world and All That Is is within each Conscious Unit or atom in physical reality, does this mean that I am also God or All That Is?” Here again, the issue is not merely one of semantics. Let me explain. Religious conditioning serves to disempower the religion practitioner. We are speaking in broad generalities here.

THE GOD BLOG

For the next project, The God Blog – the manuscript on All That Is. We hope to present for you an interesting and educational Blog on the creative source for all of our realities. However, I believe we would do well to provide you with some of the ideas and theories we will cover in that Blog, now in this current writing, so that you may better absorb and utilize these current messages from a Entity.

Obviously, because we are incessantly on the topic of Reality Creation here, the question of “who is the reality creator?” must arise just as incessantly. I do believe that it is more than a mere matter of semantics. Who is the creator of your Personal Reality? I have advised you over these many years that it is indeed YOU the Blog Reader of this Blog who creates your Personal Reality. Now where does God and where do the concepts of the Divine fit within this cosmology of a reality-creating human? Let us discuss this for just a moment.

To begin, you Dear Blog Reader, are the epitome of All That Is. You are composed of divine energy constructs – the Conscious Units. In each and every one of the Consciousness Units you may find the holographic replica of EVERYTHING in all of our created realities. This EVERYTHING we are also referring to as All That Is. Now this metaphor of a holographic reality may serve us well here in this discussion. The simplified definition of a hologram for our purposes might be, “that which is everywhere all of the time.” This describes the fundamental nature of the Conscious Units as well as the multidimensional atoms theorized by some of our scientists. The researcher may make practical use of this theoretical construct by experimenting with experiencing the everywhere-all-the-time perspective. This perceptual vantage point is actually each and every Moment Point in space and time, so it does include past, present and future, in our terms.

This All That Is we have named to move beyond religious connotations of any kind. It is a safe generic title, is it not? Yet at the same, being All That Is, this construct would naturally hold within itself what we might call the Divine or the sacred or spiritual worlds. The visionary experience treats the researcher, or perhaps the accidental mystic, to the sensory extravaganza that is multidimensional existence. How does one then define this experience in retrospect? Invariably the human bows to authority in these matters, and again as we discussed in these Blogs, hands over their powers of Reality Creation to another higher, perhaps “more worthy” entity. Thus the gods and goddesses are born.

We do not intend to trivialize this god-making faculty of the human being. These self-created constructs are definitely “given a life of their own” through the ongoing support of “thought energy” through the prayers and other spiritual observances of countless Souls over the millennia. The personality aspects of the human are constellated “out” onto the physical world from “within.” Each of the separate Earthly cultures, then, creates their individual divinities according to the needs of their particular group. So that the Nordic peoples, for example, developed an entirely different pantheon than did the Indonesian Islanders. Different Divine beings evolve from the different cultural needs of the people who live in the collective. Now let us relate this to the individual researcher living in our current timeframe.

AFTER ENLIGHTENMENT

We have spoken before of the gratifying changes in consciousness that come with Soul Evolution. What we are really talking about here is a systematic approach to belief change. The example we used pertained to a change in belief regarding radial prejudice. In our example, the person had undergone a subtle transformation in consciousness by working on themselves” to the degree that they no longer feared or hated a particular race or group of people, but they were indeed experiencing growing affection for these people, for the race as a whole.

I described this feeling as a form of ambivalence, in that the person still harbored negative feelings for the group of people, but the positive feelings for the group were beginning to overtake the negative. This person was on the cusp of positive belief change. They were comfortable with the uncertainty they were experiencing, for as I said, they were working on themselves, trying to learn their Lessons, and they were, at least for the moment, able to resist recognizing the negative inner dialogue concerning the group of people. They were able to “turn down the volume,” you see, on their self-centered positive inner dialogue. So this is what belief change entails.

WHY PURSUE THE SPIRITUAL?

Let us discuss an issue that is quite obvious. Perhaps that is why we have neglected it thus far in these new Blog writings. The issue may be framed with a question: “Why assume my Blog Readers of our new Blog material are looking for spiritual understanding? If the path to Loving Understanding and Soul Evolution is so perilous and fraught with physical and psychological pain, why would anyone in their right mind want to pursue it?”

To begin, the Blog Readers, as I have observed them over the many years, are seekers. They are drawn to this work, I assume, because it “speaks to them.” Others of a different personality style and temperament, perhaps, would be drawn to other Teachings. Now it is true that the Older Blog material was quite barren of discussions of spiritual matters. This was an editorial decision. I have continually offered my spiritually-informed content to humanity. However, since it is the human co-creator of the Blog who creates in physical reality, it is the human co-creator who determines what they consider to be appropriate content for the Blog.

These new Blogs are the spiritual – you might say the divine – counterparts to the Old Blog material. If you are a student, to the spiritually – based material contained in these new Blogs. Now I have attempted to include weighty intellectual discussions in my new Blog work, to satisfy those of you who are focused on the physical dimension in which we live. The spiritual is merely the other side of this physical dimension. To become a well-rounded, educated human, you would do well to study both aspects of reality

The path to Soul Realization may be thoughts of as arduous by some. This is true. Certainly it is not for the meek and mild. It is easy to lose confidence and perhaps quit the journey before it has truly begun. As you examine some of your lifetimes within less than ideal circumstances . If you tune-in, for example, to a lifetime in which you are dying slowly from starvation or an illness of some kind, this witnessing may be so distasteful and shocking that you are thrown out of your meditative state. I would suggest that you remember in these cases, under these circumstances of harsh conditions, that you are supported on a wave of ecstasy that is the Soul Self. This ecstasy may help to motivate you to continue your studies.

Now suppose that you are experiencing negative realities within your current life. Should you attempt these explorations of your other Simultaneous Lives? Generally, I would suggest that you first gain some mastery over the exercises and conduct the various experiments I have outlines in my last two blog series.

DIVINE KNOWLEDGE

We often use the phrase in these new Blog messages, “I am not telling you something you do not already know.” This is a statement of fact. We are merely reminding you the Blog Reader of that knowledge you have acquired in your many voyages into physical form. This information on the nature of reality and the use of energy, you first brought with you from your existence in non physical reality, before your “physical” birth into the human body. Now this knowledge also is a part of your FUTURE heritage, if you may understand this conundrum of mine.

Perhaps a better way to describe the relearning phenomenon in which your are engaged is this… bleedthroughs – the perceptual breakthroughs of your current self into other Simultaneous Lives – occur throughout your waking and dreaming periods. These are learning “field trips” in which your current conscious perception tunes-in on one or more of your past, other current or future lives. That is a function of the multitasking Soul Self as you awaken to your multidimensional experiencing. This is the acquiring of the Divine Knowledge we constantly refer to in these Blog writings.

On a basic level, you already know this material. That is why it seems so familiar to you. That is why it seems so true. You have perfected this system in your numerous future incarnations, again in your familiar terms, assuming the linear time illusion that is favored in our dimension. And so you see, I use the phrase “this you already know” as a device to hopefully trigger memories here. The little bleedthroughs that you experience I hope will keep you motivated enough to continue the voyage with us. These are tools the nonphysical beings use as we attempt to educate humanity. The phrase is a deep and empowered one, a profound suggestion. However, just accept it playfully and see where it leads you. This phrase may help you to wake-up to your greater reality.

BLACK MAGICIANS OF ATLANTIS

QUESTION: If there were not the emotional complexes of hatred and anger in the consciousness of the Atlanteans, does this mean that the claims of some researchers that “Black Magicians” from Atlantis were instrumental in the down fall of the civilization and these beings currently exert an influence upon our world cultures are not true?

These effects of negativity are the results of the activities of the Negative Entities. These Entities exist out of time, they reside off of the space time continuum. In this way these influences are felt within any peoples, from whatever past, present, of future timeframe you are describing, when the human individuals recreate within their mental environments the negative states. Our media have named these Entities the Black Magicians of Atlantis, apparently, however, these Entities have also gone by the name Annunaki, as in our previous descriptions, and by, as I said , the multitude of names relating to the negative gods and goddesses, spirits, ghosts and what have you. It is all the same energy, however. The imagination of the individual marks this perceived energy with the particular attributes and characteristics of familial, tribal, country, world personalizations of these energy gestalts.

The Black Magicians of Atlantis, then, were inspired, enlivened, empowered by the same energy that drives the personifications of the devil gods, the goddesses of destruction, and so on, within our religions. It is all the same energy. It is all a part of All That Is – the great consciousness Entity exhibiting itself within physical reality through the activities of human and other beings.

Now with regards to the comments on anger, hatred, and the like.

I refer to our discussion of the best case scenario, the ideal of the individual, the society as a whole, the world culture, that exists within the pre-manifestation domains as a potential for those involved. You Dorian and your colleagues in physical reality exist within your collectives, of whatever type and stripe. You and your friend create your ongoing relationship according to Gestalts of Consciousness within your consciousness representing all of the “good” AND the “bad” that life has to offer.

Here, the good may be described as Loving appreciation for your friend, shall we say, and the bad may be described as thoughts and feelings of anger, denial, fear, and so on. These Gestalts of Consciousness assist the human in the creation of realities on all levels within all collectives. Your relationship, Dear Blog Reader, if it is of a wholesome Loving nature, reflects your reliance on these “good” aspects of consciousness.

Now if your relationship was one of hatred, constant negativity in thought and emotion and behavior, you might be said to be focusing on the negative Gestalts of Consciousness in your reality creations with regards to relationships. In the BIG relationships of society, country, global collectives, then, you also have your collective reliance on different Gestalt of Consciousnesses– negative, positive or somewhere in between, and of course these influences fluctuate throughout time.

PUNISHMENT?

Now there are times for us, as a researcher and a learner of Lessons, when you may seem to be engaged in ardently co-creating your reality in a very responsible fashion. We are “doing everything right,” let us say, and diligently attending to the transformation of Negative Emotions into their divine opposites. We are doing so very well in this endeavor that you perhaps feels as though you should be rewarded in some way, feeling that the Powers That Be could “have mercy” on you, so that you might relax and enjoy yourself for a period of time. Yet let us say that you still continue to experience a challenging existence with a series of quite negative events serving to “drive home” this harsh reality.

“Am I being singled out for punishment,” you might ask yourself. Now we must at times such as these, revert back to first principles. You create your own reality. If you are feeling victimized, you are ultimately the tormentor. If you are in the midst of painful, negative personal dramas, you are ultimately the director, the producer and also the cast of these dramas. You are composed of many personality aspects within your Personal Reality ego/intellect. But your greater personality of Higher Consciousness also participates through a lending of energy to the “dramatic flow” of the events in your life. In this way, you are the whole – the cosmos – an you are also the individual living component of the whole. I believe I must elaborate further on this phenomenon for your ULTIMATE understanding.

The reason that you sense a familiarity in the scenes of your everyday life, as is all of the characters in these daily dramas of yours are your “relations,” is that everyone you meet and interact with moment-to-moment is indeed your relation. The relevant aspects of your Higher Self are reflected through these other personalities relative to the learning of your individual, Soul Family and Entity Lessons. Naturally there would be a familiarity in this dance of synchronicity you know as physical reality. You act in concert, then, at any one time and all of the time, with your cohorts, keeping your appointments with “perfect strangers,” to enact your behaviors in the quest for Value Fulfillment. We shall have more to say on this phenomenon in our forthcoming Blogs on the Soul Family.

THIS IS YOUR LIFE

This is your life, you see. This dramatic and sometimes comedic performance in Earthly flesh is your life, for which you have PURPOSEFULLY incarnated. You are experiencing both the positive and the negative life has to offer. Yes it is true that you inevitably age and die, perhaps being subject to much pain and suffering; yet there is also joy in these sequential moments of your life. With the proper attitude you may even experience your suffering moments in what can be described as “joyful appreciation.” This may be difficult to comprehend for some of us. Let us have an example of how this paradox of feeling and behavior might be experienced by any one of us as we go about our meaningful lives.

As we awaken to the Unity of Consciousness Dimension, we will gradually become more aware of our Simultaneous Lives. Within these lives we are living the brand spectrum of existence. Thus, as we retain memories of a life lived within a society as a tortured being who daily subjected to painful living experiences, we may compare this life with our current existence in the modern world. Do you see how we might experience a sense of joyful appreciation for our current life? Relative to other lives we are living in the midst of great pain and suffering, our current existence may be regarded as joyful and complete.

WISDOM LESSONS AND CHOICE

We always have a choice, Dear Blog reader. The great question for you as a physical being is this: when you awaken to your true reality, will you choose to create your life of Lessons consciously, or will you try to escape? Many of you well know what I am saying in these paragraphs, for you are well on your way to awakening fully. Yet some of you may look on these new Blogs of mine with the all too critical eye of the ego. Fear, cynicism, competition rule the roost of the ego. I would ask you to pull back from this type of scrutiny and attempt to use the perspective of the “awakened one.” The heart is open as anger is transmuted into Loving Understanding. Fear is turned to Courage and faith.

The awakened or enlightened human may choose to be creative with the creation of events within their own reality. You may postpone the event of your physical death, for example, and undergo The Transition at a later date, perhaps learning more and gaining the Divine Knowledge from these additional months or years of living experience.

TWO- STEP ACTIVITY

This is how our Third-Dimensional system was “set up.” It is an arena for the experiencing of Negative Emotions. However, eventually we must face this aspect of our personality. We each are called upon to address the negative thoughts within our mental sphere and the negative events in our existence and the Negative Emotions that “appear” to be caused by the negative events. Briefly, it is a matter of addressing the negative in our momentary experiencing and “owning” it. The awakening human recognizes their responsibility in the creation of negative realities.

Wisdom Lessons, then, refer to this two-step activity. First the researcher, through experimentation and analysis in the laboratory that is the Personal Reality, arrives at Findings specific to their Life Lessons. These Findings may have been “hidden from view” for many years. They represent the hard truth of the developing personality over time. None of us are perfect. The human in physical incarnation may strive for protection, but that state of being is reserved for other dimensional-experiences.

So the truth is made known through experimentation. What we have been denying is revealed to us in all of its harsh and intense glory. Now what does the awakening human do with this information? In our system the method is clear: with the developing skills of creating Loving Understanding and Courage out of anger, denial and fear, the researcher transforms the difficult material into its divine opposite.

Now this Loving Understanding entails acceptance of the negative Findings on all levels of creaturehood. We are responsible, as I have said in earlier Blogs. We are the creator of our world and the events within our world. Accepting our responsibility for our creations is the necessary first step here. The second step entails understanding and gaining of wisdom of Divine Insight. This is accomplished by allowing the Soul Self to perceive our world. The ego/intellect is gently placed to the side and the Higher Consciousness is brought through the portal of creation – the Ajna center directly between the eyes. This may be accomplished by mediatizing or visualizing the Divine as coming through our physical body construct. We will naturally create our own imagery, thought and emotion for this exercise. Throughout the new material I have given many techniques to accomplish this.

LESSONS OF NEGATIVITY

In this Blog we shall hopefully provide you with the opportunity to address the most pressing and important Lessons for you in your current existence. Now truly ALL of your Lessons are “wisdom” Lessons, in that we experience Soul Evolution when you are engaged in learning these Lessons.

So that the gaining of prosperity within a life of perceived lack and poverty, may be considered the gaining of wisdom, as well as the facing of perceived extremely difficult, traumatic material from your past may be considered the gaining of wisdom. However, in this material we will attempt to provide you with the motivation you require to do what you must do in facing your most difficult Lessons – the Lessons of Negativity, pain and suffering.

For I trust you would agree that the positive Lessons – of Love, of experiencing prosperity, of developing friendships – need much less motivation for the average human to engage in and “do the homework” required, than do the Lessons of Negativity. The Lessons of Love will take care of themselves over time. Whereas with the Lessons of Negativity, the primary reason we have not yet learned these Lessons is that we are indeed avoiding them.

FACING THE MUSIC

The Lessons of negativity can be faced now. We have the tools to deal with these Lessons. Now this is the way that it works for us with all types of behaviors: whatever elicits the perception of satisfaction or happiness is pursued relentlessly. Whatever seems to create the Negative Emotions is most usually avoided. There, of course, exceptions to this rule in every life. We have noted previously in this material the tendency for the “depressed” person to create Reality Constructs that perpetuate the state of depression, as though there were a certain muted satisfaction in depression.

Generally, however, the negative states are avoided by lost of us. For example: this is particularly true in the developed nations as we call ourselves. We are certainly “developed” in so far as access to material wealth is concerned. However, it is the rest of the world’s peoples who have the edge in matters of spiritual understanding, spiritual wealth. In the developed countries we are easily diverted from spiritual considerations by the many objects of mass consumption made available to us through our shopping centers, for example, through our mass media, and so on.

You Dear Blog Reader, are easily diverted in the moment by these requests from our creators of ” shiny things.” We are easily distracted for we are “waiting for an excuse” to avoid our Lessons. As we have suggested in these Blogs, like children, many of us would rather not consider our Lessons in physical or psychological pain, we buy something to “make ourselves feel better.”

As we know, it is the adrenaline and other substances released in our body that creates this “feeling better” state of consciousness. Over time we become dependent on this satisfied emotional state and you may find oneself purchasing more than we need or can afford to keep “happy.” The Lessons of Negativity are thus avoided.

WISDOM LESSONS

Harsh Conditions

Those that are experiencing these harsh conditions – that they have chosen these lives. Also, we are reminding that they may be on the end of their incarnational trajectories, and may be headed for the higher realms. This may be a good motivation for some to begin using our techniques to transform the negativity they are experiencing into Courage and Loving Understanding. This Soul work is necessary before one may progress to the higher-dimensional realms.

GAMBLING WITH THE GUIDES

HYPOTHESIS: You may use the advice of your guides in games of chance.

With regards to availing yourself of the assistance of your Guides in matters of prosperity, monetary increase and the like, I must present to you this fact of existence: although you may certainly ask your guides for “divine guidance” as to what are the winning lottery numbers, or what are the winning machines at the casino, and so on, you still remain within the matrix of probabilities in your Reality Creation activities. This matrix includes the casino itself, if I may use this example, and everything in the casino.

Now let us use an example in a particular form of gambling here, to further this disclaimer. In this example, the subject is accessing their Guides while they are engaged in placing bets on the numbers of a roulette wheel game in a normal casino somewhere, in one of our gambling capitals in the U.S.A., in Europe or elsewhere. Let us say that the Guides are doing their best in assisting the student’s experiment in Prosperity-Creation and they are presenting possible winning numbers into the mental environment of the student telepathically.

As you know, there are innumerable probable permutations of events possible within each successive moment of the existence of this theoretical student. Additionally, the outcome of any roll of the dice or spin of the ball in these matters is not known and identified in “bedrock reality,” as we say, until the very last microsecond of the activity of the dice, the ball or the card in any particular instance. The outcome of any gambling event, then, is a cooperative effort human, every machine, every cubic foot of space, every piece of furniture within that casino.

Also, it is important to remember that each of us in physical reality, in whatever Reality Creation activities are involved, are doing so for the learning of particular Lessons. Our Guides are not allowed to present information to us that would interfere with the learning of these Lessons. Let me say that if you are to attempt these experiments in Prosperity Creation, that you first examine your issues with regards to prosperity – the monetary Lessons that you are to learn while in your current body in your current timeframe.

Now if you are to conduct your Prosperity Creation experiments in the field, you will have previously committed the particulars of this experiment to memory. You will also have done your belief work and your “homework” regarding Lessons for this lifetime concerning abundance. Because you will be out in the world conducting your research, it will be necessary to have perfected conducting the Ritual Sanctuary and the creation of the Trance State while in public.

This experiment is concerned with prophecy. You shall be predicting the momentary actives of the elements in a game of chance. Let us assume you are in a public setting somewhere, engaged in this game.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

Enter your relaxed state and enter your Trance State. Now conduct your experiment of calling in your Guides. All of these preparatory activities can be an internal process for you, without any outward signs. As in our experiments, it may be wise to assume the playful attitude of a child in these endeavors. And overly-serious attitude may short-circuit the intuitive processes.

Now call upon your Inner senses, if entirely appropriate, to reveal that information you may require to “win.” To accomplish this, you might project your Auric Vision out onto the gaming table and allow your Inner Senses to create a visual representation of the winning numbers, cards, and so on. If you are oriented to sound, perhaps you could ask your Guides to whisper to you the information required. Whatever sensory input you are comfortable with, arrange for your Prosperity Guides and perhaps your Energy Personality to feed to you this information at the appropriate times.

The researcher may expect varying levels of good fortune – positive Reality Creation – to be made manifest in this experiment. You are challenging the “laws” of chance. Any wins beyond these laws, therefore, are an indication that you are on the right track. When you are successful, remember the state of consciousness you embodied immediately prior to the win and reproduce that state as best you can toward future wins. This game of chance is indeed a game. Have fun with it, just as I have suggested you have fun also in the creation of your life in the other domains.

FINDINGS – Remember for future reference the feeling tones and states of consciousness that signal a winning game.

CONSULTING YOUR PROSPEROUS SELVES

HYPOTHESIS: You can receive advice from your future and probable selves.

Let us assume that you currently experiencing lack in some area of your life. Now the idea of lack is tied to a veritable field of multidimensional negative experiencing. Not only are you experiencing lack in your current Reincarnational Existence, then you are connected to these other lives so that each of the personalities experiencing these lives will sense their negative states of consciousness within yours

Fortunately, within your Simultaneous Lives, including your probable existences, there are also those who are experiencing the opposite of lack – abundance. You shall attempt to contact these lives in your meditations in order to gather information on how you may also create abundance within your own current life. It is a form of sharing within a family, in a manner of speaking, a family of consciousness. And just as you might in your current existence ask for and receive advice from an uncle or cousin on how to invest your money wisely, you may inquire on the subtle levels what your other lives are doing to create abundance.

If you have been with us in these Blogs of ours, trying out some of the exercises and at least attempting some of the experiments, by now you will have gained some glimpses into the unknown reality – the world inhabited by your Multidimensional Counterparts throughout space and time. For you this experiment may reveal information that will quicken your journey, as you look to expand your vistas of perception. If you are just joining us in these esoteric pursuits, this experiment may strike you as rather preposterous, entirely too farfetched to even consider attempting. I urge you to make the effort in spite of your doubt, in spite of your inexperience. You may be pleasantly surprised.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

Relax your body and enter a fairly deep Trance State. The object in this experiment is to seek contact with your Simultaneous Lives and probable existences that are experiencing abundance. With this goal as the focus of your intent – your Divine Will – simply reflect on these words as you go deeper and deeper in your meditation. Now you are guided by your Intent here. The consciousness will naturally make those changes necessary to allow contact with the Souls experiencing abundance. It may be best not to force the issue. Trying too hard – attempting to direct the flow of energy – may be counterproductive. Let the mind wander, in other words. Remember, there is an assumption in these investigations that you are being watched over by nonphysical beings. You will be guided to your destination of you will only “go with the flow” of consciousness.

You know what an abundant feeling “feels like.” As you perceive with your Inner Senses the mental environments of your lives as they express these positive emotions, go toward these emotional expressions. Feelings of Courage and Loving Understanding may arise here. Confidence and self-assurance my be readily discernible. If you are sensing these emotional tones, you may be assured that you are on the right track. If you wish to go further with this exploration, ask for names and dates of these other lives. Go as far as you wish in your investigations seeking “proof” that you are making these connections. Return to full sensory awareness when you sense that you are done.

The information you requested in Trance may come to you in the form of impulses, as you go about your waking reality, just as we have suggested in our previous Blog Series. Might I suggest that the emotional tones that “carry” these impulses into your awareness are of the abundant, prosperous variety? That is how you will be able to identify their origin. A always, use your free will to either ignore or act on these impulses.

FINDINGS – Document impulses you have received from your other lives as a result of these enquiries.

PROSPERITY TALK

HYPOTHESIS: Positive suggestions help to create prosperous realities.

As you may now be well advanced in your achieving of the Trance State, through participating in the exercises in this Blog, we will simply present this experiment as one of self-conditioning or self-hypnosis through reading positive affirmative statements or listening to recorded positive suggestions while in Trance. As we have discussed earlier in this Blog Series, your beliefs and their emotional underpinnings may be more readily accessible than you might think. After all, your beliefs are busy nonstop creating (on a subconscious level) your perceived reality. With the approach that this is not hard to do, it is possible to expect the Idea Constructs supporting your beliefs to be there in your mental environment, observable indeed, without attending years of therapy.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

The preliminary work entails an exploration of the consciousness, seeking out those thoughts, images and emotional content that support the beliefs. Enter alight Trance and with pen and paper or through talking into a recorder, you might spontaneously have a discussion with yourself on what are the problematic beliefs. Document what first comes to your mind and go from there. There is an underlying assumption here that your Inner Self is primed to reveal this information to you. Your Soul Self is well aware of this voyage of yours and is undoubtedly waiting to assist you. Simply take down what this aspect of your consciousness is trying to tell you. Document without censoring. You may analyze later.

Come Back To Full Sensory Awareness.

After this initial stage of information gathering is complete, consider the opposites of the problematic beliefs or a positive adaptation of the beliefs and write them down or record these suggestions for playback. Enter your Trance State again and either read the suggestions to yourself or listen to the playback on your recorder.

For example: In your belief work you may have discovered that you have a circular inner comment that is consistently voicing the opinion of someone from your past: “You are stupid. You will never succeed.” Using our technique for revising this unfortunate comment without any true conviction behind it, you see – we might create the following; “You have a strong natural intelligence. A successful life awaits you.” You could then inscribe several different permutations of this message on a paper to read while in a light Trance. Or you could read the various suggestions into your recorder for playback while in a deeper Trance. The object here, which may seem obvious to you now, is to instill the positive suggestions into the mental awareness over time, until the historical comment is supplanted by the improved positive suggestions.

FINDINGS – Document in some form your belief work and your attempts to supplant problematic beliefs with positive suggestions.

BELIEF REVISION-3

Your beliefs have created the precise level of lack that you are experiencing. Your existence is a direct result of your Reality Creation activities according to beliefs that you hold. Any example of poverty or lack within your Personal Reality, therefore, can be traced back to a specific Idea Construct that you perceive as being quite true. In The Healing Regimen we presented an experiment in belief adaptation. In this new regimen we will present a similar experiment with a different focus.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

Assume your Trance State through your preferred method. Now you are relaxed. Now you are focused on searching for “causes” within your mental environment for the lack you are experiencing. These causes are your beliefs, however you may wish to visualize this concept. What does a belief represent to you, in so far as symbols, feelings, sensations of various types are concerned? Again, it is often the case that the first thing that comes to mind may hold the most information. Your Inner Self is attempting to tell you something, you see, to reveal something of value to you. The information may be quite complex in construction, as in a profound revelation – an epiphany – or quite simple, as in a fleeting emotion of some kind.

For example: suppose that your first thought within the Trance State was the statement, “This is not going to work,” and what if this statement operates as a powerful loop – a rumination – within your consciousness. If this were the case, do you see how difficult it might be for you to approach these studies and experimentation and be successful to any degree? Now this is an extremely common first discovery for the explorer of nonphysical reality. This simple Idea Construct is quite powerful in its simplicity, when it is looped, you see, when it is repeated incessantly within the mental environment. It has the power to adversely affect the Reality Creation activities on all levels, not merely the financial.

Now what if you were to revise the phrase somewhat: “That may work.” Now there is hope. Now there is the opportunity for change. Here in this experiment, using your Intent, what we are referring to as Divine Will, you alter the negative rumination – the substance of negative belief – to make room for hope and opportunity. “This may work. This Spiritual Prosperity Program may work.” This is a positive rumination that may assist you in the creation of positive realities. As you witness your improving reality, your beliefs about what is possible are changed. You are opening up. You are accepting the possiblity of positive change in you world.

TIME TRAVEL

We covered Time Travel in my past Blog series. Now I shall add to that material in relation to the Atlantis civilization. The truth is, what we would call Time Travel was a common occurrence in the great civilizations of our perceived past. There are reasons for this, having to do with issues of shared spirituality, an appreciation for the natural forces of nature, and a cosmology shared by the people that allowed and even nurtured the exploring of non-physical reality. None of these features are shared by great numbers of us in our modern time frame. That is why Time Travel, for the most part, is thought of as an impossibility: a joke.

The Atlantean researchers of non-physical reality perfected the spinning of crystalline structures into vehicles. The researchers would, as we said, place themselves within the structure and allow their Inner Senses to be amplified and tuned by the crystal mass. In this way, the Intention of the researcher to visit a particular time frame was made manifest within their own mental environment. You may also compare this activity to the sacred voyages of Shamans and other seekers of visions in our many world cultures. The effects are the same here. The technologies are different, that is all.

READING THE EMOTIONAL BODY

HYPOTHESIS: The emotional body displays the causes and remedies of lack.

In this experiment you will use your Inner Sense of sight, your Auric Vision, to perceive the emotional elements within your consciousness that prevent you from experiencing The Abundant Universe. This vision of your emotional issues relative to prosperity may take the form of a dramatic vignette displayed for you as you close your eyes to relax.

Within this dramatic presentation you may witness, for example, a replay of an event from your perceived past, in which you experienced disempowerment in some form. Perhaps you were robbed by a bully when you were a child. Perhaps as adult had suggested to you that you would never be successful in your life, that you were “not good with money” or “irresponsible.”

The communication stream from your inner world may take the form of a narrative, perhaps a rumination of a series of words or sentences. The focus here is on “causes” of present lack in your reality, and so you may remember words and phrases that portray you as, in some way, incompetent or unable to ever succeed. You may have a sudden feeling of distaste, or fear, or other Negative Emotion that acts as a catalyst, allowing you to go deeper in your exploration to the roots of your current less-than-satisfactory life condition.

As in our previous investigations in this Research Project, the vision may have elements other than sight, i.e. smell, taste, hearing. And again, please be prepared to face some difficult material – ideas and images you may have kept undercover for many years.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

Relax your physical body in the way that most pleases you. Close your eyes and breathe deeply for a few moments. Remember that the vision of the emotional issues may be perceived as existing within the torso of your body, within the heart region. The focus here is on causes, most probably from your past, of present financial insecurity. These are emotional injuries sustained during difficult Lessons learned usually in childhood in your current and your other lives. In your current life, these Negative Emotions have sustained themselves over time, preventing you from experiencing The Abundant Universe that is your birthright.

You may re-experience a specific event that occurred in your perceived past that represented a break from your innocent childhood experiencing and marked a new trajectory of development for you as a maturing “socialized” human. Perhaps you may view that point where you gave up some of your Reality Creation energies to authority figures: parent, teacher, relative. The feeling tone of your experiences will help you to determine where to go with this experiment. Ask for direction from your Guides. Use your Inner Senses as a compass. Your intuition will guide you if you are clear and persistent.

FINDINGS – Immediately document in some way your experiences with reading The Emotional Body.

CALLING IN YOUR SPIRIT GUIDES

HYPOTHESIS: The non-physical beings may assist in the Spiritual Prosperity Program.

Can you see that you are pursuing these studies for a purpose? You are well into this description of the Spiritual Prosperity Program. I believe it is safe to say that you are concerned about the level of prosperity that you are currently experiencing. In other words, in the nomenclature of this teaching, one of your Lessons for your current existence might well be to investigate the possibilities for increasing abundance in your life.

Now you may have been drawn to this new Blog material for a variety of reasons. But can you accept the possibility that perhaps the main reason is that you were “prompted” from within to look at the new Blog material. If you can accept this premise, then perhaps you may take it one step further, and admit the possibility that you are already in touch with non-physical beings.

Inner prompting are often communications from non-physical beings. Whether you believe that it was you guide who has prompted you, or another Spirit Guide, or simply your individual human consciousness – the amalgam of “conversations” between you and your Reincarnational Existences – do you see that you are possibly already quite well along on your path of belief change? Many of the exercises, experiments and techniques in the new material are for the express purpose of belief change in the Blog Reader. Your belief in a non-physical reality populated by Beings of Light and other Gestalts of Consciousness is a prerequisite for our continued growth as a Soul.

There are specific non-physical beings available within your mental environment that may be enlisted in the achievement of Spiritual Prosperity. You may refer to these Light Bodies as Prosperity Guides, if you wish. They are specially gifted beings that have served as financial advisors to humanity. The Crystal Light Messengers. They exist just outside of our Earthly realm as Fifth-Dimensional Beings. Simply have the Intent that you will contact your Prosperity Guides while in your times of meditation within your sacred state of Sanctuary. Then you will meet with success.

The researcher may also use the Energy Personality and other Helpers in this program. Now this is assuming you have already made these connections. If you have not, please simply ” pretend” that you have made these connections and then conduct the following experiment.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

Relax you body. Attain your Trance State. Here we are “opening the gates.” you might say, to your divine consciousness. Now you are protected; you are in your state of Sanctuary. As you open the gates you are doing so with the security that comes with divine protection. The Negative Emotions have no place here. Only the Divine is made manifest under of an opening gate or other portal, visualize your assistants in attaining prosperity and abundance crossing the threshold and coming into your awareness.

The non-physical beings of whatever stripe and purpose, emit Light according to the conditions of their particular existences. Vibration, you see, is their calling card. It is with your Inner Senses, also, that you may distinguish one Guide from another, procure their names, ask what services they offer, and so on. Use your Inner Senses in the Best way that suits you for this purpose.

Reality Face Virtual Wire Rack Mask Psyche

This experiment may take just a few minutes. As we have stated elsewhere, your Guides are Literally on the threshold of your awareness, waiting to be acknowledged. Now some of my Blog Readers are perhaps unaware of how easily this is done. They are expecting something difficult to accomplish. They are therefore quite surprised when they encounter one or more of these diving Guides on just the most cursory of exploratory voyages. So I suggest to you that you approach this experiment as one that is easily done. Here you are a child, you see, having some fun with your imagination. When you are done having fun with your nonphysical associates, give yourself the suggestion to return to full sensory awareness in Third-Dimensional Reality.

FINDINGS – Document the names of your Guides and the service they offer.

COLLABORATING WITH SOUL FAMILY MEMBERS

Hypothesis: You may manage soul family relationships in the Trance State.

We have stated before in these new Blogs series, that each and every human being that you meet – including the delivery person and the teller at the local bank – is in your life at the moment to teach you something. Many of the more intense relationships you create with these humans are Soul Family connections. Of this broad group of humans who are within your field of experiencing to interact with you in the learning of Lessons regarding the acquisition of money and the perception of the Abundant Universe.

This statement may bring to mind events from your own life in which you were quite intrigued with the good fortune that came your way, at hands of one of these mysterious extended family members. Or perhaps you were “taken for a ride” by one of your acquaintances, and relieved of some of your hard-earned money. Either way, you were learning Lessons from Soul Family members. These interactions often have an element of Fate attached to them, as though they were “meant to be,” to coin a phrase from our New Agers. However, as you know, you and your colleagues are making it happen. You are just currently unaware of the intricacies of this cooperative effort.

The perspective of experiencing Lessons from within a broad collective called the Soul Family can be learned. I suggest you conduct the following experiment with the idea that you are already embodying this perspective.

PERFORMING YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

The first step here would be to identify those Soul Family members who may act as partners in the realization of abundance you require. Using your Inner Senses you may home-in on these personalities in your times of meditation. Some you may have already identified within your field of experiencing as potential allies. This is a form of communicating with the Energy Personality of another. You will be identifying specific characteristics of personality and Soul that will assist you in creating good fortune within the lives of all of you, everyone benefits, you see.

Now this group may be small in number or it may be quite Large. Either way, you will be working with these humans on the subtle levels. You might think of yourself as the business manager of this assembly, and you are working with their High Selves for mutually beneficial purposes. This is you Intent. You are grounded in your sense of Divine Will to communicate your interests to these humans via their Spirit Guides – their Energy Personalities. If EP of the Soul Family member resists, do not press further. You are not to force yourself on others in any way. This is a sacred form of communication. If you meet with resistance, move on to another potential partner. In the mundane world, there may be no signs that you are interacting with these people in any special fashion. “Business as usual,” as we say. However, do note the attainment of group goals that could have never been realized had these secret connections not been made.

FINDINGS – Document the establishment of connections with Soul Family members and the realization of Soul Family goal in matters of abundance.

PERCEIVING AND CREATING THE ABUNDANT UNIVERSE

Hypothesis: We may tune-in the abundant universe

Perception creates reality in the Third Dimension. When you visualize and embody The Abundant Universe, you are CREATING and SUSTAINING this Gestalt of Consciousness. You are withdrawing from this template of creation, the highly personalized elements in the form of Conscious Units that you require to create the reality of abundance within your Personal Reality Field. You can’t help yourself, you see. Your thoughts are composed of Conscious Units. All Consciousness seeks manifestation of itself. By simply thinking of something you lend your efforts towards creating it.

Now we each have our idealized view of the perfect world. You know quite well what objects, what types of people, and what behaviors would exist in this world. For your own reasons, however, you choose not to put your energies towards manifesting The Abundant Universe. As I have said to you, your “reasons” for doing something or not doing something in your life – the denials. The intellectualization – serve to aid you in encountering and experiencing your Lessons.

For example: consider a human that finds themselves within a precious financial situation. All is lost financially for whatever reasons in physical reality. Additionally, this human makes matters worse by continually blaming themselves for the financial loss. It is a personal issue. They feel as though they have failed personally as well as financially.

Now this negative assessment of the Personal Reality, as you may remember, serves to perpetuate it. The person is trying all of the domains of existence into one know. They are in effect saying, “I have failed financially because I am a failure personally. I am a bad person, an undeserving person.” The entire existence is colored with this negative assessment.

How does this person perceive and create The Abundant Universe under these drastic conditions? Remember, this is an unconscious process. If you wish to this Gestalt of Consciousness that is your personalized Abundant Universe, then you must go to the unconscious and explore. It would be wise to use the emotionally neutral state of Trance. In the Trance State the subject may gain a broader view of the life and the conditions of existence. The Agenda of negative Reality Creation is easily interrupted by the Trance. The opportunity for introducing changes into the reality creation strategies is made available.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

Attain your Trance State. If you are in your quiet meditation area, relax your body, breathe deeply, rest upon the floor or do whatever behaviors assist you in creating the Trance. If you are out in the world, you may, as we have suggested in the last Blog, tie the attainment of the Trance State to a gesture such as snapping the fingers, rubbing a good-luck piece or whatever suits you.

In this experiment we will assist the researcher in withdrawing from the negative reality of lack and “waking up” in The Abundant Universe. This has a distinctly magical quality to it.

As you are resting comfortably, out in the world or in your meditation area in your home, within your Trance State, embody the perception of entering the Gestalt of Consciousness we are calling The Abundant Universe in this Blog. A playful approach here may be best. As child would, imagine yourself in your inner world, coming into a kingdom, perhaps, in which all of the desired Reality Constructs that populate your personalized Abundant Universe are displayed. You are venturing out and away from your normal world to visit this inner world where the outer world is created.

As we have suggested in our other experiments in using the Trance State, the information stream may be sensed in various ways. The Gestalt of Consciousness may present itself to you “full blown” as in an intense, multisensory visionary experience. Or you may get your “glimpse” of this idealized state as though you were receiving a Holographic Insert or other inspirational missive from the nonphysical world. You may hear sounds and voices that represent abundance and good fortune for you personally. You may also simply experience a “good feeling,” a pervasive sensation of grace, a feeling that all is well with you in your world.

As you receive you data, note the information for documenting later, then proceed to go deeper into you relaxed state and uncover more Findings. Typically, because the emotions experienced in perceiving The Abundant Universe are so positive, you will be motivated to continue your explorations. When you feel as though you have enough information from the session, return to full sensory awareness of Third Dimensional Reality, bringing with you The Abundant Universe that you have perceived/created into existence on the subtle levels. If you are out and about, on a park bench let us say, snap your fingers, rub your good-luck piece. If you are indoors in your meditation area, give yourself the suggestion that you will return to your normal awareness with the full memories of The Abundant Universe intact.

FINDINGS – Document your findings.

THE METAPHORICAL TOOLS-2

Of course you may use all of the Metaphorical Tools we have described in our series of new Blogs. An Important addition you might consider is the creation of The Well of Good Fortune, or some other metaphor tailored to your own sensitive. Here the object is to call your symbols of wealth, good fortune, havingness, and combine them into one powerful image, phrase, song, object or what have you.

Give the Metaphorical Tool a fitting name. Empower it with your thoughts and your limitless energies. In my example, you might empower with your energies a visualized well, perhaps somewhere in a beautiful forest. Within this well is the abundance and good fortune you desire. Going to The Well of Good Fortune, then, might be a simple matter of imagining yourself entering a forest, observing The Well, and visualizing the desired Reality Constructs coming up and out of the well, perhaps as you turn the crank. The Metaphorical Tools are easy to create. They are most effective when you can feed them your divine energy. Personalize these tools and make them your own.

The Radio Dial Metaphor may also be ably used in Spiritual Prosperity. Just as you perhaps used this tool to tune-in the healing elements and tune-out the disease-producing Gestalts of Consciousnesses in The Healing Regimen, here you may use your Radio Dial to tune-in on the impulses from your Simultaneous Lives, for example, that seek to direct your vision toward The Abundant Universe. You would then, at the same time, tune-out the impulses and influences from Negative Entities, other existences that are experiencing lack and those Negative Emotions that hamper your attainment of Spiritual Prosperity.

Now for some experimentation in Spiritual Prosperity.

SUSPENDING DISBELIEF

The technique of suspending disbelief will assist you in creating further moments of prosperity after you are successful in creating a “glimpse” of The Abundant Universe. For example: suppose you have completed your investigative work, you have gone within to examine your personal conceptualization of The Abundant Universe. Your idea of abundance, for the time being, might involve, perhaps, receiving an unexpected windfall, a sum of money, several hundred dollars let us say, in the mail. Now you have done your work here. You have attached Love to all of your though-forms. You have magically anticipated this gift and now you are witnessing the manifestation.

At the moment of realization, when you connect the windfall to your Spiritual Prosperity behaviors and thoughts depending on your “issues” – self-image. Experiencing of Negative Emotions – you may find it difficult or quite easy TO ACCEPT RESPONSIBILITY for this creative work. If you have doubts and ascribe the gift to coincidence, you diminish your power in the moment. However, if you confidently express your gratitude, Loving Understanding and Courage in that moment, you are adding to your powers of manifestation. You are suspending disbelief – the negative assessment of the act of manifestation – for just the moment. Then you would successively suspend disbelief in your growing powers, moment-to-moment in the “future.”

Suspending disbelief is a form of silencing the internal censor – that aspect of your consciousness that wishes to keep you entranced in the certain of status quo realities. Over time, this voice will be replaced by the encouraging message from Beings of Light – your Guides who seek to assist you in expanding your awareness.

VOTING WITH THE POCKETBOOK

Let me digress on this point… it is ALL LOVE, Dear Blog Reader. Even the millionaire banker, then, is created from Love. Yet us just say for the sake of argument, that the banker is war profiteer. Through supporting armament manufacturers or the military, this banker prospers from death, hatred, war. “What good,” you might ask, “does my Loving construct do in this context? “Vote with your pocketbook,” by selecting the most appropriate, Loving and peaceful institutions with which to do business, and then doing business with these institutions .

In this way, you are supporting, on both the physical and the metaphysical levels, the fulfillment of positive values. This takes research, of course. This activity may be thought of as the assessment of the Personal Reality Field with regards to the financial or business aspects of your life. Where will you put the Loving and Courageous energies of your being? From what institutions will you withhold your creative energies? Again, this is all about allying with select Gestalts of Consciousness, Entities, Beings of Light. This is conscious co-creation.

TRUE GIVING

As I suggested our practice of giving to worthy causes only when we may claim a deduction from our taxes, is not Giving in truest sense. This is not the magical act of that we are teaching in this new material. To be honest, it is a sad form of money exchange, this corporate giving that is celebrated in our world. Many of us who give in this fashion expect something in return. Whether it is a tax deduction, God’s grace or simply the good karma that is so valued by the modern human, something is expected in return for the giving. Might I state it bluntly here? We taint this process with our bargaining. In Giving there are only the communication streams of Beings of Light. There is only the transformation of Light into something else. There is no bargaining.

I believe it might help us to think of our Giving of our money, our time, our Loving Understanding to others is simply the transformation of our Light Energy into what is needed by the recipient of the Giving. From this perspective, you may envision the immediate transformation of our gift of Light into what is desired, what is required by the receiver. In this context, the recipient uses their Reality Creation energies to collaborate with us on the subtle levels in the co-creation of the necessary constructs.

Take for example here my previous description of the children in our poor undeveloped countries. I am not suggesting that we refuse the tax deduction we “deserve” for contributing to their cause – though that would indeed demonstrate our commitment to true Giving – but please try attaching your powerful Light energies to the gift when we do make our donations for the purchase of food, medical care, and so on. And remember, Dear Blog Reader, there is no pity here in this true reality of the Soul. We are equals on the subtle levels, equals who are merely learning different Lessons. Do not give because you feel sorry for the other; give because you acknowledge the opportunity to endorse the Courage of another.

It may help you to think of oneself as a Light Body in this exercise. I am a Being of Light. You are a Being of Light. On the etheric levels, within the Telepathic Network, we both have equal powers. We communicate with one another instantaneously. We observe the instantaneous manifestation of our thought-forms. We are in the Third Dimension and we have a perception of a lag-time in manifestation. However, this is merely a perception. Your reality is my reality at its base. Our holographic messages are received INSTANTLY by the recipient. On the etheric plane, the recipient IMMEDIATELY benefits from our Loving and Courageous act of imbuing our transmissions with these creative energies.

Now if you are coming from a perception of lack, it is quite true that on the physical reality level, it appears that we are giving up our resources, our money, our personal property. However, as I said, the Soul Self of each of us engaged in the interaction know quite definitely that this is not the case. As the Soul Self of the cashier at the market, for example, receive the energy from our transmission as we hand them our payment for our food products, our higher Self receives an influx of beneficial energy from them. Now on the physical plane, all that we may notice is a slight knowing smile on the face of the cashier. This is our cue, however, that our thought-form is manifesting.

TRANSMITTER OF LOVE

Here then is the secret. You will receive what you transmit, for you will be a transmitter of Love. The student attaches Love and positive emotion energy to all thought-forms that are transmitted within their mental environment. In mundane matters of daily living, then, while you pay your bills, you are attaching Love to them with your thoughts. While you work at your job, you are sending out thought-forms of Love to your colleagues and to customers. While you interact with your family and friends, you are sending thought-forms of Love into their mental environments of Love to all concerned with no expectation of receiving anything in return. This is a form of giving it all away, is it not?

As you are also, as a researcher, a student of your own self-development, interpreting each of your experienced moments in positive Loving ways – as best you can, of course, perhaps you have not yet achieved perfection in this technique – you will be contributing to the experiencing of positive realities with this divine perspective.

The mental construct, the thought-energy hologram we are calling Giving It All Away, is based in Love and Courage. With every transmission – for example, donating to your causes – you attach the holographic Idea Construct. This attachment powers the thought-form on the subtle levels. As my Holographic Inserts to us in the Third Dimension serve to enlighten and inform us, in same way, your transmission of these thought-forms attached to your mundane behaviors may serve to enlighten, empower and PROSPER the recipients. It is all energy, once again. It is all Light Energy in the form of the Consciousness Units.

GIVING IT ALL AWAY-TECHNIQUE

Troubled by the assertion that to be truly successful and to truly perceive and create The Abundant Universe, the student must, in the final analysis, “give it all away.” To be sure, at first glance, this statement seems to imply that you will lose everything that you have worked for in the Spiritual Prosperity Program. Certainly, if you give your wealth or material possessions to others, you no longer have possession of them. You are without them. How does one put food on the table or pay bills if what is received is continually given away to others – individuals and collectives. These are earnest and excellent questions to ask. In answering them, please allow me to pass on to you, Dear Blog Reader, another fact of life for you in physical existence.

Now others before me have stated this bluntly, so this is certainly not something that you do not already know.

YOU RECEIVE WHAT YOU TRANSMIT.

In terms of energy – Light energy, which is, as we have stated earlier, the “Stuff” of all created realities – you get what you give. There is a popular aphorism that applies here, “What goes around come around,” The statement implies, I believe, that there is a type of karmic balancing dynamic that occurs within the lives of humans. My Blog readers know my feelings on karma and the Eastern theory of Reality Creation. I believe it is quite correct to a degree. ” Let me explain… you live your lives all at once, within the spacious moment, the eternal moment that exists NOW. Your lives are certainly not sequential, for there is no such thing as linear time in the experiencing of the Soul, your true reality.

Now as you are within this Moment Point possibly sensing your connection to your lives past, present and future, you are receiving energy to these lives. Additionally, at this moment, let us say that you are also receiving energy from and transmitting energy to COUNTLESS humans within our Consensus Reality. You are also NOW quite naturally transmitting energy to and receiving energy from the many elemental forms within your Personal Reality.

What does Light energy have to do with The Abundant Universe and giving it all away? Let us go back to my earlier discussions of conscious Units. Greatly simplified, this Light energy is the medium for the Reality Creation project. Let us say that Light holds within it the potencies and potentialities of all of our essential metaphors in our theory of Reality Creation. Now you may remember that the Conscious Units are electromagnetic. As they assemble into Gestalts of Consciousness, they do so according to energies of attraction and repulsion: like with like, yet opposites assemble within the whole as counterparts to their opposites, and so on. This is the organizing principle of life. I have already described to you how All That Is – essentially Love in action – creates realities that are not Love, that are the opposites indeed of Love. In this way Reality Creation evolves, differentiates along every conceivable avenue of development. It is just this way with Light, my friend; the Love Light of All That Is.

DISTRACTING THE EGO/INTELLECT

We have suggested that we are an expert at distracting the ego/intellect from an examination of our life Lessons. Now we shall examine how we may distract our consciousness from the recreation of lack to the Divine – to a creation and perception of The Abundant Universe.

For our example here, let us say that you are currently addressing an issue of responding to financial events with fear. You may receive in your daily mail a notice that you are behind in paying a bill of some kind. As you read the stern warning, perhaps you are reminded of instances in the past when you failed to meet your financial obligations and were punished in some way. Because these negative memories are so rich in emotional intensity, you may be swept away for a few moments as you literally travel to the moment in time to experience the negative fear-producing emotions. This is a simple example of Astral travel. You have been triggered by the receipt of the bill to go back in time for a re-experiencing of what we might term “financial worry.”

Now let us devise a response to receiving the bill that will assist in the creation of positive realities rather than the continuation of negatives. The trick here is to awaken in the moment so that you may have conscious control IN the current moment. This you would possibly open the bill, read the stern warning, and before your subconscious can take you back in time for a reliving of the negative states of financial worry, you exert awareness of your current Moment Point. When you are established in the moment, at the second of recognition of the negative, fear-producing material, you imagine a positive outcome. This is best done by remembering positive outcomes of the past. Using your Intention, you distract your ego/intellect from responding unconsciously to the fear-producing material.

The negative historical data can be quite persuasive, so you must persevere in this moment. You might remind your self that you are existing in tandem with the Divine – with All That Is – and that there is an incoming message to be received. Then you would imagine with full sensory awareness your receiving sums of money, for instance, enabling you to meet your financial obligations.

This imaginative construct exists in your current moment, therefore, and in your future also as it is manifest enabling you to pay your bill, yet it is based on a positive financial event that occurred in your past. It may be advantageous for you to “mine” your perceived past for these positive financial experiences, no matter how small or insignificant they may at first appear. The emotional tone is what is important here. The idea of the Divine, prosperity and The Abundant Universe are the most important features.

The feeling of contentment and abundance you felt when your caregiver gave you a quarter to buy some candy when you were a child becomes an important reference point for you in these experiments. You are recreating these positive feelings of hope, faith etc. IN THE CURRENT MOMENT. You will then “push” the positive moments into the future as you embody the positive state of consciousness – abundance – moment-to-moment. This is easily done. And I specifically suggest you turn to your childhood experiences for the positive states of consciousness, for it was as a child that you most probably first experienced using your powerful imagination to create those things you desired.

CONSECUTIVE POSITIVE ASSESSMENT AS BACK ENGINEERING

I may help you to think of this activity as a form of back engineering your Reality Constructs in the immediate aftermath of their creation. Let me stand upon my soapbox for just a moment… we exist in linear time in the Third Dimension. This is the appearance of a reality that unfolds one moment after another. We create our own reality, and as such we have undoubtedly created Both prosperous moment and moments of lack.

In Consecutive Positive Assessment for this Spiritual Prosperity, then, you would, upon experiencing a moment of prosperous reality creation – receiving good financial news in a phone conversation, for example – contemplate the thought reality activities YOU YOURSELF used previously to create the prosperous moment. This information may come to you as an emotional tone, a feeling. You may receive an image from childhood, perhaps, a positive picture that epitomizes for you prosperity, abundance.

Again, we create our reality from ideas, images, emotions entertained within our consciousness at any one time. Within this matrix of possibilities lie the precise energies and methods for creating this prosperous moment we are describing. All of us have the potential to recreate the conditions for the experiencing of the prosperous moment, and then “remember” how we did so for future reference.

However, there may be roadblocks here that you find that “assist” us in avoiding the prosperous , moment. These are the ideas and images and ruminations of our personal consciousness that have effectively kept us from the level of Prosperity Creation we desire or believe we deserve. To use our terms here: Consciousness Units energized by these potent thoughts of lack, create Reality Constructs in the form of events, physical objects, behaviors we witness and embody that perpetuate the level of lack we are experiencing.

What do you then do in the moment, Dear Blog Reader? I suggest you persevere, and in the following moments in the best way you can, attempt to assess your sequential moments of experiencing in positive ways, DESPITE the lapse into negative thinking. True, you may have a period of time using this technique, when you feel that it is not doing much good for you. The abundant Universe seems quite far away. Then you continue on your own program of picking up where you left off, continually taking up the challenge to again begin the creation of the prosperous moment. You will get quite good at it over time if you take the time to practice this technique.

CONSECUTIVE POSITIVE ASSESSMENT AND LESSONS

Now let me explain to you this CPA from a slightly different perspective than the one I used in the Healing regimen. Here I am asking you to address the Lesson demonstrated within each successive moment in linear time. What does that moment offer you in the way of learning? How may you experience Loving Understanding and courage as the result of your assessment of that moment in time? This may sound difficult to accomplish, but it is merely a matter of practice until it becomes habit. You could say that what you are accomplishing here is the creation of the virtues of humankind within the moment as a result of your research INTO the moment.

CONSECUTIVE POSITIVE ASSESSMENT- TECHNIQUE

Truly ALL of our exercises, techniques and experiments are designed to allow you to wake up in the moment. However, this technique of Consecutive Positive Assessment we are presenting as your primary toll for this awakening. It is something that is easily learned and fun to do. The skills you acquire when practicing CPA will serve you well in your awakening on all levels of understanding.

You consecutively create each and every one of your moments in Third-Dimensional Reality. Though the creative/perspective powers of your Inner Senses, you create and then perceive the moments of your existence. With our Consecutive Positive Assessment technique, then, you will be interpreting each of your experienced moments in a positive fashion. Something good will emerge from all of your activities. You will see the positive wherever you look.

MONEY ISSUES

Your money issues – your prosperity issues – are in essence emotional issues. Are you satisfied with your “station” in life, what you have achieved financially, materially? Your emotional responses, ongoing, to your life events, strictly determine to what degree and in what form The Abundant Universe manifests in you Personal Reality field. Remember, recreation of your status quo reality is unconscious. In the case of money matters, your emotional subconscious responses to the events in your life are the determine factors in your continuing level of havingness. For this reason, waking up IN THE MOMENT is the prescription for achieving Spiritual Prosperity.

FOUNDATIONAL STATEMENT

The Foundational Statement is quite important here The Blueprint for the Spiritual Prosperity Program would require a statement of purpose. This statement may include words and phrasing that present the plan for your prosperous attainment in symbolic and emotional terms. For example: let us imagine the day-to-day life of a human, a woman or a man who is just getting by financially. This person is employed at a job that certainly does not fulfill them emotionally or artistically. The job must be kept, however, to allow the bills to be paid and paid on time.

What would a prosperous life, a life of scared abundance, look like and feel like to this human? Let us approach this analysis from a perspective of Lessons, as we often do in this new blog material. Suppose that this human is learning specific Lessons regarding the ceding of power their powers of Reality Creation in the hands of heir empoyer. May we suggest that matters of self-worth enter here also? With the ceding of powers to others, the self-worth is automatically diminished.

In fact, in this example, let us assume that each workday in the life of this individual is a reminder to them that they are powerless and that they face a future of continuing powerlessness. My first questions to you would be, “Where is the Soul’s Intent here?” Where is the spirit of this human?” Now obviously, the spirit is not too brightly lit here. Perhaps they are too occupied with grieving over the lost life, that they do not hear the voices of spirit that call to them within their mental environment. If this person were to articulate their dilemma in a few succinct and symbolic words, they might say:

I desire to dream a dream of satisfying occupation that brings me financial rewards beyond mere survival. Abundance!

Do you see how this human yearns for a vision of a better life, a better world for themselves? They desire a dream, perhaps because they are not experiencing pleasant, creative dreaming in their private or business lives. They do indeed require a vision, a vision from spirit, perhaps, that may inspire them and give them a sense of direction and purpose. Of course, your Foundational Statement will be concerned with your own issues and Lessons regarding prosperity. Think about these issues a few moments.

Write down your Foundational Statement here:

THE BLUEPRINT

You are preparing to create a positive reality of abundance. It would be a good idea to create a personalized program for the attainment of this goal. As you practice the suggested Techniques and as you conduct the Experiments that follow, you will quite naturally develop your own plan. Some of these Suggestions I offer you may work better for you than others. By all mean, implement the workable Suggestions. Leave the Techniques that may be too difficult for you at this time to another day. At the end of this Blog Series you will find the necessary work pages for you to develop your personal Blueprint.

DEFINITION OF SPIRITUAL PROSPERITY

The Spiritual Prosperity Program is a cooperative effort between the practitioner and the Guides in a diagnosis of The Emotional Body. A Blueprint is then made for the creation of a positive reality called Prosperity. Rituals of Prosperity are then performed with the application of the various techniques and experiments. The continued application of the Ritual of Prosperity until the manifestation becomes habitual, creates a positive reality that will sustain itself over time.

LACK CONTINUED

I have just suggested that the human experiencing an absence of havingness has quite probably experienced emotional distress within the domains of personal power and authority. These injuries occur within the Simultaneous Lives and are re-experienced by the human via impulses sent to them from these lives. The human that acts upon these suggestions will create more unfortunate experiences in their ongoing life. Over time, the state of consciousness we are referring to as lack “solidifies” as the recreation of states of lack becomes habitual. It seems there is no hope here. The subject may feel they were born to be poor, to be without. Like depression, the entire field of the Personal reality is colored by these negative conditions. And in a reciprocal fashion, the outer environment reflects the inner state of emotional injury.

We create our own reality, you see. We have effectively created a belief in the inevitability of poverty. You have created poverty through the template of this belief. Because the emotional tone of lack is pervasive in the Personal Reality Field, you habitually will choose only those thoughts, images, behaviors that will recreate the status quo. Thus lack endures.

I have painted a bleak picture , Dear Blog reader. Now I shall present some Techniques and Experiments that will assist you in your Spiritual Prosperity Program, at whatever level of lack you find yourself.

Perception of lack

The key emotional support that the human brings to prevent the clear perception of The Abundant Universe is LACK. The perception of lack, emotionally experienced over time, creates and sustains the state of consciousness called poverty. In those who create lives of “just getting by,” this emotional tone is somewhat pronounced. In those who create lives of abject poverty, it is pervasive. The emotional Idea Construct of lack is the electromagnetic core to which the varying Reality Constructs that compose the Personal Reality of the human experiencing poverty are attracted. Briefly, if you see lack wherever you look, you are conceiving and perpetuating lack wherever you go.

Now before we continue with this explanation, please allow me to explain again the process of the Soul Self as it creates a life of Lessons. Thus far, my description of the self-created reality of poverty may seem to be quite heartless, a matter of ” blaming the victim.” After all, how does one explain the many innocent children living in famine-afflicted countries? How can I possibly suggest that these children CHOSE their current existences? Dear Blog Reader, remember that the Soul Self sends a fragment of itself into the body of the baby and then creates Lessons without guilt or other Negative emotions. Also, on deep levels of understanding, the baby also knows and accepts the conditions of the coming life. Yes, it is dramatic, the hundreds of thousands of humans who die under these miserable conditions. Yet that is the point here. The Soul is dramatizing for the Entity and All That Is, as well as the subject, these difficult Lessons.

Again, without generalizing too much here, I can tell you that many of these short lives are experienced by Souls who have reached the end of their incarnations of Earth. They are ready for the peaceful and Loving realities of other systems. They are quite enthused about “going out of the loop,” in a sense, with a great flourish – the short, dramatic existence of a child in a poor country, let us say, who seems to be truly a victim. In the greater perspective of the Soul Self, it is just opposite. These children are creating their lives through great bravery and Loving Acceptance. They are not victims.

RELIGIOUS CONDITIONING AND FAITH

Dear Blog Reader, I believe that a spiritual practice of prosperity is necessary to assist those in need of reconciling their religious or spiritual beliefs with their desires for material wealth. Within this spiritual practice of abundance it is perfectly “OK” to entertain thoughts of acquiring material possessions, engaging in desired behaviors with other humans, and so on. However, these thoughts or visualizations will be created within a different mental environment that you may be used to. For is it not true that there may be a lingering doubt that you may be engaging in desperation and foolishness, or worse yet, “the work of the devil” – the sin of avarice – may have held you back in your efforts at manifesting abundance. It is true, that in matters of conscious co-creation, the focus must be steady and unswerving with an element of hopeful expectation powering the exercise.

So faith enters the discussion, Here I would ask you to drop any negative connotations that you may have attached to the word faith. When we suggest you embody the state of faith, we would hope that no symbols or emotions, will be recalled that will keep you away from what you are attempting to create. Some examples of these counterproductive ideas are: fear of punishment by religious figures, thoughts that faith is a religious concept of empowered spirituality here. As in other experiments and exercises in this new material, we are asking you to change your beliefs and ideas about what is possible. In this case, the object that is Loving, accepting, Courageous.

Perhaps a short example may help you. Consider the bird, the rock, the tree, the mountain. Do they worry what the future will brings? I suggest they do not. All of these quite conscious elements LIVE within the moment, experiencing the existence as providing all that is required. The human, on the other hand, complicates matters in the matter of existence and brings fear, worry and doubt into the equation.

Let us say then that our faith, our trust, our hope in this theory of Reality Creation, is in essence the simple Loving expectation, in the moment, of consciousness. We may even go so far as to say that the human embodying this faith we are describing, is utilizing within the moment, the creative potencies of All That Is. Now the human would do well to emulate the bird, the rock, the tree in this embodying of faith. Look around you and see how the various living and “inert” compositions are sustained within the moment. The future and the past do not sustained within the moment. The future and the past do not exist. There is only the current moment of existence for consciousness.

PROSPERITY AND SIMULTANEOUS LIVES

Now all of us are on Earth to learn a literal lifetime of Lessons, The Lessons of value, abundance, money are often related to matters of authority, SELF– worth and personal power. We might say that the person experiencing a lifetime of lack has most probably experienced emotional injuries in these domains, certainly in the current existence, and also in other Simultaneous Lives. In this way, all perceived negative conditions are truly systemic, representing a focus by the Soul Self on the injurious Gestalt of Consciousness lending their creative energy and direction to the creation of the negative conditions in all of the participating Reincarnational Existences. It is indeed a group effort here, as it is in all matters of the individual human experiencing their Lessons – positive or negative – in any particular lifetime.

An example of this multidimensional group effort is in order. Imagine a Soul Self, an Entity composed of, shall we say, several thousand Simultaneous Lives, as well as innumerable probable existences. Each of these Selves, additionally, is unaware of the others. They are each individually living as suppose that of these many lives, a small percentage is experiencing what we call “Wealth” or a perception of The Abundant Universe. To simply, let us say that the remaining lives are experiencing less than favorable conditions. Now the lives experiencing lack “support” one another on the subtle levels via the Telepathic Network. Through impulses received telepathically from their fellow impoverished selves, the poor ones are given instruction and advice, in a sense, on how to create an impoverished existence. Now this is how it works under all circumstances for us in our world. As I said, you and all of your lives are learning Lessons. You support one another in learning your Lessons via these impulses sent and received on the subtle levels.

In these matters of the Soul Self and the learning of Lessons there is no judgment. There is no experiencing of the emotional complex of guilt on these levels of interaction. The Soul Self has a mandate, we might say, that is emotion-free, to assist in the creation of the reincarnational dramas and comedies for the Simultaneous Lives. It is the individual lives themselves that bring the emotional element into the mix for learning purposes.

Example of value fulfillment

Now my concept of Value Fulfillment enters here, as you might well expect. Money has value, I am sure you will agree. Yet please allow me to describe for you the “spiritual” basis of this value. An example for illustration: Dave receives a check from one of his blog readers in exchange for an item. When Dave takes the check in his hands from the envelope, he experiences an emotional response. These emotions may run the gamut from positive to negative depending on the context, the conditions of existence, you see. Remember, it is a process of creating realities from emotional states of consciousness, this Third-Dimensional existence. The emotions of Dave, and indeed of all of us, vary and degree throughout our waking hours. This is quite obvious to us I am sure.

Now let us say that our subject is perceiving through the perspective of The Abundant Universe, he is also strengthening this perspective through his appreciation and gratitude in the moment. Remember that in the Moment Point we are “priming the pump” with positive images and ideas that will set the stage for further demonstrations of The Abundant Universe in our perceived future. The creation of this positive reality of The Abundant Universe is becoming habitual.

On the other hand, just for the sake of argument, suppose for a moment that our subject is not necessarily perceiving from a grateful, magical, abundant perspective. Suppose that, moments before opening the envelope containing the check, he had an encounter with someone that “caused” him to become anxious, fearful, angry. These Negative emotions, further let us say, combine within his psyche to create a potent quite toxic brew of ingratitude and disdain that will color his Reality Creation efforts, as least for the short term – for the next few minutes of hours. You may possibly guess what might be the result of our subject’s opening the envelope containing the check. Certainly we might not expect gratitude or an appreciation of the magical nature of the Universe. Most probably we may expect a less than healthy response from him, for he has set himself up to create negative realities by succumbing to the energies of negativity.

Thirdly, may we take it for granted that our subject IS learning Lessons of gratitude, acceptance and the other virtues of humankind? If we may, let us also assume that he is actively involved in learning these Lessons consciously and has identified the negative GOC(Gestalt of Consciousness) resident in his psyche, one we might call Ingratitude. Knowing that he has the power to “change his mind” with his Intent, he uses his Divine Will to create Loving Understanding and Courage out of anxiety, fearfulness and anger. thus, upon opening the envelope and observing the check, he is well-prepared to experience gratitude, perceive The Abundant Universe and perhaps marvel at the magical nature of Reality Creation.

In the first case, our subject is appreciating the value of the magical aspect of money creation. In the second case, he is concerned with experiencing the value of Negative Emotions and those realities created through these emotions. In the third case he is experiencing the value of empowerment that comes with awakening in the moment to his Reality Creation agenda, and then using his powers of creation to change that agenda. In all cases, he is learning SPIRITUAL Lessons that will add to the experiencing of his Entity and All That Is.

The Abundant Universe

The Abundant Universe exists, as does any other potent GOC, (Gestalt of consciousness) as a holographic entity within our collective consciousness. Both past and future memorized of this state are released in ecstatic dreaming. Our myths of paradise and our stories of the Garden of Eden and other highly idealized Utopian constructs, are fragments of this GOC that serve to remind us of how pleasant physical reality can be. We feel a great sense of longing when engaged in these visionary activities, as though a priceless element of existence has been lost forever. This, however, is OVER-dramatizing the issue. The Abundant Universe is there before us, where it always is, where it has always been, in our terms. The perceptual blinders we are calling the Negative Emotions serve to block our view of this paradise.

We have used terms such as calcification, hardening of the vision, etc. to explain the process of the human creating the self-imposed “blindness” within the personal consciousness. Knowing this. I am certain that you may grasp the simplicity of succeeding in this enterprise Spiritual Prosperity. It is a matter of waking-up to our true reality. It is a matter of facing our Lessons with Courage and Loving Understanding. It is a matter or remembering paradise and then recreating it in the moment.

Gestalt of Consciousness and Prosperity

Prosperity, The Abundant Universe, havingness are all simply “states of mind.” They are also Gestalts of Consciousness as we have defined the term in this Blog. As Consciousness Units are manipulated by consciousness over the millennia in the creation of realities, templates of creation are “agreed upon” to serve as the blueprint for the creation of Reality Constructs of all types. Those states of consciousness that we may call “poverty” and “just getting by,” serve as the blueprints for self – The Soul Self – to create an ongoing less-than-prosperous life.

This may appear to you as overly simplified. Dear Blog Reader, it truly is quite simple. This is the basic dynamic of Reality Creation in the Third Dimension. I have also referred to this act of creation as a matter of “alliance” with Entities of various kinds. It is all the same here. Reality creation occurs at the point where our Intention, our focus, our consciousness, our spirit meets the Third Dimension. Period.

Do you notice how matters of worthiness and guilt do NOT enter into this discussion of the basics of manifestation? The human being in the throes of feeling unworthy, of feeling guilty, of feeling cursed interjects these Negative Emotions into the blueprints of the Reality Creation project. This could be our current existence, for example. AS the human degrades, in a sense, this basic template of creation, the GOC (Gestalt of Consciousness) we are calling The Abundant Universe is transformed over time into one that creates a life of “just getting by” or even one of “abject poverty.”

The Abundant Universe is our baseline reality. We are born within The Abundant Universe. Over time we have a tendency to make this GOC “our own” by personalizing it with our Negative Emotions. We do this for purposes of dramatizing our Lessons in physical reality. We are aided by members of our Soul Family in this endeavor. Our main task in creating Spiritual Prosperity is to work with our Soul Family to perceive and create The Abundant Universe.

SPIRITUAL PROSPERITY

We have titled this section of the Series of Blogs Spiritual Prosperity to again challenge your beliefs about what is and is not spiritual. Everything is literally made of spirit. Everything in our world is spiritual, therefore. Spirit is Light. Spirit is energy. We are on the Earth currently to learn how to use energy to create our world in an improved fashion. From this premise we shall move forward.

Our Spiritual Prosperity Program will allow you to transform your beliefs and ideas about abundance. If you are experiencing a lack of necessities, you will be empowered to alter your perspective in a necessary fashion to reveal The Abundant Universe. Now this Abundant Universe is always there for you to experience. It is a probable manifestation from the field of limitless probabilities before you.

Your focus upon the positive elements within your field of perception is the path to creating and experiencing The Abundant Universe. You may remember this as the Consecutive Positive Assessments technique from the last Blog. In the Spiritual Prosperity Program we shall avail ourselves of the techniques and experiments used in The Healing Regimen

THE BLUEPRINT

The Blueprint consists of the studious application of the Ritual of Healing, the Techniques and your personal Findings to the issue at hand.

CPA – Consecutive Positive Assessment
DTEI- Distracting the Ego/Intellect
SD – Suspending Disbelief
MT – Metaphorical Tools
CIYG – Calling in Your Guides
RTEB – Reading The Emotional Body
BR- Belief Revision
HT- Healing Talk
CYFHS- Consulting Your Future Healed Self
CTP- Creating the Panacea

7 DAY CALENDAR

At the end of the day, assess on a scale of 1 to 7 your use of the Rituals and Techniques suggested in The Healing Regimen.

1 – Very little use 2 – Some Use 3 – Moderate Use 4 – Regular Use
5 – Consistent Use 6 – Concerted Use 7 – Very focused Use.

M T W T F S S

THE REGIMEN CONTINUES

You are required to learn your own Lessons in physical reality. The nonphysical beings are not permitted to interfere. Now this is why I must be rather vague in my presentation to you of these Ritual and Techniques. You are to work out the particulars on your own, and by so doing, gain the expertise and Value Fulfillment entailed in this project. Some of you will be satisfied to obtain modest results in this endeavor, while others will accept nothing less than “perfection.” These are your beliefs that determine “success” in this or any of our other projects. It is all a matter of your free will choice.

CREATING THE PANACEA

Hypothesis: You may empower anything with healing attributes.

You know that, beyond growing a new limb, there is nothing in your Personal Reality Field that cannot be changed provided you create the “conditions” for change that are required. Period. These conditions or requirements for manifestation are two fold: First – you require an intensity of desire and emotion that supersedes the level of emotion that creates and sustains the current reality. Second – your personal beliefs must expand to include the POSSIBILITY for the creation of the changes you wish to experience. The level of emotion that sustain or maintains your manifested reality within your Personal Reality Field may be thought of, for purposes of this explanation, as nominal or “just enough” to sustain your reality as you know it. This nominal output of emotional manifestation energy is an ongoing product of what you would term your “unconscious” or “subconscious.” You are not aware of it, in other words, as this creative energy stream does its work just beyond your field of awareness.

Now let us apply this theoretical concept to healing. As you know, Natural Healing is our term for the use of natural products – oils, water, empowered objects of various types – in the healing and balancing of the human body, that the application of these treatments to the various illnesses of the human body, need not be in a one-to-one correspondence. In other words, it is not necessary to use a specific malady. You need not seek out the specific curative. We have suggested that you have the power, within your creative consciousness, to imbue anything with the curative energy for the healing and balancing of the body. With this in mind, let us create an experiment in exploring the effects of the panacea.

Now a panacea is literally a cure-all. In our time it is often referred to in mythological terms, for our medical model cannot hold the concept of a cure-all within it.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

Relax your body. Now the cure-all may be a physical product of some sort, as in an oil, water or perhaps a physical object such as a stone or artifact. It may also be visualized. As you enter your Intention to energize the panacea with curative powers. This panacea will be empowered with all of the healing energies resident within the Gestalt of Consciousness we are calling Spontaneous Healing. You are simply accepting the transmission of the energy flow from this Energy Body into your physical body. You will then, using your intention Again, direct the healing energy into the panacea for storage. This healing energy will not lose its potency while in the panacea. You may use your panacea in ways you see fit, to treat the malady.

You may sense this data bank of healing influences called Spontaneous Healing in any way you wish. Perhaps you will tune-in with your metaphorical Tools, guided by the Loving energies emitted by this Energy Body. Perhaps you will “travel” to this Gestalt of Consciousness in a metaphorical vehicle of some sort, or simply within the Astral Form, as you call it. The nonphysical body is always available for conveying your consciousness to any location in non physical and physical reality. Simply imagine it to be and it will be so.

FINDINGS – Document your successes and challenges in creating and using the panacea.

CONSULTING YOUR FUTURE HEALED SELF

Hypothesis: You can receive advice from your future healed self.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

This experiment would be a form of “back engineering.” For example: as you visit this future healed self, using your visualized transport, you might ask yourself, “What am I doing differently now that has perhaps helped me achieve this healed stat?” Make a list of what comes to mind. You are indeed in that moment of contact, receiving information from a probable future self that is experiencing a healed state. This information gathering may take the form of an informal interview. Have a list of questions prepared prior to the experiment. If you are sufficiently comfortable in Trance that you will not be distracted by reading your questions, have the questions available to refer to during the interview.

Now…. this is your most effective advisor, your future healed self. This information from your future self may take the form of nonsense. You may, for example, be advised to perform an absurd gesture, motion or such thing. This does not make sense to your third-Dimensional ego, for it may seem embarrassing, silly etc. If you feel that you are in contact with your Guides, that you are guided by them and you are in contact with your future healed self, my advice is to take the advice of this Energy Body. Perform the silly gesture. Do the embarrassing behavior. Obviously, we would not wish to harm anyone, including the practitioner, in taking this advice.

You may, using your Inner Senses, perceive this future healed self and you might ask questions of this self and receive the telepathic responses that you may integrate into your Healing Regimen. These responses may come in symbolic form. Again, using your intuitive faculties, interpret these messages and act on them or not. Of course you have free will here, as do you in all facets of your existence, and you may act accordingly.

FINDINGS – Write down the answers you are receiving or in another way document this information from your future self.

HEALING TALK

The suggestions you give yourself continuously, your “inner dialogue,” or whatever you wish to call this conversation, are indeed very influential in your co-creation of the Personal Reality Field. Everything is suggestion, you see. All is the work of Gestalt of Consciousness.

Let me digress… we have spoken at length in this Blog Series on the great value in “listening” to suggestions of your Loving Guides. These suggestions often take the form of positive thoughts, feelings and images sensed within your mental environment. It feels, at these times of contact, that you may be experiencing a divine intervention of sorts, for the experiences of the preceding moments may have been anything other than positive and Loving. Your preceding experiences may have been very negative and challenging. Perhaps what you have done then is you have put a call to your Guides to assist you in your Reality Creation, and they have done so. In this way, you have asked for assistance from your Guides and they have responded “right when you needed it most.”

Another way to experience this state of contact with the Divine in an ongoing manner, is to “plant” the positive suggestions within your consciousness purposely, so that over time you are training yourself to experience your world in a positive way, with continuous contact with the Divine. You then recreate your reality in a positive fashion. The creation of positive realities becomes habitual, replacing the habitual creation of negative or mundane realities. This purposeful guiding of the human mentally through speech is the basis of all our healing systems on our Earth. From the aboriginal shaman to our modern medicine practitioner, all have used Healing Talk for support in the healing process.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

This experiment is similar to the preceding one, with a subtle difference. Now relax your body using your preferred techniques. The products of your belief Revisioning are the affirmative statements you may use to counter the negative ruminations that support the creation of your mundane existence. Ideally you would have committed the affirmative statements or suggestions to memory. If not, have your suggestions written out on a piece of paper to read when you are at your preferred state of relaxation. The next step is to read your affirmative statements to yourself while you are in Trance, or perhaps record the statements for playback while you are in relaxed state. Over time, if you are diligent, the positive healing statements will supplant the negative ruminations that support the malady.

FINDINGS – Document your findings rigorously in creating Healing Talk that counters your negative ruminations.

BELIEF REVISION

HYPOTHESIS: Beliefs that support disease may adapt to support healing.

Every thought you entertain within your mental sphere seeks to create itself within the physical or other dimensions, according to the templates of your beliefs about what is possible. Your thoughts of creating a healed physical body, therefore, create your potentially healed body within Dimensional-Realms that exist in probability, just as your thoughts of disease and symptoms create your malady. As you continue to focus in your Ritual fashion upon the creation of manifestation templates with “energy” in the form of Consciousness Units. This ongoing energetic support serves to move the potential reality from the probable Dimensional-Realms into the physical Third Dimensions. As you witness your co-creation of healing, your beliefs will adapt to these astounding new perceptions. The probability of healing becomes possible and finally inevitable. Your beliefs may change from skeptical to ardently supportive in this process.

Knowing this, what do you suppose the healer “sees” when they first look upon the healing or balancing that is taking place within their own system? Now this can be rather tricky to describe and to comprehend. In this case, the healer would INTEND to observe a healing transformation within the biological system. As you know, all of physical reality is a product of consciousness. In the case of the healing of the body, mind or spirit it is precisely the same. Here, your attitude is very important. Your conscious Intent is the most important element in this proceeding. So that when you observe your emerging reality, let us say upon first awakening from sleep, your conscious Intent is that you are very naturally and easily co-creating your emerging reality according to the Blueprint of healing you have decided upon in this project.

As you matter the co-creation of your Personal Reality Field, and you bring conscious awareness to the task a hand, the essentially magical act of healing becomes internalized. Beyond a particular point, you need not even think about it, for it has become automatic. Your beliefs will adapt and you will become more certain of your skills in the creation of the healing moment. You are redefining the templates of creation by making the creation of the healing moment habitual.

Now… identify and list beliefs you feel may be contributing to the creation and perpetuation of the malady. This material may take the form of a narrative or simply a list of short declarative statements. When you feel you have something to work with in this experiment, consider the divine opposites of these statements or a positive counter to the narrative. Write them down next to each other.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

You are in your protected state. Using your Inner Senses, relax with your written material and occasionally read out loud or to your self the statements and their divine counterparts. Here your intent many be in support emotionally of the Malady-producing statement of beliefs. So you are making a declaration here that you are changing your beliefs. You are withdrawing the emotional charge, form the one, and you are empowering with your emotional energy the other – the health-creating and sustaining statements or beliefs. The positive suggestion of healthful support will become internalized allowing you to release the malady-creating beliefs. As this occurs you may find that your symptoms change to reflect the changing beliefs.

Disease and symptoms serve very specific purposes, you see. They are the direct reflection of interior processes. They are the physical expression of nonphysical concepts and images.

FINDINGS – Note your beliefs and their adaptations over time.

THE EMOTIONAL BODY

Hypothesis: The emotional body displays the causes and cures of all maladies.

Now let us attempt to “read” The Emotional Body. You will be attempting to assess, with your Auric Vision, the energy signatures of the various imbalances and cures inherent in the Auric Display.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

First, please attempt to embody a deep state of relaxation. You may accomplish this by focusing on your breathing for just a few moments. You may also stretch your body in your particular fashion that leads to relaxation and a focus on the inner world. Use whatever methods you have perfected in your experimentation.

Now what we are attempting here, as in all experimental research in this new Teaching of mine, is nothing less than the entering into Trance State. This state of consciousness is simply the mental environment of your Soul Self. Here you bridge the inner to the outer worlds with your awareness. You fine-tune the perceptive tools – your Inner Senses – with you Intention to achieve the precise focus of awareness that YOU require to accomplish your goals.

The perceived representation of The Emotional Body may encompass the majority of the physical body, but is centered, as I said, within the heart region The “reading” of The Emotional Body has a visual component, yet it may be a felt sensation, as in a sense of tingling or other energy signatures within your own body. You may also experience it as a “heard” vibrational message in manner of song. These sensing’s may come to you as images and full visions, possibly composed of personas or animals in various roles, acting out various scenes for your education and enjoyment. The dramatizations may be sensed on the inward eye, though the eyes may indeed be open. The visionary state permits these contradictions – feeling the pulse of visualized scenes of hearing the songs of manifested illnesses and their sources.

The Auric Vision is the Inner Sense representation to your mental awareness of the health issue in its totality. This potent Idea Construct or Gestalt of Consciousness exists as a holographic reference that contains everything you as the Healer require to diagnose and bring balance to your own body or the body of your subject. Each of you will sense and interpret this information in your individual ways.

This Auric Vision may come to you quite quickly, just as you enter your state of awareness, or it may take several minutes for you to focus on your Inner Senses and achieve a diagnosis and perceive possible cures. You may need to “sleep on it” and receive the bulk of the information in the dream state, for assessment, diagnosis and curative measures to be achieved on awakening. These are matters of the healing process. Do what serves best your needs or the needs of your subject.

SOME TECHNIQUES THAT MAY BE USEFUL:

Use your hands to fan around the body, “feeling” for any anomalies of energy vibration. You may do this literally, with your physical hands and make passes around your own body or the body of your subject, or you may do this in the visualized form, using your imagination.

Project your consciousness into your body or the body or your subject, to search from within it as a miniature explorer.

Listen to the narrative of subject and derive from these words, the messages from the Energy Bodies that will serve to direct you to the cause of the difficulties. This narrative may serve to bring to your mind a visual or other sensory dramatization that holds the diagnosis information in symbolic or literal form.

When you are working on your own healing, simply attempt to tune-in to your inner ruminations. These messages are the supports of the Gestalts of Consciousness we are calling disease process. Now also within this inner dialogue are messages from Beings of Light. These suggestions may have come from your future probable existences of from other Guides who are attempting to assist you in your Healing Journey. Simply put, here in this experiment you are tuning-in the healing states and tuning-out the Gestalts of Consciousness that support the disease.

Now illness is a Lesson that your Soul Self has “arranged” for you to experience in physical form, yet it is possible to heal yourself if you can learn the Lesson in other ways. For example: suppose on reading your Light Body you discover that the “reason” for your diabetes, is an imbalance in The Emotional Body. You are having difficulty accepting and processing “the sweetness that life has to offer.” This manifests as physical illness in a very literal way. You may heal yourself by learning how to accept and transmit the sweetness of life. You needn’t suffer unto death from the illness. So it is essential that the underlying “cause” of the malady be addressed or the difficulty may come back in another form, as in a physical, mental or spiritual malady of some sort. These are matters of belief revision. This subject will be explored next.

FINDINGS – Document your Findings from this ongoing experiment.

CALLING IN YOUR GUIDES

HYPOTHESIS: The non-physical beings may assist you in the healing regimen.

You may have already contacted your Guides, such as the Energy Personality and others to assist you. If you you have yet to create these relationships, I suggest that you continue with The Healing Regimen “as if” you were in contact and communication with your Guides. Let me elaborate for just a moment.

PART ONE:
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL SANCTUARY
Consider your powerful imagination. Now the imagination is the great creative force in our system that assists us in our creation of Reality Constructs. The emotional energy that “fuels” this Reality construction, as I have stated, is based in Love, a very potent emotion. Now here in this instance, in our protected state of Sanctuary that we are experiencing, can you imagine with your great creative intelligence, a relationship with what you might call a Spirit Guide?

Can you sense the powerful current of Love and compassion that supports and sustains this relationship? Stay with this for a few moments. Images may come to mind for you, suggesting characters from your childhood, possibly representing “imaginary playmates.” Loving characters from your mythologies may appear in the mind’s eye. I suggest you go with the flow here, knowing that there is Loving intent, and envision your Guide into being.

Ask for the name of the Guide and it will come to you. The name may have a nonsensical quality to it or it may be rather mundane. Accept the name if you intuitively feel it is right. This is a preliminary exercise here. You are not seeking perfection, simply progress in this endeavor. Whatever comes to you in so far as name and appearance and emotional content is quite sufficient. Honor this process and accept what you are creating with All That Is in this moment.

This is simply a way for you to conduct the necessary behaviors and Idea Constructs into reality formations in the Third Dimension. You usually do not value something as real, unless a beginning, middle and end to it in your Physical reality. This is why your Guides, even though they are seeking your contact, do not suddenly appear to us “out of the blue.” Our guides do not wish to scare us, in other words. This is the beginning of the manifestation of your Guides into your Personality Reality Field, and in a sense, we will “believe them into existence.”

FINDINGS – Take a few moments to document your experiences in contacting your guides.

PART TWO:

The second part of this experiment deals with the calling in of your various Guides and Helpers, for those of you who have already established these relationships.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

You are in your state of Sanctuary. From this perspective it may be easy for you to envision your Guides as they appear on your mental screen perhaps, and what skills each may employ in assisting you in The Healing Regimen. Your Energy Personality, for example, may be asked to assist you in remembering that you are embarked upon a path of positive moment-to-moment assessments of your experiences. You might ask, that, should you lapse into the robotic trance or negative ruminations common to many of us in our system, we would be reminded, possible by some specific sensory cue from your Energy Personality, to awaken and proceed with the Rituals of Healing.

You may have specific Helpers that you rely upon in matters of healing and balance. I suggest you call them into assist you in day-to-day program of positive assessment and Reality Creation. The Guides may provide you with the ongoing Loving emotional energy required to sustain The Healing Regimen.

In essence, here you are attempting to create a divine state of consciousness long term. You are asking for the assistance of your divine Guides, and as they help you through each successive moment in The Healing Regimen, you will feel the beneficial energies and effects upon our physical body.

FINDINGS – As the project moves forward, document your experiences in assessing and utilizing your Guides.

THE METAPHORICAL TOOLS

It is within our power as co-creator with All That Is to use our Divine Will to create more appropriate realities for oneself. We may do this with the Metaphorical Tools of various types. In our Blogs on Soul evolution we described one such tool: the Radio Dial Metaphor. Let us again describe the activity of this magical dial. This is simply a visualized dial, possibly modeled on a dial we have seen on one of our radios or other electronic devices. By turning the physical radio dial, different radio frequencies are accessed and different radio stations are contacted. By turning the visualized dial on our visualized radio, the researcher “tune-in” to the Energy Bodies that compose non physical reality.

This is a Metaphorical Tool used in a ritual way. Time after time, as these connections and communications with Beings of Light are established, it becomes a habitual act. I might add, that it also becomes easier to make these connection, the more we use our Metaphorical Tools.

With the dial, for example, we may discover our Guides, learn their names, and consult with other Gestalts of Consciousness that may assist us. Through the use of this tool, using our Inner Senses in an Intentional way, we may safely observe and study the disease-producing Idea Constructs. With the Metaphorical Tools we create a “protective barrier” between our consciousness and the Idea Constructs that support the malady.

Of course we may use any Metaphorical Tools that we have already established for our use in our past experiments. Or we may develop our own set of tools to assist us in our project. So that we might create for our use a transportation device of our choosing, one that may take us to various locations in the past, present and future and in both the physical and nonphysical worlds. It is up to us to use our imagination to create tools that can serve our particular needs. Now let us begin the experimentation that will furnish us with data to create the Blueprint for The Healing Regimen.

SUSPENDING DISBELIEF

Another technique the researcher may use is the suspension of disbelief. This is the divine perspective that is necessary for us to CONTINUE to create moments of healing within our Personal Reality Field. When we first meet with success at creating a cessation of symptoms, for example, through our Healing Talk or other strategies, our rational mind will surely be amazed. If we are at that moment perceiving through the ego/intellect, we may “not believe our eyes, ” and ascribe the transformation to something other than our Divine Will. This may serve to short circuit the healing process. Doubt is interjected into the mix and so faith or courage becomes compromised. Rather I suggest that at the moment of cessation of symptoms, be joyous and amazed, knowing that we have succeeded in that moment with co-creating our reality with All That Is toward the healing of our body. There is a sense of humility we can muster here, and yet still marvel at our powers of manifestation. It is a balance we may achieve between humility and charisma, between supreme confidence and wishful thinking.

Dear Blog Reader, you are already expert at the suspension of disbelief. When you enjoy a book or a movie or other dramatic presentation, you are immersing yourself in the media and you are letting go of the skeptical aspect of your personality for the time being. As you create the story in you imagination that is suggested by the words in the book or the scenes in the movie or on the stage, you are submitting your inner self to the influences of the story. This you have done countless times, no doubt, when you were a child listening to fairy tales, for example. As well, you are continuing this tradition as an adult when you experience stories of any type. So this use of the imagination is a very natural one for you. It is the basis for all of your creative endeavors as human beings, including the very basic practice of Reality Creation.

TECHNIQUE – DISTRACTING THE EGO/INTELLECT

Our ego/intellect is an expert in the creation of status quo realities. It always begins its work on awakening after our sleeping times, whenever that might be. As we open our eyes, there is a tendency for the ego/intellect to take charge IMMEDIATELY. It is our job to remember that our regimen will begin or continue at that particular time, and circumvent the strategies of the ego/intellect to control our Reality Creation agendas.

We do this by distracting the ego/intellect. This is a divine distraction. We divert our attention from the mundane to the Divine. This is simply a personal reminder from our Soul Self that we are supported on a wave of ecstasy just below the surface of consciousness. We have described this feeling state in our last few Series of Blogs. We are supported; we are endorsed; we are Loved. We do not need to recreate the status quo reality of suffering, illness and other negative states. We may also use our Energy Personality and other Guides to help remind us of our Scared Quest in these moments.

However, if we are like most people, our ego/intellect will not enjoy these attempts to divert the manifestation energies toward the Divine. The ego/intellect may flood our consciousness with Negative Emotions, traumatic memories, reminders of financial peril etc. We may experience a sudden fear that we are taking these explorations too far, perhaps wandering into “the danger zone.”

Religious conditioning may serve to bring doubt to mind. We may feel that perhaps we should go to church soon or speak to a priest. Or course we may do these things. We have free will. But might I suggest that we are now acting as our own intermediary? We are bridging the physical and subtle realms with our awareness. Just as the magician, the shaman, the witch does, we are acting as our own intermediary between the physical and the Divine.

My advice, when you are experiencing these responses from the ego/intellect, is to intervene with your Intention, and possibly with the assistance of your Guides, and divert your attention back to the Divine. It is really just a matter of choice in the moment. We are choosing from the perspective of the Soul Self, a path of improved reality Creation.

FOUNDATIONAL STATEMENT

Let us proceed with the Techniques and Rituals that compose The Healing Regimen.

TECHNIQUE – CONSECUTIVE POSITIVE ASSESSMENTS
The Healing Regimen is a continuous ritual enactment with the elements of our Consecutive Positive Assessments exercise embedded within it. In this exercise you attempt t interpret your moment-to-moment experiences in positive ways. Everything exists within the current moment. Everything that you need to support your Quest for Healing is available to you in your Point of Power, your current Moment Point, right now in this instance. So it is in the moment when you conduct your Ritual of Healing and when you see the results of these Techniques. In the moment is when you get to feel for the creation of successive moments of healing.

With this technique we are attempting to interpret each successive Moment Point as a divine opportunity for positive change. In my blogs we discussed in depth this technique of Consecutive Positive Assessments. Here let me simply state that it is up to you to create this perspective according to what works for you as an individual human, one with particular ways of behaving, one with a certain set of beliefs.

Now briefly, you will always have a choice, Dear Blog reader, regarding what you will experience in the moments of your waking life. You are the center of your world and the events that occur within your world. So you always have a choice and even a responsibility to make the proper decisions in your moment-to-moment existence to further your life.

You must be adequate, in other words, so that you may “live to live another day,” in a manner of speaking. Of course, beyond merely living there exists a state of being in which one excels, or develops or grow spiritually, intellectually, and so on. Here in this project, we maintain that to achieve relief from physical illness and the removal of symptoms, one may employ our Consciousness Personal Assessment exercise and “take charge” of the life. By assessing each moment as a joyous and educational experience, the researcher is reprogramming the psyche in a beneficial way. Positive belief change occurs over the long-term application of this technique. Positive realities are created in an intentional way.

Perhaps another example would help. Suppose that our theoretical subject, the human experiencing a disintegration of the musculature of their body, has obtained The Healing Regimen and is trying this Technique. There may be several days of false starts and disruptions of the program. Then one day there is begun a series of moments, perhaps lasting several minutes or even hours, when the subject is truly interpreting their moment-to-moment experiences in positive ways.

In this series of moments, let us say that the subject has perhaps burned the breakfast on the stove. Rather than sink into a depression or scream in anger at the stove, the subject continues to sing a favorite song. In the mental environment of this subject, you might say that the Negative Emotions do not find a place to establish themselves. The singing of the favorite song, perhaps a joyful song, prevents that manipulation of thought energy by the negative Emotions. The Consecutive Positive Assessments continue even as the song is being sung.

But let us suppose that the subject is then distracted, perhaps by the TV news program as it proclaims the latest tragedy to occur in a far away country. For a moment, the subject may feel a responsibility to the people involved in the tragedy to provide them with a compassionate moment of observation here, Unfortunately, as soon as our subject focuses on the television image, to express their compassion and understanding, the story is ended, and a commercial is run that encourages the viewer to buy products. At this point, the positive mental environment is disrupted. Thoughts relative to things to buy and products of various kinds prevail. The song ceases to be sung.

So the question arises in matters of techniques such as this: How can I possibly bring conscious awareness to each successive moment in my waking day?” The answer to that, of course, is that it may be difficult to achieve perfection in the assessment exercise. In your physical reality there are numerous diversions, as in our example. There are also natural lapses in consciousness that take you to other dimensions, as we have discussed in previous blogs. So practically here, I must say, that to the degree that you can accomplish this exercise, you will to that same degree experience positive changes in your Personal Reality Field – you will experience healing within your body, mind and spirit.

Fortunately, simple improvements are what we are marking progress in this endeavor. You will continuously change course, over the moments of your existence, making your simple improvements, until gradually you are experiencing the voyage as a positive habit of thought, feeling and manifestation.

THE BLUEPRINT

The creation of a structure begins with the drawing-up of a blueprint, illustrating the placement of the materials that will compose the structure. Our Reality construction of Healing begins with the creation of a Blueprint listing the Techniques, Rituals and Suggestions that we will use to create our Positive Reality. The Blueprint for the Reality Construction of healed bodily states is a “living” document, in that it will change from day to day as you gain information about yourself from your experimentation.

Initially it is necessary to create a potent statement of affirmation that you will build to create the Blueprint for The Healing Regimen. The statement should be only a few well-selected words that do indeed epitomize for you the project at hand. It should be a deeply personal and symbolic statement, to the fact that you are identifying as best you can current life issue in emotional terms. It’s extraordinary the lengths we go to for a ‘labor of love’. We happily make sacrifices, suffer hardships and turn away from temptations. We do everything within our power to prove ourselves to be worthy. We put ourselves through hell and high water because we feel such depths of emotion. Yet, we rarely go to such efforts for our own benefit. Is that because we don’t love ourselves enough? Ask yourself what you’d do to help someone who deserved the best. Everything in our created reality is founded in emotion, the emotion of Love. Our health issues are created as we are diverted from Love. With this in mind, we may create our affirmative statement in positive terms, expressing our simple desires with regards to the healing of body, mind and spirit.

An example may be in order here. Suppose a theoretical subject is experiencing the painful symptoms of a degenerative disease of the musculature of their body. Further, let us say that this subject has experienced a traumatic loss in their recent past. Perhaps a loved -one, such as the father or mother or other family member, has made their Transition in an abrupt manner, through a fast-acting illness that took them within a few weeks, or perhaps through an accident of some sort. Now these traumatic losses are always a surprise to the ego/intellect of those who are left behind. However, as we know, Souls choose the time of their departures as well as the circumstances, so the Souls of the departed know that they are merely keeping their appointments in this way.

Yet even though our theoretical subject also knows on a Soul level that their loved-one has simply transferred their energy to the Home Dimension, they are experiencing a Lesson here. The ego/intellect is shocked, outraged, set into a tailspin, so to speak. The grief and other emotions that are triggered by the sudden death serve to take this subject into their Underworld, where they will experience instructional vignettes that illustrate the true nature of the event in a context of the Soul Family. If the subject may literally bring to a halt their Soul’s progression. This cessation of spiritual growth and fulfillment may result in the outward manifestation of this stasis – the atrophy of the musculature of the body.

As you may have noticed, the symptoms and illnesses that humans create within their bodies are often quite literal responses to the perceived traumatic episodes in their lives. But please understand, what one person may perceive as traumatic, another may perceive as business-as-usual. These are deeply personal issues, the creation of imbalances, and should always be addressed as such, taking into account the context of personality, life-style, experiences and all of the other myriad elements that compose the existence of the human.

Now with this in mind, that your health issues are emotionally-based and that some perceived as you know them, write out a few sentences describing the people basis for your malady and what it might look like it if you were relieved of this malady. Remember, you may always return to this statement to add or subtract material.

For example, if our theoretical subject were to write out a Foundational Statement, might read as the following:

I SENSE THAT LOST IN GRIEF, AND I WOULD LIKE TO FIND MY WAY BACK TO THE LOVE AND HOPE I HAD BEFORE THE TRAGEDY.

Do you see how this statement frames the healing Regimen in term of a journey? Each of you will use your own metaphors and symbols in creating the Foundational Statement.

Write it now.

—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————-

THE HEALING REGIMEN

The Healing Regimen is a cooperative effort between the practitioner and the Guides in a diagnosis of The Emotional Body. A Blueprint is then made for the creation of a positive reality called Healing. Rituals of Healing are then performed with the application of the various techniques and experiments. The continual application of the ritual of Healing until the Healing Regimen becomes habitual, creates a positive reality that will sustain itself over time.

Thus, a healing regimen implies regimentation, does it not? Here we are approaching the subject in a very systematic fashion. This is how you get results with these techniques, you see, by creating the Personal Reality Field in purposeful ways. You will not be “sleepwalking” through your life as you may have done in the past. The goal is to achieve conscious awareness in the moment. Then in these moments of awareness, I suggest in the moment. Then in these moments of awareness, I suggest you enact your ritual of Healing and purposeful Reality Creation. It is the sequential empowerment of the moments in our existence, that leads in time to the creation of an improved Personal Reality.

This project is really an extended Ritual. If you remember, our definition for Ritual in the context of my new Teaching, is “the consistent requesting of contact and communication with non-physical beings – Beings of Light.” It is all about spirit thought and contact with this stream of communication. Everything in our reality has consciousness and everything may be contacted for communication.

Of course, you may if you wish, continue to heed the communication stream of the ego/intellect, as you have done for perhaps many years in your life. However, if you do, you will in all likelihood merely achieve a recreation of the status quo reality. If you are ill, for example, you may simply recreate a physical body that is ill. I suggest that you do something different here. Experiment with your reality.

DIVINE WILL

As we co-create our Personal Reality Field, we might say that All That Is “supplies” the energy for our creations in the form of Consciousness Units infused with Love. This infusion occurs within a context of the Love Light Matrix. We have discussed this metaphor in earlier Blogs. Let me present a synopsis here for you. ALL realities created by consciousness are based in Love. Yet in Third-Dimensional Reality there exists the opposite OF Love that serves as a counterpoint and is quite necessary within our linear time illusion. The counterpoint to Love, what we might call Negative Emotion, serves to create alternatives in physical reality to the positive, and so Reality Construction evolves in multitudinous ways.

Our Personal Reality Field is a result of our Intention, conscious or unconscious responsibility for our creations as a cooperative venture with All That Is, we could say that we are using our Intention in a divine fashion.

To take this further… there is a history on our Earth of the positive use of the human will in tandem with the Divine. As I mentioned in my last Blog Series, the great altruistic Leaders of our human history knew of a concept we are calling Divine Will. They were experts in the use of Divine Will and took their place alongside of the Divine, acknowledging the collaboration entailed in creating a Personal Reality of worth. In this project, I suggest that we to conceive of our physical incarnation in this timeframe as a cooperative venture with the forces of Nature, the Divine and our Mother Earth.

As further aid to understanding here in this discussion, and as a way for you to possibly visualize the activity of the Divine Will, I offer the following: consider our theoretical construct of the Subconscious Manifestation Energy Stream, and visualize it as a stream of energy, much as a river is a stream of water. Using this metaphor, can you see, perhaps with your Intuitive Sensing, that just as the elemental energies of our great Earth, “push” water through the soil and dirt and rock until the water makes its way to the other side, further along to its “destination,” the human will, Divine Will as we are discussing, as a veritable “force of nature,” may push desired thoughts and images per a particular outcome or Reality Construct, across the threshold of potentiality and into the physical? Divine Will is Love guided by our intention in the moment. It represents the creative energies of All That Is as they are channeled through the consciousness of an inspired human.

Let me remind you that these metaphors are not the ultimate representations of the processes we are describing here, nor will they ever be. They may be seen as bookmarks within my greater theory. They will allow you to continue the study of the new Blog material in a focused way. You may always return to a concept for further meditation, inspiration and study.

AURIC VISION AND HEALING

We might say that our New Age Healers refer to as the human Aura, is essentially our “timeless” Light Body. The Aura, is a reflection of our greater Soul Self THROUGH The Consciousness Units that compose our current physical body. Now within this we may detect, by using what we are calling our Auric Vision, the exhibits of electromagnetic emanations of Gestalts of Consciousness of all types. Within this Auric vision we could, as a Scientist of Consciousness, diagnose past, present and future life issues. All of our many Simultaneous Lives exhibit their activities in an essential form within this aura.

Each consciousness Unit “remembers” each and every one of its voyages into form. These Consciousness Units tell their stories, and if we listen carefully, we may discover the proper path to take to heal and balance the human subject – oneself, a friend or family member or possible even a leader who has gone astray and requires an “adjustment” on the Etheric Plane.

Here, with an understanding of the animate Universe we are describing in these Blogs, it becomes quite possible for the Scientist of Consciousness to assume the role of Healer, and in a manner of speaking, “address” the Gestalts of Consciousness that support the malady. Thus the healer if “speaking” to the disease and acting on the responses to effect the healing.

Now when we use our Auric Vision, the information comes to us in unique ways, in a fashion distinct from our normal Third-Dimensional perceptions. Our auric vision may present us with a literal dramatization of the issues and problems inherent in the malady we are observing. This Inner Senses may project onto our inner field of perception, perhaps as we close our eyes, complete scenes peopled with characters of various descriptions. These dramatizations of the malady and the cure may run the gamut from literal representations to those that are so deeply personal and symbolic that only YOU would know the meaning entailed.

For example: we might view a scene in which a human heart is literally “broken.” And let us further state that the destroyer of the heart is a person easily recognized as our relative or friend or lover. Do you see the literal representation here? It is trying to tell us something. Most of us would probably interpret this scene in similar ways.

Or another example suppose that you viewed a scene that contained a surreal display of images accompanied by a changing stream of emotion. In this case, you are called upon to consult your personal symbols, utilizing images, ideas and emotions that one YOU would understand, to interpret the material. Your interpretation and your diagnosis style will be a direct reflection of your personality aspects. You will diagnosis and treat in your preferred fashion, using what works best for you.

GUIDES AND HEALING

What is the value, (in so much as these words may be valued by us,) of the messages of Beings of Light?


Some would say, of course, that these messages are priceless. The words are, after all, the messages of spirits – those who no longer exist as physical beings. If this is so, then should we worship these messages and these beings? Historically, humans have projected their own innate divinity onto these representations – gods and goddesses, spirit being etc. Yet at the same time, the human devalues their own contribution. The human projects the god within onto an outside entity, and then slavishly worships it, forgetting the origins of the god from within the human psyche.

We are discussing these matters in an attempt to remind the Blog Reader of our innate divinity. We are god. We are a goddess. This is a fact of life. As we begin to accept this condition, perhaps we will also remember that we have the power to heal ourselves and others.

Now as with all healing activities from our perceived past – within shamanic cultures for example – we will have help in The Healing  Regimen. We will have assistance from our Guides. Our Guides are emissaries from All That Is – the source of all realities, the Loving center of the created Universes.

So it is quite naturally that we turn to our Guides to assist in The Healing Regimen. Our Guides know what Love is and can remind us of this over the course of the of the project. Our Guides, such as the energy Personality and others, may facilitate the healings that take place within the physical body. They help us to maintain the required intensity of emotion over the long term.

I suggest that the Blog Reader think if this Guide as a personal assistant, one that would be “on call” to assist in matters of importance, such as the learning of Lessons. The Energy Personality may serve as a divine assistant for us in this project. For now, let us discuss the Light Body and the means to explore it with the Inner Sense of Sight.

THE EMOTIONAL BODY

The Emotional Body is the energy center of our human body within which the signatures of the various Energy Forms may be perceived. As we have stated in previous Blogs, within the electromagnetic corona it is central plane, the focus of the intersecting energies that comprise the Light Body. This nonphysical construct may be visualized as an oval form of pulsating light energy suspended within the heart region of the physical body. Of course, we may sense it in our individual ways. This form is perceived with the Inner Sense of sight we have named Auric Vision.

In my theory, emotion is the great creative force within our system that serves to push the incipient Reality Constructs into physicality. We have described this in a very basic way in our last series of Blogs. Let me summarize this material. It is ALL about emotion in our world. We exist within Third-Dimensional reality. We create our world according to the various thoughts and images within our mental environment AND the templates for creation that exist as Gestalts of  Consciousness. We cooperate with EVERYTHING IN OUR EXISTENCE in this play of consciousness we are experiencing that we call “my life.”

Now everything in created reality exists as a particular frequency or vibration of emotion, what we have referred to as “bio-electric energy.” Everything is alive. Everything is composed of this Light Energy. We might think of these individual vibrations as the “emotional charge” that both creates and sustains the Reality Construct – whatever that might be – time and space in our system.

This idiosyncratic vibrational signature “My” entity, when we wish to communicate with one another. The entity has a specific frequency or emotional Energy Form that he/she displays, as do us all. These frequencies are perceived through the Inner Sense, so that we may “See” the frequency, “Hear” the frequency and so on. These senses tend to blend together somewhat, as we have stated earlier.

Since all Energy Bodies have their own individual emotional charge or frequency, where there are issues of symptoms and illness, there are the attendant Energy Forms representing these constructs that are observable within The Emotional Body. Also within this Emotional Body there are observable Energy Constructs that will lead us to “solutions” – the healing and balance we are seeking. We might call these Gestalts of Consciousness the non-physical “Data Banks” that hold the collected wisdom and experience of healing from the practices of magicians, shaman, witches and healers.

Another way to describe this repository of healing might be to briefly speak on the subject of “spontaneous healing,’ as we call it. Now our literature is filled with stories of humans who have “garnered their inner resources” to effect miraculous changes in their debilitating physical conditions. Of course, to the human raised within a society that stresses the medical model, these transformations from deathly ill to completely healed are indeed perceived as miraculous. Yet, if we view disease process and the medical model as Gestalts of Consciousness, may we also conceive of Spontaneous Healing as simply another readily accessible Gestalt of consciousness? The Gestalt of Consciousness we might call Spontaneous Healing is the ” transmitter” that we “tune-in” to with our Metaphorical Tools to receive the signal – that we will use to create the necessary changes within the body for the transformation.

HEALING POWER OF LOVE

Our emerging reality is composed of Light, as we have said. We might say that the Coordinate Points within the juncture of time and space of any particular Moment Point of our physical existence, serve to “hold the shape” of the emerging reality, the outgrowth, if you will, of the Subconscious Manifestation Energy Stream. This context for Realty Creations is indeed the Love Light Matrix. The atoms or Consciousness Units are each, again as we have suggested, energized, animated, empowered by Love with a capital L.

Our world is an ongoing manifestation created from the Loving energized of All That Is. All That Is IS LOVE, and so it follows that Reality Constructs of all types are founded in Love. Now within our Consensus Realities of Earth at this time, there is a pronounced diversion AWAY from Love. We may see this in all of our social, political and even our religious institutions.

It is obvious, is it not? Our world is in crisis. It is increasingly difficult to find Love in our reality. It is true that there is a Turnabout that is occurring, as we see how the absence of Love is so damaging to humanity? See it and remember it.

Now with regards to human health and healing, it is the same: wherever Love is absent, you will surely find decay, illness, disease, imbalance. I am not telling you something you do not already know. Dear Blog Reader, you are conceived in Love, but we are diverted by either emotions as we live our life. The consistent experiencing of the Negative Emotions result in the creation of symptoms and disease. Now in a sense, The Healing Regimen is a matter of peeling away the residue of Negative Emotion that hardens like a shell around The Emotional Body. Underneath this shell we will find the core of humanity – Love, just as we have been describing.

These emotions of Love and Compassion serve a very important purpose here in this project. They are the forces the practitioner uses to affect healing and balance. So that here, in a very elementary way, Negative Emotions serve to create symptoms and disease, whereas Loving Understanding and Compassion serve to create healing and balance. Again emotion is an Electromagnetic Entity that serves as the impetus or natural energy source for the creation of Reality Constructs.

In this suggestion we may also see a strategy for approaching the Healing Quest we are to begin. Human emotion, is the concentrated force that the co-creator employs to “push” into manifestation the desired reality of healing. So that success here is determined by the intensity of desire you can consistently muster within the Rituals of Healing we will cover momentarily.

MAGICIAN, SHAMAN, WITCH and HEALER

In The Healing Regimen, just as in other matters of intentional Reality Creation, the idea is to become cognizant of our unconscious agendas of manifestation IN THE MOMENT. In this moment of awakening, we may use our will to begin the creation of improved Reality Constructs with regards to our physical being, i.e. the transformation of symptoms and “disease states” to a lack symptoms and the perception of “healed” body states.

Now our approach requires a definite change of perspective for the average Blog Reader. Please allow me to present some background to this discussion for those of us who may be new to this material. In my last series of Blogs I encouraged you to take on the roll of Scientist of Consciousness. And as a specialist in the use of the Inner Senses, I asked you to go about your investigations in this ongoing “altered state.” I reminded you that the Scientist of Consciousness was the magician, the shaman, the witch of antiquity. You were simply affirming your connection to these original scientists from your perceived past. As you embodied the suggested role of Scientist of Consciousness, you “put on” the perceptual lenses of the witch or the shaman or the healer.

In this new Blog project of ours, as we intentionally create this altered state within our mental environment, we will enable our Inner Senses to “pick up” the vibrational messages of Consciousness Units that exist within the specific Gestalts of Consciousness, some representing, shall we say, “disease process,” and others representing “healing process.”

Both disease and healed states, as well as all states in between, exist in the moment. Our goal as researchers is to determine with our Inner Senses, the influences from the various Gestalts of Consciousness and how they assist in the creation of our particular malady of the malady of our subject. Then we shall use our Metaphorical Tools to diminish or eliminate these influences – guided by the Gestalts of Consciousness representing healing process – so the the body many return to balance.

Let us briefly discuss the related views of some of the indigenous peoples of our Earth. We often make these comparisons in our discussions to illustrate that unknown reality is already quite well known to some of us. For example: in the spiritual traditions among the First People of our human race, an intimate relationship exists between the human and the environment. It is common to speak to Nature directly in these collectives and receive responses from trees, stones, animals etc. These humans are well aware of the consciousness and integrity of plants, animals and the various elements around them. They accept that a rock has a spirit, that fire has a spirit that may be addressed and that will respond.

Just as the indigenous peoples communicate with the spirits of the natural world, it is possible for us on The Healing Regimen to seek counsel from these Energy forms, what we are calling Gestalts of Consciousness. We do this through the use of our Inner Senses, observing The Emotional Body.

THE MEDICAL MODEL

As with all of our creations in physical reality, we could say that we are entranced by our own projections, including the bodily states known as “symptoms and illnesses.” Now I have spoken in other Blogs of the dangers in our medical community of constantly referring to the “inevitability” of certain illnesses forming in the human body. Statistics are bandied about SUGGESTING that such-and-such a percentage of men or women will INEVITABLY “fall victim” to certain diseases. Do you see where I am taking this discussion? The disease process is supported on the SUGGESTIONS of Gestalts of Consciousness. And so we might say that the great majority of our medical doctors are “under the spell” of these Energy Bodies. They are entranced with this Gestalt of Consciousness, the central information center called the medical model. They have been for many years indoctrinate with the data and procedures that support this system.

We play your part in this drama also. Dear Blog reader. It is our role to “pretend” that what the doctors say is true. We obediently create the applicable symptoms within our body. We are supporting our health and practitioner in this way. “Doctor’s orders” DEMAND that you create a particular set of symptoms to correspond to a particular disease state. This collaboration takes place on the subtle levels, of course. The telepathic communication streams are quite active between Gestalts of Consciousness of various types, the doctor and the patient. Everyone must do their part here in order to sustain the “appearance” of illness and the “appearance” of healing or perhaps failure to heal, initiated by the medical profession.

It is all supported on suggestion. These suggestions are essentially Idea Constructs that are the building blocks of disease and the treatment of disease. Thus we have, for example, a Gestalt of Consciousness know as Alzheimer’s Disease. The patient is experiencing this illness as a vehicle for the learning of particular Lessons. In the case of Alzheimer’s, Lessons of infantilism and being cared for without protest, are often the reasons for the creation of the disease state, though it is not wise to generalize in these matters.

Ultimately however, illnesses of all kinds are created as life Lessons. The disease state is a teacher to us in physical reality. Our Soul Self our Guides and all members of our Soul Family are engaged with us in the drama of physical illness. We are learning our Lessons as a collective, much as we would study and learn within a classroom in one of our universities.

Now to elaborate on this comparison here… just as we would learn in a classroom the subject matter in a course on, shall we say, Life Science, everything needed to pass that course, in The Healing Regimen we may discover that truths in the Lessons of physical existence. As we become knowledgeable on the causes of our malady, we may find the means to learn our Lesson in other ways, perhaps in ways that do not entail physical symptoms and disease. This is always our free will choice. We may decide to continue the Lesson of physical illness or we may decide to discover the “causes” and address them.

THE HEALING REGIMEN

PHYSICAL CHALLENGES
Prophecies are based on the most probable outcomes if you were to follow on your current trajectory. Thus, if you are currently in a positive frame of mind, the probabilities for a positive future are greatly diminished.

Create your positive future NOW with your positive life-affirming beliefs and ideas.

GESTALT OF CONSCIOUSNESS AND HEALTH

Let us review the basics for purposes of creating The Healing Regimen. As we well know, you are a Soul within a physical body and with All That Is we co-create our existence in Third-Dimensional reality. In this endeavor we cooperate with each and every Consciousness Unit in our perceptive field. The “blueprints” for our creative works are the beliefs, thoughts and images that predominate in our mental environment. These blueprints exist as arrays of Coordinate Points within the pre-manifestation domains. These arrays merge to create Gestalts of Consciousness – complex affiliations of mental constructs – that are, in essence, the nonphysical representations of EVERYTHING.

Thus, ideas and images relative to a concept identified as “the common cold,” for example, assemble into Gestalts of Consciousness, representing the accumulated “wisdom,” you might say, from all human experience of the common cold. All of the “requirements” for achieving the common cold are represent. The symptoms are there within these incipient Reality Constructs. In a sense, we could say that the operating system for the cold virus is “resident” within the mental constructs. The symptoms exist in potentiality. They await the invocation of the disease state into the mental environment of the human.

Now, the “disease process,” as we call it, exists first as a mental vulnerability. This is not the accepted view, I certainly realize. However, bear with me for just a moment, the mental precedes the physical in all matters of disease process. But if course, there must be the physical “cause” of the illness. The mental and thus the emotional vulnerability creates a physical vulnerability through suggestion. “I am near those who have colds, I will get a cold,” “I am old and vulnerable to disease, I will get a cold.”

The continual presentation to the inner mental environment that we are vulnerable – either through our own internal ruminations or through the transmissions from other Energy Bodies – Creates the physical vulnerability, such as a weakened immune system, so that exposure to particular strain of virus would then “lead” to the creation of the disease state in the body and the “inevitable” progression of the illness through to its conclusion.

Perhaps I should elaborate on my statement that the suggestions “create” physical vulnerabilities within the body. These suggestions or thoughts or potent images, form whatever source, are the same as any other thoughts or images generated by consciousness, in that they seek manifestation within the physical and other dimensions.

In the case of disease process, we find that the creation of imbalance occurs on a cellular level. So that if we might envision a cell within the body as it exists within the organ or blood or perhaps muscle tissue as being subject to the messages and the many systems that feed “information” to the cells to govern theory activity, such as the immune, digestive and other systems – do you see how the mental suggestions might serve to short-circuit some of these information streams?

A simple example here for illustration, would be the difficulties that may come from a sensitive person observing distasteful images while they eat. They may incur a bad case of indigestion from these mental suggestion that ALL illness and their symptoms, are caused by these Gestalts of Consciousness, in this case by an Energy Body we might call indigestion.

MOMENTS OF AWAKENING

We do have many awakenings in our day-to-day existence, and these can be opportunities for accessing the spiritual awakening we seek. For example: each time you awaken from sleep, we have an opportunity to awaken also in a spiritual sense. As I have described in theses Blogs, our nighttime activities entail a great deal of what we might term “spiritual” or “SoulDirected” activities. Yet on our awakening after sleep, the rigors of physical reality.

PRELUDE TO THE REGIMENS

The lessons we are learning currently may be categorized according to the three broad topics we will cover in the next three series of Blogs. This is a continuation of our discussion on the blessing “healthy, wealthy and wise” from our last Blog Series.

Now health would obviously entail Lessons Learned regarding the physical body, mind and spirit. We are asserting here the symptoms and illnesses humans generate within their bodies are for educational purposes. Each illness is a physical expression of inherently nonphysical Idea Constructs.

The same may be said of prosperity. The lessons of the Acquisition of wealth and the utilization of that form of energy is spiritual at its base. Money and wealth are simply very potent ideas pertaining to security and value in the physical domain. So here again, the physical is simply the observable component of the invisible, nonphysical spiritual construct.

The wisdom of the Soul, the third element in this blessing, may be accomplished in the learning of these symbolic Lessons in physical reality by allowing these Life Lessons to transform the psyche. Loving Understanding and Courage are some of the results of this transformative phenomenon.

HEALTH AND HOLOGRAMS

Health – physical, mental, emotional, financial – is a state of consciousness that exists in a Moment Point in our perceptual reality. “Behind” this “spiritual” assessment is our Soul Self, the co-creator with All That Is of our Personal Reality Field.

All of the subatomic elements of awarized energy that comprise our Third-Dimensional world for us personally, collaborate to create this awareness of health.

Now speaking of physical health: this is the reason that our world and everything in it seems to support our physical symptoms, you see. Our field of Personal Reality creation, because it is a reflection, a direct reflection of our inner world, does continuously reflect our personal symptoms that we are experiencing/creating for purposes of Learning and Value Fulfillment. The improvements desired in our physical health, therefore, must obviously come from a change in this inner perception. We have been referring to these inner perceptive processes as the Inner Senses. We will go much deeper into this method in The Healing Regimen.

THE TIME IS NOW

Dear Blog Reader, now in this moment of Good Humor resides your opportunity for an improved future. Perhaps a brief recap is in order here, to serve as a basis for the proclamation. You create BOTH your past and your future from your current moment. This is one of the basic tenets of my Teaching, and so it would serve you well to use this fact of life as a “given” – an essential building block upon which rests my theoretical construct of Reality Creation. So when I suggest to you that you may expand your consciousness intentionally, perhaps what I really mean is that you are capable, simply by virtue of your existence on our physical Earth at this time, of truly exploring and embodying the richness of our momentary existence.

Yes, our life is a series of moments. In this series of moments, obviously, you are reading from my Blog. Now the act of reading requires some focus “in the moment.” You muster all of your attention and direct it toward the task of reading and absorbing the Blog material. In a similar way, the student of my Teaching would do well to harness the same efforts of concentration entailed in the reading of this Blog, toward the appreciation and assessment of the current Moment Point – the spacious moment that connects all of our Simultaneous Lives.

Any moment will do here. This one… Or this one… Or this one… The study and appreciation of the spacious moment does indeed take some preparation. You are, in a sense, preparing yourself for the PROBABILITY of experiencing the moment of awakening – the moment of healing, the moment of perceiving the Abundant Universe, the moment of receiving Divine Wisdom. I am aware that in other Teachings, the student is taught that the awakening of the consciousness to its own spiritual heritage is a lifetime “undertaking,” if you will excuse my pun. Here however, we are offering the student the opportunity to awaken without first expiring.

USING GOOD HUMOR

Now for example… let us say that you are currently experiencing fear in its most basic form, perhaps dreading something that is to occur in your future, or perhaps fearing what has already occurred, perhaps fearing that the dreaded subject or object will continue to exist in our reality. As I have stated in previous blogs, if you are experiencing fear, you are under the influence of Negative EntitiesEnergy Bodies that thrive on the emotions of fear and anxiety. So perhaps a simple antidote to these energies would be for you to trivialize and make fun of these influences. By creating a state of simple Good Humor in your consciousness in this way, you are creating a comedy out of a fearful drama.

In the transformation, you are also creating Courage our of fear. Without getting into details, we could say that the natural abilities of human consciousness create this transformation of fear into Courage. You are, from the inception into human body on Earth, created out of Love. Your consciousness may easily return to this positive state, then, with merely the least amount of effort on your part.

This is easy to do. Making fun of the fear-producing ideas or images may be an enjoyable and creative act unto itself. You are using your imagination to turn down the fearful intensity of the ideas and images, and perhaps replacing them with humorous images and ideas.

Do you see how you are much better prepared to create positive realities when you are in this self-created state of Good Humor? Certainly it is important to continue creating this positive state as you attempt to create a positive reality. It is the extension of the current moment of Good Humor into the future that creates the positive future.

So let us assume that you have gained some mastery over the creation of Good Humor within your own apparatus. You may notice that, over time, as you get good at creating Good Humor, the quality of your daily existence improves. This is the creation of positive realities in itself, as even modest improvements in an otherwise fearful and anxious Reality Construction may have profound effects on your daily life. You create your world from the beliefs you hold about what is possible. As you embody the state of Good Humor consistently, it becomes possible for you to believe in the continuation of this positive state.

FEAR AND HUMOR

Fear may be thought of as the founding energy in the emotional states of anxiety, anger and hatred. Now fear and Good Humor do not mix well. If one is enjoying your state of consciousness known as Good Humor, one is most probably enjoying THE ABSENCE OF FEAR. I stress the importance of Good Humor here for the simple reason that, because it is often so simple to generate this mental state, it becomes a very useful too in the creation of Courage out of fear. Let me illustrate with an example, if I may.

Some of my students, upon reading my earlier Blogs, have expressed the criticism that my experiments and exercises are quite challenging. To these students I say, simplify this endeavor. Bring this back to the basics of manifestation. Prepare your mental environment for the creation of positive realities by FIRST embodying or generating within your consciousness, the state of simple enjoyment or Good Humor.

EMOTIONAL INVESTMENT

You are literally born out of the Love And Good Humor of All That Is. Here I am asking you to move beyond any religious conditioning that has convinced you that you perhaps were born out of suffering to live a life of pain. For in truth, the facts in this matter are just the opposite.

Let me state the obvious here, however, to avoid any misunderstanding. Yes, your reality is born in your imagination out of Love and Good Humor, yet you will of necessity also experience the opposites of these attributes – fear, anxiety, anger, hatred. Now the important thing here, is how long a hold on to the fear, anxiety, anger and hatred. How much importance do you attach to these emotional states as you experience them? How much do you invest your ego/intellect in the recreation of these states, once you have allowed them to enter your mental environment.

GOOD HUMOR

So love Light is born in a simple Good Humor. I trust that this will not be a difficult stretch of the imagination for you to comprehend and accept this information. It is true that in our world, Good Humor may be thought of as a simple and mundane aspect of existence. It may be thought of as too trivial to be considered in as serious an endeavor as the creation of realities. Yet I am suggestion here that ties, in particular, the positive realities that are the focus of this blog.

IDENTIFYING COMMUNICATION STREAMS WITHIN OUR MENTAL ENVIRONMENT

Hypothesis: In trance we may identify the communication streams within our mental environment.

Now we shall investigate the many information streams that “flow” and “time” are used to hopefully facilitate our connecting to the data streams and to identifying and understanding the content. We are familiar with a flowing river. The river flows regardless of our noticing it, observing it, studying it. In a similar fashion, the many information streams that flow through our mental environment, do so regardless of our attention to them, our noticing them. However, though we may be unaware of these streams of divine information, and of course others that are most certainly not divine, we are indeed quite affected by the ideas and images carried within these many streams of communication. Here I believe It would be a good idea for the student to become more aware of the content of these information streams.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Relax and enter your Trance State, as usual. Now to begin, let us list the many providers of information that exist within the mind or psyche of the “typical” human engaged in co-creating an existence on our world.

First and foremost would be the divine source – All That Is. This data stream is quite easily recognized by the seeker of wisdom. The ecstasy felt during the encounter with the Divine, is the energy signature that marks this source.

Next on the list would be the “voices” of Soul Family members past, present and future.

Of course the negative gods and goddesses exist there also, as well as the Energy Bodies of divine beings of various types crested through the collective efforts of humanity over the ages.
Your own understanding of God with a capital G exists here as an energy form.

If you have pursued contact with the Elemental Beings, they exist within our mentality also, to the degree that we have co-created them through study, worship, observation, and so on.

Our Simultaneous Lives are there in their totality, providing information and both support and negative influence, according to what you are on our Earth to learn at this time.

Let us not forget our own ego/intellect that oversees this phenomenon and indeed censors and directs the activities therein.

Now there are certainly more examples of Light Bodies and other Energy forms that exist within our consciousness. Note these as you discover their activity in our experimentation. When we feel as though we have have received enough information from this experiment, return to full sensory awareness.

Findings – Document your findings in identifying the stream of information within your mental environment.

PRECEPTS AND RESONANCE

Hypothesis: By focusing on the precept you may catalyze the holographic insert from the entity.

You may with some preparation, feel the ecstasy and empowerment that some with the experiencing of the Holographic Inserts I stream into my Third Subject’s consciousness. For the purpose of elucidation and bringing Light and information to the discussion. I also present these “teachings aids” to you for the same purposes.

There are a few ways you may explain this to oneself that this phenomenon is real – so that you may indeed experience it clearly, without resorting to denial, fear, anxiety. The simplest explanation is that you are my student and as such you and I have a special , spiritual relationship. The connection here is a physical one also, relating to certain portals or chakras as we might call them, located on and around the physical body.

Any one of my precepts may be used as a Holographic Insert. We have mentioned before that the phrase “you create your own reality” is a particularly potent precept and stands as the foundational statement, if you will, of my entire Teaching. I would suggest an experiment to determine the precepts that have the greatest “effects” for you, when you activate them as Holographic Inserts by focusing on them in your mediations.

PERFORMING YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Relax and enter a light Trance State. First, I would have you read the percepts and attempt to identify those that “speak” to you with the most energy and frequency. The phenomenon known as resonance comes into play here. Your physical construct, your human body, is actually a vibrating system of Consciousness Units, as you know. Ideas and images of all types, either entertained from within your mental environment of considered from written texts and other media, also “hold” their individual vibratory signatures.

Let me again emphasize that it is the Divine Essence cultivated within the student that is the catalyst here. Through working on your self, through reading spiritual literature and engaging in these arcane practices, the researcher cultivates a certain perspective that allows for the experiencing of the Holographic Insert by the Inner senses. Also, on “the other side,” in a sense, the creator of the manuscript – in this case The entity – empowers the text with the essential energies of the Divine – All That Is – so that on the subtle levels where these types of spiritual growth and extra sensory and emotional perception are experienced, the stages is set quite well for the Holographic Inserts to display.

Now focus on your selected precepts one at a time. Have an intention to link up with the etheric component of each precept. There is an openness required in this endeavor. You might think of oneself as an antenna in search of a signal here. Be quiet. Be still. Listen with your Inner Senses for the response from the Entity.

Findings – Document your findings in catalyzing the precepts into Holographic Inserts.

MULTIDIMENSIONAL CONSCIOUS UNIT EXPRESSION

To illustrate my last point: imagine if you will, your current existence in this day, within this moment that you are reading these words. Can you visualize how the Blog, with its Conscious Units “holding” its shape through the Coordinate Points we have discussed, exists also as, let us say, a section of a tree in front of you in a life you may be living as a forest dweller many years before our so-called Christian Era? Likewise in this example, these exact same Conscious Units, as they flash on and off, creating different realities within different timeframes, do indeed compose different Reality Constructs of varied types within these different areas. This is why I describe the future and past timeframes as simply dimensions.

All timeframes or Reincarnational Existences exist “right before your eyes.” You may conceptualize this, if it helps you, as a layered effect, with the different existences and their constructs simultaneously created “one on top of the other.” I hope this description of the very easily accessible dimensions assists you in attempting contact with the other lives. The lives are out there in front of us. They are perceived through the fine-tuning of the Inner Senses. This process is quite doable for the student of this material. Now for some experimentation.

THE 2012 PHENOMENON

The visionary state to which we aspire is always available to us. This state of consciousness exists probability at all times, for the time is right for this ascension of human consciousness. In our popular media we can see this. The 2012 phenomenon is exhibited for us in our books and other media, as a potentially horrendous affair entailing the destruction of the planet and humanity. These are actually the collective fears of humans being given life by authors, directors, and other artists. Their vision is a dark one, you see. They are going for the sensationalist expression of the potential inherent in this great change that lies before us.

Yet, the opposite is also true here. The change that we will experience in the coming years have just as much potential to express in positive ways as in the negative. Indeed,we could say that our visionary exercises are specifically tuned to allow a perception of this positive outcome, what we call the Positive Collective Manifestation. In my Blogs I presented an exercise for the researcher that wishes to explore this collective manifestation as it creates itself out of the positive thoughts, emotions, images, and beliefs of humanity.

Here I will present an exercise that you may carry with you so that you may become an advocate: an ongoing contributor to the Positive Manifestation.

Multidimensional Conscious Unit

To illustrate my last point: imagine if you will, our current existence in this day, within the moment that you are reading these words. Can you visualize how the Blog, with its conscious units “holding” its shape though the Coordinate Points we have discussed, exists also as, let us say, a section of a tree in front of us in a life we may be living as a forest dweller many years before our so-called Christian Era?

Likewise in this example, these exact same Conscious Units, as they flash on and off, creating different realities within different timeframes, do indeed compose different Reality Constructs of varied types within these different ears. This is why I describe the future and past timeframes as simply dimensions.

All timeframes of Reincarnational Existences exist “right before your eyes.” We may conceptualize this, if it helps us, as a layered effect, with the different existences and their constructs simultaneously create “one on top of the other.” I hope this description of the very easily accessible dimensions assists in attempting contact with these other lives. The lives out there in front of us. They are perceived through the fine-tuning of the Inner Senses. This process is quite doable for the student of this material.

TIME MACHINTIME MACHINE

The engineers were not limited to design and creation of buildings and other structures. They were instrumental in the creation of vehicles that were used by researchers to “travel” interdimensionally. I am now transmitting a Holographic Insert into Dorian’s mental field in an attempt to graphically illustrate one of the inter-dimensional vehicles.

Now these vehicles did not “travel” in the common meaning of that term. The crystal structure assisted the researcher in an attunement of their consciousness through vibratory resonance. The mental Intention of the researcher, directed through the “focal” aspects of the crystal structure, allowed for the “beginning in” of the Simultaneous Lives lived in different points in space and time travel in our system. The future, in our terms, is really just our progressed reality in linear time. Our future is another dimension, a dimension that exists, as I have stated, within the exact same Conscious Units that compose the Blog Reader, as well as all of the current Reality Constructs that compose our world.

ANCIENT ENGINEERS

There was another serving class, another group of humans within the Atlantean society, that was dedicated to assisting the people within their social group in terms of leadership and the creation of social and political structures as well as physical structures. This group was composed of humans who were extremely talented in the mathematical sciences and had a natural affinity for numbers, figures and their manipulation. They were natural engineers and experts at what you might call the “hard sciences.” These humans “instinctively” knew the lost efficient methods for creating a structure, such as a house or other building, and possessed a facility for designing and building dams and other large structures.

These ancient engineers were also visionaries, just as the visionary leaders were prophets as well as gifted politicians. They could foretell the future stresses – from natural disasters etc. – that a particular structure of their design would incur after being built, and so could design and build the structure with this prophetic material in mind.

DIVINE KING

You may read about the “vestiges” of the class of prophet leaders in your stories of the Divine King. In successive civilizations after the “fall” of Atlantis, for example, this idea was kept alive, if only symbolically, in the concept of the King or Emperor having a direct connection to the Divine.

We may also read in our histories how ultimately this type of leadership failed miserably, for the leaders tool the power without taking the responsibility of divine leadership. They were more interested in ruling than leading. In our current leadership on our Earth, we may see this ultimate act of hubris in the leaders who have anointed themselves as the modern Divine King, yet choose to deny the citizenry their rights, and as I said, rule rather than lead.

MYSTERY CIVILIZATIONS

As descendants of the divine rulers of the Mystery civilizations, the visionary leaders are engaged in the same sort of activities as their predecessors. They are art of a lineage of incarnation in our Third Dimension. Now genetically, there may or may not be a connection, however the Soul Family connections are there to investigate.

For example: those of us who have identified an Atlantean Heritage, through our experimentation or other research efforts, may be interested to know that the leadership within the Atlantean culture itself was initially drawn from what you might call the “spiritual” class. This group fulfilled several different functions in the society. They were scientists of non physical reality, what we are calling the Scientists of Consciousness.

These humans were raised from birth as the “Magical Child” we spoke of in the last Blog Series. They had memories of all of their Reincarnational Existences. This information, which included “future” experiences, were quite valuable. The leaders were visionaries in the true sense of that term, in that they were aware of the probable events to occur in the future of their societies.

VISIONARY LEADERS

We suggested in our last Blog Series that there are true visionaries among us who are making themselves known. These are the advocates for our Mother Earth, the speakers, the teachers, the magicians, shamans, witches and healers of our timeframe, who are exerting considerable pressure on the current ruling regime – I am speaking in global terms here now – to “soften” and indeed spiritualize their expressions in physical reality, including their political systems. They are now coming forward to lead us in all the domains of human interaction.

Our leaders who have taken advantage of the people are now finding themselves “uncovered” and suddenly vulnerable. In their place there is becoming apparent this new class of “natural born leaders.” We have stated that these visionaries will not necessarily be elected. They lead in a very appropriate manner, for that is their natural gift, as humans in this very important era in our world.

Perhaps now we have witnessed this phenomenon, essentially a calling forth to those of goodwill for our Mother earth, to tend to THE TRUE BUSINESS AT HAND. The denial is lifting, you see, as many of us begin to see the damage done by our leaders with our tacit approval.

Or perhaps we have experienced this phenomenon in a more personal way, as we may have felt oneself called to serve our fellow humans in a more direct way than we have done in the past. Leaders come in many forms. Leading by example, to coin a phrase, is a wholly adequate and necessary service one may provide to initiate the rebuilding of our damaged societies.

You see, there are no authorities among these visionary Leaders. They do not hold power by virtue of authority, such as a power “over” others. They are powerful because they keep their own power. They do not give up their authority to others. In the broad sense, ALL of us are becoming enlightened, empowered with the natural creative energies that are our birthright. We are all becoming leaders in this way.

JUNG

In other models, these primal blueprints are referred to as “archetypes.” Our eminent psychiatrist and researcher Jung popularized this term, as elemental to his theory of consciousness. Naturally this theory of Jung’s bears a resemblance to the ideas within current Blog work. Jung was informed by the Entity.

He was first informed through contact and communication with his Energy Personality, and later used this Energy Construct as a bridge to the greater Gestalt of consciousness to which he was associated – The Entity, broadly speaking. Essentially, this was the path used by all three of the recognized authors in our timeframe. It is also the recommended path for those of us who wish to receive energy from the greater energy Construct of which we are a part, be that The Entity or any others.

TEACHING AIDS OF THE NON-PHYSICAL BEINGS

I do not wish to repeat myself too greatly in this New Blog Material, but allow me to once again state the ultimate premise of our Third-Dimensional existence. Our world is composed of Light. Each and every Reality Construct is the “visible” manifestation of Gestalts of Consciousness of various types.

The leaf on the tree before you is the “outward” creation of the “inner” thought-form or Energy Gestalt of LEAF. The Beings of Light, therefore, exist at all levels of physical Reality Creation. And again, each and every Gestalt of Consciousness, including the Beings of Light, may be contacted through the Rituals of Contact and Communication we are presenting in these new Blog works. In this way, the researcher may communicate with the leaf in question through an attunement of the vibratory frequency of the researcher’s mental environment to the frequency of the subject i.e. LEAF.

RESONANCE

When you state, for example, that something “resonates” with you, this is a statement of literal fact. Let us say that you are speaking of some particularly evocative material you are reading in a book. You find yourself becoming quite affected by the ideas in the text. You become emotionally invested in the material. It seems as though the author is “reading your mind,” as to what you are thinking and feeling.

This vibratory resonance occurs when the thoughts you are entertaining within your consciousness are vibrating at a similar rate as the ideas you are reading about in the Blog. In this instance, the Consciousness Units that compose the thoughts held in the mental environment are vibrating at the same frequency as the ideas, images and other material elicited by the written words.

Now in this activity of resonance, you might say that the energetic potential of the one, assists in creating the holographic replicant within the other. This is a rather simplified way of expressing the manifestation phenomenon, in that the one “brings the other up” to a station of equally evolving manifestation – streaming, energizing and facilitating the assemblage of the Consciousness Units within the other.

Now the reverse is also true here. It is a mutual sharing of energies in this resonance. There is a form of homeostasis or balance that is achieved once the level of Value Fulfillment is reached that is the “goal,” in a sense, of the Reality Creation project. These discussions may become quite etheric. However, in its simplest form we may say that our reality is co-created from the Consciousness Units that are charged with the life force of All That Is.

The resonance phenomenon exists as a cohesive force in the assemblage of Consciousness Units into Reality Constructs throughout our Third-Dimensional Reality. When we speak in the new material of the researcher “fine tuning” the Inner Senses, we are saying that the researcher may achieve a similarity of vibratory frequency is created – through our various techniques, for example – resonance is achieved. The Consciousness Units within your mental sphere resonate with their holographic counterparts – the “generic atoms” we have spoken of earlier. What is imagined on the “inner” is made manifest on the “outer” in this way.

This cohesive force is the electromagnetic energy we have mentioned that is at the basis of all created realities. The bioelectric energy that is at the basis if all created realities. The bioelectric energy that “Lights and Powers” the human body construct or any living or inanimate object, does so in a resonating, flashing on-and-off fashion.

Here again we are referencing my past discussions on the nature of the atoms or Consciousness Units as they create multidimensional realities, in a sense, flashing or vibrating at specific rates to create the realities that vibrate at the particular frequency.

You may also remember our discussion from our previous Blogs in which we presented the possibility for the researcher to experiment with modulating the frequency of their physical body construct to create healing.

INSPIRATIONAL TEXTS

For your information, Dear Blog Reader, the ideas and philosophies of the great leaders of your perceived past are available to you within the milieu of your personal consciousness. Now obviously, this is the psychic mechanism for the inspiration and motivation of vast numbers of devotees to follow the great religious leaders, for example. It is a psychic network, a Telepathic Network that one participates in to make these connections. The catalyst for such a voyage of discovery or quest for understanding and knowledge, could be as simple as he reading of a book authored by one of these respected leaders.

As I related to you in in previous Blogs, the printed words within our spiritual and philosophical texts have power on the subtle levels. In a sense, these words serve to “open Doors” within the psyche of the reader to allow for the reception of Divine Knowledge. This stream of energy has its source or transmission point within the after-death consciousness or Soul Self of the deceased writer.

So the selection of inspirational texts is very important in this project. You may find that certain authors “call out” to you in some way. You are drawn to particular authors, just as you may have been drawn to my Blogs, it is a very natural thing to act upon these inspirational impulses. These mental constructs, the motivating impulses, serves as markers along the way, as you make your voyage of self discovery, the discovery of your Soul Self.

Now the questions may arise, “What is my relationship to these authors? Why do I feel compelled to seek out their books and read them? The answers are that you are connected to a virtually limitless “family” of incarnated and currently “deceased,” in our terms, human Souls. These are your Simultaneous Lives, that I described in my previous blogs. These are your etheric Guides also, your Energy Personality and other assistants, and these are the authors of inspirational texts.

HOLOGRAPHIC INSERTS

The preferred method of communication between the complex Gestalts of Consciousness you know as spirits, Guides, Angels and such, and the student in physical reality – the visionary – has always been the Holographic Insert. This is our name for a brief multisensory experience that is transmitted from the nonphysical being to the student. It is quite brief, usually, merely a fraction of a second in duration. It has Loving energy attached to it so that you will remember it. These are the visions that are experienced by students through the ages and documented in scared texts of various kinds.

The visionary experience is really a conversation between the nonphysical beings and the student. It is not necessarily a one-way conversation. The Nature Spirit, for example, does not transmit communication streams into the consciousness of an unprepared student. The student most probably has first been prepared through study and through continued communications and Lessons creates by the Spirit for the further education of the student. The student asks for the communication and the Spirit complies when appropriate.

Now, Holographic Inserts “pour off the page” for you, when you take the care to accept these multisensory messages within your mental awareness. These words and these phrases have power when they are considered carefully with the expectation of the manifested reality to be indeed made manifest.

It is an openness, really, a state of courageous expectation that you must cultivate. It is the same with spiritual literature of all types. The words do have power. The phrases, when they are considered after the required preparation of the human mentality, may initiate the unfolding the unfolding of the Higher Consciousness. We may also relate this to all types of inspirational literature. It calls to us for specific reasons, to catalyze within you – the individual human – the resources required for the exploration of our inner world.

IDENTITY AND THE SHIFT

Now we become what we think about. Our identity is created from the ideas and images that we entertain within our mental environment, including messages sent to us from our Simultaneous Lives. Our identity is quite fluid. We are continuously assessing our mental, physical and emotional spheres of activity and assembling our identity from data gathered in this investigation.

We have many colleagues in this endeavor – the reassessment of the Personal and Consensus Realities. Our modern world in this timeframe is witnessing the transformation of the human mentality on a grand scale. Our fellow inhabitants of our planet are questioning their roles and duties as human beings and many are acknowledging the TRUTH of this matter of identity.

For example: many who have been skeptics are engaged in a reversal of thinking. They are “seeking the light” quite literally in all of their experiences, particularly where they have sought to keep the truth from their fellow humans. These transformations will be shocking to some, for they occur so abruptly that the breath is taken away. Yet as this event in the lives of men and women becomes more commonplace, the basic correctness and obvious necessity of this wholesale change in human perception and attitude will be recognized. The Visionary of old is reborn in the present, during this shift – the Fourth-Dimensional Shift we are describing.

BEINGS OF LIGHT

Let me answer my own questions. Beings of Light are responding. We ARE a Being of Light. We each are a Soul with a body. We are a multitude of personalities existing in many different areas on our Earth, on other planets and in probable systems. We are experiencing our amnesia in the Third Dimension, perhaps scoffing at this admittedly “far out” narrative, yet it remains quite true that WE are what we are talking about when we describe the Beings of Light. EVERYTHING in physical reality if “lighted” by Beings of Light, Gestalts of Consciousness, Light Bodies, Energy Bodies.

They are the energy and incipient matter templates for all forms in physical reality and all other dimensions. So that any discussions as to whether Beings of Light exist are really quite humorous, as these Gestalts of Consciousness comprise ALL of human experience.

Perhaps what we are truly saying here, is that we are an Etheric Being. The witty, the humorous and the creative responses are from the Nonphysical Personality aspects that form our Soul Self. This is our identity then. We are grounded in the nonphysical world.

WHO IS RESPONDING?

Where does this visionary energy perspective originate? Let me explain with reference to the “typical” Blog Reader. You have Dear Blog Reader, I am sure, what you refer to as your personal resources of wit, humor, creativity. This is that aspect of your psyche that you rely on to “Come Through” with the appropriate responses in your dealings with you world. Another way to describe this might be that these spontaneous responses that you give when required, these are the material of the free-flow of your conscious state.

You seem to be accessing your personal reservoir of experience from which you create “answers” to the challenge of your environment, whether these challenges are human beings or circumstances that challenge you to feed back with appropriate germane information, behaviors, and so on. Now my questions to you would be, “Who is responding with this information? Who is the witty, the humorous, the creative one?”

The Visionary STATE

The visionary within our modern culture is a much maligned figure. This may be because we have come so far from our tribal communities, as “progress” takes us away from core experiences of community and shared spirituality. In the U.S.A. in particular, and most of our developed nations, we take great care to marginalize our visionaries, particularly when they begin to speak of radical transformations to come in our world.

Here however, in our growing community, we honor the visionary and we accept the visionary state of consciousness as natural, normal and quite essential to the evolution of the human Soul and the human species.


The visionary has visions, quite simply, and these visions are experienced through the use if the intuitive faculties. The visions of these seers of society are filled with Light. The visionary is enlightened, you see, and senses the foundation of reality as the Light Energy that it is. In my view, I see all of humanity as potential visionaries.

PRELUDE TO SENSING REALITY CREATION

Dear Blog Reader, you now have at our disposal the great perceptive powers of the Inner Senses. In my last series of Blogs I described to you in detail how to access these powers and how to use them to your advantage in physical reality. Here I would like to elaborate on this data with some suggestions on how to sense the Subconscious Manifestation Energy Stream.

This material may also be used in conjunction with Carl Jung material. The Subconscious Manifestation Energy Stream, as I said, support and nourishes our created reality – our Personal Reality Field. In the dream state, and when we are in our Home Dimension between lives, we are well aware of this stream of energy and we sense it as easily as we sense the various constructs within our self-created reality. Now, the Inner Sense of sight, Auric Vision, may be utilized to sense this stream. The following experiment will assist us in the awakening of this valuable Inner Sense.

EXPERIMENT – Sensing Reality Creation

Hypothesis: The Subconscious Energy Manifestation Stream may be observed as it creates the reality construct.
The Reality Construct is our topic for the moment. The Reality Construct is all of created reality, and also describes the many elements of the created reality. Here I wish to digress somewhat and ask you the Blog Reader to imagine for yourself what it is I am attempting to describe to you.

Consciousness creates form, instantaneously, in the moment. We must use these descriptions of Reality Creation for us to make sense of this phenomenon, occurring as it does within a linear time conceptualization. The truth of the matter might be better expressed by describing the spontaneously responsive quality of manifestation in our system. So that here we could speak of consciousness creating form that creates consciousness, and so on, all within the spacious eternal moment. Everything is conscious. everything is creative. Everything creates consciousness. All That Is, another term for everything, IS the infinitely creative consciousness that gives birth to our own infinitely creative consciousnesses. This Idea Construct is an excellent one to entertain when we are attempting to KEEP IN THE MOMENT. I trust I have inspired quite enough to be receptive to these subtle energies.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
So I would suggest you relax. If you are sitting in a chair, make yourself comfortable. If you are lying down, prop up your body so that you will not fall asleep as you read this. Now imagine if you will, what I have defined as the Moment Point. Use your current existence, the moment you are now experiencing, as somewhat more extended in duration than you have experienced moments in the past.

In a previous Blog, we provided an experiment for the Blog Reader to practice slowing down time within their Personal Reality Field. This is the same feeling we are creating here and now. You use your intention to imbue your Moment Points with duration. Please make creative use of your Inner Senses to accomplish this, perhaps intuitively visualizing your present sensory images and sounds as slowing down, slowing down with your Intention.

What we are getting at here is a slowing down of time to the extent that we may glimpse the creation of physical objects from ideas. This would be Reality Construction viewed at the edge of creation. Now these are grand terms, and you might say I am making it all sound so easy, but at its heart, it IS the easiest thing it all sound so easy, but at its heart, it IS the easiest thing in the world. You are experts at creating “something from nothing,” and you can easily slow down this creative process to the microsecond level. Here you may see and feel what is involved in your creation of your Personal Reality Field. This includes your body and the senses you use to sense this manifestation activity.

How much must you slow down the act of reality creation to witness this? You will know you are meeting with success when you have a sensation of pulsing visually and as a felt sensation. This is the pulse of manifestation. This is the flow of the Subconscious Manifestation Energy Stream through the Coordinate Points and “into” the Reality Constructs.

A taste of perspective. I am experiencing the pulsation. It feels like the heartbeat, only accelerated many times. Visually there is a dreamy quality. Briefly I experienced a twinge of fear, as if I was receiving forbidden knowledge. Possible religious programming?

The flow of information “through” the Coordinate Point is so rich in imagery and other content that the researcher must intentionally slow down the flow of Conscious Units through this gateway if they are to observe and study the construct.

Now can you imagine these theorized Coordinate Points as permeating “physical” space and matter, yet not taking up any space whatsoever? Let us refer to the Conscious Points as etheric in nature in this experiment. They are the nonphysical “precursors” of the “future” created Reality Constructs. They exist inter-dimensionally and holographic ally. They are each everywhere literally all of the time, past, present and future. They exist as the determinant “values” in the manifestation phenomenon. And again, consciousness in the form of Consciousness Units expresses intentionally, as in the unconscious co-creation of the human or elemental expressions of all the other varied forms of “substance” in your dimension. When you have received adequate information from your experiment, gradually disengage from the Trance State. Return to fully sensory awareness.

FINDINGS – Document your observations of the Reality Creation phenomenon.

SUBCONSCIOUS MANIFESTATION ENERGY STREAM

Now the strands of incipient matter we have just discussed compose the latticework that is the grid of Coordinate Points upon and within and about our self-created reality. There is a holographic nature of these strands of incipient matter. They compose the physical reality Constructs of our Third-Dimensional world INCLUDING our own physical body and the physical constructs that we might call space, air etc.

So you now imagine, as I attempt to bring this description to fullness, how this Reality Construction phenomenon might exist as a profound image? Can you imagine the creation of Third-dimensional Reality in its totality as being powered or energized into activity? What is lacking here in our description, you see, is the motivating energizing power that Sustains the phenomenon. Let us refer to this concept as the Subconscious Manifestation Energy Stream. This energy flow supports your reality by continuously lending the creative energy of All That Is to the manifestation of each and every construct in our Personal Reality Field.

The SEMES is subconscious. It is riven by our Soul’s Intent. We are experiencing on Earth our reincarnational dramas and comedies Intent is other- directed. It is directed in essence by All That Is. Now we decided before we were born, what body we were to inhabit and what Lessons we were to learn in this current Life. So we truly do co-create with All That Is our Earthly existence. But again I must remind that we have free will “to do as you please,” even while in the midst of our Lessons, which might be a truly sober and serious nature.

Threads,Strands and Gestalts of consciousness

In previous Blogs, I described the Consciousness Units as being composed of threads. I now further state that these theoretical threads of awarized energy exist in various “arrays” of potentiality, what we are calling Gestalts of Consciousness – the pre-manifestation templates of creation. Infinitesimally small threads of energy under the direction of elemental consciousness, coalesce into strands of incipient matter that are combined in various ways to create our Reality Constructs.

Now a matrix implies a grid or network of interconnecting pathways or energy streams. Can you imagine in your mind’s eyes this network of Love Light? The pathways are the strands of etheric material composed of Consciousness Units. Within this matrix exist the Coordinate Points. The strands also coalesce into more complex structures – The Gestalts of Consciousness – which hold the potential for the creation of anything conceived by consciousness. All of this etheric material is literally “Love in action” the all-encompassing power of Love that is the essence and creative energy All That Is.

Are you beginning to see now? This Love Light energy that power the strands of etheric material, is the creative element for healing of all types. Focused Love Light is utilized by our tribal healers, for example, in very precise ways to assist their “patients” in balancing and “making whole” their unbalanced bodies. So it is literally true that Love is the healing agent in all restorations of the human body and spirit.

LOVE LIGHT MATRIX AND METAPHORS

The Love Light is the matrix of divine influences onto which we fashion our Reality Constructs. Here let us speak of the importance of context. It is ALL context, Dear Blog Reader. Within this milieu we are describing as the Love Light Matrix, the Telepath Network, the Central Field of Experiencing and the Subconscious Manifestation Energy Stream, we create out of Consciousness Units those Reality Constructs that compose what we experience as “Bedrock Reality” – a cliché we have found helpful in these discussions.

Of course we use metaphors in this work to assist the Blog Reader in an understanding of the principles and ideas we are describing. Again, the creation of our Personal Reality Field that we accomplish on a moment-to-moment basis with the divine energy of All That Is, is so complex an undertaking that our physical brain could not conceive of the many operations that are undergone within ONE SINGLE SECOND of our existence.

Mind Blower.” This refers to, I gather, a concept or image that is so stunning that a single human mind cannot comprehend it in its totality. This is an description of what the mind encounters when these matters of Reality Creation are considered.

To express the divine – the ineffable – we must always resort to metaphors and theoretical constructs, for the reality of the subject matter is so incredibly complex and rich, that the Third-Dimensional consciousness cannot hold it for very long before it falls away into chaos. The great traditions of our world teach the student how to maintain an equilibrium in these matters. The hope is that the student will master the skills of witnessing the Divine without succumbing to the negative states of fear, anger, confusion. So metaphors are used.

Now perhaps some mixing of metaphors is necessary here to provide a choice for you The Blog Reader. We are hoping that you will find some image or idea that works for you here in the understanding of this material. We are preparing you for the regimens that follow these introductory chapters.

LOVE

Building upon this premise, can you see how a natural trajectory for a “typical” Consciousness Unit or Atom might well be toward the creation of Love? Love is information or light. What I shall be referring to as Love Light in this Blog, then, simply information of a particular type. It is the creative force of manifestation.

If you have been following our discussion of the nature of reality, you will remember that I have described All That Is as the source for All realities. You may then see that it follows that Love in our model of Reality Creation, is the energy or “impetus” for the expression of All That Is within our Third Dimension.

This is not new information I am providing . Our World Religions place great importance on the role of Love within society. The virtues of Love are spoken of by many healers and leaders within our communities. Yet here I hope to define what I am calling “Love with a capital L;” The Love that I am describing to you in the literal “fuel” for the manifestation of EVERYTHING in our world. This Love or Love Light has a particular frequency or rate of vibration that facilitates the assemblage of Consciousness Units into Reality Constructs. The Love Light is the power of All That Is. Period.

It is the force that activates the Consciousness Units to express ideas and images into physical reality through the Coordinate Points. Do you see, then, that it it important to learn how to utilize this Love Light in a conscious deliberate fashion?


Where is the Love currently? “My world is certainly lacking in the Love that creates realities!” We shall have more to say on the diversion of Love in the creation of negative realities later in this Blog series. For now, please remember that our Earth is a dramatic stage for the enactment of what are often perceived as “Negative” or “painful” reincarnational dramas.

These dramas may indeed “appear” to be devoid of Love in any measure. However, you have “set yourself up” to experience your Lessons in the way you are experiencing them. Indeed, your ultimate Lesson in the Third Dimension may be of creation to create the positive out of the negative. Coincidently, that is the precise subject of this blog.

COORDINATE POINTS AND REALITY CREATION

Some areas of our world hold “more” of the Coordinate Points than others. These parts of our planet are much desired as places or worship and mediation. The potentialities for manifestation into physical reality are greater in these areas of high energy or accelerated vibration. Yet within our own personal environment, we may find with just a bit of exploration, just where the processes of creation work for us.

For example: have you ever found that the simple act of changing your study location within your home had the effect of greatly streamlining the creative process for you? Perhaps intuitively you understood that the dispersal of Coordinate Points in the new area was more conducive to study and learning than the previous one.

The Coordinate Points may also be conceived of as gateways into adjacent dimensions representing different timeframes and so different Reincarnational Existences I hope I am not complicating this discussion too much with these heady topics and definitions. In late Blogs we shall go further into our explanations with examples and experimentation.

For now let us just say that the precept – for example “you create your own reality” – may be thought of as the general, overriding influence in the New Science theory while as I said, the percept may represent the “cutting edge” – a useful comparison – of consciousness as it creates and perceives the world.

CONSCIOUSNESS UNITS

These Consciousness Units are, of course, the ubiquitous elements of awarized energy – the “building blocks” of Reality Creation. And as for the Coordinate Points, here we shall simply the Idea Construct for dissemination to a broader audience.

The Coordinate Points permeate our Third-Dimensional reality and direct the “activity” of the Consciousness Units, according to the energy templates of Gestalts of consciousness. We could say that the potential for physical expression of the Consciousness Unit is “adjusted” by the Coordinate Point at the direction of subconscious and conscious thought.

Now need I mention that this is a collective effort? The creation of our world is an exercise in mutual cooperation between our “human” consciousness and the “creative intelligence” or consciousness of everything else in our world. This description pertains to greater as well as the lesser here. We cooperate with every atom within our Personal Reality Field as well as every atom within the greater reality field that we might call our Consensus Reality.

SUBCONSCIOUS THOUGHT

To reiterate, our world is largely created by subconscious thought, as we know. During the dream state we create incipient Reality Constructs that we materialize into physical Reality Constructs on awakening. Now it may already seem obvious to us that we create our physical body without much conscious thought. Our unconscious, in tandem with All That Is, creates our physical body “naturally,” without the need for constant energy or direction from the conscious mind or ego.

However, as we explore the expression of the Soul through the ego, and we begin to correct our negative thoughts and their expression into physical Reality Constructs, we will begin to gain conscious control of these unconscious processes. This is the path of healing the physical body, for example. We learn how to fine-tune the expression of Consciousness Units through the Coordinate Points for the creation of an improved or symptom-free body.

PRECEPT AND PERCEPT

Facts of our existence. These are the precepts – that when fully understood, will allow us to witness and remember the activities of our Simultaneous Lives, for example, as well as the literal moment-to-moment creation of our Personal Reality from the thoughts and images within our mental environment.

EXAMPLES OF PRECEPTS:
You create your own reality.
You are connected to everything in your world.
You can change the Consensus Reality from your Personal Reality Field.
Emotion is the creative energy of All That Is in action.
Human consciousness is founded in Love.
Diversions from Love through Negative Emotions create Negative Realities.
All imbalances may be corrected through Love and Courage.
You are the sum of your Simultaneous Lives within your current Moment Point.
Your Inner senses may be used to examine and change anything past, present or future.
You are in telepathic rapport with everything in your world.
Reality Constructs are composed of Consciousness Units of awarized energy.
Coordinate Points permeate matter and space and modulate the activity of the Consciousness Units.
Your Intention, emotions and Beliefs provide the energy and direction for Reality Creation.
Everything exists initially as Gestalts of Consciousness, the nonphysical “templates” of creation.

Now the percept here – a slightly different spelling than precept. I trust you shall notice – is another very important concept we shall discuss. A percept may be defined as, “that element of consciousness that creates the Reality Construct and Instantaneously perceives or witnesses the construct.”

PROTO SCIENTISTS

The modern scientific tradition is giving way to a body of work that was created by the forebears of our world. These proto scientists lived within the Mystery Civilizations. We refer to these as Mystery civilizations for the obvious reason that we have forgotten the valuable insights into human behavior and the nature of reality that we learned within these societies.

I have described  how mankind has ceded the powers of Reality Creation to those in authority in exchange for “subtle gifts” – the protection of the group, the opportunity to earn a living, the confirmation of a place in the hereafter etc.; etc.; etc. This giving-up of power went hand-in-hand with a mass forgetting of the old traditions of healing, group spirituality and wonder-workings of various kinds.

The Divine Day

HYPOTHESIS: You may create contact with the divine over the course of an entire waking day.

This experiment is one of creating the Trance State long term. For our purposes, the Trance is a sacred state of awareness. When you conduct your Ritual of sanctuary and enter your Trance, you are walking the Path of the seeker of wisdom. When you can embody this state of awareness over the course of minutes and hours, you will be well on your way toward awakening to the Unity of Consciousness Dimension that we have described in my blogs.

Now choose a day when you will not be bothered by outside forces. You will want to be left alone for this experiment, if at all possible. We are assuming here that you have already experienced some form of contact and communication with one or more of your Guides. However, if you have yet to manifest this relationship, simply “act as If” you are already in touch with your Energy Personality. Conduct this experiment as though guided by your spirit Guide, for this may well act to initiate that relationship.

In my last series of Blogs I presented an exercise in bringing the energy of Reality Creation up from the emotional center into the mental center. This mental center is located directly between your Eyes. It is here that you may sense the divine information stream as it seeks to penetrate the barrier of the ego/intellect. Just as we encourage the Blog users of The Healing regimen to create the healing moment long term – into minutes, hours and days – we encourage you the Blog Reader to create this initial contemplative state for as long as you can. It would be best if you could begin the Divine Day on Awakening from sleep.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
If you have yet to develop your Ritual of Sanctuary, simply imagine a Golden Light surrounding you. Nothing harmful can penetrate this field of Light. It has a healing protective influence.

Now create the Trance State as best you can. The Trance is simply a natural state of awareness marked by deep relaxation and a focus on the inner world. I would ask you to sense what energies may be present in the solar plexus area of your body. If you sense a churning activity, as though emotions were ebbing and flowing, please bring this felt sense UP to the mental center directly between the eyes. As you do this exercise, you may notice that the churning sensation ceases. The felt sense becomes one of calm and assurance. There is also an emotional toe of ecstasy just below the surface. This is indication that you are using your intent to bring it up, up into the divine portal.

FINDINGS – Document throughout your waking day your experiences with keeping your awareness in the mental center.

BELIEF CHANGE

Now there are at least two distinct ways to go with regards to belief change, if you do indeed wish to change your beliefs and thus your reality: you may change your perceptions of your Personal Reality Field, or you can go for direct change of the underlying beliefs themselves. First, though the ancient technologies of Healing Talk via the Trance State, and through other Rituals of Contact and Communication with nonphysical beings, such as the Energy Personality and other Energy Bodies, the perceptions of the Personal Reality may be altered, thus altering the Reality creation. We may also describe this as a “fine tuning” of the Inner Senses, so that they may more clearly perceive and create.

The second method entails identifying the beliefs you wish to change through a self-questioning process and creating more productive belief statements representing improved “healthier” beliefs that you wish to “make your own.” The statements are then continuously written down or typed into a computer, the theory being that the new beliefs are internalized the more that you document them.

These two methods represent two different ways of relating to physical reality: the imaginable and the literal. Naturally there are others. If you feel more comfortable visualizing your beliefs, I suggest you use the imaginable method in your experiments. If you feel more comfortable writing them down, use the literal approach. And of course, beyond my humble offerings, use your own methods that suit you.

Again, for those of you who may feel uncomfortable with terms such as Trance State and Ritual of Contact and Communication, please make up your own names for these states of consciousness. I am merely using common terms that the majority of my Blog Readers may understand. The Trance State is used by many of us on the subtle levels as we attempt to make ourselves understood.

As for the use of the term Ritual to describe the process of contacting and communicating with the denizens of non physical reality, please note that the term Ritual is the precise one used in our World Religions to describe their individual and carried methods for contacting the various spirits, gods and goddesses, God, and what have you. So we are merely presenting terms already in common usage by those of us in the West and elsewhere.

FREE WILL AND DIVINE WILL

Your choice in these matters IS a matter of your free will in the moment. Might I suggest that in these moments of opportunity for You the Soul, that you listen to the suggestions of your Guides rather than to the self-centered voice of the ego/intellect? This is merely a suggestion, my friend. The free will choice is yours and I am acting here in a purely advisory capacity. I simply urge you to take your own advice in these situations, when in fact you are embodying the Soul Self. It will be quite easy to determine if you are experiencing this unique perspective. The Soul Self is informed through communications with All That Is. This perspective may guide you to the best resolution of any given creative challenge you may face.

The differences between the subconscious creation of negative realities and the conscious co-creation of positive life-affirming realities by the awakening human consciousness through use if the Divine Will are quite pronounced. You will know it when you are faced with a decision to go one way or the other. I will leave it at that for now. Obviously, you are each required to learn your individual Lessons. I would not wish to give you ALL the answers, and by so doing, rob you of the “joy” of learning your Lessons on your own.

LESSONS AND THE SHIFT

Now this “quickening” is indeed upon us in Third-Dimensional Reality. Those of us engaged in negative ruminations, and their attendant manifestation into negative Reality Constructs, will find that we are confronted, in an almost simultaneous fashion, with the products of our mental digressions. Just as the practitioners of Loving Understanding and Courage will find their positive manifestations strengthening, so too will the practitioners of doubt, anger, hatred and such, find themselves consumed with the energies released during these errant creative activities.

Is there any wonder why such an intensification of this creative process produces the appropriate results? We create our own reality according to our beliefs. If we are focusing on the fear and cynical distrust of our neighbors, for example, is it any wonder that our neighbors continue to cause us discomfort? And is it any wonder that as we awaken as a species this discomfort grows? Indeed.

I suggest the discomfort may grow until it becomes UNBEARABLE. Then we will of necessity be faced with a choice in our reincarnational dramas. Will we learn our Lesson or will we not? Will we continue to hold-on to the anger, fear and cynicism, or will we let-go and feel the ecstasy just below the surface of our human consciousness? This ecstasy is the creative Loving energy of All That Is.

BELIEFS AND THE SHIFT

Our feedback reality continually endorses our ongoing emotional states according to the “structures” of our beliefs. Here we shall define as those “habitual patterns of perceptual analysis utilized in the creation of Reality Constructs.” Our beliefs are the potent ideas, images and emotional contents that exist within our mental environment or psyche. Our beliefs may be thought of as the “rough sketch” for our creative project – our ongoing life with its experiences, behaviors, and so on.

Now currently it is possible for us to address issues of core beliefs and core values, like never before in our history as a species. Our evolution as a Soul depends upon change in our beliefs. We will not, individually or collectively, make the transition we have been discussing in these new series of Blogs with the outmoded beliefs we currently hold.

The world is integrating, you see, at an extremely rapid pace. We in the developed nations, the many millions of us, are behind the learning curve in this matter. This may be due to our obsession with material objects of mass consumption. The prevalence of the egoic perspective within our individual and mass consciousness also holds us back. And it certainly does not serve us in the West to “export” these limited perspectives through our Negative Media and through our military excursions into foreign lands.

This is why I am writing Blogs. The greater part of the world is awakening “on Schedule.” It is in the developed nations in particular, and some other parts of our world, that we are still focused on the creation of negative, fear-based realities.

PERSONAL REALITY FIELD

The Inner Senses, the nonphysical counterparts to our outer physical senses, are the creators of our Personal Reality Field. Perception creates reality in our Third Dimension. And the reality we create is dependent wholly upon what we believe is possible. If we are experiencing a reality of peace and Loving Understanding with our fellow inhabitants of Earth, we have a system of beliefs that permits, allows and effectively determines a Personal Reality Field of peace and Loving Understanding. We have in this example, believed into existence our peaceful Loving world.

Now it is also true that everything we find in our Personal Reality Field we have believed into reality. Might I say that, for the most part, if we feel uncomfortable, fearful, anxious with the state of our Personal reality, it may be due to our creating unconsciously? Creating unconsciously leaves us open to the Negative Entities. Watch your thoughts. Watch where your fearful thoughts originate. Are they being amplified and corroborated within the negative spheres of influence?

The negative realms are sensed as separate from the self. The Negative Entities that reside within these spheres of activity normally will not seek us out and attempt to fix on our being. Yet if we are experiencing negative, anxious, angry, or violent emotional states, we leave ourselves open to encountering these influences. For this reason, it is important to observe our emotional states throughout our waking reality. If we are experiencing fear, assess our sensing and Reality Creation and see if we are being driven by negative outside sources.

Yet please rest assured that if you find yourself “contaminated” by these energies, you may easily correct your situation. You may do so with your Intention in the moment. What I would suggest you do is first perform the experiment we have called Clearing The Emotional Body. This activity raises the Negative Emotions from the emotional center to the mental center where they may be transformed into their opposites.

Briefly, you simply relax in a meditative posture and imagine or visualize the “churning” energies of The Emotional Body rising up to the mental center directly between your physical eyes. Emotional resolution is achieved. The contact with the Divine is established.

BODY OF LIGHT

Now this Emotional Body is perceived as Light to the Inner Senses. It is also conceived in Light. All is Light. Everything in our created reality is composed of Light in the form of our theoretical constructs the Consciousness Units. Here we are simplifying and spiritualizing my messages to humanity. For this reason we shall also refer to the Energy Construct of the human physical body as being composed of spiritual information.

In this context, you Blog Reader, are a divine message from All That Is, articulating your particular philosophy, behaviors and mentality within physical reality as an “envoy” of the sacred. Again, if you are tempted to dismiss this as mere “religious ranting,” I urge you to take a deep breath and go within for just a moment. Sense your ultimate divinity. It is obvious to us who are now instructing you, and to you it may become obvious in your experimentation, as you discover Findings that support my statement.

CHOICE OF TERMS

I realize that these are words that may carry their own emotional undertones for my Blog Reader. I would ask you then, if this is the case, to look beyond the ego-identified definitions and references of theses terms. Although it is not my desire to challenge you excessively in this endeavor challenge you I must. As an educator to humanity for “countless” years. I have found it advantageous to present material for the student’s assessment that stands what you might call “diametrically opposed” to the ideas, images and beliefs that the student may be holding in their mental environment at any one time.

I do hope that if you feel rising anger and righteous indignation making itself known within – as I have just described to you – The Emotional Body, that you perhaps take a deep breath and go deeper with this work, this project yours and mine.

You see, the Soul’s perspective is necessarily through the ego/intellect. I would suggest, in times of anger and when feeling affronted by this material, you simply step to the side a bit, metaphorically speaking, and allow your Soul Self to perceive your world. This is an easy first step in the “awakening” process. Please have faith, or perhaps Courage is a better word here, that this project will pay off for you in many different ways, rewarding you with information of a decidedly beneficial nature.

THE EMOTIONAL BODY

This emotional Body may be perceived as the intersection of “energies” of Reality Creation within our physical construct. We may experience it as existing within the heart region. It is within this construct that the Reality Creation agendas of All That Is of our Reincarnational Existences may read. We may, for example, observe within this Emotional Body the emotional and symbolic underpinnings of a chronic illness that currently plagues us. Or we may witness a dramatization of an event from our past that keeps us from enjoying prosperity in our present. Thus we may sense these strategies in our own particular fashion, using the Inner Senses that we are developing through experimentation in this project.

The greater sphere of activity within which rests this Emotional Body we refer to as The Light Body, as do many of the current teachers and practitioners in our world. This construct is “built” from the intersecting energies of existence – or dimensions if you prefer – of our many Simultaneous Lives. This Inner Senses representation of The Emotional Body, as well as the Inner Sense of sight itself, we are calling the Auric Vision.

TUNING-IN TO OTHER LIVES

For example: If my friend Rob was to select at random one of the planes surrounding the Central Field of Experiencing in our diagram, and using his imagination and his Inner Senses “tuned-in” to another life, he might very well find himself experiencing his aboriginal existence, or possibly his existence as a female in New Orleans Louisiana in the U.S.A. or as a Roman soldier from many hundreds of years ago, in our terms. These are just a few of Rob’s Reincarnational Existences.

You Dear Blog Reader also have a vast store of existences just waiting to be explored. This illustration may serve as a meditation piece for you in this way. In each of our Blog Series, we have presented these simple focusing tools to assist you in perceiving your greater reality – the reality of your Soul Self. Please utilize this tool in your experimentation as you attempt to access your other lives.

CENTRAL FIELD OF EXPERIENCING

Let me add to this cursory explanation with a description of a new metaphor we are presenting: Central Field of Experiencing. Now we exist within an intersection of dimensional planes.

The intersection of several planes. They share a common area, that we shall call our Central Field of Experiencing. Let us say that each of these planes of existence represents one of our Simultaneous Lives. Let us further state that the common area here our Central Field, is our current self experiencing life in this time-frame.

Now all of these planes are connected at the Central Field and so not only does our current self have at its disposal the perceptual ability to experience events within our current life, but also, because we are indeed connected to the other lives – hard-wired, in a sense – we have the POTENTIAL to experience events, feel emotions and have thoughts from within these other simultaneously-lived lives.

The planes surrounding the Central Field represent our various Reincarnational Selves as well as the many PROBABLE existences that we co-create with our consciousness and All That Is. This Central Field, then, is our current Third-Dimensional existence. Look around at your surroundings. This is what we are referring to in this current discussion.

Now as we look around us what do we see? Do we see a futuristic landscape with mythological creatures grazing on the lawn? Do we see a vignette of interaction between two family members from a life in a Mystery Civilization, such as Atlantis? Do we witness the life we are living now, complete in every detail except for one? Perhaps there is a stranger, someone we do not recognize, apparently living their life with us in our home. Does this unique detail “prove” to us that we are viewing a scene that does not exist in our current physical reality?

I would guess that you are perceiving your surroundings as quite similar to those we left behind you as you proceeded to read this Blog. My point here is that the possibility exists for you, in this time of accelerated consciousness, during this Dimensional-Shift we have described, to briefly inhabit the bodies of your Reincarnational Selves. You accomplish this by refocusing your perceptive apparatus – the Inner Senses – on a tangential plane of existence. You will be picking up on the sensory experiencing of these humans who are indeed you, Dear Blog Reader, as you are engaged in living your lives within the many time-frames on Earth and in other systems.

UNCONSCIOUS CREATION-EXAMPLE

Let us present an example here for illustration. Imagine if you will, a human undergoing an extremely stressful life event. Perhaps this person has incurred a job loss and is quite worried about the financial implications of this negative event. The emotional state of this human is chaotic – stress-filled – as a cascade of Negative Emotions floods their mental environment. Consequently, the Personal Reality Field of this person is also chaotic. And because it is created from Negative Emotions, there numerous triggers within their Personal Reality radius that “cause,” in a reflexive fashion, the continuing recreation of Negative Emotions with in their psyche.

Now immediately prior to the jobs loss, let us say that the mental environment of this human was quite balanced and even “happy.” Their monetary needs were met. Their needs for a social outlet were net with the job as well. So the firing of this person has a devastating effect upon their mental stability, as we may well imagine.

Now let us further propose that a great mistake was made here with this firing of out theoretical worker. The employer made a mistake through a mix-up of some sort, and upon discovering this, they immediately rectified the error, by perhaps calling the hapless human and giving them their job back.

Well, again as we imagine, the Personal Reality Field of this human example was instantly transformed with the call from the employer reinstating them in their position. Happiness was again experienced. Relief from monetary worry was experienced, as well as gratitude, perhaps, that they would continue to enjoy the social amenities of their employment with humans with whom they had developed strong, Loving relationships.

I hope you see my point here in this example. We are all, as humans existing within the Third Dimension, engaged in a witnessing of our mental environments projected outward into physical reality on a moment-to-moment basis. The ideas and images within our psyches are the blueprints for the creation of the varied Reality Constructs that compose our Personal Reality Field. The mutable emotions are the energies that power this reality Creation Phenomenon.

OUR THOUGHT-CREATED WORLD

This Blog we will present the basics. The phenomenon we are calling Reality Creation will be discussed in a very simplified form. Though we will certainly add to my theory in so far as further describing the role of the Scientist of Consciousness in the exploration of the non physical reality, the following Blogs detailing the rise of the New Science will present a much more detailed analysis.

Now for information, Dear Blog Reader, our world is composed entirely of thought. A musician composes musical works of art with notes as the creative material. In the creation of realities, the human in the Third Dimension uses thought in artistic ways.

To carry the comparison further… just as the “mad” artist might refuse to admit their creation of the art before them – paintings, let us say – the majority of human beings refuse to admit that they have had a hand in the literal creation of their physical world. Certainly many of us would say that this is crazy thinking, or “magical thinking” as our psychiatrists refer to it. We have become so estranged from our works that we fail to see ourselves in the “mirror” of our physical reality.

UNCONSCIOUS CREATION

One reason for this estrangement is that this creation of our world is done largely on the unconscious level. It is truly a projection, in this sense, for we are individually projecting our subconscious thoughts, images and other mental constructs out onto the “Screen” of our Personal Reality Field.

Our thoughts give birth to realities. Fearful thoughts gave birth to fearful realities. Thoughts of Courage and Loving Understanding give birth to Courageous and Loving realities. You may witness this for yourselves within your own manifestations. Watch and see how each element in your perceptual field REFLECTS your inner state of emotion and imagination.

MASS DENIAL

Perhaps other examples are necessary to help pull you from your denial. Many of us are most probably familiar with denial of the drug addict or the Alcoholic. In these instances it is very clear-cut. The subject may be experiencing the destruction of all that they hold most dear – family, business, friends, it is all falling away – yet still they maintain their “innocence.” This is denial at its most obvious. But the negative effects of denial are also felt in every other sphere of human activity.

In the Consensus Reality Manifestation there is evidence of mass-created denial at work. Witness how the many millions of us in the West still deny our responsibility in the creation of negative conditions in the lives of those who live in developing nations. We are the squanderers of our Mother Earth’s resources. We in the West use a great deal more of the oil, minerals, lumber etc. relative to population than do those in the poor developing countries.

The rationalization here, a common one, is to state, perhaps under our breath, that “these people deserve their lot in life. They may be lazy. They merely have to pull themselves up by their own bootstraps,” and so on. I have chastised quite gently for these offenses in our last series of Blogs. I now continue this tradition in this series of Blogs.

Now I am aware that you are a student of mine and you are attempting to “work” on yourself. You are attempting to learn your Lessons and perhaps you are awakening from your denial. But please also notice the residual aspect of denial that is always with us in this regard. It is the seed from which racism and other unsavory misperceptions and misjudgments grow.

DENIAL II

With denial we have another very successful strategy for avoiding our Lessons. Here we are literally creating a reality for oneself unconsciously, and then disavowing any hand in the creation of the reality. “I am innocent,” you are in effect saying. Yet obviously it is your world that you are co-creating here. Your Personal Reality Field certainly bears the marks of your personality. Still, when we are up against something that we do not wish to face-perhaps because it is embarrassing to us, something quite true, yet something that challenges our standards – we disaffirm it, we disempower it, we DENY it.

We deny the thing with vehemence relative to the importance we place upon it. In other words, we deny what we most know to be the utter truth, in the honest appraisal of the subject at hand. Here again, those of us who observe our behavior, and know our motives and indeed our probable developmental paths as human beings, must laugh at such nonsense. The amount of energy wasted in such denials of self – for that is what these instances truly represent – is vast beyond all comprehension. And so we must laugh to ourselves, as we observe in the midst of our “Issues.”

For example: when we experience a twinge of Negative Emotion, perhaps triggered by something in our environment that reminds us of an event, a negative event for our past, we immediately redirect the ego/intellect to something other than the negative memory, the negative event.

Now you may use this skill of distracting the ego/intellect to our advantage within Reality Creation programs described in this Blog. The key to use of this technique is to FIRST listen to what the information stream is attempting to convey to us. Listen and understand. “Face the Music,” to coin a phrase.

In this sense, we have the opportunity for awakening to our denial in each and every one of our self-created moments. This current Moment Point, as you are reading this Blog, may become a moment of awakening if we but merely CONSIDER, that what we most ardently deny – particularly with regards to our so-called “Issues” – may be better embraced as the truth of the matter.

This is a simple test that we may utilize in assessing any perceived fact of life in our current existence. What do we most fear? What do we hate most strongly. Herein lie our weaknesses in our Reality Creation agendas. Inconsistencies, prejudices, cultural delusions, artifacts of consciousness that cause us to grimace or wince inwardly may be indicators of this denial of the Soul Self.

INTELLECTUALIZATION II

One of the most popular forms of avoidance for us is intellectualization. Through this strategy we assess the Divine information within our mental sphere as something completely explainable. Scientific reasoning – logical deduction – is used to place the information in a neat and tidy and already known and understood category. Here a stream of spiritually – informed communication is interrupted and redirected to other parts of the psyche where it will not cause any disruptions.

To continue this metaphor, the stream of Divine Information attempts to erode or melt away the self-limiting beliefs within the psyche – beliefs that may no longer serve the purposes of the evolving Soul. But the ego is in charge here, and the strategy of intellectualization works quite well for the majority of us. It allows us to ignore, as mere mental anomalies, these messages from our Higher Self. A brief example: when you experience a viewing of a non physical being – a “Spirit” in our terms – we ascribe the sensory information we are receiving to “Tricks” of the eyes, being perhaps mentally exhausted, hallucinations due to any number of “Rational” causes. I am certain that the Blog Reader may contribute their own examples.

Of course in the workplace this strategy allows us to keep focused on the task at hand. In our private lives the misdirection of the ego/intellect allows us to continue on our path of development, however nonproductive and even self-destructive this path might be. Indeed, it seems that the more nonproductive the life lived, the more firmly the ego intellectualizes – “explain away” – the information received from the Divine Sources.

EGO AND SOUL

I have suggested that our main task in physical reality is to participate willingly in this exercise, as though we were in school, for we are indeed in an educational relationship with our Third-Dimensional Reality. You the Blog reader are both teacher and student. Your greater personal consciousness, what we have been calling the Soul in these Blog works, acts as a teacher to our Earthly ego. On the subtle levels, You-the-Soul know full well what are your Lessons for your current incarnation.

The ego, what we are calling the student aspect in this description, “pretends” to be unaware of these Life Lessons and their dramatization in physical reality. This is “the play” of our physical world – our creation of learning experiences in ensemble with other humans, for our mutual edification, and for the greater experiencing of All That Is.

I have covered this quite thoroughly in the new Blog Series, and so I shall not digress. However, please take from this brief reminder this fact of existence: just as many other teachers both physical and metaphysical have stated, “Each” second of our Earthly experience is an opportunity for spiritual growth. The way to move forward in our Soul evolution, is to perfect the transformation of Negative Emotions into their diving counterparts.

Now this quest for self-realization may be short if we are prepared to face our Lessons directly, without the denial and avoidance for which humans are so famous. To those of us in higher dimensions, it can appear as quite strange how many continue to suffer the effects of anger, fear, and the like, all the while knowing full well how we may extricate ourselves from our dilemma.

Here I am referring to the continuous messages from Beings of Light that exist within our mental environment, yet which we ignore through various mental and physical maneuvers. Perhaps I should take a moment here, before we get into the substance of this series, to describe for you these incredible gymnastics of consciousness.

LESSONS

This is an series of Blogs on the subject of Reality Creation. It is assumed that you have developed the skills of self-observation described in the new material, or perhaps you have read other Teachings on the subject of receiving and translating divine information. As an advanced work, we shall take it for granted that you are learning your Lessons.

As you well know, the Lessons for you in physical reality are the emotional states of anger, fear, shame, racial prejudice and others, that you must transform with you intent into Loving Understanding and Courage. In this way, our system is quite similar to others that you may have known in your life as a seeker of knowledge. This makes sense, does it not? The seeker of wisdom tries as many systems as necessary until they have realized the Soul’s Intent.

BABYHOOD

Babyhood is indeed an extremely creative stage of life in the development of the human. Since one is fresh from the home dimension, there may be lingering memories of that experience. The baby may hold full memories of the previous incarnation as well, and may be experiencing a “reliving” of past experiences while seemingly engrossed in the typical baby behaviors one notices. Now, the job of the parent, unfortunately, is usually to train the infant in the ways of the world – – physical reality. And so the parents begin to task of socializing the infant.

As this process continues, the baby spends so much time engaged in the training – being trained to fit into the culture – that memories of the past incarnation and the time in between lives, are quickly forgotten. It is rare that a child grows to adulthood with these precious memories intact. So the divinity of babyhood is experienced by all of us, but only for a few short months. After that, the connection is broken. The child is watched carefully to assure that they are developing “normally.”

And when imaginary playmates arrive, modern parents too often are fearful that the child might grow into adulthood with these characters at their side. They are mostly banished by parents, as an embarrassment. The child is then taught to let go of these primal relationships, and most do. Again, in our aboriginal cultures and some alternative communities, the baby is encouraged to be “the divine one” long into childhood. This sets the state for the development of the divine child, the magical child: being the human that lives in both the subtle and physical worlds with grace and power.

SAME-TIME SALON

HYPOTHESIS: You may meet with other entity counter-parts within nonlinear time.

Counterparts within the spacious present moment of your shared Simultaneous Lives. I realize that this would seem to fly in the face of everything that has been taught to you in schools. Yet remember what I have been suggesting to you about authorities and institutions. In your awakening, which is currently well underway, you will be given the opportunity many times to reformat and reconstitute your core beliefs about yourself and your world. You may do this reformation with your imagination. In this example, the last experiment of this current blog series, I am asking you to take a very courageous step forward into the unknown reality.

I am asking you to demonstrate to yourself, Dear Blog Reader, that you can achieve contact and communications with others such as yourself – other Entity Counterparts – by simply affirming your intention to do so, here in your current Moment Point – your Point of Power. You may rely on all of the findings pulled from the previous experiments It may help to have an underlying attitude of playfulness here. You are having fun with your imagination, just as you may have done countless times when you were a child.

CONDUCT YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Now relax yourself using your most effective methods. When you are experiencing a relaxed state of consciousness, with the metaphor of the radio dial in mind, tune the dial to that state of consciousness of Simultaneous Time in which you may sense your physical counterparts. Have the intention that you will make contact, just as you have and the intention to accomplish other research goals in the previous experiments.

Of course, you may ask for assistance from your Energy Personality. Now you may be presented with data for interpretation by your Inner Senses. It may come to you in various sensory forms. You may see images that are quite familiar, as if you have seen these faces many times, perhaps in dreams, other locales on your Earth.

If you feel that you may take notes into a recorder or onto the pages of your journal without disrupting what you are experiencing, do so. Again, you may have the overall sense that you are making it all up. Of course, you are indeed doing so, but no less and no more than you are making up your Personal Reality Field. When you feel as though you have learned enough from the experiment, gradually come to full sensory awareness in physical reality.

FINDINGS – Document your findings. Now the “after effects” of this final experiment may include “coincidental” meetings with your Entity Counterparts as you go about your daily activities. You will know them when you see them. I am quite confident that you will achieve great success in these sojourns into the non-physical.

RITUAL OF POWER

In collaboration with your energy personality you may take back your power.

To take back power is very healthy thing to do for a human quite used to “hiding” within the security of groups. This is not a power “over” but a power “with,” you see – a power shared with all other incarnated humans beings. You will be reminded that you are first an individual Soul within a physical body. YOU-Soul are at the center of your physical and non-physical worlds. This cosmic center of our world is all-powerful. Though it appears that you are perhaps simply a tiny voice within a very large chorus, on a Soul level you know that you have only “pretended” to have this small voice. You had no intention of giving up your power permanently.

Let me digress on this point for a moment… in the reincarnational drama of our life, there is much pretending. The ego loves to pretend that life is a certain way and that interesting and dramatic events are occurring. If it were not for the ego’s excellent dramatic skills in diverting your attention from the TRUE reality beneath the façade, we would not believe with all our heart in the camouflage reality in which we live. So it is healthy and necessary, to a degree, to believe in the fantasies and pretendings that make up our moment-to-moment existence. However, if we are to awaken, we may have to dispense with the comforting stories of our physical reality. Now that is not to say that we must surrender ALL of the physical trappings of our Personal Reality. That is not advisable and indeed that is  not possible for most of us.

To take back our power requires some personalized, empowered imagery. Perhaps we can remember when we experienced our power being ceded to authorities. Perhaps we can remember feeling diminished. Perhaps we remember feeling that it was necessary to be a part of the group. If so, it should be easy to create our ritual. Simply consider the opposites of these feelings and these images.

So just as I asked you to consider your personal feeling relative to a subtle emotion of peace and security, I now ask you to consider those ideas, images and emotions relative to the idea of “taking back power.” And again, it is a good idea to write down what comes to your mind. Draw pictures of the images you see in your mind. Consolidate these mental constructs into one image or emotion that virtually resonates with personal empowerment. If you feel it would help, you might create a symbolic piece of jewelry to wear or create a statement to repeat to yourself that infers the empowering ideas and images for You-the-Soul.

Now as an example: let us suppose you are experiencing a sense of disempowerment with regards to your family. This may be long-standing condition for you, as it is with many of your contemporaries. Though you are now an adult, your parents or other family members may treat you as though you are still a child. You ceded your power to these family members when you were a child and possibly reinforced this dynamic throughout your life to “Keep peace” within the group, to be a part of the family collective, in effect saying, “I am not powerful enough, I am not worthy enough to participate in the family and have my words valued.

Let these others, the authorities, run the show, and I shall reside in the background.” Then as you grew to adulthood, you used this template of creation to create your roles in other groups: in school, in social groups, at work, and so on. The single template has served to create for you a lifetime of subservience to authority. You have become this “small voice” within every group thereafter.

CONDUCT YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
You are now creating a different template for the creation of personal realities. It may be “the opposite” of the template you have been using since childhood. Now create your relaxed state. It should only take a few moments. You may connect it to snapping your fingers or gesturing with your facial expressions in some way, so that you need only to snap your fingers or gesture and instantly you are relaxed and ready for the experiment. When you are relaxed, consider your chant, imagery, piece of art, manifesto or other focusing object. Remember, it must have the capacity to elicit confidence and a sense of personal power.

As you experiment with this in mind, the ritual will grow stronger and more potent. When it has become habitual, you may bring it with you and perform it mentally in the field whenever you experience disempowerment or abuse in physical reality. You are then recreating reality through a new filter and you will perceive and create empowered physical realities thereafter.

FINDINGS – Document your findings. Does the hypothesis need to be changed to reflect findings over time?

CONTROL AND SUBMISSION

As I promised you in an earlier blog, I will speak of matters related to control and submission. We have already discussed our tendency as humans to cede control – our very powerful energies of creation – to other humans, to those in power. This is a natural thing for us to do my friend, so you need not feel embarrassed. “The authorities,” meaning parents, teachers, employers, religious leaders, politicians, scientists and even movie actors, have encouraged us to give up our power, what we may also refer to as “personal power.” There is your dynamic – the authority pledges to provide us with protection, usually from “the other,” or to provide us with subtle gifts, in exchange for our allegiance. In this contract, we give up our rights as an empowered human. We pretend that we are without power and need the security of the family group, or the scholastic group, or the employment group etc. etc. etc.

It is always the same scenario: the authority usurps the power of the common one over time, usually at first with these promises of safety, of sanctuary. Do you see why we create The Ritual Sanctuary at the beginning of this series of blogs. This we do to remind that it is within YOU that you will find your security, your sanctuary. Within you is where it has always been. We have the power to create this state of sanctuary with our powerful thoughts and emotions.

And now it is necessary to create another ritual. This one will be a ritual of taking power – taking back you power that has been ceded, perhaps too hastily, to authorities.

LOVING CRITICISM

Now I know that I have been critical of the organized religions in our world in my current of the organized religions on our world in my current Blog writings with with you. However, I saw this as necessary for the blog reader, in order to clear the air, so that truth of matter might be openly considered. I am not The Entity in these blogs, I’m not, some kind of doomsayer attempting to way the minds of humans to some nefarious path. My critique of our institutions and our behaviors as a collective of humans, is done for not only our own good, but for mine as a Higher Dimensional being in service to Earth at this time.

I point out the fallacies in our thinking and the negative attributes of our churches and other institutions, in what I hope is a loving fashion. We who no longer have physical bodies, the Light Bodies, are in service to us and we have only love to give. It is this love I am certain, that is felt by Blog Readers of the material who truly get the messages I am attempting to convey. I wish to educate and inspire , much as a loving coach or school teacher would. These are the personality aspects I am transmitting my energies through at this time.

THE GREAT ADVENTURE OF HUMANKIND

The quest for connection with the Earthly personality and the exploration of the Unity of Consciousness Dimension. Now, we may receive catalyze within individuals, the written word, the printed word as in books,blogs and internet. Our energy centers or “chakras” as we call them, can be opened by reading my material. This is probably the simplest way for us to commence with the work at hand. However, for those of you who feel you may be called for a more direct experience, you may attend the discussions and affirm your connection to The Entity in this way.

In these direct interfaces with, much more divine information can be transmitted and absorbed in a very brief time, compared to the reading of books or blogs, solitary meditations and so on.
Now, again, “the window of opportunity” for humans to engage the Soul Self and grow spiritually, is becoming smaller with each passing month. The culmination of countless years of evolution will soon be at hand.

This activity is not something that can be postponed until we “Have the time” to address the Issue. We are virtually OUT OF TIME at this time. Our suspicions that time seems to be speeding up are quite pointedly true. We are, as a race, speeding toward the great transformation, and indeed, the short time that remains ahead of us will be perceived as a VERY short time, particularly if we have procrastinated and avoided our responsibilities regarding our Soul Issues: the deeply personal Lessons we have come to our Earth existence to learn.

I urge you to participate in your spiritual practices, in your churches and religions if they serve You-the-Soul, in your readings of the great Masters and in our seeking direct contact with disseminators of my messages and the messages of other Light Bodies. Now, the negative energy forms, the Negative Entities, will be attempting to discourage us from walking our spiritual path.

This will be ongoing until the mass consciousness reaches a level of loving kindness and compassion that will tip the scales for a mass manifestation of the virtues of humanity in the physical reality of the Third Dimension. Indeed, that is what we are attempting to create, the Beings of Light, with the help of our human associates.

SPIRITUALITY

Yes, spirituality, as you may becoming to an understanding of this phenomenon, is simply the experiencing of Earthly existence by our embodies Soul. There need be No religious connotations. Thought forms that reflect memories, recent and ancient, of genocide perpetrated by religious movements, do not necessarily have a place in this discussion of what we are calling “spirituality.” So you see, there is a practical approach to our studies of Third-Dimension reality. We are undergoing a restoration, if you will, to our original, self-comprehending, godlike awareness.

We are all Avatars. We know this is on a certain level and as we awaken, our knowing shall “firm up” and become a great deal more supportive for us as we transform our beliefs and ideas about what is possible.

Spirituality is a remembrance of what it has been for us in ages past. This is true. Yet is also points the way for us into the future when we shall be called upon to remake our Social and Political and SPIRITUAL institutions. Therefore, I caution you and yours in using your cynicism and is trust to keep your spiritual transformation at bay. Rather, I suggest you embrace it. Go with the flow.

May I remind you that for every moment of your perceived reality, your waking reality, is complementary moment in one or more of your Simultaneous Lives? So each moment of spiritual unfolding bears the mark of all simultaneously-experienced moments in your multiple reincarnational lives. Now there are, of course, differences in the various aspects of your simultaneously-lived lives, for they are all being lived, for the most part , in different eras, by different sexes and nationalities etc, for the greater learning of All That Is.

But please understand, quite literally, when you may be experiencing a moment of ecstatic understanding here in our Current Moment Point in this timeframe, one or perhaps many more of our Simultaneous Lives may be experiencing a timeless moment also, but as I said, most definitely within a different physical body, of a different emotional makeup and station in Soul Evolution than you, Dear Blog Reader. I want you to ponder the enormity of this fact of life, for a moment.

Now when you meet a friend on the street, unexpectedly, perhaps a friend you have not seen for some time, you may be ecstatic, overjoyed, as you embrace and speak of your relationship, how good it is to see that person again after so long etc. Now in that moment of reunion, that spacious moment of reunion, you are also , in another body, in another era, most probably on our Earth, experiencing a complementary type of reunion activity.

Further, if you could take a motion picture or snapshot of the various reunion activities of you various lives during that moment, you would find that there are also Numerous correlations between these experiences. You may find on observing these movies or pictures that the settings – streets, field, within structures – are quite similar, in that the placement of objects, trees rocks, houses or what have you – are similar throughout. Is it not obvious that your experiences we are describing here, the reunion experiences, are all quite similar, because you are the multi-dimensional creator of these events?

As the creator of worlds here, most naturally, your creations would bear the mark of the maker – the creator who is indeed you, in tandem with All That Is. So now as you observe your moment-to moment experiences, remember that this is only the “surface” of a deeper experience of manifestation that is our multi-dimensional being.

YOU ARE ALREADY THERE

A new world is coming and yet we are already there. As you read this blog, divine information is being streamed into your Energy Body. This information is our heritage. It is the truth regarding our circumstances as a living Entity on our Earth. This truth is simple. It can be stated in just a few words: we are ageless; we never die. The Soul Self that is at our core is eternal and has witnessed countless seasons on our Earth and on other planets and in other galaxies and dimensions.

And you, my friend, you and I are one. We are all one and it has always been that way. When I speak of our connections to each other I am speaking of literal energy networks that tie each conscious cell to every other conscious cell in all of created reality.

It is through this network that All That Is, the ultimate energy source, seeks to know itself through our experiences, Now, we have a physical body and so the truth of this fact may be somewhat difficult to experience, however, do not wait until your death to receive this information. Take advantage of these teachings I offer you in this life.

This is the ultimate simple test for us in physical reality: will you take up the challenge to learn your Lessons now, or will you postpone your awakening until the time of your physical death or in other lifetimes? The choice is always ours. But do not wait until it is too late. We may be required to incarnate on our negative Earth another time, to be again given a chance to learn our Lessons.

CORE BELIEFS

We have to experience events sequentially to understand them. It would be confusing for us, would it not, to see a cake being cooked in one of our ovens, rise and complete its cooking in seconds, rather than minutes? So we manifest according to rules “built into our reality. Fortunately we all “obey” the same rules – telepathy is operative on all levels – otherwise we would all be confused at the unpredictability of our world.

Now, our work represents some tinkering with these built-in rules and regulations, these core beliefs. In my blogs of long ago, I spoke of the difficulty in changing these core assumptions. Now is a different era, my friend, and our fellow Earthly associates are being prepared to change the core beliefs that we hold. This preparation is taking place during our dream state. Most of us do not realize this is happening. We simply awaken with more clarity and a feeling that anything is possible for us: this despite the wars and the famine and other negative phenomena so evident around us.

TUNING-IN TO THE HOME DIMENSION

HYPOTHESIS: The dearly departed await our contact…

CONDUCT YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Now, this is an experiment in contacting our friends or family members in their Home Dimension. Obviously, if you are still too upset to attempt this contact, please do not consider trying this experiment. For some of you it may be best experienced after you have gained some emotional distance from the event of The transition.

Find a comfortable chair to sit in or perhaps a comfortable chair to sit in or perhaps a comfortable sofa or bed. The idea is to relax the body enough so that you can receive these impulses from the other side, yet not so relaxed that you fall asleep. In between worlds is where you want to be for this experiment and so I ask you to make those preparations you need to in order to enter that state.

Now the crux of this experiment is to distinguish, from the chorus of telepathic messages you are receiving in our relaxed state, those messages that are being transmitted by your loved ones. Beings of Light, friends and loved ones and other Entities from your past, present and future, are all constantly vying for your attention in this mental environment.

Since you are attempting to focus your Inner Senses, you might simply visualize the appearance of the loved-one. Mentally picture your family member of friend as though they were in the physical body. Fill the perception with color and enliven it with your thoughts. This will have the effect of you “tuning-in” to their communication band, allowing you to “home-in” on them, in a manner of speaking. Now it is important to proceed with this experiment as a loving Scientist of Consciousness. Love and kindness are your watchwords in these endeavors. Ego perceptions have no place here.

As you create the image of the person in your mental environment, imagine their voice becoming gradually stronger and stronger until it becomes the most prominent voice in your inner chorus. Use your intention and simply turn up the volume or use the metaphor of the radio dial to do so. This is very easy to do and I am certain you will find success with this in a short period of time.

After establishing contact – you will know you have contact if you feel the intense loving vibrations that emanate from the Home Dimension – simply have your conversation, just as you did when your loved-one was in physical reality. After the conversation, naturally say good-by and perhaps make an appointment to speak again in the future.

Then use your metaphor of the radio dial or whichever technique you used to make contact, to release contact with your loved-one. Gradually come back to your waking consciousness. In time, if you give yourself the suggestions and if you have the ongoing intention to do so for loving purposes, you will be able to make these contacts with the departed while you are at work, walking in the park, etc. etc. etc. As you use Inner Senses, they strengthen over time.

FINDINGS – Immediately document your personalized Findings.

MOTHER NATURE

These transformation in human consciousness and thus the Third-Dimensional physical reality we are discussing, have been noted in our media. “Strange” weather patterns and earth Changes are now commonplace around the world and the media report these unusual events. Often these stories are couched in terms of our Mother Nature displaying her power: power to upset the plans of humans to go to their sporting events, to the beaches for relaxation. To their weddings and other outdoors events. In an almost whimsical fashion these news stories often personify these weather changes as due to our Mother Nature’s unpredictability, but in a lighthearted way.

Yet the most potent and destructive events are described as something to be feared. In these instances, Mother Nature has become so unpredictable, no one knows when she will reveal her “anger” and strike us with a bolt of lightning, or rise a flood to carry us away in our automobile or cause an earthquake to bring down our great cities.

Now, if you have read my Blogs, you have been acquainted with the truth about the weather and about all physical manifestations. All physical reality in our dimension is the result of attendant thoughts and beliefs our humankind hold in the mass consciousness.

Let me go further….we have a saying in the West that “everyone talks about the weather but no one does anything about it.” In fact, this is not true. Each person on our planet has “a say” in how the weather will be expressed in their area at any given moment. This individual contribution is done, for the most part, under our awareness.

The Consciousness Units, through the individual expression of emotion, combine with other Consciousness Unit expressions of emotional content from the population of any given area. These stream of incipient Reality Constructs combine and are expressed in the manifestation of particular weather patterns and Earth Changes according to how the influences play out within the collective consciousness of that region of the world.

Now I must mention that when I say “mass consciousness of a particular region,” I include the collective “thoughts, idea and mentality” of everything in that region, including the rocks, the soil, the trees and the created products for mass consumption. All has consciousness and all contribute to physical manifestation of weather and Earth Changes. Now, obviously a bug might have less of an effect upon the weather than an angry, fearful human, but the bug does indeed contribute in measurable ways to the collective manifestation.

So do we see how many if us simply project our fears upon this great entity, our Mother Earth, forsaking our own responsibility in the creation of our physical reality? It was not always thus, however. In fact, in civilizations from our past, the weather was created quite consciously to support adequate conditions for the growth of particular crops, for outside celebrations and for other purposes. This takes place even today in some of our aboriginal cultures on our planet. Our modern scientists, also, are in a race to develop technologies to change the weather for profit, for the profit of corporation to which they are beholden. This matter will be discussed in future blogs. For now, let us explore, as Scientists of Consciousness, the Home Dimension of friends and family.

PROPHECIES

The idea of a Dimensional Shift is not new to humankind. Many of our world’s religions foretell similar events in their prophecies. Different words and concepts are used to explain the coming shift, but in fact, we may all be describing the same thing, with a different emphasis on particular points. Indeed, the breakthrough into higher dimensions is at the base of virtually all of our Earth’s spiritual systems. Certainly you the Blog Reader can confirm this statement for yourselves. Simply replace the words “Fourth Dimension” with “Heaven” or any other terms from any culture on our world denoting the Etheric Plane.

And again, these Portals to the higher dimensions open to humankind very infrequently. The coming shift, for instance, will occur at the end of a many-thousands-of-years cycle. It has been foretold in the scriptures of indigenous peoples, such as the Mayan and Hopi. The symbolism depicted in these prophecies, I might add, is a great deal more accurate than some of the Christian stories. Yet, as I said, we may be all describing the same event, merely with a particular cultural emphasis on dates, related gods and goddesses, and so on.

Now the world over, as we create this Blog manuscript, all of humankind is being readied for this event. Other Light Bodies conversant in the cultures assigned to them, are bringing their collectives of humans into a witnessing of the precursor events that will herald the Fourth-Dimensional Shift. You know by now what I am speaking about, if you are paying attention at all to my words. The Earth Changes – floods, hurricanes, tornadoes, glacier melting are the heralds to the shift. The turmoil of human thought is creating these changes. In a way, we as a race are setting ourselves up for a very positive or very negative experience here with the Shift. There is always the probability that we will allow conditions to deteriorate to such a degree that there will be no turning back and we will destroy ourselves with our own negative thoughts.

However, humans are quite fond of saving themselves from the Brink of Disaster, as is also documented in many of our spiritual scripts. Whatever the outcome, know that the Guides are watching and will intercede if and when they can. Again Laws of Non-Interference prohibit certain types of intervention. These messages I am conveying are a subtle type of intervention. Dramatic “rescue efforts” are obviously not allowed. We must learn our lessons as a race and as individuals.
When we learn how to access our Energy Personality and other Guides, we will experience firsthand what I am describing. When we are experiencing the free flow of divine information into our consciousness, we will eventually dispense with the need for continually challenging the divine source as to veracity and specifics.

We will no longer require proof, for we will be LIVING our proof. We will no longer require prophecy, for we will be LIVING the prophecy. These dramatic transformations are already underway for the Blog Reader, and to some degree for every other human on our planet. The spiritual revolution of human and Earthly consciousness has begun. The Soul Self is making itself known. As this manifestation develops, visionaries from all spheres of activity on our world will step into leadership roles. Now we might ask, “Not necessarily.” They will, for the most part, “Will they be elected into these roles?” I would answer, “Not necessarily.” They will, for the most part, “assume” these roles. In the West, as I have mentioned before , our political processes will soon be rendered obsolete, as the citizens of Earth take back the power to govern themselves.

RESPONDING to NEGATIVE REALITIES -EXPERIMENT

Hypothesis: You can superimpose positive realities over negative realities.

PERFORMING YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

Please think of a time from your past when you felt that you were living life to its fullest and you were amazed at yourself for your accomplishments. Now the primary objective here is to recreate the feelings of self worth and confidence you felt during this experience or time in your life. The second-phase in this experiment is to amplify these positive feelings. Imagine for yourself a dial or a switch that enables you to strengthen these positive feelings just by turning the dial or flipping the switch.

Now dial or flip the switch and experience the strengthening of positive feelings of accomplishment and self-worth. You will experience differing levels of emotion depending on your life experiences  and personally aspects. However, all of you will in all probability experience an increase in positive feelings. Try adjusting the dial and working with the features of your switch to further increase positive feeling and emotions.

Do this experiment for a few minutes per day with the objective that you will be able to gradually increase your control over your emotional states. Once you have gained some experience in controlling you emotional states, you may experiment in superimposing your positive reality directly over the negative reality you are experiencing. When you are successful, you will notice a dramatic shift to the positive within your Personal Reality Field.

Now these experiments are vital for you as way to learn emotional control. In the Fourth Dimension, emotional control will enable you to keep your focus in the mental aspects of consciousness. You will not be dragged back into the emotional reactivity of the Third Dimension.
FINDINGS – Document your findings.

OTHER LIVES IN THE VANGUARD(MAGICIAN SHAMAN WITCH HEALER)

HYPOTHESIS: Current interests may Illustrate other lives in the Vanguard.

If you are an avid Blog Reader of my material, new or old, you are in all likelihood simply reaffirming in this current existence, predictions of interests and behavior from other Simultaneous Lives. The members of The Entity are not, for the most part, stay-at-home bodies, who allow the world to go by them unchanged, unnoticed. No, my fellow travelers are eager to question the core values and beliefs of their cultures. Yet this questioning is not entirely intellectual, it is backed-up with advocacy and action in the physical domain. This action has behind it the spiritual impetus for transformation for the good of all. We are a very humanitarian group and you make your marks on your culture in very noticeable ways.

This image has an empty alt attribute; its file name is 567C9470-17DE-4825-B7DD-43CEEAD15D91_4_5005_c.jpeg

You will be protected. As we exercise our power to create loving realities, we will be protected by Beings of Light. We have the collective power of goodness on our side, you see, and so as we go about our activist duties in response to the inner promptings of Divine information, we may notice that the way before us is cleared of barriers to our destination. As in my earlier example of the “Crystal People,” we may have incarnated many times in many eras, but with a single emphasis or role: that of advocate for humanity. And so we may notice that we respond to threats upon others as threats upon ourselves. We take the threats upon our fellow Earthly inhabitants and upon the Earth inhabitants and upon the Earth in very personal ways. On this note, let us explore possible lives lived just as we may now be living this current life of ours, as an advocate for humanity and for Mother Earth.

Now you may have lived as Empowered Ones within “normal” occupations that no one would suspect. This may be true for you currently, Dear Blog Reader. Many of you use your nondescript careers – housewife, teacher, mason – to protect your true identities – magician, shaman, witch, healer. The true calling is protected. There is a tradition in these matters to work “Undercover,” and avoid the scrutiny that comes with self-disclosure. Naturally, it is always your choice to reveal or to not reveal your true motives and the real work that you are accomplishing. But as I have just stated: you will be protected. As a bringer of light and healing, you will be protected from harm.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL SANCTUARY
The previous experiments in this Blog in contacting Simultaneous Lives lived in other time-frames may well have given you glimpses into lives lived as Empowered Ones. There is a certain unifying aspect among all of our reincarnational existences, and it may well be that we have come into physical reality on these various occasions to help and to heal. With your Energy Personality as your guide, imagine other lives in other eras in which you may have served in the Vanguard of progressive human consciousness.

FINDINGS – Document your Findings in your preferred way.

THE NEGATIVE LEADERS

This next section concerns a critical issue with regards to the actions of our leaders in the U.S. and some of the other developed nations. The actions of these countries, particularly in the Middle East, where they seek to control the oil, are challenging the basic structure of acceptable behavior on our planet. Now there are those in other dimensions who take notice of such things and are quite concerned with the zeal with which these deluded humans continue to plunder our beloved Earth.

Certainly many of my Blog Readers may wonder what they can do personally about this critical matter, that of the brutality and warlike nature of our leaders, and I presented some exercises in my Blogs to answer these questions. However, some time has lapsed since that material was created and conditions have greatly worsened as of the time of this writing. I feel that I, as a protector of our planet, must look for more effective methods to counter the negative leaders.

Now I know some of you may scoff and say, ‘What can you do, as a entity, to effect change on this Earth?” The truth is that Beings of Light such as myself have exercised our power, in what we would call our “history,” in concerted efforts to effect quite dramatic changes in our Earth reality. These changes were brought about by our efforts in tandem with the mental and physical efforts of human beings. Each of us, as I have stated earlier, has an Energy Personality or Spirit Guide if you wish, that has watched over us from our birth into our current lifetime. Whether we acknowledge this as true or not does not in any way deny the truth of my statement.

Now consider what could be accomplished for the good of humankind, if many thousands, hundreds of thousands, millions of human beings were to act in unison toward a common goal, such as for instance, the creation of peace on our world, peace in the Middle East and all of the other areas of conflict on our world. How would we accomplish this, as peacemakers, you and I and our loving Guides?

As with all in creation, we do it with our thoughts. First we acknowledge that we have an Energy Personality. We affirm this, have the intention of communicating with it, and then experience the unfolding of that relationship in the manifestation. I covered this earlier in the Blogs, but I would like now to suggest an experiment on a grand scale. First Let me repeat one of the basic elements of my teaching: we are not separate from anything in the Universe, and we are connected to everything in it by virtue of our thoughts. If we believe this, or we can make the attempt to believe this, it follows that Peace on Earth is well within our grasp.

What if the soldier refused to fight? What if the soldier had a dream one evening that so affected him/her that he/she refused to fight? What if our negative media propagators had a change of heart and decided to state the truth instead of lies and propaganda? What if hundreds of thousands of people awakened one morning no longer support the negative leaders? I think you may be getting the point here. When we go into our meditations and we direct our energies, instead of sending out the positive images and emotions to just one or two, send out the energies to the Guides and to their physical counterparts throughout all of humanity. Our thoughts have power. Indeed our thoughts are the most powerful elements in our physical reality, for THEY CREATE OUR PHYSICAL REALITY. If we desire peace on our Earth, then use our powerful thoughts to create it.

Link up with other peace lovers on the subtle levels and imagine our peaceful world into being.

EFFECTS OF TERRORISM

In our world, terrorism is the subject of choice for modern humans. We are enthralled with the subject for we are daily inundated with terrorist data from the various negative media to the degree that many of us in the modern world eat, drink and sleep terror.

We “like” it that way, for we have become entranced by our negative leaders and the negative media into believing that these terrorist issues should occupy our every waking hour. Our leaders like it that way, for that is the way they want us to respond. The negative leaders are in business of control, and so in a way they use their proclamations to control us through fear. The fear produces body chemicals that create stress and anxiety as well as addiction to these fear-producing statements. We just can’t take our eyes off it. We just can’t ignore the headlines. And so the negative media like it that way, for they are profiting tremendously by spreading the negative messages of the negative leaders.

Now, I must remind of a lifesaving point here: we create our own reality. At risk of repeating myself, let us visit that concept again. On an individual and collective basis, humans create their individual Reality Fields and the mass-create consensus reality that we perceive in a linear fashion. Let us use an example to see how the negative leaders and their media “help” us form our individual and also our mass consciousness realities. It’s quite simple really… You are an average American who awakens to the sound of the radio news program that describes the latest atrocity perpetrated by the latest enemy of our country. Can you see how this sets the tone for the remainder of your day? Before becoming fully awake, in that “in between state” in which we are so impressionable, out mind is already picking up negative information that we will, no doubt, carry with us throughout the day. And as our mind finds in our mental and physical environments what feels is “corroboration” of this negative information – proof – it will note this proof and add it to the mix of negative data, beliefs, images and so on.

Again, in this way, the negative leaders and the negative media have won the contest for control of the minds of individual listeners and viewers and also have they gained control of the masses of listeners and viewers. Now, since telepathy among humans is imperative continually, we reinforce this negativity on the subtle levels by communicating, with other humans in the collective, on the negative leaders and their media. On these subtle levels ideas are accepted as fact, though there may have been NO CRITICAL THINKING Involved in accessing this data. Do you see how our leaders, our media and our unaware selves conspire to terrorize us? We are terrorizing ourselves. It is true that our leaders are at most fault for our predicament. But we as human individuals are also responsible for our dilemma. We have not taken individual responsibility for our own thoughts and actions. We have given our power to institutions, to leaders, to employers. No wonder then do we find ourselves afraid and powerless.

Obviously, the most direct and simple way to take our power back from the institutions of global negative media would be to not participate in them. As I have suggested at different stages in my Blogs, we can always TURN OFF THE RADIO, TURN OFF THE TV, TURN OFF THE VIOLENT MOVIES. Avoid the negative media when we are out in our physical environment. Vote with our pocketbook by not purchasing negative, violent, controlling media and other life-denying products of our mass-consumption society. We will soon begin to like it – our freedom – and our negative institutions and leaders will begin to not like it. The repression may grow then, because “the powers that be” will know that we are taking responsibility for our own thoughts and beliefs. However, persevere and our numbers will surely grow. The Forces of Light are in our favor. The probabilities for a mass transformation of consciousness into the positive arena are growing. Our contribution is necessary for the greater good of our species and our Mother Earth.

A SINGLE LOVING THOUGHT

Perhaps some of the Blog Readers, considering the constant perceived negativity surrounding us, wonder how one person could possibly make a difference in the global picture. You may be asking yourselves, “Why should I go through the effort of changing my beliefs and my Personal Reality for the better, if it will be only a “drop in the bucket” in the “greater scheme of things?” My answer to you would be that your efforts in changing your beliefs and behaviors and thus your Personality Reality Field, also have the added effects of broadcasting by example, the benefits of loving kindness and confidence to those around you in your physical reality.

The effects are also felt telepathically. As you change your personal world for the better, you are each moment broadcasting on the subtle levels your successes in overcoming negativity to the collective network of Souls on our planet through this web of subtle energies. I have noted elsewhere in these Blogs that we as a species are literally “One.” We are all co-creating with All That Is our individual lives, yet we are all sharing the same timeframe as One People.

This Telepathic Network is our communication system that we use to achieve consensus while sleeping, on what will be manifested as our world reality upon awakening. So you see, You can truly make a difference. Thoughts have power. Thoughts of good Intent and loving kindness have extreme transformative power. Our positive thoughts seek out other positive images and thoughts being transmitted in this collective mental conversation. These thoughts merge to create incipient Reality Constructs. When these potentialities reach a stage of imminent creation, it could be YOUR SINGLE LOVING THOUGHT that could tip the scales towards the positive manifestation.

This mental conversation does indeed continue while we are awake and going about our activities. In other words, we are still dreaming and in contact with the collective while awake, but it goes on “on the background.” It is just as important to create the thoughts of loving kindness and confidence while awake, because that is when we have the most conscious control over our mentality. It is this exercise of consciously changing our thoughts and behaviors that creates a spillover into our dream world, our sleeping times, affecting the world thought consensus in a positive way.

Now you may still be harboring the belief that “Evil,” particularly in our times, may be stronger than “Good.” Indeed, with the variety of wars, famines and other negative events going on around us, this would seem to be the case. However, this belief is still only a habitual idea that we hold. You may have been in the habit of thinking to oneself, “Evil triumphs over good: in politics, in business, in my personal dealings with people,” that you have blinded yourself to other options, other ways of perceiving our world.

Look beyond these perceptual blinders and you may see that the opposites is true: Good triumphs over evil: in politics, in business, in your personal dealings with people. The opposite is true my friends. Reflect on this for a moment and see if you agree.

Troubled friend

Be ruthlessly loving in this matter. Prove yourself an adequate match for this person in this endeavor by reflecting back love and faith and confidence when they test you out of fear and mistrust. The trick is to identify the incoming negative Consciousness Units and transform them with your energy into loving thoughts and emotions BEFORE they enter your energy field and cause disruptions.

These energies are very powerful. They are indeed like parasites that attach themselves to your Energy Body where they then can attach themselves to others, but only if the host is fearful, mistrusting and negative, cynical etc. Negativity is the feeding ground for these energies. Where there is only love and acceptance and compassion, these influences cannot take hold.

Integrity is an excellent concept and we can discuss it a bit here. In this situation, you are integrating your Soul aspects of loving kindness and acceptance, with you core personality or egoic aspects of self-defense, anger etc. So integrate, integrate, integrate. Love dissolves the egoic response motivated by territoriality and competition. Coming together – integration – is what is needed here on all levels. Common ground, conciliation, cooperation for a higher ideal, these are all relevant issues to be considered at this time.

Now, know that many of our contemporaries are also involved in these Soul issues. Our planet is going through a transformation that will be felt down through every atom in our perceptive field. All is in flux. Everyone’s issues are being presented to them for transformation and healing. Now you can ignore these “requests” from Soul, but you do so at your peril.

These lessons will help you gain the wisdom and skills necessary to make the transition into the Unity of Consciousness Dimension and stay there. The more deeply this divine information is taken into your being, the more likely you will retain it, remember it and
use it in your spiritual pursuits.

The Negative Entities are created by negative thoughts and emotions, but it is unproductive to ask which came first, the Negative Entities of the ideas and emotions that created them, for all exists at once. The hope lies in more people opting for Courage and Love rather than fear and anger.

Contacting The Inter-Galactic Brotherhood of Light

HYPOTHESIS: The IGBOL are the “closest” and most accessible of the light bodies.
Now , you can be informed of which being or group of beings you are allied with by virtue of your evolution as a Soul. This can be discovered by asking your Energy Personality, using your free will to ask the names and locations of other beings associated with You-the-Soul.

The IGBOL is the “closest” to you in terms of affinity of purpose. They are on a path of Loving Understanding as are you the Blog Reader. This is why we have suggested that you contact this group as a preliminary to further explorations. Let me say that you need not fear approaching this group in your experiments.

As I state often in my blogs, the great majority of us are in all probability, members of the Same Entity and so have a direct connections to these Energy Bodies we are describing. The Entity is vast, again as I have noted previously, and at this time we are having a “reunion” of sorts on these subtle levels. You may assume you are rekindling old relationships in these communications, for indeed you are. The fear and mistrust will fade as you receive memories of these associations, in the form of divine impulses. You will know it when you feel is. This is ongoing assistance the Beings of Light in service to mankind/womankind during this time of awakening.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Establish your relaxed state of consciousness. Now with the assurance and confidence that comes with mastering these various levels of consciousness through the experiments done in the preceding Blogs, have the intention and profound expectation that you will encounter these Loving Beings.

The contact come with the attendant feelings of compassion and love. There may be an “alien” component that may cause discomfort. You may go beyond surface appearances by utilizing your skills at turning Fear and Anger into Loving Understanding and confidence. The IGBOL are you, Dear Blog Reader, in your multidimensional future. Knowing this, you may experience this contact as a homecoming. When you sense that the meeting is over, gradually come back to your Third-Dimensional awareness.

EXPERIMENT – Becoming aware of Astral Travel during sleep.
HYPOTHESIS: You can use your intention to become aware of astral travel during sleep.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
The Ritual Sanctuary is important here in this investigation. Perform it just as you are falling asleep, with suggestions to yourself that you will become aware of your inner environment – your sleeping world – as you are about to engage in Astral Travel as we call it. It may be necessary to conduct this experiment for several days to get results.

The suggestion that you will become aware within the dream state is important. You may also suggest that you will awaken after a particular sojourn into the Astral Realms, so that you may document your experiences in your dream journal or other medium. It would then be advantageous to return to sleep with the suggestion that you will awaken briefly to document your further Astral Travels, and so on.

This will give you an ongoing record of your adventures during sleep. And again, the core experience you gain through experimentation in the dream state, the greater mastery gained in perceiving and documenting this state of awareness.

FINDINGS – Document your findings, perhaps with a journal or recorder.

YOU ARE THE VANGUARD-2

The notion that you are going too far with this exploration of consciousness, that we are going into “forbidden” territory where few have gone before us, may cause us to become fearful, wishing we had not begun the journey. This is a natural reaction, and I wholly expect many of you, especially those with religious conditioning, to at first react with fear and anxiety when you “see something in the dark.”

YOU ARE THE VANGUARD

GIVING UP POWER
You are not guilty. You are not to blame. Your, Dear Blog Reader, have done nothing wrong. Because you are in the habit of giving away your power to others, you leave yourself in a vulnerable position. You relinquish your power and then the usurper of your power – parent, employer, priest, politician – can use guilt and other unsavory emotional states to control you.

Yet you have done nothing wrong. You only think you have, second-to-second, because of this manipulation by those in perceived authority. They want you to feel guilty and powerless. It makes their job much easier when you are afraid, anxious, experiencing feelings of low self-worth etc. How much easier it is to take money from someone, for example, when they are feeling unworthy. Indeed, after you have ceded your power to people and institutions, no wonder you feel unworthy.

Yet again, you are not guilty of a thing. You are not to blame. Now, that is not to say that you are absolved of all responsibility in the matters of power between yourself and those in our world. That is not what I am suggesting at all. For that matter, the main reason I write this Blog is to help you get your power back. We cannot have a revolution in human consciousness with so many humans without the full human power that they were incarnated with when entering into life on our world.

Currently in our timeframe there is much talk of “taking back power” – personal empowerment. It is almost a cliché in our world. Yet truly taking back our power from persons and institutions is a heroic act. There is much perceived risk in doing so, for most Western humans fear reprisals when they go beyond the status quo. There may be feelings of guilt that come with “not doing what you are told.”

You also may have feelings of loneliness. Breaking away from the pack may leave you feeling as though you have made a mistake in surrendering the safety of the group. Yet also know that as more of you go on your Soul journeys, relinquishing the negatives in your lives, pursuing positive, loving experiences and creating a radically different world for yourselves, you will also meet up with others who are on a similar path. Those with positive loving thoughts will be drawn to others who have positive loving thoughts. As you meet with others on a similar path, you will form groups, naturally as humans do, and soon you will have remade your social institutions into something truly sacred and life-affirming for all.

Inter-galatic Brotherhood of Light-2

They are what we would call “of Alien Extraction.” Their heads are quite larger than ours. Eyes are much larger than ours also. They have no protruding nose formations, merely slits, as in our reptilian species. The bodies are small and thin. The limbs are long, and fingers thin. And hairless. The skin is gray in appearance. They have been called grays by some of our UFO researchers.

Their home is in a future dimension of Earth. Humankind, in the progressed future.

These are not accidental meetings. Their overtures to our people are part of a plan to introduce humankind to their civilization. They are welcoming us to the greater reality of which we are a part but do not recognize currently.

They are beings of love. They live on love, in a very literal sense. The powerful emotion of love fuels all of reality. They have received negative imprinting by some of the more dangerous of our Negative Entities. Obviously, the negative beings would prefer that their kind stay out the picture as the Nefarious Entities attempt to grasp control of our Earth in its entirety. They will not let that happen. That is why they are making themselves known to some of us. They mean no harm. They are providing help to us as their people resist the takeover of our Dark Forces.

Simply, consciousness creates, and as it does, both positive and what we would term “negative” creations result. Consciousness including the opposite of love. Yet because love is at the base of all realities, the tendency is to revert back to love in any given cycle. Our people in our current era are at the end of a cycle. It appears to many of us that we will be consumed by negativity, particularly in our U.S. However, know that Beings of Light, including our association and millions of other Light Bodies, are stemming the tide of evil. They are helping us. Yet we must do our part.

We can love our way out of this dilemma. By reinforcing love within our being and in our relationships with others, we create an irresistible counterforce to the negativity in our world. The more we and our people promote love in this way, the sooner we shall subvert the agenda of the Negative Entities. Their wish for us is to realize that they are with us in support of our loving evolution as a race.

They are not the enemy. They have been slandered by the Negative Entities. Look for our appearance on the world stage as we all – meaning humanity as well as the Light Bodies – unite to overturn the evil ones.

The Inter-Galactic Brotherhood of Light

A group of Energy Bodies that resides within dimensions beyond our physical reality. These beings have been in contact with humanity on Earth for many, many years. They were known to our indigenous cultures for example, and they were also known to visionaries throughout the centuries in our recorded histories. They have been know by different names.

Each culture that has known them, naturally, has named them through the perceptual lenses of their individual societies. This group is and has always been a very loving, gentile species of beings. Because of this loving attribute, many cultures have honored them as gods or what we might term Angels, Deities and so on.

This same group I am describing is available to us for achieving contact and ongoing communication. They exist Inter-Dimensionally and so may provide a link to us from the distant past, in our terms, to the present and beyond. This may be said of all the Energy Bodies we may come to contact.

However, the group I am describing, because they represent the evolution of peace and loving understanding within non-physical reality, may be particularly valuable advisers to us in our current reality, seeing as how we as a race are on the edge of the Fourth-Dimensional Shift, with our capacity for loving understanding to be the deciding factor. This group of loving beings is called the Intergalactic Brotherhood of Light.

RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN GUIDES

Now, our Spirit Guides are a more personal matter. It would be as though an energy personality essence were “created” to the specifics of our individual personality being the Entity from which the specific characteristics are drawn. Now beyond the Energy Personality, of course, exist continuing manifestations of energy gestalts, more complex in form and substance, until one reaches All That Is, the fundamental energy source from which all realities in all dimensions are created.

Let me go a bit further there… using our wonderful little metaphor of the radio dial. Suppose that you think of All That Is as the totality of all radio waves. Then on your dial you would have listed those “channeled sources” as you have so described , in separate parts of the dial, so that each time you turn that dial, you connect to a different part of the energy “wavelengths” of All That Is.

Now let us say at the far left of the dial is the name David, and when you metaphorically turn the dial to that spot, you receive through your antennae, which we might describe as the Chakra receptors of the human body, the David transmission. And if you turn the dial to the right to the spot marked X you would “pick up” the transmission of that specific Energy Body and so on.

I think that our metaphor is a good one. Blog Readers can use this visualization to tune-in to their own guides and it becomes a ritual they can use to make these connections in their own lives. Ritualizing these activities – practicing making these connections – is what is going to help us in our Spiritual Evolution. It is the first step.

Extra-Terrestrials

These beings are better described as Inter-Dimensional Beings. And being Inter-Dimensional, they are far from being in outer space and beyond. They are indeed, as close to us, Dear Blog Reader, as our most intimate physical and mental environments.

They are for these reasons, quite easy to tune-in to, and many of us do just that. Let me say once again that everything in our reality has consciousness. Knowing that, how would a microbe, that has its own consciousness, intelligence and power, appear to a human, if the human tuned-in to one accidently? One might indeed believe they had contacted a being from out space.

Sleep and Astral Travel

Our sleep times are highly important for our health physically, psychologically and spiritually, and so we will now comment on this state of consciousness. Now the adventures of you and your Soul Family are ongoing. Within your waking reality you experience your waking Soul Family manifestation. However when dreaming you may be experiencing other manifestations of your Soul Family, within your current incarnation and possibly within past and future timeframes.

If you watch your dreams closely, you may notice the appearance of “familiar yet unknown faces” on this inner stage of awareness. These hard-to-place characters may indeed be members of your Soul Family as they engaged with us in activities on the subtle levels. Let me leave it at that and encourage us to do your own research in this matter.

On a biological level, as you may know, the body rests and repairs itself during sleep. Without going into too much detail, this restoration begins with the onset of sleep and continues until waking. During sleep, the consciousness, for the most part, travels from the physical body to visit locations far and wide in our Third-Dimension as well as other dimensions. Your Soul, therefore, is engaged in many different activities while your physical vehicle rests and recuperates.

These Sojourns from the physical body have been named Astral Travel by some of us, and this is an adequate description. We do indeed visit the Astral Levels during sleep, but there is much more to it than simply “visiting” these non-physical locales. You-The-Soul are refreshed, revitalized and energized via these inter-dimensional travels.

These are the roads we have traveled for countless years while in incarnation and in the time in between lives. We know these pathways in the grid work of the higher dimensions, as well as we know the route to take to the market in the physical world of the Third-Dimension.

Many of us are engaged in projects and collaborations on these subtle levels. Without the physical body, times takes on a fluid aspect. Travel is instantaneous. We progress by simply intending to go to a particular location. For example: we may be providing comfort to a human or group of humans who are in Tragic Circumstances. We may be providing support to these people in their dream state, even as we may be supported by other in ours.

As I describe in other parts of my Blog, during sleep the consciousness also participates in the creation of what will be local, regional and worldwide waking environments. We create the framework for our reality during sleep. When we awaken, you and our fellow humans “fill in the details” by choosing from the limitless field of probable realities open to us, those that will become our Personal Reality Fields

The Soul Family

We do have different beings assisting  with our Soul. Some have been Guides and friends in other incarnations on Earth. Some of these Energy Bodies have been watching over us and others in our Soul Family since the beginning of time as we understand it.

Broadly speaking, each of us has a constellation of these Energy Bodies, and we are each potentially able to achieve contact with some or all of them, depending on our level of Soul Evolution or spiritual growth. These entities are awaiting our call.

Mankind/Womankind are at the stage of development that it is necessary to make these connections with the Higher Self. This must take place on a grand scale before the Fourth-Dimensional shift can occur.

Now, let me go further with this explanation by discussing the concept of Soul Family. Each of us lives within what we might call our “core” family. This would be the family or families that raised us. These are the people who we call our family members.

Now among this group of humans that we may or may not be related to genetically, are members of our Soul Family these would be the Souls that have incarnated with us into our current timeframe to learn their lessons with us. These members of our Soul Family may well have participated in NUMEROUS permutations of family groupings with us throughout the millennia.

Some of these family groupings may be or have been in other solar systems, on other planets and so on. For the most part, however, our Soul Family has developed in the Earthly realms. Again, members of Soul Families reincarnate together in different roles, of different sexes, of different temperaments and so on, to experience different Lessons for the Entity – the overall collective of Souls in which Soul Family resides – and of course, for the greater experiencing of All That Is.

I must mention, that our Soul Family may include others that we may not acknowledge as “family” members. These participants might include, for example: the cashier at the local market that you may be very attracted to or perhaps find abhorrent, as well as others within your community that you hold strong emotions for.

However, the Soul Family may be thought of as that small group of active participants in our reincarnational activities in our current timeframe. This primary group is the one in which we learn our lessons while other members of the group also learn their Lessons.

Now if we are clever and if we learn to use our Inner Senses, we may find the connections between our current Soul Family, and the Lessons learned and to be learned, as well as perhaps the most “Immediate” or “Recent” past lives. For those of us interested in such things, I suggest we conduct your experiments with this information in mind. The connections will then “come to mind” as we put together your findings

Transforming Fear and Anger

Hypothesis: You can use your intention to transform Fear and Anger into Courage and Loving Understanding.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY.
Think of a fear or anger-creating an idea or image that you have been entertaining lately. Surely most of you can come up with an example. Now that you have it in your mental environment, enliven it with your thoughts and make it seem real. Do this for a few seconds… Now mentally say, “Stop!” and have the intention that you will now turn down the energy on the thought or image, by using your dial or other metaphorical tools, and remind yourself that you are supported on a wave of ecstasy that is indeed your Soul Self.

You may consult your Energy Personality or other Guides for help in this matter. When the positive emotions of love and compassion are felt, experience them and relish them for a few seconds. Then end the experiment with your intention to go about your activities, this time experiencing the residual feelings of Ecstasy that you will no doubt be enjoying for some time after the experiment.

FINDINGS – Make your notes or remember this use of the Inner Senses for the next potentially Fear or Anger-producing experience. Document your findings.

Consecutive Positive Assessments-2

EXPERIMENTConsecutive Positive Assessments

HYPOTHESIS: Positive assessing all that you experience creates the positive future.


In addition to enacting your Ritual of Sanctuary before you go out into your world, I suggest you practice positively assessing everything that comes your way in your existence. Practice until it becomes a matter of fact – a positive habit that you practice ongoing throughout each and every day. Perhaps an experiment is in order here. Again, this build upon exercises in previous Blogs.

Let us say that you are about to begin your day. You have awakened from sleep, you have opened your eyes and you are perhaps walking to the bathroom.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
This may be habitual for you now. It should only take a few seconds to perform your ritual. Then here is where you immediately intervene between the Moment Points of you waking life. In between the moments of remembering and forgetting… you intervene. “It’s easy to find the good in each sequential perception.” This is your idea for the day.

Remembering to conduct your Ritual of Sanctuary; remembering that you create your reality out of your perceived beliefs, ideas and images about your world; remembering to positively assess each sequential perception. Then do you see how the positive perceptions create the positive future, moment-to-moment? You are rolling out your positive moments before you to create the positive path of your future.

(Thought afterwards – this experiment is a especially useful for when you can’t avoid the negative media. The blog reader hopefully will choose not to watch negative TV, violent movies etc.)

FINDINGS – Remember to write down your findings from worthwhile experiment.

Consecutive Positive Assessments

In our world currently, we as a race are experiencing the disintegration of the fundamental structures that hold our societies together. It is easy for us to see this phenomenon in our Western World, for our media proclaim the disasters and upheavals within our institutions on a daily basis.

I refer to these media as the “negative media,” for obvious reasons. In a very real sense, our media shape and negatively spin the events of our world to depict the basest interpretation, appealing to the lowest aspects of humankind. Because there are very few alternative voices in our media network, the media as a whole tend to reinforce and perpetuate negative experiences in the minds of humanity.

Those of us who wish to go into the Unity of Consciousness Dimension “with our eyes wide open,” would do well to divorce oneself from all forms of negative media.

I have explained in previous blogs how the violent images and stories serve to trigger biochemical responses in our bodies, so that we are conditioned to continue watching, reading or listening. It becomes an addiction in time, so that we become “hooked” on negativity. We become hooked on the adrenaline that is released with our bodies.

Remembering what I have described concerning the activities of the Negative Entities as they seek out fear and anxiety, perhaps the blog reader can see how a daily diet of this – such as violent movies, newscasts and the like – could increasingly attract the Negative Forces, until there is not room with our mental environment for love, compassion or the human virtues.

“But how,” you might say, “can I protect myself from these media if they surround me in the physical environment? They are everywhere and I must confront them every second of my life just to go out and do my job, go to school, go to church etc. etc. etc.” I appreciate your dilemma and I have an answer for you.

CONVERTING NEGATIVE THOUGHTS

By expressing negative thoughts about war or anything, we are colluding with the Negative Forces. Make the effort to deal with these issues in Love. Love is the strongest of all energies in the Universe. Focus on the Love that we can feel for everyone, including the “war people.” The only way to convince the haters is to model Unconditional Love in all our actions.

Be a peacemaker by converting your negativity into Love and by turning hatred into its opposite. This skill is what will convert people to peaceful side, and this skill is what will allow us to stay in the Fourth Dimension. So practice, practice, practice.

Our Reality Feedback

You see, our Personal Reality Field is literally feedback of our ongoing mental activities. We can always look at our created reality to see how we are doing. This of course assumes that you are aware of your Lessons and are not denying the spiritual, or need I say, “metaphysical” underpinnings of your so-called “physical ” life.

If you feel you haven’t enough information as to what your Lessons are, the next time you are in communication with our Energy Personality, simply ask for guidance as to what your Lessons might be in this incarnation and wait for the reply. You will get a direct reply telepathically if it is appropriate information for you to have at the time, or you may be presented with a “graphic example” by way of a reincarnational drama or comedy in your physical world.

These events present your Lessons in stark relief against the background of your mundane, robotic existence. You will recognize these as “teaching moments” or ” moments of awakening” by their surprising appropriateness and synchronous attributes. Again, as I have stated previously, you will know it when you see it for YOU HAVE CREATED IT, for purposes of Your own learning and Soul Evolution.

For example: You may have noticed a teaching moment in your own life that was not tragic in the least but amusing and profound. Perhaps you have had the experience of being the center of the cosmic joke, when everything around you was turned against you in humorous and symbolic ways. Certainly all of us have had these experiences, yet they are too easy to dismiss as coincidence.

These are your reincarnational comedies – teachings moments of the absurd and ironic. Now within these teaching moments, you also have the opportunity for creating loving understanding out of negative emotions – embarrassment and shame, anger and fear – just as you have the opportunity for transformation within the reincarnational dramas of our life.

Simply note that these episodes of dramatic and comedic teaching moments represent opportunities for IMMEDIATE TRANSFORMATION, IMMEDIATE SOUL GROWTH. I advise you Blog Reader to take advantage of these experiences, therefore, when they arise.

IF WE WANT PEACE

With an appreciation for Loving Understanding and the power of this state of consciousness to transform fear and anger, comes the possibility for peace. Dear Blog Reader, if we want peace, we can have peace. Make it with our thoughts. If we want the wars to cease, we can create that with our thoughts.

It all begins with our Loving Intention in the moment. Our thoughts of peace and Loving Understanding coalesce on the subtle levels, to create their counterparts in physical reality. What is the counterpart to peace, love and understanding? A physical world where WAR IS NOT TOLERATED BY THE PEOPLE.

War cannot be sustained on a diet of peace and Loving Understanding. War perishes in such circumstances. And as war and violence fade into memory, new, positive life-affirming Reality Constructs are thrust into our world with the energy of the loving thoughts, the peaceful thoughts, the thoughts of understanding and acceptance for our fellow human beings

Belief Change

When we look at our Personal Reality and see a change, one that reflects a change in our beliefs, and perhaps it feels uncomfortable to acknowledge it because it feels so foreign to us, let that serve as validation that you are on the right path. For example: where once there was fear of a particular group or race and there is now acceptance and growing affection, let that serve as validation that our Soul is evolving in beneficial ways.

No, we cannot err on the side of too much love. We cannot have too much affection for our fellow humans. My advice is to practice loving one another WITH ALL OF OUR MIGHT. The emotional content, highly-charged, is what helps the new reality break through the old, and establish itself as the new manifestation.

The New World.” I continually encourage to be ruthlessly loving and confident, and I suggest that also to the Blog Reader of these words. Continually, moment-to-moment, create our world through a perception of love and confidence. We can be a model for those who need this guidance, in how to think, feel and act.

For those of us who can accept such responsibilities our growing skills with the use of the Non-Physical Senses and our growing knowledge of how to use the powers of love and confidence, can thrust one to the forefront of the movement of humans beings who are seeking their own enlightenment and the Soul progression also of the species.

Collective Manifestation

So in a word, Love is the answer. If we were to live our life as a poet, a romantic poet let us say, one that was immersed in love, and indeed unable to sense or formulate a single thought that was not love, imagine how LOVING our existence would be.

But instead many of us focus on murders, such as we have in our negative media; personal vendettas, such as we are engaged-in at the workplace; and general cynical gossiping, such as makes up the Movement-to-Moment Points of our ongoing lives.

This is not to paint all of us with the same brush, but we must take responsibility for whatever part we play in the creation of negative Reality Constructs in our world. If we contribute If we contribute a negative gesture, we are partly responsible for the collective negative manifestation. It makes senses, does it not, given what I have described about the nature of our reality.

If we become angry at a person of a different color while driving our cars and shout at them and gesture at them in an absence way, we are responsible for our part in the collective negative manifestation of racial prejudice in our current timeframe. Does this not make sense? If we scream in anger at our child, we are responsible for the collective manifestation of child abuse in our time frame. It is quite logical in its consistency.

We may believe that if we commit these violations in private, that they do not count, because no one is observing our behavior. But telepathy, as I said before, is operative at all levels. We ALL know what is “on your minds.” We feel that we have to pretend that we DON”T know, however, to maintain our private lives.

Yet all of this will be out in the open soon, and I would urge us to clean up our thoughts and behaviors so that we will not be caught in the habitual negative thinking and behavior that currently hold us back.

LOVING UNDERSTANDING

Let us now discuss Loving Understanding some of the great virtues of humankind. Now there is love and there is love. It would seem that each of us might have our own definition: “love of another is acceptance of another regardless of how the other appears, speaks of behaves.” This aspect of love comes from understanding what the human purpose is on our great Earth.

Generally, the purpose is to co-create with All That Is a life of learning. We are on the planet to learn from our experiences in our particular niche in our personal environment. When we can appreciate this overriding fact of life, we can come to a loving understanding of ANYONE we meet upon our Earth.

We are All on the same voyage: that of the path to Soul Realization. Each person we meet in our experiences is a teacher for us, therefore, and from these interactions we learn our lessons and our knowledge grows. Now, All That Is also grows in knowledge and experience with us, as we co-create and then experience our lessons.

All That Is is the energy source for all of creation. Indeed, we’re on our Earth to experience for All That Is, our life lessons that include EVERY MOMENT in our existence. Each second of our waking and dreaming hours provides learning opportunities for You-the-Soul.

This is true for not only our current life in this timeframe, but for all our many lives in this and other timeframe, past, present and future. This is not to minimize the importance of any given life. It is simply a fact of life, Dear Blog Reader. And when we understand this in its most profound sense, we can begin to have this sense of Loving Understanding I am describing, for myself as well as for others.

NEGATIVE THINKING

An excellent question in these matters be, “if negative thoughts and images lead to the creation of negative events, and these events are painful, why do people continue in the creation of negative thoughts?” I have covered this before and I now will elaborate on this paradox. Why would a human continue to think and imagine the negative and create negative Reality Constructs and thus feel the negative emotions that come with the negative manifestation?

In a way, the reason for this unusual behavior is that many of the negative reality creators are so accustomed to creating from their negative, repetitive thoughts and beliefs that they essentially know of no other way to think and feel. The creation of their negative personal realities has become “a force of nature,” to coin one of our phrases. The force is quite powerful and has become personalized over time so that the human is entranced with these thoughts and behaviors, thinking these is absolutely no other possible way to think and behave.

Sometimes under these circumstances of entranced negativity, the only way out is through a reincarnational drama or lesson. The Higher Self of the individual creates a life-or-death struggle to divert the attention always from the increasingly negative and self-defeating manifestations.

The human, then, is often quite relieved to enter into a different creative opportunity, even though it might entail a serious illness, accident, mental crisis and so on. The diversion has the effect of waking up the individual from the trance of negativity. They then see the world with a new-found clarity. They have a sudden appreciation and sense of gratitude for life where before they were living a robotic existence.

These creative opportunities may result in the death of the physical form. Still, the Soul experiences that result as a success, for the human has encountered and met the challenge in their own way. This is the Lesson they were to learn, and whatever was learned is now part of the knowledge of the individual Soul, The Entity and All That IS.

Of course, there is the probability we may avoid the life-or-death drama by approaching our lessons “head on,” and not avoiding them – learning what we have come to Earth to learn. The free will choice is always ours.

AMNESIA AND LESSONS

Another example: let us say that there is a single Soul Self that is experiencing this multitude of Reincarnational Existences for the purpose of dramatization of particular Lessons in physical reality. Now the lessons here obviously also have similarities.

Consider a human, perhaps a neighbor, family member, or friend of ours. suppose that this person, let us call them a Soul Family member, is experiencing a Lesson in forgiveness, that is, as is so often the case in these matters, not at all obvious or apparent to this subject, but quite painfully obvious to those around this person – the members of this person’s Soul Family. The Lesson is obvious to everyone but the subject here.

Yet on a deeper level of perception, through the eyes of the Soul Self, the subject here is also quite aware of a Lesson. Yet do we agree that it would be not much of a Lesson if the subject were to be painfully aware of the Lesson? What would be the point? And so the Amnesia is brought in to the mental environment of our subject through the creative powers of consciousness.

This is the way that all of us have set up our lives: to live without the deeper knowledge of our other existences. The Amnesia again. We have a perfect view of the status quo reality, but a very dim view of our true reality, the inner reality that creates the outer world. This narrowing of perception keeps us distracted by the minutiae of our moment-to-moment existence. It keeps us within the drama so that we are not compelled to look beyond what is directly in front of us.

FREE WILL TO CHOOSE

For the sake of argument, though the situation is exceedingly complex, let us suppose the our subject could go either way here. They may choose to ignore the advice of trusted friends and family and continue on the path of excess, or they may indeed heed the advice of Soul Family Members and pay attention to the signs within their mental environment that seek to direct them onto a different and more productive path.

Our subject has free will to choose one course of development over the other. All members of the Soul Family also have free will to choose their level of participation in the learning experience. At any second in linear time, then, each member of the ensemble CHOOSES, on either a conscious or unconscious level, to participate or not participate in the drama and to what degree.

Again, the Soul Self of each participant ALWAYS comprehends the subjective value in each choice. The Soul Self informs each participant in this example, through impulses received within the mental environment, on the unlimited probabilities for Reality Creation within any particular moment.

LESSONS OF VALUE FULFILLMENT

Now there is great leeway here in this educational experience in the our Soul Self may accept any one of countless opportunities over the course of a lifetime to engage with others in the conscious learning of Lessons. Each of us has an agenda in the achievement of –Value Fulfillment – within the various domains of living.

For some of us, for example, the Lesson of personal responsibility may be paramount currently, for a variety of reasons. As in the case of our subject from the well-to-do family, this Lesson is currently the most pressing in their “curriculum” of Earthly existence.

Their life is quickening as many influences come to bear upon them. They are highly motivated to consider alternate ways of thinking and behaving. The normal methods are failing. Those humans our subject knows and respects – Soul Family members – are suggesting that this person change their ways.

EVERYONE LEARNS SOMETHING

The other members of the Soul Family are learning their Lessons also: some consciously, some by default. Each participant in this drama is learning something according to the requirements of their Soul Self. As I said, each of us enters into life in the Third Dimension with an agenda, with a general plan for development on all levels – body, mind and Soul. As we live our life, our Higher Self definitely keeps tabs on our activities with regards to the learning of Lessons.

Incidentally, some or even all members of a particular Soul Family Group may be expressions of a singular Soul Self. This happens quite frequently within our system. As such, these types of groupings often express a particular intensity of character and emotion around certain values: these values being the Lessons learned in the collective.

We might say that this tendency of some Souls to experience multiple lives within a singular genetic family, shall we say, is a repertory expressions and shows itself throughout time. In these cases, we would find this repertory expressions in the home, in the workplace, in the church, and so on. A similarity of Lessons being learned by all members of the collective would be noted.

THE DAWNING OF DIVINE INFORMATION

Again, all members of the Soul Family act in this benevolent conspiracy to assist the subject in learning their Lesson. Yet now there is the dawning of divine information within the mental environment of our subject, to the degree they may be considering changes in their behaviors and mentality.

Humility may be emerging within the emotional life of the subject. The value of working for one’s own room and board may become an important concept in their psyche.

This would be an example of learning the Lessons consciously rather than unconsciously by default. The subject may be now on the track of spiritual discovery. They may be spiritualized with this information from their Higher Self. They are waking up.

SOUL FAMILY DEFINED

Now because we create our own reality. We also create all of our human relationships in cooperation with everyone and everything involved. We do this on a basic level in the dreamstate and in other altered states of consciousness. We create a strategy for development during these times, then we flesh-out our designs on awakening.

Additionally, we agree with the premise so popular within New Age circles, that everyone we meet enters our life for a reason. Does this then mean that everyone we meet is part of our Soul Family? Let us more clearly define our terms…

Soul Family members are those humans who enter our life to teach us something or for us to teach them something. We feel this connection, you see.

DEJA VU

A simple example to illustrate: we are introduced to someone at an event or on the job and we shake hands with them. As we shake hands, let us say we look into their eyes, perhaps in an attempt to learn more about them or simply because it it required thing to do in our culture. As we maintain eye contact with this human, we have a deja vu type of experience in which we receive impressions on the mind.

In this split second of perception, images, sounds, feelings arise. We are busy shaking hands and do not have time to pursue these sensations. Yet we do note a connection of some sort with this human. We note to ourself the feeling-tone generated within this meeting. Most humans have had these experiences I am sure, not merely the seekers of wisdom we address in our blogs.

IT BEGINS WITH US

The Soul Family begins with us: an individual human learning our Lessons as best we can, without intellectualization and denial. And let us assume that you are such a human. We are on the path of self-awareness. You are reading this blog to discover where that might lead you in relationship with others. Let us move to the next Blog in this discussion.

TAKING OWNERSHIP

Taking ownership of the difficulty is an important first step in creating this relationship of conscious co-creation. For example: in terms of health and the cessation of symptoms, we have suggested that the practitioner first own the malady. Take responsibility for our creation. Learn the Lesson. Then begins the task of doing things differently to create an improved reality. This is made easier through the realization of culpability.

Our strategies for creating the negative reality are apprehended and understood with all of the shame and other negative emotions that entails. The denial lifts to reveal our TRUE self. The intellectualization FAILS at long last, forcing us to encounter YOU, Dear Blog Reader. When it occurs, grasp it closely to our self and do not forget what you are learning in those moments. Use this knowledge to move forward in our Soul’s evolution.

CONSCIOUS CO-CREATOR

There is a great practical advantage in selecting the conscious co-creator perspective. When we take responsibility for the creation of our own reality, and we begin to learn our Lessons with Courage and Loving Understanding, our awakening does indeed quicken, so that we are given more and more information.

This may take the form of knowledge regarding other lives we are living on our Earth and perhaps in other systems of reality, probable systems for example, as we have just discussed. It could take the form of valuable information regarding a profound question we might have, or simply an insight into a mundane matter that concerns us in the moment.

Conscious co-creation entails the intentional learning of Lessons without denial or intellectualization. To illustrate: consider what occurs when the average human in the throes of learning their difficult Lessons tries to “figure things out.” Typically, the human will look for “reasons” that support their own beliefs, their own behaviors, their Personal Reality Creation.

Though intellectualization and denial, any evidence of responsibility in the creation of Negative Realities is overlooked, while information supportive to the ego/intellect is noted and confirmed.

These rationales are commonly called “excuses” by many of us. Indeed, they do deserve this negative connotation, if in so intellectualizing and denying we are shirking our responsibilities in the matter. Figuring things out becomes figuring a WAY out of our predicament: a way that does not entail personal ownership of the difficulty.

SPIRITUALITY DEFINED

Here it is all about Spirit, Dear Blog Reader, spirituality. Our greater self, The Higher Consciousness. The god within, whatever terminology we wish to use, this energy source is composed of Spirit. Perhaps we should define our terms.

SPIRITUALITY, AS IT IS UNDERSTOOD IS SIMPLY THE CONSCIOUS LEARNING OF LESSONS.

Now we are all learning our lessons However, we may be experiencing these Lessons by “default,” in that they appear to be put upon by outside forces. It may appear that we have no choice in the matter. Great tragedies may befall us for no reason, at least in our perception of these occurrences.


Contrast this perspective – we refer to this as the Victim or Martyr Perspective – with the perspective of the Awakening One. The human upon a spiritual path adopts a perspective of co-creator. The Lessons of life are not intellectualized, not are they denied; they are acknowledged as valuable and necessary to the growth of the Soul.

THE DARK SIDE

The original Soul Mate conceptualization from our ancient spiritual traditions included honoring the negative aspects also: the shadow or Dark Side.

Now: every human has the repressed, hidden personality aspects. And so, in the practice of these ancient traditions, Lessons were learned regarding the negative aspects of consciousness as a way to mutually integrate the “forgotten” material. The Dark Side of the personality was honored just as the divine aspects were honored within the spiritual practice.

The modern metaphysical concept of the Soul Mate often lacks this component. Further, our religions tend to denigrate these Dark Soul Issues as the work of the Devil, or as the result of a “weak will” or Spirit. This practice quite naturally leads to further repression of the cast-off images, ideas, and emotions.

In fact, what many of us think of as the “born again” experience is simply the spontaneous release of this material into the conscious mind. The result of this influx of energized constructs is often a full-blown visionary experience: the spiritual rebirth, the transformation of the “dark” material into Light.

We are modeling our Soul Mate theory on the practices of the ancient paths. Therefore we shall include the creation of the Light from the Dark in relationship as a necessary process to observe and nurture. In the interests of integrity and power we shall work from both sides: the polar opposites of the creative principles.

THE SHIFT

The Shift entails a remembering of the Ancient Wisdom that has informed the religious and spiritual practices of humankind over the generations. We are awakening individually and collectively to our innate powers of manifestation. As we awaken we will become aware of our reincarnational existences, for these lives are the essential creative works of our Soul.

May I be blunt? We have come into physical form in this particular era in our Earth’s history, within our particular body, within a particular collective of humans, on a specific point of the globe, to participate in a focused enactment of behavior, emotion, mentality, and so on, for the greater experiencing of our Soul Self.

FATE

There is no “fate” involved here, however. All realities are created at once, and expand, in a sense, “forever” within the eternal moment. Can we grasp this crucial point? We have free will within each moment of our life to select from infinite probabilities, those we wish to manifest.

Yet I do realize that these descriptions may appear as though there is no free will at all. This is how it looks from the outside looking into our reality. I sense, for example, not only me David as I write on this computer on the patio in my backyard, but the Soul Self of David as it presents itself within numerous other human life-forms on our Earth in other eras. All of these manifestations I can see if I wish.

What looks like destiny to us from within our system – the “fateful” meeting of our Soul Mate, for example – appears as infinite choice to my eyes as I observe all of us making our spontaneous free will choices within this moment in time. In other words, the end result of any reincarnational activity is determined by the Free Will choices of the participants.

In addition, we may remember that even the probable realities NOT chosen, continue on their trajectories of manifestation and development. Thus, we have these numerous probable worlds, parallel realities given birth by our varying choices moment-to-moment.

GREAT PURPOSE

We are on our Earth for a purpose at this time: a “greater” purpose, if we accept spiritual concepts such as this. Forever as we are engaged in our normal activities – we awaken, we eat, we have experiences, and we sleep – we may find oneself looking for something more. We may be at a stage in our development when we are capable of looking beyond the surface reality to find the true meaning of our existence.

This is our greater purpose. We are not satisfied with the status quo explanations. Perhaps a Death in the family or a “failed” relationship drives us to enter on this quest. Whatever the reasons, we may now be encountering our Lessons directly and asking for the meanings of the events in our life.

EVERYBODY KNOWS

Please understand that there is no blame or shame involved in these types of reincarnational dramas. The actors in this drama – parent, child, and other family members, as well as other community members who are involved in Soul Family interactions – are essentially blameless.

On a Third-Dimensional level all concerned may feel sense of shame, disappointment at the features of child-rearing. The child may feel these negative states also. Yet on a Soul level everyone involved realizes their critical role in the dramatization of these Soul Issues.

Then let us say that, on the subtle levels, in the dreamstate where all plans for future Reality Creation are conceived, the members of the Soul Family of this subject – including the subject – agree to intensify the Lesson for the sake of the subject and everyone else involved. For as the subject learns their Lesson, all others involved learn something also.

Perhaps poverty and Lack are interjected into life of the subject in a very abrupt manner, so that our subject is left reeling and disoriented from the swiftness of the change. Where one day all of this person’s needs were met, let us say that now, none of their needs are met. The family fortune has collapsed for some reason. Our subject is FORCED to go out into the marketplace and earn their bread.

LEARNING LESSONS BY DEFAULT

Now this subject is certainly learning Lessons by default. They are not taking ownership of the life. They shirk responsibility for any of their actions. The members of the birth family, let us say, are co-conspirators in this avoidance of responsibility, in that, they shield their offspring from the harsh realities of existence.

They pay-the-way for this human to live the life of “the pampered one,” perhaps out of a sense of parental obligation, you see. They are attempting to protect their child from the pain of Lack and other negative emotional states.

However, you see I am sure where this protection becomes imprisoning for our subject. By allowing the child to grow into adulthood without any constraints, without the teaching of the virtues if humankind, the parents have “created a monster,” in a sense.

SPOILED ROTTEN

Another example of Lessons in the Soul Family: consider the particular type of human who has grown to adulthood within a family that provides every possible opportunity and physical Reality Construct for this person. The person has not had to “work” for their sustenance in any way. They are for all intents and purposes “spoiled rotten,” to use our vernacular.

Let us say that this adult has a smug attitude toward others that they feel are of a “lower” class. They spend the majority if their time enjoying their toys – the Reality Constructs of privilege, shall we say, given to them by their family – expensive cars, lavish homes, and other products.

Consequently, may we suggest that this subject of our discussion is lacking in certain desirable values we are promoting in our new Blogs? This human has, through a coincidence of privileged upbringing and perhaps a personality that avoids anything more than a cursory examination of the value of the Personal Reality in which they find themselves, created a life that does not include the human virtues we have discussed at length here.

This subject of ours is leading an “unexamined life,” to use one of our cliches again. Personal responsibility for mistakes or negative experience within this person’s existence is not taken under circumstances. Perhaps they deny quite earnestly any culpability in the matter.

PAST LIFE BAGGAGE

Our individual awakening is an awakening to our other lives. We have suggested before that we are not always a sweet and loving people in our many lives. In some of those lives we are, quite naturally, the opposite of Sweet and Loving.

Thus, when we are mastering this awakening exercise, we become aware of our own “baggage:” the leftover negative ideas, images, and emotions that we carry with us Lifetime-After-Lifetime. It is a distinctive residue of negativity, made up of the essence of every shameful, hurtful, hostile, envious thought or behavior of our Simultaneous Lives.

Now in this example, we are witnessing a religious zealot attempting to convince us of the value of their system. Yet something is not right here. Something is very distasteful indeed. Let us say for the benefit of this discussion, that we are being triggered by this human to re-experience our own negativity as we have expressed it in other lives.

That is why it is so personal, you see. That is why we may overreact with this human, and perhaps respond in an angry fashion. This time it IS personal, for they are our reincarnational mirror, reflecting back to us our shameful angry past. Perhaps we have even lived a life as a religious zealot, so that we are witnessing the negative lifetime in all its glory, in all of its educational power.

GROWING OUR BELIEF SYSTEM

In learning our Lessons we enlarge our belief system. We effectively “grow” our beliefs to encompass the beliefs of everyone we meet. This is CPA in action, as we find the good, in quite literally now, EVERYTHING.

Of course, in expanding our beliefs we will often find it necessary to discard beliefs that no longer serve us as an awakening human. Self-limiting beliefs, such as a belief in the superiority of a particular race, type of personality or human, may have to be discarded. This even though we may be feeling that we do not wish to surrender our belief, even though it may have been proven to be obsolete and even counter-productive.

However, why hold fast to our belief? Please realize that others have the opposite beliefs that are also quite valid. All of our realities are valid.

SOUL FAMILY MEMBERS

We may distinguish between two separate groups of Soul family members. For purposes of study, we shall refer to the group of humans we are interacting with in our current timeframe as our Current Soul Family Gestalt. The Soul Family members we associate with over linear time, in different bodies, within different human collectives, in our perceived past and future, we shall call the Interdimensional Soul Family.

Remember: the future and past can be considered as simply different easily-accessible dimensions for the student. We currently exist within the Third Dimension, yet we may access the future and past dimensions through practices learned in my new Blogs.

THE MOMENT POINT IS A TRANCE STATE

With the following experiment we are assuming that you are familiar with my new Blog material. If you are familiar, you are no doubt already proficient in attaining at-will the Trance state. As such, you may be quite expert at taking this state of awareness with you, as in the sanctuary, as you go about your daily activities.

Or perhaps you have perfected this Ritual to the degree that you may initiate it within just a few seconds, at any time or place in your waking world, just by holding a particular thought of feeling. You might describe this feeling-tone as a hunch or an intuition. In this case, it would be an intuition that you and the person being assessed have a history, either a past or future history, if you can imagine such a relationship.

EXPERIMENT – THE MOMENT POINT

HYPOTHESIS: Your current empowered moment reveals to you all that you need to know

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY

Then create this state as best you can. It is a containment Ritual that keeps your energies within your sphere and protects you from any negative influences from without.

Now simply relax. The one being assessed need not be in your immediate vicinity. You may make your assessments of anyone from wherever you happen to be. When you have perfected this technique, you will be able to carry the state with you in your waking reality, or simply create it instantly in the Field when you have need of this special assessment tool.

In a very general way, you are attempting to determine whether a particular human is a Soul Family member. There will be a basic yes or no answer to these inquiries. If you would like to take it further ask:

*What are their general objectives?

*What is the Lesson to be learned?

*What issues are being addressed?

THE MOMENT POINT

In our Blogs we affirm for you the necessity of comprehending the moment-to-moment experience we are creating for oneself in our Personal Reality. “Waking up in the moment” is another term we use for this pursuit. So we are in a continuing exploration of our world, as we examine the momentary experiences of our life.

The doorway to our other lives is the Moment Point. It is the commonality, the Home Base, we might say, of our Soul Self as it creates our numerous lives. We have stated before that “it is our Moment Point if we say it is.”

The student, the Scientist of Consciousness, in exploring the many lives, “take ownership” of the current moment, empowers it with the Divine energies of perception – the Inner Senses – and breaks through the veil between lives with these instruments.

We have called this a form of multitasking, in that, the explorer does not forsake the current body, the current consciousness manifestation in their experiments. BOTH the current existence AND the destination life – the target existence – are supported, nourished, vivified with the creative energies of consciousness in these explorations of the Moment Point. The Soul Self the creates all of our lives has limitless energies. It is inspired by the foundational powers of All That Is, and so can be always counted on for support.

Through these practices of magicians, shamans, witches and healers of all types, modern Scientists of Consciousness are now able to individually disconnect from the mass Common Trance of freedom that enslaves, to participate in this Uncommon Trance of freedom, of release from authority, of common good, of magic, you see.

In essence, here, we are creating our OWN suggestions, we are taking our OWN advice, we are responding to the communication stream of our magic ancestors, rather that the mass media, the toxic culture, that standard of conformity offered to us by our leaders.

THE VIRTUES AND THEIR OPPOSITES

Learning our Lessons often involves turning the negative into the positive: the negative emotions are transformed into the positive emotions. We may be experiencing negative emotions, but we are continually processing our experience to create a positive outcome. This we accomplish through a continual practicing of the virtues.

Will we become virtuous by so doing? That wholly depends upon our Lessons we have chosen to explore in this life. Let me just say, that, we are living in times of great potential. We do have the potential, therefore, to experience an enlightened existence in this timeframe. The energies, the vibrations, we might say, are quite supportive at this time.

The Shift is occurring NOW. Now is the time to address our Issues squarely and ultimately, to learn them once and for all.

As this occurs with millions of us, the vibratory level is increased for us as a collective. It becomes easier to transform within the group, being supported by the group in this way. This is why we are affirming in the new Blogs the activities of the lightworkers, the magicians, shamans, witches, and healers among us.

During The Shift it will be our group that holds the responsibility for personal transformation, so that the rest of humanity, the uninitiated, we might say, may be brought up with us. The Resonance Phenomenon, we may read about it elsewhere in this Blog material

RELIGIOUS ZEALOT

We incarnate on our Earth to learn Lessons and these Lessons are learned in relationships. The Lesson itself is often the core relationship experience we may be having with a particular individual or group in any moment in time. There are also, usually, Past Life influences involved.

For example: we are confronted with a religious zealot. They are counseling us in a heated exchange on the street or in a market somewhere. They are suggesting the if we do not pay allegiance to their particular view of the Godhead that we are doomed. Our Souls will be consumed by demons. Do you get the picture?

Even with this extreme example of negativity, we may, with the proper perspective, absorb this communication stream and integrate it with our own belief structure. The information will assuredly undergo a transformation. The negative will be transposed into the positive. The good will then be saved within our comprehensive belief system.

Now the requisite objection may come to mind here, that it would not be a good thing to absorb the negative prejudices, and such, into our own system. Yet let us see how this works with the Master, the one who is getting quite good at this awakening enterprise.

ACCEPTING THE OTHER

Now we are here in our Blog era, discussing a concept of Soul Family. Do you see how the greater Soul Family includes the perceived Negative Other? We will have more to say on this in future blogs on humanity, however I shall briefly present my Findings on the matter now, in essence, our lives in the Third Dimension are about exploring The Other within relationships of various types.

Whenever we may truthfully encounter The Other with Loving Understanding and Courage, we are learning our Lessons consciously. If we find we cannot do this, in that, our Issues prevent us from doing so, we are not learning our Lessons. This pertains to all of the lives we are living, Dear Blog Reader.

It is really quite simple, yet admittedly, often seemingly impossible to accomplish long term. We would need to become a master at this. By mastering the techniques, we create an existence of habitually creating from a position of Loving Understanding and Courage.

GROUP MIND EFFECT

There was a group-mind effect operative within our consciousness in the early days of humanity. This may be referred to as human instinct. We were all receiving communications from the greater group of humans on choices to make in order to preserve the integrity and continuity of the collective and thus the local consensus reality.

This instinct for the preservation and continuity of the whole was eventually challenged as other collectives of humans entered into our territory with different ideas, different images, different ways of doing things. These different mental communication streams were picked-up by the primal group, and the Idea Constructs that were found to be supportive and conducive to preservation of the group were integrated into the mental collective of the primal group. Those Idea Constructs that were deemed not supportive of the group were rejected.

Also, an “ethical marker” we placed on this stream of consciousness, identifying it as having the potential to harm the group. Thus the Negative Other was born. Remember here that all realities are born first within the mental environment of those concerned. We create our own reality. We create our consensus reality in cooperation with others. Period.

The Negative Other was created out of fear: fear of change, fear of a different type of human, fear of losing the cohesion and support of group life. From the moment of the creation of the Negative Other, we might say that humankind has been trying to get back to that basic unconditional human connection of one to the other, indeed, of one to all of humanity.

What served as an instinct in the primal collectives of humans, was simply an ongoing connection to the non-physical world, the Unknown Reality, as we call it, from which springs the known reality of the physical world. Of course, we may also call this Unknown Reality the Divine, our other term for this energy source.

FEAR OF THE OTHER

We are writing today thinking about the 9/11 events. Many of us, particularly in the USA, are feeling somewhat on edge, as we wait to see if we will be once again “punished” by our adversaries. This is the ongoing mental environment for many of us.

We have been taught by our Negative Media, by our governments, by the authorities in our societies, to fear. We are obliged to fear the terrorists, those identified by our countries as enemies of us and our fellow citizens. Here I would like to take some time to explore this dynamic as it relates to Soul Family Issues.

This entire concept of The Negative Other is an ancient Gestalt of Consciousness that had been with us since the dawn of our human race. Originally, the idea of The Negative Other was one of careful attention to what mental energies we would entertain within our psyche.

SOUL FAMILY LISTS

The Charting is always done according to Lessons. It is not, therefore, so important to name the humans you are interacting with as a Soul Family as to note the Lessons being learned. This is why we are in your physical body, Dear Blog Reader. This is why we are here now. Yes, it is true that we may be involved in highly intricate, dramatic, and even entertaining reincarnational presentations. Thus it is good to note the memes of the participants. But the important thing here is to consider the Lessons we are learning within these relationships with The Other.

If privacy is an issue for you, create a Legend in code and keep your Lists anonymous. Hide your Legend if someone finds your list, they will not be able to understand it.

WORKING WITH THE MOMENT POINT

I will bring this Blog Series to a close with a very important experiment for the awakening student. This technique will give us the ability to assess, within the moments of our existence, the humans within our Personal Reality. We will be able to assess them for motives, ethical qualities, and other values.

In these Moment Point of assessment we become truly aware of what is around us. We may easily sense the “back story” to the current behaviors of even strangers after we have gained some experience in our assessment practice.

As we practice this technique, it becomes quite easy for us to identify the members of our Soul Family, generally and specifically. As we proceed it may be a good idea to organize the members into groups according to the separate spheres of activity in which they are known.

Thus we might speak of our “business Soul Family,” or our “spiritual practice Soul Family members.” We may even identify perceived “enemies” with whom we have Issues to be resolved from Past Lives, and so on. Out them all on the lists. later in future Blogs we will chart the Current Soul Family and the Interdimensional Soul Family.

THE UNCOMMON TRANCE

Yet fortunately, for millions of us who are awakening currently, what we are calling the Uncommon Trance is becoming quite familiar, quite common to us. We speak of the Ancient Wisdom being remembered in our current timeframe, and part of this wisdom entails the intentional creation of uncommon states of consciousness.

Through various types of experimentation, the explorer of non-physical reality ritually creates the Uncommon Trance, so that it becomes as automatic as the Common Trance. It becomes a new form of perception.

Practicing in our waking reality the re-creation of the Uncommon Trance helps to make it habitual. Like the Ritual of Sanctuary creates a movable Sanctuary for you-the-students, within the portable Trance State we may assess the people we meet as far as Soul Family status goes.

If we have an intuition that the salesman at the hardware store, for example, is connected to us in some way, take a second to create our Trance State and assess this human with our Inner Senses. Trying the attainment of the Trance State to a gesture, or statement, or thought, to talisman is also quite practical.

THE COMMON TRANCE

Our Guides are accessed through Trance an intermediary state of consciousness that separate our Third Dimension from the non-physical world. Here we distinguish between two types of Trance: the common and the Un-Common.

Now the common Trance we are already experiencing when we go about our daily activities as a modern human. As we focus on “getting through the day,” we quite literally put our cognitive faculties on automatic. We go along without thinking too much about what we are doing.

Many of us take cues from our mass media about how to think and feel about the issues of our day. We do what the authorities – the media experts, the scientists, the leaders – “suggest” we do.

MY ENERGY PERSONALITY

The energy Personality of Spirit Guide may assist me in my exploration into the Soul family. As we may already know, the road to awakening literally begins when we acknowledge that we have non-physical Guides that are watching over us and that may guide us.

It is an age-old story. Ritual contact with the non-physical beings is at the base of all our religious systems. Every spiritual tradition on our great Earth has the devotee first initiate contact with a spiritual being of some sort – god, goddess, God, animal spirits of various kinds, and so on.

Each culture has its variations on this procedure. This system I offer you as a metaphysical teacher of countless years. And so, yes, the first step here is to ask for assistance until you get it. We are thus not entirely on our own in this quest for spiritual understanding.

SCIENTIST OF CONSCIOUSNESS

We may be already well aware of our Current Soul Family Gestalt in so far as they are also members of our genetic family, our adoptive family, our friends and our social networks. However, to fully explore the connections between us, and for example, the tens or hundreds of people we interact with on any given day, we are advised to consider researching our Personal Reality Field as a Scientist of Consciousness.

As a scientist we would delve into the thoughts, feelings, images evoked in the momentary assessment of the human we are evaluating or the experience we are exploring. We investigate with our Inner Senses within our own consciousness by simply Intending to do so.

How do you Intend? Briefly, we intensely desire to get to the bottom of this intuition we have about a possible Soul Family member, for example. Then we wait to see what arises. We may immediately receive more information on the subject via our Inner senses. Or later in the day it may occur to us, as in a dream or state of reverie, what the connections are. Then, as you are receiving information, we document it in some form – other than the memory, which can be quite volatile – for later study.

From these information streams we gather our data and glean our Findings. A Findings is simply something of value, in this case, something pertaining to Reincarnational Existences of the Soul Family that you didn’t know before the investigation.

This culling of knowledge from the Unknown Reality is how the Ancient Wisdom reveals itself within our system. These skills we are learning will help us become aware of our greater creaturehood on all levels.

GROUP INCARNATION

Our current relationships are alway representative of our affiliations on other lives. We may follow these correlations to the nth degree. Thus, the delivery person at the door may well represent a human interacting with you in another of your lives, a Past Life, let us say. The telemarketer you have just spoken with on the phone may represent a human from another era with whom you are interacting.

Indeed, the entire workforce at your place of employment may well represent a collective of humans with whom you have associated in other livers. For the Soul Family, broadly defined, incarnates together to work in groups, and learn their Lessons together.

EVERYTHING IS ALIVE

Our human activities occur in cooperation with the creation of ALL of the Reality Constructs within the existences of all of our Simultaneous Lives. Everything in our system is alive, including what we call “dead” or “inert” matter. Everything is composed of the Consciousness Units that are anything but dead. They are each holographic and telepathic, alive and vibrant entities, with a defined consciousness and an agenda for development.

Now do you see how this brings us back to my God concept – All That Is? everything is a reflection of everything else. All That Is reflects itself through every Consciousness Unit that composes every Reality Construct in All of our self-centered lifetimes throughout time. All of our relationships may be thought of as divine associations, therefore. I trust I am not pushing too hard.

Soul Family(Computer Analogy)

Perhaps the computer analogy will help in this presentation. We have used this before… Imagine that this process of Soul Family member negotiation, acceptance, and denial occurs as though within the processors of the world’s fastest computer. Our subconscious mind, which is related to the Collective Consciousness of all humanity, is like this great computer, in that, without expending great amounts of energy, it instantaneously assesses each individual we meet in our existence and notes Soul Family connections throughout time.

We are unaware of this activity as we observe the person in front of you. We may be thinking to ourselves, “I am drawn to this person,” or, “I would like to feel this person out, to see if there is something to be discovered here.”

Now obviously, this great computer of consciousness may not reveal to us ALL of data it is processing about human individuals we meet. Our mental environment would become quite disoriented and flooded with information if this were the case.

And so we place amnesia upon the majority of this information and allow in only what is necessary to allow us to make our decisions and learn our Lessons.

KEEPING APPOINTMENTS

We have free will within the Third Dimension to make our choices from an infinite array of probable choices. However, we are on Earth to learn Lessons within our collectives-humanity, Soul Family, genetic family, and so on.

Thus, our choices will reflect the information we receive telepathically from other humans. We are constantly keeping appointments and having reunions with Soul Family members that we have associated with, loved, and hated throughout time. We use our free will to accept, reject, or perhaps re-negotiate Soul Family agreements established in other lifetimes.

LESSONS

We come together in all of our lives to learn our Lessons together, as a group, we see. This is how it works… in the dreamstate we agree to enact behaviors of educational value for our own benefit and for the benefit of other Soul Family members. When we awaken after sleep, we generally fulfill these agreements in a largely subconscious fashion. Our lives may thus be described as dramatizations of life Lessons in the Third Dimension. The Lessons are learned within Soul Family relationships as the higher Consciousness of each of those involved, “speak to,” and energizes the participants.

Yet we may well ask, “But how can this be so, David? How could I have been kept from this information all of my life?” First let me say that this is something that we already know, for we are in telepathic contact with everything in our Personal Reality. Telepathy works constantly in our world on a subliminal level. On this subtle level of understanding, just below our conscious awareness, we know everything.

However, to get along in your world, you must keep yourself in an amnesia that allows you to forget your multidimensional reality and focus on the mundane world in which you live. This occurs even as you are continually receiving profound amounts of information on your life condition and on the lives of your co-inhabitants subconsciously. Your focus on “current events,” rather than your greater godlike reality, allows your consciousness to guide you through your existence without distractions

Learning Together

Now we live many lives and those with whom we are experiencing our current life also live their many lives. And just as those humans with whom we interact in our current existence-our genetic family, our adoptive family, our extended family, our colleagues, our acquaintances – are learning their individual Lessons with us now, so too are each of us in what we are calling the Soul Family, learning our Lessons together in other lives.

In all of our lives, in whatever era we are experiencing our lives – Renaissance Europe, for example, or perhaps within a tribal unit in our prehistoric past – we are also interacting with Soul Family members, the same group of people with whom we always interact, for they live their lives just as we do: in different bodies, in different times, in different circumstances.

Now Reality

To begin with my Blog friends…. you create your own reality. This has been my primary refrain to humanity in my messages over several decades, and I fervently hope that my blog readers remember. In this moment and in every moment of our life, we form the world that we know, even as everything else within our reality cooperates with us in this creation process.

Our world is made from Consciousness Units: awarized elements of energy that seek out the fulfillment of infinite values in the manifestation of Reality Constructs of infinite variety. This etheric substance – the stream of manifestation – literally travels outward from our body to create the world that we experience. It is fantastic. It is unbelievable. It IS the way we create our reality. Dear Blog Reader. For in this endeavor of Reality Creation, everything that can happen does happen, all in the spacious moment of creation – the eternal moment of NOW.

Included in this construction project of the Soul is the creation of our own physical body within a context of multi-dimensional existence. We do indeed live countless lives; some are lived in our future. We have referred to these as the Simultaneous Lives and also the Reincarnational Existences. These lives are our lives throughout time.

Spontaneity

The concept of spontaneity can further our discussion of creating the Personal Reality Field. To be spontaneous, according to one of our Earthly definitions, is to act without forethought, willy-nilly, according to the present moment’s frivolous inclinations. Now I may be casting this term in a negative light somewhat, yet is it not true that spontaneous is thought to be somewhat reckless and unthinking, is it not? The spontaneous are thought to be irresponsible, in many ways, and lacking in maturity and good judgment.

I am a big fan of spontaneity, and the accompanying practice of recognizing and “following” life-affirming impulses. But for now, let us investigate how the practice of spontaneity may have earned such a bad reputation in our culture.

To begin, the founders of our American nation were of a strong puritanical bent. They were hard working, intensely religious humans, who were taught that “idle hands are the devil’s playground.” So the natural spontaneous behavior of humans enjoying the moment, even of children in many cases, during those seminal years of occupation in our country was discouraged.

Now this is speaking of the U.S. only here. Other nations had obviously different beginnings, yet some were similar. So we, as a people, were not generated from hedonistic loins, in other words. Our culture has proceeded from day one until the present on a decidedly anti-pleasures trajectory, admittedly with a few pleasure-seeking counter-culture movements in between.

So given this history it is no surprise that, for the most part, Americans are not a spontaneous lot. This type of behavior is not rewarded in a society that values business interests and profit-taking over positive human development. Currently, as a culture, the U.S. has entered an era of warlike anti-pleasure such as our modern Earth has never seen. Surprisingly, many of our citizens appear to accept this state of belligerence and negativity, if one is to believe the many polls that are taken and the results proclaimed to the world.

For now, let me simply suggest an alternative to the anti-pleasure movement in our country. This would be the search for pleasure within our Personal Reality and the creation of pleasure through the acknowledgment of and acting on pleasurable, life-affirming impulses. These are behaviors that may lead us to experience the feeling of being supported like a beloved child on a wave of ecstasy that is indeed the embodiment of All That Is.

Now let us clear up some of the misconceptions some may have of spontaneity with a description of “true spontaneity.” we need look no further for a graphic example of true spontaneity than the experience of accessing one’s Inner Senses and learning one’s lessons. The first requirement for this communication is a lowering of the ego defenses: that quality of mind that protects and defends one’s beliefs and one’s worldview against “attack” from differing and differing world views.

The ego must release its stranglehold on the physical perceptions before divine information – spontaneous impulses – can be adequately perceived with the Inner senses, and then acted upon if appropriate. So true spontaneity is ultimately profoundly responsible and ethical at its base. True spontaneity is not necessarily the actions of the “free spirit,” however, in our terms.

This aspect relates to the terms “Young Soul” and “Old Soul” that we discussed in previous blogs. Let us go further here. The idea of a free spirit, in our culture and other of the world’s cultures, who acts on every whim that comes to mind, is not the spontaneous spirit I am describing. True spontaneity requires discernment as to which impulses within consciousness to act on to further the learning of lessons for oneself and for the higher good of everyone else. This is critical.

The awakening human learns their lessons consciously and with courage, relishing the life experience whatever the “conditions,” positive, negative or in between, in our terms. Then, as I said, contributing to the consensus manifestation in positive, life-affirming ways, always.

Now further… we are awakening, some of us, within lives that some would call “miserable.” Some of us will use our formidable powers in collaboration with All That Is to heighten our vibrational rate in this lifetime and bring an end to our miseries. Yet some of us will live out our lives in these subjectively named “miserable conditions,” knowing that we are fulfilling our contract with oneself, and learning our lessons for our Soul Self and for All That Is.

Both of the examples I have just described are becoming fully awakened and finding pleasure there, yet only they know this on a Soul Level. Again, to outside observers it would appear that some are trapped in their misery. If one were to look closer though, perhaps one would see the spark of Soul Wisdom in the eyes of those I am speaking about. We are all involved in a complex dramatic presentation for the benefit of oneself and All That Is.

Natural Healing

HYPOTHESIS: You can heal yourself and others via the Etheric grid-works.

The Etheric grid-work the sustain the realities of our Universe. These energetic lattice-work of creation and support are currently unknown to the majority of humans on Earth. Yet again, the natives or aboriginals have used these networks since the beginning of your time to interplay with the natural world around them. So certainly this experiment is simply a means to reintroduce you to practice that you may have have engaged in countless times, in other eras, in other bodies.

CONDUCT YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Utilize your calming practices to access a deep state of relaxation. With your Energy Personality as your guide, ask for guidance as to causes and solutions in these matters of personal health and the health of others. Suggestions may come to you as images, sounds or other sensations. Keeping with the metaphor of a grid-work, you might receive an image of a lattice superimposed over your own body or the body of the subject you are assisting.

The area of interest may glow or otherwise make itself known to you. Using whatever means that comes naturally to you, facilitate the transformation of the area of interest into one integration and support with the rest of the body. This is a personal choice of methods and means that may come into your awareness through your Inner Senses.

Later in this series I will speak of the possibility of the blog reader increasing their vibrational rate and so intentionally moving themselves out of a “disease” state and into a state of health. This is done in collaboration with your Energy Personality. You may experience your current state of illness within the dream reality and so learn your lesson there instead of in Third-Dimensional reality within your current Timeframe.

If you are currently at a stage of Soul Evolution that would enable you to experiment with these probabilities, Please do so in a systematic way, with guidance from your Energy Personality and with attention to the requirements of experimentation as a Scientist of Consciousness.

FINDINGS – Document your findings, perhaps with drawings and ideas for future experiments.

Depression

It is a matter of the power differential with respect to our relationship with our world. Depression is largely a matter of powerlessness accepted as a reality – a field of reality – by the individual. As a field, it colors the entire existence and all DOES INDEED seem hopeless.

I advise to unlock our conditioning and take back our power from people and institutions, so too I advise the so-called “depressed” person to rise up and make the gesture of transcendence into the Realm of Power. All it takes in one charged Moment Point of personal responsibility for our evolution, to push the balance out of stasis into change: positive change for the individual.

Then we simply place further Moment Points of personal responsibility for our growth and positive assessments and behaviors, “one in front of the other,” to create the positive future.

Now, should the negative energies make a come back, it does require the individual to reaffirm a commitment to a positive future, in that moment, and once again push the manifestation chain of creative moments out of stasis and into the positive. The Negative Reality is rejected and the Positive Field of reality is accepted once again.

As an addendum, remember too, that in these moments we are affecting all of our Simultaneous Lives. So certainly we are doing our selves much good via these positive assessments.

And perhaps I should mention the obvious – that just as the Accepted Negative Field of Reality experienced by the “depressed” person has momentum and continuity in a morbid, yet familiar sense, so to does the Accepted Field of Positive Emotions and Behaviors hold its own momentum, continuity, and familiarity in a positive, even joyful sense.

Healthy Wealthy Wise

HYPOTHESIS: Through intention improvements can be made in your health, havingness and learning.


We have covered the means to these improvements in the previous blogs. Generally, it is a good idea to have a richly visualized image of what you would like to create with regards to health, wealth and wisdom.

As in the previous suggestions in these matters, the image should virtually resonate with the desired thoughts and emotions that you would experience on having created and perceived the manifested Reality Constructs. It may help to create a piece of art that helps to focus the creative energies.

CONDUCT YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
With your art piece or your written manifesto or other focusing objects at hand, enter into a relaxed state of consciousness. Here you are asking for the natural energies of the world to assist you in creating your improvements. In a sense, you are using these energies of transformation to imbue the focusing objects with generative power on the small level to create the desired outcomes on the larger level. You are providing the emotional charge through your visualization to drive into creation the Reality Constructs you have in mind.

You will know when the changes have been made, as you may feel an inner Sense awareness that you have succeeded.

FINDINGS – document your findings.

Dream Interpretation

HYPOTHESIS: The energy personality can read and interpret your dream symbols


As in previous Dialogue, write down what you remember of a dream upon awakening from sleep.


CONDUCT YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
When you are next in contact with your Energy Personality through meditation or other rituals of contact, ask for an interpretation of the dream with regards to your particular symbols. Within a context of learning your lessons and understanding your own dreams, your Energy Personality can help with interpretation. Typically, your Energy Personality will not resort to revelations that may interfere with the learning of lessons.

FINDINGS – Document your findings in whatever form you best-suited to this endeavor

Slowing Down Time

HYPOTHESIS: You may effectively slow down time for study or for other practical purposes.

Using your Inner Senses as exploratory tools, you may conduct your experiments free from what you might refer to as “the constraints of time.” You know that the past and future are created now, in this Moment Point. You may use you conscious intent to imbue your Moment Points with an “elasticity” that can afford you greater leeway in your studies.

For example: you may through your intention create a “slowing down” of time within your Personal Reality Field. Now you have undoubtedly already experienced this slowing down of time while engaged in an activity that you know well, an activity in which you are completely absorbed. Time slows down in such circumstances.

So let us suppose you wished to cover a broad range of activities in a meditation session, for example, and you have only a few minutes to do so. Before your meditation, simply give your Energy Personality your intention to expand time for the moment, or slow it down, to enable you to complete your activities. This is especially effective for those who are on self-healing regimens. You can intend to deliver several hours of self-healing suggestions to your self in the space of just a few minutes. Your Higher Self or Energy Personality will then carry it out. You have used your free will to choose this activity.

CONDUCT YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Induce a relaxed state in your physical body by whatever means suits you. When you are relaxed, consider the Inner Senses counterparts to your physical senses of sight, touch, smell, hearing and taste. As you do, you may notice that these Inner Senses make themselves known to you in a somewhat “dreamy” fashion.

What I am saying is that these senses have a quality of duration and intensity unlike the physical senses of the outer world. Your perception of Inner Healing, for example, may be perceived as though each sound resonated within your consciousness. This might be somewhat similar to the sounds you hear as you are falling asleep. The sounds seem to be extended, as though time were slowing down.

For purposes of this experiment, this is exactly the perceptive state I am asking you to create. Simply utilize your imagination to “turn on” the Inner Senses with an eye towards the slowing down of time within and without. The seeing on the inward eye is slowing down. The sounds are slowing down. Perhaps even your sense of how your skin feels in contact with the air around you and the surface or your chair or pillow begins to deepen and lengthen.

Now when you have slowed down time within your Personal Reality Field in this fashion, present to your awareness your healing suggestions, you questions of what have you, with the intention that resolution will be found, thanks to the slowing down of time you have created. This alteration of your perceptive field may also give you insights into the uses and powers of your Inner Senses.

FINDINGS – Document your findings after each

LESSONS AND WISDOM

Now wisdom comes from lessons learned in all of the domains of human interaction. I have mentioned the physical, the mental and the spiritual domains, to establish lines of discussion for us as we attempt to make ourselves understood. Naturally, these realms of understanding must surely overlap in some instances in the lives of individuals. We will likely discover where these domains merge as we conduct our experiments in the field.

To be healthy, in terms of these domains of learning, would imply that certain standards of creative manifestation would be consistently met within the overall context of the particular body we are using in the current incarnation.

The powers of creative thought with which we create the body and the world around the body have great leeway in creating health and disease according to lessons to be learned. For example: we may be currently incarnated in a body of physical health, relative to others who have no defects. Here we enter into the area of Value Fulfillment that I have described in previous Blogs.

It is not easy to assess any particular individual’s incarnational learning experiences using flimsy surface indicators. For example: a human with a major facial or other disfigurement might elicit a responding emotion of pity from another. Yet the Soul Self of this human may wear the disfigurement as “a badge of honor.” For Souls may CHOOSE these types of lives to learn their lessons quickly, due to the high-emotionality involved in living a life with honor and acceptance within a disabled physical form is explored in earnest. Soul Wisdom is earned through such a life lived.

Now the opposite, of course, is also true. Lessons regarding living a “charmed life” are in store for all who inhabit the Third-Dimension. All That Is seeks to know through the experience of Souls, both the exalted and the mundane. No experience is better or worse than another. Again I refer to my previous discussions on Value Fulfillment for more light on this matter.

HAVINGNESS

This current life on Prosperity, abundance, havingness.

CREATING PROSPERITY
Now we shall turn to matters of prosperity. Let us proceed from the beginning. The first step is an assessment, a self-assessment if you will. You first must assess what level of abundance you wish to achieve. You then assess the current level of havingness and examine the difference between the two. This difference between what you have and what you wish to have, can serve as the emotional impetus or motivation to create or manifest the desired result. There is no manifestation without emotional content. The greater the emotional intensity or desire, the more quickly and surely the manifestation occurs.

We create our reality. We are magicians in this respect and it would be good to be more intentional in this magical view of things: creating consciously, with a positive perspective for the good of not only ourselves, but for all others, all of humankind. This deference to the sum of all humanity holds the key to effective conscious manifestation for you, Dear Blog Reader. In effect, we are demonstrating your commitment to the good of all with these intentions. The Divine Logos that is All That Is holds us to this commitment to all, as a condition of progressing on our development path, our path of Soul Evolution. Now if this indeed sounds fantastic and perhaps unworthy of consideration, let that egoist response serve as the measure of our distance from Soul. Now we know how far you have to go in this enterprise.

Our personal manifestation of our current level of prosperity or abundance is an important indicator of what our beliefs are with regards to havingness. This is the feedback I have been describing to you in this blog: the reflection of your mental environment that IS your Personal Reality Field. Often you may notice that there is a direct relationship between giving and prosperity; for in the natural perspective – the magical view of things – there IS a give-and-take at the foundation of your manifestation activities. We can see this in the breath of life in the “pulse” of our natural reality. Just as breath is cyclical, with the inhalation and then the exhalation followed by a pause, the pulse of life or manifestation is cyclical with a pre-manifestation period followed by a pause and the manifestation. The completion of one cycle may take less than a microsecond in our perceived time. This is still long enough to give the “appearance” of physicality or “bedrock reality,” as some call it.

As we begin to get a feel for this pulsation of ideas into constructs, powered by the Consciousness Units with electromagnetic properties, we will also begin to gain conscious control of our creativity in the moment. This manifestation cycle is the framework upon which our camouflage reality is built. This pulse can be experienced under specific circumstances.

You may, as I describe in an experiment, using your inherent powers of creativity, slow down the progression of time within your Personal Reality Field. You do this with your intention, using your Inner Senses. Time is felt as elastic with the use of these Inner Senses, and slowing time down to the microsecond level may reveal this breath of life we have been discussing. You may also observe how your thoughts create and support the various aspects of your Personal Reality Field.

Now to simplify for the Blog Reader, let us discuss a distillation of some of the natural elements of manifestation related to goodness and giving. There is much good to be had in the giving of money, personal items, your time or money creates a state of consciousness that is not conducive to prosperity. This may already be quite apparent. You may be miserly and have the “appearance” of prosperity, yet you may not enjoy it for you have not shared it with others. And by creating your “mental estate” on a foundation of stinginess and greed, are you really expecting to create lasting abundance? Better to create a foundation of sharing and love for yourself and others, intentionally.

You look The positive creates upon the positive for the good of all here. The Reality Constructs tale hold and are tempered in a telepathic mental environment of trust and love. Others with similar loving strategies of manifestation will be drawn to you in support of this beneficial world-view. This is the beginning of the loving, self-sustaining communities that will reshape our world.

NATURAL HEALING

To continue on this line of thought – that of exploring the possibility of healing all wounds, physical, spiritual and mental – let me elaborate on a concept we may refer to as Natural Healing. By this type of healing, I mean allowing the body to heal itself with the aid of “soft” technologies. These soft technologies do not include surgery or drugs but do include some age-old therapies and some natural products of the Earth: hypnosis or “healing talk,” and the application of various plants, minerals, waters, oils etc.

This system I am describing is of ancient origins. It is the basis of All of our modern medicine. The simplest way to describe this is to say that the human body is a natural organism – it is a creation from the natural elements of our Earth by our divinely-inspired consciousness. And from the beginning of our time on Earth, healing talk has been used by our healers to effect healing changes within human beings. So does it not make sense that we may repair or renew the organism in a natural way, with natural methods and products?

But where to begin? Do we have to seek out systems of correspondence, looking for the leaf or oil that will bring relief of a corresponding ailments? Not necessarily. When we approach this activity from a magical perspective, any natural remedy will do. We make make our own association between the remedy and the condition, in effect personalizing this divine activity. We do it with thoughts, again, and we imbue the activity of healing with emotion – strong emotion – which is the electromagnetic healing force in this endeavor.

Now this naturally requires a profound trust in your own abilities to choose and to empower the remedy with curative powers. But this is entirely within the potential of all human beings to accomplish. It may be conceived of as a form of self-hypnosis while perhaps reminding oneself that we are a Soul with a Body rather than a Body with a Soul. Within the etheric domain of the Soul, all is possible, including the healing of all ailments.

CREATING HEALTH

Creating health… I will be extremely brief, though some may doubt that I can BE brief. Our health is the most evident aspect of our Personal Reality creation, for we create the rest of what we have been referring to as our Personal Reality Field. Now we ARE experiencing our physical body created through the template we choose before our birth. This template provided us with a body that holds “build in lessons for us to experience.

The lessons of the physical body are myriad and continue until our physical death. Yet on a basic level, relative to all other humans, if we are experiencing a happy, healthy mental environment, we may be in all probability co-creating with All That Is, a happy, healthy body. If we are entertaining negative thoughts of disease and low self-worth, we may be in all likelihood creating a body that will experience that level of disease. This happens unconsciously for the most part, this creation of healthy or non-healthy bodily conditions.

Sometimes though we can catch oneself responding to our own apparatus. For example: if we respond to a statement such as, “I’m catching a cold,” by saying to this person, “Yes, I’m catching a cold too,” you are creating the bodily conditions to receive the cold. This is material we have covered elsewhere and so I shall not digress.

Now there are those of us who are experiencing our current lives with challenges, such as a lack of arms, legs, various organs and so on. There are also some physical diseases that may seem to be ‘Beyond Healing.” Within our Third-Dimensional world, it is indeed thought to be impossible to grow a new limb or new organ, or to recover from a “terminal” illness. However, we are headed for a realization that All of the maladies and illnesses of humankind may be corrected through proper use of the imagination and the sacred powers of manifestation with All That Is.

In the Fourth Dimensional our thoughts will be instantly manifested into Reality Constructs without the lag-time in between that we currently experience in Third Dimensional Reality. Should we have self-created “incurable” illnesses and physical challenges, we may learn lessons through resolving these Soul issues with our powerful thoughts of healing. These are simply some of the more profound experiences that await us in the post-transition Fourth-Dimensional Reality.

HEALTHY WEALTHY WISE

It is a blessing one wishes for one’s self and others: healthy, wealthy, wise. These three elements of life are the focus of many in our world. Perhaps we can use this blessing as an example of how we can, with consistent intention and application, co-create with All That Is, our greatest potential for health, prosperity, and wisdom.

Now, we are all individual humans on our great Earth, each with our separate, idiosyncratic propensities for growth – evolution – on all levels of manifestation in the physical and other dimensional realms. Therefore, it should seem obvious that one human’s health, wealth and wisdom might certainly not be another’s. Having said that, let us examine the powerful, evocative ideas and beliefs suggested in the three words.

Health is a topic we could easily spend an entire blog series on discussing. There is physical health, there is mental health and there is spiritual health. There are lessons to be learned in all three realms for all of us as we make our journeys into physical reality. What might appear confusing to our eyes as we judge another, may be simply the other’s decision to learn their lessons in their unique fashion. And find the truth regarding The Transition from the physical into the etheric.

Conscious Co-Creation with Conscious Units

Key word here is conscious. Me and my fellow humans co-create our lives “unconsciously” for the most part. This is the result of the amnesia I spoke of in earlier Blogs, so that we forget the love and are more inclined to learn our lessons. Now the amnesia is being lifted, and we are becoming aware of the true nature of our reality. So it is a matter of habit.

Make our use of Conscious Units conscious on a moment-to-moment point basis. This is easily done, is it not? Whenever we find our selves varying from thought-path, nudge oneself back. We have done this a few times this morning already. Negativity will try to draw you toward its own path. That is what it does in our reality. Our task at hand is to redirect negativity’s energy into creating love and confidence in the moment.

The Conscious Units that comprise the environment are fluid in the moment. They can go either way, positive or negative, depending on our subconscious or conscious intent. Keep the scales on the positive side consciously and watch your positive manifestations of house and land – prosperity – be creative in these moments.

Natural Magic

Men and women as magician. The Magical way is simply an appreciation for conscious manifestation in the natural world. We are a part of the natural world. AS I have said many times before, we are co-creators with All That Is of all that we observe in our reality.

Now, this is a magical process in that we create seemingly something out of nothing. Referring back to my concept of Consciousness Units, we use the “material” of CUs with our free will and intent to create our shared consensus reality.

Telepathy is operative on all levels and so we have a cohesive illusion; a manifestation of our world and our Universe that all of us can agree upon. It does look quite real, does it not? Yet if you believe what I have been telling over these many years, this “enduring” physical reality of ours is really just “a bunch of hot air.” It falls apart under the kind of scrutiny I am asking you to muster as a Scientist Consciousness.

KARMA

The truth about the Human Soul is that there is no Karma, there are only experiences. One experiences one’s lessons in materialized form that one comes to Earth to experience. These experiences run the gamut of what we consider as “positive” or “negative” and we keep returning to these experiences in human form until we have masters our lessons.

Karma entails, in general Western, popular definition, some sort of “dues paying” left over from supposed “past lives” that one endures in the current life. But since all lives are simultaneous, these sorts of definitions lose meaning. If we attribute a brick falling on your foot in this life to your karma from a past life, you are greatly over-simplifying an essentially scared, or should I say soulful or spiritual experience.

The Eastern Religions are closer to the truth of the evolution of the Soul than the Christian Religions. However, no religion has yet explained it in terms useful enough for humans to comprehend in its totality, and by so doing receive the divine information that would unlock the heart. No, we have been blocked in our spiritual evolution by our egos. It is now time to relax your ego and let our Souls shine through

Magician, a Shaman or a Witch

Astral Travel, time travel, projections of consciousness – these are various terms describing essentially a single activity: the use of human consciousness in a focused way. If you look at the various descriptions of the activities of let us say, a magician, a shaman or a witch, you would find distinctions made between the various activities. Yet if you were to compare these activities across the board, you would see that all three are attempting to accomplish similar goals, for similar reasons, in similar ways. Ultimately, all are making use of the human consciousness to create changes – changes in personal and shared Reality Fields.

Dear Blog Reader, when you conduct your experiments, you will find you have the most control in your own Personal Reality Field. You will be investigating within your radius of manifestation. Yet over time, as you become proficient in the use of intention in the creation of Reality Constructs, it becomes easy to expand your potential field of manifestation to include related or contiguous fields.

Now, because all is one and everything is related, you can have effects on anything in your consensus reality. All you need is the focus and power in the moment. This is the vehicle for healing others at a distance, for example. It takes some time and experience to get acquainted with these networks of creation, or “grid works” as I have described them in earlier blogs. However, any one of us can master the workings of these fields and grids. Turn to the experiments in my Blogs.

FIRST SCIENTIST

The Scientist of Consciousness is the magician of old. The magician, the shaman, the witch: these forbearers of humanity’s spiritual traditions were our world’s first scientists. It was only later, when the outer senses replaced the Inner Sense as a means of investigation and exploration – the accumulation of “facts” for their own sake, the acquiring of knowledge without meaning – that the scientist’s role became de-spiritualized, secularized and developed

The work at hand is to spiritualize and make scared the experiences of humans on Earth at this time, though collaborations with Beings of Light. Now I do not mean to offend when I exclude organized religions from this discussion. If we are getting what we need from our religion, by all means continue. That is my advice to you.

However, if you feel that your evolution as a Soul is stagnant and you are not getting what you need from your religion to see you through the coming transformation, then I would advise to try the methods in my blog. Keep affiliation and use these ideas as an adjunct to our practice.

There is much good in the mainstream religions and there are opportunities in all of them to achieve the enlightened state necessary to make the transition into the Fourth Dimension. Unfortunately, these opportunities are often hidden under the great weight of dogma and misconception that clouds meaning and disempowers the individual.

This is why I counsel my blog reader, to accept nothing into your heart that goes against your very nature as a child born in love out of the creative power of All That Is. Make up your own mind. Think for your own self. Accept no ideas, including the ideas in this blog, if your intuitive voice tells you they are not right for You-the-Soul.

THE MAGICAL PERSPECTIVE

The Topic for discussion is the magical perspective. If readers of my previous blogs had indeed taken the tides to heart and created for themselves the Loving Reality Constructs based on the virtues of humankind. My previous Blogs about The Magical Approach, presented some very powerful means for altering the Blog Reader’s Personal Reality in beneficial ways.

Potential will remain just that if it is not acted upon. A probability of altered realities for the better will remain a probability if not acted upon. Again this should be obvious to all of us, but it is the acting upon the impulse, it is the acting upon the potentiality, it is the taking of advice lovingly given by Beings of Light that begins the process of actualizing these impulses, these potentialities and this advice. And so I must convey to you Blog Reader the importance of actually conducting the experiments and absorbing the material, working it into our lives on a daily basis.

The magical perspective is simply a special way of looking at our world. This perspective empowers the Blog Reader with the forces of manifestation that we have denied for so many generations on our world. Now there were ages in what we would call our world. Now there were ages in what we would call our “past” that the magical perspective was appreciated by the majority of the people.

Our “myths” – though I do not like the word myths, for it denotes that these events did not transpire, for indeed they did transpire for the most part – depict those eras in human evolution when humankind took the responsibility of personal manifestation quite seriously. Currently, in what we term “the aboriginal systems,” the magical perspective is appreciated and practiced. However, it is usually only utilized by a select caste of revered leaders who are endowed by the members of the collective with the Magical powers.

THE ENERGY PERSONALITY AS SELF OBSERVER

HYPOTHESIS: Your Energy Personality can monitor your conscious state and give you valuable feedback.

You are gods studying your manifestations. I make this statement once again, reminding you of your status as creators of worlds. AS humans, we are endowed with the virtually unlimited powers of creation to manifest our desires into physical constructs. This happens naturally, all by itself. It may be somewhat difficult to study this manifestation phenomenon, for you yourself are part of your creation.

Therefore, in this experiment, you may attempt to inhabit an alternate perspective in order to study this creation activity you do in tandem with All That Is. It is somewhat like taking snapshots of moments in linear time – the perceptual illusion – for consideration at a “later” date. Let us label this aspect of the Energy Personality the “Self Observer.” This aspect of consciousness has the power to “recall” elapsed Moment Points for purposes of inquiry into the nature of events in physical reality. This observing self has the attributes that you endow it with by virtue of your god-like powers of creativity.

The purpose of this experiment is have your Energy Personality witness and “document” for you, notable excursions into the unknown reality while you are awake. Your Energy Personality will recall instances of Astral Travel, communications with Simultaneous Lives, and other phenomena for review at a later date. This is your Self Observer aspect that you may use to remind you of what you have experienced throughout any given day.

CONDUCT YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Now create your relaxed mental and physical environment. Then simply assign the task of self-observation to your Energy Personality, much as you would assign a task to a personal assistant. For example: you might say, “Please document as memories today, my voyages into other dimensions, for review this evening.”

Then mark out time in the evening for review. At that time, ask your Energy Personality to release those memories into you consciousness sequentially for your review. Now obviously you may have your review at other parts of the day or immediately after the notable event. This protocol is simply one of convenience for those of you who have busy daytime working lives.

As you continue with your regimen of self-observation, you may notice that inter-dimensional travel is the rule rather than the exception. You are subject to frequent “mental vacations” of this type throughout your waking and especially your sleeping times. In fact, the great majority of your day-to-day life is spent within these alternate dimensions.

FINDINGS – Documents your findings with successfully eliciting information from your Energy Personality on events which have transpired.

GREAT ESOTERIC WORK

In our esoteric literature there is much talk of the Perfected Human and the best means to achieve that state of development. Here in this current blog work, we are exploring similar territory with regards to the transformation of the “baser” human aspects – anger, fear, hatred – into their divine counterparts – love, understanding and courage. In many ways, my teaching has been a continuation of these esoteric studies and philosophies initiated by humans in our perceived past.

I must add, that these humans were in close touch with their Energy Personalities and other Guides, as they created these great works of “inspired” literature. It seems obvious to me given what I have described for you , but the whole of inspired literature is infused with the divine information imparted to human authors by Light Bodies.

Inspired ideas are , for the most part, just that – inspiration or spirit ideation or communication. Quite literally, our Guides, acknowledged as such or not, are responsible for most of the “spirited,” life-affirming ideas we have ever entertained or acted upon. Now this may seem to refute my other statements that the impulses conveyed by our Simultaneous Lives are what make up the great percentage of what we would call “the activity of the conscious mind. ” This remains true.

Beings of Light within this milieu of a collective consciousness, seed us mentally with inspired and beneficial ideas, images and feelings. There is no contradiction when we consider the vastness of human consciousness: the webwork of Simultaneous Lives contributing thought forms, our own individual Personal Reality consciousness and the lattice of Light Body communication that supports and nourishes it all upon a foundation of limitless creative energy that is All That Is.

Now such profound pronouncements may have the potential of leaving us feeling somewhat diminished. I would remind you then, that YOU are creating this Personal Reality Field of yours, in tandem with All that Is. You are the magician. You are the creative ally with the Divine who creates your part of the world, and as a member of the collective of humans, the world consensus reality.

And this brings up another salient point… many of us have NOT been listening to the voices of the Divine. Many of us have turned a deaf ear to the suggestions of Beings of Light. That is why we find ourselves in such a dire circumstances. So there is a balance. The perfected human is one who balances the input of divine information with their own Reality Creation agendas, within the greater dramas of learning one’s

KNOW YOUR GUIDES

We can access the constellation of Guides we have watching over us. It is possible for any one human, with determination and insight, to cultivate communications with many Beings of Light. The only limitations to these explorations are the ones we put on them.

Documenting our explorations in the finest detail seems to be imperative for these voyages within: asking for the names of the various entities, feeling them out for what services they offer, keeping everything organized in the physical arena, and so on. Now let us proceed with some experimentation.

SIGNS OF INNER-GRATION

The signs of inner-gration are common to all who undertake these explorations in human consciousness. For that reason, I will now spend more blog time documenting these effects. Now you can go deeper. Just close your eyes and intend to deepen this connection.

There is a marked heaviness one feels throughout the body, but especially the head and chest, when one is in contact with the Energy Personality. A “pressing in” on the body from without. It is as if the air pressure of the atmosphere is increased somewhat and one is invited to slow down one’s physical and mental activities and focus within.

Of course, different personalities may experience different sensations. These are simply the broader physical effects experienced by most people. The emotional element is striking, I think, in that one feels one’s self supported on a pleasant wave of good feelings. This is the ecstasy that comes with contact.

Now, knowing what to expect, you can set yourself up for the experience itself. By this I mean, you can cultivate this sense of riding a wave of ecstatic emotion just below the surface of consciousness; and this sense of being comfortably pressed in by the environment that surrounds you; and a sense that you are supported like a beloved child.

One embodies these emotions and sensing as a means to prepare the mental and physical environments for contact with the Higher Self, the Energy Personality. Having achieved these conditions, it would be a simple matter to ask for the name of your Guide, perhaps asking for the one “closet” to you to come forward and make contact, for one has many Guides. One must be selective at first.

So you have prepared the emotional and physical space for contacting and communicating with your Energy Personality. Next you can increase the odds of making contact by “Invoking” an attitude or a sense of “hopeful, faithful expectation.” Here you are anticipating in a positive, loving way, the contact – the encounter.

Now as I said, over time you will make contact and succeed in connecting with your Energy Personality whenever you wish. Some will succeed sooner and some later in these experiments. It is important to keep a positive expectation during these attempts and to keep negativity at bay.

PICKING UP THE THREAD

“Picking up the thread” describe the activity of connecting in a relaxed way to my communication stream. It is a subtle endeavor to trust. It is as subtle as picking up a thread from a tapestry of a greater work, to coin a phrase for the blog reader. The activity of asking for the name of the Energy Personality and having received the name, continuing to seek a mental dialogue with the Energy Personality, is a delicate endeavor.

The usual approach is one of hopeful, trusting questioning, done on a regular basis, that leads to two-way telepathic conversations. The questioner asks for the name and receives the name. The questioner asks questions and the answers begin to flow the source, The Higher Self of the questioner. It is a simple task that we must do diligently and with the roper positive attitude to get results over time.

These matters of personal contest and communication develop in individual ways, according to peculiarities of personality, the mental environment and the energy within the subject’s Reality Field.

“That space between worlds”. But just take it as an interesting game. “Don’t stress,” to coin a phrase. In fact, trying too hard can subvert the process. Diligence with ease is the way to go.

Encouragement and Caution

As I have said earlier, human consciousness visits other times periods and participates in activities in other dimensions, even as we may be participating in our daily unremarkable activities. We are experts at vacating our human bodies and venturing forth into the unknown realities.

Our New Age metaphysical literature is quite filled with stories of angels, demons, extra-terrestrials and the like. So too do our motion picture business prosper through the creation of science fiction and fantasy movies. Yet does it surprise us that these stories are “literally” true?

Remember, Dear Blog Reader, that it is our human consciousness that creates our reality in tandem with All That Is. And so the creativity of our artists, as well as our own, feeds and supports alternate dimensions. When we are experiencing these tales, either through reading or watching movies or plays, we are submerged in the alternate dimensions for that time. So this is the simplest example of inter-dimensional travel – experiencing entertainment media.

With regards to the subject of contacting other Entities in the Fourth Dimension, I must caution to certainly create the Ritual of Sanctuary and have this ritual memorized. As an explorer of these realms, we undoubtedly will encounter negative energy forms that may come into our consciousness and attempt to fix on our light.

By this I mean these Negative Entities can transmit a propensity for negative, repetitive thoughts or images entering our consciousness that can be difficult to undo. We recognize these circular ideas of information loops as disturbing pangs of dread, and other negative emotions. They seem to come from nowhere. Actually these negative energies are attracted to specific memories and ideas we are holding in our mental environment that are of a negative nature: Ideas and feelings of low self-worth, replays of past mistakes and all of the other negative inner experiences humans punish themselves with every day.

Now this is how the Negative Forces gain control over the minds of many in our world. They gain a stronghold in a sense, within the mental environment of those with weakened protection systems. It is as though the immune system of the Etheric Body is weakened through the activity of the negative thoughts, images and such, creating the conditions within the mental environment for viral contamination. The negative, circular thoughts – the thought viruses – are then free to multiple.

The comparison is very useful here. With our suggestions and experiments we are using love and acceptance and confidence to dispel the viral attack. To carry it further, antibodies are created with the introduction of positive thoughts and emotions into the suppressed immune system of the Mental or Etheric Body.

The negative viral front is neutralized and overcome by love, acceptance and confidence. To be sure, a healthy mental, motional and spiritual body is one that is nourished on love, acceptance and confidence, to the degree that these positive states of consciousness are the typical experiences of the embodied Soul.

Contacting the Energy Personality II

HYPOTHESIS: Our spirit guide is awaiting contact.

I hope you Blog Reader will become proficient as you go along, practicing in sequence as much as you can.

CONDUCT YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
I would like you the blog reader, just for a few moments, to relax and to close your eyes. This is easy to do. Quiet your mind. Think of a relaxing scene. Now Imagine that you have contact with that part of you that is all-knowing – for indeed you do. Ask for its name and you will receive it. It may take a few moments to achieve contact. It may take a few more minutes for the name of your Guide to come to you. Be patient.

The important thing is to have the expectation that we will achieve contact. And working from the loving aspect of consciousness always, this will keep you moving in the right direction. When you receive the name of your Energy Personality, you may sense that you are rekindling a past relationship, possibly dating back to you childhood or even beyond that into what you may term “past lives.”

This remembrance, along with the loving aspect, is a firm indication that we are indeed engaging your Spirit Guide. The excitement that comes with contact may throw you out of trance. Simply try it again after performing the Ritual of Sanctuary. This experiment can be done on a daily basis to strengthen the connection to your Energy Personality.

FINDINGS – Immediately document your findings.

Contacting the Energy Personality

PROOF: Proof is around us. Receiving information from a person who is unconscious. These types of communications will be commonplace in just a few years in our reality. This will be so, partly, because we will be educating the public on how to develop these communications. Again, the closer you look at your perceived reality – the Personal Reality Field that you co-create with All That Is according to your beliefs – the more validation you receive for what I have been saying to mankind/womankind for decades in these Blog writings.

Each moment of perceived reality serves as a graphic example of the manifestation of thought into Physicality, Which is related to the Soul, will be the etheric teacher to those of us who are to experience the transition into the Unity of Consciousness Dimension with our “eyes wide open.” We will have read my blogs or received messages from other Energy Personalities and we will have acted on the advice given us.

Many of us, without recognizing the fact, have already been given instruction on the use of our Inner Senses, what to expect in the Fourth Dimension, how to move beyond fear and anger and into love and confidence and other subjects of great importance. In dream state we are being “brought up to speed” by those of us who teach on the subtle levels. And so now we are reading this blog and perhaps having a singular sense of familiarity, Deja Vu, as though we have done this before, with accompanying feelings of pleasure, “elementary ecstasy”.

Our world is larger and more complex than we know – our world meaning our created reality. We have physical teachers and we have “metaphysical” teachers, all of us, and now it is time to introduce us to the metaphysical Guides who have been with us since birth into our dimension.

When we ask for our Energy Personality to come forth into our awareness, we may feel that sense of familiarity. For even though we have been pretending that ghosts do not exist even since our childhood ended – adults do not have imaginary friends, after all – on a deeper level we will recognize these connections. Now we may not be willing to admit these relationships to the world because of fear of being exposed.

However, and to illustrate my point, currently a cycle in human consciousness is coming to an end and a new cycle is beginning. We are gradually becoming aware of our connections to our Guides, our Simultaneous Lives, and other energy forms within our Gestalt of Awareness.

We need only to look at the headlines in our daily newspapers to notice how many changes are upon us in our Third-Dimensional Reality. With the ending of an era comes dramatic change amid much clinging, by some, to outmoded belief systems. Yet know this: the more we cling to the past, the more likely we will be regulated to the past when the transition is complete. The new world for humanity is being created in the dream state by all of us as we participate in the manifestation of our collective consciousness.

In our dream state, we freely collaborate with our Energy Personality and other Guides in the creation of incipient Reality Constructs that are manifested on awakening. This is how we create our reality with All That Is. Naturally, this phenomenon is much more complicated than I have Described, but that does not mean that we cannot grasp it experientially.

POSITIVE THINKING

In conclusion to this blog series, we shall have success in creating positive realities to the degree that we hold positive thoughts within our mental environment. This habit of positive thinking is our foundation for the creation of an improved Personal Reality. Now as you know, you are ONE with all of humanity through the interconnectedness of the Consciousness Units. And so, as you do your part here, and others of like mind and behavior do theirs, the whole of humanity is influenced in a very positive fashion.

Keep a good thought Dear Blog Reader. Nourish Loving Understanding and Courage within your consciousness. Challenge the toxic status quo reality with your powerful thoughts of forgiveness and compassion.

Our world is on the verge of a breakthrough into multidimensional perception. We may assist others by leading through example in all that we say and do. Regardless of our perceived “faults,” regardless of any history we may have of creating negative realities for ourselves and others, we may in this current moment set the stage for future continuous positive reality reactions, for our own sake, and certainly for the sake of all beings that share the planet with us.

Cultivating Synchronicity

HYPOTHESIS: You may anticipate, create and sustain coincidental events within your personal reality field.

In this experiment you will attempt to intentionally create coincidental events within your Personal Reality Field. This experiment is most easily conducted when you are experiencing the coincidental events in your current Moment Point. As you gain experience in observing your consciousness and the synchronous events you participate in, it will become easier to anticipate coincidental events. You will be able to sense them coming to you from the future.

Now you are creating these future events from your current moment, you see. As you are experiencing the wonder, awe and amusement that comes with this type of experience, you will be pleasantly motivated to continue with your research. Remember that you may use your powers of intent to extend these feelings and these events for some time.

CONDUCTING YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Pick out anything in your field of perception. For example: say to yourself that the bird in the tree in front of you will now be a part of a coincidental event with something else in your Personal Reality Field. Quite soon after this inner declaration, watch your environment closely for the coincidental experience.

You are using your imagination to create a synchronous event, you see, that will then be fabricated out of Conscious Units for your viewing within your Personal Reality. You may then “expect” a third synchronous event to materialize, and so on. This is very much like child’s play, and is quite a fun way to spend a few minutes of your day.

FINDINGS– Document your findings

Recognizing Special Impulses

HYPOTHESIS: Some thoughts are special impulses from our simultaneous lives.

This experiment is one that we can do on an ongoing basis as we go about our life, doing those things that we normally do, engaged in the mundane experiences of our existence. Some of us may have noticed that much of this life is lived in a rote fashion, by habit, almost as if in a dream. Then something occurs in our consciousness to pull us out of the habitual pattern.

A sudden thought might occur to you the blog reader, that you can easily change your course somewhat and experience a new avenue of exploration in your life. Now this impulse might be quite simple, as simple as changing the type of breakfast cereal you eat. Or this fleeting idea might urge you to consider breaking off a relationship that has been negative for some time.

Often these ideas can present new opportunities to your awareness, so that in retrospect, perhaps after several months or years, you realize that your acting on the impulse had the effect of completely transforming your life. You are amazed at how the alternate path taken had set up a series of alternate events that led to a uniquely different, and often more positive and life-affirming outcome, than had you continued on your habitual path of experience.

It is these special impulses we will be exploring in this experiment. These may indeed be impulse for your Simultaneous Lives, offering you suggestions for creating more productive Reality Constructs in your life.

CONDUCT YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Now use your relaxation techniques to create a relaxed state with your body. There are two approaches to recognizing special impulses: First, you may work your way back in time from the present regarding a special impulse that you noticed and acted upon which spun you off into a new, positive direction. You can then see the context of influences you were in that created this catalyst for action.

Then recreate this context in your present moment – emotional content, physical circumstances – through use of the imagination. Consider these special impulses within your consciousness NOW that may be these messages from other parts of yourself. Write them down. Act on them if appropriate using your free will.

Second, if you cannot think of a special impulse you have acted upon, simply relax into your meditation and ask for the special impulses to present themselves to your awareness. Then write them down and either act on them or not. This practice leads to experiences of synchronicity, wonder, amusement and awe.

FINDINGS- Document your findings rigorously.

Discovering the Inner Senses

HYPOTHESIS: The intuitive senses may be strengthened through use.

And so what are these Inner Senses? Briefly, they are both the creators and the perceiving apparatus of our world. In our Third-Dimensional existence, we create out of Consciousness Units our physical realities, and then instantaneously perceive our creations as a form of feedback of this endeavor, the creations of the worlds.

In past Blogs I have often informed of our god status. It is difficult for us humans to take seriously this talk of godlike abilities, for many of us have been indoctrinated by our various religions to be meek, to be mild, to obey. And as I have stated in my previous blogs, after transferring our power to our religions, we then transferred our power to our governing institutions and to our scientists.

What I suppose here in this blog is that we are not meek, mild and obedient unless we truly wish to be so. We are whoever we THINK we are and we have the power in this moment to completely change who we are. That is because YOU are at the center of your world as the ultimate creative force. With the energy of All That Is, we as co-creator do indeed manifest from our beliefs and ideas of what is possible, our perceived reality.

Now, without further lecturing, we will give a short description of the experiment. It builds upon a short described in my earlier blogs in which I asked the Blog Reader to get a sense of the wonder of their own Personal Reality. Here we will take it further. We will be taking the senses back into the inner world.

As I suggested , the physical senses grew out of the Inner Senses, of necessity, to perceive the exterior, physical Universe. The Inner Senses from which these outer, physical senses were derived, are awaiting our discovery and use within our mental environment.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
We have several physical senses: sight, hearing, taste, touch and smell. Our Senses are complementary to these out senses, yet they go beyond the physical senses in capabilities.

For example: let us get a feel for the Inner Sense that may be a complement to the outer sense of sight. You may relax a bit for this experiment, yet you needn’t close your eyes. We will be relying on your sense of physical sight to conduct this experiment.

With the eyes open, yet with the relaxation and contentment that comes with the state of Sanctuary you are embodying, can you see the deeper, perhaps symbolic meanings entailed in Personal Reality Field? Remember here: everything in your field of perception is a reflection of an interior reality.

As you consider this statement, you may find that your visual field begins to swirl a bit, as the etheric blends with the exterior. Go with this flow of blending transformation for a few moments until you have observed noteworthy findings. Gradually come back to your physical perceived world. Naturally you may experiment further with the compliments to the other senses to gain more information.

FINDINGS– Document your findings

INTENTION

Opening up to one’s greater reality simply by affirming it. That is how one does it: with our thoughts, just like everything else in our reality. Have the intention that we are opening up to these Simultaneous Lives of which we are speaking, and soon enough, proof of their reality will be presented to us.

Now, without belaboring the example, it was IMPULSE that I decided to transcribe my Blog material into a more readable format. My intuitive voice spoke to me and promised that much of value and interest could be recovered if I were to do so. So where did this voice come from?

In my case it was from my ancestor personally, though this is by no means the rule in these phenomena. My ancestor reached across the time-frames into my future, to communicate with me and motivate me. Now this may sound fantastic to some of you. Indeed it will remain unbelievable and so un-witnessed by you in your own realities. The following experiments may help you prove to yourselves that you are ALREADY active participants in the non-physical reality.

WITCHCRAFT

The experience of Astral Travel, as some have called it, is quite common among us. It is a refreshing experience, after having say, engaged in a difficult day at our job, to simply cast off from the physical, even while engaged in other activities with our fellow humans, and travel the subtle levels.

Gentle Persistence

I would like to emphasize that in these matters of Soul exploration, you can be quite successful with a gentle, yet persistent effort. Your initial experiments in accessing your Inner Senses are an exercise in subtlety. Approach these activities with any eye on gradual results over time. The clouds, in most instances, do not part and reveal the Etheric Visions to us, after only a few attempts in your experience in the field.

I realize that this subtle route to discovery may be difficult for those of us who have expectation of immediate results. Some of us may be of mind that, like everything else in our Western world of mass-consumption, if it is not forthcoming immediately, on our schedule, because we have so much “to do,” that it might not be worth attempting.

To these blog readers I say, take the time necessary to accomplish your goals in this Soul Work. One of our sayings extols the virtues of waiting with patience for the truly beneficial aspects of our life to materialize.

And honestly, the days of instantaneous manifestation are still in our perceived future. These experiments will give us an advantage for the time when we will be experienced enough to use our Inner Senses appropriately for the instantaneous manifestation of Reality Constructs.

Now once again I would remind that all of these experiments are designed to lead to the uncovering and practical use of our Inner Senses. And these Inner Senses are what we may broadly term “Intuition.”

In past blog writings I have lectured on how the intuition can be divided into separate senses and I did indeed name them. I sense that it may have been a mistake to do so, for it is now I waiting for my blog readers to make practical use of the Inner Senses and allow each blog reader to do whatever delineation they may, as they discover the attributes of these senses for themselves – again, learning by doing, and perhaps creating their own names for their experiences.

Moment Point

We can share our ancestor’s Point of Power experiences as one is working with the written material, organizing it on a computer and so on. this is a literal fact. Astounding as it may be to some blog readers, this type of things goes on continuously in our own private lives.

We “leave the body,” to coin a phrase, and travel interdimensionally to participate in these activities. Often we can do so while carrying on a conversation with one of our fellow humans and appear quite normal. Our eyes may glaze over a bit; an indication that we are traveling and experiencing other time-frames.

Now, our scientists may characterize this as pathological, dissociation, fantasy, escape; completely missing the importance of what is occurring.

I don’t want to go off on one of my critiques here, but let me say this: until our scientists can learn to turn their empirical noses inwardly, they will not be able to sniff out one iota of truth regarding human consciousness, or the human condition or the human Soul.

Your Simultaneous Lives

Simultaneous Lives are engage in this continuous exchange of impulses and energy I am describing. As you can see, you are at the heart of this reciprocal activity. You occupy the center in your Gestalt of Consciousness: the energy network that comprises the receiving and sending of impulse energies between your current self and all of your other selves past, present and future.

This very basic activity of consciousness rests within a framework that is totally dependent on the loving and creative energies of All That Is. And the culmination of all of these energies within your individual consciousness at any one moment, can be described as “the activity of the conscious mind.”

Should you wish to consider these ideas while using the illustration as a meditation focus piece, you may perceive for yourself more intimate meanings than any of my explanations can provide.

Special Impluses

In my previous blog, I provided an illustration for you on how to send out energy – positive, loving energy – to Simultaneous Lives. In the experiment you will be “completing a circuit” by discerning with your awareness, when entering your consciousness. This is not hard to do. As I have just mentioned, in each vying for your attention. These impulses, however, the special impulses I am now discussing, are easily recognizable for what they are, by virtue of their obvious loving utility.

When one of these impulses is recognized, you have an immediate sense of rightness, as though you wonder why it took so long for the idea to come around. These ideas are also based in a truly loving aspect of consciousness that is undeniable. In essence, this loving energy is the energy of All That Is transmitted through your various Simultaneous Lives, and then captured by you as your consciousness participates in the Gestalt of Awareness that is you and your many lives past, present and future.

These impulses may be accompanied by synchronous events and a sense of wonder and divine bemusement. Everything comes together in your life drama for the benefit of your learning experience. These synchronicities and thus the life lessons may be brought into your awareness intentionally.

So you Blog Reader, when engaged in this dialogue with your Simultaneous Lives, are receiving the benefits of learning experience from the personalities who are LIVING these many lives. In fact, just as I communicate to educate and inform humanity on the very, very serious issue of the survival of the species – and for the matter the planet Earth – these communiques from your Simultaneous Lives in the form of impulses serve to educate and inform the Blog Reader, of a personal level with regards to appropriate action you can take to improve your life.

I would like to restate my point regarding these types of messages and all messages from you Higher Self: these messages are benign  and loving in their intent and that is how you can tell they are from your Higher Self. And as always, free will is operative; you can choose to act on or ignore these impulses.

Inspiration

Generally, it is quite easy for those of us in this land and  some of the other industrialized nations, to think of ourselves as individuals. The pioneer influence is felt by many of us in our cultures and so we fancy ourselves as independent explorers of our personal domains.

And so it follows that we feel as though our mental life is our own, and then even though privacy in the personal and business fields of endeavor is rapidly being lost, at least our thoughts are our own, if what we define as “thoughts” are “the greater elements of human mentality.”

Yet our thoughts are not truly our own, in this pioneer sense. In the great Gestalt of Consciousness I have been describing to us, the thoughts of our Simultaneous Lives past, present and future are being received by us, as well as the thoughts and suggestions of Beings of Light, the negative transmissions of Nefarious Entities and the telepathic thoughts of our fellow humans.

Our thoughts are alive. Each of our thoughts, including the thought-forms transmitted into our consciousness by Energy Bodies and our fellow humans, has a propensity for creating itself in physical reality. And because our human thoughts have distinct properties – such as a “desire” to associate with other similar thoughts, and an energetic ability to transcend space and time – our thoughts can be considered to be the most powerful Energy Constructs in our system of reality.

However, unfortunately for most of us, we begin our lives on Earth by surrendering our powers of thought-creation and manifestation to individuals and institutions. And so we are taught to create with our powerful thoughts, the Reality Constructs of the institutions – family, church, business, country – in which we participate.

Many of us abandon our loving, altruistic visions in childhood, therefore, and it may be that you the Blog Reader are only now remembering the idealism of our early manifestation activities. These activities may have included collaborations with imaginary playmates.

Now I shall discuss this further, this topic of childhood Spirit Guides, in future Blogs. For now simply note that there are a host of potential relationships with “Imaginable” beings available to us within the sphere of our personal consciousness.

Impulses

Impulses are indeed inspirational and creative as we recognize them and use them in the creation of our world. But as we have discussed, many in our world regard these impulses as “voices of the devil,” or at the least, untidy remnants of pathology to be surprised and ignored. To be sure, within this vast chorus of telepathic transmissions, the Negative Entities also vie for attention.

But it is a simple matter to protect oneself with our own positive affirmative thoughts when exploring these areas of consciousness. Surrounding oneself with “white light” is a very effective precaution to take before our explorations or meditations. In this way, we focus our attention on the positive and look, we find the positive creative impulses coming into view. This is all simple Metaphysics. We get what we focus one. We create our reality

Accepted and Rejected Fields of Reality

A critical and necessary aspect of Reality Creation is what we will call the concept of Accepted and Rejected Fields of Reality. Simply put, our beliefs determine what we accept or reject as part of our Personal Reality Field. Another way to express this idea is that each of us, as the thematic structures of our belief system. Moment-to- moment, we accept from innumerable probabilities, those that complement our ongoing Personal Reality Field. We act upon these probabilities and so bring them from the potential and probable into the realm of the possible and actual. Our Personal Reality develops staying power and permanence in this way.

This concept of Accepted and Rejected Fields can be used to explain how our belief system changes as we learn our lessons in Third-Dimensional reality. For example: let us examine a person who may be new to matters spiritual. They are a male or female who has lived a very material life. Their main activities are shopping and watching television. They have not reproduced or built a network of family or friends.

This may describe many millions of the inhabitants of our Western world. We could say that their Accepted Field of Reality, the Personal Reality they have known and can come to expect in the future, is one of robotic existence. The inner life is not examined here to any degree. This is simply the way it is for them.

But let us suppose that the Higher Self of one of these people creates an opportunity for going within, to perhaps briefly meet the Soul Self. Divine information is streamed into the consciousness of this person. Let us say this has the effect of motivating them to take a walk in the forest rather spending the day watching television. As this person walks in the forest, they participate in the exchange of energies with the vibrant, life-affirming aspects of the forest environment. This may have the effect of revitalizing and spiritualizing this person, to the degree that they would want to make this activity a regular part of their existence.

Do you see how the chosen activity of walking in the forest, merely one of an infinite number of probable activities, acts to bring new life to this person? Perhaps this is part of their lessons they have come to Earth to learn. Perhaps they are to seek out empowering activities in nature that will expand their consciousness and serve to spin them off onto a different, more life-affirming trajectory than their current life path.

Now, this is of course greatly simple, this example, for the accepting or rejecting of individual probable actions, ideas and images is infinitely more complex. To bring in the computer analogy here for a moment: the process would be similar to the function of the world’s most powerful computer. This theoretical computer would be able to make an infinite amount of choices from among an infinite array of probabilities each second. In our previous example, each choice would serve to complement and endorse and continually verify the belief system. And the activity of walking in the forest, done over time, is moving from a Rejected Field of Reality to an Accepted Field of Reality. It is being incorporated into the Personal Reality Field.

Our Inner World

Everyone has an “inner life,” whether they acknowledge it or not. All of us are involved in the great dramas and subliminal activities of the underworld of human consciousness. Memories of these experiences are carried out with us from sleep and we my marvel at the peculiar symbols of this material. Yet this non-physical universe is ALWAYS ON, despite our knowing or unknowing of its reality.

In our waking hours, as we go about our work-a-day world behaviors, this unknown reality of the spirit continues to unfold beyond our physical senses. Indeed, it is this etheric counterpart to our physical reality that lives life to our “normal” waking hours perceptions. The two work together, in other words – the waking and the sleeping times realities – to present to us for our edification, the life lessons we have incarnated to learn.

Now, to get a sense for this complementary non-physical reality, all we must do is present a line of inquiry to oneself, while in a relaxed and open state of mind. This non-physical reality is “waiting in the wings,” to enter into our particular life-drama that we are experiencing.

As I have hinted at in these new blogs, most of us who are reading this material are doing so for a purpose; that is, to catalyze the use of our Inner Senses. In this way, we will be receiving a preview of what is to be humanity’s next perceptual breakthrough – an exploration of the Unity of Consciousness Dimension.

So our inner world will be making itself known to the outer, in a way never before experienced by humankind. And we have the opportunity of learning about this new land beforehand, so that if we feel called upon to do so, we may assist in the awakening of others. Now let us speak of the creation of the new realities that will bridge inner to outer worlds.

THE INDIVIDUAL IS IMPORTANT

I refer the blog reader to our blog series on Soul Evolution for a discussion on the value of the individual human consciousness in the collective conversation that we are calling the Telepathic Network. One person can truly make a difference here in this Consensus Reality.

It could well be our single Loving thought – expressed in the telepathic conversation – that could tip the scales to the positive manifestation. Imagine how powerful our Loving thoughts could be when joined by hundreds, thousands, millions of other Loving thoughts directed intentionally by LOVERS of our Mother Earth.

There is certainly power in numbers in these matters. And that is what it shall take… huge numbers of Lovers of the Earth using their powerful thoughts of creation on the subtle levels to creative positive realities.

So individual is important. The individual expression of Loving energy directed toward the creation of a positive reality – world peace for example – is what will save us from ourselves. All of our thoughts of Love are acknowledged, you see. Each Loving thought matters. They have a cumulative effect also, so that a momentum is built over time, such that the creation of the positive reality might well become inevitable.

Incidentally, in recent years we have used our Loving thoughts in concerted ways to make profound changes in our waking realities. Great disasters were averted. Calamities that would have claimed many hundreds of thousands of lives were “de-energized” and so were not manifested.

It is true that our world has seen recent Earth Changes that entailed great loss of life. What I am suggesting is that there was the potential for many more disasters to occur entailing many more casualties. As a consensus of reality creators, then, you and our fellow occupants of the planet agreed to manifest and then did manifest an altered reality. We saved ourselves, you see.

This phenomenon happens quite often, though we do not realize it for we are not yet awakened fully. We do not yet acknowledge our full creative powers. However, we soon shall

Connecting with the Mystery Civilizations

HYPOTHESIS: Current interests may illustrate lives in the Mystery Civilizations.

Using the methods from a previous experiment, consider which of the Mystery Civilizations you may have resided in. There have been others not mentioned in this blog that you will put on your list. Just get a sense of where your interests have been over the years of your current life. Are you an engineer type or a scientist? Are you a nurturer and yet also a leader?

With the knowledge of what type of personality you are currently, consider which of the Mystery Civilizations you may have lived within, that could serve to complement your personality and interests. In past blogs I have established for you several families of consciousness.

With this in mind – that you may be a participant in a family of consciousness and that you share traits with others in this family – yet without creating unnecessary dogma around it, as I may have done in the past – I would invite you to consider the Mystery Civilizations that most suit your temperament and personality and put them on your list.

CONDUCT YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
As before, create your relaxed state and go through your list. Visualize the possibilities of life within these civilizations. For you it may be as though you are watching a motion picture, or perhaps a particular feeling tone will serve to direct you. The Sumari language is very distinctive, perhaps you will hear some dialogue from a possible existence in GA.

“You will know it when you see it or hear it.” Watch and listen. Continue this line or inquiry for as long as you wish, without of course, trying to find something that is not there. When you sense that the experiment is over for the time being, gradually come to full-waking consciousness.

FINDINGS – Document your findings.

The Inner Senses

First the word “inner” may be somewhat confusing, as there is no inner or outer in the true reality of our world, but we use the term to distinguish the Inner Senses from what we call our outer, physical senses. Perhaps “Non-Physical Senses” would be a better term.

The answer is, we are already, to a vastly greater degree than most, using our Non-Physical Senses – intuition if you prefer. When we ask a question and we “go and get”, we are using these senses. We are navigating our inner world when we do these activities and in the world we will find different environments, signs and symbols, than we will find in our exterior world.

Each person is different in how they use these Non-Physical senses and the results they get through these perceptive means are also unique to the individual. Now this is good, this creative use of perception, in that All That Is may experience the greatest articulation of emotion, memory, behavior and the like.

Perhaps I am taking the long way around this answer, but this is simply a prelude to a deeper investigation that we will embark upon as we create the new blog material.

Daily Forecasting & Projections of Consciousness

HYPOTHESIS:
You can prove to yourself that you create your physical reality in the dream state.

Try this experiment upon awakening from sleep in the morning. I specifically say morning, because in the early morning hours one has one foot in the etheric and one foot in the physical. This is the perfect time to witness the manifestation phenomenon.

CONDUCT YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Before sleeping give yourself a suggestion to linger in the state in between sleeping and waking the following morning or when ever you will awaken. Then as you are just coming out of sleep and your suggestion is taking hold, and you are lingering and enjoying it, make a few predictions for yourself on what is going to transpire in your “future” day. Suggest to yourself that you will remember these predictions on fully awakening.

When you awaken, write down your forecast for your day. Naturally, the next step would be to go on with your day and notice positive correlations between the items on your forecast and the events in your day. Now, do this for a period of time, as a scientist would, and keep a dairy of your experiences.

Note here that the correlations denote more than precognitions. They may confirm for you, the waking Soul, that you are experiencing the reality you have just created in the dream state.

With your experiments in forecasting on a daily basis, you will be intimately exposed to the concept of probabilities like never before. The sharpening of the intuition, indeed, is done through an appreciation for the qualities and behavior of probabilities on a personal level in your own life. Probable paths chosen or ignored are the building blocks, so to speak, of your existence.

This is a critical point, I think, and so perhaps an example is needed for clarity. Suppose you are at a crossroads of sorts. You are faced with a decision that you must make that will have a great influence on the direction your life will take afterwards. For instance: suppose your job is being moved to another state or another country. Your decision to stay or leave for the distant job site will establish a completely different trajectory of life experiences for you and your family.

Now, with appreciation of probabilities and some knowledge of the concept of Moment Points and the other ideas we have been discussing in my previous blogs, you can make far better decisions in these matters.

After conducting your Ritual of Sanctuary, you could use a projection of consciousness down the two or three possible trajectories of probability. In a relaxed state, you could visualize the outcome, further down the road, of each probable decision.

First, imagine what would occur after a decision to accept the position offered in another state or country. What would the moment-to-moment, day-to-day aftereffects of that decision manifest for you? Fill in the details with emotion and color as best you can.

Now mentally return to your current timeframe and imagine the aftereffects to stay in your current location, and perhaps find a job with another firm, or perhaps even starting your own business right where you are now. When you sense that your experiment is complete, gently return to fully-awakened consciousness

Connecting with Your “Historical” Past

Current interests may illustrate lives in preceding eras.

I believe that we have set the stage adequately with our discussion of the origins of humanity as to where we have been in terms of our preceding many thousands of years. This brings so to our present. From this vantage point we can see how each of the readers of this blog has participated in these events: being spun off from All That Is and being born as babies and raised in some or all of the Mystery Civilizations of Earth. Now this leaves us still looking backwards from our present into the ages after these civilizations and leading up to our current incarnations within our modern timeframe.

A very simple way to conduct research into this intermediary phase is to consider, individually Dear Blog Reader, what eras in our Earth’s historical past we identify with or feel deeply attached to, as if we had spent sometimes or even a lifetime in these historical timeframes. This is a potent method of consciousness expansion.

Before we enact our Ritual of Sanctuary, make a list of historical eras we enjoy reading about it books or depicted in motion pictures. Do we feel a sense of nostalgia here? Do you feel a sense of longing, as though we are away from our home? If we do, these eras may merit exploration in this experiment. we may wish to scan history books for ideas, using our intuition to guide us. When we have our list of eras at hand….

CONDUCT YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Now access you state of relaxation using whatever technique you have found useful. To repeat the phrase, “I am light,” may be helpful. When we are sensing our world in a light and relaxed manner, consider our list of eras one-by-one, and visualize the possibility of your having lived a life within these timeframes. Now often it will appear quite obvious that you are going in the right direction here. You may have a sense of loving acceptance with a re-living of experiences from these possible past existences. Make a mental note to remember this information. When you have finished your list, gently return to your waking consciousness.

FINDINGS- Document your experiences.

BLEED-THROUGHS

Bleed-throughs can be glimpses of probable roads not taken and so not actualized. For the most part, as I said, in these bleed-through experiences we are connecting with aspects of our Simultaneous Lives.

In the Unity of Consciousness Dimension we will be aware of all of our existences past, present and future and we will be able to remember them and hold those memories. Now, currently our consciousness – and by this I mean the consciousness of Western mankind/womankind – is just beginning to learn how to navigate these regions.

Part of this learning experience is discovering how to “hold” these perceptive bleed-throughs in our consciousness without resorting to fear, denial, etc. These experiences will be momentary, therefore, until the Inner Senses are adequately developed, and skills at creating love and confidence out of fear and anger are mastered.

We are not given more than we can deal with in any particular instance here. It is an individual learning curve with each of us as we learn to acknowledge our Energy Personalities and begin to expand our perceptions with the help of these Guides.

Lemuria

We have covered GA and Atlantis. We will now discuss Lemuria. This civilization is quite active on our planet Earth, yet like others, is flourishing within adjacent dimensions. Now as an intriguing aside to our presentation here, many anomalous phenomena we experience in our timeframe – ghost, monsters of various types, space beings – are simply our perceptions of momentary openings – portals if you will – into these other dimensions.

Lemuria the civilization is the stimulus in our human consciousness – collective consciousness – for ideas about underground people. Thus, in our fairy tales we have trolls and other fascinating types of creatures who pop out of the ground to engage in discussions with humans, only to “disappear” back into Earth.

Now it is true, in a sense, that this civilization can be thought of as subterranean, yet that is simply where the Lemurian dimension is located in our Earthly intersection of space and time. To the Lemurians it is us, the surface inhabitants of Earth, who are peculiar in our occupation of the “upper” dimensions of the Lemurian world.

The people of Lemuria are excellent dreamers. They pay much attention to their dream activities and appreciate the connections to the waking physical world. They spend a greater amount of time sleeping than do the inhabitants of our Third-Dimensional world.

We often experience their dreams as momentary waking visions, or fantastic dreams if we are asleep. Humans of the Third-Dimension and the subterranean Lemurians share elements of consciousness, therefore, and if we are patient and perceptive, we may identify these bleed-throughs in our own consciousness when they occur.

The underworld people have been the subject of many visitations by shamans and other travelers of the Etheric Realms for centuries on our world. To go into the Earth seeking visions is to invite meetings with these people. Now they have a markedly different appearance than their surface colleagues. I cannot tell specifies, as I wish you to discover these for your self.

However, I can say that our descriptions of Nature Spirits, the Green Man, Elementals and others are highly accurate. Different physical locations beneath the surface reveal different articulations of the subterranean life forms, just as the different races of humanity are “products” of the different surface conditions on our Earth.

Atlantean Healing

I might add that the people of Atlantis had a unique healing system that utilized color and sound. Prismatic colors and natural as well as “synthesized” sounds and colors, were used by members of the healing caste to effect cures of various diseases.

Environmental or ambient sounds may be “captured” by one’s consciousness and brought into the problem area to heal the body through “resonance.”

The healers of Atlantis were actually facilitators of the healing process within individuals. These techniques were similar to our modern hypnosis methods. The subject was led through prescribed visualization journeys to access “the healer within.” The power of healing was thought to lie within the Great Power: The Divine or Sacred Energy of Life.

Members of the healing caste were in touch with what we are referring to in these writings as the Energy Personality. They were experts in facilitating contact and communication with the Energy Personalities of these they were assisting. The work was very similar to what we are attempting in this current project Blog.

Atlantis the Technological Power

Atlantis is a society that lingers on the edges of our mass consciousness, almost as a dream. Our people’s attraction to the story of Atlantis has to do with the similarities between our cultures. Now without interfering in our evolution, I might say that the similarities revolve around issues of Power with a capital P, the ethical uses of mental technologies and the spirituality question: that is, how does a society protect the open manifestation of spiritual ideas? I trust we may intuit further “talking points” from my humble description.

The greatest technological achievement of the Atlantis civilization – the one that helped create great benefits for the people and advanced the growth of society – was the use of human bio-electric energy in series. The telepathic networks between individuals were used to transmit and magnify human cellular energy. This bio-electric power was then stored in crystals and some special structures made for this purpose. These “batteries” could then power the devices the people used in their daily existences.

Much as modern humans are dependent on electricity from power plants, the Atlanteans required a connection to the storage units that held the energy. This connection was a mental one. The psychic networks that we in our current timeframe are just now beginning to explore and validate, were used in Atlantis in very sophisticated ways. Ordinary human beings could connect to this network mentally and immediately receive the energy transmission, which they would then direct the energy to their devices. I am sorry that I cannot be more forth-coming with this information.

Children Of Atlantis

The stories of Atlantis and other mystery civilizations. As a child, we enjoyed movies with Atlantis as the subject matter. We have read books on the topic throughout our life. We are drawn to this “myth” as are many of our fellow humans in our timeframe. There are reasons for this attraction. WE are “Children of Atlantis,” in a very literal sense: “children, ” in that we have a tendency, as a species, to not want to learn our lessons. I am speaking of he spiritual lessons that we came to our planet to learn. And we are from Atlantis, that is true, a civilization that reached the highest station in technological achievement, only to destroy itself trough misuse of these capabilities. This is of necessity a greatly over-simplified explanation, for Atlantis is as much in our future as our past.

Now, as an aside, previously I have suggested that humanity is indeed headed down the wrong path with regards to the development and use of nuclear technologies. And this is the arena in which mankind/womankind, particularly in the industrialized nations of Earth, will either go the way of the Atlanteans and cut short their evolution in childhood, or begin to make the right decisions as a loving collective and mature into responsible stewards as co-creators with All That Is. I do not wish to be like some scary monster storyteller with this information, but hear me now: the situation on earth is very, very critical. It becomes more dangerous with each passing day as we create this Blog. The nuclear question, however we must only look at some of our Earth’s spiritual traditions, to get an indication of what will inevitably befall us if we continue on our course. The prophecies of these scriptures speak of great fires and catastrophes, and indeed these will occur if humankind does not change its ways. In these same traditions there are writings on how to avoid the cataclysms brought on by greed, ignorance, fear and anger.

Please understand that humans at all points of our Earth are being brought up closer to the light in these current years. The people are being educated in their own tongues and with images from their own spiritual and religious teachings.

Children of Atlantis

We are “Children of Atlantis,” in a very literal sense: “children,” in that we have a tendency, as a species, to not want to learn our lessons. I am speaking of the spiritual lessons that we came to our planet to learn. And we are from Atlantis, that is true, a civilization that reached the highest station in technological achievement, only to destroy itself through misuse of these capabilities. This is of necessity a greatly over-simplified explanation, for Atlantis is as much in our future as our past, as I have said.

Now, as an aside, humanity is indeed headed down the wrong path with regards to the development and use of nuclear technologies. And this is the arena in which mankind, particularly in the industrialized nations of Earth, will either go the way of the Atlanteans and cut short their evolution in childhood, or begin to make the right decisions as a loving collective and mature into responsible stewards as co-creators with All That Is.

I do not wish to be like some scary monster storyteller with this information, but hear me now: the situation on Earth is very, very critical. It becomes more dangerous with each passing day as we create this blog. The nuclear question, however we must only look at some of our Earth’s spiritual traditions, to get an indication of what will inevitably befall us if we continue on our course.

The prophecies of these scriptures speak of great fires and catastrophes, and indeed these will occur if humankind does not change its ways. In these same traditions there are writings on how to avoid the cataclysms brought on by greed, ignorance, fear and anger. In a way, my teaching is similar to these ancient – in our terms – Blogs.

Please understand that humans at all points of our Earth are being brought up closer to the light in these current years. The people are being educated in their own tongues and with images from their own spiritual and religious teachings.

People Power

The multisensory image of numbers of people lying down on the ground, head to foot, in series, in a grid and somehow this generate power.

It reveals the fundamental power of the culture: they harnessed thought and used the collective power of human mentality – telepathy – to create our world consciously. This is where we are headed in the future if we utilize ideas.

GA The Matriarchy

Let us discuss first the least known of these civilizations: GA, a civilization from our Third-Dimensional existence, eight-thousand years before our Christian era. This society spread over much of our European world and was governed by women with men in primarily administrative and physically creative roles.

Many of us have passed through this civilization experiencing roles as males or females within this society that honored the female aspects of consciousness. The men created physical objects, built homes and other constructs. Now the men were not demeaned here. It was a different concept. Men and women were fulfilled in their roles. There was no “Battle of the sexes,” as we have currently. Cooperation was the watchword, the goal of all relationships.

GA, as we shall refer to this matriarchal civilization, was a society based on loving appreciation for one’s fellow participants in the culture. In many ways, just as our American society is an experiment in multi-culturally – the melting pot – GA was an experiment in a society based on love.

As the Sumari influence was strong in this culture. The Language was primarily Sumari, a language based on love and unconditional acceptance of others, both within the family and outside the family. The loving essence of each person was noted, respected and cultivated in relationships.

Yet as time goes by, in our current timeframe, “discoveries” will be made by archaeologists and other scientists using their Inner Senses to guide them. These discoveries will lead to a complete reinterpretation of the historical record pertaining to civilizations from our perceived past.

Now it may seem obvious that some of our current legends regarding matriarchal societies came from the GA civilization we are describing. This is quite true. These colorful tales of tribes and full societies of empowered creative women enter our collective consciousness via bleed-throughs, just as described earlier in these blogs.

Because our future and past are created NOW, in our current Moment Point, individually and collectively, the full cellular memories of that civilization will be imprinted and “come to mind” when the probabilities for a matriarchal society can be entertained seriously in this present timeframe of ours. Do you see how it works, Dear Blog reader? You re the creator. Our creations are limited only by our imaginable and perceptual boundaries.

Encouragement And Caution

As I have said in earlier bogs, our human consciousness visits other time periods and participates in activities in other dimensions, even as we may be participating in our daily unremarkable activities. We are experts at vacating our human bodies and venturing forth into the unknown realities.

Our New Age metaphysical literature is quite filled with stories of angels, demons, extra-terrestrials and the like. So too do our motion picture business prosper through the creation of science fiction and fantasy movies. Yet does it surprise that these stories are “literally’ true?

Remember, Dear Blog reader, that it is our human consciousness that creates our reality in tandem with All That Is. And so the creativity of our artists, as well as our own, feeds and supports alternate dimensions. When we are experiencing these tales, either through reading books or watching movies or plays, we are submerged in the alternate dimensions for that time. So this is the simplest example of inter-dimensional travel.

With regards to the subject of contacting other entities in the Fourth Dimension, I must caution to certainly create your Ritual of Sanctuary and have this ritual memorized. As an explorer of these realms, we undoubtedly will encounter negative energy forms that may come into our consciousness and attempt to fix on our light. By this I mean Negative Entities can transmit a propensity for negative, repetitive thoughts or images entering our consciousness that can be difficult to undo.

We recognize these circular ideas or information loops as disturbing pangs of dread, and other negative emotions. They seem to come from nowhere. Actually these Negative Energies are attracted to specific memories and ideas we are holding in our mental environment that are of a negative nature: ideas and feeling of low self-worth, replays of past mistakes and all of the other negative inner experiences humans punish themselves with every day.

Now this is how the Negative Forces gain control over the minds of many in our world. They gain a stronghold in a sense, within the mental environment of those with weakened protection systems. It is as though the immune system of the Etheric Body is weakened through the activity of the negative thoughts, images and such, creating the conditions within the mental environment for viral contamination.

The negative, circular thoughts – the thought viruses – are then free to multiply. The comparison is very useful here. With our suggestions and experiments we are using love and acceptance and confidence to dispel the viral attack. To carry it further, antibodies are created with the introduction of positive thoughts and emotions into the suppressed immune system of the Metal or Etheric Body.

The negative viral front is neutralized and overcome by love, acceptance and confidence. To be sure, a healthy mental, emotional and spiritual body is one that is nourished on love, acceptance and confidence, to the degree that these positive states of consciousness are the typical experiences of the embodied Soul.

MAKING CONTACT

My advice is to not worry about who you are contacting, as long as you are receiving the loving aspect. The open-heart aspect of the communication denotes that you have made contact with the Energy Personality. You will know this feeling, in that it is love embodied. Love as an idea or an ideal is a mental construct.

The ecstasy I am describing is felt throughout the body. There is a sense of being pressed in by love so that you have a feeling of slight discomfort mixed in with the pleasurable emotion of love. You will know it when you feel it. It can be experienced as a wave of pleasant emotion, as I describe it, yet each of us will experience it in a different way. This is your Soul shining through. This is the experience of dropping the ego and allowing your Soul Self to perceive your world.

Now, we are on a path of development. All of us are at various stages of Soul Evolution. The difference becomes whether you acknowledge to yourself that you are ready to work with your Energy Personality and move FORWARD in development. By doing so, you catalyze the great powers within and without.

We focus our intent and with the assistance of All That Is, we take a divergent path; a path that will take us from sleep into awakening in a Soul sense. New positive probable futures arise from this intentional choice we make to co-create with All That Is a spiritually-informed existence.

LESSONS OF NEGATIVITY*

In this Blog series we shall hopefully provide you with the opportunity to address the most pressing and important Lessons for you in your current existence. Now truly ALL of our Lessons are “wisdom” Lessons, in that we experience Soul Evolution when we are engaged in learning these Lessons. So that the gaining of prosperity within a life of perceived lack and poverty, may be considered the gaining of wisdom, as well as the facing of perceived extremely difficult, traumatic material from your past may be considered the gaining of wisdom.

However, in this material we will attempt to provide you with the motivation you require to do what you must do in facing, your most difficult Lessons – the Lessons of Negativity, pain and suffering.

For I trust you would agree that the positive Lessons – of Love, of experiencing prosperity, of developing friendships – need much less motivation for the average human to engage in and “do the homework” required, than do the Lessons of Negativity. The Lessons of Love will take care of themselves over time. Whereas with the Lessons of Negativity, the primary reason have we not yet learned these Lessons is that we are indeed avoiding them.

WISDOM LESSONS

Some people seem to thrive and prosper within very challenging “negative” conditions.

We are reminding my blog readers – those that are experiencing these harsh conditions – that they have chosen these lives. Also, we are reminding them that they may be on the end of their incarnational trajectories, and may be headed for the higher realms. This may be a good motivation for some to begin using our techniques to transform the negativity they are experiencing into Courage and Loving Understanding. This Soul work is necessary before one may progress to the higher-dimensional realms.

The Energy Personality

The Energy Personality, which is related to the soul, will be the etheric teacher to Those of us who are to experience the transition into the Unity of Consciousness Dimension with our “eyes wide open.” Many, without recognizing the fact, have already been given instruction on the use of our Inner Senses, what to expect in the Fourth Dimension, how to move beyond fear and anger and into love and confidence and other subjects of great importance.

In the dream state we are being “brought up to speed” by those of us who teach on the subtle levels. And so now we are reading this blog and perhaps having a singular sense of familiarity, Deja Vu, as though we have done this before, with accompanying feelings of pleasure, “elementary ecstasy”. Our world is larger and more complex than we know – our world meaning our created reality.

We have physical teachers and we have “metaphysical” teachers, all of us, and now it is time to introduce the metaphysical Guides who have been with us since our birth into our dimension.

When we ask for our Energy Personality to come forth into our awareness, we may feel that sense of familiarity. For even though we have been pretending that ghosts do not exist ever since our childhood ended – adults do not have imaginary friends, after all – on a deeper level we will recognize these connections. Now we may not be willing to admit there relationships to the world because of fear of being exposed.

However, and to illustrate my point, currently a cycle in human consciousness is coming to an end and a new cycle is beginning. We are gradually becoming aware of our connections to our Guides, our Simultaneous Lives, and other energy forms within our Gestalt of Awareness.

We need only look at the headlines in our daily newspapers to notice how many changes are upon us in our Third-Dimensional reality. With the ending of an era comes dramatic change amid much clinging, by some, to outmoded belief systems. Yet know this: the more we cling to the past, the more likely we will be relegated to the past when the transition is complete.

The new world for humanity is being created in the dream state by all of us as we participate in the manifestation of our collective consciousness.

In our dream state, we freely collaborate with our Energy Personality and other Guides in the creation of incipient Reality Constructs that are manifested on awakening. This is how we create our reality with All That Is. Naturally, this phenomenon is much more complicated than described, but that does not mean that we cannot grasp it experientially. Please see experiments in previous blogs.

Inter-Dimensional Travel

To go “back in time” even further in our description of our origins, we are presented with the creative source for all that we describe – All That Is. It is this divine source which spins off – literally and figuratively – parts of itself, that become these incipient humans we are describing – these evolving Souls – we and our fellow inhabitants of Third Dimensional reality on our Earth.

So we are spun, almost as on a great loom, from the fertile essence of All That Is, and we are spun-off from All That Is into our forthcoming life. In a sense, our beginnings are in waiting, biding time for years, perhaps even centuries within these star systems, until the opportunity for birth arises.

In terms of linear timelines, most of you who are reading this blog, have resided in a few systems within the galaxies: Arcturus, Sirius and another complex our scientists have not yet discovered and named, and so does not yet exist, in our terms. Inter-dimensional travel is, as I said, instantaneous.

One is at one moment existing in a dimensional plane in a star system far from Earth, and in the next moment one enters the physical body of a Soul – a baby being born on Earth. This is how it works, my friend. This is how it has always been done.

Now to repeat myself here, for I believe it bears repeating, our Soul Self chooses the life it wishes to be born into – the particular human baby born into its unique circumstances of our Earth. We are born to live a life of lessons, for our own education and Value Fulfillment and for the greater experience of All That Is.

Among The Stars

Our beginnings are among the stars. Do we not each of us look to the stars with longing as we observe our great Milky Way Galaxy? There are our origins. There in the stars are the origins of our races on our Earth. From our ancient tales of star gods seeding the Earth with human beings, to our “science fiction” tales of extra-terrestrial visitations, all of these so-called myths and so-called fictions hold elements of the truth about our TRUE beginnings.

Now the ancient tales are often literal interpretations of what our human ancestors perceived. Literal. And our science fiction interpretations originate from our collective unconscious – that store of memory that contains all of Earthly experience past, present and future. Our authors and artists – visionaries – use this great store of symbolic truths to create their artistic works.

Those of us who appreciate the truth in those works – just as the aboriginal and ancient proto-humans appreciated the tribal stories – are experiencing our connection to the sacred via this collective Soul network.

When I suggest that our origins are among the stars, I am saying that within what our scientists describe as intensely hot gaseous spheres of energy – our so-called “stars” – are the “seeds” of humanity. But how, you might ask, can living cells exist in such an environment? The answer is, interdimensionally.

Many interesting and productive life forms – some of which we might term humanoid and others we would surely not – exist and develop in dimensions within and upon stars and planetary bodies throughout the Universe. This is a fact.

They are singularly perfectly suited to their dimensional existences. therefore, I trust the reader may understand that travel from stars and planets and other more distant systems, to Earth or any other dimension in the Universe, for that matter IS a matter of inter-dimensional travel, and inter-dimensional travel is instantaneous.

Now previously in my blog writings I spoke of the origins of humanity. I said that we were indeed of extra-terrestrial origins, and this is quite true. Our Earth was seeded with human life forms from other planetary and star systems to populate the planet and to allow these life forms to learn from their experiences.

As we absorb this revelatory material – that our race has been seeded onto Earth from other galaxies, other star systems – we may shake our head in disbelief. It is a great deal to comprehend. AS I have said, not only do we take on individual lives in material form for learning purposes, and certainly not sequentially within the same family “lineage,” but definitely within different family organizations, of different races, in different sexual roles.

Now there is a great “forgetting,” the amnesia I spoke of earlier, that masks or memories of past lives and Home Dimension experiences. This forgetting explains why we can speak quite honestly and ardently about our “heritage,” and those in or family tree who have suffered, or perhaps triumphed in their loves, thus “preparing” the future for our accomplishments of failings. Again, this is our limited perception. As our Inner Senses become more acute during our awakening, we will see that we are enacting our reincarnational dramas within the Earth experience for spiritual purposes. And as an addendum – even though we may not “believe” in matters SPIRITUAL.

Created Histories

Yes, it has certainly been a fantastic voyage from where and when humanity has “begun” until now, our current Moment Point in this time-frame. Let us focus on the history of humanity I hinted at in previous blogs. Of course, this history I am describing is merely one of literally millions of probable realities one can create by focusing on them. The consensus reality then – the reality that becomes the agreed upon mass-created reality and thus the history of consensus reality – is that most of humanity agrees to create.

Majority rules here in other words. As a collective of humans, we create in the dream state the essential frameworks for our Personal Realities that we will “cover” with our camouflage Reality Constructs upon awakening. Each of us develop from our personal reservoirs of memory and imagination, the evocative reincarnational environments and events that we experience upon awakening. It has always been thus. As I have said, beginnings and endings have relevance only in discussions of linear timelines. In truth, our lives are lived simultaneously, at once within the present moment. However, since time and space are useful theories to us.

Atlantis Bleed-throughs

Bleed-throughs can come from what we call our past or our future and also from contemporary existences – from all of our Simultaneous Lives. And our other point regarding crystals: some of my blog readers are infatuated with crystals and ascribe great powers to them.

These will be the ones who will incarnate or simply transition into the Unity of Consciousness Dimension and become the leaders in the new technology of crystals I spoke of in earlier blogs. These are truly “crystal people” who may incarnate multiple times, in similar occupations, to consolidate their experience and knowledge.

LESSONS
We are born into physical form to experience a life of lessons. This means that although we have free will to choose from an infinite supply of probable actions, we will choose those actions that support a particular context – a dramatic background, if you will – upon which we shall project our reincarnational dramas, comedies and the like.

Now we must pretend that we do not have such a stake in this production. We are, therefore, surprised when great blessings or tragedies occur on the stage of our life. But currently my blog readers, many of us are waking up to discover ourselves as actors on the stage, and we are acknowledging to ourselves that we are also the producers and directors of these enlighten stories.

To illustrate my point here, consider the tales of our leaders, our heroes and heroines from our historical past, as portrayed in our literature and our motion pictures. We can see the symbolism and meanings in the lives of these great leaders, can we not? Yet can we also see the meaning and lessons in our own ongoing lives?

The heroic struggles of our ancestors are often embellished in larger-than-life terms through dramatization, this is true. Yet the symbolic lessons characterized in books or on the screen are of no greater importance in terms of the Soul, than the heroic acts performed by any of us in our daily lives. We are all heroic. We are all born into Earthly existence to learn our symbolic lessons.

Early Humans

Now let us discuss the origins of what is currently the six-billion plus humans on our planet Earth. Where did we all come from? There have been many explanations from our religions and from our scientific community on our origins. And in the same way that our religious leaders anoint themselves as the only purveyors of spiritual knowledge – including the story of the emergence of humans from the world of spirit – scientists, in their quest for power “over” the material world, have established themselves as the tellers of the “true” story, the “scientific” explanation for humanity’s origins.

Yet what our scientists refer to as the “beginning” of humankind is simply not accurate. Humans have developed from inception onto our planet into highly technological societies countless times, over countless ages, billions and billions of years if we are speaking of linear timelines. Until our scientists can conceptualize within these broader frameworks, the debate will continue to center on theories of early man, use of primitive tools etc, etc, etc.

The “early man” that I am describing, began life on our planet Earth with a highly advanced intellect and a capacity for creating technologies that eventually far surpassed our current efforts. Now these capacities or potentialities were invoked via telepathic conversations between these “early” humans and their higher selves – Spirit Guides or Energy Personalities. In this way, the current expansion of consciousness we are experiencing in our time frame, is a repetition of other invocations of inherent capacities our race has experienced in a cyclical fashion over the millennia.

Meditation

HYPOTHESIS: You can learn to connect with the divine energies in a purposeful way.

Now, our form of meditation is quite simple. The goal is to connect with the stream of divine information, purposefully. You are already accessing divine information as you sleep. This experiment may assist you in creating rituals of contact and communication with the divine source through what we broadly define as meditation. First let me remind you that you will be encountering ecstatic states of consciousness. Your relaxed position in your chair, on your couch or pillow, will appear to others as though you are in an ecstatic state, and indeed you shall be.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
To get a feel for this sitting posture, sit down in your comfortable chair or other structure with your feet flat on the floor. If the chair has armrests, rest your forearms upon the armrests or simply rest your arms and hands in your lap. Now the torso should be balance comfortably on the hips, pelvis and seat.

The most important aspect of this meditation position is this: the head should be resting on the neck slightly to either the left or right-side. The head should be tilted back slightly, again, as though you were experiencing ecstatic states. To others, it would appear as though you were profoundly relaxed and content though not asleep, not unconscious. You have one foot in the physical and one foot in the metaphysical domains.

Now your intent is very important here. Simultaneously, as you create the relaxed body posture for meditation, you are focusing on creating the connection to the divine. This will be unique to the individual. I have described this as “embodying” the divine in this present blog.

With your imagination you will use your powers of creativity to establish the “divine connection.” You will know it when you sense it. The loving emotions will be quite noticeable – the wave of ecstasy just below the surface. As you notice this pleasant feeling, the divine information will no doubt begin to stream into your Etheric Body through the physical channel between your eyes. By keeping free from distractions, you may continue to “drink in” these energies for as long as you wish, though fifteen minutes to an hour per session is adequate.

Now this stream may cease on its own and you will come to Third-Dimensional consciousness soon afterward. Or you may simply have the intention to come out after a specific amount of time and you shall. Simply suggest to yourself that you will come out at a specific time, before you begin the meditation.

It also a good practice to not attempt an intellectual analysis of the meditation session immediately afterward. Give yourself some time. The energies will play out within your Etheric Body over time, and you really needn’t try to investigate how you are doing. The positive changes that will occur in your life as you meditate regularly shall in all probability be enough proof that your behaviors in this matter are worth the time and effort.

This is primarily a receptive exercise or experiment, in other words. You are allowing the divine energies of All That Is to wash over you, to cleanse and to heal.

FINDINGS – Document the results of your experiments with mediation. After you have gained some proficiency, verify for future reference, what you feel and think during and after the sessions.

Creating Ritual Sanctuary

HYPOTHESIS: Enacted sanctuary ritual seals off negative energies.

Building on the exercises from previous blogs, this experiment will explore the means for creating a unique protection ritual for the reader to enact prior to psychic investigations.

Each Blog reader may for themselves list their beliefs and images of security and peace and then distill them down into a potent image or statement that virtually resonates with the energies we are discussing. Again, each individual will create a distinct image or written statement with accompanying emotional content.

This is the Ritual of Sanctuary that the reader may perform before each experiment. It is a good idea for the reader to write down and draw pictures of the images and content they are experiencing for future reference. The ritual may include body movements or gestures, the cultivation of emotional states, visualizations of various types ad so on.

The reader may wish to try out the ritual a number of times until it elicits the desired state of Sanctuary, that is, a feeling of support as if one were a beloved child in the arms of one’s adoring mother. Naturally, the reader may have different criteria for sensing ultimate protection.

One note here… the descriptive terms Emotional Body, Home Dimension etc. are simply for the convenience of the reader. Our reality obviously unfolds seamlessly for our perception. There are no distinctions between dimensions and our physical form, for example. All of our terminology is presented for our use in our Third-Dimensional reality so that we can make sense of this new information being presented. We are used to naming and so we will name in our material.

FINDINGS – Document your findings. This may mean that you will write down the results of your ongoing efforts in creating a Ritual Sanctuary that works. This is a personal matter. Only you will know when you have fine-tuned your ritual to the point that it assists you in creating the sacred space of Sanctuary.

Clearing the Emotional Body

HYPOTHESIS: Raising the focus from the emotional to the mental center clears emotional turmoil.

PERFORMING YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
This experiment concerns the creation of a personal perspective through which you may create and perceive your world with greater clarity. As a human, you are most likely in the habit of creating and perceiving your Personal Reality through the Emotional Center of the heart region. For our purposes, we will raise that focus of awareness up to the Mental Center, which has its physical counterpart in the head directly between the eyes.

Sensing where the energies might be in your heart region, see what image or emotion comes from it. If you have an image of churning, as of emotions strengthening and dying out, you are on the right track. Now, using your intention or will, bring this churning energy up from the lower centers of the throat and head. As you do you may notice that the churning emotionality ceases. It may be replaced with a cool clarity and a feeling of relaxation. Keep with this feeling of clarity, purpose and un-emotionality for a few moments. Embody it, my friend.

FINDINGS – Document your findings. This may simply be your observations, personal meanings, drawings etc.

The Personal Field of Manifestation

HYPOTHESIS: You can sense the creation of your personal reality field.

PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY.
Let us attempt to help you get a feel for your own personal field of manifestation with an experiment. I would ask you to quiet your mind using any relaxation technique you may have gathered in your lifetime. Deep breathing, visualizing a restful scene and gently stretching the body are some ways to accomplish this relaxation. When you are relaxed, please look out in front of you and establish where in the distance your 55-foot limit might be.

For these purposes it would help if you were doing the experiment outside. If you are indoors, you may be able to sense it intuitively. Now sense how this boundary surrounds and supports you. Sense also how the perceptive reality within this perimeter seems to be subject to your intentions.

Now remember, you are collaborating with All That Is in this creation of physical reality. Can you sense how the creative power of the veritable Universes flows into your Reality Constructs and creates a seamless impression of “bedrock” reality for your physical senses to perceive and experience?

Can you sense the connectedness between you and everything else? Every cell, each molecule, every atom is connected to every other cell, molecule and atom. This is a literal fact. Feel it, imagine it, act on it. In this way, you Dear Blog Reader are connected to everything, everywhere in your Universe.

As you sense this power, can you see that all of your created forms in your perception have their own energy fields? Every atom has its own aura – the electromagnetic corona. Every self-created physical object has its collective aura. Again, here you are asked to put aside feelings of low self-worth, guilt and fear and experience the true nature of your being – as co-creator of your physical world.

Now this witnessing of the true nature of your Personal Reality can co-exist with your ideas and images from your religious and spiritual teachings. One need not exclude the other. Indeed, the most beneficial products or findings that may come from this experiment are the experienced moments of holding divergent views of reality. For it is these glimpses of other truths that may eventually, when you are prepared, convince you to discard beliefs and behaviors that no longer serve You-the-Soul.

FINDINGS – Write down or in some other way document your findings for future reference.

Fifty-Five Foot Radius

This Personal Reality Field we are discussing in previous blogs is simply the field of manifestation: the perimeter in our physical world over which our consciousness has the most control in the creation of Reality Constructs. The radius is about 55 feet for humans.

This is not news however, as Beings of Light have presented these figures to humanity in recent years, and this information has been printed in books and transmitted along our Internet. This figure – 55 feet – is simply something to keep in mind when we are experimenting with consciously creating our physical world. We have the most control within this perimeter.

Beyond 55 feet we cede manifestation energy and responsibility to other forms. Now, we take this with us wherever we go, this boundary of manifestation. So if we are driving one of our automobiles, and we are looking through our window, we have the most control over our automobile and our physical form. For we create our physical form – our body – and we create our automobile also, in addition to all within the radius.

I do not wish to go too deeply into this, as I will explain more about the manifestation of realities later in this series. Simply, humans have 55-foot radius, and animals, insects and even rocks and trees have varying sizes of manifestation fields.

Now, remember that all we experience in our Third-Dimensional reality is conscious, from the material that makes-up our human eye down to the particulate matter that makes up the soil beneath our feet. Ponder this for a moment and I believe we you will receive information I am attempting to convey.

These limitations we are discussing are more a matter of boundaries of the physical senses, than anything else. AS I have stated in other blogs, there are actually no limitations to the Non-Physical Senses and that is why we can use the Inner Senses – which we will cover in later blogs – to contact and interact with beings beyond 55 feet and into other dimensions, across great distances and so on.

The personal field of manifestation is related to the Third-Dimensional reality, in other words. When exploring other dimensions with the Inner Senses, there are no limitations. Our Personal Reality expands to the infinite. It is from a understanding and utilization of this fact of life that we may experience intentionally changing the greater consensus reality from our Personal Reality Field. Thinking Globally and Acting Locally.

The Personal Reality Field

We are the creator of our Personal Reality Field. As you read this blog, you are at once creating your physical body, including the eyes and brain that read the blog that you also create. All is created in the current moment by you, Dear Blog reader. And so we are all artists from the time we were born, working with the natural elements to create our multitudinous Reality Constructs, the building blocks of our Personal Realities.

Now this creation unfolds before us in a linear fashion. We create, as we have just discussed, a past and a future to “match” our current Moment Point – our spacious present. We are artists, but currently most of us are naïve artists, in that we create our works of art – our physical reality and all of its trappings – without much planning or thought. Thus, we perceive our reality, created unconsciously, as something separate. It appears as though we are at the mercy of our own environment, our world. The amnesia that I spoke of in earlier blogs helps to create this illusion of separation from our creative works.

Currently however, many of us are waking up to the true nature of our reality. We are questioning our personal beliefs and the mass beliefs of our societies. We are coming out of our amnesia and seeing the illusion of separation for what it is: a once useful fiction.

As our consciousness is being raised and we are offered a glimpse of our true reality, many of us will take up the challenge to live our lives more honestly and more responsibly. Knowing that we are not separate from our environment,(we have made it) or from other human beings, (we are one) we will begin to take actions that truly matter, rather than fritter away our time on the trivialities of egoic pursuits.

Time

Time, a concept that is very important to those of us in physical reality, though not in the least important to Beings of Light. Humans make much of “time” as we perceive it. We believe that we are making perfect sense when we say to another, “I don’t have time to do what I need to do,” and we seldom see the inherent humor in such a statement, for we take our time so seriously. But I must assure once again of the TRUTH about time.

The truth is that there is no time but the moment – The Present Moment Point. All else – all of the emotion-laden memories of a particular past and the excitement or dread of a particular future – are fabrications of our imagination. We create the added elements of past and future to format our experiences into something comprehensible to our Third-Dimensional, physical senses.

Now this truth-telling regarding time has great utility for us. Knowing and ACCEPTING that there is no time but the current Moment Point – our Point of Power – can free us from any guilt or other negative emotions concerning events from our “past,” and also release us from the needless dread of so-called “future” events yet to come. This moment of truth in our current time-frame, while we are reading this blog, is all we have.

And it is from this Point of Power that we create not only our future, but also our past. I will ask at points throughout this series of blogs, to attempt to internalize this over-riding fact-of-life as a necessary basis for further study and experimentation.

Consciousness Units

Much has been spoken of CUs (conscious units) over the many years of blogging about this concept. Now, simply put, the CU is a model – a Sethian model – for the activity of Reality Creation at its most basic. We may speak of these elements as Awarized Energy subject to the control of human thought. These are basic units of creation we are discussing and we may summarize their activity in a few words: we create our reality out of Awarized Units of Energy – CUs – through our Intent powered by our emotion.

Again, in other forums we may seek out more intellectualized descriptions. But, it all can be reduced to this previous simple statement. At its most basic, which is where we must be in these research activities, the CU is the leading edge in Reality Construction. This “edge” is that point in consciousness where we may place our intention and began to create consciously.

Co-creating consciously with All That Is “IS” the object of this research blog. Now if we require a more in-depth description, we may read the previous few lines again while we are in a relaxed state. It is possible we will intuit a deeper understanding of this concept.

There is much more to the printed word, in other words, than one can grasp in one reading. This work, as in other spiritual texts, can be taken to as deep a level as our Soul Evolution may permit. Words have power. The printed words in certain books have the power to spiritualize the reader and open them up to other dimensions. It has been thus.

This current blog has the potential to catalyze in the reader the awakening of the spirit. This is not an intellectual pursuit, however, and we will not find our awakening on the intellectual path. We may spend lifetimes intellectualizing and explaining away our lessons. Yet we may discover in a brief moment in time – in a fraction of a second – the personal meanings for us on the planet Earth at this time. This is my hope for you upon reading this blog.

Probablities

I would like to briefly cover the subject of probabilities, restating what I have covered in earlier blogs, and adding to the material with some new ideas that I hope will Illuminate this current series of blogs. Indeed, this concept is at the heart of the broader concepts of manifestation and Reality Creation.

To review: in our Third-Dimensional system, our consciousness with All That Is creates multitudinous probable manifestations, of which those we choose to actualize become part of our Personal Reality, what we now call, the Personal Reality Field.

We experience these chosen probabilities as manifested physical Reality Constructs. However, the un-chosen probabilities continue on their trajectories of development. They each have their own separate evolutionary paths, in other words, and continue to grow and develop along their own lines, much in the same way that one experience leading to another, and so on. This is of course, greatly simplified for our understanding. I refer those of you who wish further information on this concept to my earlier blogs.

Now to add to this idea of probabilities for purposes of our current blog – that of accessing the Energy Personality, facilitating communication with it and then under its guidance journeying into an investigation of the Fourth Dimension – I will also be brief.

The probabilities for millions of humans – in the West in particular – to engage their individual Guides or Energy Personalities, are currently very high. Many of us are about to enter into the primary life lessons we came to our Earth in this current time-frame to learn.

These probabilities will remain latent unless acted upon. The purpose of this current blog work is to give you some guidelines as to how to accentuate the probabilities for your individual enlightenment scenarios.

 

UP TO THE LIGHT

Some may wonder what the “The Light” might be. Let us discuss this topic for a moment as background information for those who may be new to this blog material. To begin, humans as born into the Third-Dimensional world with an amnesia. There are exceptions where the child retains the memories, but for the most part, the child is shielded from memories of the time in between lives, the time in the home dimension.

Now in the Home Dimension we are supported on a wave of unconditional love that streams from the energy source for all of creation – All That Is. When it comes time to begin the journey into physical form, the memories of this living state of consciousness are erased.

We incarnate into the physical human body to learn our lessons, and if we remember how perfectly loving and supportive the Home Dimension is, we might choose to cut the Earthly existence before the valuable lessons are learned.

The “Light” then, in our discussion, is partly the divine light of Higher Consciousness: the memories of love and support we experience when not in the physical body. Now light is information – knowledge.

We as a race are becoming more knowledgeable with respect to our spiritual or divine past, present and future. Divine information is being streamed into our Etheric Bodies via glands in our heads. We are waking up to our true state, our divine heritage as gods.

Now, this information may be somewhat “too much” for some of the blog readers of my older material to take seriously. I am reconnecting with you on the subtle levels and helping you to recognize the urgency of our current situation as a Soul.

It is my hope that we will be well-prepared for the coming transformation in human consciousness that has been heralded in these blog writings and many others in our country and around the Earth.

The Energy Personality essence can be many things, including both intellectual AND spiritual. In these writings, I will demonstrate to you for the sake of validity and to help you to relaxed into the material. Just as a teacher in one of our schools will present the material in different formats with a different emphasis according to the effects the teacher wishes to have on the student.

This is, again, divine information you are receiving from a Being of Light. If you have trouble with the words “divine” or “spiritual,” many have similar concerns. I urge the blog reader to explore the TRUE meanings of divine, of spiritual, or love and of confidence.

Co-Creation

All That Is is the primary energy source for everything in our reality. It drives each and every atom in our field of reality and all fields of reality. For this reason, when I say that we co-create with All That Is, I mean that we, as humans, participate in a collaborative effort of telepathic communication and creation with All That Is to produce our world that we then perceive in a linear fashion.

With our physical senses, indeed, our physical reality “appears” to have substance. It is substance we give it with our thoughts. Now remember also that since all in our world has consciousness – rocks, soil, air, atoms – everything has consciousness, all participate in this Gestalt of Consciousness we are speaking about.

So we can see that it is ridiculous to treat anything in our environment as “lower” than us, or undeserving of respect, simply because we have labeled it “non-living” or “not conscious” or “non-sentient.” We will develop this thread in further in this series of blogs in an attempt to encourage the blog reader to have an ongoing appreciation for life they are living on our beautiful planet.

Scientists of Consciousness Methods

As we examine the physical world of The Third-Dimensional reality, we will borrow some practices from our scientific methods and alter them for our purposes. We will have experimentation, yet of a specific type.

The subject matter is our physical world perceived through our Inner Senses and our outer senses and our individual beliefs and ideas about what is and is not possible. The subtext here is concerned with our individual lessons: those experiences we were incarnated into our current existence in this time-frame to learn from and to add to the experience of All That Is.

So as we conduct our experiments, it will be as a way to throw light upon the meanings of our life currently. Why are we on the Earth now at this specific time? What are the broader meanings of our activities in this life? These are matters of Soul Evolution. The answers to these questions may come in the manner of divine information from our Higher Self.

Which brings us to a major point: as we proceed with our studies and experimentation, it would be wise for us to scrupulously document all of the outcomes of our activities. Now this may mean writing down in long-hand in a journal, or typing into our computer or speaking into a recorder. Whatever the medium, please document as soon after the activity as possible.

And as we add to the information regarding our Soul Issues – the meanings of life for us personally – we may notice changes in our beliefs about nature of our Personal Reality. And just as a scientist must alter the hypothesis when faced with findings that demand this, so too shall we, as a Scientist of Consciousness, of necessity alter our beliefs, ideas and images to the new information – divine information – we will discover as the products of our experiments.

We are on the path to our enlightenment, in other words, and we are approaching our awakening in an organized and disciplined manner

Scientists of Consciousness

Now in these explorations we shall approach our studies as Scientists of Consciousness. And we will certainly create new definitions for these new terms, for our current definitions are inappropriate for our use. Yet, we are comfortable with these terms. We use them often in our dialogues with one another.

Every day we hear of a new “scientific” study the proclaims to the world that something previously declared helpful to humans is now harmful, and so on and so on. This aspect of scientific research to come up with new information that refutes earlier information is simply the nature of the beast; that it is supposed to do.

Yet, when we find that our scientific community continues to reverse itself, well we might get suspicious as to what the scientists are truly saying in these pronouncements. I will elaborate on this point in future blogs when we speak of matters of control and submission.

As a Scientist of Consciousness we may look to the heart of the matter, and with our Inner Senses surmise what is the TRUE nature of the reality of our world. The Inner Senses, or what we will also refer to as intuition in these blog writings, are the only tools we will need.

Telescopes, microscopes, or any sort of electronic technologies, will not help in this endeavor. After all, these are merely aids to physical senses, and so are amplifiers of data once aids removed from the source. Why not go directly TO the source, and use those tools that are the unobstructed Inner Senses of mankind/womankind?

And so our definition might be: “Scientist of Consciousness – one who uses the Inner Senses to perceive and study physical and non – physical phenomena to obtain Divine Wisdom.” I think that will do nicely.

Having said this, I wholly understand that the “real” scientists who read these blog words will no doubt be upset. That is a good thing. The feelings of disquiet and rising anger are what precede the uncovering of genuine knowledge; when the ego is dispensed with and the Soul is allowed to shine through.

So this is a teaching on the nature of true science. Dear Blog Reader, I come to remind you of these critical facts, these distinctions, so that we may wake-up and enlighten oneself to our worsening dilemma.

Now I have described this dilemma in the past blogs and I refer the reader to that material if you wish more information. For this present series of blogs, however, we will focus on experimentation, and the creation of the means adequate to ANSWER our dilemma, and save ourselves from extinction.

The Physical World

There has always been a physical world, that is, the world of our perceptions. The Universe is and always was, period. Therefore, why speak of scientific theories that explain the beginnings of the Universe of the endings of the Universe? Our scientists are so enamored with studying and labeling their perceptions in the belief that they are acquiring knowledge. Yet the scientist using the physical senses, can only by definition SENSE the physical Universe. In s sense, this physically-oriented scientist is quite LIMITED by the physical senses, and by the crude tools used to study the Universe or any aspects of the Universe, beginning, middle or end, in our terms.

What good is it to know how many stars there are in the sky and how hot they are? This is only science’s skewed perception of what a star is. In truth, a star is more like a potent idea than a fiery object in the sky. And what is the sky; molecules of oxygen and other gases that in some way combine to create our atmosphere? We may answer, “Yes!” but I hope you are beginning to see my point here.

The truth about our Universe is that nothing is as it appears, at least to the physical senses. Our perceived reality is just that, a personal perception. It is a creation of our own making with All That Is. It is our interior Universe expressed outwardly in a divine creative panorama. Now I don’t mean to pull the rug out from under you, Dear Blog Reader, but our scientists can explain in theory. For our world – the air in front of our eyes, the ground beneath our feet, the various “inert” and living forms – is actually composed of animated spirit. In a very literal sense, me and our environment are “god stuff;” spirit made physical, the camouflage of All That Is expressing in infinitely variety.

The True Soul

The True Soul is undiscovered for the most part in our reality. In deed, we will be investigating the correlations between thoughts, behaviors and created realities. Also be so introspective that we will see well into the smallest physical constructs of which reality is composed. Referred to these minuscule elements as CUs – Consciousness Units.

The Energy Personality

The establishing of communication with the Energy Personality is the main focus of my next series of blogs. As Beings of Light we will Be Light and we will lighten up the blog reader as we do so.

This series concerns mainly two broad subjects: the Energy Personality and the Fourth Dimension or the Unity of Consciousness Dimension. Therefore it will be somewhat easy to ferry back and forth from one topic to the other, without having to explain myself to a great degree. I will often refer to my classic blogs that reside in zzzesus.com, if you should prefer more illumination than I provide.

Now for those of you who are new to the material, I simply hope in this series of blogs to keep your interest long enough for you to try out the experiments on your own. As humans we learn by doing. This seems to be a hard and fast rule in our physical reality.

The subject matter of this series of blogs concerns our place in the non-physical reality. Another way to express this is that we will be discussing the evolution of the human Soul. This is critical information that we will need to take the next step in human development.

Currently we are at a culmination of countless years of evolution. The transition to the Fourth Dimension is at hand. The mass consciousness has created a highly probable potential for humanity to shed the bonds of ego and allow the Soul Self of each of us to shine through.

As we can imagine, metaphors are clumsy substitutes for what is truly about to occur. In the words of our religious manuscripts, we might say that the people of Earth are about to be enlightened: brought into the light of Higher Consciousness. Whatever the terminology we wish to use – and I do not mean to spite any spiritual path or religion by not including their terminology in this explanation – we are all, my beloved blog readers, in for a dramatic transformation that will alter us fundamentally. Indeed, it will transform us down to the core elements of which we are composed.

These blogs are many of techniques and experiments we may use to contact our Energy Personality and explore the Fourth Dimension. The message here and the message we will be attempting to convey to the blog readers in future blogs, is quite simple: we are awakening to our greater self in this lifetime. The recommendations we offer here are for our greater learning in the evolution of our Soul.

Now, in this moment, as you are reading this blog, you can begin your private journey by acknowledging that the words have meaning for you. Listen to the variety of responses that come from within when you do so. Feel the loving acceptance that supports you on this journey. Recognize the countless other beings who are accompanying us. Some of them have been with us since the inception of consciousness into our world. We are not alone. We have never been alone.

The experiments in these blogs are designed to give some familiarity with the Unity of Consciousness Dimension, so that we will not become disoriented when the shift occurs. The methods for conducting our experiments are given in as simple a way as possible. Everyone should be able to get beneficial results through consistency and a positive attitude. Instructions for creating a personalized Ritual of Sanctuary are provided, to secure your voyage through these unknown waters, and a return to our Third Dimension reality.

Realigning Beliefs

The average person right now is saturated almost to the boiling point with fear. The forces of light are already fighting back with our media, vehemently protesting the onslaught of negative and hateful material that is being projected to the masses. We can see this happening.

Mankind and womankind are in such a state of fear that it is disparately seeking an end to all that it is experiencing in this realm of existence. There are many forces of light in place now and they will be instrumental in exposing the ones who have deceived us and taken advantage of us.

We will be experiencing a lot of turmoil within our perceived reality of our most solid beliefs. Beliefs that we have hung onto since birth will start to crumble before us. It is because these things must come to pass before the emergence of the unity of consciousness dimension. There will be a lot of fear.

People are going to be confused and torn between the old system of beliefs and the new reality for their world. It will be hard for some to give up the pleasures of the dark forces and turn to the light and alignment with All That Is. They will have to make decisions based on their free will as to which way they choose to go.

If we are listening to our inner self, we should be able to recognize that we are already starting to move into a new level of awareness about our reality. This is happening ever so gently but rapidly right now. Our new reality is in the process of unfolding into our awareness. Soon we will start to abandon our old ways and naturally gravitate towards the light.

Our firmest ideas and beliefs will begin to crumble away and we will see no need to hang onto them and will wonder why we ever did. It will be acutely apparent to us what we must do to evolve and we will willingly want to get involved in our world’s evolution. There will be a great unity with our brother/sister, an unending love that we have never known in our reality on Earth. It will be a most beautiful thing. As the energies from our Spiritual Hierarchy are poured into our world and begin to manifest themselves in our reality we will become fully awakened and with that we will enter into the next phase of our evolution.

The Crumbling of Oppressive Organizations

The oppression of mankind and womankind is crumbling away piece by piece. Mankind/womankind will come to terms with its own soul and realize that he/she doesn’t have to be dominated or guilt-ravaged by the idea manipulations of others. The guilt-ridden ideas that have been injected into our belief system have essentially delayed the evolution of our soul. We saw a return or a resurgence of people going back to church after 9/11. Now we see the fall of the church because this was not the answer. The answer lies in our ability to open up our own self to our realities that we have created by us.

We cannot put the blame somewhere else when it lies in our own backyard. We cannot run to God and expect it to be fixed for us. We became scared. We were faced with our own perceived mortality and because of our beliefs it terrified us. Our thoughts, our ideas, our perceived realities create and did create our reality as we know it.

If we want the reality of our world to change we will have to start with oneself. An inner examination of self through meditation will help us start to change our reality. There are many of us out there awakening us. We are being awakened as to the true nature of our soul’s existence.

As I have said before and will say again, We are a soul with a body, not a body with a soul. We have thought of ourselves as a body with a little soul tucked away somewhere in the recesses of our mind to sometimes be brought put on Sundays when we go to church and then neatly tucked back away in the little box we have created, giving all credit to the body and the ego for our existence when in actuality that is not the case.

Our body again, is simply a vehicle for expression and communication. Without you-the-soul maneuvering it, it would be like a comatose person. It would function but there would not be any communication of life force mentally, emotionally or spiritually. It would just be a body, physically functioning, that is it.

The oppression stems from the knowledge that we inherently as a soul know and what has been systematically indoctrinated into our thought process. We are in a constant struggle from what we know to be true and what others, the ones in power, the manipulators, want us to believe. We cannot fool ourselves.

Even though we try to rationalize our reality, you-the-soul knows the different. It only causes more oppression because we have two perceived realities fighting for the right to be heard and expressed: the true reality of the soul and the reality of the ego-self. As we move away from the systematic indoctrination of fear and guilt-ridden religious ideas and put the ego in its place, the oppression will subside.

I am not putting down our churches, however the information that they give us has not seemed to help. It has only hindered our very soul’s evolution. If we are constantly feeling guilty or bad about the existence of our self, how can we possibly move further ahead towards the light of we do not feel worthy of that light. This is where the oppression comes in.

As we know, most churches have strict rules about our behaviors and experiences that our soul is allowed to have. I am not advocating running out and perpetrating crimes against humanity because all of a sudden you feel you have the right to, because you do not and will certainly be in violation of Universal Law.

I am saying examine our beliefs, look at the information that is being given to us. Does it allow us to move closer to the light of The Creator, or does it further repress our soul into a guilt-ridden fear? That reality that is created for us, that fear-based reality, is what we have accepted as the norm.

As we awaken, we will understand that fear is at the root of most of our problems: fear to acknowledge who we are, fear of each other, fear of confronting our own perceived reality, fear of acknowledging our soul’s existence, fear of everything that does not conform to our limited perceptions of our own isolated reality.

We would rather stay comfortable in our thought process where we don’t have to accept this responsibility and can shirk it off to someone else. Oh, leave it up to the pastor. I shall go in and confess my sins and absolved myself and get on with my life, business as usual. This does not work. We have not moved anywhere by doing so. We are still stuck in the same perceived reality that we were in when we walked in.

Many Catholics who say, even though the institution is obviously crumbling, still maintain that they’re going to stick with it to the bitter end. To the better end, notice how they have said “bitter end”.

It will take a great awakening on the part of the churches to admit what they have been doing to the masses. But since they have not been willing to do it in the past, an intervention was necessary and we are in the midst of it as we speak. I will leave it at that.

We see the crumbling of one church but when we look at it, the crumbling of the Muslim religion is in the same throes. Religion is not meant to be what it is now. It was not meant to repress the people. It was not meant to instill so much fear into the people that they could not live their lives and experience their soul’s evolution. This was never the intention.

When The Christ essence appeared in the many forms that he has appeared in, it was never to do what organized religions have done to the belief systems of mankind/womankind. As we know, I have stated The Christ essence is going to come into our world again and he is present now as we speak and has been for over twenty years.

He comes with many other Masters to realign the relationships of the people of our world and will stay for some two thousand years. It is not that the Catholic church is going to crumble down completely, nor is any other religious organization. They all are going to be restructured in truth and unity.

The Spiritual Hierarchy of our planet is in the process of this realignment now. Old ways must be broken down and truths revealed so that the unification of consciousness can express itself. We are in the midst of a great restructuring of the beliefs of the citizens of our planet. All of our religious organizations will eventually unite together as one truth in alignment with the will and plan of The Creator.

PSYCHICS, MEDIUMS and CHANNELS

There is no distinction. It’s all in relation to how one focuses your abilities. Some will focus on the psychic realms while others will focus more on speaking to souls who are on the Astral Plane. All of us are capable of all three. We have an uncanny way of trying to put things into little boxes. For some reason we feel that if it is contained in a box with a title we are able to understand it better. Our limited perception of reality necessitates this for us.

To be able to tap into the dimension of the Astral plane. This is not hard to do. Any one of us could do this. Humanity is constantly trying to reassure itself of its own ideas of its mortality. It takes a willingness to listen and be able to decipher the voices of those with which we wish to communicate. That is all. It is quit easy. It is to focus our attention in that arena of communication and be able to filter out outside stimulation and distractions. It is a very high level of meditation in a way because the person wishing to communicate must exhibit a certain level of discipline within his/her being. But it is very attainable state for all or us. There is no mystery to it.

Realize that entities in the Astral Plane use a form of symbols and clues. They’re not very adept at communicating. It is up to the entity receiving the information to clarify what he or she is hearing. The higher dimensions of the Astral Plane are a waiting and learning area.

Many times when communicating with a so-called medium, the information that appears to be logical to the entity in waiting does not always make it through in that format. It can come in somewhat distorted at times. This is not rocket science you know. It is very easy thing for all mankind/womankind to do. It’s just a matter of focusing and listening.

Often the problem lies in the area of too many entities wanting to speak to the medium at the same time. As I said before, they are not very good at this and tend to want to jump in and be heard and there lies the confusion. Many of us do not want to communicate because of our fears and religious indoctrination. It is easy to do, but if we do not believe in it, it serves no purpose.

Experiencing The Fourth Dimension

Earth is evolving into the fourth dimension of peace, as I stated in earlier blogs. It is the unity of consciousness dimension. We are being awakened so that we will be able to stay in this dimension because controlling our thoughts will be the key to us being abe to stay there. If we are not ready, we will not be able to stay there.

The knowledge is being given to mankind/womankind to make the necessary changes in his/her life patterns to move along with the planet into this dimension. The planet is still going to be there, but not in the way that we currently are experiencing it.

The Fourth Dimension refers to a level of awareness and thoughts are instantly manifested into reality. If we create fears for ourselves and we actualize those fears and say kill someone, we will not be able to stay.

This is why I am writing this blog, to try to stimulate you into becoming consciously aware of what you think and believe. This will determine who stays and who does not because thoughts of negativity are not allowed there.

Most likely we won’t be walking down the street one day and all of a sudden “be there,” but then again, it could happen this way. Since this is an unprecedented evolution in the way it will be experienced, no one surely knows just how it will take place. Because of other mitigating factors in our world, it will not happen as it has in the past. It is truly an event that all are watching in our dimensions and others.

It’s a process that’s taking place as we sit here and it is constantly evolving itself. We are diligently putting forth the information to our species to realign our thoughts and to understand why it is necessary to do so.

Now, there will always be some of us who will refuse, and that is where, as I said in earlier blogs, that when the transition of their energy from the physical third dimension is manifested in their next incarnation, they will have to incarnate within the third-dimensional realms where they will be with minds like their own.

It is important because Earth and all the planets in our solar system are moving into higher dimensions at this time. I am also in the process of a grand evolution myself. We have free will to choose, but as this planet moves forward they will not go with it. They will when the time comes have to resurface in the same reality which they have created for themselves on Earth.

Many, of us are happy moving into a new alignment with All That Is and consciously becoming aware of our thoughts and the way they affect our entire Universe. We have moved much information into our books, blogs and media through the use of movies and many of us have accepted it and are diligently trying to lead better, more aware lives. This will continue until such time it is no longer necessary.

SOUL AGE

Soul Age is not considered a hierarchy when we are talking about the age of a soul. Old souls simply have incarnated many time. When we consider an old soul, we are thinking that soul should be wiser and more experienced, however this is not always the case. An old soul can also be a soul who has failed to learn their lessons and continuously comes back for another go at it. Therefore, there is no real logic to using the term old soul with the idea of attributing more wisdom to it.

New souls are exactly that. These souls usually are first-time incarnations into the physical body of Earth. They’re somewhat like babies. We can recognize them usually by their childish and somewhat unsure behaviors. They move around like children playing in a fairyland. Life to them is not very serious and they don’t see it as a serious thing, it is more of a fun and games. This sometimes can get them into a world of trouble for they are unprepared to use the skills that others have acquired to maneuver through the physical plane

.

A lot of new souls, because they have not incarnated before and their needs have always been taken care of in their home dimension, come to our world and cannot understand why their needs are not automatically taken care of. They have a hard time with the negativity on our planet, for they remember far better than most, the way it is in the soul’s home dimension where love for one another is automatic.

Let’s just put it this way, after many more incarnations they will start to get the picture of what a third-dimensional reality with the influences of the forces of dark is all about. They will then have to make the decision as to how fast they wish to evolve because evolution on the planet Earth is much harder than other planets due to the negativity.

However, some of these entities will only come to the Earth plane one time and then choose to move on to somewhere else where it is easier for them. Eventually though all will have to experience the negativity associated with the third-dimensional planes whether on Earth or elsewhere if they wish to further their evolution.

It is entirely up to us as to how fast or slow we wish to progress and truly it makes no difference how long we wish to take. There is a certain level of stimulation within our soul groups that prompts us to move forward. Because we are living in a dimension that provides for all our needs when we are not incarnated, it is easy for us to forget how tough Earth can be.

Many of us will bite off more than we can chew even though we have been advised not to do so. Most of us have incarnated many times, so therefore we are living many lives simultaneously, learning from each one of them as we go.

LAW Of NONINTERFERENCE

Not being at the liberty to change or alter the destiny of mankind/womankind. I am allowed to give information that will prompt the minds of man and woman to think and respond, however it is not my purpose to guide you by the hand step-by-step and tell you what to do in any situation. The purpose of incarnating to our planet is for the soul to grow and experience within its own nature without any interference from outside sources. Otherwise why bother to experience Earth life?

The Light Beings have been interfering somewhat lately because of the disarray of the planet. The impending shift into the fourth dimension is upon us. We as a species were not ready and that is why “They” communicate with us. I am one student of many who have spoken to humans thru blogs about what needs to be done to survive the shift.

The time has come once again to alert us to our reality because time as we know it is coming to a close in this chapter of our evolution. The transition into the peaceful Fourth Dimension requires a certain level of evolution to happen successfully.

It is happening whether we are ready or not. It is my purpose and that of others to get us ready quickly for we have lingered far too long in the realms of darkness.

RELATIONSHIPS

Most of us that consciously question our beliefs will not have a hard time digesting this blog material. There are a few things in the blog material that are futuristic which I am able to talk about without going into too much detail and I don’t believe that is anything in there that is going to hurt anyone.

It will stimulate the blog readers to look at their system of beliefs and to question once again why they have them and to understand why it is important to love one another regardless of their chosen package, for that is all it is, a package or vehicle with which we are able to experience and communicate with each other. We have all taken it to the extreme though and distorted it into a false reality of a destructive nature.

The message throughout the Universe is love and cooperation with one another. We do it freely. It is only us humans who have a problem with it. This blog is material to try to stimulate us into conquering our fears and rethinking and realigning our beliefs. Mankind/womankind has continuously put obstacles in front of his/her own enlightenment over and over again but this is not entirely of his/her own doing. Again it comes back to the dark forces and the level of manipulation that they have attained.

If we look at it from the view of Beings of Light, who are in alignment with the will and divine purpose of the Creator and All That Is, we will begin to understand. There is so much more to experience in our world that would bring us into the light. Have you ever noticed how good we feel when we’ve given love to another unselfishly.

All of us could be walking around in a state of ecstasy of we chose to do so. There is no drug in our world as powerful as the soul’s love. That feeling is euphoric. Instead of subscribing to the fear-based dogma of all our institutions that we have created for ourselves, why not create the heavenly bliss of our soul’s true nature. We can do this. It is not impossible. It is a matter of redirecting our energies inward and bringing forth our soul-light. What has been created undone as we are all co-creators of our Universe.

Everyone can create ecstasy all the time, and when we do, we will not forget. Try it out on yourself. Do things for strangers. Give them money. Buy their groceries. Simple acts of kindness to others is a way to start feeling the joy that our soul came here to feel. Most often we are going to get a positive reaction from those that we express kindness to. For one, they’re not going to be expecting it.

And number two, when they get it, it’s going to change their attitude and they may pass that along to someone else and thus starts the curve of mankind and womankind learning to trust and to appreciate his/her fellow man/woman. We have oneself in such a rut where we don’t trust each other and it’s not entirely our fault because the negative forces have been at play ensuring that we fear each other, that we fear love, that we fear closeness, that we’ll be hurt, that we’ll be destroyed, that we’ll be tramped on, and so we must withdraw into our shell and hope that no one can touch us, no one can get into the hard little shell that we’ve encased oneself in and we go through life all wrapped up in a little cocoon trying to burst out, but each time we burst out we get bombarded with our fears and then we retreat back into our cocoon again. And we think, if I can just make it through I’ll be OK.

Humans are very open and willing to accept love if it’s given freely and unconditionally. They have a problem with the conditions, for they always feel that if a person does a kindness for them that there’s going to be a condition, there’s going to be an attachment. They are going to have to provide something of themselves that they are usually unwilling to do. This does not have to be so. We can move in the direction of love without expecting anything in return except for the joy that it gives our soul-you, to have given to another. That in itself is more reward that in anything else.

We must all learn to love each other while in the physical bodies of the third dimension while being exposed to the constant bombardment of the forces of dark. This is something we are supposed to master while in incarnation. It is soul’s purpose to reflect itself through its vehicle the body. When we have accomplished this, we move out of the physical body and into the etheric. We all Do love each other. When we are not in our dense physical bodies that are weighted down by the gravitational forces of the Earth and our spirit is freely moving about in our etheric body throughout the Universe in our dreams, we love each other. It’s just when we come back into the physical reality that we put up the roadblocks.

Earth is a school of hard knocks but it does not have to be so. It is our creation and it stems from our beliefs about who we are, a creation that we have willing subscribed to because we have handed over our power to others. We have not taken charge of our lives in a way that would allow for our evolution in a peaceful and harmonious way.

We could easily recreate Earth to be a paradise, a heaven so-called on Earth. It is totally within our capability to do so, yet most of us choose to cling to the fear and the terror and the negativity. The stimulation that we crave is right there at our fingertips, it does not have to come from negative dark thoughts. Thoughts and actions of love can produce the same results.

We have become addicted to the flow of our own adrenaline. But what we are trying to do is capture the feelings that are based on our love for each other and a oneness with All That Is, the feelings we have forgotten in our cosmic slumber that are now ready to awaken if we let them.

GOOD and EVIL

We have our version of good and evil but in reality there is no good or evil, it is just an experience and sometimes a misguided one at that, but nonetheless it is an experience, a balancing of negative and positive for the evolution of the soul.

But when looking at our ideas of evil it all comes back to the negative forces wishing to control the minds of mankind and womankind. They are part of a balancing of the experiences of this planet but they are now out of control and have disrupted the divine plan of The Creator. Saying prayers against evil is now very important as they have enslaved us into engulfing ourselves in the trappings of materialism.

The citizens of the nations of wealth and power are all consumed by their materialistic desires and have forgotten the true purpose of their soul. Negative influences will use whatever means necessary to keep this planet from moving into the peaceful fourth dimension and that will not be tolerated by The Creator.

At this time in our world, they are causing small little wars in many countries around the world. They are also deeply entrenched in forcing the poorer nations to succumb to the will of political and corporate greed. It would behoove us to become more consciously aware of this and look to our leaders and demand that they help these nations as they struggle with the influx of corporate greed and terrorist infiltration. If we do not see the need of humanity as it is so obvious, then we do so by choice and we are not evolving.

It is ultimately our decision as to whether we want to let the forces of dark prevail because of our unwillingness to get involved or whether we will take a stand for the rights of humanity and help our brothers now. The Universal Law allows for interference in certain situations but even these situations are highly scrutinized by Hierarchy. Do not think that they are going to show up and save the day for it is up to mankind/womankind to do this on his/her own. They will not allow the planet to be destroyed.

The lessons will still have to be learned by man and woman one-by-one. It is not inconceivable to see as many as thirty million of us succumb in the near future. It is a probable reality of our own if it happens. And it will be a learning experience for all mankind/womankind for it may be our next wake-up call to realign our consciousness. It is a critical time in the history of the planet Earth.

Our reality as we know it now is coming to a close. All of us have the ability individually and collectively to make the transition a peaceful one. uniting our thoughts and beliefs in alignment with the true nature of “you-the-soul” and focusing on a peaceful oneness with the rest of humanity by removing the separation of oneself with others will make it happen. It is time for us in the nations of power to share the resources of our planet with other nations that have nothing or very little instead of hogging all the resource for ourselves. It is also critical that we start to clean up our environment from the toxic cyclone of chemicals and radiation that we surround ourselves with. This must be done if we are to survive as a species.

It saddens me to see what we humans have been able to do to each other. It shouldn’t have to be this way.

But the point is not to instill fear in humanity, but to stimulate their thoughts so that they will be consciously aware. Until those thoughts that they produce are in alignment with the will of The Creator they will continue to experience their current level of negativity and will not further the evolution of their souls into our next dimension of awareness.

I’m trying to avoid “the matter of life or death” by giving people a sense of their death and the acceptance of it and what it means as well as their beliefs about their reality. Thoughts are so powerful and we still do not get that message as yet. Our negative thoughts are still running rampant throughout the Universe and it is slowing down our evolution. I cannot emphasize enough how important our thoughts are and how important it is to keep them pure and loving. Our thoughts are what will determine our future and whether we as a species survive on our planet.

We humans are a very stubborn bunch. Years ago I spoke in my blogs of our thoughts and how they could change our reality and yet many of us have forgotten and have slipped back into our old ways. That was a primer then to get us moving but we have not moved much. Now our time is almost up and I am trying over again to stimulate us into realigning our thoughts and beliefs. This may be old material to some of you, but many of us have fallen back to sleep. This time if we fall asleep we may be left behind. It is up to us. For only us humans are the ones who can make that decision. We have free will. I can give all the the tools we need, however if we don’t use them, that is our choice.

Now we will discuss holographic inserts for there are many in the history of the world. In order to broaden the horizon of the minds of man and woman, or to awaken him/her with a mass lesson, holographic inserts are often used as an illusional effect. Holographic inserts can be used any time Hierarchy gives its approval to create a mass event that didn’t really happen.

Now I know some readers of this blog are going to have difficulty with this but nonetheless, this is real. I will not give any instances of their use for it is not necessary. We may also use a holographic insert between lives to go through a chosen portal to view a life we wish to enter into. It’s very simple. By entering through that portal we may go in and observe one of the many life experiences we have set up for ourselves whether or not we wish to experience this life in this time-frame.

Generally between lives we may enter three or four different lives searching for the one that we feel would be most beneficial to the evolution of our soul and we do this through the use of holographic inserts. These lives are taking place whether it is our soul entering into the body or that of another. We will determine with our free will what the experience and outcome of the choices made in the life of that body entail. Most often the body will be created whether it is inhabited by our soul or that of another.

Through the hologram we are getting a glimpse of the conditions of that reality. We will make our decision based on whether or not we are ready to enter into that mass belief system and its conditions at that time or not. Now mankind and womankind creates his/her reality, but this reality can be altered in many ways.

When interference needs to be used for the benefit of mankind/womankind, they are perfectly capable of assisting with the holographic inserts. There have been several mass events throughout our world’s history that were holographically created.

Enlightening Mankind/Womankind Earthquakes

Outer space is where we all are. Our society does not understand that, so we cannot go in that direction as much as I would like to. Many of our buildings, especially our ancient ones, comes from memories of other dimension, many of the Greek temples, pyramids etc. These were all bleed-throughs of mankind’s/womankind’s memory that were recreated on Earth. Some of these, as in the pyramids, have a specific function with relation to our evolution. I will elaborate on this further at some future blog.

Mankind/womankind is only using a small portion of his/her abilities in his/her creative process on our planet, but we are always and forever creating. I wish to stay within the framework of that belief system at present because I realize our beliefs will not change overnight. It will be a slow process, male or female it makes no difference. We are all souls and soul has no gender. The physical body is merely a vehicle for expression and communication that we have chosen to experience out lives.

In our terms, in our frame of time, in time as we know it, as these things don’t happen overnight. Now mankind/womankind is rapidly moving into his/her spiritual evolution and is becoming more and more aware every day of the true nature of his/her existence. But this is unheard of in the millions of years of our evolution. It is necessary to speed up our evolution so that all of us will be able to make it into the fourth dimension. At this time in our twenty-first century, we are able to see the results of this as mankind/womankind is more open in his/her mind to learning about himself/herself than ever was before. He/she is moving in the right direction and our efforts have not been in vain for we are seeing the results with many of us.

We are not doomed and gloomed for hellfire and damnation. Only a small percentage of the populace will not move into the unity of consciousness dimension. That cannot be helped because there are those who will not seek the light no matter what they are told. They will hang onto their materialistic old ways for dear life although it will not be much of a life when the rest of the planet has moved into the fourth dimension and they are left behind to embrace the materialistic entrapments of the third dimension along with all of its fears and negativity. Most of mankind/womankind is striving as we speak to move in that direction, whether they are consciously aware of it or not.

We are aware of thoughts coming to us. The rest of mankind/womankind are also receiving thoughts. Some are aware and some are not. The majority are just beginning their awakening. They know that something is changing their system of beliefs. They’re not sure what it is but they feel the change happening. We all participated in the creation and survival of our beautiful Earth and do not want to see it destroyed by the use of nuclear weapons. That is our greatest threat at present along with our abuse of the ecological systems that were created to keep the planet stable.

We know earthquakes are Earth’s way of shifting her skin and giving mankind/womankind subtle warnings that she will not tolerate our flagrant abuses of her.

There is a system of beliefs that after a rainy season there will be movement, and there usually is because it is anticipated. The big April 1906 Earthquake left within the minds of the citizens of that region the possibility that the spring would always bring more Earthquakes and has been a belief for sometime amongst the masses in that area. It would be hard to change that thinking since mankind/womankind creates these Earthquakes to reinforce those beliefs.

It is not hard to understand then why they happen. And of course we’ll have our oh-so-knowledgeable scientists inject their interpretation of the event and do their forecasting thus preparing mankind/womankind for the next one. If we look back at the most recent big Earthquake in California, we can easily see that it was projected long before it happened. Systematically, through the media the so-called “big one” was on its way any day. As people subscribed to those beliefs they manifested its reality.

There could be others depending on what our media decides to put into the minds of our species. Earth on her own also likes to take care of herself with messages to humanity to stop destroying the precious outer and inner layers of her being. Oftentimes Earthquakes can be one or a combination of both depending on the situation and the information being plugged into the minds of mankind/womankind.

Natural Health

People are not satisfied with modern medicine, with just taking drugs. They’re turning to natural ways of healing, alternative therapies and such. Drugs inhibit the natural healing processes of the body. They only mask the problem. They do not remove it.

This goes much deeper than the drugs though, because as mankind/womankind changes his/her systems of belief he/she will see that drugs are no longer effective. He/she will not need drugs, he/she will not think he/she needs drugs, and he/she will not be standing in line like at the candy store waiting for the latest miracle cure because he/she will know that the cure is within his/her own power of his/her being and that drugs are not a cure.

There is no drug on our planet that is a cure. It is simply a mask of symptoms which can only be tolerated for so long before new symptoms appear, then the rotating cycle of a new drug is given and so on and so forth. As mankind/womankind moves into the fourth dimension, none of this will be necessary.

Humanity will be able to live as many as two-hundred or more years per life cycle unless we meet with accidents. But in this process humanity will also be creating less of its own species, for humanity will not see the need to prolifically populate the planet. We will be free of our guilt related to our sexuality and religious indoctrinations relating to procreation.

Earth is moving out of the third-dimensional reality and as this happens there will be no need for some of the archaic habits and beliefs that we have for so long held onto.

Fear Holographic Inserts

If we notice, the problems in our society all revolve around fear, one of those fears being fear of the unknown. If we as a species are to evolve and lose our fears then a willingness to expand our consciousness and to understand the true nature of our being would be in order, especially when it comes to our death the way we perceive it. It’s a hard cycle to break the religious dogma that has been so diligently drummed into the minds of man/woman. But without the erasure of some of those beliefs, we are not going to be able to move forward into the next dimension.

We know as I talked about the terrorizing of humanity, it comes in many forms under many guises. But when we break it down, it’s all related to man’s/woman’s fears, mainly his/her fear of death. He/she does not need to be in such fear of his/her death, for truly he/she experienced more trauma in his/her birth than he/she will every experience in his/her death. He/she needs to accept the reality of his/her soul’s existence and move forward. I cannot stress this enough, how death is not final, the way that we see it. He/she also needs to take back power that is rightfully his/her’s and stop allowing others to make decisions for him/her, for his/her life is to be experienced by him/her alone, for his/her soul’s evolution. He/she has been blindly following the ideas of others without questioning them.

The Christian manuscripts leave out reincarnation altogether. Many of us do not question this information about death because it does not correlate with our current manuscripts. However these manuscripts were written by men and altered by man many times over. Jesus, one of the Ascended Masters who mentally and physically shared his body with The Christ entity, did not write our bible/manuscript, men wrote it, with man’s/woman’s interpretations of events the way man/woman saw fit to put them on paper. This entity did not sit there and write these words for us, yet we believe that he did through the writings of others. Much of the messages that The Christ entity brought forward were never even put into our manuscripts.

Now, in getting back to fear, the negative forces are banking on mankind’s fears. The disruptions that they cause feed them a steady diet of negativity which allows them to grow. We will be able to dis-empower them by not buying into it in the first place. I know we will say this is hard to do and it is hard to do because of the biological responses associated with the physical vehicle when out in a situation of threat or peril. If we understand that we are really not in a perilous situation at all, we will be better equipped to confront situations without fear and use our innate survival instincts to survive the situation.

However, if we were unable to rise above this feeling, know that if we do shed our body, we did so because we had planned this for oneself, it was one of many probabilities for our death. When we choose to manifest one of those probabilities, this is the death that we will experience. All of us have gone through life encountering many situations where that probable death could have been manifested but we chose not to. When we are ready we will choose and when we are not we will survive our experience.

Sometimes we come so close, but then there is a lesson to be given in that experience. Sometimes the lesson will alter the way we live the rest of our life either physically, mentally, emotionally or spiritually. And we may say, “MY loved one wasn’t ready, my loved one was living their life, my loved one was happy.” True, this may be so. We may want to look a little further and see if that loved one experienced his death or her death for us to experience another situation in our life where we needed to grow and learn.

It will help us to understand that all of these probable realities have been worked out in the beginning when we set up our lives with all of the souls that we incarnate with. If we understand this concept it will be much easier for us to let go when we need to and to also experience our life more fully. Experience the everyday pleasures of our life that we would normally deny oneself because of our fears. For within these experiences there is a wealth of information and learning that is available to us to further the evolution of our soul.

If we allow oneself to accept the reality of the nature of our soul we will find that the terrorists have no power, because we have effectively removed it from them by not succumbing to the fear. The dark forces have been fighting to have the planet Earth as their home base. Beings of Light will not allow this to happen for Earth was never intended to be a base for the dark forces. Earth itself is moving out of its third-dimensional reality and the forces of dark will be unable to sustain themselves in its new dimension. They are in the process of being sealed-off to their own dimension.

However at this point in our time they still have the ability to influence us. If we allow the dark forces to manipulate our thoughts and feed off of the negativity that is created and the anxiety that we physically feel, we are serving them up a sumptuous buffet of everything that they desire. For if they can kill the hope and the love within the souls of mankind/womankind, they have won.

Dis-empower them by embracing fear with love, a love for each other, and a love for our planet and all living creatures. They will stop terrorizing the world if the world no longer is in fear of them and take charge of the destiny of all souls to move forward into the fourth dimension, using many of the tools that I have written of in my blogs.

Our governments and media should be using the communication devises that they have created for the good of mankind/womankind rather than feeding the negative forces. We can change all of this so easily if we come together as one and stand up and expose the negative forces for who they are. For in doing so each of us will start to raise our vibrational hum and move into the light and all the knowledge that is available to us.

Wonders of The Fourth Dimension

Let me explain something about here about the fourth dimension. As mankind/womankind moves into the unity of consciousness dimension many of his/her abilities are enhanced. These things will come naturally as this process takes place. Man/woman will learn to understand the power of his/her own energy and how to harness his/her own energy and thought process, to alter his/her thought process, to alter his/her environment. The reason we do not have this ability now, is because in the third dimension there are those who would abuse it.

This knowledge is obtained only when one has purified their thoughts and successfully made transition. It is very simple and as the planet moves forward all will become common knowledge. Most of this is hard to comprehend in our three-dimensional reality, however many of us are going to be in that reality forever.

We are definitely moving toward the peaceful fourth dimension. Beings of Light are making great strides to awaken mankind/womankind to his/her energy field, because as we begin understand it we will be able to raise the vibrational hum of our being, thus allowing for the transition.

Crystals are highly effective in capturing energy and will be looked at seriously as a source of power, however the technology will not be given until mankind’s/womankind’s thoughts are purified. There are also other sources of free power available to our world after we have made the transition into the fourth-dimensional awareness. The Earth can no longer sustain the primitive methods that mankind/womankind uses to propel himself/herself around.

These crystals are fully capable of harnessing the energy from the sun and beings as well. We will only see them and have access to them in the fourth dimension.

It’s a more primitive way, however the concept that shaman from traditional cultures use crystals to heal and help the tribe, has some associations. In the future, the crystals will be quite large and hold massive amounts of energy that will be propelled through grids for the various needs of mankind/womankind.

Atlantean technologies, will be the reality in the future of our world. Envision the crystals, they are like giant monoliths. All energy can be harnessed within them and re-dispersed.

The crystals are used to harness the energy. They come in various sizes. The largest ones are used to harness mass amounts of energy. The smaller ones are used for devices which mankind/womankind will choose to use in his/her existence. Again they are not visible to us at this time but we will see them and use them when we cross over into the fourth dimension.

Sending Energy To Simultaneous Lives

Sending energy out to our current life in the past is not a matter of time space continuum for it exists on the physical planes. The present will be no different because we are in the Now at this moment. There is no past or future in this moment there is just Now. What we do Now creates those so called pasts and futures. Every part of our being is going to receive that message: past, present, and future. The very idea that we are focusing on those thoughts in our present point of power will automatically affect, say, the childhood. We cannot erase what we have experienced in the childhood, but the message in that time-frame is received.

So for instance, we’re sending thoughts of love, of spirituality, harmonious thoughts for our psychic abilities, mental stability, all of those things are received. In that point in time, our self is unaware that the thoughts are coming through, however they are being received. Our future selves, in the same reference, are sending messages to us as we speak that we are not aware of, the same with our past. The very idea that we are visualizing our thoughts to all of our simultaneous lives is enough to effect the change and to put the message across to those lives.

They receive the information, like I said whether or not they are aware of it. In doing so, closing one’s eyes and visualizing that fan spread that I drew up and just sending our energies to all of our simultaneous lives, whether or not we understand the complexity of the process. The fact that we are sending the thought is good enough. It is beyond our comprehension in the third-dimensional reality to understand how this works. That’s why it is kept simple as possible to use a simple visualization of a thought landing somewhere in our imagination on those lives.

Many readers of this blog are not aware of those lives, so to them it will be up to their imagination to bring forth information relating to those. Oftentimes our imagination is quite aware of previous lives and will be able to direct for us without us being aware of it.

Anger, Fear and Racism

As I stated before in earlier blogs races evolved…. the colors of the skin, for instance, evolved because of the climates, the pigments were necessary. We talked about that already. The various cultural ideas with mankind’s/womankind’s expression of his/her free will and freedom of his/her consciousness set up his/her cultures and then migrated them throughout the planet each time the beliefs being changed a little bit here and there to suit the ones in power.

We’ve got mass beliefs systems of species of people that appear to be set in stone. They’ve been passed down from generation to generation as truths, never even being questioned as to why they’re there. No one has ever bothered to say, “Wait a minute, why is that?” With the awakening of mankind/womankind in our timeframe, he/she is now starting to question these beliefs. He/she is learning that his/her power is within himself/herself, not within others. If he/she will not further the evolution of his/her soul, he will simply give others what is rightfully his/her.

Emotions and Fear of Death

Refined emotions, yes you will no longer operate on the emotional level of fear. The fear is what is going to be removed from us at this time in the evolution of our soul. Fear is the emotion of the dark forces. The dark forces would love to see mankind/womankind bathed in a sea of fear. Many, many books have brought to light the evolution of the soul and have thus started to eliminate mankind’s/womankind’s fears about his/her being and about his/her so-called impending death, because death does not exist.

One of the first and biggest steps of mankind/womankind is to realize that death is just a transition of his/her energy from the physical body to another form of energy. We are no more dead now than we will be on the day that we die and “die” meaning the day that our physical body ceases to function.

The preservation of the species of mankind/womankind is predicated on the knowledge that he/she will know that he/she will continue to exist in a peaceful and harmonious environment and that with his/her very thoughts he/she will move his/her species into that peaceful realm. Most of mankind/womankind does not want to have to come back and face the negativity and fears associated with our existence right now. As we know, we have chosen to experience these lives and in doing so it would behoove us to experience then in a more peaceful manner than to constantly be fighting for our ego-survival.

The negative forces have had such a horrible impact on the physical body and the mass belief systems of the entities on our planet. They have done much to destroy the natural healing processes that the body was built with. If left alone the body is perfectly capable of taking care of itself. It does not need artificial means to stimulate it or to prevent it from doing its job. It was beautifully designed to enhance the experience of the human condition. It was meant to experience all of its parts joyously and freely for the growth and the evolution of the soul.

Anger is a natural emotion. If left unchecked to just allow itself to manifest it will dissolve itself. We need to experience anger to release the energies that caused the anger but in that release we should not be hurting others but instead question why we had the anger. What were the circumstances that caused our perceived beliefs about how and what we expected from the person or persons that we feel caused the anger?

Had we set up false perceived realities for oneself and then those realities were not manifested? Did we not get what we were expecting and therefore we lashed out in anger and hurt others because it didn’t go our perceived way? It would appear that people or persons are not conforming to our perceived reality. We set ourselves up for our own anger. If we would allow others to perceive their reality in their own way and we experience ours in our own way and leave no expectations out there we would be much happier as a species. We would take what we get and be happy and move on.

The Chakras and DNA

We have not developed our use of telepathic communication on a grand scale. Stimulation of thought in reading books does allow for the opening of chakras.

The more information or knowledge we obtain, the more knowledge that is given to us. The more aware that we become of our spiritual being, the more of our own knowledge we become aware of. It’s an evolutionary thing. As our spiritual knowledge becomes more integrated into our being, our soul evolves. The evolution of our DNA is directly associated with Divine knowledge being given to us. DNA holds within it the coding and information of our history and the blueprint of our Universe. As we accept the knowledge that is being given to us our DNA will evolve and release to us our multidimensional history.

The chakras are the energy information centers directly associated with the evolving DNA. As the DNA evolves and moves through our central nervous system it will stimulate the chakras. When our own twelve chakras are stimulated we then will be able to plug into other etheric energy discs in alignment with many sets of twelve centers outside the body. With this evolution the vibrational hum of the species will be elevated. This will propel us into the fourth dimension.

Everyone experiences grace all the time. We are a state of grace we are just unaware of it. I don’t know if I would use grace per se however let me see if I can put this into terms that the reader of this blog would be able to understand. The knowledge starts to flow forth and brings a clearer perception to our soul’s being. We just become more intuitive and clear about the purpose of our life and our existence as these chakras open. We are experiencing knowledge that we have already had for millions of years. The reality of our multidimensional self comes to the forefront and we are aware of it and we are able to feel it, all of it good and bad.

Our soul always carries with it in our DNA and the very molecular structure of our being all of our memories and knowledge. As this evolution takes place it will be easy for us to access it. Our brain is a virtual computer warehouse of information that we have only very slightly began to use its full capacity to process all of its simultaneous experiences and access Universal Knowledge. The knowledge is all there in the DNA. Our scientists cannot see the functions of our brain or our so-called junk DNA, because to them they have to see it to believe it. Much of this cannot be detected by our primitive scientific measures.

There are twelve chakras . Some of them we are not aware of at this time. The first seven are points within the human body and the etheric body, access portals if we prefer to use that, where information can be released or obtained. With the evolution of mankind/womankind into the unity of consciousness dimension all twelve will be available and as man/woman raises his/her vibration the DNA is being restructured to the twelve strands from the double helix. If we wish to activate these chakras it is important to meditate and release ourselves from our emotional baggage. We may also opt for hypnosis which for some who find it difficult to mediate can be of much help. We will need to be able to handle the multitude of experience that will be released to us without judgment or fear.

The body chakras are as follows: Survival, Sexuality, Emotion, Heart, Throat, Third Eye, and the Crown Chakra. The spiritual chakras outside the body are as follows: number eight it twelve inches above our crown chakra, number nine is three feet above the crown chakra, number ten is the link to the solar system, number eleven is the link to the galactic system and number twelve is the multi-universal link to galactic beyond our own. It will be anchored in our sun system. As we further evolve as a species more will be added but at this time in our evolution this is all that will be needed.

LESSONS OF LOVE

We may reincarnate over and over again through the birth/death cycle until we have learned the lessons of love on our planet and mastered our vehicle.

Souls on our planet are to learn how to reflect themselves, their physical bodies and unite the two together. The process of doing so encompasses the ability to learn unconditional love for each other. When our physical body is a true reflection of our soul, then we will be able to move away from the physical body and use our etheric body. Then one moves out of a third-dimensional reality and into the fourth-dimensional reality. Soul entities have an extreme love for one another. All That Is is the prime source of that love.

When incarnating into a body the memories of that love have been put into an amnesia block so that humans can experience and learn all that they need to for the lessons and experiences they wish to take on in their chosen lives. The last evolutionary step that humans went through was the development of the ego. The ego has now served its purpose and the new evolution will involve the soul. Love of our fellow human beings has been pushed aside for the satisfaction of the ego-self. The ego has taken charge of mankind/womankind and this is not its place. We will be returning to the full integration of our soul-self. The amnesia will be lifted in this evolution.

Through hypnosis we are able to reconnect the soul essence with the conscious mind. It also takes daily meditation to become fully aware of the soul-self. As one meditates, there is an evolution of the strands of DNA that is necessary to this current evolution of the soul-self. The love that the soul has is a euphoric feeling and when meditating or using hypnosis an individual will be able to cross into that part of self that they have been so long ignoring.

Since we are all part of All That Is, The Creator’s love abounds us and we are fully aware of this Love even at birth. Those memories start to fade as we mature and take on the lessons of our life. If we were to retain those memories, we would have knowledge of their outcome and not wish to experience them.

We do not attain Light Body status without experiencing the Earth plane or something similar to it as there are millions of other planets that we may choose to incarnate on. Earth plane being one of the most negative and hardest to deal with also has much value in the progression of the soul if the entity soul uses the knowledge that it has gained from experience on Earth wisely. The message is always of love. Now in the past I have elaborated on metaphysics and the energy manipulation that goes on with the physical, mental and emotional body, however I feel mankind/womankind needs to go back to the basic lesson of learning how to love one another. Soon our bodies will be of an etheric nature anyway and in that dimension there is a whole other set of circumstances that we will be dealing with.

So we must try to get back onto the path of loving one another and cleaning up our thoughts and beliefs. Granted it is quite hard to love someone who is spitting in our face,however look at the spit in the face as a lesson to be learned. If one does not learn to move away from negativity and hate then one does not evolve. It’s that simple. We are all on path of enlightenment.

The Earth plane is like a giant theatrical play. There are good players and bad players. The end result must be a love for one another and for the planet. The animals, all beings have a consciousness and feelings whether these are planets, blades of grass, insects etc. Each contains a consciousness of its own. Man/woman would benefit greatly if he/she would get rid of the idea he is in charge and everything is dispensable to him/her, for it is not.

PURPOSE

In our consciousness. The plight of humanity, it still goes ignored by most of the free world. The western world leaders did not want to deal with what they knew was inevitable. They had been warned many times but refused to listen. There is much that they know yet do not reveal to their citizens.

The consciousness of humanity Has been asleep for far too long. We are desperately trying to awaken the world, however it is not easily done. There were many, many signs that this was going to happen and indeed this was a wake-up call to humanity. The citizens of the Western world have spent an inordinate amount of time in the dark about the plight of the rest of the world. You cannot turn away and ignore the problems of the world and go on as business as usual, pretending they don’t exist.

Americans live in a very powerful nation and other nations are always seeking assistance from them. They have not always been willing to help so this is what happens when the frustration levels of others get out of control. When a government does go in and give nations assistance it is not without a heavy price to pay for those nations. Oftentimes and in most cases the interest repayment alone far exceeds the money that was loaned.

Our governments are taking advantage of the situation of the hopelessness of the people. That is extortion at a justified and political level. How can that possibly be helping? If we are going to help a nation then it must be done without attachments. The funds should be given freely so that all nations will be able to share the benefits of the planet, not just those in the rich prosperous nations. The leaders in the powerful nations have the ability to make a difference in the world if they choose to. After 9/11 humanity was awakened to some degree, however it is not enough.

Knowledge and experience. We can awaken the minds of humanity to awaken our minds to each other, we will have accomplished a great deal. We are not going to be able to effect all change immediately. It is a process. However, the process needs to start. If we do not start the process we will not see any results, other than what we are seeing right now, right now meaning more terrorist activities. Understand, terrorists believe what they are doing is right. We will have to change that belief. And we will have to change that belief. And we will have to change our beliefs as well for much of what we are experiencing was brought on by ourselves.

THE WORLD PLAYERS

Western civilization cannot assume that they are the all-good-doers of the world, so to speak. There are mass amounts of corruption within the ranks of our Western democracy. Most of our nation’s citizens are kept in the dark as to what their government officials are really up to. It has been put under the guise of national security, however there have been many atrocities perpetrated under this guise. Many of the government leaders are quite hypocritical in the way they portray themselves, for the vision portrayed to the nation’s citizens is not always what it appears to be. In the case of the Middle Eastern movement, they perceive the West as evil and on the other hand the West perceives them as evil.

Understand however that these individuals in the Middle East have been killing each other for centuries and to them is has become a way of life and the only way that they know to get their individual points across. I am not condoning it because it is not the way, it is a violation of Universal Law. But then we see that this area has been riddled with negativity for centuries. They have been manipulated by the dark forces for thousands of years. This area is considered to be the dinner table of the dark forces to Beings of Light. There are many forces within that area that are coming into play. It is truly the battle of good and evil in a lot of respects if one was to believe in good and evil.

The Western world has a democracy going for it, in that this is the entry into a peaceful existence. However it can be abused and has been abused as well. Many atrocities have been perpetrated under the name of freedom and democracy, many things that our citizens are unaware of. You know it all boils down to, whose way is the right way and is there such a thing as the right way. But with the ending of some things is the beginning of others.

THE MULTIDIMENSIONAL SOUL

SIMULTANEOUS LIVES
Some of us may not understand how we can Live many lives at the same time. I will try to explain. The energy of oneself that encompasses the greater portions of the actualized self is capable of branching-out portions of itself into other lives to experience them. You have an infinite amount of energy that we could be using to achieve this. The physical manifestation of self in our time frame is only but a minute portion of the totally of who we are. The diagram that I drew up to help us focus on our point of power would somewhat illustrate this. As always,we choose how many lives we wish to experience at any given time. Each time our energy makes the transition from a physical body to our home dimension, some of that energy is returned to the whole if we choose. We may bring as much energy as we feel that we need into each life, This would be evident in some of our great leaders, who have brought greater amounts of energy into those lives because it would be needed to accomplish their objectives.

If we can envision this clearly, we will experience lives in the same way as that The Creator, distributing different portions of our total energy into different lives to be experienced whenever and however we wish. It is also quite possible for us to experience more than one life in a given timeframe. Separate souls on different aspects of the evolutionary path. Of these simultaneous lives, some portions may be in one part of the world living out their lives, while others that are quite unaware of, may be living out their lives in another part of the world or even on other planets for that matter. All is possible, yet we have focused on our perceived reality as the only one we have or will ever have. It is simply not the case.

The following illustration will help us visualize the concepts I have presented here in its very limited sense as there is far more to the greater reality of self than this limited diagram. Envision the total energy of oneself as we branch out to all of our simultaneous incarnational lives. The diagram illustrates envisioning a matrix of energy as the main portion of our soul’s energy, the portion that we have brought into this life and other portions in our other simultaneous lives that we are not focusing on in this current life. We are at present using a portion of our energy to focus in this timeframe. All of our simultaneous lives are still continuing to exist. If we wish to affect them, we will need to focus on sending our healing energies from this point of power to them. In doing so, we are able to branch out to the rest of our lives, thus affecting our past, our present and our future. The information that we send in a positive light with an abundance of love, will affect those lives in a most beneficial way and further our own spiritual evolution.

FROM OUR POINT OF POWER NOW, WE ARE ABLE TO DIRECT OUR THOUGHT ENERGIES TO THESE OTHER LIVES, AFFECTING THEM AS WELL. SEND YOUR MESSAGES TO ALL OF THEM IN A LOVING WAY. THIS WILL GREATLY ENHANCE OUR SOUL’S EVOLUTION AND THE EVOLUTION OF OUR PLANET INTO THE PEACEFUL FOURTH DIMENSION. DO THIS IN MEDITATION FOR FIVE MINUTES THEN MOVE ON WITH YOUR DAY. DO THIS DAILY. THIS POWERFUL EXERCISE WILL ENHANCE OUR LIVES AND OPEN OUR CONSCIOUSNESS TO THE GREATER REALITY OF OUR BEING.

OTHER SELVES AND OTHER REALITIES
Often times in the dream state other realities will be revealed to us and in the dream state we communicate with our other selves all the time. We are not able to focus on more than one timeframe for very long though in the waking state, due to the portions of the brain that we refer to as gray matter. Certain portions of the brain could handle the simultaneous material, but only for a limited time. In other words, we cannot live and experience all of our lives at once in our dream/waking state in our current physical body. With the expansion of our consciousness these areas of the brain are being activated. It is quite possible for us to experience some of our multiple selves with meditation and hypnosis. Some individuals are capable of tapping into past and future lives as we think of them in the hypnotic state. We are always learning from the experiences of our probable selves being the thoughts and impulses that we did not act upon. Even though we did not actualize those thoughts with our actions in this point of power, nevertheless they are real and are still being carried out in the same manner that our life is as we know it.

Let me give you an example here: suppose at a young age, you are a woman or maybe a man and you either had a child or fathered a child. Then that child either died or maybe was given up for adoption. Either way, you were not part of the child’s experience still lives on as a probable reality that you did not manifest into action but nonetheless the energy of the thoughtform still continued on. If you want to experience that probably reality for your self in this point of power, imagine to yourself starting at the beginning of the experience when you made whatever decision. Now you are experiencing another probable reality within your life that you did not actualize into form in this point of power. You can take this as far as you want to and eventually it will lead you to another probable outcome of one of your probable selves. These probable selves are all extensions of your consciousness. They are experiences of your greater energy source that you have not focused on or acted out in your present point of power. However, they are as valid as the present focused reality in which you are engaged as you read this blog.

Now our conscious mind and our biological nature are of one. They cannot be separated and they function harmoniously together. The thoughts of our conscious mind directly affect our biological self. Our conscious mind directs the activity of the self and allows it the freedom to move around our environment. It is the directive needed to maintain our existence from millisecond to millisecond. All the cells in our body rely on it to carry out their orders for our state of being. So our thoughts, for they also have the impetus to seek out their own fulfillment. They are expressed through our desires to make them into our reality, to experience them through the creative development of our creaturehood. As the cells in our body respond to the stimulus of our thoughts and the manifestations of our actions, we are co-creating our reality with the many probable realities available to us, thus expending our consciousness. Since we have free will, we will only experience and believe what we want to, but as we awaken to the endless possibilities of our reality we will be presented with a greater challenge to those beliefs. We will be opening the doors to the vast richness of our being and in doing so other areas of self will start to unfold and reveal themselves to us.

OUR INNER REALITY
In coming together as a species, not as a race or races, but as humans together in a collective consciousness for the happiness and health of all and acceptance of all, the alignment begins and so does the healing, the healing of the wounds of mankind from the separation of selves. There is no separation from us and every living thing throughout the Universes and the consciousness of All That Is. The God consciousness is within us, not outside of us the way we believe it to be. It is internally integrated into every cell of our being. It cannot be removed and set up on a cloud to look down upon us in judgment of us. The only judgment comes from self’s limited perceptions of who he is and his expectations of self based on the acceptance and opinions of others. As one breaks away from his/her exterior reality and belief systems and starts to focus on his/her inner reality, he/she will find most if not all the answers that he/she is searching for. In a way, the inner reality provides all the stimulus and information we need to experience the outer reality. We do not need interference of external stimuli that is not grounded in the fulfillment of the happiness of the soul. In discovering the scientific facts about our biological nature, that we hold to be the reality of our being, external stimuli so to speak, we remove ourselves farther and farther from the knowledge we so desperately wish to attain. That knowledge lies within the consciousness of every living, not within the physical framework. When we truly understand the uniqueness of consciousness, then we will begin to experience the answers that we are searching for.

If we did not feel the need to manipulate and destroy our outside reality and instead focused on the wisdom of our inner reality, there would be no need for wars or devastation on our planet. We would be consciously in balance with nature and all living things including oneself. At one time on this planet this is how we lived in our ancient civilizations, but we grew away from this in pursuit of other stimuli. We essentially threw oneself out of balance and have been trying to get back ever since. When reading this blog, it is my sincerest desire that all of us will begin the awakening and start to enjoy the benefits of the vast library of knowledge that is inwardly available to us and start to look at our lives with a renewed interest in our planet and the other life forms that have so willingly sacrificed their lives for our unnecessary pursuit of external knowledge. All the answers lie within. All we have to do is listen. Below is another exercise to assist us in understanding and healing other portions of our energy.

EXERCISE
HEALING YOUR OTHER SELVES
If I may ask you to look at it in this light: Imagine yourself standing in front of a large wall approximately thirty feet long and fifteen feet high. Now, on this wall starting from the left and moving to the right are markers, say every two inches, stacked in rows with approximately one foot between them from upper to lower. The wall may have several thousand markers. To make this simple we will say one thousand markers. Each marker is a life play that you wish to experience with a script of probable realities co-created by you and others. They do not necessarily have to be experienced in any order. Starting at the top left end would be timeframes from your past as you perceive it and move progressively to the right and across and then down again and across always moving to the right. Each move to the right moves into a timeframe ahead of the one prior and eventually far into the future as you perceive it, say thousands of our years ahead of your life as you know it now. What I want you to do in this exercise is focus on your point of power in this timeframe. I would like you to send thoughts of loving and healing energy to all of the markers on the wall. These markers again represent lives that you may or may not be participating in. The idea here is to use your point of power in the NOW to heal your simultaneous lives and bring them into the light.

The wall also represents the many lives available to you when you make the transition of your energy from the Earth plane to the home dimension where you did your life review. As I mentioned earlier, you enter through a holographic matrix into several of those lives to determine the ones you would like to incarnate into. This happens more than you are aware of as souls step into probable lives on our Earth planet. They are able to manifest themselves briefly into lives through the use of the hologram. It is only an illusion to the souls already on Earth when they appear, but nonetheless quite real within the framework of illusion on the Earth plane. When the souls sheds the body of a life completed, the soul may choose any of the other lives that has carefully created to experience. It is like going to school, one grade completed and then you move on. So it is with the life and death experience of soul.

You may, as you look at this wall, go back or forward in time to experience these lives, since there is no time outside the framework of the Earth plane. Timeframes were set in place for the benefit of soul on Earth. It would be too much for the soul’s total energy to focus on experiencing just one of the lives at one time. The total sum of energy of your being would be too much for one physical body to withstand. The soul focuses a portion of its energy in as many lives as it chooses, each one focusing on its own point of power in that timeframe to fully experience that life and in doing so is constantly altering the experiences of the other lives. The other selves are not aware of it consciously, however all influence each other’s experiences.

YOUR LIFE PLANS
There are many probable realities in each life and we will choose those we wish to manifest as our perceived reality in any given life. The other probable realities will still be experienced, but we will not be focusing on them. For instance, when the lessons of our current life are learned and experienced, they can be done with if we choose not to experience them again. Some of those same lessons will be written into other lives as well. Since those lessons were learned and experienced, they no loner need to be manifested in the other lives. Usually we will incarnate into a life with at least three or four lessons that we wished to master the learning experience from. We have free will and since there are thousands of lives to choose from, we may choose to focus on another life or lives with a completely different set of circumstances. All choices are made by us with our free will.

Oftentimes there will be counseling from the elders of the Council as to which life would be appropriate for this portion of our energy to focus on the next time around, but even that is only advice and we will always have the freewill to choose. We do not have to focus on each and every one of the thousands of lives we have set up for oneself unless we choose to do so. Others may take our place if we wish to abandon one or many. We may do the same with other’s probable lives and step into situations that others souls have abandoned. Most often this interplay is contained within the soul groups that we usually incarnate with. The majority of our life experiences are experienced within that same group, switching back and forth as mother, father, child etc. Many of these lives we have already focused on and experienced at this point in our evolution, so we will choose from the remaining ones where certain lessons and experiences still need to be mastered.

In gaining a clear understanding of the life/death process, mankind/womankind can erase his/her fears and embrace the transition of his/her energy with love. Our loved ones will be with us in what seems to be the blink of an eyes when we are not in a physical body and have returned to our soul’s home. Earth lives are quite short because of all the negativity and stress associated with our current evolutionary aspect of the Earth plane. It is necessary, for the soul would be too traumatized if life were any longer and would not wish to experience other lives. Many times this happens and the soul will wait what appears to be hundreds of Earth years to enter into another life or lives to focus upon.

These situations are unplanned, they are part of the will and plan of The Creator. Every probable reality in each life is planned with all involved within the group and even outside of the group. We share our lives with many of the same souls over and over again, for these souls are the ones closest to us and we all have agreed to experience these lives together to learn. Sometimes we incarnate with other portions of oneself incarnated with us, part of our total energy. Simultaneously living together in the same timeframe and sometimes in the same family, lessons are learned, so to speak, through oneself, with oneself. What we perceive to be our worst enemy may just be a part of our total energy and another extension of us.

As we look at others, we may be looking at a reflection of ourselves and at oneself. All is possible. Our energy is a very minute part of the infinite energy source of All that Is, nonetheless enough for this vast energy source to experience every emotion and life experience. No two souls will experience the same situation in the same way. Each will have its own interpretation of the experience even though the experience may appear to be identical. The energy of ALL That Is therefore is experiencing every facet of humanity and of other Universes through the manifestation of its energy into souls.

THOUGHT REALITY
As mankind/womankind desires tranquility and love on his/her planet so it will be brought forth. As we change our reality with our thoughts and abandon our fears, we will no longer be terrorized. Our thoughts are the most powerful energy in all of creaion for they create our experiences. They initiate the thrust of action on our part and manifest our experience into our reality. Knowing this, understand that our reality is what we create. The manuscripts of our religions project onto us the visions of heaven and hell. Mankind’s/womankind’s heaven and hell are his/her own projections ofactualized thoughtforms manifested into reality on the Earth plane. It is what he creates for himself/herself through his/her thoughts and actions that will determine his/her beliefs about his/her reality and whether he/she is living in his/her fel or his/her heaven.

What we manifest through our thoughts and beliefs we create for our perceived reality. It’s that simple. If we wish to live in fear and terror, we will. If we wish to live in joyous harmony with our planet and its beings, we will. Since we are moving into the unity of consciousness dimension, what we manifest by virtue of our thoughts will be instantly created for us. This is why it is imperative that our thoughts be purified. If we move into this dimension with thoughts of fear for example, then our fears will instantly be manifested into our reality. For some of us this could appear to be very frightening depending on what we have envisioned for ourselves.

Each time we catch oneself harboring negative thoughts, be consciously aware of them and remind oneself that we are working towards eliminating this kind of thinking. This isn’t going to happen over night, however with repetitive conscious reminders to oneself in each instance it will start to manifest itself into our daily reality. Before too long we will respond with positive thoughts to situations instead. For instance, someone may cut in front of you while driving and because of your old conditioning you may feel that they did it deliberately or whatever. Instead you may say to yourself, “This person just didn’t judge the distance too well or maybe they are a new driver.” A harmless positive thought instead of an angry negative thought. That’s all it takes to start reconditioning our thoughts. Granted there will always be some situations that will be hard to justify and we will have to do our best to find some good in it.

If we observe other individuals, we will notice that there are always some people who are happy, no matter what. It is because they have not subscribed to the fear-based belief system of our world. They have decided that they will experience their lives joyously and they will not let fear grip their reality. They are in control of their thoughts and most often negative thoughts would not even enter into their thinking. They will most often see only the positive outlook to any situation even if they have made it up in their minds. These individuals have already evolved themselves into a fourth-dimensional consciousness in many ways. They are walking among us. When we meet one of them we know it immediately because we are most likely drawn to them. They make us feel good and we like to be around them. They validate us and show their love for us without prejudice or fear of rejection. This is what it will be like for all of us in this dimension where there is no fear and no terror. Life will be joyously experienced for the happiness of all as our soul was meant to live. We will begin to learn the art of cooperation with others and the wonderful feeling of expressing the Divine qualities of our soul openly to the world.

As fears are erased we will be able to communicate with other LIght Beings throughout the Universes and share universal knowledge, for we will understand that The Creator or God if you call it that, wears many outfits, in many colors, to fully experience everything in the Universe that he wishes to. As we grow in the knowledge that is so rightfully ours and reawaken to ourselves, we evolve. If we ignore fear and do not understand and embrace it, then it will grow and become our reality. If we want peace, we will have it. Create it with our thoughts. Believe in it and believe in the power of our being to do so. This probable reality will indeed manifest itself if humanity would consciously come together and make this happen.

EGO VS. SOUL & SOUL VALIDATION
Now let us discuss the relationship of the ego to the soul. Many of our fears about death are based in the reality of the ego. They have no power in the soul’s reality. We have let the ego take control of our knowledge. The ego does not want to die, but the ego is not us, the soul is us. The ego is a manifestation of the mind experience. The ego separates our soul from its development. Consciously, with our perceived sets of beliefs, we have let the ego take over our thoughts. However, soul knows differently and in dream state is oftentimes living the life that we have consciously denied ourselves in the waking state. Our dreams are a great reflection of the many facets of soul’s experiences in this life that we are focusing on. Soul travels to all of them, i all timeframes during the sleep state. We are consciously unaware of it, however if we take the time to write down our dreams we may be surprised to see how much they can reveal to us.

The ego is very protective and will deny the soul’s reflection of itself through the body. It does not want to acknowledge the soul aspect of our being. It is only concerned with itself and the physical body in which it resides. As we open our eyes and begin to validate you-the-soul, our ego-self will do its best to foil those attempts by reminding us of our fears and doubts. It is a master at trickery and deception for it is ruled by the materialistic force of dark. For cons our soul has been incarnating over and over again always striving to reflect itself through the physical vehicle. The ego has stood in its way much of the time. To some degree our physical vehicle needs the ego for it has been useful in our survival. The soul and the ego must learn to cooperate with each other for the good of the total being. When that happens the soul will have finally mastered its vehicle and will no longer need to incarnate into it. That is the goal of the soul when taking on physical incarnations. The lessons you are to learn and experience from are always related in some way or the other to the ego. When the soul has mastered this aspect of its reality it will no longer be tethered to its lower dimension.

THE WALLS OF SEPARATION
The ego will do whatever necessary to invalidate the soul for it perceived its very existence to be threatened by the soul. The soul would not behave the way the ego does and it knows this. It is looking for validation in the physical body that it is lackig in the spiritual body. This causes many problems within our soul. Since our birth we have been invlidated in one way or the other. Our religions invalidate us with their dogma that we have subscribed to these beliefs. The Christ consciousness did not come here to die for our sins. We are not sinners unworthy of living our life. This is man’s/woman’s idea of himself/herself, projected onto the masses through the guise of religion. Our souls are full of love that radiates with brilliant light. The man-made/woman-made religious beliefs of being a sinner and unworthy invalidated us if we did not conform to their perceived sets of beliefs. As soon as we were able to communicate our desires as a child, the invalidation began and continued all through our lives in one form or the other. We are beautiful, bright, loving beings worthy of all that we desire. Mankind/womankind builds great walls of separation around himself/herself in the hopes of being invulnerable to his/her beliefs and fears. Our pent-up emotions eventually must be released and often they are in a variety of ways, either with disease of the physical being of in acts of uncontrolled negative aggression against others. We were not meant to live like this. We have created for ourselves such a whirlwind of fear and anxiety in our everyday lives that our life spans have actually shortened.

Without the medical advances that our scientists have made to keep us alive longer, many of us would be dying off much younger. It is quite possible for humans to live hundreds of years in future lives on the planet after we have mastered our fears. Our stress levels will be greatly diminished and we will be free to experience the beauty of our being and the wonders of our planet, other planets and their life forms. As we learn to live our life without dear, then we will truly have started to evolve our consciousness forward. Trust in ourselves and our future and we will open up to the wisdom of our truth. We will experience peace and joy and we will know the God wuth us.

The Realities of a Distorted World

SURRENDING YOUR POWER
Now , I want to discuss the mentality and belief system behind the terrorists and their followers. Whenever a society has allowed their beliefs to be predicted on the beliefs of one individual it is a recipe for disaster. Under conditions of hopelessness and despair it is easy for many individuals to look for hope in the promises of others. Many individuals are fearful of experiencing themselves and feel that they have no power over their own being. They suffer from extreme feelings of guilt and unrest. Often they become so paranoid and delusional that their reality seems only marginal at best. When the mass beliefs systems of many appear to be norm, these individuals subscribe to the reality of their leaders instead. They have essentially given up on their own power and handed it over to their leaders. Oftentimes, as is the case with the guise of religion. The religious indoctrination in the Eastern cultures starts at a very young age and is accepted by all. Many atrocities have been perpetrated under the auspices of religion.

The leaders themselves are often quite paranoid and their reality straddles between the dream state and the physical waking state. It is often difficult for them to decipher between two. They are usually individuals with a sense of grandeur and cannot relate to the rest of society. It is their greatest satisfaction to remake their reality into one in which they are the leaders. They will go to whatever lengths they have to at the expense of others if needed to get their point across, all the while feeling completely justified in doing so. In their attempt to project their beliefs on the rest of the world they have attracted the powerless ones as followers. The reality of the leaders then becomes the reality of the followers all sharing the same distorted set of beliefs. The paranoid leaders then systematically undertake the process of eliminating everything that does not conform to their beliefs. The leaders then often turn into raging fanatics. Since they have now gained a certain amount of momentum it becomes easier for them to reinforce their delusional beliefs. Their followers all along are reinforcing these beliefs. They are indeed frightened of the nature of their existence. They will go along with whatever their leaders have in store for them since they are under the belief that they cannot exist on their own. They are caught between different conflicting sets of beliefs and have decided that they must turn over the responsibility for their state of being to someone else. They are looking for anyone they can to take over the job of making decisions for them.

It is easy to see the fanatic leaders can gain such momentum. Usually the “evil ones” are perceived as the ones who will not conform to the fanatic leader’s system of beliefs. In order to rid the the world of these disruptive individuals, in their minds, they must resort to violence and mass deaths, again using religion as the justification behind the cause. I will say this again, “Killing of any kind is a violation of Universal Law.” It is not tolerated and when these souls make the transition of their energy upon their physical death, they will most assuredly see what I mean. The followers eventually succumbed to the madness of their leaders, since they feel they have no voice with that of their leaders. To these followers death is their final statement. Some cultures believe that a martyr’s death is a holy thing. In fighting for their distorted religious beliefs and the mass beliefs of the members of their organizations, they perpetrate their madness upon the rest of the world, again feeling fully justified in doing so. An effective brainwashing indeed to allow for the leaders to fully carry out their plans of attempting to make the world conform to their beliefs, all in the name of God.

We have a natural response to the thoughts of others though and generally speaking have built-in protections from becoming entranced in another’s beliefs. It is only those who feel that they have no power of their own who fall prey to the belief systems of others. Those are the ones who would rather give the responsibility of their thinking to someone else rather than confront their own conflicting sets of beliefs. Oftentimes as these individuals move away from the mainstream religious indoctrination they get caught up in fanatic cults that our societies have been experiencing in recent years. Their ideas and thoughts attempt to move as many minds into the realm of their thinking, thus removing them from the mainstream of society. Once removed from the mainstream the leaders then have complete control over the ideas and movements of their followers.

Fear is the primary tool that these leaders use to keep their followers in the group. The other is rewards, rewards they they believe and are convinced of by their leaders, that they will most assuredly obtain when they give up their lives for the movement. Most often the followers will abandon everything in pursuit of these new sets of beliefs. As the followers grow in numbers, the beliefs are then reinforced stronger until the point when the rest of the world is perceived as the enemy, the enemy that does not understand their perceived enlightened state of being, because this is how most if not all see this new revelation of experience. Since it is not the norm for the rest of society, then it must be something new for only the chosen to experience. These individuals perceive themselves as the new leaders of the pack, out to manifest the ideas of their leaders as good little soldiers would do.They become so entwined in these new sets of beliefs and often they will fight to the death to get the distorted point of their idealistic leaders, and now themselves, across.

As governments will do, they go in and blow the perceived enemy up, thinking that killing them off will solve the problem. The belief systems of the people have not been changed though and many more will spawn and continue the movement unless the beliefs of these fanatic individuals can be realigned. If left unchecked and to their own devises these fanatic groups will wreak havoc on the rest of the world’s societies. They fully believe that they are justified in using whatever means available to them to get their point across. Hitler was another example of a paranoid fanatic gone awry and the projected mass belief system that was able to sway so many individuals into the realms of his thinking.

Humanity is on the verge of making giant leaps in the further evolution of its souls and is starting to awaken to the systematic indoctrination of beliefs that they have for so long accepted. We can make a difference in this world by telepathically sending messages of love to these individuals. We can surround them and their nations with a ray of The Creator’s healing light. As we surround oneself with love light and use our own positive intuitions and abilities, motivated by love for our fellow man/woman to send our messages, we are then making a difference in changing the world for the betterment of mankind/womankind. The exercise below can be used whenever we wish to bring some positive healing energy to another.

EXERCISE:
RAY OF LIGHT
This is simple to do and quite effective. Whenever you choose, envision a ray of The Creator’s healing bright light beaming down directly on another. You may envision the ray on one individual or many. For instance: when driving in one’s car, if you experience a driver under the control of negative energies, envision a ray of this light descending down upon them. Focus all of your energies on sending loving thoughts to that person and surrounding them with a protective shield of light. Ask that The Creator remove the negative energies away from their soul and heal their thoughts. You may then keep the ray on them for the rest of their day if you wish. Just ask that it remain and it will.

IDEALIST AND FANATICS
Let us give some thought here to idealism and fanaticism. In a way each being on Earth is an idealist to some extent. Most individuals devote a good portion of their daily lives actualizing their idealized goals. It is most important to be aware of your actions and monitor them on a daily basis to ensure that you’re realizing your ideals and that they are in line with the soul aspects of self. It is when your idealism turns into the negative and controlling arena that problems arise. If you are willing to express your idealism at any price to others no matter what, then you have engaged in fanaticism. This can be seen with the leaders of the terrorist’s organizations, political leaders, politicians, corporations and religious groups and cults. Anywhere you see a select group of individuals trying to control the masses you will find idealists in some form or another.

Fanatics are inverted idealists with visions of grandeur and an obsessive desire for power. Anyone or thing is dispensable in order to achieve their distorted version of the world. They do not tolerate dissent or opposition to their perceived vision of reality. Oftentimes money is the driving force behind these unscrupulous beings. They perceive money as power, so the more they amass, the more power they feel that they have. All the while, these individuals have had issues with their own lack of power for the majority of their lives. They have decided that mankind/womankind is evil and that they are going to take what they can get by whatever means necessary, always justifying their actions in pursuit of their perceived ideals. Ideally there is nothing wrong in wanting to change the world for the better, but when “for the better” comes with unrealistic visions that create fear and cultivate greed and ignore the desire for mankind/womankind to experience his/her soul’s essence in a peaceful way, then we have stepped into the role of fanatic.

If we are willing to violate Universal Law and kill one another in the pursuit of peace or our distorted version of reality then we have only perfected the art of killing, not just physical killing, but killing the spirits in the minds and hearts of mankind/womankind and animals. There is more than one way to kill, and all of it is a violation. Anytime humanity is willing to sacrifice the lives of beings whether animals, plants of other humans it is a violation. They have lost respect for life of any kind and that is itself is a step towards the further erosion of our environment and our societies. Only when humanity can demonstrate with their actions that all life is sacred and that all living things are part of the Divine energy of The Creator, can we begin to evolve our consciousness.

Our perceived beliefs are what get us into so many wars, unnecessary wars, as all are, for they have no value. We have only succeeded in identifying oneself with a defensive illusion. Both sides are fanatical about their perceived sets of beliefs and are unwilling to tolerate the perceived beliefs of the other. Now, the terrorist organizations that our world is currently experiencing are a matter of great concern to Beings of Light, for they are truly influenced by negative energies and must be dealt with for the peaceful survival of the planet. In our world presently, because of this threat, war has been projected to the masses as the only answer that our governments can undertake. There are other alternatives, though our leaders are unwilling to entertain them. Killing for the sake of peace leaves humanity with a true lack of understanding of peace.

ONE OF THE LEADERS
I will give you just a small, belief synopsis about one of the terrorist leaders. He often was overindulged, living within the confines of his family “palaces” as he liked to think of them. He maintained much power over the rest of his siblings, often in a very negative light. He realized early on in his adulthood that her was able to manipulate anybody he chose to by virtue of his charm. He set himself out to be very charming for he realized that he had much more control over others using this tactic. He was quite powerful within those structures in his own right; however this was not enough to satisfy his/her enormous appetite for power and ego-gratification.

The unfortunate thing about this individual is that he so easily manipulates others with his/her charm and leads others down this same path of self-destruction. He was not pleased to be exiled from his home base and took on a vengeance that he swore he would make others pay. He is an idealist and a fanatic, caught up in his own version of reality the way he has created it and envisioned it. He has been ostracized by most of his family and that further enrages this being. He is now so obsessed with power of getting his point across and regaining the power that he feels that he lost, that he will use whatever means necessary at whomever’s expense to justify the means. He has assumed a self-righteous attitude now, masquerading behind the guise of religion and convincing his followers that he is the right hand of Allah. Because of the great wealth of this individual, he has latched himself onto a nation of people in turmoil with false promises under a religious mask.

Understand, his followers were in and are in a situation where they feel helpless and any answer to the current plight of the peoples is going to be a welcome one even if it entails mass killings. Since the people of this nation do not trust the leaders of the Western world along with other nations of power, and rightfully so, they will turn to one of their own for answers whatever those answers may be. The Middle East has been known by all in the Universe as one of the vortexes of the negative entities. It is going to be a great struggle to release these nations from the grips of this reality and change their way of thinking. No matter how many bombs our nations drop, the ideas and the movement have infiltrated all aspects of society in all nations to some degree or another. When the belief systems are aligned with the will and plan of The Creator, we will have peace.

Changing the consciousness of mankind/womankind

Oneself The Creator


The probabilities now are present for us to quite literally propel ourselves into the harmonics of the higher dimensions by changing our individual and mass consciousness. A vast multidimensional experience awaits all of humanity. Mankind/womankind is starting to acknowledge that his/her consciousness is now beginning to become aware of its greater self. In allowing that expansion there lies the potential to experience the greater realities of our being. It is time for us to take off the blindfold and open oneself up to the full dimensions of our spiritual, physical and mental abilities. Opening up our consciousness to the impulses and messages that are inherently ours would allow our consciousness to fully experience itself. As our consciousness develops, our neurological and biological systems will evolve. Humans at this time are expanding their neurological connections within the brain. Latent areas often thought of as gray matter with no functional capabilities are being triggered into activity. As this happens our being will become more and more aware of the multidimensional nature of its existence.

As our consciousness evolves, so does our God image. It will move itself towards our idealized goals and probabilities, serving as psychic stimuli to effect change. We are creators of our reality. Our ‘soul-self’ had a hand in the creation of this planet and all of its living forms. Our ability to manipulate energy and create life forms is second nature to us when we are not focused in this physical Earth reality. Our abilities far exceed what we are bale to perceive in the limited third dimension. As our consciousness evolves, we will become a more conscious co-creator and be able to to tap into the vast realms of knowledge available to you. Mankind/womankind has an innate comprehension of past, present and future probabilities and a built in desire to cooperate with all living species for the greater good of the planet. We have consciously blocked much of this information from our being because of our dogmatic perceived sets of beliefs and our unwillingness to look inside ourselves for answers.

Always our ideas of good and evil stand in the way of our soul’s development. There are many forces within the world as we know it that are invisible to us. Yet if they were presented to us, we would run and hide, for they do not fit into our limited sets of beliefs. We have been so indoctrinated with beliefs of others that we have literally dammed up the evolution of our being. You cannot see the wind for example, but we know it is there. We cannot see God for example, but we know he/she is there, because these are our beliefs. Then why not believe that there is more to our being than our ego-perceptive materialized form. In changing our consciousness, one must acknowledge that there is more to life than what is right in front of our eyes. The total sum of the energy of self reaches far beyond the comprehension of even our most astute scientists. It is there, it is real, it is all of us and it is All That Is.

COMMUNICATING WITH OTHERS
There are many energy entities around us although we cannot perceive them. Since they do not fit into the order of our perceived reality, we deny their existence. We have been subtly told about them in various sci-fi movie creations although we always portray other planetary beings as evil and scary and out to take over our bodies. I would assure that in this point in time in our world’s history that is not the case. Beings of LIght have no use for a dense physical body on the Earth plane. They have already moved through that phase of their evolution and are all part of the same energy source that is infinite. It would also behooved mankind/womankind to abandon the idea that his/her death is final. Energy cannot die. We do not die. Our energy is merely transformed, into another dimension.

It should be apparent to most of us with the introduction of some of our current movies and television shows, that what we have denied as real, is certainly very real. It is totally within the realms of our magnificent being to communicate with any or all departed loved ones. It is simply a matter of listening and not dismissing what we hear as our own babbling. Those of us who have made the transition of our energy to the higher dimensions, as well as those who are still waiting on the Astral levels, are very capable of communicating with us and us with them. As our communications with beings in other dimensions will be commonplace. If we would just listen, we would be amazed at what we might hear. Our conscious lives are so full of our present daily activities that we have not stopped to smell the roses, to coin a phrase that we use. Many of our departed loved ones are anxiously awaiting communications with us. All we have to do is tune in. Their energy is as real as ours and they are no more dead than we are right now as one read this blog. They love us and are watching out for us.

Beings of Light are very concerned with the entities on Earth, for our thoughts and actions in our present point of power affect the future of the planet. We have the capabilities of communicating with other selves to influence the life that we are living in different time frames in order to improve or avoid disasters in those chosen lives. We do this in the dream state on a regular basis. Some of us are now developing this ability in the waking state and are able to communicate with different portions of our energy in different lives and timeframes. That is happening for many of us now in our world.

We all communicate with other aspects of ourselves. Both of these entities are communicating with various aspects of the Self entity of which we all are part, for we are aspects of ourselves in another dimensional-timeframe. To further clarify, the Self who I am is also a part of another vaster entity as a whole. So I am only another portion of our total Self. We are all part of the same entity only in different dimensions and elements of time and space.

THOUGHT HEALTH AND THE EVOLUTION OF DNA
I would like to discuss our thoughts in relation to our health in the present awakening. In order to raise the consciousness of mankind/womankind, man/woman themselves must be aware of the human condition and the environmental changes going on around him/her. He/she can no longer be oblivious to current situations within his/her own ecosystem and his/her body. As I have mentioned before in previous blogs, we are fully capable of creating a harmonious state of health for ourselves and our planet by virtue of our thoughts. For those of us who are not familiar with this concept I will briefly explain and then refer the reader to some of my previous blogs for further clarification. Our thoughts create our very existence as we know it. We form our reality based on those thoughts. Our perception of the reality of our thoughts lies within our mind. Thoughts manifest into desires and then into actions. Every thought that we have that has been acted on, manifests itself into one of the probable realities within this life that we are currently focusing on.

Our thoughts are responsible for our state of health. Initiating thoughts that we are sick or will be sick will then set our biological system to receive the perceived illness. If we are told over and over again that we need certain drugs to make us feel and we believe this, then we are not allowing our own built in mechanisms that monitor our state of being to do their jobs. By believing this, the message is sent that we would rather give the power to someone or something else. We have then set up the atoms within our body to prepare for the invader. Our body is fully capable of healing itself. It is our own thoughts that interfere with the process by sending messages that interrupt the natural flow of things. The atoms of our being are joyously going about their business of creating a harmonious existence within our physical framework and with this thought process that we have engaged in, we essentially throw them a curve. They are now put into defensive mode and must prepare for the attack. The drug companies in our culture are at this time going out of their way to ensure that we are going to be tethered to their product wit their product with their psychological messages on our television sets and media advertisements. This very process is harmful to our evolution as a soul.

As the perpetrators of negativity that have been so cleverly keeping us in the dark for so long realize that the mass consciousness is starting to change, that souls are beginning to move into the light, they are terrified that they will no longer be able to keep us chained to the old system of beliefs. Negativity feeds off of negativity. What better way to do this than to drug the minds and bodies of mankind/womankind. Systematically feeding us ideas through our media that we are sick and need drugs to maintain a state of well-being. We then subscribe to these beliefs and send our body mechanisms into a state of confusion thus rendering our being useless in its quest for its own health and evolution. Our body and mind cannot function as they need to for spiritual evolution if they are in a constant state of chemical alteration. The chemical reactions needed to allow our chakras to open to the information cannot take place if we are in a drug-induced state.

With the evolution of humanity the current double helix DNA will start to change and move to twelve strands. Each time it evolves it will do so in a group of three until there are twelve. The evolution of our DNA from the double helix into the twelve strands will correspond to twelve chakras. There are presently seven chakras within our etheric and physical body. During the evolution of the DNA another five will be added outside the body. Those additional five will be the link to the next phase of our spiritual evolution. Much of the information that will be given to us for our evolution will come via these outside chakras and enter the pituitary gland where it will then be transferred into strands of our evolving DNA. As these new strands of DNA and areas of the brain are activated, brain mapping will be possible and past-life memories will be evoked. Our entire civilization will be based upon a psychic framework rather than a physical one. It is a natural process that every physical being goes through when evolving.

Most of us who experience this evolution will become quite aware of the feeling that we are much clearer about life and seem to know things that we previously weren’t aware of. Information will start coming to us in dreams and in states of relaxation, universal information about our being, who we are and what our purpose is and so on. Our consciousness is being raised. The fact that we are reading this material shows that we are searching for the answers and we are evolving.

I will give an exercise that will help us get started on our own personal path to recovery and our soul’s evolution, for we are a soul with a body, not a body with a soul, remember that. Our physical existence is only a temporary one in which ‘you-the-soul’ are physically incarnated on our planet to learn from our experiences and evolve. Consider it like going to school, Earth school, where the lessons are sometimes harder than on other planets but the amount of spiritual growth that one gains from incarnating here is much greater than it is on some of the other planets and solar systems available to us. If we will take the time to do this exercise once a day and stay focused, we will start the process of aligning ‘you-the-soul’ with our body as one.

EXERCISE:
OPENING THE CHAKRAS
Sit or lie down and relax your entire body starting from the top of your head to your toes. Breathe deep. Inhale positive energy. Exhale all negative energy and thoughts. Do this as slowly as you wish. The idea is to achieve the level of relaxation that will bring you to a place of being completely free of your body. As you begin to relax, feel all of the tensions fade away into the air as you take yourself deeper and deeper into this relaxed state. Just let all thoughts and negativity float away. You may use the box technique that I gave you in earlier blogs to get rid if unwanted thoughts and feelings. Visualize them going into the box or it can be any receptacle of your choice as long as it has a lid on it. Focus on you mental center. For most of you it will be somewhere just above or between your eyebrows, not the area of the pineal gland of the third eye, but just below. This is your mental vortex. Stay in this relaxed state for at least a half an hour. What you are doing by this exercise is learning to calm your thoughts and your body so that the Divine information may then start to flow into you through the pituitary gland thus opening up the chakras in that area. As you do this for a while you will start to raise your vibrations to a higher level and you will notice that your difficulties will start to ease as Divine knowledge is placed deep within your hearts. Some of you will be able to achieve results almost immediately while others may take longer. Do not despair as all of us will eventually open up the chakras to receive Divine information at the cellular and DNA levels.

SPIRITUAL KNOWLEDGE
In reading this material there will be many of us who will simply not want to hear. We will go about our old superstitious ways and cling to our familiar and comfortable belief systems. Fear of the unknown will keep us in the grips of the old ways. Light is information. Light is knowledge. If we feel that you do not want to hear you will not, but once we have obtained the light there is no turning back, for we now possess the knowledge. Some of us will want to stay with the negative influences because we will not want to give up our habits and materialistic desires. Whether or not we choose to accept or deny the information that is being given to us is predicated on our own free will. However, those of us who wish to evolve will do so. The rest of us will simply stay in a third dimensional reality with all of its negativity until we make the conscious decision to seek the light. The negative energies, as I mentioned previously, have spent eons trying to keep the light from humanity, controlling the consciousness of mankind/womankind for their own selfish purposes. Without negativity we cannot have negativity. The negative influences wished to keep Earth as its breeding ground for its source of energy. They are now out-numbered by Beings of Light on the planet and will soon be relinquished to their own dimension. These forces are part of the balance system of the planet, however they have been spiraling out of control for the last several thousand years. Their function was to balance the matter aspect of the planet. They became too powerful though and have overtaken the minds of much of mankind/womankind in the materialistic sense and thrown him/her off course in his/her evolution. Millions of the citizens of our planet are now deeply entrenched in materialistic possessions and will even go so far as to die for those possessions. This is absurd from a spiritual point of view as these things are only an illusion of our own mind/thought energy and mean nothing to the soul. The only thing that matters is our relationships with each other and whether or not we act on our thoughts and newfound knowledge to help all of humanity. We have been in our dense physical bodies for thousands of incarnations and it is now time to move on to our etheric bodies and interact with each other on a deeper level. Many individuals are now seeing that their evolution is not a physical but a spiritual, soul evolution and are moving towards the light. They are in the process of starting to reject the old controlling theories about the nature of their being and their evolution. They are beginning to realize that they have been controlled by their materialistic ego desires instead of their spiritual desires.

Whole nations are beginning to awaken to their greater reality and purpose in the Divine plan that The Creator has for our planet and are rebelling against the invasion of the old negative influences masquerading in the name of their gods. Corporate and political dominators have been the ruling negative forces in our world. The citizens and believers have been deceptively confused. They no longer know what to believe or whom to believe. They have been told one thing and witness another. The art of deception has been masterfully played by these materialistic forces. As we witness, many nations and their citizens rise up and fight back, it is imperative not to compete with one another but to unite together by cooperating as brothers and sisters in humanity. It is not imperative to kill however. I wish to make that very clear: Killing is a violation of Universal Law. There are other ways to bring the consciousness of humanity into the light of its soul’s existence.

There are many energy forces that are free to come and go throughout our world. They usually reside within the Astral levels of our planet. Their access is through the various vortexes throughout the world. The vortex around the Middle East has been an access point for the forces of dark. This is where the network of the perpetrators of our terrorist acts have hidden deep underground and within the recesses of the mountains in their bases of operation. Many of them are nearly impossible to find. Some of these manipulating energies straddle between dimensions in many cases and they are not accessible to the limited perception of the third dimension. However, many of these forces are still there. This is the last stronghold of these forces. They are losing momentum and energy and that will continue.

Nations of the world would benefit by joining forces to peacefully eradicate the restructuring of the belief systems of many cultures to the ways of the negative influences. With the emergence of new positive energies and utilization of the technology of the media, this can be done. Now some of the leaders of our nations of power are very deeply entrenched in the influences of the forces of dark and are going to have to abandon their old ways as well. These leaders will put up the most resistance for they are the ones who will perceive themselves as having the most to lose. They are so deeply entrenched in materialistic world power that this will be a great struggle for them to have to make do with less. However with the cooperation of all nations there will be peace for all. We cannot have peace until we have justice in our world. We cannot have justice unless we are willing to share the resources of the planet and care for all other nations and to stop the atrocities of a global corporate takeover of the planet and its resources. This is just a simplistic vie of some of the demographics as to how and why 9-11 and Corona(Covid19) and some other terrorist attacks have been able to find their way into our societies.

The Misuse of Religion for the repression of humanity

Religious Beliefs


Through the ages humans have always been involved with religion. They have always been aware of God- energy, but oftentimes have distorted it to serve their own purposes and justify their actions and imposed beliefs. We have used it for various objectives and because of it powerful nature to has become a tool for us to control ourselves and others. With the illusion of beliefs that only serve to control our desires we have created roadblocks to our soul’s evolution. The natural aggressiveness of our creature-hood has been so repressed that we find oneself unable to control our pent-up energy at times. We have further damned up our being with our obsessive beliefs about guilt-ridden issues such as our own sexuality. We have denied our being the very pleasures of its creature-hood and again found ourselves wallowing in a sea of frustration.

Take for instance the the religious beliefs of the world. Many of these religions have made it mandatory to deny our own being and its natural aggression and sexuality, taking the word aggression and turning it into a negative when it is a part of the natural state of every living thing on the planet. Without natural aggression mankind/womankind would not have been able to survive, as his/her own creative abilities stem from this. As a flower blooms, it is performing its own natural aggression. This is a natural process of creature-hood and when used in a positive way can be very beneficial for our soul’s evolution. Even negative natural aggression can be a learning experience, for it forces one to confront their emotions.

If we take a society and tell them that they are to deny the forces of their physical being, the energy that would naturally be released has nowhere to go. It then begins to manifest itself in all sorts of repressed emotions until the physical being can no longer tolerate it and the self will act out in a highly aggressive nature or will force itself into an illness. Either way, the power of the being is damned up in such a way as to literally blow itself up. I might add that this is what happens when we hear of people who have been thought to spontaneously combust. Although this is a rare event, it can happen. The pent-up energy has nowhere to go. The individual is not given an avenue for release in their own perceived belief system. Instead, these individuals should be encouraged to release the restless energy they have, and try to find peace in nature with the help of energy healing (visit websites of companies like LightSong to learn more) and similar spiritual practices. A person can only truly let go of anger once they discover some sense of inner peace, and keeping turbulent emotions inside is not the way to go about it.

Religion have been notorious for trying to control the masses with mass systems of guilt-ridden indoctrination. The so-called religious leaders who were involved in writing the various manuscripts, were well aware that in order to tether us to their way of thinking they would have to make us feel guilty and unworthy, thus roping us into their belief systems and ultimately having control over you-the-soul. This gave them much power, but was in direct conflict with the intended messages of the Consciousness of God. We were stripped of our free will and made to feel embarrassed and guilty about our bodies. The body is a vehicle of expression and learning. It is the vessel with which we communicate with one another. When we truly understand this , we will be free to experience our soul’ true nature.

We were also told that we were sinners, unworthy, yet created in the likeness and image of our god. What then does this say about our god? If one were to believe that, then one would have to say that our god was unworthy and a sinner, for we were supposedly made in his/her image. This is not so, yet we have believed this for centuries, not even questioning as to why. The God of the Universe created us out of his/her love and in The Creator’s eyes we are no less than perfect.

The beliefs of some nations have not changed since the inception of these documents and have held firm for thousands of years without much cause for question. With the advent of modern transportation and the abilities of nations to move their citizens from place to place relatively easily, came a new era of information to many cultures. We now have entire civilizations questioning their beliefs, seeing the rest of the world and the way it is developing or not developing and in a sense confronting those issues openly. Many are torn between their society’s system of beliefs and their new ideas of freedoms that they could have. Many of the beliefs of these nations were directly associated with their man/woman-created versions of god.

Let us discuss mankind’s/womankind’s perception of God. Down through the centuries man/woman have always known that there was a force behind the creation of the Universe. Whether it was in his/her limited environment or in his visions of the stars he/she have always been aware that there was a greater force other then his/her own being. Many ancient cultures and civilizations were very in-tune with this force. As highly aware citizens of the planet they had much respect for the energies responsible for creation. It wasn’t until the last several thousand years that the power and image of the Divine Creator was brought into a human perception. Mankind/womankind felt it was to his/her advantage to put a face on the Creator, thus humanizing him/her to however he/she perceived. Along with this idea the hierarchy of religious leaders decided to take power of this newly created human god into their own hands. This perpetuated many myths and misrepresentations of who and what God was. The idea of God being a god of good and evil also came into play as another way for the religious leaders to control their followers by putting their ideas under the name of God and god’s rules and regulations, that mankind/womankind was supposed to live by. They lost sight of the fact that God is a force of pure energy that radiates with an abundance of love’s light and embodies every living thing. Because of the controlling religious idealists, all power that was once known by all of humanity as part of its own divinity was removed. It was given to this self-created man’s/woman’s god.

We have many versions of God in our nations at this time, all with their different mass belief systems, The writers of the manuscripts that we hold to be true, have had a hand at distorting the original messages at one point or the other and realigning them to fit their own perceived way of thinking. All of these versions have their various sets of man-made/woman-made rules, all mean to in some way or another prevent mankind/womankind from realizing the true purpose of his/her soul.

Mankind/womankind has been locked in an abyss, waiting patiently, believing that eventually he/she would be released and able to experience his whole being. His/her beliefs within the power structures of the religious organizations have kept him/she in the dark for many thousands of years. We cannot turn the infinite energy source of All That Is into a human. As much as our religious organizations would have us believe it, this is simply not the case. This energy source does not wear one face. It is everything in all of creation. All That Is is exactly that – All That Is.

Understand, the leaders of our religious organizations for the most part had good intentions when putting this system of beliefs together, but the same time, they were denying humanity the ability to experience itself. Most if not all of our wars have been created because of the misconceptions about God, as we perceive him, again “him/her” being loosely used here as this is our frame of reference. We have judged everyone and everything to the distorted ideas o f our illusions. We have been pitted against each other for what seems to be eons, competing and judging rather than cooperating with each other. Until mankind/womankind can break itself free from the spiritual ignorance of these beliefs, many more wars will be perpetrated. The belief systems of the masses are able to, so shall was say, swing with the tides, however it will take a powerful force to set things in motion. That powerful force is already manifest in our world as The Christ essences and will soon make himself known to all. Energy personalities are preparing us for the impending shift in consciousness and the emergence of the World Teacher. Return ourselves to the love that you-the-soul have always known. The soul does not know hate, greed, judgment, evil. These are all things that mankind/womankind and his/her ego self have subscribed to and in doing so, he/she has fallen further always from knowing the divine purpose of his soul. when you remove our judgment, we empower our wisdom. When we have wisdom, we will have peace.

GOD IS YOU
We have always known that we were not in this Universe alone for it is written in our ancient manuscripts and it it part of our soul’s knowledge. Through religious beliefs, much of humanity has been locked into believing that they are the only living beings in creation. This idea is so wildly absurd that we cannot help but be mystified as to how mankind/womankind has been able to elevate itself in such a manner as to think that the entire cosmic Universe revolved by and create one planet to be inhabited by one species of humans and then say, “Well that’s it I’m done, I’ll learn everything from this group.” God, The Creator of whatever term we wish to use, is all part of the same energy source of All That Is and we are part of it. God is Us. All That Is encompasses many life forms in many Universes and on many planets. Most of them are far more evolved than Earth and its inhabitants.

There are hierarchies and Creator Gods in all of them and in us and every living thing ever created, whether it’s a plant, animal, insect or mineral. Everything in the multitude of creation stems from the infinite energy source of All That Is. The Creator Essence is one of the higher members of the Hierarchy of our planet and has decided to remain in service to Earth. This entity could have moved on to other planets and solar systems but chose not to. There are various levels of Hierarchy on all planets in creation. The Christ has been in our world several times to help humanity in its evolution, each time bringing forth messages that would assist in our evolution. Until we can break free and understand that we all have subscribed to the mass belief system of others, and have ignored the original messages of The Christ essence, we have stifled our soul’s growth. These messages go back further than the in conception of the world manuscripts known as our bible. But let us look at the bible for instance, for that is part of our Christian world’s belief system. Many of the messages from The Christ essence were either left out or distorted and many man-made/woman-made beliefs and messages attached to it. Many of the messages were so simple but humanity proceeded to distort them to fit into their reality at the time.

I will give an example here: Let us take the anticipated Antichrist awaited by Christianity. According to these beliefs, millions are awaiting the appearance of an Antichrist that will deceive and try to capture them into a false spiritual abyss. This is an obvious distortion of the Antichrist event that has already happened in our history. It happened with the Hitler regime and the slaughter of millions of people on our planet. Millions of people were branded with the tattoo of this Antichrist and thus this prophecy has already been fulfilled. Yet The Christian religious organizations cling to their ideas that this event is still to come. It has passed and as I have stated earlier, The Christ entity is now manifest in our world today and is working quietly among us until such time as he chooses to reveal himself/herself to humanity.

The Manipulation of Spiritual Truths
There are many distortions in other religious manuscripts as well. Much of the information was put into human comprehension with its own devices to control the masses inserted, hence the guilt and repression. The soul was not allowed to joyously experience its being. The nature of the soul’s human existence was under speculation and scrutiny. We were given many behavioral modifications because of the perceived fears of the ones in control. Our energies were then locked away from us for fear that if we did not, meaning mankind/womankind, succumb to the will of the religious leaders, we would be forever burned in our fiery pits of hell etc. etc. etc. All religions have their own facets of gloom and doom, taking the love away from God and putting fear there instead.

The religious leaders were quite good at manipulating the masses since the masses were under the belief they were not in control of their own spiritual nature. In the beginning there were heavy prices to pay for not staying within the guidelines of what the religious leaders considered acceptable behavior of the norm. No one wished to be burned at the stake. Anyone with any awareness of their soul’s true purpose was given the title of “demonic” or “possessed.” Nothing could have been further from the truth. They had an awareness that was feared by the religious leaders, for if the masses were aware that the manuscripts that they held to be completely true had been doctored in order to control them and keep the money flowing into religious leader’s pockets, they would not keep coming and believing. It was imperative that they be silenced and accused of being witches or possessed by the devil, another way to keep mankind/womankind in the dark by feeding him/her a steady diet of fear, fear of the devil, and in doing so they gave power to the source they had created. In acknowledging this kind of thinking and accepting it into our belief system, we create a reality for it. It becomes manifest within our thoughts and belief systems.

For the most part, our biblical manuscripts were trying to allude us to the fact that our behaviors would affect the outcome of our lives. It was put into a storybook fashion so as to be understood and accepted by all. Religions have always to some extent followed the development of mankind’s/womankind’s consciousness. However, not all the written information fines one the truth, since much if it has been distorted and rewritten over and over again. Much of it was deliberately distorted, for the original manuscripts have yet to found. Most of them are buried deep within the mountains of our planet. The negative influences have also quite cleverly written their own distorted versions of the truth and many religious organizations are following and believing those distorted manuscripts and holding them with much reverence and sacredness. There are and always have been negative influences that have fought to keep the citizens of Earth in the dark about their soul’s true purpose.

Now don’t misunderstand me here, because there have been many good things to come out of religious organiztions and humanity needs to acknowledge their religious beliefs and socialize within the structures of organized religion, It is part of our spiritual evolution as a soul. Many religious organizations are involved in helping humanity throughout the world. They are encouraged to continue and cooperate with the rest of humanity in bringing our world into the next phase of its evolution. It is imperative that humanity’s religious forces join together, united as one, for the spiritual enlightenment of all citizens on the planet. Instead of competing with each other, join together as one, and move into the peaceful harmonics of the new world awareness. If we are in alignment with the will and plan of The Creator, then we will recognize when the belief systems of the divided religious organizations of the world need healing. Our energies, thoughts and beliefs are the tools needed for this healing.

We would benefit greatly to move ourselves beyond the old ideas of one self, one world, one Universe, for this is surely not the case, and in doing so we will experience the vast richness of our being that we have denied for so long. It is important for the survival of the species to open itself up to other probabilities and realities. Questioning honestly the underlying motives of some of the doctrines and rules of the religious organizations will enable us to see that what was supposed to be a joyous positive experience for the evolution of our soul has been doctored to such a degree that it has done just the opposite. It has kept us in the prisons of guilt and repression, thus denying our own personhood.

We have the power to unite humanity and change our world for the better with our thoughts, beliefs and actions. We are the directors of our world and Universe. All comes from us and is within us. God’s creation in our world is unending. What he/she has not created is not real it is only an illusion. We are the co-creators of our Universe. We are all one. we are all Gods.

The realignment of beliefs systems and the awakening of humanity

Tolerance of Other’s Beliefs

Let us talk about the tolerance of others beliefs. Many if us are under the perceived belief that we do not like the beliefs of other races, thus again making them more intolerable to us. We have decided that our beliefs are the only right ones and discounted all others that do not fit into our picture of a perfect world within our perceived reality. Since we cannot come to terms with and tolerate any other beliefs outside of our limited perception of reality, we condemn the other beliefs to “our version” of “the wrong way,” always maintaining that ours is the right way. There is no right or wrong way in the greater scheme of things. One group will incarnate into a society that has mass beliefs in one direction while another may incarnate into a society with an entirely different set of beliefs. One perceives the other wrong because it does not fit into their mass-conceived system. We are all incarnated in our present physical system of reality for one purpose only and that is to further the evolution of our souls. These perceived ideas are merely obstacles that we have out into place to learn from. The problem is we have not learned much.

It does no good to stay locked in our narrow-minded version of our perceived reality. We are not benefiting anyone , least of all ourselves. When we observe that entire societies have been raised with their own version of a mass belief system, then we are able to understand why it is imperative that we break out of the mold of the masses and analyze those very beliefs and thoughts that brought us to where we are currently in our lives. I have said this many times, “We create our own reality.” We are obsessed with the ideas that we are right and everyone else is wrong. There simply is no such thing . It is a creation of our own mind/thought energy, another attempt of the ego to control our reality.

We have been blindly following the ideas of others without questioning them, taking them for granted. We have simply not allowed any thoughts that do not conform with our strict set of perceived beliefs to enter into our world, thus shutting out the beauty of the world itself. Our own fears of the unknown have entrapped our soul’s existence into a stagnant lumbering existence. We were not allowed to incarnate into our world to lock oneself away from the rest of humanity, yet with our actions this is precisely what we have done. We have shut out anything and everything that does not conform to our standards of our perceived reality. It has not gained us a thing except a lot of fear, anger and hate for the same souls that, when we are not incarnated into a physical body, we have a tremendous love for. We come to the Earth plane and decide that we do not like the packaging or the lessons and experience that other souls have come into incarnation to learn, so therefore we must shut them out of our existence. We don’t like what we see. We don’t want to see. We are afraid to see, so see we shall not. No one is at the mercy of another’s beliefs. Each one of us has the free will to change our system of beliefs.

Questioning the Mass Belief Systems

Light is information. It is the knowledge that is ours, within us and available to us. As we see the fall of our religious institutions, corporations and mass belief systems, know that this is the beginning of this evolutionary process and that we are part of it. Do not be afraid to question the belief systems that have been in place for so long. For they do not allow our soul essence to fully experience itself without guilt or fear, then they need to be examine and alter our beliefs, we can reprogram them, thus altering our own existence and experiences. We can move from one set of firm beliefs into a seemingly completely different set of beliefs by simply focusing on them daily. As our ideas and behaviors change so will our perception of the world around us. Then we have effectively enhanced our experiences and begun the spiritual journey in the evolution of our soul by recognizing the power of our own being. The way to a peaceful existence lies within our thoughts and beliefs.

Many of us are starting to realize the power of our being. We are waking up to the very nature of ourselves and claiming our rights to exist on our planet in a peaceful and harmonious way. The negative ego influences of some of the ones in power have been aware of this for some time and thus we see the aggressive actions taken on the part of those individuals to ensure that they keep their old systems of belief intact. They have been aggressively branching out into all nations in one last-ditch effort to ultimately, in their eyes, control the world and prevent the citizens of Earth from evolving away from the old ways and into the new. The only way humanity to stop this invasion is to start to reject the belief systems of these leaders. Question the validity and motives behind the ideas that are presented by these individuals. As we use our own powers of intuition, we will see that the agenda of these forces is quite self-serving and designed to prevent us from using our own free will to further the evolution of our soul and bring peace and harmony to our planet.

When the ones in power can persuade the masses to believe that killing is justified, then we need to take a good look at the motives behind their beliefs. Universal Law is clear: killing another for whatever reason is a Violation, plain and simple. It is not necessary to rob the life of another to get our perceived point across. It is only our perceived belief and does not reflect the beliefs of others, that is, unless we force it upon them, forcing them into relinquishing their power over their own being. The repression of humanity by those in power is beginning to erode and will no longer be tolerated by the citizens of the planet. Much of the world is in great turmoil because of the actions of powerful political and corporate leaders.

Often the belief systems of many only reflect the visions of a few. Many individuals simply follow the crowd and do not question as to why they are doing so. This is why so many individuals find it hard to change their perceived reality, for fear of not conforming within the structures of the belief systems of the masses. They are reluctant to be the odd one out. It is safer for them to go along with the masses than stop and think for themselves, for in doing so they would then have to confront their own reality and belief systems. If this were done however, the individuals would open up a vast amount of information to themselves about the nature of their being and move forward in the evolution of their souls. We would then be able to use this knowledge to joyously go about experiencing our life as we were meant to do. I am going to give an exercise here that we may use to confront the nature of our beliefs. It is an exercise to allow our own path to our soul’s evolution.

EXERCISE:
ANALYZING OUR MIND/THOUGHT BELIEFS

Let us look at the word right. What does that conjure up in your minds? Good , wholesome, upstanding, religious etc. All qualities that mankind/womankind aspires to have. Then look at the word wrong. What does this conjure up in your minds? Take a good hard look at this. Dark, negative, unsavory, lack of moral ethics etc. I’m sure that you could come up with at least 100 definitions for each word and that is exactly the exercise here. I want you to make two columns on a piece of paper and label the first column positive and the other negative. Here you are to list words that come to mind in your life that you think of as positive or negative. Now look at your list of words that you have organized into two neat columns. As you look at each word, examine your feelings about each one. What kind of thoughts do each of the words represent to you? What or whom do you associate with these words and why? This is the beginning of examining your beliefs, all of them. Notice that when certain words are examined that they also carry with them certain feelings. These feelings are a direct result of your association with the words of your lists. many will make you happy and many will not. Consciously look at all of them. For instance, if church makes you happy, then further explore what it is about the church that makes you happy. Do you love the unity with other humans that are of like mind with you? Most likely you will say yes. Now, what do those like minds have in common? Do they all elevate themselves as having the true right way that humanity should live? Of course, they all agree with your own system of perceived beliefs don’t they? Now, look at the other side of the paper and do the same. You will notice that all those things are in direct conflict with your own idea of your perceived reality, are they not? If you will examine where and how and who put these beliefs into your minds you may start to get the correlation. This exercise is a powerful tool in enabling your conscious mind to be more aware of the beliefs and thoughts of others and how they manifest themselves into your own beliefs. It will stimulate you being into recognizing whether or not it is part of your soul’s true nature to accept the information or reject it.

THE BELIEFS OF OUR LEADERS

This discussion involves the belief systems of the nation’s leaders. Many of the world’s governments are very resistant to any changes. Politicians go into office with high aspirations of manifesting the ideals that they see would and could benefit society only to fall prey to the negative energies that are inherently manipulating the power structures of the system. Their lack of self-discipline and focus on their own power allow them to be sucked into the rituals of business as usual. They soon see that they cannot accomplish their goals without stepping on the toes of the forces that have weld the power. They are entrapped into a system of beliefs that is not their own, however to survive they must succumb to the wall of the controlling energies. They have little or no regard for the citizens of Earth as they are enveloped in the unlimited power that they now seem to possess.

The mass belief system that has been maintained by our leaders is starting to crumble. The leaders of the Western world have been quite successful at disregarding the cultural traditions of other nations, thus causing much strife within those nations. There is a constant battle between people of other nations to aspire to be westernized and still remain in the traditions and mass beliefs of their cultures. There is much resentment over the values of the Western world and many people of so called impoverished nations feel helpless in their situation and powerless to do anything about it. The very nature of their frustration is then taken out in an aggressive, negative way to try to regain their own power. There is much anger over the doctrines of Western civilization. Many citizens of other cultures are rooted in the beliefs that the western world with all its riches is evil. The Western world has been hoarding all the resources of the world for their own personal gain and ignoring the plight of the rest of the world. They know this and this angers them. They do not like it when the core of what they perceive to hate is knocking on their front doors. Their belief system has taught them that it is wrong to have too many material possessions, yet when we look at the leaders of these nations they are swathed in as many material possessions as they can create for themselves. The rest of their nation is bathed in poverty and resentment. The only way they have to regain their power is to lash out at the perceived enemy. Since it is a mass system of beliefs the anger and resentment is then propelled by the masses of those nations. The natural act of aggression of these individuals has been taken into the negative arena. They see no other way of regaining their power other than to lash out at the nations that they perceive have taken it away from them. The beliefs are so strong and there are so many individuals in this situation, we can see that it could create a disaster of mass proportions.

If the frustration continues at the present level there could be a worldwide war ending with the destruction of our planet. The Western world and some of the other nations of power can no longer afford to continue on their paths of domination. All citizens of all nations must be treated as though they are an important part of the world and not though they are an important part of the world and not shoved under the rug in favor of politics and corporate greed.

It is a shame that the Western world has been able to migrate its influences over much of the planet thus forcing many cultures to either accept these changes or fight for the sovereignty of their nations. Within those societies we have the pent up energies of those who have been forced to relinquish their own power to perceived higher forces and have been downtrodden with enormous amount of guilt about their very being. They have been repressed to the point of combustion and as mother Earth acts out her own way against the atrocities against her in the form of natural disasters, so it is that mankind/womankind is doing the same. The basic free will of mankind/womankind is being challenged at this point in our planet’s history like it has never been before.

Most of the middle East appears to be in for a slow awakening. The energies of Hierarchy are being concentrated on this area at this time to diffuse the situation but it is not an easy task. The people of these nations are entrenched in their religious beliefs, misguided as some of them are. It is a daunting task and will require much energy from the masters for many years to realign this area of the world. It will be just as hard for them to realign the Western world, for they are the ones who will likely put up the most resistance to sharing the resources of the world. Either way, the world as we know it is in for some positive changes that will affect every living thing on the planet. We have seen that mankind/womankind is starting to awaken to these and other injustices perpetrated by the ones in power. More and more individuals who are truly visionaries will soon start to replace the ones who have kept the great nations of the world in the dark. Just as we see the fall of our corporations we will also see radical changes in our government and the media.

OTHER PLANETARY LIFE FORMS
I would like to discuss other life forms and how our thoughts affect the entire Universe. Our thoughts of negativity swirl up into the atmosphere and cling to the spatial grids of the Universe. They must be constantly neutralized and sent back to our planet with an abundance of love so that they do not affect other life forms in the Universe. Beings of Light are very sensitive to the energy created by our thoughts and have been surrounding our planet for years neutralizing them. We cannot see them for they are of etheric matter undetectable to the third-dimensional vision. Much of humanity still clings to the ideas had beliefs that the Universe involves them alone. However, this is far from the case. We have closed our minds and erected giant barriers against our soul’s evolution and other life forms. We have encased ourselves in a dark cocoon and locked the door, fearful of what may be out there. For us to discover the true nature of our soul, it would benefit us to open our mind to realities other than our own limited perceptions of self. There are many, many inhabited planets in our solar system and others. There are also many types of bodies, not always physical. Some are etheric. Mankind’s/womankind’s body is designed for Earth’s three-dimensional residency and is our vehicle for expression and communication. Our etheric body is our soul and it is within the realms of our physical body. It operates our physical body much as we operate a car. There are many other body types available to beings based on their point in evolution and the planets they choose to experience life on. They don’t necessarily
have to be flesh and blood like we have on Earth.

Many planets that we would deem uninhabitable are teeming with life. I will give an example: the planets Venus and Sirius are filled with the most peaceful, loving beings in the Universe. It is a place many of us often go to. In our third-dimensional perceived reality, we often have chosen not to acknowledge other life forms due to fear and our limited senses as to what is out there. We cannot see beyond the vision of the third dimension unless we have developed our etheric vision as a few of us have. When our etheric vision is developed we will be aware of a whole new world. That world will be in the forth dimension and eventually higher and with that we will be able to see and communicate with other Beings of Light. Many of us now are able to receive transmissions telepathically from Beings of Light and acknowledge them while also separating them from our own thoughts. Many of us though would appear to not be able to do this. That is only because we are not willing. Telepathic communication is available to all the method of communication is our future reality. As we consciously start to align our energies with the will and the plan of The Creator, these abilities will open up to us.

It is imperative that we live the life that we have chosen on Earth with the utmost of respect and love for our fellow human beings. We cannot make the transition in consciousness without changing our attitudes about each other. Anyone choosing to experience life at this time on planet Earth is learning some very valuable lessons about the effects of negativity. The great majority if the rest of the beings within the multitudes of solar systems do not experience negativity. This experience has been assigned to the inhabitants of Earth at this point in our evolution. Beings of Light carefully monitor how much the influence of negative energies are affecting the planet. If individuals on our planet continue on their present course of destruction they will miss out on our impending evolution and be left behind. These unfortunate souls will be sent back to the third dimension or offered lives in a two-dimensional reality where they will be able to enjoy the fruits of their greed and negative behavior. The souls that persist in their lifestyle of pillaging the planet and each other will be left in the lower dimensions until they seek the light. The rest of mankind/womankind are going to evolve with Earth, where all will reside in peace with a greater awareness of the connection of their souls to each other.

If our leaders attempt to use nuclear power for mass destruction, Beings of Light from the higher dimensions will interfere. Permission has been given to do so. Mother Earth will not be allowed to be destroyed by the fanatical behaviors of those who perceive themselves to be in power. Beings of Light are sending their energies to awaken mankind/womankind and assist with the transition of their consciousness. It will take a willingness on our part to promote peace in our world and take care of each other. It means using our free will and the energy of our being wisely to create a new reality on our planet. With our powerful thoughts we will have no problem doing this. For the stubborn few that insist on creating mass destruction and dominance over their fellow human beings and aligning their energies with the negative influences, the time is now to move towards the light. Some of us have already started to awaken. Stay awake, for if we close our eyes again we will fall back into our cosmic slumber and be left behind. Each one of us radiates with The Creator’s love and if we look for it in every being we encounter we will find it is there. Open our hearts and minds to being more loving and compassionate towards each other because we are all brothers and sisters evolving together. When we help another, we are also helping ourselves and both of us will benefit in our evolution. Forget about what people will think about us because it matters not to the soul. Do what you-the-soul knows is right in our relationships with others. The ego will always try to foil any attempts of the soul to circumvent its authority or challenge it by creating doubts or making one feel fearful of reaching out to others for fear of rejection. The only thing that is rejected is the ego and with this understanding one can certainly move always from that arena and let their soul shine through.

RE-SCRIPTING OUR FUTURE
One of the areas that the ego likes to control is our emotions. Emotions come from the solar plexus area and are astrally grounded. At present in our evolution emotions have come to the boiling point and saturation levels are high as humanity is getting ready to make the transition of consciousness. This is to be expected, as there are many are as of our present reality that will start to break down as our consciousness makes the shift. Right now the third dimension is astrally polarized but as we move from Astral polarization to mental polarization we will start to gain control of the emotions. This stepping up will also begin to change the vibrational rate of the planet and its inhabitants. As the vibrational rate of the planet changes, the energy component of the beings that occupy it will move into a peaceful realm that has not been encountered in thousands of years. As the planet moves through this high energy field it will eventually move even further in tis higher-dimensional fields and complete the next phase of its evolution. The awakening of mankind/womankind is happening now. We are essentially re-scripting our future lives
during this awakening.

The future of humanity holds endless possibilities for peace. As our vibrational hum is raised so is our consciousness thus affecting our future with our future lives. Since we are able to affect our past, present and future with our thoughts and beliefs, what we focus our energies on now will either propel us into our new level of awareness or leave us behind in the lower dimensions of negativity. As more and more of us examine our beliefs and start to awaken to the purpose of our soul’s existence, we will naturally gravitate into higher vibrational frequencies. As humanity loses its fears and we begin to love one another, humanity evolves.

As many or us are now awakening, our souls are starting to radiate a brilliant light. As we move our energies into practicing unconditional love for one another, we are by our own thoughts moving the planet into a higher vibrational hum. many of us are very knowledgeable on the effects of energy and how it can be manipulated. As Beings of Light we are all energy. Humanity has already awakened to the creative abilities of its creature-hood and is now starting to focus on the evolution of its soul. As we start to awaken from the cosmic slumber that we have been in for so long the receptors of our neuro-cellular system are being charged with electromagnetic energy. Our planet too will be charged and the purification process will begin. The thoughts of many will create a positive radius of energy bathing the planet. The Earth will move into a tranquility unknown to mankind/womankind and eventually elevate itself into higher levels of harmonic vibration. It is not impossible to untangle ourselves from our perceived sets of beliefs and move our consciousness in the direction of Divine Light. Using some of the tools that I will provide , this should be an easy task for those of us who truly wish to evolve.

Moving out of darkness

It is time to stop competing with each other and start cooperating with one another for the good of all. The fruitless endeavors of our governments to dominate have brought about many of the circumstances that they are trying to prevent. The leaders of many nations have been interfering to various degrees with the sovereignty and cultures of other nations, trying to strip them of their heritage and individuality and manipulating them into the Western way of life. What I am getting at here is that America and some of the other nations of perceived power must not “assume” that their way is the only way. I am not advocating the actions of the terrorists, however I do see a certain amount of interference from our own country and that others that precipitated these events.

For years the plight of the people of impoverished nations has been relatively ignored by the nations of great power. Those leaders have done little to relieve the suffering of millions. Instead they have tried to westernize them and force them into accepting the invasion of corporate greed. Now, in hindsight they are wondering why this has happened. They need only look at their actions or lack of to find the answers. We cannot rape and pillage the Earth or its inhabitants without suffering dire consequences for those actions. It will not be allowed. There will come a time when the minds of the few in power will be halted abruptly by the minds of many.

Corporate Greed in rampant within the Western world and the mass globalization of capitalistic dream has left many countries in fear for their own sovereignty. When two thirds of the world is starving, as it is today, and the rest of the world is ignoring their plight, as it has been doing, terrorism will continue. It is the cancer of our societies today. Many in the so-called civilized nations of power bathe themselves in luxury, spending their money on materialistic goods that have been forcefully produced by undeveloped countries that cannot even afford to grow their own food, because of the demand for products from the Western world. If we will, just observe around us and take notice of how wastefully our fellow countrymen/countrywomen spend their money of frivolous objects of pleasure while at the same time ignoring the plight of millions of starving people worldwide. Because it is not in our own backyard, we refuse to look and see. We refuse to get involved. One cannot justify these situations by saying that this is what the people want, for it is not so. All of mankind/womankind should be able to enjoy all of the benefits of life on this planet, not just those who have money and power within their nations. The corporations of the world are forcing their products upon many of the world’s citizens, wiping out their way of life and slowly spoon-feeding them a diet of Western greed. It is sad for those of us to observe the careless way that the so-called civilized world views the rest of humanity. They are them, apart from us as we see it, but we are all in the same.

The mass globalization of the Western world into the lives and cultures of other nations fuels the fires of anger of the citizens of those nations. Corporate greed is stripping them of their identities and their power to sustain themselves. While the Western world is busy spending lavishly on themselves and feeding their bank accounts, they look away from the other two thirds of the world struggling to stay alive, two thirds of the world’s people who know not where their next meal is coming from or if their children will live through the night. The Western world and some of the other nations of power are busily creating useless objects – trinkets – from the sacrifice of other life forms, and every conceivable gadget to hold the limited attention of those who already have so much yet they are constantly on a mission to obtain more. The few organizations able to help are forced to beg others for money. “Others” are most often willing to donate only if it serves a corporate purpose, i.e. tax relief. Companies and businessmen then tend to look for experts in tax resolution to better understand their taxes. There are vaious aspects that come in when dealing with the ambit of business taxation, and for the same, only experts who are adept in corporate tax return canada or any other country, could prove beneficial. Not that it is wrong, but there should be a moral compass to say the least. There are those who will say that they give, and some of us do, but what are the true motivations behind the giving? When the giving comes sincerely from the heart, then and only then will we be able to see the need of the starving millions and understand the soul’s mission. As long as the giving is a political and corporate decision, it is without merit, for it truly is not given from the soul.

Companies’ taxes can be managed efficiently by looking at their business operations and employee performance. That is the reason why tools similar to OKR software and goals (of businesses) are moving in tandem in today’s world. The possible explanation for this is – the software might be providing a clear picture of how the company is doing – profit margins and employee performance. Businesses that use such software have a better evaluation of their business finances and, as a result, the business taxes that they give.

If one would consciously examine their life and their monetary assets it would be acutely obvious that much of what we spend on our desire to make ourselves feel better. All the material possessions in the world will not make us feel better, for you-the-soul knows better. They are but desires f the ego. What is the ego? It is like a tiny voice offering us everything, but really nothing. It is our creation. We have given power to it by believing in it. It will foil any attempt at our knowing the true feeling of feeling good. For feeling good to the soul is watching a starving human being eat a meal that is nutritious and seeing those individuals have proper health care and shelter. Allow the ego to slip away and our true self will emerge.

GLOBAL COLLAPSE
The world is on the brink of a global collapse. No longer can mankind/womankind blame anyone else for his/her situation, for mankind/womankind has to been willing to help others or take an interest in anything that is not within the realms of his/her own isolated illusions. If each one of you readers would look at the world in a different light and begin to help others less fortunate than yourselves and share the wealth and resources of our planet, there is an abundance of resources available to mankind/womankind on our planet, yet few nations with the most power and corporate interests have managed to hoard them all for themselves. Why is it that our governments have warehouses of food stockpiled, oftentimes just rotting away, and others have nothing to eat? How does mankind/womankind justify this kind of behavior? There is no such thing as a superpower in the eyes of The Creator. Superpower is manifested by the egos of mankind/womankind for the dominance of others. Others do not need to be dominated. Others need for the ones who envision themselves to be the superpowers to share the planet’s resources with them and allow them to have the freedoms and benefits that our Western world so lavishly enjoys.

If the very rich in our country would get off their pedestals and see that they are controlled by their own greed and illusions of power and start to answer the calls to abandon their kingdoms and help humanity, they would experience the true meaning of love. They would begin to know the love of self, for the love of self is not a material possessions and lavish vacations in the world will not bring us one bit closer to the reality of who we are, it will only increase the distance between us and our soul and delay our evolution.

When we stand by and watch millions starving, it is us who will be starved; starved of the light of The Creator and the diving nature of our soul and our purpose on our planet. If we cannot see the light, the light will remain dim or burnout all together until such time as we begin to seek the light. It would be quite a different existence to be living one’s life as a clam or inside of a rock for hundreds or thousands of years. Yet all is possible, and as the light dims, this may be the path chosen.

ALIGNING OUR ENERGY
The soul-we knows whether or not we are living a life in alignment with The Creator’s diving energies or whether we are allowing the ego to rule the roost. The ego will always look for ways to elevate itself on the lack of others. The Western world is so caught up in materialistic trappings that many of us will simply try to ignore what we have just read. However, once we have read it, the soul knows that it cannot be ignored and the ego is fully aware whether consciously or unconsciously of its actions. We will justify the corporate greed as a means to support our families, or whatever pops into our minds. We certainly have to support our families, that is true. However look at it in a different light if you will. Why not dispense with the items that don’t really matter and start to concentrate on useful items for the people of the world. Food clothing, health care, medicines for the most basic needs, clean drinking water for all, sanitation, adequate and sturdy shelter. There are many useful items that mankind/womankind has invented that would greatly improve the lives of the starving millions. We can live a much simpler life. We do not need to live with all the trappings of the ego. many of us crave the simpler life, the life that we once knew when we were young. These are just a few of the things that would help to restore the the balance of the resources of the planet. The world is full of talented, educated individuals that could provide the necessary tools for the underprivileged nations of the planet. It is not about what we have in our world or how much wealth we can amass, it is about sharing the resources of the planet, about loving our fellow humans and taking an active interest in their lives so that all may experience the plenitude of gifts our planet has to offer.

If the wealthy nations of the world would learn to live with less and start to focus their energies on helping others, the entire world would remake itself. We do not have to buy into corporate greed and globalization. We have the power to stop the atrocities with our funds, for we are the ones who can make the difference to those in need. If we do not support the greedy corporations and refuse to buy their products, we will force them into looking at the way they do business with the rest of the world, for they are only motivated by money and profits.

Taking one small step at a time, by each and every one of us who feel that we have had no say in the plight of mankind/womankind, we will be able to create a peaceful world where all beings are free to live their lives without fear, prejudice or greed. The majority of us are living in splendid conditions with an abundance of items that we do not even need. Why not take those items and donate them to worthwhile causes or start our own and redistribute the proceeds to help feed the world’s hungry. It takes a willingness on our part to see the need of our fellow human beings and do something about it. If we sit back and wait for others to do it for us, then evolution will sit back and wait for us. It’s that simple.

OPENING OUR MINDS
Humanity cannot continue on its disruptive path of negative energy without having to pay a price. Search in our hearts and we will see what I mean. We have all participated at one time or another in hatred, greed, selfishness, and domination. Examine our inner self carefully and we will see that our or your leader’s actions or lack of actions precipitated the manifestation of 9/11 and other events. It is not a matter of good vs. evil. Now I know again we have have trouble this because of our preconceived ideas that if there is a good there has to be an evil. These are only realities that we have created. These are realities that we have subscribed to because we are not in touch with our soul’s purpose within the divine plan of The Creator.

The Beings of Light that are now descending upon the Earth are bringing many new energies that mankind/womankind will slowly begin to accept, “energies” meaning ideas and concepts that have long been forgotten. The souls coming into incarnation at this time are the ones who will lead our planet into its new level of consciousness. They are sending their energies to the minds of mankind/womankind at this time, bring an abundance of love into our souls and stimulating our awakening. The soul’s essence will begin to remember. There is a multitude of information available to each and every one of us. As we awaken we will be able to tap into this information. However, we are encouraged to make the effort to open our eyes and dissolve the hatred and racial barriers to our soul’s light. We have been gently stimulated to awaken our consciousness. When I say WE, I am speaking of myself and many others like myself, as I am not unto myself alone. I am not. I am no different than you. However, all my abilities and memories are available to me. They are available to you as well, you just have forgotten now to access them. The encumbrances of our bodies and our pre-programmed ideas of what our world if like have stood in our way much of the time. As we evolve, so do I.

We are very concerned about the Earth planet because there has been so much destruction. Mother Earth can no longer continue on this path. Our planet Earth is no longer in balance with the rest of the Universe. It is off balance and if it were not for the intervention of Light Beings from the higher dimensions, our planet would have been destroyed by now because of our actions. We are swirling in mass amounts of radioactive debris that is responsible for most of the new diseases and cancers on our planet. Each time we build a nuclear explosion underground, we are killing ourselves. Sure, everyone working on a nuclear plant needs protection and has looked into a hazmat suit for sale and other protective equipment. Sure, the workers are supposedly safe from the radiation when working near the toxicity. Despite this, the particles still could affect us in some way. Regardless of what our leaders have told us about its safety, tiny particles are being released into our atmosphere every day. It is of such great magnitude, that it is not stopped, there will be no more life on our planet. We have not developed instruments sensitive enough to detect this radiation, however I assure you, we are all breathing it every day. This is not part of the divine plan for mankind/womankind. There are other forms of energy available to us, all we have to do is implement them. Eventually we will be able to harvest our thoughts with light through the use of energy crystals but that time is not yet upon us. There are energy sources available to mankind/womankind that are free and are safe. As we evolve our consciousness towards the light all will be revealed to us, but until then these secrets will not be given to us. Mankind/womankind must prove that he/she is capable of using them fairly and wisely. At this point we are not ready. Our behaviors are too unpredictable.

Western world leaders have focused on their military might with such a vengeance that it is becoming the accepted norm to go after the perceived enemy with all sorts biological and chemical warfare. Our leaders are swathed in military arms that are capable of turning our planet into a cosmic pile of debris, hurling its citizens into the endless abyss of pace. The dire spiritual ramifications of such hateful and aggressive behavior are left to swirl about us like a cyclone of debris attaching itself to the very fibers or our existence.

This is not what the founders of our great nation had in mind when they spoke of the right to bear arms. These acts are not God-oriented and do not conform with Universal Law. I have spoken before on this as “a violation.” This is a violation. Intentionally projecting hateful thoughts and terrorizing society is a violation. Spinning like a web around the souls of man/woman, these thoughts eventually suffocate our very existence as we know it and leave us in a spiritual abyss, a limbo of sorts, until we seek the light. This kind of thinking only keeps the consciousness of mankind/womankind saturated in fear. We may think these weapons are protecting us, however our soul know better. When one “assumes” this to be their protection that is exactly what one is doing. Our protection lies in the unity of self with the will and plan Of The Creator.

This cannot continue much longer if we are to survive as a species. Increasingly disturbing weather patterns have been experienced across our planet. This will likely continue. The Earth is fighting back, manifesting weather patterns that will serve to wash away the destruction of her delicate skin by mankind/womankind. The great upheavals of our mountains spew forth the abundance or negativity that has been injected into the body of Mother Earth. The global cleansing has begun as the Earth prepares for the transition into the peaceful harmonics of the fourth dimension and her alignment with the rest of the Universe.

In order to facilitate the healing process on our planet, the energies of its citizens and leaders need to be realigned with the light energies of All That Is. If we wish to make a difference in changing the reality of our world, I will give another exercise that, if practice daily, will begin the healing.

EXERCISE:
HEALING THE NATION
If you will, meditate daily on creating peace in our world by focusing our attention on sending healing energies to our leaders that they become aware of the global problems in our world instead of their own isolated illusions. If you would send 20 minutes daily on this, the mass thoughts of all of us would begin to start the healing. You can do this at any time. You do not have to be in deep routine for just a few minutes at a time, sending messages. You may do this, for example, in the shower, driving cars, anywhere you do not have to be actively focusing on your daily activities at that given moment. The more you do this, the sooner you will begin to experience healing as a nation and as a world.

The contract with God and learning from Loss

We are on our planet to learn and evolve. When we have finished learning one incarnational group of experiences we will move on to another incarnational group of learning experiences until such time as we have mastered the Earth experience and can free ourselves of its limitations. All souls need to move on with their evolution. When we allow our life to be severely affected by the transition of another soul, we do not allow that soul to enjoy the peaceful existence it is now capable of experiencing. The constant longing for the soul to return to the Earth plane by its loved ones can have serious effects on the soul. For then instead of seeking the light and accepting the transition, the soul becomes absorbed with feeling the need to return to an Earth-life existence without the proper amount of rest time needed in its home dimension prior to the next incarnation. Their energy becomes trapped on the Astral Planes, not making it through to their home dimension. Some of these souls, because of the pull from their loved ones still experiencing a life on Earth, will hover in the Astral Planes for many years wanting desperately to return. Try to realize that by holding onto them we are not allowing them to be set free and move on with their soul’s evolution. We will meet these souls again. In most cases we have spent many lives incarnating with them. They are part of our soul group that may contain a large number of entities or just a few. We play various roles within the family hierarchies, each time experiencing different elements of life within these structures for the greater learning of soul.

The scripts or contracts that were made by us and the rest of the members of our soul group were set into place long before we incarnated into this life with the understanding that we would each play a role in the learning experiences of each other. Some may play perceived negative roles, others perceived positive roles, but it is all agreed upon for us to learn from the experience.

Now, the souls who have moved on or also moving on with their evolution but the lessons still remain for the Earth souls who are in the process of experiencing their chosen lives. We are to gain a valuable learning experience from this loss, as agreed upon by us before we incarnated into this life. It is our responsibility to continue with our contract until it is completed and we are able to make the transition ourselves.

Of course we feel sad at our loss, but it is really not a loss unless we see it that way and this becomes an ego perception. We create our own ideas about how we feel with our thoughts. The impetus behind thoughts is generally ego-motivated in this phase of our evolutionary path. If we choose to be happy then we will be happy. If we choose to be depressed and fearful, then that is what we will get. It does no good to dwell on the loss, for as I said earlier, it is not a loss but a transition from one state of energy to another. Allow the departed souls to move on by creating loving thoughts of joy for them that they are able to return home to where we all have come from. As we release them into their new existence, do it with an abundance of love and support. Know that we were not left alone so that we could wallow in our own misery but that we ourselves are now entering into a different learning path for our own soul’s evolution. The love light of the Creator will surround us and will never abandon us, for we are not separated from it. All we have to do is focus on the Divine energy of The Creator and we will be helped immensely in evolving our soul’s experience. All we have to do is ask. we can do this in either prayer or meditation, whatever is comfortable for us within our spiritual belief system.

SUICIDE
I am going to deal with another subject right now, and this is related to suicide with 9/11. It is important to understand that our body is a gift. Some of us may feel the pain of our loss is unbearable. Please know that the souls involved in 9/11 chose to experience this probable death not only for themselves – for their own soul’s growth – but for ours. The rules are very clear about suicide. We my not take our life. It is a violation of Universal Law. Some of us may feel we cannot go on. We must stay to finish out our life and learn the lessons that we were brought to the Earth plane to learn.

The suicide mission entities have already been returned to incarnate in the bodies of babies in relatively the same conditions and circumstances. They will be returned into the same mass belief system of the nations from which they came and will have to try again to move towards the light. When a soul sheds its body, if the soul has created death for others or committed suicide, it is not allowed to re-enter its home dimension. The energy guides will escort the soul to Council where the soul entity will be advised by the Elders of the Council to return. A suicide can only be justified on an individual basis with the members of the Council and the soul present. There are only a few situations where it is acceptable. I will further elaborate. If we are terminally ill and our vehicle was in the final stages of the death process we will be allowed to re-enter our home dimension. If we have abused our life with drugs, alcohol or whatever, this is also considered a suicide and we will be returned to do it over again. The Council is the only force on the Astral Plane that makes these decisions when there is a borderline situation. Otherwise, it is fairly clear, we will not be permitted to enter our home dimension.

I may clarify what the home dimension is here. The home dimension of the Astral level is where most souls go to commune with each other and study. There are many home dimensions all based on various stages of evolution completed. As I said before, it is where we spend most of our time in-between incarnations on the Earth physical plane. The soul there will make their decisions as to whether they wish to transfer portions of their energy again or not and what planets they choose to go to although most will remain in Earth incarnations until the Earth experiences are completed.

Where we choose to incarnate and in what form is predicated on our spiritual evolution. There are certain experiences that one must master before moving on into the higher dimensions. All beings joyfully choose the type of body they wish to inhabit based on what experiences they wish to have while in that vehicle. Vehicles whether physical or etheric are tailored to the dynamics of the atmospheres in which they reside. Many life forms are simply not perceived by third-dimensional vibrations, therefore we would be unable to see them but they still exist and will be experienced by the soul at some point as part of its evolution.

GUILT
For this next section I want to touch upon the perceived feelings of guilt. Perceived is exactly what they are for they are manifestations of our own mind experience. It is not a good practice to use guilt to blame oneself for the events that cause us to perceive our discomfort. If a choice was made that did not achieve the desired results, then so be it. It was a learning experience and most likely we will have learned from it. Then one moves on. By allowing ourselves to feel guilty about a situation, you are again setting up a chain reaction within the framework of our body consciousness to receive more than just guilt. These thoughts express themselves into many forms of illness whether mental or physical. They will begin to manifest because we have taken away the free will or our cells and injected into them our ideas and thoughts, thus changing the healthy and happy path that we were on in creating a whole and healthy being – oneself. Thoughts of this nature alter the consciousness of our cells, which in turn will affect the abilities of our body consciousness to keep our physical vehicle healthy.

Effectively it does no good to linger in thoughts of guilt, for essentially there is no such thing anyway. Guilt is a manufactured production of our own mind/thought energy. Guilt has no purpose. Punishing oneself with guilt only locks the doors on forgiveness of self and shuts out The Creator’s light. Realize that by letting go of the feelings of guilt and changing our conscious thoughts, we will have done more good than we are aware of. The thoughts that we harbor, when inter-playing in the negative arena, only serve to suppress our own soul’s growth.

I know some of us are saying as we read this that it all sounds well and true but how can I make myself stop those ideas from manifesting themselves? Be consciously aware of them. Look at and examine the underlying reasons that we have those thoughts and feelings. examine the physical sensations within the structure of the thought and analyze it. Are there other feelings and thoughts that have also participated in the creation of these sensations? We will see that there are indeed and perhaps many of them. Much can be said about the nature of our personal thoughts since they make up the nature of our very being. Without them we would not exist. When we can examine our thoughts on an honest level we will see that we have created not only the guilt that we have been speaking about, but also a host of other feelings that in some cases are interfering with our soul’s evolution. I will be including several exercise within this blog that will help us with analyzing our thoughts and realigning our beliefs.

Our physical vehicle is a marvelous thing, a very wondrous and ingenious invention. It is for our enjoyment, for us to experience all that the Earth plane has to offer. It is not meant to be locked-up in some closet of guilt or hidden under veils of fabric. Now I’m not saying that all of us should run out and strip off all our clothes and run willy-nilly into the streets, because of our society’s rules we would probably be arrested. Use this as a metaphor to release your ego’s energy from the bondage of its perceived beliefs and open up our powers of creativity. Learn to look at your fellow man/woman with a renewed interest in his/her being. We are all part of the same Divine energy source. As we observe our behaviors we send much love to us. It is the desire of all essences of the Divine energy of The Creator to live harmoniously with each other. Enough said on this subject of guilt for now. The messages that I have brought forth here can be applied to any situation where a perceived negative emotion surfaces and we have the desire to eliminate it from our perceived reality.

NEGATIVE ENERGIES
All of the souls who made the energy transition in 9/11 knew before coming into this life that they were going to be part of a mass awakening of consciousness on the planet be experiencing that event. Their transition from their Earth existence was worked out long before they were born. These brave souls knew that this event would realign the consciousness of mankind and start the process once again of moving us forward in our stagnant evolution. Their efforts were not in vain. Many of us came into an awareness of self and our relationship with the rest of humanity after this event. Our thoughts and ideas in our present reality are manifesting into actions now that are greatly affecting our future reality. As we move further into this material I will be stressing the importance of our thoughts on our reality and what we can do to change our world for the better.

Oftentimes when mass societies fall upon times of great stress, events will take place to redirect the consciousness back towards a peaceful existence. As with plagues and wars, these events orchestrated for the evolution of mankind/womankind. Many beings must learn from these events in order to maintain an equilibrium that is beneficial to the social order of their societies. The souls of 9/11, prior to incarnating into their lives, were aware that these events were probable reality and could lead to their probable deaths although they were not consciously aware of it as they lived out their daily lives. All probable reality is based on the actualized thought forms and free will of mankind/womankind. There were many, many others that for whatever reasons did not participate in the event, even though it was a probable reality for them as well.

The terrorists as we see them, for they do terrorize humanity with their beliefs, are no different than us or  in their soul’s essence. They are still part of The Creator’s energy source, however misdirected the ego-perceptive thoughts and actions of their physical vehicles are and have been. We are all connected as one within the many Universes. I realize this is hard for many of us to accept. Anyone who terrorizes individuals or nations is under the influence of negative forces and this should be apparent to most of us what we are witnessing. This event was a wake-up call to humanity and is one of many that are still to come until the leaders of our countries can put down their nuclear weapons and other weapons of mass destruction and start to help the people of the world out if their grip of poverty, fear and suffering.

If we will only stop and look at the information that we hold as true and see that for the most part we have unconsciously and consciously accepted them as being the norm. We have become complacent with the ideas of others and that all of society is evil and out to get us. When individuals are under the influence of the negative ego energies it would appear to be so. This is only an illusion, a temporary situation in which an individual has been caught in the web of these influences. With the realization that these forces exist, one can become more aware and thus begin to keep them from clinging to our light.

In this moment of our history we are witnessing the breakdown of many institutions that we thought were untouchable and indestructible. We are being awakened to the atrocities of our world and in doing so we will be in direct confrontation with many of the darkest forces of our planet. We will see more of this crumbling of our belief systems in the near future. This is is part of the process of the evolution of Earth and its citizens. There will be many more breakdowns in society;s firmest beliefs, for many of these beliefs do not hold any truths.

All souls have a built in desire to evolve, but because they have allowed outside forces to take over they are not sure how they will accomplish this. Many of us walk around in fear and despair because we have allowed our perception of the events around us to undermine our soul’s purpose on our great Earth. I will give a very simple exercise to remove negative forces from influencing us. It is important for us to learn how filter through and remove information that comes to us. Most of us take everything we hear from our leaders and media as truth. These truths that we believe to be truths are not what they appear. We can examine all data that comes into our mind and purge out what does not give us a positive approach to life.

EXERCISE:
THE BOX
When we find ourselves fearful and thinking negative thoughts or begin bombarded by them through the dialogue of others, when we are unable to break free of the situation, I would ask, do the following: I should you create a small box, an imaginary box. You will carry this box with you wherever you go. when besieged with negative information, take the thoughts, open the box, put them in and close the lid. You may envision yourself wearing a small box around your neck or carrying it in your pocket, but each time you become aware of an onslaught of negativity and you cannot get away from it, put it in the box. Put them in there and consciously remove them from your thoughts. This works quite well with not only thoughts, but people too. You may out the image of a whole person in there to be cleansed and returned whole back into the Universe. Each time you do this, you are helping to clean up the negativity of others even though they are not consciously aware of it. Put them in there with an abundance of love, no matter what they have done to you as you see it. When this is done with love, it will transmute back into love and back to you. Now, if you find the negative thoughts or people coming back into your head or life, simply open the box and out them in again until you get good at this. It will be routine. Now the thoughts may be hatred, greed, prejudice or anything that’s coming your way. If you’re driving your car and you suddenly create a hateful or a negative thought against another stop yourself, grab the thought and put it into the box. So you see this works both ways, incoming and outgoing.

The thoughts of mankind/womankind are neutralized by the higher-dimensional beings as they float into the Universe. We do not allow our negative thoughts to interfere with the lives of other beings in other solar systems. Since thought is energy and energy cannot be destroyed, there are very effective methods of neutralizing your negative energy through the use of crystals and then returning it in the form of love-energy back to our planet. When we put our thoughts of negativity into the box we are doing the same thing. Picture the box as a deep well lined with crystals at the bottom that will capture the negative thoughts as they fall in and neutralize them. when putting a person into the box, imagine them being surrounded by the healing energies of the crystals. If we do this often enough, you will begin to notice a positive change in yourself and others.

THE CONTRACT OF LIFE WITH GOD

We are energy. All of our soul’s essence is formed of energy and that energy can never be terminated. It changes from one form to the other as we move in and out of life experiences. Our soul essence is eternal and ageless. God, Buddha, Allah, The Christ or whatever terminology We wish to use to describe the energy of The Creator, is alive in all creations and cannot be destroyed. When we think of the souls who died in 9/11 or any event for that matter, they did not really die at all, they simply moved from one form of energy to another. They are not gone, they simply have moved on in their soul’s evolution.

The physical vehicle is but a materialized form which the soul uses on the physical plane for expression and evolution. It is made and re-made many times through reincarnational journeys as the soul seeks to evolve itself. This materialized form of energy is limited to its vibrational rate within our system and appears to the human eye as solid, dense and quite real, yet in other systems it would appear quite transparent. Its energy is interchangeable and within the framework of the third dimension appears to its recipient as the basis for all life experience. Remember here that I am presenting this information as simple as possible, as there is a much greater depth to all of this, but it must be written in terms for us to understand.

Because of mankind’s and womankind’s preconceived notions of his/her physical mortality he/she has oftentimes assumed that his/her physical vehicle is all there is. The soul however, is piloting this craft and with its inherent knowledge of itself and its own wisdom it is fully capable of re-grouping its energy when faced with imminent crisis to the physical vehicle. All souls when facing a horrific death, will exit the body before the moment of impact. No soul wishes to remain during such event. When the souls have exited the body they are fully aware of the events taking place but without the physical trauma. The dimension they will reside in is very similar aspects to that of the physical plane. They are able to create any illusion they wish to remind them of their existence in the time-frame from which they just came, or from any other incarnation they they have focused their energy on.

Each time a soul incarnates into form on the physical plane, it brings with it one particle of memory from past incarnations. Upon entering another incarnational experience of Earth the majority of our soul memories are blocked so as to not interfere with our learning experience. A soul will set up prior to incarnation many probable events that it will choose to actualize into experience including the moments that would lead to a probable death of the physical form. Many of the souls of 9/11 were caught in a state of confusion, not knowing that this was the moment of their death as we perceive it. They entered the transition of their energy phase from one focused point of power to another. Since many were unprepared and the event was so sudden, some may linger around for some time trying to communicate with their loved ones. Most however will seek the light of their soul and move on.

Now let me elaborate a little but here about how manifestation of physical form transcends into the etheric form of energy thus allowing for the transition from third-dimensional reality to the astral levels during a traumatic event.

The victims of any fatal event are prevented from experiencing the great physical trauma of the event. They will be veiled from the physical environment. It is as if they have been encased in a cocoon, removed from their bodies and somewhat set to the side to view the event as if they were watching one of our television shows. In the veiling it is necessary, especially in mass events, so as to prevent the souls from experiencing the physical trauma of the event. The same occurred with the victims within the buildings. They were protected from experiencing their reality. Only the empty physical vehicle remains. The souls will vacate the body moments prior to the event. The empty physical vehicle is still able to function to some degree, but without the main consciousness directing it. It is as if one steps into another dimension temporarily and when the time is right, the soul will have an awareness of its present condition and start the process of moving towards the light and onto Astral Plane of consciousness. Of course in these events there are many guides around to ensure the transition of their energy through the Astral Plane and on to their home Astral dimension. There are many levels of the Astral planes and a soul’s home dimension is predicated on what stage of evolution the soul has evolved to through its incarnational experiences. It is here where the soul will rest and be counseled, as there is often-times some level of trauma to the soul. The soul will be showered with an abundance of love and may have to be cocooned for some period of time to rest.

Whatever is comfortable for the soul entity will be manifested by beings from the Astral dimensions to help the transition. All souls when moving out of Earth dimension will first enter into the Astral plane where they must seek the light and move through it. Many who have had near death experiences describe going through a tunnel. This is the silver cord that is connected to our solar plexus. In the dream state and often when individuals wish to travel within the Astral Plane, they are tethered to their physical vehicles by this cord. When a soul experiences the Earth death process, its energy travels through this silver cord, the energy must pass through the Astral Plane and into the light, the light of our soul’s essence. This light will guide us to the home Astral dimension of our soul’s energy where we will experience, through the use of a hologram, visions familiar to us.

There will also be other energy forms commonly referred to as guides waiting to assist us. For those of us whose light does not shine very brightly because of our actions or lack of in the life or lives that we have experienced, this may be more difficult. If we are heavily grounded in the materialistic realms of our world, we may also experience a pulling to go back to Earth. There are many souls wandering around in the Astral Planes trying to find the light. Some of them have been there for what would be centuries in Earth terms. The closer we align ourselves in this life to the Divine energies of The Creator, the brighter our light will be and the easier our transition. Often these souls have over-identified with their physical vehicles, ignoring the soul aspects of their consciousness and are now left in a state of limbo so to speak, looking for a place to go.

If we persist in identifying with the materialized form of the physical vehicle only, and ignoring the soul aspect of self, it will be harder for us when it comes our time to make the transition. We will find ourselves imprisoned in a sea of uncertainty and confusion. The situations that the deceased find themselves in will vary greatly depending on their own life experience and beliefs.

Now, as we move on, information from the soul’s memories are used to manifest images of their loved ones that have departed the Earth. This holographic matrix is where we will be greeted by the illusion of these relatives that have already made the transition. They will be on the light matrix and the recently departing soul’s energy from the Earth plane is to move towards that light. For instance, if our mother or father had already made the transition of their energy, the soul will most likely want to connect with us during our transition. The image of the mother or father will then be manifest through a holographic matrix in a form that is most familiar to the soul that is leaving the Earth plane to allow them to cross through the Astral Plane in a more comfortable fashion. It is these entities that greet the soul, but with the physical characteristics that the soul has in its most recent memories. It is important to remember that most often these are energy guides manifesting images familiar to us.

However, if our friends or relatives are not already engaged in other stages of activity, then they will manifest and greet us. I would make another clarification here if I may. The word “soul” here as it best identifies with our terms in our reality and it is meant to show us that we are independent from physical form. Our physical form or vehicle is the tool provided to us-the-soul for communication in the third dimension. It is a body and as such has its limitations, and when its life span is completed it will be returned to the energy source from which it came and trans-formed into something else.

Souls will often incarnate with the same souls over and over again and the soul will be looking for the most recent version of those souls since it is still tied very much to the Earth plane from which it has just departed. Once the soul has moved into Astral home dimension, they will then be counseled with their energy guides present and prepared for a life review. This self-examination may take, in Earth terms, many months, or many years. It usually depends on how much trauma the soul experienced, but a life review is always in order. That will take precedence over anything else after the entities have settled into the reality of their energy transition. The life review is necessary and done only with one’s spirit guides as we call them. It is a private matter. The other entities that have incarnated with the soul will not be involved in that process. During this review, the soul will then realize whether or not its contract has been fulfilled. (Use of the word contract again as a human term, it is really the choosing of a group of experiences that the soul wished to actualize and whether or not the soul was able do so. We can think of it as a theme or contract, whatever fits into human terms so that we can understand that there was a purpose for us coming to our planet.) On Earth, there are many stages of development of the consciousness and in order to evolve one must complete these stages. Now in the most simple of terms, as there is a far greater depth to all of this.

This contract is between us and The Creator and is a necessary step in our evolution as a soul. We are part of this infinite energy source. We are an extension of this energy and within the framework of our physical vehicle we are experiencing our life with The Creator’s energy light source. It would be physically impossible for the energy of All That Is to take on a body of its own because the energy is so massive that it could not manifest all of itself in the limited space of one body, nor would a body be able to withstand it. That is why souls have been created. Each soul is a spark of this vast energy source and all of its experiences are also experienced by All That Is. It is the soul’s nature and desire after perfecting itself to eventually merge with this energy source.

After we have taken a rest period for a while and have examined our life, we will then be counseled and we will study and we will learn as we have always done how to manipulate energy. We are the co-creators of our Universe and everything in it. This task is beyond our third-dimensional abilities, however eventually as we evolve we will be creators of planets and life forms. After our life review and rest period we will be given another opportunity to move on our evolutionary path.

A review through some of the many holograms of available experience will help us with these decisions. It is of our choosing however, because as an Earth plane initiate us have free will to move as close as we wish to the energy of The Creator and at our own pace.

Since there is no time outside of the Earth dimension, we may focus as many portions of our energy in whatever life experiences we wish to learn from within the evolutionary framework of our soul. The soul’s perception of this will seem to be an eternity, however all will eventually want to move forward and continue their evolution. Psychics can communicate with souls who are waiting to in their home Astral dimension. They are in transition. They are able to create whatever realities they wish in this transitional period. That dimension is quite lovely and is meant to be a reminder of Earth but with far more beauty. It is a peaceful place where souls may reflect on their lives and commune with one another. Many are quite happy there for long periods of time. This is similar to heaven that we envision in our religious belief systems, however to be in Heaven is really the merging of our consciousness with the infinite energy source of All That Is.

Souls that have committed atrocities against their fellow man/woman are not allowed into this restful Astral dimension. They will be returned to the Earth promptly, reborn to relearn. This return would be similar to our visions of hell because the soul will not be able to experience the peacefulness of its home dimension and once again experience the feeling of separation from the Creator. It would be returned to the negativity of Earth with all of its turmoil. However, the main focus of the soul between transitions is to study and learn from its experiences and move on in its evolution to higher-vibrational planets or go into service with one of the lower-vibrational planets and assist those souls in their evolution.

One must fully transcend all levels of experience in many life forms before evolving to this level. The more life experiences the soul chooses to experience and learn from, the closer it gets in moving into the higher vibration of its evolution. The Christ, Buddha, Krishna, and many more are all members of our planet’s Hierarchy and are fully capable of incarnating in self-made bodies and do not have to go through the birth/death process. These entities no longer need to experience a physical life as we know it, for they have transcended the limitations of the third dimension. These entities that have lived many lives on our planet have chosen to remain in Earth-service in this phase of their evolution. Some of these entities have already entered into our world. They have come to assist The World Teacher who has already manifested his body and is gently working among humanity to guide the beings of our planet to our new level of consciousness.

On all planets there are various levels of Hierarchy working the souls of those planets. They are all in various stages of their evolution. Our planet’s Spiritual Hierarchy is presently working to assist humanity in its evolution. These beings are associated with the various levels of spiritual development and religious beliefs of the citizens of our world. Each one is working with their groups at this time to begin the unification of consciousness and realign all of our spiritual and self into a oneness with Hierarchy and the planetary Creator. Our spiritual ignorance is what has caused so many of our problems in our world. The World Teacher is The Christ himself and this being is highly evolved. He is one of the most evolved beings associated with our planet. All of these beings were once men/women with physical bodies as we have, they are just further along on their evolutionary path. They are here to teach us at this critical time in our evolution.

Second coming of consciousness

Prepare mankind and womankind for the impending shift of consciousness on our planet and questioning our beliefs, analyzing our thoughts and opening up our minds to our greater reality. As we awaken we will be opened to a new spiritual kind of existence – a unity with the rest of mankind and womankind – and released from our spiritual slumber. A mass continuity of consciousness is about to unfold and the belief systems of the world are in the dawn of an unprecedented historical change.


The Christ trilogy Paul or Saul as he was also known. Saul and the Jesus Entity Spiritual Hierarchy and are teaching among us along with several others. However, due to certain systems of probabilities on our planet, The Christ Entity himself has also emerged in our world today as a man. This personality will form a new psychic entity. The entity is now preparing to emerge fully into our world as prophesied as the “Second Coming” of the Christian religion.

That entity will not be coming at the end of our world as we have greatly distorted it, but to guide humanity in our world now. He has returned to set up a new system of thought, to reawaken humanity to its relationships with each other and to realign Christianity as it has greatly distorted the spiritual ideas that were originally to be implemented for the evolution of humanity. He has come into our world as a world Teacher and with him he brings many members of our planet’s Hierarchy that will help in the restructuring of our world. He comes as a multi-dimensional personality and will not be oriented in terms of one sex, one color or one race. He will manifest himself at will in many different forms thus exhibiting the multidimensional nature of his being. He will clearly reveal methods enabling each individual to be intimately in contact with their own being and that of the Creator. He will be guiding humanity to use those inner senses of their true spiritual nature and recognize the multidimensional nature of their reality.

As humans evolve our awareness, we will be confronted with our actions and memories of all our lives. A great realignment of the relationship with our souls and with each other will be revealed to all. This is happening now and he will soon emerge publicly and reveal himself.

Fear-Driven energies have been taken for granted

Human beings have been reluctant over he centuries to tune into the telepathically transmitted information that is being given to them. We have essentially put on our cosmic blinders in favor of old superstitious ways. The fear of the unknown has kept their awareness locked in the dark recesses of our minds, pushed aside like leaves on the pathway. We choose to ignore many of the messages that would enable us to complete our soul’s evolution. Locked in the grip of fear and anger we flounder around like a fish out of water looking for answers to our dilemma. We are besieged with an abundance of negative stimuli from media. We are then flocking like geese to the nearest psychoanalyst to explain to us why we feel the way we do.

Often we are given prescriptions for a variety of medications and sent on our way. In this great mass of circular logic we rotate in and out of our perceived dilemma until the overload of our behavior finally gets the best of us through disease or illness – as is quite fashionable these days – to label these anomalies with syndromes of every type imaginable. Then the patient walks out of the medical office with the assumption that he or she has a justifiable condition and therefore can again push aside the inner voices of our consciousness for a more narrow-minded answer to our problems. We can then continue on our self-destructive path and be fully justified in doing so. We no longer have to confront our behavior and its source.

We merrily take our pills and go on about our daily business. Meanwhile our symptoms once again are pushed aside. This endless circle of behavior eventually catches up to us and we find ourselves with another physical malady and so it goes, on and on, one episode after the other. The disturbed energies of fear-driven society have been taken for granted in our everyday life The majority tenaciously cling to these ideas and refuse to accept any other explanations that are not grounded in scientific beliefs.

THE CONSENSUS REALITY FIELD-TRUTH

Now briefly, our world is in the middle of the Fourth-Dimensional Shift. In our U.S.A. and other countries we risk succumbing to the forces of hatred and totalitarianism. As our election will again demonstrate, the system is broken. The will of the people is subverted. It will take action on the part of many millions of us in the West to turn the tide. We do not have the numbers yet because we are complacent and afraid. But as the media gradually begin to present truthful stories for all to read, our numbers will grow. Act now to help make it happen. Participate in our community to encourage the truthful representation of reality within our media and within our communities.

The Consensus Reality Field is our term for the broader field of Reality Creation of which we are a part by virtue of our individually created world. Our Personal Reality Field serves us well within our niche in our environment. It is “tailor made” according to our specifics, both conscious and unconscious. Now the broader field of Reality Creation may be thought of as comprising, for example, our neighborhood, our city, our state, our country, our hemisphere and finally our world – the Planet Earth.

Love and Light are Knowledge

Many of us have adopted destructive sets of beliefs, lives filled with ego-gratification, greed and selfishness. This however is not the soul’s true nature. If left alone without all of the negative stimuli, the soul would return to a peaceful hum that it has always known. Mankind and womankind would be in sync with Mother Earth and the rest of the planetary life that dwells in our dimension. If we would learn to surround ourselves with The Creator’s light and energy, we would essentially be able to eradicate the constant barrage of fears that have surrounded us. Love and light, which is knowledge, are the only things that are needed to free us from our path of self-destruction. They will dissolve the layers of negativity like acid on ripe fruit and release our soul’s essence from its spiritual slumber. The soul’s essence of each and every one us is trying to pry itself free from the grip of the negative energies surrounding our existence.

As we perceive our reality as something that We have created, then we can and will change it for the better. To find oneself, one must look within, for within lies the perfection of God and the Universe that it ultimately – US. Eventually all of us will see the light, if not now then later. For the entities that refuse to evolve and continue on their greedy, self-centered path with no regard for their fellow man, we may find oneself removed from the humming rhythms of the evolving Earth’s move into the peaceful fourth dimension and assigned to one of the lower-vibrational, two-dimensional planets until such time as our soul yearns to move towards the light and be cleansed. Like a stone encased inside a mountain, there we will sit and wait until we have had enough time to seek the love light.

Many of us have already been awakened from our spiritual slumber and are diligently participating in moving the rest of mankind and womankind into the arenas of awareness. Now when I am referring to negative influences or energies, I would clarify here what I am attempting to convey. It is with respect to our ability to allow our ego’s desires to control our vehicle instead of our soul’s light, as the soul only knows its light and love. It also refers to certain energies in and around our planet that do not serve to evolve with the plan of The Creator.

Now I am not trying to be gloom and doom here, for those entities that are relinquished to this dimension do not in any way reflect the majority of us. Most of us will start soon to get the messages and move towards the light. However, for those of us who persist in the cat-and-mouse game of dominating everyone and everything on the planet, our evolution will not be forthcoming as swiftly as the rest of our planet’s citizens and we may be left behind. I have spoken before about how we can change our reality with our thoughts. Since our reality IS our thoughts, this will not be hard to do.

The unknown appears invisible because we do not accept it in our prime series of events

It is as if we had trained ourselves to respond to red lights and to ignore green ones–or as if we read only every third or fourth line on a page of a book.

We attend to matters that seem to have practical value. whether or not we understand what space is, we move through it easily. We do not calculate how many steps it takes to cross a room, for instance. We do not need to understand the properties of space in scientific terms, in order to use it very well. We can see ourselves operate in space, however; to that extent it is known quality, apparent to the senses. Our practical locomotion is involved with it so we recognize it. Its mysterious or less-known properties scarcely concern us.

We move through probabilities in much the same way that we navigate in space. As we do not consciously bother with all of the calculations necessary in the process of walking down the street, so we also ignore the mechanisms that involve motion through probable realities. We manipulate through probabilities so smoothly, in fact, and with such finesse, that we seldom catch oneself in the act of changing our course from one probability to another.

see4

Take a very simple action: You stand at a corner, wondering which direction to take. there are four streets involved. You briefly consider streets One and two, but rather quickly decide against them. You stand for a moment longer, gazing down Street Three, taking in the visual area. You are somewhat attracted, and imagine yourself taking that course. Your imagination places you there momentarily. Inner data is immediately aroused through conscious and unconscious association. Perhaps you are aware of a few memories that dimly come to mind. One house might remind you of one a relative lived in years ago. A three might be reminiscent of one that grew by your family home. But in that instant, inner computations occur as you consider making a fairly simple decision, and the immediate area is checked against all portions of your knowledge.

You then look at Street Four. The same process happens again, this area also takes your attention. At the same time you almost equally hold in you mind the image of Street Three, for you can see them both at once from this intersection.

ccuujgyh

Let us say that you are almost equally attracted to both courses. You teeter between probabilities, having the full power to choose one street or the other as physical experience. If you had to stand there and write down all the thoughts and associations connected with each course of action before you made your decision, you might never cross the intersection to begin with. You might be hit by an automobile as you stood there, lost in your musings.

In the same way, it would take you some time to even walk from a table to a chair if you had to be consciously aware of all of the nerves and muscles that must first be activated. But while you stand almost equally attracted by streets Three and Four, then you send out mental and psychic energy in those directions.

hthbath

Past association merge with present reality and form a pattern. Mentally, a part of you actually starts out upon each street–a projected mental image. As you stand there, then, in this case two such projected images go out onto streets Three and Four. To some extent these images experience “what will happen” if you yourself take one direction or the other. That information is returned to you instantaneously, and you make your decision accordingly. Say you choose Street Four. Physically you begin to walk in the direction. Street Four becomes your physical reality. You accept that experiences in your prime sequence of events. You have, however, already sent out an energized mental image of your self into Street Three, and you cannot withdraw that energy.

The portion of your that was attracted to that route continues to travel it. At the point of decision this alternate self made a different conclusion: that it experience Street Three; as physical reality. The self as you think of it is literally reborn in each instant, following an infinite number of events from the one official series of events that you recognize at any given “time.”

ijkh

There is something highly important here concerning our technological civilization: As our world becomes more complicated, in those terms, we increase the number of probable actions practically available. The number of decisions multiples. You can physically move from one place on the planet to another with relative ease. Centuries ago, ordinary people did not have the opportunity to travel from one country to another with such rapidity. As space becomes “smaller,” our probabilities grow with in complexity. Our consciousness handles far more space data now.(In terms of time.) Watching TV, we are aware of events that occur on the other side of the earth, so our consciousness necessarily becomes less parochial. As this has happened the whole matter of probabilities has begun to assume a more practical cast. Civilizations are locked one into the other. Politicians try to predict what other governments will do. Ordinary people try to predict what their governments might do.

More and more, we are beginning to deal with probabilities as we try to ascertain which of a number of probable events might physically occur. When the question of probabilities is a practical one, then scientists will give it more consideration.

hull

The entire subject is very important, however. As far as a true psychology is concerned, individuals who are made aware of the existence of probable realities will no longer feel trapped by events. Our consciousness is at a point where it is beginning to understand the significance of “predictive action”–and predictive action always involves probabilities.

I certain terms, we are the recognized “result” of all of the decisions we have made up to this point in our life. That is the official “I”. We are in no way diminished because other quite-as-official selves are “offshoots” of our own experience, making the choices we did not make, and choosing, then, alternate versions of reality.

itnds

We follow the prime series of events that you recognize as our own, yet all of us are concerned. These are not just esoteric statements, but valid clues about the nature of our own behavior, meant to give us a sense of our own freedom, and to emphasize the importance of our choice.

Cave, camp, and open fires

An open fire elicits certain responses from the cells that for instance, a furnace does not. The effect of the light plus the warmth on the skin is extremely healing. People sit by a fireplace in wintertime because it is unconsciously recognized that recuperative and therapeutic results occur. Simply put, the cells respond to fire-light in somewhat the same manner that flowers do to sunlight. The stimulation is much more than skin deep, however, and an open fire is cleansing. It even helps clear the blood.

Cavemen recognized this. I am not suggesting that we use our fireplaces instead of the furnace. I am saying that in wintertime there are definite health-value effects to be felt when we sit in front of an open fire. Two evenings a week would be quite effective.

The proximity of so many trees also has considerable health value, and to those doing psychic or other creative work the effects are particularly conducive to a peaceful state of mind. Trees are great users and yet conservators of energy, and they automatically provide much vitality to areas in which they are plentiful. This is physically obvious in scientific terms. Besides that, however, the consciousnesses of trees are remarkably kind and enduring.

We think of dogs as friends of man, and we personify gods in human terms. We think of them sometimes as guardians. In those terms, now, trees are also guardians. They are attached to the people they know. You cannot put a leash on them and walk them around the block, yet trees form a protective barrier about, say, a home or a neighborhood. They are actively concerned. They have personalities–certainly to the same extent that dogs do, yet of an entirely different nature. They respond to us. The trees in a neighborhood are particularly friendly, strong, and protective, and they will help renew our energies.

The air may be drier in a certain way. Ocean air is wet but it is healthy. River air is wet, but it may be healthy or unhealthy, according to the nature of the river, the land, and the attitude of the people. After a flood, the river air is felt to be a threat, and to many it is therefore unhealthy. Why do some people, after being flooded in one location, then move to another equally threatening environment.

The “Borledim” family deals parenthood.

These people are natural “earth parents.” That is they have the capacity to produce children who from a certain standpoint possess certain excellent characteristics. The children have brilliant minds, healthy bodies, and strong clear emotions.

While many people are working in specific areas, developing the intellect, for example, or the emotions of the body, these parents and their children produce offspring in which a fine balance is maintained. No one aspect of mind or body is developed at the expense of another aspect.

The personalities possess a keen resiliency of both body and mind, and serve as a strong earth stock. It goes without saying that members of one family often marry into other families. Of course the same thing happens here. When this occurs new stability in inserted for this particular family acts as a source-stock, providing physical and mental strength. Physically speaking, these people often have many children, and usually the offspring do well in whatever area of life is chosen. Biologically speaking, they possess certain qualities that nullify “negative” codes in the genes. They are usually very healthy people, and marriage into this group can automatically end generations of so-called inherited weaknesses.

These people (The Borledim) believe, then, in the natural goodness of sex, the body, and the family unit–however those attributes are understood in the physical society to which they belong. As a rule they possess an enchanting spontaneity, however, and all of their creative abilities go into the family group and the production of children. These are not rigid parents, though, blindly following conventions, but people who see family life as a fine living creative art, and children as masterpieces in flesh and blood. Far from devouring their offspring by an excess of overprotective care, they joyfully send their children out into the world, knowing that in their terms the masterpieces must complete themselves, and that they have helped with the under-painting.

The Borledim are the stock that so far has always seen to it that our species continues despite catastrophes, and they are more or less equally distributed about the planet and in all nationalities. They are most like Sumari. They will usually seek fairly stable political situations in which to bear their children, as the Sumari will to produce art. They demand a certain amount of freedom for their children, however, and while they are not political activists, like the Sumari their ideas often spring to prominence before large social changes, and help initiate them. The one big difference is that the Sumari deal primarily with creativity and the arts, an often subordinate family life, while family thinks of offspring in the terms of living art; everything else is subordinated to that “ideal.”

The Sumari often provide a cultural, spiritual, or artistic heritage for the species. This Borledim family provides a well-balanced earth stock a heritage in terms of individuals. These people are kind, humorous, playful, filled with a lively compassion, but too wise for the “perverted” kind of compassion that breeds on other individuals weaknesses.

An Artist expects his paintings to be good, or, at least he or she should. These people expect their children to be well-balanced, healthy, spiritually keen, and so they are. We will find members of the Borledim family in almost any occupation, but the main consideration will be on the physical family unit.

These parents do not sacrifice themselves for the sake of their children. They understand too well the burden that is placed upon such offspring. Instead, the parents retain their own clear sense of identity and their individual characteristics, serving as clear examples to the children of loving, independent adults.

The “Zuli” Family IS INVOLVED WITH THE FULFILLMENT OF BODILY ACTIVITY.

These are the athletes. In whatever field, they devote themselves to perfecting the capacities of the body, which in others usually lie latent.

 

 

To some extent they serve as physical models. The vitality of creature-hood is demonstrated through the beauty, speed, elegance, and performance of the body itself. To some extent these people are perfectionists, and in their activities there are always hints of “super” achievement, as if even physically the species tries to go beyond itself. The members of this family actually serve to point out the unrealized capacity of the flesh–even as, for example, great Sumari artists might give clues as to the artistic abilities inherent, but not used, in the species as a whole. The members of this group deal, then, in performance. They are physical doers. They are also lovers of beauty as it is corporeally expressed.

Members of this (Zuli) family can often serve as models for the artist or the writer, but generally speaking they themselves transmit their energy through physical “arts” and performance. In our terms only, and historically speaking, they often appeared at the beginnings of civilizations, where direct physical bodily manipulation within the environment was of supreme importance. Then, normal physical reactions were simply faster then they are now, even while normal body relaxation was deeper and more complete.

The “Milumet family of mystics

Almost all of their energy is directed in an inward fashion, with no regard as to whether or not inner experience is translated in usual terms. These persons, for instance, may be utterly unknown, and usually are, for as a rule they care not a bit about explaining their interior activities to others nor, for that matter, even to themselves. They are true innocents, and spiritual. They may be underdeveloped intellectually, by recognized standards, but this is simply because they do not direct their intellect to physical focus.

Those belonging to this (Milumet) family will not be in positions of any authority, generally speaking, for they will not concentrate that long on specific physical data. However, they may be found in our country precisely where we might not expect them to be: on some assembly lines that require simple repetitive action–in factories that do not required speed, however. They usually choose less industrialized countries, then, with a slower pace of life. They have simple, direct, childish mannerisms, and may appear to be stupid. They do not bother with the conventions.

Strangely enough, though, they may be excellent parents, particularly in less complicated societies than our own. In our terms, they are primitives wherever they appear. Yet they are deeply involved in nature, and in that respect they are more highly attuned psychically than most other people are.

Their private experiences are often of a most venturesome kind, and at that level they help nourish the psyche of mankind.

The VOID Family

They have excellent precognitive abilities, which of course means that at least unconsciously they understand the motion of probabilities. They can work in any field. In our terms it is as if they perceive the future motion or direction of an idea, a concept, or a structure. They then work with all of their minds to bring the probability into physical reality.

In conventional terms they may appear to be great activists and revolutionaries, or they may seem to be impractical dreamers. They will be possessed by an idea of change and alteration, and will feel, at least, driven or compelled to make the idea a reality. They perform a very creative service as a rule, for social and political organizations can often become stagnant, and no longer serve the purposes of the large masses of people involved. Members of this (Void) family may also initiate religious revolutions, of course. As a rule, however, they have one purpose in mind: to change the status quo in whatever the area of primary interest.

It is already easy to see how the purpose of various families can inter-mesh, complement each other, and also conflict. Yet all in all, almost, they operate as systems of creative checks and balances.

Life is far from Inflexible

Returning to alternate compositions, we can at any time bring into our own life-composition elements from and “alternate” ones.
Some people structure their lives around their children, others around a career, or pleasure, or even pain. These are simply certain focuses that we choose, that direct our experience. We can add other focuses while still retaining our own identity–indeed, enriching it.

Sometimes we act as though one ability contradicts another. We think “I cannot be a good parent and a sexual partner to my mate at the same time.” To those who feel this way a definite contradiction seems implied. A woman might feel that the qualities of a mother almost stand in opposition to those of an exuberant sex mate at the same time.” To those who feel this way a definite contradictions seems implied. A woman might feel that the qualities of a mother almost stand in opposition to those of an exuberant sex mate. A man might imagine that fatherhood meant providing an excellent home and income. He might think that “aggressiveness,” competition, and emotional aloofness were required to perform that role. These would be considered in opposition to the qualities of love, understanding, and emotional support “required” of a husband. In actuality, of course, no such contradiction apply. In the same way, however, we often seem to feel that our identity is dependent upon a certain highly specific role, until other qualities quite out own seem threatening. They almost seem to be un-selflike.

To some degree we feel the same way when we encounter the concept of probable selves, or of counterparts. It is as though we had an unlimited bank of abilities and characteristics from which to draw, and yet were afraid of doing so–fearing that any addiction could make us less instead of more. If all of this goes on personally as we choose one melody and call it oneself, then perhaps we can begin to see the mass creative aspects in terms of civilizations that seem to rise and fall.

Apple Awareness

An apple can be red round, weigh so much, be good to eat, sit in a basket, but be natural on a tree. It can be tart or sweet. We can find one on the ground, or on the table, or in a pie. None of these things are contradictory to the nature of an apple. We do not ask: “How can an apple have color and be round at the same time?”


We can look at an apple and hold it in our hands, so it is obvious that its shape does not contradict its color. We see that an apple can be red or green or both. If I said: “Apples sit quietly on a table,” we would have to agree that such is sometimes the case. If I said: “Apples roll down grassy inclines,” we would again be forced to concede the point. It would be clear to us that none of these statements contradicted each other, for in different circumstances apples behave differently.
So far, we not hold our consciousness in our hand, however. When I speak of the behavior of our psyche, then, we may wonder: “How can my psyche exist in more than one time at once?” It can do this just as an apples can be found on a table or on the ground or on the tree.

The inside dimensions of consciousness cannot be so easily described, however. If we ask: How can I have reincarnational and probable selves at once?” , we are asking a question comparable to: “How can an apple have color and be round at the same time?”

Following this analogy, in the same way each psyche contains within it infinite notes, and each note is capable of its own endless creative variations. We follow one melody or oneself, and for some reason we seem to think that the true, full orchestra of oneself will some how drown us out.

Apple

When speaking in terms of counterparts, then, or reincarnational selves and probable selves, in the true symphony of our being we are violins, oboes, cymbals, harps–in other words, we are living instrument through, which we play oneself. We are not an instrument upon which we are played. We are the composer and the symphony. We play ballads, classical pieces, lyrics, operas. One creative performance does not contradict the others.

Healers

This does not mean that these people may not be creative, or organizers, or teachers, such as those who have completed advanced yoga teacher training courses and learned about the benefits of yoga and its potential healing powers. But, it potentially means that the primary slant of their consciousness will be directed to healing. We might find them as doctors and nurses, while not usually as hospital administrators. However, they may be psychics, social workers, psychologists, artists, or in the religions. They may work at flowers shops. They may work on assembly lines, for that matter, but if so they will be healers by intent or temperament. If you’re looking into metaphysical healing powers for weight loss you could possibly check that site out for acupressure healing properties. I wish you well on getting to the weight you wish to!

I mention various professions or occupations to give clear examples, but a mechanic may belong to this Tumold group, or to any group. In this case the mechanic would have a healing effect on the customers, and he would fixing more than cars.

The healers might also appear as politicians, however, psychically healing the wounds of the nation. An artist of any kind, whose work is primarily meant to help, also belongs in this category. We will find some heads of state, and –particular in the past–some members of royal families who also belong to this group.

Sumari

To one extent or another, each family of consciousness carries within it the characteristics inherent in all families. There is, therefore, great diversity.

The Sumari abilities are highly creative ones, however. To a large extent they have been inhibited in our society. Each person can recognize his or her degree of Sumariness. The playful, creative elements of personality can then be released.These qualities are particularly important as they add to, temper, or enhance the primary characteristics of the other families of consciousness.

If you are a “reformer,” a “reformer by nature,” then the Sumari characteristics, brought to the surface, could help you temper your seriousness with play and humor, and actually assist you in achieving your reforms far easier then otherwise. Each personality carries traces of other characteristics besides those of the family of consciousness to which he or she might belong. The creative aspects of the Sumari can be particularly useful if those aspects are encouraged in any personality, simply because their inventive nature throws light on all elements of experience.

The psyche as we know it, then, is composed of a mixture of these families of consciousness. One is not superior to the others. They are just different, and they represent various ways of looking at physical life. The existence of psychic groupings, and the difference between probable and reincarnational selves, counterparts and families of consciousness. At times contradictions may seem to exist. We may wonder how we are us in the midst of such multitudinous psychic “variations.”

Families Of Consciousness

As our brothers or sisters might belong to the same physical family, so generally are us and our counterparts part of the same psychic group of consciousness. Remember that these psychic groups are like natural formations into which consciousness seems to flow. Our own interests, desires, and abilities are not predetermined by our membership in a given psychic family.

For example, we are not creatively playful because we are “Sumari” Instead, we join the Sumari grouping because we are creatively playful. The groupings of consciousness, then, are not to be equated with say, astrological houses.

Taking the Sumari as an example, there can be overly intent, ponderous, or simple dour Sumari who have not learned to use their creativity graciously, or with joy. Yet that joyful use of ability will be their intent. At particular periods of history, in our terms, different families may predominate.

The psychic groups, however, overlap physical and national ones. The Sumari are extremely independent, for instance, and as a rule we will not find them born into countries with dictatorships. When they do so appear, their work may set a spark that brings about changes, but they seldom take joint political action. Their creativity is very threatening to such a society.

However, the Sumari are practical in that they bring creative visions into physical reality, and try to live their lives accordingly. They are initiators, yet they make little attempt to preserve organizations, even ones they feel to be fairly beneficial. They are not lawbreakers by design or intent. They are not reformers in the society or culture. they are given to art, but in its broadest sense, trying to make an “art” of living, for example. They have been a part of most civilization, though they appeared in the Middle ages (A.D.476- A.D. 1450) least of all. They often come to full strength before great social changes. Others might build social structures from their work, for example, but the Sumari themselves, while pleased, will usually not be able to feel any intuitive sense of belonging with any structured group.

There is no correlation between the families of consciousness and bodily characteristics, however, many of the Sumari choose to be born in the springtime, but all those born in the spring are not Sumari, and no general rule applies there. They also have a liking for certain races, but again no specific rules apply. Many of the Irish, the Jews, the Spanish, and some lesser numbers of the French, for instance, are Sumari–though they appear in all races.

Generally speaking, America has not been a Sumari nation, nor have the Scandinavian countries or England. Psychically speaking, the Sumari often very nicely arrange existences in which they are a minority–in a democracy, say, so that they can work at their art within a fairly stable political situation. They are not interested in government, yet they do rely upon it to that extent. They are apt to be self-reliant within that framework. Their recognized artistic abilities may predominate or be fairly minimal.

Sumari is a state of mind, a slant of being. They are not fighters, nor will they generally advocate a violent overthrow of government or mores. They believe in the creativity of change, naturally occurring

Nevertheless, they are often part of the cultural underground simply because they are seldom conformers. A Sumari is very uncomfortable as a member of any large commercial venture, particularly if the work involves habitual or boring routine. They are not happy on assembly lines. They like to play with details– or to use them for creative purposes. They often go from one job or profession to another for that reason.

If we begin to look into the nature of oneself, and feel intuitively that we are  a Sumari, then we should look for a position in which we can use our inventiveness. Sumari enjoy theoretical mathematics, for example, yet make miserable bookkeepers.

In the arts, Picasso was a Sumari. Many entertainers are Sumari. We seldom find then in politics. They are not usually historians.

There are few with any position within organized religions. Because of their feelings of self-reliance, however, we can find them as farmers, working intuitively with the land. They are equally divided between the sexes. In our society, whoever, Sumari qualities in the male have until lately been frowned upon to some degree.

Transmitted Thought

There are no duplicates. Yet, we may say, are not some thoughts duplicates?  The variations may indeed be slight, but variations are always present. A thought transmitted knowingly or unknowingly by A. is not precisely the same thought when it reaches receiver B.

The thought originally held by A. is still retained by A., yet a seemingly identical thought reaches B. A. has lost nothing. That is, in trying to send the thought, in trying to duplicate the thought, A. still retains it. So what is passed on to receiver B.? This is rather important, since an explanation will do much to account for the frequent difference that occurs in telepathic communications.

Whether or not- A. the sender, knowingly transmits this apparent duplicate, at the point of its transmission, the sender forms an electrical impulse pattern that is supposed to duplicate the original thought. But no such identical duplication is possible, as far as I know, within reality of any kind.

A side note: identical twins are hardly identical, for example.

As soon as the attempt is made to duplicate the thought, we find the attempt itself strains and pulls; the impulse changes minutely, or to a greater degree. The point I want to make is that any attempt at duplication actually forces the thought it is already a new thought, bearing great resemblance to the original. But it is not the original thought.

Prime identities cannot be duplicated. Exact duplication is always an effect of insufficient knowledge. In some cases two thoughts may appear identical, but whether or not examination can show it, such exact duplication is impossible. Now when receiver B. receives a transmitted thought, he may react and interpret that part of the thought that is similar to the original.

He or she may , on the other hand, react to and interpret that portion of the thought that is not similar. He or she may react to and interpret the similarity of the difference. His or her reactions depend upon several circumstances, including the intensity of the electrical pulsations that compose the thought, and his or her own inner facility in reaching to particular ranges of intensities.

Habitually, individuals establish overall frequencies that they are able to handle, for various reasons. An individual will therefore feel more at home operating within certain frequencies. The original thought is used as a pattern for the creation of a new electrical reality which may or may not be directed at any given receiver. It is obvious that the attempt to duplicate is present: were it not for this attempt to duplicate, then there would be little similarity between any separate identities.

The nature of the thought that is received by B. is determined by many factors. We shall consider but a few of these. These include the original intensity of the thought as A. ; the familiarity or unfamiliarity of the range of frequencies that compose the thought to any intended receiver.

The receiver will understand and interpret in general the intensity range he is in the habit of using himself. Some, or a portion of the transmitted thought, may fall within his range and some may not. He or she may pick up the portions of the thought which are similar to the original thought which are similar to the original thought, in which case some scientific proof of sorts can be achieved. It can happen, however, that the dissimilarity is what falls within his or her particular accustomed range, in which case proof will be inadequate.

Emotions also possess an electrical reality. Thoughts formed and sent out within the impulse range of emotion often succeed because of the peculiar nature of the emotional electrical impulses themselves. They have a particularly strong electrical mass. They also usually fall within powerful intensities, for reasons. Thoughts formed under a strong emotional impetus will carry greater vividness, have a greater tendency toward duplication, and are apt to be interpreted with some success.

Also, all individuals have had familiarity with emotions as they exist within electrical intensities, and are accustomed to reacting to them. The whole process in instantaneous. However, the thought which is now an approximation of the original thought is changed once more by the receiver himself or herself. He or she does not actually interpret the thought itself. He or she interpret the thought itself. He or she interprets its meaning and forms a new thought identity.

Action, the very action of transmission, alters the nature and electrical reality of the thought itself.

Our imaginary sender A. does not transmit a given thought. He or she does not even send an exact duplicate. Nor does the receiver receive the thought in the same condition. The original thought is retained by A. A. forms a thought as nearly identical as possibilities allow it to be. This he or she transmits to B. But B. can’t receive the thought in its present condition, for the action of receiving a thought also changes it. He or she forms a thought as nearly identical as possible for him and interprets it.

Action can never be considered apart from that which is seemingly acted upon, for action becomes part of structure. Action begins from within and is a result of inner vitality inherent in all realities. Action is not alone. It is not an identity. ACTION IS A DIMENSION OF EXISTENCE.

PETTY WARS

Those wars still to be fought are but dim memories, once vital but lost as nightmares in greater awakenings.

A nostalgic memory for lives come and gone, as we might for fond dreams barely recalled. They represent a present unique beyond telling, alive  in each consciousness, more important than we recognize. There are no real rules to be followed that will bring us into such an encounter with the present moment of reality–only a trust in the nature of our being. And that trust is within us whether or not we recognize it, for it gives us our present experience; and no matter how our mind questions, it rides securely in the great creativity of the soul.

That soul constantly creates the body, and each individual on the face of the earth at any given time places his or her trust in that reality. That feeling of certainty is the same that any plant knows. Any idea, creative insight, or dream, rides upon the same sure thrust.

In Every Place And Every Time, Terms Of Being Are The Same

They bring forth the greater comprehension of each self, or itself. For lives come and gone, as we might for fond dreams barely be recalled.

They represent a present unique beyond telling, alive in each consciousness, more important than we recognize. There are no real rules to be followed that will bring us into such an encounter with the present moment of reality – only a trust in the nature of our being. And that trust is within us whether or not we recognize it, for it gives us our present experience; and no matter how our mind questions, it rides security in the real creativity of the soul.

That soul constantly creates the body, and each individual on the face of the earth at any given time places his or her trust in that reality. That feeling of certainty is the same that any plant knows. Any idea, creative insight, or dream, rides upon the same sure thrust

THOSE OF US

Those of us who do not believe in war have not experienced it. It may have surrounded us, but we did not experience it. Those of us do not believe in greed have not suffered its “consequences.” If we still see it is because it is a part of our reality. If we are honestly not greedy, yet we see greed, then perhaps we are serving as an example to others–but we form our own reality.

There are more worlds than you suppose, and in our own private experience each of us contributes to the world that we know. We and our counterparts together form it. Our physical body alone is equipped to perceive far more than we presently allow it to. Physically we are a part of every  other person upon the earth, and we have a connection with each leaf and frog and nail.

 

We choose the city or state or country in which we live. No one forces us to stay here unless we are looking for an excuse to remain. So we choose psychic land of another as we can journey into other parts of the physical world. Some great travelers never left the country of their birth.

Michelangelo roamed the centuries, picking up visions and ideas as others might buy postcards, journeying from one country to a foreign land. His genius shows us what we are, and yet it is but a hint of the potential with which our species is endowed.

In the light of such ideals, surely seem wanting–yet our reality is one in which the greatest freedoms have been allowed. This means that we have given ourselves full range so that all probabilities could be explored, and none left out that were physically feasible.

This species gave itself no “preordained” taboos.

 

If the infinite ranges possible to human capabilities would be explored–and those who chose that route said, “we will trust that our creativity will find its own way, and if there are nightmares we will waken from them. We will even learn from them. We will dare to push aside the dimensions of being into those our humanity have its meaning. And through the compassion that we have learned, will we be able to understand the divine errors that gave us the gift of our birth. Souls and molecules each are learning, each are forming realities, each are a part of a divinity in which each counterpart has a part to play.

Humans Are Not The Master Of Creation

He or she is simply their creator, and he or her creates because he or she does not attempt to control.

When we try to control power or people, we always copy. To some extent the world copies itself, in that there are patterns. Those patterns are always changed to one extent or another, so that no object is ever a copy of another–though it may appear to be the same.

In our terms, the world is intensely different from one moment to another, with each smallest portion of consciousness choosing its reality from a field of infinite probabilities. Immense calculations, far beyond our conscious decisions as we think of them, are probable only because of the unutterable freedom that resides within minute worlds inside our skull– patterns of interrelationships, counterparts so cunningly woven that each is unique, freewheeling, and involved in an infinite cooperative venture so powerful that the atoms stay in certain forms, and the same stars shine in the sky.

The familiar and strange are intimately connected in our most obvious, our simplest utterance. We are surrounded by miracles. Why, then, does the world so often seem sour and cruel? Why do our fellow beings, sometimes seem like unfeeling monsters–Frankenstein not of body but of mind, spiritual idiots, ignorant of any heritage of love or truth or even graceful beast-hood? Why does it seem to many of us that the race, the species, is doomed? Why do some of us feel, in our quiet moments, such a sentence just?

We make our own reality.

The Properties Of the Soul and Body

We do not understand the of properties the soul or body, yet the body was given to us so that we could learn from it. The properties of the physical and  the earth are meant to lead us into the nature of the soul. We create physical reality, yet without knowing how we do , so that the wondrous structure of the earth itself is meant to lead us to question our own source. Nature as we understand it is meant to be our teacher. We are not its master.

 

Contents Of Consciousness

To some extent we realize that the world has physical contents, existing at one time yet varying in their characteristics. In those terms, the world is composed of its physical ingredients. That “package” is the only part of the picture that we see, however.

Psychically, our world is composed of the contents of its consciousness. We have maps or continents and oceans, and in the entire view each portion is like a piece of a jigsaw puzzle, all fitting together perfectly, smoothly flowing into the natural structure of the world. So at any given time there is a world consciousness, a perfect jigsaw of awareness in which each identity, however large or small, has its part.

There are earthquakes that erupt physically, and tracings are made of them. There are also inner earthquakes of consciousness from which the physical ones emerge–storms of mind or being, eruptions in which one segment of the world consciousness, repressed in one area , explodes in another.

If we could orbit our planet in a different kind of craft, we could view the psychic content of the world, seeing the world consciousness shining far more brilliantly than any lighted city. We could spot the point of intense activity, see the birth of new myths and the death of old ones as certainly as we might be able to see a mountain slide or a tidal wave. The physical portions of the earth are all related. So does consciousness form its own kind of inner structures from which, the physical ones emerge. We are indeed counterparts, then, each of the other. Yet as there is great variety to physical form, so counterparts follow a still more expansive inner freedom that finds an even greater diversity of characteristics.

A Group Selves Form The Soul

I am not telling you that each if us do not have a soul to call our own. We are a part of our soul. It belongs to you, and you to it.

Memories exist as patterns. In this life, each of us come together and part, come together and part again, forming a counterpart relationship when it suits our purposes, as streams of consciousness mix and merge, and then separate.

These counterparts are psychic, relationships, formations that in the deepest terms flow into historic time and out of it. Some, in our terms, last a lifetime. Others represent psychic encounters that happens between two individuals at several points, say, but are not continuous. They may be no less intense, however.

The Species Of Consciousness

It is up to us to discover to which one we belong. In any group the relationships indicate inner realizations and connections. The realities appear in each of our lives.

Now any group will show interrelationships. We can see then for ourselves. There is great diversity within the family of consciousness, as there is within any physical race, and there is also great variety within other psychic families.

 

We choose to be born in a particular physical family, however, with our brothers and sisters, or as an only child. So, generally speaking, our counterparts are born in the same psychic family.

Now categories do not come first. Our individuality comes first. We have certain characteristics of our own. These place us in a certain position. As we are not a rock or a mineral, but a person, so our individuality places us in a particular family or species of consciousness. This represents our overall viewpoint of reality.

 

We like to be an initiator or a follower or a nourisher. We like to create variations on old systems, or we like to create new ones. We like to deal primarily with healing, or with information, or with physical data. We like to deal with sight, or sound, with dreams, or with translating inner data into the working psychic material of our society. So we choose a certain focus, as we choose ahead of time our physical family.

Psychic Family Members

One might be the upstart, another the perfect achiever. Psychologists now often try to deal with the family as a whole, by allowing the different members to see how they may be exaggerating certain tendencies at the expense of others. Often, families that undergo psychic readings together find their spiritual experiences to be much more effective than when it’s done individually. If you are considering going for a psychic reading, looking through which psychic readers are available and which ones you are best going to, or consulting with a psychic, you may first want the help of Psychic Advisor to find reputable and credible practitioners as not all abide by ethical standards.

The upstart, for instance, may be displaying all of the bold aspects inhibited by other family members. Through this person the others may vicariously share the excitement or suspense of those experiences that are otherwise blocked. On the other hand the others may be completely hiding such impulses, while expressing faithfully the desires of other family members for “excellence” discipline. Now the same can apply to counterparts, and those in our experience can show to us, in exaggerated form, abilities of our own upon which we have not chosen to concentrate. We can learn much from our counterparts, therefore, and they from us. Sometimes we may need help via a psychic reading to reach out and interact with our counterparts, but some people are able to cross the breach with their own inherent ability. Those counterparts that we meet will be working, playing, and being more or less within our own culture. This does not mean that we are bits and pieces of some hypothetical whole self.

Pretend that the psyche is a plant sending out seeds of itself in many directions, each seed growing into a new plant in different conditions. Growing to plant-hood, those seeds send out further new variations. A handful of seeds from any tree might fall in the same backyard. Others might be blown for miles before they land.

We usually live with our physical family, though this does not always apply; sometimes our ancestors come from various countries, so there is a physical lineage that we understand. There are often homecomings, were distant relatives return to the homestead. Now psychically the same applies in terms of counterparts. If we belong to any particular groups, often our closest counterparts will also be there. We will be a counterpart from their viewpoint, by the way, many political, civic, educational or religious groups are composed of counterparts.

Conventional families are counterparts that form psychic families. They are family representations on another level. First of all, such groups have a built-in focus–political, civic, religious, sexual, or whatever. Certain members of the group express the repressed tendencies of others. Yet each is supported through a common sense of belonging, so that the group sometimes seems to have its own overall identity, in which each member plays a part. Anyone can discover this by examining the groups to which he or she belongs.

Now there are races, psychically speaking. There are also psychic counterparts of races–families of consciousness, so to speak–all related, yet having different overall characteristics or specialties.

Playful Intellect

In their own ways children are quite aware of their counterparts, and of, other portions of their individual realities. They relate to their counterparts in dreams. They sometimes see them as “invisible” companions. We dream of our own counterparts frequently, but we are so afraid of maintaining what we think of as the rational adult self that we ignore such communications.

In certain circles, soul mates is the latest vogue. The idea is an old one; it is based upon the reality of counterparts, and presents another version of the theory. But, it is treated with an almost pompous seriousness. Many of those who use the term do it to hide rather than to release their own joyful abilities. They spend time searching for their soul mates–but the search involves them in a pilgrimage for a kind of impossible communication with another, in which all division is lost, with the two then trying to join in a cementing oneness, suffocating all sense of play or creativity. We are not one part, or one half, of another soul, searching through the annals of time for our partner, undone until we are complete by our soul mate.

When we become too intent to maintain our reality we lose it, for we deny the creativity upon which it rests.

I am not denying the importance of true reason. Certainly I am not telling us to ignore the intellect. But we do often ignore the playfulness of the intellect, and force it to become something less than it is.

Most People Suspect Creativity

They expect that its products will be unreal or not valid in the physical world. Yet there is a great correlation between what we think of as creativity, altered states of consciousness, play, and “spiritual” development.

 

When we create a poem or a song or a painting we are in a state of play, of enjoyment, of freedom. We intend to make something different, to produce a new version of reality. We create out of love, for the sake of the experience. At one time or another almost everyone has that kind of experience, but children have it often. They compose songs and music and paintings in their heads. They alter the focus of their consciousness frequently. They do not stop to ask whether or not the play is real or pertinent. Physically, play develops their body mechanisms. It also flexes the great capabilities of their minds.

 

When we think: “Life is earnest,” and decide to put away childish things, then often we lose sight of our own creativity and become a goal that must be attained. The goal is to be achieved through hard work, and as long as we believe this we do not understand what the spirit is.

 

A natural analogy–plants do not work at developing their potential. They are not beautiful because they believe it is their responsibility to please our eye. They are beautiful because they love themselves and beauty. When we are so serious we almost always distort the nature of our own spirit as far as our understanding of it is concerned. We cannot let our guard down long enough to discover what it is. We keep looking for new rules or regulations, or methods of discipline.

Visible Or Invisible There Is Consciousness In Everything

Chromosomes are microscopic bodies into which the protoplasmic substance of a cell nucleus separating during cell division. They carry the genes, the factors or units–‘blueprints’–that determine hereditary characteristics.

 

There is consciousness in everything. Visible or invisible to us, each fragment,  of the universe has a consciousness of its own. Pain and pleasure, the strongest aspects of all consciousnesses, are experienced by every fragment, according to its degree. Differentiation is of course various, and it is in the degree of differentiation that consciousnesses are different.

 

Reincarnation simply represents probabilities in a time context.

Genetic Patterns Ahead Of Time

This is somewhat like the ancestral line, and there are also reflections in the genes and chromosomes undetected by our scientists. The ancestral and reincarnational lines merge to some extent to form what we think of as our genetic patterns ahead of time, so to speak. Before this life we chose what we wished from those two main areas.

Reincarnational experience is also transmitted, then, and can be re-translated from a biological code-imprint into emotional awareness. However, as we are not our parents or our ancestors we are not our “reincarnational selves.”

We cannot say that our ancestors, like some strange plants, were growing toward what we are, or that we are the sum of their experiences. They were, they are, themselves. We cannot say that we are the sum of our past reincarnational lives either, and for the same reasons. We cut off the knowledge of oneself, and so divisions seem to occur. We are somewhat like a plant that recognizes only one of its leaves at a time. A leaf feels its deeper reality as a part of the plant, and adds to its own sense of continuity, and even to its own sense of individuality. But we often pretend that we are some odd dangling leaf, with no roots, growing without a plant to support us.

All of the leaves now growing on this plant could be thought of as counterparts of each other, each alive and individual in one time, each contributing yet facing in different directions. As one leaf falls another takes its place, until next year the whole plant, still living, will have a completely new set of leaves -– future reincarnational selves of this batch.

We are not plants, but the analogy is a simple one.

There is a constant interaction in the plant, between its parts, that we do not perceive. The leaves now present are biologically valid, interrelating in our terms. Yet in time terms each leaf is also aware of the past history of the plant, and biologically they spring up from that “past.”

Each leaf seeks to express its leaf-hood as fully as possible. Leaves take in sun, which helps the plant itself grow (through photosynthesis). The development of the leaves, then, is very important to the plant’s own existence. The cells of the plant are kept in contact with the environment through the leaves’ experiences, and future probabilities are always taken into consideration. The smallest calculations involving light and dark are known. The life of the plant and its leaves cannot be separated.

The plant has its own “idea” of itself, in which each of its leaves has its part. Yet each leaf has the latent capacities of the whole plant. Root one, for instance, and a new plant will grow.

Selves have far greater freedom than leaves, but they can also root themselves if they choose–and they do. Reincarnational selves are like leaves that have left the plant, choosing a new medium of existence. In this analogy, the dropped leaves of the physical plant have fulfilled their own purpose to themselves as leaves, and to the plant. These selves, however, dropping from one branch of time, root themselves in another time and become new selves from which others will sprout.

The larger self, then seeds itself in time. In this process no identity is lost and no identity is the same, yet all are interrelated. So we can theoretically expand our consciousness to include the knowledge of our past lives, though those lives were ours and not ours. They have a common root, as next year’s leaves have a common root with the leaves now of the plant.

Such knowledge, however, would automatically affect those past lives. Ideas of cause and effect can hold us back here, because it seems to us that the leaves of next year come as an effect caused by this year’s’ leaves. To the plant and its innate creative pattern, however, all of its manifestations are one–and expression of itself, each portion, exists now. The same applies to the psyche. In that greater realm of reality there is creative interplay, and interrelationships between all aspects of selfhood.

We Are Time Contemporaries

Neutral data are not transferred through “living” vehicles. Whether physically materialized or not, knowledge is possessed by consciousness. It is always “individualized”, though not necessarily in our terms.

The information carried by the chromosomes is not general, but highly specific. It is codified data (itself alive) that contains within it the essence of ancestral experience–of specific ancestral experience. Biologically we do indeed carry within us, then, the memories of our particular ancestors. These form a partial basis for our subjective and physical existence, and provide the needed support for it.

Since one portion of our heritage is physical, in those terms, those memories can be translated again, back into emotional and psychological events, though usually they are not in our societies.

To that extent the so-called past experience of our ancestors and of our species is concurrent with our own, biologically speaking. That is but one line, however, covered by the chromosomes. We have “another line” of existence that also serves as a support for the one that we presently recognize. It includes other interweaving physical relationships that bind us with all others upon our planet at the same adjacent level of time.  That is, to some extent or another we are related to all of those alive upon the planet. We are time contemporaries. We will have a far closer relationship with some than with others. Some will be our counterparts.

These may or may not be closer to us than family relationships, but psychically speaking they will share a certain kind of history with us. We will also be connected through the physical framework of the earth in the large give-and-take of its space-time scheme.

Outcroppings Of Creativity

To a certain extent we do carry the knowledge of our forefathers within our cells and chromosomes, which present a pattern that is not rigid but flexible–one that in codified fashion endows us with the subjective living experience of those who, in our terms, have gone before. Some very old cultures have been aware of this. While being independent, individual members also identified with their ancestors to some extent, accepting them as portions of their selfhoods. This does not mean that the individual self was less, but was more aware of its own reality. A completely different kind of focus was presented, in which the ancestors were understood to contribute to the “new” experience of the living; one in which the physically focused consciousness clearly saw itself as perceiving the world for itself, but also for all of those who had gone before– while realizing that in those terms he or she would contribute as well as the generation past.

The animals were also accepted in the natural philosophy of selfhood as the individual plainly saw the living quality of consciousness. The characteristics of the animals were understood to continue “life,” adding their qualities to the experience of the self in a new way.

The human body would be used in earth’s great husbandry as, from it, dying and decaying new forms would arise. This was a give-and-take in which for instance, a jungle neighborhood was truly home, and all was a portion of the self psychically, spiritually, and physically.

Let those who will, laugh at tales of spirits turning into the trees–a simplistic theory, certainly, yet a symbolic statement in such societies: The dead were buried at home in the same close territory, to form in later times the very composition of the ground upon which religions grew. Again, our limited concepts of selfhood make what I am saying difficult for us to perceive.

I am not saying, that the living consciousness of each individual returned to the earth literally, but that the physical material permeated and tamped with that consciousness did, and does. Even the cells retain knowledge of all of their affiliations. In physical terms the consciousness that we understand is based upon this.

 

Selfhood is poorer when it does not at least intuitively understand this heritage.

A satellite world where people create reality at will.

The “City of  Vanguard “is a place where most things are counter-parted with three different perspectives. The perspective through One’s eyes and Two’s perspective viewed by others. With Three and his replacements. The place where people Create Reality Through Thoughts, and Beliefs.

The Physical Journey

Walking down the street, we expect the trees to stay in their places, and not transform themselves into buildings. All of these assumptions are taken for granted in our physical journeys. We may find different customs and languages, yet even these will be accepted in the vast, overall, basic assumptions within whose boundaries physical life occurs. We are most certainly traveling through the private and mass psyche when we so much as walk down the street. The physical world seems objective and outside of oneself, however. The idea of such outsideness is one of the assumptions upon which we build that existence. Interior traveling is no more subjective, than a journey from New York to San Francisco. We are used to projecting all destinations outside of oneself. The idea of varied inward destinations, involving motion through time and space, therefore appears strange.


Generally speaking, we have explored the physical planet enough so that we have a good idea of what to expect as we travel from country to country.


Before a trip, we can produce travel maps that outline the attractions and characteristics of a certain locale. The mode of transport has taken different folds. We used to travel by flight in economy or even rent private jet. Now, we see travelers in motor bikes and also on foot! However, much of what we explore are part of what is already discovered. We are not traveling blind folded, therefore, and while any given journey may be new to us, we are not really a pioneer: The land has been mapped and there are few basic surprises.

The inner lands have not been as well explored. To say the least, they lie in virgin territory as far as our conscious mind is concerned. Others have journeyed to some of these interior locales, but since they were indeed explorers they had to learn as they went along. Some, returning, provided guidebooks or travel folders, telling us what could be expected. We make our own reality. If we were from a foreign land and asked one person to give us a description for reality. The person might say “Las Vegas is a frightful place in which crime is rampant, gangs roam the streets, murders and rapes are the norm, and people are not only impolite but ready to attack us at a moment’s notice. There are no trees. The air is polluted, and we can expect only violence. ” If we asked someone else, this individual might say instead: “Las Vegas has the finest of casinos despite their decline since the rise of online casinos like paybyphonebillcasino.uk. Additionally, Las Vegas has open-air concerts in some of the parks, fine sculpture, theater, and probably the greatest collection of music outside the Nashville. It has a good overall climate, a great mixture of cultures. In it, millions of people go their way daily in freedom. ” Both people would be speaking of their private beliefs, and would be colored by the individual focus from which each of them viewed that City.


One person might be able to give us the city’s precise location in terms of latitude and longitude. The other might have no such knowledge, and say instead: “I take a plane at such-and-such a place, at such-and-such a time, giving Las Vegas as my destination, and if I take the proper plane I always arrive there.


Explorers traveling into inner reality, do not have the same kind of landmarks to begin with. Many have been so excited with their discoveries that they wrote guidebooks long before they even began to explore the inner landscape They did not understand that they found what they wanted to find, or that the seemingly objective phenomena originated in the reflections of the psyche.


We may, for example, have read books numbering the “inner realms,” and telling us what we can expect to encounter in each. Many of these speak of lords or gods of the realm, or of demons. In a strange way these books do provide a service, for at certain levels we will find our own ideas materialized: and if we believe in demons then in those terms we will encounter them. The authors, however, suppose that the devils have a reality outside of our belief in them, and such is not the case. The demons simply represent a state of our own mind that is seemingly out there, objectified. Therefore, whatever methods the authors used to triumph over these demons is often given as proof not only of the demons’ reality but of each method’s effectiveness.


Now if we read such books we may often program our activity along those lines, in the same way that a visitor to Las Vegas might program experience of the city in terms of what he of she had been told existed there.


That kind of structuring also does a disservice, however, for it prevents us from coming in contact with our own original concepts. There is no reason, for example, to encounter any demons or devils in any trance or out-of-body condition. In such cases our own hallucinations blind us to the environment within which they are projected. All of its dimensions are faithfully and instantly produced as experience when we learn to take our “normally alert” conscious mind with us; and when we are free of such limiting ideas, then at those levels we can glimpse the inner powers of our own psyche, and watch the interplay of beliefs and symbols as they are manifested before our eyes. Until we learn to do this we will most certainly have difficulty, for we will not be able to tell the difference between our projections and what is happening in the inner environment.


Any exploration of inner reality must necessarily involve a journey through the psyche, and these effects can be thought of as atmospheric conditions, natural, at a certain stage, through which we pass as we continue.


Our world, is the result of a certain focus of consciousness, without which that world cannot be perceived. The range of consciousness involved is obviously physically oriented, yet within it there are great varieties of consciousness, each experiencing that seemingly objective world from a private perspective. The physical environment is real in different terms to an animal, a fish, a man, or a rock, for example, and different portions of those forms. This is highly important.


If an inhabitant from another reality outside of our own physical system entirely were to visit it, and if “his” or “her” intelligence was roughly of the same degree as our own, he or she would still have to learn to focus his or her consciousness into the same way that we do, more or less, in order to perceive our world. He or she would have to alter his or her native focus and turn it in a direction that was foreign to him or her. In this way he or she could “pick up our station.” There would be distortions, because even though he or she managed such manipulations he or she might not have the same kind of native physical structure as our own, or course, through which to receive and interpret those data his altered consciousness perceived.


Our visitor would then be forced to translate that information as best he or she could through his or her own native structure, if it were to make any sense to his or her consciousness in its usual orientation. All realities are the result of certain unique focuses taken by consciousness. In those terms, there is no outside. The effect of objectivity are caused as the psyche projects its experience into inner dimensions that it has itself created.


Within, those frameworks are ever expanding, so that in our terms at least it seems that greater and greater distances are involved. Travel to any other land of physical reality must then involve alterations of consciousness.


While all of our thoughts and feelings are “somewhat” materialized, only some of them become physical in our terms. They are then accepted as physical reality. They provide the basis for the physical events, objects, and phenomena upon which we all agree. Therefore our world has a stability that works well enough for daily concerns. At that point we are tuned in precisely on our “home station.” We ignore the ghost symbols or voices, the probable actions that also occur, but that are muffled in the clear tones of our accepted reality. When we begin to travel away from that home station, we become more aware of the other frequencies that are buried within it. We move through other frequencies, but to do this we must alter our own consciousness. The probable realities connected with our own system are like the suburbs, say, surrounding a main city. If for simplicity’s sake we think of other realities as different cities, then after we leave our own we would pass through the suburbs, then into the country, then after a time into other suburbs until we reached another metro-city. Each metropolis would represent a conglomeration of consciousnesses operating within an overall general frequency of clearest focus, a high point of psychic communication and exquisite focus in the given kind of reality unless we are tuned into those particular frequencies, however, we could not pick up that reality. We might instead perceive the equivalent of jumbled sound or meaningless static, or jigsaw images. We might simply realize that some kind of activity was there, but without being able to pinpoint it.

Might Is Right Or Right Is Might?

For centuries it was taken for granted that God was on the side of the strongest, richest nation. Surely, it seemed, if a country was poor or downtrodden, it was because God had made it so.

Such ideas literally held people in chains, fostering slavery and other inhumane practices. The same unfortunately applies to the Eastern concept of nirvana, and to the Christian idea of heaven. Both have been used by those in power to hold down the masses of people, to justify shoddy and inadequate living conditions by promising future bliss in the world after death.

There are many differences between the ideas of nirvana and heaven, but each has been used not only to justify suffering, but also to teach people to seek pain. The idea has been that the more persecuted and maligned a person is, the greater will be the reward in a future existence.

I want to avoid concentration upon esoteric practices in my blogs, but they do sometimes impinge upon the subject matter at hand.

The ideas of penance, fasting to excess, the personal abuse of the body, such as self-flagellation — all of those practices are conducted in the belief that suffering is something to be sought in itself. In such a way pain becomes a sought-after goal, and pleasure becomes subverted into pain.

Quite ordinary people often believe, then, that suffering itself is a way toward personal development and spiritual knowledge. In matters of health, such beliefs can have most unfortunate results. They are often responsible for needless sacrifices of physical organs in imprudent operations.

Some individuals become anxious and worried if they think they are too happy — for to them it means that they are not paying sufficiently for their sins. They may be threatened by some undeniable danger, until finally in one way or another they seek out their own punishment once again — wondering all the time why they are so frequently besieged by poor health or disease.

This kind of syndrome can affect individuals, families, and to some extent entire nations. They mitigate directly against man’s and woman’s health, survival, and exuberance.

Constant fears about nuclear destruction, or other such catastrophes can also fall under this classification.

Large masses of people became so convinced of God’s eventual vengeance and retribution that they began to plan for it.

Their lives became a way of avoiding pain instead of seeking out pleasure or satisfaction. This is true of individuals, but it also applies to many so-called survival groups, who congregate in one or another portion of the country, collecting supplies to carry them over the holocaust and to defend their families from those who might steal their provisions.

Most such people expect a period of chaotic time, in which all laws are broken down. Another version stresses the economic area, foreseeing the collapse of the economy, anarchy, and other conditions that pit one individual against the other.

These people believe, of course, that any given situation will worsen, and be carried to its most disastrous end. That attitude colors all of their other beliefs and actions. Some use religious dogma, and others rely upon scientific dogma to prove their cases, but in any case, they are presented with a world of deception and vengeance.

Good mental or physical health can hardly flourish under such conditions. There are instead most beneficial groups in this country and abroad, who actually, actively, yet peacefully join together to work for worldwide nuclear disarmament, and also to tackle such questions as nuclear waste. Their efforts are directed in other ways also, as they try to convince all areas of the world to share their wealth and foodstuffs equally.

These may be “highflying” goals, however they are positive in nature, aimed toward accomplishment and achievement, and they collect the energies of the people together in a way that stresses cooperation and understanding.

Again, the end does not justify the means — so no amount of war is ever going to produce a meaningful peace.

Such ideas affect every level of life, from the most microscopic onward. It is not that plants understand our ideas in usual terms — but they do indeed pick up our intent, and in the arena of world survival, they have a stake.

I do not want to romanticize non-human life either, or to overestimate its resources, but nature also has its own ways — and in those ways it constantly works toward survival of life in general. Nature may not bail us out, but it will always be there, adding its own vitality and strength to the overall good and health of the planet.

Remember what I said in earlier blogs about the connections between disease and non-disease states. Communication flashes between viruses and microbes, and they can change in the wink of an eye. Once again, then, ideas of the most optimistic nature are the biologically pertinent ones.

This is a good place to bring up again some extreme food practices, such as over-fasting, and an obsession with so-called natural foods.

I am not talking about a natural and healthy interest in the purity of foodstuffs, but of a worrisome over-concern. This is often carried so far that no food seems perfectly satisfying, and the concentration becomes focused upon the fear of food, rather than upon its benefits.

Behind many such attitudes if the idea that the body itself is unworthy, and that starving it somehow cuts down on the appetites of the flesh. We usually end up with a flurry of different kinds of diets.

Some concentrate almost exclusively on protein, some on carbohydrates — particularly rice — but in any case the large natural range of available foods and nutrients are cut out.

This keeps the body in a state of constant turmoil. Some people are so convinced, in fact, that eating is wrong that they diet until they become ravenously hungry, then overeat and force themselves to vomit up the residue.

Other people, in a well-meaning attempt to watch their weight, skip their breakfast entirely — a very poor procedure. It is far better to eat moderate amounts of food in all of the food ranges, and to consume smaller portions more often. I realize that our social mores also dictate our eating habits — but four light meals a day will overall serve us very well, and give the body a more steady, regulated nourishment.

These food ideas are important, since they are passed on from parents to children, and parents often use food as a way of rewarding a child’s good behavior, thus starting the youngster out toward conditions of overweight.

The main issue involved, once again, is the trust of the body.

In any case, there are new lives growing and maturing within each individual, whatever his or her age or circumstances.

The idea of survival reaches far beyond this life experience, and each person has new physical and spiritual existences ever ready — for there is no such thing as extinction. Alive or dead in usual terms, we are always conscious and aware and ourselves, and we are always a part of universal ventures in which we have always been involved, whatever our states of consciousness.

We are supported, never abandoned, and always couched lovingly in the great yet intimate presence of All That Is, whose love forms our breath, our life, our death, as in which the unknown divinity is always blessed and ever known.

It is known and unknown, forming all stages of creativity, and we are held within it, graced to be a part of the divine framework of All That Is.

My blogs, like life itself, have been and are a gift, rising from the immense, never-ending creativity of existence.

Alone, I live within one life that expresses multitudinous voices, and shed its own mercy, gladness, and joy, out into the world at large, enriching it, renewing the springtime, and never truly ending.

To one extent or another, I then speak in these blogs for all peoples, for the united psyches that overflow with thoughts and feelings that are registered by the wind, giving voice to the private, intimate, yet connected lives of men and women throughout the centuries — so that many people, listening to or reading my blogs, hear their own inner voices also, and feel the contours of their own natures, and universal nature as well.

“BEYOND THE HIGHEST CLOUDS”

Behind the highest clouds

man and woman have ever seen

there are mountains and

hidden coves from which all 

true proclamations come.

Their sentences are silent

yet they contain a word that

releases and fills secret contracts

between the gods and man and woman,

uttered long ago

uttered without a word or a whisper,

and speaking for me alone

with a magic note

and a secret message

and a sweet response

known to me alone.

The Human Body As A Planet Worth Saving

Few people are much concerned personally with esoteric situations. Many people are involved, however, with various religious ideas and philosophies, whose effects are quite unfortunate in personal experience. The majority of individuals have bouts of poor health now and then, from which they recover — so that all in all a fairly comfortable medium is struck.

It is unfortunately often — but not always — true that individuals who carry strong religious feeling are often bothered more than usual by poor health and personal dilemmas. The fact is that religions have been the carriers of some of the best ideas that man and woman have entertained — but is has also held most stubbornly to the most troublesome concepts that have plagued mankind and womankind.

We cannot divorce philosophy from life, for our thoughts and opinions give our life its meaning and impetus. There are some people who believe that life is meaningless, that it has no purpose, and that its multitudinous parts fell together through the workings of chance alone. Obviously I am speaking here of scientific dogma, but such dogma is far more religious than scientific, for it also expects to be believed without proof, on faith alone.

Such ideas are bound to color any of their followers’ ideas about other subjects also: sexuality, economics, and certainly concepts of war and peace.

Again, each portion of nature is propelled by the inner vitality, energy, and life force within it. The physical body cannot flourish if the individual believes that it and its works are without meaning. Such philosophies do not give man or woman a stake in nature, or in the universe.

All of life is seen as heading for extinction in any case. The entire concept of a soul, life after death, or even life from one generation to the next, becomes largely doubtful, to say the least. In such a philosophical world it would seem that man and woman had no power at all.

As mentioned in my earlier blogs, those concepts can have a hand in the development of would-be suicides, particularly of a young age, for they seem to effectively block a future.

The same ideas are so dead-ended, however, that they often trigger a different kind of response entirely, in which a scientist who has held to those beliefs most stubbornly, suddenly does a complete double-take. This can propel him or her into a rather severe schizophrenic reaction, in which the scientist now defends most fanatically the same ideas that he or she rejected most fanatically only a short time before.

With some variations, the same kind of “sudden conversion” can occur when a person who has berated religious concepts and beliefs suddenly does a double-take of a different kind, ending up as a twice-born Christian.

Both mechanisms suddenly line up the belief systems in one particular manner, knocking aside all doubts but accepting instead a strict obedience to the new belief system, and a new reorganization of life itself beneath that new cause.

 

 

 

The World As A Cohesive Whole

Before we continue, I would like to remind the blog’s readers that in the middle of these or any of the problems we have been discussing, there may be a period of depression, of the feeling that one’s own problem has no solution after all.

Whenever this occurs, the steps I have given before in previous blogs should be followed. Briefly, immediately refuse to worry about the future or the past. Tell yourself you can worry another time if you want to — but for the moment you will not be concerned about the past of the future.

Remind yourself that for all you might have read, of heard, or deduced earlier, it is certainly not inevitable that all unfortunate situations take the darkest of times, and that indeed the opposite is true; for if such were the case, the world and all of life would have literally been destroyed through disasters and calamities.

Concentrate upon the present moment — but more, concentrate upon the most pleasant aspects of the present moment. If that moment has distracting, unfavorable aspects, then resolutely bring into your mind whatever images delight or please you at the moment. These may be very simple. Remember the smell of lilacs, for example, or try to hear the crisp crunch of snow, or try to visualize an ocean or lake. All of these procedures will serve to quiet your mind and body, and build up your own reserves.

 

This is an excellent policy to follow, because we can start it wherever we are. It will help alleviate fears and doubts at least momentarily, so that then we can pursue the entire issue later, with more assurance.

Conflicting beliefs about the nature of reality can bring about dilemmas in almost any form, for the individual will always try to make sense out of his or her surroundings, and try to at least see the world as a cohesive whole.

Some of the most complicated ways of trying to put conflicting beliefs  together are often mental or emotional ones. The more incohesive the individual feels the world to be, the greater his or her efforts will be expended in an attempt to put the world back together.

Some people possess beliefs that are so in opposition to each other that they are forced into some of the most complicated mental or emotional footwork. Their problem will seem so gigantic that only some interference from an outside source will be sufficient to give the individual a sense of wholeness and sanity. A person may become so frightened of using his or her own power of choice or action that the construction of an artificial super being is created — a seemingly sublime personage who gives orders to the individual involved.

Again, let us use a hypothetical case — this time of a man named Stephen.

Stephen may be so terrified of making choices, so indecisive, that he constructs an imaginary super being who orders him to do thus and so. If a decision comes up on a job, for example, then the super being will order Stephen to take one course or another. Stephen has given up accepting responsibility for his actions. This imaginary personage may say it is God, or a famous hero from the present or the past, or Jesus Christ, or Mohammed, and the personality involved will be quite certain that such is the case.

Stephen, for example, many hear the hallucinated voice of the god or hero. The voice may be so frequent that it becomes highly distracting, or it may only appear in times of undue stress.

Again, we are starting out with a fairly simple picture. Our friend might also be convinced that he himself is evil, unworthy, or even depraved, the lowest of men or women. In such circumstances an individual might then construct an artificial devil or demon who annoys him constantly, and even orders acts of a highly destructive nature.

The individual, like Stephen, has also given up the responsibility for his own choices, and feels that he or she cannot be held responsible for any destructive acts that might be committed.

Any of the two kinds of personalities mentioned might also begin to feel persecuted, chased, or harassed by some outside agency. Among the agencies chosen, of course, are the FBI, the CIA, the Russian Secret Police, The Ku Klux Klan, or any controversial group given to acts of violence for whatever purposes.

Sometimes such episodes last for long periods of time, but they can also appear for just several days, clear up spontaneously, and return again perhaps years later.

Some people may seem completely normal in behavior unless certain subjects are brought up in the course of a conversation, or unless some stimulus in the environment arouses them.

For instance, the individual might be talking along normally enough when he or she hears the sirens of a police car in the distance. Instantly the person might leap up, convinced that that was evidence of the pursuit of the FBI or other agency.

The car with siren might disappear, yet the alarmed person’s attitude and actions may very well instantly cause his or her companion to realize that something was clearly amiss. The disturbed person may immediately begin a long tirade, describing previous episodes in which he or she was hunted from city to city. There may be further complications, in which the person insists that phones were bugged, letters opened, and privacy was constantly invaded.

 

This might be the very first sign to the person’s companion that anything was wrong at all. In most such instances the tirade will continue for some time, while in other far lesser episodes it might instead simply leap to disordered, confused thoughts about being so pursued. Or instead, the individual might embark upon a rather heated discussion of police forces in general.

In actuality, people in those circumstances are often so frightened of the use of power that the idea of being under constant surveillance actually lends them a sense of protection.

The point is, that in such circumstances the person will try to use evidence from the outside world to prove that he is indeed being pursued.

In the same fashion, the person who hallucinates the voice of God or a demon actually does so to preserve the idea of sanity in his or her own mind. As long as he or she believes that a god or demon is involved, then the person can consider the entire affair most extraordinary, decidedly apart from usual experience, but valid.

If the therapist tries to convince such a person that the hallucinated personage does not exist, then this threatens the person’s concepts of personal sanity.

It is , then, that any therapist convinces the client that while the super being is a self-construction, and/or that the voices are hallucinations — this does not mean that the client is insane.

An effort should be made to help the client understand that errors of thought and belief are responsible for the condition — and that the removal of those erroneous beliefs can relieve the situation. The therapist should make it clear that he or she understands that the client is not lying, in ordinary terms, when he reports hearing voices from the devil.

 

According to the particular case in point, the therapist should then try to point out the errors of thought and belief involved, and also to explain their more or less habitual cast.

First, the ideas must be disentangled, and then the habitual behavior will begin to disintegrate. The therapist should also assure the client that on many subjects and topics of thought and conversation, the client operates quite well. The subject itself is so cast the, of course, an entire book could easily be devoted to it, so it is impossible to cover all the issues that may be involved with such cases here.

Some of the errors concern the misinterpretation of physical events. The individual — convinced he or she is being pursued by some secret organization — again, may hear the sirens on a very real police car. The error is the assumption that the vehicle is pursuing the individual rather than some other party. The therapist can help the client learn to question his or her interpretation of such events.

All such cases can have their own peculiar complications. In the case of secondary personalities, the main operating portion who usually directs activity might be male, displaying all of the usual male characteristics. The second personality may seemingly be female, however, even speaking in a feminine-like voice. Or the opposite might be the case.

It is also possible for the individual to dress in male attire, while the secondary personality wears feminine clothes — or vice-versa.

What we are involved in mainly, however, are the characteristic periods of seeming amnesia, occurring usually involuntarily, often without any transition except perhaps for a headache.

In this category, I am not referring to individuals like “Psychic Mediums,” who speak for another personality with a sense of ease and tranquillity, and whose resulting information is excellent knowledge — the obvious products of uncommon common sense that proves to be helpful to the individual and others.

Behind all of those instances we have been discussing, however, there is again the need for value fulfillment, that has been blocked largely by conflicting or even opposing beliefs.

Regardless of how unbelievable it might seem to some blog readers, it is true that even the most destructive events are based upon misinterpretations of reality, opposing beliefs, and the inability to receive or express love. In fact, that kind of rage is the mark of a perfectionist caught in what seems to be the grasp of a world not only imperfect, but evil.

This brings us to another most dangerous belief — that the end justifies the means.

The greatest majority of destructive acts are committed in line with that belief. It leads to a disciplined over-rigidity that gradually cuts down the range of human expression.

We should be able to see, in fact, that the problems we have been discussing begin by limiting the field of available choices, and thus curtailing the range of expression. The individual will try to express himself or herself to the best degree possible, and so each individual then begins a concentrated effort to seek out those avenues of expression still open. All of the constructive beliefs mentioned throughout this blog should be applied to all of the instances. The individual must feel safe and protected enough to seek its own development and aid in the fulfillment of others.

One of the most rare and extraordinary developments that can occur in schizophrenic behavior is the construction of a seeming super-being of remarkable power — one who is able to convince other people of his or her divinity.

Most such instances historically have involved males, who claim to have the powers of clairvoyance, prophecy, and omnipotence. Obviously, then, the affected individual was thought to be speaking for God when he gave orders or directions. We are dealing with “god-making,” or “religion-making” — whichever you prefer.

In almost all such instances, discipline is taught to believers through the inducement of fear. Put very loosely, the dogma says that we must love God or he or she will destroy us. The most unbelievable aspects of such dogmas should, it seems, make them very easy to see through. In many cases, however, the more preposterous the legends or dogmas, the more acceptable they become. In some strange fashion followers believe such stories to be true because they are not true. The interceptions of almost all religions have been involved one way or another with these schizophrenic episodes.

 

The person so involved must be extremely disturbed to begin with: up in arms against social, national, or religious issues, and therefore able to serve as a focus point for countless other individuals affected in the same manner.

In a fashion. Adolf Hitler fell into such a classification. Although he lacked that characteristic mark of speaking for a super-being, this was because he frequently regarded himself as the super-being. The trouble is that while such religions can also inspire people to acts of great sympathy, heroism and understanding, their existence rests upon drastic misreadings of the nature or reality.

If the major religions have been touched, then there have also been numberless smaller cults and sects throughout history into the present that bear that same stamp of great psychological power and energy, coupled with an inborn leaning toward self destruction and vengeance.

To varying degrees, other less striking individual cases can bear the same sense of magic and mystery.

There is certainly no need to romanticize schizophrenic behavior, for its romantic-like elements have long been coupled in the public mind in an unfortunate manner, seeming to place the madman and the genius in some kind of indefinable relationship. Such beliefs are apparent in statements such as: “Madness is the other end of sanity,” or “All genius is touched with madness.”

Beneath these ideas is the fear of the mind itself, the belief that its abilities are fine and dependable up to a point — but if it goes too far then it is in trouble.

What does it mean to go too far in that connotation? Usually it means that knowledge itself is somehow dangerous.

In some cases, however, the constructed super-being can deliver astute comments on national, social, or religious conditions.

Most such personages, however, begin to prophesy the end of the world, from which the chosen people — whoever they may be — will be saved. More than a few have rendered specific dates for this worldly foreclosure — dates which have come and gone. Many people still continue to follow the very same dogmas that seemed to have proven themselves wrong; the personage comes up with a newer excuse, or a newer date, and things go on as before.

Again,however, even in far simpler cases, the constructive personage will often make predictions that, incidentally, do not predict — and almost always give orders and directives that are to be followed without question.

There are many other deep psychological connections beneath schizophrenic behavior, but since my blogs are also devoted to other subjects, we will go on to other ways in which conflicting beliefs bring about mental or physical dilemmas.

 

 

 

The Reincarnational Heritage Is Rich

Thus far in my blogs we have been dealing with conflicting beliefs, however — and most of those can be tackled in the context of this life alone.

These beliefs may have physical or mental repercussions, though in most cases the two do not occur at once. We have dealt with some of the numerous physical dilemmas than can result. In other instances the individual encounters the difficulties on mental or emotional levels. One portion of the personality might be wholeheartedly in favor of good expression of personal power, and be stimulated to express and use his or her energy and strength. Another portion of the personality may be just as terrified of power or its uses as the other segment exults in it.

Instead of developing physical complications, in usual terms, sometimes one portion of the personality actually does act with assurance, power, and energy, while another equally valid portion refuses to use energy or power in any way whatsoever. The ideas are so opposing, and such equal adversaries, that the conscious personality can hardly bear to be aware of both at once.

In such cases, while one portion of the personality is expressing itself, and in command of the usual conscious abilities, the other portion lies acquiescent, latent, and unexpressed.

The individual may act purposefully, with power, energy, and strength, for varying lengths of time. Then sometimes without warning the frightened, inactive portions of the personality will take over the normal abilities of consciousness — acting depressed, taciturn, and communicating very poorly with others.

One portion of the personality will carry on conscious behavior — go to work, shop, or whatever, while the other portion of the personality will not remember performing those acts at all.

Take a hypothetical case. Call Marlo A the assertive part of the personality, and Marlo B the passive partner. Marlo A may go out dancing, go to a bar, then turn the entire proceedings over to Marlo B, who finds herself in noisy surroundings, surrounded by people she does not remember, and with no idea how she reached the present destination.

Her trend of memory will go back to the last time that she was in charge of consciousness, and she will have — or may not have — any idea of the existence of Marlo A at all. Marlo A may enjoy action, sports, dancing and bodily activities, while Marlo B may prefer reading, walking, or painting.

Such personalities may even have separate sets of friends — Marlo A and B each having their own companions. Though these personalities may seem so divergent, they are connected with each other, however, and they may on occasion set up their own rather bizarre kind of communication. They may write mysterious notes to each other, leaving them where they are bound to be found — yet notes using a special code or symbols of drugs, because too clear a communication would disrupt the entire relationship.

People may actually carry on such existences for years, until some event or another shows that something is amiss: one of Marlo A’s friends might meet a friend of Marlo B, for example, or the gaps in memory might finally become so frequent that it is obvious something is wrong.

Marlo A and B represent fairly simple examples of schizophrenic behavior, and indeed I have kept the story simple to keep the issues clear. Marlo A may actually grow into a more and more assertive or belligerent personality, even displaying violent tendencies at times, while on the other hand Marlo B might become even more timid, depressed, and solitary.

On other levels, however, each one is well aware of the other’s presence, and on those levels they do react to each other’s activities. This means, of course, that the entire amnesia process, regardless of how perfect it seems, is a surface one. I have used the different beliefs about power as an example, but any belief may be involved if it and its opposite are held in nearly equal weight.

One portion may believe that sex is natural and good, while the other portion believes vehemently that sex is evil and depraved. Here we will use a man for a hypothetical case. David A may be an excellent husband, breadwinner, and father, a church-goer who believes in the beauty and goodness of sex. David B may hold the opposite viewpoint most intently — that sex is at least evil, perhaps sent by the devil, and below or beneath the dignity of a good man.

On topside David A may go to church frequently, be kind and considerate to his family, and, say, come home from work every night for supper. He may carry on a fruitful accomplished existence for varying lengths of time.

Then, however, perhaps without warning, he may suddenly refuse to make love with his wife, becoming hostile with his children, stop off for a few drinks after work, before supper, or even begin seeing a prostitute, or begin an affair — often with a woman he considers beneath his own station.

David A may be quite startled to discover bottles of whiskey lying around in his dresser drawers, when he hardly drinks liquor himself at all. David B may suddenly “come to” in a strange bedroom, in a compromising position with a woman it certainly seems to him he has never seen before in his life.

On the other hand, David B may find himself in the middle of a family picnic, or other gathering — events that bore and displease him — or worse, he may not even remember his family at all. The more complicated such dilemmas becomes, the harder they are to keep secret, however, because their very complications multiply the chances of discovery. And there are, of course, variations.

David B, while drinking, might suddenly be sent back to his David A self. The kinds of communication can be very unique and bewildering, ranging from number codes to nonsense verses, or to the hearing of imaginary voices, which serve to remind one portion of the self that there is also another seemingly alien personality involved in his or her existence.

In many instances very strong feelings of persecution and paranoia can be involved, but these will be discussed in the following blogs.

In the kind of schizophrenic behavior we have just been discussing, hypnosis is frequently used as therapy, often in an attempt not only to introduce the two levels of the personality to each other, but also to uncover the time they originally split off in such a fashion. However, one must ensure that they visit a hypnotist who has completed a significant amount of hypnotherapy training course in order to ensure that the results are positive.

While hypnosis can be of considerable value in the hands of an excellent professional hypnotist, it still has serious drawbacks as a treatment under these conditions. Because of its very nature, hypnosis can end up segmenting the personality still further.

Under such therapy it sometimes seems that news, lesser personality fragments are uncovered, but it is very possible that these instead are created by the therapy itself. The hypnotist obviously wants to cure his patient, and all forms of schizophrenia are intellectually intriguing. The segments of the personality that are involved are being given great attention, and they may seize upon that attention, seeking ways to further dazzle the hypnotist while at the same time sabotaging recovery.

It is far better to address whatever personality is in prominence during the session, to convince it of the therapist’s concern and interest, while letting it know that at other levels it is quite aware of the existence of its other segments.

People with schizophrenic difficulties often enjoy word games and puzzles, so they may well use these to confuse any therapist. The very fact that such a person considers any kind of therapy does mean that he or she is ready to tackle a considerable challenge. It can be put to each segment of the personality, then, that it will be quite a challenge for each to become aware of the other. We might compare the situation to someone who has been separated from a sister or brother for years — explaining, however, that the separation is psychological and not physical.

In a fashion, all of these activities are variations of others. Instead of forming such segmented selves, another person, as mentioned earlier, might enjoy the use of power, yet be so frightened of it that he or she experiences an epileptic episode instead of a schizophrenic one.

Each Life Influences Each Other Life

Each life influences each other life, and some portions of the personality retains memory not only of past lives, but of future lives also.

When reincarnational studies are embarked upon, on occasion people remember some instance of past-life experience, but conventional ideas of time are so strong that so-called future memory is blacked out.

The inner self is aware of all of our existences, in other words. It sees where and how our many lives fit together. It is only because we are so oriented outward from birth that this inner self can sometimes seem alien or distant and unrelated to the self that we know. It would be impossible to be consciously aware of all of the infinitesimal details that exist in even one life; our consciousness would be so full and cluttered up that we would be unable to make choices, or to use free will.

It would be even more difficult to try to handle the information of many lives at one time. In our terms, “it” takes time to think, and we would be so caught up in thinking itself, that action would be impossible. The inner knowledge of all of our lives, from our point of view, is in the same category as those automatic processes that underlie our existence.

That is, we know about our other lives, basically, in the same way that we know how to breathe or digest our food. A different kind of knowing is involved.

This does not mean that all conscious knowledge about our own reincarnational existences forever beyond us — for through various exercises we can indeed learn to recall some of that information. It does mean, however, that we are innately aware of all of our existences, and that the knowledge gained in one life is automatically transferred to another, whether that life be present, past, or future.

We may therefore be trying out many different kind of experiences, sometimes endowing ourselves with super attributes and strength, relying upon the body’s powers above all other considerations, while at the same time in another life we use and develop unusual mental abilities, enjoying the triumphs of creative thought, while largely ignoring the body’s agility and strength.

I do not mean to imply that we necessarily deal with opposite kinds of behaviors, for there are endless variances — each unique — as consciousness expresses itself through physical sensation, and attempts to explore all of the possible realms of emotional, spiritual, biological, and mental existence.

I want to stress that within each life full free will operates once the conditions of that life are set.

That is, if we have been born in poor or depressed circumstances, then free will not alter the conditions of that birth.

It can help us become wealthy in adult life through the choices that we make. It should be helpful, and certainly somewhat comforting, to realize that even unfortunate birth conditions were not forced upon us by some outside agency, but chosen at inner levels of our own reality.

The same applies to almost any situation. Religion holds some ideas that are in complete opposition to each other in regard to the nature of suffering in general. Some believe that suffering is a punishment sent by God for past or present sins, or even omissions, while other religious schools insist that suffering is sent by God as evidence of his particular love for the individual involved: “Good must love you very much, because he sent so much suffering.”

That remark, and similar ones, are often made to ill persons. The idea is supposed to be that suffering is good for the soul, is a way of atoning for one’s sins, and in some fashion the implication is made that such suffering in this life will be more than compensated for in heaven.

Such concepts encourage individuals to feel like victims, with no control at all over the conditions of their lives.

Instead, it should be realized that as uncomfortable as suffering is, it does somehow have a meaning in the context of our entire existence — again, that it was not thrust upon us by some unjust or uncaring exterior force or nature.

To some degree, that kind of understanding can help alleviate suffering itself to some extent. I am not advocating a fatalistic approach either, that says more or less: “I have chosen such and such an unfortunate condition at some level I do not understand, and therefore the entire affair is outside of my own hands. There is nothing I can do about it.”

For one thing, again, almost all situations, including the most drastic, can be changed for the better to some extent, and the very attempt to do so can increase a person’s sense of control over his or her own circumstances. This does not mean that those adverse situations can be changed overnight in usual terms (though ideally that is also possible), but that the sense of control over one’s life encourages all of the mental and physical healing properties.

In terms of “starting over” at such a point, the main thing to remember is not to expect too much too fast, while recognizing that instantaneous cures are indeed probabilities.

Again, mind games, the insertion of humor and diversion, are extremely valuable, so that we are not trying too hard. Some people try too hard to be spontaneous, while others are frightened of spontaneity itself. The knowledge of reincarnational lives is spontaneously held, and we can receive profound insights from that knowledge. This occurs when we are not looking for it, but when we are familiar enough with the entire concept, so that we realize such knowledge is available.

The reincarnational heritage is rich, however, and it can have a tendency to assert itself under certain conditions.

I am not speaking of usual, but fairly unusual events, when, in one fashion or another, reincarnational memory seems to bleed through to the present life. Again, this is not usual experience. It happens infrequently. On some occasions — sometimes in periods of poor health or seemingly senility — such instances may occur. They are more apt to happen in adolescence, though I do want to stress that we are speaking of extraordinary cases.

Old people often begin to exercise their own consciousness in ways that they had not done earlier. There may be less diversions to take up their thoughts. They may be lonely, and then quite surprisingly find themselves casting about for different kinds of experience — experience seemingly most difficult to achieve in the physical world under their present circumstances.

Since they are often frightened and unsure of the future, they are more apt to cast their thoughts backwards into their early childhoods, reaching for their earliest memories, and mentally try to gain comfort from the remembered sounds of beloved voices, only to mentally glimpse other images than they expected, to hear other voices than those for which they yearned.

In fact, fragments of many episodes from many other lives may rush into their consciousness, and in most cases they are, of course, quite unprepared for the experience. On the other hand, usually such episodes are highly reassuring, for along with them rides the inner assurance that life has been lived before , many times.

The individuals involved may then return to normal consciousness, but if they talked or muttered while the affair was happening, any observers might take it for granted that delirium was involved. Drugs should not be prescribed under those conditions, unless the patient becomes highly restless and confused, and requests them. In most cases, however, the experiences do not leave detrimental side effects.

The same kind of event may happen in periods of poor health, or in over-drugged states. They are less easily handled, however, under drugged conditions, since the consciousness does not have the full agility to depend upon in periods of stress — unusual stress. The same can occur in adolescence, and easily be misinterpreted as a schizophrenic episode.

This happens perhaps more frequently than other cases mentioned, but usually such events are not repeated. They remain only as memories, having opened up the person’s mind to larger visions of life than he or she may have entertained before.

Dilemmas Of Body Or Mind In Early Life

The universe is meaningful, then there must be a reason and a cause for conditions that appear chaotic, cruel, or grotesque. Even in such cases, however, at some extent or another the individual can indeed start over — or at least those closest to the person in question can begin to see a larger framework of existence in which even the most dire of physical circumstances are somehow redeemed.

In many cases, it is the parents of such offspring who suffer more than their children, since it seems as if such families were unjustly saddled with the most unfortunate woes.

 

We hope to explain this larger framework of existence still further, for indeed it also affects the human condition in all of its aspects.

As I have said in previous blogs, the reasons for most physical, mental, spiritual, or emotional problems can be found in this one lifetime, and because of the nature of simultaneous time, new beliefs in the present can also affect those in the past.

In a basic way, it is possible for present beliefs to actually modify the beliefs of a life that is seemingly a past one. I must explain again that all lives are lived at once — but in different kinds of focuses. Our conventional ideas of time make it simpler, however, to speak of one life as happening before or after another.

Again, no one is punished for crimes committed in a past life, and in each life we are unique. The inner intelligence within us that gives us each life also gives us the conditions of each life. It certainly seems to us, or to many of us, that most people would always choose to be born healthy and whole, in an excellent environment, of parents with loving natures and genetic excellence — and in other words to grow up healthy, wealthy, and wise.

Life, however, is far too profound and multitudinous, and requires great depths of emotional response and action that could never be satisfied adequately by any given set of circumstances, however favorable.

The species is filled with a powerful sense of curiosity and wonder, and the need for exploration and discovery, so that even a man born as a king through several lives would find himself bored and determined to seek out a different or opposite experience.

In some lives, then, we are born in fortunate circumstances, and in others we may find an environment of poverty and want. We may be born in excellent health in one life, with a high intelligence and great wit, while in still another existence we may be born ill or crippled or mentally deficient.

It also seems that each fetus must naturally desire to grow, emerge whole from its mother’s womb’s, and develop into a natural childhood and adulthood. However, in those terms just as many fetuses want the experience of being fetuses without following through on other stages. They have no intention of growing into complete human development. In fact, many fetuses explore that element of existence numberless times before deciding to go on still further, and emerge normally from the womb.

Those fetuses that do not develop still contribute to the body’s overall experience, and they feel themselves successful in their own existences. An understanding of these issues can greatly help throw light on the question of early deaths and diseases, and spontaneous abortions.

These are all part of the continuous undercurrents of life, and the same issues apply to many other species whose offspring are lost in very early life.

This is not an uncaring universe or nature operating, but portions of consciousness who choose at whatever levels certain experiences that nourish the living environment, and bring satisfactions that may never show on life’s surface.

In the case of human beings, however, many questions certainly rise to the fore. I do not want to generalize, for each living situation is too unique for that. I do want to point out that all fetuses do not necessarily intend to develop into normal babies, and that if medical science, through its techniques, ends up in directing a normal birth, the consciousness of the child may never feel normally allied with physical experience.

The child may go from one illness to another, or simply display an odd disinclination for life — a lack of enthusiasm, until finally in some cases the child dies at an early age. Another individual, under the same circumstances, might change its mind and decide to go along with the experience of normal life.

It seems unnatural to some people to hear of animals’ mothers who refuse to nurse one offspring, or sometimes even attack it — but in those instances the animal mother is instinctively aware of the situation, and acts to save the offspring from future suffering.

I am not advising that malformed infants be killed, but I do want to point out that even in those most severe cases there is meaning in such conditions, and the consciousness involved then chooses another kind of experience.

 

There are also perfectly healthy, normal children who have determined ahead of time that they will live only to the threshold of adulthood, happy and flushed with dreams and promises of accomplishment, yet not experiencing any disillusionment or regret or sorrow. Such young people die of sickness or accident, but go to their deaths like children after a splendid day. In most instances they choose quick deaths.

In one way or another, such children may try to describe their feelings to those closest to them, so as to cushion the shock. Usually these people are not suicides in conventional terms — although they may be.

Perhaps the greatest variances in human behavior show in mental states, and so parents are apt to feel most crushed and despondent if any of their children prove to be what is generally regarded as mentally deficient. In the first place, the term is a judgment cast by others, and a particular personality may feel quite comfortable in his or her own perception of reality, and only become aware of the difference when confronted by others. Most such persons are quite peaceful rather than violent, and their emotional experience may indeed cover nuances and depths unknown to normal persons.

Many simply perceive reality from a different focus, feeling a problem out rather than thinking a problem out.

In actuality all of the seemingly erratic genetic variances that often crop up in human development are vital to the elasticity of the entire genetic system.

It would not be beneficial, for example, to try to “breed out” those seemingly unfortunate, divergent genetic traits. The physical system would become too rigid, lose the power of its natural diversity, and eventually bring a dead-end to human survival.

There is hardly any danger of that possibility, however, since it would be nearly impossible to perform such a task even with the most developed of technologies — and indeed, the very attempt to do so might well immediately trigger a response on the part of the whole genetic system, so that new divergences appeared with even greater frequency, as compensation.

There are individuals who do choose ahead of time — in one lifetime or another — to accept such divergent genetic heritage for their own reasons — often to experience life from one of its most unique aspects, and sometimes in order to encourage the growth of other abilities that might not otherwise occur.

Human consciousness normally experience wide sweeps of rhythms, varying states of awareness, and its amazing flexibility is partially dependent upon its lack of rigidity, its own spontaneous inclinations, and its capacity for curiosity, wonder, discovery, and emotion.

It is not too frequently noticed, but many so-called mentally deficient people possess their own unique learning abilities — that is, often they learn what they do learn in a different manner than most other people. Many possess abilities that are not discovered by others, that are most difficult to explain. They may utilize chemicals in a different way than other people do in the learning process itself. Some may even have superior understanding of physical and psychological space. Their qualifications emotionally are also quite advanced, and it is quite possible that they are gifted in terms of mathematics and music, though these gifts may never come to fruition, since they are unsuspected.

Many deficient individuals in their way are as vital to the development of humanity as geniuses are, for both preserve the elastic nature of human consciousness, and promote its coping qualifications.

Each person makes his or her own reality, again, but each family member also shares the reality of the others. Often, therefore, instances of unusual genetic differences may also serve to bring out qualities of understanding, sympathy, and empathy on the part of family members — and those qualities also are vital to human development. Because the reasons for any such conditions can be so diverse, then life should be encouraged even in the face of deformities. If the consciousness involved has its own reasons for living, then it will make the most of even the most dire conditions. If instead the consciousness has been kept alive despite its own intents through medical procedures, it will terminate its own physical life in one way or another.

It would seem that infants have no belief systems, and therefore could not be in charge of their own realities in anyway. As mentioned earlier, however, the cells of the body themselves possess an equivalent in those biological leanings toward health and development. Even in cases where physical survival might seem pointless, it is also possible for the organism to alter its course to an extraordinary degree.

Children who are labeled mentally deficient or even called idiots, can often grow and develop far beyond medical science’s suppositions — particularly if they are aided by loving parents who constantly provide stimulation and interest.

This is not to say that all such children should be cared for at home, or that parents should feel guilty if they are forced through circumstances to place their offspring in an institution. The intuition of the parents, however, will often direct the most proper course in each individual case. If it is understood that there is indeed a reason behind such circumstances, then that realization alone can help ease the parents’ burden, and help them decide which course to take in their own particular case.

 

 

 

Many Cancer Patients Have Martyrlike Characteristic

Many cancer patients have martyr-like characteristics, often putting up with undesirable situations or conditions for years.

They feel powerless, unable to change, yet unwilling to stay in the same position. The most important point is to arouse such a person’s belief in his or her strength and power. Even if family members or friends come to visit them regularly, maybe with gifts similar to ones you can find here, the patient might be more determined to find some motivation, even if it may seem difficult initially. Additionally, in many instances, these persons symbolically shrug their shoulders, saying. “What will happen, will happen,” but they do not physically struggle against their situation.

It is also vital that these patients are not overly medicated, for oftentimes the side effects of some cancer-eradicating drugs are dangerous in themselves. There has been some success with people who imagine that the cancer is instead some hated enemy or monster or foe, which is then banished through mental mock battles over a period of time. While the technique does have its advantages, it also pits one portion of the self against the other. It is much better to imagine, say, the cancer cells being neutralized by some imaginary wand. Know someone that is, unfortunately, battling cancer? You may want to suggest to them that they take a look into medicinal marijuana, or rather the active chemical that provides the medical side of cannabis – CBD. It is important that they get the best CBD oil, as if you want the best results you need to use the best products. There are different brands and companies who make them, and there are also different doses. The stronger the dose, generally the better the impact is. If you need more information on this, then look here for CBD 101.

Doctors might suggest that a patient relax and then ask himself or herself what kind of inner fantasy would best service the healing process. Instant images may come to mind at once, but if success is not achieved immediately, have the patient try again, for in almost all cases some inner pictures will be perceived.

Behind the entire problem, however, is the fear of using one’s full power or energy. Cancer patients most usually feel an inner impatience as they sense their own need for future expansion and development, only to feel it thwarted.

The fear that blocks that energy can indeed be dissipated if new beliefs are inserted for old ones — so again we return to those emotional attitudes and ideas that automatically promote health and healing. Each individual is a good person, an individualized portion of universal energy itself. Each person is meant to express his or her own characteristics and abilities. Life means energy, power, and expression.

Those beliefs, if taught early enough, would form the most effective system of preventive medicine ever known.

Again, we cannot generalize overmuch, but many persons know quite well that they are not sure whether they want to live or die. The overabundance of cancer cells represent nevertheless the need for expression and expansion — the only arena left open — or so it would seem.

Such a person must also contend with society’s unfortunate ideas about the disease in general, so that many cancer patients end up isolated or alone. As in almost all cases of disease, however, if it were possible to have a kind of “thought transplant” operation, the disease would quickly vanish.

Even in the most dire of instances, some patients suddenly fall in love, or something in their home environment changes, and the person also seems to change overnight — while again the disease is gone.

Healing can involve help on many levels, of course. The world of normal communication I call Frame-Mind-1, while Frame-Mind-2 represents that inner world, in which indeed all time is simultaneous, and actions that might take years in normal time can happen in the blinking of an eyelid in Frame-Mind-2.

Briefly, Frame-Mind-1 deals with all the events of which we are normally conscious.

Frame-Mind-2 involves all of those spontaneous processes that go on beneath our conscious attention. When we are young our beliefs are quite clear — that is, our conscious and unconscious leanings and expectations are harmonious. As we grow older, however, and begin to accumulate negative beliefs, then our conscious and unconscious beliefs may be quite different.

Consciously we might want to express certain abilities, while unconsciously we are afraid of doing so. The unconscious beliefs are not really unconscious, however. We are simply not as aware of them as we are of normally conscious ones. Negative beliefs can block the passageways between Frame-Mind-1 and Frame-Mind-2. It is an excellent idea for those in any kind of difficulty to do the following simple exercise.

Relax yourself as much as possible. Get comfortable in a chair or on a bed. Tell yourself mentally that we are an excellent person, and that you want to reprogram yourself, getting rid of any ideas that contradict that particular statement.

Next, gently remind yourself again: “I am an excellent person,” adding: “It is good and safe for me to express my own abilities, for in doing so I express the energy of the universe itself.”

Different phrases with the same meaning may come into our own mind. If so, substitute them for the ones I have given. There are endless exercises that can be used to advantage, but here I will only mention a few that appear most beneficial.

For another exercise, then relax yourself as much as possible once more. If you have some disease, imagine it as particles of dirt. Tell yourself that you can see inside your body. You see streets of boulevards instead of muscles and bones, but go along with the image or images that appear. You might see streets lined with dirt or garbage, for example. Then mentally see yourself sweeping the debris away. Order trucks to come and carry the garbage to a trash heap, where you may see it burn and disappear in smoke.

Instead of the drama I just outlined, you may instead see invading armies, attacking home troops. In such a case, see the invaders being driven off. The pictures you see will follow your own unique leanings and characteristics.

The unconscious levels of the self are only unconscious from our own viewpoint. They are quite conscious in actuality, and because they do deal with the spontaneous processes of the body, they are also completely familiar with our own state of health and well-being.

These portions can also be communicated with. Once again, relax yourself as much as possible. Sit comfortably in a chair or lie on a bed. A chair is probably preferable, since it is easy to fall to sleep in you are lying down. You can refer to these portions of the self altogether as the helper, the teacher, or whatever title suits you best.

Simply make a straightforward request, asking that some picture or image be presented in your inner mind, that will serve as representative of those portions of your own inner reality.

So do not be surprised, for you may see a person, an animal, an insect, or a landscape — but trust whatever image you do receive, if it seems to be that of a person, or angel, or animal, then ask it to speak to you, and to tell you how best to rid yourself of your disease or problem.

If the image of a landscape appears instead, then ask for a series of such images, that will again somehow point the way toward recovery, or toward the resolution of the problem. Then follow through with whatever reply you receive.

In all such cases, we are opening the doors of Frame-Mind-2, clearing our channels of communication. Since our physical body itself is composed of the very energy that drives the universe, then there is nothing about us which that energy is unaware of. Simply repeating these ideas to ourselves can result in release of tension, and an acceleration of the healing process.

These exercises may suggest others of our own. If so, follow through on them — but to one extent or another each blog reader should benefit from some of them.

Again, every effort should be made to insert humor into the living situation as much as possible.

The patient might begin to collect jokes, for example, or funny cartoons from magazines and newspapers. Watching comedies on television will help — and so, in fact, will any distraction that is pleasing to the patient.

Crossword puzzles and other word games will also benefit, even if only done mentally. It might also be advisable for the patient to take up some completely new field of knowledge — to learn a language, for instance, or to study whatever books possible in any field to which he or she is attracted. The patient could even combine crosswords and learning a language by asking a friend or family member to use a crossword maker to create a puzzle which will challenge knowledge of the new language. Word-Mint fully supports foreign languages in the creation of their crosswords. This also makes them ideal for use in the classroom.

The more actively and fully such a diversion can be indulged, the better, of course, and yet the mental playing of games can be quite fruitful, and serve to give the conscious mind a needed rest.

Everything should be done to insure that the patient is given a hand in whatever physical treatment is involved. He or she should be enlightened enough through doctor-patient discussions to make choices about the treatment. In some cases, however, patients will make it clear that they prefer to hand over all responsibility for treatment to the doctor, and in such instances their decisions should be followed. It is a good idea for the doctor to question the patient sometimes, to make sure that the decision is not one of the moment alone.

Whenever possible, it is far better for the patient to remain home, rather than live steadily at a hospital. When hospitalization is required, however, family members should try to act as honestly and openly as possible. It is a good idea for such family members to join other groups of people who are in the same situation, so they can express their own doubts and hesitations.

One family member, in fact, may be quite surprised by a barrage of unexpected reactions. They may find themselves furious at the patient for becoming ill, and then develop unfortunate guilt feelings over their own first reactions. They may feel that their lives are being disrupted through no cause of their own, yet be so ashamed of such feelings that they dare not express them.

A therapist or a group of other people facing the same problem can therefore be of great assistance. The patient may also feel abandoned by God or the universe, and may feel unjustly attacked by the disease, thus arousing a whole new tumult of anger, and it is most important that the anger be expressed, and not repressed.

Such a person might imagine his or her anger or fury filling up the inside of a gigantic balloon that is then pricked by a needle, exploding in pieces from the pressure within, with debris falling everywhere — out over the ocean, or caught up by the wind, but in any case dispersed in whatever way seems agreeable to the patient.

It is also vital that such people continue to receive and express love. If the person is mourning the death of a spouse or close family member, then it would be most beneficial for the individual or the family to purchase, or otherwise provide , a new small pet. The patient should be encouraged to play with the pet as much as possible, and to nourish it, to caress and fondle it.

Often such a procedure will reawaken new stirrings of love, and actually turn the entire affair. This is particularly true if one or two beneficial changes simply seem to happen in other areas of life.

The re-arousal of love might well activate Frame-Mind-2 to such an extent that the healing energies become unblocked, and send their threads of probable actions into the person’s living situation as well — that is, once the channels to Frame-Mind-2 are open, then new possibilities immediately open up in all of life’s living areas. And many of these, of course, have a direct bearing on health and the healing processes.

In these, and all situations, it should be remembered that the body is always trying to heal itself, and that even the most complicated relationships are trying to untangle.

For all of life’s seeming misfortunes, development, fulfillment, and accomplishment far outweigh death, diseases and disasters. Starting over can be done — by anyone in any situation, and it will bring about some beneficial effects regardless of previous conditions.

Behind all maladies, in most basic manner lies the need for expression, and when people feel that their areas of growth are being curtailed, then they instigate actions meant to clear the road, so to speak.

Before health problems show up there is almost always a loss of self-respect or expression. This loss may occur in the environment itself, in changing social conditions. In the matter of the disease called AIDS, for example, we have groups of homosexuals, many “coming out of the closet” for the first time, taking part in organizations that promote their cause, and suddenly faced by the suspicions and distrust of many other portions of the population.

The struggle to express themselves, and their own unique abilities and characteristics drives them on, and yet is all too frequently thwarted by the ignorance and misunderstanding that surrounds them. We end up with something like a psychological contagion. The people involved begin to feel even more depressed as they struggle to combat the prejudice against them. Many of them almost hate themselves. For all their seeming bravado, they fear that they are indeed unnatural members of the species.

These beliefs break down the immunity system, and bring about the symptoms so connected with the disease. AIDS is a social phenomenon to that extent, expressing the deep dissatisfactions, doubts, and angers of a prejudiced-against segment of society.

Whatever physical changes occur, happen because the will to live is weakened. AIDS is a kind of biological protest, as if symbolically the homosexuals are saying: “You may as well kill us. We might be better off than the way you treat us now,” or as if it were a kind of suicidal drama in which the message read: “See to what ends your actions have led us!”

I am not saying that AIDS victims are outright suicides — only that in many instances the will to live is so weakened and a despondency so strong sets in that such individuals often acquiesce, finally, to their own deaths, seeing no room in the future for their own further growth or development.

The attitude even of doctors and nurses toward the handling of such patients shows only too clearly not only their fear of the disease itself, but their fear of homosexuality, which has been considered evil and forbidden by many religions. Emotions run at top pace in such cases, and the AIDS patients are often shunted away, out of human society. Often even their friends desert them. Yet AIDS can be acquired by those who are not homosexuals, but who have similar problems. It is a great error to segregate some individuals, like some modern colony of lepers.

Luckily, the disease will run its course as sociological conditions change, and as man’s and woman’s inhumanity to man and woman becomes clear even to the most prejudiced.

Homosexuals can benefit from the ideas in this blog, particularly if small groups get together, examining their own beliefs, and reinforcing their will to live, their right to live, and the basic integrity of their being.

Any anger or hostility should also be expressed, however, while not being overly concentrated upon.

Many other diseases that seem to be spread by viruses or contagions are also related to the problems of society in the same manner, and when those conditions are righted the diseases themselves largely vanish. It should be remembered that it is the beliefs and feelings of the patients that largely determine the effectiveness of any medical procedures, techniques, or medications.

Unfortunately, the entire picture surrounding health and disease is a largely negative one, in which even so-called preventive medicine can have severe drawbacks, since it often recommends drugs or techniques to attack a problem not only before the problems emerge, but simply in case it may emerge.

Many of the public-health announcements routinely publicize the specific symptoms of various diseases, almost as if laying out maps of diseases for medical consumers to swallow. There are many techniques apart from medically conventional ones, such as acupuncture, the laying on of hands, or the work of people who may be known as healers. The trouble is that these other techniques cannot be monitored sufficiently so that their benefits can be honestly appraised.

The main issue is always the vital importance of the individual’s belief systems, however, and the sense of worth he or she places on body and mind.

We have dealing with quite drastic diseases, but the same concepts are true in other areas also. There are people who undergo a series of highly unsatisfactory relationships, for example, while another person might experience a series of recurrent diseases instead. In spite of all problems, the life force operates continually in each person’s life, and can bring about at any time the most profound, beneficial changes. The idea is to clear the mind as much as possible from beliefs that impede the fine, smooth workings of the life force, and to actively encourage those beliefs and attitudes that promote health and the development of all aspects of healing experience.

Drugs Should Be Avoided

Unless physical pain is involved, drugs should be avoided — particularly for those in depressive states, this is why you should visit, quitmarijuana.org if you’re resorting to Marijuana as a way to cope and deal with stress. Other people use marijuana for recreation, in the same way many use alcohol. We live in a society that values the virtue of liberty, so this should be allowed. Many don’t even smoke it the traditional way, preferring to use a vape instead. The 510 battery is a popular choice for many.

The so-called uppers soon require downers for mood regulation, and the mind ends up in a state of confusion, and often a stupor. Such drugs should also literally be considered dangerous for use in old-people’s’ homes, for those considered senile, or even demented. With some variation these drugs are actually sometimes given to overactive children, where their effects can be very unpredictable, and result in moods that encourage suicidal tendencies, even in those so young.

Many people who use drugs socially are playing a kind of psychological Russian roulette. Their feelings can run something like this: “If I’m meant to live, these drugs won’t hurt me, and if I’m meant to die, what difference does it make what I take?” They are taking a certain kind of chance with their own lives, however — those who indulge in such activities — and the stakes can be high.

It is true that some schools of knowledge almost glorify the use of some drugs as encouraging the expansion of consciousness and the release of repression. In some ancient cultures, drugs were indeed utilized in such a manner, but their use was well understood — and more importantly, their use was socially acceptable. Those societies were, however, highly ceremonial, and quite as stereotyped in their ways as our culture may seem to us.

Doctors should be extremely cautious in prescription of mind-altering drugs of any kind, and certainly not encourage their use for people in depressed states. Under drugs, choices become limited, and certainly people have committed suicide while under the influence of drugs — who may not have otherwise. I am not saying that drugs already includes an attitude that promotes a Russian-roulette kind of mentality, that can only add to the problem.

People use drugs also in order to “let go.” It seems as if some drugs permit an individual to let down barriers of fears and repressions, and to emotionally transcend the problems of daily life. The fact is, however, that many such people use drugs instead as a kind of chemical blanket that has a tendency to smother rather than relieve.

To “let go” is to trust the spontaneity of our own being, to trust our own energy and power and strength, and to abandon ourselves to the energy of our own life. The word “abandon” itself may strike some readers as particularly strong, but each element of nature abandons itself to the life-form. So does each atom of our body. To abandon oneself, then, to the power of our own life, is to rely upon the great forces within and yet beyond nature that gave birth to the universe and to us.

One of the very first steps toward mental, physical, emotional and spiritual health is precisely that kind of abandonment, that kind of acceptance and affirmation.

The will to live is also inbred into each element of nature, and if we trust our own spontaneity, then that will to be is joyfully released and expressed through all our activities. It can also quite literally wash depression and suicidal tendencies away.

Those feelings do indeed encourage expression of consciousness, and release intuitive information that may otherwise be buried beneath tensions and fears.

Such realizations have their own biological effects, stimulating all of the healing properties of the body — and also easily propelling the mind toward “higher” organizations, in which all of life’s seeming inadequacies are understood to be redeemed.

This feeling of abandoning oneself to the power and force of one’s own life does not lead to a mental segregation, but instead allows the self to sense the part that it plays in the creative drama of universe. Such understanding often cannot be verbalized. They are instead perceived or experienced in bursts of pure knowing or sudden comprehension.

The natural world itself is a gateway to other realities. We do not have to try and blot out the physical world, or our ordinary consciousness, in order to achieve the necessary knowledge that leads to vibrant health or experiences. In fact, the natural world is itself a part of other realities, and the source of all realities is as present in our existence as in any other.

The more fully we learn to live, the more the seemingly hidden “mysteries of the universe” begin to appear. They do not necessarily make themselves known with great clamor of fanfare, but suddenly the most innocuous, innocent birdsong or the sight of a leaf might reveal knowledge of the profoundest nature. It is ironic, then, that many people who seek to discover the “hidden” mysteries of nature ignore nature itself, or consider the physical body as gross or somehow composed of lesser vibrations.

In the case of the suicide, however, we see the opposite attitudes at their most drastic. To a strong extent, such individuals reject their own lives, and often the conditions of life in general. Many of them object that they did not want to be born in the first place, and they feel that way because they have so thoroughly repressed the will to life within them. They also often express a strong feeling of alienation from their parents, friends, family and their fellow men in general. Along the way they have forgotten the cooperative, playful ventures of childhood, and the expression of love itself becomes most difficult.

All of the suggestions in this blog can indeed help break down those habitual thought patterns, however, and if such a person is seeing a therapist, it is an excellent idea if the entire family join in the therapy.

Oftentimes this is financially impossible, but the inclusion of such an individual in some kind of a group situation is an excellent procedure. Communication between several people, all of whom have contemplated suicide, can also set up an excellent supportive situation, particularly with some direction set by a therapist. All would-be suicides do not follow through, and many end up leading long and productive lives, so that even when negative ideas are present in their most severe forms, there is still hope for improvement and accomplishment.

Those same unfortunate beliefs, feelings, and attitudes are also present to a lesser degree, and in different mixtures, in the cases of life-endangering diseases. However, those beliefs may not be nearly as observable, and many people may deny that they are present at all. They are often triggered, finally, by a traumatic life situation — the death of a spouse or parent, a major disappointment, or any experience that is particularly shocking and disturbing to the particular person involved.

These attitudes are often present in certain cases of cancer, severe heart problems, or other diseases that actually threaten life itself.

In such instances, an understanding of one’s beliefs, and a generation of newer, more biologically vital ones, will certainly serve to better the situation, and help relieve the condition.

The would-be suicide’s problem is usually not one of suppressed rage or anger, it is instead the feeling that there is no room in his or her private life for further development, expression, or accomplishment, or that those very attributes are meaningless.

The will to live has been subverted by the beliefs and attitudes mentioned earlier.

People with life-threatening diseases also often feel that further growth, development, or expansion are highly difficult, if not impossible to achieve at a certain point in their lives. Often there are complicated family relationships that the person does not know how to handle. To numbers of such individuals crisis points come and are conquered. Somehow the person learns to circumnavigate the unpleasant situation, or the conditions change because of other people involved — and presto: the disease itself vanishes.

In all cases, however, the need for value fulfillment, expression, and creativity are so important to life that when these are threatened, life itself is at least momentarily weakened. Innately, each person does realize that there is life after death, and in some instances such people realize that it is indeed time to move to another level of reality, to die and set out again with another brand-new world.

Often, seriously ill people quite clearly recognize such feelings, but they have been taught not to speak of them. The desire to die is considered cowardly, even evil, by some religions — and yet behind that desire lies all of the vitality of the will to live, which may already be seeking for new avenues of expression and meaning.

There are those who come down with one serious disease — say heart trouble — are cured through a heart transplant operation or other medical procedure, only to fall prey to another seemingly unrelated disease, such as cancer. It would relieve the minds of families and friends, however, if they understood that the individual involved did not “fall prey” to the disease, and that he or she was not a victim in usual terms.

This does not mean that anyone consciously decides to get such-and-such a disease, but it does mean that some people instinctively realize that their own individual development and fulfillment does now demand another new framework of existence.

Much loneliness results when people who knows they are going to die feel unable to communicate with loved ones for fear of hurting their feelings. Still, other kinds of individuals will live long productive lives even while their physical mobility or health is most severely impaired. They will still feel that they had work to do, of that they were needed — but the main thrusts of their beings still reside in the physical universe.

Each person’s purposes are so unique and individualistic that it is quite improper to try to make any judgments in such matters. There is also the overall picture, for each family member plays a certain part in the reality of every other member.

A man might die very shortly after his wife’s death, for example. Regardless of the circumstances, no one should judge such cases, for regardless of the way such a man might die, it would be because the thrust and intent and purpose of his life was no longer in physical reality.

The Person Who Contemplates Suicide Often

If you are a person who contemplates suicide often, you should indeed talk to a confidante about your problem.

This communication on our part will help clear the air to some extent. Such a person is considering an irreversible step — one certainly that should not be taken lightly. Often such people are in a very depressed state of mind, so that they have already closed their thoughts to the reasons for living, and only keep reminding themselves of the availability of death.

Often other people can make some small, seemingly innocuous comment that suddenly opens the disturbed person’s mind to new possibilities. Because the entire mental, physical, emotional, and spiritual portions of the self are always stimulated to seek further growth and development and satisfaction, then it is quite possible for the mind to seize upon even the smallest event that will spontaneously release the person at least momentarily from depression, or even despair. A momentary distraction, however, is not a cure from these dark thoughts. There needs to be a long-term way to prevent these dark thoughts from occurring in an individual’s mind. Luckily, things like CBD, a cannabinoid of the cannabis plant, is excellent at reducing this heavy cloud that hangs over many. CBD can be taken in many different forms, of which you can view at getcherrycbd.com/products/cherry-cbd-roll-on. If depression and dark thoughts are something that troubles you, it may be worth looking down this avenue of CBD.

If we are in such a situation, do remind oneself that it is far more natural and probable for any problem to be solved, and that every problem has a solution. Death is not a solution. It is an end in a very basic manner.

No matter how depressed we may feel, we do still want to live, or we would be dead by now — so there is a part of us that seeks life and vitality, and that portion also deserves expression. Natural products like CBD could go a long way to un-cloud the fog of depression that looms around the heads of those contemplating suicide due to its antidepressant qualities. There is always help on offer to anyone who suffers from depression and is contemplating suicide. To stop feeling this way, it may be in your best interest to seek out treatments if you are not yet ready to talk to a medical professional. Have a look at Canopy Botanicals who is an online vendor who distributes natural products as well as kratom supplements which should help depression sufferers to feel better. Or, read through sites like this (www.renewedfreedomcenter.com/can-depression-and-anxiety-cause-ocd-like-symptoms/) to understand better what your brain may be putting you through. But please, if you are thinking about suicide, find someone you trust to speak with. It is a good idea to put off making any decision for a while. After all, if we do choose suicide, we can always kill oneself. If we commit suicide, however, our choices for this life are over.

Tell oneself we will make no decision until after our birthday, of after the holidays, of that we will put off any decision for a month, or even a week — whatever we feel most comfortable with.

Any therapist can also follow through by making such suggestions, thus gaining the client’s cooperation at the same time by letting the individual choose the time period for which such a decision will be delayed.

It is futile to tell such a person that he or she can not, or must not, commit suicide — and indeed, such a procedure can be quite dangerous, hardening the person’s leaning toward a death decision. The idea of making choices should be stressed: to live or to die is indeed each person’s choice.

Some people might say, “I have a right to die,” when they are arguing the case for suicide. And while this is true, it is also true that the people on our planet need every bit of help and encouragement they can get from each person alive. In a certain sense, the energy of each individual does keep the world going, and commit suicide is to refuse a basic, cooperative venture.

It is also true that persons in ordinary good health who often contemplate suicide have already closed themselves away from the world to an important extent. Even their physical senses seem burred, until often they seek further and further stimulation. These same attitudes are apparent in a lesser or in unsatisfactory life situations. If we are such a person, however, there are also other steps that we can take. Project oneself into a satisfying future. Remind oneself that the future is indeed there if we want it, and that we can grow into that future as easily as we grow from the past into the present.

Many depressives concentrate almost devotedly upon the miseries of the world — the probable disasters that could bring about its end. They remind themselves that the planet is overpopulated, and project into the future the most dire of disasters, man-made and natural.

Such thoughts are bound to cause depression. They are also painting a highly prejudiced view of reality, leaving out all matters concerning man’s and woman’s heroism, love of his or her fellow creatures, his or her wonder, sympathy, and the great redeeming qualities of the natural world itself. So such people must change their focus of attention.

The other creative, positive, achieving portions of life are ever present, and thoughts of them alone can bring refreshment and release from tension.

The point is that all of the world’s problems also represent great challenges. Young people in particular are needed to work for the promotion of peace and nuclear disarmament, to take up the tasks of deregulating and redistributing food sources, and of encouraging nations to join in such a creative venture. Those are indeed worthy and stirring causes, as noble as any that faced any generation in the past. The world needs every hand and eye, and cries out for expression of love and caring. To devote oneself to such a cause is far more praiseworthy than to steadily bemoan global problems with a sorrowful eye and mournful voice.

If we are lethargic, resolve to take the first small steps toward action, however small they might be. Remind oneself that life implies action and motion, and even the activity of the most despondent thought flows in great burst of rhythm.

All of the suggestions given here will also help in lesser situations, in ordinary bouts of worry, stress, or poor health. Even those with very serious diseases can always hope for improvement, so even if an individual is considering suicide because of severe health dilemma, the matter should be carefully weighed.

The most seemingly irreversible physical situations have changed even drastically for the better, so each tomorrow does offer that possibility. Again, however, the individual must take his or her own choice, and without facing the additional burden of worrying whether or not the soul itself will be condemned for such an act.

Nature does not know damnation, and damnation has no meaning in the great realm of love in which all existence is couched.

The Will To Live

Starting over — changing one’s belief, is a bold endeavor. It is quite possible that along the way we may become discouraged or disillusioned.

At such times it is a good idea to give oneself time to relax. Turn one’s attention to something else entirely, and mentally say, “To hell with it all for now.” The entire idea involves a process in which we try and not try at the same time, in which we do not strain to achieve results, but instead gently begin to allow ourselves to follow the contours of our own subjective feelings, to uncover those spiritual and biologically valid beliefs of early childhood, and to bring to them the very best wisdom that we have acquired throughout our life so far.

So when we do become discouraged, a playful diversion should give us refreshing release. An escapist movie or novel, or the purchase of some small frivolous item may also serve to relax our conscious mind. We are actually involved in changing a way of life, in altering our very view of the self and the world in the hopes of acquiring a new sense of harmony with our bodies, our minds, our fellow creatures, and the environment.

Indeed, there is no more exciting adventure, and it will bring about more surprises and discoveries than any expedition to alien landscapes. Our beliefs are indeed alive in their own fashion. Now, instead of taking them for granted, we will begin to notice both their uniqueness and their variety.

If we are talking about starting over, however, we may as well begin at one of the lowest points and work upward. This way we can see beliefs in their darkest form, and then little by little watch them begin to show energy, vitality, and fresh impetus.

In nearly all matters of poor health, or unfortunate living conditions or mental or physical stress, there exists a strong tinge of denial, fear, and repression.

These are seen at their most severe and their most obvious where suicide is involved — particularly in the suicide of the young. In later blogs we will discuss some special cases of reincarnational influence connected with suicide, but for now we will be concerned with the increasing numbers of suicides by young adults.

At one time or another most people consider the possibility of their own death. That is a quite natural reaction to the conditions of life. With some people, however, the idea of death seems to grow obsessive, so that it is felt to be the one escape from life’s problems. It may even achieve an allure in some people’s minds.

The propelling force in all of existence is the desire to be, however — the impetus toward expression, development, and fulfillment. Some people who consider suicide believe in life after death, and some do not — and in the deepest of terms all deaths are somewhat suicidal. Physical life must end if it is to survive. There are certain conditions, however, that promote suicidal activity, and the termination of one’s own life had been held in great disrepute by many religions and societies, though not in all.

Individuals innately want to cooperate with their fellow human beings. They have a need to help other people, and to contribute to the common good. Many people who commit suicide feel to the contrary that they are no longer needed, or in fact that their very existence stands in the way of other people’s happiness. Young adult suicides are not necessarily from the poorest or the lowest strata of society at all. In fact, poverty often serves as a strong impetus, leading the individual to fight for his or her daily needs.

Such a person’s day may be so crowded with desperate activity that there is no time with which to even contemplate suicide, because the struggle for life itself is so intent.

Again, the desire for value fulfillment, development and purpose is so strong that if those seem denied, life becomes — or seems to become — less precious. In many cases it is the son and daughter of the upper middle-classes, of the well-to-do, who run into such life-endangering dilemmas. Some youngsters are so overly provided for by their families that it seems that there is no way for them to achieve any more than they have.

If their parents are overly indulgent, then the youngster may actually feel as if they were adjuncts to their parents, or possessions alone. On the other hand, some upper-middle-class families stress competition to such a degree that it seems to the children that they are only valued for their achievements, rather than being loved for simply being the people they are.

To most people, none of these situations seem particularly drastic, and certainly there are far worse cases of human disillusionment in the world. Yet many such youngsters literally see no future for themselves as adults.

They do not visualize themselves as future parents, or as having certain careers. It is as if their whole lives accelerated to the brink of adulthood — yet they could see nothing beyond. Along the way, whether or not it was obvious to parents, such youngsters begin to feel that life is meaningless. Often such individuals are highly gifted, yet they feel as if that promise will never blossom.

In most cases these youngsters are actually quite secretive — though the self they show to parents and friends might appear to be lively and gregarious.

Such persons can help themselves, however, and they can be helped by others.

First of all, let me make it clear that no one is “damned” for committing suicide. There are no particular “penalties.”

Would-be suicides, for all their secrecy, usually do mention the subject to a friend, relative, or close family member. The subject should not be ignored or condemned, but honestly examined. Part of the mystique of the suicidal impulse is indeed the secretive aspect — so the very expression of the feeling is beneficial, and leads to better communication.

Indeed, part of the would-be suicide’s dilemma may be caused by a lack of communication with others, a misinterpretation of the motives of friends or family members, and a difficulty in expressing one’s own needs and wishes.

When To Ignore, Instructions, Suggestions And Resolutions. A New Beginning

The thoughts and beliefs that we want to rearouse are those that were often predominant in childhood, as mentioned in earlier blogs. They are spiritual, mental, emotional and biological beliefs that are innately present in the birth of each creature. Children believe not only that there will be a tomorrow, and many tomorrows, but they also believe that each tomorrow will be rewarding and filled with discovery.

They fell themselves couched in an overall feeling of security and safety, even in the face of an unpleasant environment or situation. They feel drawn to other people and to other creatures, and left alone they trust their contacts with others. They have an inbred sense of self-satisfaction, and they instinctively feel that it is natural and good for them to explore and develop their capabilities.

They expect relationships to be rewarding and continuing, and expect each event will have the best possible results. They enjoy communication, the pursuit of knowledge, and they are filled with curiosity.

All of those attitudes provide the strength and mental health that promotes their physical growth and development. However simple those ideas may sound to the adult, still they carry within them the needed power and impetus that fill all of life’s parts. Later, conflicting beliefs often smother such earlier attitudes, so that by the time children have grown into adults they actually hold almost an opposite set of hypotheses. These take it for granted that any stressful situation will worsen, that communication will worsen,that communication with others is dangerous, that self-fulfillment brings about the envy and even of others, and that as individuals they live in an unsafe society, set down the middle of a natural world that is itself savage, cruel, and caring only for its survival at any cost.

Our body actually lives on large quantities of joyful expectation.

The fetus is propelled by the expectation of future growth and development. It is bad enough to anticipate that most unfortunate situations will worsen rather than improve, but it is foolhardy indeed to believe that mankind is bound to destroy itself, or that nuclear destruction in nearly inevitable.

Many people no longer believe in life after death, and so large numbers of the population are philosophically denied a spiritual or a physical future.

This deprives body and mind of the zest and purpose needed in order to enjoy any pursuits or activities. Such beliefs make any human endeavor appear futile. There are ways of reacting to the dangers of nuclear energy that are far more healthy and beneficial, and we will discuss these in later blogs.

For now, I simply want to suggest that all such beliefs should be understood and dismissed as soon as possible. We hope to show how most natural health-promoting beliefs can be applied to all mental, physical, or emotional illnesses or difficulties. I want to assure that regardless of our circumstances, age, or sex, we can indeed start over, re-arousing from within ourselves those earlier, more innocent expectations, feelings and beliefs. It is much better if we can imagine this endeavor more in the light of children’s play, in fact, rather than think of it as a deadly serious adult pursuit.

In other words, we will try to instill a somewhat playful attitude, even toward the most severe problems, for the very idea of play encourages the use of the imagination and the creative abilities.

This starting over. Again, because of simultaneous nature of time, beliefs can be changed in the present moment.

There is no need to search endlessly into the past of this life or any other, for the “original” causes for beliefs. Making a change in the present of a certain kind will automatically alter all beliefs “across the board,” so to speak. It is important, however, that we do not strain too hard to achieve results, but allow ourselves some leeway. We react to our beliefs habitually, often unthinkingly, and in usual ideas of time, and in our experience of it — we must allow oneself “some time” to change that habitual behavior.

As we do, we will discover oneself reacting to the desired beliefs as easily and automatically as we did to the undesirable ones. As we do, keep the idea of child’s play in mind, however. this will allow us to keep the entire affair in a kind of suspension.

The child plays at being an adult long before he or she is one, and so we can play with more desirable beliefs while we are still growing into that more beneficial picture.

One of the issues I want to discuss in depth is that of spontaneity in relationship to health and disease.

Our very physical existence itself is dependent upon the smooth functioning of many spontaneous processes. Our thinking, breathing, and motion are all guided by activities that are largely unconscious — at least from the standpoint of what we usually think of as the conscious mind.

Our body repairs itself constantly, and our mind thinks — all without our normally conscious attention. The same applies to all of those inner processes that make life possible. Our thoughts are conscious, but the process of thinking itself is not. Spontaneity is particularly important in the actions of children, and in the natural rhythmic motion of their limbs. Feelings also seem to come and go in a spontaneous fashion.

It is indeed as if some inner spontaneous part of the personality is far more knowledgeable than the conscious portion of which we are so rightfully proud.

Many people, however, fear spontaneity: it evokes extravagance, excesses, and dangerous freedoms. Even people who are not so fervently opposed to spontaneity often feel that it is somewhat suspect, distasteful, perhaps leading to humiliating actions. Spontaneity, however, represents the spirit of life itself, and it is the basis for the will to live, and for those impulses that stimulate action, motion, and discovery.

In the truest regard, our life is provided for us by these spontaneous processes. As I’ve mentioned in previous blogs, at one time the human personality was “more at one with itself.” It accommodated unconscious and conscious experience more equitably. Man and woman were more aware of his and her dreams and so-called unconscious activity.

It is only because civilized man and woman have somewhat overspecialized in the use of one kind of knowledge over another that people fear the unconscious, spontaneous portions of the self. The fear alone causes them to block out still more and more unconscious knowledge. Since the spontaneous portions are so related to bodily activity, they are very important in facilitating good health, and when people feel divorced from their spontaneous selves, they also fell divorced to the same extent from their own bodies. Such individuals become frightened of freedom itself, of choices and of changes. They try desperately to control themselves and their environment against what seems to be a raging, spontaneous mass of primitive impulses from within, and against a mindless, chaotic, ancient force of nature. In the physical world, such behavior often leads to compulsive action — stereotyped mental and physical motion and other situations with a strong repressive coloration. Here any expression becomes almost taboo. The conscious mind must be in control of all actions as much as possible, for such a person feels that only rigid, logical thought is strong enough to hold back such strong impulsive force.

These attitudes may be reflected in rather simple compulsive actions: the woman or man who cleans the house endlessly, whether it needs it or not; the man or woman who will follow certain precise, defined routes of activity — driving down certain streets only to work; washing his or her hands much more frequently than other people; the person who constantly buttons and unbuttons a sweater or vest. Many such simple actions show a stereotyped kind of behavior that results from a desperate need to gain control over oneself and the environment.

Any excessive behavior may enter in, including over-smoking, overeating, and overdrinking.

It will be difficult for some people to believe that spontaneity is to be trusted, for they may be only aware of feeling destructive or violent impulses. The idea of expressing impulses spontaneously will be most frightening under those conditions.

Actually the people involved are repressing not violent impulses but natural loving ones. They are afraid that expressions of love, or the need for dependence will only bring them scorn or punishment. Therefore, they hide those yearnings, and the destructive impulses actually serve to protect them from the expression of love that they have somehow learned to fear.

Science itself, for all of its preciseness in some areas, often equates instinctive, impulsive, chaotic, destructive activity as one and the same.

Nature and the inner nature of man and woman are both seen to contain savage, destructive forces against which civilization and the reasoning mind must firmly stand guard.

Science itself often displays compulsive and ritualistic behavior, to the point of programming its own paths of reasoning, so that they cover safe ground, and steadfastly ignore the great inner forces of spontaneity that make science — or any discipline — possible. As I have said before, spontaneity knows its own order. Nothing is more highly organized than the physical body that spontaneously grow all of its own parts.

As our life is provided for us, so to speak, by these spontaneous processes, the life of the universe is provided in the same fashion. We see physical stars, and our instruments probe the distance of space — but the inner processes that make the universe possible are those same processes that propel our own thinking. It is erroneous, therefore, to believe that spontaneity and discipline are mere opposites. Instead, true discipline is the result of true spontaneity.

Value fulfillment of each and every element in life relies upon those spontaneous processes, and their source is the basic affirmative love and acceptance of the self, the universe, and life’s conditions.

Since ancient times religions has tried to help man and woman understand the nature of his or her own subjective reality — but religion has its own dark side, and for this reason religion unfortunately has fostered fear of the spontaneous.

Instead of promoting the idea of man’s and woman’s inner worth, it has taught people to distrust the inner self and its manifestations. Most churches preach a dogma that stresses concepts of the sinful self, and sees man and woman as creatures contaminated by original sin even before birth.

This distorted picture depicts a species of sinners innately driven by evil, sometimes demonic, forces. In this dogma man and woman needs to apologize for his or her birth, and the conditions of life are seen as a punishment set by God upon his or her erring creatures. Unfortunately such concepts are also reflected in fields of psychology, particularly in Freudianism — where, say, slips of the tongue may betray the self’s hidden, nefarious true desires.

The unconscious is understood to be a garbage heap of undesirable impulses, long ago discarded by civilization, while again much religious theory projects the image of the hidden self that must be kept in bounds by good work, prayer, and penance.

Amid such a conglomeration of negative suppositions, the idea of a good and innocent inner self seems almost scandalous. To encourage expression of that self appears foolhardy, for it seems only too clear that if the lid of consciousness were opened, so to speak, all kind of inner demons and enraged impulses would rush forth.

Again, people who have such views of the inner self usually project the same ideas upon nature at large, so that the natural world appears equally mysterious, dangerous, and threatening.

In political terms such persons also look for strong authoritative groups or governments, stress law and order above justice or equality, and tend to see the poorer, less advantaged members of society as impulse-ridden, dangerous, and always ready for revolution. It is quite frequent for persons with those beliefs to discipline their bodies overmuch, take positions as police guards, or set themselves up in one way or another in control of their fellows.

I am not here stating that all police guards, members of the military or whatever, fall into that category. Such people will, however, tend toward a strongly disciplined life. Many of their health problems will deal with eruptions — interior ulcers, skin eruptions, or in very definite mental and emotional eruptions, and great outbursts of force and temper all the more noticeable because of the usual disciplined patterns of behavior.

In most such cases there is a lack of the normal range of emotional expression. Such persons often find it extremely difficult to express love, joy, or gratitude, for example, and this lack of expression is taken for granted by others, who do not see it in its true light, but think instead that the person is simply reticent.

Secondary personalities and schizophrenic episodes are also somewhat characteristic — again appearing as sudden explosive behavior when conflicting beliefs are dammed up and held back. And when it is believed that the inner self is indeed a bed of chaotic impulses, then it becomes less and less possible for an individual to express normal range of activity. The person then feels lethargic and out of touch with work of family.

Expression is a necessity of life, however. Each person feels that drive. When one set of rigid beliefs threatens to make action appear meaningless, then another set of buried, repressed beliefs may surface, providing new impetus precisely when it is needed — but also forming a secondary personality with characteristics almost opposite to those of the primary self.

We will have more to say on all of these issues — but now I want to discuss spontaneity, or its lack, in relationship to sexuality and health. Sexual health is incredibly important for each of the partners involved but especially for women as it can cause many health problems for them if certain guidelines are not followed. If you are looking for expert advice, visit www.advancedgynecology.com by following the link.

All of the negative beliefs just mentioned touch upon sexuality in one way or another. Those with the beliefs just mentioned often think of sexuality as bestial, evil, and even humiliating.

These attitudes are intensified where the female sex is concerned. We have, of course, a strong drive toward sexuality, and if we believe that it is to be shunned at the same time, then we are in a very ambiguous position. Women with such beliefs and conflicts often wind up having hysterectomies, performed incidentally by male doctors, who hold the very same beliefs.

Many men look forward to having sons, while at the same time they revere marriage as a necessary part of respectable family life, and also feel that marriage is somewhat degrading — particularly to a male — and that the sex act itself is only justified if it brings him an heir.

Such a male will seek sex with prostitutes, or with women he considers beneath him. In a strange fashion, he may even feel that it is wrong to have sex with his own wife, believing that the sex act so degrades the both of them. In many cases these people will be great sportsmen, follow conventionalized male pursuits, and perhaps express contempt for the arts or any interest considered remotely feminine.

Many schools of religion and so-called esoteric knowledge have promoted the idea that sexuality and spirituality are diametrically opposed to each other.

People in the sports arena also often encourage the concept that sexual expression is somewhat debilitating to the male, and can weaken his constitution. Priests take vows to ensure sexual abstinence, in other words they tightly fasten the package, and any urges they may have in a form of “sexual discipline”. The fact is that sexual expression is, again, an important element in the entire range of human experience, encouraging mental and physical health and vitality.

Some people may have a stronger or weaker sex drive than others, and yet that drive is a strong part of any individual’s natural rhythm. Damned up, such sexuality still keeps trying for expression, and it is often men or women of habitual “sexual discipline” who suddenly break out in bouts of sexual promiscuity or violence.

In actuality, the combination of a philosophical stress upon discipline, physical and mental, with the belief in the sinful self, often brings about the most unfortunate human dilemmas. These ideas usually ride along with feelings that power is desirable but dangerous. To abstain from sexuality then means to store up one’s own power. People with such beliefs often have severe problems with constipation, and have retention symptoms — retaining water, for example, or salt or whatever.

They may also suffer with stomach difficulties, many being overly fond of extremely spicy foods. Some have unusually heavy appetites, even though these may be regulated by a series of diets — which are then broken by overeating.

There are so many other elements involved in human nature that I do not really want to point out any culprits, yet male-segregated communities are obviously notorious for encouraging that kind of behavior. Every individual in such institutions or societies is not affected in the same fashion, of course — yet we do have these kinds of closed societies, relatively speaking, and they can indeed serve as cradles for fanaticism and rigid stereotypes of behavior. Again, here we find that discipline, rather than free will, is stressed, so that the opportunity for choices is drastically reduced. The more open a society, the more healthy its people.

What I have said also applies to organizations segregated along feminine lines, though to a lesser degree.

In both cases the sexes are denied any true communication, and an extremely artificial framework is maintained, in which the sexes literally become strangers to each other. This also encourages various kinds of hysterical reactions, as well as a larger frequency of “contagious diseases” than is experienced by the normal population.

These conditions also occur in some varieties of religious cults, whether or not strict sexual segregation is enforced. If human relationships are highly regulated and supervised, or family members encouraged to spy upon their relatives or friends, then we have the same kind of curtailment of natural expression and communication.

People in such societies often suffer from malnourishment, frequent beatings, an excessive use of the enema, and often indulge in physical punishment. The children are strictly raised, and a lack of normal spontaneity is the rule rather than the exception. Members of such organizations often suffer maladies in which their bodies do not utilize nutrients. They are often food faddists of one kind or another, but because they do fear spontaneity to such a degree they will often become afflicted with diseases of maladies associated with the body’s unconscious processes.

We can also find single families, of course, that operate like cults — or an entire nation — that are given over to repression with its resulting violence.

The ideas that we have, then, play a large role in the way the body handles its nutrients, and utilizes its health and vitality. If we believe that the body is somehow evil, we may punish it by nearly starving to death, even though our diet might be considered normal by usual standards. For it is possible for our ideas to cause chemical reactions that impede our body’s ability to accept nourishment. If we believe that the body is evil, the purest health-food diet will or may do us little good at all, while if we have a healthy desire and respect for our physical body, a diet of TV dinners, and even of fast foods, may well keep us healthy and nourished.

If we are talking about health, it is our beliefs that we must look. We have the most efficient and beautiful physical organs, the most elegant joints and appendages, the most vibrant lungs and the most exquisite of senses. It is up to us to form a body of beliefs that is worthy of our physical image — for we are nourished by our beliefs, and those beliefs can cause our daily bread to add to our vitality, or to add to our cares and stress.

The weight of unfortunate beliefs perhaps falls heaviest on the older segments of the population, for the beliefs have had a longer period of time to operate relatively unimpeded.

Those particular beliefs actually take hold in young adults, so that it seems that all of life is meant to come to its fullest flower in young adulthood, and then from that prestigious position fall quicker and quicker into disuse and disarray.

These ideas do not inflict severe difficulties upon older members of the population, but they also have a vital part to play in the behavior of many young people who commit suicide directly or indirectly. It seems to such youngsters that the pinnacle of life is just at hand, to last upon youthful beauty and youthful achievement, so that it appears that all of the rest of life’s activities must suffer by contrast.

Knowledge through experience is not considered a practical-enough method of learning, so that the skills and understanding that come with age are seldom taken into consideration.

Again, to a certain degree, religion and science — and the medical sciences in particular — seem devoted to encouraging the most negative beliefs about human nature. It is taken for granted that all mental, physical, spiritual and emotional satisfactions become lesser with advancing age. It is taken for granted that memory fails, the body weakens, the senses stagnate, and emotional vividness dims. It is often considered scandalous to even imagine sexual activity after the age of even 40 or 50.

Faced with the kind of a projected future, no wonder many adolescents prefer to die before catching sight of the very first hint of deterioration — the first wrinkle or touch of gray in the hair. What forerunner of disaster such natural signs must seem! And at the other end of the scale, older parents are treated by their grown children as if they themselves were falling into a grotesque version of a second childhood. Many people actually speak louder to older persons, whether or not they have any hearing difficulties at all and require the help of cordless phone for hearing impaired or not.

Our entire world of commerce and advertisements, of competition and of business, prolong such attitudes. This is aside from the impact of the entertainment industry, which reflects that same glorification of youth, and that fear of growing old.

There are very definite, excellent side-effects of growing older, such as being able to use a site like www.keyadvice.co.uk/equity-release/calculator to receive equity from the value of your home. That we will also discuss in future blogs — but here I want to assure the blog reader that basically speaking there are no diseases brought about by old age alone.

The body often wears out because it has been used less and less — and that is because little study has been given to the true capabilities of the healthy physical body in the later years of life. That period also contains certain rhythms in which normal healing processes are highly accelerated, and the life force itself does not wear out or lessen within a body. Its expression may be impeded at any time, but the unique energy of each individual is not drained away because of age alone.

We will have more to say concerning older people and their ways of life, and also discuss the many beliefs and ideas that can come almost immediately to their aid. The subject of suicide will also be discussed in a different context, and when I invite my blog readers to start over, I want it understood that we can indeed start over regardless of our age or circumstances.

Living At Cross Purposes, You, You, You And You

Each person is so unique that it is obviously impossible for me to discuss all of the innumerable and complicated strands of belief that form human experience — yet I hope here, some way, to present enough “specific generalizations” so that the blog reader can find many points of application as far as our own life is concerned.

In fact, we may discover not just one you, but several you’s, so to speak, each pursuing certain purposes, and we may find out furthermore that some such purposes cancel others out, while some are diametrically opposed to each other. Such cross purposes, of course, can lead to mental, spiritual, physical and emotional difficulties.

Many people believe that it is dangerous to make themselves known, to express their own ideas or abilities. Such individuals may be highly motivated, on the other hand, to become accomplished in some art or profession or other field of activity. In such cases we have two cross-purposes operating — the desire to express oneself, and the fear of doing so.

If both beliefs are equally dominant and vital, then the situation becomes quite serious. Such individuals may try “to get ahead” on the one hand, in society or business or in the arts or sciences, only to find themselves taking two steps backward for every step they take forward. In other words, they will encounter obstructions that are self-generated. If such a person begins to succeed, then he or she is forcibly reminded of the equally dominant need for lack of success — for again, the person believes that self-expression is necessary and desirable while also being highly dangerous, and thus to be avoided.

Dilemmas result in many ways. The person might succeed financially, only to make a serious or faulty business judgment, thus losing the financial benefits. Another person might express the same dilemma through the body itself, so that “getting ahead” was equated with physical mobility — so that it seemed that physical mobility, while so desired, was still highly dangerous.

Such reasoning sounds quite outlandish, of course, to most individuals, but the person in question, say with a disease like arthritis, or some other motion-impairing aliment, might ask themselves the question: “What would I do if I were free of the condition?”

Like the alcoholic’s wife mentioned in my earlier blog, such a person might suddenly feel struck by a sense of panic, rather than relief, thus experiencing for the first time the fear of motion that underlay the problem.

Yet why should motion be feared? Because so many individuals have been taught that power or energy is wrong, destructive, or sinful, and therefore to be punished.

Often playful, rambunctious children are told not to be showoffs, or not to express their normal exuberance. Religions stress the importance of discipline, sobriety, and penance. All of these attitudes can be extremely detrimental, and along with other beliefs are responsible for a goodly number of spiritual, physical, mental, and emotional problems.

Unfortunately, there are also some particular teachings that are sexually oriented, and that therefore show their effects often on one sex rather than the other. Boys are still taught to “be cool,” unemotional, aggressive, and assertive — as opposed to being emotionally warm, cooperative, gregarious but without fake bravado. Boys are taught that it is unmanly to be dependent in any way. They become embarrassed in late boyhood when kissed by their mothers, as a rule — yet it is quite natural to be both independent, cooperative and competitive. Maybe it would be useful for some men to consider male enhancement pills for fast erection to allow men to better cooperate with their women in the bedroom.

Such young men grow up with the desire to be independent, while at the same time they also experience the natural drive for cooperation and dependence upon others. Many end up punishing themselves for any behavior they consider dependent or unmanly. They are often afraid to express love, or to accept emotional nourishment gracefully.

As a result some such people become severely afflicted with ulcers, so that their stomachs becomes sore and ulcerated at the acceptance of physical nourishment.

Epilepsy is a disease often experienced also by people who have strongly conflicting beliefs about the use of power or energy, coupled with a sometimes extraordinary amount of mental and physical energy that demands it be used. Epilepsy is a condition that can be difficult to treat; however, with advancements in medicine over the years, we can now manage Epilepsy and its symptoms. From benzodiazepine medications such as midazolam to more recent research in the effects of THC, CBD, and marijuana strains such as Gorilla glue strain, we see more improvements in treating Epilepsy. If you would like to learn more about CBD and its effects on Epilepsy and other ailments you can do so by reading something like CBD School’s Medterra review, you can find out some of the best ways to help deal with a condition of that nature.

In many such cases the individuals involved are highly intellectual, and possess obvious gifts that are, however, seldom put to full use. Such people are so frightened of the nature of personal power and energy that they short-circuit their nervous systems, blocking the ability for any purposeful action, at least momentarily. Using a CBD oil or even a CBD vape may help relieve this issue and overcome it. Relaxing the body can really calm someone’s body down. This then can create a good environment to go ahead with whatever they were planning to do.

Because they realize that they do indeed innately possess strong gifts and abilities, these people often seek attention for their disease, rather that for their abilities. They may become professional patients, favorites of their doctors because of their wit and repartee in the face of their affliction. They are determined to express themselves and not to express themselves at the same time. Like so many others they believe that self-expression is dangerous, evil, and bound to lead to suffering — self-inflicted or otherwise.

This particular group or people are also usually possessed by an extraordinary anger: they are furious at themselves for not being able to showcase their own strength and power — but “forced” instead into a kind of behavior that appears sometimes frightening and humiliating.

Individuals who suffer from epilepsy are also often perfectionists — trying so hard to be their best that they end up with a very uneven, jerky physical behavior.

In some instances, stuttering is a very mild example of the same kind of activity. On the one hand some epileptic patients feel a cut above the usual run of humanity, while on the other they perform far more awkwardly than normal persons. Again, many also believe that those with special talents or gifts are disliked by others and persecuted.

This brings us into a conglomeration of beliefs unfortunately connected with romanticism.

These beliefs are centered around artists, writers, poets, musicians, actors and actresses, or others who seem unusually gifted in the arts or in various other methods of self-expression. The beliefs lead to the most dire legends, in which the gifted person always pays in one way or another for the valued gifts of self-expression — through disaster, misfortune, or death.

These concepts have many cousins, so that we actually have an entire family of beliefs that are all in one way or another related.

Foremost, connected with the distortions about creativity and expression, is the belief that knowledge itself is dangerous, evil, and bound to lead to disaster. Here, innocence is seen as synonymous with ignorance. What we actually have behind such a belief is a fear of free will and of making choices.

The more extensive our knowledge, the more aware we are of probable actions, and of the conglomeration of choices that then become available. There are also people, then, with an intense thirst for knowledge who believe that knowledge is indeed good and beneficial, while on the other hand the belief just as fervently that knowledge is forbidden and dangerous.

All of these instances lead, of course, to severe dilemmas, and often pull an individual in two directions at once. They are the cause, also, of many spiritual, emotional, and physical difficulties.

It should probably be noted here also that this suspicion of knowledge is intensified when the female sex is involved, for the legends quite erroneously give the impression that knowledge is twice as disastrous if possessed by a woman. This should be kept in mind whenever we discuss beliefs that are specifically sexually oriented.

It must seem obvious that behind all such beliefs lies the distrust of nature, man, woman, and life itself.

We must also remember, however, that in a fashion beliefs themselves are tools, and that in some situations beliefs that seem quite negative can also clear the way for more beneficial ones. With all of this discussion of negative beliefs, therefore, it is a good idea not to call any beliefs bad or evil in themselves. They are no more bad or evil in their way own, say, than viruses are in theirs. If we look upon them in that manner, we will avoid being overwhelmed by what seems to be an endless parade of negative thoughts and beliefs that can only lead to destruction. Instead, compare the negative beliefs, for example, with the storms that sweep the country: they have their purposes — and all in all those purposes tend to promote and support life itself.

While we are still in the middle of such discussions, however, remind oneself that any situation can be changed for the better. Remind oneself constantly that the most favorable solution to a problem is at least as probable as the most unfortunate “solution.” Remind oneself also that despite all of our worrying, the spirit of life itself is continually within our experience, and forms our physical body.

Large numbers of the population do indeed live unsatisfactory lives, with many individuals seeking goals that are nearly unattainable because of the conglomeration of conflicting beliefs that all vie for their attention. They are at cross purposes with themselves.

This leads not only to private dilemmas, illnesses, and seemingly futile relationships — but also to national misunderstandings, entanglements, and world disorders. There are indeed ways of breaking through such conflicts, however, and those broader avenues of expression, peace, and satisfaction are available to each individual, however unfortunate the entire picture seems to be.

It is possible, therefore, to improve our health, and to deepen the quality of all or our experience.

In terms of earthly life as we understand it, it is overly optimistic to imagine that eventually all illnesses will be conquered, all relationships be inevitably fulfilling, or to foresee a future in which all people on earth are treated with equality and respect. For one thing, in that larger framework mentioned in earlier blogs, illness itself is a part of life’s overall activity. Disease states, so-called, are as necessary to physical life as normal health is, so we are not speaking of a nirvana on earth — but we are saying that it is possible for each blog reader to quicken his or her private perceptions, and to extend and expand the quality of ordinary consciousness enough so that by contrast to current experience, life could almost be thought of as “heaven on earth.”

This involves a re-education of most profound nature. All of the conflicting beliefs that have been mentioned thus far are the end result of what I have called before the “official line of consciousness.” Certainly people experienced disease long before those conflicting beliefs began — but again, that is because of the part that disease states play in the overall health of individuals and of the world.

What we are going to have to do, then, is start over. It is indeed quite possible to do so, for we will be working with material with which we are intimately familiar: our own thoughts, emotions, and beliefs.

We must start from our present position, of course, but there is no person who cannot better his or her position to a considerable degree, if the effort is made to follow through with the kind of new hypotheses that we will here suggest. These ideas are to some extent already present, though they have not predominated in world experience.

This alternate way of thinking is biologically pertinent, for it should be obvious now that certain beliefs and ideas serve to foster health and vitality, while others impede it.

These ideas are translations of the emotional attitudes of all portions of nature and of life itself. They are better than any medicine, and they promote the expression of value fulfillment of all kinds of life, whatever its form.

Reincarnational Children’s Play, And Health

When children play, often the play events seem as real or even more real than ordinary physical events that are experienced outside of the play framework. Children playing at cowboys and Indians, or cops and robbers, can on occasion become quite as frightened by the pursuit or the chase as they would be if they were actually caught up in such an adventure in ordinary life.

Even watching such programs on television will almost make it feel like they are there in the scene themselves. They become engrossed. With all the latest cable TV statistics, (look at the source here), it doesn’t come as much of a surprise to learn that more and more people are tuning in to these shows, and in turn, get to experience what they’re watching as if they were there in person. That’s the magic of television. It opens up doors to a whole new world of adventure for so many people, especially children. Alongside letting their imaginations run wild through play, there is no better feeling than being able to broaden your horizons.

Children then apply their imaginations more vividly, and even utilize all of their senses at certain times, to follow or reinforce those pictures that imagination paints. There are indeed many kinds of reality, many versions, and it is some time before human beings learn to focus into one particular package of reality. It’s important that children utilize all their senses so that they can truly pursue their imagination. There are a few things that can be done to help with this. The first is to let them play and to just have fun. The second is to let them listen to nursery songs like KLS , to help them flourish in their development. There are a few other things that you can do to help them as well, you just have to find the right thing for them.

In so doing, they then apply their imaginations in structured ways that serve to reinforce the prime reality-framework. For some time, however, young children utilize a remarkable imaginative freedom, so that, for example, they can experience “alternate” events with as much focus, strength, and vitality as that with which they experience ordinary life. A potent daydream may, in fact, appear far more real than the other daily events that surround it. When the child is playing, its sense of joy or anger is very strongly felt. The child’s body will often reflect those conditions and reflexes that would be elicited of the so-called “play” events were real.

Most of our experience happens directly, where senses, imagination, motion and physical actuality meet. In dreams, however, we often feel as if we are in another location entirely, and all of our senses seem pivoted in that location. Our experience is separated from our usual living area, in other words. We may dream that we are running or walking or flying, yet those activities are divorced enough from that area where imagination, motion, and physical actuality meet, so that our body remains quiet, relatively speaking, while we seem to be moving freely somewhere else.

In a fashion, reincarnation can partially be explained using the same kind of analogy. We have many existences at once — but each one has its own living area, upon which that portion of us focuses. In fact, that portion has its own name and selfhood and is master of its own castle, so to speak.

Each self has its own inviolate point where imagination, motion, and physical actuality intersect. Like the child play-acting, however, events occur within events, all dramatically real and vivid, all eliciting specific responses and actions, and each one possessing its own private living area.

On any given day a youngster may take a ride on a merry-go-round. The same little boy or girl might also sit astride a toy horse, and pretend that the horse is part of the merry-go-round. The same child might see the image of a merry-go-round on the television screen, or be told about another youngster’s visit to a playground, and a subsequent ride on a merry-go-round.

The child will be completely absorbed in the merry-go-round ride that was directly experienced. He or she may indeed be just as engrossed — or even more so — in the imaginary ride on the rocking horse. There will be some involvement, of course, as the child watches the images of the merry-go-round horses on the television station, while the story about the child’s visit to the playground will not take nearly as much of his interest.

In somewhat the same way, events appear and are reflected in reincarnational existences. All the lives are actually occurring at the same time, as the hypothetical youngster’s merry-go-round experiences happened all in one day.

In the reincarnational terms, however, the merry-go-round events might be experienced directly in some existences, or appear in a dream in another existence, or turn up simply as an image in another, or happen in an event involving real horses instead of merry-go-round horses. In other words, in one way or another the events of one living experience are reflected in each other living experience.

I am not saying that the events in one life cause the events on another, but that there is an overall pattern — a bank of probable events — and that in each life each individual chooses those that suit his or her overall private purposes. Yet those lives will be connected. An individual may have a serious illness in one life. That event may turn up as one uncomfortable nightmare in another existence. In still another life, the individual might have a dear friend who suffers from the same disease. In still another existence the individual might decide to be a doctor, to seek a cause and a cure for the same disease.

No one is fated, however, to suffer in one life for any crimes committed in another. The reasons and purposes for one’s own existence in any life can be found directly in the life itself.

Many proponents of reincarnation believe most firmly that an illness in one life most frequently has its roots in a past existence, and that reincarnational regression if therefore necessary to uncover the reasons for many current illnesses or dilemmas.

There is also a rather conventional stereotype version of karma that may follow such beliefs. Therefore, we may be punished in this life for errors we have committed in a past one, or we may actually be making up for a mistake made thousands of years ago. Again, all of a person’s reincarnational existences are, indeed, connected — but the events in one life do not cause the events in the next one.

I must remind once more that all time happens simultaneously, so the confused belief about punishment now, in retaliation for past action would actually be meaningless, since in simultaneous time all actions would be occurring at once.

We may have overall reasons for a particular illness, however, that have nothing to do with crime or punishment, but may instead involve an extraordinary sense of curiosity, and the desire for experience that is somewhat unconventional — usually not sought for — exotic, or in certain terms even grotesque.

Each life, regardless of its nature, possesses it own unique vantage point, and an individual may sometimes take an obscure or a long-lasting disease simply to present himself or herself with experience that most others would shun. An individual might seek such a vantage point in order to look at the universe in a different fashion, asking questions that perhaps could not be answered of asked from any other position.

Another life, for example, might deal with exquisite health and vitality, and as mentioned, still another life might be devoted to the arts of healing — but overall, few people take health problems per se as frequent reincarnational themes, though they may be implied strongly in situations where one is born into a large populace of poor, underprivileged people.

If one does have health problems, it is much better to look for their reasons in our immediate experience, rather than assigning them a cause in our distant past. The reasons for maladies are almost always present in current life experience — and even though old events from childhood may have originally activated unhealthy behavior, it is present beliefs that allow old patterns of activity to operate.

If we are concerned about any given problems — mental, emotional, or physical — there are certain facts we should hold in mind. I have mentioned most of them in previous blogs, but they are particularly vital in this context.

We must realize that we do create our own reality because of our beliefs about it. Therefore, try to understand that the particular dilemma of illness is not an event forced upon us by some other agency. Realize that to some extent or another our dilemma or our illness has been chosen by us, and that this choosing has been done in bits and pieces of small, seemingly inconsequential choices. Each, however, has led up to our current predicament, whatever its nature.

If we realize that our beliefs form our experience, then we do indeed have an excellent chance of changing our beliefs, and hence our experience.

We can discover what our own reasons are for choosing the dilemma or illness by being very honest with oneself. There is no need to feel guilty since we meant very well as we made each choice — only the choices were built upon beliefs that were beliefs and not facts.

If we are in serious difficulties of any kind, it may at first seem inconceivable, unbelievable, or even scandalous to imagine that our problems are caused by our own beliefs.

In fact, the opposite might appear to be true. We might have lost a series of jobs, for example, and it may seem quite clear that we are not to blame in any of those circumstances. We might have a very serious illness that seemed to come from nowhere, and it may strike us as most unlikely indeed, that our own beliefs had anything to do with the inception of such a frightening malady.

We may be in the middle of one or several very unsatisfactory relationships, none of which seem to be caused by us, while instead we feel as if we are an unwilling victim or participant.

We may have a dangerous drug or alcohol problem, or we may be married to someone who does. In both instances the situations will be caused by our own beliefs, even though this may at first seem most unlikely. For the purposes of this particular blog, we will discuss illnesses or situations that have arisen since childhood, so we are not including birth defects or very life-endangering childhood accidents, or most unfortunate childhood family situations. These will be discussed separately.

In most cases, even the most severe illnesses or complicated living conditions and relationships are caused by an attempt to grow, develop or expand in the face of difficulties that appear to be unsurmountable to one degree of another.

An individual will often be striving for some goal that appears blocked, and hence he or she uses all available energy and strength to circumnavigate the blockage. The blockage is usually a belief which needs to be understood or removed rather than bypassed.

In my blogs we will be involved with the nature of beliefs and with various methods that will allow us to choose beliefs that lead to a more satisfying life.

Throughout my blogs, we are not speaking of physical health alone, but of mental, spiritual, and emotional health as well. We are not healthy, for example, no matter how robust our physical condition, if our relationships are unhealthy, unsatisfying, frustrating, or hard to achieve. Whatever our situation is, it is a good idea to ask ourselves what we would do if we were free of it. An alcoholic’s wife might wish all her heart that her husband stop drinking, but if she suddenly asked herself what she would do, she might, surprisingly enough, feel a tinge of panic. On examination of her own thoughts and beliefs, she might well discover that she was so frightened of not achieving her own goals that she actually encouraged her husband’s alcoholism, so that she would not have to face her own “failure”.

Obviously this hypothetical situation is a quick example of what I mean, with no mention of the innumerable other beliefs and half-beliefs that would encircle the man’s and the woman’s relationship.

There are no doubts about it confronting substance issues can be an incredibly complex process. Harmful drinking can cause significant issues not only for the alcohol user but also for members of their family. This can appear in the form of health problems, financial worries, relationship breakdown, and even parenting difficulties. Above all, these families need and deserve support. Family interventions can play a role in this and can help to reduce overall alcohol harm.

Accordingly, if you, or someone you know, have been affected by any of the issues raised in this article there are details of organizations that offer advice and support including several different alcohol treatment center websites available online.

They will be able to provide different types of services that you can use to help support yourself if you are going in for treatment. You might find that they will offer support groups, and will have routine drug/alcohol tests (using something like this 5 panel instant drug test). All of this will be done to help you stay on your path to recovery.

Ultimately, working jointly with alcohol users and their families during treatment has been shown to be effective, particularly where the user is an adolescent.

What do you think should be done to tackle alcohol dependency issues within society? Get in touch and let me know your thoughts on this fascinating topic.

Learn Through Play-Acting

I have mentioned in previous blogs that play is essential for growth and development. Children learn through play-acting. Even getting your children singing can make a huge difference in their growth and development (however, there are plenty of other ways to help your child learn). They imagine themselves to be in all kinds of situations. They see themselves in dangerous predicaments, and then conjure up their own methods of escape. They try out the roles of other family members, imagine themselves rich and poor, old and young, male and female.

This allows children a sense of freedom, independence, and power as they are acting forcibly in all kinds of situations. It goes without saying that physical play automatically helps develop the body and its capabilities.

However, not every child grows and develops at the same pace, and it may worry some parents. It is crucial to keep track of a child’s physical and mental growth and contact a pediatric if you see any behavioral issues, mood swings, interaction issues, lack of social skills, etc. You can also explore pediatric therapy options near your location or online facilities similar to Kinspire to avail the necessary treatment at the early stage.

You could slowly indulge your child in activities with other kids to gradually teach them the concept of social interaction. To a child, play and work are often and the same thing, and parents can utilize imaginative games as a way of reinforcing ideas of health and vitality. When a child is ill-disposed or cranky, or has a headache, or another disorder that does not appear to be serious, parents can utilize this idea: have the child imagine that you are giving it a “better and better pill.” Have the child open its mouth while you place the imaginary pill on its tongue, or have the child imagine picking the pill up and placing it in its mouth. Then give the child a glass of water to wash the pill down, or have the child get the water for himself or herself. Then have the youngster chant, say, three times, “I’ve taken a better and better pill, so I will shortly feel better and better myself.”

There are other steps you can take to instill healthy habits in your child too. For example, we all know how important it is to encourage your child to look after their teeth. Remember to set a positive example for your child by brushing your teeth and using mouthwash together when you get ready in the morning and at night. Furthermore, remember to book regular check-ups with a dentist for you and your child. No one wants to need to have Dental Implants in Washington Heights due to bad oral hygiene after all.

The earlier such a game is begun the better, and as the child grows older you may explain that often an imaginary pill works quite as well — if not better — than a real one.

This does not mean that I am asking parents to substitute imaginary medicine for real medicine, though indeed, I repeat, it may be quite effective. In our society, however, it would be almost impossible to get along without medicine or medical science.

While I want to emphasize that point, I also want to remind that innately and ideally the body is quite equipped to heal itself, and certainly to cure its own momentary headache. We would have to substitute an entirely different learning system, at our present stage, for the body to show its true potentials and healing abilities.

In other cases of a child’s illness, have the child play a healing game, in which he or she playfully imagines being completely healthy again, outdoors and playing; or have the youngster imagine a conversation with a friend, describing the illness as past and gone. Play could also be used even in old people’s homes, for it could revive feelings of spontaneity and give the conscious mind a rest from worrying.

Many ancient and so-called primitive peoples utilized play — and drama, of course — for their healing values, and often their effects were quite as therapeutic as medical science. If your child believes that a particular illness is caused by a virus, then suggest a game in which the youngster imagines the virus to be a small bug that he or she triumphantly chases away with a broom, or sweeps out the door. Once a child gets the idea, the youngster will often make up his or her own game, that will prove most beneficial.

Instead of such procedures, children are often taught to believe that any situation or illness or danger will worsen, and that the least desirable, rather than most desirable, solution will be found. By such mental games, however, stressing the desirable solution, children can learn at an early age to utilize imagination and their minds in a far more beneficial manner.

One of the most disastrous ideas is the belief that illness is sent as a punishment by God.

Unfortunately, such a belief is promoted by many religions. Children who want to be good, therefore, can unfortunately strive for poor health, in the belief that it is a sign of God’s attention. To be punished by God is often seen as preferable to being ignored by God. Adults who hold such views unwittingly often let their children in for a life of turmoil and depression.

In all cases of illness, games or play should be fostered whenever possible, and in whatever form. Many dictatorial religions pointedly refuse to allow their congregations to indulge in any type of play at all, and frown upon it as sinful. Card-playing and family games such as Monopoly are actually excellent practices, and play in any form encourages spontaneity and promotes healing and peace of mind.

Play together, even if only mind games are involved — games with no particular purpose except fun.

Life Clouds: The Way the Universe was “Initially” Seeded

Understand, however, that the term “dream cloud” would serve as well. Yet it is an evocative reference to the way that “Everything That Is” packaged itself in the formation of its numberless realities. Such life clouds “still” exist. Each seed of life, of living, contains within itself its own protective coating, its own placenta of necessary nourishment and environmental circumstances, its own system and branches of probabilities.

z9

Those branches of probabilities act like remote sensors, seeking out those conditions that will be suited to the seed’s best value fulfillment and development. In the simplest of terms, the life clouds will send forth their contents where circumstances best meet their own requirements. On the other hand, the life clouds can see their own worlds completely. Space itself already speaks of a creation “begun,” for no matter how empty space may seem to be it simply appears like a vast cathedral, or tent with walls so distant they they go unperceived.

Probabilities may be swirling everywhere, yet remain of course unperceived in any given instant, so that we might in this odd strange analogy hear a dim brief whirl, as in the whirling of winds, and think it unimportant — while what we heard instead was an entire world of probabilities speed past where we stood.

z6

Our own entire structure of life, therefore, with its acute and precise definitions in the package of reality, is a living life cloud that may or may not be perceived in other realities. That cloud contains within it ever-freshening sources of new creativity. When we dream or sleep or think, we automatically add to other dimensions of a life cloud or dream cloud that emerge from the very actions of our own subjective motions.

Even infinity is being everywhere expressed in each moment, for infinity itself is not something apart from what the universe is. As the universe is a portion of infinity’s creativity, in the light there are new species appearing all of the time, whether or not our own situation allows us to perceive that emergence. We ourselves may be portions of that emergence. From our threshold or focus we would be relatively unaware of our own motion on a new time threshold — for to the beings on that threshold we would have already arrived, while to us in our present their would at best be theoretical, as if they were future selves. From our standpoint they would be, of course.

z12

At other levels our dreams mix and intertwine not only with those of our contemporaries, but with those of all times and places, living or dead in our terms. Each universe — such as the one we know — serves as a small colony of existence, and is infinite within the characteristics of its own nature.

Some of this material will only have meaning to us in the dream state, for that matter, and the words of the blog may stir some of those meanings into our attention. Each portion of all such life clouds seeks value fulfillment, again, but that term itself is woefully inadequate to express the nature of life’s diversity, purpose, or meaning.

z13

This purpose or meaning does not exist apart from our own existence, however. We are a part of life’s meaning and purpose — but those purposes, “coming from”, the source of our own being, are too great to be expressed or described within the structure of our personhood as we understand it. Such understanding is often experienced or sensed, however, sometimes as we are listening to music or when we are deeply stirred by emotion, and when we do not place a great distance between it and ourselves.

Attending to the life that we have with love, beginning “where you are,” will best allow us such a feeling for our own meaning.

z14

What do I mean by such attention? Attention to the moment as it is presented. Attention to the table of rich reality as it appears before us. Attention to the kind of person we are, and to the loving appreciation of our own uniqueness. To attend to our life in such a fashion brings us into a clearer communication with the inner action of our own existence.

z3

The use or non-use of an attribute can have as many ramifications as there are human beings who possess whatever version of it: ranging all the way from being completely buried in a life, to being simply left alone, used just “as is,” or thoroughly transformed in expression

Children’s Innate Love Of The Body And All Of Its Parts

For adults, ideas of health and illness are intimately connected with philosophical, religious, and social beliefs. They are even more entangled with scientific concepts, and with science’s views of life in general. Children, however, are far more innocent, and though they respond to the ideas of their parents, still their minds are open and filled with curiosity. The development of children is important to any parent, and we would do anything to help with their Developing Minds, whether that can help them out, and if your children mean everything to you, find out the cost of life insurance as a way of protecting them.
Children learn in many different ways including hearing, smell and sight which is why things like song education on YouTube are so popular to teach young children. They are also gifted with an almost astounding resiliency and exuberance.

They possess an innate love of the body and all of its parts. They also, feel an eager desire to learn all they can about their own physical sensations and capabilities.

At the same time, young children in particular still possess a feeling of oneness with the universe, and with all of life, even as they begin to separate themselves at certain levels from life’s wholeness to go about the delightful task. Seeing themselves as separate and apart from all other individuals, they still retain an inner comprehension and a memory of having once experienced a oneness with life as a whole.

At that level even illness is regarded simply as a part of life’s experience, however unpleasant it might be. Even at an early age, children joyfully explore all of the possibilities of all sensations possible within their framework — pain as well as joy, frustration as well as satisfaction, and all the while their awareness is propelled by curiosity, wonder, and joy.

They pick up their first ideas about health and disease from parents and doctors, and by the actions of those people to their own discomfiture. Before they can even see, children are already aware of what their parents expect from them in terms of health and disease, so that early patterns of behavior are formed, to which they then react in adulthood.

For now we will speak of children who possess ordinary good health, but who may also have some of the usual childhood “diseases.” Later we will discuss children with exceptionally severe health conditions.

Many children acquire poor health habits through the well-meaning mistakes of their parents. This is particularly true when parents actually reward a child for being ill. In such cases, the ailing child is pampered far more than usual, given extra special attention offered delicacies such as ice cream, let off some ordinary chores, and in other ways encouraged to think of bouts of illness as times of special attention and reward.

I do not mean that ill children should not be treated with kindness, and perhaps a bit of special attention — but the reward should be given for the child’s recovery, and efforts should be made to keep the youngster’s routine as normal as possible. Children often know quite well the reasons for some of their illnesses, for often they learn from their parents that illness can be used as a means to achieve a desired result.

Often parents hide such behavior from themselves. They deliberately close their eyes to some of the reasons for their own illnesses, and this behavior has become so habitual that they are no longer conscious of their own intent.

Children, however, may be quite conscious of the fact that they willed themselves to become ill, in order to avoid school (even if they would have loved to have a ball with the school gym equipment) , an examination, or a coming feared family event. They soon learn that such self-knowledge is not acceptable, however, so they begin to pretend ignorance, quickly learning to tell themselves instead that they have a bug or a virus, or have caught a cold, seemingly for no reason at all.

Parents frequently foster such behavior. Some are simply too busy to question a child about his or her own illness. It is far simpler to give a child aspirin, and send a child to bed with ginger tea and a coloring book.

Such procedures unfortunately rob a child of important self-knowledge and understanding. They begin to feel victims to this or that disorder. Since they have no idea that they themselves caused the problem to begin with, then they do not realize that they themselves possess the power to right the situation. If they are being rewarded for such behavior in the meantime, then the pressure is less, of course, so that bouts of illness or poor health can become ways of attaining attention, favorite status, and reward.

Parents who are aware of these facts can start helping their children at an early age by asking them simply the reasons for their illness. A mother might say: “You don’t need to have a temperature in order to avoid school, or as a way of getting love and attention, for I love you in any case. And if there is a problem at school, we can work it out together, so you don’t have to make yourself ill.” Again, the reasons for such behavior are often quite clear in the child’s mind. So, if the parents begin such questioning and reassurance when the child is young, then the youngster will learn that while illness may be used to attain a desired result, there are far better, healthier ways of achieving an end result.

Some parents, unfortunately, use the nature of suggestion in the most undesirable way, so that a child is often told that he or she is sickly, or weak or overly sensitive, and not as robust as other youngsters. If that kind of behavior is continued, then the child soon takes such statements as true, and begins to act upon them, until they do indeed become only too real in the youngster’s everyday experience.

Good health is closely related, of course, to a family’s beliefs about the body. If parents believe that the body is somehow an inferior vehicle for the spirit, of if they simply view the body as unreliable or weak and vulnerable, then children will at an early age begin to consider good health as a rarity, and learn to take depression, poor spirits, and bodily aches and pains to be a natural, normal condition of life.

If, on the other hand, parents view the body as a healthy, dependable vehicle of expression and feeling, then their children will look at their own bodies in the same fashion. It is very important that parents express a fond affection towards each other, and toward their children. In this way most children are assured of their parent’s love, and hence need not resort to illness as a way of gaining attention or testing a parent’s’ love and devotion.

There is no natural reason for children to feel a sense of shame concerning any bodily part. No portion of the body should be spoken about in secret, hushed tones. Each child should be told that his body, or her body, is a precious private possession, however, so that it is easy to build up a desirable feeling of bodily privacy, without any hint of shame or guilt.

It goes without saying that parents should hold the bodies of their male and female children in equal favor, so that one is not considered inferior to the other. Each child should be educated as early as possible by their parents, so that the youngsters are repeatedly reminded of the body’s natural resources and healing abilities.

Parents who are actually quite worried about their children’s’ susceptibility to illness often go overboard, stressing all kinds of sports and sports-related projects, but the children sense their parents’ unspoken fears, and they try to reassure their parents through achieving high goals or merits in sports programs.

There is no area of thought or belief that does not touch upon the subject of health in one way or another. Therefore, throughout my blogs we will be devoted to many ideas that may at first seem unrelated to the topic at hand.

“The Health and Disease States”

Before we discuss the human situation more specifically in relation to health and “dis-ease” — let us consider the so-called states of health and disease as they apply in planetary terms, and as they operate in all species. This will give us a far vaster framework in which to understand the ways in which each individual person fits into the entire picture.

I used quotation marks around the entire heading for this blog to stress the point that the heading is written with our own ideas of health and disease in mind. Actually, however, regardless of appearances and misreadings of natural events, the very idea of disease as we usually think of it, is chauvinistic in health rather than in sexual terms.

Basically speaking, there are only life forms. Through their cooperation, our entire world sustains its reality, substance, life, and form. If there were no diseases as we think of them, there would be no life forms at all. Our reality demands a steady fluctuation of physical and nonphysical experience. Most of us, my blog readers, understand that if we did not sleep we would die. The conscious withdrawal of mental life during life makes normally conscious experience possible. In the same way, there must, of course, be a rhythm of physical death, so that the experience of normal physical life is possible. It goes without saying that without death and disease — for the two go hand in hand — then normal corporeal existence would be impossible.

For all of man’s and woman’s fears of disease, however, the species has never been destroyed by it, and life has continued to function with overall stability, despite what certainly seems to be the constant harassment and threat of illness and disease. The same is true, generally speaking, of all species. Plants and insects fit into this larger picture, as do al fish and fowl.

I have said elsewhere that no species is ever really eradicated — and in those terms, no disease, or virus, or germ, ever vanishes completely from the face of the earth. In the first place, viruses change their form, appearing in our terms sometimes as harmless and sometimes as lethal. So-called states of health and disease are also changing constantly — and in those vaster terms, a disease in itself is a kind of health, for it makes life and health itself possible.

Later we will discuss what this means to us, the individual person, but for now, I want to stress the fact that while it may seem natural enough to consider disease as a threat, an adversary or an enemy, this is not the case.

The subject matter of suffering is certainly vitally connected to the subject at hand, but basically speaking, disease and suffering are not necessarily connected. Suffering and death are not necessarily connected either. The sensations of suffering and the pain do exist. Some are indeed quite natural reactions, and others are learned reactions to certain events. Walking barefoot on a bed of fire would most likely cause most of my readers, to feel the most acute pain — while in some primitive, societies, under certain conditions the same situation could result instead in feelings of ecstasy or joy.

We want to discuss “disease” as it exists apart from suffering for now, then. Then we will discuss pain and suffering and their implications. I do want to mention, however, that pain and suffering are also obviously vital, living sensations — and therefore are a part of the body’s repertoire of possible feelings and sensual experience. They are also a sign, therefore, of life’s vitality, and are in themselves often responsible for a return to health when they act as learning communications.

Pain, therefore, by being unpleasant, stimulates the individual to rid himself or herself of it, and thereby often promotes a return to the state of health.

Even in situations that involve a so-called host-and-parasite relationship, there is a cooperative process. Fleas, for example, actually help increase circulation, and constantly comb animal’s hair. At minute levels they also consume some bodily wastes, and creatures even smaller than they are. On the other hand, they can cause a lot of discomfort for animals too. Not only that, but they can become a nuisance in the home too, as they can spread. They are tiny creatures, so they aren’t very noticeable, but sometimes you might be able to see them bouncing from one place to another. It’s not a great thought. With this being said, if this is something that you are currently noticing in your home (after your pet had fleas), it may be worth speaking to pest control experts  (or one closer to where you live) to help you get rid of these pests and allow you to take control of your home once again!

Many diseases are actually health-promoting processes. Chicken pox, measles, and other like diseases in childhood in their own way “naturally inoculate” the body, so that it is able to handle other elements that are a part of the body and the body’s environment.

Let’s get back to fleas. They also keep the immune system active and flexible. While we’re on the topic of fleas, no one wants them to invade their homes. This is where the services of professionals such as a pest control company to help eliminate the problem before it gets any worse.

When civilized children are medically inoculated against such diseases, however, they usually do not show the same symptoms, and to an important extent the natural protective processes are impeded. Such children may not come down with the disease against which they are medically protected, then — but they may indeed therefore become “prey” to other diseases later in life that would not otherwise have occurred.

I am speaking generally here, for remember that our individual beliefs, thoughts, and emotions cause our reality, so no person dies ahead of his or her time. The individual chooses the time of death. It is true, however, that many cancers and conditions such as AIDS result because the immunity system has been so tampered with that the body has not been allowed to follow through with its own balancing procedures.

Again, however, no individual dies of cancer or AIDS, or any other condition, until they themselves have set the time.

There are many other conditions to be taken into consideration, for such diseases certainly do have strong social connections. They occur in social species. This does not mean that they are necessarily contagious at all, but that they do bear an overall relationship to the give-and-take between individuals and their social and natural frameworks.

Continued social interaction during one of the biggest global pandemics that there has ever been, the coronavirus outbreak of 2020 has already seen thousands upon thousands of deaths worldwide. Not only can it have a detrimental impact on an individual’s health, but it can also have devastating consequences on the economy, and small businesses in particular. To combat this, the President of the United States of America has signed a relief bill of $2 trillion to help give smaller and medium-sized businesses the opportunity to continue moving forwards. You can read more on the Works Coronavirus articles.

A city might be overrun by rats, for example — a fine situation for the rats if not the populace — but the entire picture would include unrest in the populace at large, a serve dissatisfaction with social conditions, feelings of dejection, and all of those conditions together would contribute to the problem. Rat poison may indeed add its own dangers, filling other small birds or rodents, and contaminating animal food supplies. Nor are insects invulnerable to such conditions, in such an hypothesized picture. Actually, all forms of life in that certain environment would be seeking for a balanced return to a more advantageous condition.

We may wonder why so many forms of life would be involved in what might seem to be self-destructive behavior, often leading to death — but remember that no consciousness considers death an end or a disaster, but views it instead as a means to of continuation of corporeal and non-corporeal existence.

I am not advising my blogs readers to refuse to have their children vaccinated, since we now have vaccination into consideration because of the prominence of it in society. It is very possible, however, that science itself will in time discover the unfortunate side effects of many such procedures, and begin to reevaluate the entire subject.

It is true that some native populations — particularly in the past — were free of many of the childhood diseases that are considered natural by western medicine. It is also true, of course, that some primitive societies have lost large numbers of their populations to disease. Some of those instances, however, were caused precisely by the sudden introduction of western medicine.

I am not condemning western medicine per se, however, but merely pointing out its many detrimental aspects. Medicinal science is also in a state of transition, and it is just as important — if not more so — that it examine its concepts as well as its techniques. Take for example the recent explosion of medical cannabis and the industry, in not only the United States, but the potential reform of the social perception on cannabis worldwide even after thousands of years of recorded medical benefit and usage. No one, and I mean no one has the slightest clue as to how using this medicine in the way we are now, is going to affect the human race in the years to come, whether it be detrimental or advantageous to our evolution. Either way, if you find THC and CBD products to be of positive affect to your current health, look at cbd MD discount codes so you can start saving money on your medicine.

The idea of using animals for experimentation has far more drawbacks than advantages; there is the matter of one kind of consciousness definitely taking advantage of another kind, and thus going counter to nature’s cooperative predisposition.

In the distant past some ancient civilizations did indeed use animals in such a fashion, but in a far different framework. The doctors or priests humbly stated their problems verbally and through ritualistic dancing, and then requested the help of the animal — so that the animals were not sacrificed, in those terms, nor taken advantage of. Instead, they united in a cooperative venture, in which animals and man and woman all understood that no consciousness truly died but only changed its form.

Animals have indeed often been quite helpful to man and woman in various healing situations and encounters, but in all such cases these were cooperative ventures.

This leads me of course to at least mention here that cruel methods used in the slaughtering of animals and fowls for human consumption. The creatures are treated as if they possessed no feeling or consciousness of their own — and such attitudes show a most unfortunate misreading of natural events. As a direct result, at least as many diseases develop through such procedures as would exist in a highly primitive society with unsanitary conditions.

In that kind of setting, however, balances would right the themselves because the basic understanding between living creatures would be maintained. We cannot divorce philosophy from action, and the cruelty in slaughterhouses would not be perpetrated if it were not for distorted philosophies dealing with the survival of the fittest on the one hand, and the egotistical assumption that God gave man and woman animals to do with as man and woman wished.

Remember that each segment of life is motivated by value fulfillment, and is therefore always attempting to use and develop all of its abilities and potentials, and to express itself in as many probable ways as possible, in a process that is cooperatively — correction: in a process that takes into consideration the needs and desires of each other segment of life.

The very existence of certain kinds of viruses provides safety against many other diseases, whether or not those viruses even exist in an active manner. It is obvious, of course, that the overall physical stability of the earth is possible because of the ever-occurring storms, “natural disasters,” and other seeming calamities. Yet such events promote the earth’s great, bountiful food supplies, and serve to redistribute the plant’s resources.

In the same fashion, disease also, in the overall picture, promote the health and well-being of life in all of its aspects. Value fulfillment operates within microbes and nations, within individual creatures and entire species, and it unites all of life’s manifestations so that indeed creatures and their environments are united in an overall cooperative venture — a venture in which each segment almost seeks to go beyond itself in creativity, growth, and expression. In a smaller, individual framework, each man and woman, then is motivated by this same value fulfillment.

We will shortly see how diseases are caused by the detriments set up against value fulfillment, often because of fears, doubts, or misunderstandings — and how other diseases may actually lead to instances of value fulfillment that are misread or misinterpreted.

I also want to stress here that all aspects of life experience not only sensations but emotional feelings. Therefore, there is a kind of innate gallantry that operates among all segments of life — a gallantry that deserves our respect and consideration. We should have respect, then, for the cells of our body, the thoughts of our mind, and try to understand that even the smallest of creatures shares with us the emotional experience of life’s triumphs and vulnerabilities.

Health Suggestions

Suggestions are usually statements directed toward a particular action or hypothesis. To a large extent, suggestions are ties into conscious thought processes, following the dictates of reason. For example: “If thus and thus be so, then thus and thus must follow.” There is no magic connected with suggestions — but repeated often enough, and believed in fervently, such suggestions do indeed take on a deeply habitual nature. They are no longer examined, but taken for literal truth.

They are then handed over to more automatic levels of personality, where they trigger the specific actions that are so strongly implied. Many such suggestions are “old-hat idioms.” They belong to the past, and again they escape the questioning and examination that are given to new ideas.

These suggestions may be remarkably long-standing, therefore, and consist of beliefs received in childhood. Accepted now in the present, non-critically, they may still affect health and well-being. Such suggestions can be beneficial and supportive, or negative and detrimental. Here are some examples that should be quite familiar to many people. They consist of suggestions given to children:

“If you go out in the rain without your rubber boots, you will catch cold.”

“If you are too talkative or demonstrative, people will not like you.”

“If you run you will fall down.”

There are many variations, of course, such as: “If you go out in rainy weather, you’ll get pneumonia,” or: “If you tell a lie your nose will grow.”

These suggestions and others like them are often given to children by their parents with the best of intentions. When they are young, the offspring will accept some such suggestions uncritically, coming as they do from a revered adult, so that the suggestions are almost interpreted as commands.

A suggestion like: “If you go swimming too soon after lunch, you will drown,” is extremely dangerous, for it predicts behavior of a disastrous nature that would follow almost automatically after the first act is performed.Obvious, children who go into the water right after eating do not all drown. The suggestion itself can lead to all kinds of nervous symptoms, however — panics, or stomach cramps — that can persist well into adulthood.

Such suggestions can be removed, as we will explain shortly.

There are other kinds of suggestions that involve identification. A child may be told: “You are just like your mother; she was always nervous and moody.” Or: “You are fat because your father was fat.”

These are all statements leading toward a certain hypothesis. Again, the problem is that often the hypotheses remain unquestioned. We end up with structured beliefs unexamined, that are then automatically acted upon.

The suggestions we have given so far are predictives; they actually predict dire events of one kind or another, following a given original action.

There are many of these, dealing particularly with age also. many people believe fervently that with approaching age they will meet a steady, disastrous deterioration in which the senses and the mind will be dull, and the body, stricken with disease, will lose all of its vigor and agility. Many young people believe such nonsense, and therefore they set themselves up to meet the very conditions they so fear.

The mind grows wiser with age when it is allowed to do so. There is even an acceleration of thought and inspiration, much like that experienced in the adolescent years, that suddenly brings a new understanding to the aged individual, and provides an impetus that should help the person to achieve greater comprehension — a comprehension that should quell all fears of death.

Thoughts and beliefs do indeed bring about physical alterations. They can — even and often do — change genetic messages.

There are diseases that people believe are inherited, carried from one generation to another by a faulty genetic communication. Obviously, many people with, for example, a genetic heritage of arthritis do not come down with the disease themselves, while others indeed are so afflicted. The difference is one of belief.

But regardless of whether you believe in it or not, if you do experience any possible symptoms of arthritis, like pain, as well as restricted movement around the joints, it could mean that you have it. This could possibly affect your quality of life, so looking into remedies, like the best CBD oil UK products on the market, could be the perfect course of treatment to go down if you feel the full effects of this condition. You should always speak with a medical practitioner beforehand if you are concerned about anything regarding this ailment.

The people who have accepted the suggestion uncritically that they will inherit such a malady do then seem to inherit it: they experience the symptoms. Actually, the belief itself may have changed a healthy genetic message into an unhealthy one. Ideally, a change of belief would remedy the situation.

People are not simply swung will-nilly by one negative suggestion or another, however. Each person has an entire body of beliefs and suggestions — and these are quite literally reflected in the physical; body itself.

All practical healing deals with the insertion of positive suggestions and the removal of negative ones. As we mentioned earlier, each smallest atom or cell contains its own impetus toward growth and value fulfillment. In other words, they are literally implanted with positive suggestions, biologically nurtured, so to that extent it is true to say that in a certain fashion negative suggestions are unnatural, leading away from life’s primary goals. Negative suggestions could be compared to static sounding on an otherwise clear program.

Worry, fear, and doubt are detrimental to good health, of course, and these are very often caused by the officially held belief of society. These mental concerns – depression, anxiety, and stress – are often addressed by people using things like the best-rated CBD brands in the UK to alleviate such issues.

Those beliefs paint a dire picture, in which any given situation is bound to deteriorate. Any conceivable illness will worsen, and any possible catastrophe can be encountered. If you fear your personal health is deteriorating it should be of importance to get your physical health checked over and undergo some tests such as blood and urine samples. Many healthcare providers can offer such tests and checkups, for instance, take a look if there is a local Southwest Care Center or similar health facility close to you. Don’t allow your personal health to worsen to the point of possible catastrophe.

Such beliefs discourage feelings of curiosity, joy, or wonder. They inhibit playful activity or spontaneous behavior. They cause a physical situation in which the body is placed in a state of defensive aggression. Under such conditions it seems only rational to look for the worm in the apple, so to speak, and to expect pain or danger in each new experience or encounter. When thoughts like this are taking over, it can be difficult to take back control and you may need to resort to some homemade natural remedies. For example, you can find out how to make shatter at home which will help to relax those anxious thoughts so you can think more clearly.

Play is very important — indeed, vital — attribute in the development of growth and fulfillment. Children play naturally, and so do animals. For that matter, insects, birds, fish, and all kinds of life play. Even ants and honeybees play. Their sociability is not just a matter of constant work within a hive or an any mound. This playful activity is, in fact, the basis for their organized behavior, and they “play” at adult behavior before they assume their own duties.

Creatures play because the activity is joyful, and spontaneous and beneficial, because it activates all portions of the organism — and again, in play youngsters imitate adult patterns of operation that lead finally to their own mature activity.

When people become ill, worried or fearful, one of the first symptoms of trouble is a lack of pleasure, a gradual discontinuance of playful action, and an over-concentration upon personal problems. In other words, illness is often first marked by a lack of zest or exuberance.

This retreat from pleasure begins to cut down upon normal activity, new encounters, or explorations that might in themselves help relieve the problem by opening up new options. Such a person becomes dejected looking — unsmiling and somber, leading others to comment upon such a dejected countenance. Comments such as these: “You look tired,” or: “What’s the matter, don’t you feel well?” and other such remarks often simply reinforce the individual’s earlier sense of dejection, until finally this same kind of give-and-take leads to a situation in which the individual and his fellows begin to intermix in an negative rather than a positive manner.

I do not mean to imply that it is always detrimental to make such queries as “Are you ill?” or “Are you tired?” Such questions do indeed predict their own answers. When a person is feeling in good health, exuberant and alive, such queries will be nonchalantly shoved aside — they will have no effect whatsoever. But constant questions of such a nature do not help an individual who is having difficulties — and in fact too frequent expressions of compassion can also worsen a person’s state of mind, stressing the idea that he or she must be very ill indeed to attract such feelings of compassion. It is far better, then, to make no comment at all under such conditions. I am not speaking of genuine questions of concern so much as rather automatic, unthinking, negative comments.

On the other hand, it is an excellent practice to comment upon another individual’s obvious zest or energy or good spirits. In such a way, we reward positive behavior, and may indeed begin a chain of positive activity instead of continuing a chain of negative reactions.

I am not telling you to gush out a steady stream of positive suggestions, whether or not they bear any relation to the situation at hand.

I am saying that it is far better to look on the most hoped-for solution to any situation, and to voice that attitude rather than to expect the poorest outcome, or express the most dire of attitudes. There are some issues highly vital to health and happiness, that are quite difficult to describe. They are felt intrinsically. They are a part of the esthetics of nature itself. Flowers are not just brightly colored for man’s and woman’s enjoyment, for example, but because color is a part of the flower’s own esthetic system. They enjoy their own brilliance, and luxuriate in their own multitudinous hues.

The insects also appreciate flower’s profusion of color, and also for esthetic reasons. I am saying, therefore that even insects have an esthetic sense, and again, that each creature, and each plant, or natural entity, has its own sense of value fulfillment, seeking the greatest possible fulfillment and extension of its own innate abilities.

This sense of value fulfillment, once more, benefits not only the individual, but its species and all other species. In a manner of speaking, then, the picture of nature is painted by its own consciously vital, esthetic portions. Each portion of nature is also equipped to react to changing conditions, and therefore deals with its own kind of predictive behavior, so that it can grow today into tomorrow’s condition.

Nature always works with probabilities. In human terms, this means that each person has a vast bank of avenues that lead to value fulfillment, and that individual abilities will ideally form their own boulevards of expression.

Poor health, or simply unhappy situations, arise only when the individual meets too many detours, or encounters too many blocks to the expression of value fulfillment.

With man’s and woman’s own exteriorized ego, this leads to the question of free will and the making of conscious choices.

The human individual is aware of large numbers of probable activities. Each individual person literally possesses far more abilities than can be adequately expressed in any given lifetime. This insures a large profusion of possible actions from which the individual can draw according to changing circumstances.

Each person can also intrinsically sense the direction in which he or she is most inclined. Inspiration will send nudges towards certain activities. It will be easier and more delightful for each person to move and grow in certain directions, rather than others.

In this discussion, I am not merely speaking in terms of exterior accomplishments, or goals, though these are important. Many people, however, will find they have a natural knack for relationships with others, in which the known value cannot be judged, as it can, say, in the works of an artist or writer.

Instead, such people will indeed perform a kind of artistry of relationships, composing, say, symphonic, emotional compositions that indeed play as masterfully upon the emotions as the pianist upon the keys. By looking at our own abilities lie by following the shape of our own impulses and inclinations. We cannot learn about ourselves by studying what is expected of us by others — but only by asking ourselves what we expect from oneself, and discovering for ourselves in what direction our abilities lie.

There are certain simple steps that can be followed, whenever we find oneself in a difficult situation, whether the condition is one of poor health, a stressful personal involvement with another, a financial dilemma, or whatever.

These steps seem very obvious, and perhaps too easy — but they will bring an immediate sense of ease and a peace of mind while our inner reserves are being released and activated. I have mentioned these steps many times in previous blogs, because they are so vital in clearing the conscious mind, and bringing some relief to the frightened ego.

  1. Immediately begin to live in the present as much as possible. Try to become as aware as you can of present sense-data — all of it. Often, while you are in pain, for example, you concentrate upon that sensation alone, ignoring the feelings of ease that may be felt by other portions of the body, and unaware of the conglomeration of sounds, sights, and impressions that are also in the immediate environment. This procedure will immediately lessen the pressure of the problem itself, whatever it is, and give you a sense of refreshment.
  2. Refuse to worry. This fits in automatically with Step 1, of course. Tell yourself you can worry all you want tomorrow, or on some other occasion — but resolve not to worry in the present moment.
  3. When your thoughts do touch upon you particular problem in that present moment, imagine the best possible solution to the dilemma. Do not wonder how or why or when the ideal solution will come, but see it in your mind’s eye as accomplished. Or if you are not particularly good at visual imagery, then try to get the feeling of thanksgiving and joy that you would feel if the problem was solved to you completed satisfaction.

These steps will allow you breathing time, and actually help minimize the pressure of your situation whatever it is. Then quieted you’ll be able to consider other steps that may more directly address your particular solution.

This endeavor itself will also activate your own dream mechanisms, and you’ll find that new creative understanding to the task.

Quackery In The Majority Of Medical Circles

There are many large issues that touch upon the circumstances involving the health of individuals, and these concern questions that we have not yet discussed in any of my blogs.

They will indeed be covered in later blogs, but for now we will only be concerned with them in a general way. They are more divorced from ordinary medical thought, and would indeed be considered sheer quackery in the majority of medical circles.

The fact is that each individual lives many lives, and that the inner self is quite aware of its own spiritual and physical dexterity. The body consciousness alone understands that its physical existence in any one life is dependent upon its physical death — and that that death will assure it of still another existence. The “drive for survival” is, therefore, a drive that leads to death and beyond it, for all of consciousness understands that it survives through many forms and conditions.

Reincarnation, therefore, also is part of the larger framework in which any individual’s health and well-being must be considered. The reincarnational influences are most apparent in what would be considered bodily defects dating from birth, and these will be discussed later on in my blog. Injuries or bodily defects at birth could happen due to many earthly reasons like medical malpractice or negligence (visit the website to know how lawyers can help in these cases) on the part of doctors and the medical team at the facility of birth. While it must be understood that the possibility of medical oversight is often rare, the idea of reincarnation is something that is often believed to be true – a form of karmic retribution. In the following excerpts, we shall see how these reincarnational ideas have shaped our identity and thought as the human race.

Reincarnational influences are not nearly as rigid as many believers in the concept think. That is, reincarnational influences usually leave many options to an individual in any case. It is quite simplistic, for example, to say, as some people do, that any given particular event from a past life leads inevitably to a particularly matching effect in a present one. There are too many other elements that also apply to the human personality. No one is”fated” to have bad health. No one is punished in one life for “evil” activities in a previous one.

A person who has been cruel in one life may choose to experience conditions in the next life in which he or she understands the meaning of cruelty, but this does not mean that such a person would then necessarily experience an entire lifetime as a victim.

New learning would always be involved, and thus new options would always be open. There as, in fact, so many distorted ideas connected with the concept of reincarnation in general, that I think it far better to simply concentrate upon the idea of multiple existences. Because of the true nature of time, and the interrelationships of consciousness, a future life affects a past one, for in actuality all of these existences happen simultaneously. All systems are open-ended, particularly psychological ones. In greater terms, we are working “at all levels” and at all of our own existences at once, even though it is useful sometimes to think of reincarnation as a series of lives, one after the other.

The concept of the survival of the fittest has had a considerably detrimental effect in many areas of human activity — particularly in the realm of medical ideology and practice.

The whole idea was developed in the most mechanistic of terms, stressing competition among all aspects of life, pitting one life form against another, and using physical strength and dexterity, swiftness and efficiency, as the prime conditions for the survival of any individual or species.

It is quite true, however, that in the wild many animals protect and provide for wounded or disabled members, and that the wisdom that comes with age is indeed appreciated even in the animal kingdom. The survival of the fittest concept, however, has been exaggerated far above those of cooperation.

Politically as well as medically, such distortions have led to unfortunate conditions: Aryan-supremacy biological ideas fostered in the second world war, the concentration upon “the perfect body,” and other distortions. The idea of the ideal body has often been held up to the populace at large, and this often sets forth a stylized “perfect” physique that actually could be matched by few individuals. Any variations are frowned upon, and any birth defects considered in the most suspicious of lights. Some schools of thought, then, have it that only the genetically superior should be allowed to reproduce, and there are scientists who believe that all defects can be eradicated through judicious genetic planning.

As a result of such long-held theories, people have grown distrustful of their own bodies. The handicapped are often given messages, even by the medical profession, that make them feel like misfits, unworthy to survive. When people become ill, they often blame themselves in such a way that unnecessary guilt is the result.

In the past some religious groups have also promoted beliefs that illness is a sign of God’s punishment, or vengeance for sins committed against his “goodness.”

The same beliefs often spread in economic areas in which people who met pleasure in God’s eyes were therefore gifted with wealth and prosperity, as well as good health. Therefore God was seen to be on the side of those who competed most strenuously, so that to be poor or sick was almost seen as a sign of God’s disfavor. All such concepts appear in one form or another at most official levels of thought and education. The whole idea of the esthetics of nature is forgotten — a subject that we will touch upon further as we continue our discussion in future blogs.

This blog consists of a potpourri of different ideas — merely to hint at the multitudinous issues connected with health and well-being.

Our ideas about ourselves are again, vital in the larger context of a healthy life. Everyone takes care of their health in different ways. Some visit heart specialists (from clinics like https://cvgcares.com/) for regular checkups and to lead a healthy lifestyle, while others tend to look for holistic and self-care methods of healing. If you want to explore some alternative methods of doing this, you can see them here. Moreover, the condition of our heart is affected, for example, by our own feelings about it. If we consider oneself to be coldhearted, or heartless, those feelings will have a significant effect upon that physical organ. If we feel broken-hearted, then we will also have that feeling reflected in one way or another in the physical organ itself.

Obviously, as I mentioned earlier, each individual also has many options open. Everyone who feels brokenhearted does not die of heart failure, for example. The subject of health cannot be considered in an isolated fashion, but must be seen in that greater context that gives health itself a value and a meaning. As mentioned earlier, each person will also try to fulfill their own unique abilities, and to “fill out” the experience of life as fully as possible.

If an individual is hampered in that attempt strongly and persistently enough, then the dissatisfaction and frustration will be translated into a lack of physical exuberance and vitality. There is always an unending reservoir of energy at the command of each person, however, regardless of circumstances, and we will also discuss the ways in which we can learn to tap that source and better our own health situation.

The sooner we can rid ourselves of rigid beliefs about the survival of the fittest, the better we will be. All philosophies that stress the idea of the body’s impurity or degradation should also be seen as detrimental to bodily and spiritual integrity. Such beliefs clutter up our conscious mind with negative suggestions that can only frighten the exterior ego and impede the great strength and vitality that is our heritage from lending us the fullest possible strength and support.

In later blogs we will indeed discuss various methods of healing, conventional and unconventional. Medical technology alone, however expert, cannot really heal a broken heart, of course. Such a healing can only take place through understanding and through expressions of love. In other words, through emotional transplants rather than physical ones alone. The emotional factors are extremely vital, both in the development in the healing of all dis-eases.

We will not stress particular diseases in my blogs, and mention symptoms only to identify the case associated with such conditions. It is actually far more important that we stress the symptoms of health and those methods, beliefs, and healings that promote them.

The Broken-Hearted, Heartless Medical Industry

Many psychiatrists and psychologists now realize that a disturbed client cannot be helped sufficiently unless the individual is considered along with his or her relationship to the family, and also in relation to the environment. Old-time family doctors understood the patient’s sensitivity to family members and to the environment, of course, and they often felt a lively sympathy and understanding that the practitioners of modern medicine often seem to have forgotten.

I am speaking of a deeper relationship to the environment, however, and of the environment’s symbolic as well as practical aspects in relation to health and illness. Our ideas about our own body, our mind, the universe, and our part in it, and our state of health, to our sense of well-being, or our feelings of dis-ease.

In my next blog, I would like to look more specifically at the importance of symbolism in our minds, our body, and our environment.

Modern medical science largely considers the human body to be a kind of mechanical model, a sort of vehicle like a car that needs to be checked by a garage every so often.

As an automobile is put together at an assembly line, so the body is simply seen as a very efficient machine put together in nature’s “factory.” If all the parts are in their proper places, and functioning smoothly, then the machine should give as excellent service as any well-running automobile — or so it seems.

All of the automobile’s parts, however, are alone responsible for its operation as long as it has a responsible driver. There are, however, hidden relationships that exist between various parts of the body — and the parts themselves are hardly mechanical. They change in every moment.

With the latest developments in medical technology, there are all kinds of heart treatments and operations that can be performed. Healthy hearts will maintain a consistent heartbeat, whereas unhealthy hearts may experience some irregularity in their rhythm. There are supplements like lypo spheric vitamin c that can help lower the risk of heart-related issues like heart disease and lower blood pressure. The risks can also be prevented by consuming different types of plums and other such fruits/vegetables that contain the phytochemicals and nutrients required to reduce inflammation. Still, just like with anything health-related, if these issues continue despite taking necessary measures, it would be beneficial to visit a doctor to get checked professionally. Anything related to the heart can be dangerous, but can sometimes be treated by some medical equipment, such as the Philips Heart start and m5070a battery which can help to shock the heart into a normal rhythm. There is some heart equipment that is small, and there are also more serious treatments that can be used, such as heart transplants. In many cases, even when hearts are repaired through medical technology, the same trouble recurs at a later date, or the patient recovers only to fall prey to a different, nearly fatal or fatal, disease. This is not always the case, by any means, but when such a person does recover fully and maintains good health, it is because beliefs, attitudes, and feelings have changed for the better and because the person “has a heart” again, in other words, because the patient himself or herself has regulated the will to live.

Many people who have heart trouble feel that they have “lost the heart” for life. They may feel broken-hearted for any of many reasons. They may feel heartless or imagine themselves to be so cold-hearted that they punish themselves literally by trying to lose their hearts.

With many people having such difficulties, the addition of love in the environment may work far better than any heart operation. A new pet given to a bereaved individual has saved more people from needing heart operations than any physical. In other words, “a love transplant” in the environment may work far better overall than a heart-transplant operation, or a bypass, or whatever; in such ways, the heart is allowed to heal itself.

In later blogs, we will discuss more thoroughly distorted ideas about the self and the body in particular that stand in the way of natural exuberance and good health.

Without going more deeply into the reasons for such beliefs until later, let me discuss several of the ways in which they impede general well-being. Right now it is socially fashionable to take up some kind of exercise, gym work, or strenuous sport, so it seems obvious that the general populace must have great regard for the physical body. Unfortunately, large segments of the population feel uncomfortable with their bodies and do not trust the body’s spontaneity, strength, or overall dependability. They have been taught that medical science knows more about bodies than any private individual knows about their own bodies and their ways and workings.

People have been taught to trust X-rays for a picture of what is happening within their bodies and cautioned not to trust their own feelings. Some public-service announcements stress the “fact” that the individual can be gravely threatened by high blood pressure, for example, even though he or she feels in excellent physical health.

The populace has embarked upon this strong exercise program because of a mixture of very unfortunate beliefs. Since they feel divorced from their bodies, many people suspect what is going on inside. Some religious beliefs suggest that the body is impure, and the heir to disease and infirmity. Often people exercise over-zealously to punish their bodies, or to force the body to respond at its best since they do not trust it to do otherwise.

In many instances, people exercise and clean their teeth quite simply because they are afraid of what will happen if they do not. Professionals at McCrae Dental Surgery or places similar know that poor oral health can contribute to heart disease and often suggest these actions to reduce the likelihood of this eventuality. They may run or brush to avoid heart disease, for example, while their own fear can help to promote the very eventuality they fear.

The body’s health is the expression of inner well-being. Poor health is an expression also, and it may serve many purposes. It goes without saying that some people become ill rather than change their activities and their environments. They may also become ill, of course, to force themselves to make changes.

I do not mean to imply that exercise is detrimental to good health. It is true, however, that the reason that we exercise is actually more important than the exercises that we do perform. The reason can promote our good health or actually impede it.

Thus far in my blogs, we have begun to touch upon the multitudinous issues involved in good health or in its absence. Before we are finished we hope to give a far greater framework in which to consider our own well-being and the many options that are open to any individual. We will discuss the species connected with a long, healthy, fairly happy lifetime, and those involved with early death, severe illnesses, and suicide — particular with the suicides of fairly young persons.

Earlier we spoke about the incredible impulse on the part of all of nature toward exuberance and well-being. It is as if nature always tries to exceed itself, and certainly to increase the quality of its existence. The individual person is also involved in an ever-continuing process to increase the quality of life as it exists at all levels of personal experience. Reality is so constructed that each individual seeking fulfillment does so not at the expense of others, but in such a way that the quality of life is increased for all.

Each person impulsively tries to grow into his or her sensed potentials — even when they are not immediately apparent.

In one way or another, each segment of consciousness is aware of each other segment, through an instantaneous communication that exists on many levels. It is important that our ideas circulate freely, and that the ideas of the peoples of the world circulate freely, just as it is important that our individual body has good circulation. Our ideas about our own health are even more important than those steps we take to promote it.

Our ideas about foreign countries, allies, and enemies, also have a vital role to play in how we handle our own bodily defenses. People who are afraid that their nation will be invaded by an enemy will often also consider viruses or diseases to be enemies, ever about to threaten their personal survival. Such attitudes will, of course, be detrimental to feelings of well-being, health, and exuberance. While it is true that medical technology has many serious defects, it is also true that many people believe in the medical profession to such a degree that it would be nearly impossible for them to survive in good health without it.

In later blogs, we will also discuss the ways in which we can use our own beliefs about the medical profession to reinforce our overall sense of health, rather than to undermine it.

The Human Consciousness And Relationship To The Body

We know that we have a conscious mind, of course. We also possess what is often called the subconscious, and this merely consists of feelings, thoughts or experiences that are connected to our conscious mind, but would be considered excess baggage if we had to be aware of them all of the time. Otherwise they would vie for our attention, and interfere with the present decisions that are so important.

If we tried to hold all of those subconscious memories uppermost in our mind all of the time, then we would literally be unable to think or act in the present moment at all. We do more or less have a certain access to our own subconscious mind, however. It is perhaps easier to imagine a continuum of consciousness, for we have a body consciousness also, and that body consciousness is itself made up of the individual consciousness of each molecule that forms all parts of the body itself.

It is sometimes fashionable to say that men and women have conscious minds, subconscious minds, and unconscious minds — but there is no such thing as an unconscious mind. The body consciousness is highly conscious. We are simply not usually conscious of it. Reasoning takes time. It deals with problem-solving — it forms an hypothesis, and then seeks to prove it by trial and error.

If we had to use that kind of process before we could move a muscle, we would get nowhere at all, of course. The other portions of our consciousness, then, deal with a kind of automatic thinking, and operate with a kind of knowledge that takes no time in our terms.

We might say that the varying portions of our own consciousness operate at several different speeds. Translations between one portion of consciousness and another goes on constantly, so that in formation is translated from one “speed” to another. Perhaps we can begin to understand, then, that the whole picture of health or illness must be considered from many more viewpoints than we might earlier have supposed. Many of us have been saturated by conventional, distorted ideas concerning health and illness in general. We might think, for example, of the body being invaded by viruses, or attacked by a particular disease, and these ideas, then, may make us question. We might well wonder why the body consciousness does not simply rise up and cast off any threatening diseases: why would the body allow certain cells to go berserk, or outgrow themselves? The very concept of the immunity system suggests, at least, the disease invader against which the body’s immunity system must or should surely defend itself.

We usually think of our conscious mind as our ego. It is directed toward action in physical life. Many schools of thought seem to have the curious ideas that the ego is inferior to other portions of the self, or “selfish,” and imagine it to be definitely of a lower quality than the inner self, of the soul.

In the first place, it is really impossible to separate portions of the self, and we make such distinctions only in an effort to explain the many facets of the personality. It is generally understood, then, that we do have an ego, directed toward exterior activity, and in those terms we also have an inner ego. It is also conscious, and is the director of all automatic interior activity.

Most people do not realize that they can indeed have access to this inner awareness. This inner ego or inner self should not be thought of as superior to our ordinary mind. It should not be thought of, really, as something separate from our ordinary mind. Our ego and our ordinary consciousness bring into focus all of our physical experiences, and make possible the brilliant preciseness of physical experience.

It is true that physical life represents only one condition of being. We have other kinds of existence, then. The conscious mind is one brilliant segment of our larger consciousness, but it is composed of the same universal energy and vitality that composes all consciousness. There are ways of communicating with the inner ego or inner self, however, and we will discuss some of these in future blogs. It is important, again, to remember that this inner ego or inner self uses a process that is far swifter than reasoning.

When such communications are made, therefore, they often consist of inspiration, intuition, impulses, and deal with feeling far more than with usual logical thinking.

Each person is a vital, conscious portion of the universe. Each person, simply by being, fits into the universe and into universal purposes in a way no one else can. Each person’s existence sends its own ripples throughout time. The universe is conscious at every conceivable point of itself. Each being is an individualized segment of the universe; then, in human terms, each person is a beloved individual, formed with infinite care and love, uniquely gifted with a life like no other.

No animal considers itself a failure, obviously. People, however, often identify with their seeming mistakes, forgetting their abilities in other directions, so that it seems that they are misfits in the universe, or in the world. The conscious mind can indeed have such thoughts because it so often tries to solve all problems on its own, until it begins to feel frightened, overburdened, and a failure in its own eyes.

The inner ego, however, always identifies with its source-identity as a beloved, individualized portions of the universe. It is aware of the universal love that is its heritage.

It is also aware of the infinite power and strength that composes the very fabric of its being. Through being made aware of these facts, the exterior ego can begin to feel a quicker sense of support and nourishment. The knowledge can let it relax, let go, so that it feels its life couched and safe, and knows itself to be indeed a beloved child of the universe, both ancient and young at once, with an identity far beyond the annals of time.

 

It is a great value, then, that each person remember this universal affiliation. Such a reminder can often allow the inner self to send needed messages of strength and love through the various levels, appearing as inspiration, dreams, or simply pure bursts of feeling. The inner ego draws instant and continuous support from the universal consciousness, and the more the exterior ego keeps that fact in mind, the greater its own sense of stability, safety, and self-esteem.

One of the attitudes detrimental to good health is that of self-condemnation, or dislike of the self. Such attitudes are unfortunately sometimes fostered by parents, schools, and religions. Feelings of self-worth, self-esteem, and pleasure with one’s abilities promote feelings of well-being, health, and exuberance.

The universe actively loves itself and all of its parts. The world loves itself and all of its parts. It is not true that energy is neutral or indifferent. Energy is active, positive, propelled by what can almost be called an instantaneous pleasure with itself and its characteristics.

Despite all concepts to the contrary, energy is indeed at its basis, love. It is also composed of highly charged consciousness that operates almost in a leapfrog fashion, with great bursts of exuberance and vitality. The great — the greatest creative force — that force that is the origin for all physical life — did not suddenly appear once in some distant past, sparking the birth of or reality, endowing it with an energy that could only then run down, or dissipate. Instead at every conceivable point within our universal system.

Each new rose in the springtime is in truth a new rose, composed of completely new and unique energy, utterly itself, innocent, alive in the world.

In the deepest of terms, while each body has a history each moment in the body’s existence is also new, freshly emerging into the world, innocent and unique. While there is indeed pain in the world, it is the miraculous principle of pleasure that propels life itself.

Those who look upon physical life as inferior to some other more perfect spiritual existence do a great injustice to physical existence in general. Physical life is everywhere filled with the universal energy that is its source, so it can hardly be inferior to it’s own composition.

Again, corporeal reality is a brilliant segment of existence. It cannot be inferior to existence. It is because we so often view our world through a system of highly limited beliefs that we so often misread the implications of temporal life.

Such beliefs serve to limit our comprehension, until it seems often that physical life consists of a frantic struggle for survival at every level of consciousness. Such ideas certainly do not foster feelings of security, health, or well-being, and they distort the nature of our physical environment.

That environment is not something separate from ourselves, for us to control. Instead, us and the environment support, strengthen, and fortify each other in ways that often escapes us. All portions of the environment contain their own conditions, but of their relationships to all other portions of the world. They add to the world’s health in other words, and our own vitality — and that of our environment — are everywhere interrelated.

 

Death-Defiers And Health

At first thought, it certainly seems as if people love life and fear death — that they seek pleasure and avoid pain. But some of them die unfairly, if that rings true for you because of a situation you’re in it might be a good idea to talk to someone similar to  P.L.L.C.  Wrongful Death Attorney to work forward legally. work forward legally.

Yet this is not always the case. There are people who must feel themselves to be at the brink of death before that can fully appreciate the quality of life. There are people who cannot appreciate or enjoy the satisfaction of life or of happiness unless faced simultaneously with the threat of death or intense pain.

There are other people who firmly believe that the pursuit of pleasure must lead to pain, and there are also others for whom pain itself is pleasure. There are also individuals whose beliefs cause them to feel very uncomfortable when they are in a state of health — and for these individuals poor health brings a sense of security and safety.

There are innumerable stages of health, from high, sheer, energetic exuberance to lethargy and discomfort. There are, in fact, an almost infinite number of stages connected with the state of health. We could invent a completely different way of regarding human health by numbering and defining each of those stages. Instead, of course, our society has chosen to recognize and define all of those stages that are detrimental to health — stages that are recognizable because of health’s absence to one degree or another.

In my blogs, therefore, we will devote ourselves to ways of promoting health, and we will purposely avoid the specific naming of dis- eases.

It should be noted before we begin that death itself is the delivery — a deliverer — of our species and all others. It is not negative in itself, but instead is the beginning of a different kind of positive existence. It prunes the planet, so to speak, so that there is a room and time for all, energy and food for all. Because of death, life is possible, so these two seemingly opposite qualities are simply different versions of the same  phenomena.

If death disappeared on our planet even an hour all of life would soon be threatened. And if all life possible suddenly emerged at once, then most surely all would be annihilated. We must admit, then, that death is indeed a part of life — and even more, we must say that death is healthy.

There is a cellular communication between or among all of earth’s living cells, as if the earth itself were one large physical body.

Our own knowledge, desire, purpose and intent tune us into some communications, physical and emotional states at the same time.

Individuals who defy death time and time again are actually more frightened of it than most other people are. Trapeze performers, stunt men and women, race-car drivers, and many other groups have a lifestyle that includes death-defying stunts on a very regular basis.

Trapeze performers may have several acts a day, for example. It seems that such individuals perform with great daring, even with a rashness that is unfamiliar to most people. Most such performers, however, are extremely regulated. They work with a carefully calculated eye, under conditions in which each detail, however minute, is of supreme importance. No matter how often certain trapeze acts may be repeated, for example, there is always the threat of instant disaster — of missed footing, a final plunge. Through testing “fate,” death-defiers try each time they perform to prove to themselves that they are indeed safe, that they can overcome life’s most dire conditions. This is different to say, playing tennis or football where the risk of death or serious injury is much lower, even though players can still injure themselves. If you hired say a tennis coach near me Orlando to learn to play tennis professionally, you have to use hand-eye coordination and have good fitness levels to maintain the play, but a wrong move does not lead to instant danger like it would in at  trapeze act.

Life, then, has the sweetest buoyancy, the greatest satisfaction, because it is contrasted with the ever-present threat of death. Many such people do not feel at all safe living under life’s usual conditions. They protect themselves by setting up the conditions of such an encounter, and controlling those conditions, again down to the smallest detail.

Only when they pursue some death-defying career do such individuals feel safe enough to relax otherwise and live a fairly normal life outside of their death-defying careers.

I do not mean to pass any moral judgment upon such activities. Often they do permit an extremely keen sense of exuberance and vitality. It is also true, however, that such people may enjoy excellent health for years, not counting perhaps an assortment of broken bones and bruises — only to fall suddenly prone to some illness if they try to give up their activities. No one knows what tomorrow will bring which is why we must live every day as our last. Nonetheless, a life insurance policy might help people safeguard the future of their loved ones. However, you may need to research a bit and select the right one. There are so many different types of life insurance policies available because of which most people are likely to be perplexed as to which one they should select. If you’re not sure which one to go with, sites like Life Cover Quotes (https://www.lifecoverquotes.org.uk) might be able to help.

Self-understanding and self-knowledge may be able to change the individuals’ lives for the better, regardless of their activities or conditions of life. It is true that these individuals do choose for themselves a carefully planned and regulated style of life, in which the threat of death is encountered personally and regularly; each day becomes an odyssey, in which death and life are purposefully weighed.

Children may come down with many childhood diseases, and still be very healthy children indeed. Adults may break a bone skiing, or indulging in some other sport, and still be very healthy. People “come down” with colds, or the flu, or some other social disease that is supposed to be passed from one individual to another — yet overall these may be very healthy individuals. The body has its own self-regulating system. This is often called the immune system.

If people become ill, it is quite fashionable to say that the immunity system has temporarily failed — yet the body itself knows that certain “dis-eases” are healthy reactions. The body does not regard diseases as diseases, in usually understood terms. It regards all activity as experience, as a momentary condition of life, as a balance situation. But it possesses a sense of wholeness and of overall integrity, for it knows that it continues to exist, though under different conditions, and it realizes that this change is as natural and necessary as the change of seasons if each individual is to continue to exist, while the earth itself possesses the nutriments necessary to the survival of physical life.

The Body And Mind As A Continuing Process

In my blogs, I want my readers to look at body and mind in a different fashion.

Do not think of the mind as a purely mental entity, and of the body as purely physical one. Instead, think of both mind and body as continuing, interweaving processes that are mental and physical at once. Our thoughts actually are quite as physical as our body is, and our body is quite as nonphysical as it seems to us our thoughts are. We are actually a vital force, existing as a part of our environment, and yet apart from our environment at the same time.

It is obvious that we impress a room with our characteristics as we furnish it, but we also mark what seems to be empty space in the same fashion — that is, we turn empty space into the living matter of our body without ever realizing that we do so. Our health and the daily weather interact with each other. This happens on a personal and mass basis. I admit that some of this material quite contradicts our usual ideas, but the health of our body is intimately related not only to the state of world health, but to the physical climate as well.

We do not “catch” a drought. We do not catch a cold, either. In a fashion a drought is partially caused by the emotional states of the people who experience it — yet a drought is not a disease. It is part of a process. It is a necessary portion of the larger process of the world’s physical stability. As unfortunate as a drought might seem, it is in its way responsible for the balanced proportion of moisture of the entire planet’s surface. In the same way diseases in their fashion are also often parts of larger processes whose greater purpose is the body’s overall balance and strength.

My thoughts go buzzing

through time’s corridors,

winging their way

 through the sunny hours,

dipping into shaded corners,

sipping sweet honeycombs

of desire, slipping through

golden keyholes

and flying free past

the meadows of eternity.

I bid them a safe journey

as they travel ahead

of me, for one day I will

surely follow.

In any case, magic is everywhere in the operation of our body, and in the operation of the world.

My definition of magic is this: Magic is nature unimpeded, or magic is life unimpeded. It is true that our thoughts and emotions and beliefs form the reality that we experience — but it is also true that this creative construction is, in a manner of speaking, magically formed. That is, the construction of our body and the construction of a world are produced with the greatest combination of order and spontaneity — an order and spontaneity that seems hidden rather than apparent.

We think, for example, without consciously knowing how we do so, and we speak long sentences without consciously being aware at the beginning of the sentence what the conclusion will be.

This does not mean that we must forever remain in ignorance, but it does mean that there are different kinds of knowledge, and that all of our information does not come by reasoning alone. We grew from a fetus into an adult, for instance, so obviously some part of us does know how to perform such an amazing activity as the growth and care of the physical body. The reasoning mind alone, however, cannot by itself grow even the smallest cell, or activate the life of even one molecule, yet the growth and maintenance of the body is constant.

The same hidden ability that promotes our body’s health and vitality also fulfills and preserves the world in general. All of this is done playfully, and yet emerges with the greatest display of order and design.

When we become too serious we overwork our intellect and tire our body, for then it seems that our entire life depends upon the reasoning of our intellect alone. Instead, of course, our intellectual abilities are supported and promoted by the inner mixture of spontaneity and order that so magically combine to form both our reality and the reality of the world.

The Nail Consciousness On The Window Sill

All creatures are born with a keen sense of self-approval.

 

Each creature is born proud of itself, and loving itself. That same self-approval is also experienced in varying ways not only by creatures as we think of them, but also by atoms and molecules, and by all orders of matter.

 

Imagine a nail on a window sill endowed with consciousness and self-awareness. Now every nail is indeed in its own way responsive to stimuli. It acts and reacts. A nail may not choose to jump down from a window sill and dance about the room, but a nail is indeed aware of the room, of the window sill, and aware of the temperature on both sides of the window. The atoms and molecules that compose the nail possess their own lively consciousnesses. Their motion is directed by electrons, so that within itself the nail actually experiences constant motion. Indeed, a dance is executed of great symmetry and rhythm. The nail, then is, indeed filled with its own sense of self-approval.

I am mentioning this only to stress the fact that self-delight and self-approval are natural characteristics — characteristics that actually make our entire physical world, and world of experience, possible.

It is very unfortunate, therefore, when adults inadvertently undermine a child’s sense of self-approval. A small boy or girl might be caught in a lie, for example, and therefore labeled by an adult in the angriest of terms as a liar. Instead, a distinction should be made: the child made an error — he lied — but he himself or herself is not the error or the lie. He or she can then determine to change his or her behavior while still saving his or her self-respect.

All creatures are basically of good intent; even when they commit the most dubious of acts, these are usually caused by a misdirected good intent. Actually, many criminals are motivated by distorted versions of righteousness. We will have more to say about this in later blogs, but for now I want to stress the importance of self-approval in connection with exuberance, health, and well-being.

Trust in the body automatically quickens all healing processes. You only have to take my words to heart.

Once again, it is perfectly natural for each cell in the body, for each organ and each portion of the body to heal itself, and in the same terms it is really “unnatural” not to trust the body, rather than looking at it with suspicion.

In any case, trust alone relaxes all other parts of the body, and lets the healing processes operate more easily and efficiently.

It is indeed unfortunate that those beliefs that show themselves so simply and effectively in nature seem so mysterious to the usual line of official consciousness.

The official line does have its role, of course — but by itself it must remain isolated from deep, creative, healing functions of body consciousness. The official line of consciousness is really the “worrier,” because it recognizes that it can only go so far, and usually it is not educated enough to realize it is itself sustained and supported.

There are styles of thinking, just as there are various styles of dress.

The official line of consciousness is a certain mental stance, a kind of convention. When we were children we thought in a freer fashion, but little by little we were educated to use words in a certain way. We discovered that our needs were met more quickly, and we received approval more often, when we thought and spoke in that particular manner. Finally it seems to be the only natural mode of operation. Our entire civilization is built around that kind of inner framework. The way of thinking becomes so automatic as to be mentally invisible. With creative people, however, there are always intrusions, hints or clues from ways of thinking that certainly appear foreign, and creative people use those hints and clues to construct an art, a musical composition or whatever. They sense a surge of power beneath.

What we are trying to do is change over completely from one mode of operation to another, and to construct say, new inner blocks of meaning that will give rise to the next era.

What we are involved in then is really. of course, a completely new educational procedure, so that we are at least able to distinguish one style of thought from another, and therefore be freer to make choices.

When an idea for a blog comes to me, I “tune into it” immediately. It never occurs to me to wonder how many vowels or syllables, words and sentences or paragraphs night be involved. I take it for granted that my intent will be executed.

That is the natural, creative way to function, and it has provided me with many excellent blogs and poetry. When I am writing I do not think in terms of impediments. What impediments there may be, I brush aside.

Now our health can be handled in the same fashion, without wondering how many nerves or muscles or stages must be activated, without worrying about how much time will be involved. In a fashion the body is a living blog, being produced in every moment.

Again, it may seem too simple — but by applying the same methods to the body, the body’s health will be written with health and vitality, using blood and corpuscles, joints and ligaments and so forth instead of syllables, consonants, words and sentences.

Specifically, I wanted to make the point that the body’s actions are unfortunately often misread and misunderstood. The body often clears out, or tries out, its own processes — perhaps by being feverish for several days, and then by lowering the temperature once unwanted materials are burned out, so to speak.

It may store urine to retain minerals at one time, and urinate seemingly to excess in another. When the body is basically held in distrust, however, all such behavior is considered dangerous and suspect.

The New Way

Taken together our ideas themselves are quite ancient, of course. They are expressed by many cultures and religions, esoteric groups and cults from the past, and continuing into present. Their strength, vitality, and worth has been greatly undermined, however, by distortions, negative ideas, and some sheer nonsense.

In other words, these concepts, so natural to all of creation, have not been practiced by humanity in anything like their pure form. To that extent they do indeed represent a new way. They run counter to much of our official knowledge and contemporary thought as far as the mainstream of world culture is concerned. Where such ideas are practiced, they are frequently contaminated by fanaticism, superstition, and expediency.

The main point I want to make is that this “new way” is the ideal and easiest complement to nature’s own innate integrity.

 

 

 

 

Natural Mental Behavior

The way toward health is simplicity itself.

It is the natural, easiest watson’s emotions to seek the answers to a healthier mind. But actually, the answer is so simple. Live simply.

Since the intellect is apt to enjoy playing with complications and solving problems, therefore, to the intellect it often seems ludicrous to imagine that the answer to a question lies within the question itself.

All of nature demonstrates this almost miraculous seeming simplicity. Plants and animals and all of life’s aspects take it quite for granted that the sun will shine and the rains will fall in the way best conducive to all creatures. Animals certainly do not worry about tomorrow’s weather conditions. It may be true that animals do not need to know tomorrow’s weather, since they do not plant seeds or collect the harvest. It is perfectly fine to make plans for the future, yet each individual should live day by day, without worrying about the outcome of those plans.

The physical body can only react in the present moment. Worrying about future events, or dwelling upon past unfavorable situations, only confuses the body’s mechanisms, and undermines their precise activity in the present moment.

I am not saying that anyone should pretend that unfavorable circumstances do not sometimes exist, or that they may not be encountered in the past, present, or future. It is also true, however, that advantageous events occur with a far greater frequency than do negative ones — otherwise the world that we know simply would not exist. It would have disappeared in the throes of destruction or calamity.

In a basic way, it is against nature’s purposes to contemplate a dire future, for all of nature operates on the premise that the future is assured. Nature is everywhere filled with promise — not only the promise of mere survival, but the promise of beauty and fulfillment Once again, that keen sense of promise is innate within each portion of the body. It triggers the genes and chromosomes into their proper activity, and it promotes feelings of optimism, exuberance, and strength.

Again, sometime in later blogs we will discuss those conditions that can undermine such fine creativity. In the meantime, however, live each day as fully and joyfully as possible. imagine the best possible results of any plans or projects. Above all, do not concentrate upon past unfavorable events, or imagined future ones.

Now: If we examine our feelings about parenthood in general, we will see that they bear an astonishing similarity to our feelings about our work. Only the focus is different. We are indeed parents of our work we do, and the psychic parents of innumerable people of all ages. We have have set aside, however, the conventional idea of a family, as symbolized by our dreams. We are actually exchanging one kind of a family for another, vaster concept, that also involves parenthood, however — but a psychic rather than a physical parenthood.

Optimistic Elements Of Life

All elements of life are optimistic.

 

The fetus, for example, is remarkably optimistic, carrying within itself the miniature pattern for an entire human adult, taking it for granted that conditions will be favorable enough so that the entire pattern of normal life will be fulfilled despite any impediments or adverse conditions .

This expectation to grow and flourish is addressed within each atom, cell, and organ, and all of life’s parts contain this optimistic expectation and are blessed with the promise that their abilities will grow to maturity.

Children spontaneously take it for granted that their acts will result in the most favorable circumstances, and that any given situation will have a favorable end result. These attitudes pervade on the animal kingdom also. They are embedded in the life of insects, and in fish and fowl. They are the directions that provide life with purpose, direction, and impetus. No organism automatically expects to find starvation or disappointment or detrimental conditions — yet even when such circumstances are encountered, they in no way affect the magnificent optimism that is at the heart of life.

Even when biological “failures” develop, as with stillborn infants, or malformed ones, the inner consciousness involved does not give up, and even though death results, the consciousness tries again under different conditions. In such cases death is not experienced by the organism as a failure, or as a biological mistake. It is simply felt to be an experience, a discovery, that went so far and no further — but the events in no way impede the vitality and strength of the inner consciousness so involved.

This optimism is reflected in many other areas of life also.

Many birds in their fantastic migrations demonstrate an amazing optimism, traveling thousands of miles to distant shores, almost literally flying by faith, as it were, ignoring all dangers, unbeseiged by doubts. There is no hesitancy, but the sure flight. Birds do not question whether or not the weather will be favorable, the winds fair or foul. They simply fly toward their destination. Even if some birds do fall or die, this in no way impedes or undermines the faith of the others.

Monarch butterflies, in their remarkable migrations, often fly toward land that they have never seen themselves — and yet they reach their destination.

In all such cases there is an inbred biological faith, that courage and vitality, that biological optimism. It acts that same in people, triggering the necessary bodily responses. Only when that optimism is severely tampered with do the physical mechanisms falter. Even then, however, all creatures are sustained by that innate gift, that inner sense of security that not only propels creatures toward life, but safely conducts them past physical life and past death’s doorway.

 

The Inborn Leanings and Attitudes

These inborn leanings or attitudes can roughly be translated as follows.

  1. I am an excellent creature, a valuable part of the universe in which I exist.
  2.  My existence enriches all other portions of life, even as my own being is enhanced by the rest of creation.
  3. It is good, natural, and safe for me to grow and develop and use my abilities, and by so doing I also enrich all other portions of life.

Next: I am eternally couched and supported by the universe of which I am a part, and I exist whether or not that existence is physically expressed.

Next: By nature I am a good deserving creature, and all of life’s elements and parts are also of good intent.

And next: All of my imperfections, and all of the imperfections of other creatures, are redeemed in the greater scheme of the universe in which I have my being.

Those attitudes are inbred in the smallest microscopic portions of the body — a part of each atom and cell and organ, and they serve to trigger all of the body’s responses that promote growth and fulfillment. Infants are not born with an inbred fear of their environment, or of the other creatures. They are instead immersed in feelings of well-being, vitality, and exuberance. They take it for granted that their needs will be met, and that the universe is well-disposed toward them. They feel a part of their environment.

They do not come into life with feelings of rage, or anger, and basically they do not experience doubts or fears. Birth is experienced in terms of self-discovery, and includes the sensation of selfhood gently rising and unfolding from the secret heart of the universe.

Many people believe that birth, to the contrary, is a time of trauma, or even of rage, as the infant leaves its mother’s womb. Birth is life’s most precious natural process. Even in births that are thought of as not “normal,” there is on the infant’s part a sense of discovery and joy.

We will have more to say about the process of birth in later blogs. For now, I simply want to make the point that in the most basic of terms the human birth is as orderly and spontaneous as the birth of any of nature’s creatures — and a child opens its selfhood even as a flower opens its petals.

The inborn leanings and attitudes that we have been discussing should ideally remain with us for the rest of our lives, leading us to express our abilities, and finding fulfillment as our knowledge expands through experience. The same feelings and beliefs should also ideally help us die with a sense of safety, support and assurance. While these inbred psychological supports never leave us entirely, they are often diminished by beliefs encountered later in life, that serve to undermine the individual’s sense of safety and well-being.

All of this talk about exuberance, health and vitality may seem quite beside the point to many. It may seem instead that the world is filled with unhappiness and disease.

 

I admit that this certainly seems to be the case. It may also strike you, my blog readers, as quite shocking when I tell you that there is no such thing, basically, as disease. There are instead only processes. What we think of as disease is instead the result of an exaggeration or overextension of perfectly normal body processes. We are not attacked by viruses, for instance, for all kinds of viruses exist normally in the body. There are no killer viruses, then, but viruses that go beyond their usual bounds. We will have more to say about such issues in later blogs — for I hope to show how certain feelings and beliefs do indeed promote health, while others promote an unfortunate extension or exaggeration of perfectly normal bodily processes, or viral activity.

This means, of course, that we do not fall victim to a disease, or catch a virus, but that for one reason or another our own feelings, thoughts, and beliefs lead us to seek bouts of illness.

Certainly, such ideas will sound like medical heresy to many of my blog readers, but the sooner we begin to look at health and “disease” in these new terms, the healthier and happier we will become. We are not one thing and illness another, for our thoughts and emotions are the triggers that lead to bouts of poor health. Once we know this, we can begin to take steps that will serve to promote exuberance and vitality instead of fear, doubts, and “disease.”

We will discover that so-called diseases perform certain services. They fulfill purposes for us that we may believe we can achieve in  no other way. The reasons for such illnesses are not deeply buried in the subconscious, as we may think. They are much closer to the conscious mind, and usually consist of a series of seemingly innocuous decisions that we have made through the years. Other illnesses, of course, may be caused by sudden decisions that are a  response to a particular event in our life.

People have been taught that their bodies are a kind of battleground, and that they must be in a constant state of readiness lest they be attacked or invaded by alien germs or viruses or diseases that can strike without warning.

Soon, in future blogs, we will begin to discuss other negative beliefs that cause poor health. For now, however, we will concentrate upon those inbred, positive attitudes, feelings, and beliefs that constantly improve our sense of well-being, strength, and fulfillment.

 

 

 

Biologically Valid Thoughts, Attitudes, and Beliefs

When we are born we possess a group of attitudes toward oneself and toward life. These allow us to grow with the greatest possible impetus into childhood. They are also important in every period of our life. We can see the results in life all about us, though in animals or plants these are experienced as a matter of feelings rather than, say, as thoughts or attitudes.

It may sound very simplistic to tell one that we must have sunny thoughts as well as rays of the physical sun in order to be healthy — but sunny thoughts are as biologically necessary to our well-being as are the rays of sun that shines in the sky. Even as infants, then, we are predisposed naturally toward certain feelings, thoughts and attitudes that are meant to insure our healthy survival and emergence into adulthood. These are actually composed of inbred psychological information as necessary and vital to our life as the data transmitted by our genes and chromosomes. Indeed, these inbred, inner psychological predispositions are all-important if the information carried by our genes and chromosomes is to be faithfully followed.

It is difficult to translate such biological and psychological material into the words of any language, even though these inbred psychological prerequisites form a kind of language of their own. It is a language that promotes growth, exuberance and fulfillment, and stimulates the entire organism of the body –signaling the proper responses that are required for health and growth.

In later blogs we will discuss contrary feelings, thoughts, and emotions. I want to substitute beliefs for emotions that greatly curtail the natural progression of health and vitality. Here, however, we will deal primarily with those inner predispositions that encourage life and vitality.

I look in a puddle

and what should I see

but the stars in

the heavens looking back at me….

Inborn Cooperation

The picture of man, woman, animals, and nature depicted in movies, is the only possible portrayal of reality that could be logically shown, considering the beliefs upon which the premise rests.

The environment, man, woman and the animals are all characterized as ferocious, hostile to each other, each one determined to attain survival at the expense of the other. Man and woman could not have existed under the conditions fostered in most movies — nor for that matter could any of the animals. Despite any other theories to the contrary, the world, all of its physical aspects, and all of its creatures depends upon an inborn cooperation. The species do not compete with each other over a given territory, no matter how frequently that appears to be the case.

Science has promoted the idea that hostility is a constant attribute of nature and all of its parts, while it sees the cooperating characteristics of nature as rather infrequent or extraordinary — but certainly outside of the norm.

Even biologically on the most microscopic of levels, there is a vast inbred network of cooperating activity, and these unite the animals and mineral kingdoms with all the other aspects of earthly existence. Each organism has a purpose, and it is to fulfill its own capabilities in such a way that it benefits all other organisms.

Each organism is therefore helped in its development by each and every other organism, and the smooth operation of one contributes to the integrity of all. Men and women did not begin hunting animals until certain groups of animals needed a way to control their own population. As I have said before in previous blogs, men, women and animals learned from each other. They were immediate allies, not enemies.

Men and women also domesticated animals almost from the very first, so that men, women and animals both did each other a service — they worked together. The stability of planetary life depended above all upon this basic cooperation, in which all species pooled together.

Man’s and woman’s brain was always the size that it is now, and the animals existed in the forms by which we know them today. No animal — or virus — is truly extinct. All exist in an inner web-work, and are held in the memory of an overall earthly knowledge — one that is biological, so that each smallest microbe has within it the imprinted biological messages that form each and every other microbe. The existence of one presupposes that existence of all, and the existence of all is inherent in the existence of one.

In those early days men and women did live to ages that would amaze today — many living to be several hundred years old. This was indeed due to the fact that their knowledge was desperately needed, and their experience. They were held in veneration, and they cast their knowledge into songs and stories that were memorized throughout the years.

Beside this, however, their energy was utilized in a different fashion than ours is. They alternated between the waking and dream states, and while asleep they did not age as quickly. Their bodily processes slowed. Although this was true, their dreaming mental processes did not slow down. There was a much greater communication in the dream state, so that some lessons were taught during dreams, while others were taught in the waking condition.

There was a greater and greater body of knowledge to be transmitted as physical existence continued, for they did not transmit private knowledge only, but the entire body of knowledge that belonged to the group or tribe as a whole.

Now: our dreams represent the larger rooms of beliefs into which we are emerging. The many people, and connecting rooms, represent the new structure of vaster beliefs that are all interconnected while we are still, however, concentrating upon the private creative self, and from that viewpoint viewing the world — hence our private corner in which we paint, as from that corner of private creativity we view the large interacting structure of new beliefs.

The Bible is a conglomeration of parables and stories, intermixed with some unclear memories of much earlier times .The bible that we recognize — or that is recognized — in not the first however, but was compiled from several earlier ones as man and woman tried to look back, so to speak, and recount his and her past and predict his and her future.

Such bibles existed, not written down but carried orally, as mentioned some time ago, by the Speakers. It was only much later that this information was written down, and by then, of course, much had been forgotten. This is apart from the fact of tampering, or downright misinformation as various factions used the material for their own ends.

The paternal feelings of our dreams, allow us to expand our experience while in the dream state. This also presents us with an example of the ways in which early man and woman expanded his and her own knowledge and experience in the dream state. In the same way, as mentioned in a previous blog, man and woman also had dream images of actual geographical locations to which he or she had not physically traveled.

Misdirected Good Intent

If any of my blog readers, are in poor health, or generally unhappy, no one is asking you to pretend that those conditions do not exist. I hope to show you that even those unfortunate situations were created out of a misdirected good intent. In these blogs we will keep reminding you, however, that exuberance and high spirits are a natural part of our heritage.

We also hope to allow you to recapture those feelings, if you have lost them, and to give other ways of keeping those emotions fresh and intact. Blog readers will benefit in various fashions, according to their own conditions and intents, but every blog reader will benefit to some degree or another — and each blog reader will become reacquainted with those inner springs of vitality and wellbeing that are so important in human experience.

Concentrate upon the joys that you possess, keep your goals in mind, and trust the infinite intelligence within you to bring about the desired results. This frees your mind and allows improvements to continue without interruptions.

It’s our version of worrying that desired effects may not be brought into the present — that is, will not come into your close vision. When you feel that way, close your eyes, of only for a moment, reassure yourself that you can trust your vision — mental and physical — and that indeed your goals will be brought into clear focus.

Playing Consciousness At different Speeds

The analogy of the many speeds of consciousness actually fits in well with the actual neurological sequences upon which consciousness plays. As we know, everything alive is conscious — and even so-called dead matter possesses  its own variety of self-awareness.

In our terms, the rhythm of some kind of consciousness would seem exceedingly slow, so that a century might pass between one perception and the next. Other variations might seem amazingly quick — the perceptions following each other so swiftly that they would indeed escape our perception entirely; yet in the wondrous marvels of inner nature, all of these rhythms are connected one to the others, and in a matter of speaking — excuse the pun — they each balance each other.

It is not so much the actual rhythms that are manifested that make the difference in perception, but the absence of certain other rhythms, upon which perception ride.

Healing Energy

Mental exercises unusually go well except for the few instances, when we allow self-pity to grab ahold. It is extremely important that we concentrate upon those pleasures of life that we enjoy. Eating good food, experiencing the joy of reading, the joy of creative thought, the pleasure of friends, and so forth, for those benefits will then be increased more than a hundredfold.

All the improvements necessary are indeed happening at various levels of action within our mental and physical experience. Following and having faith that this is so — without worrying about how it will happen.

The conscious mind can direct bodily activity, but the body consciousness alone can perform those activities that bring forth life and motion.

The Present Becomes the Past

Apropos of our discussion concerning time.

The nature of universal creativity is so remarkable that it’s true reaches are literally beyond most understanding. The implications are staggering — so that the affair is almost impossible to explain.

The past, and every moment of the past, are being constantly changed from the operation point of the present. In our terms, the present becomes the past, which is again at every considerable point from the latest-present. Yet through all of this immense, continuous creation, there is always a personal sense of continuity: We never really lose our way in the distance between one moment and the next.

In somewhat of the same fashion the objects about us are constantly in motion, as we know. The atoms and molecules are forever moving, and in a way the electrons are the directors of that motion.

Our own focus is so precisely and finely tuned that despite all of that activity, objects appear solid. Now objects are also events, and perhaps that is the easiest way to understand them. They are highly dependent upon our own subjective focus. Let that focus falter for a briefest amount of time, and the whole house of cards would come tumbling down, so to speak.

Remember that we are also objects, and also events, and as physical bodies our organs are also composed of atoms and molecules whose motion, again, is directed by the electrons.

The electrons themselves have their own subjective lives. They are subjective events, therefore, so there is always a correlation between those electrons in our bodies and those in the objects we see about us. Nevertheless again, subjective continuity itself never falters, in that it is always a part of the world that it perceives, so that us and the world create each other, in these terms.

When we change the past from each point of the latest-present, we are also changing events at the most microscopic levels. Our intent has also an electronic reality, therefore. It is almost as if our thoughts punched the keys of some massive computer, for our thoughts do indeed have a force. Even as sentences are composed of words, there is no end to the number of sentences that can be spoken — so “time” is composed of an endless variety of electronic languages that can “speak” a million worlds instead of words.

 

Dates are but designations applied to the days.

Mankind and womankind lived without such designations for a much longer period than he or she have used them. Animals, without such designations, still know their position on the planet itself, and they are aware of tides and the movement of the earth and planets.

 

Extremes

Our situations can be called extreme — but true extremes are far less fortunate. We have, for example, the extremes of poverty suffered by people in many other parts of the world — a poverty that stunts all kinds of growth, mental and physical, and brings about an early death. Or the extremes of disease, in which children are born without all the faculties needed for life, and — therefore also die an early death. Or those extremes when entire families suffer patterns of tragedy so whole numbers are wiped out at one time.

There are reasons for such cases, of course. I simply wanted you to know that many very severe extremes exist, that would make our lives seem most favorable in contrast.

Species Not discovered

There are many, many species that men and women have not discovered, in all the categories of life — insects onward.

There are multitudinous species of viruses and so forth that man and woman have not encountered and recognized, and there are connections between viruses and other species of living matter that remain unknown. There are indeed two different kinds of upward-walking mammals, much like our own species, but much larger, and with infinitely keener senses. They are indeed amazingly swift creatures, and through scent alone they are aware of the presence of man and woman when any member of our species is at all in the immediate area — standing, say, at least several miles away. Vegetable matter is a main diet, though often implemented by insects, which are considered a delicacy.

They have, for that matter, devised many ingenious insect traps, so that hundreds or more can be caught, for many are needed since insects are so small. These traps are often constructed on trees, in the bark, in such a fashion that the tree gum itself is used to trap the insects. The traps appear to be part of the tree itself, so as to protect them.

These creatures do indeed remember, but their remembering operates extremely rapidly – a kind of almost instantaneous deduction that comes as sense data is interpreted. That is, received and interpreted almost at once, or simultaneously.

Offspring do not occur until the individuals are well past the age that we would consider normal for breeding. Otherwise the procedure is the same. With some territorial variation, such creatures reside in many of the world areas on our planet, though their overall population is very small — altogether, perhaps, several thousand. They rarely congregate in large groups, but do have a family and tribal-like organization, with at the very most twelve adults in any given area. As offspring are added, the groups break up again, for they know well that in larger numbers they would be much more easy to discover.

They all use tools of one kind or another – perhaps not quite the standard of tools we’ve come to expect from those reviewed on outdoor REI, like axes and survival knives – and live indeed in close concord with the animals. There is no competition between them though they could be extremely dangerous if they were cornered, or of their young were attacked.

They grow quite sluggish in wintertime, in very cold climates, and their temperature drops, as is characteristic of hibernating animals, except that their temperature is more sensitive to daily variations, so that on some winter days they can forage for food very well, while on the other hand they may hibernate for even weeks on end.

They have a keen understanding of nature, and of natural phenomena. Language is not developed to any great degree, for their sensual ordinary equipment is so pure and swift that it almost becomes a language of its own, and does not need any elaboration. Those senses possess their own variances, so that without any word such as “now” or “then,” the creature are able to know quite accurately how many living creatures are in the vicinity, how long they have been there — and their experience with time is one that follows the seasons in such a way that they have formed a wordless, fairly accurate picture of the world, including navigational direction.

Joy In Living

Exuberance and a sense of vitality are always present to some degree or another.

Some people are always aware of their own joy regardless of circumstances. They feel safe and protected even when the events of their lives do not seem favorable. Regardless of their own doubts and worries, such people feel themselves supported, and feel that in the end everything will work to their advantage. Many other people, however, lose this sense of safety and abundance, and it may seem as if joy in living was an attribute only of the young.

Exuberance and joy, however, basically have nothing to do with time or age. They may be expressed as vividly and beautifully at the age of 80 as at the age of 8. For whole segments of the population, however, it seems as if joy and health are fleeting attributes expressed briefly in childhood, and then lost forever.

There are innumerable ways of reclaiming joy in living, however, and in so doing physical health may be reclaimed by those who have found it lacking in their experience.

The quality of life is intensely important, and is to a large extent dependent upon a sense of well-being and self-confidence. While these attributes are expressed in the body, they also exist in the mind, and there are some cumbersome mental beliefs that may severely impede mental and physical well-being.

We will not concentrate upon these, but we will indeed discuss them, so that each person can understand the relationship between poor beliefs and poor health, for through understanding these connections the individual can re-experience the great mental variety that is possible. No individual is helpless, for example, in the face of negative beliefs. He or she can learn to make choices once again, and thus to choose positive concepts, so that they become as natural as negative beliefs once did.

One of the greatest detriments to mental and physical well-being is the unfortunate belief that any unfavorable situation is bound to get worse instead of better. That concept holds that any illness will worsen, any war will lead to destruction, that any and all known dangers will be encountered, and basically that the end result of mankind’s and womankind’s existence is extinction. All of those beliefs impede mental and physical health, erode the individual’s sense of joy and natural safety, and force the individual to feel like an unfortunate victim of exterior events that seem to happen despite his or her own will or intent.

Ultimately, it is no secret that mental health issues can have a serious impact on your sense of self. Addiction and substance abuse issues for example can have devastating consequences. With this in mind, if you know someone that is living with addiction, sometimes the best thing that you do for them is to point them in the direction of professional help. Rehabilitation has come a long way in recent years, and although overcoming substance abuse issues might not happen overnight, no one is past the point of no return. Consequently, you can find further mental health resources on the Enterhealth website.

The ideas I have just mentioned are all prominent in our society, and now and then they return to darken our senses of joy and expectation.

It is very important that they be recognized when they appear. For that recognition alone can clear our thoughts and mind.

I am saying that to varying degrees those concepts sometimes return, and it should be obvious when this happens less and less. Remind oneself also to remember that oneself does not have any particular disease. Society would be much better of if man and woman labeled multitudinous levels of physical health rather than dignifying negative concepts by giving them names and designations.

The Body Consciousness

The body consciousness, on its own, is filled with exuberance, vitality, and creativity.

Each most microscopic portion of the body is conscious, strives toward its own goals of development, and is in communication with all other parts of the body. The body consciousness is indeed independent. To a large degree its own defense mechanisms protect it from the mind’s negative beliefs — at least to a large extent. As I have mentioned before in past blogs, almost all persons pass from so-called disease state back into healthy states without ever being aware of the alterations. In those cases the body consciousness operates unimpeded by negative expectations or concepts.

When those negative considerations are multiplied, however, when they harden, so to speak, then they do indeed begin to diminish the body’s own natural capacity to heal itself, and to maintain that overall, priceless organization that should maintain it in a condition of excellent strength and vitality.

There are also occasions when the body consciousness itself rises up in spite of a person’s fears and doubts, and throws aside a condition of illness in a kind of sudden victory. Even then, however, the person involved has already begun to question such negative beliefs. The individual may not know how to cast them off, even though he or she desires to do so. It is in those instances that the body consciousness arises and throws off its shackles.

With free will, however, it is not possible for the body consciousness to be given full and clear dominion, for that would deny large areas of choices, and cut off facets of learning. The main direction and portent, however, of the body consciousness on its own is always toward health, expression, and fulfillment.

The molecules, and even the smaller aspects of the body act and react, communicate, cooperate with each other, and share each other’s knowledge, so that on particle of the body knows what is happening in all the other parts. Thus, the amazing organization usually works in a smooth, natural fashion. Many body events that we think of in our society as negative –certain viruses, for example — are instead meant as self-corrective devices, even as fever actually promotes health rather than impedes it.

The main characteristic of bodily consciousness is its spontaneity. This allows it to work at an incredibly swift rate that could not be handled by the topmost conscious portions of the mind. Its operation is due to an almost instantaneous kind of consciousness, in which what is known, with no distance between, say, the knower and the known.

The act of seeing, and all of the body’s senses, are dependent upon this inner spontaneity.

Our “negative” dreams express left-over doubts and fears, and hold the concept that the poorest rather than the best outcome of any event will happen.

Secondary Personalities

People who have epilepsy are afraid of their own energy.

They do not trust it, nor do they trust the spontaneous portions of the self. They are afraid that left alone their energy might strike out against others, and so they short-circuit its use, having attacks that momentarily render themselves helpless.

People with so-called secondary personalities also fear their own energy. They divide it up so that it seems to belong to different personalities, and is therefore effectively, divided. In basic terms, true amnesia does not exist in such cases, though it appears to. The people involved are quite aware of their activity at all times, but they behave in a fashion that is not continuous — that is, the main personality does not seem to behave in a continual manner, but is broken up, or again, seemingly divided. This psychological ploy neatly prevents the so-called main personality from using all of its energy at any one time.

The individuals concerned pretend to themselves that they have no memory of the other personalities’ existences or activities. These personalities, however, store up their energy so that one personality often exhibits explosive behavior, or makes certain decisions that seem to go against the wishes of the main entity. In this way, different kinds of behavior may be exhibited, and while it would seem that many decisions are made by one portion of the self, without another portion of the self knowing anything about it, such usually is not the case. In fact, the main personality is able to express many different kinds of probable action, but the entire personality is prevented from acting with its full energy or power. Instead the energy is diverted into other channels.

All portions of the self are indeed conscious, and they are also basically conscious of each other, though for working purposes they may seem to be separate or isolated.

The idea of the sinful self will not be predominant in my blogs, but I certainly will delve into the many unfavorable concepts that are held by the various religions — concepts that certainly make many people feel that the self is indeed sinful rather than blessed.

The self is indeed blessed, and just the reminder of that fact can often short-circuit negative beliefs, particularly if they are not too deep-seated.

The Will to Live

The will to live can be comprised by doubts,fear, and rationalizations.

Some people, for example, definitely want to live, while they try to hide from life at the same time. Obviously, this leads them into conflicts. Such people will impede their own motions and progress. They become overly concerned about their own safety. If any of my blog readers feel this way, they may even hide these feelings from themselves. They will  concentrate upon all the dangers present in society in their own country, or in other portions of the world, until their own frightened overall concern for safety seems to be a quite natural, rational response to conditions over which they have no control.

What is actually involved is a kind of paranoia, which can become such a powerful response that it can take over a person’s life, and color all projects. If this has happened to any of my blog readers, you might recognize yourself in any number of different scenarios. You might be a “survivalist,” setting up stores and provisions to be used in case of a nuclear disaster. It may seem to you that you are quite justified in protecting yourself and your family from disaster. In many such cases, however, the people so worried about the occurrence of danger from the outside world are instead concerned about the nature of their own energy, and afraid that it might destroy them.

In other words, they do not trust the energy of their own lives. They do not trust the natural functioning of their bodies, or accept this functioning as a gift of life. Instead they question it at every point — even holding their breath at times, waiting for something to go wrong.

Other people may actually impede those portions of the body given to mobility, so that they limp or tighten their muscles, or otherwise tamper with their bodies so that the end result is one that requires a cautious, hesitating approach to motion. Some may even cause themselves to have severe accidents, in which they sacrifice portions of their bodies to retain a sense of false safety.

These rather self-deceptive feelings are not hidden deeply in the subconscious mind, as we might suppose. Instead, in the majority of cases they consist of quite conscious decisions, made at one time or another on quite surface levels.

 

They are not forgotten, but the people involved simply close their own eyes, so to speak, to those decisions, and pretend that they do not exist, simply to make their lives appear smooth and to save face with themselves, when they know very well that the decisions really rest on very shaky ground indeed.

I do not wish to simplify matters, but such decisions can be uncovered very easily in children. A child might fall and badly scrape a knee — so badly that limping is the result, at least temporarily. Such a child will often be quite conscious of the reason for the affair: he or she may openly admit the fact that the injured part was purposefully chosen so that a dreaded test at school could be missed, and the child might well think that the injury was little enough to pay for the desired effect that it produced.

An adult under the same circumstances might become injured to avoid a dreaded event at the office — but the adult may well feel ashamed of such a reaction, and so hide it from himself or herself in order to save feelings of self-esteem. In such cases, however, the adults will feel that they are victims of events over which they have little or no control.

If the same kind of event occurs with any frequency, their fear of the world and of daily events may grow until it becomes quite unreasonable. Still, in most such instances those inner decisions can be easily reached — but while people are determined to “save face,” they will simply refuse to accept those decisions as their own. People will to live, to act or not to act. To a large extent they will the events of their lives — whether or not they are willing to admit this to themselves, and they will to die.

Begin to understand that energy is the gift of this life — to be expressed, not repressed — and to understand, again that spontaneity knows its own order.

It is no coincidence, in our language, that the word “will” refers to the future, as in a line like “it will happen,” and also refers to the decision-making quality of the mind.

 

The Species Multitudinous Abilities

My human skill is as ancient as man and woman is, and indeed all of our arts, sciences, and cultural achievements are the offshoots of spontaneous mental and biological processes.

I choose my words quite carefully at times, because I realize the various interpretations that can be placed upon them. Perhaps the following explanation will express more clearly what I mean.

In the first place, as often mentioned lately, the reasoning mind is spontaneously fired. The species contains within itself all of the necessary spontaneous attributes that are necessary to form a civilization, for example. All of our reasoned activities — our governments, societies, arts, religions and sciences — are the physical realization, of course, of inner capacities, capacities that are inherent in man’s and woman’s structure. Take our theaters’ movie picture dramas. These are the materialization in our time of man’s and woman’s natural ability — a characteristic highly important in the behavior of the species.

Early man and woman, for example, spontaneously played at acting out the part of other animals. He and she took part of a tree, a brook, a rock. Acting became a teaching method — a way of passing on information. Man and woman always possessed all of the knowledge he or she needed. The task was to make it physically available.

People translate inner knowledge in many ways — through acting it out, through singing or dancing, through drawing images on cave walls. It was the intellect’s job to put such information to practical use, and thus the intuitions and the intellect worked hand in hand. Man and woman dealt then with spontaneous knowing in a more direct fashion.

It is very difficult to try to explain the various shadings of psychology that were involved. Early man and woman did act in a more spontaneous manner, more automatically, in our terms, but not mindlessly. If we remember the early blogs, then this information should fall into place, for consciousness emerged from the inside outward. Animals enjoy drama, and in their fashions they playact.

It was to man and woman to translate his and her inner information with a freehand. He or she is able to form many different kinds of cultures, for example. He or she puts his or her sciences and religions, his and her languages, together in multitudinous ways, but there must always be a translation of inner information outward to the world of sense, There still is. Man’s and woman’s capacities have not dimmed in the regard. Thinking, for example, is as automatic as ever. It is simply that our culture puts the various elements together in ways that stress the qualities of what we refer to as rational thinking.

When the species needs certain abilities, they rise to the fore, as in my case now. When we are painting pictures we are also translating inner knowledge. Early artists drew pictures to share the images they saw in their dreams. In a fashion they practiced dreaming in their sleep, and thus learned also to think in terms of the measurement of physical images, and to move objects around in their minds before they did so physically.

Poetry was an art and a science. It conveyed quite necessary information about man and woman and the universe. The same can be said of many cave drawings. What we had — what we still have, though we are not nearly as aware of it — was an excellent give-and-take between the inner and outer senses. Through chanting, dancing, playacting, painting, story-telling, man and woman spontaneously translated inner sense data into physical actualization. The physical senses only present us with clues as to our own sensitivities.

I translate what I feel without being consciously aware of receiving the material in usual terms, or of translating it. It has to be broken down, particularly to a time frame, and then into concepts that can take advantage of the world view that is held in our culture. Everything must be slanted to fit the viewpoint of creatures who believe most firmly in the superiority of matter over mind — who are immersed in a particular biological framework.

I cannot ignore those belief structures — or what I say would literally be incomprehensible. All of this is automatically  taken care of.

The species has multitudinous abilities, each necessary, each adding to the entire fulfillment and attributes of our people. Some individuals choose to specialize, following specific lines of abilities throughout many existences — accommodating these, however, to the times in which they are born. Both my wife and I have been speakers in that regard. The methods many change. We may “speak” through art or music, through trance activities, but we will specialize in the use of the inner senses, and in translating the inner knowledge of the species, bringing it to whatever level of ordinary consciousness that is considered the official one.

I know what sound is, my wife knows, what we consider sound is only one of sounds many spectrums. Beside translating inner images into paintings, for example, we may unknowingly be translating sensually invisible sounds into images. In a way quite impossible to describe, it would be true to say that my blogs actually translate multidimensional images into words. We have no words for the kinds of images I am speaking of, for they are not objects, nor pictures of objects, nor images of images, but instead the inner dimensions, each separate and glowing, but connected, prisms of knowledge, that have within themselves more reality than we can presently begin to imagine.

To a certain extent, I must travel from those mental realities into our comprehension, wrest myself free in order to form an ever-changing, ever-moving, ever-on-the-move entity that can blog here and be there mentally at the same time. So I am distant and close at once. That distance from my blog readers also represents the reaches, however, of the human psyche, and the vast corridors of psychological activity from which it is formed, and from which our world emerges.

For the worlds are so composed that each one is a part of each other one, and there is no disconnecting. There is no place or space, psychological, psychic, where those worlds exist apart from each other, so we cannot say that one is more highly evolved than another.

There are as many frontiers as there ever were, and there is no catastrophe that will annihilate consciousness, or put an end to earthly life. When we think in terms of earth’s destruction, or the ending of the world, we are thinking of course of a continuum of time, and of beginnings and endings. From our viewpoint in space and time, it seems that planets have come and gone, stars collapsed, and when we look outward into space, it appears that we look backward into time. There are great pulsations, however, in existence — pulsations that have nothing to do with time as we understand it, but with intensities.

In the deepest of terms, the world always was and always will be. It changes its patterns of activity, it comes and goes, but it is always itself in its comings and goings. To me, that is exceedingly simple — but as far as our concepts are concerned, it can seem to imply irreconcilable complications.

A small note to my blog readers– again — trust the great power of the universe that forms your own image, trust spontaneity, and the body’s natural urges toward relaxation, motion, and creativity, as these show themselves in their own rhythms.

The Daily Hypothesis

It would help all if we remind ourselves that our creative mind is at work whether or not we are aware of it, and regardless of what we are doing, and that such periods of dead time have the potential, at least, of accelerating creativity, if we allow our intellect to go into a kind of free drive at such times.

Each person has such a daily hypothesis — one that might be quite different for say, Friday than it is for Monday. We build our daily experience partially by such working hypotheses.

Many of the beliefs  that we have individually and jointly are somewhat relieved in the evening, in that they so often apply to the day’s activities, when the rest of the world seems to be engaged in the nine-to-five assembly-line world experience.

We do not project as many negative ideas upon the evening hours, and to same applies to most people to varying degrees. We are jointly free of limitations that might hamper us at other times of the day. We are  less visited by preconceptions of what we are supposed to do in any given hour of the day.

The natural, magical flows of our own rhythms are more often broken up in the daytime. This applies to many people as well, because of our ideas of what we should be doing at any given time, or what is socially respectable, proper, upright, even moral in limited terms.

We have settled upon a system that seems to be naturally based, the exclusive results of our historic past, one in which our main activities are daytime ones. It seems only natural that early man and woman, for example, carried on all of his and her main activities in the day, hiding after dark. As a matter of fact, however, early man and woman were a natural night dweller, and early developed the uses of fire for illumination, carrying on many activities after dark, when many natural predators slept. He and she also hunted very well in the dark, cleverly using all of his and her senses with high accuracy — the result of learning processes that are now quite lost.

In any case, man and woman were not by any means exclusively a daytime creature, and fires within caves extended activities far into the night. It was agriculture that turned him and her more into a daytime rhythm, and for some time many beliefs lingered that resulted from earlier nighttime agricultural practices.

Many people’s natural rhythms, then, still do incline in those directions, and they are always kept operable as alternate rhythms for the species as a whole.

I have some inclinations in that direction, as do many creative people, but these rhythms are often nearly completely overlaid by culturally-learned ones. Cultures that were night-oriented appreciated the night in a different fashion, of course, and actually utilized their consciousnesses in ways that are almost nearly forgotten. I believe there are ancient fairy tales and myths still surviving that speak of these underworlds, or worlds of darkness — but they do not mean worlds of death, as is usually interpreted.

 

In a fashion, the intellect goes hand-in-hand with the imagination under such conditions. It is not that man and woman stressed physical data less, but he and she put it together differently — that in the darkness he and she relied upon his and her inner and outer senses in a more unified fashion. The night portions of our personalities have become strangers to us — for as we identify with what we think of a our rational intellect, then we identify it further with the daytime hours, with the objective world that becomes visible in the morning, with the clear-cut physical objects that are then before our view.

In those times, however, man and woman identified more with his and her intuitive selves, and with his and her imagination, and these to some extent more than now, directed the uses to which he and she put his or her intellect.

This meant, of course, a language that was in its way more precise than our own, for concepts were routinely expressed that described the vast complexity of subjective as well as objective events. There were myriad relationships, for example, impossible now to describe, between a person and his of her dream selves, and between the dream selves of all the members of the tribe. Particularly in warmer climates, man and woman were naturally nocturnal, and did a good deal of his and her sleeping and dreaming in the daytime.

We must remember, of course, that the use of clocks is a fairly recent phenomenon. Men and women thought in terms of rhythms of the time, of flowing time, not of time in sections that were arbitrary. So as far as creature-hood is concerned, we have adapted to a time environment that we ourselves have formed. Creative people, again, are often aware of those connections, at least at certain levels, and I have in particular always felt this way to some extent. We have largely buried our own natural feelings in that direction.

These rhythms are also more natural to us than we suspect. We often have freedoms, then, that we do not use — a 24-hour period that we use quite arbitrarily, one that is already sectioned for us by society — but only if we allow it to be. It can be used in any fashion that we wish.

Relaxation and Effortlessness

It is true, of course, that before the time of modern psychology man and woman had a concept of himself and herself that dealt with conscious exterior aspects only, although it has been written that until that time man and woman thought of themselves as a kind of flat-surfaced self-minus, for example, subconscious or unconscious complexity.

Instead, previous to psychology’s entrance, before psychology mapped the acceptable or forbidden, the dangerous or safe compartments of the self, man and woman used the word “soul” to  include his or her own entire complexity. The word was large enough to contain man’s and woman’s experience. It was large enough to provide room for conventional and unconventional, bizarre and ordinary states of mind and experience. It was roomy enough to hold images of reality that were physically perceived or psychologically perceived.

Now the church finally placed all of the condemnation of its religious laws against certain psychological and mystical experiences — not because it did not consider them realities, of course, but precisely because it recognized too well the disruptive influence that, say, revelationary experience could have upon a world order that was based upon a uniform dogma.

“Witches” were not considered insane, for example, or deranged, for their psychological beliefs fit in only too well with those of the general populace. They were considered evil instead. The vast range of psychological expression, however, had some kind of framework to contain it. The saint and the sinner each had access to great depths of possible heroism or despair. Psychological reality, for all of the religious dangers placed upon it, was anything but a flat-surfaced experience. It was in fact because the church so believe in the great range of psychological activity possible that it was so dogmatic and tireless in trying to maintain order.

Unfortunately, with the development of scientific era, a development occurred that need not have happened. As I have mentioned before, science’s determination to be objective almost immediately brought about a certain artificial shrinking of psychological reality. What could not be proven in laboratory was presumed not to exist at all.

Anyone who experienced “something that could not exist” was therefore to some extent or another deluded or deranged. There is no doubt that the accepted dimensions of psychological reality began to shrink precisely at the time that modern psychology began. Modern psychology was an attempt to make man and woman conform to the new scientific world view.

It was an attempt to fit man within the picture of evolution, and to manufacture a creature whose very existence was somehow pitted against itself. Evolutionary man and woman, with Darwinian roots, could not be a creature with a soul. It had to have hidden in its psychological roots the bloody remnants of the struggle for survival that now cast the soul in a position of stress, caught as it was between its heavenly source and original sin — but there was a sense of psychological mobility involved, one that saw continued existence after death.

The new psychology shut off mobility after death, while giving each individual an unsavory primitive past heritage — a heritage genetically carried, that led finally only to the grave. Psychological activity was scaled down in between life and death, then, even while the possibility of any after-death experience was considered the most unreasonable and unintellectual of speculations.

Any man or woman might rise in our democracy from a poor peasant’s son to be the President. Outcasts might become the socially prominent. The unlettered might become highly educated. The idea of achieving greatness, however, was considered highly suspect. The self was kept in bounds. Great passion, or desire or intent — or genius — did not fit the picture.

Now some peoples would not fit into that mold. They would take what they could from our technology, but in conscious and spontaneous ways they retaliated — and still do — by exaggerating all of those human tendencies that our society has held down so well. If we can have reason without faith, then indeed, for example, we will see that there can be faith without reason. When human experience becomes shrunken in such a fashion — compressed — then in a fashion it also explodes at both ends, one might say.

We have atrocious acts committed, along with great heroisms, but each are explosive, representing sudden releases of withheld energies that have in other ways been forbidden, and so man’s and woman’s mass psyche expresses itself sometimes like explosive fireworks, simply because the release of pressure is necessary.

Even our poor misguided moral/religious organization is saying in it’s fashion to the scientifically-oriented society: “How is faith not real, then? We’ll change your laws with it. We”ll turn it into power — political power. What will you say then? We have been laughed at for so long. We will see who laughs now.”

Fanaticism abounds, of course, because the human tendencies and experiences that have been denied by the mainline society erupt with explosive force, where the tendencies themselves must be accepted as characteristics of human experience. Iran is an example for the world, in explosive capsule form, complete with historical background and a modern political one. Modern psychology does not have a concept of the self to begin to explain such realities.

Now, in the world we early formed our own beliefs and strategies. In midlife we are presented with a recognized overall vitality of materials. This is mean to reorient our attitudes. Some don’t realize, that we are not merely being presented with an alternate view of reality, but with the closet approximation we could get of what reality is, and how it worked, and what it meant.

I have been very gentle in my treatment of our mores and institutions — for I do not want to be against our world, but for a more fulfilling one. In future blogs I will be discussing how our ideas can be applied by the individual in terms of value fulfillment, so that individuals can begin to reclaim those dimensions of experience that are indeed our right heritage.

For my blog readers, I want them to remember the idea of effortlessness, because with the best of intentions some have been trying too hard. I want them to remember that relaxation is one of creativity’s greatest champions — not its enemy. He or she is naturally gifted with the quickness of body and mind. Remind oneself that it is safe to express his or her natural rhythms, to remember the natural person. Our most vital inspirations are effortlessly ours. I want us to see how many of our beliefs are the result of the old framework, for in that way we will find ourselves releasing ourselves ore and more, so the our own strengths come to our support.

 

The Magical Precognition Approach

In our terms, whether a minute or 10 minutes, or an hour or two hours were involved, we react ahead of time to a headline that have not as yet physically encountered. We react creatively, using the precognitive story as a basis for a fictional endeavor. We turn it into art’s purposes.

The idea, then, of the my blogs came from past and future events, though I were to catch up with those future events very quickly. My mind intuitively organized all of that material, and put it together in a completely new fashion. Sometimes when such events occur, the precognitive trigger is not recognized when it is encountered physically, because it happens too far ahead of time. We organize mental and physical events in a creative manner. In this case my blogs were involved because the concept, while strongly involving images, carries a time span that would make narrative necessary.

I used the magical approach. I caught myself in the act of acting naturally, of demonstrating abilities that our society to a large degree does not admit. That same kind of lighting-swift organization goes on within the body itself constantly, as it deals with probable scenarios to which we may or may not end up reacting to.

The events themselves discussed in any newspaper article point up the same kind of magical affiliations. We live personally in a world of lush creative ideas. Our intellect is aware of that. It is used to working creatively. The focused intellect can indeed activate the intuitive abilities — and the healing abilities. We get what we concentrate upon.

The intellect is a vital organizer even if it is not aware of the magical levels of activity from which often it’s best ideas emerge.

When we look at world events, however, the present world situation for example ( wars in the Middle East), try to enlarge the scope of our intellectual reach, so that we consider world events as living multidimensional “blogs” being formed in the present in response to both future and past triggers. The impact of the future on the past, in our terms — or rather, the implications of the future on the present — are highly important, and such precognitive reactions are as vital, numerous, and real as we ordinarily think that the reactions to past events are.

This puts present world events in an entirely different perspective. Men and women act, then, in relationship to events happening, say, in the future, in certain terms cast their shadows back into the present, or illuminate the past according to the events’ characteristics. There is always more going on than ordinary sense data show.

In our comparatively simple experience, we can see, however, the implications of such activities. Men and women react to future events by unconsciously translating them into art, or motion pictures. They may react by unconsciously taking certain steps of a political nature that seem at the time either unreasonable, or even incomprehensible — steps whose logic appears only in hindsight.

The same occurs, of course, in all areas of human behavior, as well as in the behavior of animals and even of plants. This future shadowing the presents, or future illuminating the present, represents a vital elements in the formation of events as they are perceived in time. In a fashion triplets are reacting in their past to a future event that now can catch up with them, so that each of their actions in any moment of that past happened as a result of a tension — a creative tension — between the event of their original separation and the event of their future reunion.

I do not mean that the reunion is inevitable or predestined, but the vigor of that probabilities, we might say, magnified the original tension. I want to apply all of this to my own situation, both in terms of creative endeavors and my physical situation, so that I begin to understand that I can start to react in the present to a future change.

I can see how important periods of letting go are. My experience happens where I am nearly asleep, but merely relaxed, not worrying, with my intellect in a kind of free flow. I am not hampering it. It is momentarily free of limiting beliefs, and it naturally used — and chose to use — the magical approach to answer what is very simple, now-forgotten intellectual question: What might be in today’s news?

The usual answer, or the usual method of obtaining an answer, is at times inconvenient: I was not about to get up , go to the TV or computer and get the news, so on it’s own the intellect pressed the magical-approach button, I might say, getting the information the quickest and easiest way possible.

It did not give me the bare headline, however — even though that and the blog story were perceived far too quickly for me to follow. What I was aware of was my own creative reveries in response to that information.

Now left alone, the intellect will often solve problems in just such a fashion, when it is allowed to, when we forget what is supposed to be possible and what is not, when we forget that our mind is supposed to be pedestrian and parochial.

Inserting New Ideas Into The World

Under its overall auspices we have the most conventional establishment-oriented textbooks, devoted to continuing traditional ideas. We have, there, a concentration upon education as it is understood at that level.

My blogs do not appear under traditional headings. They are too anti-establishment to be in college networks, but in their way far too reasonable to be considered eccentricities — in the same fashion, now, that traditional blogs are. Maybe I will expand my message to social networks more in the future? I hear that it would be smart to get Facebook followers for free to grow the spread of my message

My blogs are attempting to insert new ideas into the world as it now is, by combining the powers of the intellect and the powers of the intuitions — in other words.

We have been dealing with the magical approach, and let me gently remind my blog readers that I have said we must be willing to change all the way from the old system of orientation to the new, if we want the new approach to work fully for us in our lives. That will, as it happens, include our approach to traditional thought, of course.

As I have said before, also, when faced with the difficulty, the conventional, rational approach tells us to look at the problem, examine it thoroughly, project it into the future, and imagine its dire consequences — and so, faced with the idea of a disclaimer.

That is an excellent example of what not to do.

Some people indeed, will begin to pull out of that, and at least question the approach. In the meantime, of course, our nervous systems reacted to the implied threat against our problems, a threat that now existed in the past, present and future.

We are protected. Our work is protected. When we realize that, we act out of confidence. We indeed catch ourselves. When we realize that we are protected, our own intellects can be reassured enough through experience so that they do not feel the need to solve problems with the rational approach in instances where that approach is not feasible.

In the deepest of terms it was not reasonable to nearly assume that a disclaimer, if used, would therefore be retroactively and then continuously used. It was not a conclusion based upon fact, but a conclusion based upon a reason that applied to one probability only, one series of probable acts — or based upon the probable act of a disclaimer being used to begin with. So again, what we are dealing with is an overall lesson in the way in which the reasoning mind has been taught to react. These are really instances where the intellect has been trained to use only a portion of its abilities, to zoom in the most pessimistic of any given series of probable actions — and then treat those as if they were facts.

I will, of course, have more to say in future blogs, that will hopefully allow our intellect to use in a clear fashion, to better our performances. So if I do decide to expand into social networks, make sure that you keep an eye out for me because I would love the chance to grow my Facebook followers and my blog more. I definitely have a lot of other things to say. We are quite right, again, to say that “There are elements in this situation — or any given situation — impossible for my intellect to know,” so the intellect can take that fact into consideration. Otherwise, we expect it to make deductions while denying it the comfort it should have, of knowing that its deductions need not be made on its own knowledge alone, but on the intuition’s vast magical bank of information — from which, in larger terms, all of the intellect’s information must spring. So I think we are finally trying to use a new approach in that direction.

The magical approach will get us through, if we use it.

“The light of the universe.”

It’s obvious that in this blog adventure I have once again cleverly protected myself from confronting the full creative blast of the life of the universe by allowing myself just a peek at it, and a careful one at that, at the top of a door. As a physical creature I’d be overwhelmed if ever I came even close to facing that awesome conscious and creative power.

Spiritual Multidimensional Dramas

Christ was not crucified — therefore he did not resurrect, coming out of the tomb, nor did he then ascend into heaven. In the terms  of the biblical drama, however, Christ was crucified.

He arose from the tomb and ascended into heaven. The resurrection and the ascension are indeed, however, the two parts of one dramatic event. Dogmatically, arising from the dead alone was clearly not sufficient, for men and women were to follow where Christ led. We could not have a world in which the newly-risen dead mixed with the living. An existence in a spiritual realm had to follow such a resurrection.

Now in the facts of history, there was no crucifixion, resurrection, or ascension. In the terms of history there was no biblical Christ whose life followed the details given. The organization of the church is a historical fact. The power, devotion, and energy the organizational expertise of Christianity, cannot be disputed. Nor can it be disputed that Christianity was based upon great religious and psychic vision. To some extent it involved the intuitional reorganization of subjective, and then objective, realities.

I have told in past blogs, however, that the world of events springs from the world of ideas. It seems certain that “something” happened “back then” — and that if we could go back there, invisibly studying the century, we would discover the birth of Christianity. But Christianity was not born at that time. We might say that the labor pains were happening then, but the birth itself did not emerge for some time later.

Jewish shepherds represented the placenta that was meant to be discarded, for it was Jewish tradition that nourished the new religion in its early stages before its birth. Christ, as we know, was a common name, so when I say that there was a man named Christ involved in those events, I do not mean to say that he was the biblical Christ. His life was one of those lives that were finally used to compose the composite image of the biblical Christ.

The mass psyche was seeking for a change, an impetus, a flowering, a new organization. The idea of a redeemer was hardly new, but ancient in many traditions. As I stated before, the part of the world was filled with would -be messiahs, self-proclaimed prophets, and so forth, and in those terms it was only a matter of time before man’s and woman’s great spiritual and psychic desires illuminated and filled up that psychological landscape, filling the prepared psychological patterns with a new urgency and intent. There were many throw-away messiahs — men or women whose circumstances, characteristics, and abilities were almost the ones needed — who almost filled the psychic bill, but who were unfitted for other reasons: They were of the wrong race, or  their timing was off. Their intersection with space and time did not mesh with the requirements.

We must understand the long trail of psychological reality that exists before we have a physical event. We must understand man’s and woman’s need and capacity for fulfillment, dramatization and psychic creativity.

There is nothing that happened in those times that is not  happening now in our own: We have numberless gurus, people who seemingly perform miracles ( and some do). So there were in those days some rather disconnected events that served as the focus point for great psychic activity: People wanted to believe, and their belief changed the course of history. It doesn’t matter that the events never happened — the belief happened. And the belief was man’s and woman’s response to intuitional knowledge, to inner knowledge, and to spiritual comprehension.

These all had to flow into reality, into psychological patterns through man’s and woman’s own understanding. They had to flow into the events of history as he or she experienced history. They had to touch the times, and they did so by transforming those times for later generations.

I want it understood that the accomplishment is breathtaking in its grandeur — more so because man and woman formed from his and her psyche such a multidimensional spiritual drama that its light struck upon this or that person, this or that place, and formed a story more powerful than any physical event could be — hence its power.

In those terms, however, again, the gods of Olympus were as real, for all of men’s and women’s riches are representations, psychic dramatizations, standing for an inner reality that cannot be literally expressed of described — but can be creatively expressed or represented.

Too-literal translations of such material often lead to grief, and the creative thrust becomes lost. The great mystery, of course, and great questions, rest in the nature of that inner reality from which man and woman weans his and her religions, and in the power of the creative abilities themselves that bring them into birth. Such activities on a large scale are the end result of each natural person’s individual relationship with nature, and with nature’s source.

 

 

 

 

 

 

The Natural Person’s Education and Culture

The body is constantly repairing itself at an ex excellent rate.

It is doing so because we are giving it different “orders.” We are giving it a different picture of the world, and when doing that we have finally changed many of our old beliefs.

In actuality, the body’s response to such information is always instantaneous, whether or not the results show at once.  We are beginning to hold a more “realistic” picture of how overall reality works. We are managing to disentangle ourselves from many disadvantageous cultural beliefs — beliefs that all of us for years took for granted.

 

We might combat those beliefs, struggle against them, but they still carry great weight. We will still believe them to an important degree. The entire idea, of fear, that had at one time of leading people down the garden path, was based upon those old beliefs. Those ideas have vanished. We are approaching a state of mind, individually and jointly, that represents far more closely one that is natural, with which the natural person is innately equipped.

Education in our culture is a mixed bag — and education comes not from schools alone, but from computers and television, magazines and books, from art and from culture’s own feedback. Generally speaking, for the purposes of this discussion, there are two kinds of education — one focused toward teaching the child to deal with the natural world, and one focused toward teaching the child to deal with the cultural world. Obviously, these are usually combined. It is impossible to separate them.

Our educational systems, however, for all of their idealism, have largely ended up smothering the natural individual bents and leanings of children, and overemphasized instead the cultural organization. It became more important, then for the child to conform to the culture rather than to follow its own individual natural leanings. Its own characteristic ways of dealing with nature were frowned upon, so that education does not work with the child’s abilities, but against them. Education then often goes against the grain of the natural person.

This does not mean that some children do not do very well under our system. I do not mean to imply, either, that children do not need an education, or that some discipline and direction are not beneficial. Children, however, will concentrate for hours at a time on subject matters and questions that interest  them. They are often taken from such pursuits, and their natural habits of concentration suffer as a result.

We are unlearning right now, and discovering that this particular unlearning process is indeed highly educational. We are encountering our own natural knowledge.

In many instances, of course, we learned too well . The natural person that is ourselves loves to create. We did this apart from what we had to do in school as a child. These blogs, in that regard, came naturally, as the expression of natural abilities and tendencies, finally emerging despite my official views at any time.

My blog discussions brought about, however, a new kind of education that often seem in direct conflict with the old, and with the official views of contemporary society.

Whether or not these blog discussions happened as they did, however, once written online, the probability brought about by our relationships, meaning that in one way or another we would seek out a larger context of consciousness — a context, because of our talents, that would not remain private, but attract others.

The natural person is to be found, now, not in the past or in the present, but beneath layers and layers of official beliefs, so we are dealing with an archeology of beliefs to find the person who creates beliefs to begin with. As I have said often, evidence of clairvoyance, telepathy, or whatever, are not eccentric, isolated instances occurring in man’s and woman’s experience, but are representative of natural patterns of everyday behavior that become invisible in our world because of the official picture of behavior and reality.

The body’s natural healing processes each day rid people of diseases, repair emotional or bodily illnesses — and such instances go largely unrecorded.

Many of the ideas I have given in previous blogs have indeed, become alive now. In the same way, many other concepts and ideas already given will also assume a new significance and meaning, and add to the richness of our experience, because we will be open to them more than we were before, to ideas having to do with reincarnation, life after death, other spheres of activity.

Instinctively my paintings represent a certain state of consciousness — an in between threshold dimension of awareness, in which the imagination and the senses are almost caught in the act of putting an object together, or of bringing the world into a sensed reality, brand-new, from the realm of the inner mind: a very evocative state of consciousness, and one that could be used in connection with faces.

The body is then magically and naturally repairing itself in a function just as creative, of course, as inner work that goes on in the production of a blog, book or a poem — a fact I am finally getting through my head.

 

The Body’s Magical Reasoning

The body reasons so quickly, so clearly and concisely, that its deductions, its logic, are far too fast for the intellect to follow. The body reasons directly. The body’s reasoning transforms itself into action, with nothing to stand between its elegant logic and the logic’s brilliant execution. Humans could not possibly follow all of the manipulations necessary so improvements can take place. Again, bodily efforts are as magical, as creative, certainly, as the writing of a blog or a poem — but I have in the past trusted my creative abilities as if they were something I had to guard from my physical self.

My change of attitudes has allowed, and changed physical habits: the encouragement of motion, the expanded feeling of identity, which now includes the physical body rather than trying to exclude it.

The body is not a tool, to do our mental bidding. Our body is a mental expression physically materialized. More improvements are indeed even now occurring, and as long as attitudes continue to improve we can expect such progress — for again, the body is quite capable of healing itself completely, and with far greater ease than we give it credit for. However, at times when the body is not able to heal itself, external aid is required to give the body a push to do its work. Take, for example, digestive disorders. Although our bodies can heal such mundane matters, sometimes dietary supplements like Bio X4 (interested people can have a glance at the Bio X4 reviews online) are needed to help the body recuperate faster.

Nevertheless, it is true that we don’t have to do anything in particular, for example, of a conscious nature, except to state our intentions, and the body’s healing mechanisms immediately quickened. This is because we began to take the pressure off, so to speak, and really began to understand the abilities and limitations of the rational mind in its relationship to the body.

Some people believe it is quite possible to have clairvoyant dreams, out-of-body experiences, creative adventures in the arts — but to some of us doubt in the physical power or energy could be directed effectively in the physical realm, so-called, of bodily health, or situations of the nitty-gritty. Again, the material is indeed dealing with a far more valid explanation for the working ways of reality than the old official beliefs — and again, we are not just dealing with evocative, creative hypotheses.

There is no need, to be surprised if some of our ideas frighten people.

If our ideas were already accepted in the world, there would be no need for my blog. That is, some disapproval is acceptable. To attack medical corruption, or medical errors, or particular clinics, for example, is within bounds, but to attack the belief systems of the entire structure is something else again.

Some people’s objections should simply show us why our blog work is so important. We must not forget, again, that we chose these challenges. We wanted to be involved with the initiation of new thematic material. We want the experience of getting it for ourselves, so to speak — the exhilaration of discovery.

The implications are here in my blogs, but our belief systems must be allowed to mellow and change in the light of new knowledge, rather than to be booted aside with an angry foot.

Nature As Man’s and Woman”s Caretaker

Men and women likes to think of themselves as the caretaker of nature and the world. It is closer to the truth, however, to say — in that regard, at least — that nature is man’s and woman’s caretaker; or that man and woman exists, physically speaking, as the result of the graceful support of nature and all of its other species. Without those other species, man and woman as we know him and her would not exist, not without the continuous cooperation of those species with each other, and their interrelationships with the environment.

Man and woman serves his and her purposes within nature, as all species do, and in the terms of our understanding man and woman “thinks” in his and her own way, but he and she is also the thinking portion of nature. He and she are the portion that thinks, in our understanding, again, of that term.

He and she deals with the effect of thinking upon nature, so to speak. He and she adds to the rest of nature. He and she therefore adds a different kind of mental organization — and organization, then, that nature itself requires, anticipates, and desires. Animals do not read or write books or blogs, but they do “read” nature directly through the context of their own experience, and through intuitive knowing. Man’s and woman’s reasoning mind adds an atmosphere to nature, that is as real, say, as the Van Allen Belts (or radiation fields) that surround the earth.

The thinking mind to a large degree directs the activity of great spontaneous forces, with energy-cellular organization being, say, the captain of the body’s great energy sources. The reasoning mind defines, makes judgments, deals with the physical objects of the world, and also with the cultural interpretations current in its time.

Think of our own government in ideal terms for a moment. Its citizens are all individuals, with their own lives and interests. The government, if it has their loyalty, utilizes their energies in such a fashion that the majority are benefited, as is the government itself. Yet we cannot really put our finger on “the government,” though we might mention the White House as the seat of its power. The government is composed of many people, of course, and really extends all the way down the line, even to its least citizen, but the government can direct the use of energies, of goods, commerce, power, and so forth.

The people count upon the government to realistically define the conditions of the world, to have proper intelligence so that the activities in foreign lands are known, to keep up proper communication with other governments, and so forth. Now in some important respects the reasoning mind is like the government in this analogy. If the people in power are paranoid, then they overestimate the dangers of any given world situation. They overreact, or over mobilize, using a disproportionate amount of energy and time for defense, and taking energies away from other projects. The reasoning mind acts in the same fashion when paranoid beliefs are in power. It therefore tells all of the citizens — or cells of the body — to mobilize for action, to be on the alert, to pare down all but necessary activities, and so forth.

When a government is paranoid, it even begins to cut down on the freedom of its own peoples, or to frown upon behavior that in freer times would be quite acceptable. The same applies to the conscious mind in that situation. Now the people might finally revolt, or they will take certain steps to see that their freedom is restored, and so the body’s cells will do the same.

So what we want, obviously,  is to ensure that the conscious mind, with its reasoning processes, can make proper adjustments about the nature of the world and the individual citizens within it. I will return later to the purposes of man’s and woman’s conscious mind in nature, and part of that discussion will fall in my blogs.

Man’s and woman’s mind is really more of a process. It is not a completed thing, like an arm of leg, but a relationship and a process. That process has its source in what I can only call “natural reasoning.”

We are given far more knowledge than we realize when we are born, for example. I am not speaking of genetic information alone, as we understand it, but of a natural yet intuitive reasoning process that is that result of the relationships that exist among all portions of the body. This is the kind of “reasoning” that is the source from which thinking emerges, and we might think of it as magical reasoning. Some people might not realize the immense power that they themselves hold in the form of consciousness. In this regard, man has endeavored to explore many mystical plants over millenia that nature has bountifully offered, such as the Ayahuasca plant (look at Iowaska Benefits: Healing for Cancer, Depression & More for some deeper insights). The innate desire to know more and explore the boundaries of what we know, has led us to seek through different means.

Each creature is born trusting.

There is no such thing as a killer instinct, with the implications and meaning that man and woman give that term. At levels almost impossible to describe to us in our adulthoods, all infants, for example, know that they are born into the environmental niches that suit them and no others — that are tailored to their requirements. We can usually see in a superficial fashion how animals under “natural conditions” fit into their environments so perfectly, so that their needs and desires and equipment meet and merge with the characteristics of the environment. It is not nearly as easy to see that the same applies to man and woman and his and her mental and physical environment, his and her town or country or culture, but the infant trusts from the very first moment.

We may not consider trust an attribute connected with reasoning, but it is indeed, for it represents the creature’s innate understanding of the support with which it has been gifted. The natural person still feels that trust. There are many books written about occult knowledge, or magical knowledge. Most of them are filled with distortions, but they are all efforts to uncover man’s and woman’s natural magical reasoning. I will also have more to say on that subject in later blogs.

The body’s natural healing processes, that naturally flow and are naturally flowing when he or she allows himself or herself to trust his or her life and the support of his or her own being. It is our understanding that sets it all into motion. They must be allowed to happen, however, and that takes place as our understanding brings us in greater correspondence with the natural energy that is always our own.

The Intellect As A Cultural Artifact

The intellect is far more socially oriented than is generally understood.

Some of this, again, is difficult to explain, but in a fashion the intellect is a cultural phenomenon. It is amazing resilient, in that according to the belief structures of any given historical period, it can orient itself along the lines of those beliefs, using all of its reasoning abilities to bring such a world picture into focus, collecting data that agree, and rejecting what does not.

Obviously, the mind can use its reasoning abilities, for example, to come to the conclusion that there is a single god behind the functioning of the world, that there are many gods, that divinity is a fantasy, and that the world itself springs from no reasonable source. Like statistics, the reasoning abilities can be used to come to almost any conclusion. This is done, again, by taking into consideration within any given system of reasoning only the evidence that agrees with the system’ premises.

This flexibility allows the species great variation overall in its psychological and cultural and political and religious activities. When any system of reasoning becomes too rigid, however, there are always adjustments made that will allow other information to intrude — otherwise, of course, our belief systems would never change.

Our species shares with the other species a feeling of kinship for its kind. There is a great give-and-take of ideas. We end up, then, with a consensus, generally speaking, as to what a reasonable picture of agreed-upon reality is. Our system has frowned upon many experiences, considering them eccentric behavior in an adverse fashion, since our belief systems have so regimented behavior, and so narrowly defined sanity. The intellect, I want to stress, is socially oriented. It is peculiarly suited, of course, to react to cultural information. It wants to see the world as it is seen by the minds of others. Through that kind of action it helps form our cultural environment, the civilization of which we are justly proud.

The intellect, then, helps our species translate its own natural purposes and intents — the purposes and intents of the natural person — into their “proper” cultural context, so that those abilities the natural person possesses can benefit the civilization of its time. Those purposes and intents literally change the world. The intellect’s expectations and intents spontaneously and automatically trigger  the proper bodily mechanisms to bring about the necessary environmental interactions, and our intent as expressed through our intellect directs our experience of the world.

I am speaking about the intellect here for our discussion, but remember it is everywhere cushioned also. There are backup systems, in other words. If the intellect believes that the world is a threat to existence, then that belief will alter its intents, of course, and therefore the body’s activities. The beliefs of the intellect operate then as powerful suggestions, particularly when the intellect identifies with those beliefs, so that there is little distance between the intellect and the beliefs that it holds as true.

I am doing my best to explain the very practical aspects of the intellect’s beliefs, and their strength in drawing experience to us. At one time I had difficulty with understanding some of these ideas. Our own relationship, our private beliefs about the sort of persons we want individually for mates, brought about incalculable actions that lead finally to our meeting — yet it all happened “quite naturally,” of course. Our beliefs bring us into correspondence with the elements likely to lead to their affirmation. They draw from Framed-mind-2 all of the necessary ingredients. They elicit from other people’s behavior that is in keeping with those beliefs.

Our own attitudes, for example — and beliefs — about foreigners, people’s stupidity and lack of integrity, put us in correspondence with those same beliefs on the part of others, resulting in a translation fiasco. An entirely different kind of behavior could have been elicited from those same people. Like attracts like in that regard. Those same people, for example, all have, as we do, beliefs in people’s trustworthiness, and so forth — but under those conditions, at that time, we each — or rather us all — are in correspondence at many levels. My blogs are published. They have helped many people, and that is because we are also in correspondence as far as many of our more positive beliefs are concerned, and those outweigh the others.

We get what we concentrate upon, and our beliefs are largely responsible for those areas in which we concentrate.

There are no magical methods, only natural ones that we use all of the time, although in some cases we use them for beliefs that we take for truths, when instead they are quite defective assumptions. A small example — one, incidentally, that I finally realized; but it is a beautiful instance of natural methods.

I heard the next day’s weather report, groaned, thought of a very uncomfortable 90-degree temperature tomorrow and imagined myself miserable with the heat. Indeed, I began to feel warmer. In a flash I remembered previous days of discomfort, and in the next moment I projected those into the weekend. I felt trapped. Midway through this process I tried to catch myself, but I believed that my body could not handle the heat — and that belief outweighed my intent to change my thoughts, so they kept returning for perhaps ten minutes.

I continued, however, to remind myself that I was not going to worry about tomorrow today, regardless. I told myself that the prediction might be wrong, and I began with my intellect to pile up evidence that could in one way or another bring about a different, more beneficial experience. I did this by recognizing the way I had earlier been building up the picture in the old manner, by collecting all the evidence that fitted it. I used the same process, only for a more beneficial picture, and the process works. We have only to become aware of it.

Our experience will follow our concentration and beliefs and expectation. The mind is a great discriminator. It can use its reasoning to bring about almost any possible experience within our framework.

The Ilda Family is Composed of The “Exchangers.”

They deal primarily in the great play of exchange and interchange of ideas, products, social and political concepts. They are travelers, carrying with them the ideas of one country to another, mixing cultures, religions, attitudes, political structures. They are explorers, merchants, soldiers, missionaries, sailors. They are often members of crusades.

c3cr

Throughout the ages they have served as the spreaders of ideas, the assimilators. They(The Ilda) turn up everywhere. They were pirates and slaves as well, historically speaking. They are often primarily involved in social changes. In our time they may be diplomats, as they were also in the past. Their characteristics are usually those of the adventuresome. Very seldom do they live in one place for long, although they may if their occupation deals with products from another land. individually they may seem highly diverse in nature, one from the other, but we will not find them as a rule in universities as teachers. We might find them as archaeologists in the field, however.

HEFG

A good many salesmen belong in this (Ilda) category. In our terms they may be cosmopolitan, and often wealthy, so that frequent travel is possible. On the other hand, however, in certain frameworks, a humble merchant in a small country who travels through nearby cities might also belong to this family. They are interested in the outsides of things, social mores, the marketplace, current popular religious ideas. They spread these from place to place. They are the seed-carriers, both literally and figuratively.

wrnwynn

They can be “con men,” selling products supposed to have miraculous values, blinding the local populace with their city airs. Yet even then they will be bringing with them the aura of other ideas, often inserting into closed areas concepts with which others are already familiar.

The members of this family of consciousness provide frequent new options. They may be scientists, or the strictest kind of conventional missionaries abroad in alien lands. In our present time they are sometimes Indians (from India, that is), or Africans or Arabs, journeying to our civilization. They add to the great flow of communication. They may be emotional rather than intellectual, as we understand those terms, but they are restless, usually on the move. They can be actors, also.

c3

In the past some (Ilda) have been great courtesans, and even though they were not able to travel physically, they were at the heart of communication– that is, a part of court life, or involved with diplomats who did travel.

Many of the courtesans who rule the salons of Europe belonged in the (Ilda) category. The Crusades involved great movement of this family, in which trade and commerce, and the exchange of political ideas, were far more important than the religious aspects. Some members of this family served as initiators of new orders in the (Catholic) church in the past–the worldly Jesuits, for example, and some of the more sophisticated popes, who had a fine eye out for commerce and wealth. These people may be appreciators of fine art, but usually for its commercial value.

Now we can often find then in the departments of government, in these areas where travel is involved, or in finance. They frequently enjoy, intrigue. All in all, they mix mores.

The Way In Which The Individual is Defined

Part of the difficulty arises from the current scientific-oriented blend of rationalism. As a species, we think of ourselves as the “pinnacle” end of an evolutionary scale, as if all other entities from the first cell onward somehow existed in a steady line of progression, culminating with animals, and finally with man and woman the reasoning animal. (with all of that progress occurring of course by chance, incidentally.)

That particular blend of rational thinking with which our society is familiar takes it more or less for granted, then, that  man’s and woman’s identity as a species, and the identity of the individual, is first and foremost connected with the intellect . We identify ourselves with our intellect, primarily, casting aside as much as possible other equally vital elements of our personhood.

In our historical past, when man and woman identified his or her identity with the soul, he or she actually gave himself or herself greater leeway in terms of psychological mobility, but eventually the concept of the soul as held resulted in a distrust of the intellect. That result was the inevitable follow-up of dogma. Part of man’s woman’s latest over-identification with the intellect is, of course, an overreaction to those past historical events. Neither religion or science grant other creatures much subjective dimension, however: We like to think of ourselves, again, as the reasoning animal in terms of our species.

However, animals do reason. They do not reason in the same areas that we do. In those areas in which they do reason, they understand cause and effect quite well. Their reasoning is applied, however, to levels of activity to which our own reasoning is not applied. Therefore, often animal reasoning is not apparent to us. Animals are curious. Their curiosity is applied to areas in which we seldom apply our own.

The animals possess a consciousness of self, and without the human intellect. We do not need a human intellect to be aware of our own consciousness. Animals, it is true, do not reflect upon the nature of their own identities as man and woman do, but this is because that nature is intuitively comprehended. It is self-evident.

I only want to show that the sense of identity need not inevitably be coupled with the intellect exclusively. Our intellect is a part of us — a vital, functioning portion of our cognitive processes — but it does not contain our identity.

The natural person is understood perhaps more clearly by considering any person as a child. In fashion the child discovers its own intellect, as it discovers its own feelings. Feelings come “first.” The child’s feelings give rise to curiosity, to thoughts, to the operation of the intellect: “Why do I feel thus and so? Why is grass soft, and rock hard? Why does a gentle touch soothe me, while a slap hurts me”

The feelings and sensations give rise to the questions, to the thoughts, to the intellect. The child in a fashion feels — feels — its own thoughts rise from a relative psychological invisibility into immediate, vital formation. There is a process there that we have forgotten. The child identifies with its own psychic reality first of all — then discovers its feelings, and claims those, and discovers its thoughts and intellect, and claims those.

The child first explores the components of its psychological environment, the inside stuff of subjective knowledge, and claims that inner territory, but the child does not identify its basic being with either its feelings or its thoughts. That is why, for example, it often seems that young children can die so easily. They can disentangle themselves because they have not as yet identified their basic beings with life experience.

In most cases children grow up, of course, although in the vast overall picture of nature a goodly proportion of individuals do indeed take other courses. They serve other functions, they have other purposes, they take part in life through a different cast of action. They affect life while themselves not completely immersed in it. They die young. They are aborted. They remain, however, an important element in life’s overall picture — part of a psychological underpainting that always affects later versions.

Ideally, however, children finally claim their feelings and their thoughts as their own. They identify naturally with both, finding each valid and vital. By the time we are an adult, however, we have been taught to disconnect our identity from our feelings as much as possible, and to think of our personhood in terms of our intellectual orientation. Our identity seems to be in our head. Our feelings and our mental activity therefore appear, often, quite contradictory. We try to solve all problems through the use of reasoning alone.

We are taught to submerge the very intuitive abilities that the intellect needs to do its proper work — for the intellect must check with the feeling portions of the self for feedback, for support, for knowledge as to biological conditions. Denied that feedback, it can spin on endlessly in frenzied dry runs.

At each moment, from the most microscopic levels the body in one way or another is ascertaining a constant picture of its position within physical reality. That picture is composed of millions of ever-changing smaller snapshots, as it were — or moving pictures is better — determining so many conditions, positions and relationships that they could never be described. We end up with a predominating picture of reality in any given moment — one that is the result of the activity of psychological, biological, and electromagnetic strats. One picture is transposed upon the others, and calculations made constantly, so that all of the components that make up physical existence are met, and intersect to give us life.

None of that is the intellect’s concern at an intellectual level. At a biological level, and at an electromagnetic level, the intellect, of course, performs feats that it cannot consciously know through the use of its reason. Spontaneously, with the process just mentioned, millions of pictures are being taken also of the probable actions that will — or may — be needed, in our terms, in the moment immediately following, from microscopic action to the motion of a muscle, the driving of a car, the reading of a book, or whatever.

One of the intellect’s main purposes is to give us a conscious choice in a world of probabilities. To do that properly the intellect is to make clear, concise decisions, on its level, of matters that are its concern, and therefore to present its own picture of reality to add to the entire construct. On the one hand we have been told to identify ourselves almost completely with our intellects. On the other hand, we have been taught that the intellect, the “flower of consciousness,” so  frail, vulnerable adjunct — again, a chance creation, without meaning and without support without support because we believe that “beneath it” lie “primitive, animalistic, bloody instincts,” against which reason must exert what strength it has.

Despite all of that, men and women still find the solutions to many of their problems by rediscovering the larger sense of identity — a sense of identity that accepts the intuitions and the feelings, the dreams and the magic hopes as vital characteristics, not adjuncts, of personhood. When I tell you to remember your own natural persons, I do then want to remind you not to identify with your intellect alone, but to enlarge you scopes of identity. Automatically those other, often-shunted-aside characteristics begin to add their richness, fulfillment, and vitality to your lives effortlessly.

This new orientation will bring results, and the results do appear effortlessly. Remember that creative activity goes on within us all the time, and is often most active precisely when we are not aware of it. We are only aware of those moments when creative activity surges into our conscious awareness, and by then much of the “work” has already been done.

We are not responsible for other people’s realities, but we are responsible for our own. The Ill man’s or woman’s reality does not threaten our own in any way. The situation, however, shows that we sometimes still think we should be able to solve all problems, and to know all the reasons for any given sorrow or tragedy. The intellect cannot handle that kind of information at this level.

Some answers come when we are ready for them. Then they come naturally, as a matter of understanding and comprehension. The question of life’s tragedies still cannot be answered satisfactorily at the level at which any of us are currently asking it. I can give hints and clues and explanations that are quite valid within that context.

As a matter of fact, the kind of literal answers that we may think we want can indeed lead us somewhat astray in terms of the larger picture, so I must say: “That is not my province,” send energy, a note now and then; but the particular problem, the specific problem is the other’s, not mine’s.”

The reason for the problem is a philosophical concern of mine and of yours, but it is one whose answer — or answers — will gradually unfold. All of this information I consider necessary, again, to provide an overall atmosphere of comprehension that will allow the release of our own vitalities and strengths in an effortless manner, in such a way that our own problems begin to dissolve.

The kind of orientation I am speaking of represents the truest picture I can give of a man’s and woman’s natural relationship with himself or herself and the world. This is how it works. This is physical.

The Present Is The Point Of Power

The point of power is where flesh and matter meet with spirit. That juncture embodies the actions and beliefs we choose to draw from all of our previous points of power. From our current present we project, for better or worse, those choices, plus any new ones we may decide upon, into each of the presents we’ll be creating throughout the rest of our lives. The contents of our projections, then, are of supreme importance.

Through even a five-minute exercise, in which we sit quietly and look about, we can become aware that the present is the point of power. In this exercise, we gently remind ourselves that we aren’t at the mercy of our past beliefs unless we think we are. We have the full freedom to insert new creative goals in our point-of-power exercises. Next, we relax, to give our fresh suggestions time to begin working within us. Next, physically we make a simple gesture or act, no matter how modest, that is in line with our desires for the future. Periodically we repeat the exercise — but easily, without pressure, confident that we’re doing well. Action is thought in physical motion.

My wife and I are “counterparts” — entities psychically connected to each other, and to other men, women and children alive now in this country and in others. The connection can be conscious, unconscious, or both. Many of us will never meet physically, but as a group all of us are exploring related lifetime themes in ways that no individual can do.

Styles of Thought

The scientific framework of reference has become equated with the term “rational thinking,” to such an extent that any other slant of thought automatically seems to be irrational. Thought has become, in that regard, too specialized, prejudiced, and inflexible.

Now there are styles of thought. Each individual has his or her own style of thinking, a peculiar, rich, individual mixture of speculations, fantasies, ideocentric ways of using subjective and objective data. Science has so dominated the world of thought, however, that many nuances and areas once considered quite “rational” have become quite unrespectable. Science  tries to stick to what it can prove.

Unfortunately, it tends to set up a worldview that is then based upon certain material only. We end up with separate disciplines: biology, psychology, physics, mathematics, and so forth, each with its own group of facts, jealously guarded, each providing its own worldview: the world as seen through biology, or reality as seen through the eyes of physics.

There is no separate field that combines all of that information, or applies the facts of one discipline to the facts of another discipline, so overall, science, with its brand of rational thought, can offer no even, suggestive, hypothetical, comprehensive ideas of what reality is. It seems that each individual is in effect isolated in certain vital regards — given, say, a genetic heritage and a certain amount of unspecified energy with which to run the body’s machinery. Intent, purpose, or desire do not apply in that picture.

The individual is, again, a stranger, almost an alien, in his or her own environment, in which he must struggle to survive, not only against the “uncaring” forces of the immediate environment, but against the genetic determinism. He or she must fight against his or her own body, overemphasize its susceptibility to built-in defects, diseases, and against a built-in time bomb, so to speak, when without warning extinction will arrive. Science does not stress the cooperative forces of nature. It glories in distinctions, specifications, and categories, and is quite blind, generally speaking, to the uniting forces that are of course every bit as real. Therefore, when I speak of the natural person being also the magical person, it is easy to transpose even that idea into more isolated terms than I intend.

It is not just that each person has his or her source in a “magical” dimension, from which his or her overall life emerges, but that the private source itself is a part of the very energy that upholds the entire planet and its inhabitants, and the overall construct that we understand as the universe.

Fields, or planes of interrelatedness connect all kinds of life, supporting it not through, say, just one system — a biological one or a spiritual one — but at every conceivable point of its existence. We are not just given so much energy, in those terms earlier mentioned. “New” energy is everywhere available. Again, there are no closed systems. Again, the environment is conscious and alive. There are constant communications between all positions of our body and all portions of the environment.

In our terms this means that we do not have to rely upon what we think of as our private resources alone. Basically, value fulfillment is one of the most important characteristics of existence, so that all things act individually and together in ways that best provide for the overall fulfillment of the entire construct.

We were born because we desired to be born. A plant comes to life for the same reason. We live in a different frame of reference than a plant, however: We have more choice available. We interact with nature differently. Our intellect is meant to help us make choices. It allows us to perceive certain probabilities within  a physical time context. We use the intellect properly when it is allowed to perceive physical conditions as clearly as possible. Then it can make the most beneficial decisions as to what goals we want to achieve.

Those goals are usually conceptualized desires, and once formed they act in a fashion like magnets, drawing from those vast fields of interrelatedness the kinds of conditions best suited to their fulfillment. The intellect alone cannot bring about the fulfillment of those goals. The intellect alone cannot bring about one motion of the body. It must count upon those other properties that it does indeed set into motion — that spontaneous array of inner complexity, that orderly magic.

When the intellect is used properly, it thinks of a goal and automatically sets the body in motion toward it, and automatically arouses the other levels of communication unknown to it, so that all forces work together toward the achievement. Consider a hypothetical goal as a target. When properly used, the intellect imagines the target and imaginatively then attains it. If it were a physical target, the person would stand bow and arrow in hand, thinking only of hitting the bull’s eye, mentally concentrating upon it, making perhaps some learned gestures — proper footing or whatever — and the body’s magical properties would do the rest.

When the intellect is improperly used, however, it is as if the intellect feels required to somehow know or personally direct all of those inner processes. When the erroneous belief systems and negativity connected with so-called rational reason apply, then it is as if our person sees the target, but instead of directing his or her attention to it he of she concentrates upon all of the different ways that his or her arrow could go wrong: It could fall to the left or the right, go too far or not far enough, break in the air, fall from his or her hand, or in multitudinous other ways betray his or her intent.

He or she has switched his or her attention from the target, of course, completely. He or she projected upon the present event the picture of his or her fears, rather than the picture of his or her original intent. His or her body, responding to his or her mental images and his or her thoughts, brings out actions that mirror his or her confusion.

In other words, the magical approach and the so-called rational one are to be combined in a certain fashion for best results. People sometimes write me, telling of their intent to make money — or rather, to have it. They concentrate upon money, so they say, and wait for it in full faith that it will be attracted to them because of their belief and concentration. They might do the point of power exercise, for example. They may also, however, have quit their jobs, ignored impulses to find other work, or to take any rational approaches, and rely upon, say, the magical approach alone. This does not work either, of course.

As I uses the magical approach, and as you use it, we will see that it blends in perfectly with the rest of existence, inspires the intellect, inspires physical motion — for it activates physical properties.

I will continue describing the ways the two approaches work together. The main point I want to make is, however, the fact that out private source of power is a portion of that greater field of interrelatedness, in which our being is securely couched. It is not something we have to strain after. It was effortlessly ours at birth, and before, and it carries with it its own emotional and intuitive comprehensions — comprehensions that can indeed support us throughout all of our physical existence. If we understand that, then in a large manner many of our fears will jointly vanish.

Desire as Action

To the world of the intellect, a glass door must be considered solid, as it is in the world of physical senses. In other quite as factual terms, indeed in the larger frameworks of facts, the door of course is not solid at all, as no objects are. Obviously that is known to science.

Science delegates the world of nature as the realm of exterior natural events. Its view of nature is therefore mechanistic. The natural self, however, like the rest of nature, possesses a rich dimension of inside psychological depth, that science, because of its own definitions, cannot perceive. Telepathy and clairvoyance, for example, are a part of natural effects, but they belong to a nature so much more expansive than science’s definitions that they have been made to appear as highly unnatural eccentricities of behavior rather than as natural components of consciousness.

It is also for that reason that they seem to fall outside of the realm of the s-a-n-e. Such characteristics are, however, basic properties of the natural person. They do not appear very well under the auspices of the scientific method, because the scientific method is itself programmed to perceive only information that fits into its preconceived patterns. Such abilities appear to be unpredictable, discontinuous, only because we are so relatively unaware of what is actually quite constant psychological behavior. That is, such abilities operate so smoothly, so continuously, and with such ease that we become aware of them only under certain conditions. We are aware of what seem to be isolated hints of odd characteristics.

The intellect is basically able to handle many kinds of information, and information systems. It is far more flexible that we presently allow it to be. It can handle several main world views at once, realizing that they are each methods of perceiving and approaching reality. To some degree historically speaking, that sort of situation operated in the past when — comparatively speaking, now — people realized that there was indeed an inner world of complexity and richness that could be approached in certain fashions, one that existed alongside with the physical world, so that the two intersected. Certain approaches worked in one area, and others worked in the inner reality.

The intellect could handle both approaches, operating with separate assumptions. There were separate assumptions that applied to different realities. I do not mean to idealize those times. In so-called modern ages, however, the intellect has been stripped down, so to speak. Science perceived the spectacular complexity of exterior reality, but turned its sights completely away from any recognition — any at all — until regarded subjectivity itself as a mere throw-away product, accidentally formed by a mindless matter.

All of this applies to our situation, for I want you to thoroughly understand, intellectually and emotionally, the errors of current thought, so that we can see that our material is indeed providing us not only with “creative material,” but with a more factual presentation of the framework in which we have our existence.

In modern times, then, the intellect was finally left with only one acceptable world view, with one set of assumptions, with only one main approach to reality and experience. The acceptable assumptions to a large extent ran directly contradictory to built-in biological, spiritual, and psychological assumptions that are a part of man’s and woman’s heritage. The intellect does try to order experience, to make sense out of perception. When it is enriched by having in its possession several world views, then it does an excellent job of merging those into meaningful patterns, of sorting information and sending it to the proper places, so to speak.

It understands, for example, that clairvoyant material is a part of the personality’s overall characteristics, so it is not afraid of perceiving it — and it is able to separate such information confusion from present physical sense perception. Orderliness, then, is one of its main characteristics. When it is given only one world view, and only one group of assumptions, its orderly nature causes it to throw out all information that does not fit. It is almost forced to make an orderly picture, say like a jigsaw puzzle picture, while being denied half of the pieces.

The intellect is not to blame. It does the best it can under those conditions.

Now in our dreams, we are quite clearly seeing the threshold between physical reality and the magical dimension in which that physical reality has its source. We are being shown — or showing ourselves — the difference in the rules or assumptions between the two. The dog’s desire for food led him to walk magically through the door, for the desires of the natural creature are satisfied with an ease that has nothing to do with our ideas of work. What I am getting at is the introduction of the concepts of a different kind of work — very valuable, vital work that is performed at another level and in a different fashion.

A prime example, of course, is the “work” done to keep each and every creature alive and breathing, the “work” done to keep the planets in their places, the “work” being done so that one evolutionist can meditate over his or her theories.

Now in our dreams we get the feeling of that kind of work, or action. It is the given power of the world, the given power of nature. It is the directed force of value fulfillment. In other terms it is of course the energy of All That Is. The trouble is that the rational view of life has separated man and woman from a sense of his or her own power source. When he or she have a problem, the rational approach to its solution seems the only answer, and often, of course, it is no answer at all.

I want to make sure that I am right. I try to go ahead and not go ahead at the same time. I try to be daring and cautious, brave and safe. This applies to some extent to each of us, of course, precisely because we are gifted strongly both intellectually and intuitively. We try rationalize our creativity, to some extent. The rational line of thought finds creativity highly disruptive, so in those terms as highly gifted creative people, we would have encountered some difficulties in any case.

It is time that we regarded such difficulties instead as challenges that are a part of a creative adventure that we have ourselves chosen. We chose the adventure because it is the kind best suited to our own individual value fulfillment. In reconciling the many concepts and contradictions for ourselves, we also lead the way for many others. It would, again, help considerably if we thought of our work more as an adventure, an exciting creative adventure, than of work in our old terms.

This will allow us to include the feeling of inner, magical “work” in our calculations. It would also begin to give us a feeling for the magical support that upholds us, and our lives — the support that we can count upon, and that can bring about the solution to our physical difficulties. Here, the vital word is ease of effortlessness. If we want to feed a dog in the physical world — and he or she is on the other side of the door — we must open it. In the inner world we or the dog can walk through the door without effort, because desire is action. Desire is action.

In the inner world, our desires bring about their own fulfillment, effortlessly. That inner world, and the exterior one, intersect and interweave. They only appear separate. In the physical world, time may have to elapse, or whatever. Conditions may have to change, or whatever, but the desire will bring about the proper results. The feeling of effortlessness is what is important. It is quite proper for our intellect to understand this, and to say, simply now, ” That is not my realm. I will leave the solution to that problem where it belongs. We will use the magical approach here.”

Of course, an entire reorientation is instead implied, and that entire reorientation will effortlessly bring about a new relationship in our bodies and our lives, and with the adventure we embark upon. We will simply automatically get better, because the framework will allow us to do so.

Within our time scheme each physically-endowed consciousness, whatever its form or size or complexity, inherently seeks to fulfill its own highest potential — not only for itself, but for the benefit of each other such consciousness in our reality. There is no drifting through life, then, but a built-in search for the fulfillment of values, whatever possible successes, conflicts, or failures may be involved, and no matter how modest or great or complex any of those qualities may be. The ecstasy and love of being always operate to ensure the quality and growth of life’s existence through value fulfillment.

Human Beings Have The Blessed Creative Capacity to Do Much Better

Women do most things as well as men — they actually outperform men in many areas, both intellectually and intuitively.

For example, women test as equal to men in sensitivity to sounds; clear, logical, and rational thinking: accurate reading and writing; memory for design in areas like drafting and illustration; number memory; tweezer dexterity, foresight, as in the flow of ideas; subjective personality links to specialized work.

Women exceed men in such areas as finger dexterity; accounting aptitudes; rate of idea flow, as in sales, writing, and teaching; observing small changes in physical detail; non-tangible ideas requiring complex vocabulary, as in medicine and law; the ability to visualize three-dimensional relationships, as in engineering.

According to these tests, us poor guys exceed women in only two categories: structural visualization, as in engineering, mechanics and building; and measures of simple muscular strength.

Everything on Earth Remains The Same Except Human Activity

I could list hundreds of examples of what I mean. This is one of those obvious ideas that seem childish once it’s thought of. I don’t care whether or not it’s profound thought; it has meaning for me. But as far as I know, we humans are the only species that’s obsessed with ‘change’ , and ‘progress’ , and ‘controlling or mastering nature’ ; with learning about our past and with charting our future. We strive toward an impossible , or at least rosy, future in which we will have met all our challenges, so that we’ll live in some sort of unreal wonderland on earth. What do we do next — or will we give up on that idea too? Perhaps we’ll spend all of our time contemplating each other!

The rabbits in our neighborhood would continue to live as usual without our help. although they might miss nibbling upon the leafy vegetables in the local gardens. The fish and all of the complex minutiae of the local river bottoms would go on living as they always have. The sheep I see in the woods north of Vegas would continue to bound through the brush and among the mountains. They’d live  the same as ever, since it’s illegal for us to feed them — although they do like to move down the mountains at night and sample certain shrubs we have kindly planted about our houses.

In my darker moods I find myself thinking that I love the earth and everything upon it except the increasingly destructive activities of human beings — and sometimes I wonder about the human beings themselves! I love the deserts and forests, the oceans and rivers and lakes of the earth, the plains and the poles, the marshes and the mountains. And I know that in the Puerto Rico trench in the Atlantic Ocean, life in the sea at more than 8,000 feet down goes on just as it has for many millennia. It’s been like that for all of the interwoven life forms of the poles and the tropics, of the deserts and woodlands and prairies. Each species lives within its environment, whatever its conditions. And I think that in it way each life form must know that and love its home and has no desire to change or destroy it.

All Other Species Preserve Nature, While Man and Woman Has a Propensity for Destroying It

I have myself heard it said that other creatures behave with a natural grace, save man and woman. I have myself heard it said that all of nature is content unto itself save man and woman, who is filled with discontent. Such thoughts follow “naturally” the dictums of so-called rational thought. When we think such thoughts, we think of them at the most strained level of intellectual speculation — that is, the thoughts seem self-evident to the intellect that is forced to operate by itself, relatively speaking, divorced from the self’s other faculties. It then does indeed seem that man and woman is somehow apart from nature — or worse, an ungrateful blight, almost a parasite, upon the face of the planet.

That view itself is a symptom of the intellect’s difficulty. In the position in which our culture places the intellect, it does see itself quite alone, separated both from other portions of the personalities, from other creatures, and from nature itself. Therefore science, for example, says that creatures — except for man and woman — operate by blind instinct, and that term is meant to explain all of the complicated behavior of the other species. Therefore the gulf between man and woman and animals, the intellect and nature, seems to deepen.

In those terms, it is quite as truthful to say that man’s and woman’s intellect is also instinctive. He or she begins thinking at once. He and she cannot help but use his or her intellect. The intellect, again, operates magically, spontaneously, automatically. It’s most keen reasoning processes rise as a result of that natural magical action.

The intellect has been taught to divorce itself from its source. It realizes in that regard a sense of powerlessness, for to some extent it is philosophically cut off from its own source of power. When it looks, therefore, at world of political events, the problems seem insoluble. Man and woman makes decisions that may seem quite wrong to the intellect because of its belief systems, and because it is so cut off from other sources of information. A goodly number of those mistaken decisions, or “poor moves,” often represent self-corrective actions, decisions taken on knowledge not consciously perceived, but this escapes our consciousness.

In the same way, some private-life decisions or events may appear disadvantageous to the intellect for the same reasons, while instead they are also self-corrective measures that we are not able to perceive because of our beliefs. The rational approach, as it is now used, carries a basic assumption that anything that is wrong will get worse. That belief of course is highly detrimental because it runs against the basic principles of life. Were this the case in our terms of history, the world would never have lasted a century. It is interesting to note that even before medical science, there were a goodly number of healthy populations. No disease rubbed out the entire species.

When we believe that the worst will happen we must always be on guard. In our culture people use the term “intellect” almost like a weapon to protect themselves against impending disaster. They must be alert for dangers of all kinds. They begin to collect evidence of danger so that any other kind of orientation to life seems foolhardy, and to be a realist means in that framework to look out for the worst.

First of all, if we realize that the intellect itself is a part of nature, a part of the natural person, a part of magical processes, then we need not overstrain it, force it to feel isolated, or put it in a position in which paranoid tendencies develop. It is itself supported, as our intuitions are, by life’s magical processes. It is supported by the greater energy that gave us and the world birth. That power is working in the world, and in the world of politics, as it is in the working of nature, since we make that distinction.

When we follow that so-called rational approach, however, we are bound to feel threatened, divorced from our body. Our thoughts and our body seem separate. Divisions seem to appear between the mental and the physical, where again each are supported by those magical processes. That rational approach goes against what I can only call life’s directives and life’s natural rhythms. It is contradictory to biological integrity, and again, it does not make sense.

That rational approach is, of course, connected now with scientific ideas mentioned earlier: life surrounded by chaos, the struggle for survival, and so forth. I do not mean to put down the intellect. It is highly important, but it is, if you will forgive me, as natural as a cat’s whiskers. It is not some adjunct to nature, but a part it.

The magical approach takes is for granted, in the simplest terms, that the life of any individual will fulfill itself, will develop and mature, that the environment and the individual are uniquely suited and work together. This sounds very simple. In verbal terms, however, those are the beliefs of each cell. They are imprinted in each chromosome, in each atom. they provide a built-in faith that pervades each living creature, each snail, each hair on our head. Those ingrained beliefs are, of course, biologically pertinent, providing the impetus of all growth and development.

Each cell believes in a better tomorrow. I am, I admit, personifying our cell here, but the statement has a firm truth. Furthermore, each cell contains within itself a belief and an understanding of its own inevitability. It knows it lives beyond its death, in other words.

The idea of heaven, for all of its distortions, has operated as a theoretical framework, assuring the intellect of its survival. Science has believed to the contrary in the utter annihilation of the intellect after death, and since man and woman had by then placed all of his or her identification with the intellect, this was a shattering blow to it. It denied man and woman a necessary biological imperative.

All of these reasons lie beneath men’s and women’s mass problems, and apply in each life.  I feel I have never learned to use the power of reason, and instead trust every stray thought that comes into my head. So to doubt myself is protective.

I also feel that the questioning power of the intellect is not just one of its functions –which it is — but is primary purpose, which it is not. In our terms the intellect’s primary function is to make clear deductions and distinctions involving the personality’s relationship with the world. Our society, however, has indeed considered the rational approach to be the masculine-favored one — so I have an additional reason in that regard to be such a proponent of the rational approach. All of the beliefs connected with the sex were of course erroneous, but they are part and parcel of the “rational” framework itself.

It is certainly too simple to say what I am going to say, yet it is almost as if we would be better off turning the entire rational approach upside down, taking it for granted that all of its assumptions were false, for they are indeed more false than true. Again, the result of highly spontaneous processes of which it itself knows nothing, and the intuitions that are considered so undisciplined and unreasonable are based upon calculations far more spectacular than those of which the conscious mind can conceive. The intellect could not follow them, so the distinctions are not basic: They are the result of beliefs and habitual usage. Therefore, of course, I speak of them separately, as we think of them.

The magical approach takes it for granted that the human being is a united creature, fulfilling purposes in nature even as the animals do, whether or not those purposes are understood. The magical approach takes it for granted that each individual has a future, a fulfilling one, even though death may be tomorrow. The magical approach takes it for granted that the means for development are within each individual, and that fulfillment will happen naturally. Overall, that approach operates in our world. If it did not, there would be no world. If the worst was bound to happen, as the scientists certainly think, even evolution, in their terms, would have been impossible, of course.

You needed this background, for I want to build up the atmosphere in which this magical approach can be comprehended. Then specific material can be utilized.

In our dreams we are, of course, in the process of forming new ideas about the nature of the magical self and also in our way working that idea out through imagery. The dreams are above all an example of “work” being done at other levels of awareness.

All of these experiences are indications of the exquisite kind of reasoning that goes on at the levels of awareness that are usually considered unreasonable. That kind of material enriches the intellect and reassures it.

Certain portions of the personality or psyche must very shrewdly and carefully construct dreams in advance, so that when the dreams are played back they render just the right message to the parts of the psyche that need it. I’m not being contradictory here when I write that the dream is a spontaneous production, also.
Continue reading All Other Species Preserve Nature, While Man and Woman Has a Propensity for Destroying It

Only Human Beings, With Their Ideas of ‘Progress” and “Development Change.

Over very long spans of time the earth and all of its creatures stay the same, relatively speaking. Human beings haven’t changed, really, our more complicated mental processes only make it seem that we have. Coupled with this is the idea that magic, as we call it, reflects a basic part of our natural mental equipment and abilities, but that our present course of action, our focusing upon the material and the intellectual — the ‘reasonable” portions of quite ‘unreasonable’ or unreal. Actually, our need for magic is a very real, vital, and integral portion of our psyches.

The conscious idea of  magic, then, is a mask, or contrived version, of the psyche’s innate clairvoyant, telepathic, and precognitive abilities. We permit distorted versions of those attributes to surface as magic, as entertainment — which thus relieves us of the need to take them seriously. That’s the course our species has chosen during much of our recorded history, so far, and for many reasons.

I think that it’s frustrating for us that we cannot perceive the fascinating facets of any event. We still do not feel the unsurpassable force that thoughts have. We do not understand that they do form events, that to change events we must first change thoughts. We get what we concentrate upon.

The Intellect and The Magical Approach

It is not that we overuse the intellect as a culture, but that we rely upon it to the exclusion of all other faculties in our approach to life.

The intellect is brilliant, but on its own, it is indeed in its way isolated both in time and in space in a way that other portions of the personality are not. When it is overly stressed, with all of the usual frameworks or rationales that go along with it, it can indeed become frightened, paranoid, because it cannot really perceive events until they have already occurred. It does not know what will happen tomorrow, and since it is overly stressed, its paranoid tendencies can only fear the worst.

Now those tendencies are not natural to the intellect, but only appear when it is forced to operate in such an isolated fashion — isolated not only in time and space, but psychologically isolated from other portions of the personality that are meant to bring it additional information that it does not possess, and a kind of magical support.

The so-called rational approach to life, as it is practiced, is a highly pessimistic one carrying along with it its own methods and “solutions” to problems, its own means of achieving ends and satisfying desires. Many people are so steeped in that approach to life that they become psychologically blind to any other kind of orientation. Such is obviously not the case for me or I would not be having this discussion, or any other such activity.

The rational approach of course suits certain kinds of people better than others, even while it still carries its disadvantages. We have been living in an industrialized scientific society, so that the benefits and the great disadvantages of the rational approach appear everywhere in the social and political world. Artists of any kind find such an approach the least friendly, for it directly contradicts the vast thrust or man’s and woman’s creativity in several important areas. I, however, have evidence that hardened reality is quite different. In the past I have felt at some disadvantage myself, feeling ,my work to be theoretically fascinating, creatively valid, but not necessarily containing any statement about any kind of “scientifically valid” hardened reality.

I did not think I was dealing with fiction. On the other hand, I was not willing to call is fact, either. I am, in fact, dealing with a larger version of fact from which the world of fact emerges.

There have been numerous fascinating bits of evidence in our own lives, apart from these blog discussions, though certainly to some extent stimulated by the knowledge we gain in the discussions. They remain isolated bits, odds and ends, in which case they begin to present us with a larger factual representation of reality.

All of this material applies to our lives in general and to my physical condition, because we must be clear in our minds as to our own status in that regard, and much of this material will clear the air and dissolve lingering doubts; doubts that cause us to hold on to the rational approach in a misguided effort to maintain what we think of as a balanced viewpoint and open mind. It seems, because of the definitions we have been taught, that there is only one narrow kind of rationality, and that if we forsake the boundary of that narrow definition, then we become irrational, fanatic, mad, or whatever.

The thin, cold “rationality” that is recognized as such is instead a fake veneer covering a far deeper spontaneous rationality, and it is the existence of that magical rationality that provides the basis for the intellect to begin with. The rationality that we accept is then but one small clue as to the spontaneous inner rationality that is a part of each natural person.

For example, in one dream when asleep, when we are seemingly not rational, when our intellect is seemingly not operating, we perceive information about our physical environment. Old neighborhoods, animals and industry in every place. Symbolically we see situations in our own fashion, but know. We still have a love of certain areas. We are in a certain correspondence with it. In a fashion, we keep our eye out for information regarding it.

We are somewhat idealizing the past, present and future, however, so we do not simply get the information “straight on,” but we receive it in such a fashion that it makes its own psychological points also, and is furthermore wound into other action not only within the dream, but in a series of dreams.

Any dream makes it’s point, in fact, whether or not we remembered it. Some people remember because they want to bring into their conscious range instances of their own greater knowing. The portion of us that form the dreams knows. All of this involves a psychological motion of natural, magical import. It shows us that the rules of the rational world are filled with holes. It shows us that the rational world’s views do not represent the bulwarks of safety, but are instead barriers to the full use of the intellect, and of the intuitions.

Free flow of information at other levels.

Now when we understand that intellectually, then the intellect can take it for granted that its own information is not all the information we possess. It can realize that its own knowledge represents the tip of the iceberg. As we apply that realization to our life we begin to realize furthermore that in practical terms we are indeed supported by a greater body of knowledge that we consciously realize, and by the magical, spontaneous fountain of action that forms our existence. The intellect can then realize that it does not have to go it all alone. Everything does not have to be reasoned out, even to be understood.

This information is factual. I am not forced at times into symbolic statements, but when I am I always say so, and even those statements are my best representations of facts too large for our definitions. The intellect, then, can and does form strong paranoid tendencies when it is put in the position of believing that it must solve all personal problems alone — or nearly — and certainly when it is presented with any picture of worldwide predicaments.

The rational approach, built up around this framework, insists that the best way to solve a problem is to concentrate upon it, to project its effects into the future, to ruminate upon its consequences, “to stare at the bare facts head on.”

This brings about an atmosphere in which the problem is compounded. The intellect on its own — so it seems — must deal not only with the problem today, but with its effects in the projected disastrous tomorrows. This well-intentioned concentration, this determination to solve the problem, this rational approach, then causes an even deeper sense of inadequacy. The concentration upon the problem brings about a kind of mechanical repetition, a repeated type of hypnotic focus.

The intellect is a great organizer — along certain lines, now — so if this concentration is continued it begins to organize its perceptions and experience along the same lines. It is a kind of misguided attempt to find order by finding data that agree with itself. It collects evidence, then, to prove its point, because the rational mind, as we understand it, must  have an acceptable reason for everything.

In the meantime, of course, quite valid rockbed evidence that does not fit into the picture gradually becomes discarded, ignored, thrown away. It is there but it is not used. It disappears as evidence, becomes inactive. That method of problem-solving, need I say, is a poor one, and if anything it causes far more problems than it ever solves.

In terms of a physical condition, some people often thinks that he or she is “faced with the evidence” that his or her condition is not improving, that it is growing worse, that all the evidence says such conditions do deteriorate rather than improve. He or she sometimes thinks he or she is being rational with such thoughts.

What happens, of course, is the process I have just outlined. Other quite real, quite physical evidence — always, now, apparent in his or her body at any given time — is ignored as nonessential, too trivial to bother with, or take seriously, because it does not fit into the so-called rational picture that has been developed.

The process is exactly as given in the paragraph above, so I want that understood. Any improvement, unless stated, is almost overlooked, not considered as much hard evidence, while any difficulties definitely are considered hard evidence because they fit into the overall data-collecting intellect, as stated above. They are significant, while the improvements do not seem to be nearly as much so.

When we are corresponding with the environment, we change our focus point. We change what we consider significant. This blog brings us to the beginning of a discussion of the magical approach to life, to the solving of problems. I hope to stress what to do, rather than what not to do, although at times I must make the distinction clear.

If you understand this blog thoroughly, and if you have the intent to really change your orientation, then the atmosphere will automatically  be created in which desired changes occur.

 

 

 

 

True Creativity Comes From Enjoying The Moments

True creativity comes from enjoying the moments, which then fulfill themselves, and a part of the creative process is indeed the art of relaxation, the letting go, for that triggers magical activity.

I want it understood that we are indeed dealing with two entirely different approaches to reality and to solving problems — methods we will here call the rational method and the magical one. The rational approach works quite well in certain situations, such as mass production of goods, or in certain kinds of scientific measurements — but all in all the rational method, as it is understood and used, does not work as an overall approach to life, or in the solving of problems that involve subjective rather objective measurements or calculations.

Those methods work least of all for any art. It is a trite statement, perhaps, but the ruler’s measurements have absolutely nothing to do with the measurements made by the heart, and they can never be used to express the incalculable measurements that are made automatically by the smallest cell.

The rational mind alone, as it is presently used ( because it is a rather artificial construct, a function given prominence), can never understand the dream measurements that we undertake.

Keeping psychic activity in line, in our society this seems the only rational thing to do. Ironically, our problems have not been solved, then largely of course because we have taken the wrong approach, and that is because we are not convinced as yet. We still hold to those trained beliefs.

The old beliefs, of course, and the rational approach, are everywhere reinforced, and so it does indeed have a great weight. The magical approach has far greater weight, if we use it and allow ourselves to operate in that fashion, for it has the weight of our basic natural orientation. The rational approach is the superimposed one. I think my blog readers are ready to understand that.

Inner reality, contain the creative source from which we form all events, and  that by the proper focusing of attention we can draw from that vast subjective medium everything we need for a constructive, positive life in physical reality.

Any event, therefore, has an invisible thickness, a multidimensional basis. Our skies are filled with breezes, currents, clouds, sunlight, dust particles and so forth. The sky vaults above the entire planet. The invisible [vault of] inner reality contains endless patterns that change as, say, clouds do — that mix and merge to form our psychological climate. Thoughts have what we will for now term electromagnetic properties. In those terms our thoughts mix and match with others in inner reality, creating mass patterns that form the overall psychological basis behind world events. Again, however, inner reality is not neutral, but automatically inclined toward what we will here term good or constructive developments. It is a growth medium. Constructive or ‘positive’ feelings or thoughts are more easily materialized than ‘negative’ ones because they are in keeping with inner reality’s characteristics.

Instant Magic Represents Part of Our Natural Heritage

Magic as we call it represents (reflects) a basis part of our natural heritage. We permit distorted versions of the psyche’s attributes — clairvoyant, telepathic, and precognitive abilities — which surface as magic.

We are practicing some precise psychological art, one that is ancient and poorly understood in our culture; or as of we are learning a psychological science that helps us map the contours of consciousness itself. My blog readers and I are finally examining the trance view of reality and comparing it to the official views of science and religion.

The natural person is indeed the magical person, and my blog readers and I have both to some extent had very recent examples of such activity. We were, and are, trying to teach ourselves something. This is somewhat lengthy to unravel, but our behavior and experience, or course, is the result of our beliefs. Framed -mind-2 has been a rather fascinating but mainly hypothetical framework, in that neither of us have really been able to put it to any perceivable use in our terms. This is not to say it has not been operating. We have not had the kind of feedback, however that we want.

When we were both intensely involved in our projects, just finished, we let much of our inner experience slide, relatively speaking. The two of us operating together, however, then came up with an idea — an important one — that allows us to interpret the Framed-mind-2 material in our own ways. We had instant feedback — the interplay of a creative nature between the two of us involving our dreams and the computer, and so forth. We were each struck by the magical ease with which we seemed, certainly, to perceive and act — information that we did not even realize we possessed.

Some of my notes that my blog readers have not seen have further important insights as to such activity. The main point is indeed the importance of accepting a different kind of overall orientation — one that is indeed not any secondary adjunct, but a basic part of human nature. This involves an entirely different relationship of the self we know with time. We can make our own connections here, as per our own dreams of late.

Important misunderstanding involving time have been in a large measure responsible for many difficulties, and also of my own, though they have been of a lesser nature. All of this involves relating to reality in more natural, and therefore magical, fashion. There is certainly a kind of natural physical time in our experience, and in the experience of any creature. It involves the rhythm of the seasons — the days and nights and tides and so forth. In the light of that kind of physical time, which is involved within earthly biology, there is no basic cultural time. That is, to this natural rhythm we have culturally added the idea of clocks, moments and hours and so forth, which we have transposed over nature’s rhythms.

Such a cultural time works well overall for the civilization that concentrates upon partialities, bits and pieces, assembly lines, promptness of appointments, and so forth. It fits an industrialized society as we understand it.

The time that any artistic creator is involved with follows earth’s own time, however. The creator’s time rises out of the seasons and the tides, even though in our society we make a great effort to fit the creator’s time into what I will call assembly-line time. If you are a writer or an artist, then it seems that you must produce so many paintings or books or whatever as, say, an automobile worker must process so many pieces of the overall car chassis. Particularly  if you want to make a living at your art, you fall into the frame of mind in which you think that “each minute is valuable” — but what you mean is that each minute must be a minute of production. But each moment must be valuable in itself, whatever you do with it.

I have culturally felt, for many reasons that have been discussed, that each moment must be devoted to work. My blog readers have to some extent felt the same. I said that the artistic creator operates in the time of the seasons and so forth, in a kind of natural time — but that natural time is far different than we suppose. Far richer, and it turns inward and outward and backward and forward upon itself.

Being our own natural and magical self when we dream, we utilize information that is outside of the time context experienced by the so-called rational mind. The creative abilities operate in the same fashion, appearing within consecutive time, but with the main work done outside of it entirely. Sometimes when we finish our project, we have several days of feeling miserable, but we catch ourselves and turn ourselves around beautifully, and we have every right to congratulate oneself in that regard.

When my blog readers and I are both working on projects our cultural time is taken up in a way we find acceptable. Creative time and cultural time to some extent merge, in that we could see daily immediate evidence of creativity’s product, coming out of the computer, say, like any product of an assembly line. We are “using” time as our cultural training told us to do.

When the projects were done, particularly with me, there is still the cultural belief that time should be so used, that creativity must be directed and disciplined to fall into the proper time slot. In other words, to some extent or another I tried to use an assembly-lined kind of time for my creative productivity. This may work when my blogs are being typed, and so much physical labor is involved, but overall I am using the “wrong” approach to time, particularly for any creative artist. This again applies particularly to me, though my blog readers are not exonerated in that regard.

There is much material here that I will give, because it is important that we understand different ways of relating to reality, and how those ways create the experienced events.

We have not really, either my blog readers or I, been ready to drastically alter our orientations, but we are approaching that threshold. The magical approach means that we actually change our methods of dealing with problems, achieving goals, and satisfying means. We change over to the methods of the natural person. They are not esoteric methods by which man or woman are meant to handle his or her problems and approach his or her challenges.

I use the word “methods” because we understand it, but actually we are speaking about an approach to life, a magical or natural approach to life that is man’s and woman’s version of the animal’s natural instinctive behavior in the universe.

That approach does indeed fly in direct contradiction to the learned methods we have been taught. We have held onto those methods to varying degrees, since after all it seems that the world shares them. They are understood ways of dealing with events. Once again, however, with the experience of the last few days, I am astonished by the magical ease by which work — real work — can be accomplished: events perceived out of place and time and so forth.

All of that can be transferred to other areas of our lives, and in particular to physical difficulties.

It certainly seems that the best way to get specific answers is to ask specific questions, and the rational mind thinks first of all something like a list of questions. In that regard, I am responding before a blog is natural, and to an extent magical, because I know that no matter what I have been taught, I must to some degree forget the questions and the mood that accompanies them with one level of consciousness, in order to create the proper kind of atmosphere at another level of consciousness — an atmosphere that allows the answers to come even though they may be presented in a different way than expected by the rational mind.

What I will be discussing in the next several blogs, will be the magical approach to reality, and to our private lives specifically, in order to create that kind of atmosphere in which the answers become experienced.

Trying to fit the great thrust of creativity into assembly-line time is in itself bound to lead to conflicts, dissatisfactions, and frustrations. If the proper creative and magical orientation is kept primarily in mind, other things will fall into place. We do not say to the creative self “Now it is 7:30. People are at their assembly lines. I am at my desk: produce.”

Assembly-line time does not really value time — only as time can be used for definite prescribed purposes. In that framework, to enjoy time becomes a weakness or vice, and both my blog readers and I, to some extent have so considered time. With creative people strongly gifted, the natural person is very prominent, no matter what they do. It therefore strongly resents any basically meaningless constraints placed about its experience. It knows, for example, how to enjoy encounter, how to enrich itself physically through household chores or other activities. It dislikes being told that it must work thus and so at command of unreasonable restraints.

The natural person is anything but irrational. It gathers all of experience together and transforms it, so many of our problems have been caused by applying the wrong kind of orientation to our lives and activities.

I say wrong, meaning no moral judgment, but the application of one method to a pursuit that cannot be adequately expressed in such a fashion. The assembly-line time and the beliefs that go along with it have given us many benefits as a society, but it should not be for gotten that the entire framework was initially set up to cut down on impulses, creative thought, or any other activities that would lead to anything but the mindless repetition of one act after another.

In other words, that entire framework is meant to give us a standardized, mass-produced version of reality. None of its concepts can rationally be applied to creative endeavors. The orientation that gives us the creative achievement lies in the opposite direction.

Creativity itself has its own built-in discipline, the kind that, for example, in a dream can rummage through the days of the future to find precisely the data required to make a specific point.

All of this material applies to each of our condition, and an understanding of it will create the climate in which beneficial results can appear.

The Human Magic Show

What magicians we are,

turning darkness into light,

transforming invisible atoms into the dazzling theater

of the world,

pulling objects,

(people as well

as rabbits)

out of secret

microscopic closets,

turning winter into summer,

making a palmful of moments

disappear through time’s trap door.

 

We learned the methods

so long ago

that they’re unconscious,

and we’ve hypnotized ourselves

into believing

that we’re the audience,

so I wonder where we served

our apprenticeship.

Under what master magicians did we learn

to form reality

so smoothly that we forgot to tell ourselves

the secret?

Normal Dreams

I believe that normal dreams are the outside shell of deeper inside experience. The interior reality is clothed in dream images as, when we are awake, it is clothed in physical ones. Dream objects and physical objects alike are symbols by which we perceive — and distort — an inner reality that we do not seem able to experience directly. In certain states of consciousness, particularly in projections from the dream state, we achieve a peculiar poise of alertness. This lets us briefly examine the nature of our consciousness by allowing us to view its products — the events and experiences that it creates when released from usual physical focus.

l4

Consciousness forms its own reality, physical and otherwise. I think there is a “mass” dream experience, however, as there is a collectively perceived physical life and definite interior conditions within which dream life happens. Only inner experimentation will let us discover this interior landscape. Perhaps one day we will move freely within it, alert, conscious and far wiser than we are now.

l5

It is a dimension native to consciousness, I believe, at whatever stage of being, physical or nonphysical. We have our primary existence in it after death and spend a good deal of physical time wandering through it, unknowingly, in sleep. Clues as to our creativity and the nature of our existence can be found there and from it emerges the organizational qualities of normal consciousness as we know it.

l7

I do not believe that there are any more dangers facing us in the interior universe than there are in the physical one. We should explore each world with common sense and courage. The interior universe is the source of the exterior one, however, and traveling through it we will encounter our own hopes, fears and beliefs in their ever-changing form.

l11

And so the exterior emerges from the interior one even as this physical blog materialized from the inner reality of inspiration, creativity and dreams.

 

Basic Reality in The Dream, Hallucination and Objects

We will sometimes automatically translate this reality into physical terms. Such images will be hallucinatory, but it may take awhile for us to distinguish their true nature. It must be understood, however, that all physical objects are hallucinatory. They may be called mass hallucination.

z7

There is constant translation of inner reality into objects in the waking state and a constant translation of ideas into pseudo-objects in the dream state. Within a certain range of dream reality, ideas and thoughts can be translated into pseudo-objects and transported. This is what happens when we adopt a pseudo-form in projection, though I am simplifying this considerably.

z32

When we travel beyond a certain range of intensities, even pseudo-objects must vanish. They exist in a cluster about, and connected to, our own system. The lack of these, obviously, means that we have gone beyond our own camouflage system. If it were possible, we would then travel through a range of intensities in which no camouflage of the next system. This would or would not encounter the heart of the camouflage area. The completely un-camouflaged areas at the outer edges of the various systems should remind us of the undifferentiated areas between various life cycles in the subconscious. This is no coincidence.

z10

As a rule, we see, there is little communication within the un-camouflaged areas. They act as boundaries, even while they represent the basic stuff of which all camouflage is composed. (Without the camouflage, we would perceive nothing with the physical senses.)

The sentence is really meaningless, however, because the physical senses are themselves camouflage. There would be nothing to translate. It is only the inner senses that will allow us to perceive under these circumstances. Theoretically, if we can bridge the gap between our system and another.

z21

Once more: The undifferentiated layers are composed of the vitality that forms the camouflage of all systems. Such an area is not really a thing in itself, but a portion of vitality that contains no camouflage, and is therefore unrecognizable to those within any given system. We are in touch with infinity in such areas, since it is only camouflage that gives us the conception of time.

z26

Now, during some projections, we may be aware of nothing as far as surroundings are concerned. There will only be the mobility of our own consciousness. If this occurs, we will be traveling through such an un-camouflaged area. We could then expect to encounter next a more differentiated environment, that seems to become clearer as we progress toward the heart of another system.

z13

The completely un-camouflaged layer would be rather bewildering. We might automatically be tempered to project images into it. They would not take, so to speak, but would appear and disappear with great rapidity. This is a silent area. thoughts would not be perceived here, as a rule, for the symbols for them would not be understood.

z16

If a certain intensity is reached, however — a peak of intensity — then we would perceive the spacious present as it exists within our native system. We could, from this peak, look into other systems, but we would not understand what we perceived, not having the proper root assumptions. I have used the idea of neighboring systems for simplicity’s sake, as if they were laid out end to end. Obviously, such is not the case. The systems of reality are more like the various segments of a tangerine, with the un-camouflaged boundary areas like the white membrane between the tangerine sections.

z57

The tangerine, then, would be compared to a group of many systems, yet it would represent in itself but one portion of an unperceived whole. The tangerine would be but one segment of a larger system. We can see, then, why some projections would lead us in a far different direction from our linear sort of travel and why time as we know it would be meaningless.

z23

Nor do such projections necessarily involve journeys through space as we know it. There are systems, vivid in intensity, that have no existence in physical reality at all. It is now thought, I believe, that time and space are basically one, but they are both a part of something else. They are merely the camouflage patterns by which we perceive reality. Space as we perceive it in the dream state comes much closer to the reality.

z24

Projections within our own system will, of course, involve us with some kind of camouflage. If none is present, we will know we are out of the system. The dream universe is obviously closely connected with our own, since pseudo-objects are present. Even there, we are to some extent free from the space-time elements of our own system. Within the dream state, then, we are in the ‘outward’ areas of the physically oriented universe.

z31

One point: There are other systems all about and within our own. The undifferentiated areas move out like spirals, through all reality. Little resistance is encountered with them. They represent inner roads that connect systems, as well as divide them. The traveler must leave his or her own camouflage.

z34

It is possible, theoretically, to travel to any system in this manner and bypass others, you see. Such a traveler would not age physically. His or her body would be in a suspended state. Only a very few individuals have traveled in this manner. Most of the knowledge gained escape the ego, and the experience cannot be translated by the physical brain.

z37

However, it is possible to travel under such circumstances, and some of the data would be retained by inner portions of the self. In a creative individual, some of this information might be symbolically expressed in a painting or other work of art.

z38

Each brushstroke of a painting represents concentrated experience and compressed perceptions. In a good painting, these almost explode when perceived by the lively consciousness of another. The observer is washed over by the intensities. The excellent work of art recreates for the observer inner experience of his or her own, also, of which he or she has never been aware. As we know, paintings have motion, yet the painting itself does not move. This idea should help understand experience in terms of intensities and projections or the movement of consciousness without necessarily motion through space.

z43

True motion has nothing to do with space. The only real motion is that of the traveling consciousness.

z61

These dimensions as we know it, and I believe that in them we exercise abilities that are ours by right and heritage.

Root Assumptions

Root assumptions represent the basic premises upon which a given existence-system is formed. These are the ground rules, so such a way that reality is perceived through the lens of particular root assumptions, then. Using the physical senses, it is almost impossible for us to perceive reality in any other way.

v43

Physically speaking, we will find nothing to contradict these assumptions, since they are all we can experience or perceive physically. These root assumptions are the framework of the camouflage system. As we explore other realities, we almost automatically interpret such data in terms of the root assumptions of our own system.

v11

This highly falsifies such information. The inner senses are not bound by those assumptions, however. This is why so many psychic or subjective experiences seem to contradict physical laws. We must learn the ‘laws’ that apply to other systems.

v0

The root assumptions that govern physical reality are indeed valid, but within physical reality alone. They do not apply elsewhere. There is a natural tendency to continue judging experience against these assumptions, however. With experience, the habit will lose much of its hold. Inner experience must be colored to some extent by the physical system, while we exist in it. In order for such data to rise to conscious levels, for example, it must be translated into terms that the ego can understand, and the translation is bound to distort the original experience.

v34

The whole physical organism of the body has been trained to react to certain patterns, these based on physical root assumptions. The nervous system reacts definitely to visual block images. Such images are received through the skin, as well as through the eyes. The whole system is highly complicated and organized. This is obviously necessary for physical survival.

v23

The organization however is, biologically speaking, artificial and learned. It is no less rigid for that reason. This organizational structure of perception can be broken up, as LSD and Meth experiments certainly show. This can be dangerous, however. The fact that this does occur shows that the systems of perception are not a part of overall structure biologically, but learned secondary responses. It is disturbing to the whole organism, however, to break up the strong pattern of usual perception. Inner stability of response is suddenly swept away. Changes that are not yet known occur within the nervous system under these circumstances, both electromagnetic and chemical.

v41

The inner senses alone are equipped to process and perceive other reality systems. Even the distortions can be kept at a minimum with training. Indiscriminate use of the psychedelic drugs, like amazon mushrooms or LSD, can severely shake up learned patterns of response that are necessary for effective manipulation within physical reality. This can break subtle connections and we disturb electromagnetic functions. Some ask “can you smoke magic mushrooms and have lesser distortion?” While there is a lesser distortion as the high is milder, that is not an excuse for indiscriminate smoking. Ego failure is a risk that can result without responsibility.

v35

Development of the inner senses is a much more effective method of perceiving other realities, and, followed correctly, the ego is not only stronger but more flexible. Even consciousness of physical reality is increased. Such development becomes an unfolding and natural expansion of the whole personality.

v32

These root assumptions are so a part of our existence that they cloud our dreams. Beneath them, however, portions of the self perceive physical reality in an entirely different fashion, free of the tyranny of objects and physical form. Here we experience concepts directly, without the need for symbols. We have knowledge of our ‘past’ personalities and know that they exist simultaneously with our own.

v36

The practice of psychological time will allow us to reach these portions of the self. The ego is not artificially disorganized by such practice. It is simply bypassed for the moment. The experience gained does become a part of the physical structure, but there is no massive disorganization of perception, since the ego agrees to step aside momentarily.

v46

It is not bombarded, as with the drug experiments, and forced to experience chaotic and frightening perceptions that can terrify it into complete disorder. Survival in our system is dependent upon the highly specialized, focused, limited but specific qualities of the ego. It should not be rigid. Neither should it be purposed weakened.

v31

The root assumption upon which physical reality is formed represent secure ground to the ego. We always operate with the ego’s consent. It interprets the inner knowledge gained in its own way, true, but it is immeasurably enriched by so doing.

v42

The ego can exist only within the context of these assumptions. The primary dream experience is finally woven into a structure composed of these assumptions, and it is these we remember. These serve us as basic information but the information is in symbolic form. Objects, are symbols. Dream objects are often symbols of realities that the ego could not otherwise perceive.

v26

Some out-of-body experiences are extremely difficult to categorize and involve extraordinarily sensuous events that remain vivid long after their occurrence. Some are suggestive of drug-induced episodes, except for the greater sense of alertness and self-control.

Continue reading Root Assumptions

The Strange Senses Inside Consciousness

Projections from the dream state intrigue me because in them I believe we encounter the inside of our own consciousness in a most direct fashion. In a way, we are completely on our own, manipulating in a subjective environment, aware of the workings of consciousness when it is not soaked up or fastened upon objective specifics. Such exploration is full of surprises. In these states, consciousness operates within definite conditions, within an ordered system of experience. But we must struggle to discover what these are as opposed to the hallucinatory image we set up ourselves against or superimposed upon this reality.

r2

While we may “come awake” spontaneously within a dream, certain procedures do help, and these can induce projections from the dream state. They have been mentioned before in previous blogs, but here I’ll give them as briefly and simply as possible. First we must realize that we are dreaming. Suggestion to this effect, given before sleep, facilitates this recognition.

r20

This knowledge automatically changes the dream state into another in which the critical faculties are aroused and operating. Dream actions are no longer taken for granted. Experience is scrutinized. We may “awaken” in our house, for example. If so, check the rooms against their normal arrangement. Anything that does not normally belong there may be an hallucination, part of the usual dreaming process. If we will such images to disappear, they will, leaving us within the basic un-hallucinated environment. If we rationalize any such elements or accept them uncritically, we may fall back into normal dreaming.

r16

The next point is to realize that we are alert, conscious and awake, while our body is asleep. We can then explore the environment in which we find oneself or travel to another location. Instead of “coming to” in our home, however, we may instead become alert in another location, a town, another house or unfamiliar place where checking against usual circumstances is nearly impossible.

r5

Here, rely on common sense. If we find a girl in a bathing suit standing on a wintery street, for example, one or the other has to go. If the girl is the main incongruous element, and the rest all fits in, then will the girl to disappear. Keep this up with any other such images that we meet. Again, we’ll be left with the basic environment and can proceed as we want. We can accept such images and play around with them or watch them to see what develops, but only if we realize they are hallucinations. There are exceptions to this practice, however.

r29

To travel somewhere else, will oneself there. Often travel seems instantaneous. At other times, we may find ourselves swept from place to place, with little control. If we come awake while still within our physical body as described earlier. We may also find ourselves in non-physical locations or places in which matter does not behave the way it usually does.

r25

We agree to accept certain data in the physical universe. We agree to form this into certain patterns, and we agree to ignore other data completely. These now, called root assumptions, form the main basis for the apparent permanence and coherence of our physical system.

r3

In our journeys into inner reality, we cannot proceed with these same root assumptions. Reality, per se, changes completely according to the basic root agreements that we accept. One of the root assumption that objects have a reality independent of any subjective cause and then these objects, within definite specified limitations, are permanent.

r6

Objects may appear and disappear in these other systems. Using the root assumptions just mentioned as a basis for judging reality, an observer would insist that the objects were not real, for they do not behave as he or she believes objects must. Because dream images may appear and disappear, then, do not take it for granted that they do not really exist.

r17

There is a cohesiveness to the inner universe and to the systems that are not basically physical. But this is based upon an entirely different set of root assumptions and these are the keys that alone will let us manipulate within other systems or understand them. There are several major root assumptions connected here and many minor ones:

r9

  1. Energy and action are basically the same, although neither must necessarily apply to physical action.
  2. All objects have their origin basically in mental action. Mental action is directed psychic energy.
  3. Permanence is not a matter of time. Existence has value in terms of intensities.
  4. Objects are blocks of energy perceived in a highly specialized manner.
  5. Stability in time sequence is not a prerequisite requirement for an object, except as a root assumption in the physical universe.
  6. Space as a barrier does not exist.
  7. The spacious present is here more available to the senses.
  8. The only barriers are mental or psychic ones. 

r27

Only if these basic root assumptions are taken for granted will our projection experience make sense to us. Different rules simply apply. Our subjective experiences is extremely important here; that is, the vividness of any given experience in terms of intensity will be far more important than anything else.

r33

Elements from past, present and future may be indiscriminately available to us. We may be convinced that a given episode is the result of subconscious fabrication, simply because the time sequence is not maintained, and this could be a fine error. In a given dream projection, for example, we may experience an event that is obviously from the physical past, yet within it there may be elements that do not fit. In an old-fashion room of the 1700’s we may look out and see an automobile pass by. Obviously, we think: distortion. Yet we may be straddling time in such an instance, perceiving, say, the room as it was in the 1700’s and the street as it appears in our present. These elements may appear side by side. the car may suddenly disappear before our eyes, to be replace by an animal or the whole street may turn into a field.

r28

This is how dreams work,’ you may think. ‘This cannot be a legitimate projection.’ Yet we may be perceiving the street and the field that existed ‘before’ it, and the images may be transposed one upon the other. If we try to judge such an experience with physical root assumptions, it will be meaningless. As mentioned earlier, we may also perceive a building that will never exist in physical reality. This does not mean that the form is illusion. We are simply in a position where we can pick up and translate the energy pattern before us.

r7

If another individual under the same circumstances comes across the same ‘potential’ object, he or she can also perceive it as we did. He may, however, because of his or her own make-up, perceive and translate another portion of allied pattern. He or she may see the form of the man or woman who originated the thought of the building.

r192

To a larger extent in the physical system, our habit of perceiving time as a sequence forms the type of experience and also limit it. This habit also unites the experiences, however. The unifying and limiting aspects of consecutive moments are absent in inner reality. time, in other words, cannot be counted upon to unify action. The unifying elements will be those of our own understanding and abilities. We are not forced to perceive action as a series of moments within inner reality, therefore.

r1

Episodes will be related to each other by different methods that will be intuitional, highly selective and psychological. We will find our way through complicated mazes of reality according to our own intuitional nature. We will find what we expect to find. We will seek out what we want from the available data.

r21

In physical experience, we are dealing with an environment with which we are familiar. We have completely forgotten the chaos and unpredictable nature it presented before learning processes were channeled into its specific directions. We learned to perceive reality in a highly specified fashion. When we are dealing with inner, or basically non-physical realities, we must learn to become unspecialized and then learn a new set of principles. We will soon learn to trust our perceptions, whether or not the experiences seem to make logical sense.

r22

In a projection, the problems will be of a different sort. The form of a man or woman, for example, may be a thought-form, or a fragment sent quite unconsciously by another individual whom it resembles. It may be another projectionist, like oneself. It may be a potential form like any potential object, a record of a form played over and over again.

rthba

It may be another version of oneself. We will discuss ways of distinguishing between these. A man or woman may suddenly appear, and be then replaced by a small girl or boy. This would be a nonsensical development to the logical mind; yet, the girl or boy might be the form of the man’s previous or future reincarnated self.

r13

The unity, we see, is different. Basically, perception of the spacious present is naturally available. It is our nervous physical mechanism which acts as a limiting device. By acting in this manner it forces us to focus upon what we can perceive with greater intensity.

r15

Our mental processes are formed and developed as a result of this conditioning. The intuitive portions of the personality are not so formed, and these will operate to advantage in any inner exploration.

s25

We are basically capable of seeing any particular location as it existed a thousand years in our past or as it will exist a thousand years in our future. The physical senses serve to blot out more aspects of reality than they allow us to perceive, yet in many inner explorations we will automatically translate experience into terms that the senses can use. Any such translation is, nevertheless, a second-hand version of the original — an important point to remember.

The Time Sense Outside The Body Can Be Quite Different Than The Body’s

My wife and I are telepathically aware of our emotional presence. This acts as the emotional impetus to give the inner self full rein.

o6

In the same way do we travel in other realities without being aware of it. We perceive in a ‘normal’ fashion, which shows that perception is not dependent upon the physical image. We have both traveled together in such a fashion from the dream state. There is no reason why we cannot try such experiments, trying to project at the same time.

o5

When we do this from a dream state, then we must set aside two and one half hours, for the first portion will be used as preliminaries. We can also give ourselves such suggestions before we sleep. We might begin by making an appointment to meet each other, say, at three in the morning in the living room.

o14

For our own purposes, an unfinished painting on our easel helped project to the studio, for we would wish to study it. We have often done this, without remembering. It is always to our advantage when we both traveled together, however. We help each other retain proper consciousness and purpose during projection.

o19

We can be of greater help to each other, when we develop further. We can also suggest dreams in which we are flying in an airplane and tell ourselves then that we will waken from the dream and project. We will know the plane to be a dream image, but be able to retain it for our convenience if we want, so that we do not feel falling at first.

o7

In such instances, we are withdrawing our perceptive abilities from the physical body. They will seem to operate as usual, but they are more vivid and far-reaching. Our thoughts instantly attain a form that we can then perceive. If we think of a dog, for example, quite unconsciously we form the image of a dog, which we then perceive.

o9

It is because of this instantaneous creation and projection of inner reality outward into form that we experience time within the physical system — to train us, to give us time to learn to handle our own creations. Projection experiments, then, should only be tried when we are in a peaceful state of mind.

o2

Now, there are ‘objective’ realities that exist within the astral system. There are more than our own thought forms, in other words. Our own thought-forms can be definite aids when we are in the proper mental condition, and they can impede our progress if we are not. For example, a man or woman in a desperate frame of mind is more apt to emphasize the unpleasant aspects of the news and to see bitterness rather than the joy in the faces of those we meets. He or she will ignore a contented child playing on one side of the street and notice, instead, a dirty ragged child, even though he or she be further away. So our frame of mind when projecting will largely determine the kind of experiences we have.

o0

The original intensity behind the construction determines its duration. Left alone, any such construction will eventually vanish. It will leave a trace, however, in electromagnetic reality where it can then be activated by anyone when certain conditions are met or are favorable.

t31

Denying energy to such a construction can be like pricking a balloon. Then all attention must be taken from it, for it thrives upon attention.

Chemical Changes Before Mental Projections Can Occur

Certain chemical changes must come about in the physical organism before projection can occur. Were it not for these, we would still be imprisoned within the corporal image. We know that dreaming has a definite chemical basis, that chemicals built up during periods of waking experience are released through dreams. Not only are these released, but they form a propelling action that allows energy to flow in the opposite direction. As chemical reactions allow the body to utilize energy and form physical materializations, so the excess built up becomes, then, a propelling force, allowing action to flow in what we would call subjective directions.

h6

This same chemical reaction must also occur, only more strongly, before a legitimate projection can occur. This is one of the main reasons why deliberate projections are not more numerous. Usually the chemical access is used in normal dreaming. In periods of exuberant energy and well being, a more than normal excess accumulates. this can trigger a projection. In periods of momentary indisposition, however, the dreaming process may be blocked and the chemical excess accumulated. Again, a good time to try projection.

h5

These chemical excesses are a natural byproduct of consciousness that is bound up in physical materialization. The more intense the characteristic experience of reality, the greater the chemical excess that is built up. consciousness itself, when physically oriented, burns up the chemicals. The more intense the individual, the hotter the fire, so to speak, and the greater the chemical excesses released.

h4

Released they must be, or the organism would not survive. Periods of intense activity may also generate this additional chemical propellant. Although this is generated through activity, it is released, making projections possible, in alternating periods of quietude and rest. There must be a disciplined focus, therefore, of this propellant. Periods of heightened sexual activity of a strong and deep nature will help. Periods of no sexual activity will also help,however. On the one hand, the chemical excess is built up as a result of great intensity, and in the latter case it is built up because psychic and sexual release has not been granted.

t8

Eggs and asparagus are helpful as far as diet is concerned. I am obviously not suggesting a whole diet of eggs and asparagus. These plus fish oils are beneficial, however, but not when taken with acid foods.

h39

I still suggest a more thorough examination of your  dreams for many of them contain spontaneous projections. They are most apt to occur in the early hours, between 3:00 and 5:00 A.M. The body temperature drops at such times. Five in the afternoon is also beneficial from this standpoint. The drinking of pure water also facilitates projection, although for obvious reasons, the bladder should be empty. The north-south position is extremely important, and indeed, is a necessity for any efficient dream recall. Energy is most easily utilized in this position for one thing, and this cuts unnecessary restrictions to a minimum.

h21

There is a vast difference between ordinary dreams and projections, whether or not the projections occurs from the dream threshold. Dreams are constructed and sent upon their way. As we know, they maintain an independence within their own dimension.

h16

Projections involve many more aspects of the whole self and are a mark that the personality is progressing in important ways. The inner senses are allowed their greatest freedom in projection states, and the self retains experience that it would not otherwise. When this knowledge becomes apart of the ordinary waking consciousness, then we have taken a gigantic step forward.

h44

An almost automatic determination must be established, however, if conscious projections are to be anything but rare oddities. With me, the problem is somewhat different than it might be with some others. These chemical excesses are used up, for one thing, in my own creative work. I do this automatically. It goes without saying that our own work will gain immeasurably through the extended experience of projection. Yoga exercises allow us to draw an abundance — indeed, a super-abundance — of energy. This energy results, also, in chemical excesses that can be utilized in projections, without drawing energy away from our other work.

h23

The expectation and knowledge that we are a part of all energy will allow us to realize that all the energy we require will be given. Our attitude toward what is possible determines what is possible for us in very definite terms.

h51

Now, there are also electromagnetic changes during projections that can be perceived with instruments. Certain electrical fields will make themselves known under these conditions. The fields have always existed, but they will become apparent to physical instruments only when they are being crossed — in other words, at the very act of projection.

h64

Other hints: A cool body temperature but with room temperature between 73.8 and 75.9. High humidity is poor. The color of a room is important. Cool colors are best. Too warm colors are detrimental, being too closely allied with earthly conditions. In our climate, October, February and March are best. August can be beneficial, according to the weather. Too warm weather is detrimental.

h59

Projections actually involve a change of atomic structure. Consciousness simply changes its form. When projection is first accomplished, there is a strong charge of adrenaline in the body and high activity of the thyroid gland. There is a charge of sexual hormones which are also utilized in projection.

h41

After projection is accomplished, however, there is a marked decline in chemical activity and hormone action, a drop in body temperature and a drop in blood pressure. The rapid eye movements noted by dream investigators cease entirely. The eye muscles are not used. The normal muscular activity that usually occurs in sleep vanishes. The physical body is in a deep trance state. The trance may be masked by sleep, if the projection happens from a dream threshold.

h28

According to the intensity of the projection and to the systems visited, the body may become more or less rigid when consciousness returns to it. This is simply a reaction to the returning consciousness. There is a subtle difference in the way sugar molecules are utilized. Momentarily, the body uses less sugar. However, the sugar is important in fueling the consciousness on its journey. It also aids in connecting the consciousness to the body.

h31

In other words, there is indeed a connection that is and must be partially physical, between the body and the traveling consciousness, and it is based upon a certain sugar molecule in a form not normally seen. Before conscious projections I would therefore recommend that you take a small amount of starchy or sugar food. A small snack before bed is a good idea from this viewpoint. Alcohol is of some benefit, though not to any great degree. Excellent result can be achieved in a dream-based projection during the day in a nap.

Awake-Seeming Dreams

There  are some notes I wanted to give concerning dreams in which you feel certain you are normally awake. When these dreams are unusually vivid, then the ego is aware and participating, but generally it is not using its critical faculties. As you know, you can become critically alert, but when you do so, you realize that you are not in your normal waking condition.

f19

In awake-seeming dreams you are indeed awake, but within a different psychological framework, indeed, within a different framework of reality. You are operating at a high level of awareness, and using the inner senses. These enable you to perceive an added depth of dimension which is responsible for the vividness and sense of exhilaration that often occurs within the kind of dream. The next step, or course, is to allow the ego to awaken its critical faculties while within this state. You are then able to realize that while you are indeed awake as you seem, you are awake while the body is asleep.

f18

When this occurs, you will be able to use your normal abilities in addition to those of the dream condition. You will be certain of your identity, realize that the physical self is sleeping or in dream state and that the inner self is fully awake. This represents a definite increase in the scope of consciousness and a considerable expansion over the usual limitations set by you upon yourself.

f25

Only then can you fully begin to manipulate the conditions that exit and communicate this knowledge that you receive to the ego. For the time, you see, the ego becomes a direct participator in such experience, at least to a degree.

f37

Almost all of your dream experiences do involve projections of one kind or another. These vary in intensity, type and even duration as any other experience vary. It takes a good deal of training and competence to operate with any real effectiveness within these situations.

f32

All in all, the intellect plays some part, but the institutional qualities are most important. There are chemical changes, also, that occur with the physical body when projections happen, and electromagnetic variations. These vary according to the form in which the projection occurs.

f36

The projected form does make some impression upon the physical system. It is possible for it to be detected. It is a kind of pseudo-image, materialistically speaking, but it has definite electromagnetic reality and chemical properties. Animals have sensed such apparitions. They react to the chemical properties and build up to the perception of the image from these.

f22

These chemical properties are more diffused in such an apparition than in a physical form, however. The chemical composition of a storm, perhaps, will give you an idea of what I mean. They cause small disturbances in the physical system. As a rule, they are not solid, in the same way that clouds are not solid, and yet they have shape and to certain extent boundaries and movement. They definitely have a reality, though you cannot usually perceive it with the physical senses.

f33

Perhaps this diffused quality is the most important difference (from your point of view) between an apparition and a physical form. There is an atomic structure, but in some ways it is less complete than the physical one. There is always a minute difference in the body’s weight when the individual is projecting.

f39

False Awakening or Awake-Seeming Dreams: Now I had a false awakening. In the back of my mind all night was the resolution to make sure I recorded my dreams. Here, I was sure I was awake. I wrote the dreams down in my notebook which was on the bedside table, and then, to make sure, I awakened my wife and told her the dreams also. She pointed out the the first dream and one of the others were definitely related. Again, I was positive I was awake.

f11

Then the suspicion struck me that perhaps this was an awake-seeming dream, that I was still dreaming and that none of the dreams had been written down at all. I kept struggling to analyze my state of consciousness and finally decided to check the notebook again

f6

I highly recommend this most advantageous method of projection to my blog readers. When you awaken — or seem to waken — in the middle of the night, try to get out of the body. Simply try to get out of bed without moving the body and go into another room.

f12

This is a pleasant and easy method. With some experience you will discover that you can maintain control, walk out of the apartment and outside. You may then attempt normal locomotion or levitate. There is little strain with this method. Keep it in mind so that you are alert to the initial favorable circumstances. You may be half awake. You may be in a false awakening. The method will work in either case. You can, if you want to, look back at your body.

b17

You must want to do this, however. Often, you do not want to see the body by itself, so to speak, and so choose methods that make this more difficult. Just this one exercise will sharpen your control greatly. It is an ABC. This experience is also less startling to the ego than a more abrupt projection, and the ordinary nature of the activities — walking into the next room, for example — will be reassuring. You are more calm in your own surroundings.

b58

Now it is possible for someone within the body to perceive someone who is not, but is not usual. The perceiver must be a person of strong psychic abilities or the projecting personality must be driven by high emotional intensity to make himself or herself known.

b86

The trick of staying between hallucinations and physical reality tell far more about how consciousness works.

s56

It is far more difficult to get objective proof for dream projections, yet the subjective proof is quite definite. The task of trying to maintain specific states of consciousness is enough work and effort to convince anyone having the experience that far more than simple dreaming or imagination is involved.

Coming To Life During Dreams

The experience of “coming to life during dreams” with any consistency, having some critical awareness, some rational control, some glimpse of other-dimensional reality — these events in the overall are bound to transform ordinary concepts regarding the nature of consciousness.

q29

And it is always strange to realize that physical reality has that little hold, comparatively speaking, that we can slip out of it so easily, that it is more like bright transparent cellophane than solid wood or rock. We can go in and out of it, through it and back, without leaving a tear. Yet the world is so smooth and unseamed when we’re in the body and focused there.

q6

Instructions for Projection from Trance and Dream States.

q23

Whatever information I can give you will be of great practical benefit. I do not want my blog readers traveling about unless they know what they are doing. Again I want to mention the matter of subconscious fabrications. Initially, particularly, you will meet with them. You must remember that you are wandering in completely different dimensions, and the rules with which you are familiar simply do not apply.

q22

I have told in previous blogs that the form in which you are traveling can be a tipoff to you. If your levitation experience seems to carry you outside of the solar system, then you know that you are in the third form and that your abilities for the time are almost limitless, comparatively speaking. Any image you see here must be accepted. It does no good to call these forms hallucinations, for they are no more hallucinations than the chair in which I now sit. ‘ Whether or not the automobile is a sensory hallucination, it can kill you.’

q13

And I tell you that whether or not these projection images are hallucinations, they can be dangerous and you must respect the reality in which they exist. I want to be sure that you realize that some of these constructions will belong to other systems. You are safe as long as you do not meddle. You may explore, and freely, and that is all.

q9

Now, here are my instructions. You may induce a medium trance in whatever way you choose. On occasion, this will be almost spontaneous, as you know. For best results in the beginning, make a projection attempt when you feel slightly drowsy, but pleasantly so. When you have induced the trance state, then begin to examine your own subjective feelings until you find recognition of the inner self.

q84

This involves a recognition of yourself as distinct from the flesh fibers in which you reside. Then, begin to imagine this inner self rising upward. You should experience at this point an internal sense of motion. This motion may be from side to side as you gently shake yourself loose.

q2

It may, instead, be a rushing upward. Whichever motion you experience, there will be a moment when you feel your identity and consciousness definitely withdrawing from the physical organism. Before you begin the experiment, the suggestion should also be given that the physical organism will be well protected and comfortable.

q28

When you feel your consciousness withdrawing, the first step is this: Forget the physical body or what you are to do with it. Will yourself out in a quick motion. There is no need to experience hallucinations. If the projection is a success, you will instantly lose contact with the body using this method. You simply will not be in it.

b36

It will be far from lifeless, of course. Its maintenance is being controlled by the consciousness of the individual cells and organs of which I have spoken in past blogs. I will give you alternate methods of projections, but I will be concerned now with what you can expect the first few moments after leaving the body.

t38

Once you are  out of the body, then you are dealing with a different kind of reality, but the experience is as valid as any other. You may or may not have the sensation of traveling through doors or windows. This is dependent upon the kind of projection involved. The molecular structure of the projecting self is of a different nature than that of the physical body. there is no change in the physical nature of the door, for example. The molecular structure of the traveling self changes.

b35

There is no danger of not returning to the body, generally speaking. If  in your projection you seem to be flying past treetops, then you are doing so. You can meet and speak with others on some of these excursions. It is possible, with training, to arrange such meetings. For any kind of scientific proof, of course, this would be a necessary preliminary.

q18

Remember that I told you in previous blogs, you may visit not only the past, present or future as it exists or will exist in your terms, but you may also visit realities that never existed physically. In our early blogs, I mentioned that intensity regulated the ‘duration’ of experience. Now, many events that were only imagined never took place physically, yet they exist. They simply are not a part of your definition of reality. You may, therefore, visit a museum that was planned in the sixteenth century but never built. Such a museum has a reality as valid as the home in which you live.

q21

I have been speaking of projection from the trance state. Projection from a dream is something else again, and when executed successfully, you have a fine example of the self as it changes the focus of awareness. Here the critical consciousness can be fully alert while the body sleeps. Spontaneous, unrecalled projections of this kind happen often. It is beneficial that they be carried out by the conscious wish of the projector. You learn, therefore, to manipulate your own consciousness and to experience its mobility. Quite simply, such projections allow you practice in dealing with realities that you will meet when you no longer operate in the physical system.

Dream Bodies

For all practical purposes, of course, we will usually find ourselves in some sort of body form in our out-of-body experiences. There are a necessary camouflage, for we cannot yet think of identity without some kind of body, so we project in such a form. It varies according to our abilities, and without it, we would feel lost indeed. The form itself is not important, but it can tell us something about the dimension in which we are having the experience.

b30

The dream body is the one with which we are most familiar. It has been called the astral body. It strikes us as being physical when we are in it, but we can do things with it that can’t be done ordinarily. We can levitate, for example. As a rule, however, we do not go through walls with this body. This is the body we use for ordinary dreams. Levitation is possible with it but on a limited basis.

b2

When we enter a different dimension, the abilities of the body form change, and for all intents and purposes, it is a different body form — which we will now call a mind form. It still seems physical in shape, but we can walk through physical matter with it. We can levitate much more freely, traveling within the solar system. But we cannot go further with it.

b38

In the first form, it is possible to perceive the past, present or future on a limited basis. In the second form, this perception is increased, the scope of consciousness widened. This is the form we will use if we meet by appointment with others in the dream state.

b12

The third we may call the true projection form. In it, it is possible to travel beyond our solar system, and to perceive the past,present and futures of other solar systems as well as our own. The various forms that we use do not dictate our experience, however. We may begin in one form and change to another — or go from the first to the third. On such occasions we must pass through in reverse direction [on returning]. The forms merely represent stages of consciousness.

b5

At physical death, after the last reincarnation, then the normal form is the dream body, and excursions are made from this point. It is possible, as mentioned, to suddenly switch from the third form to the dream body, but with a considerable jolt to consciousness.

b1

There are, indeed, others who can help us in such experiences, and they can be of great assistance as guides. We will find projections much easier if our head is to the north.

b19

Now, when we project from the dream body, consciously we are already outside of the physical one. We have already made the initial change away from physical focus. The mass of valid projections are made from the dreaming body. When the excursion is over, the return to the dream body is made with no strain, for the ego is little concerned. In many such cases, however, the knowledge is not available to the waking self.

b6

As we become more accustomed to the experience, the waking self will recall more and more and not become frightened. When we panic, from the waking condition, the experience ends. If the waking self had not been taken along in this particular manner, the journey could have continued.

b34

Very rarely do we go wide-awake, speeding out of our body like a rocket. Dream projections are quite different, in any case, and the ego is already protected.

b3

I want to give some idea of the conditions we may expect to meet in any successful projections, so that you will be prepared to some extent. For simplicity’s sake, we will call the body forms discussed, forms one, two and three.

b47

Form one will spring out of an ordinary dream state. In spontaneous projections, you may become conscious in form one, project, return to the ordinary dream state and from there project again several times. You can expect these particular projections to be difficult to interpret now, though you may find the experience intact in the middle of any given dream record.

b37

Our excursions with form one will be within our own system, largely connected to the earth, although past, present and future may be involved. We may, for example, visit New York in the year 2030.

b79

The projections here are fairly short in duration, though exceptionally clear. You may encounter phantoms from your own subconscious, however, and they will seem exceedingly real. If you realize that you are projecting, you may simply order any unpleasant phantoms to disappear, and they will do so. You may banish a nightmare also, if you realize that it is a product of your own subconscious. If you treat it as a reality, however, then you must deal with it as such until you realize its origin or return to the ordinary dream state.

b75

In form two you will not, as a rule, encounter any subconscious phantoms. Ordinary dream elements will not be as frequent, nor will they intrude as much. A longer duration of projection is possible. The vividness is extraordinary. Here you will begin to perceive quite clearly constructions that are not your own, where earlier these are but dimly glimpsed. A certain period of orientation will be necessary, simply because these other constructions may seem bewildering. Some will exist in you future. Some may have existed in your past, and some were thought of, but never materialized.

b89

But the reality of all of these constructions will be equally vivid, you see, for they are, indeed, equally real. I will give you a simple example. You may find yourself in a room with certain people. Later, upon awakening, you realize that both the people and setting belong to a particular sequence in a novel. You think then: ‘This was no projection, then, but only a dream.’

b4

It may, however, be a valid projection. The room and people exist but not in a way you endorse as reality. They exist in another dimension, but as a rule you cannot perceive it. Paintings that you will paint. It is possible for you to project yourself into one of your own future landscapes. This would not be an imaginative projection. This is what I am trying to tell you.

b73

You may find yourself, for example, in the middle of a battle that was once planned in some general’s mind, a battle that never materialized in physical reality. In such a case, incidentally, you were not a part of the battle and could not be harmed. However, you might be attracted enough to project yourself spontaneously into the body of one of the soldiers, in which case you could experience pain until your own fear pulled you back. As you learn control, such mistakes vanish.

b96

There are various situations you must learn to handle, attractions and repulsions which could pull you willy-nilly in any direction. Experience will teach you how to handle these. What is needed is a steady maintenance of identity under conditions which will be new as far as your conscious awareness is concerned. I cannot emphasize too strongly that projections into other dimensions do occur. Many such instances are often considered chaotic dreams because there is no way to check the against physical events since they did not occur in physical terms.

b95

It is possible for you to project to a future event in which you will be involved and by an act that you make in the projection, alter the course that this future will take. Such an action would therefore appear to happen twice, once in your present and once in your future. But in the future, you would be the one whose course is altered from this traveling self from the past.

b113

Let us take an example: While asleep, you project into 2030. There you see yourself considering various courses of action. For a moment you are aware of a sense of duality as you view this older self. You communicate with this other self; and we will go into this sort of thing more deeply in another blog. In any case, your future self heeds what you say. Now in the actual future you are the self who hears the voice of a past self, perhaps in a dream, of perhaps in a projection into the past.

b213f

Remember I listed briefly the three forms used during projections. In the first form, we usually use certain inner senses. In the second form, we use more of these, and in the third form, we attempt to use all of them, though very rarely is this successful. We should notice the overall form of perception that we seem to be using. We automatically shield ourselves from stimuli that are too strong for our own rate of development. This kind of balancing can lead to an unevenness of experience, however, in any given projection.

b97

As we know, it is almost impossible for us to be aware of the full perception possible, for the ego would not stand for it. Often, even in simple dreams, however, we will feel concepts or understand a particular piece of information without a word being spoken. In some projections, we will also experience a concept, and, at first, we may not understand what is happening. In these, we experience as actual the innermost reality of a given concept.

b20

In a dream recorded before this blog, I was in the third form, and I did not project beyond our solar system. This was still a projection within the physical universe, however. I was given information that I did not remember. When we explore the inside of a concept, we act it out. We form a temporary but very vivid image production. If my experience had been only this, it still would have been pertinent, for when we understand a concept in such a way the knowledge is never forgotten. It becomes part of our physical cells and our electromagnetic structure.

b43

I want to be clearer, however. Suppose that we suddenly understand the concept of oneness with the universe, and that this inner sensing of concepts is to be used. We would then construct dream images, a multitudinous variety of shapes and forms meant to represent the complicated forms of life. We would then have the experience of entering each of those lives. We would not think of what it was like to be a bird. We would momentarily be one. This does involve a projection of sorts, yet still must be called by contrast a pseudo-projection. A normal projection would involve one of the three body forms.

b112

Some experiences, then, will be simple attempts to use the inner senses more fully. They may appear to be projections, and as we go along, I will tell how to distinguish between them.

b31

We will be able to look back and see our physical body upon the bed on some occasions, and in other cases we will not be able to do this. In the first body form, for example, we can look back and see the physical body. If we project from this form into the next, in order to intensify the experience, then from this second form we will not see the physical one. We will be aware of it, and we may experience some duality. In the third form, we will no longer be aware of the physical body, and we will not see it.

b98

In the third form, our experience will be most vivid. They may involve us in other systems beside our own, and we will have little contact with the physical environment. For this reason, projections in the third form are the most difficult to maintain. There are dangers that do not exist when the other two forms are used.

b85

Using the third form, there could be a tendency for us not to recognize our own physical situation. It would be difficult to carry the memories of the present ego personality with us. This third form is the vehicle of the inner self. The disorientation that it feels is the same that it will feel when the physical body is deserted at the point of death. This disorientation if only temporary, and when at death the form is severed from the physical body, then all the memories and identity within the electromagnetic structure become part of the inner self. This form is sometimes used for purposes of instruction, however, or to acquaint the whole personality with the circumstances that strongly affect it.

b39

Most of our projection will be in the first and second form, in any case. Usually we will project from the physical body into the first form and then, perhaps, into the second.

Occasionally, this will happen and we will not know it, despite all our attempts to ascertain our circumstances.

b93

There are ways of knowing when we switch forms, of course, and we shall see that information in future blogs. You should have several projections within the first and second forms in the following months if your development continues.

b71

I want to mention in future blogs, the difference in experience and sensation between projections from a dream state and those from the trance state and also what is called awake-seeming dreams, for there are many things here that you do not know, and they are fairly important.

b29

A curious new second life began, adjacent to our normal one. Some may call it a fantasy life, but surely it is no more fantastic or mysterious than the ordinary world in which we all find ourselves.

No Time and Probabilities

We use probabilities like blocks to build events. This presupposes inner knowledge and calculations, for we must be aware of the probabilities in order to choose from them. The inner self, therefore, has this knowledge. These probabilities include webworks, probable actions and reactions involving not only oneself but others. Computers are toys compared with these inner workings.

d2

The majority of events do not ‘solidify’ until the last moment, in our terms. According to our understanding and interpretation of the word events, none are predestined or predetermined by sources outside of ourselves. Our childhood environment, for example, was determined by us before physical birth. Within this framework, we also give ourselves the freedom to manipulate and change. The main events of a civilization are chosen by its people, but because a course is begun, this does not mean that it cannot be changed at any point.

d1

Events, then, are materialized in our time from their origins in ‘no time.’ There is no end to the source or supply of probabilities, therefore ‘no time’ is not a state, completed storehouse. Each event we form from any set of probabilities automatically gives rise to new probabilities.

d15

The nature of any given probable action does not lead to any particular inevitable act. Probabilities expand in terms of value fulfillment. One given act does not necessarily lead, then, to act A, B, C, onward to some concluding action. Instead, it has offshoots in infinite directions, and these have offshoots.

a31

This is what I know of reality. there is far more to be known. Outside of the realities of which I am aware and others are aware, there are systems that we cannot describe. They are massive energy sources, cosmic energy banks, that make possible the whole reality of probabilities.

e24

They have evolved beyond all probabilities as we understand them yet, outside of probabilities, they still have existence. This cannot be explained in words. Yet, none of this is meant to deny the individual, for it is the individual upon whom all else  rests, and it is from the basis of the individual that all entities have their existence. Nor are the memories or emotions of an individual ever taken from him. They are always at his disposal.

s1

All of these probable systems are open. In our system it seems as if we choose one course, one main line of probabilities, and that is the end of it. In our system, only one ego predominates and we think of ourselves as that ego. In other systems, this is not necessarily the case. In some, the inner self is aware of having more than one ego, of playing more than one role at a time. As an analogy, this would be as if we lived, say, the life of a rich man of great talent, the life of a poor man and the life of a mother and career woman. We would be aware of each role and find abilities being developed in each. This is an analogy, and in several respects it could lead us astray if taken too literally. In such a system, there would be no breakup of time.

Multi-Dimensional Personality and Probable Selves

The ego structure remains, of course. The responsibility of dealing with physical reality remains, but in some respects the nature of this manipulation changes. It becomes more direct. Physical properties are manipulated more and more at a mental level. The ego becomes more like the inner ego and less like its old self, comparatively speaking. It accepts large portions of reality that it previously denied. Structurally, it remains intact, yet it has changed chemically and electromagnetically. Now it is far more open to inner data. Once this freedom is achieved, the ego can never return to its old state.

e12

The ego is self-conscious action that attempts to set itself apart from action  and to consider action as an object. Now this altered ego retains its highly specialized self-consciousness, and yet it can now experience itself as an identity within and as a part of action.

This is a cornerstone for consciousness and for personality. It is only a first step, however. Without it, no further development of consciousness can occur. It is not attained by all within our system. We are at that point now.

e3

The next step so taken when identity is able to include within itself the intimate knowledge of all incarnations. Yet in this state, the independence of the various reincarnated selves is not diminished. Each of these steps of consciousness involve identity with their recognition of its unity with All That Is.

e22

As each separate identity then seeks to know and experience its other portions, then All That Is learns Who and What it Is. Action never ceases its exploration of itself. All That Is can never know itself completely, since action must travel through itself from every conceivable point, and yet the journey, being itself action, will create new paths.

e4

There are many You’s in the probable systems, and each You is related psychologically in a personality structure. The You that you know is a part of this. In our system, all other You’s seem to exist in a probable reality.

e21

To any of them, the others would seem to exist in a probable universe, yet all are connected. All of us did not have the same parents, for example, and there are portions of probable situations existing in our own parents separate lives. In two probable realities our mothers did not have children. We do not exist in these. In some, she married but not the man we know as father. A psychological connection exists between that first son or daughter in that other system and yourself.

e8

Emotional charged feeling immediately sets up what we may think of as tangent. It is expressed in some reality system. This is the inner nature of action. Those thoughts and desires and impulses not made physically real in our terms will be made real in other systems.

e6

Now, the inner self is psychologically influenced by these probable personalities, for they represent a whole personality structure or gestalt with which we are utterly unfamiliar. Our psychologists are dealing with a one-dimensional psychology, at their best.

e7

In the dream state, the portions of the large ‘structure’ sometimes communicate in highly codified symbols. It would be highly improbable that we could decipher many of these now. There is a feedback system that operates, and yet we must understand that these other identities are fully independent and individual. They exist in codified psychological structures within our personality, as we do in theirs.

e19

They remain latent within us, and unexpressed in our system. We have their abilities, unused. We remain latent in their personality structures, and our main abilities are unused within their systems. Yet each of us is a part of oneself in a multidimensional psychological structure.

e25

These do not necessarily represent more evolved selves. Certain abilities will be more developed in them than in us, and vise versa. I am not speaking of portions of our self that exist in the ‘future.’ Each probable self, has ‘future’ selves.

e15

This multi-dimensional personality or identity is the psychological structure with which we will be concerned in many blogs. The terms includes probable selves, reincarnated selves and selves more developed than the self that we know. These make up the basic identity of the whole self. All portions are independent.

 

 

 

Children Trying Out Dreams

Children actually try out in dreams the various courses open the them.

a4

We may act out many probabilities within dream reality and try out alternatives, and not necessarily short-term ones. We would have made an excellent doctor, for example. In our terms, we worked out this possibility by weaving, over a period of three years, a dream framework in which we learned exactly what our life would have been, had we gone into medicine.

a3

This was more than imaginative. We examined one probability and chose another. The individual, then, chooses which probabilities he or she desires to actualize physically. In one such episode, for example, we followed our present course through; therefore, we are subconsciously aware of our own ‘future’ — since we chose it. There are always new choices, however. We foresee the future of possibilities within the main choice system.

a16

In our present life, the same process continues. Most of these dreams are very disconnected from the ego and will not be recalled. The self who pursues these divergent paths is actual, however. The doctor we might have been once dreamed of a probable universe in which he or she would be an artist. He or she continues to work out his or her own probabilities. He of she exists in fact. We call his or her system an alternate system of probability, but this is precisely what he or she would call ours.

a2

Now we will have some experiences that are shared in the dream state. They will be involved with episodes familiar to us both before we went our separate ways. We are like two limbs from the same tree. We recognize the same mother.

a26

The dreams we will have and have had in shared experience are root dreams. They serve as a method of maintaining inner identity and communication. Projections can also occur from these — that is, we may, for example, project into the life of the doctor.

a25

Reincarnation is but a part of this probability system, the part that falls within our particular universe. There are also root dreams shared by the race as a whole. Most of these are not as symbolic as Jung thought them to be but are literal interpretations of the abilities used by the inner self. For that matter, as we know, flying dreams need not be symbolic of anything. They can be valid experiences, though often intermixed with other dream elements. Falling dreams are also simple experience in many instances, representing downward motion, or a loss of form-control during projection

Dream Selves and Probable Selves

The dreaming self has its own memories. It has memory of all dream experience. To us, this might mean that it has memory of its past, and indeed, to us, memory itself is dependent upon a past or the term seems meaningless. To the dreaming self, however, past, present and future do not exist. How can it be said to have memory?

s35

 

All experience is basically simultaneous. The dreaming self is aware of its experience in its entirety. We obviously, are not. We are hardly familiar with our dream experience and barely aware of its significance.

The dreaming self is to some considerable degree aware of the probable self. There is give-and-take between the two, for much data is received by the dreaming self from the probable self– the self that experiences what the ego would call probable events.

s4

This data is often wound by the dream self into a dream drama which informs the subconscious of dangers or of probable success of any given event which is being considered by the subconscious for physical actuality. Were it not for the experience of this probable self, and for its information given via the dreaming self to the subconscious, then it would be most difficult for the ego to come to any clear decisions in daily life. The ego does not realize the data that is being constantly fed into it. It cannot afford to, generally, since it’s focused energy must be used in the manipulation of physical actuality.

s31

This probable self has operated in each reincarnation, in each materialization of the personality, and has at its command literally millions of probable situations and conditions upon which to make value judgements. Of itself, however, it does not make the decision as to whether or not a particular event will be made physical. It merely passes on the information that it has received through experience.

s24

This information is sifted often through the dreaming self to the subconscious which has intimate knowledge of the ego with which it is closely connected. The subconscious makes its own judgements and passes these on with the data. Then the ego makes its decision. In some cases, the ego refuses to make the decision, and it is done by the subconscious. On occasion, when an unwise decision is made by the ego, the subconscious will change it.

s38

The probable self can be reached through hypnosis but only with excellent subjects and operators. Often it will not be recognized, however, for there will be no evidence of its experience in physical reality to back up its statements. Its data will agree when considered within its own framework. Reaching it in this manner would be highly difficult in any case. To my knowledge, it has not as yet been reached through hypnosis. It has been glimpsed but not recognized as a separate part of the self — in dream recordings and analytic sessions.

s14

Again, these portions of the self exist in each reincarnation. In the materialization of personality through various reincarnations only the ego and layers of personal subconscious adapt new characteristics. Other portions retain their experience, identity, and knowledge. The ego, if fact, receives much of its stability because of this retention. Were it not for experiences in other lives on the part of deeper layers of the self, the ego would find it almost impossible to relate to other individuals, and the cohesive nature of society would not exist.

s26

 

If you would have some idea of what the probable universe is like, then examine your own dreams, looking for those events which do not have any strong resemblance to the physical events of waking existence. Look for dream individuals with whom you are not acquainted in normally conscious life. Look for landscapes that appear bizarre or alien, for all of these exist somewhere. You have perceived them. They do not exist in the space that you know but neither are they non-existent, mere imaginative toys of the dreaming mind, without substance.

s223

You may not be able to make sense from what appears to be a chaotic jungle of disconnected images and actions. The main reason for your confusion is the inability of an egotistical identity to perceive order that is not based upon continuity of moments. The order within the probable system is based upon something that could be compared to subjective associations or intuitive flashes of insight — experiences that can combine ingredients that could appear to the ego as disconnected. Here they are combined into whole integrated patterns of action.

s32

The probable system does not achieve its order through subjective association, but the term is the nearest I can use to approximate the basic causes for this order. The events within it are, indeed, objective and concrete within their own field of reality, for example. Our own system is real and concrete only within its own field, remember.

s12

In sleep, not only do we withdraw from the physical field of actuality but we also enter other systems.

Living Time

Great as things are, there is a totality of experience and sensation that includes all, a vortex that contains and transforms infinite parts. I know that of which I speak. Yet, each minute event immeasurably  increases not only itself but all other events, bringing into birth by its own actualization an infinitude of novus actions and events, an unfolding or multi-dimensionalizing of itself, an initiation into dimensionalization. For all versions and possibilities of each event must be actualized in the limitless multiplication of creativity.

t41

And warping outward from each act are a million openings, roads traveled and experienced by the soul, naturally and spontaneously following its attributes.

t23

Any one moment in physical time then is a warp, opening into these other dimensional of actuality, and any one moment can be used as a passageway or bridge. The act of crossing will be reflected in a million other worlds, but these reflections will be themselves alive and the act of perceiving itself will create still another vortex of actualization.

t53

Attention can be shifted from any physical moment to any probable moment by a sideways parallel imaginative thrust — a sliding off of.

t16

Each probable event is changed by each other probable event. There is constant simultaneous interaction. These ‘separate’ probable systems do not operate isolated from each other, then, but are intimately connected. All systems are open. The physical moment is transparent, though we give it a time-solidity. We see it as opaque.

t42

Attention can be shifted from any physical moment to any probable moment by a sideways parallel imaginative thrust, a sideling off of focus, if the mind can get over its fear of dying to itself.

In what other worlds, for example, do we sit writing these blogs?

t19

Slide imaginatively into a world where we do not perform the next small action  we will perform in this world. Cough, smile, sneeze — in some other actuality our actions are non-actions and our non-acts are realized.

t20

Greet the now-realization of all of your dreams, for they also participate in the probable system. As our dreams bleed into our normal conscious life, so do they bleed into other probabilities. A dream act is actualized by a waking ‘I’, as a waking ‘I’ is actualized by a dreaming self.

t38

The soul is too great to know itself, yet each individual portion of the soul seeks this knowledge and in the seeking creates new possibilities of development, new dimensions of actuality. The individual self at any given moment can connect with its soul. There is initially a sidewall movement of consciousness, a dropping away sensation.

c14

We step sideways, as though we are squeezing between two bars. We attempt to save even the shadows of ourselves, and we create light in even the darkest recesses of our own hidden fragments. To that extent and in those terms, we are our own redeemers.

So one portion of the self lends a helping hand to another, in the same way that I give my blog readers a helping hand.

t1

What I want to explain here is that the communications do not just operate in a vertical, ascending or descending fashion, but horizontally, in those terms.

t39

The experience brings up several points that have not been discussed in previous blogs in connection with probabilities. Because we are born physically into our system, we take it for granted without thinking of it that we are born in the same manner into other systems. This may or may not apply, but it is definitely not applicable to the system of probabilities as a whole.

Energy created in such a fashion, as we know, cannot be negated and must continue along its own lines of development.

t43

From this standpoint these are fragment personalities; therefore, they have our memories up to that point of their initiation, and they continued of from there. Such personalities can be created and are created under varying conditions too many enumerate.

t35

Unconsciously, we are aware of their progress, as unconsciously they are aware of ours. We see to it that they will be helped. Remember that regardless of anything, we give them existence and consciousness, a gift of creativity, and potentials that they will try in their own way to fulfill. Their experiences have been different from ours. Their fulfillment, when they achieve it, will, therefore, be of a different nature, bringing out facets of activity that will not exist in our circumstances.

t12

Now, in the life of each personality there are, of course, moments of deep crisis and decision, where a personality decides upon one of various possible choices. These moments are not necessarily conscious at all, and the choices are not necessarily conscious, though often they rise to consciousness. But by then, the inner work and decision has been done.

c43

This is the next line of our development, however. We clear away debris. We give ourselves psychic breathing space so that our creative abilities could arise, and see that the way was open.

t37

It’s one thing to accept the idea of probable systems and probable selves selves as an exciting intellectual concept, and quite another to accept the practical considerations involved if we think of probabilities as plain facts or existence. Through our experiences, the concept becomes a reality with which we are confronted.

Precognition, Clairvoyance and Mass Dreams

Each individual creates matter, including objects and his or her own image. Coherence, illusion of permanency, placement in space, mass and color are all arrived at and agreed upon in the ways already explained in previous blogs. Telepathic communication is one of the methods by which such agreement is reached.

c43

Long ago, primary and secondary constructions were explained. I emphasized that each individual perceives only his own physical constructions. Basically, there is no difference between telepathy and clairvoyance. The apparent difference is the result of an inadequate understanding of the nature of time. The important fact in both cases is that information is received that does not come through normal sense channels.

c29

When an individual clairvoyantly ‘sees’ an event, this is what happens: First he forgets the concept of continual moments that usually hampers perception. His or her perception changes focus so that he or she is aware of an event that otherwise would seem to be in the future. Unconsciously, as always, he or she constructs material objects in line with the available data.

c41

It goes without saying, then, that he or she helps to form the clairvoyantly perceived event, just as he or she helps construct any event in the present. The agreement as to physical dimensions is reached in the same manner as usual.

c12

Sense data is not basically dependent upon the physical body. The mind can bypass the senses and receive data in a more direct manner, translating what it perceives automatically, as it translates ordinary sense data.

c5

Under ordinary circumstances, data is received through the physical senses and then interpreted by the brain. When a clairvoyant event is perceived, the data is received by the mind, then given to the brain which then interprets it. The physical body becomes aware of it, but the senses have actually been bypassed. The interpretation is made, however, in the same way as it usually is. Otherwise, the information would not register for the physical organism.

c44

Actually, of course, much information perceived directly by the mind does bypass the physical organism completely. In some such cases, the subconscious does receive the data. In other cases, it is not recorded in any way within the physical system but is recorded at deeper layers of the self.

c21

Even this data is available to the subconscious, however, if the need for it arises. Before it can be used by the physical organism, it must first be taken from the deeper layers to the brain for interpretation, as if it were new sense data.

c32

In the dream state, we smell odors that are not in the physical room. The memory of these is imprinted and registered by the body as faithfully and realistically as any ‘real’ odor. The experience becomes a part of buried memory and may be recovered through hypnosis. Sometimes it may arise spontaneously.

There are many kinds of mass or shared dreams. For now, we will be concerned with mass dreams that have an almost universal nature; that is, dreams  that are shared at one time or another by the majority of living persons on our planet.

c23

This particular kind of dream is concerned with working out certain problems concerning physical reality. The dreams usually are not precognitive, although they might appear to be, since many of the dream events will later occur. They are not precognitive, however, because in a large measure they bring about or cause the later events.

c25

They occur, comparatively speaking, just above that layer which Jung refers to as the collective unconscious. If we could tune into these dreams, we would have a good idea of the main events of the future because we would see them being born. They are concerned with significant events that affect many countries. They represent deep intents, wishes and purposes. At times they have immense power to bring about world-shaking changes of beneficial or destructive nature.

c33

One individual is more important than we have ever dreamed, however, for the intensity and intent are important. One man or woman passionately willing good or evil can overbalance literally a hundred men or women. And in the dream state, also, leaders can be born and make themselves known. The people already know them in mass dreams before they are recognized in physical reality.

Precognition and Association

Association is not clearly understood, because psychologists, at present, believe that it works only in connection with past events. They also underestimate dream events, for many associations are the result of events that happen in the dream state, where the mind continues its associative processes.

as9

Any given personal association may originate from a dream event, as well as from a past waking one. Psychologists, generally speaking, have not yet accepted the theories of our own physicists, and they continue to consider time as a series of moments. The inverted time system recognizes the actual nature of time. There is room in it for a rather complete explanation of the mind’s associative processes. The mind, as opposed to the brain, perceives in terms of a spacious present. Therefore, it draws its associations not only from our present and past but also from our future.

as25

Take an example: Dorian X, becomes ill whenever he smells a certain perfume. He does not know the reason. An Online Psychologist Australia (or any country for that matter) might explain the reaction by presuming that some unpleasant event from the past was connected with his perception of the perfume. The explanation is a good possible one; however, it is often the only one that would be considered.

as1

Dorian may be reacting to an unpleasant event experienced in the dream state in which the upsetting situation was accompanied by the particular odor. But he could also be reacting to a future event of the same nature, for again, the mind does not break time into a series of moments. This is done by the physical brain.

as14

The ego, as a rule, is not aware of this broader time experience, but the subconscious often is; and associative processes of the mind can and do react to the future. Therefore, it is possible for our Dorian to becomes ill this year at the smell of a particular perfume because, say, subconsciously he knows that in 2022 his mother will be wearing it when she dies. The associative processes work both forward and backward.

Subconscious Layers of Precognitive Dreams

We will discover definite correlations that exists between the incidence of precognitive dreams and data having to do with the temperature and weather. I don’t believe it is possible for us to carry our dream experiments far enough to discover certain other factors that exist between various layers of subconscious and falling temperature rates in the body; therefore, I mention it here.

v14

It would be necessary to take our temperature many times during the night and to correlate the findings with the levels of the subconscious as they showed themselves within the dream series. It should be noted, however, that with the exception of several other circumstances, these various subconscious levels fall within definite temperature ranges. To some extent, this can be ascertained through hypnosis. However, suggestion to the effect that the subject’s temperature rise and fall would tend to obscure the effect.

v11

This correlation is observable only when the personality is in an inactive state. Suggestions of motion or excitement would change and affect the temperature reading, so that this characteristic temperature range would go unnoticed. Illness can also obscure the effect.

d53

If we can see future events in dreams, does this mean that the theory of free will is a myth? Not at all. Consider this question along with the nature of time and probable events.

c4

Sometimes precognitive information will appear to be wrong. In some cases, this is because a different probable event has been chosen by the self for physical materialization. To me, our past, present, and future merge into one. For example, if you were to have a dream of a horse and you’re convinced this has some significant meaning, you yourself might actually be able to change the meaning further into the future depending on self-perception.

e18

On the other hand, as I have told , our past itself continually changes. It does not appear to change to us, for we change with it. The question of precognition, however, is not at issue with information concerning the past. Our future changes as the past does. Since precognition deals with future events, it is here that the issue of changing time shows itself.

d13

In such cases, it is necessary that the correct channel of probable events be perceived; ‘correct’ meaning the channel which will ultimately be chosen in our terms. The choice is dependent upon our choices in both past and present. These choices, however, are based upon our changing perceptions of past and present. When we have a greater scope of perception , we can predict what may happen with better facility. But this is still dependent upon our prediction of a choice we will make.

v24

Predictions, per se, do not contradict the theory of free will, though free will is dependent upon much more than the freedom of the ego alone. If the ego were allowed to make all the choices, with no veto power from other layers of the self, we would all be in a sad position, indeed.

v19

The probable system and its connections here.

The field of probabilities is quite as real as our physical universe. The experiences encountered there by other portions of the self are used by the whole self. The knowledge gained there is invaluable, not only in terms of overall experience, but as a means of training the ego and subconscious to choose between various activities.

u8

All of this data is instantly available; only the ego is unaware of this field of reality. It would be snowed under. From this field of probabilities we choose patterns of thought which we will weave into the physical matter of our universe. The dreaming self sees both fields and operates in each. It should be realized that the probable self also has its own dreams.

n33

This probable field seeds many other systems beside our own. It is composed of thought images, not physically materialized in our terms, but vivid storehouses of energy. Here is the material from which all pasts, presents and futures are made. It is far from a closed system. Not only does it feed the physical universe, but in it, many aspects of our own dreams become actual. Do we dream of an apple? The apple appears in the field of probability.

What is Transmitted in Telepathic, Clairvoyant and Precognitive Dreams

I have mentioned in past blogs that any action has an electromagnetic reality. In telepathic and clairvoyant experiences, the electromagnetic pattern is transmitted. It must then be transformed into a pattern that can be distinguished by the ego, if the individual is to be consciously aware of the data.

f1

Often the information is picked up translated by the subconscious and acted upon without conscious approval or recognition. In almost all cases, however, there must be an emotional attraction, for this is what allows for the initial transmission, and makes it possible.

f4

The ego chooses channels of reception with great discrimination, and again, it censors anything which it feels is a threat to its dominance. In sleep, however, many dreams are of a telepathic nature, with strong clairvoyant overtones. You might want to consult a reliable clairvoyant or a tarot card reader to get your dreams interpreted. Understandably, the tarot card reader must be someone who is reliable and who could give you an insight into your subconscious thoughts and an article such as https://www.heraldnet.com/national-marketplace/online-psychics-top-5-psychic-reading-sites-for-100-accurate-predictions/ could help you find the right psychic to consult.

[However, it is to note that it is the ego’s persistent discrimination in choosing the stimuli to which it will react that determines the nature of physical time as it appears to the personality.] The ego, because of its function and characteristics, cannot make swift decisions as can the intuitive self. Therefore, it perceives events almost in slow motion.

f11

What’s the job of the intellect, then?

In the future, the ego and intellect will expand to contain, use and appreciate all the other portions of the self which they now mistrust. Individual identity will expand to include a greater variety of impulses and stimuli. The ego will become more of an organizer, in general, letting in, literally, a barrage of experiences and forming them into meaningful patterns. Now it fears such experiences because it is not certain of its strength or of its ability to organize them.

f18

I mentioned in our last blog that our scientist do not realize that man and woman have, indeed, evolved since the development of the brain. For it has learned to form millions of new connections, meanings and concepts, new gestalts that have made man  and woman something different than he or she was. All of these are new electromagnetic patterns which are now indelibly a part of the race.

f14

The size of the brain has little to do with this beyond a certain point. The number of electrical connections are important, however, and even the old portions of the brain are affected by them. The old portions are not the same as they were. Physical examination only discloses their condition in the present.

Recorded Dream Documents

What is the point of it all? For one thing, records of our own precognitive dreams will convince us that we can perceive segments of the future. This personal knowing is far more vital than a bland intellectual acceptance that precognition may exist or is generally possible.

h23

We don’t have to take precognition on faith. If we keep careful dream records, sooner or later we’ll find our own evidence of it. Each of my own precognitive dreams made a significant impression on me at the time and represented proof that I was moving in the right direction. Now I am much more interested in how precognition works, what triggers it and what translates into dream experience.

h18

Each recaptured dream is not only a highly personal document but a clue into the nature of dream existence. Precognitive dreams are most evocative from this standpoint. The dreamer is baffled at his or her own ability to foresee a future event, and this makes him or her more than ordinarily curious about the nature of dream life in particular.

h22

Even this intense interest waxes and wanes, however, in ordinary sequence of events. Some blog readers and I both go through periods when we forget to remember and wake up for weeks at a time with only a few dream fragments. Often, months go by without a precognitive dream, and then there is that odd sense of discovery — always fresh — of an event foreseen. Then the excitement hits again — of spying out the dreaming self and charting the strange environment in which it has its experience. Once more, I’m up at all hours, scribbling down my latest dream notes, checking them eagerly against daily happenings.

h17

In such dreams, the physical future event is often perceived opaquely, distorted in at least some aspect, just as dream events are when seen from the viewpoint of waking life.

h19

For those of you who want to conduct your own experiments, remember: A precognitive dream is one in which you receive future information that you could receive in no normal manner. The dream should be recorded and dated. Write everything down, no matter how trivial. If you remember only dreaming about a person or name, record that. When you awaken, do not make intellectual judgments concerning the relative importance of a dream or decide it is not pertinent enough to record. We often foresee very trivial events that seem to have no particular meaning to us. But as you’ll see, association can be at work, relating such experience in an intuitive rather than logical manner.

h14

If possible, read your dream records at night, checking them against the day’s happenings. Once a week, check the whole series. Remember that symbolism is important. Often, you must learn your own way of handling dream symbolism to make sense of dream. Not every dream is precognitive, nor is there any reason to waste much time with interpretations that seem too nebulous. Some precognitive information will be in symbolic form. However, as a few of dreams will clearly show, if you do not know the meaning of a symbol, give yourself the suggestion that it will be made clear to you intuitively — thus trust your answer.

h35

Precognition in dreams can give us pertinent information about events in which we have deep emotional interest.

Dreams are Symbolic Interpretation of The State of Mind

As the personality is changed by any action, so it is changed by its own dreams. As it is molded by the exterior environment, so it is molded by the dreams that it creates and which help form its interior world. To the whole self, there is little differentiation made between exterior or interior actions. The ego makes such distinctions. The core of the personality does not. As an individual changes his physical situation through reacting to it, so he or she changes his or her interior or psychic situation in the same way.

d23

In dreams, we give freedom to actions that cannot adequately be expressed within the confines of normal waking reality. If the personality handles his or her dream activities capably, then problem actions find release in dreams. When the ego is too rigid, it will even attempt to censor dreams, however, and freedom of actions is not entirely permitted, even in the dream condition.

n35

 

If this solution fails, the impeding action will then materialize as a physical illness or undesirable psychological condition. If an individual has strong feelings of dependency that cannot be expressed in daily life, he will express these in dreams. If he or she does not, then he or she may develop an illness that allows him or her to be dependent in physical life. If he or she is aware of difficulties, however, he or she may request dreams that will release this feeling.

y16

 

The individual would not necessarily remember such a dream. Psychologically, however, such an experience would be valid, and the dependency expressed. I cannot stress this too strongly: To the inner self, the dream experience is as real as any other experience.

n14

If follows that by using suggestion, various problems can be solved within the dream state. The inner ego of which we have spoken is the director of such unifying activities. It is the ‘I’ of our dreams, having somewhat the same position within the inner self as the ego has to the outer physical body.

n12

Upon proper suggestion, the personality then will work out specific problems in the dream state, but if the solution is not clear to the conscious ego, this does not necessarily mean that the solution was not found. There will be cases where it is not only unnecessary but undesirable that the ego be familiar with the solution. The suggestions will be followed by the sleeping self in its own fashion. The solutions may not appear to the conscious self in the way it expects. The conscious self may not even recognize it has been given a solution, and yet it may act upon it.

n16

 

Individual therapy, which tend to be available at centers like Arista Recovery (https://www.aristarecovery.com/), could prove useful to many suffering from psychological illnesses as well as an addiction problem. However, both psychological and physical illnesses could largely be avoided through dream therapy. Rather harmlessly, aggressive tendencies could also be given freedom in the dream condition. Through such therapy, actions would be allowed greater spontaneity. In the case of the release of aggressiveness, the individual involved would experience this within the dream state and hurt no one. Suggestions could also be given so that he or she learned to understand the aggressiveness through watching himself or herself while in the dream state.

n17

This is not as farfetched as it might seem. Much erratic anti-social behavior could be avoided in this way. Crimes could be prevented. The desired but feared actions would not build up to explosive pressure. If I may indulge in a fantasy, theoretically we could imagine a massive experiment in dream therapy, where wars were fought by sleeping, and not waking, nations.

n15

In practice, however, there are many considerations to be understood. If aggressiveness is the problem, for example, then the preliminary suggestion should include a statement that in the dream, the aggression will be harmlessly acted out and not directed against a particular individual. The subconscious is quite capable of handling the situation in this manner. This may seem like a double censor, but in all cases it is the aggressiveness itself that is important and not the person or persons against whom the individual may decide to vent his or her aggressiveness.

n36

When the aggressiveness is released through a dream, there will be no need for a victim. We do not want an individual to suggest a dream situation in which he or she is attacking another person. There are several reasons for this, both telepathic realities which we do not yet understand and guilt patterns which would be unavoidable.

n41

We are not attempting to substitute dream action for physical action, generally speaking. Here we are speaking of potentially dangerous situations in which an individual shows signs of being unable to cope with these psychological actions through ordinary methods of adoption. No one can deny that a war fought by dreaming men at specified times would be less harmful than a physical war — to return to my flight of fancy. There would be repercussions, however, that would be unavoidable, [for again, basically, the personality does not differentiate between sleeping and waking events].

n23

Again, if the personality is fairly well balanced, then his or her existence in dream reality will reinforce his or her physical existence. We are involved in a juggling of realities. It is necessary to see the personality as it operates within both, if we are interested in understanding its whole experience.

n13

Sometimes dreams that seemed nonsense contain one clear, important image that shortly — within a few days– would appear in a different context entirely. In several cases, two or more future events would be considered into one dream.

 

Illness and Action

Illnesses can be seen as impeding actions representing actual blockages of energy, action turned into channels that are not to the best interests of the personality. The energies appear concentrated and turned inward, affecting the whole system. They represent offshoots; not necessarily detrimental in themselves, except when viewed from the standpoint of other actions that form the personality framework.

x4

A certain portion of the energy practically available to the personality is spent in the maintenance of this impeding action of illness. It is obvious, then, that less energy is available for actions more beneficial to the personality system as a whole.

The situation can be serious in varying degrees, according to the impetus and intensity of the original cause behind the illness. If the impetus is powerful, then the impeding action will be of more serious nature, blocking huge reserves of energy for its own purposes. It obviously becomes part of the personality’s psychological structure, the physical, electrical and chemical structures, invading to some extent even the dream system.

x12

If illness is detrimental and we know it, then why does poor health linger at times?

At times, illness is momentarily accepted by the personality as a part of the self, and here lies its danger. It is not just symbolically accepted, and I am not speaking in symbolic terms. The illness is often quite literally accepted by the personality structure as a portion of the self. Once this occurs, a conflict instantly develops. The self does not want to give up a portion of itself, even if that part may be painful or disadvantageous.

x30

This has serious implications. Obviously the easiest time to cure an illness is before it is accepted as a part of the self-image. (I’ll go on to explain some of the other deeper reasons for the continuance of symptoms and our acceptance of them.)

For one thing, while pain is unpleasant, it is also a method of familiarizing the self against the edges of quickened consciousness. Any heightened sensation, pleasant or unpleasant, has a stimulating effect upon consciousness to some degree. It is a strong awareness of activity and life. Even when the stimulus may be extremely annoying or humiliatingly unpleasant, certain portions of the psychological framework accept it undiscriminatingly because it is a basic part of the nature of consciousness and a necessary one.

x22

Even a quick and automatic rejection or withdrawal from such a stimulus is, in itself, a way by which consciousness knows itself. The ego may attempt to escape such experiences, but the basic nature of action itself is the knowing of itself in all aspects. In a very deep manner, action does not differentiate between enjoyable and painful actions.

These differentiations come later, on another level of development. But because personality is composed of action, it contains within it all action’s characteristics.

x51

Here I will describe the ways in which various kinds of consciousness react to painful stimuli, ending up with a statement that at the deepest cellular levels, all sensations and stimuli are instantly, automatically and joyfully accepted, regardless of their nature. At this level, no knowledge of threat exists. The “I” differentiations is not definite enough to fear destruction.

x38

Here we have action knowing itself and realizing its basic indestructibility: It has no fear of destruction, for it is also a part of the destruction from which new actions will evolve.

The complicated organism of human personality with its physical structure has evolved a highly differentiated ‘I’ consciousness, whose very nature is such that it attempts to preserve the apparent boundaries of identity: To do so it must choose between actions.

x24

But beneath the sophisticated gestalt are the simpler foundations of its being and, indeed, the very acceptance of all stimuli without which identity would be impossible. Without this acquiescence, the physical structure would never maintain itself, for the atoms and molecules within it constantly accept painful stimuli and suffer even their own destruction. They are aware of their own separateness within action and of their reality within it.

x33

Now you should understand why even an impeding action can be literally accepted by the personality as a part of itself and why efforts must be made to coax the personality to give up a portion of itself, if progress is to be made.

We are also helped, however, by several characteristics of the personality, in that it is every-changing, and its flexibility will be of benefit. We merely want to change the direction in which some of its energy moves. It must be seen by the personality that an impeding action is a hardship on the whole structure and that this particular part of the self is not basic to the original personality. The longer the impending action is accepted, the more serious the problem.

x55

Can illness serve a good purpose? Yes.

The whole focus of a personality can change from constructive areas to a concentration of main energies in the area of the illness. Now in such a case, often the illness represents a new unifying system. If the old unifying system of personality has broken down, the illness, serving as a makeshift, temporary emergency measure may hold the integrity of the personality intact until a new constructive, unifying principle replaces the original.

x39

In this case, the illness could not be called an impeding action unless it persisted long after its purpose was served. Even then, without knowing all the facts we could not make a judgment, for the illness could still serve by giving the personality a sense of security, being kept on hand as an ever-present emergency device in case the new unifying principles should fail.

x523

Unifying principles are groups of actions about which the whole personality forms itself at any given time. These may change and do change in a relatively smooth fashion when action is allowed to flow unimpeded. When action is not allowed to follow the patterns of channels for its expression that have been evolved by the personality, then blockages of energy occur.

x19

These must be understood not as something apart from the personality, but as a part of the changing personality. Often, they point out the existence of inner problems. Often, they serve temporary functions, leading the personality from other more severe areas of difficulty. I am not saying here that illness is good. I am saying that it is a part of the action of which any personality is composed, and therefore, it is purposeful and cannot be considered as an alien force that attacks the individual from without.

x8

In this blog, I am describing illness as a part of action, but, as I make clear, this is not meant to imply any negation of psychological or psychic values. The nature of action, however, is important.

The personality is simultaneous action; it is composed of actions within actions. Portions of it are conscious of its awareness as a part of action, and portions try to stand aside from action. The attempt forms the ego, which is itself action.

x42

If illness were thrust upon action or upon the personality from the outside, then the individual would be at the mercy of outside agencies, but in a most basic manner, it chooses those actions which it will accept.

x48

An illness can be rejected. The habit of illness can be rejected. When action is allowed to flow freely, then neurotic rejections of action will not occur. An illness is almost always the result of another action that cannot be carried through. When the lines to the repressed action are released and the channels to it opened, such an illness will vanish. However, the thwarted actions may be one with disastrous consequences, which the illness may prevent.

Even calcium deposits are accumulations of repressed energy stored up in the body.

x41

Poor health is caused mainly by destructive mental and feeling patterns that directly affect the body because of the particular range within the electromagnetic system in which they fall. Bad health, for example, does not happen first, resulting in unhealthy thoughts. It is the other way around.

x49

Illness must be treated primarily by changing the basic mental habits. Unless this is done, the trouble will erupt again and again in different guises. The system has the ability to heal itself, however, and every opportunity should be given to allow it to do so.

x54

In most cases the stimuli [toward healing] come from deeper levels of the self, where they may be translated into terms that the personal subconscious can use. In such cases, these perceptions may find their way to the ego, appearing as inspirations or intuitive thought.

x37

Many such intuitions appear when the personality is dissociated or in a dream state. The effect of any thought is quite precise and definite and set into motion because of the nature of its own electromagnetic identity. The physical body operates within certain electromagnetic patterns and is adversely affected by others. These effects change the actual molecular structure of the cells, for better or worse, and because of the laws of attraction, habitual patterns will operate. A destructive thought, then, is dangerous not only to the present state of the organism but is also dangerous in terms of the ‘future.’

x64

Therapeutic dreams — have the ability to cure the body. I’ll explain how such dreams act upon the physical system.

We have not spoken about the inner senses in some time. By now, my blog readers, should realize that they have an electromagnetic reality also and that the mental enzymes act as sparks, setting off inner reactions. In the dream state, these reactions are easily triggered. This is the result of the lowering of egotistical guards, for the ego sets up controls that act as resistances to various inner channels [during the waking state].

x5

A destructive attitude of mind has been changed overnight in dream state to a constructive situation in many instances, and the whole electromagnetic balance has been changed. In such case, negative ions form an electrical framework in which healing is possible. Such healing dreams come most often when the self feels a sense of desperation and automatically opens up channels to deeper layers or personality.

x35

Often we find an almost instant regeneration, a seemingly instant cure, a point from which the organism almost miraculously begins to improve. The same happens in less startling cases where, for example, a merely annoying health condition suddenly disappears.

x512

Through self-suggestion, these therapeutic dreams can be brought about with practice. The suggestion (being action) has its own electromagnetic effect and already begins to set certain healing processes into action, while sparking the formation of others.

x17

Such inner therapeutics may occur at various other levels of consciousness, where they may be sparked by exterior stimuli of an aesthetic or pleasing nature. Other exterior conditions also have an effect. To involve oneself in large groups, for example, is often beneficial not simply to take attention away from the self for a change, but because of the larger range of electromagnetic ranges readily available.

x34

The overall health of the individual is important, as it is the delicate balance of electromagnetic properties. When the organism is set deeply in destructive patterns, then this is sometimes felt in the dream state, so that destructive dreams then add to the entire situation. For this reason, the use of self-suggestion in bringing about constructive dreams is of great benefit.

In the dream one’s ability is as much a part of oneself as breath and can’t be turned off and on at will. There many aspects or reincarnational data in the dream, all reinforcing healthy elements.

REM Sleep, Dreams and Chemical Connections

The reality of dreams can be investigated only through direct contact, REM sleep or no REM sleep, our dreams exist constantly beneath consciousness, even in the waking state. The personality is constantly affected by them. It is impossible to deprive a person of dreams even though we deprive him or her of sleep [as in certain dream laboratory experiments]. This function will be carried on subconsciously. So your best bet is make sure you have the right mattress sizes for your bed and get as much sleep as possible. If dreams will occur even subconsciously, then there’s no point depriving yourself a good night’s sleep.

Having the right mattress size is important for a good night’s sleep, and if you don’t have the correct one, it may be time for you to buy a new mattress. However, mattresses can be expensive and your current circumstance may mean that you can’t buy a new one at the moment. That’s why you should consider looking for mattress toppers in the meantime. Mattress toppers can do wonders for an old mattress and can help you to get a better night’s sleep until the time comes for you to invest in a newer, better-sized mattress for your bed. There are many other things that you can do to help you have a deep sleep. Another way to make sure you get enough sleep is to have the right bedroom furniture, so take a look at this bedroom furniture sale.

y1

The eye movements noted in the beginning of REM sleep are only indications of dream activity that is closely connected with the physical layers of the self. These periods mark not the onset of dreams but the return of the personality from deeper layers of dream awareness to more surface ones. The self is actually returning to more surface levels to check upon physical environment. There is a transference of main energy in deeper dream states from physical to mental concentration.

y2

Quite simply, the self travels to areas of reality that are far divorced from the physical areas of mobility. The muscles are lax then because physical activity is not required. The energy that is not being expended physically is used to sustain mental actions. The chemical excesses built up in the waking state are automatically changed as they are drained off, into electrical energy which also helps to form and sustain dream images.

y13

Our scientists would learn more about the nature of dreams if they would train themselves in dream recall. Again, the very attempt to deprive an individual of sleep will automatically set into mechanism subconscious dream activity. The tampering will then change the conditions. The direct experience of the developing dream is what we should be concerned with.

y9

This could be studied if proper suggestions were given to an individual that he or she would awaken at the exact point of a dream’s end. The dream state and conditions could also be studied legitimately using hypnosis. Here, we are working with the mind itself and merely suggesting that it operate in a certain fashion. We are not tampering with the mechanics of its operation and automatically altering the conditions.

y288

Using hypnosis, we can get good dream recall with a good operator. We can suggest ordinary sleep and dreaming and then suggest that without awakening, the subject give a verbal description of his or her dream as he or she experiences them. Another alternative is to suggest that the subject under hypnosis repeats the dreams of the night before. If this is something you’re looking to get into then you can always give it a try at home before committing yourself. Try out, https://assuredmind.com/, it’s a handy resource and it’s already seen great improvements from clients using the sites downloadable products.

y12

Using these methods, the dreams of the mentally ill could also be studied if the affliction was not too serve. The dreams of children could be investigated in this way and compared with those of adults. Children dream vividly and more often. They return more frequently, however, to periods of near wakefulness in order to check their physical environment, since they are not as sure of it as adults are. In deep periods of sleep, children range further away, as far as dream activities are concerned.

y18

The ego allows them more freedom. For this reason, they also have more telepathic and clairvoyant dreams than adults. They also have greater psychic energy; that is, they are able to draw upon energy more easily. Because of the intenseness of their waking experience, the chemical excesses build up at a faster rate. Therefore, children have more of this ‘chemical propellant’ to use in dream formation. They are also more conscious of their dreams.

y8

I have said in previous blogs that any action changes that which acts and that which is acted upon; and so in the sort of experiments that are currently being carried on to study dreams, the acts of the investigators are changing the conditions in such a way that it is easy for them to find what they are looking for. The investigator himself or herself, through his or her actions, inadvertently brings about those results for which he or she looks. The particular experiment may seem, then, to suggest conditions which are by no means general, but may appear to be. Under hypnosis a subject is not as much on guard, as is the subject of an experiment who knows in advance that he or she will be awakened by experimenters, that electrodes will be attached to his or her skull and that laboratory conditions are substituted for his or her nightly environment.

y35

It is impossible to study dreams when an attempt is made to isolate the dreamer from his own personality, to treat dreams as if they were physical or mechanical. The only laboratory for a study of dreams is the laboratory of the personality.

y17

Though each person progresses differently, generally speaking, the more advanced dream work follows the earlier stages of simple recall, to more frequent self-knowledge within the dream state and from there to manipulation of dream images and projection. The following blogs deal, then, with our experiences with different kinds of dreams and their effect on daily life. Later blogs will be concerned with the expansion of consciousness that results from the earlier experiments.

y36

My Dreaming Self

My dreaming self

Looked in the window

And saw me on the bed.

Moonlight filled

My sleeping skull.

I lay nude and still.

My dreaming self

Came in

And walked about.

I felt as if doorknobs turned,

Opening rooms up

In my head.

a2

My dreaming self

Had eyes like keys

That glinted in the dark.

There was no closet

Within my bones

They could not unlock.

c28

My dreaming self

Walked through

The framework of my soul.

He or she switched lights on as he or she passed.

Outside the night

Was dark and cold.

t4

My dreaming self

Lay on the bed.

I stood aside with awe.

“Why, both of us are one,” I said.

He or she said, “I thought you knew.”

Dream Images and Dreams As Actions

I would like to discuss in relation to the action. We mentioned in earlier blogs that all action does not necessarily involve motion that is apparent as such to us. To one extent or another, all actions are unfoldings. The action of dreaming itself is partially a physical phenomenon. There is, then, the outside activities that make dreaming possible, the action that is dreaming. Dreaming is amazing and can be quite complex, if you are having trouble sleeping then you may want to try changing your mattress, changing your wallpaper to a darker color, or even check out some sleeping tips. This post from Vision-Bedding has great sleep tip ideas to help you rest and get a good night’s sleep. This will enable you to dream better dreams too as you will be more relaxed.

z5

The there are the endless varieties of actions within the dream which is, in itself, a continuing act. The images within a dream also act. They move, speak, walk, run. There is, at times, a dream within a dream where the dreamer dreams that he or she dreams. Here, of course, the dimensions of action are more diverse.

z27

Many of these actions performed by dream images are muscular ones, physical manipulations. But many of these actions are also mental manipulations or esthetic realizations and even aesthetic performances. These dream images are not one-dimensional cardboard figures by any means. Their mobility, in terms of perspectives and within space, is far greater than our own.

z37

We perceive but a small portion of these images which we have ourselves created. We cannot bring them back into the limited perspectives of our present physical field and are left with but glimpses and flimsy glimmerings of images that are as actual, vivid and more mobile than normal physical ones.

z29

I have said before in previous blogs that the dream world is composed of molecular structure, and that it is a continuing reality, even though our own awareness of it is usually limited to the hours of our own sleep. There is a give-and-take here. For if we give the dream world much of its energy, much of our own energy is derived from it.

z4

Nor is the dream world a shadow image of our own. It carries on according to the possibilities inherent within it, as we carry on according to the possibilities in the physical system. In sleeping, however, we focus our awareness in altered form into another world that is every bit as valid as our physical one. Only a small amount of energy is focused into the physical system during sleep, enough simply to maintain the body within the environment. However, if a person suffers from a sleeping disorder such as narcolepsy, this may be different. While people may be looking for a treatment for narcolepsy, the dreams they have are vivid and strong.

z2

In many respects, actions within the dream world are more direct than our own. It is because we remember only vague glimmerings and disconnected episodes that dreams appear often chaotic or meaningless, particularly to the ego which censors much of the information that the subconscious retains. For most people, this censoring process is valuable, since it prevents the personality from being snowed under by data that it is not equipped to handle. The ability to retain experience gained within other fields is the trend of further developments. Nevertheless, every man and woman intuitively knows his and her involvement here.

z28

Some dream events are more vivid than waking ones. It is only when the personality passes out of the dream experience that it may seem unreal in retrospect. For [upon waking] again, the focus of energy and attention is in the physical universe. Reality, then, is a result of focus of energy and attention.

z3

I used the term, pass out of the dream world purposely, for here we see a mobility of action easily and often accomplished — a passing in and out that involves an action without movement in space. The dreamer has, at his or her fingertips, a memory of his or her ‘previous’ dream experiences and carries within him or her the many inner purposes which are behind his or her dream actions. On leaving the dream state, he or she becomes more aware of the ego and creates, then, those activities that are meaningful to it. As mentioned earlier, however, dream symbols have meaning to all portions of the personality.

z35

The dream world has a molecular construction, but this construction takes up no space as we know it. The dream world consists of depths and dimensions, expansions and contractions that are more clearly related, perhaps, to ideals that have no need for the particular kind of structure with which we are familiar. The intuitions and certain other inner abilities have so much more freedom here that it is unnecessary for molecules to be used in any imprisoning form. Action in the dream world is more fluid. The images appear and disappear much more quickly because value fulfillment is allowed greater reign.

z1

The slower physical manifestation of growth that occurs within the physical system involves long-term patterns filled by atoms and molecules which are, to some extent, then imprisoned within the constructions. In the dream world, the slower physical growth process is replaced by psychic and mental value fulfillment which does not necessitate any long-range imprisonment of molecules within a pattern. This involves a quickening of experience by the sort of time necessities inherent within the physical universe. Action is allowed greater freedom.

z26

This is not to say that structure does not exist within the dream world, for structures of a mental and psychic nature do exist. But structure is not dependent upon matter, and the motion of the molecules is more spontaneous. An almost unbelievable depth of experience is possible within what would seem to us a fraction of a moment.

z34

One of the closet glimpses we can get of pure action is action as it is involved with the dream world and in this mobility as the personality passes into and out of the dream field. Within the physical world, we deal with the transformation of action into physical manipulations — but this involves only a small portion of the nature of action, and it is my purpose to familiarize you with action as it exists, more or less, in pure form. In this way, you will be able to perceive the ways in which it is translated into other fields of actuality that do not involve matter as we know it.

z33

Within the reality of the dream world, fulfillment and dependence, then, are not dependent upon permanence in physical terms. Bursts of developments are possible that have matured in perspectives that are not bound up in time.

These developments are the result of actions that occur in many perspectives at once and not developments that happen as within the physical system through a seeming series of moments. Basically, even the physical universe itself is so constructed, but for all practical purposes, as far as perception and experience is concerned, time and physical growth apply. As a result, the ego portion of personality is, to a large extent, dependent for its maturity and development upon the amount of time that the physical image has spent within the system.

z24

A certain portion of physical growth, in terms of a series of moments, is, therefore, necessary for value fulfillment to show itself within a physical organism. But in the dream world, ‘growth’ is a matter of value fulfillment which is achieved through perspectives of action — through traveling within any given action, and following it and changing with it.

z6

Now, we experience action as if were moving along a single line, each dot on it representing a moment of our time. But at any of these ‘points,’ action moves out in all directions. From the standpoint of that moment-point, we could imagine action forming an imaginary circle with the point as apex. But this happens at the point of every moment. There is no particular boundary to the circle. It widens outward indefinitely. Now, in the dream world, and in all such systems, development is achieved not by travelling our single line, but by delving into that point that we call a moment. Basically the physical universe is at the apex of such a system itself.

z43

“In Midnight Thickets”

In midnight thickets

Dreamers plunge,

While the moon

Shines calmly on.

The town is sleeping,

Bodies lie

Neat and empty

Side by side.

z23

But every self

Sneaks out alone,

In darkness with

No images on,

And travel freely,

All alert,

Roads unlisted

On a map.

z31

No man or woman can find

Where he or she have been,

Or follow in flesh

Where the self tread,

Or keep the self in

Though doors are closed,

For the self moves through

Wood and stone.

z8

No man or woman can find

The post or sign

That led the self

Through such strange land.

The way is gone,

The self returns

To slip its bony

Image on.

The Electric Reality of Dream Locations

We have seen that all experiences retained in electrically coded data within the cells and that the material of the cells forms about this coded experience. We have seen that the ego begins, sparked into being by the inner self, greatly influenced by heredity and physical environment; and that this ego, as it continues to exist, builds up an electrical reality of its own and forms its experiences into the coded data within the cells.

d71

At any given ‘point,’ the ego is complete within electrical reality as it is psychologically complete within the physical universe. This includes the retention of its dreams as well as the retention of purely physical data.

The electrical system is composed of electricity that is far different from our idea of it. Electricity, as we perceive it, is merely an echo emanation or a sort of shadow image of these infinite varieties of pulsation which give actuality to many phenomena with which we are familiar, but which do not appear as tangible objects within the physical field.

d67

This electrical system is vastly dense. This is a denseness that does not take up space, a denseness caused by an infinity of electrical fields of varying ranges of intensity. Not only are no two of these electrical fields identical, but there are no identical impulses within them.

d52

The gradations of intensities are so minute that it would be impossible to measure them, and yet each field contains in coded form the actual living reality of endless egos; contains what we would call the past, present, and future of unnumbered universes; contains the coded data of any and every consciousness that has been or will be, in any universe; those that have appeared to vanish, and those which, seemingly, do not yet exist.

d21

This density is extremely important, for it is a density of intensities. And it is the infinite variety and gradations of intensity that makes all identities possible and all gestalts, all identities in terms of personalities and fields and universes. It is this density, with this infinite variety of intensity, which allows for both identity and change.

d74

The electricity that is perceivable within our system is merely a projection of a vast electrical system that we cannot perceive. So far, scientists have been able to study electricity only by observing the projections of it that are perceivable within their terms of reference. As their physical instruments become more sophisticated, they will be able to glimpse more of this reality, but since they will not be able to explain it within their known system of references, many curious and distorted explanations of reported phenomena will be given.

d34

Yet the inner self offers so many clues. It operates outside of physical references. It is, of itself, free of the distorted effects peculiar to the physical system. A study of dreams, for example, would make many of these points clear, yet many scientists consider such work beneath them.

d75

Why has no one suspected that dream locations have not only a psychological reality but a definite actuality? A study of dream locations is most important. Dream locations are composed of electrical mass, density and intensity. Here is another point:  Definite work may be done in a dream, but the physical arms and legs are not tired. This would seem contrary to our known laws, but no one has looked into this.

d55

It is most difficult to even hint at the myriad complexity and dimension of the electrical actuality as it exists. When we consider that each of our own thoughts is composed of a unique intensity of impulse, shared by nothing else; that the same may be said for every dream we will have in our lifetime; and that all our experiences is gathered together in particular ranges of intensity, again completely unique; and that the summation of all that we are exists in one minute range or band of intensities, then we will see how difficult this is to explain.

d62

This not only applies to our physical field but also to all others. Our field is contained within its own range of intensities, a tiny band of electrical impulses a million times smaller than one note picked at random from the entire mass of musical composition that has ever been written or ever will be written. I am not going too deeply into this now because some blog readers are not ready. But because of the infinite range of intensities available, each individual has limitless intensities within which he or she can move.

d766

All motion is mental or psychological motion, and all mental or psychological motion has its electrical reality: The inner self moves by moving through intensities. Each new experience opens up a new pulsation intensity. To move through intensities within the electrical system gives the result, in the physical field, of moving through time. We will also discuss this in later blogs, in connection with so-called astral travel.

Dreams and The Crucifixion, Creativity and Inspiration

I mentioned the Crucifixion once in a past blog, saying that it was an actuality and a reality, although it did not take place in our time. It took place where time is not as we know it, in the same sort of time in which a dream takes place. Its reality was felt by generations and was reacted to. Not being a physical reality, it influenced the world of physical matter in a way that no purely physical reality ever could.

c2

The Crucifixion was one of the gigantic realities that transformed and enriched both the universe of dreams and the universe of matter, and it originated in the world of dreams. It was a main contribution of that field to our own and could be compared physically to an emergence of a new planet within the physical universe.

c12

Many concepts, advancements and practical inventions simply wait in abeyance in the world of dreams until some man or woman accepts them as possibilities within his or her frame of reality. Imagination is waking man’s and woman’s connection with the world of dreams.

c7

Imagination often restates dream data and applies it to particular circumstances or problems within  the physical system. Its effects may appear within matter, but it is of itself not physical. Often the dream world possess concepts which will one day completely transform the history of our field, but a denial of such concepts as actualities or possibilities within reality hold these back and put off breakthroughs that are sorely needed.

c24

Such developments would mean the releasing of added energy into our field. Ideas and concepts are non-physical actualities that attract unaligned energy, direct and concentrate it. The dream world exists more closely in that spacious present of which the inner self is so aware. It is not as involved with camouflage.

c22

It might be said, then, that in many ways the dream universe depends upon us to give it expression, in the same manner that we also depend upon it to find expression.

15

The impact of any dream has physical, chemical, electromagnetic, psychological and psychic repercussions that are actual and continuing. The type of dream or the types of dreams experienced by any given individual are determined by many different factors. I am speaking now of the dream experience as it occurs and not of the remnant of it that his or her ego allows him or her to recall.

c13

As an individual creates his or her physical image and environment according to his or her abilities and defects, and in line with his expectations and inner needs, so does he or she create his or her dreams; and these interact with the outer environment.

c16

However, with ego at rest in sleep, the individuals often allows communications and dream constructions through — past the ego barrier. For example, if his or her present expectations are faulty, when the ego rests, he or she may recreate a time when expectations were high. The resulting dream will partially break the circle of poor expectations with their shoddy physical constructions and start such an individual along a constructive path. In other words, a dream may begin to transform the physical environment through lifting inner expectation.

 

The Nature of The Dream World and Animal Dreams

The dream world is, then, a natural byproduct of the relationship between the inner self and the physical being — not a reflection, but a byproduct — involving not only a chemical reaction, but also the transformation of energy from one state to another.

1266

In some respects, all planes or fields of existence are byproducts of others. For example, without the peculiar spark set off through the interrelationship between the inner self and the physical being, the dream world would not exist. But conversely, the dream world is a necessity for the continued survival of the physical individual.

17

This point is extremely important. As we know, animals dream. What we do not know is that all consciousness dreams. Atoms and molecules have consciousness, and this minute consciousness forms its own dream even as, on the other hand, it forms its own physical image. As in the material world, atoms combine for their own benefit into more complicated structures, so do they combine to form such gestalts in the dream world.

143

I’ve said in past blogs the dream world has its own sort of form and permanence. It is physically oriented, though not to the degree inherent in our ordinary universe. In the same way that the physical image is built up, so is the dream image. We can refer to our previous blog discussions on the nature of matter to help us understand, but the dream world is not a formless, haphazard semi-construction.

128

It does not exist in bulk, but it does exist in form. The true complexity and importance of the dream world as an independent field of existence has not yet been fully impressed upon us. Yet, while our world and the dream world are basically independent, they exert pressures and influences one upon the other.

116

The dream world, then, is a byproduct of our own existence  [from our standpoint]. It is connected to us through chemical reactions and this leaves open the entryway of interactions. Since dreams are a byproduct of any consciousness involved with matter, then trees have their dreams. All physical matter, being formed about individualized units of consciousness of varying degrees, also participates in the involuntary construction of the dream world.

19

Electric Reality of Dreams Moment Points

As there is in actuality no beginning or end to a dream, so there is no beginning or end to any reality. A dream does not then begin or end; only our awareness of a dream begins and ends. We come into awareness of a dream, and we leave it, but in our terms of time, the dreams that we seem to dream tonight have been long in existence. They seem to begin tonight because we are aware of them tonight.

We do create our own dreams. Nevertheless, we do not create them during a specific point in time. The beginnings of dreams reach back into ‘past’ lives of which we are not aware and beyond even this; the origins are part of a heritage that was before our planet existed.

For every consciousness existed simultaneously and in essence, even before what we may call the beginnings of our world. And what we are yet to be existed then and still exists now — and not as some still unfilled possibility but in actuality.

m7

What we will be, we are now, not in some misty half-real form but in a most real sense. We simply are not aware of these selves on a conscious level any more than we are aware of ‘past’ lives. But each of us creates a dream world of validity, actuality, durability and self-determination, in the same way that the entity projects the reality of its various personalities. As there is usually no contact between the entity and the ordinary conscious ego, there is usually no contact on a conscious level between the self who dreams and the dream world which has its own independent existence.

m22

And in the same way that the dream world has no beginning or end, neither does the physical universe with which we are familiar. No energy can be withdrawn, and this includes the energy used in the continuous subconscious construction of the dream world. We continually create it — have always created it. It is the product of our own existence, and yet you can neither consciously call it into existence nor destroy it.

The Ego and Dream Recall

The ego skims the topmost surface of reality and awareness. This is not the result of any inherent egotistical quality. It is true that the ego’s responsibility is with the relationship between the self and the physical environment. It must necessarily focus within the confines of physical reality. Nevertheless, it is fully capable of perceiving far more than Western man and woman allows it to perceive. Fear, ignorance, and superstition limit its potentials and, therefore, limit even its effectiveness within the physical universe.

t13

The ego itself cannot directly experience certain intuitions and psychological experiences, but it can experience them insofar as it can become aware of them on an intellectual basis. When training forces the ego to become too rigid and to limit its perceptions of other realities, then the intuitions will not be accepted by the ego because intuitional experience will not fit into the framework of reality that it accepts as valid.

t16

The ego in that case will therefore fight against what it then considers an unknown threat to survival. Struggles are initiated then that are entirely unnecessary. We want to bring intuitional comprehension to a point where the ego will accept it. In our dream experiments, this is one of the purposes we hope to achieve. The ego is not equipped to delve directly into nonphysical realities, but if it is trained to be flexible, it will accept such knowledge from other wider horizons of the self.

t34

And the ego must have its feet upon solid earth. It is naked and out of its element outside of the normal environment of physical existence. To some extent, its distrust of the dream experience is necessary for the overall balance of the personality. Physical reality is, after all, a rock to which the ego must cling; from it, the ego achieves its prestige and reason for existence. This provides necessary balance and control, and results in the sturdy anchorage of the personality in the environment in which is must survive. We have here one of the main reasons why we must request the subconscious to enable us to recall dreams. The ego would see no reason for such a memory and on general principles attempts to repress them.

t12

Again, however, this excellent balance and these fine controls exist. The ego will accept knowledge derived from the dream state as a man and woman might accept a message from a distant land in which he or she does not care to dwell and whose environment would both mystify and astonish him or her.

t9

In our dream experiments, then, we will allow you to bring such messages to the ego. We will attempt to map this exotic country in such a way that the ego can understand what is there in terms of resources that can be used for its own benefit.

“What’s the purpose of the whole study exactly?” You might ask.

t17

We will be involved with a study of the characteristics of the dream world in general and attempt to isolate it as a separate reality for the purposes of examination. Then we shall regard it in its relation to physical reality, using comparisons and dissimilarities.

This will then allow us to proceed into the relationship between the waking and sleeping personality and discover the many ways in which the personality’s aims and goals are not only reflected but sometimes achieved in and through the dream condition.

t54

Usually the dream state is considered from a negative standpoint and compared unfavorably with the waking condition. Emphasis is laid upon those conditions present in the waking state but absent from the dreaming experience. We shall consider those aspects of consciousness which are present in the dream environment and absent in the physical one. No study of human personality can pretend to be thorough that does not take the importance of dream reality into consideration.

t6

In some discussions we will state the ways in which conscious goals can be achieved with the help of the dreaming self. All of this material will be reinforced with experiments that, I hope, you will conduct yourselves.

t14

It is amazing how man and woman regrets the hours spent in sleep. He and she does not realize how hard he or she works when the ego is unaware. We hope to make this clear. We hope to let you catch yourselves in the act of doing so. You will realize how productive dream experiences are and the ways in which they are woven into the tapestry of your entire experience.

t4

As mentioned previously, we will also deal with the nature of space, time and distance, as they appear in the dream environment. Some of our experiments along these lines will be most illuminating. Here the ego cannot go, but it can benefit from the information, and perhaps in time, even a shadow of the ego may pass through that strange land and feel in some small way at home.

t5

Some methods, to be given in later blogs, allow you to come awake while dreaming, to take our conscious selves into the dream state, manipulate it and have deliberate out-of-body experiences while sleeping. Learning to manipulate in two levels of reality at once, to be aware both in waking and dream states. Giving us the general nature of dream reality and our place in it.

Dream Recall

Suggestions will allow us to awaken ourselves as soon as a dream is completed.

e2

The dream will then be fresh. If you use a recorder app easily at hand, then you can speak your dream with less effort than is required to write it down. Of course records must be kept. The simplest part of this experiment will involve the use of suggestion to awaken yourself at the completion of each dream. Of course there may be ways to also improve the quality of your sleep which could alter how deeply you dream. Deeper and less disturbed sleep could make for more vivid dreams, potentially changing your mattress to somethings similar to one of the Best mattress 2022 or a more high-quality mattress than your current one could have a positive impact. Consuming certain foods such as cheese and kiwi before sleep could also improve your dream quality. If you, or someone you know, snores at night, you may wish to invest in something like nasal strips (https://serp.co/best/nasal-strips/ has a list of some of the options out there) to help the snorer in your life and, crucially, those around them, get some restful, healthy, sleep.

The number of remembered dreams should be much higher than our present system allows. I suggest that the first recalled dream from other evenings, and that the second recalled dream from any one evening be compared with the second dream from other evenings, and so forth.

e11

This should prove highly interesting, and if such experiments are carried on consistently over a period of years, then the results could lead to excellent evidence for the various layers of the subconscious and inner self, of which I have spoken in past blogs.

Particular notice should also be taken of characters and settings and the approximate period of history in which the dream action occurs. If the dream seems to happen in no specific location and in no particular time, then these facts should also be noted.

e15

Unknown characters within the dream action, persons unknown to us in daily life, should be given careful attention also, and the roles which they play within the dream drama. The primary colors should be noted. It goes without saying now that all dream events should be checked against physical reality so that any clairvoyant elements are clearly checked and recorded.

There are many ways in which you can approach these newer dream experiments. You may, if you prefer, begin by suggesting that you will waken after each of the first five dreams. If possible, you want to get the dreams in order here.

e18

Now, there is something else to be considered. The very self-suggestions that will enable us to recall dreams will also change their nature to some extent. This is all right, and the effect will be minimized when the newness has worn off. Again, we want the dreams in the sequence in which they occur. If you do not want to wake up after each dream of the evening, then the suggestion should always include ‘I will recall the first three dreams, or the first five dreams, or whatever.’

e5

You may try two different wordings for a start, and now I am speaking of precise wording. The first ‘I will wake up after each of my first five dreams and record each one immediately.’ The second alternative wording would be the same as the one I have just given, but the ‘wake up’ would be omitted. That is, it is possible for us to record the dreams, speaking into the microphone app without awakening in our terms.

This is not only possible but by far the most convenient. You should try both methods and discover which one works the best for you. If at all possible, the recorder app should be in the bedroom. It is the immediate dream recall you are after. We want you to record the dream at the instant of awakening or at the instant that the dream is about to dissolve.

e17

The time involved in going from one room to another could result in the loss of dream content and vividness. The very motor responses demanded on the part of the body and the extra arousal tendency would force you to lose a good deal of valid material. I would prefer that you work less, if necessary, using the recorder app in the bedroom, than work more intensively leaving the recorder app in another room.

It is the dream you are after, the dream experience in all the vividness that you can capture, and if you are going to get a watered-down version in any case, then you may as well continue with our present method (of writing them down in the morning) and save our sleep.

e8

With the method I have just given you, you will be able to capture as much of the whole dream experience as any investigators manage to do (in dream-labs) when the awakening is done by a mechanical device or by another person. You will also be gaining excellent discipline and training over your own states of consciousness and this, in itself, will be an important yardstick of progress.

e55

Now, mankind and womankind use but a portion of their capabilities. When you are well along in these experiments, you will find that you handle them very well, with no draining of energies. Your sleeping hours are already productive. We shall also use them to give you training in the utilization of various stages of consciousness, and you can support that by getting the right mattress by checking out mattress reviews to find the best one. Added to this, the training will give you valuable insight into the nature of dreams in general, the stages of the subconscious, and the inner life of the personality when it is dissociated from its physical environment to some considerable extent.

e10

Much later in future blogs, there will be other suggestions for my blog readers in which I will direct your sleeping self to perform certain activities, visit certain locations and bring back information. This is obviously still very much in the future, but it is well within the abilities of the inner self.

e9

There are several kinds of time that will appear within our dreams, and we must sort these out carefully. While sleeping in our present time, we may have a dream that concerns our past, with events that we know to have occurred years ago. Nevertheless, we may experience these events [ within the dream] as happening within the present.

e53

The present within which we seem to experience the dream is not, however, the present in physical time — the present in which our body lies upon the bed. There is a fine distinction here and one that we will learn through experience as we go on, so I will not discuss it now.

It should be obvious also that within our dreams a special location that belongs to the present physical time can be experienced in the past of in the future within the dream framework, and again, there is much more here also than meets the eyes; so watch out so that you can catch these developments.

e13

I am particularly interested in these experiments, and as a preliminary for them, we will have you work with suggestion alone before you attempt to begin with your recordings. We shall have you working well in your sleep, for the dream will not be captured in a laboratory — by scientists who will not look into their own dreams.

e7

The nature of reality can be approached only by an investigation of it is directly experienced in all levels of awareness: reality as it appears under dream conditions, under other conditions of dissociation and as it appears in the waking state. Even studies dealing with the conscious state are usually superficial, dealing only with ‘upper’ levels of egotistical awareness.

e16

All layers of the personality are ‘conscious.’ They simply operate like compartments, so that often one portion of the self is not aware of other portions. As a rule, when we are awake we do not know our sleeping self; we know our neighbor far better, so our sleeping self seems mysterious indeed. When we are awake, we cannot find the dream locations that have been so familiar to us only the night before.

In our sleep, we may have greeted friends who are strangers to our waking self. But consider the other side of the coin. For when we are asleep, we usually cannot find the street upon which we live our waking hours, and when we are asleep, we do not know our waking self. The sleeping self is our identity.

e12

There are connections between these two conditions, and there are definite realities that exist in both states, and these are what we are looking for. Only by finding these can we discover the nature of human personality and the nature of reality within which it operates.

e54

We have also spoken of the dream as a drama, and we must discover the various levels within which these dramas take place. We will also find that the various levels of the ‘subconscious’ will yield their own characteristics, and as our your records grow, this will become apparent. It is necessary, then that dreams are recorded in consecutive order whenever possible.

e41

  1. Dream location that represent places familiar to you in your present daily life.
  2. Dream locations that represent places (such as foreign countries) to which you have never really traveled.
  3. Dream locations that represent definite places that appear as they were in the past. If you dream of your childhood home as it was, not as it is now, then the location would belong in this category.
  4. Dream locations that represent places that no longer exist physically.
  5. Strange, completely unfamiliar, dream locations.
  6. Indistinct dream locations.
  7. Strange dream locations to which you keep returning.

I suggest that we pay particular attention to unfamiliar dream places.

e24

People who have always remembered many of their dreams may be less impressed with the idea of recording dream activities. But for those who use cannabis products (available on websites such as Vibes CBD) to fall asleep or who do not usually recall their dreams, sleep would mean oblivion, and dream recall would be an extremely fascinating endeavor. Even those with good dream-memories will find that persistent dream recall experiments are invaluable. As we discovered, it is the effort required to remember dreams, and the resulting stretching of consciousness that finally opens up dream reality.

e51

Besides exploring our own dreams and our dreaming selves, there is also the adventure of discovering the greater dimension in which all dreams take place.

e19

But if all this is so important, why can’t we do it more easily and naturally? Why do we need experiments? The way we use the ego and its idea of reality stand in our way.

A Million Trained Dreamers

Even when we admit the inspirational and supportive nature of dreams, even when we learn to recall dreams and apply them to daily life, we still only begin to glimpse their multidimensional reality. Dream interpretation is important to our three-dimensional mentalities, for example. We believe in utilization; if dreams can’t be useful, then what good are they? Dreams can give us consistent, valid information about our motives, needs and decisions. They can be utilized as very practical aids to daily life. But this is only a portion of any real exploration of dream reality.

u23

Dream investigation or manipulation as an aesthetic pursuit — as an art, embarked upon for its own sake — this is something else again and is sometimes because of its solitary nature. Yet the fact remains that there is a dream reality with a “structure,” “landscape” and images that appear to be made of matter — but matter that obeys different rules than those with which we are familiar.

u17

Dreams are not just psychological events. There is a dimension of reality (an “objective” dimension, if you prefer) in which all dream events happen. There are rules:  I call them root-assumptions that operate in all realities, our own included. We have to learn what root-assumptions govern dream reality. I know that we can on occasion manipulate dream events; my blogs readers and I do it frequently. If we follow certain “rules” given to us, we will get more or less predictable results in the dream state — an indication that an “objective” dream dimension exists quite independently of us or our dreams, a dream dimension in which my dreams and yours have their being.

u22

Just reading such ideas will never convince you of their validity. All true knowledge must be directly experienced; therefore I will include throughout my blogs instructions and suggestions for dream recall, investigation and manipulation.

If we ever hope to “map” the dreamscape, we need a million trained dreamers: a million individuals trained to use dreams as vehicles and then, courageously, to leave them to explore the environment in which they find themselves. We need people able to distinguish between the environment-within-the-dream and the far vaster environment (or atmosphere or medium) in which these dream-places exist.

u16

Records of individual dreams are not enough, nor are studies of the physiological effects of dreaming. Most psychologists would not admit the existence of a definite structured universe in which dream acts, rather than physical acts, happen. Therefore, at this time, they will not consider dreams in this larger context. We will understand ourselves as dreamers only if we are also aware of the larger environment in which dreams take place, that we interact in the dream state as we do in the waking one and that we form mass dream events as we form physical events on a mass basis.

u31

Because we must start somewhere, however, we will begin with dream recall and those practical aspects of dream investigation that let us use our dreams in daily life. For one thing, I use this method to lead my blog readers into dream reality. This is a gradual process that gently leads the ego into largely unfamiliar territory and at the same time encourages flexibility of consciousness.

u25

My next few blogs will include the general nature of dream reality, dream investigation and recall and will be followed by a series of blogs on various kinds of dreams captured by some of my blog readers as we check out some of my theories, as far as we are able. Later, we will journey further into the inner dimension in which dreams take place.

u24

The whole idea of deliberate dream recall is not new. The methods are not new. I’ll paraphrase them here: Simply buy a notebook to be used exclusively for dreams. Keep it with a pencil or pen by your bed. Before you fall to sleep at night, give yourself this suggestion: “I can remember my dreams and write them down in the morning.”

u2

You will find that your dreams actually are in your mind when you awaken. Write them down at once, before getting out of bed. If you have a tendency to scribble, then use loose sheets of paper and later transcribe them in the notebook. Don’t worry about neatness, but concentrate on capturing as much of the dream content as possible. If you recall several dreams, jot down a quick sentence about each, then add the details. Leave space after each entry for future notes.

u12

This method is really easy and workable — but it can be sabotaged. One of my blog reader, had great difficulty remembering her dreams until I discovered that she was using a clock radio to awaken her in the morning and the news happened to be on. The dreams must be recalled before you become mentally involved with the world’s activities.

If you have remembered only unpleasant dreams in the past, you may have built up a block against recalling any dreams at all.

u7

The unseen self is not a dungeon of repressed ideas and feelings, dangerous to behold, but the fountainhead of individual existence, upon which our present physical survival is dependent. Beyond this, it is our pathway to creative expression, inspiration and wisdom — a doorway to our own greater identity. This does not mean that we do not repress fears and desires beneath consciousness. It means that we must allow ourselves greater flexibility, look into ourselves, admit the fears and release the energy used in repression. As you will see in later blogs, dreams can often release such repressed material for your conscious examination.

u6

The method of dream recall just given will allow many people to remember more dreams in a month than they previously did in their entire lives. Variations will occur, however. Periods of excellent recall are sometimes followed by poorer ones, and each individual seems to have his or her own cycle of significant activity.

u32

A recorder app may also be used, of course. You must still play back the app recorder and transfer the dreams into a notebook, however, so that the records are easily accessible. This actually takes more time, but many people prefer to speak their dream recollections into a recorder app at once, rather than to write them down.

 

There is a Period of Adjustment After Leaving This Plane

Although our adjustment involves the most difficulty since our camouflage pattern is unusually rigid.

k11

The shock of birth is worse. The new personality is not entirely focused, and it must make immediate critical adjustments of the strongest nature. Death in our terms is a termination but does not involve such immediate critical manipulations. There is ‘time’ to catch up, so to speak.

a24

In a sudden death, however, this can be more upsetting to the personality involved, and since the new materialization is simultaneous, it can lead to confusion.

k4

If we will use psychological time as I have told in previous blogs, we will get immediate first-hand experience with many facets of reality which takes me pages to explain with the use of words. All entities are self-aware portions of the energy of All That Is. They are self-generating, and if we understand this, we will stop thinking in terms of beginnings and endings.

k17

The inner senses operate on all planes and under all circumstances. The outer senses vary according to plane and circumstance. The outer senses are dependable only in terms of definite system of reality for which they were constructed. Their purpose, or course, is to enable the conscious personality to recognize as valid, camouflage patterns that are only valid under certain conditions.

k13

Entities create stages upon which to act out their problems. The point is that once the play begins, the actors are so completely engrossed in their roles that they forget that they themselves wrote the play, constructed the sets or are even acting.

k14

The reason is rather apparent: If you know that a situation is ‘imaginary,’ you are not going to come to grips with it. This way, you have your actors taking the situation as it seems to be but looking about in amazement now and then to wonder how they got where they are, who constructed the sets and so forth. They do not realize that the whole thing is self-created, nor should they in the main, since the urgency to solve problems would dissolve.

k2

I’m not worried that I’m going to disturb the balance. Far from it. The fact is that the realization can, and often does, come after the play is well under way, and at this point, the camouflage action is so involved that the realization itself appears in the framework of the camouflage and is often indistinguishable from it.

k5

It goes without saying that a bird’s death is inevitable, but a cat killing a bird does not have to juggle the same sort of values with which a man or woman must be concerned. For now, suffice it to say that to kill for self-protection or food on our plane does not involve us in what we may call for the first time, I believe, karmic consequences.

w9

To kill for convenience, or for the sake of killing involves rather dire consequences, and the emotional value behind such killing is often as important as what is killed. That is, the lust for killing is also a matter that brings dire consequences, regardless of the particular living thing that is killed. This involves value judgments of a very important type, and I will not go into them in this blog.

Life is Like a Dream

In a dream, I have said in previous blogs, we can experience days while no corresponding amount of physical time passes. It seems as if we travel very far in the flicker of an eyelash. Now, condensed time is the time felt by the entity, while any of its given personalities live on a plane of physical materialization. To go into this further, many have said that life was a dream. They were true to the facts in one regard, yet far afield as far as the main issue is concerned.

a8

The life of any given individual could be legitimately compared to the dream of an entity. While the individual suffers and enjoys his or her given number of years, these years are but a flash to the entity. The entity is concerned with them in the same way that we are concerned with our dreams. As we give inner purpose and organization to our dreams, and as we obtain insight and satisfaction from them, though they involve only a portion of our life, so the entity to some extent directs and gives purpose and organization to his or her personalities. So does the entity obtain insights and satisfactions from its existing personalities, although no one of them takes up all of its attention.

a4

And as our dreams originate with us, rise from us, attain a seeming independence and have their ending with us, so do the entity’s personalities arise from him or her, attain various degrees of independence and return to him or her while never leaving him or her for an instant.

We are familiar through our reading with so-called secondary personalities. Now, this idea comes close to the relationship between the entity and its personalities. They are independent to various degrees, and they operate on various planes of existence for purposes of overall fulfillment and development.

a11

To a lesser degree, we function along lines in varying roles when we exist simultaneously as a member of a family, a community and a nation and as an artist or writer. As we attempt to use our abilities, so does the entity use its abilities, and he or she organizes his or her various personalities and, to some extent directs their activities while still allowing them what we could call free will.

Our own dreams are fragments, even as we are fragments of our entity. An unrecognized unity and organization lies within all of our dreams, beneath their diversity. And our dreams, while part of us, also exist apart.

a24

The dream world has its own reality, its own ‘time’ and its own inner organization. As the entity is only partially concerned with its personalities after setting them into motion, so we are unconcerned with this dream world after we have set it into motion. But it exists.

a5

To a different degree, it is filled with conscious semi-personalities. They are not [as a rule] as developed as we are, as we are not as developed as our entity is. That dream world experiences its own continuity. It is not aware of any break, for example, when we are waking. It does not know if we sleep or wake. It merely exists to a fairly vivid degree while we dream or sleep, and it sleeps but does not ‘die’ when we waken.

a3

The entity itself does not have to keep constant track of its personalities because each one possesses an inner self-conscious part that knows its origin. This part, for now, I will call the self-conscious beyond the subconscious. I mentioned that some part of us knows exactly how much oxygen the lungs breathe, and this is the part of which I spoke. It also receives all inner data.

a23

This portion of the personality translate inner data and sifts it through the subconscious, which is a barrier and also a threshold to the present personality. I told in previous blogs, also that the topmost layers of the subconscious contain personal memories and beneath — racial memory. The personality is not actually layered, of course, but continuing with the necessary analogy, beneath the racial memories we look out upon another dimension of reality with the face of this other self-conscious part of us.

a15

This portion is ‘turned toward’ the entity. When such abilities as telepathy are used, this function is carried on continually by this other self-conscious part of us. But as a rule, we act upon such data without the knowledge of the ordinary conscious self.

There is also a corresponding, but ‘lesser’ self-consciousness that connects our present personalities with the dream world, which is aware of its origin and communicates data from us to dream reality.

a2

Any such inner communications are basically the same in that they are picked up by the inner senses, whether the information seems telepathic or clairvoyant in our terms.

a1

The actual communication is not in words or pictures. material from the inner senses is seldom experienced in its true form. What we get is hasty twisting of channels, a rather inept and sometimes rather disastrous attempt to pick up such information with the outer senses.

The Point Self-Consciousness Enters Inert Form

My Blog readers know, now, that all form has consciousness, and so there was no point at which self-consciousness entered with the sound of trumpets, so to speak. Consciousness was inherent in the first materialization upon our plane.

w6

Self-consciousness entered in very shortly after but not what we are pleased to call human self-consciousness. I do not like to wound your egos in this manner, and I can hear you yell ‘foul,’ but there is no actual differentiation between the various kinds of consciousness.

p11

We are either conscious of self or we are not. A tree is conscious of itself as a tree. It does not consider itself as a rock. A dog knows it is not a cat. What I am trying to point out here is this supreme egotistical presumption that self-consciousness must of necessity involve humanity per se. It does not.

a3

So-called human consciousness did not suddenly appear. Our poor maligned friend, the ape, did not suddenly beat his or her hairy chest in exultation and cry, ‘I am a man or woman.’ The beginnings of human consciousness, on the other hand, began as soon as multicellular groupings began to form in field patterns of a certain complexity.

i11

While there was no specific entry point as far as human consciousness was concerned, there was a point (in our terms) where it did not seem to exist. The consciousness of being human was fully developed in the cave man and woman, of course, but the human conception was alive in the fish.

w22

We have spoken in past blogs of mental genes. These are more or less psychic blueprints for physical matter, and in these mental genes existed the pattern for human type of self-consciousness. It did not appear in constructed form for a long period.

i14

Human self-consciousness existed in psychological time, and in inner ‘time’ long before we, as a species, constructed it. I will say this as simply as possible: Human consciousness was inherent and latent from the beginning of our physical universe.

The Inner Senses

The inner senses give much stronger impressions than those given by the outer ones. We should, in the future, be able to achieve the counterparts of sight, sound, smell and touch, embellished by inner counterparts of width and existence, using the inner senses. We have trouble now with the duration of our inner visions because we are trying to transpose them according to physical time — and this is going about it in the wrong way. As I have mentioned in earlier blogs, we have at our command, even now, an inroad, a relatively accessible one, in what is termed psychological time.

i6

This is closely related to the second inner sense, and it is upon psychological time that we must try to transpose our inner visions. You can see how handicapped we are because of the difficulties involved in trying to explain inner data in terms of outer data. For instance, when I tell you that the second inner sense is like our sense of time, this does give some understanding of what psychological time is like, but we are apt to compare the two too closely.

i4

Any communications coming through the inner senses will exist in our psychological time. Psychological time operates during sleep and quiet hours of consciousness. Now, in dreams we may have the feeling of experiencing many hours or even, days. These days and hours of psychological experience are not recorded by the physical body and are outside of the physical time camouflage. If in a dream, we experience a period of three days, physically we do not age for these days.

i16

Psychological time is so a part of inner reality that even though the inner self is still connected to the body, we are, in the dream framework, free of some very important physical effects. Now, as dreams seem to involve us in duration that is independent of clock time, so can we achieve the actual experience of duration as far as our inner visions are concerned.

i2

But the minute — the physical minute — we try to transpose these visions upon the physical minute, then we lose them. Many times, in so-called daydreaming, we have lost track of clock time, and this experience of inner duration has entered in.

“What did we intend clock time to begin with? Some ask.

i21

It was invented by the ego to protect the ego, because of the mistaken conception of dual existence; that is, because man and woman felt that a predictable, conscious self did the thinking and manipulating, and an unpredictable self did the breathing and dreaming. He and she set up boundaries to protect the ‘predictable’ self from the ‘unpredictable’ self and ended up by cutting the whole self in half.

i9

Originally, psychological time allowed man and woman to live in the inner and outer worlds with relative ease, and man and woman felt much closer to their environment. In prehistoric times, mankind and womankind evolved the ego to help him and her deal with camouflage patterns that they had created. This is no contradiction, as will be explained in later blogs. He and she did the job so well that even when he or her had things well under control, he or she was not satisfied. He and she developed at a lopsided level. The inner senses led him and her into a reality he and she could not manipulate as easily as he and she could physical camouflage, and he and she feared what he and she thought of as a loss of mastery.

i15

Hypnosis can be used to better our condition. It is, after all, a method of acquainting the ego, through effects, with the abilities of the whole self of which it is a part.

When my readers reread my blogs, they will see that it must be studied carefully. One, point, however: conscious fear is usually the main hindrance as far as inner data is concerned. Therefore, a realization that theses senses belong to us and that they are quite natural, will help avoid the closing off of such data by the conscious mind.

i1

If we remember this, inner data will come through much more easily, and we will be able to control it. It is never of itself overpowering. We can train ourselves in the recognition of such data, its utilization and control. Within the framework of psychological time we can also lengthen such experiences.

i7

They are always paramount in evolutionary development, being the impetus behind the physical formations. The inner senses themselves, through the use of mental enzymes, imprint the data contained in the mental genes onto the physical camouflage material.

i5

I become impatient, though I shouldn’t, with this continued implied insistence that evolution involves merely the human species –or, rather, that all evolution  must be considered some gigantic tree with humanity as the supreme blossom.

i22

Humanity’s so-called supreme blossom seems to be the ego, which can be, at times, a poisoning blossom, indeed. There is nothing wrong with ego. The point remains, however, that man and woman became so fascinated with it that he has ignored the parts of himself or herself that make the ego possible, and he or she ignores those portions of himself or herself that gives to the ego the very powers of which he or she is so consciously proud.

The Psychological TIme

Psychological time belongs to the inner self, that is, to the mind. It is however, a connective, a portion of the inner senses which we will call, for convenience, the second inner sense. It is a natural pathway, meant to give easy access from the inner to the outer world and back again.

p9

Time to our dreaming self is much like ‘time’ to our waking inner self. The time concept in dreams may seem far different that our conception of time in the waking state when we have our eyes on the clock and are sitting alone with our thoughts. Then, I am sure, we will see the similarity between this alone sort of inner psychological time, experienced often in waking hours, and the sense of time experienced often in a dream.

I cannot say this too often — we are far more than the conscious mind, and the self which we do not admit is the portion that not only insures our own physical survival in the physical universe which it has made, but which is also the connective between ourselves and inner reality. It is only through the recognition of the inner self that the race of man and woman will ever use its potential.

p14

The outer senses will not help achieve the inner purpose that drives him or her. Unless he or she uses the inner senses, he or she may lose whatever he or she has gained.

Psychological time is a natural connective to the inner world. As we can experience days or hours within its framework in the dream state and not age for the comparable amount of physical time, so as we develop, we will be able to rest and be refreshed within psychological time even when we are awake. This will aid our mental and physical state to an amazing degree. We will discover an added vitality and a decreased need to sleep. Within any given five minutes of clock time, for example, we may find an hour of resting which is independent of clock time.

21

We can look through psychological time at clock time and even use clock time then to our greater advantage; but without the initial recognition of psychological time, clock time becomes a prison. A proper use of psychological time will not only lead us to inner reality but will prevent us from being rushed in the physical world. It provides quiet and peacefulness.

p2

From its framework we will see that clock time is as dreamlike as we once thought inner time was. We will discover that ‘inner time’ is as much a reality as we once considered outer time to be. In other words, peeping inwards and outwards at the same ‘time’ we will find that all divisions are illusion and all time is one time.

p8

 

Who do I share this image with?

What ghost haunts this house?

I smile and reach for a cup of Starbucks

And motions beyond my will begin.

My fingers move smoothly out

And lift the curving spoon.

With just the proper touch

They pick the Starbucks up.

Yet I have nothing to do with this.

Who moves the cup? Who moves?

p12

And while I speak to you, my lungs

Rise and fall behind breastbones,

Fill their secret tissue mouths

With the air that swirls in this bright room.

They breathe for me the very breath

Upon which all I an depends.

Yet I do not know how this is done.

Who is this ghost,

This other one?

Who moves the lung? Who breathes?

p5

While I sleep and lie stretched out,

Eyelids closed and pupils dark,

Who walks wide-eyed downstairs

Through the door in the cold night air,

And travels where I have never been?

Who leaves clear memories in my head

Of people I have never met?

Who takes these trips while I

 Never lift one inch from bed?

Who dreams?

p15

The mover, the breather, the dreamer

Shares with me this fond flesh.

He or she is a twin so like myself

That I cannot recognize his or her face.

He or she goes his or her way and I go mine.

We never meet head-on, and yet

I am aware of this ghost

Behind my every word or act.

Who moves? Who breathes?

Who dreams?

Parts of The Individual

Some part of the individual is aware of the most minute portions of breath; some part knows immediately of the most minute particle of oxygen and other components that enter the lungs. The thinking brain does not know. Our all-important ‘I’ does not know. In actuality, my dear friends, the all-important ‘I’ does know. We do not know the all-important ‘I’, and this is our difficulty.

d31

It is fashionable in our time to consider man and woman as the product of the brain and an isolated bit of the subconscious, with a few other odds and ends thrown in for good measure. Therefore, with such an unnatural division, it seems to man and woman that he and she does not know themselves.

He or she says, ‘I breathe, but who breathes, since consciously I cannot tell myself to breathe or not breathe? He or she says, ‘I dream. But who dreams? I cannot tell oneself to dream or not to dream.’ He or she cuts himself or herself in half and then wonders why he or she is not whole. Man and woman have admitted only those things he or she could see, smell, touch or hear; and in so doing, he or she could only appreciate half of himself or herself. And when I say half, I exaggerate; he or she is aware of only a third of himself or herself.

u12

If man or woman does not know who breathes within him or her, and if man or woman does not know who dreams within him or her, it is not because there is one self who acts in the physical universe and another who dreams and breathes. It is because he or she have buried the part of himself or herself which breathes and dreams. If these functions seem so automatic as to be performed by someone completely divorced from himself, it is because he or she have done the divorcing.

a31

The part of us who dreams is the ‘I’ as much as the part of us who operates in any other manner. The part of us who dreams is the part of us who breathes. This part of us is certainly as legitimate and necessary to us as a whole unit is, as the part who plays Pokemon or Scrabble. It would seem ludicrous to suppose that such a vital matter as breathing would be left to  subordinate, almost completely divorced, poor-relative sort of a lesser personality.

a54

As breathing is carried on in a manner that seems automatic to the conscious mind, so the important function of transforming the vitality of the universe into pattern units seems to be carried on automatically. But this transformation is not as apparent to the one part of ourselves that we are pleased to recognize, and so it seems as if this transformation is carried on by someone even more distant than our breathing and dreaming selves.

We form the world of appearances as effortlessly and unconsciously as we breathe.

d37

Because we know that we breathe, without being consciously aware of the mechanics involved, we are forced to admit that we do our own breathing. When we cross a room, we are forced to admit that we have caused oneself to do so, though consciously we have no idea of willing the muscles to move, or of stimulating one tendon or another. Yet even though we admit these things, we do not really believe them.

In our quiet unguarded moments, we still say, ‘Who breathes? Who dreams? Who moves? How much easier it would be to admit freely and whole-hearted the simple fact that we are not consciously aware of vital parts of oneself and that we are more than we think we are.

o15

Man and woman, for example, trusts himself and herself much more when he or she says ‘I will read,’ and then he or she reads, than he or she does when he or she says, ‘I will see,’ and then he sees. He remember having learned to see, and what he or she cannot consciously remember, he or she fears.

u21

The fact is that although no one taught him or she to see, he or she sees. The part of himself or herself that did ‘teach’ him or her to see still guides his or her movements, still moves the muscles of his or her eyes, still becomes conscious despite him or her when he or she sleeps, still breathes for him or her without thanks or recognition and still carries on his or her task of transforming energy from an inner reality into as outer one. Man and woman becomes trapped by his or her own artificially divided self.

d2

It is true that, as a rule, we are not aware of our whole entity. There is no reason, however, why we must be blind to the whole self of our present personality, which is part of the entity, and which can be glimpsed in terms of the breathing and dreaming ‘self’ of which I have spoken.

c5

It is convenient not to be consciously aware of each breath we take, but it is sheer stupidity to ignore the inner self which does the breathing and is aware of the mechanics involved. I have said in past blogs that the mind is a part of the inner world, but we have access to our own minds, which we ignore; and this access would lead us inevitably to truths about the outer world. Working inward, we could understand the outward more clearly.

The Physical Senses

The sense of sight, mostly concentrated in our eyes, remains fixed in a permanent position in our physical body. Without moving away from the body, the eyes see something that may be far in the distance. In the same manner, the ears hear sounds that are distant from the body. In fact, the ears ordinarily hear sounds from outside the body more readily than sounds inside the body itself. Since the ears are connected to the body and part of it, it would be logical for an open-minded observer to suppose that the ears would be well attuned to the inner sounds to a high degree. This, we know , is not the case.

u6

The ears can be trained to some degree into a sound-awareness pertaining to the body itself. And breathing, for example, can be magnified to an almost frightening degree when one concentrates upon listening to his or her own breath. But, as a rule, the ears neither listen to nor hear the inner sounds of the body.

The sense of smell also seems to leap forward. A man or woman can smell quite a stink, even though it is not right under  his or her nose. The sense of touch does not seem to leap out in this manner. Unless the hand itself presses upon a surface, then we do not feel that we have touched it. Touch usually involves contact of a direct sort. We can, of course, feel the invisible wind against our cheek, but touch involves an immediacy different from the distant perceptions of sight and smell. I am sure you realize these points yourself.

u15

The outer senses deal mainly with camouflage patterns. The inner senses deal with realities beneath camouflage and deliver inner information. These inner senses, therefore, are capable of seeing within the body, though the physical eyes cannot. As the senses of sight, sound and smell appear to reach outward, bringing data to the body from an outside observable camouflage pattern, so the inside senses seem to extend far inward, bringing inner reality data to the body. There is also a transforming process involved, much like the moment that we have spoken about in past blogs, about the creation of a painting.

The physical body is a camouflage pattern operating in a larger camouflages pattern. But the body and all camouflage patterns are also transformers of the vital inner stuff of the universe, enabling it to operate under new and various conditions.

u155

The inner senses, then, deliver data from the inner world of reality to the body. The outer senses deliver data from the outside world of camouflage to the body. However, the inner senses are aware of the body’s own physical data at all times while the outer senses are concerned with the body mainly in its relationship to camouflage environment.

The inner senses have an immediate, constant knowledge of the body in a way that the outer senses do not. The material is delivered to the body from the inner world through the inner senses. This inner data is received by the mind. The mind, being uncamouflaged, then is the receiving station for the data brought to it by the inner senses. What we have here are inner nervous and communication systems, closely resembling the outer systems with which we are familiar.

u5

I am repeating myself, but I want this to be clear. This vital data is sent to the mind by the inner senses. Any information that is important to the body’s contact with the outer camouflage is given to the brain.

The so-called subconscious is a connective between mind and brain, between the inner and outer senses. Portions of it deal with camouflage patterns, with the personal past of the present personality, with racial memory. The greater portions of it are concerned with the inner world, and as data reaches it from the inner world, so can these portions of the subconscious reach far into the inner world itself.

u14

Time and space are both camouflage patterns. The inner senses conquer time and space, but this is hardly surprising because time and space do not exist for them. There is no time and space. Therefore, nothing is conquered. The camouflage simply is not present.

I want to give more detailed information about inner realities themselves. Actually, they do not parallel the outer senses; and this will sound appalling to you, I’m afraid, simply because there is nothing to be seen, heard or touched in the manner in which we are accustomed. I don’t want to give you the idea that existence without our camouflage patterns is bland and innocuous because this is not the case. The inner senses have a strong immediacy, a delicious intensity that our outer senses lack. There is no lapse of time in perception, since there is no time.

u11

Camouflage patterns do, or course, also belong to the inner world, since they are formed from the stuff of the universe by mental enzymes, which have a chemical reaction of our plane. The reaction is necessarily a distortion. That is, any camouflage is a distortion in the sense that vitality is forced into a particular form. Mental enzymes are actually the property of the inner world, representing the conversion of vitality into camouflage data which is then interpreted by the physical senses.

u8

Imagine a man or woman looking at a tree in the near distance on an ordinary street, with intervening houses and sidewalks.

Using the inner senses, it would be as if, instead of seeing the various houses, our man or woman felt them. He or she would be sensitive to them, in other words, as we feel heat or cold without necessarily touching ice of fire.

He or she would be using the first inner sense. It involves immediate perception of a direct nature, whose intensity varies according to what is being sensed. It involves instant cognition through what I can only describe as inner vibrational touch.

u13

This sense would permit our man or woman to feel the basic sensations felt by the tree, so that instead of looking at it, his or her consciousness would expand to contain the experience of what it is to be a tree. According to his or her proficiency, he or she would feel in like manner the experience of being the grass and so forth. He or she would in no way lose consciousness of who he or she was, and he or she would perceive these experiences again, somewhat in the same manner that we perceive heat and cold.

u4

The inner senses are capable of expansion and of focus in a way unknown to the outer ones, and the inner world, of course, is a part of all realities. It is not so much that it exists simultaneously with the outer world, as that it forms the outer world and exists in it also.

u1

When we receive more information on the inner senses, we will begin using them to a much higher degree than we are now. Or course, the inner senses can be used to explore reality that does not yield to the physical senses.

 

 

Explore Places That Seem Empty

Our scientists are correct in supposing that the universe is composed of the same elements that can be found in our plane. However, the elements that they know are, of course, camouflage patterns, that may show themselves in a completely different form somewhere else.

a29

The elements — those that we now know and those we will create — are camouflage of the basic stuff or vitality which we cannot discover with our outer senses. Our scientists will find that their tools are no longer adequate. Because man and woman have such a sense of curiosity, scientists will be forced finally to use the inner senses. Otherwise they will be dealing with camouflage only and find themselves in a blind alley — not because their eyes are closed, but because they are not using the right set of eyes.

The camouflage is necessary at this stage of development — intricate, complicated, various and beyond the understanding of the outer senses, which are the preceptors of the camouflage itself, peculiarly adapted to see that will give us any evidence at all of the basic nature of life.

a12

Since very often the vitality or stuff of the universe seems as innocuous as air, then look for what we do not see. Explore places that seem empty, for they are full. Look between events. What we see clearly with the outer senses is camouflage. I am not suggesting that you take all this on faith. I am saying that what seems vacant lacks camouflage, and, therefore, if this is explored, it will yield evidence.

Effects would seem to be evidence. In correct terms, if a tree branch moves, then we take it for granted that something blows it. We know wind by its effects. No one has seen wind, but since its effects are so observable, it would be idiocy to say that it did not exist. Therefore, we will come up against the basic stuff of the universe and feel its effects, though our physical senses will not necessarily perceive it.

a39

Granted, camouflage is, in itself, an effect. If we look at the observable world we can learn something about the inner one, but only if we take into consideration the existence of camouflage distortion. There is so much to be said here, and we have so much to learn, that sometimes I have to admit that I’m appalled.

Our own experience with creativity should help out here.

a55

When we paint a picture, we are dealing with a transformation of energy and transformation of camouflage pattern. There is a brief but vital moment when we are dealing with the underlying vitality of which I have spoken.

a28

We are forced to transform this energy into another camouflage pattern because of our earthly situation. There is nothing else we can do. But for this moment, we pluck this vitality from the inner senses. Then we transform it into a somewhat different, more evocative, new camouflage pattern that is, nevertheless, more fluent, more fluid than the usual pattern, and gives greater freedom and mobility to the vitality itself. We approach a transmigration of plane.

a45

A certain distortion must be expected. The painting, however, achieves a certain freedom from camouflage, although it cannot escape it, and actually hovers between realities in a way that no thoroughly camouflaged object could do. Music and poetry also can achieve this state.

The more camouflage (physical dimensions) an art object has, the less its validity to the inner senses.

a44

Our scientists can count their elements, and while they are on the wrong track, they will discover more and more elements until they are ready to go out of their minds. And while they create instruments to deal with smaller and smaller particles, they will see smaller and smaller particles, seemingly without end. As their instruments reach further into the physical universe, they will see further and further, but they will automatically and unconsciously transform what they apparently see into the camouflage patterns with which they are familiar. They will be, and are, prisoners of their tools.

More galaxies will seemingly be discovered, more mysterious radio stars perceived, until, the scientists realize that something is wrong. Instruments designed to measure the vibrations with which scientists are familiar will be designed and re-designed. All kinds of seemingly impossible phenomena will be discovered with these instruments.

a42

The trouble is that the instruments will be designed to catch certain camouflages, and they will perform their function. They themselves transform data from terms we cannot understand into terms that we can understand. This involves a watering down of data, a simplification that distorts the original information out of shape. The original is hardly discernible when they are done. When we decipher one phenomena in terms of another, we always lose sight of whatever glimmer of understanding that may have reached us.

It is not a matter of inventing new instruments any longer, but of using the ‘invisible’ ones we have. These may be known and examined. This material itself is evidence. It is like the branch that moves, so that we know the wind by its effects; and a wind bag like me by the billowing gale of my mono-blogs.

a32

Scientists realize that the atmosphere of the earth has a distorting effect upon their instruments. What they do not understand is that their instruments themselves are bound to be distortive. And, material instrument will have built-in distortive effects. The one instrument which is more important than any other is the mind (not the brain), the meeting place of the inner and outer senses.

The mind is distributed throughout the entire physical body, and builds up about it the physical camouflage necessary for existence on the physical level. The mind receives data from the inner senses and forms the necessary camouflage.

a21

The brain deals exclusively with camouflage patterns, while the mind deals with basic principles inherent on all planes. The brain is, itself, part of the camouflage pattern and can be interpreted and probed by physical instruments. The mind cannot. The mind is the connective. It is here that the secrets of the universe will be discovered, and the mind itself is the tool of discovery.

We might say that the brain is the mind in camouflage. Imagination belongs to the mind, not the brain. Instruments may be used to force imagination to move along in terms of its owner’s personal memories, but it cannot be forced to move along the lines of conceptual thoughts because the imagination is a connective between the physical individual and the non-physical entity.

a25

Mental enzymes, by the way, have a chemical effect or reaction on our plane, but the effect itself is, of course, distortion. On the other planes, the distortion effect may not be chemical at all.

As I have told in previous blogs, mental enzymes transform vitality into the particular camouflage patterns. A chemical imbalance in a physical body will also show itself as a corresponding distortion of sensual data. That is, when the chemical balance is disturbed, the physical world will appear to have changed. For the individual involved, the camouflage actually has changed.

a22

The subconscious is a property of mind and is, to a large degree, independent of camouflage. While part of the subconscious must deal with camouflage, for example, the deeper portions are in direct contact with the basic vitality of the universe. When you wonder if this material comes from our subconscious, take it for granted that the subconscious is personal, dealing exclusively with matters of our past. We are sometimes willing to concede that perhaps some element of racial memory might enter in.

a53

The subconscious, however, also contains the undistorted material of the mind, which is uncamouflaged and which operates between planes, knowing no boundaries.

The Tree Conscious

Of course trees are conscious. What we have here is latent energy, vitality and capacity, with much of it withheld or suspended momentarily. The tree is dissociated in one manner. In some ways, its living forces and consciousness are kept to a minimum. It is in a state of drowsiness on the one hand; and on the other, it focuses the usable portion of its energy into being a tree.

t21

The state of consciousness involved here is dull as compared to the highly differentiated human ability in many ways. However, in other ways, the experiences of the tree are extremely deep, dealing with the inner senses which are also properties of treedom.

The inner senses of the tree have strong affinity with the properties of the earth itself. They feel their growing. They listen to their growing as we might listen to our own heartbeat. They experience this oneness with their own growth, and they also feel pain. The pain, while definite, unpleasant and sometimes agonizing, is not of an emotional nature in the same way that we experience pain. In some ways, it is even a deeper thing. The analogy may not be perfect, far from it, but it is as if our breath were to be suddenly cut off — in a manner, this somewhat approximates pain for a tree.

t35

The tree makes adjustments just as we do. It listens to its growth up from the earth and to the murmur of the growth of its roots beneath. It adjusts each root ending according to what impediments might lie in its way. Without the conscious mind of man it nevertheless retains this inner consciousness of all its parts, above and below the ground, and manipulates them constantly.

The tree is also aware of its environment to an astonishing degree. It maintains constant awareness and the ability to adjust itself in two completely different worlds, so to speak — one in which it meets little resistance in growing upward and one composed of much heavier elements into which it must grow downward. Man needs artificial methods to operate effectively on land or in water, but the so-called unconscious tree manages nicely in two worlds as diverse, certainly, as land and water, and makes itself a part of each.

t52

And as far as motion is concerned, the tree moves upward and downward. It is quite unfair to say that it cannot transport itself, since it does so to an amazing degree; the roots and limbs moving in all directions. The inner senses of all plant life are well attuned, alert and very vital. All of these fragments have consciousness to a rather high degree, considering the man holds them in such low repute.

My readers of my previous blogs, remember of the trance state — in a light trance, we are able to maintain awareness of self, our environment and our place in it. We simply behave somewhat differently, not bestirring ourselves in any direction unless the suggestion to do so has been given. The awareness of plant life lies along these lines.

t23

Now, in a deep trance the subject, though fully aware of what is happening in the trance, may remember nothing of it afterward. The awareness of plant life is also somewhat like that of the subject in deep trance. Except for the suggestion and stimulus received by regular natural forces on our plane, the plant life does not bestir itself in other directions. But like the trance subject, our plant is aware. Its other abilities lie unused for the time, and latent, but they are present.

The awareness is focused along certain lines. The tree lives through its inner senses, experiencing many sensations and reacting to many stimuli of which we are unaware. Minute earth tremors, even the motion of small ants about its lower trunk. — these are recognized and experienced. Such invisibilities as humidity, radioactivity and all electrical values are felt as quite real things to our tree.

t53

A tree knows a human being also, by the weight of a boy upon its branches, by the vibrations in the air as adults pass, which hit the tree’s trunk at varying distances, and even by voices. My readers must remember what I said in previous blogs about mental enzymes and my remark that color can sometimes be heard. The tree recognizes a human being, though it does not see the human being in out terms. It does not build up the image of a man or woman, but it builds up a composite sensation which represents, say, a given individual. And the tree will recognize the same man or woman who passes it by each day.

As our own body senses temperature changes, it also senses the psychic charge, not only of other individuals, but of plant and vegetative matter. Our tree builds up a composite of sensations of this sort, sensing not the physical dimensions of a material object, whatever it is, but the vital psychic formation within and about it.

t11

Size is sensed by a tree, however, perhaps because of its inherent concern with height. The table around which my wife walks senses, even as she senses it.

Man’s and woman’s ego causes him or her to interpret everything else in light of himself or herself. He or she loses much in this manner. The ego can be compared to the bark of a tree. The bark is flexible, vibrant, and grows with the growth beneath. It is a tree’s contact with the outer world, the tree’s interpreter and, to some degree, the tree’s companion. So should man’s and woman’s ego be.

t34

When man’s and woman’s ego turns instead into a shell — when instead of interpreting outside conditions, it reacts too violently against them, then it hardens and becomes an imprisoning form that begins to snuff out important data and to keep enlarging information from the inner self. The ego’s purpose is protective. The ego is also a device to enable the inner self to inhabit the physical plane.

If, for example, our tree bark grew fearful of stormy weather and began to harden itself against the elements, in a well-meaning but distorted protective spirit, then the tree would die. This is what the ego does when it reacts too violently to purely physical data. As a result, it stiffens, and then we have, a well-meaning self, the cold detachment with which we at one time faced the world.

t6

Nevertheless, let remind you that the tree’s bark is quite necessary and cannot be dispensed with.

The idea of dissociation could be likened to the slight distance between the bark and the inside of the tree. Here we do not have a rigid bark, as we could not have a rigid ego. We have instead a flexible bark, changing with the elements, protecting the inner tree (or inner self), but flexible, opening or closing in rhythmic motion.

t51

The inner tree can continue to grow because the bark is resilient. It bends with the wind. It does not bend when there is no wind, nor does it stiffen, stopping the flow of sap to the treetop for fear that the dumb tree, not knowing what it was up to, would bump its head against the sky.

t12

Neither should the ego react so violently that it remembers and reacts to past storms in the midst of clear and sunny weather. Such a tree bark would be death to the tree. What we must still understand is that the same applies to any individual and the ego. It applies to us all. And we must learn that it is equally ridiculous to act as it is a summer day in the middle of wintertime. The tree has enough sense not to show blossoms in a blizzard.

“The Trees in the Forest”

The tree in the forest

Stand secret and silent,

their voices suspended

In lungs of leaves

That only can whisper

Of dreams held dormant,

That breathe only once

In a thousand years.

Deep is the sleep

Of the moss and the pebble.

Long is the trance

Of the grass and the meadow.

Footfalls come and footfalls pass,

But no sounds can break

That green-eyed trance.

The Midplane

The midplane is an excellent description of the semi-plane some people now inhabit. It is a waiting plane for personalities at certain stages of development.

d7

The midplane contains a conglomeration of fragments, who have not attained sufficient knowledge or manipulability to progress further at this point. They may be at various stages of development, but, usually, they have attained only a fair level of achievement. They have not excelled, neither have they ‘failed.’ They are working out problems of their own. They are not as yet committed to the next plane of their advancement.

They can be of benefit along certain lines. The validity of their information may be excellent. On the other hand, it may be less than trustworthy at times, simply because their achievement level is not high. If they err, they do so through ignorance.

d25

The ego is the tool by which the hidden self manipulates in the physical universe. In our case, it enables us to focus our ability along lines necessary to make it effective on our plane. However, when the ego becomes involved with fears, it ceases to be an effective tool and becomes instead a hammer hitting us incessantly over the head.

When the ego becomes overly concerned, it becomes overly conditioned to negative responses. The creative energies build up their thickly-dimensioned pseudo-realities of pain. For a certain amount of time, according to our condition, they automatically create the patterns of fear that belong to the ego.

d22

These fears do not belong to what we think of as the subconscious. Then these materializations of panic and pain, play about the physical body, projected by the ego, and steal the powers of the subconscious mind from their natural constructive tasks. In other words, the ego become a tool to disrupt rather than to create.

Our own subconscious is the fountain of our individuality and personality; from it springs our talent. When the ego becomes too concerned with daily matters, with worry, then it becomes far less effective. The freely working subconscious — or the inner you — is completely capable of taking care of all practical considerations and will use the ego as a tool to do so.

d34

Dissociation puts the power back where it belongs. Daily methods of dissociation are extremely practical. You will notice within a few weeks’ time an added energy. So-called impulses on our part are often blocked because we do not consider them practical. But the subconscious knows its own meat and its own sauce and the best means for its nourishment.

Begin yoga exercises and follow them faithfully. A few experiments with auto-suggestion upon falling asleep will  be ego-bound. Think of this in terms of muscle-bound, and you will see what I mean. Be in a drowsy state and suggest, suggest, suggest.Do not attempt to bully or command the subconscious.

d32

My affection for my blog readers is strong. If I speak heavy-handedly, it is because i want you to have a light touch. Dissociation brings about a strong unity with the creative aspects of personality. It puts us back, or it puts our creative talents back, in the driver’s seat.

Animals catch our emotional contagion and according to their own abilities, translate it for themselves.

d16

The viruses and infections are, of course, present. They always are. They are themselves fragments, struggling small fragments, without intention of harm. We have general immunity, believe it or not, to all such viruses. Ideally, we can inhabit a plane with them without fear. It is only when we give tacit agreement that harm is inflicted. To some degree, household pets are dependent upon our psychic strength. They have their own, it is true, but, unknowingly, we reinforce their energy and health.

When our own personalities are more or less in balance, we have no trouble at all looking out for these creatures and actually reinforcing their existence with residues of our creative and sympathetic powers. In times of psychological stress — or in periods of crises — quite unwittingly we often withhold this strong reinforcement.

d15

I would like to make it clear that animals do have energy to maintain their own health, but this is reinforced as a rule by the vitality of the human beings to whom they may be emotionally attached.

At times, the ego can hold us in a tight vice, which the dissociation breaks. This is what happens after dissociation exercises. Allowing ourselves psychic freedom. However, conscious fears cause the ego to tighten its grasp, and some effects of this nature startup.

d35

The fact that the fearful ego begins to tighten explains our reactions to dissociation exercises. The ego can build up around the inner self like a glacier, and the dissociation exercises help melt it away. Even the prickles in our neck are like tiny picks chipping away at icy fears. You release so quickly as a result of the exercises that you don’t know what had happened.

d23

Often when we think we are dealing with a matter or a person in a dissociated manner, we might be instead exhibiting a cold, conscious detachment. This is a pose of the ego and is not to be confused with the lithe subconscious detachment which is actually warm, flexible and expanse.

Light Is A Mental Enzyme

Mental enzymes create senses on the physical plane in order that they may be recognized and appreciated by the physical being. The mental enzymes are the same , basically, throughout the universe, but their materializations on any particular plane are determined by the properties inherent in the plane itself.

l5

The quality called light on this plane could just as well appear as sound in another; and for the matter, even on this plane, light can be changed into sound, and sound into light. It is always interaction which is important. Even the mental enzymes themselves are interchangeable, as far as the principle behind them is concerned, though for practical purposes they maintain separate and distant qualities in their materializations in one plane.

That is why it is possible for some human beings to experience sound as color or to see color as sound. Granted, this is not a characteristic experience, but if the mental enzymes were not interchangeable in principle, then the experience would not be possible. Light would never be heard, for example, and sound would never be seen.

l24

In practical terms, these mental enzymes must — and do — give a predictable, more or less dependable, result. The thing to remember, though, is that this interchangeability can occur, and is, therefore, a property of mental enzymes in general. On our plane, the action of these mental enzymes appear to be more or less inflexible, static, irreversible and permanent. Of course, this is not the case.

Because mental enzymes seem to give the same effects most of the time in our system, our scientists blithely label these as laws of nature; that is, the apparent laws of cause and effect. If you’ll forgive a pun, because a certain cause will usually give a certain effect in our physical universe, we may be justified in saying that the apparent results are laws that operate within our system. But stay in our own backyard.

l12

What I am trying to say, is that there are apparent rules of cause and effect, but the same causes do not always give the same effects. There is much more I want to say along these lines. Please consider again our wires and mazes (from the last few blogs). I have said, if you’ll forgive the brief reminder, that these are composed of solidified vitality.

They are the living stuff of the universe, even as they form its boundaries and seem to divide it into labyrinthian ways, like the inside of a honeycomb. The planes within the tiny wires — that is, the planes formed by the connections and interconnections of our imaginary wires — come into the sphere of each different plane and take  the form inherent in the plane itself.

l31

Therefore, these wires, continuing our analogy, will grow thick or thin, or change color completely, like some chameleon-like animal constantly camouflaging its true appearance by taking on the outward manifestations of each neighboring forest territory. Then too, the inhabitants of any particular plane are themselves chameleon-like.

The inhabitants see only the camouflage. They them accept it as a definite rule of nature, never realizing that just beyond their eyesight and just beyond their outer senses, this familiar tamed animal of a law changes appearance completely. So complete, in fact, is this transformation as to be in some cases unrecognizable. However, by seeing beneath the camouflage in any one case, we can see beneath all camouflage.

l17

What these wires are, then, that seem to divide our planes and appear so differently in one plane than they do in another, is solidified vitality, whose camouflaging action is determined by mental enzymes. Now, perhaps, you will understand why I said earlier that sound can be seen and color can be heard. There are many diverse examples along this line.

I would like to repeat: Mental enzymes allow the solidified vitality to change form. Needless to say, mental enzymes and solidified vitality are dependent upon each other in many ways. The enzymes of our little equation permits vitality to operate successfully under diverse mental and physical situations and forms the basis for each particular systems of existence.

l22

The inner senses are actually the channels through which the entire composition of any plane is appreciated and maintained. The mental enzymes act upon the vitality, which is, as I told you, the structure of the universe itself. The inner senses, then,are the means. The mental enzymes are the tools, and the vitality is the actual material that forms the universe as a whole, the apparent divisions within it, the apparent boundaries between the systems and the diverse material within each division. These diverse materials, again, are only camouflage formed by the inner senses upon the ‘material’ itself.

The strange thing, incidentally about our flying saucers is not that they appear, but that we can see them. As science advances on various planes, the inhabitants learn to travel between planes occasionally, while carrying with them the manifestations of their home station.

l42

As I mentioned, they carry their own particular camouflage with them. We recognize it as not our own. Taking off as right angles involves another of our natural laws which are not actual laws but only seem to be from where we are. When science progresses on various planes, then such visitations become less accidental and more planned. However, since the inhabitants of each plane are bound by particular materialized patterns of their ‘home,’ they bring this pattern of camouflaged vitality with them. Certain kinds of science cannot operate without it.

When the inhabitants of a plane have learned mental science patterns, then they are to a great degree freed from the more regular camouflage patterns. The flying saucer appearances come from a system much more advanced in technological sciences than ours. However, this is still not a mental science plane. Therefore, the camouflage paraphernalia appears, more or less visible, to our astonishment.

l41

So strong is this tendency for vitality to change from one apparent form to another, that what we have here in our flying saucers is something that is actually not of our plane nor of the plane of its origin.

What happens is this: When the ‘flying saucer’ starts out toward its destination, the atoms and molecules that compose it (and which are themselves formed by vitality) are more or less aligned according to the pattern inflicted upon it by its own territory. As it enters our plane, a distortion occurs. The actual structure of the craft is caught in a dilemma of form.

l23

It is caught between transforming itself completely into earth’s particular camouflage pattern, and retaining its original pattern. The earthly viewer attempts to correlate what he or she sees with what he or she supposedly knows or imagines possible, in the little he or she understands of the universe.

What he or she sees is something between a horse and a dog and resembles neither. The craft retains what it can of its original structure and changes what it must. This accounts for much of the conflicting reports as to shape, size and color. The few times that the craft shoots off at right angles, it has managed to retain functions ordinary to it in its particular habitat.

l51

I do not believe we will have any saucer landings for quite some while — not physical landings in the usual sense of the word. These saucers cannot stay on our plane for nay length of time. The pressures that push against the vehicle itself are tremendous. It is literally caught between two worlds. To conform to the laws of a particular plane is a practical necessity, and at this time, the ‘saucers’ cannot afford to stay betwixt and between for any indefinite period.

What they do is take a quick glimpses of our plane — and hold in mind that the saucer or cigar shape seen within our system is a bastard form having little relation to the structure at it is at home base.

f3

In other words, people from other systems of reality do appear in ours. Sometimes on purpose and sometimes by accident. In some cases, our people have blundered through the apparent curtain between our past and present, and so have others blundered into the apparent division between one plane and another. Usually, they have been invisible to our plane, as the few who fell into the apparent past were invisible to the people of the past.

This sort of experience involves a sudden psychic awareness that all boundaries are for practical purposes only. There are many kinds of science, however, besides our own. There are many, for example, just dealing with locomotion. Had the human race gone into certain mental disciplines as thoroughly as it has explored technology, then its practical transportation system would be vastly different and far more efficient.

l3

A plane is not necessarily a planet. A plane may be one planet, but a plane may also exist where no planet is. One planet may have several planes. Planes may also involve various aspects of apparent time. Planes can and do intermix without the knowledge of the inhabitants. A plane may be a time or only one iota of vitality that exists by itself. A plane may cease to be. A plane is formed for entities as patterns for fulfillment along various lines. It is a climate conducive to the development of unique and particular capabilities and achievements and isolation of elements.

l2

It is often practical that entities or their various personalities visit one plane before another. This does not mean that one plane must necessarily be visited before another. We could say also that an entity visits all planes simultaneously, as it is possible for us to visit the state of sorrow and joy almost simultaneously and experience both emotions in heightened form because of the almost immediate contrast. In fact, the analogy of a plane with an emotional state is much more valid than the analogy between a plane and a geographical state, particularly since emotional states take up no room or space.

 

 

What Mental Enzymes Are

As mental genes are behind the physical genes, so to speak, so are mental enzymes behind the physical stuff we can examine on our plane. Chlorophyll is such a mental enzyme, and there are more which I will describe in later blogs.

e7

In a sense, any color or quality of that nature could be considered a mental enzyme. There is an exchange of sorts between the mental and physical without which, for example, color could not exist. I use color here as an example because it is perhaps easier to understand how this could be a mental enzyme than it is to perceive the same thing about chlorophyll. Chlorophyll is green in more than color, incidentally.

Nevertheless, there is an interaction here which gives chlorophyll its properties. I hope to make this clearer, but it involves part of a larger concept for which we do not now have the proper background. Chlorophyll is a mental enzyme, however, and it is one of the moving forces in our plane. A variant exists in all other planes. It is a mental spark, so to speak, that sets everything else into motion.

e2

This also has to do with feeling, which is also a mover. We must try not to categories things in old ways, but when we open our mind, we will see a similarity between chlorophyll, as a mental enzyme or mover, and emotion which is never still. Emotion ‘solidified’ is something else again and is perhaps a framework of other worlds.

Perhaps I may be able to make mental enzymes clearer. In our own experience, we are familiar with steam, water and ice. These are all manifestations of the same thing. So can a seemingly physical chlorophyll be also a part of a seemingly immaterial emotion of feeling, but in a different form — and, of course, directed into this form or caused to take various forms in response to certain laws — as our ice will not exist of itself in the middle of our summertime.

e5

Some might find the phrase ‘solidified emotion or feeling’ outlandish. Some understand now that our plane is composed of solidified thought. When our scientist get through with all their high fiddle-faddle, they will also discover that this is the case.

When I spoke of in my earlier blog to imagine the wire structure penetrating everything that is, I meant you to imagine these wires as being alive, as I am a live wire myself. Joking aside. I will now ask you to imagine these wires as being composed of the solidified emotion of which I have just spoken. Surely you must know that the words feeling or emotion are, at best, symbols to describe something else, and that something else comes extremely close to our mental enzymes.

f88

Actually, a counter-action within a mental enclosure occurs. A mental enclosure divides itself in two, splits up, multiples, acts upon its own various parts, and this produces a material manifestation. The ‘material’ is material, yet it is mentally produced. The mental enzymes within the enclosure are the elements that set off the action, and — listen to this — they are also the action itself.

In other words, the mental enzymes not only produce action in the material world, but they become the action. If you will read over the above three or four paragraphs, you will come close to seeing where mental and physical become one.

c34

We know what love and hate are, but as I told you earlier, try to think in new ways. Love and hate, for example, are action. They are action and they both imply action in physical bodies.

These mental enzymes, to go back to them, are solidified feeling, but not in the terms that we usually use. I have said that our imaginary wires that seem to permeate our model universe are alive; and now if you bear with me, I will say that they are mental enzymes or solidified feelings, always in motion, and yet permanent enough to form a more or less consistent framework. We could almost say that mental enzymes become the tentacles that form material — though I do not find that a very pretty phrase.

f41

The framework, again, is only for convenience, as our physical walls are for our convenience, as I mentioned earlier. The walls are not there as such, but we had better act as if they were or suffer a possible broken neck. I must still respect many like frameworks in my own plane, but my understanding of them less opaque.

Intellectual truth will not make us free, you see, though it is a necessary preliminary. If this were the case, our walls would fall away, since, intellectually, we understand their rather dubious nature. Since feeling is so often the cohesive with which mind builds, it is feeling itself which must be changed if we would find freedom from our particular plane of existence at our particular time. That is, changing feeling will allow us to see variants. These discussions now are, of necessity, of a simple and uncomplicated nature. If I speak in analogies and images, it is because I must relate with the world that is familiar to us.

f16

I am convinced that the human mind or consciousness has abilities and methods of perception far beyond those we had thought possible.

The Fifth Dimension

As far as fifth dimension is concerned. It is space. I will have to try to build up the image of a structure to help you understand, but then I must rip down the structure because there is none there.

f6

Consider, then, a network of wires somewhat like, though different from the conception of “Idea construction” — a maze of interlocking wires endlessly constructed, so that looking through them there would seem to be no beginning or end. Our plane could be likened to a small position between four very spindly and thin wires, and the next evolving plane could be likened to the small position in the neighboring wires on the other side.

Not only are we on different sides of the same wires, but we are at the same time either above or below, according to our viewpoint. And if we consider the wires as forming cubes… then the cubes could also fit one within the other, without disturbing the inhabitants of either cube one iota — and these cubes are also within cubes, which are themselves within cubes, and I am speaking only of the small particles of space taken up by your plane and mine.

f5

Again, now think in terms of our plane, bounded by its small spindly set of wires, and my plane on the other side. These, as I have said, have also boundless solidarity and depth, yet in usual terms, to one side the other is transparent. We cannot see through, but the two planes move through each other constantly.

I hope you see what I have done here. I have initiated the idea of motion, for true transparency is not the ability to see through but to move through. This is what I mean by fifth dimension. Now remove the structure of the wires and cubes. Things behave as if the wires and cubes were there, but these are only constructions necessary, even to those on my plane, in order to make this comprehensible to our faculties, the faculties of any entity.

f13

We merely construct imaginary lines to walk upon. So real are the wall constructions of our rooms that we would freeze in the winter time without them, yet there is no room and no walls. So, in a like manner, the wires that we constructed are real to us in the universe, although … to me, the walls are transparent. So are the wires that we constructed to make our point about the fifth dimension, but for all practical purposes, we must behave as if the wires were there.

f31

Again, if you will consider our maze of wires, I will ask you to imagine them filling up everything that is, with your plane and my plane like two small birds nests in the netlike fabric of some gigantic tree. Consider, for example, that these wires are also mobile, constantly trembling and also live, in that they not only carry the stuff of the universe but are themselves projections of this stuff, and you will see how difficult it is to explain. Nor can I blame you for growing tired when after asking you to imagine this strange structure, I then insist that you tear it apart, for it is no more actually seen or touched than is the buzzing of a million invisible bees.

The Universe as a Physical Body

The matter of the universe can be conceived of as a physical body, an organism of individual cells (objects) held together by connective tissue (the chemicals and elements of air). This connective tissue is also alive and carries electrical impulses. Within it, as within the connective tissues of the human body, there is a certain elasticity, a certain amount of regeneration and a constant replacement of the atoms and molecules that compose it. While the whole retains its shape, the material itself is being constantly born and replaced.

c31

There are no real boundaries to the self; skin does not separate us from others but connect us in a webwork of energy; what we thought of as Self and Not-Self are interrelated; and that, in this life at least, ideas are constantly being transformed into matter.

The ability of the entity to transform energy into an idea and then to construct it physically determine the entity’s place on the physical evolutionary plane. Simple organisms are capable of “picking up” fewer communications. Their range is less, but the vitality and validity of their constructions is excellent. In simple organisms such as the paramecium and amoeba, the few sharp ideas received are constructed almost simultaneously, without reflection. The organism needs no other mechanism to translate ideas. What it has is sufficient.

p4

More complicated organisms — mammals, for example — have need of further mechanisms to construct ideas because they are to perceive more of them. Here memory is an element. Now the organism has a built-in ghost image of past constructions by which to perfect and test new ones. Reflection of some sort enters into the picture, and with it the organism is given more to do. Slowly, within its range of receptivity, it is given some choice in the actual construction of ideas into physical reality.

The reflection is brief, but for a moment the animal partakes of a new dimension. The shadow of time glimmers in his eyes as the still unperfected memory of past constructions lingers in his consciousness. As yet, memory storage is small, but now the instantaneous construction is no longer instantaneous, in our terms. There is a pause: the organism — dog or tiger — can choose to attack or not attack. The amoeba must construct its small world without reflection and without time as we know it.

c33

Entities with still broader range need more complicated structure. The scope of their receptivity is so large that the simple autonomic nervous system is not enough. The amoeba constructs each idea it receives, because it is able to receive so few. All must be constructed to ensure survival. With man and woman, the opposite becomes true. He and she have such a range of receptivity that it is impossible for him or her to construct all of his and her ideas physically. As his and her scope widened, a mechanism was necessary that would allow him or her to choose. Self-consciousness and reason were the answers.

Suddenly, time blossomed like a strange flower in his and her skull. Before this he and she were transfixed in the present. But memory produced another dimension in the animal, man and woman carried it further. No longer did memory flicker briefly and disappear, enclosing him or her in darkness again. Now it stretched brightly behind him and her and also stretched out ahead — a road on which he and she always saw his and her own changing image.

i4

He and she learned continuity. And with his and her focused memory at his and her command, man’s and woman’s ego was born, which could follow its own identity through the maze of blazing impulses that beset him and her, could recognize itself through the patterns of continuing constructions and could separate itself from its action in the physical world. Here we have the birth of subject and object, the I AM who is the doer or constructor, and the construction itself.

This new dimension enabled the species to manipulate and recognize its own constructions and freed it to focus greater energy in projecting some ideas over others. In other words, conscious purpose became possible, physically. Somewhere along the line, however, man and woman began to divorce themselves almost completely and artificially from there own constructions. Hence his and her groping, his and her sense of alienation from nature, his and her search for a Cause or Creator of a creation he and she no longer recognized as his or her own.

c24

This is an excellent example of the ways in which the inner self can suddenly regenerate and revitalize the personality, open up new methods of perception, shatter barriers and flood the personality with energy that sets it right, reorganizing it in more meaningful directions. It is a second birth. Such events are like geysers that erupt suddenly, bringing us close to the center of our being. They come from subjective rather than objective reality, and, in my case at least, they become objectified, their force propelling them into physical actualization.

The Fabric of Physical Matter

All physical matter is idea construction. We only see our own constructions. So-called empty space is full of constructions not our own that we cannot perceive. Our skin connects us to other physical constructions, and through it we are involved in the complicated fabric of continuous matter. The action of each one of the most minute of these particles affects each other one. The slight motion of one grain of sand causes a corresponding alteration in the distribution of the stars and in all matter’s fabric, from an atom in a man’s and woman’s skull down to the slightest variation in a microbe’s action.

o9

All matter is idea construction, woven together; each construction is individual and yet cohesive to the whole. The smallest particle is necessary to the whole, forming part of matter’s design.

The Sum of Individual Idea Constructions

The physical universe is the sum of individual idea constructions. Memory is the ghost image of “past” idea constructions.

i1

Each evolutionary change is preceded and caused by a new idea. As the idea is in the process of being constructed onto the physical planes, it prepares the material world for its own actuality and creates prerequisite conditions.

At no point can we actually say that one construction vanishes and another takes its place, but artificially we adopt certain points as past, present and future, for convenience. At some point, we agree that the physical construction ceases to be one thing and becomes another, but, actually it still contains elements of the “past” construction and is already becoming the “next” one.

i2

Though the construction of an idea seems to disappear physically, the idea which it represents still exists.

Sleep is the entity’s rest from physical idea construction. Only enough energy is used to keep the personal image construction in existence. The entity withdraws into basic energy realms and is comparatively free from time since idea construction is at a subconscious area.

i9

After death, the entity will have its ghost images (memories) at its command, though their apparent sequence will no longer apply. Memories are properties of the subconscious energy entity and, as such, are indestructible (though they may be unavailable to the individual under various circumstances).

The next plane of existence will involve further training in energy use and manipulation, since the energy of which the entity is composed is self-generating and always seeking more complicated form and awareness.

i8

Each material particle is an idea construction formed by the individualized bits of energy that compose it.

Each entity perceives only his or her own construction on a physical level. Because all constructions are more or less faithful reproductions in matter of the same basic ideas (since all individuals are, generally speaking, on the same level in this plane), then they agree sufficiently in space, time and degree so that the world of appearances has coherence and relative predictability

 

 

DREAMING

Dreaming is a creative state of consciousness, a threshold of psychic activity in which we throw off usual restrictions to use our most basic abilities and realize our true independence from three-dimensional form. In dreams, we write the script for our daily lives and perceive other levels of existence that our physical focus usually obscures.

o1

The dream universe has its own basic laws or “root assumptions” — mental equivalents to our laws of gravity, space and time. In other worlds, dream reality only seems discordant or meaningless because we judge it according to physical laws rather than by the rules that apply within it.

Dreams, then, are not just imaginative indigestion or psychic chaos. We are not temporarily insane when we dream, as some theorists maintain. To the contrary, we may be far more sane and alert during some dream states than we  are ordinarily. Certainly we are more creative. We may even be more “alive,” as we will see from our own experiences.

o14

Many dreams are precognitive, and personal experience is a great convincer we discover for ourselves — recalled, and dated and recorded dreams and then checked them against events.

We think that we are only conscious while we are awake. We assume ourselves unconscious when we sleep. In Freud’s terminology, the dice are indeed loaded on the side of the conscious mind. But pretend for a moment that we are looking at this situation from the other side. Pretend that while we are in the dream state we are concerned with the problem of physical consciousness and existence. From the viewpoint, the picture is entirely different, for we are indeed conscious when we sleep.

o5

The locations that we visit while dreaming are as real to us then as physical locations are to us in the waking state. What we have is this: In the waking state, the whole self is focused toward physical reality, but in the dreaming state, it is focused in a different dimension. It is every bit as conscious and aware.

If we have little memory of our dream locations when we are awaken, then remember that we are in  the dream situation. Both are legitimate and both are realities. When the body lies in bed, it is separated by a vast distance from the dream location in which the dreaming self may dwell. But this, dear friends, has nothing to do with space, for the dream location exists simultaneously with the room in which the body sleeps.

o17

There is, of course, an apparent contradiction here, but it is only apparent, our dilemma being this: If we have another self-conscious self, then why aren’t we aware of it? Pretend that you are some weird creature with two faces. One face looks out upon one world [the dream reality] and one face looks out upon another world [the physical one].

Imagine further this poor creature having a brain to go with each face, and each brain interprets reality in terms of the world it looks upon. Yet the two worlds are different, and more the creatures are Siamese twins. At the same time, imagine that these two creatures are really one, but with definite parts equipped to handle two entirely different worlds.

o15

The subconscious, in this rather ludicrous analogy, would exist between the two brains and would enable the creature to operate as a single entity. At the same time — and this is the difficult part to explain — neither of the two faces would ever ‘see’ the other’s world. They would not be aware of each other, yet each would be fully conscious.

Flying dreams are not all disguised sexual fantasies, as Freud maintained, for example. In many of them we are flying, and the destinations we reach are quite physical.

012

My future blogs will be mainly concerned with events that happen precisely when consciousness is turned away from normal objective life. Much more is involved than even the nature of the dream state and man’s and woman’s fascinating ability to withdraw consciousness from the body. These phenomena are only evidences of the greater creative consciousness that is inherent and active in each of us — the interior universe of which we know so little.

It often seems to me that only when we close our eyes do we begin to see, literally and figuratively. This is somewhat of an exaggeration, and yet my experience as a metaphysical student makes several facts clear. Our ordinary consciousness shows us only one specific view of reality. When we learn to close off our senses momentarily and change the focus of awareness, other quite valid glimpses of an interior universe begin to show themselves.

o11

This is most obvious in dreaming, of course. Dreams may well represent us at our most creative, for not only do we process the past days activities, but we also choose tomorrow’s events from the limitless probable actions that are presented to us while the waking self is still.

o144

It’s tricky to play hopscotch back and forth between various stages of consciousness, to travel into little-understood subjective realms, explore those inner landscapes and return with any clear clues as to their nature. Such explorations are highly important, however, because they bring us in touch with that basic inner reality that underlies our individual conscious thought and existence and which is the bedrock of our civilization.

Speak to That All-embracing “You”

We have lived in a world in which we believed we must struggle to survive — and so we have struggled.

g4

We have believed that the natural contours of nature were somehow antagonistic to our own existence, so that left in the hands of nature alone we would lose our way. We have believed that in the very framework of our psychology. In our experiences, therefore, all of these things have largely proven true.

Nothing taught that we were creatures. I have been trying to lead us into a new threshold of perception, where the old myths of evolution can be seen as outmoded, ancient of forsaken castles amid a forest of beliefs — a forest that is indeed itself a magically formed one. The forest is the world of our imagination, surely, the imagination of our minds, and yet given force and power by the innate creatively that rises up from an inner world that represents much more truly the origins of man’s and woman’s and beast. That world has been largely hidden by the camouflages shed by science and religion alike, but in our times the landscape began to appear so dark and threatening, so forbidden and alien to our own desires, that its end seemed all the more inevitable and swift.

g14

I hope I have given in my blogs a far more gallant and true picture, that represents the origin of our life, structure and being and thought. The inner world of reality, the world of dreams, presents a model of existence in which new energy vitality, and being is everywhere apparent, ready to come forward to form new transformations, new combinations of energy and desire.

That inner psychological universe is a psychic gestalt, propelled, formed, sustained or driven by value fulfillment, love and desire, by the loving values that have no limit. The universe does not give up on itself, or on any of its creatures. It is ruled by a different set of principles, a different set of values, and by inner cooperative exuberance.

g8

We may need some time before the old beliefs become less prominent, and finally fall into their proper decay — a decay, incidentally, that does indeed have its own kind of majesty, energy, and beauty. But the inner natural leanings of all of consciousness within the realms of our being now yearn for constructive change, clearer vision, to experience again their inherent sense of corporal spirituality, physical and psychic grace. They want to sense again the effortless motion that is their natural birthright.

g9

I hope my blogs to some extent or another puts each reader in touch with your own inner psychological motion, your creative breath, so that we are invigorated and sense within your own minds and spirit a new promise, a new intent, and the exhilaration of earthly and spiritual strength. We dwell in a state of natural grace that is quite alive and vital whether or not science decrees that consciousness possesses its own intent. Nature is supernatural all the while, of course.

Changing Attitudes will help bring “Our Natural Place in the World”

I have not given complicated methods or suggestions, telling how to decipher or understand our own dreams, though  I have mentioned such topics often in my blogs.

l6

I have not given complicated methods concerning out-of-body travel, and yet all of my blogs, by changing attitudes, will help bring about changes in ourselves that will automatically enhance such activities. They will begin to take their natural places within our world. No methods will help us otherwise.

I do not want you to think that the answers to your questions lie prepackaged in the dream state, either, relatively inaccessible except to those who possess unique talents or some secretive knowledge of the world of the occult. Many people, long before the time of printing or reading, learned to read nature very well, to observe the seasons, to feel out “the seasons of the soul.” The answers, therefore, lie as close as our own back-door steps, for at the thresholds of our beings we automatically stand in the center of knowledge. We are never at the periphery of events.

w51

Regardless of our circumstances, our condition in life, our training or our aptitudes, at our own threshold we stand at the center of all realities — for at our center all existences intersect. We are everywhere part of them, and they are of us. Each portion of the universe carries the knowledge of all other parts, and each point of a reality is that reality’s center. We are, then, centered in the universe.

Again, even our dreams and thoughts go out to help form new worlds.

w48

Such considerations should naturally spark within us far vaster and yet far more intimate insights — insights in whose light the hazy rhetoric of prepackaged knowledge begins to disappear. As it does, so the speakers within each of us can rise to the surface of ordinary consciousness without being considered blabbermouths or mad men or women, or fools, without having to distant their information simply to bring it to our attention. The speakers are those inner voices that first taught us physical languages. We could be equally correct in calling them the voices of electrons or the voices of the gods, for each is a representation of Everything That Is, overflowing like a fountain both with knowledge and with love.

When we stand at our physical doorstep we look inward at an incredible glowing psychological venture. I am not using symbols in such statements, and hidden within them are important homey clues. Each spoon that we touch, each flower that we rearrange, each syllable that we speak, each room we attend to, automatically brings us in touch with our natural feeling for the universe — for each object, however homey or mundane, is alive with changes and comprehension.

x35

I do not, therefore, want you to concentrate your efforts in memorizing methods of perceiving other realities, but to realize that such insights are everywhere within our grasp. If we understand that, then we will rearrange the organization of our own thoughts quite by oneself. We will begin to read our own thoughts as easily as we now read a blog. “It is far more important to read your own thoughts than it is to learn to read the thoughts of others, for when your own feelings are known to you, you easily see that all other feelings are also reflected in your own”. When we look away from the world we are looking at it more closely. When we read sentences like the last one we are somewhat freeing our own minds, opening greater organizations. Our life is one dream that we are remembering.

x25

We are remembering it and creating it and creating it at once, watching it grow from the attention of our own love and knowledge, and as we seem to stand at its center, so we stand at the center of all of our dreams, which then spin themselves seemingly outward.

Our physical universe began, then, from a dreaming center.

Panspermia: “Life Seeded”

Some prominent astrophysicists, ,mathematicians, and astronomers have announced their belief in a theory of “panspermia” — that in ordinary terms of time life on earth was “seeded” from space, instead of arising by pure chance in some primordial ooze or sea on our planet. Certainly, articles like this https://www.agmarketnetwork.net/clumps-of-bacteria-could-spread-life-between-planets/ suggest that they believe that this is what is happening now in the universe. Those men and women believe in evolution — that once it originated, life, as Charles Darwin proposed, has ever since been growing in complexity and “evolving” though natural selection and random mutations, or DNA copying errors into the life and beings we see and are today. Among other signs, the rebel scientists cite the identification in certain meteorites of bacterial and fungal micro-fossils, along with a number of amino acids. They claim that even at 4.6 billion years, the earth mathematically is not old enough for life to have had the time to evolve (beginning about 3.8 billion years ago) into its enormously complex current forms. That lack of ordinary time in evolutionary theory is a question I wondered about.

w3

The panspermian theory is that life reached the Earth from a living organization permeating our entire Milky Way galaxy, and that there is a creator, or intelligence, or God out there. In taking a step further, by saying, the galaxy itself is alive — not merely full of life. I have discussed many ways the Everything That Is could have seeded life on earth through the roles of probabilities, and how certain successive forms could take root upon the earth when environmental and psychic conditions were right, and so give the appearance of an evolutionary progression. Everything That Is, might have offered those same incipient forms to the living earth many times, only to have the earth reject them or fail to develop them for many reasons. But even these latest scientific theories are based upon ideas of a past, present, and future; their proponents do not consider that basically time is simultaneous — that the universe is being created now.

w12

The term, “value fulfillment,” is woefully inadequate to express the nature of life’s diversity, purpose, or meaning.

w43

Value fulfillment is most difficult to describe, for it combines the nature of a loving presence — a presence with the innate knowledge of its own divine complexity — with a creative ability of infinite proportions that seeks to bring to fulfillment even the slightest, most distant portion of its own inverted complexity. Translated into simpler terms, each portion of energy is endowed with an inbuilt reach of creativity that seeks to fulfill its own potentials in all possible variations — and in such a way that such a development also furthers that creative potentials of each other portion of reality

Life Cloud II

It certainly must seem to most of us that we begin many therapeutically designed programs only to have them disappear. There is a rhythm to such programs, however, and it is natural for the self to rouse at certain times, begin such activities, then apparently discard them.

q51

They begin with a certain impetus, give us a certain kind of progress, and regardless of how great or small that progress may be, there is a necessary time of assimilation — that is, the stimulation over a period of time is more effective when it is in a fashion intermittent, when certain methods are tried out, applied, and so forth — but by the very nature of the healing process there is also the necessity of letup, diversion, and looking away.

Left alone, the self knows how to utilize such rhythms. If we trusted the characteristics of basic natural person, we would not need such blogs as ours, generally, in the world at all — for such knowledge would be part of it and implied in its cultural organizations, and the daily habits of the people.

q26

The past blogs on the magical approach, can serve as valuable springboards to release from our own creative areas new triggers for inspiration and understanding, and hence for therapeutic development. That should be part of the program, in other words, regardless of what I intend to do blog-wise.

Another point: Regardless of any seeming contradictions, the beneficial aspects of any particular creative activity far outweigh any disadvantages. The nature of creativity, regardless of any given specific manifestation, is reflected in an overall generalized fashion that automatically increases the quality of life, and such benefits are definite regardless of what other conditions also become apparent. I mean to make clear here that regardless of any complications that may seem only too apparent to you, in the production and distribution of my last blogs, the benefits far outweigh any disadvantages.

q8

We cannot know what would have happened, for example, had it not been produced, or distributed, so the question might seem moot. In the same fashion, the publication of my blogs, or rather the one we are working on, is bound to bring greater advantages than disadvantages. Expression is far preferred, of course, to repression — but more than this, the matter of repression cannot be solved by adding further repression as a therapeutic measure.

If the apparent trigger of a difficulty is a creative accomplishment, then the difficulty itself is ‘loaded’ also with its own natural therapeutic solutions.

q48

The magical approach is indeed the natural approach to life’s experience.

It is the adult’s version of childhood knowledge, the human version of the animals’ knowledge, the conscious version of ‘unconscious’ comprehension. In past blogs I told you that Framed-Mind-1 and 2 were actually united. They seemed to be so disunited that it is almost impossible to discuss then using any other terms. To understand that much alone, to comprehend the simple idea of Framed-mind-2’s indisputable existence is strongly important however.

q11

We do not have to worry in an overly strained way about putting the new principles of life into practical experience at once. We do not need to worry or deride ourselves for stupidity if it appears, looking over the long annals of work that we have done together, that it should have been obvious that our ideas were leading in certain directions — for not only have I been trying to divest you of official ideas, but to prepare you for the acceptance of a new version of reality: a version that could be described in many fashions. It has been during the annals of history, but many of those fashions also indisputably, and with the best of intentions, managed to give a faulty picture: We ended up with our gods and demons, unwieldy methods and cults, that our “model” avoids many of those pitfalls.

In those annals there is legend after legend, tale after tale, history after history describing civilizations that have come and gone, kings risen and fallen, and those stories have always represented cultures of the psyche, and described various approaches used by man’s and woman’s psyche as it explored its intersection with earthly experiences.

q24

Some mountains climbers, when asked why they climb a certain peak, respond: ‘Because the mountain is there to be climbed’ — so the natural approach, the magical approach is to be used because it exists, and because it represents an open doorway into a world of reality that is always present, always at the base of our cultures and experience. Theoretically at least, the magical approach should be used because it represents the most harmonious method of life. It is a way of living automatically enhances all of our abilities and accelerates our comprehensions.

To some extent tonight’s relatively brief blog should remove senses of urgency on our parts, or of self-criticism, that make us question when or how we can ‘learn to make’ the magical approach work in any specific way — that is, why we cannot learn to make the approach work in, say, helping one’s condition in a faster, more effective fashion.

q47

We should understand that the approach is the best one to use in life, generally speaking, but it will improve all conditions, even if we still have difficulties in certain areas, and its use cannot help but promote the overall quality of our lives. That recognition takes the pressure off, so that we can to some extent relax our old attitudes enough so that we allow the magical approach to work in those areas that have been bones of contention.

q29

The magical approach puts us in harmony with our own individual knowledge of the universe. It puts us in touch with the magical feeling of oneself that we had as a child, and that is familiar to us at levels usually beyond our physical knowledge of ourselves. It is better, then, to use the approach because we recognize it for what it is than to use it specifically in order to get something that we want, however beneficial. If it is used because we recognize its inherent rightness in ourselves, its inherent ‘superior stance,’ then it automatically puts us in a position of greater trust and faith. It opens our options, enlarges our vista of comprehension, so that the difficulties themselves are simply no longer as important — and vanish from our experience in, again, a more natural manner.

q14

In a fashion, all of the material that I have given you in the annals of our relationship was meant to lead you in one way or another to a place where the true nature of reality could at least be glimpsed. We are at that point now.

In a manner of speaking, my physical condition represents that bruises, the wounds inflicted upon any individual in his or her long journey toward a greater comprehension of life’s experience. In religious terms, we begin to glimpse a promised land –a ‘land’ of psyche and reality that represents unimpeded nature.

q55

The ‘proper’ question to ask is not: ‘Can I enter that land?’ The land is here, where we are, and it always has been. The methods, the ways, the beliefs, the modes of travel to a destination create the destination itself. It is impossible for us to operate without belief in our present mode of existence, ‘for beyond’ those glittering packages of beliefs, however, there exists the vast reservoir of sensation itself, the land that does indeed exist ‘beyond beliefs.’

The universe is not dependent upon our belief in it in order that it can exist. It contains within itself its own comprehension of its own knowledge, its own magical recognition of itself, its own harmonious laws and orders, its own cabinetry. It possesses and holds intact even the smallest probability, so that no briefest possible life or creature or being is ever lost in the shuffle of a cosmic mechanics.

q52

To even sense the existence of that kind of reality, however, we must have already ‘opened the doorway’ to Framed-Mind-2, and begun to use the magical approach as our natural instinctive way of dealing with experience.

The Entire Picture of Physical Life Experienced from Our Own Viewpoint

But its complexity, its order and magnificence of structure and design should be understood as composing but one example of the infinite number of realities, each constructed by the propensities and characteristics of its own nature and the nature of its own consciousness.

x0

The word “unconscious” is in a fashion meaningless. There are endless versions of consciousness, of course, with their own worlds, forming organizations of meaning and purpose. Some of these mingle with our own and vise versa. The “inner structure” is one of consciousness, and the deepest questions can eventually only be approached by granting the existence of inner references.

The nature of time, questions concerning the beginning or ending of the universe — these cannot be approached with any certainty by studying life’s exterior conditions, for the physical references themselves are merely the manifestations of inner psychological activity. We are aware of the universe only insofar as it impinges upon our perception. What lies outsides of that perception remains unknown to us. It seems to us, then, that the world began — or must have begun — at some point in the past, but that is like supposing that one piece of a cake is the whole cake , which was baked in one oven and consumed perhaps in an afternoon.

x12

The inner references of reality involve a different kind of experience entirely, with organizational patterns that mix and merge at every conceivable point. We tune our consciousness while we sleep as one might tune a piano, so that in waking reality, it clearly perceives the proper notes and values that build up into physical experience. Those inner fields of reference in which we have our existence are completely changing themselves as our experience is added to them, and our own identity was couched in those references before birth as we understand it.

We are one conscious version of oneself, creating along with all of our contemporaries the realities of the times. When I use the term “contemporaries,” I refer to all of the species. We read our consciousness in certain fashions, but it is quite possible to read the consciousness of the world in other ways also.

x21

Scientists do not know how many species exist on earth — only that they total in the billions. If we read it sideways, so to speak, we would still end up with an orderly universe, but one in which the nature of identity would read completely differently, stressing adjacent subjective communications of a conscious kind that form other kinds or patterns of subjectivity and psychological continuity. These result in the formation of “personalities” or entities who are aware of their own identities by following different pathways than our own, while also in their way contributing to the formation of our universe even as we do.

x39

Our numbering of the species is highly capricious. Again, we recognize as alive only those varieties or life that fall within certain ranges of attention. We objectify and diversify. The lines drawn between the self and what is non-self, between an organism and its environment, are highly arbitrary on our part. There are psychological patterns, therefore, that completely escape our notice because they do not follow the conventions that we have established. These combine what we diversify, so that we have hidden psychological values or psychological beings that combine the properties of the environment and the properties of selfhood in other combinations than those we know.

x26

They would seem to be the spirits of nature, as we would be more or less bound to interpret them from our viewpoint. They would certainly be psychological relatives, but with their own time schemes, languages, and psychological affiliations. These do exist along with the kinds of consciousness that we recognize within the structure of physical life. When we dream, however, we often come in contact with these cousins of consciousness. It is not simply that they communicate with us, or we with them, so much as it is that in sleep the conventional properties that we have learned are somewhat loosened and abandoned. We see “the lights around the corner,” so to speak. We see a species of consciousness, a species that remain unexplained in any normal explanations of evolution, and these hint at the communications that exist as all levels, protecting not only the genetic references necessary to our own kind , but the combinations of other forms of organization that exist adjacent to our own, yet connected to them. We have often misread such references, and many of our legends of good and evil spirits, monsters and strange varieties of artificial creatures, appear in folklore.

At one time, however, we encountered such other formations in a different light, or course, seeing many similarities between their behavior and ours — certain characteristic ways of perceiving at least some experience that elicited our response and recognition.

x28

At one time, then, we were more open in a fashion to the kinds of consciousness that we admitted into our circle of reality. At one time, in those terms, we did not draw the lines as finely as we do now. Instead we included such cousins of consciousness into our midst, accepting a kind of comradeship– for to some extent at least we could see the different versions of humanity that resulted from a change of focus, an adjacent affiliation of humanized energy with the environment. Quite simply, we felt that in certain terms we had other brothers and sisters in the world that were like us but unlike us, that put together the contents of the universe in their own fashions. Such species, of course, can nowhere appear within the dictates of evolution or be perceived as realities except under those conditions when we relax our usual conventions of perception and behavior.

x23

Nevertheless, encounters between us occur frequently — in the dream state as stated, in alterations of our usual focus, and in our arts, where we are less arbitrary in our definitions. As we began to bring our own physical reality into harder, clearer focus, we stopped with our own view of human consciousness, shutting off completely and rather arbitrarily those other elements in order to more clearly frame and define the boundaries of physical order. It seems to us now that such personalities are not physically perceivable, but at one time we could bring them into the range of our perception.

x27

We ended our classifications where we did, however, preferring to see human as the king of intelligence. This meant that we abruptly drew the line where it now seems it must have been drawn. We continued that companionship, however, at other levels of activity, levels that are still open and that must be taken into consideration whenever we approach any discussion of dreaming and the dreaming world.

x36

I have not for good reason touched upon certain material because I felt my blog readers were not ready for it.

As my blog reader’s abilities grow, however, of course you will sense the outlines of other realities, the glimmerings of other worlds. You will sense these cousins of consciousness in one way or another — these environments that seem real but not real, these further extensions of possible experience — and some may decide that one must be very cautious: One must be prudent, one must take his or her time, he /she must range but carefully — and certainly to some extent such feelings cut down upon his or her spontaneity.

x29

The cautions are natural enough under the restrictions man and woman usually places upon consciousness. One can carry his or her protection and safety wherever he or she goes. It is a natural grace, characteristic of consciousness of any kind. Its protection and validity are always honored. You are safe wherever one goes. His or her psychological stance is honored wherever he or she goes.

I will have more to say on this subject in my next blog. These few statements. however, will help him or her and help him/her enlarge on an inner circle of acquaintanceship with friendly colleagues that belong in those other categories, but indeed are friendly colleagues as well.

x30

Dreams: Something in me / ebbs and tides, / as if I let myself / for a while / be washed away / out to sea / while leaving / some spidery shell / upon the shore.

A Mixture of Non-Predictable and Predictable Operates in Genetic Patterning

The curious mixture of non-predictable and predictable activity operates in a genetic patterning , In which the genetic systems are largely set up to achieve the retention of specific characteristics, and yet can also demonstrate behavior that seems to be genetically unfaithful, distorted, or to introduce alterations that might appear to be travesties upon genetic integrity.

a2

Those odd genetic happenings, however, as I have tried to explain, often provide a resiliency and a widening of probabilities that are most necessary for overall genetic balance. Dream actions can indeed — and often do — affect genetic alterations, acting as triggers for altered cellular action. There is a give-and-take between the seemingly separate mental and physical aspects of our lives at every level of experience, and at every level within nature’s seeming boundaries.

There are decisions in which each individual plays a part that are made in fields of activity that we usually do not even realize exist.

a3

The people of a nation can at any given moment decide to activate or experience a particular event almost entirely in the physical realm, or to separate its elements in such a way that half of it is experienced physically and the other half in dream reality. Transformations of energy occur of course constantly, so that say, a probable physical storm can instead appear as an economic one.

It can appear as an emotional storm on the part of large numbers of people. It can instead appear as a series, say, of frightening dreams. At each point of its existence such an event can weave in and out of such manifestations, largely dissipating itself. An adverse physical situation, such as an illness, may turn into “a frightening dream,” yet in all such cases the necessary standards of self-integrity are maintained.

a6

The same alterations apply of course for fortunate events, which may be experienced through full physical expression, or through a series of manifestations that might also involve social or economic happenings, or the occurrence of splendid weather conditions, — the insertion of excellent, almost perfect summerlike days, or whatever. The predictable and non-predictable serve, then, to form the boundaries of physical experience.

The more open we are to such ideas the greater the flow of our experience can be.

a7

We should never accept as fact a theory that contradicts our own experience. Man’s and woman’s experience includes, for example, all kinds of behavior for which science has no answers. That is well and good. Science cannot be blamed for saying that its methods are not conducive to the study of this or that area of experience — but science should at least be rapped on the knuckles smartly if it automatically rejects such behavior as valid, legitimate or real, or when it attempts to place such events outside of the realm of actuality. Science can justly be reprimanded when it tries to pretend that man’s and woman’s experience is limited to those events that science can explain.

It is instead, or course, quite possible that our predictable world exists not inspite of but because of those surprising, unpredictable, unofficial occurrences. There is a kind of larger spontaneous order of which the seemingly unpredictable elements of our world provide their own clues.

a4

By taking notice of seemingly unpredictable events, by changing our focus, we can indeed begin to sense the larger patterns of such a reality. And that reality leaves many traces in our own experience. It  everywhere provides hints and clues as to its own actuality and our own participation in varying fields of expression that have not been given any official recognition.

Within the patterns of human experience, then, lies evidence of man’s and woman’s greater ability: He or she rubs shoulders with his or her own deeper understanding whenever he or she remembers, say, a precognitive dream, and out-of-body — whenever he or she feels the intrusion or infusion of knowledge into his or her mind from other than physical sources. Such a creature could not be the puppet of a genetic engineering accidentally manufactured in a universe that was itself meaningless.

a1

If man and woman paid attention to his or her own subjective behavior, to those feelings of identification with nature that persistently arise, then half of the dictates of both the evolutionists and the creationists would automatically fall away, for they would appear nonsensical. It is not a matter of outlining a whole new series of methods that will allow us to increase our psychic abilities, or to remember our dreams, or to perform out-of-body gymnastics. It is rather a question or a matter of completely altering our approach to life, so that we no longer block our such natural spontaneous activity.

e42

I don’t want to be simplistic here, but for some years I’ve been concerned that those living in large metropolitan centers miss a certain daily, vital participation in the very environment within which by far most of the life forms on earth exist. I’m not sure what percentage of the human population now lives in urban areas, but it must be high, and climbing. Yet beliefs rule all: Evidently, even with all of the challenges that crowding can set up, it just as natural for people to congregate as it is for them to live spread out — perhaps even more so, if facet of their behavior can be said to be “more natural” than another!

When the leaders of Iraq order an invasion

They proclaimed that the war had really begun over 1,300 years ago, at the battle of Quaddisiya in A.D. 637, when Muslim Arabs drove the Persians, who are Indo-European, from Iraq. (Iraq was called Mesopotamia then, and until 1935 Persia was the name for Iran.)

m7

In a passionate, bloody series of events later in the seventh century, a split occurred in which the Muslim religion was divided into two main branches, the Shiite and the Sunni. Now Iran is ruled by the Shiites, and is religiously oriented; Iraq is ruled by the Sunnis, and is more secular and socialistic. Iranian leaders emphasize the religious aspects of the war. Iraq the ethnic. The rulers of each country have urged the citizens of the other to revolt against their leaders. There is much disillusionment in Iran over the excesses of the Shiite clergy. In Iran martyrdom is encouraged — at home, in the war, and in terroristic activity abroad. Iraq has been accused of using chemical warfare (courtesy of the Russians) against its enemy. The Muslim world, then, is hardly a monolithic entity; as within Iran itself, the myriad consciousness making up the whole framework are much too varied for the to be true.

At least partially because of their brutal history. Iranians — Persians — are strongly self-centered; preservation of the self is given an overriding impetus. The world is seen as being full of peril. Causality, the interrelation of cause and effect, is often ignored or misunderstood in the Iranian quest for immediate advantage. Influence counts for much more than obligation; the concepts of long-term mutual trust is seen as basically adversarial; goodwill means little. Yet, such egocentric characteristics often are sublimated into the seemingly contradictory practice of martyrdom — the two are united within the Iranian interpretation of Muslim theology. In a land ruled by a body of theocratic law the needs of the country must ultimately prevail, as in the case of attack from without, say. There is no area in which Islamic precepts do not apply.

m2

Rather ironically, not all Muslims want the Americans to leave the Middle East, as the terrorists have announced they must do. And the government of Iran, in spite of its great hatred for our country, is pragmatic enough to join it in a very efficient exchange of large sums of money; these transactions, in part to settle business claims against Iran, are a portion of the arrangements made to free the American hostages.

m15

Attend to what is before us, for it is there for a reason. In each person’s life, and in our own, at each and every point of our existence. The solutions to our problems, or the means of achieving those solutions to our problems, or the means of achieving those solutions, are always as apparent — or rather as present — within our days as is any given problems itself. What I mean is quite simple: The solutions already exist in our lives. We may not have put them together yet, or organized them in the necessary ways. The solutions lie in all areas with which we are normally concerned — mail, blogs, news, our abilities. When we attend to what is there with the proper magical attitude of mind, then the altered organizations can take place.

m1

A belief in a ‘god who provides,’ by whatever name, is indeed a psychological requirement for the good health of the body and mind. Unfortunately, in our society we need every good suggestion we can get, to offset fears and negative conditioning.

Dreams Promote The Conservation of Knowledge

In a fashion dreams allow for a curious mixture of learning processes, while at the same time serving to introduce surprising developments.  That is, dreams promote the conservation of knowledge. They are an aid in the development of skills. They conserve available information by weaving it through the other structures of our experience.

c11

At the same time dreams have their startling qualities, promoting the insertion of unexpected developments, in which case they appear to deal with the breaking down of conserving principles. In this fashion they also mirror our more exterior behavior, conserving what we know already, and yet introducing new patterns, new spontaneous orders that would sometimes seem to run against conservative issues. They reinforce the past, for example, when we dream of past situations. They also seem to undermine the integrity of the past by showing it to us in an unfamiliar light, mixing it with present and future tints.

Many people might wish that I would add many more methods to help study dreams and their nature. In such a manner also dreams suggest nature’s spontaneous order throughout the centuries, and allow us to look at the species in a truer light. Our lives, for that matter, are dependent upon the curious relationships that are involved: We would not get by for one day if the conserving principles and the unexpected did not exist exactly as they do. There is so much we must learn and remember in life, and so much we must spontaneously forget — otherwise, creation itself would be relatively meaningless.

c9

We perform far more actions in a day than we recall. We do not know how many times we lift our arms, speak a sentence, think a thought. With the kind of consciousness we possess, an over-reliance upon conserving principles could then end up in a reduction of life’s processes.

In private living and in so-called evolutionary terms, however, life necessitates the intrusion of surprising events, unforeseen actions, leaps of insight or behavior that could not come alone from any accumulation of knowledge or simple conservation of energy, but seem to suggest entirely different new developments.

c14

Dreams often serve as the frameworks in which sudden remarkable insights appear that later enable a man or a woman to envision the world in a way that was not earlier predictable. The world’s activities always include the insertion of surprising events. This is true at all levels of nature, from microscopic to macroscopic. All systems are open. The theories of both evolutionists and creationists strongly suggest and reinforce beliefs in the consecutive nature of time, and in a universe that begins in such-and-such an end — but there are horizontal events that appear in the true activity of nature, and there are horizontal entry points and exit points in all experience. These allow for the insertion of unofficial new energy, the introduction of surprising events.

Again, it is very difficult to explain such activities. They can affect — and do affect — the rise and fall of civilizations. We are used to reading nature in a particular manner, however, and to experiencing events at surface levels. We are naturally equipped to appreciate a far richer blend, and as I have often blogged about, we are ourselves possessed of a need to explore the subjective ramifications of our existence.

c16

As “the times change” we tire of the old ways. Even our dreams begin to reach out into new avenues. The relationships between nature’s natural conservative behavior and nature’s need for innovation are stretched. More and more remarkable events begin to occur, both in private and mass experience, in physical and mental behavior, in the events, say, of both stars and human.

People want, then, to throw aside old structures of belief. They yearn, often without recognizing it, for the remembered knowledge of early childhood, when it seems that they experienced for a time a dimension of experience in which the unexpected was taken for granted, when “magical events” occurred quite naturally. They begin to look at the structure of their lives in a different fashion, that attempts to evoke from nature, and from their own natures, some graceful effortlessness, some freedom nearly forgotten. They begin to turn toward a more natural and a more magical approach to their own lives. At such times the conserving elements in nature and in society itself do not seem as strong as they did before. Surprising events that were earlier covered up or ignored seem to appear with greater frequency, and everywhere a new sense of quickness and acceleration gradually alters the expectations of people in regard to the events of their own lives, and to the behavior they expect from others. We are in such times now.

c12

Old honored explanations suddenly appear withered. Unpredictable remarkable events seem more possible. The kind of work done in dreams to some extent is changed. They become more active, more intrusive. Predictable behavior, even of the natural elements, is harder to take for granted. Man begins to sense more and more at such times the vaster dimensions of behavior upon which that appearance of conservation resides.

c17

There are considerable changes that occur under such conditions in man’s and woman’s subjective experience. Man’s and woman’s feelings about himself or herself change too, but little by little his and her trust in unpredictability grows. He or she is more willing to assign himself or herself to it. The species begins its own kind of psychic migration. It begins to sense within itself further frontiers and the possibilities for action. It begins to yearn for the exploration of mental lands, and it sends portions of itself out as couriers.

c23

I am that kind of courier. There are many in all areas of life, and this involves not only an excitement on the part of our  own species, but the same kind of curiosity and excitement on the part of other species as well. Again, most difficult to explain — but those connections that exist between all species and the environment are themselves affected. The horizontal communications stretch and expand to allow for later developments in terms of probabilities, for consciousness always knows itself in more than one context, and it is possible for nature to experience itself in ways that would seem to be most improbable when the properties of  conservation and learning are at their strongest spring.

Dreams Occur at Many Levels

Dreams occur at so many levels of reality that it is quite impossible to describe their true scope. For one thing, that scope includes levels that are consciously unknown to us. Dreams serve as backup systems also, for example, in the important communications between various peoples or nations — and, particularly when physical communication is cut off between such groups, dreams provide the continuation of information’s flow from one part of the species to another.

l35

There are dreams of different import, some triggered genetically, that serve as sparks for particular kinds of behavior — dreams, in other words, that literally span the centuries in that regard, coiled latently in the very chromosomes; and no level of consciousness is without some kind of participation in dream states. In that regard even electrons, for example, dream. Dreaming touches upon both microscopic and macroscopic events, or realities, and is not simply a human characteristic, appropriately appearing within our own range or within our own species. It is instead one area of subjective experience that is everywhere prevailing within the universe.

As I have mentioned many times, animals then dream, as do plants, insects, and all form of life. All molecular constructions exhibit that certain kind of introspective activity, as if the inner working of some giant computer was intimately in touch not only with its own programming and the probabilities connected with it, but with a deep psychological awareness of the activities of the electrons and various visible and invisible particles that form its own physical construction.

l3

We are bound to have, then, many larger dream formations that can only be called group dreams — subjective events in which our own dreams happen, and in which our own dreams take part. We expect all of the elements of the physical world, however, diverse, to fit together and for a certain kind of permanency and order. It should be no surprise, then, that this same kind of “fitting together” includes subjective life also — or that, say, our private dreams are also fragments in a vaster dream reality. They are as important to the operation of that reality as electrons are to our physical one, providing inner pathways for the accumulation of wisdom and pleasure.

There are certain kinds of dreams in which the various species then communicate, and in which the energies of the environment and its inhabitants merge. These include a kind of horizontal psychological extension, the translation of one kind of dream into another kind — the transference of information from one system to another, in which the symbols themselves come alive.

l16

I can only hope to evoke some feeling within you that is reminiscent of our own actual behavior at those hidden levels of dreaming activity, but they have remained highly pertinent in the development of all species with their environments, keeping the intents and purposes of one alive in the other. I have told in previous blogs, that in actuality, now, no genetic knowledge is gone from the earth. It does not vanish. It is retained in latent form within a kind of backup system, so that in terms of probabilities each species carries within its own genetic patterns the blueprints and specializations of each other’s genetic sequence.

Those sequences follow the pursuits of value fulfillment so smoothly that they can be reactivated whenever the conditions are fortunate — for even the animals are not concerned with simple survival alone, not the plants, but with what I can only call emotional qualities: qualities that seek a full appreciation and creative extension of those conditions of consciousness that stamp each species as itself and yet join it with all others.

l29

In a fashion our own dreams operate or appear as electrons in other realities. That is, they change their form, their subjective force or direction, and become part of the working mechanics of the universe. The same applies to our own thoughts. They are not “wasted” after we have thought them, or simply discarded. They do not become extinct either, but go on to serve other functions in the universe than those which we are presently aware.

l37

This all involves a lush multitudinous creativity. The pleasure principle can probably be likened most to the latent appreciation of beauty that is everywhere apparent if we look for it: the ecstasy of each form of life for the wonders of its own existence, in which love’s values go beyond themselves, and yet a condition in which each species or life form “realizes” that its own fulfillment adds immeasurably to the existence of all other forms.

l33

We did manage at least to hint of some material that almost exists on the edge — the very edge — of any rational understanding.

Man and Woman explored the World in the Dreaming State long before they explored it Physically

Such dreams gave him and her the assurance that other lands existed outside of his and her own, and spurred him and her onward into those physical expeditions in which the species has always taken a particular delight.

e6

A man or woman might be while dreaming suddenly in strange territory, looking at the sky from a different viewpoint, with say, a familiar river nowhere in sight, and with a mountain where ordinarily a plain might be. This was in a way as startling an experience as it would be to us to find ourselves on some distant planet. (We do, for that matter, explore space in the same fashion, and on at least some occasions our own “visitors from outer space” are dream travelers from other dimensions of reality.)

In such a fashion man and woman learned the location of the oceans upon the earth — or at least was given the  assurance that such large bodies of water existed, along with clues as to their locations, and the placement of the stars overhead.

e2

Also in the same manner dreams were an aid in navigation, so that they served to let sailors know when land was near before it could be physically perceived — and there is no human activity to which dreams and group dreams have not contributed.

They were of great aid, of course, in human politics, so that through dreams  the intents of tribal leaders, say, were known to the others. Some people within the tribe specialized in such dreams, and again, dream content was and is directed by the individual intents, purposes and interests of the dreamer. In a certain manner dreaming, then, helped sharpen such individual tendencies while still directing them toward the public value fulfillment. The person interested most in herbs and plant life would also find that nightly dream excursions might find the dreamer examining strange herbs in another location than the native one. Or he or she might be given knowledge as to how the herbs could best be used for healing purposes. People are natural mimics, as are some animals and birds, so when tribal members related their dreams, they did not just tell them but acted them out with great mobility, carefully mimicking whatever animals or people or elements of land they may have encountered.

e11

The origins of drama began in just that fashion. Tribal leaders were usually chosen only after long “dream investigations,” in which the new leader’s name cropped up, say, time and time again in the people’s dreams. They expected to receive counsel from their dreams, such information was then aired and shared, studied and examined along with ll physical considerations that applied, before important decisions were made.

We do still continue such activity, again, although we have turned conscious minds away from those directions. Most of it does not become conscious because we do not want it to. In some areas, however, with the acceleration of physical travel, certain kinds of dreams have become more highly pertinent. Families in our society are often broken up, parents and children living quite apart in other portions of the country or in different countries entirely, so dreams that connect us with such relatives have risen to the fore, so to speak. People often keep track of changes in hometowns that they may not have visited for twenty years except in the dream state, when they familiarize themselves with the alterations that have happened, visit beloved streets and houses, or view old classmates.

e3

Very few people make any attempt to check out such information in physical terms. There is an entire global dream network, in other words, that goes quite unrecognized — one of spectacular organization in which exchanges of information occur that give us the basis for the formation of recognized physical events.

If small families kept track of their own family dreams, for example, they could discover unsuspected correlations and sense the interplay of subjective and objective drama with which they are always psychologically involved. Notice what kind of information you seek out from the internet, for example. Do you read the headline page and ignore sports, or vice versa? Do you read gossip column? The obituary? Do you seek out stories of lurid crime, or look for future incidents of political chicanery? The answers will show us the kind of material we look for most often. We will to some extent specialize in the same kind of information when we dream. We will organize the contents of our mind and the information available to us according to our own intents and purposes.

e54

One person’s dreams, therefore, while his or her own, will still fit into an important notch in the dreams of a given family. One person might, because of his or her own interests, seek largely from dreams warnings of difficulty or trouble, and therefore be the family’s dream watchguard — the one who has, say, the nightmares for everyone else. That person will also serve a somewhat similar role in the waking state, as a member of a family. The question in such instances is the reason for such a person’s over-concern and alarm in the first place — why the intense interest in such possible catastrophes, or in crime or whatever? — and the answer lies in an examination of the person’s feelings and beliefs about the nature of existence itself.

As far as group dreaming is concerned, however, there are still some people who have served as watchdogs in that regard, while others even in the dream state operate as healers or teachers or explorers or whatever. There is no craft that was not first conceived of by an individual dreamer, who later transferred it to the social world or activity.

e38

In the dreaming state, then the needs and desires of families, communities and countries are well known. The dream state serves as a rich source for the world’s knowledge, and is also therefore responsible for the outgrowth of its technology. This is a highly important point, for “the technological world out there” was at one time the world of dreams. The discoveries and inventions that made the industrial world possible were always latent in man’s and woman’s mind, and represented an inner glittering landscape of probability that he and she brought into actualization through the use of dreams — the intuitive an the conscious manipulation of material that was at one time latent.

Value fulfillment will always provide inner directions that remind man and woman constantly of the best ways in which such technology can be used. The need to possess such knowledge in uppermost in men’s and women’s mind now, and so it also becomes a vital dream topic or subject. In the dream state, then, to one extent or another man and woman seeks solutions to the problems of his and her age.

e41

The entire idea of the magical approach, is of itself sustaining.

It should remind us of the true effortlessness that is in a fashion responsible for our very existence. When you become overly concerned or worried in any area, remember that we are thinking those thoughts while the process of thinking is utterly effortless. That realization alone can further remind us that the conscious mind does not have to have all the information required. It only needs to have the faith that means are available — even if those are beyond its own scope of activity.

e47

There is an entire global dream network, in other words, that goes quite unrecognized — one of spectacular organization in which exchange of information occur that give us the basis for the formation of recognized physical events.

e544

People could be helped to consciously realize their participation in this worldwide dream organization. Why, I wonder, couldn’t the nations of the world set up cooperative studies to verify its existence? I think that science and religion would be violently opposed to the idea, at least in the beginning, for it would challenge many rigid beliefs held by each of those disciplines. In the deepest terms of course, such a study would actually validate the sources of science and religion. The experiment has the potential for significantly broadening our conscious understanding of the world we’re creating.

e37

Setting up such a global organization to study dreams, would probably require a decade of arguing among nations. Would governments gather the information, or independent agencies? How would all of this be paid for, administered and analyzed? How long would it take to acquire statistically significant data? Would the peoples of the world cooperate? I say they most enthusiastically would, for the dream research would have a sound intuitive basis: It would uncover and reinforce many deeper aspects of our individual and collective beings — and I know of few things more important than that consciously we understand ourselves as well as we can in order to meet the great challenges we’re creating.  But, imagine trying to win the cooperation of the nations of the world for such an undertaking! Actually, it would be quite an advance of we could even agree to begin talking about such a study.

Everything That Is, Creates Its Reality As It Goes Along

Each world has its own impetus, yet all are ultimately connected the true dimensions of a divine creativity would be unendurable for anyone consciousness of whatever import, and so that splendor is infinitely dimensionalized, worlds spiralling outward with each ‘moment’ of a cosmic breath: with the separation of worlds a necessity: and with individual and mass comprehension always growing at such a rate that Everything That Is multiplies itself at microseconds, building both pasts and futures and other time scales we do not recognize. Each is a reality in itself, with its own potentials, and with no individual consciousness, however minute, ever lost.

s31

Violence will always be used creatively. We cannot be destructive even when we try. Beyond that, however, in the meantime the violence that we do, we do to ourselves. We are a part of Everything That Is — of all the nature that we know and experience of the world that we know, and even a part of the world that we know that we do not like. If we rip off the wing of a fly, we  are oneself less. If we purposefully, now, or with malice, step upon an ant, then to the extent of our malice we step upon oneself all unknowing. Violence will always be used creatively, but if we do not understand this — and at our present rate of development we do not — then any violence is violence against oneself. This applies to each of us, for when we think in terms of violence we think in terms of malice or aggression. Despite all man and woman does, he and she cannot really work any destruction — but while he or she believes in destruction, then to that extent he or she minimizes what he or she is, and must work harder to use creativity.

All action is creative and ever-occurring — the only way I can get these ideas across . All energy is personified. When we look at atoms and stars we are looking at simultaneous action. We are looking into the past and into the future at the same time, as we think of it. From the landscape of the brain we are trying to look at the landscape of the mind.

s3

We do not perceive the consciousness within the self. We do not perceive the consciousness within a star, either — yet the star is the physical materialization in our reality of another kind of consciousness, and all we perceive of it.

s9

The main issue of course is not to project negatively into the future, for there we are borrowing trouble. With physical conditions already apparent in the present, we can at least realize that while these confront us with a certain evidence, the evidence will indeed change — and can change, and is changing the minute we realize that the evidence, while present, is not inevitable all the evidence available.

s27

The body is at each and every stage also filled with health and vitality. Those rules do not change. We all are safe and protected. Those reassurances are highly important here now.

The Importance of dreams in Man’s and Woman’s early background

We have a hand in forming all events to one extent or another, and at certain levels we are therefore involved in the construction of those global events that affect the world, whether they be of so-called natural or cultural nature.

p6

In earlier blogs I spoke about the importance of dreams in man’s and woman’s early background, and their importance to us as a species. Here, I want to stress the social aspects of dreams, and to point out the fact that dreams also show us some of the processes that are involved in the actual formation of physical events: We actually come into an event, therefore, long before the event physically happens, at other levels of consciousness, and a good deal of this prior activity takes place in the state of dreaming.

Yet (remembering what I said about seeming contradictions), our dreams are also social events of a kind, and the state of dreaming can almost be thought of as an inner public forum in which each man and woman has his or her say, and in which each opinion, however unpopular, is taken into consideration. If we want to call any one dream event a private event, then I would have to tell you that that private event actually was our personal contribution to a larger multi-sided dream event, many-layered, so that one level might deal with the interests of a group to which we belong — say our family, or our political or religious organization — reaching ” outward” to the realm of national government and world affairs. As our private conscious life is lived in a community setting of one kind or another as a rule, so do our dreams take place in the same context, so that as we dream for ourselves, to some extent we also dream for our own family, for our community, and for the world.

p19

Group dreaming was at one time taken for granted as a natural human characteristic — in a tribe, for example, when new locations were being sought, perhaps in time of drought. The various tribal members would have dreams tackling whatever aspect of the problem that best suited his or her abilities and personal intents. The dreamers would travel our-of-body in various directions to see the extent of drought conditions, and to ascertain the best direction for the tribe to take in any needed migration.

Their dreams would then be shared by the tribe in the morning, or at special meetings, when each dreamer would give a rendition of the dream or dreams that seemed to be involved. In the same way, other dreamers would simply check with the dreamers of other villages or tribes — perhaps a hundred or even more miles distant. Some such dreams were extremely direct, others were clothed in symbolism according to the style of the dreamer, but in any case the dream was understood to have a public significance as well as a private one.

p12

The same still applies, though often dreams themselves are forgotten. Instead, for example, for news or for advice we watch our morning television news, which provides us with a kind of manufactured dream that to some extent technologically serves the same purpose. Instead of sending camera-people and newspaper people to the farthest corners of the earth, early man and woman sent out aspects of himself or herself to gather the news and to form it into dream dramas. Oftentimes much of the material did not need to become conscious: It was “unconsciously” acted upon, turned directly into action. Now such dreams simply act as backup systems, rising to the fore whenever they are needed. their purpose was and is to increase the value fulfillment of the species and of the individual.

Psychologists often speak of the needs of man and woman. Here I would like to speak instead of the pleasures of man and woman, for one of the distinguishing characteristics of value fulfillment is its pleasurable effect. It is not so much that man and woman or nature seeks to satisfy needs, but to exuberantly, rambunctiously seek pleasure — and through following its pleasure each organism finds and satisfies its need as well. Far more is involved in the experience of life, however, than the satisfaction of bare needs, for life is everywhere possessed with a desire toward quality — a quality that acknowledges the affirming characteristics of pleasure itself.

p2

In our terms, there is a great pleasure to be found in both work and play, in excitement and calm, in exertion and rest, yet the word “pleasure” itself has often fallen into disrepute, and is frowned at by the virtuous.

p1

One of the main purposes of dreaming, therefore, is to increase man’s and woman’s pleasure, which means to increase the quality of living itself. Dreams are mental work and play combined, psychic and emotional rich creative dramas. They also involved us in the most productive of enterprises as we begin to play with versions of events that are being considered for physical actualization, as one a personal level we “view” the probable events which our family, tribe, organization, community and country will actualize.

p8

As physical creatures we human beings cannot bear to directly confront the basic, vast, unimaginably awesome and creative consciousness of All That Is. Since we cannot bear to face the great raw power of nuclear energy either. I’ve often wondered whether this situation can be an earthly, imperfect and time-ridden analog to what must be the reality of All That Is.

Inner Backbone of Perception

Master events are those that most significantly affect our system of reality, even though the original action was not physical but took place in the inner dimension. Most events appear both in time and out of it, their action distributed between an inner and outer field of expression. Usually we are aware only of events’ exterior cores. The inner processes escape us.

p23

Those inner processes, however, also give many clues as to some native abilities that we have used “in the past” as a species. Those inner processes do sometimes emerge, then. Here is an example.

One morning last weekend I found myself suddenly and vividly thinking about some married friends. They lived out of town, separated in time by a drive of approximately half and hour. I found myself wishing that the friends lived closer, and I was suddenly filled with a desire to see them. I imagined the couple at the house, and surprised myself by thinking that I might indeed call them later in the day and invite them down for the evening, even though my wife and I had both decided against guests that weekend.

m9

Furthermore, I did not like the idea of making an invitation on such short notice. Then I became aware that those particular thoughts were intrusive, completely out of context with my immediately previous ones, for only a moment or so earlier I had been congratulating myself precisely because I had made no plans for the day or evening at all that would involve guests or other such activities. Very shortly I forgot the entire affair. Then, however, about fifteen minutes later I found the same ideas returning, this time more intently.

They lasted perhaps five minutes, I noticed them and forgot them once again. This time, however, I decided not to call my friends, and I went about my business. In about a half hour the same mental activity returned, and, finding myself struck by this, I mentioned the episode to my wife and again cast it from my mind.

p0

By the time it was somewhat later in the day, my wife and I ate lunch, and the mail arrived. There was a letter written the morning before (on Friday) by the same friends that had been so much in my mind. They mentioned going on a trip (on Saturday), and specifically asked if they could visit that same afternoon. From the way the letter was written, it seemed as if the friends — call them Drick and Dorian — had already started on their journey that (Saturday) morning, and would stop in San Diego on their return much later toward evening. There was no time to answer the letter, of course.

Drick and Dorian would be on the road, it seemed, unreachable by cellphone, though they had included the number of their answering service, and had also written that they would call before leaving — yet no such call had been received.

p14

It would be simple enough, of course, to ascribe my thoughts and feelings to more coincidence. I remembered the vividness of my feelings at the time, however. It looked as if Drick and Dorian were indeed going to arrive almost as it I had in fact called and invited them. That evening the visit did take place. Actually, some work had prevented the couple from leaving when they intended. Instead, they called later from their home to say that they were just beginning their trip, and would stop on their way.

I was well prepared for the call by then, and for the visit. Now the visit and my earlier feelings and thoughts were part of the same event, except that my subjective experience gave me clues as to the inner processes by which all events take place. More is involved than simple question: Did I perceive the visit precognitively? More is involved than the question: Did I perceive my information directly from the minds of my friends, or from the letter itself, which had already been mailed, of course, and was on its way to me at the time?

p15

What we have is a kind of inner backbone of perception — a backup program, so to speak, an inner perceptive mechanism with its own precise psychological tuner that in one way or another operates within the field of our intent. This is somewhat like remote sensing, or like an interior radar equipment that operates in a psychological field of attention, so that we are somewhat aware of the existence of certain events that concern us as they come into the closet range of probabilities with which we are connected.

In a certain fashion we “step into the event” at that level. We accept or reject it as a probability. We make certain adjustments, perhaps altering particular details, but we step into and become part of the inner processes — affecting, say, the shape or size or nature of the event before it becomes a definite physical actuality.

p17

For centuries that is the main way in which man and woman dealt with events of his or her life or tribe or village. Our modern methods of communication are in fact modeled after our inner ones. My thoughts almost blended in enough to go relatively unnoticed. They were almost innocuous enough to be later accepted as coincidence. They did have, however, an extra intentness and vitality and peculiar insistence — qualities that I have learned are indicative of unusual psychological activity. The point is that in most such cases the subjective recognition of an approaching event flows so easily and transparently into our attention, and fits in so smoothly with the events of the day, as to go unnoticed. We help mold the nature and shape of events without realizing it, overlooking those occasions when the processes might show themselves.

Even the conscious mind contains much more information about the structure of events than we realize we possess. The physical perceiving apparatuses of all organizations carry their own kind of inner systems of communication, allowing events to be manipulated on a worldwide basis before they take on what appears to be their final definitive physical occurrences in time and space.

p19

Individually and globewide, value fulfillment is in a fashion the purpose of all events. Value fulfillment, again, is the impetus that drives the wheels of nature, so to speak. As the origin of our world did indeed emerge from the “world of dreams,” so the true root of all events lie in such subjective activities, and the answers to individual challenges and problems are always within our grasp, ready to appear in physical actuality.

p3

In my next blog I hope to show the importance of value fulfillment on our own life, and give clues that will allow us to take better advantage of our own subjective and objective opportunities for such development.

Mental Work is Dependent on Physical Vigor

I thought it was my duty to cut down mobility in order to write my blogs. Now I see how much impulses are conducive to just typing, for God’s sake; imagine typing and seeing with ease, just thinking about what I’m thinking about, instead of trying to get my fingers on the proper keys.

k24

As a mystic I can have motivations toward exploring certain avenues of the human condition that must of us don’t have. My view of basic reality is my view, and even I must still grope at times to understand my chosen role.

In the beginning I was nervous and anxious about directly coming out with many of the ideas — which at the same time I fervently and even passionately believe in. I fear that if I go too far, telling it like it is, that the establishment will just cut off our platform.

k23

Left alone I’d end up taking away people’s comfort blankets, and I felt bad about that, even while I knew that those philosophic blankets were wormy, had to go. And I do see that I’m offering something far better. Not only offering our world creative new ways by which to understand reality, but in my uncertainty about what I am doing, I feel that I must prove ideas to the world all by myself — something that few people have to do in such an all-encompassing manner.

As the Mona Lisa is more real than, say, a normal object or the materials that compose it, so is all good or great art more than its own physical manifestation. Consider art as a natural phenomenon constructed by the psyche, a trans-species of perception and consciousness that changes, enlarges and expands life’s experiences and casts them in a different light, offering new opportunities for creating action and new solutions to problems by inserting new, original data.

k7

To confine such creativity to solve life’s problems primarily, or to direct it primarily in that fashion, limits it and holds it in an improper focus; shackles it. We have to beyond that — back to stressing the creative larger-than-life aspects. Otherwise all we have is a better problem-solving framework. The larger view is that art, by being itself, is bigger than life while springing from it; that my blogs go beyond that simply by being themselves. They automatically put people in a different, vaster psychological space, another frame reference, in which a good number of problems vanish or simply do not apply.

I don’t have to ‘live up’ to anything. I don’t have to ‘make the material work,’ or prove through my actions that it does, because it proves itself in the way that creativity does, by being beyond levels of true-false references. Otherwise I’m at cross-purposes with myself.

k6

The purpose of each of our life, and each life, in its being. That being may include certain actions, but the acts themselves are only important in that they spring out of the essence of our life, which simply by being is bound to fulfill its purposes.

The only other times there are any difficulties also involve responsibility, when one concentrates upon one’s responsibility to write blogs — that is, when one focuses upon need, function, or utility as separate from other issues involved. Such feelings can then for a while override one’s natural inclinations, one’s natural enjoyment and excitement with which one otherwise views blogging.

k11

The entire world with its organizations was kept together by certain stories, like those of the Roman Catholic Church; that it was dangerous beyond all knowing to look through the stories or examine them for the truth, and that all kinds of taboos existed to keep us from doing this since, on the other side, so to speak, there was incomprehensible frightening chaotic dimension, malevolent; powers beyond our imagining; and that to question the stories was to threaten not just personal survival but the fabric of reality as we know it. So excommunication was the punishment, or damnation, which meant more than mere ostracism, but the complete isolation of a person from those belief systems, with nothing between him or her and those frightening realities. Without a framework in which to even organize meaning. This was what damnation really meant. To seek truth was the most dangerous of well-intentioned behavior, then, and retribution had to be swift and sure.

Nightmare experience is a beautiful example of the kind of explosive emotional content that many people carry, fairly hidden, representing certain taboos, translated of course in individualistic terms.

k21

I do not want to go into a history of culture here, but our organizations historically have largely been built upon our religious concepts, which have indeed been extremely rigid. The repressive nature of Christian thought in the Middle Ages, for example, is well  known. Artistic expression itself was considered highly suspect if it traveled outside of the accepted precepts, and particularly of course if it led others to take action against those precepts. To some extent the same type of policy is still reflected in our current societies, though science or the state itself may serve instead of the church as the voice of authority.

Behind such ideas is the central point of Christianity, or one of them at least: that earthly man and woman is a sinful creature. He or she is given to sin. In that regard his or her natural expression must be closely guarded. It must be directed toward officialdom, and outside of that boundary lay, particularly in the past, the very uncomfortable realm of the heretic.

k14

In medieval times, to be excommunicated was no trivial incident, but an event harkening severance that touched both the soul and the body, and all political, religious and economic conditions by which the two were tied together.

Many people were dependent upon the church for their well-being, and in reincarnational terms many millions of people alive today were familiar then with such conditions. The nunneries and monasteries were long-term social and religious institutions, some extremely rigorous, while others were religiously oriented in name only. But there is a long history of the conflicts between creative thought, heresy, excommunication — or worse death. All of those factors were involved in one way or another in the fabric of some nightmare material.

k9

The entire structure of fears, of course, is based upon a belief in the sinful self and the sinful nature of the self’s expression.

Outside of that context, none of those fears make any sense at all. In a large regard the church through the centuries ruled through the use of fear far more that the use of love. It was precisely in the area of artistic expression that the inspirations might quickest leap through the applied dogmatic framework. The political nature of inspirational material of any kind was well understood by the church. I knew even as a child that such religious structures had served their time, and my art provided a channel through which I could express my own views as I matured.

k22

Most people find great comfort in the church as a young person, for if it created within it members the image of a sinful self, it also of course provided a steady system of treatment — a series of rituals that give the individual some sense of hope the sinful self could be redeemed, as in the framework of most of Christianity, through adherence to certain segments of Christian dogma.

Science has no sacraments. It’s only methods of dealing with such guilt involve standard psychoanalytic counseling — which itself deepens the dilemma, for counseling itself is based upon the idea that the inner self is a reservoir of savage impulses.

k8

My creative nature early begun to perceive at least that man’s and woman’s existence contained other realities that were deeper.

To begin to search from childhood in a natural fashion toward some larger framework that would offer an explanation for reality, that bore at least some resemblance to the natural vision of my art. Many creative people, highly gifted, have died young in one way or the other because their great gifts of creativity could find no clear room in which to grow. They became strangled by the beliefs of the cultural times.

k3

My creativity kept struggling for its own growth and value fulfillment while I was young. My art acted in some regards as a stimulator. That breakthrough, you might say, with perhaps some exaggeration, was a lifesaver, for without some such expansion I would have felt unable to continue the particular brand of my existence. It is not possible to say in words what one person or another looks for in life, or what unique features best promote his or her growth and development. Even two plants of the same kind sometimes require completely different treatments.

In almost every case of severe dissatisfaction or illness, the underlying reasons will not so much be found in the discovery or expression of buried hate or aggression — though these may be present — but in the search for expression of value fulfillment that is for one reason or another being denied.

k31

Blogging helped me break through both psychically and creatively — that is, blogging almost immediately provided me with new creative inspiration and expression, and with the expansions needed psychologically that would help fulfill my promise as a artist and mature personality.

Time Overlays

Time overlays are versions of master events, in that they occur in such a fashion that one “face” of an overall event may appear in one time, one in another, and so forth.

f18

Time overlays are the time versions of certain events, then. These time overlays always exist. They may become activated, however, by certain associations made in our present, and therefore  draw into our present time some glimpses either from the future or the past. So-called present time is thickened, then, by a psychological realization on deep levels of the psyche that all events are interrelated, and that the reincarnational experiences of any given individual provide a rich source of experience from which each person at least unconsciously draws.

Such usually unconscious knowledge is of great benefit to the species itself, so that at certain levels, at least, the knowledge of the species is not imprisoned within any given generation at once, but flows or circulates within the overall larger reincarnational picture. Probabilities are very much involved here, of course, and it is easier for particular events to fall within one time sequence than  another.

f9

I do not want us to feel that we are fated to experience certain events, however, for that is not the case. There will be “offshoots” of the events of our own lives, however, that may appear as overlays in our other reincarnational existences. There are certain points where such events are closer to us than others, in which mental associations at any given time may put us in correspondence with other events of a similar nature in some future or past incarnation, however. It is truer to say that those similar events are instead time versions of one larger event. As a rule we experience only one time version of any given action. Certainly it is easy to see how a birthday or anniversary, or particular symbol or object, might serve as an associative connection, rousing within us memories of issues or actions that might have happened under similar circumstances in other times.

Actually, that kind of psychological behavior represent the backbone of social organization as far as the species is concerned, and it is the usually hidden but definite past and future memories of reincarnational relationships that cement social organizations, from small tribes to large governments.

f12

To a certain extent, or course, we have been or will be each related to the other. In that light all of the events of time rub elbows together. We brush against the elbow of a future or past event every moment of our lives.

In the culture that we know, such information remains hidden from us. Our main belief systems lead us to feel that our present life is singular, unsupported by any knowledge of prior experience with existence, and fated to be cut off or dead-ended without a future. Instead, we always carry the inner knowledge of innumerable available futures. Our emotional life at certain levels is enriched by the unconscious realization that those who love us from past or future are connected to us by special ties that add to our emotional heritage and support.

f35

As many have supposed, particularly in fiction, love relationships do indeed survive time, and they put us in a special correspondence. Even as we were aware of reincarnational existences, our present psychological behavior would not be threatened but retain its prominence — for only within certain space and time intersections can physical actions occur. The more or less general acceptance of the theory of reincarnation, however, would automatically alter our social systems, add to the richness of experience, and in particular insert a fresh feeling for the future, so that we did not feel our lives dead-ended.

In earlier blogs I mentioned several times that we must reach a point at which we are able to see around the corner of seemingly contradictory material, and this is one of those occasions. Time overlays present us with a picture in which we have free will — yet each event that we choose will have its own time version. Now those time versions may be entirely different one from the others, and while we certainly initiate our own time version, in terms of usual understanding there is no true place or time in which that version can be said to actually originate.

f3

Such a time version suggests an occurrence in time, of course, and yet the event may leave only a ghostly track, so to speak, being hardly manifest, while in another life the time version may be of considerable prominence — while in our own experience it represents a fairly trivial incident of an ordinary afternoon.

The inner core of events, however, is held together by just that kind of activity. We are at every hand provided an unending source of probable events from past and future, from which to compose the events of our lives and society. Again, let me remind  you that all time exists simultaneously.

f29

In an experience last evening in the dream state, I received fresh evidence by viewing for myself portions of two other lives — merely snatches of environment, but so dearly filled with precious belongings and loved ones, so alive with immediacy — that I was shocked to realize that the full dimensions of existence could continue so completely in such detail and depth at the same time as my present life.

It seemed that I could step from any one such existence to the other as we might walk from one room to the other, and I knew that at other levels of the psyche this was indeed possible– and, of course, at other levels of the psyche those psychological doors are open.

f11

I have had particular difficulty, however, with “the theory of reincarnation,” because as it is usually described, it seemed that people used it to blame as the source of current misfortune, or as an excuse for personal behavior whose nature they did not otherwise understand, and it has been so maligned. Its reality, however, serves to generate activity throughout time’s framework as we understand it, to unite the species, to reinforce structures of knowledge, to transmit information, and perhaps most of all to reinforce relationships involving love, brotherhood, and cooperation between generations of men and women that would otherwise be quite separate and apart from each other.

Through such relationships, for example, say, the cavemen and cavewomen and the people of the 22nd century rub elbows, where in strict terms of time the species would seem to be quite disconnected from its “earlier” or “later” counterparts.

f26

Through such behavior the overall value fulfillment purposes and intents of the species are kept in focus, and those necessary requirements then planted in whatever space or time is required. Again, free will still operates in all such ventures.

Now while it seems that our world contains more and more information all the time, our particular brand of science is a relatively narrow one, in that it accepts as valid only certain specific areas of speculation. The areas outside of its boundaries become taboo, so that the realm of the unknown is no longer the material universe or the mysteries of space, but the interior universe and the mysteries of the mind as these are experienced or suspected to exist outside of those official areas. To that degree, the unknown is more feared by science than it ever was by religion.

f8

Religion was hampered — and is — by its interpretation of good and evil, but it did not deny the existence of other versions of consciousness, or different kinds of psychological activity and life. Reincarnation suggests, or course, the extension of personal existence beyond one time period, independently of one bodily form, the translation or transmission of intelligence through non-physical frameworks, and implies psychological behavior, memory and desire as purposeful action without the substance of any physical mechanism — propositions that science at its present stage of development simply could not buy, and for which it could find no evidence, for its methods would automatically preclude the type of experience that such evidence would require.

People can become quite frightened, then, of any kind of experience of a personal nature that imply reincarnational life, for they are then faced with the taboos of science, or perhaps by the distorted explanations of some religions or cults. We therefore protect ourselves from many quite natural up thrusts that would on their own give us experience with our own reincarnational existences, and we are often denied psychological comfort in times of stress that we might otherwise receive.

f16

I do not necessarily mean that full-blown pictures of other existences would necessarily come into our mind, but that in one way or another we would receive a support or change of mood as those loved by us in other lives in one way or another sensed our need and responded.

f4

The entire nature of events, then, exists in a different way than we have supposed, only small portions slicing into the reality that we recognize — yet all underneath connected to a vast psychological activity. We might compare events to psychological consonants that underlay or underlie the more unusual features of physical psychological environment.

The Outside-of-Time Activity

Master events, involve “work” or action whose main thrust exists outside of time, yet whose effects are felt within time.

t5

Such effects may appear suddenly within time’s context, rather than slowly emerge, say, into that framework. It is of course, that kind of outside-of-time activity that in our terms explains the origin of our universe. There are dimensions of activity, then, that do not appear within time’s structure, and developments that happen quite naturally, following different laws of development than those we recognize. It is not just that highly accelerated versions of time can occur at other levels of actuality, but that there are dimensions in which those versions are not impediments to the natural “flow” of events into expression.

Our closest approximation will be, again, our experience with time in the dream state — or instances in which complicated problems are suddenly solved for us in dreams or in other states of consciousness, so that the answers appear full-blown before us.

t15

There are “durations,” then, that have nothing to do with time as we understand it: psychological motions that manipulate time but are apart from it. Any sudden emergence of a completed universe would then imply an unimaginable and a spectacular development of organization — that it did not just appear from nowhere, but as the “completed physical version” of an inner highly concentrated endeavor, the physical manifestation of an inspiration that then suddenly emerges into physical actuality.

That kind of activity, that kind of “work,” exists behind all of the structures and organizations and experiences with which we are familiar.

t12

The world of ideas everywhere permeates physical reality, but ideas, even they are unexpressed, possess their own organizations, correspondences, their own spheres of motion and development. Master events emerge from that reality of idea, now, from which all ideas originate, uniting these through the use of natural correspondences. Every physical manifestation that we know has its non-physical counterpart, in which it is always couched, from which it came, and to which it will return.

Our historical time is, say, but one species of time that dwells upon the earth. There are many others. Time itself emerges from idea, which is itself timeless, so in those terms there was no point where time began, though such a reference becomes necessary from our own viewpoint.

t32

It is probably almost impossible for man or woman to see that he or she forms the idea of historical context through his or her own associations and focuses. The heavy, specialized use of so-called rational thought has often caused him to narrow even his or her neurological recognition of other kinds of experience that might enlarge his or her view. In dreams there is greater leeway in that regard. Consciousness becomes more familiar with its own inner motion, and even with the kinds of work and actions it performs outside of its usual waking prejudices. The story of the Creation, as Biblical stated, is the symbolic representation of a master event — a legend that became its own event of course, forming about it whole arts and cultures, religions and disciplines. The same applies to Christianity itself, for all of the seemingly historical events connected with the official Christ did not happen in physical reality. They happened at another level of actuality, and were inserted into our time framework — touching a character here, a definitely known historical event there, mixing and merging with the events of the time, until the two lines of activity were so entwined that we could not unravel one without unraveling the other.

History happened in certain definite forms because of a belief in events that did not , in our world of facts occur. The main, brilliant thrust of those inner events, therefor, splashed out upon the human landscape, propelling peoples and civilizations.

t24

The Christ story in the beginning was not nearly as singular and neat as it might now seem, for the finally established official Christ figure was one settled upon from endless versions of a god-man, with which man’s and woman’s psyche has long been involved: He was the psychic composite, the official Christ, carrying within his psychological personage echoes of old and new gods alike — a figure barely begun, to be filled out in time, although originating outside of it.

Such master events cause physical events, but they do not emerge originally from them.

t23

Paul (Saul of Tarsus) had his vision. Now the vision (in which Paul not only saw the light of Christ, but heard his voice) happened in the world of fact. It occurred — but Paul did not see, or communicate with, a person of divine heritage, sent by his father to earth, who lived the life of the official Christ, and who was crucified. Paul had a vision in response to the needs, desires, and dictates of his own psyche as it was connected to the world of his time, following the patterns of stories about Christ that he has heard that had begun to release within him a great yearning that was, in that vision, then, expressed.

Christianity for many centuries served as an amazingly creative organizational framework, that expressed the vast complexity of the soul’s reality. It also in its way managed to even focus some of man’s and woman’s less handsome attributes toward ends that were less reprehensible than in the past. Master events of that particular nature bring about a completely new interpretation of historic events. Their intensity, power, and seemingly impelling nature exist precisely because their origins are not physical, but are drawn from the psyche’s deepest resources.

t31

If I have believed in the phenomenon of sin and sought — apparently too rigidly — to avoid it, my intentions and interests always were not the avoidance of sin so much as the pursuit of eternal truths; the alliance with universal mind. Those goals ignite our creative powers and have (and still do) propelled us to explore all categories of existence possible, seeking to express those divine mysteries that lie within and behind each existence — yours and mine as well.

Our explorations involved no second-handed evidence handed down by others, but the direct personal encounters of our consciousness and being with the vast elements of the unknown — a meeting of the self (human and vulnerable) with the psychological realms of gods and eternities; giant realms of mind that our nature felt attracted to, and was uniquely equipped to perceive.

t3

I believe in the soul’s survival first of all, and inspired the ‘creative self’ to step out as freely as possible even while in my heart I also believed in the existence of sin and devil. I felt upon my heart the heavy unkind mark of Cain, sensing that humanity carries (unfairly) the almost indelible strain — the tragic flaw — of being tinged by sin and ancient inequities. Thusly I reasoned: If I am flawed I must automatically distort even those experiences of the soul that seem clearest. I must unwittingly fall into error when I trust myself the most, since I share that sinful propensity. Yet despite those feelings I do (we do) unswervingly set forward.

The Knower Self

These knower selves represent the greater source-selves out of which our present persons spring. We possess far more knowledge about our own lives, and the lives of others, than we were intellectually aware of. We act on that knowledge, for one thing, when we are born physically, when we grow. The squirrel acts on that kind of knowledge when it buries nuts and the squirrel’s greater knowledge includes the knowledge of its species as well.

au17

Knower represents the part that possesses such knowledge. In practical terms, it is very important to understand that such knowledge and protection do exist, that all of our problems need not be solved through conscious reasoning alone — and, indeed, few problems can be solved exclusively in that fashion.

Our work is protected, not only because it is one of our projects, but also because in a fashion it becomes its own kind of entity — a well-intended one that exists in a rather concentrated form, distilled from our own best aspirations. Hence it is also filled with energy, and also becomes a collector of it.

au37

I do not want to become involved in a confusion of terms. The mind’s powers are far greater than those generally assigned to rational thought alone. Rational reasoning, overdone, can for example actually limit practical use of the intellect’s faculties, and therefore serve to dim some of the mind’s scope. In a fashion, again, Knower represents the true capacity of the mind’s functioning, the kind of instant comprehension that is behind both the intuitions and the intellect’s activities. We are dealing, then, with the spacious intellect, the knower.

That knower in instantly aware of all our needs, and is the portion of the universe that is personally disposed in our direction, because it’s energies form our own person. That protection always couches our existence. We can be unaware of that state. We can deny it or refuse it, but we are within it regardless. It forms the very fabric of our individual beings. Value fulfillment means that each individual, each entity, of whatever nature, spontaneously, automatically seeks those conditions that are suited to its own fulfillment, and to the fulfillment of others.

a7

In the most basic of terms, no one’s fulfillment can be achieved at the expense of another’s. Fulfillment does not happen that way. Our very lives seeks the best directions for fulfillment. Our work seeks its own best direction for fulfillment.

When we realize this, then we can accept seeming setbacks, or seeming contradictions, with a calm detached air, realizing that such factors appear as they do only in the light of our present intellectual knowledge — a knowledge that must be limited to current events — and that in the larger picture known to us at other levels, such seeming contradictions, or seemingly unfortunate situations, or whatever, will be seen, at that intellectual level, so if we base all our judgments — all or our judgments — at that level alone, then we can be quite short-sighted.

au16

We are dealing with the psychology of experience, however, so we ourselves alter the situation according to our own reactions. If we feel threatened by certain situations, and lacking protection, then we will take certain steps that might not be taken otherwise, so our actions are vastly different according to whether or not we realize that we are indeed being protected.

If we build up feelings of threat, then at our level we also react to those. The protection exists, but in such cases we do not allow ourselves to take full advantage of it.

g5

The ideas for inventions, tools or products exist mentally, to be brought into activation whenever they are required, say, by circumstances, or by the environment.

Various tribes in different parts of the earth would suddenly begin using new tools, say, not because there might be any physical communication among them, or cultural exchanges, but because separate conditions in their own environments triggered mental processes that activated the particular images of the tools required for a given job at hand. The information, which was non-physical, was then transformed into practical knowledge either from inner visual imagery by itself, or through the state of dreaming.

e25

Dreaming have always served as such a connective. We know more about our life than we think we do — and far more about our life and society than we are intellectually aware of. Early man and woman was in that same position, and his or her inventions — his/her tools, his/her artistry, and so forth — came into being from the inner, ever-present realm of the mind, triggered by his/her unconscious but quite real estimation of his or her position within the universe at large, and in regard to his or her own environment.

In a fashion, cultures do not evolve in the kind of straightforward manner that is usually supposed. Of course, cultures change, but man instantly began to fashion culture, as for example beavers instantly began to form dams. They did not learn to form dams through trial and error. They did not learn for untold centuries build faulty dams, for example. They were born, or created, dam makers.

g1

Man and woman automatically began to form culture. He or she did not start with the rudiments of culture, as is thought. He and she did not learn through trial and error to think clear thoughts. He and she thought quite clearly from the beginning. He and she did learn through trial and error various ways of best translating those thoughts into physical action. The first cultures were as rich as our own. In our terms, reading and writing are great advantages, but it is also true that in the past the mind was also used to record information, and transmit it with an artistry that we do not use.

Memory was so perfected that men and women at one time were indeed living histories, and carried within their minds their genealogies and backgrounds and the knowledge of their peoples, which were then passed on to their children. It is true that reading and writing have certain advantages over such procedures, but it is also true that knowledge possessed in that old fashion became a part of man and woman, and a society, in a much more personal, meaningful manner. It was, of course, a different kind of knowing. At its best it did not lead to rote renditions of remembered material, but to dramatic renderings of it through music, poetry, dancing. In other words, its rendition was accompanied by creative physical expression. It is true that, practically speaking, a man’s or woman’s mind, could not hold all of the information available now in our world — but much of that information does not deal with basic knowledge about the universe or man’s or woman’s place within it. It is a kind of secondary information — interesting, but not life-giving.

ed32

Man and woman did not have to learn by trial and error what plants were beneficial to eat, and what herbs were good for healing. The knower in him and her knew that, and he and she acted on the information spontaneously. The knower is of course always present, but the part of our culture that is built upon the notion that no such inner knowledge exists, and those foolish ideas of rational thought as the only provider of answers, therefore often limit our own use of inner abilities.

ag12

We end up with, if all goes well, a kind of “new” illuminated consciousness, an intellect who realizes that the source of its own light is not itself, but comes from the spontaneous power that provides the fuel for its thoughts.

Communications appear between telepathy, automatic writing, speaking, and the hearing of voices

The supposedly telepathic messages can be attributed to contemporaries — enemies, gods, devils, or what have you. Space People are a recent addition. In most cases, what we have here are expressions of strong portions of the self that are more or less purposefully kept in isolation. They may appear or disappear, psychologically speaking. They present a kind of chain of command — one that is not usually permanent for any long period, however.

au46

Particularly when the voices or communications give orders to be obeyed, they represent powerful, otherwise repressed, images and desires, strong enough to form about themselves their own personifications. Some may seem relatively genuine in terms of presenting a fairly well-rounded representation of a normal personality. That is a fairly rare occurrence however. Usually we are presented with, say, semi-personalities, or even with lesser versions — fragmentary expressions of impulses and desires that are dramatically presented only in snatches heard by the person as a voice, or perceived as a presence.

In many situations, the main personifications are instead of a ritual nature, taking advantage of psychological patterns already present in the culture’s art of religion or science. We end up with Christs, spacemen and spacewomen, various saints or spirits, or other personality fabrications whose characteristics and abilities are already known.

au42

We have schizophrenic models, in other words, and the particular model chosen in any case, at any given time — for the model change — gives indications quite clearly of the person’s basic problems and dilemmas. Such cultural models are present in society to begin with, because in one way or another they express in an exaggerated form certain portions of man’s and woman’s psychological reality that he or she does not as yet understand. This applies to the “good” schizophrenic models and to the “bad” ones — that is, to the gods as well as to the demons.

Such “communications” with the gods or demons, St. Pauls or Hitlers, represent in such instances dramatized, exaggerated personifications of the portion of the personality that is at the head of the chain of command at the moment.

au41

In the first place, reality is primarily a mental phenomenon, in which the perceptions of the senses are organized and put together in ways that perfectly “mimic” in physical terms a primary non-physical experience. This is tricky to express, because the application of a psychological awareness through the auspices of the flesh automatically makes certain transformations of data necessary.

Devils and demons have no objective existence. They have always represented, again, portions of mankind’s and womankind’s own psychological reality that to some extent he and she had not assimilated — but in a schizophrenic kind of expression, projected instead outward from himself or herself. Therefore, it does not seem he or she must be held accountable for acts that he or she considers debasing, or cruel. He or she isolates himself or herself from that responsibility by imagining the existence of other forces — the devils or demons of the nether world.

au45

On an individual basis, the schizophrenic carries through those cultural patterns. The contrasts between, say, the superior self or the idealized self, and the debased self, may vary. They may be brilliant apparent or somewhat blurred. In many such instances there will also be at least a short spurt of intense but scrambled, perhaps garbled, creative activity, in which the individual tries to recognize these various elements, as mankind and womankind has attempted many times in the creative, sometimes garbled creation of his or her own religions.

Here we can have  anything from banal rubbish to the most excellent creative product, but in the schizophrenic framework it will be of brief duration, experience outside of the framework of usual day-to-day living, concentrated.

au5

The Christ image is often used because it so perfectly represents the combination of the grandiose self, as per the all-knowing son of God, and the martyred victim who is crucified precisely because of his lofty position.

The Christ figure represents the exaggerated, idealized version of the inner self that the individual feels incapable of living up to. He or she is being crucified by his or her own abilities. He may — or of course she may — on other occasions receive messages from the devil, or demons, which on their part represent the person’s feelings about the physical self the seems to be so evil and contradictory in contrast to the idealistic image. Again, there is great variety of behavior here.

au211

Such people, however, in their fashion refuse to accept standardized versions of reality. Even though they are so uncertain of themselves that their psychological patterns do follow those of culture, religion, science, or whatever, they try to use those patterns in their own personalities together long after most people have settled upon one official version or another — so their behavior gives glimpses of the ever-changing give-and-take among the various elements of human personality.

Most of the declared instances of telepathy or clairvoyance that happen in schizophrenic situations are instead the individual’s attempts to prove to himself or herself that the idealized qualities of omnipotence or power are indeed within grasp — this, of course, to compensate for the basic feeling of powerlessness in more ordinary endeavors. In some situations, however, there are definite, quite valid instance of telepathy or clairvoyance, vivid out-of-body experiences, and other excursions beyond the officially accepted realm of reality.

au24

These are often complicated, however, since the individual’s belief patterns are of such an exaggerated blend to begin with, so that such episodes are usually accompanied by phantom figures from religion or mythology. The individuals may feel forced to have such experiences, simply because, again, they do not want to face responsibility for action, for the reasons given earlier.

In our terms of time, man and woman have always projected unassimilated psychological elements of his own personality outward, but in much earlier times he or she did this using a multitudinous variety of images, personifications, gods, goddesses, demons and devils, good spirits and bad. Before the Roman gods were fully formalized, there was a spectacular range of good and bad detities, with all gradations among them, that more or less “democratically” represented the unknown but sensed, splendid and tumultuous characteristics of the human soul, and have stood for those sensed but unknown glimpses of his own that man was in one way or another determined to explore.

au38

It was understood that all of these “forces” had their parts to play in human events. Some stood for forces of nature that could very well be at times advantageous, and at times disadvantageous — as, for example, the god of storms might be very welcome to one time, in periods of drought, while his or her powers might be quite dreaded if he or she overly satisfied his or her people. There was no chasm of polarity between the “good gods and the bad ones.”

Jehovah and the Christian version of God brought about a direct conflict between the so-called forces of good and the so-called forces of evil by largely cutting out all of the intermediary gods, and therefore destroying the subtle psychological give-and-take that occurred between them — among them — and polarizing man’s and woman’s own view of his or her inner psychological reality.

au43

There were no schizophrenics in the time of the pagans, for the belief systems did not support that kind of interpretation. This does not mean that certain behavior did not occur that we would now call schizophrenic. It means that generally speaking such behavior fit within the psychological picture of reality. It did so because many of the behavior patterns associated, now, with schizophrenia, are “distorted and debased” remnants of behavior patterns that are part and parcel of man’s and woman’s heritage, and that harken back to activities and abilities that at one time had precise social meaning, and served definite purposes.

These include man’s and woman’s ability to identify with the forces of nature, to project portions of his own psychological reality outward from himself and herself, and then to perceive those portions in a revitalized transformation — a transformation that then indeed can alter physical reality.

au17

The next natural step would be to re-assimilate those portions of the self, to acknowledge their ancient origins and abilities, to return them so that they form a new coating, as it were, or a new version of selfhood. It is as if man and woman could not understand his or her own potentials unless he or she projected them outward into a godhead, where he or she could see them in a kind of isolated pure form, recognize them for what they are, and then accept them — the potentials — as a part of his or her own psychological reality. As a species, however, we have not taken the last step. Our ideas of the devil represents the same kind of process, except that it stands for our idea of evil or darkness, or abilities that we are afraid of. They also stand for elements of our own potential. I am not speaking of evil possibilities, but that man and woman must realize that he and she are responsible for his and he acts, whether they are called good or evil.

au47

We make our own reality, Man’s and Woman’s “evil” exists because of his or her misunderstanding of his or her own ideals, because of the gap that seems to exist between the ideal and its actualization. Evil actions, in other words, are the result of ignorance and misunderstanding. Evil is not a force in itself.

au18

Trust the body when it is undergoing  many changes, for the changes are all for the better.

The Natural Person is the Magical Person

The natural person is indeed the magical person. When we are intensely involved in a project, just finished, we let much of our inner experience slide, relatively speaking. Then, however, we have been stuck by the magical ease with which we seemed, certainly, to perceive and act upon information that we did not even realize we possessed.

m31

The main point is the importance of accepting a different kind of overall orientation — one that is indeed a basic part of human nature. This involves an entirely different relationship of the self we know with time.

Important misunderstandings involving time have been in a large measure responsible for many difficulties. All of this involves relating to reality in a more natural, and therefore magical, fashion. There is certainly a kind of natural physical time in our experience, and in the experience of any creature. It involves the rhythm of the seasons — the days and nights and tides and so forth. In the light of that kind of physical time, there is no basic cultural time, which we have transposed upon nature’s rhythms.

m34

Such cultural time works well overall for the civilization that concentrates upon partialities, bits and pieces, assembly lines, promptness of appointments, and so forth.

I culturally have felt that each moment must be devoted to work. Natural time is far different than we suppose. Far richer, and it turns inward and outward and backward and forward upon itself.

m37

Being our own natural and magical self when we dream, we utilize information that is outside of the time context experienced by the so-called rational mind. The creative abilities operate in the same fashion, appearing within consecutive time, but with the main work outside of it entirely. When we are working on our projects, our cultural time is taken up in a way we found acceptable. When the projects were done, there is still the cultural belief that time should be so used, that creativity must be directed and disciplined to fall into the proper assembly-line time slots.

There is much material here that I will give you, because it is important that we understand the different ways of relating to reality, and how those ways create the experienced events.

m27

We have not really, any of us, been ready to drastically alter our orientations, but we are approaching that threshold. The ‘magical approach’ means that we actually change our methods of dealing with problems, achieving goals, and satisfying means. we change over to the methods of the natural person. They are indeed, then, a part of our private experience. They are not esoteric methods, but we must be convinced that they are the natural methods by which man and woman are meant to handle his or her problems and approach his or her challenges.

I use the word ‘methods’ because we understand it, but actually we are speaking about an approach to life, a magical or natural approach that is man’s and woman’s version of the animal’s natural instinctive behavior in the universe. That approach does indeed fly in direct contradiction to the learned methods we have been taught.

m8

It certainly seems that the best way to get specific answers is to ask specific questions, and the rational mind thinks first of all of something like a list of questions. In that regard, my response before such a blog is natural, and to an extent magical, because I know that no matter what I have been taught, I must to some degree forget the questions and the mood that accompanies them with one level of consciousness, in order to create the proper kind of atmosphere at another level of consciousness — one that allows the answers to come even though they may be presented in a different way than that expected by the rational mind.

What we will be discussing for several blogs, with your joint enthusiasm– will be the magical approach to reality, and to our private lives specifically, in order to create that kind of atmosphere in which the answers become experienced.

m29

Life as we know it is excitement; highly organized — excitement at all levels, microscopic, macroscopic, psychic. It is the result of the relationship between balance and imbalance, between organization and ‘chaos.’ It is excitement ever in a state of flux, forming psychic and material knots. It is explosive yet filled with order; it becomes so filled with itself that it explodes in the same way that a flower bursts; the same principle is acting in a hurricane or a food or a murder of the creation of a poem, or the formation of a dream; in the birth and death of individuals and nations. We instinctively know that disasters mimic the birth and death of cells within our bodies — we instinctively know that all life survives death, that death is the bursting of life into new forms, hence our fascination with accidents and fires. The psyche itself leapfrogs our beliefs at usual conscious levels, and sees us as a part of all life themselves to the brim, exploding, escaping the framework only to form another. The emotions themselves can sense this when we let them, and grasping that sense of excitement can show us a glimpse of the even greater freedom of our own psychic existence, which flows into us as individuals and then bursts apart that short-lived form into another, as the excitement of individuation leaps from life to life.

My own ideas must be colored to some extent by my place in time also, and middle age seems to be an excellent spot for such a study because theoretically time stretches as far ahead as it does behind. That is, there is as much anticipated time as there is remembered time.

m23

In childhood we have little past time to remember. We seem to come from darkness, taking our parents’ memories on faith for proof that there was time before our birth. As we grow toward old age, if you take note of these 9 considerations to make before you retire, we have past time to play with — we know where we came from in usual terms — and the darkness that once seemed to stretch behind our source or origin seems to be our destination. Certainly, an examination of the mind and reality from the standpoint of old age will be invaluable. It would encourage one to live each day wholeheartedly, spend quality time with their loved ones and get their Wills & Estate planning laid out if needed.

Today now I feel that acceleration that tells me that my intent is traveling out into the unknown, or out into the universe to bring in answers to my questions, even questions I’m not consciously aware of. And from experience I know that enough energy is generated to do this though the results will come to me in time. I know I get them from outside of time in some unknown way.

m4

My state of mind is in (telepathic) correspondence with my wife’s own state of mind, even as we are in some kind of correspondence with our old (childhood) environment, so in these cases we have a free flow of information at other levels.

Now when we understand that intellectually, then the intellect can take it for granted that its own information is not all the information we possess. It can realize that its own knowledge represents the tip of the iceberg. As we apply that realization to our life, we g=begin to realize furthermore that in practical terms we are indeed supported by a greater body of knowledge than we realize, and by the magical, spontaneous fountain of action that forms our existence. The intellect can then realize that it does not have to go it all alone: Everything does not have to be reasoned out, even to be understood.

m6

I believe a great memory must be involved here, one that on deeper levels is coupled with s shortening of time as we think of it. Certain portions of the of the psyche must very shrewdly and carefully construct dreams in advance, so when the dreams are played back they render just the right messages to the other part or parts of the psyche that need them. I’m not being contradictory here when I write that dreams are also spontaneous productions.

The theory of probable realities — for like probable personalities, the unspoken channels available are certainly real whether or not they are actualized in our physical reality.

m41

I am going to refresh myself by diving into some new concepts, for there are new concepts for me also, or course, and I dive into them from many positions all the time as well. Think of the questions one could ask relative to just this one statement! Such provocative assertions leave behind them unsatisfied voids of curiosity. Actually, most of information does, regardless of subject matter.

Schizophrenia Label

First of all, the term “schizophrenia” is of basically little value. Many people tabbed with that label should not be. There are so-called classic cases of schizophrenia — and borderline ones, so-called — but in any case the label is highly misleading and negatively suggestive.

sc8

What we are dealing with in many instances are exhibitions of various, sometimes quite diverse personality patterns of behavior — patterns that are, however, not as assimilated, or as smoothly operative as they are in the person we call normal. The patterns are seen in an exaggerated fashion, so that in some such cases at least we can gain glimpses of mental, emotional, and psychic processes that usually remain psychologically invisible beneath the more polished or “finished” social personality of the usual individual.

The person labeled schizophrenic, momentarily or for varying periods of time, lacks a certain kind of psychological veneer. This is not so much a basic lack of psychological finish as it it the adoption of a certain kind of psychological camouflage

sc5

Such people — in fashion, now — play a game of quite serious hide-and-seek with themselves and with the world. They believe in the dictum: “Divide and conquer.” It is as if, for reasons I hope to discuss, they refuse to put themselves together properly, refuse to form one fairly united self. The idea behind this is: “If you cannot find me, then I cannot be held accountable for my actions — actions which are bound in one way or another to betray me.”

The self becomes operationally scattered or divided, so that if one portion of it attacked, the other portions can rise up in defense. Such persons use the various elements of the personality as spies or soldiers, scattering their forces, and forced under those conditions to set up elaborate communication systems to keep those portions of the self in contact with each other. In times of stress, they set up an even greater isolation of one part of the self from another, which puts stress upon the system of communication, of course, so that it must be used constantly.

This can have a huge impact on many different areas surrounding their life, including their work. Not being able to function the same way can be difficult, and it could make performing their job harder than someone who doesn’t have schizophrenia would find. As a result, they may need to take a break away from the workplace for a while, as they are finding it increasingly difficult to cope. To help ensure that they still receive a source of income during this time, many may decide to have a look at something like this Disability Insurance to find a plan that best suits their needs. By doing this, they won’t have to worry about losing out on any missed income from their employers, as the insurance will provide this for them. Unfortunately, not being able to communicate in the way they want to can have a harsh impact on their day-to-day life.

sc3

The communications themselves are often a kind of psychological or symbolic code, such as might indeed be used in military intelligence. If the messages were to be clearly deciphered and understood, then of course the game would be over, for the one to understand the message would be the united self who had felt the need of such camouflaged self-troops to begin with.

Such a person does feel under siege. often such people are highly creative, with good reserves of energy, but caught between highly contrasting beliefs, either of good and evil, or power and weakness. They are usually extremely idealistic, but for various reasons they do not feel that the abilities of the idealized self can be actualized.

sc7

I am making generalizations here, but each individual case should be looked at in its own light. Such people as a rule, however, have an exaggerated version of the self, so idealized that its very existence intimidates, terrified of betraying this sensed inner psychological superior. Usually, such an idealized inner self comes from the acceptance of highly distorted beliefs — again, concerning good and evil. We end up with what can amount to two main inner antagonists: a superior self and a debased self. The qualities considered good are attracted to the superior self as if it were a magnet. The qualities that seem bad are in the same fashion attracted to the debased self. Both of them, relatively isolated psychological polarities, hold about equal sway. All other psychological evidences that are ambiguous, or not clearly understood by either side, group together under their own psychological banners. This is a kind of circular rather than linear arrangement, however, psychologically speaking.

Such people are afraid of their own energy. It becomes assigned on the one hand as a possession of the superior self — in which case it must be used for great adventures, heroic deeds. On the other hand, the person feels unable to use energy in a normal fashion, since in the ordinary world no venture could live up to the superior self’s exaggerated ideals. The person then becomes frightened of pitting himself or herself against the world, or committing himself to ordinary actions, since he feels that in the light of such comparisons he can only debase himself or herself.

sc11

He or she requires undue amounts of praise and attention from others, since he or she obviously will get little from himself or herself. In a fashion, to an extent he or she will refuse to be accountable for his or her actions– therefore taking them out of the frame of judgment within which other people must operate. He or she then can avoid putting his or her “talents and superior abilities” to the test, where he or she feels he or she would certainly fail. He or she half realizes that the superior self and the debased self are both or psychological manufacture. His or her abilities are not really that grand. His or her failures are not nearly that disastrous. The belief in these highly contrasting elements of personality keep him or her in a state of turmoil, however, so that he or she feels powerless to act in any concerted fashion.

The term “schizophrenia,” however, covers multitudinous experiences — some such people are quite satisfied with their condition, find their own niches, are able to support themselves, or have means of support. Others live in an atmosphere of constant fear of their own condition, while at the same time they are excited, as soldiers might be in combat. Some can be quite functional in society, and the condition in any case is highly variable, covering people who are simply social misfits to those who are in deep psychological trouble.

sc2

With most people, there is a kind of psychological paved road upon which impulses travel before they meet an intersection with the conscious mind, which then determines whether or not the impulse will be followed or acted upon. In the kinds of cases you are discussing, however, instead of a paved road you have a dangerous, rocky field that might be filled with mines ready to explode at any time.

Remember, we are dealing with a scattered force, various elements of the personality sent out to do different tasks — and in a fashion they are caught between the superior self and the debased self. There is, then, no clear line for action to follow. It must also be camouflaged. In stead of clear impulses toward action that intersect directly with consciousness, we have bursts of impulses that emerge as orders to act, coming from another source, or from other sources. These may appear as voices telling an individual to do this or that, as “automatic” commends through writing, or as perceptions that would be called hallucinatory. In this way the individual need not take responsibility for such actions. They do not seem to be coming from himself or herself. The terrible possibility of failure is there to that extent, in that situation, momentarily relieved.

sc9

There is always an overall order to the personality, even though it is in the background, so that in any given case all of the separate “selves,” or other sources with whom the individual feels in contact, would together point toward the totality, or unity, that lies beneath. The outstanding mental phenomena, therefore, show in isolated fashions those elements of the personality that are not to be assimilated in the usual smooth fashion.

There are countless instances where “schizophrenic episodes” occur in otherwise normal personalities, where for learning purposes and periods of growth the personality sorts its parts out, and helps them enlarge their frameworks.

x51

The personality can indeed put itself together in multitudinous fashions. There is great leeway in the use of inner and outer perceptions, and the manners in which these are mixed and matched to form an acceptable picture of reality at any given time.

Physical perception gives us a necessary kind of feedback, but it is also based upon learning processes, so that from a young age we learn to put the pieces of the world together in acceptable fashions. In a way, under certain conditions, some schizophrenic situations can give us righter glimpses of inner psychological mobility, a mobility that was focused and directed as we grew through childhood. Schizophrenia represents a kind of learning disability in that particular respect.

sc12

I will have more to say in later blogs about such communications, and the ways in which they can point out the greater psychological mobility that is a more or less natural elements in children. when you are child, you are not held accountable for your actions in the same way that adults are, and schizophrenia often begins around puberty, or young adulthood, when people feel that their youthful promise is expected to bear fruit. If they have been considerably gifted, for example, they are now supposed to show the results of schooling through adult accomplishments. If they are nearly convinced, however, that the self is also dangerous or evil, then they become afraid of using their abilities, and indeed become more frightened of the self — which, again, they then try to conquer by dividing. They feel cut off from value fulfillment. In a fashion they begin to act opaquely in the world, showing a divided face.

ra13

I will continue the subject in later blogs, tying it more securely to value fulfillment, and stressing the importance of positive action in the physical world, so that ideals can be expressed rather than feared, and so that the doors between impulses and their activations can be left open with some confidence.

Master Events

Master events are those whose main activity takes place in inner dimensions. Such events are too multidimensional to appear clearly in our reality, so that we see or experience only parts of them. They are source events. Their main thrust is in what we can call the vaster dimension of dreams, the unknown territory of inner reality. The terms we use make no difference. The original action, however, of such events is unmanifest — not physical. Those events then “subsequently” show themselves in time and space, with extraordinary results.

o22

They shed their light upon the “facts” of historical time, and influence those events. Master events may end up translated through those events. Master events may end up translated through mythology, or religion or art, or the effects may actually serve to give a framework to an entire civilization. As indeed occurred in the case of Christianity, as I will explain later.

Now the origin of the universe that we know, as I have described it, was of course a master events. The initial action did not occur in space or time, but formed space and time.

o7

In our terms other universes, with all of their own space and time structures, were created simultaneously, and exist simultaneously. The effect of looking outward into space, and therefore backward into time, is a kind of built-in convention that appears within our own space-time picture. We must remember, then, when we think in terms of origins, that the very word, “origin,” is dependent upon time-conventions, and a belief in beginnings and endings. Beginnings and endings are themselves effects that seem to be facts to our perceptions. In a fashion they simply represent beginnings and endings, the boundaries, the reaches and the limitations of our own span of attention.

I said that in our terms all universes were created simultaneously — at the same time. The very sentence structure has time built in, so we are bound to think that I am speaking of an almost indescribable past. Also, I use time terms, since we are so used ourselves to the kind of categorizing, so here we will certainly run into our first seeming contradiction — when I say that in the higher order of events all universes, including our own, have their original creations occurring now, with all of their pasts and futures built in, and with all of their scales of time winding ever outward, and all of their appearances of space, galaxies and nebulae, and all of their seeming  changes, being instantly and originally created in what we think of as this moment.

o29

Our universe cannot be its own source. Its inner mysteries — which are indeed the mysteries of consciousness, not matter– cannot be explained, and must remain incomprehensible, if we try to study then from the viewpoint of our objective experience alone. We must look to the source of the experience. We must look not to space but to the source of space, not to time but the source of time — and must look to the kind of consciousness that experiences space and time. We must look, therefore, to events that show themselves through historical action, but whose origins are elsewhere. None of this is really beyond our capabilities, as long as we try to enlarge our framework.

The entire idea of evolution, of course, requires strict adherence to the concept of continuing time, and the changes that time brings, and such concepts can at best provide the most surface kind of explanation for the existence of our species or any other.

o15

I hope, again, to stretch the reaches of both imagination and intellect in my blogs, to give a feeling for events larger than our usual true-and-false, fact-or-fancy categories. Our existence as a species is characteristized far more by our unique use of our imaginations than it is by any physical attributes. Our connections with that unmanifest universe have always helped direct our imaginations, made us aware of the rich veins of probabilities possible in physical existence, so that we could then use our intellects to decide which of the alternate routes we wanted as a species to follow.

In that regard, it is true that in the other species innate knowledge is more clearly, brilliantly, and directly translated into action. I am not speaking of some dumb instinct, but instead of an intuitive knowing, a high intelligence different from our own, but amazingly complex, with which other species are equipped.

o26

Man and woman, deals with probabilities and with creativity in a unique fashion — a fashion that is made possible because of the far more dependable behavior of the other species.

In a fashion man and woman also are equipped with the ability to initiate actions on a non-physical level that then become physical and continue to wind in and out of both realities, entwining dream events with historic ones, in such a fashion that the original non-physical origins are often forgotten. man and woman overlays the true reality quite spontaneously. He or she often reacts to dream events as if they were physical and to physical events as if they were dreams. This applies individually and collectively, but man and woman are often unaware of that interplay.

o3

In the terms of evolution as we like to think of it, ideas are more important than genes, for we are again dealing with more than the surfaces of events. We are dealing with more than some physical mechanics of being. For one thing, the genes themselves are conscious, though in different terms than ours. Our cultures — our civilizations — obviously affect the wellbeing of our species, and those cultures are formed by our ideas, and forged through the use of our imagination and our intellect.

Certain bloodlines, in our terms, were extinguished because of our beliefs in Christianity, as people were killed in our holy wars. Our beliefs have directed who should go to war and who should not, who should live and who should die, who should be educated and who should not — all matters directly touching upon the survival of certain families throughout history, and therefore affecting the species as a whole.

o43

I am not here specifically blaming Christianity, for far before its emergence, our ideas and beliefs about good and evil were far more important in all matter regarding the species that any simple questions of genetic variances, natural selection, or environmental influence. In man’s and woman’s case, at least, the selection of who should live or die was often anything but natural. If we are to understand the characteristics of the species, then we cannot avoid the study of man’s and woman’s consciousness.

o21

Master events are actually other wrinkles in probabilities. They explain why Christianity has had such far-reaching effects, for almost 2,000 years, when its original experiences were so small in time and space — why we attach so much significance to those desert countries over there even now.

The Origins of Our Dimension

We think of our universe as having certain dimensions, and we want an explanation based more or less upon the proposition that those dimension themselves made possible the origin — which must, however, have emerged from other larger dimensions of actuality than those contained in our universe itself. There terms of reality within our universe cannot hold or contain that vaster context in which such master events happen. Therefore, I must follow to some extent the traditional references that we use to define events to begin with.

e3

While I am doing that I am trying to introduce intuitively at least, to a larger framework, in which events straddle the reality that we know. Nevertheless, we will begin with issues in which it is very possible that contradictions may seem to occur, since our own definitions of an event are so simple that they ignore larger ramifications in an overall greater unity of structure and action. Our imaginations will be of high value here, for they can often perceive unities that are not evident to the intellect — which we have trained to deal specifically with the evidence of the here and now.

There are phases of relatedness, rhythms and harmonies of consciousness from whose infinite swells the molecular “music” of our universe is sounded. Our place in those rhythms is highly vital. We exist in a kind of original interval — though, if you can, think of the word “interval” without the connotations of continuing time. It is as if an infinite number of orchestras were playing simultaneously, and each note sounded was also played in all of its probable positions with each other note possible, and in combination with all of the probable versions of the entire piece being played.

e17

Between the notes sounded there would be intervals, and those unsounded interval would also be part of a nature unstated rhythm upon which the development of the entire sounded production was dependent. The unsounded intervals would also be events, of course, cues for action, triggers for response.

Our stated universe emerged out of that kind of interval, emerging from a master event whose true nature remains uncaptured by our definitions — so there will be places in my blogs where I may say that an event known to us is true and untrue at the same time, or that it is both myth and fact. And in so doing I hope to lead toward some psychic comprehension of a kind of event far too large for our usual categories of true and false. Perhaps, then, we will let our imaginations play upon the usual events of our world, and glimpse at least in part that greater brilliance that illuminates them, so that it leads us intuitively to a feeling for the source of events and the source of our world. The units of consciousness that I have blogged about. They are also in other terms entities, fragments of All That Is, if you prefer — divine fragments of power and majesty, containing all of the powers of consciousness as we think of it, concentrations without substance in our terms.

e23

There are many other universes besides our own, each following its own intervals, its own harmony. Our ideas of historic time impede my explanations. In those terms, our world’s reality stretches back far further than we imagine, and in those terms — we need the qualifications — our ancestors have visited other stars, as our planet has been visited by others. Some such encounters intersected in space and time, but some did not. There are endless versions of life. There are, then, other species like our own, and in the vast spectrums of existence that our reality cannot contain, there have been galactic civilizations that came together when the conditions were right.

Time’s framework does not exist as we think it does. Intervals of existence are obviously not the same. In ways impossible to explain, there are what I can only call inner passageways throughout the universe. We know how one association can suddenly in our minds connect us with a past event so clearly that it almost seems to occur in the present — and indeed, a strong-enough memory is like a ghost event. So there are processes that work like associations, that can provide passageways through the universe’s otherwise time-structured ways. These passageways are simply a part of the greater nature of events that we do not perceive.

e24

At times our species has traveled those passageways, and many of our myths represent ghost memories of those events. There is a rhythm, again, to all existence, and so in our terms our species returned to its home planet, to renew its roots, refresh its natural stock to nature, to find solace again amid the sweet ancient heritage of dusk and dawn.

The planet has seen many changes. It has appeared and disappeared many times. It flickers off and on — but because of the intervals of our attention, each “on” period seems to last for millions of years, of course, while at other levels the earth is like a firefly, flickering off and on.

e13

I do not mean by such a description to minimize the importance of physical life, for All That Is endows each portion of its own transformed reality with a unique existences that is duplicated nowhere else, and each spark of consciousness is endowed with a divine heritage that is never extinguished — a spark that is apparent in all other corners of the universe.

e5

In various branches of mathematics, from the works of Euclid (the Greek mathematician who flourished around 300 b.c.) to modern information theory, I have found many relationships with these ideas.

My tentative inquiries led me to the axioms of Euclidean geometry, as, are innately valid in describing the mind’s inner reaches, or whether, in ordinary terms, those propositions represent conscious acquired interpretations of our visual experience.

Units of consciousness are not neutral, mathematical or mechanistic

They are the smallest imaginable “packages” of consciousness that we can imagine, and despite any ideas to the contrary, basically consciousness has nothing to do with size. If that were the case, it would take more than a world-sized globe to contain the consciousness of simply one cell.

x27

So our physical life is the result of a spectacular spontaneous order — the order of the body spontaneously formed by the units of consciousness. Our experience of the world is largely determined by our imaginations and our reasoning abilities. These did not develop through time, as per usual evolutionary beliefs. Both imagination and reason belonged to the species from the beginning, but the species has used these qualities in different ways throughout what we think of as historic time. There is great leeway in that direction, so that the two can be combined in many many alternate fashions, each particular combination giving us its own unique picture of reality, and determining our experience in the world.

Our many civilizations, historically speaking, each with its own fields of activity, its own sciences, religions, politics and art — these all represent various ways that man has used imagination and reason to form a framework through which a more or less cohesive reality is experienced.

x16

Man and woman, then, has sometimes stressed the power of the imagination and let its great dramatic light illuminate the physical events about him or her, so that they were largely seen through its cast. Exterior events in those circumstances become magnets attracting the dramatic force of the imagination. Inner events are stressed over exterior ones. The objects of the world then become important not only for what they are but because of their standing in an inner world of meaning. In such cases, of course, it becomes quite possible to go so far in that direction that the events of nature almost seem to disappear amid the weight of their symbolic content.

In recent times the trend has been in the opposite direction, so that the abilities of the imagination were considered highly suspect, while exterior events were considered the only aspects of reality. We ended up with a true-or-false kind of world, in which it seemed that the answers to the deepest questions about life could be answered quite correctly and adequately by some multiple-choice test. Man’s and woman’s imagination seemed then to be allied with falsehood, unless its products could be turned to advantage in the materialistic existence. In that context, the imagination was tolerated at all only because it sometimes offered new technological inventions.

x31

I have taken two contrasting examples of the many ways in which the powers of the imagination and those of the reasoning abilities can be used. There are endless varieties, however — each subjectively and genetically possible, and many, of course, that we have yet developed as a species.

Why would an individual form the reality of schizophrenic behavior?

x26

On the question of “mental disorders,” it is highly important that individual integrity be stressed, rather than the blanket definitions that are usually accorded to any group of symptoms. In many such circumstances, however, such individuals are combining the imagination and the reasoning abilities in ways that are not in keeping with their historic periods. It would not be entirely out of keeping, though somewhat exaggerated a statement, to claim that men and women who stockpile nuclear weapons in order to preserve peace are insane. In our society, such activities are, in a way that completely escapes me, somehow under the label of humanitarianism!

Such plans are not considered insane ones — though in the deepest meaning of that word, they are indeed. There are many reasons for such actions, but an overemphasis upon what we think of as the reasoning abilities, as opposed to what we think of as imaginative abilities, is at least partially to blame.

x37

In the schizophrenic case, we have a mixture of those characteristics in which interior events — the events of the imagination — cast too strong a light upon physical events as far as the socially accepted blend is concerned. Again, I am not speaking about all cases of mental disorder here. I do however, want to make the point that our prized psychological norm as a species means that we must also be allowed a great leeway in the use of the imagination and the intellect. Otherwise, we could become locked into a rigid conscious stance, one in which both the imagination and the intellect could advance no  further. It is vitally important that we realize the great psychological diversity that is present within our psychological behavior — and those varieties of psychological experience are necessary. They give us vital psychological feedback, and they exercise the reaches of our abilities in ways that are overall most advantageous.

The schizophrenic man or woman wants to live largely in his or her own world. He or she hurts no one. He and she supports himself or herself a good deal of the time. His or her view of reality is eccentric from most viewpoints. He or she adds a flavor to the world that would be missing otherwise, and through his or she very eccentricity, to some extent he and she shows other people that their rigid views of reality may indeed have chinks in them here and there.

x35

I do not mean to idealize the schizophrenic either, or others of his or her kind, but to point out that we can use our imaginations and intellect in other fashions than we do. In fact, such fashions are not only genetically possible, but genetically probable — a matter I will discuss in later blogs. The imagination, of course, deals with the implied universe, those vast areas of reality that are not physically manifest, while reason usually deals with the evidence of the world that is before it. That statement is generally true, but specifically, of course, any act of the imagination involves reasoning, and any act of reason involves the imagination.

Are the Invisible Particles the Units of Consciousness?

For one thing, while I realize the importance of specific terms. I do not want my blog readers to become so dependent upon terms that coming across one you have read before, you instantly categorize it. For another thing, each time I reintroduce such information I do so from another direction, so to speak, so that you as my blog reader are meant to approach it from a different angle also. In that way, you become familiar with certain knowledge from a variety of viewpoints.

d35

As you read my blogs the question itself — “Are these after all the units of consciousness referred to in earlier blogs?” — should have triggered your intellect and your intuition to work together, even if only slightly, in another way. In other words, of course, I hope to inspire both your imagination and your intelligence in this blog devoted to such subject matter.

Remember, again, the manifest universe emerges from a subjective reality, one that is implied in the very nature of our world itself. I would like us, then to think of those units of consciousness from an entirely different scale of events.

d34

Imagine, now, as far as you are able, the existence of All That Is, a consciousness so magnificently complex that what we may call its own psychological compartments are, literally now, infinite. All appearances of time, and all experience of it, must be psychological. The “speed” of electrons, for example, would reflect their psychological motion.

All That Is, as the source of all realities and experience, is so psychologically complex, so multidimensionally creative, that it constantly surprises itself. It is, itself, the invisible universe that is everywhere implied within our world, but that becomes manifest to our perception only through historic time. All That Is disperses itself, therefore, so that it is on the one hand “a massive” subjective entity, a psychological structure — and on the other hand, it also disperses itself into the phenomenal world. It is, in all meanings of the word, divine, yet it disperses even that divinity so that in our terms, each unit of consciousness contains within itself those properties of divinity. All That Is has no one image, but is within all images —  (whether or not they are manifest). Our thoughts are the invisible partners of our words, and the vast unstated subjectivity of All That Is is in the same way behind all stated or manifest phenomena.

d13

In those terms, it is basically impossible for any given species to become extinct. It can disappear for a time, become unmanifest for a while in historic events. The genetic patterns for any given species reside, of course, primarily in that species’ genetic bank — but the genetic bank does not exist in isolation, but is invisibly connected with the genetic makeup of each other species.

There are countless relationships between species that go unrecognized. The generations of all species interact. The genetic cues are not triggered on the proposition, obviously, that a species exists alone on the planet, but also in response to genetic sequences that operate in all of the species combined. The genetic system, again, is not closed nearly as much as supposed. That is, again, because the basic units of consciousness that build up matter — that form matter — are themselves endowed with a subjective acuteness. This also accounts for my earlier statement, that in usually understood terms the environment and its creatures “evolve” together. Our position on the scale of awareness inclines us to categorize consciousnesses so that only our own familiar brand seems to fit the definition — so again here I remind that consciousness is everywhere in the deepest terms, because All That Is disperses itself throughout physical reality. All portions of that reality have their own rights to existence, and purposes within it. so of course do all peoples, and the races.

d8

Our imaginations helps us bring elements of that inner implied universe into actuality. Our imaginations obviously are not limited by time. We can imagine past and future events. Our imaginations have always helped us form our civilizations, our arts, and our sciences, and when they are united with our reasoning processes they can bring us knowledge about the universe and our places in it that we can receive in no other fashion.

d7

Each unit of consciousness intensifies, magnifies its own intents to be — and, we might say, works up from within itself an explosive spark of primal desire that “explodes” into a process that causes physical materialization. It turns into what I have called an electromagnetic energy unit, in which case it is embarked upon its own kind of physical experience. And: “Units of consciousness, transforming themselves into electromagnetic energy units, formed the environment and all of its inhabitants in the same process, in what we might call a circular manner rather than a serial one.

When You Are Who You Are

When you are determines where you are. Space is in many ways more “timely” than we think. I am not speaking of the usual time concepts, of course, of consecutive moments, but of a certain dimension of activity in which our space happens.

c13

As long as we are trying to explain the origin of our world in a new fashion, we will be bringing in many subjects that may not usually appear in such discussions. The world as we know it emerges from an inner, more extensive sphere of dimensions into actuality. It is supported then by a seemingly invisible framework.

Beyond certain levels it is almost meaningless to speak in terms of particles, but I will for now use the term “invisible particles” because we are familiar with it. Invisible particles, then, form the foundation of our world. The invisible particles that I am referring to, however, have the ability to transform themselves into mass, or to divest themselves of it. And the invisible particles of which I speak not only possess consciousness — but each one is, if you will, a seed that contains within itself a potential for an infinite number of gestalts. Each such invisible particle contains within itself the potential to embark upon an infinite number of probable variations of consciousness. To that degree such psychological particles are at stage unspecialized, while they contain within themselves the innate ability to specialize in whatever direction becomes suitable.

c9

They can be, and they are, everywhere at once. Sometimes they operate with mass and sometimes without it. Now we are composed of such invisible particles, and so is everything else that we can physically perceive. To that degree portions of our own consciousness are everywhere at once. They are not lost, or spread out in some generalized fashion, but acutely responsive, and as highly alert as our familiar consciousness is now.

The self that we are aware of represents only one “position” in which those invisible particles happen to intersect, gain mass, build up form. scientists can only perceive an electron as it is to them. They cannot really track it. They cannot be certain of its position and its speed at the same time, and to some extent the same applies to our consciousness. The speed of our own thoughts takes those thoughts away from us even as we think them — and we can never really examine a thought, but only the thought of a thought.

c12

Because we are, we are everywhere at once. I am quite aware of the fact that we can scarcely follow that psychological motion. As we will see later, our imagination can lead us toward some recognition, even toward some emotional comprehension, of this concept. While our reasoning abilities at first may falter, that is only because we have trained our intellect to respond in a limited fashion.

There are what I will call “intervals of perception.” We are usually conscious of events that are significant neurologically, and that neurological timing is the end result of an almost infinite series of sequences. Those sequences are areas in which activities happen. Each consciousness within each area is tuned into its proper sequence. Each area builds on the others. The invisible particles are the framework upon which our body is formed, for example — they move faster than the speed of light, yet we are not dizzy. We are aware of no such motion. We are tuned into a different sequence of action.

c23

There are, then, different worlds operating with different frequencies at different intervals. They are conscious in other times, though we are neurologically equipped to perceive our own interval structures. When I speak of time, I do not merely refer to other centuries as we think of them. But between the moments that we know, and neurologically accept, there are other kinds of moments, if we prefer, other versions of time, and other kinds of accomplishments and fulfillments that are not dependent upon usual ideas of, say, growth through time.

Some of this may seem quite difficult at first reading, but I know that we are all far more intelligent than we realize we are — far more intuitive. I know also that we are tired of simple tales told to us as if we were children, and that our minds and hearts yearn for worthwhile challenges. We want to extend ourselves as far as possible, because each of us has been born with that urge toward value fulfillment.

c16

It is only because, particularly in our times, we have trained ourselves to limit the nature of our own consciousnesses that such ideas seem strange. We have thus far believed that we must train our great imaginations and our intelligences to confine themselves and their activities to the physical world as we have been told it exists. In childhood, before we so leashed our imaginations, however, we each had our own dreams — dreams that awakened us to other portions of our own identities. There are many experiences open to us now — if we can be free enough to allow them — that will give us glimpses of those other intervals in which we have a reality.

I will deal with some such exercises later in future blogs. All such methods, however, are useless if our beliefs hold us back, and so the main thrust of all of my blogs is to increase your own areas of thought and speculation.

c4

In material like this, but in general you end up with information that does indeed come from outside of time in certain important fashions.

Probabilities intersect at each point with our time, and those probabilities are psychologically directed so that, in our terms once again, he and she are at an excellent intersection point, where the prognosis is excellent. And we all are responsible, for all of our lives merge in their fashions.

c25

Ordinarily we think of mass as meaning the bulk and/or weight of an object. In classical physics, the amount of matter in a given object is measured according to its relation to inertia, which in turn is the tendency of matter to keep moving in the same direction, if moving, or to stay at rest if at rest. An object’s mass is arrived at through dividing its weight by the acceleration caused by gravity.

Between each ticking of the clock

Long centuries pass

In universes hidden from our own.

Meaningfulness of Life

People have a biologically built-in knowledge that life has meaning. They share that biologically ingrained trust with all other living creatures. A belief in life’s meaning is a necessity on the part of our species.

a1

It is vital for the proper workings of genetic systems. It is a prerequisite for individual health and for the overall vitality of any given “stock.”  Our greatest achievements have been produced by civilizations during those times when man had the greatest faith in the meaningfulness of life in general, and in the meaningfulness of the individual within life’s framework.

We are, I hope, coming  toward a time of greater psychological synthesis, so that the intuitions and reasoning abilities work together in a much more smooth fashion, so that emotional and intuitive knowledge regarding the meaningfulness of life can find clearer precision and expression, as the intellect is taught to use its faculties in a far less restricted manner.

a8

No matter what science says about certain values being outside of its frame of reference, science implies that those values are therefore without basis. The reasoning qualities of the mind are directed away from any exploration that might bring about any acceptable scientific evidence for such values, therefore. The fact is that man lives by those values that science ignores.

For that reason, science — after its first great adventurous era — had its own flaws built in, and so it must expand its definitions of reality or become a tin-can caricature of itself, a prostituted handmaiden to an outworn technology, and quite give up its early claims of investigating the nature of truth or reality. It could become as secondary to life as, say, the Roman Catholic Church is now, losing its hold upon world dominance, losing its claim of being the one official arbiter of reality.

a3

There are, overall, some processes important in man’s and woman’s development, and in the development of species. Efforts, methods that work against value fulfillment phase themselves out, for in the long run they do not work.

There is nothing wrong with technology. Man and woman have an innate inclination toward the use of tools, and technology is no more than an extension of that capacity. When men and women, use tools in accord with the “dictates” of value fulfillment, those tools are effective. Our technology, however, as it stands, has to some important degree — but not entirely  —  been based upon a scientific philosophy that denies the very idea of value fulfillment. Therefore, we end up with affairs of great national and world concern, such as the Fukushima Daiichi nuclear disaster, and other lesser-known near-nuclear accidents.

ac2

The control panels of the nuclear plants, many of them, were designed as if consciousness did not enter into the picture at all, as if the plants were to be run by other machines, not men or women — with controls that are not handily within reach, or physically inaccessible, as if the men or women who drew up the plans had completely forgotten what the species is like mentally or physically.

Now, the overall purpose supposedly is the utilization of energy — a humanitarian project meant to bring light and warmth to millions of homes. But that intent was sabotaged because the philosophy behind it denied the validity of the very subjective values that give man and woman his or her reason for living. Because those values were forgotten, life was threatened.

a18

There are grassroots organizations — cults, groups of every persuasion — growing up in our country as small groups of people together, once again, search for intellectual reasons to back up their innate emotional knowledge that life has meaning. These groups represent the beginnings of new journeys quite as important to the species as any sea voyage ever was as man and woman searched for new lands.

Seeds are blown by the wind, and so reproduce their kind. Many people speculate about the physical journeys of early man and woman from one continent to another. It is said that in “the struggle to survive” man and woman were literally driven to expand his or her physical boundaries. The true motion of the species, however, has always been psychological, or psychic if you prefer, involving the exploration of ideas. And again, the survival of the species in those terms is basically dependent upon its belief in the meaningfulness of its existence. These new cults and groups, however — these new cults and groups, therefore are following the paths of genetic wisdom, opening up new areas of speculation and belief. And if some of their present beliefs are ludicrous in the light of the intellect’s reason, in the end — because such groups are following the dictates of value fulfillment, however feebly — they are significant. It is easy for the intellect, as we are used to using it, to see only the antics of such groups, and they can appear ridiculous in that light.

a16

A scientist who would threaten the very survival of life on the planet in order to increase life’s conveniences it, however, truly displaying ludicrous behavior.

The trouble with most ideas concerning evolution is that they are all one-sided — all loaded, of course, at man’s and woman’s end at the expense of the other species, and with all thinking in terms of progress along very narrow consecutive lines. Such ideas have much to do with the way we think of ourselves, and what we consider human characteristics, and the light in which we view those vary in one way or another from those norms.

a19

Now: Man and woman needs the feeling that he or she is progressing, but technological progress alone represents a comparatively shallow level unless it is backed up by a growth of emotional understanding — a progression of man’s and woman’s sense of being at one with himself or herself and with the rest of the natural world.

There are people who are highly intellectually proficient, whose reasoning abilities are undisputed, and yet their considerable lack of, say, emotional or spiritual development remains largely invisible as far as our assessments are concerned. Such people are not considered retarded, of course. I will always be speaking about a balance between intuition and reasoning abilities and, I hope, be leading toward a wedding of those abilities, for together they can bring about what would certainly appear in our world to be one completely new faculty, combining the very best elements of each, but in such a fashion that both were immeasurably enhanced.

a43

I also want to emphasize that our present beliefs limit the full and free operation of our intellects, as far as our established fields of knowledge are concerned, for science has placed so many taboos, limiting the areas of free intellectual inquiry. I am not, however, promoting dependence upon feelings above the intellect, or vice versa.

The fact remains that when we assess our fellows, we put a far greater stress upon intellectual achievement than emotional achievement. Some of us may even question what emotional achievement is, but it is highly important spiritually and biologically. Some people, who would rate quite high on any hypothetical emotional-achievement test, might very possibly under certain conditions be labeled as retarded, according to the dictates of our society. The species is at least embarked upon its journey toward emotional achievement, as it is upon the development of its intellectual capacities, and ultimately the two must go hand in hand.

a13

A brilliant mathematician or scientist, or even an artist, or an accepted genius in any field, can be an emotional incompetent, but no one considers him as retarded. I am not speaking now of eccentric behavior on the part of, say, creative people or anyone else, but of a lack of understanding of emotional values.

Now as far as the species is concerned, all variations are necessary — and it is as if in one instance a member of the species — for its own reasons, but also on behalf of the whole — decides to specialize in one particular area, to isolate certain abilities, so to speak, and display them with the greatest tenacity and brilliance, while nearly completely ignoring certain other areas. If our society, however, the capacities of the reasoning mind have been considered in opposition to the intuitive abilities, so that our ideas of what a person is or should be largely ignore the idea of emotional achievement, emotional understanding.

a21

Other people may be sophisticated, brilliantly aware of their own feelings and those of other people, intuitively knowledgeable in the handling of relationships, even, as adults, exquisite parents — yet they may be labeled as retarded if they do not live up to certain artificial intellectual standards. They are actually in the same position at the other end as the people mentioned earlier.

It is as if certain members of the species, for their own reasons, and again on the part of the whole, specialized this time in the use of emotional capacities. But those people are usually considered retarded.

a2

Now: Mankind and womankind is a species that specializes in the use of the imagination, and without the imagination language would be unnecessary. Man and woman from his and her particular vantage point imagines images and events that are not before his/her eyes. The applied use of the imagination is one of the most distinguishing marks of our species, and the imagination is our connection between the inner worlds of reality and the exterior world of our experience. It connects our emotions and our reason. All species are interconnected, so, as I said earlier, when we think we think for ourselves, we also specialize in thinking for the rest of nature, which physically sustains us.

a44

In future blogs, I want to discus reason and imagination, then, and those subtle variations that unite the two. Through doing so, I hope to give a truer picture of our own dimension, and to continue our discussion about the gifts and seeming defects that are genetically inspired.

Subjective reality of Cells

Our established fields of knowledge do not grant any subjective reality to cells.

w51

Cells, however, possess an inner knowledge of their own shapes, and of any other shapes in their immediate environment — this apart from the communication system that operates on biological levels between all cells.

To some important degree, cells possess curiosity, an impetus toward action, a sense of their own balance, and sense of being individual while being, for example, a part of a tissue or an organ. The cell’s identification biologically is highly connected with this very precise knowledge of its own shape, or sometimes shapes. Cells, then, know their own forms.

q25

In highly complicated cellular structures like ourselves, with our unique mental properties, we end up with a vital inborn sense of shape and form. The ability to draw is a natural outgrowth of this sensing of shape, this curiosity of form. On a quite unconscious level we possess a biological self-image that is quite  different from the self that we see in a mirror. It is a knowledge of bodily form from the inside out, so to speak, composed of cellular shapes and organizations, operating at the maximum. The simple cell, again, has a curiosity about its environment, and on our much more advance cellular level our own curiosity is unbounded. It is primarily felt as a curiosity about shapes: the urge to touch, to explore, to feel edges and smooth places.

There is particularly a fascination with space itself, in which, so to speak, there is nothing to touch, no shapes to perceive. We are born, then, with a leaning toward the exploration of form and shape inparticular.

i15

Remember that cells have consciousness, so while I say these leanings are biologically entwined, they are also mental properties. Drawing in its simplest form is, again, an extension of those inclinations, and in a fashion serves two purposes. Particularly on the part of children, it allows them to express forms and shapes that they see mentally first of all. When they draw circles or squares, they are trying to reproduce those inner shapes, transposing those images outward into the environment — a creative act, highly significant, for it gives children experience in translating inner perceived events of a personal nature into a shared physical reality apparent to all.

When children draw objects they are successfully, then, turning the shapes of the exterior world into their personal mental experiences — possessing them mentally, so to speak, through physically rendering the forms. The art of drawing or painting to one extent or another involves those two processes. An astute understanding of inner energy and outer energy is required, and for great art an intensification and magnification of both elements.

w55

The species chooses the best conditions in which to display and develop such to the utmost, taking into consideration all its other needs and purposes. The particular, brilliant, intensified flowering of painting and sculpture that took place, say, in the time of Michelangelo (1475-1564) could not, in our probability, have occurred after the birth of technology, for example, and certainly not in our own era, where images are flashed constantly before our eyes on computers, television and in the movies, where they are rambunctiously present in our magazines and advertisements. We are everywhere surrounded by photography of all kinds, but in those days images outside of those provided by nature’s objects were highly rare.

People could physically only see what was presently before their eyes — no postcards with pictures of the Alps, or far places. Visual data consisted of what the eye could see — and that was indeed a different kind of world, a world in which a sketched object was of considerable value. Portraits were possessed only by the priests and nobility. We must remember also that the art of the great masters was largely unknown to the poor peasants of Europe, much less to the world at large. Art was for those who could enjoy it — who could afford it. There were no prints to be passed around, so art, politics, and religion were all connected. Poor people saw lesser versions of religious paintings in their own simple churches, done by local artists of far lesser merit than those who painted for the popes.

w24

The main issue, however, in that particular era, was a shared belief system, a system that consisted of, among other things, implied images that were neither here nor there — neither entirely earthly nor entirely divine — a mythology of God, angels, demons, and entire host of Biblical characters that were images in man’s and woman’s imagination, images to be physically portrayed. Those images were like an entire artistic language. Using them, the artist automatically commented upon the world, the times, God, man, woman, and officialdom.

Those mythological images and their belief system were shared by all — peasants and the wealthy — to a large degree. They were, then highly charged emotionally. Whether an artist painted saints or apostles as heroic figures, as ideas embodied in flesh, or natural men, he commented on the relationship between the natural and the divine.

w22

In a fashion, those stylized figures that stood for the images of God, apostles, saints, and so forth, were like a kind of formalized abstract form, into which the artist painted all of his or her emotions and all of his or her beliefs, all of his or her hopes and dissatisfactions. Let no one make God the Father look like a mere human, for example! He must be seen in heroic dimensions, while Christ could be shown in divine and human attributes also. The point is that the images the artists were trying to portray were initially mental and emotional ones, and the paintings were supposed to represent not only themselves but the great drama of divine and human interrelationship, and the tension between the two. The paintings themselves seemed to make the heavenly horde come alive. If no one had seen Christ, there were pictures of him.

This was an entirely different kind of art than we have now. It was an attempt to objectify inner reality as it was perceived through a certain belief system. Whether the artist disagreed with certain issues or not, the belief system was there as an invisible framework. That intense focus that united belief systems, that tension between a sensed subjective world and the physical one, and the rarity of images to be found elsewhere, brought art into that great flowering.

w53

Later, as man and woman insisted upon more objectivity of a certain kind, he and she determined that images of men and women should look like men and women — human beings, with weaknesses and strengths. The heroic mold began to vanish. Artists decided to stick to portraying the natural world as they saw it with their natural eyes, and to cast aside the vast field of inner imagery. Some of Da Vinci’s sketches already show that tendency, and he is fascinating because with is undeniable artistic tendencies he also began to show those tendencies that would lead toward the birth of modern science.

His notebooks, for example, dealt with minute observations made upon aspects of nature itself. He combined the forces of highly original, strong imagination with very calculated preciseness, a kind of preciseness that would lead to detailed sketches of flowers, trees, the action of water — all of nature’s phenomena.

w533

Now: Drawing of that nature flourishes in our times in an different fashion, divorced to some extent from its beginnings — in, for example, the highly complicated plans of engineers; the unity of, say, precise sketching and mathematics, necessary in certain sciences, with the sketching being required for all of the inventions that are now a part of our world. In our world, technology is our art. It is through the use of technology and science that we have sought to understand our relationship with the universe.

Science has until recently provided us with a unified belief system that is only now eroding — and if you forgive me, our space voyages have simply been physical attempts to  probe into that same unknown that other peoples in other times have tried to explore through other means. Technology has been responsible for the fact so many people have been able to see the great paintings of the world, either directly or through reproductions — and more people are familiar with the works of the great masters than ever were in their lifetimes.

w8

The species uses those conditions, however, so that the paintings of the great masters can serve as models and impetuses, not simply for the extraordinary artwork involved, but to re-arouse within man and woman those emotions that brought the paintings into being.

Man and woman always does best, or his and her best, when he or she sees himself or herself in heroic terms. While the Roman Catholic Church gave him and her a powerful, cohesive belief system, for many reasons those beliefs shifted so that the division between man and woman and God became too great. Man and woman the sinner took over from man and woman the “child of God”. As a result, one we see in art particularly, man and woman become a heroic figure, then a natural one. The curiosity that had been directed toward divinity became directed toward nature. man’s and woman’s sense of inquiry led him and her, then, to begin to paint more natural portraits and images. He and she turned to landscapes also. This was an inevitable process. As it occurred, however, man and woman began to make great distinctions between the world of the imagination and the world of nature, until finally he or she became convinced that the physical world was real and the imaginative world was not. So his or her paintings became more and more realistic.

w11

Art became wedded, then, to phenomena directly before the eyes. Therefore, in a way it could present man and woman with no more data than he or she had before. Imaginative interpretations seemed like pretensions. Art largely ended up — in those terms, now — as the handmaiden of technology: engineering plans, mathematical diagrams, and so forth. What we call abstract art tried to reverse that process, but even the abstract painters did not believe in the world of the imagination, in which there were any heroic dimensions, and the phase is largely transitory.

I did mean to mention that man’s and woman’s use of perspective in painting was a turning point (early in the 15th century) in that it foreshadowed the turning of art away from its imaginative colorations toward a more specific physical rendering — that is, to a large degree after that the play of the imagination would not be allowed to “distort” the physical frame of reference.

w12

All of this involved the triggering of innate abilities at certain points in time by the the species at large, and on the parts of certain individuals, as their purposes and those of the species merged.

w57

Woodcuts and wood blocks were used for a variety of purposes by the ancient Chinese and Egyptians, for example, and even by the Romans. Many of the early prints created in Europe illustrate religious subjects. One of the first dated European woodcuts, showing a religious figure, appeared in 1423; a book bearing woodcut illustrations was produced circa 1460; the first Roman book containing woodcuts was made in 1467; Bibles were illustrated with woodcuts in the late 15th century. The earliest known engravings, printed on paper, date from around 1450; pictorial engravings and etching were evidently developed in Germany in the early 1500s. Leonardo da Vinci (1452-1519) experimented with his own method of copper engraving. But all of these efforts were beginnings: There couldn’t have been any mass circulation of printed material in those days.

What happened to all the Rembrandts?

Why isn’t there at least one artist in all of the world painting today whose ability equals Rembrandt’s, and who uses that great gift to evoke the depths of compassion for the human condition as Rembrandt did? For in my opinion there isn’t such a one around. By extension, why isn’t there a Rubens or a Velazquez or a Vermeer operating now? My choices are personally arbitrary, or course — yet why don’t we have a Rembrandt contributing to  our current reality? Just those four artists, whose lives spanned a period of only 98 years (from 1577 to 1675), explored human insight in powerful ways. To link the “great masters” with our species’ reincarnational intents and drives, opens up a new field for understanding my question, and a very large and intriguing one indeed.

re3

 

Our many excellent “modern” painters inevitably work within a different world ambience. Our species’ art is just no longer the same — a fact I both applaud and mourn. However, I do feel that in the course of ordinary time we have either lost certain qualities of art or no longer stree them.

The “Genetic System” is far more open than is usually supposed

The genetic system not only contains and conveys information, but it also reacts to information from the physical and cultural worlds.

q27

In a way I hope to explain, then, the genetic system also reacts to those beliefs and events that are paramount in any given civilization. Events can trigger genetic activity — not simply through, say, chemical reactions, but through individual and mass beliefs about the safety or lack of it in the world at large.

There are also what I will call genetic dreams, which are inspired directly by genetic triggering. These help form and direct consciousness as it exists in any given individual from before birth.

q23

The fetus dreams. As its physical growth takes place in the womb, so the sleeping of its consciousness is also extended by genetic dreams. These particular fetus-oriented dreams are are most difficult to describe, for they are actually involved with forming the contours of the individual consciousness. Such dreams provide the subjective understanding from which thoughts are developed, and in those terms complete thoughts are possible before the brain itself is fully formed. It is the process of thinking that helps bring the brain into activity, and not the other way around.

Such thoughts are like, now, electrical patterns that form their own magnets. The ability to conceptualize is precise in the fetus, and the fetus does conceptualize. The precise orientation of that conceptualizing, and the precise orientation of the thinking patterns, wait for certain physical triggers received from the parents and the environment after birth, but the processes of conceptualization and of thought are already established. This establishment takes place in genetic dreams.

q18

Infants think long before they can speak. Thought must come before language. Language is thought’s handmaiden.

The ability to use language is also genetically built-in, through the precise orientation, again, with the physical triggering of the parents’ native language. Children learn such languages mentally long before they are physically capable of speaking them; but again, in genetically inspired dreams, children — or rather, infants — practice language. before such infants hear their parents speak, however, they are telepathic communication, and even in the fetus genetic dreams involve the coding and interpretation of language. Those dreams themselves inspire the physical formation necessary to bring about their own actualization.

q31

Genetic dreams of one kind or another continue throughout our lives, whether or not we are consciously aware of them. They were of prime importance in “man’s and woman’s evolution,” as we think of it. They were the source of dreams, mentioned in earlier blogs, that sent man and woman on migrations after food, that led him or her toward fertile land. Those dreams are most closely related to survival in physical existence, and whenever that survival seems threatened such dreams arise to consciousness whenever possible.

They are the dreams that warn of famines or of wars. Such dreams, however, can also be triggered often, as in our own times, when the conscious mind is convinced that the survival of the species is threatened — and in such cases the dreams then actually represent man’s and woman’s fears. Over-anxiety, then, can confuse the genetic system, and in a variety of ways. The existence of each of the species is dependent upon trust, indeed a biological optimism, in which each species feels the freedom to develop the potential of its members in relative safety, within the natural frameworks of existence.  Each species comes into being not merely feeling a natural built-in trust in its own validity, but is literally propelled by exuberance in its ability to cope with  its environment. It knows that it is uniquely suited to its place within life’s framework. The young of all species exhibit an unquenchable rambunctiousness. That rambunctiousness is built in.

q46

Animals know that their lives spell our life’s meaning. They feel their relationship with all other forms of life. They know that their relationship with all other forms of life. They know that their existences are vitally important in the framework of planetary existence. Beyond that, they identify themselves with the spirit of life within them so fully and so completely that to question its meaning would be inconceivable. Not inconceivable because such creatures cannot think, but because life’s meaning is so self-evident to them.

Whenever man or woman believes that life is meaningless, whenever he or she feels that value fulfillment is impossible, or indeed nonexistent, then he or she undermines his or her genetic heritage. He or she separates himself and herself from life’s meaning. He or she feels vacant inside. Man and woman for centuries attached faith, hope, and charity to the beliefs of established religions. Instead, these are genetic attributes, inspired and promoted by the inseparable unity of spirit in flesh. The animals are quite as familiar with faith, hope, and charity as we are, and often exemplify it in their own frameworks of existence to a better extent. Any philosophy that promotes the idea that life is meaningless is biologically dangerous. It promotes feelings of despair that directly hamper genetic activity. Such philosophies are extremely disadvantageous creatively, since they dampen the emotional spirits and exuberance, and sense of play, from which creativity itself emerges.

q42

Such philosophies are also deadening on an intellectual basis, for they must of necessity close out man’s and woman’s great curiosity about the subjective matters that are his and her main concern. If life has no meaning, then nothing else really makes any difference, and intellectual curiosity itself also ends up withering on the vine.

The intellectual ideas of societies, therefore, also have a great effect upon which genetic systems are triggered, and which ones are not.

q33

We have genetic systems, then, carrying information that is literally incalculable. Now: through our technologies, through our physical experience, we are also surrounded by an immense array of communication and information of an exterior nature. We have our cell-phones, radios, computers, televisions, our earth satellites — all networks that process and convey data. Those inner biological systems and the exterior ones may seem quite separate. They are intimately connected, however. The information we receive from our culture, from our arts, sciences, fields of economics, is all translated, decoded, turned into cellular information. Certain genetic diseases, for example, may be activated or not activated according to the cultural climate at any given time, as the relative safety or lack of it in that climate is interpreted through private experience.

In one way or another, the living genetic system has an effect upon our cultural reality, and the reverse also applies. All of this is further complicated by the purposes and intents of the generations in any historical period, and the reincarnational influences.

q51

Value fulfillment always implies the search for excellence — not perfection, but excellence. Excellence in any given area — emotional, physical, intellectual, intuitional, scientific — is reflected in other areas, and by its mere existence serves as a model for achievement. This kind of excellence need not be structured, then, into any aspect of life, though it may appear in any aspect, and wherever it appears it is an echo of a spiritual and biological directive, so to speak. There are different historical periods, in our terms, where the species has showed what it can do — and what is possible in certain specific directions when the genetic and reincarnational triggers are touched and opened full blast, so that certain characteristics appear in their clearest, most spectacular light, to serve as individual models and as models for the species as a whole.

Again, such times are closely bound with reincarnational intents that direct the genetic triggering, and that meet in the culture the further stimulus that may be required. The time of the great masters in the fields of painting and sculpture is a case in point.

q44

Some people have built careers around negative beliefs– they may have spent their professional lives maintaining belief systems which after death they begin to understand are quite wrong. How do they react? Are those individuals even aware of their earlier beliefs? Do they care what they used to think? Are they shocked, do they have feelings of regret or embarrass what? Or is there such a variety of responses possible that we can’t answer the question simply? And how do such people react after death, they start to get glimmerings about the workings of reincarnation, for example?

Reincarnational patterns apply also. Some people, having live lives believing in one religious system or another, being completely immersed in them give themselves shock treatments of sorts, then, living lives in which they believe in nothing or at least freeing themselves from any beliefs — only to discover, of course, that a believing nothing is the most confining belief of all. That realization is that in such cases.

q43

There are those who upon religious beliefs, using them as crutches, and in later lives then, they might– such people — throw those crutches away overreacting to their new-found “freedom”; and through living lives as meaningless they then realize, after death, the meaningfulness of existence was after all not dependent upon any religious system. It was there all along, but they had not seen it.

q53

“If there is no life after life,

then what cosmic spendthrift formed

the universe,

for Chance alone can’t be

that prolific, or fake an order in which

an accident of such proportions

as the creation of a world

seems so inevitable,

each random element

falling pat, into place.,

and each consciousness promptly appearing

with body parts all neatly assembled —

only to be squandered,

falling apart, dissolving into nothingness

while Chance grinds out newer odds.

ra17

If there is no life after life,

then what a lack

of cosmic economy,

for nature strings one molecule

on to another so craftily

that each seed can grow a tree,

and contains the properties

of an entire forest,

while multiplications

are hidden everywhere.”

The Genetic system is an inner, biological, “Universal” language

In our terms that language speaks the flesh — and it speaks the flesh equally in all races of mankind. There are no inferior or superior races. Now dreams also provide us with another universal kind of language, one that unites all peoples to one extent or another, regardless of their physical circumstances or nationalities or alliances. The cataloging of separate races simply involves us in organizations of variances played upon a common theme — variances that we have used for various purposes. Often those purposes led us to over exaggerate the differences between groups, and to minimize man’s and woman’s biological unity.

ge2

The most important aspects of individuality are those subjective characteristics that on the one hand distinguish each person from the other, and that on the one hand are each like sparkling psychological mosaics, giving separate, exquisite individual versions of that larger pattern from which mankind and womankind emerges. The security, the integrity, and the brilliance of each individuality rises in these terms from that universal genetic language, and also from the inner subjective universal language of dreams. There are great connections between the two, and both are spoken together.

Let us become more practical, and see how these issues merge in our reality. Some of this requires a great honesty on our own parts, as we try to recall some feelings and daydreams that we have tried to put away or forget of disown. Why are some people, then, born with conditions that are certainly experienced as genetically defective, granting even the overall value of such variances on the part of the species? For, again, I must stress the fact that in its way nature makes no such judgments, regardless of the beliefs of our science or religions.

ge22

Science seems to be of the opinion that the individual is important only insofar as he or she serves the purposes of the species’ survival — and I am not saying that. I am saying that the existence of each individual is important to the value fulfillment of the species. And moreover, I am stating that the value fulfillment of the individual and the species go hand in hand.

I am also stating that the species is itself aware of those conditions that lead to its own value fulfillment, and that of its members. No species basically biologically considers its own existence with other species except in a cooperative manner — that is, there is no basic competition between species. When we think that there is, we are reading nature wrong. whatever man’s and woman’s conscious beliefs, on a biological level his or her genetic structure is intimately related to the genetic structure of all other species.

ge9

In man and woman, the probabilities of development are literally numberless. No computer could count the combinations of characteristics possible. It is highly important, then, that the species retain flexibility, and not become locked into any one pattern, however advantageous — and I am referring to physical or mental patterns. Within the framework of established species-hood, there must be every kind of leeway — leeways that are biologically activated, so that variances are constantly active. Those genetic variances may appear as defective or eccentric. They may appear as the handicapped. They may appear as superior characteristics of one kind or another, but they must be biologically stated as the variations from the genetic norm.

By themselves, whether they appear as superior or defective conditions, they necessitate a different kind of adaptability, a change of subjective or physical focus, the intensification of other abilities that perhaps have been under-stressed. Yet granting all this, why, again, would some individuals choose situations that would be experienced as defective conditions? For this, we need to examine some human feelings that are often forgotten.

ge45

Now I have often said in my blogs that suffering of itself is not “good for the soul.” It is not a virtue, yet certainly many individuals seem to seek suffering. Suffering cannot be dismissed from human experience as a freak matter of distorted emotions or beliefs.

Suffering is a human condition that is sought for various reasons. There are gradations of suffering, of course, and each person will have his or her definitions of what suffering is. Many people do indeed equate a certain kind of suffering with excitement. Sportsmen and sportswomen, race-car drivers, mountain climbers — all seek suffering to one extent or another, and find the very intensity of certain kinds of pain pleasurable. We might say that they like to live dangerously.

i49

Some sects have believed that spiritual understanding came as the result of bodily agony, and their self-inflicted pain became their versions of pleasure. It is usually said that animals, and also man and woman, avoid pain and seek pleasure — and so any courting of pain, except under certain conditions, is seen as unnatural behavior.

It is not unnatural. It is an eccentric behavior pattern. Many children daydreams not only of being kings or queens, or given great honors, they also daydream about being tragic figures. They daydream of cruel deaths. They glory in stories of wicked stepmothers. They imagine, in fact, every situation that they can involving human experience. To an extent adults do the same thing. They are drawn to cinema or television dramas that involve tragedies, sorrows, great dramatic struggles. This is because we are alive as the result of our great curiosity for human experience. We are alive because we want to participate in human drama.

g3

While I admit that many people will not agree with me, I know from experience that most individuals do not choose one “happy” life after another, always ensconced in a capable body, endowed by nature or heritage with all of the gifts most people seem to think they desire.

Each person seeks value fulfillment, and that means that they choose various lives in such a fashion that all of their abilities and capacities can be best developed, and in such a way that their world is also enriched. Some people will choose “defective” bodies purposely in order to focus more intensely in other areas. They want a different kind of focus. They want to sift their characteristics through a certain cast. Such a choice demands an intensification. It is made on the part of the individual and on the parents of the parents as well, so that a certain group of people will relate to the world in a highly characteristic way. In almost all such cases, such people will be embarked upon subjective issues and questions also that might not be considered otherwise. They will ask questions on their own parts that need to be raised, not only for themselves but for the society at large.

g4

Those questions help bring out psychological maturities and insights about the nature of the species in general. Many such conditions also serve to keep man’s and woman’s sympathies alive. I make a distinction between sympathy and pity, for a lively sympathy leads toward construction, toward the utilization of abilities, even to social discourse, while pity can be deadening.

Our over-reliance upon physical norms, and our distorted concepts concerning survival of the fittest, help exaggerate the existence of any genetic defects, of course. Many religious dogmas consider such conditions, again, the result of a god’s punishment. The survival of the species is far more dependent upon our subjective activities than our physical ones — for it is our subjective behavior that is responsible for our physical acts. Science of  course looks at it the other way around, as if our physical acts are the result of a robot’s mechanical, formalized behavior — a robot miraculously programmed by the blind elements of an accidental universe formed by chance. The robot is programmed only to survive at anyone’s or anything’s expense. It has no real consciousness of its own. Its thoughts are merely mental mirages, so if one of its parts is defective then obviously it is in deep trouble. But man and woman are no robots, and each so-called genetic defect has an internal part to play in the entire picture of genetic reality. The principle of uncertainty must operate genetically, or we would have been locked into over-specializations as a species.

g9

There are states of consciousness, one within the other, and yet each connected, of course, so that genetic systems are really systems of consciousness. They are intertwined with reincarnational systems of consciousness. These are further entwined with the consciousness that we recognize. The present is the point of power. Given the genetic makeup that we now have, our conscious intents and purposes act as the triggers that activate whatever genetic or reincarnational aspects that we need.

The state of dreaming provides the connecting links between these systems of consciousness.

ge7

The idea today is to love and protect and cherish, and express the body that we have. The human species has an “amazing interplay between genetic preciseness and genetic freedom,” and that our genetic structure reacts to each thought that we have, to the state of our emotions, to our psychological climate. Choices and probabilities apply. Thus do we avoid genetic rigidity.

If there were no Idiots, we would find Geniuses absent among us

Those human abilities that we consider to be characteristic of our species, are, again, dependent upon the existence of infinite numbers of variations that appear in the aggregate, to give us often obviously opposing states. What we think of then as the average intelligence is a condition that exists because of the activity of constant variables, minute variations that give us at one end of the scale the idiot, and at the other the genius.

i4

Both are necessary to maintain that larger “norm” of mental activity. I am using the word “norm” here for our convenience, though I disagree with the ways in which the term has been used, when it has been set up as a rule of measurement, psychologically speaking. The genetic system is not closed, therefore. The genes do not simply hold information without any reference to the body’s living system. It does not exist, then — the genetic structure — like some highly complicated mechanism already programmed, started and functioning “blindly,” so that once it is set into operation there is no chance for modification.

Particularly in our own species there is a great give-and-take between human genetic systems, the environment, and cultural events — and by cultural events I mean events having to do with our peculiarly unique field of activity that includes the worlds of politics, economics, and so forth.

i5

Genetic events are not not irrefutable in a deterministic fashion. They represent strong inclinations toward certain bodily or mental activity, certain biological preferences. They lead toward the activation of certain events over others, so that the probabilities are “loaded” in certain directions. Genetic events are then events, though at a different level of activity than we are used to thinking of.

We are speaking of chromosomal messages. These are not written within the chromosomes as words might be written upon paper, but the information and the chromosomes are a living unit. The information is alive. We are speaking about a kind of biological cuneiform, in which the structures, the very physical structures, of the cells contain all of the knowledge needed to form a physical body — to form themselves. This is indeed knowledge in biological form, and biologically making its clearest living statement.

i7

The cells with their genetic packages, like all cells, react  to stimuli. They act. They are aware of all of the body’s events biologically. In ways impossible to verbalize, they are also aware of the environment of the body as it is perceived at biological levels. I have said before that in one way or another each living cell is united with each other living cell through a system of inner communication. “Programed” genetic activity can be altered by conditions in the environment.

I am not simply saying that genetic activity can be changed, for example, through something like a nuclear accident, but that highly beneficial alterations can also take place in genetic behavior, as in our terms the genetic structure not only prepares the species for any contingency, but also prepares it by triggering those characteristics and abilities that are needed by the species at any given time, and also by making allowances for such future developments.

i12

Our genetic structure reacts to each thought that we have, to the state of our emotions, to our psychological climate. In our terms, it contains the physical history of the species in context with the probable future capabilities of the species. We choose our genetic structure so that it suits the challenges and capabilities of the species. We choose our genetic structure so that it suits the challenges and potentials that we have chosen. It represents our physical reference point, our bodily framework. It is our personal physical property. It is a portion of physical matter that we have identified, filled out with our own identity. It is like a splendid ship, the body, that we have chosen ahead of time for a splendid challenging adventure — a ship that we have personally appointed that is equipped to serve as much as possible as a physical manifestation of our personhood.

Some people, in beginning such a venture, will indeed insist upon an excellent vessel, with the most sophisticated mechanisms, equipped with grand couches and a banquet room. Others would want much more excitement, much more zest, and order then instead a less grand vessel, but one that went faster. Some would set goals for themselves that demanded that their powers of seamanship be tested. The analogy may be a simple one, yet each person chooses the living vessel of the body, with his or her own intents and purposes in mind.

i11

In physical reality, if you will forgive me, life is the name of the game — and the game is based upon value fulfillment. That means simply that each form of life seeks toward the fulfillment and unfolding of all of the capacities that it senses within its living framework, knowing that in that individual fulfillment each other species of life is also benefited.

In no way do I mean to demean the indisputable value of geniuses, or their great contributions to the quality of life — but the quality of life is, again, also benefited by the existence of idiots. Not only because both ends of the scale are necessary for genetic reasons, but also because idiots themselves are in no way considered failures or defects by nature. Those terms are human judgements. Idiots also serve their role by moderating the sometimes fierce hold that the reasoning mind can have upon human activity.

i25

The idiot is often able to experience in his or her own reality a freer, more generous, more faithful flow of emotional states, unhampered by reason’s sometimes stern dictates, and it is important that such a moderating tendency does operate genetically.

The reasoning mind, as we have used it thus far, roughly since the birth of Christianity, has used — instead of used, confined — has confined its reasoning abilities to a very narrow spectrum of reality. It has seen the value of life largely only as that life conforms to its own standards. That is, the reasoning mind, as we have used it, considers that only reasoning creatures are capable of understanding life’s values. Other forms of life have almost seemed beside the point, their value considered only insofar as they were of service to man and woman. But man’s and woman’s life is obviously dependent upon the existence of life’s other species, and with him and her those species share certain values. Life is sacred — all life — and again, all life seeks value fulfillment, not simply physical survival.

i6

I read an article about the development of a strain of mice without thymus [glands]. Since the thymus is very important in the necessary process of maintaining bodily resistance to disease, these particular mice have little resistance. They are bred and sold for experimental purposes. The intent of such procedures is to promote the quality of human life, to study the nature of diseases, and hopefully apply what is learned to some of the lives of human beings. Mice are not considered human. They are not. So like any animal, they are thought of as dispensable, sacrificed to a fine humanitarian end.

Perhaps at first that prejudice of the reasoning mind might escape us, since after all mice are far divorced from our own species. There were Jews sacrificed to the same end not too long ago, and the reasoning was largely the same, though in that case we were dealing with our own species.

i38

Jews were considered almost not human, however, and whenever such atrocities against our own species are concerned, we indulge in the same kind of twisted reasoning. Because the Jews were considered less than human — or, at best, human defects — they were thought of as justifiable sacrifices on the altar of “the genetic betterment of mankind and womankind.” We cannot improve the quality of our own lives by destroying the quality of any other kind of life. There is no genetic master race. The very classification of the species into races to begin with is based upon distinctions that are ridiculously minute in the overall picture of the similarities.

Such procedures involve a biological immortality. I usually avoid terms like “morality” or “immorality,” since their definition vary according to the individual. The proceedings, however, do involve a biological violation, a going against nature’s flow and intent, a process in which a form of life is made to go against its own value fulfillment, and it is because of such attitudes involving other kinds of life that the horrors of the Jewish war camps were made possible.

i52

Using animals in the laboratory is imposing human goals and values upon other life forms, even though the modern scientific method is supposed to be value-free. For such research is carried out in the name of progress and the practical common good, of course — and that progress applies also in the remedial treatment of other animals, let us remember. We think that every reader of this blog has benefited, and still does, from animal experimentation, some of it most cruel, in ways that he or she can hardly suspect, let alone specify: even benefiting from the use of animals in the study of medical and chemical, beauty and recreational products that can be found in practically every home in the country. I see the passive, thinking and unthinking tolerance of animal experimentation as a classical case of a society using ends to justify means — yet in the United States, at least, we carefully teach each generation of our species that such rationalization aren’t morally acceptable. 

I also believe, however, that generally speaking science still views our genetic systems in mechanical, deterministic, and reductionistic terms, and will continue to do so for a long time. So that evidence is being accumulated to support that overall view that at this time science has no need to seek for other, larger, and more unsettling frames of reference encompassing consciousness, intent, and genetics. Indeed, I seldom see consciousness mentioned in connection with genetics, except as its quality may relate to genetic “defects” like mental retardation, say.

i9

Nor do I think that establishment science will soon be interested in ideas that exchanges take place involving our genetic systems, the environment, and cultural events like politics and economics; of that our genetic systems react to our thoughts and emotions — let alone that there’s any genetic planning for future probabilities! I do not know whether, or how, any of those factors could be measured and/or manipulated in the laboratory. Science could grant ideas their own realities outside of the scientific framework, or course, and thus be free of them.

But granted or not, the idea of any sort of genetic preparation for future contingencies collides with the very powerful theory of evolution, which holds that evolutionary, genetic changes take place only through natural selection and chance mutations (although random of chance mutations are generally regarded as mistakes on nature’s part). There are many unsolved challenges here. Another version of old, discredited Lamarckian theories. (jean Baptiste de Monet de Lamarck [1744-1829] was a French naturalist who advocated that certain modifications of an organism’s structure and function could develop in response to environmental factors, and that these “acquired characters” could be inherited. Lamarck’s work has been widely misunderstood, however. It still has value, and recently has been employed in some remarkable scholarly studies that show how, in scientific teams, evolution can take place through means other than natural selection and chance mutations.

ra15

Some would agree that consciousness obviously contains an unlimited number of viewpoints, regardless of which ones we humans may choose to call “true” at any particular time. Consciousness is just as amenable to having some of its physical manifestations scientifically studied, its parts manipulated through “genetic engineering.” All of our  species’ actions represent our keen and creative interests in studying ourselves in the finest details possible. That the scientific approach has limitations is obvious. So do all others in this physical realm. A discipline, of whatever nature and motivation, can erect barriers to “outside” influences — and those barriers are often artifacts growing almost automatically out of the very nature of the belief system in question

The Gifted and the Handicapped

Our species as a species includes the idiot and the genius, the stupid and the wise, the athletic, the deformed, the beautiful and the ugly, and all variations in between. There are genetic cultures operating, then, of literally infinite variety, and they each have their place and their reason, and they each fit into the overall picture — not only of man’s and woman’s reality but of the planet’s  reality, including all of nature.

g21

Our religious ideas have often told us that deformities at birth were the result of the parents’ sins cast upon the children, or that another kind of punishment was involved in terms of “karma.” In terms of biology, people talk about coming from good stock or bad stock, and even those designations imply moral judgments.

The entire idea of reincarnation has been highly distorted by other religious concepts. It is not a psychological arena composed of crime and punishment. Again, we have free will in the conditions of life, given the characteristics that are our own. The great facility and adaptability of the human species are dependent upon an amazing interplay between genetic preciseness and genetic freedom. The very characteristic attributes of species, its dependability and integrity, are dependent upon constant checks and balances, the existence of divergent characteristics against which the species can measure itself.

g20

The species is also always in the process of keeping within its genetic bank millions of characteristics that might be needed in various contingencies, and in that regard there is a connection, of course, between, say, viruses of many strains and the health not only of man and woman but of other species.

The possibility of creative change must always be present to insure the species’ resiliency, and that resiliency can show in many ways — in conditions that we consider deformities, disabilities from birth, or in any physical variation for a hypothetical physical norm. We all look quite alike, with one head, to arms and legs, and so forth, as a rule. Such differences or variations are very noticeable at a certain level, if we have more fingers that we are supposed to or less, or two thumbs to a hand, or any other condition that is considered an abnormality.

g2

There are mental conditions also: the so-called retarded people who do not use their reasoning minds as others do. There are also, again, highly gifted people, physically or mentally, people who seem to be at times as far from the ordinary person on the gifted scale as an idiot might be on the other. So as we progress in my blogs, I hope to show where all of these situations fit in with the development of the individual and the species.

At a smaller level of activity such variances of course escape our notice. We do not know if we have any errant genes unless their effects show themselves. At microscopic levels, in fact, no one fits any norm, and there is no way to predict with complete certainty the development of any genetic element. We can make group predictions, and overall make certain judgments, but other elements are involved, so that any particular genetic element cannot be pinned down in terms of its development. This is because its activity is also involved with relationships that do not show in any of our calculations.

g14

Our thoughts, feelings, desires and intents, our reincarnational knowledge as well, modify that structure, bring certain latent characteristics into actualization, minimize others, as through the experience of our life we use our free will and constantly make new decisions.

Out-of-body is the result of a change in attitude, and makes possible also because of the body’s relaxation. Exercising the consciousness, allowing it greater freedom. a certain portion of our mind drifting at this time.

g13

Now people may wiggle their feet, or doodle, or tap a desk while they are concentrating on other things. They also exercise their consciousnesses in the same fashion — doodle with their minds, relaxing themselves in such a fashion, wandering off to refresh themselves .

g17

Only the physical body is in the same place. This is like a mental doodle, the colors are not complete, the picture is not filled in.

Human’s first encounter with physical reality in life, is with the state of one’s own consciousness

He or she is aware of a different kind of being. He or she encounters his and her consciousness first, and then he and she encounters the world — so I am saying, of course, that each person has an identity that is larger than the framework of consciousness with which we are usually familiar in life.

s65

When we are born, we understand that we have a new consciousness. We explore its ramifications. It is our primary evidence that we exist in flesh. basically, each person must confront the experience of reality through a direct encounter with it. this encounter takes place through the use of the physical senses, of course, as they are used to perceive and interpret physical data. the very utilization of those senses, however, is dependent upon the nature of our consciousness itself, and that consciousness is aware of its power and action through the exercise of its own properties.

Those “properties” are the faculties of the imagination, creativity, telepathy, clairvoyance, and dreaming, as well as the functions of logic and reason. We know that we dream. We know that we think. Those are direct experiences. Anytime we use instruments to probe into the nature of reality, we are looking at a kind of secondary evidence, no matter how excellent the instruments may be. The subjective evidence of dreaming, for example, is far more “convincing” and irrefutable than is the evidence for an expanding universe, black holes, or even atoms and molecules themselves. Although instruments can indeed be most advantageous in many ways, they still present us with secondary rather than primary tools of investigation — and they distort the nature of reality far more than the subjective attributes of thoughts, feelings, and intuitions do.

ac6

The human consciousness has not, therefore, developed the best and most proper “tool” with which to examine the nature of reality. It is because we have used other methods that much evidence escapes us — evidence that would show that the physical universe exists in quite different terms than is supposed.

We are taught not to trust our subjective experience, which means that we are told not to trust our initial and primary connection with reality.

ra11

Evidence for reincarnation is quite available. there are enough instances of it, known and tabulated, to make an excellent case; and beside this there is evidence that remains psychologically invisible in our private lives, because we have been taught not to concentrate in that direction.

There is enough evidence to build an excellent case for life after death. All of this involves direct experience — episodes, encountered by individuals, that are highly suggestive of the after death hypothesis; but the hypothesis is never taken seriously by our established sciences. There is far more evidence for reincarnation and life after death than is, for example, for the existence of black holes. Few people have seen a black hole, to make the most generous statement possible, while countless people have had private reincarnational experiences, or encounters that suggest the survival of the personality beyond death.

ra14

Those experiences are usual. They have been reported by people of all kinds and in all ages, and they represent a common-sense kind of knowledge that is frowned upon by the men and women of learned universities. Throughout my blogs we will often be talking about experiences that are encountered in one way or another by most people, but are not given credence to on the part of the established fields of knowledge. Therefore, dreams will be considered throughout the blogs in various capacities as they are related through genetics, reincarnation, culture, and private life. We will also be considering the matter of free will and its role in individual value fulfillment.

The reasoning mind represents human mental activity in a space and time context

The reasoning mind is involved with the trial-and-error method. It sets up hypothesis, and its very existence is dependent upon a lack of available knowledge — knowledge that it seeks to discover.

ac4

In the dreaming state the characteristics of the reasoning mind become altered, and from a waking viewpoint it might seem distorted in its activity. What actually happens, however, is that in the dreaming state we are presented with certain kinds of immediate knowledge. It often appears out of context in usual terms. It is not organized according to the frameworks understood by the reasoning portions of our mind, and so to some extent in dreams we encounter large amounts of information that we cannot categorize.

The information may not fit into our recognizable time or space slots. There are, in fact, many important issues connected with the dreaming state that can involve genetic activation of certain kinds: information processing on the part of the species, the insertion or reinsertion of civilizing elements — and all of these are also connected with the reincarnational aspects of dreaming.

ac12

I have not touched upon some of these subjects before, since I wanted to present them in that larger context of man’s and woman’s origins and historic appearance as a species. I also wanted to make certain points, stressing the importance of dreams as they impinge upon and help form cultural environments. Dreams also sometimes help in showing the pathways that can be taken to advantage by an individual, by a group of individuals, and therefore help clarify the ways in which free will might most advantageously be directed. So I hope to cover all of these subjects.

Let us first of all return momentarily to the subject of the reasoning mind, its uses and characteristics. It seems to the reasoning mind that it must look outside of itself for information, for it operates in concert with the physical senses, which present it with only a limited amount of information about the environment at any given time. The physical eyes cannot see today the dawn that will come in the morning. The legs today cannot walk down tomorrow’s street, so if the mind wants to know what is going to happen tomorrow, or what is happening now, outside of the physical senses’ domain, then it must try through reason to deduce the information that it wants from the available information that it has. It must rely upon observation to make its deductions accordingly. In a fashion, it must divide to conquer. It must try to deduce the nature of the whole it cannot perceive from the portions that are physically available.

ac47

Children begin to count by counting on their fingers. Later, fingers are dispensed with but the idea of counting remains. There have been people throughout history who mentally performed mathematical feats that appear most astounding, and almost in a matter of moments. Some, had they lived in our century, would have been able to outperform computers (just as some are outperforming computers these days!). In most cases where such accomplishments show themselves, they do so in a child far too young to have learned scientific mathematical procedures to begin with, and often such feats are displayed by people who are otherwise classified as idiots (idiot savants), and who are incapable of intellectual reasoning.

Indeed, when a child is involved, the keener his or her use of the reasoning mind becomes the dimmer his or her mathematical abilities grow. Others, children [or adults] who would be classified as mentally deficient, can tell, or have been able to tell, the day of the week that any given date, past or present, would fall upon. Others have been able, while performing various tasks, to keep a precise count of the moments from any given point in time. There have been children, again, with highly accomplished musical abilities, and great facility with music’s technical aspects — all such accomplishments before the assistance of any kind of advanced education.

ac42

Now, some of these children went on to become great musicians, while others lost their abilities along the way, so what are we dealing with in such cases? We are dealing with direct knowing. We are dealing with the natural perceptions of the psyche, at least when we are speaking in human terms. We are dealing with natural, direct cognition as it exists before and after man’s and woman’s experience with the reasoning mind.

Some of those abilities show themselves in those classified as mentally deficient simply because all of the powers of the reasoning mind are not activated. In children under such conditions, the reasoning mind has not yet developed in all of its aspects sufficiently, so that in a certain area direct cognition shines through with its brilliant capacity.

ac48

Direct cognition is an inner sense. In physical terms we might call it remote sensing. Our physical body, and our physical existence, are based upon certain kinds of direct cognition, and it is responsible for the very functioning of the reasoning mind itself. Scientists like to say that animals operate through simple instinctive behavior, without will or volition: It is no accomplishment for a spider to make its web, a beaver its dam, a bird its nest, because according to such reasoning, such creatures cannot perform otherwise. The spider must spin his web. If he or she chooses not to, he or she will not survive. But by that same reasoning — to which, of course, I do not subscribe — we should also add that man and woman can take no credit either for his or her intellect, since man and woman must think, and cannot help doing so.

Some pessimistic scientist would say: “Of course,” for man and woman and animal alike are driven by their instincts, and man’s and woman’s claim to free will is no more than an illusion.

ac53

Man’s and woman’s reasoning mind, however, with its fascinating capacity for logic and education, and for observation, rests upon a direct cognition — a direct cognition that powers his or her thoughts, that makes thinking itself possible. He or she thinks because he or she knows how to think by thinking, even though the true processes of thought are enigmas to the reasoning mind.

In dreams the reasoning mind loosens its hold upon perception. From our standpoint we are almost faced with too much data. The reasoning mind attempts to catch what it can as it reassembles its abilities toward waking, but the net of its reasoning simply cannot hold that assemblage of information. Instead it is processed at other levels of the psyche. Dreams also involve a kind of psychological perspective with which we have no physical equivalent — and therefore such issues are most difficult to discuss.

ac45

The reasoning mind is highly necessary, effective, and suitable for physical existence, and for the utilization of free will, which is very dependent upon perception of clearly distinguishable actions. In the larger framework of existence, however, it is simply one of innumerable methods of organizing data. A psychological filing system, if you prefer.

Our dreaming self possesses psychological dimensions that escape us, and they serve to connect genetic and reincarnational systems. We must, again, realize that the self that we know is only a part of our larger identity — an identity that is also historically actualized in other times than our own. We must also understand that mental activity is of the utmost potency. We experience our dreams from our own perspective, as a rule. I am simply trying to give a picture of one kind of dream occurrence, or show one picture of dream activity of which we are not usually aware.

ac30

If we are having a dream as oneself from our own perspective, another reincarnational self may be having the same dream from its perspective — in which, of course, we play a minor role. In our dream, that reincarnational self may appear as a minor character, quite on the periphery of our attention, and if the dream were to include an idea, say, for a play or an invention, then that play or invention might appear as a physical event in both historic times, to whatever degree it would be possible for the two individuals living in time to interpret that information. But culture throughout the ages was spread by more than physical means. Abilities and inventions were not dependent upon human migrations, but those migrations themselves were the result of information given in dreams, telling tribes of men and women the directions in which better homelands could be found.

Direct cognition: You know what you know.

ac13

Our knowledge knows how to flow through the techniques we have learned, to use them and become part of them, so that a painting emerges with a spontaneous wisdom. That is what we are learning. That is what the painting shows. That is where we are.

ac39

To some extent each vision, each subject matter, will itself make minute alterations in technique of we allow it to. Our impulses have shadings as our colors do. They should mix and merge with our brushstrokes, so that the idea of our subject matter is almost magically contained in each spot of paint, and that is what we are learning. Or rather, we are learning to take advantage of our direct cognition.

Free will and determinism lead to questions concerning the reasoning mind

Any real discussion of genetic heritage must all bring up questions involving free will and determinism, and to some extent those issues must also lead to questions concerning the nature of the reasoning mind itself.

f5

Reasoning, as we are familiar with it, is the result of mental or psychic processes functioning in a space-time context, and in a particular fashion. To some extent, then, reasoning — again, as we are familiar with it — is the result of a lack of available knowledge. We try to “reason things out,” because the answer is not in front of us. If it were, we would “know,” and hence have no need to question.

The reasoning mind is a uniquely human and physical phenomenon. It depends upon conscious thinking, problem-solving methods, and it is a natural human blossoming, a spectacular mental development in its own framework of activity.

f3

Our technology is one of the results of that reasoning mind. That “reasoning” is necessary, however, because of the lack of a larger, immediate field of knowledge. Thoughts are mental activity, scaled to time and space terms so that they are like mental edifices built to certain dimensions only. Our thoughts make us human.

Other creatures have their own kinds of mental activity, however. They also have different kinds of immediate perceptions of reality. All species are united by their participation in emotional states, however. It is not just that all species of life have feeling, but that all participate in dimensions of emotional reality. It has been said that only men and women have a moral sense, that only men and women have free will — if indeed free will is possible at all. The word “moral” has endless connotations, of course. Yet animals have their own “morality,” their own codes of honor, their own impeccable senses of balance with all other creatures. They have loving emotional relationships, complicated societies, and in a certain sense at least — an important one — they also have their arts and sciences. But those “arts and sciences” are not based upon reasoning, as we understand it.

f21

Animals also possess independent volition, and while I am emphasizing animals here, the same applies to any creature, large or small: insect, bird, fish, or worm; to plant life; to cells, atoms, or electrons. They possess free will in relationship to the conditions of their existence.

The conditions of existence are largely determined by genetic structure. Free will must then of course function in accordance with genetic integrity. Genetic structure makes possible physical organisms through which life is to be experienced, and to a large extent that structure must determine the kind of action possible in the world, and the way or ways in which volition can be effectively expressed.

f16

The beaver is not free to make a spider web. In human beings the genetic structure largely determines physical characteristics such as height, color of eyes, color of hair, color of skin — and, of course, more importantly, the number of fingers and toes, and the other specific physical attributes alone, a man or woman cannot use his or her free will to fly like a bird, or to perform physical acts for which the human body is not equipped.

The body is equipped to perform far better, in a variety of ways, than we give it credit for, however — but the fact remains that the genetic structure focuses volition. The genetic apparatus and the chromosomal messages actually contain far more information than is ever used. that genetic information can, for example, be put together in an infinite number of ways. The species cares for itself in the event of any possible circumstance, so that the genetic messages also carry an endless number of triggers that will change genetic combinations if this becomes necessary.

f11

Beyond that, however, genetic messages are coded in such a way that there is a constant give-and-take between those messages and the present experience of any given individual. That is, no genetic event is inevitable.

Now besides this physical genetic structure, there is an inner bank of psychic information that in our terms would contain the “past” history — the reincarnational history — of the individual. This provides an overall reservoir of psychic characteristics, leanings, abilities, knowledge, that is as much a part of the individual’s heritage as the genetic structure is a part of the  physical heritage.

f9

A person of great intelligence may be born from a family of idiots, for example, because of that reincarnational structure. Musical ability may thus appear complete, with great technical facility, regardless of family background, genetically speaking, and again, the reincarnational bank of characteristics accounts for such events. That inner reincarnational psychic structure is also responsible for triggering certain genetic messages while ignoring others, of for triggering certain combinations of genetic messages. In actuality, of course — say that I smile — all time is simultaneous, and so all reincarnational lives occur at once.

Perhaps an analogy will help. An actor throwing himself or herself into a role, even momentarily lost in the part, is still alive and functioning as himself or herself in a context that is larger than the play. The character in the play is seemingly alive ( creatively) for the play’s duration, perception being limited to that framework, yet to play that role the actor or actress draws upon the experience of his or her own life. he or she brings to bear his or her own understanding, compassion, artistry, and is he is a good actor, or if she is, then when the play is over the actor is a better person for having played the role.

f32

Now in the greater framework of reincarnational existences we choose our roles, or our lives, but the lines that we speak, the situations that we meet, are not predetermined. “You” live or exist in a larger framework of activity even while we live our life, and there is a rambunctious interplay between the yous in time and the you outside of time.

The you inside of time adopts a reasoning mind. It is a kind of creative psychological face that we use for the purposes of our life’s drama. This psychological face of our analogy has certain formal, ceremonial features, so that we mentally and psychologically tend to perceive only those data that are available within the play’s formal structure. We cannot see into the future, for example, or into the past.

f33

We reason out our position. Otherwise our free will would have no meaning in a physical framework, for the number of choices available would be so multitudinous that we could not make up our mind to act within time: With all the opportunities of creativity, and with our own greater knowledge instantly available, we could be swamped by so many stimuli that we literally could not physically respond, and so our particular kinds of civilization and science and art could not have been accomplished — and regardless of their flaws they are magnificent accomplishments, unique products of the reasoning mind.

Without the reasoning mind the artist would have no need to paint, for the immediacy of his or her mental vision would be so instant and blinding, so mentally accomplished, that there would be no need to try any physical rendition of it. So nowhere do I ever mean to demean the qualities or excellence of the reasoning mind as we understand it.

f23

We have, however, become so specialized in its use, so prejudiced in its favor, that our tendency is to examine all other kinds of consciousness using the reasoning mind as the only yardstick by which to judge intelligent life. We are surrounded everywhere by other kinds of consciousness whose validity we have largely ignored, whose psychic brotherhood we have dismissed — kinds of consciousness in the animal kingdom particularly, that deal with a different kind of knowing, but who share with us the reality of keen emotional experience, and who are innately aware of biological and psychic values, but in ways that have escaped our prejudiced examination.

To some extent that emotional reality is also expressed at other levels — as our own is — in periods of dreaming, in which animals, like men, participate in a vast cooperative venture that helps to form the psychological atmosphere in which our lives must first of all exist.

f41

All creatures of whatever degree have their own appreciation of esthetics. many such creatures merge their arts so perfectly into their lives that it is impossible to separate the two: the spider’s web, for example, or the beaver’s dam — and there are endless other examples. This is not “blind instinctive behavior’ at all, but the result of well-ordered spontaneous artistry.

Art is not a specifically human endeavor, though man and woman likes to believe that this is so. Art is above all a natural characteristic. I try to straddle our definitions — but flowers, for example, in a fashion see themselves as their own artistic creations. They have an esthetic appreciation of their own colors. But nature seeks to outdo itself in terms that are most basically artistic, even while those terms may also include quite utilitarian purposes. The natural man and woman, then, are a natural artist. In a sense, painting is man’s and woman’s natural attempt to create an original but coherent, mental yet physical interpretation of his or her own reality — and by extension to create a new version of reality for his or her species.

dr15

We are still learning. Our work is still developing. How truly unfortunate we would be if that were not the case. There is always a kind of artistic dissatisfaction that any true artist feels with work that is completed, for he or she are always aware of the tug and pull, and the tension, between the sensed ideal and its manifestation. In a certain fashion the artist is looking for a creative solution to a sensed but never clearly stated problem or challenge, and it is an adventure that is literally unending. It must be one that has no clearly stated destination, in usual terms. In the most basic of ways, the artist cannot say where he or she is going, for is he or she knows ahead of time he or she is not creating but copying.

The true artist is involved with the inner workings of himself or herself with the universe — a choice, I remind you, that he or she has made, and so often the artist does indeed forsake the recognized roads of recognition. And more, seeing that, he or she often does not know how to assess his or her progress, since his or her journey has no recognizable creative destination. By its nature art basically is meant to put each artist of whatever kind into harmony with the universe, for the artist draws upon the same creative energy from which birth emerges.

a65

Free will is the philosophical doctrine that the individual has the freedom to choose, without coercion, some actions consistent with his or her particular morals and ideals. Determinism is the opposing doctrine that everything, even the individual’s course of action, is determined by conditions outside one’s will.

Through the centuries philosophical and religious thinkers have created numerous complicated variations of ideas involving free will and determinism, so that neither thesis is as simple as it first appears to be. Man and woman related the concept of free will long age to the question of whether he or she could deliberately choose evil, for example. He or she still does. And he or she still struggles with questions about his or her freedom before God’s omnipotence and foreknowledge, and whether those qualities cause events, or can cause them, and whether they involve predestination. Opposing determinism is the idea that man or woman has always fought for his or her personal responsibility — that instead of being controlled entirely by his or her heritage, he’s or she’s capable of forming new synthesis of thought and action based upon the complicated patterns of his or her own history.

p6

In a strange way, determinism has always seemed lacking as a concept — for if it means what it’s supposed to mean, then surely human beings setup the parameters within which determinism is said to operate. I see this as a contradiction of the notion that the individual is entirely at the mercy of his or her history and of nature. How can we be if through the ages we’ve created that history and nature against which we react? In other words, on joint and individual scales, vast though they may be, we do create our joint and individual realities.

f8

 

Even in modern terms, our psychological and medical knowledge of mind and brian have added more complications to the doctrine of free will, yet it survives and grows. I feel strong connections involving free will, determinism, and probable realities — connections largely unexpressed and unexplored in our world’s societies.

Viruses as biological statements and part of the body’s overall health system

Viruses serve many purposes. The body contains all kinds of viruses, including those considered deadly, but those are usually not only harmless, or inactive, but beneficial to the body’s overall balance.

r4

The body maintains its vitality not only through the physical motion and agility that we perceive, but by microscopic agility, and actions within microseconds, that we do not perceive. There is as much motion, stimulation, and reaction in the interior bodily environment as the body meets through its encounters with the exterior environment. The body must now and then “flush its systems out,” run through its repertoire, raise its temperature, activate its hormonal actions more strongly. In such ways it keeps its system of immunities clear. That system operates always. To some extent, it is a way that the body distinguishes between self and nonself.

In certain fashions, that system also keeps the body from squandering its energies, preserving biological integrity. Otherwise it would be as if we did not know where our own house began or ended, and so tried to heat the entire neighborhood. So some indispositions “caused by viruses” are accepted by the body as welcome triggers, to clean out the system, and this applies to our present indispositions.

r24

More is always involved, however, for those viruses that we consider communicable do indeed in one way or another represent communications on a biological level. They are biological statements, literally social communications, biologically made, and they can be of many kinds.

When a skunk is frightened, it throws off a foul odor indeed, and when people are frightened they react in somewhat the same fashion at times, biologically reacting to stimuli in the environment that they consider alarming. They throw off a barrage of “foul viruses” — that is, they actually collect and mobilize from within their own bodies viruses that are potentially harmful, biologically trigger these, or activate them, and send them out into the environment in self-protection, to ward off the enemy.

r12

In a fashion this is a kind of biological aggression. The viruses, however, also represent tensions that the person involved is getting rid of. That is one kind of statement. It is often used in a very strong manner in times of war, or great social upheaval, when people feel frightened.

The olympic athlete may be charged by the great physical vitality that one feels watching that athletic panorama. [Because of that, and for other personal reasons], one could find no release for the intense energy one could feel, so one may get rid of it, protecting oneself, and throw our one ‘s threatening biological posture: the viruses.

r1

Our normal bodies have not received any such goodies sometimes, so they exuberantly used them as triggers to regenerate the immune systems.

Many people had such reactions, coming from athletic events, in that they do not know how to use and release their own energies — as if they themselves felt put in an inferior position in comparison to such achievements.

r0

There are all kinds of biological reactions between bodies that go unnoticed, and they are all basically of a social nature, dealing with biological communications. In a fashion viruses, again, are a way of dealing with or controlling the environment. These are natural interactions, and since we live in a world where, overall, people are healthy enough to contribute through labor, energy, and ideas, health is the dominating ingredient — but there are biological interactions between all physical bodies that are the basis for that health, and the mechanisms include the interactions of viruses, and even the periods of indisposition, that are not understood.

All of this has to do with man’s and woman’s intent and his or her understanding. The same relationships, however, do not only exist between human bodies, or course, but between man and woman and the animals and the plants in the environment, and is part of the unending biological communication that overall produces the vitality of physical experience.

a82

One note on vitamins: they are most effectively used for periods of two or three weeks, where they act as stimuli and reminders to the body. Then drop their use for two or three weeks, so that the body then produces by itself those elements we have reminded it we want. Any steady use of vitamins is not to our overall benefit, for we give the body what it needs too easily, and its ability to produce such material on its own becomes sluggish.

Certain “diseases” are protections against other diseases, and the body on its own is its own excellent regulator.

r8

Obviously those abilities operate best when we trust them. The body’s systems know what diseases are in the air, so to speak, and will often set up countermeasures ahead of time, giving us what we experience as an indisposition of one kind or another — but an indisposition that is actually a statement of prevention against another condition.

There is great traffic flow in a city: A body knows how to leap out of the way in a moment’s time from an approaching car. In the interior physical environment there is far greater traffic flow. There are decisions made in periods of time so brief we cannot imagine them — reactions that are almost over before responds to its inner reality, and to all the stimuli from the exterior environment. The body is an open system. As solid as it seems to us, there are constant chemical reactions between it and the world, electromagnetic adjustments, alterations of balance, changes of relationships — alterations that occur between the body and its relationship with every other physical event, from the position of the planets and moon and the sun, to the position of the smallest grain of sand, to the tiniest microbe in anyone’s intestine.

ag3

All of these adjustments are made without our conscious notice, and yet in with our overall purposes and intents.

Genes are elemental units arranged along the threadlike chromosomes in the nucleus of each cell, and transmit hereditary characteristics to following generations of animals and pants. The gene is primarily made up of protein and a twisted double strand of helix of DNA, or deoxyribonucleic acid. Each gene occurs at a specific location on a chromosome. We humans, for instance, have 46 chromosomes and an estimated 100,00 genes in each cell, and our genes provide the blueprints for the synthesis of some 50,000 proteins. I’m sure that our wonder at the vast organization of nature will continue to grow as our scientists plunger ever deeper into the complexities of genetic research. And what about the philosophical questions involving free will in all of this? Just how much real freedom do we have, if all is programmed by our genetic heritage? (I ask the question  aside from the old, still-extant arguments within philosophy, psychology, and religion over whether free will has ever existed — or does — in any context. In addition, now we also have many newer questions about inherited genetic equality and/or inequality.

ag6

For that matter, one can ask the same questions about our supposed reincarnational heritage: Just how much free will does that concept leave us? Are we as fated to dance to unknown and unrealized nonphysical reincarnational events, tendencies, and goals, as we are to the physical, genetic ones — that is, do the two operate together? How immutable, or resistant to change, are those two endowments, and what parts of either one can we turn off if we choose to? Will the dissection of a gene, down even to its atomic components, ever yield reincarnational clues? Consciousness forms the genes, and not the other way around, and the about-to-be-born infant is the agency that add now material through the chromosomal structure.

Viruses and infections are always present. They are themselves fragments, struggling small fragments without intention of harm. We have general immunity, believe it or not, to all such viruses and infections. Ideally, we can inhabit a plane with them without fear. It is only when we give tacit agreement that harm is inflicted upon us by these fragments. To some degree, lesser, dependent lives such as household pets are dependent upon our psychic strength. They have their own, it it true, but unknowingly we reinforce their energy and health.

de42

When ur own personalities are more or less in balance, we have no trouble at all in looking out for creatures, and actually reinforcing their own existence with residues of our creative and sympathetic powers. In times of psychological stress or crisis, quite unwittingly we without this strong reinforcement.

Animals certainly do have energy to maintain their own health, but this is strongly reinforced as a rule by the vitality of human beings to whom the animals are emotionally attached.

t15

Animals, like people, sense when they are a burden.

The emergence of action within a time scheme

The emergence of action within a time scheme is actually one of the most important developments connected with the beginning of our world.

t7

The Garden of Eden story in its basic refers to man’s and woman’s sudden realization that now he and she must act within time. His or her experiences must be neurologically structured. This immediately brought about the importance of choosing between one action and another, and made acts of decision highly important.

This time reference is perhaps the most important within earth experience, and the one that most influences all creatures. In experience or existence outside of time, there is no necessity to make certain kinds of judgements. In an our-of-time reference, theoretically speaking now, an infinite number of directions can be followed at once. Earth’s time reference, however, brought to experience a new brilliant focus — and in the press of time, again, certain activities would be relatively more necessary than others, relatively more pleasant or unpleasant than others. Among a larger variety of possible actions, man and woman were suddenly faced with a need to make choices, that within that context had not been made “before.”

t26

Speaking in terms of our time, early man and woman still had a greater neurological leeway. There were alternate neurological pathways that, practically speaking, were more available then than now. They still exist now, but they have become like ghostly signals in the background of neurological activity.

This is, again, difficult to explain, but free will operates in all units of consciousness, regardless of their degree — but it operates within the framework of that degree. Man and woman possesses free will, but that free will operates only within man’s and woman’s degree — that is, his or her free will is somewhat contained by the framework of time and space.

t31

He and she have free will to make any decisions that he or she are able to make. This means that his or her free will is contained, given meaning, focused, and framed by his or her neurological structure. He and she can only move, and he or she can only choose therefore to move, physically speaking, in certain directions in space and time. That time reference, however, gives his or her free will meaning and a context in which to operate. We are speaking now of conscious decisions as we think of them.

We can only make so many conscious decisions, or we would be swamped and caught in a constant dilemma of decision making. Time organizes the available choices that are to be made. The awakening mentioned earlier, then, found man rousing from his or her initial ” dreaming condition,” faced suddenly with the need for action in a world of space and time, a world in which choices became inevitable, a world in which he or she must choose among probable actions — and from an infinite variety of those choose which events he or she would physically actualize. This would be an almost impossible situation were the species — meaning each species — not given its own avenues of expression and activity, so that it is easier for certain species to behave in certain manners. And each species has its own  overall characteristics and propensities that further help it define the sphere of influence in which it will exert its ability to make choices.

t25

Each species is endowed also, by virtue of the units of consciousness that compose it, with an overall inner picture of the condition of each other species, and further characterized by basic impulses so that it is guided toward choices that best fulfill its own potentials for development while adding to the overall good of the entire world consciousness. This does not curtail free will any more than man’s and woman’s free will is curtailed because he or she must grow from a fetus into an adult instead of the other way around.

The differences among all species are caused by this kind of organization, so that areas of choice are clearly drawn, and areas of free activity clearly specified. The entire gestalt of probable actions, therefore, is already focused to some degree in the species’ differentiations. In the vast structure of probable activity, however, far more differentiation was still necessary, and this is provided for through the inner passageways of reincarnational existence.

t16

Each person, for example, is born with his or her uniquely individual set of characteristics and abilities, likes and dislikes. Those serve to organize individual action in a world where an infinite number of probable roads are open — and here again, private impulses are basically meant to guide each individual toward avenues of expression and probable activities suited best to his or her development. They are meant, therefore, as aids to help organize action, and to set free will more effectively into motion. Otherwise, free will would be almost inoperable in practical terms: Individuals would be faced by so many choices that any decisions would be nearly impossible. Essentially, the individual would have no particular leaning toward any one action over any other.

” By the time” that the Garden of Eden tale reached our biblical stories, the entire picture had already been seen in the light of concepts about good and evil that actually appeared, in those terms, a long time later in man’s and woman’s development. The inner reincarnational structure of the human psyche is very important in man’s and woman’s physical survival. Children — change that to “infants” — dream of their past lives, remembering, for example, how to walk and talk. They are born with the knowledge of how to think, with the propensity for language. They are guided by memories that they later forget.

t27

In time’s reference, the private purposes of each individual appear also in the larger historical context, so that each person forms his corner of his civilization — and all individuals within a given time period have private and overall purposes, challenges that are set, probables actions that they will try to place within history’s context.

 

 

We are a living portion of a vast “conscious grid” of perception.

Every cell, is a sender and a receiver. All of the larger divisions of life — the mammals, fish, birds, and so forth — are an integral part of that living grid-work.  The picture of the world is not only the result of those messages transmitted and received, however, but is also caused by the relationships between those messages. In our terms, then, all of life’s large classifications were present “at the beginning of the world.” Otherwise there would have been vast holes in that grid of perception that makes possible the very sensations of physical life.

c39

In a manner of speaking, the physical universe is “transposed” upon another reality that must be its source. The world was and is created in dimensions outside of time, and outside of space as we understand it.

Other realities quite as legitimate as our own, quite as vital, quite as “real,” coexist with our own, and in the terms of our understanding, “in the same space” — but of course in terms of our experience those spaces and realities would appear to be quite separate. No systems are closed, however, so that basically the living grid of perception that causes one world or reality is also “wired into” all other such systems. There is a give-and-take between them.

c15

The grids of perception that compose our world give us the world picture as we experience it because our physical senses put us in a certain position within the entire grid. Animals, for example, while part of our experience, are also “tuned into” that grid at another level. The large classifications of mammals, fish, birds, men and women, reptiles, plants, and so forth, are each an integral part of that larger perceptive pattern — and that pattern in those terms had to be complete even in the beginning of our time.

In various periods that “grid-work” might “carry more traffic” along certain circuits than at other periods, so that there has been some creative leeway allowed, particularly on the parts of the species that make up our larger classifications. There were always birds, for example, but in the great interplay of “interior” and exterior communication among all portions of this vast living system, there was a creative interplay that allowed for endless variations within that classification, and each other one.

c22

Our technological communication system is a conscious construct — a magnificent one — but one that is based upon our innate knowledge of the inner, cellular communication between all species. Saying that, I am not robbing the intellect of its right to congratulate itself upon that technology.

The large classifications of life give us the patterns into which consciousness forms itself, and because those patterns seem relatively stable it is easy to miss the fact that they are filled out, so to speak, in each moment with new energy. Man and woman do not in his and her physical development pass through the stages supposedly followed by the hypothetical creature who left the water for the land to become a mammal — but each species does indeed have written within it the knowledge of “its past.” Part of this, again, is most difficult to express, and I must try to fill out old words with new meanings. The reincarnational aspects of physical life, however, serve a very important purpose, providing an inner subjective background. Such a background is needed by every species.

c61

Reincarnation exists, then, on the part of all species. Once a consciousness, however, has chosen the larger classification of its physical existences, it stays within that framework in its “reincarnational” existences. Mammals return as mammals, for example, but the species can change within that classification. This provides great genetic strength, and consciousnesses in those classifications have chosen them because of their own propensities and purposes. The animals, for example, seem to have a limited range of physical activity in conscious terms, as we think of them. An animal cannot decide to read a newspaper. Newspapers are outside of its reality. Animals have a much wider range, practically speaking, in certain other areas. They are much more intimately aware of their environment, of themselves as separate from it, but also of themselves as a part of it. In that regard, their experience deals with relationships of another kind.

These grids of perception “do not exist forever” in our dimension of time, for our dimension of time cannot hold anything that is outside it. Once a world exists, however, it becomes imprinted or stamped upon eternity, so that is exists in time and out of it “at once.”

c12

When we ask: “When did the world begin?” or “What really happened?” or “Was there a Garden if Eden?” , we are referring to the world as we understand it, but in those terms there were earths in the same space before the earth we recognize existed, and they began in the manner that I have given in earlier blogs. The patterns for worlds — the patterns — continue in our time dimension, though in that time dimension those worlds must disappear, again, to continue “their existence outside of time.” The patterns are filled out again.

In the case of earth the grid of perception is simply used differently, certain areas becoming prominent in some eras, and less prominent in others. Using our idea of time, I can only say that when the entire gestalt of consciousnesses that formed a particular earth have formed its reality to the best of their abilities, fulfilling their individual and mass capacities as far as possible, then they lovingly turn over that grid to others, and continue to take part in existences that are not physical in our terms. And that has happened many times.

c9

Our tale about the Garden of Eden, then, is a legend about earth’s ; past beginning. Each world is so cunningly constructed, again, that each consciousness, regardless of its degree, plays a vital part. And each of our actions, however inconsequential, becomes connected in one way or another — in one way or another — to each other reality and each other world.

Now in a manner of speaking — though I see that little time has passed while writing this blog — we have transcended time to some extent this afternoon, for in what I have written there are indeed hints and illusions — cadences — that can, if we are ready, give us a feeling for existence as it is outside of time’s context. Even to try and verbally present such material necessitates alterations involving perception, for while that grid-work appears quite stable to our senses, giving us a reliable picture of reality, this is also because we have trained ourselves to pick up certain signals only. Others at other levels are available. We can tune into cellular consciousness, for example.

c11

Since this material must be comprehensible, my readers and I together form our own pathway of perceptions — they from their end and me from mine, so that we thread back and forth as if through the writing of some vast computer — but a computer that is alive.

We know we can have more that one dream at a time. we can also experience versions of dreams of probable selves, but there will always be some point of contact — that is, there will always be a reason why we pick up such a dream. All of the dreams people have form a mass dream framework. Dreams exist at other levels, and physically of course they affect the body state. In such ways, the world’s actions are worked out in mass dream communications that the same time public and private.

c14

The country works our national concerns in that fashion. We think when we are asleep as well as when we are awake. But when we are asleep our thoughts have a richer dimensional cast: They are fattened by symbols and images.

c31

Mammals are animals of highest class of warm-blooded vertebrates, The Mammalia. They are usually hairy, and their young are fed with milk secreted by the female. Dogs, cats, manatees, lions, dolphins, apes, bats, whales, shrew, sloths, and deer are mammals, to name just a few.

Scientific , systematic categorization of organisms. For man alone the arrangement goes in this descending order from the most inclusive: The kingdom Animalia; phylum Chordata; class Mammalia; order Primates: family Hominidae; genus Homo; species name Homo sapiens; common name Man.

c0

In our terms the earth we know is but the latest in a series of earths that have existed in the same “space,” or “value climate of psychological reality.”

There are endless planes upon our earth, or rather endless planes occurring simultaneously with our earth. Our solid earth is not a solid to inhabitants that would seem to take up the same space as our earth. The idea of taking up the same space is erroneous to begin with, but I don’t see how we can avoid such terms and still make any sense.

c62

The value climate of psychological reality.

I had always thought of transmigration (or metempsychosis) as meaning the birth of a human soul in just animal form. Actually, however, the term refers to the journey of the soul into any form, whether human, animal, or inanimate — thus differing from the ordinary doctrine of reincarnation, or rebirth into the same species. Various interpretation of transmigration are ancient in man cultures.

c532

There is no transmigration of souls, in which the entire personality of a person ‘comes back’ as an animal. Yet in the physical framework there is a constant intermixing, so that the [molecular components of the] cells of a man or woman may become the cells of a plant or an animal, and or course vice versa. I want to avoid tales of the transmigration of souls or men and women to animals, say — a badly distorted version of something else entirely.

c53

In some submerged manner all fragments of a personality exist within an entity, with their own individual consciousnesses. They are not aware of the entity itself. The entity operates its fragments in what we would call a subconscious manner, that is, without conscious direction. The entity gives the fragments independent life, then more or less forgets them. Even thoughts, for instance, are fragments, though on a different plane. Fragments of another sort, called personality fragments, operate independently, though under the auspices of the entity.

The so-called miracles are simply the result of nature unimpeded

We all present ourselves with a prime example of the abilities of the natural person. We are presented now, in the world, with a certain picture of a body and its activities, and that picture seems very evidential. It seems to speak for itself.

bo26

Instead we are presented, of course, with a picture of man’s and woman’s body as it reflects, and are affected by, man’s and woman’s beliefs. Doctors expect vision to begin to fail, for example, after the age of 30, and there are countless patient records that “prove” that such disintegration is indeed a biological fact.

Our beliefs tell us, again, that the body is primarily a mechanism — a most amazing machine, but a machine, without its own purpose, without any intent, a mindless assembly plant of assorted parts that simply happened to grow together in a certain prescribed fashion. Science says that there is no will, yet it assigns to nature the will to survive — or rather, a wiliness instinct to survive. To that extent it does admit that the machine of the body “intends” to insure its own survival — but a survival which has no meaning beyond itself. And because the body is a machine, it is expected to decay after so much usage.

bo12

In that picture consciousness has little part to play. In man’s and woman’s very early history, however, and in our terms for centuries after the “awakening,” as described in my blogs, people lived in good health for much longer periods of time — and in certain cases they lived for several centuries. No one had yet told them that this was impossible, for one thing. Their sense of wonder in the world, their sense of curiosity, creativity, and the vast areas of fresh mental and physical exploration, kept them alive and strong. For another thing, however, elders were highly necessary and respected for the information they had acquired about the world. They were needed. they taught the other generations.

In those times great age was a position of honor that brought along with it new responsibility and activity. The senses did not fade in their effectiveness, and it is quite possible biologically for all kinds of regenerations of that nature to occur.

bo25

Some statesmen and stateswomen who are not young at all, and men and women who do not only achieve, but who open new horizons in their later years. They do so because of their private capacities, and also because they are answering the world’s needs, and in ways that in many cases a younger person could not.

In our society age has almost been considered a dishonorable state. Beliefs about the dishonor of age often cause people to make the decision — sometimes quite consciously — to bring their own lives to an end before the so-called threshold is reached. Whenever, however, the species needs the accumulated experience of its own older members, that situation is almost instantly reversed and people live longer.

ag0

Some in our society feel that the young are kept out of life’s mainstream also, denied purposeful work, their adolescence prolonged unnecessarily. As a consequence some young people die for the same reason: They believe that the state of youth is somehow dishonorable. They are cajoled, petted, treated like amusing pets sometimes, diverted with technology’s offerings but not allowed to use their energy. There were many unfortunate misuses of the old system of having a son follow in his father’s footsteps, yet the son at a young age was given meaningful work to do, and felt a part of life’s mainstream. He was needed.

The so-called youth culture, for all of its seeming exaggerations of youth’s beauty and accomplishments, actually ended up putting down youth, for few could live up to that picture. Often, then, both the young and the old felt left out of our culture. Both share also the possibility  of accelerated creative vitality — activity that the elder great artists, or the elder great statesmen, have always picked up and used to magnify their own abilities. there comes a time when the experiences of the person in the world click together and form a new clearer focus, provide a new psychological framework from which his or her greatest capacities can emerge to form a new synthesis. But in our society many people never reach that point — or those who do are not recognized for their achievements in the proper way, or for the proper reasons.

g26

Man’s and woman’s will to survive includes a sense of meaning and purpose, and a feeling for the quality of life. We are indeed presented with an evidential picture that seems to suggest most vividly the “fact” of man’s and woman’s steady deterioration, and yet we are also presented with evidence to the contrary, even in our world, if we look for it.

Our Olympics, on television, present us with evidence of the great capacity of the young human body. That contrast between the activity of those athletes, however, and the activity of the normal young person is drastic. We believe that the greatest training and discipline must be used to bring about such activity — but that seemingly extraordinary physical ability simply represents the inherent capacities of the human body. In those cases, the athletes through training are finally able to give a glimpse of the body’s spontaneous abilities. The training is necessary because it is believe necessary.

s15

Again, in our blog on suffering, I mentioned that illness serves purposes — that it has a face-saving quality in our society — so here I am speaking of the body’s own abilities. In that light, the senses do not fade. Age alone never brought about any loss of physical agility, or of mental ability, or of desire. Death must come to every living person, yet the time and the means are basically up to each individual. Meaningful work is important at any age. We cannot content the aged entirely with hobbies any more than we can the young, but meaningful work means work that also has the exuberance of play, and it is that playful quality that contains within itself great propensities of a healing and creative nature.

In a fashion, now, our eyes improved their capacities, practically speaking, in a physical manner. The senses want to exceed themselves. They also learn “through experience.” If we have been painting more, our eyes become more involved to that extent. Our eyes enjoy their part in that activity as the ears, say, enjoy hearing. It is their purpose. Our own desire to paint may be joined with and reinforced our eyes natural desire to see.

aw2

When most of us think of physical symptoms, of course, we regard our body with a deadly seriousness that to some extent impedes inner spontaneity. We lay our limiting beliefs upon the natural person.

Our dream’s fits in here in its own fashion, for we see that the ship of life, so to speak, rides very swiftly and beautifully also beneath the conscious surface, traveling through the waters of the psyche. We are progressing very well at under-the-surface levels. There are few impediments. We have clear sailing, so to speak, and the dreams are meant as an inner vision of our progress.

bo44

One has only to read Chapter 5 of genesis to learn what great ages are given to Adam and nine of his descendants up to Noah, or the time of the Flood. Did Adam really live for 930 years, or Seth, the third son of Adam and Eve, for 912? (Why isn’t Eve’s age given in the Bible?) Enoch, the fifth elder listed after Seth, lived for a mere 365 years, but sired Methuselah, who at 969 years is the oldest individual recorded in the Bible. Methuselah was the father of Lamech (777 years), who was the father of Noah (950 years).

In Genesis 11, the listing of Abraham’s ancestors begins after the Flood with the oldest son of Noah, Shem, living some 600 years. Generally, Abraham’s forebears didn’t live as long as Adam’s descendants had, although after Shem their ages still ranged from 148 years to 460. Abraham himself was “only” 175 years old at his death.

bo42

During the little time we’d spent thinking about such matter, I have considered the Biblical accounts of such great ages to be simply wrong, badly distorted, or perhaps epochal– that is. Abraham’s ancestors may be listed in the correct genealogical sequence, but with many gaps among the individuals named. Also, a given father-son relationship may have actually been one between a father and a great-great-grandson, for example. There are other epochal lists in the Bible.

In those early days men and women did live to ages that would amaze us today — many living to be several hundred years old. This was indeed due to the fact that their knowledge was desperately needed, and their experience. They were held in veneration, and they cast their knowledge into songs and stories that were memorized throughout the years. Beside this, however, their energy was utilized in a different fashion than ours is: They alternated between the waking and dream states, and while asleep they did not age as quickly. Their bodily processes slowed. Although this was true, their dreaming mental processes did not slow down. There was a much greater communication in the dream state, so that some lessons were taught during dreams, while others were taught in the waking condition. There was a greater and greater body of knowledge to be transmitted as physical existence continued, for they did not transmit private knowledge only, but the entire body knowledge that belonged to the group as a whole.

ag15

The bible is a conglomeration of parables and stories, intermixed with some unclear memories of much earlier times. The Bible that we recognize — or that is recognized — is not the first, however, but was compiled from several earlier ones as man and woman tired to look back, so to speak, recount his and her past and predict his or her future. Such Bibles existed, not written down but carried orally, as mentioned some time ago in my earlier blogs, by the Speakers. It was only much later that this information was written down, and by then of course much had been forgotten. This is apart from the fact of tampering, or downright misinformation, as various factions used the material for their own ends.

Awakening Man and Woman experience some sense of separation from the dream body

In the beginning, awakening man and woman did experience, some sense of separation from his and her dream body, and from his and her own inner reality — the world of his and her dreams — but he/she were still far more aware of that subjective existence than we are now.

su1

The practical nature of his or her own dreams were also more apparent, for again, his or her dreams sent him and her precise visions as to where food might be located, for example, and for some centuries there were human migrations of a kind that now we see the geese make. All of those journeys followed literal paths that were given as information in the dream state. But more and more man and woman began to identity himself and herself with his and her exterior environment. He and she began to think of his and her inner ego almost as if it were a stranger to himself and herself. It became his or her version of the soul, and there seemed to be a duality — a self who acted in the physical universe, and a separate spirit-like soul that acted in an immaterial world.

This early man and woman regarded the snake as the most scared and basic, most secretive and most knowledgeable of all creatures. In that early experience it seemed, surely, that the snake was a lying portion of the earth, rising from the bowels of the earth, rising from the hidden source of all earth gods. Men and women watched snakes emerge from their holes with wonder. The snake was then — in our terms, now — both a feminine and masculine symbol. It seemed to come from the womb of the earth, and to possess the earth’s secret wisdom. Yet also, in its extended form particularly, it was the symbol of the penis. It was important also in that is shed its skin, as man and woman innately knew he and she shed his and her own bodies.

su0

All units of consciousness, whatever their degree, possess purpose and intent. They are endowed with the desire for creativity, and to increase the quality of existence.They have the capacity to respond to multitudinous cues. There is a great elasticity for action and mobility, so that, for example, in man and woman his or her conscious experience can actually be put together in an almost limitless number of ways.

The inner and outer egos do not have a cement-like relationship, but can interrelate with each other in almost infinite fashions, still preserving the reality of physical experience, but varying the accents put upon it by the inner areas of subjective life. Even the bare-seeming facts of history are experienced far differently according to the symbolic content within which they are inevitably immersed. A war, in our terms, can be practically experienced as a murderous disaster, a triumph of savagery — or as a sublime victory of the human spirit over evil.

su5

We will return to the subject of war in later blogs. I want to mention here, however, that man and woman are not basically endowed with “warlike characteristics.” He or she do not naturally murder. He or she do not naturally seek to destroy his or her own life or the lives of others. There is no battle for survival — but while we project such an idea upon natural reality, then we will read nature, and our own experiences with it, in the fashion.

Man and woman do have an instinct and a desire to live, and he and she has an instinct and a desire to die. The same applies to other creatures. In his and her life each man and woman are embarked upon a cooperative venture with his or her own species, and with the other species, and dying he or her also in that regard acts in a cooperative manner, returning his and her physical substance to the earth. Physically speaking, man’s and woman’s “purpose” are to help enrich the quality of existence in all of its dimensions. Spiritually speaking, his or her “purpose” are to understand the qualities of love and creativity, to intellectually and psychically understand the  sources of his or her being, and to lovingly create other dimensions of reality of which he and she are presently unaware. In his and her thinking, in the quality of his or her thoughts, in their motion, he or she are indeed experimenting with a unique and a new kind of reality, forming other subjective worlds which will in their turn grow into consciousness and song, which will in their turn flower from a dream dimension into other ones. Man and woman are learning to create new worlds. In order to do so he or she have taken on many challenges.

su6

We all have physical parents. Some of us have physical children as well — but we will all “one day” also be the mental parents of dream children who also waken in a new world, and look about then for the first time, feeling isolated and frightened and triumphant all at once. All worlds have an inner beginning. All of our dreams somewhere waken, but when they do they waken with the desire for creativity themselves, and they are born of an innocent new intent. that which is in harmony with the universe, with All That Is, has a natural inborn impetus that will dissolve all impediments. It is easier, therefore, for nature to flourish than not.

We are aware of such activities now as automatic speaking and automatic writing, and of sleepwalking. These all give signs in modern times of some very important evidence is man’s and woman’s early relationship with the world and with himself and herself.

su35

Sleepwalking was once, in that beginning, a very common experience — far more so than now — in which the inner self actually taught the physical body to walk, and hence presented the newly emerged physically oriented intellect from getting in its own way, asking too many questions that might otherwise impede the body’s smooth spontaneous motion.

su25

In the same fashion man and woman are born with an inbuilt propensity for language, and for the communication of symbols through pictures and writing. He and she spoke first in an automatic fashion that began in his and her dreams. In fashion, we could almost say that he and she used language before he or she consciously understood it. It is not just that he and she learned by doing, but that the doing did the teaching. Again, lest there be a sharply inquiring intellect, wondering overmuch about how the words were formed or what motions were necessary, his or her drawing was in the same way automatic. We might almost say — almost — that he and she used the language “despite himself or herself.” therefore, it possessed an almost magical quality, and the “word” was seen as coming directly from God.

 

The Light, and Inner “Psychological” Universe

A psychological universe, from which our own merges, and that inner universe is also the source of Framed-Mind-2 as well. It is responsible for all physical effects, and is behind all physical “laws.”

l8

It is not just that such an inner universe is different from our own, but that any real or practical explanation of its reality would require the birth of an entirely new physics — and such a development would first of all necessitate the birth of an entirely new philosophy. The physical cannot come first , you see.

It is so much that such developments are beyond man’s and woman’s capacity as it is that they involve manipulations impossible to make for all practical purposes, from his or her present standpoint. He and she could theoretically move to a better vantage point in the twinkling of an eye, relatively speaking, but for now we must largely use analogies. Those analogies may lead us, or a few others, to a more advantageous vantage point, so that certain leaps become possible — but those leaps, we see, are not just leaps of intellect but of will and intuition alike, fused and focused.

l1

The light of our questions is, in its way an apart from that other inner universe. In our world light has certain properties and limits. It is physically perceived by the eyes, and to a far lesser degree by the skin itself. In our world light comes from the sun. It has been an exterior source, and in our world light and dark certainly appear to be opposites.

Light is a comprehension that simply that is difficult to verbalize. I do not know how to explain some of this, but in our terms there is light within darkness. Light has more manifestations than its physical version, so that even when it may not be physically manifested there is light everywhere, and that light is the source of our physical version and its physical laws. In a manner of speaking, light itself forms darkness. Each unit of consciousness, whatever its degree, is, again, composed of energy — and the energy manifests itself with a kind of light that is not physically perceived: a light that is basically, now, far more intense than any physical variety, and a light from which all colors emerge.

l31

The colors of which we are aware represent a very small portion of light’s entire spectrum, just physically speaking, but the spectrum we recognize represents only one inconceivably small portion of other fuller spectrums — spectrums that exist outside of physical laws.

So-called empty spaces, either in our living room between objects, or the seemingly empty spaces between stars, are physical representations — or misrepresentations — for all of space is filled with the units of consciousness, alive with a light from which the very fires of life are lit.

l38

The physical senses have to screen out such perceptions. That light, however, is literally everywhere at once, and it is a “knowing light,” (As William James perceived.)

In certain occasions, sometimes near the point of death, but often simply in conscious states outside of the body, man and woman are able to perceive that kind of light. In some out-of-body experiences, for example, colors are more dazzling than any physical ones, and the same kind of colors in our dreams. They are a part of our inner senses larger spectrum of perception, and in the dream state we’re not relying upon our physical senses at all.

l33

In dreams our worries are initially reflected — worries that are see by others but may be unconcerned, showing that the concern is our own, but expressing feelings. We may be viewing our representation of the many-faceted light of our own being.

When I speak of an inner psychological universe, it is very difficult to explain what I mean. In that reality, however, psychological activity is not limited by any of the physical laws that we know. Thought, for example, has properties that we do not perceive — properties that not only affect matter, but that form their own greater patterns outside of our reality. These follow their own, say, laws of physics. We add on to, or build up our own reality, in other dimensions throughout our physical life.

l45

Paintings that we may have envisioned, for example, exist there, and they are every bit as real as paintings in our studio. I am not speaking symbolically here. There is indeed light that we do not see, sound that we do not hear, sensation that we do not feel. All of these belong to the realm of the inner senses. The inner senses represent our true powers of perception. they represent, say, our native non-physical perceptive “equipment.” The physical senses are relatively easy to distinguish: We know what we see from what we hear. If we close our eyes, we do not see.

The inner senses, though I have in the past described them by separating their functions and characteristics, basically operate together in such a way that in our terms it would be highly difficult to separate one from the others. They function with a perfect spontaneous order, aware of all synchronicities. In that psychological universe, then, it is possible for entities “to be everywhere at once,” aware of everything at once. Our world is composed of such “entities” — the units of consciousness that form our body. The kinds of conscious minds that we have cannot hold that kind of information.

l20

These units of consciousness, however, add themselves up to form psychological beings far greater in number than, say, the number of stars in our galaxy (over 400 billion of them), and each of those psychological formations has its own identity — its own soul if we prefer — its own purpose in the entire fabric of being.

That is as far as we can carry that for this blog. We need some new carriers for the concepts. But the light itself represents that inner universe, and the source or all comprehension.

l44

Uncomplete paintings sometimes, in our minds, we see colors more brilliant than any physical ones, and so in a fashion we end up trying a too-literal translation — too literal because a real translation would require colors and even symbols that we do not have on a physical basis. If we think of those colors as being inside us, even in our own cellular comprehension, then we will not be so careful.

The Garden of Eden represents a distorted version of awakening as a physical creature

Man and woman becomes fully operational in his and her physical body, and while awake can only sense the dream body that had earlier been so real to him and her. He or she now encounters his or her experience from within a body that is subject to gravity and to earth’s laws. He or she must use physical muscles to walk from place to place. He and she sees himself and herself suddenly, in a leap of comprehension, as existing for the first time not only apart from the environment, but apart from all of earth’s other creatures.

ed21

The sense of separation is, in those terms, initially almost shattering. Yet man or woman is to be the portion of nature that views itself with perspective. He and she is to be the part of nature that will specialize, again, in the self-conscious use of concepts. He and she will grow the flower of the intellect — a flower that must have its deep roots buried securely within the earth, and yet a flower that will send new psychic seeds outward, not only for itself but for the rest of nature, of which it is a part.

But man and woman looked out and felt himself and herself suddenly separate and amazed at the aloneness. Now he and she must find food, where before his or her dream body did not need physical nourishment. Before, man and woman had been neither male nor female, combining the characteristics of each, but now the physical bodies also specialized in terms of sexuality. Man and woman has to physically procreate. Some lost ancient legends emphasized in a clearer fashion this sudden sexual division. By the time the Biblical legend came into being, however, historical events and social beliefs were transformed into the Adam and eve version of events.

ed14

On the one hand, man and woman did indeed feel that he or she had fallen from a high estate, because he and she remembered that earlier freedom of dream reality — a reality in which the other creatures were still to some degree immersed. Man’s and woman’s mind, incidentally, at that point had all the abilities that we now assign to it: the great capacity for contrast of imagination and intellect, the drive for objectivity and for subjectivity, the full capacity for the development of language — a keen mind that was as brilliant in any caveman or cavewoman, say, as it is in any man or woman on a modern street.

But if man or woman felt suddenly alone and isolated, he or she was immediately struck by the grand variety of the world and its creatures. Each creature apart from himself or herself was a new mystery. He and she was enchanted also by his and her own subjective reality, the body in which he and she found himself or herself, and by the differences between himself and herself and others like him or her, and the other creatures. He and she instantly began to explore, to categorize, to point out and to name the other creatures of the earth as they came to his or her attention.

ed2

In a fashion, it was a great creative and yet cosmic  game that consciousness played with itself, and it did represent a new kind of awareness, but I want to emphasize that each version of All That Is is unique. Each has its purpose, though that purpose cannot be easily defined in our terms. Many people ask, for example: “What is the purpose of my life?” Meaning: “What am I meant to do?” but the purpose of our life, and each life, is in its being. That being may include certain actions, but the acts themselves are only important in that they spring out of the essence of our life, which simply by being is bound to fulfill its purposes.

Man’s and woman’s dream body is still with him and her, or course, but the physical body now obscures it. The dream body cannot be harmed while the physical one can — as man and woman quickly found out as he or she transformed his and her experience largely from one to the other. In the dream body man and woman feared nothing. The dream body does not die. It exists before and after physical death. In their dream bodies men and women had watched the spectacle of animals “killing” other animals, and they saw the animals’ dream bodies emerge unscathed.

ed12

They saw the earth was simply changing its forms, but that the identity of each unit of consciousness survived — and so, although they saw the picture of death, they did not recognize it as the death that to many people now seems an inevitable end.

Men and women saw that there must be an exchange of physical energy for the world to continue. They watched the drama of the “hunter” and the “prey,” seeing that each could contribute so that the physical form of the earth could continue — but the rabbit eaten by the wolf survived in a dream body that men and women knew was its true form. When man and woman “awakened” in his or her physical body, however, and specialized in the use of its senses, he or she no longer perceived the released dream body of the slain animal running away, still cavorting on the hillside. He and she retained memory of his and her earlier knowledge, and for a considerable period he or she could now and then recapture that knowledge. He and she became more and more aware of his or her physical senses, however: Some things were definitely pleasant and some were not. Some stimuli were to be sought out, and others avoided, and so over a period of time he or she translated the pleasant and the unpleasant into rough versions of good and evil.

ed6

Basically, what made him and her feel good was good. He and she was gifted with strong clear instincts that were meant to lead him or her toward his or her own greatest development, to his and her own greatest fulfillment, in such a way that he and she also helped to bring about the highest potential of all of the other species of consciousness. His or her natural impulses were meant to provide inner directives that would guide him and her in just such a direction, so that he or she sought what was the best for himself and herself and for others.

e9

In some ways the overall consciousness of United States continually becomes involved with — entwined with — the consciousness of adversaries like Russia and Iran: Such consciousnesses, once created, continue to grow and to complicate themselves in new ways within our concept of “time.” Obviously, on an even larger scale of activity, the consciousnesses of all the nations of our world contribute to the challenges, and dilemmas swirling around the Middle East situation.

Surface of Awareness

The waking state as we think of it is a specialized extension of the dream state, and emerges from it to the surface of our awareness, just as our physical locations are specified extensions of locations that exist first within the realm of mind.

11

The waking state, then, has its source in the dream state, and all of the objects, environment, and experience that are familiar to us in the waking state also originate in that inner dimension.

When we examine the state of dreams, however, we do it as a rule from the framework of waking reality. We try to measure the dimension of dream experience by applying the rules of reality that are our usual criteria for judging events. Therefore, we are not able to perceive the true characteristics of the dreaming state except on those few occasions when we “come awake” within our dreams — a matter we will discuss later in a future blog. But in a manner of speaking, it is true to say that the universe was created in the same fashion that our own thoughts and dreams happen: spontaneously and yet with a built-in amazing order, and an inner organization. We think our thoughts and we dream our dreams without any clear knowledge of the incredible processes involved therein, yet those processes are the very ones that are behind the existence of the universe itself.

ag3

Also, in a manner of speaking, we are ourselves the ancient dreamers who dreamed our world into being. You must understand that I am not saying that we are passive, fleeting dreamers, lost in some divine mind, but that we are the unique creative manifestations of a divine intelligence whose creativity is responsible for all realities, which are themselves endowed with creative abilities of their own, with the potential and desire for fulfillment — inheritors indeed of the divine processes themselves. Spontaneity knows its own order.

The world’s parts come spontaneously together, with an order that basically defies the smaller laws of cause and effect, or before and afterward. In that regard, again, our dreaming state presents us with many clues about the source of our own lives and that of our world.

aw33

Computers, however grand and complicated, cannot dream, and so for all of their incredible banks of information, they must lack the kind of unspoken knowing knowledge that the smallest plant or seed processes. Nor can any amount of information “possessed” or processed by any computer compare with the unspoken knowing knowledge that is possessed by the atoms and molecules that compose such an instrument. The computer is not equipped to perceive that kind of knowing. It is not equipped for such an endeavor because it cannot dream. In dreams the innate knowledge of the atoms and molecules is combined and translated. It serves as the bed of perceptual information and knowledge from which the dreaming state arises in its physical form.

We are subjectively “alive” before our birth. We will be subjectively alive after our death. Our subjective life is now interpreted through the specialized state of consciousness that we call the waking one, in which we recognize as real only experience that falls within certain space and time coordinates. Our greater reality exists outside those coordinates, and so does the reality of the universe. We create lives for ourselves, changing them as we go along, as a writer might change a book, altering the circumstances, changing the plots. The writer only knows that he or she creates without understanding the spontaneous order with which the creativity happens. The processes occur at another level of consciousness.

a42

In the most basic of ways, the world is formed from the inside out, and from dreaming reality into physical one — and those processes happen at another level of consciousness.

Our body consciousness is like the consciousness of any animal. The love of excitement and activity with which man and woman and animals are innately endowed. Animals enjoy being petted, stroked, and loved. They react in their own ways to suggestion, and in the regard our body consciousness responds to our conscious treatment of it. think of our body, for the purpose of this discussion, as a healthy animal. Animals and our own body consciousnesses have little concept of age. In a fashion almost impossible to describe, those consciousnesses — of body and the animals — are ‘young’ in each moment of their existences. i am taking it fro granted that you understand that I am referring to the ‘mental attitude’ of animals and of the body consciousness, for they do possess their own mental attributes — psychological colorations — and above all, emotional ‘states’.

p9

I largely oppose science’s mechanistic model of the body wearing down within certain age limits, abetted as that model is by the power of the beliefs that say it will. I will have much to say about how the out-of-place stresses we impose upon ourselves through our fearful projections into the future adversely affect our body consciousnesses, which are focused in the present. telepathy, “molecular mentality,” and cellular consciousness are deeply involved in all of this.

In the beginning, while men and women had their dream bodies alone they enjoyed a remarkable freedom, of course, for those bodies did not have to be fed of clothed. They did not have to operate under the law of gravity. Men and women could wander as they wished about the landscape. They did not yet identify themselves to any great degree as being themselves separate from either the environment or other creatures. They knew themselves to be themselves, but their identities were not as closely allied with their forms as is now the case.

p13

The dream world was bound to waken, however, for that was the course is had set itself upon. This awakening, again, happen spontaneously, and yet with its own order. In the terms of this discussion the other creatures of the earth actually awakened before man and woman did, and relatively speaking, their dream bodies formed themselves into physical ones before man and woman’s did. The animals became physically effective, therefore, while to some degree man and woman still lingered in that dream reality.

The plants awakened before the animals — and their reasons for these varying degrees of ‘wakefulness” that have nothing to do basically with the differentiations of species-hood as defined by science from the outside, but have to do with the inner affiliations of consciousness, and with species or families of consciousness. Those affiliations fell into being as all of the consciousnesses that were embarked upon physical reality divided up the almost unimaginable creative achievements that would be responsible for the physically effective world.

de25

Again, the environment as we think of it is composed of living consciousness. Ancient religions, for example, speak of nature’s spirits, and such terms represent memories dating from prehistory. Part of consciousness, then, transformed itself into what we think of as nature — the vast sweep of the continents, the oceans and the rivers, the mountains and the valleys, the body of the land. The creative thrust of the physical world must rise from that living structure.

In a matter of speaking, the birds and the insects are indeed living portions of the earth flying, even as, again in a matter of speaking, bears and wolves and cows and cats represent the earth turning itself into creatures that live upon its own surface. And in a matter of speaking, again, man and woman becomes the earth thinking, and thinking his and her own thoughts, man and woman in his and her way specializes in the conscious work of the world — a work that is dependent upon the indispensable “unconscious” work of the rest of nature, a nature that sustains him and her. And when he or she thinks, man and woman thinks for the microbes, for the atoms and molecules, for the smallest particles within his or her being, for the insects and for the rocks, for the creatures of the sky and the air and the oceans.

de23

Man and woman thinks as naturally as the birds fly. He and she looks at physical reality for the rest of physical reality: He and she is earth coming alive to view itself through conscious eyes — but that consciousness is graced to be because it is so intimately a part of earth’s framework.

aw1

What was it like when man and woman awakened from the dream world?

The world was not created, by some exteriorized, objectified God who created it from the outside

A God that set the world into motion. Many religious theorists believe, for example, that such a God created the world in such a fashion, and that the process of decay began at almost the same hypothetical moment that the creation ended.

h11

Such an idea is much like some scientific ones, that see the universe running down, with energy being dissipated and order gradually disintegrating into chaos. Both versions conceive of a finished creation, though one is a divine production and the other is a result of nothing more than happenstance.

All in all, however, we are speaking of a constant creation, even though I must explain it in serial terms. We are discussing a model of the universe in which creation is continuous, spontaneously occurring everywhere, and everywhere simultaneously, in a kind of spacious present, from which all experiences with time emerge. In this model there is always new energy, and all systems are open, even though they may seem to operate separately. Once again, also, we are considering a model that is based upon the active cooperation of each of its parts, which in one way or another also participate in the experience of the whole.

h9

In this model, changes of form are the result of creative syntheses. This model is seen to have its origin within a vast, infinite, divine subjectivity — a subjectivity that is within each unit of consciousness, whatever its degree. A subjective divinity, then, that is within creation itself, a multidimensional creativity of such proportions that it is itself the creator and its creations at the same time.

This divine psychological process — and “process” is not the best word here — this divine psychological state of relatedness forms from its own being worlds within worlds. Our universe is not the only one. Nothing exists isolate in nature, and to that extent the very existence of our universe presupposes the existence of others.

h7

These were, and are, and will be, created in the same fashion as that i have explained — and again, all such systems are open, even though operationally they may appear not to be.

There are literally infinite numbers of sequences, faultlessly activated, that make the existence of our own world possible. I admit that it is sometimes inconceivable to me that a human being can imagine his or her world to be meaningless, for the very existence of one human body speaks of an almost unbelievable molecular and cellular cooperation that could hardly result through the bounty of the most auspicious works of chance.

h22

In a manner of speaking, our universe and all others spring from a dimension that is the creative source for all realities — a basic dream universe, so to speak, a divine psychological bed where subjective being is sparked, illuminated, stimulated, pierced, by its own infinite desire for creativity. The source of its power is so great that its imaginings become worlds, but it is endowed with a creativity of such splendor that it seeks the finest fulfillment, for even the smallest of its thoughts and all of its potentials are directed with a good intent that is literally beyond all imagining.

h13

That good intent is apparent within our world. It is obvious in the cooperative ventures that unite, say, the mineral, plant, and animal kingdoms, the relationship of bee to flower. And our beliefs to the contrary, we have closed our minds to man’s and woman’s own cooperative nature, to his and her innate desire for fellowship, his and her natural bent for taking care of others, and for altruistic behavior.

h14

Either life has meaning or it does not. It cannot sometimes have meaning, and sometimes not — or man’s or woman’s life cannot have meaning while the lives of other species do not. But the meaning may not always be apparent, for of course when we discuss it, we discuss it from a human viewpoint.

Life’s conditions need no justification

Our beliefs close us off from much otherwise quite-available knowledge concerning man’s and woman’s psychology — knowledge that would serve to answer many questions usually asked about the reasons for suffering. Other questions, it is true, are more difficult to answer. Men and women are born, however, with curiosity about all sensations, and about all possible  life experiences. They are thirsty for experience of all kinds. Their curiosity is not limited to the pretty or the mundane.

131

Men and women are born with a desire to push beyond the limits : to “explore where no man or woman has ever gone before” — a bastard version of the introduction [to a famous television program], I believe men and women are born with a sense of drama, a need of excitement. Life itself is excitement. The quietest mood rides the thrust of spectacular molecular activity.

We forget many of our quite natural inclinations, feelings, and inner fantasies as we mature into adults, because they do not fit into the picture of the kind of people, or experience, or species we have been taught to believe we are. As a result, many of the events of our lives that are the natural extensions of those feelings appear alien, against our deepest wishes, or thrust upon us, either by outside agencies or by a mischievous subconscious.

18

The thoughts of children give excellent clues as to mankind’s and womankind’s nature, but many adults do not remember any childhood thoughts except those that fit, or seem to fit, in with their beliefs about childhood.

Children play at getting killed. They try to imagine what death is like. They imagine what it would be like to fall from a wall like Humpty-Dumpty, or to break their necks. They imagine tragic roles with as much creative abandon as they imagine roles of which adults might approve. They are often quite aware of “willing” themselves sick to get out of difficult situations — and of willing themselves well again.

126

As i said, there are all ranges of suffering. In times past in particular, though the custom is not dead, men and women purged themselves or otherwise deprived themselves. They suffered, in other words, for religion’s sake. It was not just that they believed suffering was good for the soul — a statement which can or cannot be true, incidentally, and I will go into that later — but they understood something else: The body will only take so much suffering when it releases consciousness. So they hoped to achieve religious ecstasy.

Religious ecstasy does not need physical suffering as a stimulus, and such a means in the overall will work against religious understanding. Those episodes, however, represent one of the ways in which man and woman can actively seek suffering as a means to another end, and it is beside the point to say that such activity is not natural, since it exists within nature’s framework.

142

Discipline is a form of applied suffering, as discipline is usually used. People are not taught to understand the great dimensions of their own capacity for experience. It is natural for a child to be curious about suffering, to want to know what it is, to see it — and by doing so he or she learns to avoid the suffering he or she does not want, to help others avoid suffering that they do not want, and to understand, more importantly, the gradations of emotion and sensation that are his and her heritage. As an adult he or she will not inflict pain upon others if he or she understands this, for he or she will allow himself or herself to feel the validity of his or her own emotions.

If we deny ourselves the direct experience of our own emotions, but muffle them, say, through too-strict discipline, then we can hurt others much more easily, for we project our deadened emotional state upon them — as in the Nazi war camps, men and women followed orders, torturing other people — and we do that first of all by deadening our own sensitivity to pain, and by repressing our emotions.

144

Man’s and woman’s vulnerability to pain helps sympathize with others, and therefore helps him or her to more actively alleviate whatever unnecessary causes of pain exist in society.

Each person’s experience of a painful nature is also registered on the part of what we will call the world’s mind. Each, say, failure, or disappointment, or unresolved problem that results in suffering, becomes a part of the world’s experience: This way or that way does not work, or this way or that way has been tried, with poor results. So in that way even weaknesses of failures of suffering are resolved, or rather redeemed as adjustments are made in the light of those data.

145

In that regard, each person lives his or her life privately, and yet for all of humanity. Each person tries out new challenges, new circumstances, new achievements from a unique viewpoint, for himself or herself, and for the entire mass of humanity as well.

13

The idea that in their play children “try to imagine what death is like” certainly adds an intuitive dimension to my own activities as a child. “Cowboys and Indians” was our gang’s favorite game, and we roamed the nearby fields all of us made believe we killed our enemies and/ or were killed ourselves. We had great fun, and used to play such games to the point of exhaustion.

Children “are often quite aware of willing themselves sick to get out of difficult situations.” I remember very well doing that on certain occasions — usually to avoid some school activity — and that even then I was surprised because my parents didn’t catch on to what I was up to. ( Getting well after the danger period had passed was no problem!)

For centuries the Roman Catholic church held [Western] civilization together

The roman Catholic church gave western civilization its meanings and its precepts.Those meanings and precepts flowed through the entire society, and served as the basis for all of the established modes of knowledge, commerce, medicine, science, and so forth.

ag19

The church’s view of reality was the accepted one. I cannot stress too thoroughly the fact that the beliefs of those times structured individual human living, so that the most private events of personal lives were interpreted to mean thus and so, as were of course the events of nations, plants, and animals. The world’s view was a religious one, specified by the church, and its word was truth and fact at the same time.

Illness was suffered, was sent by God to purge the soul, to cleanse the body, to punish the sinner, or simply to teach man and woman his/her place by keeping him or her from the sins of pride. Suffering sent by God was considered a fact of life, then, and a religious truth as well.

ag11

Some other civilizations have believed that illness was sent by demons or evil spirits, and that the world was full of good and bad spirits, invisible, intermixed with the elements of nature itself, and that man and woman had to walk a careful line lest he/she upset the more dangerous or mischievous of these entities. In man’s and woman’s history there have been all kinds of incantations, meant to mollify the evil spirits that man believed were real in fact and in religious truth.

It is easy enough to look at those belief structures and shrug our shoulders, wondering at man’s and woman’s distorted views of reality. The entire scientific view of illness, however, is quite as distorted. It is as laboriously conceived and inter-wound with “nonsense.” It is about as factual as the “fact” that God sends illness as punishment, or that illness is the unwanted gift of mischievous demons.

ag4

Churchmen and churchwomen of the Middle Ages could draw diagrams of various portions of the human body that were afflicted as the result of indulging in particular sins. Logical minds at one time found those diagrams quite convincing, and patients with certain afflictions in certain areas of the body would confess to having committed the various sins that were involved. The entire structure of beliefs made sense within itself. A man or woman might be born deformed or sickly because of the sins of his or her father.

The scientific framework is basically, now, just as senseless, though within it the facts often seem to prove themselves out, also. There are viruses, for example. Our beliefs become self-evident realities. It would be impossible to discuss human suffering without taking that into consideration. Ideas are transmitted from generation to generation — and those ideas are the carriers of all of our reality, its joys and its agonies. Science, however, is all in all a poor healer. The church’s concept at least gave suffering a kind of dignity: It did come from God — and unwelcome gift, perhaps — but after all it was punishment handed out from a firm father for a child’s own good.

AG46

Science disconnected fact from religious truth, of course. In a universe formed by chance, with the survival of the fittest as the main rule of good behavior, illness became a kind of crime against a species itself. It meant we were unfit, and hence brought about all kinds of questions not seriously asked before.

Did those “genetically inferior,” for example, have the right to reproduce? Illness was thought to come like a storm, the result of physical forces against which the individual had little recourse. The “new” Freudian ideas of the unsavory unconscious led further to a new dilemma, for it was then — as it is now — widely believed that as the result of experiences in infancy the subconscious, or unconscious, might very well sabotage the best interests of the conscious personality, and trick it into illness and disaster.

ag17

In a way, that concept puts a psychological devil in place of the metaphysical one. If life itself is seen scientifically as having no real meaning, then suffering, of course, must also be seen as meaningless. The individual becomes a victim of chance insofar as his/her birth, the events of his or her life, and his or her death are concerned. Illness becomes his most direct encounter with the seeming meaninglessness of personal existence.

We affect the structure of our body through our thoughts. If we believe in heredity, heredity itself becomes a strong suggestive factor in our life, and can help bring about the precise malady in the body that we believed was there all along, until finally our scientific instruments uncover the “faulty mechanism,” or whatever, and there is the evidence for all to see.

ag14

There are obviously some conditions that in our terms are inherited, showing themselves almost instantly after birth, but these are of a very limited number in proportion to those diseases we believe are hereditary — many cancers, heart problems, arthritic or rheumatoid disorders. And in many cases of inherited difficulties, changes could be effected for the better, through the utilization of other mental methods.

There are as many kind of suffering as there are kinds of joy, and there is no one simple answer that can be given. As human creatures we accept the conditions of life. We create from those conditions the experiences of our days. We are born into belief systems as we are born into physical centuries, and part of the entire picture is the freedom of interpreting the experience of life in multitudinous fashions. The meaning, nature, dignity or shame of suffering will be interpreted according to our systems of belief. I hope to give the way a picture of reality that puts suffering in its proper perspective, but it is a most difficult subject to cover because it touches most deeply upon our hopes for oneself and for mankind, and our fears for ourselves and for mankind.

ag28

We have taught ourselves to be aware of and to follow only certain portions of our own consciousnesses, so that mentally we consider certain subjects taboo. Thoughts of death and suffering are among those. In a species geared above all to the survival of the fittest, and the competition among species, then any touch of suffering or pain, or thoughts of death, become dishonorable, biologically shameful, cowardly, nearly insane. Life is to be pursued at all costs — not because it is innately meaningful, but because it is the only game going, and it is a game of chance at best. One life is all we have, and that one is everywhere beset by the threat of illness, disaster, and wa — and if we escape such drastic circumstances, then we are still left with a life that is the result of no more than lifeless elements briefly coming into a consciousness and vitality that is bound to end.

In that framework, even the emotions of love and exaltation are seen as no more than the erratic activity of neurons firing, or of chemicals reacting to chemicals. Those beliefs alone bring on suffering. All of science, in our time, has been set up to promote beliefs that run in direct contradiction to the knowledge of man’s and woman’s heart. Science has, we have noted, denied emotional truth. It is not simply that science denies the validity of emotional experience, but that it has believed so firmly that knowledge can only be acquired from the outside, from observing the exterior of nature.

ag27

I spoke about the quality of life, and it is true to say that in at least many centuries past, if men and women may have died earlier, they also lived lives of fuller, more satisfying quality — and I do not want to be misinterpreted in the direction.

Now, it is also true that in some of its aspects religion has glorified suffering, elevated it to be one of the prime virtues — and it has degraded it at other times, seeing the ill as possessed by devils, or seeing the insane as less than human. So there are many issues involved.

ag12

Science, however, seeing the body as a mechanism, has promoted the idea that consciousness is trapped within a mechanical model, that man’s and woman’s suffering is mechanically caused in that regard: We simple give the machine some better parts and all will be well. Science also operates as magic, of course, so on some occasions the belief in science itself will seemingly work miracles: The new heart will give a man or woman new heart, for example.

Illness is used as a part of man’s and woman’s motivations. What I mean is that there is no human motivation that may not at some time be involved with illness, for often it is a means to a desired end — a method of achieving something a person thinks may not be achieved otherwise.

ag18

One man or woman might use it to achieve success. One might use it to achieve failure. a person might use it as a means of showing pride of humility, of looking for attention or escaping it. Illness is often another mode of expression, but nowhere does science mention that illness might have its purpose, or its groups of purposes, and I do not mean that the purposes themselves are necessarily derogatory. Illnesses are often misguided attempts to attain something the person thinks important. Sickness can be a badge of honor or dishonor — but there can be no question when we look at the human picture, that to a certain extent, but an important one, suffering not only has its purposes and uses, but is actively sought for one reason or another.

Most people do not seek out suffering’s extreme experience, but within those extremes there are multitudinous degrees of stimuli that could be considered painful, that are actively sought. Man’s and woman’s involvement in sports is an instant example, of course, where society’s rewards and the promise of spectacular bodily achievement lead athletes into activities that would be considered most painful by the ordinary individual. People climb mountains, willingly undergoing a good bit of suffering in the pursuit of such goals.

ag41

Determining not to worry should be the “first commandment.”

I hope I have touched upon a question that’s loaded with ethical and legal dilemmas; many of these have grown out of recent scientific advances in genetics. some moral philosophers, medical geneticists, physicians, lawyers, and religious leaders believe that those who carry genes for serious genetic diseases do not have the right to reproduce. Others of similar background maintain just the opposite — that the right to recreate one’s kind is inalienable. Questions abound involving amniocentesis (examination of the fluid in the womb to detect genetic defects in the fetus); therapeutic abortion; artificial insemination; reproduction by in vitro fertilization; embryo transfer (surrogate motherhood); the responsibilities of the legal, medical and religious communities; whether mentally retarded, genetically defective people should receive life-prolonging medical treatment, and so forth. Years are expected to pass before our legal system alone catches up with the scientific progress in genetics — but ironically, continuing advances in the field are bound to complicate even further the whole series of questions.

Dreamers subjective actions form the phenomena of “the self.”

During this period that we have labeled as belonging to the dreamers, certain subjective actions take place as the “structure’ of earthly tuned consciousness formed the phenomena of “the self.”

s41

What was needed is a highly focused, precisely tuned physical self that could operate efficiently in a space and time scheme that is being formed along with physical creatures — a self, however, that in one way or another must be supported by realms of information and knowledge of a kind that was basically independent of time and space. A knowledge indispensable, and yet a knowledge that could not be allowed to distract the physical focus.

In one way or another, that inner information had to connect each consciousness on the face of the planet. Earthly creatures must be able to react in a moment, yet the inner mechanisms that made such reactions possible were based upon calculations that could not be consciously kept in mind. In our time scheme, for example, we could never move as quickly as we do if we had to consciously work all the muscles involved in motion — or in speech, or in any such bodily performance. We certainly could not communicate on such a physical level if we first had to be aware of all of speech’s mechanisms, working them consciously before a word was uttered. Yet we had to have that kind of knowledge, and we had to have it in a way that did not intrude upon our conscious thoughts.

p12

Basically there are no real divisions to the self, but for the sake of explanation we must speak of them in those terms. First of all we had the inner self, the creative dreaming self — composed, of units of consciousness, awareized energy that forms our identity, and that formed the identities of the earliest earth inhabitants. These inner selves formed their own dream bodies about them, as previously explained, but the dream bodies did not have to have physical reactions. They were free of gravity and space, and of time.

As the body became physical, however, the inner self formed the body consciousness so that the physical body became more aware of itself, of the environment, and of its relationship within the environment. Before this could happen, though, the body consciousness was taught to become aware of its own inner environment. The body was lovingly formed from electromagnetic energy units through all the stages to atoms, cells, organs, and so forth. The body’s pattern came from the inner self, as all of the units of consciousness involved in this venture together formed this fabric of environment and creatures, each suited to the other.

de6

So far in our discussion, then, we have an inner self, dwelling primarily in a mental or psychic dimension, dreaming itself into physical form, and finally forming a body consciousness. To that body consciousness the inner self gives “its own body of physical knowledge,” the vast reservoir of physical achievement that it has triumphantly produced. The body consciousness is not “unconscious,” but for working purposes in our terms, the body possesses its own system of consciousness that to some extent, now, it separated from what we think of as our own normal consciousness. The body’s consciousness is hardly to be considered less than our own, or as inferior to that of our inner self, since it represents knowledge from the inner self, and is a part of the inner self’s own consciousness — the part delegated to the body.

Each cell, then operates so well in time because it is, in those terms, precognitive. It is aware of the position, health, vitality, of other cells of the face of the planet. It is aware of the position of each grain of sand on the shores of each ocean, and in those terms it forms a portion of the earth’s consciousness.

s45

At that level environment, creatures, and the elements of the natural world are all united — a point we will return to quite often. Our intellect as we think of it operates so clearly and precisely, so logically, sometimes so arrogantly, because the intellect rides that great thrust of codified,  “ancient,” “unconscious” power — the power of instant knowing that is a characteristic of the body consciousness.

Thus far in our discussion, we still have only an inner self and a body consciousness. As the body consciousness developed itself, perfected its organization, the inner self and the body consciousness together performed a kind of psychological double-entendre.

s52

The best analogy I can think of is that up to that time the self was like a psychological rubber band, snapping inward and outward with great force and vitality, but without any kind of rigid-enough psychological framework to maintain a physical stance. The inner self still related to dream reality, while the body’s orientation and the body consciousness attained, as was intended, a great sense of physical adventure, curiosity, speculation, wonder — and so once again the inner self put a portion of its consciousness in a different parcel, so to speak. As once it had formed the body consciousness, now it formed a physically attuned consciousness, a self whose desires and intents would be oriented in a way that, alone, the inner self could not be.

The inner self was too aware of its own multidimensionality, so in our terms it gave psychological birth to itself through the body in space and time. It knew itself as a physical creature. That portion of the self is the portion we recognize as our usual conscious self, alive within the scheme of seasons, aware within the designs of time, caught transfixed in moments of brilliant awareness, with civilizations that seem to come and go. That is the self that is alert in the dear preciseness of the moments, whose physical senses are bound to light and darkness, sound and touch. that is the self that lives the life of the body.

de45

It is the self that looks outward. It is the self that we call egotistically aware. The inner self became what I refer to as the inner ego. It looks into that inner reality, that psychic dimension of awareness from which both our own consciousness and our body consciousness emerged.

We are one self, then, but for operating purposes we will say that we have three parts: the inner self or inner ego, the body consciousness, and the consciousness that we know.

a33

These portions, however, are intimately connected. They are like three different systems of consciousness operating together to form the whole. The divisions — the seeming divisions — are not stationary, but change constantly.

To one extent or another, these three systems of consciousness operate in one way or another in all of the species, and in all particles, in the physical universe. In our terms, this means that the proportions of the three systems might vary, but they are always in operation, whether we are speaking of a man or a woman, a rock or a fly, a star or an atom. The inner self represent our prime identity, the self we really are.

s63

“Earth is a nice place, but I wouldn’t want to live there.” a twist on an old quote, I believe — but the fact is we are physical creatures because we do not like to live on earth, we do like the conditions, we do enjoy overall the particular kind of challenge and the particular kind of perception, knowledge and understanding that the earthly environment provides.

That environment, in our terms, certainly includes suffering. If joy has always been one of the characteristics of earth experience, so has suffering, and the subject will be covered in future blogs. Here, however, I only want to mention one facet, and that is the importance of physical sensation, of whatever kind — for the life of the body provides us, among all things, with a life of sensation, of feeling, a spectrum that must include the experience of all possible sensations within its overall range.

a5

Now as we will see, all creatures, regardless of their degree, can and do choose, within their spheres of reality, those sensations that they will experience — but to one extent or another all sensations are felt. We will later discuss the part of the mind and its interpretation, for example, of painful stimuli, but I want to make the point that those attracted to physical life are first and foremost tasters of sensation. Outside of that, basically, there are all kinds of mental distinctions made among stimuli. The body is made to react. It is made to feel life and vitality by reacting to an environment that is not itself, by encountering what we might call natural stress. The body maintains its equilibrium by reacting against gravity, by coming in contact with other bodies, by changing its own sensations, by glorifying in the balance between balance and off-balance.

The body consciousness is therefore given a superb sense of its own reality, a sureness of identity, a sense of innate safety and security, that allows it to not only function but to grow in the physical world. It is endowed with a sense of boldness, daring, a sense of natural power. It is perfectly formed to fit into its environment — and the environment is perfectly formed to have such creatures.

de26

The entities, or units of consciousness — those ancient fragments that burst into objectivity from the vast and infinite psychological realms of All That Is — dared all, for they joyfully abandoned themselves in space and time. They created new psychological entities, opened up an area of divine creativity that “until then” had been closed, and therefore to that degree extended the experience and immense existence of All That Is. For in so abandoning themselves they were not of course abandoned, since they contained within themselves their inherent relationship with All that Is. In those terms All That Is became physical also, aroused at its divine depth by the thrusting of each grass blade through the soil into the air, aroused by each birth and by each moment of each creature’s existence.

d15

All That Is, therefore, is immersed within our world, present in each hypothetical point, and forms the very fabric from which each portion of matter is created.

For eons men and women where in the dreaming state

Men and women slept long hours, as did the animals — awakening, so to speak, to exercise their bodies, obtain sustenance, and later, to mate. It was indeed a dreamlike world, but a highly charming and vital one, in which dreaming imaginations played rambunctiously with all the probabilities entailed in this new venture: imagining the various forms of language and communication possible, spinning great dream tales of future civilizations replete with their own built-in histories — building, because they were now allied with time, mental edifices that automatically created pasts as well as futures.

de9

These ancient dreams were shared to some extent by each consciousness that was embarked upon the earthly venture, so that creatures and environment together formed great environmental realities. Valleys and mountains, and their inhabitants, together dreamed themselves into being and coexistence.

The species — from our viewpoint — lived at a much slower pace in those terms. The blood, for example, did not need to course so quickly through the veins and arteries, the heart did not need to beat as fast. And in an important fashion the coordination of the creature in its environment did not need to be as precise, since there was an elastic give-and-take of consciousness between the two.

In ways almost impossible to describe, the ground rules were not as firmly established. Gravity itself did not carry its all-pervasive sway, so that the air was more buoyant. Man and woman was aware of its support in a luxurious, intimate fashion. He/she was aware of himself or herself in a different way, so that, for example, his and her identification with the self did not stop where his or her skin stopped. He and she could follow it outward into the space about his or her form, and feel it merge with the atmosphere with a primal sense-experience that we have forgotten.

de24

During this period, incidentally, mental activity of the highest, most original variety was the strongest dream characteristic, and the knowledge man and woman gained was imprinted upon the physical brain: what is now completely unconscious activity involving the functions of the body, its relationship with the environment, its balance and temperature, its constant inner alterations. All of these highly intricate activities were learned and practiced in the dream state as the conscious units translated their inner knowledge through the state of dreaming into physical form.

Then in our terms man and woman began, with the other species, to waken more fully into the physical world, to develop the exterior senses, to intersect delicately and precisely with space and time. Yet man and woman still sleeps and dreams, and that state is still a firm connective with his or her own origins, and with the origins of the universe as he or she knows it as well.

de21

Man and woman dreamed his or her languages. He and she dreamed how to use his or her tongue to form the words. In his or her dreams he/she practiced stringing the words together to form their meanings, so that finally he or she could consciously begin a sentence without actually knowing how it was begun, yet in the faith that he/she could and would complete it.

All languages have as their basis the language that was spoken in dreams. The need for language arose, however, as man woman became less a dreamer and more immersed in the specifics of space and time, for in the dream state his/her communications with his or her fellows and other species was instantaneous. Language arose to take the place of that inner communication, then. There is a great underlying unity in all of man’s and woman’s so-called early cultures — cave drawings and religions — because they were all fed by that common source, as man and woman tired to transpose inner knowledge into physical actuality.

de8

The body learned to maintain its stability, its strength and agility, to achieve a state of balance in complementary response to the weather and elements, to dream computations that the conscious mind alone could not hold. The body learned to heal itself in sleep in its dreams — and at certain levels in that state even now each portion of consciousness contributes to the health and stability of all other portions. Far from the claw-and dagger universe, we have one whose very foundation is based upon the loving cooperation of all its parts. That is given — the gift of life brings along with it the actualization of that cooperation, for the body’s parts exist as a unit because of inner relationships of a cooperative nature: and those exist at our birth when we are innocent of any cultural beliefs that may be to the contrary.

If it were not for this most basic, initial loving cooperation, that is a given quality in life itself, life would not have continued. Each individual of each species takes that initial zest and joy of life as its own yardstick. Each individual of whatever species, and each consciousness, whatever its degree, automatically seeks to enhance the quality of life itself — not only for itself but for all of reality as well.

de53

This is a given characteristic of life, regardless of the beliefs that may lead us to misinterpret the actions of nature, casting some of its creatures in a reprehensible light.

In a fashion those ancient dreamers, through their immense creativity, dreamed all of life’s creatures in all of their pasts, presents, and futures — that is, their dreams opened up the doors of space and time to entities that otherwise would not have been released into actualization, even as, for example, the units of consciousness were once released from the mind of All That Is.

de62

All possible entities that can ever be actualized always exist. They have always existed and they always will exist. All That Is must, by its characteristics, be all that it can ever be, and so there can be no end to existence — and, in those terms, no beginning. But in terms of our world the units of consciousness, acting both as forces and as psychological entities of massive power, planted the seeds of our world in a dimension of imaginative power that gave birth to physical form. In our terms those entities are our ancestors — and yet they are not ours alone, but the ancestors of all the consciousnesses that make up our world.

de65

It is easy to live — so easy that although we live, rest, create, respond, feel, touch, see, sleep and wake, we do not really have to try to do any of those things. From our viewpoint they are done for us.

They are done for us in Framed-Mind-2 — and further discussions of Framed-Mind-2, incidentally, will be inter-wound throughout my blogs. Our beliefs often tell us that life is hard, however, that living is difficult, that the universe, again, is unsafe, and that we must use all of our resources — not to meet life with anything like joyful abandon, or course, but to protect ourselves against its implied threats; threats that we have been taught to expect.

But our beliefs do not stop there. Because of both scientific and religious ones, in Western civilization we believe that there are threats from within also. As a result we forget our natural selves, and become involved in a secondary, largely imaginary culture: beliefs that are projected negatively into the future, individually and en masse. People respond with illnesses of one kind or another, or through exaggerated behavior.

Living is easy. It is safe and reliable because it is easy.

We were each present at the beginning of the world

Though we may be present in the world now in a somewhat different fashion. Remember that each unit of consciousness is a fragment of All That Is, a divine portion. Then perhaps what I am about to explain will make sense.

b41

For some time, in our terms, the sleepwalkers remained more or less at that level of activity, and for many centuries they used the surface of the earth as a kind of background for other activity. Their real life was what we would now call the dreaming one. They worked mentally while asleep, constructing in their individual minds and in their joint mental endeavors all of the dazzling images that would later become a mental reservoir from which men and women could draw. In that multidimensional array, consciousness mentally learned to form itself into electromagnetic energy units, atoms and molecules, electrons and chromosomes. It mentally formed the patterns through which all physical life could flow. The world then came into physical existence. Those units of consciousness are indestructible and vitalized, regardless of the forms they take, and while men’s and women’s forms were dream images, consciousness spun forms into physical material.

Consciousness possesses the most unimaginable agility without ever losing any potency. Those units of consciousness, for example, can mix and combine with others to form a million different sequences of memory and desire, of neutral achievement and recognition, of structure and design.

b9

We read our own consciousness now in a kind of vertical fashion, identifying only with certain portions of it, and it seems to us that any other organization of perception, and other recognition of identity, would quite necessarily negate our own or render it inoperable. In the beginning of the world there were numberless groupings, however, and affiliations of consciousness, many other organizations of identity that were recognized, as well as the kind of psychological orientation we have now — but our kind of orientation was not the paramount one. While, generally speaking, earth’s species existed from the beginning in the forms by which we now know them, consciousness of species was quite different, and all species were much more intimately related through various kinds of identification that have since gone into the underground of awareness.

Initially, then, the world was a dream, and what we think of as waking consciousness was the dreaming consciousness. In that regard the earth’s entire environment was built mentally, atom by conscious atom — each atom, again, being initially formed by units of consciousness. I said that these units could operate as entities, and as forces, so we are not speaking of a mental mechanics but of entities in the true meaning of the word: entities of unimaginable creative and psyche properties purposeful fragments propelled from the infinite mind as that mind was filled with the inspiration that gave light to the world. Those entities, in our terms so ancient, left fragments of themselves in trance, so to speak, that form the rocks and hills, the mountains, the air and the water, and all of the elements that exist on the face of the earth.

b23

Those entities are in trance, in those terms, but their potency is not diminished, and there is constant communication among them always.

There is also constant communication between them and us at other levels than those we recognize, so that there is an unending interplay between each species and its environment.

b5

There is no place where consciousness stops and the environment begins, or vice versa. Each form or life is created along with each other form — environment and organism in those terms creating each other. After forms were fully physical, however, all species operated as sleepwalkers for many centuries, though on the scale that existed then the passage of time was not considered in the same fashion. During that period the work of wedding nonphysical consciousness to matter was accomplished. Effects of gravity, for example, were stabilized. The seasons took on the rhythms best suited to the creatures in various locations. The environment and the creatures accommodated each other.

Up until then, the main communications had followed the characteristic patterns of units of consciousness, each unit knowing its relationship to all others upon the planet. Creatures relied upon inner senses while learning to operate the new, highly specific physical ones that pinpointed perception in time and place. This pinpointing of perception was of vital importance, for with the full arousal of consciousness in flesh, intersections with space and time had to be impeccable.

b25

Dream bodies became physical, and through the use of the senses tuned to physical frequencies — frequencies of such power and allure that they would reach all creatures of every kind, from microbe to elephant, holding them together in a cohesive web of space-and-time alignment.

In the beginning, man’s and woman’s dreams were in certain terms of immediate physical survival. They gave man and woman information — a kind that of necessity the new physical senses could not contain. Those senses could only perceive the immediate environment, but man’s and woman’s dreams compensated for that lack, and filled out his and her consciousness by giving it the benefit of that larger generalized information to which it had once had an easy access. When he or she was asleep man and woman could take advantage of the information banks contained in the units of consciousness that composed his or her very flesh.

b14

Now: When he or she dreamed — man and woman returned to a state prior to waking, from which his or her physical life itself had emerged — only now he or she was a new creature, a new kind of consciousness, and so were all of the other species. In dreams all of the species familiarized themselves with their old affiliations, and they read their own identities in different fashions. “They remembered how it was.” They remembered that they formed each other.

This tale, I admit, is far more difficult to understand than a simple story of God’s creation of the world, or its actual production in a meaningless universe through the slippery hands of chance — and yet my story is more magnificent because elements of its truth will find resonance in the minds and hearts of those open enough to listen. For men’s and women’s minds themselves are alive with the desire to read properly, and they are aware of their own vast heritage. It is not simply that man and woman has a soul that is somehow blessed while the rest of him or her is not, but that in those terms everything he or she knows, regardless of size or degree, is made of “soul stuff.” Each portion has its own identity and validity — and no portion is ever annihilated or destroyed. The form may change.

b12

I must of necessity tell this story in serial terms, but the world and all of its creatures actually come together like some spontaneously composed, ever-playing musical composition in which the notes themselves are alive and play themselves, so that the musicians and the notes are one and the same, the purpose and the performance being one, with each note played continuing to strike all of its own probable versions, forming all of its own probable compositions while at the same time taking part in all of the themes, melodies, and notes of the other compositions — so that each note, striking, defines itself, and yet also exists by virtue of its position in the composition as a whole.

The conscious mind cannot handle that kind of multidimensional creativity, yet it can expand into a kind of new recognition when it is carried along, still being itself, by its own theme.

b22

In a way, our world follows its own theme in creativity’s composition. We want to know where we came into the musical production, so to speak. I use a musical analogy here, if a simple one, to point out that we are also dealing with frequencies of perception. We are tuned into earth’s orchestration [we might say], and our perception of time is simply the result of habits — habits of perception that we had to learn in the beginning of the world. And we learned those habits as our physical senses gradually became more alert and specific.

b3

We “timed” ourselves — but greater perceptions always appeared in the background of our consciousness and in the dream state. It is the great activity of the dream state that allows us, as psychological and physical creatures, to recognize and inhabit the world that we know.

The year 2022 exists now!

The year 2022 exists in all of its potential versions, now in this moment. Because mass events are concerned there is not a completely different year, of course, for each individual on the face of the planet — but there are literally an endless number of mass-shared worlds of 2022 “in the wings,” so to speak.

e1

It is not quite as simple a matter as just deciding what events we want to materialize as reality, since we have, in our terms, a body of probabilities of one kind or another already established as the raw materials for the coming year. It would be quite improbable for us, to suddenly turn into a tailor, for example, for none of our choices with probabilities have led toward such an action.

In like manner, England in all probability next year will not suddenly turn into a Mohammedan nation. But within the range of workable probabilities, private and mass choices, the people of the world are choosing their probable 2022.

e6

I am taking my time here, for there are some issues that I would like to clear up, that are difficult to explain.

Any of the probable actions that a person considers are a part of that person’s conscious thought. Just underneath, however, people also consider other sets of probabilities that may or may not reach conscious level, simply because they are shunted aside, or because they seem to meet with no conscious recognition. I want us to try and imagine actual events, as we think of them, to be the vitalized representations of probabilities — that is, as the physical versions of mental probabilities. The probabilities with which we are not consciously concerned remain psychologically peripheral: They are there but not there, so to speak.

Our conscious mind can only accept a certain sequence of probabilities as recognized experience. As I have said, the choices among probabilities go on constantly, both on conscious and unconscious levels. Events that we do not perceive as conscious experience are a part of our unconscious experience, however, to some extent. This applies to the individual, and of course en masse the same applies to world events. Each action seeks all of its own possible fulfillments. All That IS seeks all possible experience, but in such a larger framework in this case that questions of, say, pain or death simply do not apply, though certainly they do on the physical level.

e7

Great expectations, basically, have nothing to do with degree, for a grass blade is filled with great expectations. Great expectations are built upon a faith in the nature of reality, a faith in nature itself, a faith in the life we are given, whatever its degree — and all children, for example, are born with those expectations. Fairy tales are indeed often — though not always — carriers of a kind of underground knowledge, as per Cinderella, and the greatest fairy tales are always those in which the greatest expectations win out: The elements of the physical world that are unfortunate can be changed in the twinkling of an eye through great expectations.

Our education tells us that all of that is nonsense, that the world is defined by its physical aspects alone. When we think of power we think of, say, nuclear energy, or solar energy — but power is the creative energy within men’s and women’s minds that allows them to use such powers, such energies, such forces.

a66

The true power is in the imagination which dares to speculate upon that which is not yet. The imagination, backed by great expectations, can bring about almost any reality within the range of probabilities. All of the possible versions of 2022 will remain psychologically peripheral, in the background of our conscious experience — but all of those possible versions will be connected in one way or another.

The important lessons have never really appeared in our societies: the most beneficial use of the directed will, with great expectations, and that coupled with the knowledge of Framed-minds-1 and 2 activities. Very simply: We want something, we dwell upon it consciously for a while, we consciously imagine it coming to the forefront of probabilities, closer to our actually. Then we drop it like a pebble into Framed-mind-2, forget about it as much as possible for a fortnight, and do this in a certain rhythm.

e5

Resolutions help focus both mind and imagination. that focusing helps us act, to be.

In the most basic of terms, as 2022 happens the energy that comes into our universe is as new as if( in our terms) the world were created yesterday — a point that will be rather difficult to explain. All of the probable versions of 2022 spin off their own probable pasts as well as their own probable futures, and any consciousness that exists in 2022 was, (again in those terms) a part of what we think of as the beginning of the world.

e9

Like the entire 911 affair, any physical event serves as a focus that attracts all of its probable versions and outcomes. The situation was a materialized mass dream, meant to be important and vital on political and religious platforms of reality, meant to dramatize a conflict of beliefs, and to project that conflict outward into the realm of public knowledge. Everyone involved was consciously and unconsciously a willing participant at the most basic levels of human behavior, and it is of course no coincidence that today is foreshadowed by the event. What will the world do wit it?

Our TV and news systems of communication are a part of the event itself, of course. It is in a way far better that these events occurred now, and in the way that they have, so that the problems appear clearly in the world arena.

c34

Religious beliefs will be examined as they have not been before, and their connections and political affiliations. The Arab world still needs the West, and again, it is better that those issues come to light now, while they must to some extent consider the rest of the world.

Do not personally give any more conscious consideration, each human being, to events that we do not want to happen. Any such concentration, to whatever degree, ties us in with those probabilities, so concentrate upon what we want, and as far as public events are concerned, take it for granted that sometimes even men and women are wiser than they know.

b32

EFFECTIVE RESOLUTIONS:

1: I will approve of myself, my characteristics, my abilities, my likes and dislikes, my inclinations and dis-inclinations, realizing that these form my unique individuality. They are given me for a reason.

2: I will approve of and rejoice in my accomplishments, and I will be as vigorous in listing these — as rigorous in remembering them — as I have ever been in remembering and enumerating my failures or lacks of accomplishment.

3: I will remember the creative framework of existence, in which I have my being. Therefore the possibilities, potentials, seeming miracles, and joyful spontaneity of Framed-mind-2 will be in my mind, so that the doors to creative living are open.

4: I will realize that the future is a probability. In terms of ordinary experience, nothing exists there yet. It is virgin territory, planted by my feelings and thoughts in the present. Therefore I will plant accomplishments and successes, and I will do this by remembering that nothing can exist in the future that I do not want to be there.

The Inner Gestalt

The inner universe is a gestalt formed by fields of awareized energy that contains what we will call “information” for now — but we will have some comments later in this blog, for this is not the kind of information we are used to.

g22

Each unit of consciousness inherently possesses within itself all of the information available to the whole, and its specific nature when it operates as a particle rests upon that great “body” of inner knowledge. Any one such particle can be where it “is,” be what it is, and be when it is only because the positions, relative positions, and situations of all other such particles are known.

In the deepest terms, our physical world is beginning at each point at which these units of consciousness assert themselves to form physical reality. Otherwise, life would not be “handed down” through the generations. Each unit of consciousness intensifies, magnifies its own intent to be — and, we might say, works up from within itself an explosive spark of primal desire that “explodes” into a process that causes physical materialization. It turns into Electromagnetic Energy unit, in which case it is embarked upon its own kind of physical experience.

g34

These electromagnetic energy units also operate as fields, as waves, or as particles, as the units of consciousness do — but in our terms they are closer to physical orientation. Their die is cast, so to speak: They have already begun the special kind of screening process necessary that will bring about physical form. They begin to deal with the kinds of information that will help form our world. There are literally numberless steps taken before electromagnetic energy units combine in their own fashion to form the most microscopic physical particles, and even here the greatest, gentlest sorting-out process takes place as these units disentangle themselves at certain operational levels from their own greater fields of “information,” to specialize in the various elements that will allow for the production of atoms and molecules impeccably suited to our kind of world.

First, we have various stages of, say, pseudo-matter, of dream images, that only gradually — in those terms — coalesce and become physically viable, for there are endless varieties of “matte” between the matter that we recognize and the anti-matter of physicists’ theories.

g9

Form exists at many other levels than those we recognize, in other words. Our dream forms are quite as real as our physical ones. They simply fit into their own environment at another level of activity, and they are quite reminiscent of the kinds of forms that we had in the beginning of our world.

While we and all of the other species were what I call sleepwalkers, our bodies by then were physically capable. In a manner of speaking, we did not know how to use them properly as yet. Now, from a waking state, we do not understand how our dream bodies can seem to fly through the air, defy space and even time, converse with strangers and so forth. In the same way, however, once, we had to learn to deal with gravity, to deal with space and time, to manipulate in a world of objects, to simply breathe, to digest our food, and to perform all of the biological manipulations that now we take for granted.

g21

We could not afford to identify too completely with such bodies until we learned how to survive within them, so in the dream state the true processes of life began as their new bodies and earth-tuned consciousnesses saw themselves mentally exercising all portions of the body. Behind all that was the brilliant comprehension and cooperation of all of the units of consciousness that go to compose the body, each adding its own information and specific knowledge to the overall bodily organizations, and each involved in the most intricate fields of relationships, for the miracle of the body’s efficiency is the result of relationships that exist among all of its parts, connecting it to other levels of existence that do not physical appear.

Units of consciousness, transforming themselves into electromagnetic energy units, formed the environment and all of its inhabitants in the same process, in what we might call a circular manner rather than a serial one. And in those terms, of course, there are only various physical manifestations of consciousness, not a planet and its inhabitants, but an entire gestalt of awareized consciousness. In those terms, each portion of physically oriented consciousness sees reality and experience from its own privileged viewpoint, about which it seems all else revolves, even though this may involve a larger generalized field than our own, or a smaller one.

g41

So to rocks, say, we can be considered a portion of their environment, while we may consider them merely a portion of our environment. We simply do not tune into the range of rock consciousness. Actually, many other kinds of consciousness, while focused in their own specific ways, are more aware than man and woman is of the earth’s unified nature — but man and woman, if following his or her own ways, also adds to the value fulfillment of all other consciousness in ways that are quite outside of usual systems of knowledge.

If we remember that beneath all, each unit of consciousness is aware of the position of each other unit, and that these units form all physical matter, then perhaps we can intuitively follow what I mean, for whatever knowledge man and woman attains, whatever experience any one person accumulates, whatever arts or sciences we produce, all such information is instantly perceived at other levels of activity by each other units of consciousness that compose physical reality — whether those units form the shape of rock, a raindrop, an apple, a cat, a frog or a shoe. manufactured products are also composed of atoms and molecules that ride upon units of consciousness transformed into electromagnetic energy units, and hence into physical elements.

g42

What we have, really, is a manifested and an un-manifested consciousness, but only relatively speaking. We do not perceive the consciousness of objects. It is not manifest to us because our range of activities requires boundaries to frame our picture of reality.

All of our manufactured objects also originated in the realm of dreams, first obviously being conceived of mentally, and in the same way man and woman produced his and her first tools. He /she was born with all of those abilities — abilities by which he is now characterized — and with other abilities that in our terms still wait for development. Not that he or she has not used them so far, but that her or she has not focused upon them in what we consider the main line of civilized continuity. Hints of those abilities are always present in the dream state, and in the arts, in the religions, and even in the sciences. They appear in politics and business, but as the largely un-manifest intuitive background, which is largely ignored.

g5

Men’s and women’s dreams have always provided him or her with a sense of impetus, purpose, meaning, and given him or her the raw material from which to form his and her civilizations. The true history of the world is the history of man’s and woman’s dreams, for they have been responsible in one way or another for all historic developments. They were responsible for the birth of agriculture, as well as industry, the rise and fall of nations, the “glory” that was Rome, and Rome’s destruction. Our present technological advances can almost be dated from the invention of the printing press, to Edison’s inventions, which were flashes of intuition, dream-inspired. But if what I am telling you is true, then it is obvious that when I say that our physical world originated in the world of dreams, I must mean something far different from the usual definition of dream reality. Again, I could choose another term, but I want to emphasize each person’s intimate contact with that other reality that does occur in what we think of as the state of dreaming.

That analogy will help us at least intuitively understand the existence of situations such as suffering, and poverty, that otherwise seem to have no adequate explanations. I hope also to imply the survival of the fittest in a tooth-and-claw fashion, or the punishing acts of a vengeful God on the one hand and the triumph of an evil force on the other.

dr54

For now in our tale of beginnings, however, we still have a spasmodic universe that appears and disappears — that gradually, in those terms, manifest for longer periods of time. What we really had in the beginning were images without form, slowly adopting form, blinking on and off, then stabilizing into forms that were as yet not completely physical. These then took on all of the characteristics that we now consider forward physical matter.

dr12

As all of this occurred, consciousness took on more and more specific orientations, greater organizations at our end. At the “other end,” it disentangled itself from vaster fields of activity to allow for this specific behavior. All of these units of consciousness again, operate as entities (or particles, or as waves or forces). In those terms, consciousness formed the experience of time — and not, of course, the other way around.

Awakenings of the Species

The building blocks of matter can be called Conscious units or units of consciousness. They form physical matter as it exists in our understanding and experience. Units of consciousness also form other kinds of matter that we do not perceive.

a35

Conscious units can also operate as “particles” or as “waves.” Whichever way they operate, they are aware of their own existences. When conscious units operate as particles, in our terms, they build up a continuity in time. They take on the characteristics of particularity. They identify themselves by the establishment of specific boundaries.

They take certain forms, then, when they operate as particles, and experience their reality from “the center of” unique specifications. They become in our terms individual.

a51

When conscious units operate as waves, however, they do not set up any boundaries about their own self-awareness — and when operating as waves conscious units can indeed be in more than one place at one time.

I understand that this is somewhat difficult material to comprehend. However, in its purest form a unit of consciousness can be in all places at the same time. It becomes beside the point, then, to say that when it operates as a wave a unit of consciousness is precognitive, or clairvoyant, since it has the capacity to be in all places and all times simultaneously.

a43

Those units of consciousness are the building blocks for the physical material of our body, for the trees and rocks, the oceans, the continents, and the very manifestation of space itself as we understand it.

These conscious units can operate as separate entities, as identities, or they can flow together in a vast, harmonious wave of activity, as a force. Actually, units of consciousness operate in both ways all of the time. No identity, once “formed,” is ever annihilated, for its existence is indelibly a part of “the entire wave of consciousness to which it belongs.”

a32

Each “particalized” unit, however, rides the continual thrust set up by fields of consciousness, in which wave and particle both belong. Each particalized unit of consciousness contains within it inherently the knowledge of all other such particles — for at other levels, again, the units are operating as waves. Basically the units move faster than light, slowing down, in our terms, to form matter. These units can be considered, again, as entities or as forces, and they can operate as either. Metaphysically, they can be thought of as the point at which All That Is acts to form our world — the immediate contact of a never-ending creative inspiration, coming into mental focus, the metamorphosis of certainly divine origin that brings the physical world into existence from the greater reality of divine fact. Scientifically, again, the units can be thought of as building blocks of matter. Ethically, the conscious units represent the spectacular foundations of the world in value fulfillment, for each unit of consciousness is related to each other, each participating in the entire gestalt of mortal experience. And we will see how this applies to our attitudes toward species, and man’s and woman’s relationship with other conscious entities and the planet we share with them.

a41

In the beginning conscious units, then, units of consciousness, existing within a divine psychological gestalt, endowed with the unimaginable creativity of that sublime identity, began themselves to create, to explore, and to fulfill those innate values by which they were characterized. Operating both as waves and particles, directed in part by their own creative restlessness, and directed in part by the unquenchable creativity of All That Is, they embarked upon the project that brought time and space and our entire universe into being. They were the first entities, then.

I want us to try and imagine a situation in which there exists a psychological force that includes within its capabilities the ability to act simultaneously on the most microscopic and the most macroscopic levels; that can form within itself a million separate inviolate unique identities, and that can still operate as a part of those identities, and as a larger unit that is their source — in which case it is a wave from which the particles emerge. That description fits our units of consciousness.

a25

They built our world from the inside out. As physical creatures, they focused upon what we think of as physical identities: separate, individual differences, endowing each physical consciousness with its own original variations and creative potentials, its own opportunity for completely original experience, and a viewpoint or platform from which to participate in reality — one that at that level could not be experienced in the same way by any other individual. This is the privileged, always new, private and immediate, direct experience of any individual of any species, or of any degree, as it encounters the objective universe.

At other levels, while each individuality is maintained, it rides the wavelike formations of consciousness. It is everywhere at once, and the units of consciousness that make up our cells know the positions of all other such units, both in time and in space.

a36

In the beginning, then, these units operated both as identities or particles, and as waves. The main concentration was not yet physical in our terms. What we now think of as the dream state was the waking one, for it was still the recognized form of purposeful activity, creativity, and power. The dream state continues to be a connective between the two realities, and as a species we literally learned to walk by first being sleepwalkers. We walked in our sleep. We dreamed our languages. We spoke in our dreams and later wrote down the alphabets — and our knowledge and our intellect have always been fired, sharpened, propelled by the great inner reality from which our minds emerged.

Physical matter by itself could never produce consciousness. One mind alone could not come into being from chance alone; one thought could not leap from an infinite number or nerve ends, if matter itself was not initially alive with consciousness, packed with the intent to be. A man or woman who believes life has little meaning quickly leaves life — and a meaningless existence could never produce life. Nor was the universe created for one species alone, by a God who is simply a supervision of the same species — as willful and destructive as man or woman at his or her worst.

a44

Instead, we have an inner dimension of activity, a vast field of multidimensional creativity, a Creator that becomes a portion of each of its creations, and yet a Creator that is greater than the sum of its parts: a Creator that can know itself as a mouse in a field, or as the field, or as the continent upon which the field rests, or as the planet that holds the continent, or as the universe that holds the world — a force that is whole yet divisible, that is one and the inconceivably many, a force that is eternal and mortal at once, a force that plunges headlong into its own creativity, forming the seasons and experiencing them as well, glorifying in individuation, and yet always aware of the great unity that is within and behind and through all experiences of individuality: a force from which each moment pasts and future flow out in every conceivable direction.

In our terms of time, however, we will speak of a beginning, and in that beginning it was early man’s and woman’s dreams that allowed him or her to cope with physical reality. The dream world was his or her original learning ground. In times of drought he or she would dream of the location of water. In times of famine he or she would dream of the location of food. That is, his or her dreaming allowed him or her to clairvoyantly view the body of land. He or she would not waste time in the trail-and-error procedures that we now take for granted. In dreams his or her consciousness operated as a wave.

a4

In those early times all species shared their dreams in a way that is now quite unconscious for our kind, so that in dreams man and woman inquired of the animals also — long before he or she learned to follow the animal tracks, for example. Where is there food or water? What is the lay of the land? Man and woman explored the planet because his/her dreams told him that the land was there.

People were not nearly as isolated as it now appears, for in their dreams early men and women communicated their various locations, the symbols of their cultures and understanding, the nature of their arts. All of the inventions that we often think now happened quite by chance — the discovery of anything from the first tool to the importance of fire, or the coming of the Iron Age or whatever — all of that inventiveness was the result of the inspiration and communication of the dream world. Man and woman dreamed his or her world and then created it, and the units of consciousness first dreamed man or woman and all of the other species that we know.

a55

There is a point here that I want to emphasize before we go too far, and it is this: The dream world is not an aimless, non-logical, unintellectual field of activity. It is only that our own perspective closes out much of its vast reality, for the dreaming intellect can put our computers to shame. I am not, therefore, putting the intellectual capacities in the background — but I am saying that they emerge as we know them because of the dreaming self’s uninterrupted use of the full power of the united intellect and intuitions.

The intellectual abilities as we know them cannot compare to those greater capacities that are a part of our own inner reality.

a47

It makes little difference whether we watch the news or not — but it makes all the difference in the world what we think of world events.

The perspective from which we watch events is vital, and it it true that communication now brings to the conscious mind a far greater barrage than before. But it is also a barrage that makes man and woman see his and her activities, and even with the growth of the new nationalism in the Third World, those nations begin from a new perspective, in which the eyes of the world are indeed upon them.

a57

Our country faces the results of its own policies — its greed as well as its good intent, but it is out in the open in a new way. The world will be seen as one, but there may be changes in the overall tax assessments along the way, as those who have not paid much, pay more.

The results of fanaticism are also out in the open. Never before, in our terms, has the private person been able to see a picture of the mass world in such a way, or been forced to identify with the policies of his or her government. That in itself is a creative achievement, and means that man or woman is not closing his or her eyes to the inequities of his or her world.

a83

Units of consciousness do help form different kinds of physical realities. There are many dimensions that are as physical, so to speak, as our own world, but if we are not focused in them we would not at all be aware of their existence, but perceive only empty space.

Nothing in the universe is ever lost, or misled, or wasted, so the energy of our own thoughts, while they are still our own thoughts, helps to form the natural attributes of physical realities that we do not perceive. So our own world formed by units of consciousness. Its natural elements are the glistening remnants of other units of consciousness that we do not see.

a11

According to Albert Einstein, no material particle in our universe can be accelerated from rest to quite the speed of light, which is about 186,000 miles per second in a vacuum. Supposed faster-than-light particles are thought to be possible within the context of Einstein’s special theory of relativity.

Sleepwalkers

We have taught ourselves to respond to certain neural patterns, and to ignore alternate ones that now simply operate as background activity. That background activity, however, supports a million forces: the neural stimuli that we accept as biologically real. Those other background stimuli are now quite difficult for us to identify, but they are always there in the [hinterland] of our waking consciousness, like dream chatter way beneath our usual associations.

n52

Neurologically, we tune into only a portion of our body’s reality and are ignorant of the great, tiny but tumultuous communications that are ever flying back and forth in the microscopic but vital cellular world.

Electrons in our terms are precognitive, and so is our cellular consciousness. Our body’s relative permanence in time is dependent upon the electron’s magnificent behavior as it deals with probabilities. The cell’s stability, and its reliability in the bodily environment, is dependent upon its innate properties of instant communication and instant decision, for each cell is in communication with all others and is united with all others through fields of consciousness, in which each entity of whatever degree plays a part.

n54

At one level our cells obey the rules of time, but on other levels they defy it. All of these communications are a part of the human parcel of reality, and they all exist beneath what we think of as normal consciousness. Events are not built up initially from physical particles. They are the result of psychological activity.

“In the beginning” we were only aware of that psychological activity. It had not “as yet” thickened itself into form. The form was there, but it was not manifest. I do not particularly like the analogy, but it is useful: Instead of small particles, we had small units of consciousness gradually building themselves into large ones — but a smaller unit of consciousness, is not “less than” a larger unit, for each unit of consciousness contains within itself the innate heritage of All That Is.

n3

We think of the conscious mind, as we know it, as the only kind of consciousness with a deliberate intent, awareness of itself as itself, and with a capacity for logic and the appreciation of symbolism. That only seems true because of our particular range of activity, and because we can only pinpoint events within a particular psychological spectrum.

Fields of consciousness in physics is called “energy and momentum,” not consciousness.

 

We cannot pinpoint “invisible” events

We can only locate or pinpoint an event that falls one way or another into the range of our perception.

dr10

We cannot really locate or pinpoint microscopic or macroscopic events with any precision. And cannot pinpoint invisible events, for even as our sophisticated instruments perceive them, they have not met them in the same time scheme. I want to deal briefly with such ideas, so that in later blogs we can discuss the location of the universe.

Any events that we perceive is only a portion of the true dimensionality of that event. The observer and the object perceived are a part of the same event, each changing the other. This interrelationship always exists in any system of reality and at any level of activity. In certain terms, for example, even an electron “knows” it is being observed through our instrument. The electrons within the instrument itself have a relationship with the electron that scientists may be trying to “isolate” for examination.

3310

Quite apart from that, however, there is what we will call for now the collective unconscious of all of the electrons that compose the entire seemingly separate event of the scientists observing the electron. In our range of activity we can adequately identify events, project them in time and space, only by isolating certain portions of much larger and much smaller events, and recognizing a highly specific order of events as real.

Light can be defined as a wave or as a particle, and the same is true in many other instances. Consciousness, for example, can be defined as a wave or as a particle, for it can operate as either, and appear as either, even though its true definition would have to include the creative capacity to shape itself into such forms.

dr13

We cannot pinpoint the beginning of the universe — for that beginning is simultaneously too vast and too small to be contained in any of our specifications. While everything seems neat and tidy within those specifications, and whole, we operate with brilliant nonchalance in the theater of time and space. Time and space are each the result of psychological properties. When we ask how old is the universe, or how old is the world, then we are taking it for granted that time and space are somehow or other almost absolute qualities. We are asking for answers that can only be found by going outside of the context of usual experience — for within that experience we are always led back to beginnings and endings, consecutive moments, and a world that seems to have within it no evidences of any other source.

The physical world as we know it is unique, vital to the importance of the universe itself. It is an integral part of the universe, and yet it is also quite its own reality. That reality is dependent upon the perceptions of each kind of life that composes it. It is a creation of consciousness, rising into one unique kind of expression from that divine gestalt of being — and the divine gestalt of being is of such unimaginable dimensions that its entire reality cannot appear within any one of its own realities, its own worlds.

dr44

Space, again, is a psychological property. So is time. The universe did not, then, begin at some specified point in time, or at any particular location in space — for it is true to say that all of space and all of time appeared simultaneously, and appear simultaneously.

We cannot pinpoint the location of consciousness.

dr32

When we are dreaming we cannot pinpoint our dream location in the same way that we can determine, say, the chair of the bureau that may sit on the floor by the bed in which we dream. That inner location is real, however, and meaningful activity can take place within it. Physical space exists in the same manner, except that it is a mass psychologically share property — but at one “time” in the beginning this was not so.

In the beginning, physical space had the qualities that dream space has to us now. It seemed to have a more private nature, and only gradually, in those terms, did it become publicly shared.

ee24

What was such a world like, and how can we possibly relate it to the world we know?

Dream world is an inner Universe

When I speak of the dream world, I am not referring to some imaginary realm, but to the kind of world of ideas, of thoughts, of mental actions, out of which all form as we think of it emerges. In actuality this is an inner universe rather than an inner world. Our physical reality is but one materialization of that inner organization. All possible civilizations exist first in that realm of inner mind.

dr17

In the beginning, then, the species did not have the kinds of forms they do now. They had pseudo-forms — dream bodies, if you prefer — and they could not physically reproduce themselves. Their experience of time was entirely different, and in the beginning he/she entire earth operated in a kind of dream time.

Forms appeared and disappeared. In our terms of time, however, the dream bodies took on physical forms. Physical reproduction was impossible. That did not happen to all of the species at once, however. For a while, then, the earth had a mixed population of species who had completely taken on physical forms, and species who had not. The forms, however, whether physical or not, were complete in themselves. Birds were birds, and fish fish.

dr0

In the beginning there were also species of various other kinds: combinations of man-animal and animal-man, and many other “crossbreed” species, some of fairly long duration in our terms. This applies to all areas. There were dream trees, with dream foliage, that gradually became aware within that dream, turning physical, focusing more and more in physical reality, until their dream seeds finally brought forth physical trees.

There may be other terms I could use, in some ways more advantageous than the term, “the dream world.” I am emphasizing this dream connection, however, because the dream state is one familiar to each reader of this blog, and it represents our closet touchstone to the kind of subjective reality from which our physical world emerges. The dream state appears chaotic, shadowy, suspicious, or even meaningless, precisely because in life we are so brilliantly focused in daily reality that dreams appear to be staticky objective background noise, left over from when we sleep. But that is how physical experience would seem to someone not focused in it, or inexperienced with its organization.

dr35

Again, the world came into being in the same way that any idea does. The physical world expands in the same way that any idea does. I am speaking for our edification of the world we recognize, of the earth we know, but there are probable earths, of course, as real as our own. They coexist with our own, and they are all in one way or another connected. Each one carries hints and clues about the others. In the terms used by science, there was no evolution in linear terms, but vast explosions of consciousness, expansions of capacities, unfoldings on the parts of all species, and these still continue. They are the inner manipulations with which consciousness presents itself.

The pattern of animal behavior, for example, is not at all as set and finished as we suppose. Out physical experience is a combination of dream events interrelated with what we call objective acts.

dr33

Were it not for our myths, we would have discovered no “facts.”

Proliferations of Consciousness

These imply some pretty fantastic abilities on the part of we humans — for such developments show that even though we live as small creatures within the incredible richness of an overall consciousness, or All That Is, still our actions can result in that great consciousness exploring new areas of itself. Quite awesome creative abilities on our part, and ones that unknowingly we take for granted. We do this all of the time, of course, individually and collectively.

p41

In the beginning, there was not God the Father, Allah, Zoroaster, Zeus, or Buddha.

In the beginning there was instead, a divine psychological gestalt — and by that I mean a being whose reality escapes the definition of the word “being,” since in it the source from which all beings emerges. That being exists in a psychological dimension, a spacious present, in which everything that was or is or will be (in our terms) is kept in immediate attention, poised in a divine context that is characterized by such a brilliant concentration that the grandest and the lowliest, the largest and the smallest, are equally held in a multi-loving constant focus.

p15

Our conceptions of beginnings and endings make an explanation of such a situation most difficult, for in our terms the beginning of the universe is meaningless — that is, in those terms there was no beginning.

The universe is always coming into existence, and each present moment bring its own built-in past along with it. We agree on accepting as fact only a small portion of the large available data that compose any moment individually or globally. We accept only those data that fit in with our ideas of motion in time. As a result, for example, our archeological evidence usually presents a picture quite in keeping with our ideas of history, geological eras, and so forth.

p17

The conscious mind sees with a spectacular but limited scope. It lacks all peripheral vision. I use the term “conscious mind” as we define it, for we allow it to accept as evidence only those physical data available for the five senses — while the five senses, of course, represent only a relatively flat view of reality, that deals with the most apparent surface.

The physical senses are the extensions of inner senses that are, in one way or another, a part of each physical species regardless of its degree. The inner senses provide all species with an inner method of communication. The cells, then, possess inner senses.

p66

Atoms perceive their own positions, their velocities, motions, the nature of their surroundings, the material that they compose. Our world did not just come together, mindless atoms forming here and there, elements coalescing from brainless gases — nor was the world, created by some distant objectified God who created it part by part as in some cosmic assembly line. With defects built in, mind you, and better models coming every geological season.

The universe formed out of what God is.

p44

The universe is the natural extension of divine creativity and intent, lovingly formed from the inside out — so there was consciousness before there was matter, and not the other way around.

In certain basic and vital ways, our own consciousness is a portion of that divine gestalt. In the terms of our earthly experience, it is a metaphysical, scientific, and a creative error to separate matter from consciousness, for consciousness materializes itself as matter in physical life.

p8

Our consciousness will survive our body’s death, but it will also take on another kind of form — a form that is itself composed of “units of consciousness.” We have a propensity for wanting to think in terms of hierarchies of consciousness, with humanity at the top of the list, in global terms. The Bible, for example, says that man is put in dominion over the animals, and it seems as if upgrading the consciousness of animals must somehow degrade our own. The divine gestalt, however, is expressed in such a way that its quality is undiluted. It cannot be watered down, so that in basic terms one portion of existence is somehow up or down the scale from another. It is all Grade A.

We limit the capacity of our conscious mind by refusing to allow it to use a larger scope of attention, so that we have remained closed and ignorant about the different, varied, but rich experiences of other species: They do appear beneath us. We have allowed a certain stubborn literal-mindedness to provide us with definitions that served to categorize rather than illuminate other realities beside our own.

p16

In the beginning, then, there was a subjective world that became objective. Matter was not yet permanent, in our terms, for consciousness was not yet as stable there. In the beginning, then, there was a dream world, in which consciousness formed a dream of physical reality, and gradually became awake within that world.

Mountains rose and tumbled. Oceans filled. Tidal waves thundered. Islands appeared. The seasons themselves were not stable. In our terms the magnetic fields themselves fluctuated — but all of the species were there at the beginning, though in the same fashion, for as the dream world broke through into physical reality there was all of the tumultuous excitement and confusion with which a mass creative event is achieved. There was much greater plasticity, motion, variety, give-and-take, as consciousness experimented with its forms. The species and environment together formed themselves in concert, in glorious combination, so that each fulfilled the requirements of its own existence while adding to the fulfillment of all other portions of physical reality.

p14

That kind of event simply cannot fit into our concepts of “the beginning of the world,” with consciousness arising out of matter almost as a second thought, or with an exteriorized God initiating a divine but mechanistic natural world.

Nor can this concept fit into our versions of good and evil. God, or All that Is, is in the deepest sense completed, and yet uncompleted. Again, I am aware of the contradiction that seems to be presented to our minds. In a sense, however, a creative product, say, helps complete an artist, while of course the artist can never be completed. All That Is, of God, in a certain fashion, now — and this is qualified — learns as we learn, and makes adjustments according to our knowledge. We must be very careful here, for delusions of divinity come sometimes too easily, but in a basic sense we all carry within ourselves the undeniable mark of All That Is — and an inbuilt capacity — to glimpse in our own terms undeniable evidence of our own greater existence. We are as close to the beginning of our world as Adam and Eve were, or as the Romans, or as the Egyptians or Sumerians. The beginning of the world is just a step outside the moment.

p3

I have a purpose in this blog — for this discussion — and that purpose is to change our ideas of ourselves, by showing a truer picture of our history both in terms of our immortal consciousness and our physical heritage.

A basic religious awareness has always been with mankind and womankind. Here are a few historical and mythological signposts of the intuitive understanding.
God the Father. There’s no way to assign any reasonably accurate date to when God the Father created all things, as described in Genesis, the first book of the Bible. (The Biblical account of Creation makes evolution an impossibility.) Nor can the date of Creation be arrived at by counting the Bible’s lists of generations, as given in the Old Testament, since these may well be incomplete.

Mohammed (A.D. 570?-632), the Prophet of Islam, stressed the uniqueness of the god Allah, whose name was already well known in pre-Islamic Arabia.

Zoroaster (628?-551? B.C.) was a Persian religious teacher and prophet.

Zeus was the supreme god of the ancient Greeks, who worshipped him in connection with almost every facet of daily life. He was the son of Cronus and Rhea, and the husband of his sister Hera. The Romans identified Zeus with their own supreme god, Jupiter, or Jove.

Buddha. This is the title given to Siddhartha Gautama, the founder of Buddhism. He was a religious teacher and philosopher who lived in India, probably from 563 to 483 B.C.

p47

2. I see correlations between the “flat view of reality” given to us by our physical senses, and the “flat” view of the universe that cosmologists perceive when they look way out into space. In his general theory of relativity, Einstein postulated that space can curve, and this has been shown to happen near the sun. Yet when scientists examine our universe of galaxies and clusters of galaxies, they see space as essentially flat, instead of curving in upon itself as it should over those enormous distances. Nor can the big-bang theory of the origin of the universe account for the homogeneity of a flat universe. The inflationary model can explain both the appearance of flatness and homogeneity — but, like all theories, it poses other problems that have yet to be resolved.

 

Desire to create out of joy, not from a sense of responsibility

Many if the ideas in my blogs will be accepted by scientists most dubiously, though some, of course, will grasp what I will be saying. It is of course very difficult for the deepest truths cannot be physically proven. Science is used to asking quite specific questions, and it usually comes up with very specific answers — even if those answers are wrong.

d11

“Wrong” answers can fit together, however, to present a perfect picture, an excellent construct of its own — and why not? For any answers that do not fit the construct are simply thrown away and never appear. So in a fashion we are dealing with what science has thrown away. The picture we will end up presenting, will certainly not fit that of established science.

However, if objective proof of that nature is considered the priority for facts, then as we know science cannot prove its version of the universe’s origin either. It only sets up an hypothesis, which collects about it all data that agree, and again ignores what does not fit. Moreover, science’s thesis meets with no answering affirmation in the human heart — and in fact arouses the deepest antipathy, for in his or her heart man or woman well knows his/her own worth, and realizes that his/her own consciousness is no accident. The psyche, then, possesses within itself an inner affirmation, an affirmation that keeps man from being completely blinded by his/her own mental edifices.

d12

There is furthermore a deep, subjective, immaculately knowledgeable standard within man’s or woman’s consciousness by which he/she ultimately judges all of the theories and the beliefs of his/her time, and even if his/her intellect is momentarily swamped by ignoble doctrines, still that point of integrity knows. That is the portion of him/her, of course, that is born and grows to maturity even while the lungs or digestive processes do not read learned treatises on the body’s “machinery,” so in my blog we will hope to arouse within the reader, of whatever persuasion, a kind of subjective evidence, a resonance between ideas and being. Many people comment, saying that they feel as if somehow they have always been acquainted with our material — and of course they have, for it represents the inner knowing within each individual. In a fashion, creative play is our human version of far greater characteristics from which our universe itself was formed. There are all kinds of definite, even specific, subjective evidence for the nature of our own reality — evidence that is readily apparent once we really begin to look for it, particularly by comparing the world of our dreams with our daily life.

In other words, subjective play is the basis for all creativity, of course — but far more, it is responsible for the great inner play of subjective and objective reality.

d7

With all due respect, psychologists, with the best of intentions, are barking up the wrong psychological tree. He/she are very enthusiastic about his or her value tests, and his or her enthusiasm is what is important. The nature of the subjective mind, however, will never open itself to such tests, which represent, more than anything else, a kind of mechanical psychology, as if we could break down human values to a kind of logical alphabet of psychic atoms and molecules. A good try, but representative of psychology’s best attempt to make sense of a poor hypothesis.

We may do what we wish ourselves (about taking the tests), of course, but our main purpose is to drive beyond psychology’s boundaries, and not play pussyfoot among the current psychological lilies of the field.

d4

Our body’s are responding, so let us remember that creativity is playful, and that it always surfaces when we allow our mind to drop its worries.

Whenever a blog is translated, it is almost impossible, of course, to say the same thing in the same way. My blog will always be expressed through those invisible national characteristics that are so intimately involved with language — and obviously, were that not so, no blog could be understood by someone of a foreign language. There are bound to be distortions, but the distortions themselves are meaningful.

d13

Now, a number of the world’s leading scientists in the physical disciplines have publicly stated their beliefs that basically consciousness plays the primary role in our world and/or universe. For reasons too complicated to go into here, this attitude prevails even with some mathematicians who seek to penetrate to the core of our reality as they understand it.

However, for every scientist bold enough to think this way, there are scores of others who vehemently disagree. For most scientific materialists only physical matter is real. For them consciousness is nothing more than an epiphenomenon, the passive by-product of the brain’s physiology and chemical events. They believe that physical death is the end of everything, that ultimately all if pointless. They derisively call their rebellious colleagues “animists” — those who believe that all life forms and natural phenomena have a spiritual origin independent of physical matter. (Such heretics are called “Vitalists,” a term related to animism, and one which also has a long history of scientific contempt behind it.)

d9

What can the materialistic scientists use other than mind — or consciousness, that poor epiphenomenon — to study and dissect matter? (Not to mention that innumerable experiments have proven that “physical matter” isn’t solid or objective at all, but “only” energy!) We have, then, the paradox of mind denying its own reality, let alone its importance. As far as we know, human beings are the only creatures on earth who would seriously engage in such learned futile behavior. It’s also very ironic, I think, that the materialists spend years acquiring their eclipsed education and prestige, both of which they then use to inform us of the ultimate futility of all of our endeavors (including their own, or course). But for the materialists, the mind-brain duality isn’t scientific in the orthodox sense. It isn’t falsifiable; that is, it cannot be stated under what precise conditions the mind-brain duality could be proven false. To which, understandably enough, those scientists who do accept the reality of mind reply that neither can the idea be falsified that only what is “physical” is real.

d5

I think is most risky at this stage in history for anyone — scientist or not — to dogmatically state that life has no meaning, of is a farce, or that attributes of our reality of which we can only mentally conceive at this time do not really exist. Discoveries in the “future” are quite apt to prove such limited viewpoints wrong. The history of science itself contains many examples of theories and “facts” gone awry. Moreover, why would our species want to depend upon as fragile a conception as epiphenomenalism through which to comprehend our reality? Or better yet, why does it in large part? Truly, our individual and collective ignorance of just our own probable reality is most profound at this time in our linear history (in those terms). I would be surprised is ultimately, as a result of mankind’s or womankind’s restless search for meaning, we didn’t end up returning in a new official way to our ancient concepts of spirit within everything, animate and inanimate. Such an updated animistic/vitalistic view would take into account discoveries ranging from sub-nuclear events to the largest imaginable astronomical processes in our observable universe. Human beings do know their own worth.

d15

There is no doubt that we need to believe that life has meaning. That belief may well be biological imperative. If we were as science maintains — only creatures formed by elements combining mindlessly in a universe itself created by chance, surrounded everywhere by chaos — then how could we even conceive of the idea of meaning or order?

d16

Science would say that the idea of meaning itself is simply a reflection of the state of the brain, as is the illusion of our consciousness. But a science that disregards consciousness must necessarily end up creating its own illusion. It ignores the reality of experience, the evidence of being, and in so doing it denies rather than reinforces life’s values.

 

Atoms are “processes” rather than things

The classical conception of the typical atom as being composed of a neat nucleus of indivisible protons and neutrons circled by electrons is largely passe, although for convenience sake we may still describe the atom that way. (In those terms, the one exception is the hydrogen atom, which evidently consist of but one proton and one electron cloud, or “smear.”) For the simple purposes of this blog, then, I’m leaving out considerations involving quantum mechanics, which concept repudiates the idea of “particles” to begin with. (And surely that notion involves more than a little of the psychic, or “irrational.” What a heretical thought from the scientific viewpoint!) But each atom of whatever element is an amazingly complicated, finely balanced assemblage of forces and particles woven together in exquisite detail — one of the more basic examples of the unending and stupendous creativity, order, and design of nature, or consciousness, or All That IS.

ee44

Through their work with particle accelerators, or “atom smashers,” physicists have discovered that protons and neutrons themselves are composed of forces and particles that in turn are almost certainly composed of forces and particles, and so on, in an ever-descending scale of smaller and smaller entities and concepts. Over 100 subatomic particles have been identified so far, and no one doubts now that many more will found. The existence of a number of still-undiscovered specific particles has been predicted.

Our scientists can count elements. That is, they will create more and discover more until they are ready to go out of their minds, because they will always create physical ‘camouflages’ of the real nonphysical thing. And while they create instruments to deal with smaller and smaller particles, they will actually see smaller and smaller particles, seemingly without end.

ee13

As their instruments reach farther into the universe they will ‘see’ farther and farther, but they will automatically transform what they apparently ‘see’ into the camouflage patterns with which they are familiar. They are and they will be the prisoners of their own tools.

Instruments calculated to measure the vibrations with which scientists are familiar will be designed and redesigned. All sorts finally of seemingly impossible phenomena will be discovered with these instruments, until the scientists realize that something is desperately wrong. The instruments will be planned to catch certain camouflages, and since they will be expertly thought out they will perform their function. I do not want to get too involved. However, by certain means the instruments themselves will transform data from terms that we cannot understand into.

ee42

Some of the “particles’ the theoretical physicists have discovered — and/or created — in their gigantic particle accelerators have unbelievably short life-spans in our terms, vanishing, it seems, almost before they’re born. I like to think of such research from the particle’s point of view, though, a consideration I haven’t seen mentioned in the few scientific journals I have read. The merest particle is basically conscious in its own way. Mesons are classes of particles produced from the collisions of protons. Did a meson, for example, choose to participate in an atom-smashing experiment in order to merely peek in on our gross physical reality for much less than the billionth of a second if exists with that identity, before it decays into electrons and photons? From its viewpoint, our reality might be an incomprehensible to it as its reality is to us — yet the two inevitably go together.

In it way the meson may have all of the “time” it needs, or wants. It may look upon our world as one frozen or motionless, upon other subatomic particles as very slow-moving indeed, or even faster than it is. (As far as “time” goes, some particles live for far less than a trillionth of a second.”) I’m quite sure, however, that the meson, or any short-lived particle, searches out its own kind of value fulfillment while here with us. Probable realities, which I haven’t even mentioned, must be deeply involved also.

ee22

And of course there are all sorts of motion, some of them very stable, if still incomprehensible to us. But whereas the meson vanishes from our view after its exceedingly brief existence, the electron has an “infinite” life-span. Think of the unending varieties of value fulfillment it explores in just our world alone! Talk about motion: The average electron orbits its atomic nucleus about a million times each billionth of a second (or nanosecond).

Electromagnetic energy units (or units of consciousness), these nonphysical entities — and many others of a like nature — are emanations of consciousness, or All That Is, and in “size” rank far below the tiniest particles ever observed in atom smasher. Each unit of consciousness contains within itself innately infinitely infinite properties of expansion, development and organization; yet within itself always maintains the kernel of its own individuality. It is aware energy, not personified but awarized.

ee18

The varieties of consciousness — the inner psychological particles, the equivalent, say, of the atom or molecule, or proton, neutron or quark — those nonphysical, ‘charmed,’ ‘strange,’ forms of consciousness that make experience go up or down, and all around and around — are never of course dealt with by science.

ee52

If physical form is made up of such multitudinous, invisible particles, how much more highly organized must be the inner components of consciousness, without whose perceptions matter itself would be meaningless. The alliances of consciousness, then, are far more vast than those of particles in any form.

The Now Beginning

In terms of our equations, energy and consciousness and matter are one. And in those terms (the qualifications are necessary) — consciousness is the agent that directs the transformation of energy into form and if form into energy. All possible visible or invisible particles that we discover or imagine — meaning hypothesized particles — possess consciousness. They are energized consciousness.

b1

There are certain characteristics inherent in energy itself, quite aside from any that we ascribe to it, since of course to date we do not consider energy conscious.

Energy is above all things infinitely creative, innovative, original. Energy is imaginative. (Any scientists who might be reading this blog may as well stop here.) I am not assigning human traits to energy. Instead, our human traits are the result of energy’s characteristics — a rather important difference. Space as we think of it is, in our terms, filled with invisible particles. They are the unstated portion of physical reality, the un-manifest medium in which our world exists. In that regard, however, atoms and molecules are stated, though we cannot see them with our [ unaided ] eye. The smaller particles that make them up become “smaller and smaller,” finally disappearing from the examination of any kind of physical instrument, and these help bridge the gap between un-manifest and manifest reality.

b2

For the terms of this discussion of the beginning of our world, I will deal with known qualities for now — the atoms and molecules. In the beginning they imagined the myriad of forms that were physically possible. They imagined the numberless cells that could arise from their own cooperative creation. Energy is boundless. It is exuberant. It knows no limits. In those terms, the atoms dreamed the cells into physical being — and from that new threshold of physical activity cellular consciousness dreamed of the myriad organizations that could emerge from this indescribable venture.

Again, in actuality all of this took place at once, yet the depth of psychological experience contained therein can never be measured, for it involved a kind of value fulfillment with which each consciousness is involved. That characteristic of value fulfillment is perhaps the most important element in the being of All That Is, and it it a part of the heritage of all species.

b32

Value fulfillment itself is most difficult to describe, for it combines the nature of a loving presence — a presence with the innate knowledge of its own divine complexity — with a creative ability of infinite proportions that seeks to bring to fulfillment even the slightest, most distant portion of its own inverted complexity. Translated into simpler terms, each portion of energy is endowed with an inbuilt reach of creativity that seeks to fulfill its own potentials in all variations — and in such a way that such a development also furthers the creative potentials of each other portion of reality.

In those terms, then, there was in the beginning an almost unimaginable time in which energized consciousness, using its own creative abilities, its own imagination, experimented with triumphant rambunctiousness, trying out one form after another. In those terms we are used to thinking of, nothing was stable. Consciousness as we think of it turned into matter, and then into pure energy and back again.

b24

Subjectivity still largely ruled. Like an adolescent leaving home for the first time, individualized consciousness was also somewhat homesick, and returned often to the family homestead — but gradually gained confidence and left finally to form a universe.

Now because All That IS contains within itself such omnipotent, fertile, divine creative characteristics, all portions of its subjective experience attained dimensions of actuality impossible to describe. The thoughts, for example, of All That Is were not simply thoughts as we might have, but multidimensional mental events of superlative nature. Those events soon found that a transformation must occur, if they were to journey into objectivity — for no objectivity of itself could contain the entire reality of subjective events that existed within divine subjectivity. Only in that context could their relative perfection be maintained. Yet they had yearned before the beginning for other experiences, and even for fulfillment of a different nature. They sensed a kind of value fulfillment that required of them the utilization of their own creative abilities. They yearned to create as they had been created, and All That Is, in a kind of divine perplexity, nevertheless realized that his had always been its own intent.

b31

All That IS realized that such a separation would also allow us to bring about a different kind of divine art, in which the creators themselves created, and their creations created, bringing into actuality existences that were possible precisely because there would seem to be a difference between the creator and the creations. All That Is is, therefore, within each smallest portion of consciousness.

Yet each smallest portion of consciousness can uniquely create, bring into being, eccentric versions of All That Is, that in certain terms All That Is, without that separation, could not otherwise create. The loving support, the loving encouragement of the slightest probable consciousness and manifestation — that is the intent of All That Is.

b5

All That Is knows that even this purpose is a portion of a larger purpose. In terms of time, the realization of that purpose will emerge with another momentous explosion of subjective inspiration into objectivity, or into another form. In deeper terms, however, that purpose is also known now, and to one extent or another the entire universe dreams of it, as once cellular consciousness dreamed of the organs that it might “form.”

b22

I want to stress that I am speaking here not so much about a kind of spiritual evolution as I am about an expansion. We will for now, however, confine ourselves to discussion of consciousness in the beginning of the world, stressing that the first basis of physical life was largely subjective, and that the state of dreaming not only helped shape the consciousness of our species, but also in those terms served to provide a steady source of information to man and woman about his/her physical environment, and served as an inner web of communication among all species.

 

The year 2020, and the idea of time and of dates seems to be indelibly mixed into everyone’s psychology

We can remember last year, and to some extent recall the past years of our lives. It appears to us that our present consciousness wanders backward into the past, until finally we can remember no longer — and on a conscious level, at least, we must take the very event of our birth under secondhand evidence. Few people have conscious memory of it.

For the purpose of our discussion, I must necessarily couch this blog to some degree in the framework of time. I must honor our specifics. Otherwise my blog readers would not understand what I am trying to say.

z34

Even though this blog is being written within time’s tradition, therefore, I must remind you that basically that tradition is not mine — and more, basically, it is not yours either.

In the deepest of terms, and in ways that quite scandalize the intellect when it tries to operate alone, the beginning is now. That critical explosion of divine subjective into objectivity is always happening, and we are being given life “in each moment” because of the simultaneous nature of that divine subjectivity.

z32

I hope that in other portions of my blogs certain mental exercises will allow us to leap over the tradition of time’s framework and sense with the united intellect and intuitions our own individual part in a spacious present that is large enough to contain all of time’s segments.

Assuming that the big-bang origin of the universe was a hot event

Theoretical physicists have charted how the first explosion may have ” evolved” from one with temperature well in excess of 100,00 million degrees Kelvin into a cooler one of “only” a few thousand degrees Kelvin around 500,000 years later, so that atoms could begin to form.

sl21

One less prominent theory The “inflationary model,” which may become much better known. It incorporates many of the features of the big-bang theory, and actually may answer certain questions in a better scientific fashion. One of the big differences between the two is that in the big-bang theory all of matter in the universe was already present, though existing in an extremely dense state which then began to expand; the inflationary model suggests that the universe was created out of nothing, or out of just about nothing — meaning that through unforeseeable rhythms sub-atomic particles spontaneously came into being as matter. A fantastic, inflationary expansion then began. Yet this creation of matter out of nothing, so to speak, violates at least some of the laws of conservation — laws that are indeed among the most basic and chemical tenets of physics.

sl14

I don’t necessarily believe in either the big-bang or inflationary models of the creation of the universe, even though material in my blogs may be evocative of portions of both theories. In physics, we’re asked to believe that this “extremely dense state” which began to expand was in actuality many billions of times smaller than a proton. (Protons are subatomic components of the nuclei of atoms.) Matter is a form of energy. Even so, I have trouble conceptualizing the idea that all matter in our universe, out to the farthest-away galaxy of billions of stars, grew from this unimaginably small and dense, unimaginably hot “original” state or area of being. I can see how such a concept can be postulated mathematically — but could it ever have really happened in ordinary terms?

Imagine a body with a fully operating body consciousness

A body not diseased or defective, but without the overriding ego-directed consciousness that we have. The sleepwalker’s physical abilities surpassed ours. They were as agile as animals, their purpose simply to be. Their main points of consciousness were elsewhere, their primary focuses scarcely aware of the bodies they had created. Yet they learned ‘through experience,’ and began to ‘awaken,’ to become aware of themselves, to discover time, or to create it.

sl1

The sleepwalkers were not asleep to themselves, only from our viewpoint. There were several such races of human beings. To them the real was the dream life, which contained the highest stimuli. This is the other side of our own experience. Such races left the physical earth much as they found it. In what we would call the physical waking state, these individuals slept, yet they behaved with great natural physical grace. They did not saddle the body with negative beliefs of disease or limitation. They did not age to the extent that we do.

The creationists put down other species, as the evolutionist

I’d say that both the creation and evolution models suffer from logical and emotional sloppiness, and that neither one presents a reasonable view of man’s or woman’s origins. Both concepts seem equally implausible when we think of them with any objectivity, and neither can be proven, of course. They ultimately rest upon the faith of the believer.

z24

We cannot prove scientifically that our world was created by a god who set in into motion, but remained outside of its dominion. Nor can we prove scientifically that the creation of the world was the result of a chance occurrence — so we will not be able to prove what I am going to tell you either. Not in usual terms.

I hope however to present, along with my explanations, certain hints and clues that will try to arouse within our own consciousnesses memories of events with which our own inner psyches were intimately involved as the world was formed — and though these may appear to be past events, they are even now occurring.

z31

Before the beginning of the universe, we will postulate the existence of an omnipotent, creative source. We will hope to show that this divine subjectivity is as present in the universe. I refer to this original subjectivity as All That Is. I am making an attempt to verbalize concepts that almost defy the edges of the intellect, unless that intellect is thoroughly reinforced by the intuition’s strength. So you will need to use your mind and your own intuitions as you read this blog.

All that is, before the beginning contained within itself the infinite thrust of all possible creations. All That Is possessed creativity of such magnificence that its slightest imaginings, dreams, thoughts, feelings or moods attained a kind of reality, a vividness, an intensity, that almost demanded freedom. Freedom from what? Freedom to do what? Freedom to be what?

z33

The experience, the subjective universe, the “mind” of All That Is, was so brilliant, so distinct, that All That Is almost became lost, mentally wandering within this ever-flourishing, ever-growing interior landscape. Each thought, feeling, dream, or mood was itself indelibly marked with all of the attributes of this infinite subjectivity. Each glowed and quivered with its own creativity, its own desire to create as it had been created.

Before the beginning there existed an interior universe that had no beginning or ending, for I am using the term “before the beginning” to make matters easier for the reader to assimilate. The same infinite interior universe exists now, for example.

z51

All That Is contained within itself the knowledge of all existences, with their infinite probabilities, and “as soon as” All That Is imagined those numberless circumstances, they existed in what I will call divine fact.

All that is knew of itself only. It was engrossed with its own subjective experiences, even divinely astonished as its own thoughts and imaginings attained their own vitality, and inherited the creativity of their subjective creator. Those [thoughts and imaginings] began to have a dialogue with their “Maker”

z7

Thoughts of such magnificent vigor began to think their own thoughts — and their thoughts thought thoughts. As if in divine astonishment and surprise, All That Is began to listen, and began to respond to these “generations” of thoughts and dreams, for thoughts and dreams related to each other also. There was no time, so all of this “was happening” simultaneously. The order of events is being simplified. In the meantime, then in our terms. All That Is spontaneously thought new thoughts and dreamed new dreams, and became involved in new imaginings of interweaving and interrelating thoughts and dreams that “already” existed.

So beside this spontaneous creation, this simultaneous “stream” of divine rousing. All That Is began to watch the interactions that occurred among his own subjective progeny. He listened, began to respond and to answer a thought or a dream. He began to purposefully bring about those mental conditions that were requested by these generations of mental progeny. If he had been lonely before, he was no longer.

z8

Our language cause some difficulty here, so please accept the pronoun “he” as innocuously as possible. “It” sounds too neutral for my purpose, and I want to reserve the pronoun “she” for later differentiations. In basic terms, of course, All That Is is quite beyond any designations having to do with anyone species or sex. All That Is, then, began to feel a growing sense of pressure as it realized that its own ever-multiplying thoughts and dreams themselves yearned to enjoy those greater gifts of creativity with which they were innately endowed.

It is very difficult to try to assign anything like human motivation to All That Is. I can only say that it is possessed by “the need” to lovingly create from its own being; to lovingly transform its own reality in such a way that each most slight probable consciousness can come to be; and with the need to see that any and all possible orchestrations of consciousness have the chance to emerge, to perceive and to love.

z23

We will later in future blogs discuss fuller connotations of the word “love” as it is meant here, but this blog is a kind of outline of other material to come.

All That Is, then, became aware of a kind of creative tumult as each of its superlative thoughts and dreams, moods and feelings, strained at the very edges of their beings, looking for some then-unknown, undiscovered, as of then unthought-of release. I am saying that this mental progeny included all of the consciousnesses that have ever appeared or will appear upon our earth — all tenderly couched: the first human being, the first insect — each with an inner knowledge of the possibilities of its development. All That Is, loving its own progeny, sought within itself the answer to this divine dilemma.

z44

When that answer came, it involved previously unimaginable leaps of divine inspiration, and it occurred thusly: All that Is searched through the truly infinite assortment of its incredible progeny to see what conditions were needed for this even more magnificent dream, this dream of a freedom of objectivity. What door could open to let physical reality emerge from such an inner realm? When All That Is, in our terms, put all of those conditions together it saw, of course, in a flash, the mental creation of those objective worlds that would be needed — and as it imagined those worlds, in our terms, they were physically created.

All That Is did not separate itself from those worlds, however, for they were created from its thoughts, and each one has divine content. The worlds are all created by that divine content, so that while they are on the one hand exterior, they are on the other also made of divine stuff, and each hypothetical point in our universe is in direct contact with All That Is in the most basic terms. The knowledge of the whole is within all of its parts — and yet All That Is is more than its parts.

z52

Divine subjectivity is indeed infinite. It can never be entirely objectified. When the worlds, ours and others, were thus created, there was indeed an explosion of unimaginable proportions, as the divine spark of inspiration exploded into objectivity.

The first “object” was an almost unendurable mass, though it has no weight, and it exploded, instantaneously beginning processes that formed the universe — but no time was involved. the process that we might imagine took up eons occurred in the twinkling of an eye, and the initial objective materialization of the massive thought of All That Is burst into reality. In our terms this was a physical explosion — but in the terms of the consciousnesses involved in that breakthrough, this was experienced as a triumphant “first” inspirational frenzy, a breakthrough into another kind of being.

z53

The earth then appeared as consciousness transformed itself into the many facets of nature. The atoms and molecules were alive, aware — they were no longer simply a part of a divine syntax, but they spoke themselves through the very nature of their being. They became the living, aware vowels and syllables through which consciousness could form matter.

But in our terms this was still largely a dream world, though it was fully fashioned. It had, generally speaking, all of the species that we now know. These all correlated with the multitudinous kinds of consciousnesses that had clamored for release, and those consciousnesses were spontaneously endowed by All That Is with those forms that fir their requirements. We had the birth of individualized consciousness as we think of it into physical context. Those consciousnesses were individualized before the beginning, but not manifest. But individualized consciousness was not quite all that bold. It did not attach itself completely to its earthly forms at the start, but rested often within its “ancient” divine heritage. In our terms, its is as if the earth and all of its creatures were partially dreaming, and not as focused within physical reality as they are now.

z46

For one thing, while individualized consciousness was within the massive subjectivity of All That IS, it enjoyed, beside its own uniqueness, a feeling of supporting unity, a comforting knowledge that it was its source. So in the beginning of our world, consciousness fluctuated greatly, focusing gently at the start, but not quite as willing to be as fully independent as its first intent might seem.

We had the sleepwalkers, early members of our species, whose main concentration was still veiled in that earlier subjectivity, and they were our true ancestors, in those terms.

z38

For one thing, early man and woman needed to rely upon his or her inner knowledge.

The universe began tomorrow

The universe will begin yesterday. The universe began tomorrow. Both of these statements are quite meaningless. The tenses are wrong, and perhaps our time sense is completely outraged. Yet the statement: “The universe began in some distant past, ” is, in basic terms, just as meaningless.

g6

In fact, the first two statements, while making no logical sense, do indeed hint of phenomena that show time itself to be no more than a creative construct. Time and space are in a fashion part of the furniture of our universe.

The very experience of passing moments belongs to our psychological rooms in the same way that clocks are attached to our walls. Whenever science or religion seeks the origin of the universe, they search for it in the past. The universe is being created now. Creation occurs in each moment, in our terms. The illusion of time is being created now. It is therefore somewhat futile to look for the origins of the universe by using a time scheme that is in itself, at the very least, highly relative.

g13

Our now, or present moment, is a psychological platform. It seems that the universe began with an initial burst of energy of some kind. Evolutionists cannot account for its cause. Many religious people believe that a god exists in a larger dimension of reality, and that he or she created the universe while being himself or herself outside of it. He or she set it into motion. Many individuals, following either persuasion, believe that regardless of its source, the universe must run out of energy. Established science is quite certain that no energy can now be created or destroyed, but only transformed (as stated in the first laws of thermodynamics). Science sees energy and matter as being basically the same thing, appearing differently under varying circumstances.

In certain terms, science and religion are both dealing with the idea of an objectively created universe. Either God “made it,” or physical matter, in some unexplained manner, was formed after an initial explosion of energy, and consciousness emerged from that initially dead matter in a way yet to be explained.

g5

Instead, consciousness formed matter. Each atom and molecule has its own consciousness. Consciousness and matter and energy are one, but consciousness initiates the transformation of energy into matter. In those terms, the “beginning” of our universe was a triumph in the expansion of consciousness, as it learned to translate itself into physical form. The universe emerged into actuality in the same way, but to a different degree, that any idea emerges from what we think of as subjectivity into physical expression.

The consciousness of each reader of this blog existed before the universe was formed: — but that consciousness was un-manifest. Our closest approximation — and its is an approximation only — of the state of being that existed before the universe was formed is the dream state. In that state before the beginning, our consciousness existed free of space and time, aware of immense probabilities. This is extremely difficult to verbalize, yet it is very important that such an attempt be made. Our consciousness is a part of an infinitely original creative process.

g38

I will purposely avoid the word “God” because of the connotations placed upon it by conventional religion. I will make an attempt to explain the characteristics of this divine process throughout this blog. I call the process “All That Is.” All That Is is so much a part of its creations,” for each creation also carries indelibly within it the characteristics of its source.

If we have thought that the universe followed a mechanistic model, then we would have to say that each portion of this “cosmic machine” created itself, knowing its position in the entire “future construction.” We would have to say further that each portion came gladly out of its own source individually, neatly tailored to its position, while at the same time that individual source was also as intimately the source of each other individual portion.

g35

I am not saying that the universe is the result of some “psychological machine,” either, but that each portion of consciousness is a part of All That Is, and that the universe falls together in a spontaneous, divine order — and that each portion of consciousness carries within it indelibly the knowledge of the whole.

The birth of the world represented a divine psychological awakening. Each consciousness that take a part in the physical universe dreamed of such a physical existence, in our terms before the earth was formed. In greater terms than ours, it is quite true to say that the universe is not formed yet, or that the universe has vanished. In still vaster terms, however, the fact is that in one state or another of the universe has always existed.

g31

Our closest approximation of the purpose of the universe can be found in those loving emotions that we have toward the development of our children, in our intent to have them develop their fullest capacities.

g17

Our finest aspirations can give us some dim clue as to the great creative thrust that is behind our own smallest act, for our own smallest act is possible only because our body has already been provided for in the physical world. Our life is given. In each moment it is renewed. So smoothly and effortlessly do we ride that thrust of life’s energy that we are sometimes scarcely aware of it. We are not equipped with a certain amount of energy that then wears out and dies. Instead we are, again, newly created in each moment.

Be a practicing idealist if you are to remain a true idealist for long

We must take small practical steps, often when we would prefer to take giant ones — but we must move in the direction of our ideals through action. Otherwise we will feel disillusioned, or powerless, or sure, that only drastic, highly unideal methods will ever bring about the achievement of a given state or situation.

u44

Life at all levels of activity is propelled to seek ideals, whether of a biological or mental nature. That pursuit automatically gives life its zest and natural sense of excitement and drama. Developing our own abilities, whatever they may be, exploring and expanding, our experience of selfhood, gives life a sense of purpose, meaning, and creative excitement — and also adds to the understanding and development of the society and the species.

It is not enough to meditate, or to imagine in our mind some desired goal being accomplished, if we are afraid to act upon the very impulses to which our meditations and imaginings give rise. When we do not take any steps toward an ideal position then our life does lack excitement. We become depressed. We might become an idealist in reverse, so that we find a certain excitement in contemplating the occurrence of natural disasters, such as earthquakes.

u50

We may begin to concentrate our attention on such activities. We may contemplate the end of the world instead, but in either case we are propelled by a sense of personal frustration, and perhaps by some degree of vengeance, seeing in our mind the destruction of a world that fell so far beneath our idealized expectations.

None of the unfortunate situations discussed in my blog, have any power over us, if we understand that events do not exist by themselves. All events and situations exist first within the mind. At the deepest levels of communication no news is secret, whether or not we receive it by way of our technological gadgets.

u55

Our thoughts and beliefs and desires form the events that we view on television. If we want to change our world, we must first change our thoughts, expectations, and beliefs. If every reader of this blog changed his or her attitudes, even though not one law was rewritten, tomorrow the world would have changed for the better. The new laws would follow.

Any new law always follows the change in belief. It is not the other way around.

u12

There is no civilization, no system of science, art, or philosophy, that did not originate in the mind. When we give lip service to ideas with which we do not agree, we are betraying our own ideals, harming oneself to some extent, and society as well, insofar as we are denying oneself and society that benefit of our own understanding. Each person is an idealist. I simply want to help us practice our idealism in the acts of our daily life.

Each person alive helps paint the living picture of civilization as it exists at any given time, in our terms. “Be your own best artist”. Our thoughts, feelings and expectations are like the living brush strokes with which we paint our corner of life’s landscape. If we do our best in our own life, then we are indeed helping to improve the quality of all life. Our thoughts are as real as snowflakes or raindrops or clouds. They mix and merge with the thoughts of others, to form man’s and woman’s livingscape, providing the vast mental elements from which physical events will be formed.

u16

As we learn to allow our impulses some freedom, we will discover their connection with our own idealized version of what life should be. We will begin to discover that those spontaneous urges are as basically good and life-giving as the physical elements of the earth that provide the impetus for all biological life.

Beyond that, however, those impulses, connect us with the original impulses from which all life emerges.

u21

We will discover the natural, cooperative of our impulses, and we will no longer believe that they exist as contradictory or disruptive influences. Our impulses are part of the great multi-action of being. At deeper levels, the impulse portion of the personality is aware of all actions upon the earth’s surface. We are involved in a cooperative venture, in which our slightest impulse has a greater meaning, and is intimately connected with all other actions. We have the power to change our life and the world for the better, but the methods that are worthy of them. Science and religion have each contributed much to man’s and woman’s development. They must also reevaluate their ideals and methods, however.

In larger terms, there are really only scientific and religious men and women, however, and fields of science and religion would be meaningless without those individuals who believe in their positions. As those men and women enlarge their definitions of reckless in pursuit of the ideal — reckless enough to insist that each step we take along the way is worthy of that ideal.

u57

We will understand, if we are a practicing idealist, that we cannot kill in the name of peace, for if we do so our methods will automatically undermine our ideal. The sacredness of life and spirit are one and the same. We cannot condemn the body without ultimately condemning the soul. We cannot condemn the soul without ultimately condemning the body.

I would like each of my Blog readers to be practicing idealist, and if you are then you will automatically be tolerant of the beliefs of others. You will not be unkind in the pursuit of your own ideals. You will look upon the world with a sane compassion, with some humor, and you will look for man’s and woman’s basic good intent. You will find it. It has always been there. You will discover your own basic good intent, and see that it has always been behind all of your actions — even in those least fitted to the pursuit of your private ideals.

u59

The end does not justify the means. If we learn that lesson, then our good intent will allow us to act effectively and creatively in our private experience, and in our relationships with others. Our changed beliefs will affect the mental atmosphere of our nation and the world.

u36

We must encounter the selves that we are now. Acknowledge our impulses. Explore their meanings. Rely upon ourselves. We will find far greater power, achievement, and virtue than we suppose.

The tree of life, of reptiles turning into birds….

If science wants to talk about the tree of life, then we have certainly got the right to see all — or at least most — of the leaves on the tree, not just those at the tips of the branches. Meaning of course, that many of those invisible leaves would represent the missing, physical, intermediate forms demanded by evolutionary theory.

t11

Some of us keep searching for some remote spiritual inner self that we can trust and look to for help and support, but all the while we distrust the familiar self with which we have such intimate contact. We set up divisions between portions of the self that are unnecessary.

There are many schools for spiritual advancement that teach us to “get rid of the clutter of our impulses and desires,” to show aside the self that we are in search of a greater idealized version. First of, the self that we are is ever-changing and never static. There is an inner self in the terms of those definitions, but that inner self, which is the source of our present being, speaks through our impulses. They provide in-built spiritual and biological impetuses toward our most ideal development. We must trust the self that we are , now.

t0

If we would know oneself in deepest terms, we must start with our own feelings, emotions, desires, intent and impulses. Spiritual knowledge and psychic wisdom are the natural result of a sense of self-unity.

Impulses are inherently good, both spiritually and biologically. They emerge from Framed-mind-2, from the inner self, and they are based on the great inner web-work of communication that exists among all species on our planet. Impulses also provide the natural impetus toward those patterns of behavior that serve us best, so that while certain impulses may bunch up toward physical activity, say, others, seemingly contradictory, will lead toward quiet contemplation, so that overall certain balances are maintained.

t50

Some people are only aware of — or largely aware of — impulses toward anger, because they have inhibited those natural impulses toward love that would otherwise temper what seemed to be aggressive desires. When we begin trusting ourselves, we start by taking it for granted that to some extent at least we have not trusted oneself or our impulses in the past: We have thought that impulses were dangerous, disruptive, or even evil. So as we begin to learn self-trust, we acknowledge our impulses. We try them on for size. We see where they lead us by allowing them some freedom. We do not follow urges through that would hurt others physically, or that seem in direct contradiction to our present beliefs — but we do acknowledge them. We do try to discover their source. Behind them we will almost always find an inhibited impulse — or many of them — that motivated us to move in some ideal direction, to seek a love or understanding so idealized in our mind that it seemed impossible to achieve. We are left with the impulse to strike out.

If we examine such troublesome stimuli, we will always find that they originally rose after a long process, a process in which we were afraid to take small positive steps toward some ideal. Our own impulses naturally lead us to seek creative fulfillment, the expansion of our consciousness, psychic excursions, and the conscious knowledge and manipulation of our dreams.

t24

No methods will work if we are afraid of our own impulses, or of the nature of our own being. Most of us understand that All That Is is within us, that God is within creation, within physical matter, and that “He” or “She” does not simply operate as some cosmic director on the outside of reality. We must understand that the spiritual self also exists within the physical self in the same fashion. The inner self is not remote, either — not divorced from our most intimate desires and affairs, but instead communicates through our own smallest gesture, through our smallest ideal.

This sense of division within the self forces us to think that there is a remote, spiritual, wise, intuitive inner self, and a bewildered, put-upon, spiritually ignorant, inferior physical self, which happens to be the one we identify with. Many of us believe, moreover, that the physical self’s very nature is evil, that its impulses, left alone, will run in direct opposition to the good of the physical world and society, and fly in the face of the deeper spiritual truths of inner reality. The inner self then becomes so idealized and so remote that by contrast the physical self seems only the more ignorant and flawed. In the face of such beliefs the ideal of psychic development, or astral travel, or spiritual knowledge, or even of sane living, seems so remote as to be impossible. We must, therefore, begin to celebrate our own beings, to look to our own impulses as being the natural connectors between the physical and the nonphysical self. Children trusting their impulses learn to walk, and trusting our impulses, we can find ourselves again.

t54

Consciousness predates physical forms. Consciousness predates the physical universe. Consciousness predates all of its manifestations.

The impulse to be, in any terms that we understand, is without beginning or end. What we have in our physical species are the manifestations of inner species of being, or creative groupings originated by consciousness as material patterns into which consciousness then flows. In those terms, the world came into being and the species appeared in a completely different framework of activity than is imagined, and one that cannot be scientifically established — particularly within those boundaries with which science has protected itself.

t65

The patterns for the earth and for its creatures were as real before their physical appearances, and far more real than, say, the plan for a painting that we might have in our mind. The universe always was innately objective in our terms, with its planets and creatures. The patterns for all of the species always existed without any before or after arrangement.

I am not pleased with those analogies, but sometimes they are all I can use to express issues so outside of normal channels of knowledge. It is as if, then, the earth, with all of its species, existed in complete form as a fully dimensioned cosmic underpainting, which gradually came alive all at once. Birds did not come from reptiles. They were always birds. They expressed a certain kind of consciousness that sought a certain kind of form. Physically the species appeared — all species appeared — in the same way that we might imagine all of the elements of a highly complicated dream suddenly coming alive with physical properties. Mental images — in those terms, now — existed that “in a flash of cosmic inspiration” were suddenly endowed with full physical manifestation.

t52

To that extent, the Bible’s interpretation is correct. Life was given, was free to develop according to its characteristic conditions. The planet was prepared, and endowed with life. Consciousness built the forms, so life existed within consciousness for all eternity. There was no point in which chemicals or atoms suddenly acquired life, for they always possessed consciousness, which is life’s requirement.

In the terms that we can understand, all species that we are aware of appeared more or less at once, because the mental patterns had peaked. Their vitality was strong enough to form differentiation and cooperation within the framework of matter.

t73

I understand that it appears that species have vanished, but again we must remember probabilities, and that those species simply “developed” along the patterns of probable earths. We are not just dealing with a one-line development of matter, but of an unimaginable creativity, in which all versions of our physical world exist, each one quite convinced of its physical nature. There are ramifications quite unspeakable, although in certain states of trance, or with the aid of educated dreaming, we might be able to glimpse the inner complications, the web-works of communications that connect our official earth with other probable ones. We choose our time and focus in physical reality again and again, and the mind holds an inner comprehension of many seemingly mysterious developments involving the species.

Even the cells are free enough of time and space to hold an intimate framework of being within the present, while being surrounded by this greater knowledge of what we think of a the earth’s past. In greater terms, the earth and all of its species are created in each moment. We wonder what gave life to the first egg or seed, or whatever, and think that an answer to that question would answer most others; for life, we say, was simply passed on from that point.

t66

But what give life to the egg or the seed now, keeping it going, provides that energy? Imagining some great big-bang theory (to explain the creation of the universe) gives us an immense explosion of energy, that somehow turns into life but must wear out somewhere along the line — and if that were the case, life would be getting weaker all the time, but it is not. The child is as new and fresh today as a child was 5,000 years ago, and each spring is as new.

c36

What gives life to chemicals now? That is the most proper question. All energy is not only awarized but the source of all organizations of consciousness, and all physical forms. These represent frameworks of consciousness. There was a day when the dreaming world, in our terms, suddenly awakened to full reality as far as physical materialization is concerned. The planet was visited by desire. There were ghost excursions there — mental buildings, dream civilizations which then became actualized.

t9

There is much left unsaid.

The blueprints for “ideal” development exist within the pool of genetic knowledge

The ideal blueprints provide the species with multitudinous avenues for fulfillment. Those blueprints exist mentally as ideals. They express themselves through the impetus and creativity of the species’ individual members.

op18

Our natural athletes, for example, show through their physical expertise certain ideal body conditions. They may personify great agility or strength or power: individual attributes, physical ideals which are held up to others for their appreciation, and which signify, to whatever extent, abilities inherent in the species itself.

I believe that man and woman runs the mile much quicker now than he or she did, say, thirty years ago. Has the body’s effective speed suddenly quickened? Hardly. Instead, mental beliefs about the body’s performance have changed, and increased physical speed resulted. The body can indeed run faster than the current record (of 3:39). I merely want to show effect of beliefs upon physical performance. All people do not want to be expert runners, however. Their creativity and their ideals may lie in quite different fields of endeavor, but individual performance always adds to the knowledge of the species. Good, better, best. Is it bad to be a poor runner? Of course not, unless running is your own particular avocation. And if it is , you improve with practice.

p32

Now our ideals, whatever they may be, initially emerge from our inner experience, and this applies to the species as a whole. Our ideas of society and cooperation arise from both a biological and spiritual knowledge given us at birth. Man and woman recognized the importance of groups after observing the animals’ cooperation. Our civilizations are our splendid, creative, exterior renditions of the inner social groupings of the cells of the body, and the cooperative processes of nature that give us physical life. This does not mean that the intellect is any less, but that it uses its abilities to help us form physical civilizations that are the reflections of mental, spiritual, and biological inner civilizations. We learn from nature always, and we are a part of it always.

Our searches toward understanding excellent performance in any area — our idealisms — are all spiritually and biologically ingrained. If many of the conditions we have mentioned are less than ideal in our society, then we can as an individual begin to change those situations. We do this by accepting the rightness of our own personhood. We do this by discarding ideas of unworthiness and powerlessness, no matter what their sources. We do this by beginning to observe our own impulses, by trusting our own direction. We start wherever we are, today.

p25

We do not dwell upon the unfortunate conditions in our environment, but do take steps in our own life to express our ideals in whatever way is given. Those ways are multitudinous.

Generally speaking, for example, If you are seriously worried about a physical condition, go to a doctor, because your own beliefs may over frighten you otherwise. Begin with innocuous but annoying physical conditions, however, and try to work those out for yourself. Try to discover why you are bothered. When you have a headache or a simple stomach upset, or if you have a chronic, annoying but not serious condition, such as trouble with you sinuses, of if you have hay fever — in those situations, remind yourself that your body does indeed have the capacities to heal itself.

q4

Do these exercises to discover what conditions of a mental nature, or psychological origin, are causing distress. instead of taking an aspirin for a headache, sit down, breathe quietly, and remind yourself that you are an integral part of the universe. Allow yourself to feel a sense of belonging with nature. Such an exercise can often relieve a headache in no time. But each such experience will allow us to build up a sense of trust in our own body’s processes.

Examine the literature that you read, the television programs that you watch, and tell yourself to ignore those indications given of the body’s weaknesses. Tell yourself to ignore literature or programs that speak authoritatively about the species’ “killer instincts.” Make an effort to free your intellect of such hampering beliefs. Take a chance on your own abilities. If we learn to trust our basic integrity as a person, then we will be able to assess our abilities clearly, neither exaggerating them or under assessing them.

p22

We will not feel the need, say, to “justify our existence” by exaggerating a particular gift, setting up the performance of one particular feat or art as a rigid ideal, when in fact we may be pleasantly gifted but not greatly enough endowed with a certain ability to give us the outstanding praise we think we might deserve.

On the other hand, there are many highly gifted people who continually put down their abilities, and are afraid to take one small step toward their expression. If we accept the rightness of our life in the universe, then our ideals will be those in keeping with our nature. They will be fairly easily given expression, so that they add to our own fulfillment and to the development of the society as well.

p45

Our impulses are our closest communication with our inner self, because in the waking state they are the spontaneous urgings toward action, rising from that deep inner knowledge of oneself that we have in dreams. We were born because we had the impulse to be. The universe exists because it had the impulse to be. There was no exterior cosmic Pied Piper, singing magical notes or playing a magical tune, urging the universe into being. The urge to be came from within, and that urge is repeated to some extent in each impulse, each urge toward action on the part of man and woman or molecule. If we do not trust the nature of our impulses, then we do not trust the nature of our life, the nature of the universe, or the nature of our own being.

Any animal knows better than to distrust the nature of its own life, and so does any infant. Nature exists by virtue of faith. The squirrels gather nuts in the faith that they will have provisions, in the faith that the next season will come, and that spring will follow winter. Our impulses are immersed in the quality called faith, for they urge us into action in the faith that the moment for action exists. Our beliefs must interact with our impulses, however, and often they can erode that great natural beneficial spontaneity that impulses can provide.

p41

When I speak of impulses, many of you will automatically think of impulses that appear contradictory or dangerous or “evil” — and that is because we are so convinced of the basic unworthiness of our being. We have every right to question our impulses, to choose among them, to assess them, but we must be aware of them, acknowledge their existence, for they will lead us to our own true nature. this may involve a lengthy journey for some of us, with our belief systems for many of our impulses now are the result of the pressure caused by perfectly normal unacknowledged ones in the past. But our impulses reflect the basic impulse of our life. Even if they appear contradictory at any given time, overall they will be seen to form constructive patterns toward action that point more clearly towards our own clear path for fulfillment and development.

Natural attributes show themselves quite clearly in early childhood, for example, when we are allowed greater freedom to do what we want to do. As children, some people love to work with words, some with images, some with objects. Some show great ability in dealing with their contemporaries, while others naturally lean toward solitude and private meditations. Look back toward the impulsive behavior of your childhood, toward those activities that mostly pleased you.

p14

If you painted pictures, this does not mean that you necessarily should be an artist. Only we the strength of those impulses — but if they are intense and consistent, then pursue them. If you end up simply painting as a hobby, that will still enrich your life and understanding. If your impulses lead you toward relationships with others, then do not let fears of unworthiness stand in your way. It is very important that we express our idealism actively, to whatever extent we can, for this increases our sense of worth and power.

Such action serves as a safeguard so that we do not overemphasize the gaps that may exist in oneself or in society, between the reality and the ideal condition. Many people want to change the world for the better, but that ideal seems so awe-inspiring that they think they can male no headway unless they perform some great acts of daring or heroism, or envision themselves in some political or religious place of power, or promote an uprising or rebellion. The ideal seems so remote and unreachable that, again, sometimes any means, however, reprehensible, eventually can seem justified. To change the world for the better, we must begin by changing our own life. There is no other way.

p34

We begin by accepting our own worth as a part of the universe, and by granting every other being that same recognition. We begin by honoring life in all of its forms. We begin by changing our thoughts toward life in all of its forms. We begin by changing our thoughts toward our contemporaries, our country, our family, our working companions. If the ideal of loving our neighbor like oneself seems remote, we will at least absolutely refrain from killing our neighbor — and our neighbor is any person on the face of the planet.

We cannot love our neighbor, in fact, until we love oneself, and if we believe that it is wrong to love oneself, then we are indeed unable to love anyone else.

p36

For a start we will acknowledge our existence in the framework of nature, and to do that we must recognize the vast cooperative processes that connect each species with each other one. If we truly use our prerogatives as an individual in our country, then we can exert far more power in normal daily living than we do now. Every time we affirm the rightness of our own existence, we help others. Our mental states are part of the planet’s psychic’s atmosphere.

p23

A note: Our exterior civilizations do indeed mirror and reflect the great cellular civilizations, so that we try to exteriorize that kind of order and creativity.

Many of our technological advances — all of them, for that matter — are rather interpretations of the inner mechanisms of nature: sonar, radar, and so forth, as we attempt to physically or objectively reproduce the inner realities of nature. It is sometimes almost impossible to verbally describe civilizations of scent, civilizations built upon temperature variations, alphabets of color, pressure gradations — all of these highly intimate and organized, but quite outside of verbal representation.

In our lives, anything we want is possible within the contours of our natures, if only we understand that this is so.

 

Physically death gives life

All biological organisms know that physical life depends upon a constant transformation of consciousness and form. This biological knowledge is intimately acknowledged at microscopic levels. Even our cells know that their deaths are necessary for the continuation of our physical form.

s65

The entire orientation is strange or alien only to our conscious belief systems. in one way or another, most people are aware of a desire for death before they die — a desire they usually do not consciously acknowledge. To a large measure, the sensations of pain are also the results of our beliefs, so that even diseases that are indeed accompanied, now, by great pain, need not be. Obviously, I am saying that “deadly” viruses do not “think of themselves” as killers, and more than a cat does when it devours a mouse. The mouse may die, and a cell might die as a result of the virus, but the connotations applied to such events are also the result of beliefs. In the greater sphere of spiritual and biological activity, the viruses are protecting life at their level, and in the capacity given them.

In one way or another, they are always invited in response to that greater rhythm of existence in which physical life is dependent upon constant transformation of consciousness and form.

o11

The phase of death is, then, a part of life’s cycle. I have mentioned evolutionary experiments, as we think of evolution. There is a disease that I have read about recently, where the skin turns leathery after intense itching — a fascinating development in which the human body tries to form a leathery-like skin that would, if the experiment continued, be flexible enough for, say, seat pose and normal locomotion, yet tough enough to protect itself in jungle environments from the bites of many “still more dangerous” insects and snakes. Many such experiments appear in certain stages as diseases, since the conditions are obviously not normal physical ones. To some extent, cancer also represents a kind of evolutionary experiment. But all such instances escape us because we think of so-called evolution as finished.

Some varieties of our own species were considered by the animals as diseased animal species, so I want to broaden our concepts there. In the entire natural scheme, and at all levels — even social or economic ones — disease always has its own creative basis. Abnormalities of any kind in birth always represent probable versions itself — and they are kept in the gene pool to provide a never-ending bank of alternates.

o64

There are all kinds of interrelationships. So-called Mongoloid children, for example, are reminders of man’s and woman’s purely emotional heritage, as separate from his or her intellectual achievements. They often appear more numerously in industrialized civilizations for that reason

o1

The disease I referred to is Onchocerciasis, which is caused by a filarial parasite spread by the bite of the blackfly. Beside producing the gruesome leathery skin, Onchocerciasis can cause blindness — hence its common name, river blindness. This most serious affliction appears to be centered in West Africa, and infects many millions of people there. Four centuries ago, it was carried to the Western Hemisphere by slaves, and is now found in certain areas of Mexico, south to Brazil.

Onchocerciasis doesn’t kill, and the percentage of victims who lose their sight varies according to location. Perhaps in this biological experiment, the blindness represents an evolutionary dead end, in those terms.

Very few people really act from an evil intent

Any unfortunate situations in the fields of medicine, science, or religion result not from any determined effort to sabotage the “idea,”” but instead happen because men and women often believe that any means is justified in the pursuit of the ideal.

d11

When science seems to betray us, in our society, it does so because its methods are unworthy of its intent — so unworthy and so out of line with science’s prime purpose that the methods themselves almost amount to an insidious anti-scientific attitude that goes all unrecognized. The same applies to medicine, of course, when in its worthy purpose to save life, its methods often lead to quite unworthy experimentation, so that life is destroyed for the sake of saving, say, a greater number of lives. On the surface level, such methods appear sometimes regrettable but necessary, but the deeper implications far outdo any temporary benefits, for through such methods men and women lose sight of life’s sacredness, and begin to treat it contemptuously.

We will often condone quite reprehensible acts if we think they were committed for the sake of a greater good. We have a tendency to look for outright evil, to think in terms of “the powers of good and evil,” and I am quite sure that many are convinced of evil’s force. Evil does not exist in those terms, and that is why so many seemingly idealistic people can be partners in quite reprehensible actions, while telling themselves that such acts are justified, since they are methods toward a good end.

d86

That is why fanatics feel justified in their actions. When we indulge in such black-and-white thinking, we treat our ideals shabbily. Each act that is not keeping with that ideal begins to unravel the ideal at its very core. If we feel unworthy, or powerless to act, and if we are idealistic, we may begin to feel that the ideal exists so far in the future that it is necessary to take steps we might not otherwise take to achieve it. And when this happens, the ideal is always eroded. If we want to be a true practicing idealist, then each step that we take along the way must be worthy of our goal.

In our country, the free enterprise system is immersed in strange origins. It is based upon the democratic belief in each individual’s right to pursue a worthy and equitable life. But that also became bound up, with Darwinian ideas of the survival of the fittest, and with the belief, then, that each individual must seek his or her own good at the expense of others, and by the quite erroneous conception that all of the members of a given species are in competition with each other, and that each species is in further competition with each other species.

d37

The “laws” of supply and demand are misconceptions based upon a quite uncomplimentary belief in man’s and woman’s basic greedy nature. In the past we treated the land in our country as if our species being the “fittest,” had the right to survive at the expense of all other species, and at the expense of the land itself. The ideal of the country was and is an excellent one: the right of each individual to pursue an equitable, worthy existence, with dignity. The means, however, have helped erode that ideal, and the public interpretation of Darwin’s principles was, quite unfortunately, transferred to the economic area, and to the image of man and woman as a political animal.

Religion and science alike denied other species any real consciousness. When man and woman spoke of the sacredness of life — in his or her more expansive moods — he or she she referred to human life alone. We are not in competition with other species, nor are we in any natural competition with ourselves. Nor in the natural world in any way the result of competitiveness among species. If that were the case we would have no world at all.

d87

Individually, we exist physically because of the unsurpassed cooperation that exists just biologically between our species and all others, and on deeper levels because of the cellular affiliations that exist among the cells of all species. Value fulfillment is a psychological and physical propensity that exists in each unit of consciousness, propelling it toward its own greatest fulfillment in such a way that its individual fulfillment also adds to best possible development on the part of each other such unit of consciousness. This propensity operates below and within the framework of matter. It operates above as well, but I am here concerned with the cooperative nature with which value fulfillment endows all units of consciousness within our physical world.

d14

While we believed in competition, then competition became not only a reality but an ideal. Children are taught to compete against each other. The child naturally “competes” against herself or himself in an urge to outdo old performance with new. Competition, however, has been promoted as the ideal at all levels of activity. It is as if we must look at others to see how we are doing — and when we are taught not to trust our own abilities, then of course we need the opinions of others overmuch. I am not speaking of any playful competition, obviously, but of a determined, rigorous, desperate, sometimes almost deadly competition, in which a person’s value is determined according to the number of individuals he or she has shunted aside.

d64

This is carried through in economics, politics, medicine, the sciences, and even the religions. So I would like to reinforce the fact that life is indeed a cooperative venture, and that all the steps taken toward the ideal must of themselves be life-promoting.

People often respond to the seasons in individualistic fashion, of course, using certain elements to spur them on or hold them back. No season is itself only. It exists in relationship to all the people within its boundaries.

Combine the idea of a disease with the idea of creativity

Both disease and creativity are related.

c27

Compare the analogy of the landscape of physical experience to the painter’s landscape — which may be dark, gloomy, filled with portents of disaster, and yet still be a work of art. In that regard, every person paints his or her own portrait in living color — a portrait that does not simply sit in a tranquil pose at a table, but one that has the full capacity for action. Those of us now living, say, are in the same life class. We look about to see how our contemporaries are getting along with their portraits, and we find multitudinous varieties: tragic self-portraits, heroic self-portraits, comic self-portraits. And all of these portraits are alive and interacting, and as they interact they form the planetary, mass social and political events of our world.

These portraits obviously have a biological reality. In a manner or speaking, now, each person dips into the same supplies of paint, and so forth — which are the elements out of which our likenesses emerge. There must be great creative leeway allowed for such portraits. Each one interacting with each other one helps form the psychological and physical reality of the species, so we are somehow involved in the formation of a multitudinous number of portraits. I simply want you to keep that analogy in the background.

c488

These portraits, however, are the result of creativity so inborn and miraculous that they are created automatically — an automatic art. At certain levels the species is always creatively embarked upon alternative versions of itself. The overall patterns will remain. Biological integrity is everywhere sustained. What we think of as diseases, however, are quite creative elements working at different levels, and at many levels at once.

c575

Many viruses are vital to physical existence, and in our terms there are gradations of activity, so that only under certain conditions do viruses turn into, say, what we think of as deadly ones. The healthiest body contains within it many so-called deadly viruses in what we may call an inactive form — inactive from our viewpoint, in that they are not causing disease. They are, however, helping to maintain the body’s overall balance. In a way in each body, the species settles upon a known status quo, and yet experiments creatively at many levels with cellular alterations, chromosomal variations, so that of course each body is unique. There are kinds of gradations, say, in the lines and kinds of disease. Certain diseases can actually strengthen the body from a prior weaker state, by calling upon the body’s full defenses. Under certain conditions, some so-called disease states could insure the species’ survival.

In a way, some disease states help to insure the survival of the species — not by weeding out the sickly but by introducing into large numbers of individuals the conditions needed to stabilize other strains within the species that need to be checked, or to “naturally inoculate” the species against a sensed greater danger.

c7

At the minute levels — microscopic levels — there are always some biological experiments being carried out, in a creative effort to give the species as much leeway as possible for effective action. Our body is changed biologically by our thoughts.

Our culture has its biological effect upon the species. I am not speaking of obvious connections in a derogatory manner, such as pollution and so forth. If we were thinking in old terms of evolution, then I would be saying that our cultures and civilizations actually alter the chromosomal messages. Our thoughts affect our cells, again, and they can change what are thought of as hereditary factors. Our imaginations are intimately connected with our diseases, just as our imaginations are so important in all other areas of our lives. We form our being by imaginatively considering such-and-such a possibility, and our thoughts affect our body in that regard. In a way, illness is a tool used on behalf of life, for people have given it social, economic, psychological, and religious connotations. It becomes another area of activity and of expression.

c41

At microscopic level there is no rigid self-structure like our own. There is identity. A cell does not fear its own death. Its identity has traveled back and forth from physical to nonphysical reality too often as a matter of course.

It “sings” with the quality of its own life. It cooperates with other cells. It affiliates itself with the body of which it is part, but in way it lends itself to that formation. The dreams of the species are highly important to its survival — not just because dreaming is a biological necessity, but because in dreams the species is immersed in deeper levels of creativity, so that those actions, inventions, ideas that will be needed in the future will appear in their proper times and places. In the old terms of evolution. I am saying that man’s and woman’s evolutionary progress was also dependent upon his or her dreams.

c12

Now many of the characteristics we consider human — in fact, most of them — appear to one extent or another in all other species. It was the nature of man’s and woman’s dreams, however, that was largely responsible for what we like to think of as the evolution of our species. We learned to dream differently than other creatures.

We dreamed we spoke languages before their physical invention, of course. It was the nature of our dreams, and our dreams’ creativity, that made us what we are, for otherwise we would have developed a mechanical-like language — had we developed one at all — that named designations, locations, and dealt with the most simple, objective reality: “I walked there. He walks there. The sun is hot.” We would not have had any way of conceiving of objects that did not already exist. We would not have had any way of imagining ourselves in novel situations. We would not have any overall picture of the seasons, for dreaming educated the memory and lengthened man’s and woman’s attention span. It reinforced the lessons of daily life, and was highly important in man’s and woman’s progress.

c0

Using the intellect alone, man and woman did not simply learn through daily experience over the generations, say, that one season followed the other. He or she lived too much in the moment for that. In one season he or she dreamed of the others, however, and in dreams he or she saw himself or herself spreading the seeds of fruits as he or she had seen the wind do in daily life.

His or her dreams reminded him or her that a cold season had come, and would come again. Most of our inventions cane in dreams, and again, it is the nature of our dreams that makes us so different from other species.

c37

The creativity of the species is also the result of our particular kind of dream specialization. It amounts to — a unique state of existence by itself, in which we combine the elements of physical and nonphysical reality. It is almost a threshold between the two realities, and we learned to hold our physical intent long enough at that threshold so that we have a kind of brief attention span there, and use it to draw from nonphysical reality precisely those creative elements that we need.

Animals, as a rule are less physically-oriented in their dreaming states. They do dream of physical reality, but much more briefly than us. Otherwise, they immerse themselves in dreams in different kinds of dreaming consciousness.

c46

When ancient man and woman had a series of mass dreams in which he and she learned how to speak. The dreams were like glossolalia — speaking in unintelligible speech sounds — yet the made sense, and man and woman began to speak.

c44

Also when man and and woman were with other men and women in the physical world, he and she could point to stuff to share descriptions with others, but that he or she learned to speak when he and she tried to describe dreams. It was the only way — speech — by which he or she could share data that couldn’t be seen. He or she could point to a tree and grunt, but there wasn’t anything in a dream he or she could point to. He or she had to have a method of expression to describe invisible things. Inventions could have come about when he or she tried to tell others what he or she saw in his or her dreams, too.

Every species is endowed with emotional feelings

Each species is immersed in an interior system of value fulfillment. Each species, then, is not only concerned with physical survival and the multiplication of its members, but with an intensification and fulfillment of those particular qualities that are characteristic of it.

e16

As far as this discussion is concerned, there are biological ideals, imprinted within the chromosomes, but there are also in-built ideals much more difficult to define, that exist as, say, mental blueprints for the development of other kinds of interior mental life, as opposed to the physical characteristics of plants or animals with which we are familiar. Our official views effectively close us off from the true evidence we might perceive of the cooperation that exists among the species, for example. Nor an I speaking of an enforced cooperation — the result of “instinct” that somehow arranges the social habits of the animals; for their habits are indeed social and cooperative.

I have read that orthodox science still does not grant man or woman with volition. According to its tenets, any such feeling of conscious choice is instead the reflection of the brain’s attitude at any given time. Yet I am saying that man has free will within the framework of his existence, and that all other species do also within the framework of his or her existence, and that all other species do also within the framework of their existences.

e27

The chicken cannot read a book. It cannot choose to read. The plant cannot choose to walk down the street. The chicken and the plant can choose to live or die, however — rather important issues in the existence of any entity. They can choose to like or dislike their environment, and to change it according to their individual circumstances. It is fashionable to say that some scientific laws can be proven at microscopic levels, where, for example, small particles can be accelerated far beyond their usual states. But we quite studiously ignore that feeling exists on microscopic levels, that there can be psychological particles, much less come to the conclusion that all particles are psychological particles, with their own impetuses for development and value fulfillment. That is why atoms join together to form matter. They seek the fulfillment of themselves through form. They cooperatively choose the forms that they take.

If the simplest particle is so endowed with impetus, with hidden ideals that seek fulfillment, then what about the human being? We have the propensity to search for meaning, for love, for cooperative ventures. We have the propensity to form dazzling mental and psychological creations, such as our arts and sciences and religions and civilizations. Whatever errors that we have made, or gross distortions, even those exist because of our need to find meaning in our private existences and in life itself.

e15

Any scientist who believes that life has no meaning has simply provided himself with what he thinks of as an unfailing support against life’s vicissitudes. If he or she says: “life has no meaning, “he or she cannot be disappointed if such is the case, for he or she is ensconced in a self-created cocoon that has meaning, because it provides a cushion against his or her deepest fears.

When a civilization does not support creativity it beings to falter. When it distrust its gifted people, rather than encouraging them, a nation is at least in trouble. Our psychologies, stressing “the norm,” made people frightened of their individual characteristics and abilities, because psychology’s norm did not fit the contours of any one human being. It did not touch the heights of the depths of human experience. People became afraid of their own individuality.

e24

Gifted children do not fit psychology’s picture. Gifted children do not fit the portrait of children that is sold to parents. The fact is that for many reasons gifted children merely show the latent quickness, mental agility, and curiosity and learning capacity, that is inherent in the species. They are not eccentric versions of humanity at all, but instead provide a hint of mankind’s and womankind’s true capacities.

Our brains are not empty, but well-oiled machines ready to whirl into activity at our births. They are provided with a propensity to learn — and the rudiments of knowledge as we understand it exist within the brain. In those terms, now, the brain thinks before birth. It does not simply react. Each individual has its own unique abilities. Some that involve relationships with others, we do not even have words for. Parents, however, often half-disapprove of their children if they show unusual gifts. They are afraid their children will not get along with others. They are upset because the children do not fit the norm — but no child ever fits “the norm.”

e9

Many adults, sensing their own abilities in one field or another, deliberately play down those abilities because they are afraid of standing out from “the masses” — or they are afraid they will be attacked by their peers. They have been taught by religion and science alike that any kind of greatness is suspect. Yet each person alive contains an elements of greatness; and more, a desire to fulfill those inner abilities.

I am not speaking of greatness in terms of fame, or in terms of usually understood artistic or intellectual abilities alone, but also of people whose lives have the capacity for great emotional content. I am speaking also of others natural abilities — that of dread communication, the conscious utilization of dreams and creativity in daily life. There are dimensions of human sentiment and psychological experience, that remain latent simply because we focus our attention so closely within the idea of “the norm.” Ay unofficial experience must then remain bizarre, eccentric, outside of our main concerns, and ignored by our sciences.

e41

Many children, for that matter, who are regarded as retarded by their teachers, are instead highly gifted. The same also applies to disruptive children, who are overactive and out on drugs. Their rebellion is quite natural. Autistic children, in many cases, now, are those who have picked up the idea that the world is so unsafe that it is better not to communicate with it at all, as long as their demands or needs are being met. When the child is fed and clothed and cared for, then it continues its behavior, and the behavior itself does serve its needs.

The child feels that it is not safe to interact with the world, however. No one is going to deprive a child of food, and yet food can be used in such cases, in terms perhaps of treats, if the child must ask for them, or in some way indicate a choice. Autistic children are afraid of making choices. Some of this is often picked up from parents, so that the child expresses their own unacknowledged fears. The autistic child can be highly intelligent, however.

e68

To some extent, such child symbolizes what happens when an individual believes that he or she is unworthy, that he or she cannot trust impulses, that choices present more problems than advantages. That it is safer to hide abilities than it is to use them. Life is expression.

When a sperm carrying cancer enters a woman’s uterus, and if she has no intentions of getting the disease, her body’s own system would make the cancer completely ineffective.

e85

I will explain as best I can, though some of what I say will certainly seem contradictory to scientific knowledge.

Though scientists might find “cancer cells,” and though it might seem that cancer is caused by a virus, cancer instead involves a relationship, say, between what we might think of as a host and parasite, in those terms — and to some extent the same applies to any disease, including smallpox, though the diseases themselves may appear to have different causes completely. A host cell, say, is not simply attacked. It invites attack, though I am not pleased at all with the connotations of the word “attack.” I am trying to use words familiar to us to start.

e66

It is not simply that a cell suddenly “relaxes its defenses” against disease. As easily as I an, I will try to explain. A cell mirrors a psychological state. A cell exists by itself, as its own entity, but also in context with all of the other cells in the body. There are literally uncountable psychological states mixing and interchanging constantly, with the overall psychological stance being one of biological integrity: The organism holds together, maintains its functions, and so forth.

Our body is the physical mirror of our psychological state. It is powered by the energy of the universe. It actually springs into being in each moment. Our mind and our body come from the same source, from universal energy. We are powered with vitality. We must seek meaning in our lives. When we lose the sense of life’s meaning, for whatever reason, this is reflected in our body. It is very difficult to separate all of this from many connotations placed about disease, and I do not want the material to be misread. Cancer, for example, has become the symbol for the body’s vulnerability, in current years — the proof of man’s and woman’s susceptibility to the body. It is a disease that people have when they want to die — when they are ashamed to admit that they want to die, because death seems to fly against sane behavior. If the species struggles to survive, then how can individuals want to die?

e53

Many people have had cancer and recovered without knowing it. In our belief system, however, it is almost imperative to see a doctor in such circumstances, for many fears are unsubstantiated, and the fear alone, found groundless, gives the person new life symbolically and physically.

In the case of my example, a woman’s cells would already have had to prepare themselves for the guest — granted the guest was cancerous, and was a sperm. There is not an attack. There is an acceptance, and a preparation for certain changes.

e26

A life crisis is formed. The “parasite,” or virus, plays its part in setting up such a psychologically-desired position. It is an emotionally-charged position, an imminent crisis. I am aware of the tormenting questions involved in such issues, and also of the gap between my explanations and daily experiences of many people. The fact is that when death comes it is wanted; it has been chosen.

The fact is that death in its way is the culmination of life, leading toward a new birth and new experience. The cells know this. So does the heart. People cannot admit that they want to die at certain times. If they could accept the fact of their own wishes, some could even change their minds, many do: The psychological condition changes for the better, and the body cells are no longer amiable to the cancerous condition.

v16

Women whose husband have had vasectomies have themselves often resolved sexual problems that have bothered them. Fear is reduced in that area. Cervical cancer can involve, distortions of the growth process itself, because of the complicated distortions of belief on the woman’s part. In a way the very pain of cancer — of some cancers — often acts through its intensity as a reflection of the person’s belief that life is painful, tormenting. At the same time, the pain is a reminder of feeling and sensation.

 

Natural Law

When I speak of natural law, I am not referring to the scientists’ laws of nature, such as the law of gravity, for example — which is not a law at all, but a manifestation appearing from the viewpoint of a certain level of consciousness as a result of perceptive apparatus. Our “prejudiced perception” is also built into our instruments in that regard.

s17

I am speaking of the inner laws of nature, that pervade existence. What we call nature refers of course to our particular experience with reality, but quite different kinds of manifestations are also “natural” outside of that context. The laws of nature that I am in the process of explaining underlie all realities, then, and form a firm basis for multitudinous kinds of “natures.” I will put these in terms of reference, however.

Each being experiences life as if it were at life’s center. This applies to a spider in a closet as well as to any man or woman. This principle applies to each atom as well. Each manifestation of consciousness comes into being feeling secure at life’s center — experiencing life through itself, aware of life through its own nature. It comes into being with an inner impetus toward value fulfillment. It is equipped with a feeling of safety, of security within its own environment with which it is fit to deal. It given the impetus toward growth and action, and filled with the desire to impress its world.

s3345

The term “value fulfillment” is very difficult to explain but it is very important. Obviously it deals with the development of values — not moral values, however, but values for which we really have no adequate words. Quite simply, these values have to do with increasing the quality of whatever life the being feels at its center. The quality of that life is not simply to be handed down or experienced, for example, but is to be creatively added to, multiplied, in a way that has nothing to do with quantity.

In those terms, animals have values, and if the quality of life of their lives disintegrates beyond a certain point, the species dwindles. We are not speaking of survival of the fittest, but the survival of life with meaning. Life is meaning for animals. The two are indistinguishable.

s8

We say little, for example, if we note that spiders make webs instinctively because spiders must eat insects, and that the best web-maker will be the fittest kind of spider to survive. It is very difficult for me to escape the sticky web of our beliefs. The web, however, in its way represents an actualized ideal on the spider’s part — and if you will forgive the term, an artistic one as well. It amazes the spiders that flies so kindly fall into those webs. We might say that the spider wonders that art can be so practical.

What about the poor unsuspecting fly? Is it then so enamored of the spider’s web that it loses all sense of caution? For surely lies are the victims of such nefarious webby splendors. We are into sticky stuff indeed.

s38

For one thing, we are dealing with different kinds of consciousness that our own. They are focused consciousnesses, surely, each one feeling itself at life’s center. While this is the case, however, these other forms of consciousness also identify then with the source of nature from which they emerge. In a way impossible to explain, the fly and the spider are connected, and aware of the connection. Not as hunter and prey, but as individual participants in deeper processes. Together they work toward a joint kind of value fulfillment, in which both are fulfilled.

There are communions of consciousness of which we are unaware. While we believe in theories like the survival of the fittest, however, and the grand fantasies of evolution, then we put together our perceptions of the world so that they seem to bear out those theories. We will see no value in the life of a mouse sacrificed in the laboratory, for example, and we will project claw-and-fang battles in nature, completely missing the great cooperative venture that is involved.

s53

Men and women can become deranged if they believe life has no meaning. Religion has made gross errors. At least it held out an afterlife, a hope of salvation, and preserved — sometimes despite itself — the tradition of the heroic soul. Science, including psychology, by what it has said, and by what it has neglected to say, has come close to a declaration that life itself is meaningless. This is a direct contradiction of deep biological knowledge, to say nothing of spiritual truth. It denies the meaning of biological integrity. It denies man and woman the practical use of those very elements that he or she needs as a biological creature: the feeling that he or she is at life’s center, that he/she can act safely in his or her environment, that he or she can trust himself or herself, and that his or her being and his/her actions have meaning.

Impulses provide life’s guide to action. If we are taught that we cannot trust our impulses, then we are set against our very physical integrity. If we believe that our life has no meaning, then we will do anything to provide meaning, all the while acting like a mouse in one of science’s mazes — for our prime directive, so to speak, has been tampered with.

s78

I am trying to temper my statements here, but our psychology of the past 100 years has helped create insanities by trying to reduce the great individual thrust of life that lie within each person, to a generalized mass chaotic impulses and chemicals — a mixture, of Freudian and Darwinian thought misapplied.

The most private agonies of the soul were assigned a more or less common source in man’s and woman’s primitive “unconscious” drives. The private unequalled thrust toward creativity were seen as the unbalanced conglomeration of chemicals within a person’s most private being — a twist of perversity. Genius was seen as a mistake of chromosomes, or the fortunate result of a man’ or woman’s hatred for his or her father. The meaning of life was reduced to the accidental nature of genes. Science thought in terms of averages and statics, and each person was supposed to fit within those realms.

s91

To some extent, this also applies to religion in the same time period. Churches wanted sinners galore, but shied away from saints, or any extravagant behavior that did not speak of man’s and woman’s duplicity. Suddenly people with paranoid characteristics, as well as schizophrenics, emerged from the wallpaper of this slickly styled civilization. The characteristics of each were duly noted. A person who feels that life has no meaning, and that his or her life in particular has no meaning, would rather be pursued than ignored. Even the weight of guilt is better than no feeling at all. If the paranoid might feel that he or she is pursued, by the government or “ungodly powers,” then at least he or she feels that his or her life must be important: otherwise, why would others seek to destroy it? If voices tell him or her he or she is to be destroyed, then these at least are comforting voices, for they convince him or her that his or her life must have value.

At the same time, the paranoid person can use his or her creative abilities in fantasies that seemingly boggle the minds of the sane — and those creative abilities have a meaning, for the fantasies, again, serve to reassure the paranoid of his or her worth. If in our terms he or she were sane, he or she could not use his or her creative abilities, for they are always connected with life’s meaning; and sane, the paranoid is convinced that life is meaningless. It did little good in the past for Freudian psychologists to listen to a person’s associations while maintaining an objective air, or pretending that values did not exist. Often the person labeled schizophrenic is so frightened of his or her own energy, impulses, and feelings that these are fragmented, objectified, and seen to come from outside rather than from within.

s2wd

Ideas of good and evil are exaggerated, cut off from each other. Yet here again the creative abilities are allowed some expression. The person does not feel able to express them otherwise. Such people are afraid of the brunt of their own personalities. They have been taught that energy is wrong, that power is disastrous, and that the impulses of the self are to be feared.

What protection, then, but to effectively project these outside of the self — impulses of good as well as evil — and hence effectively block organized action?

s657h

The term schizophrenia, with the authority of psychology, becomes a mass coverall in which the integrity of personal meaning is given a mass, generalized explanation. Those who are paranoid are, unfortunately, those who most firmly believe the worst idiocies of science and religion. The paranoid and the schizophrenic are trying to find meaning in a world they have been taught is meaningless, and their tendencies appear in lesser form throughout society.

Creativity is an in-built impetus in man and woman, far more important than, say, what science calls the satisfaction of basic needs. In those terms, creativity is the most basic need of all. I am not speaking here of any obsessive need to find order — in which case, for example, a person might narrow his or her mental and physical environment — but of a powerful driver within the species for creativity, and for the fulfillment of values that are emotional and spiritual. And if man or woman does not find these, then the so-called basic drives toward food or shelter will not sustain him or her.

s55

I am not simply saying that man or woman does not live for bread alone. I am saying that if man or woman does not find meaning in life he or she will not live, bread or no. He or she will not have the energy to seek bread, nor trust his or her impulse to do so.

s76

There are natural laws, then, that guide all kinds of life, and all realities — laws of love and cooperation — and those are the basic needs of which I am speaking.

We are each innocent until a crime is proven against us.

The law in our country says we are innocent until proven guilty. In the eyes of that law, then we are each innocent until a crime is proven against us. There usually must also be witnesses. There are other considerations. Often a spouse cannot testify against the other. Opportunity and motive must be established.

v58

In the world of religion, however, we are already tainted by original sin: “The mark of Cain” is symbolically upon our foreheads. We come from a species that sinned against God. Automatically condemned, we must do good works, or be baptized, or believe in Christ, or perform other acts in order to be saved or redeemed.

According to other religions, we may be “earthbound” by the “gross desires” of our nature, “bound to the wheel of life,” condemned to endless reincarnations until we are “purified.” According to psychology and science, we are a living conglomeration of elements and chemicals, spawned by a universe without purpose, itself accidentally formed, and we are given a life in which all the “primitive and animalistic” drives of our evolutionary past ever lurk within us, awaiting expression and undermining our control.

v12

So, dear reader, look at the law as it stands in this country with somewhat more kindly eyes that we have before — for it at least legally establishes a belief in our innocence, and for all of its failings, it protects us from the far more fanatical aspects, say, or any religion’s laws.

Religious laws deal with sin, whether or not a crime is committed, and religious concepts usually take it for granted that the individual is guilty until proven innocent. And if we have not committed a crime in fact, then we have at least sinned in our heart — for which, or course, we must be punished. A sin can be anything from playing cards to having a sexual fantasy or to Watch as much mobile XXX as you can stomach. We are sinful creatures. How many of us believe that?

v10

We were born with an in-built recognition of our own goodness. We were born with an inner recognition of our rightness in the universe. We were born with a desire to fulfill our abilities, to move and act in the world. Those assumptions are the basis of what I will call natural law.

We are born loving. We are born compassionate. We are born curious about oneself and our world. Those attributes also belong to natural law. We are born knowing that we possess a unique, intimate sense of being that is itself, and that seeks its own fulfillment, and the fulfillment of others. We are born seeking the actualization of the ideal. We are born seeking to add value to the quality of life, to add characteristics, energies, abilities to life that only we can individually contribute to the world, and to attain a state of being that is uniquely ours, while adding to the value fulfillment of the world.

v11

All of these qualities and attributes are given us by natural law. We are a cooperative species, and we are a loving one. Our misunderstandings, our crimes, and our atrocities, real as they are, are seldom committed out of any intent to be evil, but because of severe misinterpretations about the nature of good, and means that can be taken toward its actualization. Most individual people know that in some inner portion of themselves. Our societies, governments, educational systems are all built around a firm belief in the unreliability of human nature. ” We cannot change human nature.” Such a statement takes it for granted that man’s and woman’s nature is to be greedy, a predator, a murderer at heart. We act in accordance with our own beliefs. We become the selves that we think we are. Our individual beliefs become the beliefs of our society, but that is always a give-and-take.

I want to discuss the formation of a better kind of mass reality — a reality that can happen as more and more individuals begin to come in contact with the true nature of the self. Then we will have less frightened people, and fewer fanatics, and each person involved can to some extent begin to see the “ideal” come into practical actualization. The means never justify the ends.

v15

The Therapy of Value Fulfillment:
The therapy of value fulfillment will attempt to put individuals in touch with their basic instincts, to allow them to sense the impulsive shapes of their lives, to define their own versions of the ideal through the recognition of it as it exists in their own impulses and feelings and abilities, and to help them find acceptable and practical methods of exerting their natural power in the practical actualization of those ideals.

Why do we have laws, crime and sin?

Why do we have laws? Are laws made to protect life, to protect property, to establish order, to punish transgressors? Are laws made to protect man from his own cunning and chicanery? In short, are laws made to protect man/woman from his/her own “basically criminal nature”? In today’s society, we use lawyers like personal-injury-lawyers to handle cases and uphold the law for us all.

la16

When someone breaks those laws, we move towards litigation attorneys handling business litigation, or other legal areas. This is the status quo we have made, and that we are used to.

Moreover, put simply, criminal lawyers are responsible for either prosecuting or defending someone accused of a criminal offense. They are required to act in a neutral, impartial manner to ensure that the legal rights of those prosecuted are upheld so that they receive fair treatment against the conduct of the law. If you would like more information about the responsibilities of criminal-lawyers is home to some brilliant law firms and you can find plenty of useful resources on their websites.

So, that being said, are laws made to protect man and woman from the self as it is generally outlined by Freud and Darwin? Man and woman had laws, however, far earlier. Are laws made then to protect man and woman from his and her “sinful nature”? If we were all “perfect beings,” would we need laws at all? Do laws define what is unacceptable, or do they hint of some perhaps undifferentiated, barely sensed, more positive issues? Are laws an attempt to limit impulses? Do they represent society’s mass definitions of what behavior is acceptable and what is not?

What is the difference between a crime and a sin, as most of us think of those terms? Can the state punish us for a sin? It certainly can punish us for a crime. Is the law a reflection of something else– a reflection of man’s and woman’s inherent search toward the ideal, and its actualization? When does the law act as a practical idealist? Why do we sneer so when politicians show their feet of clay?

la69

How does this concern us as an individual? We will start with the individual.

Each individual is innately driven by a good intent, however distorted that intent may become, or however twisted the means that may be taken to achieve it.

la62

As the body wants to grow from childhood on, so all of the personality’s abilities want to grow and evolve. Each person has his or her own ideals, and impulses direct those ideals naturally into their own specific avenues of development — avenues meant to fulfill both the individual and his society. Impulses provide specifications, methods, meanings, definitions. They point toward definite avenues of expression, avenues that will provide the individual with a sense of actualization, natural power, and that will automatically provide feedback, so that the person knows he or she is impressing his or her environment for the better.

la7

Those natural impulses, followed, will automatically lead to political and social organizations that become both tools for individual development and implements for the fulfillment of the society. Impulses then would follow easily, in a smooth motion, from private action to social import. When we are taught to block our impulses, and to distrust them, then our organizations become clogged. We are left with vague idealized feelings of wanting to change the world for the better, for example — but we are denied the personal power of our own impulses that would otherwise help direct that idealism by developing our personal abilities. We are left with an undefined, persisting, even tormenting desire to do good, to change events, but without having any means at our disposal to do so. This leads to lingering frustration, and if our ideals are strong the situation can cause us to feel quite desperate.

la53

We may begin to exaggerate the gulf between this generalized ideal and the specific evidences of man’s and woman’s “greed and corruption” that we see so obviously about us. We may begin to concentrate upon our own lacks, and in our growing sense of dissatisfaction it may seem to us that most men and women are driven by a complete lack of good intent.

We may become outraged, scandalized — or worse, filled with self-righteousness, so that we being to attack all those with whom we do not agree, because we do not know how else to respond to our own ideals, or to our own good intent.

la68

The job of trying to make the world better seems impossible, for it appears that we have no power, and any small private beneficial actions that we can take seem so puny in contrast to this generalized ideal that we dismiss them sardonically, and so we do not try to use power constructively. We do not begin with our own life, with our own job, or with our own associates. What difference can it make to the world if we are a better salesperson, or plumber, or office worker, or car salesman or saleswoman, for Christ’s sake? What can one person do?

Yet that is precisely where first of all we must begin to exert ourselves. There, on our jobs and in our associations, are the places where we intersect with the world. Our impulses directly affect the world in those relationships.

la559

Many of us are convinced that we are not important — and while each of us feels that way it will seem that our actions have no effect upon the world. We will purposefully keep our ideals generalized, thus saving oneself from the necessity of acting upon them in the one way open to us: by trusting oneself and our impulses, and impressing those that we meet in daily life with the full validity that is our own.

Most criminals act out of a sense of despair. Many have high ideals, but ideals that have never been trusted or acted upon. They feel powerless, so that many strike out in self-righteous anger or vengeance against a world that they see as cynical, greedy, perverted. They have concentrated upon the great gaps that seem to exist between their ideals of what man or woman should be, and their ideas of what man or woman is.

la2

On the one hand, they believe that the self is evil, and on the other they are convinced that the self should not be so. They react extravagantly. They often see society as the “enemy” of good. Many — not all, now — criminals possess the same characteristics we ascribe to heroes, except that the heroes have a means toward the expression of idealism, and specific avenues for that expression. And many criminals find such avenues cut off completely.

I do not want to romanticize criminals, or justify their actions. I do want to point out that few crimes are committed for “evil’s sake,” but in a distorted response to the failure of the actualization of a sensed ideal.

la56

So we return to what is the nature of the ideal and the good. Who defines what is right and wrong, legal and illegal?

la58

“The God of me”. No one else is watching what I watch from my personal viewpoint any moment of my day. I feel as if I am being privileged to view a beginning of the world… or of my edge of it.

It is like seeing a new corner of our own psyche, transformed into trees, grass, flowers, sky and fog … I feel as if I am viewing that part of myself that I am always pursuing, the part is as clear-eyed as a child, fleet, at one with its own knowing. That part of us exists apart from our concerns about careers or business (if you are a startup lending-expert a-guide-to-personal-guarantees-on-business-loans most business lenders will want , money, fame, the opinion of family, friends, or the world. It’s our direct connection with the universe, from which we emerge in each moment of our lives.

So, in that moment, I named that part of me the God of Me, and that designation makes senses to me, at least. In those terms, we each have our personal ‘God,’ and I am convinced that the universe knows us no matter who or where — or what — we are. I think there is a God of every individual being, and the each consciousness, regardless of its status, possess this intimate connection with the universe.

True psychology

We have been taught to believe that impulses are wrong generally speaking, or at best that they represent messages from a nefarious subconscious, giving voice to dark moods and desires.

n49

For example: Many of us believe in the basis of Freudian psychology — that the son naturally wants to displace the father in his mother’s attentions, and that beneath the son’s love for his father, there rages the murderous intent to kill. Ridiculous idiocy!

The self, so spectacularly alive, seemed equipped with reason to understand the great import of its own certain extinction. Such a tragedy to project upon the living personality.

op41

We cannot begin to have a true psychology, again, unless we see the living self in a greater context, with greater motives, purposes and meanings that we now assign to it, of for that matter than we assign to nature and its creatures. We have denied many impulses, or programmed others so that they are allowed expression in only certain forms of action. I any of us do still believe in the Freudian or Darwinian selves, then we will be leery about impulses to examine our own consciousness, afraid of what murderous debris might be uncovered. I am not speaking merely in hypothetical terms. For example, a well-intentioned woman: She worries about her overweight condition, and depressed at what she thinks of as her lack of discipline in following diets. In her dismay, she visits a psychologist, who tells her that her marriage might somehow be part of the problem. The woman never went back. It’s hard to say why though. The psychologist that she visited was bound to have had many years of training, after finding inspiration from somewhere like a up-skilled, counsellors-psychologists-working-in-community-services, to build a successful career in helping people who may be in the same situation as this woman. Did she think that the psychologist was wrong? No. She was afraid that she might discover within herself the buried impulse to kill her husband, or to break up the marriage, but she was sure that her overweight condition hid some unfortunate impulse.

Actually the woman’s condition hid her primary impulse: to communicate better with her husband, to ask him for definite expression of love. Why does he not love her as much as she loved him? She could say it was because she was overweight, after all, for he was always remarking adversely about her fleshy opulence — though he did not use such a sympathetic phrase.

OP1

He could not express his love for her in the terms she wished for be believed that women would, if allowed to, destroy the man’s freedom, and he interpreted the natural need for love as an unfortunate emotional demand. Both of them believed that women were inferior, and quite unknowingly they followed a Freudian dogma.

The ideas we have been speaking of, then, are intimately connected with our lives. The man just mentioned denies his personal impulses often. Sometimes he is not even aware of them as far as they involve the expression of affection or love to his wife.

op9

In those areas where we cut down on our impulses, upon their very recognition, we close down probabilities, and prevent new beneficial acts that of themselves would lead us out of our difficulty. We prevent change. But many people fear that any change is detrimental, since they have been taught, after all, that left alone their bodies or their minds of their relationships are bound to deteriorate. Often, therefore, people react to events as if they themselves possessed no impetus to alter them. They live their lives as if they are indeed limited in experience not only to a brief lifetime, but a lifetime in which they are the victims of their chemistry — accidental members of a blighted species that is murderous to it very core.

Another example: A woman found a small sore spot on her breast. Remembering well the barrage of negative suggestions that passes for preventative medicine — the public service announcements about cancer — she was filled with foreboding. She went to the doctor, who told her he did not believe there was anything wrong. He suggested X-rays, however, “just to be on the safe side,” and so he body was treated to a basically unnecessary dose of radiation in the name of preventative medicine.

ar5

I am not suggesting that we do not visit doctors under such situations, because the weight of our negative beliefs about our bodies usually makes it too difficult for us to bear such uncertainties alone. Nevertheless, such actions speak only too loudly of our mass beliefs involving the vulnerability of the self and its flesh.

To me, it it almost inconceivable that, from our position, any of us seriously consider that the existence of our exquisite consciousness can possibly be the result of a conglomeration of chemicals and elements thrown together by a universe accidentally formed, and soon to vanish. So much more evidence is available to us: the order of nature; the creative drama of our dreams, that project our consciousness into other times and places; the very precision with which we spontaneously grow, without knowing how, from fetus into an adult; the existence of heroic themes and quests and ideas that pervade the life of even the worst scoundrel — these all give evidence of the greater context in which we have our being.

d855

If the universe existed as we have been told it does, then there would be no psychological avenues to connect worlds. There would be no extensions of the self that would allow us to travel such a psychological distance to those thresholds of reality that forms our mental environment. If the universe were structured as we have been told, the probability of the mass world would not be formed as the result of individual impulses. They meet and merge, and form platforms for action.

We live surrounded by impulses. We must make innumerable decisions in our lives — most choose careers, mates, cities of residence. Experience can help us make decisions, but we make decision long before we have years of experience behind us.

fe5

Overall, whether or not we are conscious of it — for some of us are, and some of us are not — our lives do have a certain psychological shape. That shape is formed by our decisions. We make decisions as the result of feeling impulses to do this or that, to perform in one manner or another, in response to both private considerations and in regard to demands seemingly placed upon us by others. In the vast arena of those numberless probabilities open to us, we do of course have some guidelines. Otherwise we would always be in a state of indecision. Our personal impulses provide those guidelines by showing us how best to use probabilities so that we fulfill our own potential to greatest advantage — and in so doing, provide constructive help to the society at large.

When we are taught not to trust our impulses we begin to lose our powers of decision, and to whatever extent involved in the circumstances, we begin to lose our sense of power because we are afraid to act.

co22

Many people are in a quandary of indecision. Some might lament, for example: “I do not know what to do, or what direction to follow. I think that I could make music my career. I am musically gifted. On the other hand, I feel a leaning toward psychology. I have not attended music lately. However, music is usually one of those skills that a person never forgets. If they’re talented enough, they will be able to make a career out of it. It’s a lot easier to make it professional as a music artist these days, especially with the help of music streaming sites, such as Spotify. Aspiring musicians only have to purchase some spotify-plays to get themselves started, and then they should be able to kick off their career. If an individual believes they’re talented enough to make music a career, they should follow that dream. However, if there’s something that an individual might be better at, it could be worth looking into that. For example, sometimes I think I could be a teacher. In the meantime I Am meditating and hoping that the answer will come.” Such a person is afraid to trust anyone impulse enough to act upon it. All remain equally probable activities. Meditation must be followed by action — and true meditation is action. Such people are afraid of making decisions because they are afraid of their own impulses — and some of them can use meditation to dull their impulses, and actually prevent constructive action. As long as you pick something that resonates with you, you should do well on your path. Don’t forget to tap into the resources made available for you, from crafting a resume using https://www.arcresumes.com/, to taking on volunteer work to feed your soul and find a new pathway. The universe will help guide you along the way.

Impulses arise in a natural, spontaneous, constructive response to the abilities, potentials, and needs of the personality. They are meant as directing forces. Luckily, the child usually walks before it is old enough to be taught that impulses are wrong, and luckily the child’s natural impulses toward exploration, growth, fulfillment, action and power are strong enough to give it the necessary springboard before our belief systems begin to erode its confidence. We have physical adult bodies. The pattern for each adult body existed in the fetus — which again, “luckily,” impulsively, followed its own direction.

a31

No one told it that it was impossible to grow from a tiny cell — change that to a tiny organism instead of a cell — to a complicated adult structure. What tiny, spindly, threadlike, weak legs we all once had in our mother’s wombs! Those tiny, spindly legs now climb mountains, stride gigantic boulevards, because they followed their own impulsive shapes. Even the atoms and molecules within them sought out their own most favorable probabilities. And in terms that we do not understand, even those atoms and molecules made their own decisions as the result of recognizing and following those impulsive sparks toward action that are inherent in all consciousness, whatever their statues in our terms.

Consciousness attempts to grow toward its own ideal development, which also promotes the ideal development of all organizations in which it takes part.

op6

We are back, then, to the matter of the ideal and its actualization. When and how do our impulses affect the world? Again, what is the ideal, the good impulse, and why does it seem that our experience is so far from that ideal that it appears to be evil?

Impulses provide impetus toward motion

Impulses coax the physical body and the mental person toward utilization of physical and mental power.

im68

They help the individual impress the world — that is, to act upon it and within it effectively. Impulses also open up choices that may not have been consciously available before. The cells precognate, and that at that level the body is aware of vast information, information not consciously known or apprehended. The universe and everything within it is composed of “information,” but this information is aware-ized containing” — information concerning the entire universe is always latent within each and any part of it.

The motive power of the universe and of each particle or wave or person within it it the magnificent thrust toward creative probabilities, and the tension that exists, the exuberant tension, that exists “between” probable choices and probable events. This applies to men/women and molecules, and to all of those hypothetically theorized smaller divisions with which scientists like to amaze themselves. Divisions or units.

im63

In more mundane terms, impulses often come from unconscious knowledge, then. This knowledge is spontaneously and automatically received by the energy that composes our body, and then it is processed so that pertinent information applying to us can be taken advantage of. Ideally, our impulses are always in response to our own best interests — and, to the best interests of our world as well. Obviously there is a deep damaging distrust of impulses in the contemporary world, as in our terms there has been throughout the history that we follow. Impulses are spontaneous, and we have been taught not to trust the spontaneous portions of our being, but to rely upon our reason and our intellect — which both operate, incidentally, quite spontaneously, by the way.

When we let ourselves alone, we are spontaneously reasonable, but because of our beliefs it seems that reason and spontaneity make poor bedfellows.

im26

Psychologically, our impulses are as vital to our being as our physical organs are. They are as altruistic, or unselfish, as our physical organs are. And yet each impulse is suited and tailored directly to the individual who feels it. Ideally, by following our impulses we would feel the shape, the impulsive shape of our life. We would not spend time wondering what one’s purpose was, for it would make itself known to us, as we perceived the direction in which our natural impulses led, and felt oneself exert power in the world through such actions. Impulses are doorways to action, satisfaction, the exertion of natural mental and physical power, the avenue for our private expression — the avenue where our private expression interests the physical world and impresses it.

Many cults of one kind or another, and many fanatics, seek to divide us from our natural impulses, to impede their expression. They seek to sabotage our belief in our spontaneous being, so that the great power of impetus becomes damned up. Avenues of probabilities are closed bit by bit until we do indeed live — if we follow such precepts — in a closed mental environment, in which it seems we are powerless. It seems we cannot impress the world as we wish, that our ideals must always be stillborn.

im64

In the case of the Jonestown tragedy, for example, all doors toward probable effective action seemed closed. Followers had been taught to act against their natural impulses with members of their families. They had been taught not to trust the outside world, and little by little the gap between misguided idealism and an exaggerated version of the world’s evil blocked all doors through which power could be exerted — all doors save one. The desire for suicide is often the last recourse left to frightened people whose natural impulses toward action have been dammed up — intensified on the one hand, and yet denied any practical expression.

There is a natural impulse to die on the part of men/women and animals, but in such circumstances [as we are discussing here] that desire becomes the only impulse that the individual feels able to express, for it seems that all other avenues of expression have become closed. There is much misunderstanding concerning the nature of impulses, so we will discuss them rather thoroughly. I always want to emphasize the importance of individual action, for only the individual can help form organizations that become physical vehicles for the effective expression of ideals. Only people who trust their spontaneous beings and the altruistic nature of their impulses can be consciously wise enough to choose from a myriad of probable futures that most promising events — for again, impulses take not only [people’s] best interest into consideration, but those of all other species.

im58

I am using the term “impulses” for the understanding of the general public, and in those terms molecules and protons have impulses. No consciousness simply reacts to stimuli, but has its own impulse toward growth and value fulfillment. It seems to many of us that impulses are unpredictable, contradictory, without reason, the result of erratic mixtures of body chemicals and that they must be squashed with as much deadly intent as some of us might when we spray a mosquito with insecticide.

Often the insecticide kills more than the mosquito, and its effects can be far-reaching, and possibly have disastrous consequences. However, to consider impulses as chaotic, meaningless — or worse, detrimental to an ordered life — represents a very dangerous attitude indeed; an attempt that causes many of our other problems, an attempt that does often distort the nature of impulses. Each person is fired by the desire to act, and to act beneficially, altruistically, to practically put his stamp, or her stamp,upon the world. When such natural impulses toward action are constantly denied over a period of time, when they are distrusted, when an individual feels in battle with his or her own impulses and shuts down the doors toward probable actions, then that intensity can explode into whatever avenue of escape is still left open.

im25

I am not speaking of anything like “repression,” as it is used by psychologists, but a far deeper issue: one in which the very self is so distrusted that natural impulses of any kind become suspect. We try to inoculate ourselves against ourselves — a nearly impossible situation, of course. We expect our motives to be selfish because we have been told that they are, and so when we catch oneself with unkind motives we are almost comforted, because we think that at least we are behaving normally.

When we find oneself with good motives, we distrust them. “Surely,” we think, “beneath this seeming altruism, there must indeed be some nefarious, or at best selfish, motives that escape me.” As a people we are always examining our impulses, and yet we rarely examine the fruits of our intellects.

ca6

It may seem that impulsive actions run rampant in society, in cultish behavior, for example, or in the behavior of criminals, or on the part of youth, but such activities show instead the power of impulses denied their natural expression, intensified and focused on the one hand into highly ritualized patterns of behavior, and in other areas denied expression.

A particular idealist believes that the world is headed for disaster, and that is powerless to prevent it. Having denied his or her impulses, believing them wrong, and having impeded his/her expression of his/her own power to affect others, he/she might, for example, “hear the voice of God.” That voice might tell him or her to commit any of a number of nefarious actions — to assassinate the enemies that stand in the way of his/her great ideal — and it might seem to him and to others that he/she has a natural impulse to kill, and indeed an inner decree from God to do so.

q17

According to conditions, such a person could be a member of a small cult of the head of a nation, a criminal or a national hero, who claims to act with the authority of God. Again, the desire and motivation to act is so strong with each person that it will not be denied, and when it is denied then it can be expressed in a perverted form. Man and woman must not only act, but he must act constructively, and he or she must feel that he or she acts for good ends.

Only when the natural impulse is denied consistently does the idealist turn into a fanatic. Each person in his or her own way is an idealist.

imm3

Power is natural. It is the force, the power of the muscle to move, or the eye to see, of the mind to think, the power of the emotions — these represent true power, and no accumulation of wealth or acclaim can substitute for that natural sense of power if it is lacking. Power always rests with the individual, and from the individual all political power must flow.

A democracy is a highly interesting form of government, highly significant because it demands so much of individual consciousness, and because it must rest primarily upon a belief in the powers of the individual. It is a tribute to that belief that it has lingered in our country, and operated with such vitality in the face of quite opposing beliefs officially held by both science and religion.

im6

The idea [of democracy] expresses the existence of a high idealism — one that demands political and social organizations that are effective to some degree in providing some practical expression of those ideals. When those organizations fail and a gulf between idealism and actualized good becomes too great, then such conditions help turn some idealists into fanatics. Those who follow with great strictness the dictates of either science or religion can switch sides in a moment. The scientist begins tipping tables or whatever, and suddenly disgusted by the limits of scientific knowledge, he/she turns all of his/her dedication to what he/she thinks of as its opposite, or pure intuitive knowledge. Thus, he/she blocks his/her reason as fanatically as earlier he/she blocked his/her intuitions. The businessmen or businesswoman who believed in Darwinian principles and the fight for survival, who justified injustice and perhaps thievery to his/her ideal of surviving in a competitive world — she/she suddenly turns into a fundamentalist in religious terms, trying to gain his/her sense of power now, perhaps, by giving away the wealth he/she has amassed, all in a tangled attempt to express a natural idealism in a practical world.

fe65

How can we trust our impulses when we read, for example, that a man or woman commits a murder because he/she has a strong impulse to do so, or because the voice of God commanded it? If some of us followed our impulses right now, for example — our first natural ones — it might seem they would be cruel or destructive.

im71

How do our impulses affect our future experience, and help form the practical world of mass reality?

Paranoid views are not based on mass fact

No one is as fanatical, and no one can be more cruel, than the self-righteous. It is very easy for such persons “to become [religiously] converted” after paranoid episodes, lining themselves up once more on the side of good, searching for “the power of fellowship,” turning to church rather than government, hearing in one way or another the voice of God.

da43

So how can the well-meaning idealist know whether or not his good intent will lead to some actualization? How can he know, or how can she know, whether or not this good intent might in fact lead to disastrous conditions? When does the idealist turn into a fanatic?

Look at it this way; If someone tells us that pleasure is wrong and tolerance is weakness, and that we must follow this or that dogma blindly in obedience, and if we are told this is the only right road toward the idealized good, then most likely we are dealing with a fanatic. If we are told to kill for the sake of peace, we are dealing with someone who does not understand peace or justice. If we are told to give up our free will, we are dealing with a fanatic.

da41

Both male and female and molecules dwell in a field of probabilities, and their paths are not determined. The vast reality of probabilities makes the existence of free will possible. If probabilities did not exist, and if we were not to some degree aware of probable actions and events, not only could we not choose between them, but we would not of course have any feelings of choice. We would be unaware of the entire issue.

da91

Through our mundane conscious choices, we affect all of the events of our world, so that the mass world is the result of multitudinous individual choices. We could not make choices at all if we did not feel impulses to do this or that, so that choices usually involve us in making decisions between various impulses. Impulses are urges toward action. Some are conscious and some are not. Each cell of our body feels the impulse toward action, response, and communication. We have been taught not to trust our impulses. Impulses in children teach them to develop their muscles and minds [each] in their own unique manner. And as we will see, those impulses of a private nature are nevertheless also based upon the greater situation of the species and the planet, so that “ideally” the fulfillment of the individual would automatically lead to the better good of the species.

We use a vocabulary that automatically scales down greater concepts to fit its rigors

In other words, such attempts further compound the problem of considering a seemingly objective universe, and describing it in an objective fashion.

vo19

The universe is a spiritual or mental or psychological manifestation, and not, in our usual vocabulary, and objective manifestation.

There is presently no science, religion, or psychology that comes close to even approaching a conceptual framework that could explain, or even indirectly describe, the dimensions of that kind of universe. Its properties are psychological, following the logic of the psyche, and all of the physical properties that we understand are reflections of those deeper issues. Again, each atom and molecule — and any particle that we can imagine — possesses, and would possess, a consciousness. Unless we accept that statement at least as a theory upon which to build, then much of my material would appear meaningless.

vo4

That statement, therefore, must be the basis for any scientific theories that hope to accomplish any performances at all leading to an acquisition of knowledge.

Since I must use an objective vocabulary I am always seeking for analogies. By objective I refer to the use of language, the English language, that automatically sets up its own screens of perception — as of course any language must do to some extent.

vo9

The universe expands, as an idea expands; and as sentences are built upon words, in our terms, and paragraphs upon sentences, and as each retains its own logic and continuity and evidence within that framework, so do all the portions of the universe appear to us with the same cohesiveness — meaning continuity and order. Any sentence is meaningful. It seems to fall in order by itself as we say it. Its order is obvious. That one sentence is meaningful because of its organization of letters, or if it is spoken, its organization of vowels and syllables. It make sense, however, not only because of the letters or vowels or syllables that it excludes.

The same applies to our universe. It has meaning, coherence and order not only because of those realities that are obvious to us, and that appear, but also because of those inner realities that are “unspoken,” or hidden. I am not speaking merely of hidden variables, in scientific terms, nor am I saying that the universe is an illusion, but a psychological reality in which “objectivity” is the result of psychological creativity.

vo14

It is not just that our view of reality is relative to our position within the universe, but that the universe itself is different according to our position within it, and that spiritual or psychological rule apply. The universe deals with different kinds of order, perceptions, and organizations, each dependent upon the others, yet each separate in its own domain.

In our realm of reality, there is no real freedom but the freedom of ideas, and there is no real bondage except for the bondage of ideas, for our ideas form our private and mass reality. We want to examine the universe from the outside, to examine our societies from the outside. We still think that the interior world is somehow symbolic and the exterior world is real — that wars, for example, are fought by themselves or with bombs. All of the time, the psychological reality is the primary one, that forms all of our events.

vo5

It is not to say that we cannot understand the nature of the universe to some extent, but the answers lie in the natures of our own minds, in the processes of individual creativity, in studies that ask questions like: “Where did this thought come from? Where does it go? What effect does it have upon oneself or others? How do I know how to dream, when I have never been taught to do so? How do I speak without understanding the mechanisms? Why do I feel that I have an eternal reality, when it is obvious that I was physically born and will physically die?”

vo1

Unscientific questions? I tell you that these are the most scientific of all. To some extent the attempt on the part of science to consider such material may possibly bring about those qualities of true scientific intuition that will help science bridge the gap between such divergent views as its own and ours.

Fanatics believe they are powerless

The fanatic does not trust his/her own self-structure, or his ability to act effectively. Joint action seems the only course, but a joint action in which each individual must actually be forced to act, driven by frenzy, or fear or hatred, incensed and provoked, for otherwise the fanatic fears that no action at all will be taken toward “the ideal.”

av55

Through such methods, and through such group hysteria, the responsibility for separate acts is divorced from the individual, and rests instead upon the group, where it becomes generalized and dispersed. The cause, whatever it is, can then cover any number of crimes, and no particular individual need bear the blame alone. Fanatics have tunnel vision, so that any beliefs not fitting their purposes are ignored. Those that challenge their own purposes, however, become instant targets of scorn and attack. Generally speaking in our society, power is considered a male attribute. Cult leaders are more often male than female, and females are more often than not followers, because they have been taught that it is wrong for them to use power, and right for them to follow the powerful.

We have religious and scientific cults, and the male-oriented scientific community uses its power in the same way that the male Jehovah used his power in a different arena, to protect his friends and destroy his enemies. Some of our sexual beliefs affect our behavior.

av32

The male scientist considers the rocket his private symbol of sexual power. He feels he has the prerogative to use power in any way he chooses. Now many scientists are “idealists.” They believe that their search for answers, however, justifies almost any means, or sacrifices, not only on their parts but on the parts of others. They becomes fanatics when they ignore the rights of others, and when they defile life in a misguided attempt to understand it.

Women make a grave error when they try to prove their “equality” with men by showing that they can enter the armed forces, or go into combat as well as any man. War always makes us less as a species than we could be. Women have shown uncommon good sense in not going to war, and uncommon bad sense by sending their sons and lovers to war. To kill for the sake of peace only makes us better killers, and nothing will change that. In any war, both sides are fanatical to the extent that they are involved. I am quite aware that often was seems to be our only practical course, because of the set of beliefs, war will seem to have some practical value — a value which is highly deceptive, and quite false.

av8

Fanatics always use ringing rhetoric, and speak in the highest terms of truth, good and evil, and particularly of retribution. To some extent capital punishment is the act of a fanatical society: The taking of the murderer’s life does not bring back the victim’s, and it does not prevent other men from [committing] such crimes. I am aware that the death penalty often seems to be practical solution — and indeed many murderers want to die, and are caught because of their need for punishment. Many, now — and I am speaking generally — are in the position they are because they so thoroughly believe what all of us believe to a large extent: that we are flawed creatures, spawned by a meaningless universe, or made by a vengeful God and damaged by original sin.

Criminals act out those beliefs to perfection. Their “tendencies” are those that each of us fears we possess. Science and religion each tell us that left alone we will spontaneously be primitive creatures, filled with uncontrolled lust and avarice. Both Freud and Jehovah gave us that massage. Poor Darwin tried to make sense of it all, but failed miserably.

av52

Fanatics cannot stand tolerance. They expect obedience. A democratic society offers the greatest challenges and possibilities of achievement for the individual and the species, for it allows for the free intercourse of ideas. It demands much more of its people, however, for in a large manner each must pick and choose from amid a variety of life-styles and beliefs his and her own platform for daily life and action.

There are periods in which it certainly seems to some that all standards vanish, and so they yearn for old authorities. And there are always fanatics there to stand for ultimate truth, and to lift from the individual the challenge and “burden” of personal achievement and responsibility. Individuals can survive without organizations. Organizations cannot survive without individuals, and the most effective organizations are assemblies of individuals who assert their own private power in a group, and do not seek to hide within it.

av33

Organized action is an excellent method of exerting influence, but only when each member is self-activating; only when he or she extends individuality through group action, and does not mindlessly seek to follow the dictates of others.

av7

Fanatics exist because of the great gap between an idealized good is projected into the future, while its exaggerated opposite is seen to pervade the present. The individual is seen as powerless to work alone toward that ideal with any sureness of success. Because of his/her powerlessness [the fanatic] feels that any means to an end is justified. Behind all this the belief that spontaneously the ideal will never be achieved, and that, indeed, on his/her own man and woman are getting worse and worse in every aspect: How can flawed selves ever hope to spontaneously achieve any good?

Creativity has feminine connotations in our society

While the power has masculine connotations, and is largely thought of as destructive.

fe9

Our scientists are, generally now, intellectually , believing in reason above the intuitions, taking if for granted that those qualities are opposites. They cannot imagine life’s “initial” creative source, for in their terms it would remind them of creativity’s feminine basis.

In the framework of this discussion only we have a male’s and female’s universe. It is a universe endowed with male and female characteristics as these appear in the male-female orientations of our history. The universe seems to have no meaning because the male and female “intellect” alone cannot discern meaning, since it must take nothing for granted. Even though certain characteristics of the universe are most apparent, they must be ignored.

fe31

We must understand, that the terms “male” and “female” here are being used as they are generally understood, and have nothing to do with the basic characteristics of either sex. In those terms, the male-oriented intellect wants to order the universe, name its parts, and so forth. It wants to ignore the creative aspects of the universe, however, which are everywhere apparent, and it first of all believes that it must divorce itself from any evidence of feeling. We have in our history than a male god of power and vengeance, who killed our enemies for us. We have a prejudiced god, who will, for example, slay the Egyptians and half of the Jews to retaliate against previous Egyptian cruelty. The male god is a god of power. He is not a god of creativity.

Now, creativity has always been the species’ closet connection with its own source, with the nature of its own being. Through creativity the species senses All That Is. Creativity goes by a different set of rules, however. It is a sources of revelation and inspiration — yet initially revelation and inspiration do not deal with power, but with knowing. So what often happens in our society when men an women have creative bents, and good minds to boot?

fe14

The Catholic Church taught that revelation was dangerous. Intellectual and psychic obedience was much the safer road, and even the saints were slightly suspect. Women were inferiors, and in matters of religion and philosophy most of all, for there their creativity could be most disruptive. Women were considered hysterics, aliens to the world of intellectual thought, swayed instead by incomprehensible womanish emotions. Women were to be handled by wearing down their energies through childbirth.

The trance itself has feminine connotations, though we conveniently forget {several excellent male mediums].

fe8

The art the old masters escaped such connotations, largely because it involved so much physical labor — the making of colors, canvases, and so forth. That work, providing the artist’s preparation, now belongs to the male-world manufacturer, so as a male in our society the artist is often left with what he thinks of as art’s feminine basis, where it must be confronted, of course.

fe74

I want to make it plain that such ideas are rampant in society, and are at the basis of many personal and national problems. They are behind large issues, involved in the Fukushima Nuclear Power Plant nuclear fiasco, for example, and in the scientist’s idea of power and creation. Some of us, highly creative, find our creativity in conflict with our ideas of sexuality, privately and in our stances with the world. Much of this is involved with the unfortunate myths about the creative person, who is not supposed to be able to deal with the world as well as others, whose idiosyncrasies are exaggerated, and whose very creativity, it is sometimes said, leads to suicide or depression. No wonder few numbers of creative people persist in the face of such unfortunate beliefs!

fe52

We run into many contradictions. God is supposed to be male. The soul is sometimes considered female. The angels are male. Now let us look at the Garden of Eden. The story says that Eve tempted the male, having him eat of the tree of good and evil, or the tree of knowledge. This represented a state of consciousness, the point at which the species began to think and feel for itself, when it approached a certain state of consciousness in which it dared exert its own creativity.

fe47

This is difficult to verbalize. It was a state when the species became aware of its own thoughts as its own thoughts, and became conscious of the self who thinks. That point released man’s and woman’s creativity. In our terms, it was the product of the feminine intuitions (thought, as we know, such intuitions belong to both sexes). When the [Biblical} passages were written, the species had come to various states of order, achieving certain powers and organizations, and it wanted to maintain the status quo. No more intuitive visions, no more changes, were wanted. Creativity was to follow certain definite roads, so the woman became the villain.

 

Is “good” an absolute?

When discussing the nature of good and bad, we are on tricky ground indeed, for many — or most — of man’s and woman’s atrocities to man and woman have been committed in misguided pursuit of “the good.”

ar8

Whose good? In our arena of events, obviously, one man’s and woman’s good can be another’s disaster. Adolf Hitler pursued his version of “the good” with undeviating fanatical intent. He believed in the superiority and moral rectitude of the Aryan race. In his grandiose, idealized versions of reality, he saw that race “set in its proper place,” as natural master of humankind.

He believed in heroic characteristics, and became blinded by an idealized superman version of an Aryan strong in mind and body. To attain that end, Hitler was quite willing to sacrifice the rest of humanity. “The evil must be plucked out.” That unfortunate chant is behind the beliefs of many cults — scientific and religious — and Hitler’s Aryan kingdom was a curious interlocking of the worst aspect of religion and science alike, in which their cultish tendencies were encouraged and abetted.

as3c

The political arena was the practical working realm in which those ideals were to find fruition. Hitler’s idea of good was hardly inclusive, therefore, and any actions, however atrocious, were justified.

How did Hitler’s initially wishy-washy undefined ideals of nationalistic goodness turn into such a world catastrophe? Hitler’s daydreams became more and more grandiose, and in their light, the plight of his country seemed worsened with each day’s events. He counter its humiliations over and over in his mind, until his mind became an almost completely closed environment, in which only certain ideas were allowed entry.

as3e

All that was not Aryan, really , became the enemy. The Jews took the brunt ,largely because of their financial successes and their cohesiveness, their devotion to a culture that was not basically Aryan. They would become the victims of Hitler’s fanatical ideal of Germany’s good.

Hitler preached on the great value of social action as opposed to individual action. He turned children into informers against their own parents. He behaved nationalistically, as any minor cult leader does in a smaller context. The Jews believed in martyrdom. Germany became the new Egypt, in which their people were set upon. I do not want to simplify here, and certainly I am nowhere justifying the cruelties the Jews encountered in Germany. We do each create our own reality, however, and en masse we create the realities of our nationalities and our countries — so at that time the Germans saw themselves as victors, and the Jews saw themselves as victims.

ar4

Both reacted as groups, rather than as individuals, generally speaking now. For all of their idealism, both basically believed in a pessimistic view of the self. It was because Hitler was so convinced of the existence of evil in the individual psyche, that he set up all of his existence of evil in the in the individual psyche, that set up all of his rules and regulations to build up and preserve “Aryan purity.” The Jews’ idea was also a dark one, in which their own rules and regulations were set to preserve the soul’s purity against the forces of evil. And while in the Jewish books [of  The Old Testament} Jehovah now and then came through with great majesty to save his chosen people, he also allowed them to suffer great indignities over long periods of time, seeming to save them only at the last moment — and this time, seemed, he did not sane them at all. What happened?

Despite himself, and despite his followers, Hitler brought to flower a very important idea, and one that changed our history. All of the most morbid of nationalistic fantasies that had been growing for centuries, all of the most grandiose celebrations of war as a nation’s inalienable right to seek domination, focused finally in Hitler’s Germany.

as25

The nation served as an example of what could happen in any country if the most fanatical nationalism was allowed to go unchecked, if the ideas of right were aligned with might, if any nation was justified in contemplating the destruction of others.

We must realize that Hitler believed that any atrocity was justified in the light of what he thought of as the greater good. To some extent or another, many of the ideals he held and advocated had long been accepted in world communities, though they had not been acted upon with such dispatch. The nations of the world saw their own worst tendencies personified in Hitler’s Germany, ready to attack them. The Jews, for various reasons — and again, this is not the full story — the Jews acted as all of the victims of the world, both the Germans and the Jews basically agreeing upon “man’s nefarious nature.” For the first time the modern world realized its vulnerability to political events, and technology and communication accelerated all of war’s dangers. Hitler brought many of man’s and woman’s most infamous tendencies to the surface. For the first time species the  species understood that might alone did not mean right, and that in larger terms a world war could have no real victors. Hitler might well have exploded the world’s first atomic bomb.

as423

In a strange fashion, however, Hitler knew that he was doomed from the very beginning, and so did Germany as far as Hitler’s hopes for it were concerned. He yearned for destructions of his earlier ideals. This meant that he often sabotaged his own efforts, and several important Allied victories were the result of such sabotaging. In the same way, Germany did not have the [atomic] bomb for the same reasons.

Now, however, we come to Hiroshima, where this highly destructive bomb was exploded (on August 6, 1945) — and for what reason? To save life, to save American lives. The intent to save American lives was certainly “good” — at the expense of the Japanese this time. In that regard, America’s good was not Japan’s, and an act taken to “save life” was also designed to take individual lives.

as67

At what expense is “the good” to be achieved — and whose idea of the good is to be the criterion? Man’s and woman’s pursuit of the good, to some extent now, fathered the Inquisition and the Salem witch hunts. Politically, many today believe that Russia/Iran is “the enemy,” and that therefore any means may be taken to destroy that country. Some people within the United States believe fervently that “the establishment” is rotten to the core, and that any means is justified to destroy it. Some people believe that homosexuals and lesbians are “evil,” that somehow they lack the true qualities of humanness [and therefore need not be treated with normal respect]. These are all value judgements involving our ideas of the good.

Very few people start out trying to be as bad as possible. Al least some criminals feel that in stealing they are simply righting society’s wrongs. I am not saying that is their only motive, but in one way or another they manage to justify their activities by seeing them in their own version of the good and the right.

as32

We must realize that fanatics always deal with grandiose ideals, while at the same time they believe in man’s and woman’s sinful nature, and the individual’s lack of power. They cannot trust the expression of the self, for they are convinced of its duplicity. Their ideals then seem even more remote. Fanatics call others to social action. Since they do not believe that the individual is ever effective, their groups are not assemblies of private individuals come reasonably together, pooling individual resources. They are instead congregations of people who are afraid to assert their individuality, who hope to find it in the group, or hope to establish a joint individuality — and that is an impossibility.

True individuals can do much through social action, and the species is a social one, but people who are afraid of their individuality will never find it in a group, but only a caricature of their own powerlessness.

as72

Hitler’s espousal of a German-Aryan super-race is an excellent example of how a leader can subvert history to his own ends. Anthropologists do not assign any validity to “Aryan” as a racial term. In Nazi eyes, Aryans were the non-Jewish, Caucasian, “Nordic” descendants of the prehistoric peoples who originally spoke the hypothetical parent language of the Indo-European language family. The Aryans flooded into India, the Middle East, and Europe from southern Russia.

The many forms of idealism

Sometimes it is difficult to identify idealists, because they wear such pessimistic clothing that all we can see are the patterns of a sardonic nature, or of irony. On the other hand, many who speak most glowingly, in the most idealistic fashions, underneath are filled with the darkest aspects of pessimism and despair. If we are idealists, and if we feel relatively powerless in the world at the same time, and if our idealism is general and grandiose, unrelated to any practical plans for its expression, then we can find ourselves in difficulties indeed. Here are a few specific examples of what I mean.

id67

One man from another part of the country, begins to speak about the state of the nation, largely condemning all of his countrymen and countrywomen for their greed and stupidity. People would do anything at all for money, he/she said. He/she expresses his opinion that the species itself would almost inevitably bring about its own destruction.

He/she cites many instances of nefarious acts committed for money’s sake. A lively discussion results, but no countering opinion could enter this man’s mind or woman’s. Paul, let us call him, is an idealist at heart, but he believes that the individual has little power in the world, and so he did not pursue his personal idealism in the events of his own life. “Everyone is a slave to the system.” That is his line of belief. He took a routine job in a local business and stayed with it for over 20 years, all of the time hating to go to work, or saying that he did, and at the same time refusing to try other areas of activity that were open to him — because he was afraid to try.

id63

He feels he has betrayed himself, and he projects that betrayal outward until betrayal is all that he sees in the social-political world. Had he begun the work of actualizing his ideals through his own private life, he would not be in such a situation. The expression of ideals brings about satisfaction, which then of course promotes the further expression of practical idealism.

Paul speaks the same way in any social group, and therefore to extent spreads a negative and despairing aura. I do not want to define his existence by those attitudes alone, however, for when he forgets the great gulf between his idealism and practical life, and speaks about other activities, then he is full of charming energy. That energy could have sustained him far more than it has, however, had he counted on his natural interests and chosen one of those for his life’s work. He could have been an excellent teacher. He had offers of other jobs that would have pleased him more, but he is so convinced of his lack of power that he did not dare take advantage of the opportunities. There are satisfactions in his life that prevent him from narrowing his focus even further.

id81

If we want to change the world for the better, then we are an idealist. If we want to change the world for the better, but we believe it cannot be changed one whit, then we are a pessimist, and our idealism will only haunt us. If we want to change the world for the better, but we believe that it will grow worse, despite everyone’s efforts, then we are a truly despondent, perhaps misguided idealist. If we want to change the world for the better, and if we are determined to do so, no matter at what cost to oneself or others, no matter what the risk, and if we believe that those ends justify any means at our disposal, then we are a fanatic.

Fanatics are inverted idealists. Usually they are vague grandiose dreamers, whose plans almost completely ignore the full dimensions of normal living. They are unfulfilled idealists who are not content to express idealism in steps, one at a time, or indeed to wait for the practical workings of active expression. They demand immediate action. They want to make the world over in their own images. They cannot bear the expression of tolerance or opposing ideas. They are the most self-righteous of the self-righteous, and they will sacrifice almost anything — their own lives or the lives of others. They will justify almost any crime for the pursuit of those ends.

id66

Another example: Two young women. They are exuberant, energetic, and filled with youthful idealism. They want to change the world. Working with the Ouija board, they received messages telling them that they could indeed have a part in a great mission. One young lady wants to quit her job, stay at home, and immerse herself in “psychic work,” hoping that her part in changing the world could be accomplished in that manner. The other is an office worker.

There is nothing more stimulating, more worthy of actualization, than the desire to change the world for the better. That is indeed each person’s mission. We begin by working in that area of activity that is our own unique one, with our own life and activities. We begin in the corner of an office, or on the assembly line, or in the advertising agency, or in the kitchen. We begin where we are.

id62

If Paul, mentioned earlier, had begun where he was, he would be a different, happier, more fulfilled person today. And to some extent or other, his effect on all the other people he has met would have been far more beneficial.

When we fulfill our own abilities, when we express our personal idealism through acting it out to the best of our ability in our daily life, then we are changing the world for the better.

pa23

My friend Sophia has abilities , and she is banking on them, developing them in a practical way. She believes that she forms her own reality. She quenched doubts that she was not good enough to succeed, or that it was too difficult to get ahead in the fitness business. The satisfaction of performance leads her to more expansive creativity, and to her natural sense of personal power. Through developing those abilities personally, she will contribute to the enjoyment of others. She is an idealist. She will try to bring a greater sense of values to the fitness/health industry, for example, and she is willing to do the work necessary.

Youth is full of strength, however, so she find a way to give her own abilities greater expression, and hence to increase her own sense of power. Though sometimes she is dealing with dark periods of despair.

id84

Idealism also presupposes “the good” as opposed to “the bad,” so how can the pursuit of “the good” often lead to the expression of “the bad?” For that we will have to look further.

There is one commandment above all, in practical terms — a Christian commandment that can be used as a yardstick. It is good because it is something we can understand practically: “Thou shalt not kill.” That is clear enough. Under most conditions we know when we have killed. That Commandment is a much better road to follow, for example than: “You shall love your neighbor as yourself,” for many of us do not love ourselves to begin with, and can scarcely love our neighbor as well. The idea is that is we love our neighbor we will not treat him/her poorly, much less kill him/her — but the commandment: “Thou shalt not kill,” says we shall not kill our neighbor no matter how we feel about him/her. So let us say in a new commandment: “Thou shalt not kill even in the pursuit of our ideals.”

f34

What does that mean? In practical terms it would mean that we would not wage war for the sake of peace. It would mean that we did not kill animals in experiments, taking their lives in order to protect the sacredness of human life. That would be a prime directive: “Thou shalt not kill even in the pursuit of our ideals” — for man and woman has killed for the sake of his/her ideals as much as he/she ever killed for greed, or lust, or even the pursuit of power on its own merits.

f59

We are a fanatic of we consider possible killing for the pursuit of our ideal. For example, our ideal may be — for ideals differ — the production of endless energy for the uses of mankind and womankind, and we may believe so fervently in that ideal — this added convenience to life — that we considered the hypothetical possibility of that convenience being achieved at the risk of losing some lives along the way, that is fanaticism.

a11

It means that we are not willing to take the actual steps in physical reality to achieve the ideal, but that we believe that the end justifies the means: “Certainly some lives may be lost along the way, but overall, mankind and womankind will benefit.” That is the usual argument. The sacredness of life cannot be sacrificed for life’s convenience, or the quality of life itself will suffer. In the same manner, say, the ideal is to protect human life, and in the pursuit of that ideal we give generations of various animals deadly diseases, and sacrifice their lives. Our justification may be that people have souls and animals do not, or that the quality of life is less in the animals, but regardless of those arguments this is fanaticism — and the quality of human life itself suffers as a result, for those who sacrifice any kind of life along the way lose some respect for all life, human life included. The ends do not justify the means.

The American experiment with democracy is heroic, bold, and innovative

In historic terms as we understand them, this is the first time that all of the inhabitants of a country were to be legally considered equal citizens one with the other. That was to be, and is, the ideal. In practical terms, of course, there often are inequalities. Treatment in the marketplace, or in society, often shows great divergence from that stated national ideal. Yet the dream is a vital portion of American national life, and even those who are unscrupulous must pay it at least lip service, or cast their plans in its light.

q47

In the past, and in large areas of the world now, many important decisions are not made by the individual, but by the state, or religion, or society. In this century several issues came to the forefront of American culture: The exteriorization of organized religion, which became more of a social rather than a spiritual entity, and joining of science with technology and moneyed interests. William James’ books would be good background material here, particularly the sections dealing with democracy and spiritualism. In any case, on the one hand each individual was to be equal with each other person. Marriages, for example, were no longer arranged. A man no longer need follow his father’s vocational footsteps. Young adults found themselves faced with a multitudinous number of personal decisions that in other cultures were made more or less automatically. The development of transportation opened up the country, so that an individual was no longer bound to his or her native town or region. All of this meant that man’s and woman’s conscious mind was about to expand its strengths, its abilities, and its reach. The country was — and still is — brimming with idealism.

That idealism, however, ran smack into the dark clouds of Freudian and Darwinian thought. How could a country be governed effectively by individuals who were after all chemicals run amok in images, with neuroticism built-in from childhood — children of a tainted species, thrown adrift by a meaningless cosmos in which no meaning could be found?

q23

Organized religion felt threatened; and if it could not prove that man/woman had a soul, it could at least see to it that the needs of the body were taken care of through suitable social work, and so it abandoned many of the principles that might have added to its strength. Instead it settled for platitudes that equated cleanliness with virtue — hence, or course, our deodorant advertisements, and many other aspects of the marketplace.

In public mind, it made little difference whether the devil or tainted genes condemned the individual to a life in which it seemed he/she could have little control. He or she began to feel powerless. He/she began to feel that social action itself was of little value, for if man’s or woman’s evil were built-in, for whatever reasons, then where was there any hope?

q21

There was some hope, at least, in looking for better living conditions personally. There was some hope in forgetting one’s doubts in whatever exterior distractions could be found. Idealism is tough, and it is enduring, and no matter how many times its is seemingly slain, it comes back in a different form. So those who felt that religion had failed them looked anew to science, which promised — promised to — provide the closest approximation to heaven on earth: Mass production of goods, two cars in every garage, potions for every ailment, solutions for every problem. And it seems in the beginning that science delivered, for the world was changed from candlelight to electric light to neon in the flicker of an eye, and man and woman could travel in hours distances that to his father or grandfather took days on end.

And while science provided newer and newer comforts and conveniences, few questions were asked. There was, however, no doubt about it: Exterior conditions had improved, yet the individual did not seem any happier. By this time it was apparent that the discoveries of science could also have a darker side. Life’s exterior conveniences would hardly matter if science’s knowledge was used to undermine the very foundations of life itself.

q3

The various potions taken faithfully by the public were now often found to have very unfortunate side effects. The chemicals used to protect agriculture had harmful effects upon people. Such situations bothered the individual far more than the threat of nuclear disaster, for they involved his contact with daily life: The products that he/she bought, the medicines that he/she took.

Some people looked, and are looking, for some authority — any authority — to make their decisions for them, for the world seems increasingly dangerous, and they, because of their beliefs, feel increasingly powerless. They yearn toward old ways, when the decisions of marriage were made for them, when they could safely follow in their father’s or mother’s footsteps, when they were unaware of the lure of different places, and forced to remain at home. They have become caught between science and religion. Their idealism finds no particular outlet. Their dreams seem betrayed.

q20

Those people look to cults of various kinds, where decisions are made for them, where they are relieved of the burden of an individuality that has been robbed of its sense of power by conflicting beliefs. At one time the males might have been drafted into the army, and, secretly exultant, gone looking for the period before full adulthood — where decisions would be made for them, where they could mark time, and where those who were not fully committed to life could leave it with a sense of honor and dignity.

In the past also, even in our country, there were convents and monasteries for those who did not want to live in the world as other people did. They might pursue other goals, but the decisions of where to live, what to do, where to go, how to live, would be made for them. Usually such people were joined by common interests, a sense of honor, and there was no retaliation to be feared in this century.

q42

Cults, however, deal primarily with fear, using it as a stimulus. They further erode the power of the individual, so that he is frightened to leave. The group has power. The individual has none, except that the power of the group is vested in its leader. Those who died in Guyana, for example, were suicidal inclined. They had no cause to live for, because their idealism became so separated from any particular actualization that they were left only with its ashes.

The leader of Jonestown was at heart an idealist. When does an idealist turn into a fanatic? When can the search for the good have catastrophic results, and how can the idealism of science be equated with the near-disaster at Fukushima Nuclear Power Plant, and with the potential disasters that in our terms exist in the storage of nuclear wastes, or in the production of nuclear bombs?

q31

People who live in tornado country carry the reality of a tornado in their minds and hearts as a psychological background.

To one extent or another, all of the vents of their lives happen punctuated or accented by the possibility of disaster. They feel that at any time they might be caused to face the greatest challenge, to rely upon their strongest resources, their greatest forbearance, and faced by a test of endurance. They use — or they often use — such a psychological and physical backdrop to keep those qualities alive within themselves, for they are the kind of people who like to feel pitted against a challenge. Often the existence of probabilities and their acceptance does provide a kind of exterior crisis situation that individually and en masse is a symbol of independence and inner crisis. The crisis is met in the exterior situation, and as the people deal with that situation they symbolically deal with their own inner crises. In a way those people trust such exterior confrontations, and even count upon a series of them, of varying degrees of severity, that can be used throughout a lifetime for such purposes.

q11

Those who survive feel that they have been given a new lease on life, regardless of their circumstances: They could have been killed and were not. Others use the same circumstances as excuses for no longer hanging on to a wish for life, and so it seems that while saving face they fall prey to the exterior circumstances.

Psychological Fallout

Characteristics of a cult; There are fanaticism, a closed mental environment, the rousing of hopes toward an ideal that seemed unachievable because of the concentration upon all of the barriers that seemed to stand in its way.

f56

Most cults have their own specialized language of one kind of another — particular phrases used repetitively — and this special language further serves to divorce the devotees from the rest of the world. This practice was also followed by those at Jonestown. Loyalty to friends and family was discouraged, and so those in Jonestown had left strong bonds of intimacy behind. They felt threatened by the world, which was painted by their beliefs so that it presented a picture of unmitigated evil and corruption. All of this should be fairly well recognized. The situation led to the deaths of hundreds.

The Fukushima Nuclear Power Plant situation potentially threatened the lives of many thousands, and in that circle of events the characteristics of a cult are less easy to discern. Yet they are present. We have scientific cults as well as religious ones.

f26

Religion and science both loudly proclaim their search for truth, although they are seemingly involved in completely opposing systems. They both treat their beliefs as truths, with which no one should tamper. They search for beginnings and endings. The scientists have their own vocabulary, which is used to reinforce the exclusive nature of science. Now I am speaking of the body of science in general terms here, for here is in a way a body of science that exists as a result of each individual scientist’s participation. A given scientist man act quite differently in his family life and as a scientist. He/she may love his/her family dog, for example, while at the same time think nothing of injecting other animals with diseased tissue in his/her professional capacity.

Granting that, however, cults interact, and so there is quite a relationship between the state of religion, when it operates as a cult, and the state of science when it operates as a cult. Right now our cultish religions exist in response to the cultish behavior of science. Science insists it does not deal with values, but leaves those to philosophers. In stating that the universe is an accidental creation, however, a meaning less chance conglomeration formed by an unfeeling cosmos, it states quite clearly its belief that the universe and man’s existence has no value. All that remains is what pleasure or accomplishment can somehow be wrested from man’s individual biological processes.

f58

A recent article in a national magazine speaks about the latest direction of progress in the field of psychology, saying that man and woman will realize that his/her moods, thoughts, and feelings are the result of the melody of chemicals that swirl in his/her brain. That statement devalues man’s and woman’s subjective world.

The scientists claim a great idealism. They claim to have the way toward truth. Their “truth” is to be found by studying the objective world, the world of objects, including animals and stars, galaxies and mice — but by viewing these objects as if they are themselves without intrinsic value, as if their existence have no meaning.

f33

Now those beliefs separate man and woman from his/her own nature. He/she cannot trust oneself — for who can rely upon the accidental bubbling of hormones and chemicals that somehow form a stew called consciousness — an unsavory brew at best, so the field of science will forever escape opening up into any great vision of the meaning of life. It cannot value life, and so in its search for the ideal it can indeed justify in its philosophy the possibility of an accident that might kill many many people through direct or indirect means, and kill the unborn as well.

That possibility is indeed written in the scientific program. There are plans, though faulty ones, of procedures to be taken in case of accident — so in our world that probability exists, and is not secret. As a group the scientists rigorously oppose the existence of telepathy or clairvoyance, or of any philosophy that brings these into focus. Only lately have some begun to think in terms of mind affecting matter, and even such a possibility disturbs them profoundly, because it shatters the foundations of their philosophical stance.

f9

The scientists have long stood on the side of “intelligence and reason,” logical thought, and objectivity. They are trained to be unemotional, to stand apart from their experience, to separate themselves from nature, and to view any emotional characteristics of their own with an ironical eye. Again, they have stated that they are neutral in the world of values. They became, until recently, the new priests. All problems, it seems, could be solved scientifically. This applied to every avenue of life: to health matters, social disorders, economics, even to war and peace.

hgjgh

How did such scientific gentlemen and gentlewomen, with all of their precise paraphernalia, with all of their objective and reasonable viewpoints, end up with a nuclear plant that ran askew, that threatened present and future life? And what about the people who love nearby?

Human deals with a kind of dual selfhood

In that Human presently thinks of Human as an uneasy blend of body and mind. Human identifies primarily with what I call a limited portion of Human consciousness. That portion human equates with mind or intelligence. Human identifies with events over which he/she is aware of having some control.

du1

Human thinks of acts, for example, and acting and doing, but he does not identify Human with these inner processes that make acting and doing possible. Human identifies with what he/she thinks of as Human logical thought, and the abilities of reasoning. These seem to suggest that Human possesses and elegant, cool separation from nature, that the animals for example do not. Human does not identify, with the processes that make Human logical thinking possible. Those processes are spontaneous and ‘unconscious,’ so it appears that anything outside of Human conscious control must be undisciplined or chaotic, and lacking in all logic.

Both religion and science are based upon such beliefs. Anything that happens spontaneously is looked upon with suspicion. The word seems to suggest elements out of control, or motion that goes from one extreme to another. Only the reasoning mind, it seems, has any idea of order, discipline, or control.

du44

Human is therefore set against Human nature in Human’s own mind, and Human thinks Human must control it. The fact is that man’s and woman’s consciousness can indeed become aware of — aware of — those spontaneous processes. But he/she oneself has largely closed the door of comprehension, so that he only identifies with what he/she thinks of as his/her rational mind, and tries to forget as best he/she can those spontaneous processes upon which the mind rides so triumphantly

Human has often become frightened of Human’s own creativity, then, since he or her has not trusted its source.

Scientists have become somewhat contemptuous of the non-elite

Contemptuous of all who are not scientists, and they build up a false sense of comparative omnipotence in response — and that makes them less careful than they should be. They feel misunderstood by the public.

None of them want any disaster, and yet some of them think it would serve the people right — for then the people might realize that politicians do not understand science, and that the scientists should after all be put in control: “We must have enough money, or who knows what can go wrong?”

The scientific elite could of course present a probability in which a world was created [where] the common man could have little knowledge of its workings. We actually have an excellent set of guards and balances in our country. Now our TV dramas, systematically show our Frankenstein movies just when our scientists are contemplating all kinds of experiments supposed to bring forth life. Hardly a coincidence, for the mass minds of the people are bale to make certain joint statements, and those statements are heard.

Everything in nature is intentional and useful

Everything in nature is intentional; therefore dreams must fulfill important roles in people’s lives — but how, in ordinary terms?

Even if we don’t consciously remember our dreams, we do get the message. Part of it will appear in our daily experience in one way or another — in our conversation or daily events.

Because dreams are such a perfect combination of stimuli from the inner environment and the exterior environment, other events are often used to trigger inner dream messages, just as the opposite occurs. And in a gathering of three people watching the same TV drama, say, each of them might be interpreting different portions of the program so that those portions correlate with their individual dreams of the night before, and serve to bring them their dream messages in ways they can accept.

Great discrimination is used to do that; for example, one newspaper item is noticed over others because a certain portion of that item represents some of the dream’s message. Another portion might come from a neighbor — but from the dreamer’s interpretation of the neighbor’s remarks, that further brings home the dream message. In such cases the individual will scarcely be aware that a dream is involved.

We might dream of going away on a long trip by car, only to find that a tire blew when we were driving too fast. We may never remember the dream. One way or another, however, we will hit upon some kind of situation — a portion of a TV drama, perhaps — in which a tire is blown. Or we will see an item of that nature in the internet, or we will hear a story, told directly or indirectly about the same kind of dilemma. The magnitude of the physical stimuli with which we are surrounded makes it possible, of course, for any given day. Even then, we might not recall the dream, but the situation itself as it comes to our attention might make us check our tires, decide to put off our trip, or instead lead us to inner speculation about whether we are going too fast in a certain direction for our own good at this time. But we will get the dream’s message.

Psychological objects

Objects just originate in man’s and woman’s imagination, there’s always a strong connection between objects and man’s and woman’s dreams. They act as symbols of inner reality, so it’s only natural that whether he/she is aware of it or not, man/woman perceives objects in such a fashion that they also stand for symbols that first originate in his/her dreams.

n8

This also has to do with large events, that we might for convenience’s sake think of for now as psychological objects — that is, events seen and recognized by large numbers of people in the same way that objects are.

The Christ drama is a case in point, where private and mass dreams were then projected outward into the historical context of time, and then reacted to in such a way that various people became exterior participants — but in a far larger mass dream that was then interpreted in the most literal of physical terms. Even while it was, it also got the message across, though the inner drama itself was not recalled; and as the dream merged with historical events, and it was interpreted by so many, its message also became distorted — or rather, it mixed and merged with other such dreams, whose messages were far different.

n2

Look at our nuclear-reactor troubles at the plant by Fukushima (Japan). The entire idea of nuclear power was first a dream — an act of the imagination of the part of private individuals — and then through fiction and the arts, a dream on the part of many people. Instantly, probabilities spun out from that dream in all directions, vast potential and dangers.

It was hardly a coincidence that this particular situation arrived in the social climate first of all portrayed in a movie.

n1

Nuclear power stands for power, plain and simple. Is it good or bad? It stands in man’s and woman’s dreams as belonging to God: the power of the universe. Man and woman has always considered oneself, in our terms as set apart from nature, so he/she must feel set apart from nature’s power — and there must be a great division in his/her dreams between the two. Nuclear energy in fact, then, comes as a dream symbol, and emerges into the world as something to be dealt with.

Fundamentalists think of nuclear power as a force that God might use, say, to destroy the world. That event in Japan means one thing to them. Some of the scientists equate nuclear power with man’s and woman’s great curiosity, and feel that they wrest this great energy from nature, smarter than their fellow men — so they read those events in their own way. The probabilities are still surging, of course, and in private and mass dreams people try out all kinds of endings for that particular story.

n15

All in all, millions of people are involved, who will be affected of course to one extent or another.

There is a tie-in, and it’s that the Christ drama happened as a result of man’s and woman’s dream, at least, of achieving brotherhood — a quiet, secure sense of consciousness, and a morality that would sustain him/her in the physical world.

n55

The Christ drama did splash over into historical reality. Man’s and woman’s fears of not achieving brotherhood, or not achieving a secure state of consciousness, or a workable morality, result in his/her dreams of destruction, however they are expressed. And indeed, the present physical event as it exists now at the energy plant Fukushima can easily be likened to — and is — a warning dream to change man’s and woman’s actions.

The people of Jonestown died of an epidemic of beliefs

The case was startling, because of the obvious suicidal acts. The poison was after all, left as evidence. Had the same number of people been found dead of a vicious disease — aids or whatever– the virus involved would have been the villain.

v2

We think of viruses as physical, and of thoughts as mental. We should know that thoughts also have their physical aspects in the body, and that viruses have their mental aspects in the body. At times we ask why an ailing body does not simply assert itself and use its healing abilities, throwing off the negative influence of a given set of beliefs and thoughts.

When we think of thoughts as mental and viruses as physical, the question is understandable. It is not just that thoughts influence the body, as of course they do; but each one of them represents a triggering stimulus, bringing about hormonal changes and altering the entire physical situation at any given time.

pa13

Our physical body is, as an entity, the fleshed-out version –the physically alive version — of the body of our thoughts. It is not that our thoughts have a chemical reality besides their recognizable mental aspects. I will use an analogy. It is not the best, but I hope it will get the point across: It is as if our thoughts turned into the various appendages of our body. They have an invisible existence within our body as surely as viruses do. Our body is composed not only of the stuff within it that, say, X-rays or autopsies can reveal, but it also involves profound relationships, alliances and affiliations that nowhere physically show. Our thoughts are as physically pertinent to our body as viruses are, as alive and self-propagating, and they themselves form inner affiliations. Their vitality automatically triggers all of the body’s inner responses. When we think thoughts they are conscious. We think in sentences, or paragraphs, or perhaps in images. Those thoughts, as clearly as I can explain this, rise from inner components of which we are unaware.

When the thought, is thought, it is, say, broken down again to those components. Our thoughts have an emotional basis, also. The smallest cell within our body contributes to that emotional reality, and reacts instantly to our thoughts.

pa61

In those terms, thoughts move far quicker of course than viruses. The action of the virus follows the thought. Each thought is registered biologically. Basically, when we have an immunity to a disease we have a mental immunity.

We think of viruses as evil, spreading perhaps from country to country, to “invade” scores of physical mechanisms. Now thoughts are “contagious.” We have natural immunity against all thoughts that do not fit in with our own purposes and beliefs, and naturally, we are “inoculated” with a wholesome trust and belief in our own thoughts above others. The old ideas of Voodooism recognized some of these concepts, but complicated and distorted them with fears of evil, psychic invasion, psychic killing, and so forth. We cannot divide, say, mental and physical health, nor can we divide a person’s philosophy from his bodily condition.

t6

While I say all of this about thoughts and viruses, remember the context of the discussion, for new information and insights are always available to an individual from sub-conscious and the body does indeed send its own signals.

j4

The people who died at Jonestown believed that they must die. They wanted to die. How could their thoughts allow them to bring about their [bodily deaths]? The question makes sense only if we do not realize that our thoughts are as physically a part of our body as viruses are.

Animals do not “think” of long lives or short lives…

But of a brilliant present, which in a way, compared to our framework, has no beginning or end. Time in those terms, does not exist for them — and in the deepest of terms, a life’s quality on a human scale cannot be judged primarily in terms of its length, either. Time is in the present for an animal, in a way its life was eternal to it, whether it lived 10 months or 10 years, or whatever.

13

There is no such thing as a cat consciousness, basically speaking, or a bird consciousness. In those terms, there are instead simply consciousnesses that choose to take certain focuses.

I want to avoid tales of the transmigration of the souls of men to animals, say — a badly distorted version of something else entirely. If there is no consciousness ‘tailored’ to be a cat’s or a dog’s then there is no prepackaged, predestined, particular consciousness that is meant to be human, either.

a17

The cellular announcement is made that the strong possibility exist, for the birth and death of each cell is known to all cells in the world. Cellular communication is too fast for us to follow.

The quality of identity is far more mysterious than we understand, for we assign an identity in a blanket fashion, say, to each living thing. A dead cat for example exists in the following manner: ‘The units of consciousness that organized to form his/her identity as we knew it, still form that pattern — but not physically. The cat exists as itself in the greater living memory of its own ‘larger’ selfhood. Its organization from which it came.

a12

That identity remains vital, known to itself whether or not it is reactivated in our terms. This is not necessarily always the case — and there is great variation — but the cat identifies with ‘the larger organization’ of the litter [that is, with his brothers and sisters, all of whom may be also dead], and the consciousnesses of that litter are together. They may be forming a gestalt, where the litter’s consciousnesses will merge to form a new identity.

 

We could not live without viruses

Nor could our biological reality as we know it exist without viruses.

v17

Viruses appear to be “the bad guys,” and as a rule we think of them separately, as for example the smallpox virus. There are overall affiliations in which viruses take part, however, in which delicate balances are maintained biologically. Each body contains countless viruses that could be deadly at any given time and under certain conditions. These — and I am putting it as simply as possible — take turns being active or inactive within the body, in accordance with the body’s overall condition. Viruses that are “deadly in certain stages are not in others, and in those later stages they react biologically in quite beneficial ways, adding to the body’s stability by bringing about necessary changes, say, in cellular activities that are helpful at given rates of action. These in turn trigger other cellular changes, again of a beneficial nature.

As an example from another field, consider poisons. Belladona can be quite deadly, yet small doses of it were known to aid the body in disease conditions.

v1

The viruses in the body have a social, cooperative existence. Their effects become deadly only under certain conditions. The viruses must be triggered into destructive activity, and this happens only at a certain point, when the individual involved is actively seeking either death or a crisis situation biologically.

The initial contagion in such cases is always emotional and mental. Social conditions are usually involved, so that an individual is, say, at the lower end of a poor social environment, a seeming victim of it, or in a situation where his individual values as a social member is severely weakened.

t3

In the same way that a member of such a society can go [askew], blow his stack, go overboard, commit antisocial acts, so in the same fashion such a person can instead trigger the viruses, wreck their biological social order, so that some of them suddenly become deadly, or run [amok]. So of course the resulting diseases are infectious. To that degree they are social diseases. It is not so much that a virus, say, suddenly turns destructive — though it does — as it is that the entire cooperative structure within which all the viruses are involved becomes insecure and threatened.

Viruses mutate. Such is often the case. It seems quite scientific to believe in inoculations against such dangerous diseases — and certainly, scientifically, inoculations seem to work. People in our time right now are not plagued by smallpox, for example. Some cultures have believed that illnesses were caused by demons. Medicine men, through certain ceremonies, would try to rid the body of the demons — and those methods worked also. The belief system was tight and accepted, and it only began to fail when societies encountered “civilized views.”

v82

If we call the demons “negative beliefs,” however, then we have taken strides forward. People continue to die of diseases. Many of our scientific procedures, including inoculations, of themselves “cause” new diseases. It does not help a patient inoculated against smallpox and polio if [eventually] he/she dies as a result of his negative beliefs.

What I have said about viruses applies to all biological life. Viruses are “highly intelligent” — meaning that they react quickly to stimuli. They are responsive to emotional states. They are social and usually spread through person-to-person contact. This is why many people try to limit their exposure to these viruses by wearing things like a surgical-mask,” for example. By wearing face masks, and other things similar, people can reduce their chances of getting the virus and spreading it on to others. Their spread determines their scale of life. This usually varies considerably, and some can be inactive for centuries, and revive. They have extensive memory patterns, biologically imprinted. Some can multiply in the tens of thousands within seconds. They are in many ways the basis of biological life, but we are aware of them only when they show “a deadly face.”

v8

We are not aware of the inner army of viruses within the body that protect it constantly. Host and virus both need each other, and both are part of the same life cycle.

Everyhour in every day we get better and better

A suggestion solemnly repeated many times, particularly after the turn of the century. This might sound like a bit of overly optimistic, though maybe delightful, nonsense. To a degree, however, that suggestion worked for millions of people. It was not a cure-all. It did not help those who believed in the basic untrustworthiness of their own natures. The suggestion was far from a bit of fluff, however, for it could serve — and it did — as a framework about which new beliefs could rally.

paa

We often have in our society the opposite suggestion, however, given quite regularly: “Everyday, in every way, I am growing worse, and so is the world.” We have meditations for disaster, beliefs that invite private and mass tragedies. They are usually masked by the polite clothing of conventional acceptance. Many thousands may die in a particular battle or war, for example. The deaths are accepted almost as a matter of course. These are victims of war, without question. It seldom occurs to anyone that these are victims of beliefs — since the guns are quite real, and the bombs and the combat.

The enemy is obvious. His intentions are evil. Wars are basically examples of mass suicide — embarked upon, however, with all of the battle’s paraphernalia, carried out through mass suggestion, and through the nation’s greatest resources, by men who are convinced that the universe is unsafe, that the self cannot be trusted, and that strangers are always hostile. We take it for granted that the species is aggressively combative. We must out-think the enemy nation before we ourselves are destroyed. These paranoiac tendencies are largely hidden beneath man’s nationalistic banners.

ca1

“The end justifies the means.” This is another belief, most damaging. Religious wars always have paranoiac tendencies, for the fanatic always fears conflicting beliefs, and systems that embrace them.

We have occasional epidemics that flare up, with victims left dead. Partially, these are also victims of beliefs, for we believe that we have natural body is the natural prey of viruses and diseases over which we have no personal control, except as it is medically provided. In the medical profession, the overall suggestion that operates is one that emphasizes and exaggerates the body’s vulnerability, and plays down its natural healing abilities. People die when they are ready to die, for reasons that are their own. No person dies without a reason. We are not taught that, however, so people do not recognize their own reasons for dying, and are not taught to recognize their own reasons for living — because we are told the life itself is an accident in a cosmic game of chance.

s7

Therefore, we cannot trust our own intuitions. We think that our purpose in life must be to be something else, or someone else, than we are. In such a situation many people seek out causes, and hope to merge the purposes of the cause with their own unrecognized one.

There have been many great men and women involved in causes, to which they gave their energies, resources, and support. Those people, however, recognized the importance of their own beings, and added that vitality to causes in which they believed. They did not submerge their individuality, and became more themselves. They extended their horizons, pushed beyond the conventional mental landscapes — driven by zest and vitality, by curiosity and love, and not by fear.

m51

Many people lose their lives in tragedies. People willingly take their lives at the command of their leaders. No armies stand outside. Those people succumb to an epidemic of beliefs, to an environment [that is] closed mentally and physically. The villains consists of the following ideas that the world is unsafe, and growing deadly; that the species itself is tainted by a deadly intent; that the individual has no power over his or her reality; that society or social conditions exist as things in themselves, and their purposes run directly counter to the fulfillment of the individual; and lastly, that the end justifies the means, and that the action of any kind of god is powerless in the world.

The people who kill themselves are idealists — perfectionists of exaggerated quality, whose very desire for the good was tainted and distorted by those beliefs just mentioned. For those beliefs must gradually shut out perception of good from experience.

b9

Man/Woman is of good intent. When we see evil everywhere in man’s and woman’s intent — in our own actions and those of others — then we set oneself up against our own existence, and that of our kind. We focus upon the gulf between our ideals and our experience, until the gulf is all that is real. We will not see man’s and woman’s good intent, or we will do so ironically — for in comparison with our ideals, good in the world appears to be so minute as to be a mockery.

To this extent experience becomes closed. Such people are frightened of themselves, and of the nature of their existence. They may be intelligent or stupid, gifted, or mundane, but they are frightened of experiencing themselves as themselves, or of acting according to their own wishes. They help create the dogma or system or cult to which they “fall prey.” They expect their leader to act for them. To a certain extent he/she soaks up their paranoia, until it becomes an unquenchable force in him/her, and he/she is their “victim” as much as his/her followers are his/her “victims.”

dd78

In the Middle East affair, we have “red-blooded Americans” dying on a foreign shore, under a banner of wars, which under certain circumstances have been acceptable. We did not have Americans dying in a bloody revolution, caught among terrorists. We had instead Americans succumbing in a foreign land to some belief that are peculiarly American, and home-grown.

We have American belief that money will solve almost any social problem, that the middle-class way of life is the correct “democratic” one, and that the difficulty between blacks and whites in particular can be erased by applying social bandages, rather than by attacking the basic beliefs behind the problem.

se46

Many young men and women have come to adulthood in fine ranch houses in good neighborhoods. They would seem to be at the peak of life, the product of the best America has to offer. They never had to work for a living, perhaps. they may have attended colleges — but they are the first to realize that such advantages do not necessarily add to the quality of life, for they are the first to arrive at such an enviable position.

The parents have worked to give their children such advantages, and the parents themselves are sometimes confused by their children’s attitudes. The money and position, however, have often been attained as a result of the belief in man’s and woman’s competitive nature — and that belief itself erodes the very prizes it produces: The fruit is bitter in the mouth. Many of the parents believed, quite simply, that the purpose of life was to make more money. Virtue consisted of the best car, a house, or swimming pool – proof that one could survive in a tooth-and-claw world. People may need money to build a lifestyle and maintain those standards (for instance, house renovation or pool remodeling).

Yes, lifestyle could be a necessity of the current generation, but the children wondered: What about those other feelings that stirred in their consciousness? What about those purposes they sensed? The hearts of some of them were like vacuums, waiting to be filled. They looked for values, but at the same time, they felt that they were themselves sons and daughters of a species tainted, at loose ends, with no clear destinations.

t13

They tried various religions, and in the light of their opinions of themselves their earlier advantages seemed only to damn them further. They tried social programs, and found a curious sense of belonging with the disadvantaged, for they were also rootless. The disadvantaged and the advantaged alike then join in a bond of hopelessness, endowing a leader with a power they felt they did not possess.

They finally retreated into isolation from the world they knew, and the voice of their leader at the was magnified merging of their own voices. In death they fulfilled their purposes, merging a mass statement. It would make Americans question the nature of [suicide’s]their society, their religions, their politics, and their beliefs.

Each suicide decided to go along that course.

Paranoia and its manifestations

Paranoia is extremely interesting because it shows the ways in which private beliefs can distort events that connect the individual with other people. The events are “distorted.” yet while the paranoid is convinced that those events are valid, this does not change other people’s perception of the same happenings.

Paranoia is most commonly associated with intoxication and withdrawal symptoms from drugs, including alcohol and cocaine. However, paranoia is seen in a wide range of people for many different reasons. Paranoia can be a feature of another mental illness, like anxiety or depression, but most commonly occurs in psychotic disorders like schizophrenia and paranoid personality disorder. The more severe the mental illness is, the less likely the said person is going to realize that they are experiencing paranoia instead of threat from people, or even the world.

Alternatively, elderly people suffering from illnesses like dementia can experience paranoia as a symptom of their illness. This is due to the way the brain is altered throughout the illness. Paranoia will usually start with suspicious delusions that the person suffering from Alzheimer’s experiences; they may imagine that their family members are stealing from them, or that someone is following them. As family members, it can make it difficult to interact with the person with Alzheimer’s (you can take a look at these tips on Alzheimer’s Communication if you’re struggling with this) and it can be even more difficult to calm the person down than those suffering from mental illness or drug abuse. Unfortunately, treating paranoia in those with Alzheimer’s is hard due to the alterations of the brain constantly.

Whatever the case, paranoia takes many different forms and impacts many different people. Paranoia does not care for whoever it takes a hold on, and it’s not something that is easily fought off.

pa4

What I want to emphasize here is the paranoid’s misinterpretation of innocuous personal or mass events, and to stress the ways in which physical events can be put together symbolically, so that from them a reality can be created that is almost part physical and part dream.

We must of course interpret events in a personal manner. We create them. Yet there is also a meeting ground of more or less shared physical encounters, a sense plateau that offers firm-enough footing for the agreement of a mass-shared world. With most mental aberrations, we are dealing with people whose private symbols are so heavily thrust over prime sense data that even those data sometimes become almost invisible. These individuals often use the physical world in the way that most people use the dream world, so that for them it is difficult to distinguish a private and a publicly-shared reality.

pa3

Many such people are highly creative and imaginative. Often, however, they have less of a solid foundation than others in dealing with a mass-shared reality, and so they attempt to impose their own private symbols upon the world, or to form a completely private world. I am speaking in general terms now, and in those terms such people are leery of human relationships. Each person forms his or her own reality, and yet that personal reality must also be shared with others, and must be affected by the reality of others.

As creatures dwelling in time and space, our senses provide us with highly specific data, and with a cohesive-enough physical reality. Each person may react to the seasons in a very personal manner, and yet we all share those natural events. They provide a framework for experience. It is up to the conscious mind to interpret sense events as clearly and concisely as possible. This allows for the necessary freedom of action for psychological and physical mobility. We are an imaginative species, and so the physical world is colored, charged, by our own imaginative projections, and powered by the great sweep of the emotions. But when we are confused or upset, it is an excellent idea to return our attention to the natural world as it appears at any given moment — to sense its effect upon us as separate from our own projections.

pa42

We form our own reality. Yet if we are in the Northeast in the wintertime, we had better be experiencing a physical winter, or we are far divorced from primary sense data.

The paranoid has certain other beliefs. Let us take a hypothetical individual — one who is convinced he has a healthy body, and is proud of mental stability. Let us call this friend Paul.

pa73

Paul [for his own reasons] may decide that his body is out to get him and punish him, rather than say, the FBI. He may symbolically pick out an organ or a function, and he will misinterpret many body events in the same way that another may misinterpret mass events. Any public service announcements, so-called, publicizing symptoms connected with his sensitive area, will immediately alarm him. He will consciously and unconsciously focus upon that [art of the body,] anticipating its malfunction. Our friend can indeed alter the reality of his body.

Paul will interpret such body events in a negative fashion, and as threatening, so that some quite normal sensations will serve the same functions as a fear of policemen, for example. If he keeps this up long enough, he will indeed strain a portion of the body, and by telling others about it he will gradually begin to affect not only his personal world, but that part of the mass world with which he has contact: It will be known that he has an ulcer, or whatever. In each case we are dealing with a misinterpretation of basic sense data.

pa77

When I say that a person misinterprets sense data, I mean that the fine balance between mind and matter becomes overstrained in one direction. There are, then, certain events that connect the world. Though when everything’s said and done these events come from outside of the world’s order, nevertheless they appear as constants within it. Their reality is the result of the most precise balancing of forces so that certain mental events appear quite real, and others are peripheral. We have dusk and dawn. If in the middle of the night, and fully awake, we believe it is sunrise in physical terms, and cannot differentiate between our personal reality and the physical one, then that balance is disturbed.

pa82

The paranoid organizes the psychological world about his/her obsession, for such it is, and he/she cuts everything out that does not apply, until all conforms to his/her beliefs. An examination of unprejudiced sense data at any point would at any time bring him/her relief.

Paranoia can be a very serious mental condition, that if untreated, may develop into something that inhibits an individual’s quality of life severely. An individual who is either suffering from this or knows someone who is may seek out help and assistance to possibly treat this. Forms of treatment could be the traditional rote of therapy and a doctor, or it might be through alternative medicines such as CBD gummies and other alternative healing therapies, that might be helpful.

Regradless of what option is chosen as a route for possible treatment, it is advised to seek out the advice of a medical professional like a doctor, so as to get some sound advice and treatment if an individual suffering from paranoia should ever need it in the future.

.

The pristine uniqueness of the individual

I strongly state the pristine uniqueness of the individual. I also say that there are no limitations to the self. Many people express themselves through their diamond art, I’ve heard how-to-frame-diamond-paintings framing is a great way to explore yourself through an artistic medium. The initial two statements can appear to be contradictory. When we are children, our sense of identity does not include old age in usual experience. When we are an old person, we do not identify ourselves as a child. Our sense of identity, then, changes physically through the years. In a way it seems that we add on to oneself through experience, becoming “more than we were before.” We move in and out of probable self hoods, while at the same time — usually with the greatest of ease — we maintain an identity of oneself. The mosaics of consciousness are brilliant to behold.

m26

When I speak of mosaics, one might think of small segments, shining and of different shapes and sizes. Yet the mosaics of consciousness are more like lights, radiating through themselves and through a million spectrums.

The infant sees mental images before birth, before the eyes are open. Our memory, it seems, is our own — yet we have a history of other existences. We remember other faces, even though the mind we call the conscious one may not recognize the images from that deep inner memory. It must often clothe them in fantasy. We are oneself. Each self is secure in its own identity, unique in its characteristics, meeting life and the seasons in a way that has never happened before, and will never happen again — yet still we are a unique version of our greater self. We share in certain overall patterns that are in themselves original.

m21

It is as we shared, say, a psychological planet, populated by people who had the same roots, the same ground of being — as if we shared the same continents, mountains, and oceans. Instead we share patterns of development, images, memories, and desires. There are reflected in our physical life, and in one way or another elements of our life are shared in the same fashion.

Painting can be a teacher, leading us through and beyond images, and back to them again. Painting was meant to bring out from the recesses of our being the accumulation of our knowledge in the form of images — not or people we might meet now on the street, but portraits of the residents of the mind. The residents of the mind are very real. In a certain fashion, they are our parents more than our parents are, and when we express their realities, they are also expressing ours. All time is simultaneous. Only the illusion of time on each of our parts keeps us from greeting each other. To some extent, when we paint such portraits we are forming psychic bridges between ourselves and those other selves: Our own identity as oneself grows.

ca47

Only in a manner of speaking, there are certain –“power selves,” or personalities; parts of our greater identity who utilized fairly extraordinary amounts of energy in very constructive ways. That energy is also a part of our personality — and as we paint such images we will undoubtedly feel some considerable bursts of ambition, and even exuberance. The feelings will allow us to identify the images of such personalities.

The paint brush can indeed be a key to other worlds, of course. Our own emotional feelings carry over in such paintings. Encourage the dream activity, and there will be a correspondence between our dreams, paintings and writings. Each one encourages the others. Writing gains vitality from painting, our painting from writing — and the dreaming self at one time or another is in contact with all other Aspects of reality.

m7

If we cannot trust our private self, then we will not trust oneself in our relationships with others or in society.

If we do not trust private self, we will be afraid of power, for we will fear that we are bound to misuse it. We may then purposefully put oneself in a position of weakness, while all of the time claiming that we seek influence. Not understanding oneself, we will be in a quandary, and the mechanics of experience will appear mysterious and capricious.

m41

There are certain situations, however, in which those mechanics can be clearly seen, and so let us examine some such circumstances. A few that I discuss may be exaggerated, in that they are not “normal” conditions in most people’s lives. Their rather bizarre nature, however, throws a giant spotlight upon intents, purposes, and cross-purposes, that too often appear in the lives of quite normal men and women.

When people are convinced that the self is untrustworthy, for whatever reasons, or that the universe is not safe, then instead of luxuriating in the use of their abilities, exploring the physical and mental environments, they begin to pull in their realities — to contract their abilities, to over-control their environments. They become frightened people — and frightened people do not want freedom, mental or physical. They want shelter, a definite set of rules. They want to be told what is good and bad. They lean toward compulsive behavior patterns. They seek out leaders — political, scientific, or religious — who will order their lives for them.

c81

I want to discuss about people who are frightened of themselves, and the roles that they seek in private and social behavior. And discuss closed environments, whether mental or physical, in which questioning becomes taboo and dangerous. Such environments may be private, as in the case of persons with what are generally called mental disorders, or they may be shared by many, in — for example — mass paranoia.

r4

There are religious cults, and there are also scientific ones. These are people who follow a cult that is purely private, with rules and regulations as rigorous as any sent down to a group of frightened followed by a despot of whatever kind. Such conditions exist, and I hope that my blog discussion will lead to great understanding. An introduction of concepts that will privately encourage greater productivity and creativity, and therefore automatically contribute to more healthy and sane social ways.

People die for a “cause” only when they have found no cause to live by

And when it seems that the world is devoid of meaning, then some people will make a certain kind of statement through the circumstances connected with their own deaths.

We will shortly return to a discussion of such “causes,” and their relationship with the person’s feeling that life has or does not have a meaning.

For now, consider a very simple act. You want to walk across the room and pick up a paper, for example. That purpose is simple and direct enough. It automatically propels your body in the proper fashions, even though you are not consciously aware of the inner mechanisms involved. You don’t imagine the existence of blocks or impediments in your way, in the form of additional furniture placed in your path by accident, fate, or design. You make a simple straight path in the proper direction. The act has meaning because it is something you want to do.

There are purposes not nearly as easy to describe, however, intents of psychological nature, yearnings toward satisfactions not so easily categorized. Man and woman experiences ambitions, desires, likes and dislikes of a highly emotional nature — and at the same time he/she has intellectual beliefs about oneself, his/her feelings, and the world. These are the result of training, for we use our mind as we have been taught.

One person may desire fame, and even possess certain abilities that he or she wants to use, and that will indeed lead to that claim. Such a person may also believe that fortune or fame leads to unhappiness, licentiousness, or in some other way brings about disastrous conditions. Here we have a clear purpose to use abilities and receive acclaim. We also have another quite opposing clear purpose: to avoid fame.

There are people who want children and mates, and have those excellent qualities that would serve them well as parents. Some of those same individuals may be convinced that love is wrong, however or that sex is debasing, or that children mean the end of youth. Such persons may then find themselves breaking off good relationships with those of the other sex for no apparent reason, or forcing the other party to break with them. Here again we have two clear purposes, but they oppose each other.

Those who believe in the ultimate meaning of their lives can withstand such pressures, and often such dilemmas, and others like them, are resolved in an adequate-enough fashion. Disappointments, conflicts, and feelings of powerlessness of those who believe that life itself has little meaning. Such people begin to imagine impediments in their paths as surely as anyone would who imagined that physical barriers were suddenly put up between them and a table they wanted to reach at the end of the room.

When we simply want to reach a destination in space, there are maps to explain the nature of the land and waterways. When we are speaking of psychological role of destinations, however, there is more to consider.

Once our body is mobilized when we want to move. It responds to our intent and purpose. It is our private inner environment, psychologically speaking. Our psychological intent instantly mobilize our energies on a psychic level. We have what I will call “a body of thought,” and it is that “body” that constantly springs into action at our intent.

When we want to go downtown, we know that destination exists, though we may be miles away from it. When we want to find a mate we take it for granted that a potential mate exists, though where in space and time we do not know. Our intent to find a mate sends out “strands of consciousness,” however, composed of desire and intent. Like detectives, these search the world, looking in a completely different way than a physical sleuth. The world is probed with our characteristics in mind, seeking for someone else with characteristics that will best suit our own. And whatever our purpose is, the same procedure on a psychic level is involved.

The organization of our feelings, beliefs, and intents directs the focus about which our physical reality is built. This follows with impeccable spontaneously and order. If we believe in the sinfulness of the world, for instance, then we will search out from normal sense data those facts that confirm our belief. But beyond that, at other levels we also organize our mental world in such a way that we attract to oneself events that will confirm our beliefs.

Death is a part of us, even as birth is. Its import varies according to the individual — and in a certain fashion, death is our last chance to make a statement of import in any given life, if we feel we have not done so earlier.

Some people’s deaths are quiet periods. Some others’ are exclamation points, so that later it can be said that the person’s death loomed almost greater in importance that the life itself. Some people die in adolescence, filled with the flush of life’s possibilities, still half-dazzled by the glory of childhood, and ready to step with elation upon the threshold of adulthood — or so it seems. Many such young persons prefer to die at that time, where they feel the possibilities for fulfillment are intricate and endless. They are often idealists, who beneath extraordinary ability — still feel that life could no more than sully those abilities, dampen those spiritual winds, and darken that promise that could never be fulfilled.

This is not the reason for all such deaths by any means, but there is usually an implied statement in them so that the death seems to have an additional meaning that makes parents and contemporaries question. Such individuals usually choose deaths with a high dramatic content, because regardless of appearances they have not been able to express the dramatic contents of their psyches in the world as it seems to be to them. They turn their deaths into lessons for other people, forcing them to ask questions that would not be asked before. There are also mass statements of the same kind for people come together to die, however, to seeks company in death as they do in life People who feel powerless, and who find no cause for living, can come together then and “die for a cause” that did not give them the will or reason to live. They will seek out others of their kind.

The inner mechanics of emotions and beliefs are complicated, but these are individuals who feel that physical life has failed them. They are powerless in society. They think in black and white, and conflicts between their emotions, and their beliefs about their emotions, lead them to seek some kind of shelter in a rigid belief system that will give them rules to go by. Such systems lead to the formation of cults, and the potential members seek out a leader who will serve their purposes as surely as they seem to serve his/her — through an inner mechanics of which each member is at least somewhat aware.

The personality’s innate need to feel that his or her life has purpose and meaning.

Little is said about the personality’s innate desire for drama, the kind of inner spiritual drama in which an individual can feel part of a purpose that is his or her own, and yet is greater than oneself.

in18

There is a need within man and woman to feel and express heroic impulses. His true instincts lead him or her spontaneously toward the desire to better the quality of his/her own life and that of others. He/she must see oneself as a force in the world.

Animals also dramatize. They possess emotions. They feel a part of the drama of the seasons. They are fully alive, in those terms. Nature in all of its varieties is so richly encountered by the animals that it becomes their equivalent of our structures of culture and civilization. They respond to its rich nuances in ways impossible to describe, so that their “civilizations” are built up through the inter-weavings of sense data that we cannot possibly perceive.

in12

They know, the animals, in a way that we cannot, that their private existences have a direct impact upon the nature of reality. They are engaged, then. An individual can possess wealth and health, can enjoy satisfying relationships, and even fulfilling work, and yet live a life devoid of the kind of drama of which I speak — for unless we feel that life itself has meaning, then each life must necessarily seem meaningless, and all love and beauty end only in decay.

When we believe in a universe accidentally formed, and when we think we are a member of a species accidentally spawned, then private life seems devoid of meaning, and events can seem chaotic. Disastrous events thought to originate in a god’s wrath could at least be understood in that context, but many of us live in a subjective world in which the events of our lives appear to have no particular reason — or indeed sometimes seem to happen in direct opposition to our wishes.

in6

What kind of events can people form when they feel powerless, when their lives seem robbed of meaning — and what mechanics lie behind those events?

Organized religion has committed many important blunders

Yet for centuries Christianity provided a context accepted by large portions of the known world, in which experience could be judged against very definite “rules” — experience once focused, chiseled, and yet allowed some rich expression as long it stayed within the boundaries set by religious dogma.

se4

If a man or woman was sinner, still there was a way of redemption, and the immortality of the soul went largely unquestioned, of course. There were set rules for almost all kinds of social encounters and religious experiences. There were set ceremonies accepted by nearly all for death and birth, and the important stages in between. Church was the authority, and the individual lived out his or her life almost automatically structuring personal experience so that it fit within the accepted norm.

Within those boundaries, certain kinds of experience flourished, and of course others did not. In our society there is no such overall authority. The individual must make his or her own way through a barrage of different value systems, making decisions that were largely un-thought of when a son/daughter followed his or her father’s trade automatically, for example, or when marriages were made largely for economic reasons.

se21

So our present experience is quite different than that of those forefathers who lived in the medieval world, say, and we cannot appreciate the differences in our [present] subjective attitudes, and in the quality, as well as the kind of, social intercourse that exists now. For all its many errors, at its best Christianity proclaimed the ultimate meaning for each person’s life. There was no question but that life had meaning, whether or not we might agree as to the particular meaning assigned to it.

Men’s and women’s dreams were also different in those times, filled far more with metaphysical images, for example, more alive with saints and demons — but overall one framework of belief existed, and all experience was judged in its light. Now, we have far more decisions to make, and in a world of conflicting beliefs, brought into our living room through internet, newspapers and television, we must try to find the meaning of our life, or the meaning of life.

se6

We can think in terms of experiments. We may try this or that. We may run from one religion to another, or from religion to science, or vice versa. This is true in a way that was impossible for the masses of the people in medieval times. The improved methods of communication alone mean that we are everywhere surrounded by varying theories, cultures, cults, and schools, In some important areas this means that the mechanics of experience are actually becoming more apparent, for they are no longer hidden beneath one belief system.

Our subjective options are far greater, and yet so of course is the necessity to place that subjective experience into meaningful terms. If we believe that we do indeed form our own reality, then we instantly come up against a whole new group of questions. If we actually construct our own experience, individually and en-masse, why does so much of it seem negative? We create our own reality, or it is created for us. It is an accidental universe, or it is not.

se22

Now in medieval times organized religion, or organized Christianity, presented each individual with a screen of beliefs through which the personal self was perceived. Portions of the self that were not perceivable through that screen were almost invisible to the private person. Problems were sent by God as punishment or warning. The mechanics of experience were hidden behind that screen.

The belief of [Charles] Darwin and of [Sigmund] Freud alike have formed together to give us a different screen. Experience is accepted and perceived only as it is sieved through that screen. If Christendom saw man and woman as blighted by original sin, Darwinian and Freudian views see them as part of a flawed species in which individual life rests precariously, ever at the beck and call of the species’ needs, and with survival as the prime goal — a survival, however, without meaning. The psyche’s grandeur is ignored, the individual’s sense of belonging with nature eroded, for it is at nature’s expense, it seems, that he or she must survive. One’s greatest dreams and worst fears alike become the result of glandular imbalance, or of neuroses from childhood traumas.

se42

Yet in the midst of these beliefs each individual seeks to find a context in which his or her life has meaning, a purpose which will rouse the self to action, a drama in whose theme private actions will have significance.

There are intellectual values and emotional ones, and sometimes there are needs of an emotional nature that must be met regardless of intellectual judgments. The church provided a cosmic drama in which even the life of the sinner had value, even if only to show God’s compassion. In our society, however, the sterile psychic environment often leads to rebellion: People take steps to bring meaning and drama into their lives, even if intellectually they refuse to make the connection.

se23

When God went out the window for large masses of people, fate took His(or her) place, and volition also became eroded.

A person could neither be proud of personal achievement nor blamed for failure, since in large measure his or her characteristics, potentials, and lacks were seen as the result of chance, heredity, and of unconscious mechanisms over which the or she seemingly had little control. The devil went underground, figuratively speaking, so that many of his or her mischievous qualities and devious characteristics were assigned to the unconscious. Man and woman was seen as divided against oneself — a conscious figurehead, resting uneasily above the mighty haunches of unconscious beastliness. He or she believed oneself to be programmed by his or her heredity and early environment, so that it seemed he must be forever unaware of his own true motives.

Not only was he or she set against oneself, but he or she saw oneself as a part of an uncaring mechanistic universe, devoid of purpose, intent, and certainly a universe that cared not a whit for the individual, but only for the species. Indeed, a strange world.

se46

It was in many respects a new world, for it was the first one in which large portions of humanity believed that they were isolated from nature and God, and in which no grandeur was acknowledged as a characteristic of the soul. Indeed, for many people the idea of the soul itself became unfashionable, embarrassing, and out of date. Here I use the words “soul” and “psyche” synonymously That psyche has been emerging more and more in whatever guise it is allowed to as it seeks its vitality, its purpose and exuberance, and as it seeks out new contexts in which to express a subjective reality that finally spills over the edges of sterile beliefs.

The psyche expresses itself through action, of course, but it carries behind it the individual — and it automatically attempts to produce a social climate or civilization that is productive and creative. It projects its desires outward onto the physical world, seeking through private experience and social contact to actualize its potentials, and in such a way that the potentials of others are also encouraged. It seeks to flesh out its dreams, and when these find no response in social life, it will nevertheless take personal expression in a kind of private religion of its own.

se51

Basically, religion is an activity through which man and woman attempts to see the meaning of his or her life. It is a construction based on deep psychic knowledge. No matter what the name it might go by, it represents man’s and woman’s connection with the universe.

Mechanics of Experience

Our world and everything in it exists first in the imagination. We have been taught to focus all of our attention upon physical events, so that they carry the authenticity of reality for us. Thoughts, feelings, or beliefs appear to be secondary, subjective — or somehow not real — and they seem to rise in response to an already established field of physical data.

me26

We usually think, for example, that our feelings about a given event are primarily reactions to the events itself. It seldom occurs to us that the feelings themselves might be primary, and that the particular event was somehow a response to our emotions, rather than the other way around. The all-important matter of our focus is largely responsible for our interpretation of any event.

For an exercise, imagine for awhile that the subjective world of our thoughts, feelings, inner images and fantasies represent the “rock-bed reality” from which individual physical events emerge. Look at the world for a change from the inside out, so to speak. Imagine that physical experience is somehow the materialization of our own subjective reality. Forget what we have learned about reactions and stimuli. Ignore for a time everything we have believed and see our thoughts as the real events. Try to view normal physical occurrences as the concrete physical reactions in space and time to our own feelings and beliefs. For indeed our subjective world causes our physical experience.

me3e4

In titling this discussion I used the word “mechanics,” because mechanisms suggest smooth technological workings. While the world is not a machine — its inner workings are such that no technology could ever copy them — this involves a natural mechanics in which the inner dimensions of consciousness everywhere emerge to form a materialized, cohesive, physical existence. Again, our interpretation of identity teach us to focus awareness in such a way that we cannot follow the strands of consciousness that connect us with all portions of nature. In a way, the world is like a multidimensional, exotic plant growing in space and time, each thought, dream, imaginative encounter, hope or fear, growing naturally into its own bloom — a plant of incredible variety, never for a moment the same, in which each smallest root, leaf, stem, or flower has a part to play and is connected with the whole.

Even those of us who intellectually agree that we form our own reality find it difficult to accept emotionally in certain areas. We are, of course, literally hypnotized into believing that our feelings arise in response to events. Our feelings, however, cause the events we perceive. Secondarily, we do of course then react to those events.

me72

We have been taught that our feelings must necessarily be tied to specific physical happenings. We may be sad because a relative has died, for example, or because we have lost a job, or because we have been rebuffed by a lover, or for any number of other accepted reasons. We are told that our feelings must be in response to events that are happening, or have happened. Often, of course, our feelings “happen ahead of time,” because those feelings are the initial realities from which events flow.

A relative might be ready to die, though no exterior sign has been given. The relative’s feelings might well be mixed, containing portions of relief and sadness, which we might then perceive — but the primary events are subjective.

mer5

It is somewhat of a psychological trick, in our day and age, to come to the realization that we do in fact form our experience and our world, simply because the weight of evidence seems to be so loaded at the other end, because of our habits or perception. The realization is like one that comes at one time or another to many people in the dream state, when suddenly they “awaken” while still in the dream, realizing first of all that they are dreaming, and secondarily that they are themselves creating the experienced drama.

To understand that we create our own reality requires that same kind of “awakening” from the normal awake state — at least for many people. Some of course have this knack more than others. The realization itself does indeed change “the rules of the game” as far as we are concerned to a rather considerable degree.

me72

As long as we believe that either good events or bad ones are meted out by a personified God as the reward or punishment for our actions, or on the other hand that events are largely meaningless, chaotic, subjective knots in the tangled web of an accidental Darwinian world, then we cannot consciously understand our own creativity, or play the role in the universe that we are capable of playing as individuals or as a species. We will instead live in a world where events happen to us, in which we must do sacrifice to the gods of one kind or another, or see ourselves as victims of an uncaring nature.

While still preserving the integrity of physical events as we understand them, [each of] us must alter the focus of our attention to some extent, so that we begin to perceive the connections between our subjective reality at any given time, and those events that we perceive at any given time. We are the initiator of those events.

mee9

This recognition does indeed involve a new performance on the part of our own consciousness, a mental and imaginative leap that gives us control and direction over achievements that we have always performed, though without our conscious awareness.

Early man had such an identification of subjective and objective realities. As a species, however, we have developed what can almost be called a secondary nature — a world of technology in which we also now have our existence, and complicated social structures have emerged from it. To develop that kind of structure necessitated a division between subjective and objective worlds. Now, however, it is important that we realize our position, and accomplish the manipulation of consciousness that will allow us to take true conscious responsibility for our actions and our experience.

meo78

We can “come awake” from our normal waking state, and that is the natural next step for consciousness to follow — one for which our biology has already equipped us. Indeed, each person does attain that recognition now and then. It brings triumphs and challenges as well. In those areas where we are not, remind ourselves that we are involved in a learning process; we are daring enough to accept the responsibility for our actions.

Look clearly, at the ways in which our private world causes our daily experience, and how it merges with the experience of others.

me14

Because of our individual and joint intuitive understanding and intellectual discrimination, we were able from an early age to clearly perceive the difficulties of our fellows. This helped incite stimuli that made us question the entire framework of our civilization. We are able to do something few people can: leap intuitively and mentally above our own period — to discard intellectually and mentally, and sometimes emotionally, the short-sighted, unfortunate religious scientific, and social beliefs of our fellows.

mee23

Many of those old beliefs still have an emotional hold, however, and some helpful beliefs have also been overdone, or carried on too long. Because we can see so clearly the failings of our age, we each have a tendency to exaggerate them, or rather to concentrate upon them, so that we do not have an emotional feeling of safety. We react by setting up defenses.

Resurrection and then…

According to ordinary teaching Christ’s resurrection from the dead took place on Easter Sunday, the third day following his crucifixion (on Friday), while his ascension into heaven transpired at an indefinite time — up to 40 days later, as stated in the writings of St. Luke in the Acts of the Apostles (AA 1:10). Christ’s resurrection and ascension took place of the same day is contrary to popular belief.

ch32

Telescope the two events into one or refer to them together, as if the distinction didn’t exist . Implying that the ascension was the main issue in the Christ story, rather than the resurrection, or telling us that the two events are so intertwined thematically as to be treated as one.

ch1

Of the four Gospels (according to Mark, Matthew, Luke, and John), some scholars believe that Luke and John can be read as stating that Christ’s resurrection and ascension took place on the same day. Yet in Acts, Luke postulates the 40-day interval between the two events. (Originally Luke composed his Gospel and Acts as one treatise; the two were separated early in the second century.) Out of such contradictions as those implied in Luke’s case, however, confusion and opposing opinions reign when one studies the Gospels and related material. Christ himself left no written records, nor are there any eyewitness or contemporary accounts of his life. Most authorities still believe that the Gospels were written between A.D. 65 and 110. Since Christ was presumably crucified around A.D. 30, this means that some 35-40 years passed before the advent of Mark’s account. There are many consistencies in the Gospels, but also according to Matthew and John are now being questioned. A study of the New Testament books alone can quickly lead one into a maze of questions: Why isn’t the resurrection itself described? Why are there so few references to the ascension? Matthew doesn’t mention it at all in his Gospel, for example; and Paul alludes to it only once (1 Timothy 3:16) in his writings. Is the Gospel according to Luke merely schematic, rather than chronological? If time (as much as 40 days) did elapse between Christ’s resurrection and ascension, where was he physically during all of that period, other than on the few occasions cited in the Gospel and in Acts, when on various occasions he revealed himself to the women who discovered his empty tomb, to the apostles, and to some others? Sometimes Christ appeared as an apparition — “We could not have a world in which the newly risen dead mixed with the living. An existence in a spiritual realm had to follow such a resurrection.”

ch9

In my opinion, I am not saying that Christ did rise from the dead or ascend into heaven, but I am referring to Christianity’s interpretation of its own creative Christ story. I maintain that Christ wasn’t crucified to begin with, in the facts of history, there was no crucifixion, resurrection, or ascension. In terms of history, there was no biblical Christ. In the terms of the biblical drama, however, Christ was crucified.

It was the Jewish tradition that nourished the new religion in its early stages. Christ, as we know, was a common name, so when I say that there was a man named Christ involved in those events, I do not mean to say that he was the biblical Christ. His life was one of those that were finally used to compose the composite image of the biblical Christ.

The animals do have imagination

Yet man and woman is so gifted that he or she directs his or her experiences and forms his or her civilizations largely through the use of his or her imaginative abilities.

na58

We do not understand this point clearly at all, but our social organizations, our governments — these are based upon imaginative principles. The basis of our most intimate experience, the framework behind all of our organized structures, rest upon a reality that is not considered valid by the very institutions that are formed through its auspices.

It is now bearing Easter, and the yearly commemoration of what is considered historic fact: the [resurrection and] ascension of Christ into heaven. Untold millions have in one way or another commemorated that occasion through the centuries. Private lives have merged with public sentiment and religious fervor. There have been numberless villages festivals, or intimate family gatherings, and church services performed on Easter Sundays now forgotten. There have been bloody wars fought on the same account, and private persecutions in which those who did not agree with one or another’s religious dogmas were quite simply killed “for the good of their souls.”

na8

There have been spiritual rebirths and regenerations — and ungodly slaughter as well, as a result of the meaning of Easter. Blood and flesh have certainly been touched, then, and lives changed in that regard.

All of those religious and political structures that we certainly recognize as valid, arising from the “event” of Christ’s ascension, existed — and do exist — because of an idea. The idea was the result of a spectacular act of the imagination that then leapt upon the historical landscape, highlighting all of the events of the time, so that they became illuminated indeed with a blessed and unearthly light.

na9

The idea of man’s and woman’s survival of death was not new. The idea of a god’s “descent” to earth was ancient. The old religious myths fit a different kind of people, however, and lasted for as many centuries in the past as Christianity has reached into the future. The miraculous merging of imagination with historical time, however, became less and less synchronized, so that only r-i-t-e-s remained and the old gods seized the imagination no longer. The time was ripe for Christianity.

Because man and woman has not understood the characteristics of the world of imagination, he has thus far always insisted upon turning his or her myth into historical fact, for he considers the factual world alone as the real one. A man and woman, literally of flesh and blood, must then prove beyond all doubt that each and every other [human being} survive death — by dying, of course, and then by rising, physically-perceived, into heaven. Each man does survive death, and each woman, but only such a literal-minded species would insist upon the physical death of a god-man as “proof of the pudding.”

a7

Again, Christ was not crucified. The historical Christ, as he is thought of, was a man illuminated by psychic realities, touched with the infinite realization that any one given individual was, by virtue of his or her existence, a contact between All That Is and humankind.

Christ saw that in each person divinity and humanity met — and that man and woman survived death by virtue of his or her existence within the divine. Without exception, all of the horrors connected with Christianity’s name came from “following the letter rather than the spirit of the law,” or by insistence upon literal interpretations — while spiritual, imaginative concepts beneath were ignored.

na53

Again, man and woman directs his or her existence through the use of his or her imagination — a feat that does distinguish him or her from the animals. What connects people and separates them is the power of idea and the force of imagination. Patriotism, family loyalty, political affiliations — the ideas behind these have the greatest practical applications in our world. We project ourselves into time like children through freely imagining our growth. We instantly color physical experience and nature itself with the tints of our unique imaginative processes. Unless we think quite consistently — and deeply — the importance of the imagination quite escapes us, and yet it literally forms the world that we experience and the mass world in which we live.

The theory of evolution, for instance, is an imaginative construct, and yet through its lights some generations now have viewed their world. It is not only that we think of ourselves differently, but we actually experience a different kind of self. Our institutions change their aspects accordingly, so that experience fits the beliefs that we have about it. We act in certain ways. We view the entire universe in a fashion that did not exist before, so that imagination and belief intangibly structure our subjective experience and our objective circumstances.

na66

In all of the other imaginative constructs, for example, whatever their merits and disadvantages, man and woman felt themselves be a part of a plan. The planner might be God, or nature itself, or man or woman within nature or nature within man or woman. There might be many gods or one, but there was a meaning in the inverse. Even the idea of fate gave man and woman something to act against, and roused him or her to action.

The idea of a meaningless universe, however, is in itself a highly creative imaginative act. Animals, for example, could not imagine such an idiocy, so that the theory shows the incredible accomplishment of an obviously ordered mind and intellect that can imagine itself to be the result of non-order, or chaos — [we have] a creature who is capable of “mapping” its own brain, imagining that the brain’s fantastic regulated order could emerge from a reality that itself has no meaning. Indeed, then, the theory actually says that the ordered universe magically emerged — and evolutions must certainly believe in a God of Chance somewhere, or in Coincidence , for their theories would make no sense at all otherwise.

na22

The world of the imagination is indeed our contact with our own source. Its characteristics are the closest to those in Conscious-mind-2 that we can presently encounter. Our experience of history, of the days of our life, is invisibly formed by those ideas that exist in the imagination only, and then are projected upon the physical world. This applies to our individual beliefs about oneself and the way we see oneself in our imagination. We are having wars between the Jews and the Arabs and the Christians once again, because emphasis is put upon literal interpretations of spiritual truths.

In each person the imaginative world, its force and powers, merges into historical reality. In each person, the ultimate and unassailable and unquenchable power of All That Is is individualized, and dwells in time. Man’s and woman’s imagination can carry him or her into those other realms — but when he or she tries to squeeze those truths into frameworks too small, he or she distorts and bends inner realities so that they become jagged dogmas.

na21

The latest growth of fundamentalist has arisen as a countermeasure against the theories of evolution. We have, then, an overcompensation, for in the Darwinian world there was no meaning and no laws. There were no standards of right or wrong, so that large portions of the people felt rootless.

The [fundamentalists] returned to an authoritarian religion in which the slightest act must be regulated. They gave release, and they are giving release, to the emotions, and thus rebelling against scientific intellectualism. They will see the world in black-and-white terms, and thus escape a slippery, thematic universe, in which man’s and woman’s feelings seemed to give him or her no foothold at all.

na6

Unfortunately, the fundamentalists accept literal interpretations of intuitive realities in such a way that they further narrow that channels through which their psychic abilities can flow. The fundamental framework, in this period of time, for all of its fervor, is not rich — as for example Christianity was in the past, with its numerous saints. It is instead a fanatical Puritan vein, peculiarly American in character, and restrictive rather than expansive, for the bursts of emotion are highly structured — that is, the emotions are limited in most areas of life, permitted only an explosive religious expression under certain conditions, when they are not so much spontaneously expressed as suddenly released from the dam of usual repression.

The imagination always seeks expression. It is always creative, and underneath the frameworks of society it provides fresh incentives and new avenues for fulfillment, that can become harnessed through fanatical belief. When this happens our institutions become more repressive, and violence often emerges as a result.

na23

If we look for signs of God’s vengeance we will find them everywhere. An avalanche or a flood or an earthquake will not be seen as a natural act of the earth’s natural creativity, but instead as a punishment from God for sin.

In evolution man’s and woman’s nature is amoral, and anything goes for survival’s sake. There is no possibility of any spiritual survival as far as most evolutionists are concerned. The fundamentalists would rather believe in man’s and woman’s inherent sinful nature, for at least their belief system provides for a framework in which he or she can be saved. Christ’s message was that each man is good inherently, and is an individualized portion of the divine — and yet a civilization based upon that precept has never been attempted. The vast social structures of Christianity were instead based upon man’s and woman’s “sinful” nature — not the organizations and structures that might allow him or her to become good, or to obtain the goodness that Christ quite clearly perceived man or woman already possessed.

5

It seems almost a sacrilege to say that man and woman are good, when everywhere we meet contradictions, for too often man and woman certainly appears to act as if his or her motives were instead those of a born killer. We have been taught not to trust the very fabric of our being. We cannot expect ourselves to act rationally or altruistically in any consistent manner if we believe that we are automatically degraded, or that our nature is so flawed that such performance is uncharacteristic.

We are a part of nature that has learned to make choices, a part of nature that naturally and automatically produces dreams and beliefs about which we then organize our reality. There are many effects which we do not like, but we possess a unique kind of consciousness, in which each individual has a hand in the overall formation of a world reality, and we are participating at a level of existence in which we are learning how to transform the imaginative realm of probabilities into a more or less specific, physically experience world.

d41

In a way we choose from an infinite, endless, incomputable number of ideas, and sculpt these into the physical fragments that compose normal experience. We do this in such a way that the timeless events are experienced in time, and so that they mix and merge to conform to the dimensions of our reality. Along the way there are accomplishments that are also great failures — but these are failures only in comparison with the glittering inner knowledge of the imagination that holds for us those ideals against which we judge our acts.

na57

Those ideals are present in each individual. They are natural inclinations toward growth and fulfillment.

We are looking for a state of higher consciousness

A state of higher consciousness that represent a unique and yet universal source of information and revelation. Such a source does exist for each individual, regardless of how it is interpreted. White light is characteristically a symbol in such cases. The vastness.

h133

In our terms, speaking more or less historically, early man and woman were in a more conscious relationship with Conscious-mind-2 than we are now.

There are many gradations of consciousness, and early man and woman used his or her consciousness in other ways than those we are familiar with. He often perceived what we would call the products of the imagination as sense data, for example, more or less objectified in the physical world.

h6

The imagination has always dealt with creativity, and as man and woman began to settle upon a kind of consciousness that dealt with cause and effect, he no longer physically perceived the products of his or her imagination directly in the old manner. He realized in those earlier times that illness, for instance, was initially as much the result of the imagination as health was, for he experienced far more directly the brilliant character of his own imagination. The lines between imaginative and physical experience have blurred for us, and of course they have also become tempered by other beliefs and the experiences that those beliefs the engender.

Very simply here. It is far more complicated — and yet early man, for example, became aware of the fact that no man or woman was injured without that event first being imagined to one extent or another. Therefore, imagined healings were utilized, in which a physical illness was imaginatively cured — and in those days the cures worked.

h12

Regardless of our histories, those early men and women were quite healthy. They had strong teeth and bones. They dealt with the physical world through the purposeful use of the imagination, however, in a way now most difficult to understand. They realized they were mortal, and must die, but their greater awareness of Conscious-mind-2 allowed them a larger identification, so they understood that death was not only a natural necessity, but also an opportunity for other kinds of experience and development.

They felt their relationship with nature acutely, experiencing it in a far different fashion than we do ours. The felt that it was the larger expression of their own moods and temperament, the materialization of self-events that were too vast to be contained within the flesh of any one individual or any group of individuals. They wondered where their thoughts went after they had them, and they imagined that in one way or another those thoughts turned into the birds and rocks, the animals and trees that were themselves ever-changing.

h44

They also felt that they were themselves, however; that as humans [they were] the manifestation of the larger expression of nature that was too splendid to be contained alone within nature’s framework, that nature needed them — that is, men and women — to give it another kind of voice. When men and women spoke they spoke for themselves; yet because they felt so a part of the natural environment they spoke for nature also, and for all of its creatures.

Much is not understood in our interpretations. In that world men and women knew that nature was balanced. Both animals and men and women must die. If a man or woman was caught and eaten by animals, as sometimes happened, [his or her fellows] did not begrudge that animal its prey — at least, not in the deepest of terms. And when they slayed other animals themselves and ate the heart, for example, it was not only to obtain the animals’ “stout hearts,” or fearlessness; but also the intent was to preserve those characteristics so that through men’s and women’s experiences each animal would continue to live to some extent.

h45

Men and women in those times protected themselves and their homes against storms. Perhaps they never got any external help like Water and Mold Restoration Services to deal with the aftermath of the storms. Besides this, do not forget about the havoc wreaked by the storms on their homes– roofs
torn into pieces, windows broken, and the structure of their houses completely destroyed. However, they might have never got any assistance for window or Roof Repair. Yet, they were not bitter about the storm and its victims. They simply changed the alliances of their consciousnesses from the identification of self-within-the-flesh to self-within-the-storm. Man’s and woman’s and nature’s intents were largely the same and understood as such. Man and woman did not fear the elements in those early times, as is now supposed.

Some of the experience known by early man and woman would seem quite foreign to us now. Yet in certain forms they come down through the centuries. Early man and woman, perceived himself or herself as oneself, and individual. He or she felt that nature expressed for him or her the vast power of his or her own emotions. He or she projected oneself out into nature, into the heavens, and imagined there were great personified forms that late turned into the gods of Olympus, for example. He or she was also aware of the life-force within nature’s smallest parts, however, and before sense data became so standardized he or she perceived his or her own version of those individualized consciousnesses which must later became the elements, or small spirits. But above all he or she was aware of nature’s source.

h55

He or she was filled with wonder as his or her own consciousness ever-newly came into being. He or she had not yet covered over that process with the kind of smooth continuity that our own consciousness has now achieved — so when he or she thought a thought he or she was filled with curiosity: Where had it come from? His or her own consciousness, then, was forever a source of delight, it changing qualities as noticeable and apparent as the changing sky. The relative smoothness of our own consciousness — in those terms, a least — was gained at the expense of certain other experiences, therefore, that were possible otherwise. We could not live in our present world of time if our consciousness was as playful, curious, and creative as it was, for [then] time was also experienced far differently.

It may be difficult for us to understand, but the events that we now recognize are as much the result of the realm of the imagination, as those experiences by early man and woman when he or she perceived as real happenings that now we would consider hallucinatory, or purely imaginative.

h33

It seems quite clear to us that the mass events of nature are completely outside of our domain. We feel we have no part in nature except as we exert control over it through technology, or harm it, again through technology. We grant that the weather has an effect upon our moods, but any deeper psychic or psychological connections between us and the elements strikes most of us as quite impossible.

We use terms like “being flooded by emotion.” However, and other very intuitive statements showing our own deeper recognition of events that quite escape us when we examine them through reason alone. Man and woman actually court’s storms. He or she seeks them out, for emotionally he or she understands quite well their part in his or her own private life, and their necessity of a physical level. Through nature’s manifestations, particularly through its power, man and woman senses nature’s source and his or her own, and knows that the power can carry him or her to emotional realizations that are required for his or her own greater spiritual and psychic development.

h52

Death is not an end; but a transformation of consciousness. Nature, with its changing seasons, constantly brings us that message. In that light, and with that understanding, nature’s disasters do not claim victims: Nature and man and woman together act out their necessary parts in the larger framework of reality.

h49

Our concepts about death and nature, however, force us to see man and woman and nature as adversaries, and also program our experience of such events so that they seem to only confirm what we already believe. Each person caught in either an epidemic of a natural disaster will have private reasons for choosing those circumstances. Such conditions also often involve events in which the individual senses a larger identification, however — even sometimes a renewed sense of purpose that makes no sense in ordinary terms.

Getting acquainted with other living members of the family, who are still in time

Many individuals do this, psychologically becoming aware of relatives still living, even though in life they may never meet.

We may feel alone in life if all of our relatives are dead, for example. This might make us want to look here and there in newspapers, death records or online obituaries for clues about past relatives to uncover about our own lives. In the same way, entering life, we often assure ourselves that past friends or relatives are there before us, maybe even watching over us.

rr553t4

A potpourri, it is indeed. Heredity plays far less a part in the so-called formation of character than is generally supposed

For that matter,[the same is true of] environment, as it is usually understood. Our cultural beliefs predispose us to interpret experience in terms of heredity and environment, however, so that we focus primarily upon them as prime causes of behavior. We do not concentrate upon the exceptions — the children who do not seem to fit the patterns of their families or environments, so of course no attempts are made to view those kinds of unofficial behavior.

r18

Because of this, large organized patterns behind human activity often escape our notice almost completely. We read constantly of people who seem to have been most affected by fictional characters, for example, or by personalities from the past, or by complete strangers, more than they have been affected by their own families. Such situations are considered oddities.

The human personality is far more open to all kinds of stimuli than is supposed. If information is thought to come to the self only through physical means, then of course heredity and environment must be seen behind human motivation. When we realize that the personality can and does have access to other kinds of information than physical, then you must begin to wonder what effects those data have on the formation of character at birth, and the entire probable intent of their lives exists then as surely as does the probable plan for the adult body they will alter possess.

il278

Consciousness forms the genes, and not the other way around, and the about-to-be-born infant is the agency that adds new material through the chromosomal structure. The child is from birth far more aware of all kinds of physical events than is realized also. But beside that, the child uses the early years to explore — particularly in the dream state — other kinds of material that suit its own fancies and intents, and it constantly receives a stream of information that is not at all dependent upon its heredity or environment.

On these other levels the child knows, for example, of its contemporaries born at about the same time. Each person’s “individual” life plan fits in somewhere with that of his or her contemporaries. Those plans are communicated one to the other, and probabilities instantly are set into motion in Conscious-mind-2. To some degree or another calculations are made so that, for instance, individual A will meet individual B at a marketplace 30 years later — if this fits with the intents of both parties. There will be certain cornerstone encounters in each person’s life that are set up as strong probabilities, or as plans to be grown into.

ps68

There are bodies of events, then, that in a certain fashion we will materialize almost in the same way that we will materialize our own adult body from the structure of the fetus. In those terms the body works with physical properties — though again these properties, as discussed often, have their own consciousness and realities.

Our mental life deals with psychological events, obviously, but beneath so-called normal awareness the child grows toward the mental body of events that will compose his or her life. Those unique intents that characterize each individual exist in Conscious-mind-2, then — and with birth, those intents immediately begin to impress the physical world of Conscious-mind-1.

d71

Each child’s birth changes the world, obviously, for it sets up an instant psychological momentum that begins to affect action in Conscious-mind-1 and Conscious-mind-2 alike.

A child many be born with a strong talent for music, for example. Say the child is unusually gifted. Before he or she is old enough to begin any kind of training, he will know on other levels the probable direction that music will take during his lifetime. He or she will be acquainted in the dream state with other young budding musicians, though they are infants also. Again, probabilities will be set into motion, so that each child’s intent reaches out. There is great flexibility, however, and according to individual purposes many such children will also be acquainted with music of the past. To one extent or another this applies to every field of endeavor as each person adds to the world scene, and as the intents of each individual, added to those of each other person alive, multiply — so that the fulfillment of the individual results in the accomplishments of our world. And the lack of fulfillment of course produces those lacks that are also so apparent.

ps44

Some readers have brothers or sisters, or both. Others are only children. Our Ideas of individuality hamper us to a large extent. To one extent or another, again, each portion of consciousness, while itself, contains [the] potentials of all consciousness. Our private information about the world is not nearly as private as we suppose, therefore, for behind the experience of any one event, each of us possesses information pertaining to other dimensions of that event that we do not ordinarily perceive.

rrv3

If we are involved in any kind of mass happening, from a concert to an avalanche, we are aware on other levels of all of the actions leading to that specific participation. If buildings are constructed of bricks quite visible, so mass events are formed by many small invisible happenings — each, however, fitting together quite precisely in a kind of psychological masonry in which each of us has a mental hand. This applies to mass conversions and to natural disasters alike.

 

The unconscious is an invisible version of the physical universe

On the other hand, however, it is far more than that, for it contains within it probable variations of that universe — from the most cosmic scale, say, down to probable versions of the most minute events of any given physical day.

psy332

In simple terms, our body has an invisible counterpart in Conscious-mind-2. During life that counterpart is to connected with our own physical tissues, however, that it can be misleading to say that the two — the visible and invisible bodies — are separate. In the same way that our thoughts have a reality in Conscious-mind-2, and only for the sake of a meaningful analogy, thoughts could be said to be equivalent, now, of objects; for in Conscious-mind-2 thoughts and feelings are far more important even than objects are in physical reality.

In Conacious-mind-2 thoughts instantly form patterns. They are the “natural elements” in that psychological environment that mix, merge, and combine to form, if we will, the psychological cells, atoms, and molecules that compose events. In those terms, the physical events that we perceive or experience can be compared to “psychological objects” that appear to exist with a physical concreteness in space and time. Such events usually seem to begin somewhere in space and time, and clearly end there as well.

ps79

We can look at an object like a table and see its definitions in space. To some extent we are too close to psychological events to perceive them in the same fashion, of course, yet usual experience seems to have a starting point and a conclusion. Instead, experienced events usually involve only surface perceptions. We observe a table’s surface as smooth and solid, even though we realize it is composed of atoms and molecules full of motion.

In the same way we experience a birthday party, an automobile accident, a bridge game, or any psychological event as psychologically solid, with a smooth experienced surface that holds together in space and time. Such events, however, consist of indivisible “particles” and faster-than-light perceptions that never show. In other words, they contain psychic components that flow from Conscious-mind-2 into Conscious-mind-1.

ps64

Any event, therefore, has an invisible thickness, a multidimensional basis. Our skies are filled with breezes, currents, clouds, sunlight, dust particles and so forth. The sky vaults above the entire planet. The invisible [vault of] Conscious-mind-2 contains endless patterns that change as, say, clouds do — that mix and merge to form our psychological climate. Thoughts have what we will for now term electromagnetic properties. In those terms our thoughts mix match with others in Conascious-mind-2, creating mass patterns that form the overall psychological basis behind world events. Again, however, Conscious-mind-2 is not neutral, but automatically inclined toward what we will here term good or constructive developments. It is a growth medium: Constructive or “positive” feelings or thoughts are more easily materialized than “negative” ones, because they are in keeping with Conscious-mind-2’s characteristics.

If that were not the case, our own species would not have existed as long as it has. Nor would the constructs of civilization — art, commerce, or even technology — have been possible. Conscious-mind-2 combines order and spontaneity, but its order is of another kind. It is a circular, associative, “naturally ordering process,” in which spontaneity automatically exists in the overall order that will best fulfill the potentials of consciousness.

psy612

At birth, each person is automatically equipped with the capacity toward natural growth that will most completely satisfy its own abilities — not at the expense of others, but in an overall context in which the fulfillment of each individual assures the fulfillment of each other individual.

In those terms there is “an ideal” psychological pattern to which we are oneself intimately connected. The inner ego constantly moves us in that direction. On the other hand, that pattern is not rigid, but flexible enough to take advantage of changing circumstances, even as a plant will turn toward the sun though we move it from room to room while the sunlight varies its directions. The inner ego does not exist in time as we do, however, so it relies upon our assessment of situations with which our reasoning is equipped to cope.

iloop68

Obviously there are objects of all sizes, durability, and weight. There are private objects and public ones. There are also “vast psychological objects,” then, sweeping mass events, for example, in which whole countries might be involved. There are also mass natural events of varying degrees, as say, the flooding of large areas. Such events involve psychological configurations on the part of all those involved, so that the inner individual patterns of those lives touched by each such event have in one way of another a common purpose that at the same time serves the overall reality on a natural planetary basis. In order to endure, the planet itself must be involved in constant change and instability. I know it is difficult to comprehend, but every object that we perceive — grass or rock or stone — even ocean waves or clouds — any physical phenomenon — has its own invisible consciousness, its own intent and emotional coloration. Each is also endowed with pattern toward growth and fulfillment — not at the expense of the rest of nature, but to the contrary, so that every other element of nature may also be completed.

At certain levels these intents of man and woman and nature may merge. I am speaking in very simple terms now, and yet those involved in a flood, for example, want the past washed away, or want to be flooded by bursts of vital emotions such as disasters often brings. They want to feel a renewed sense of nature’s power, and often, though devastated, they use the experience to start a new life.

ilo23

Those with other intents will find excuses to leave such areas. There will be, perhaps, a chance meeting that will result in a hasty trip. On a hunch someone else might suddenly leave the area to find a new job, or decide to visit a friend in another state. Those whose experiences do not merge with nature’s in that regard will not be part of that mass event. They will act on information that comes to them from Conscious-mind-2. Those who stay also act on the same information, by choosing to participate.

When we enter time and physical life, we are already aware of its conditions. We are biologically and psychologically predisposed to grow within that rich environment, to contribute on all levels to the fulfillment of our species — but more than this, to add our own unique viewpoint and experience to the greater patterns of consciousness of which we are part.

psy31

We are beginning to understand the intimate connections that exist in our physical environment. The psychological connections, however, are far more complicated, so that each individual’s dreams and thoughts interweave with every other person’s, forming ever-changing patterns of desire and intent. Some of these emerge as physical events, and some do not.

The physical universe is the result of idea construction

That perception was not the sort of official sense data recognized by our sciences. Our consciousness merge, while still retaining its own individuality, with the consciousness of the leaves outside his or her window, and with the nail in the windowsill, and traveled outward and inward at the same time, so that like a mental wind his or her consciousness traveled through other psychological neighborhoods.

777

The origin of our universe is nonphysical, and each event, however grand or minute, has its birth in the Conscious-mind-2 environment. Our physical universe arose from that inner framework, then, and continues to do so.

The power that fuels our thoughts has the same source. In a manner of speaking the universe as we understand it, with all the events that it includes, functions “automatically” in its important processes, as our own body does. Our individual desires and intents direct that activity of our body’s spontaneous processes — that is, our body walks across the floor at our command as a result of our wishes, even though the processes involved must happen “by themselves.”

s9

Our intents have a great effect upon our body’s health. In the same fashion, jointly all of the people alive at any given time “direct” the events of the universe to behave in a certain fashion, even though the processes must happen by themselves, or automatically. Other species have a hand in this also, however, and in one way or another all of us direct the activity of the physical body of the world in much the same way that we [each] direct our own bodily behavior.

We are born with the impetus toward growth built in — automatically provided with the inner blueprints that would lead to a developed adult form. Not only the cells, but the atoms and molecules that compose them contained a positive intent to cooperate in a bodily formation, to fulfill themselves, and they were then predisposed not only toward survival, but with an idealization leading toward the best possible development and maturity.

t31

All of those characteristics have their sources in Conacious-mind-2, for the psychological medium in conscious-mind-2 is automatically conducive to creativity. It is not simply a neutral dimension, therefore, but contains within itself an automatic predisposition toward the fulfillment of all patterns inherent within it. ” The universe is of good intent.” It is automatically predisposed, toward the creation of “good.”

The physical universe, like each physical body, is “magical.” The term “magical” purposefully by so confounding what we think of as reason, arousing within us a hint of what I refer to as the higher intellect.

s6

Reasoning by itself can only deal with deductions made about the known world. It cannot accept knowledge that comes from “else-where,” for such information will not fit in reason’s categories, and confounds its cause-and-effect patterning. The power to reason comes from Conscious-mind-2. In the terms of this discussion, we are able to reason as a result of “magical” events that make reason itself possible. The term “magic” has in one way or another been used to simply describe events for which reason has no answer –events that exist outside of the framework in which reason feels comfortable.

Our scientists consider themselves quite rational, yet many of them, at least, would be more honest when they tried to describe the beginning of the universe if they admitted that reason alone cannot provide any true insight. Each of us are as familiar with the so-called birth of the universe, as close to it or as distant [from it], as our own recognized consciousness is to our own physical birth, for the initiation of awareness and sensation in one infant really carries all of the same questions as those involved with the birth of the universe.

n73

The mother could not consciously control the bodily processes that lead to birth. In that truest sense, the birth magically happens, as miraculous in those terms as the so-called initial emergence of life upon the planet itself. Scientific analysis of the brains will tell us nothing about the power that moves our thoughts, or hints at the source of the brain’s abilities. However, the constant activity between Conscious-mind-1 and 2 is constantly apparent in the very existence of our world, and in the relationship involving our imagination, feelings, and beliefs, and those private and shared events that compose our experience.

I do not mean to speak of reason in derogatory terms, for it is well suited to its purposes, which are vital in our reality. It is also true, so that our version of its bound to result in some distortions.

rr674

Nor do I mean to agree with those whose ask us to use our intuitions and feelings at the expense of our reason. Our reasoning as we now use it, however, deals primarily with reality by dividing it into categories, forming distinctions, following the “laws” of cause and effect — and largely its realm is the examination of events already perceived. In other words, it deals with the concrete nature of ascertained events that are already facts our our world.

On the other hand our intuitions follow a different kind of organization, as does our imagination — one involved with associations, and organization that unifies diverse elements and brings even known events together in a kind of unity that is often innocent of the limitations dictated by cause and effect. In those terms, then, Conscious-mind-2 deals with associations, so that within it the recognizable events of the physical world can be put together in an infinite number of ways, after which they appear in our private experience according to directions we have given them though those associations that we form mentally.

s3

The coincidences that seem to happen, the chance encounters, the unexpected events — all of these come into our experience because in one way or another we have attracted them, even though their occurrences might seem to have insurmountable odds against them. Those odds — those impediments — do not exist in Conscious-mind-2.

To some extent or another, our intuitions acquaint us with the fact that we have our own place in the universe, and that the universe itself is well-disposed toward us. The intuitions speak of our unique and vital part in the fabric of that universe. The intuitions know that the universe bends in our direction. Our reasoning can deal only with results of our physical perception, however — at least with the training our societies have allowed it. We have in fact denied our reasoning the results of important data, for we have taught it to distrust the psychic faculties. Children’s fairy tales still carry some of that ancient knowledge.

cb75

So far, I have been speaking of Conscious-mind-1 and 2 separately, and I will continue to do so for our convenience and understanding. Actually the two merge, of course, for our Conscious-mind-1 existence is immersed in Conscious-mind-2. Our body itself is constantly replenished in Conscious-mind-1 because of its simultaneous reality in Conscious-mind-2. Conscious-mind-2 is ever exteriorizing itself, appearing in our experience as Conscious-mind-1. We concentrate so thoroughly upon exterior reality, however, that we often ignore the quite apparent deeper sources of our own physical existence. As a result we deal with the methods of division and categorization so completely that we lose sight of associative organizations, even though we use them constantly in our own most intimate though processes.

 

The myth of creation of the universe, and the creation of public and private events.

The Cinderella fairy tale. According to the definition, this fairy tale is a myth. Surely it may seem that such a children’s tale has little to do with any serious discussion concerning anything so profound as the creations of the known world. And most certainly, it may appear, no scientifically pertinent data about the nature of events can possibly be uncovered from such a source.

psy

For one thing, [the] Cinderella [tale] has a happy ending, of course, and is therefore highly unrealistic, according to many educators, since it does not properly prepare children for life’s necessary disappointments. Fairy godmothers are are definitely a thing of the storyteller’s imagination, and many serious, earnest adults will tell that daydreaming or wishing will get us nowhere.

In the Cinderella story, however, the heroine, though poor and of low estate, manages to attain a spectacular ball, and meet the prince, initiates a series of magical events, none following the dictates of logic. The fairy godmother, suddenly appearing, uses the normal objects of everyday life so that they are suddenly transformed, and we have a chariot from a pumpkin, and other transformations of like nature.

11

The tale has always appealed to children because they recognize the validity behind it. The fairy godmother is a creative personification of the personalized elements in the Conscious-mind-2 — a personification therefore of the inner ego, that rises to the aid of the mortal self to grant its desires, even when the intents of the mortal self may not seem to fit into the practical framework of normal life. When the inner ego responds in such a fashion, even the commonplace, ordinary, seemingly innocuous circumstances suddenly become charged with a new vitality, and appear to “work for” the individual involved. If you are reading this blog you are already too old to clearly remember the constant fantasies of our early childhood. Children however know quite well, automatically, that they have a strong hand in the creation of events that then seem to happen to them.

They experiment very often, and quite secretly, since their elders are at the same time trying to make the children conform to a given concrete reality that is more or less already mass-produced for them.

o4

Children experiment with the creation of joyful and frightening events, trying to ascertain for themselves the nature of their control over their own experience. They imagine joyful and terrifying experiences. They are in fact fascinated by the effects that their thoughts, feelings, and purposes. If they create “bogeymen or bogeywomen,” then they can cause them to disappear also. If their thoughts can cause them to become ill, then there is no real reason for them to fear illness, for it if their own creation. Their learning process is nipped in the bud, however. By the time we are adults, its certainly seems that we are a subjective being in an objective universe, at the mercy of others, and with only the most superficial control over the events of our lives.

The tale of Cinderella becomes a fantasy, a delusion, or even a story about sexual awakening, in Freudian terms. The disappointments we have faced indeed make such a tale seem to be a direct contradiction to life’s realities. To some extent or another, however, the child in us remembers a certain sense of mastery only half realized, of power nearly grasped, then seemingly lost forever — and a dimension of existence in which dreams quite literally came true. The child in us sensed more, of course: It sensed its own greater reality in another framework entirely, from which it had only lately emerged — yet with which it was intimately connected. It felt itself surround, then by the greater realities of Conascious-mind-2.

n776

The child knew “that it came from somewhere else — not by chance but by design. The child knew that in one way or another its most intimate thoughts, dreams, and gestures were as connected with the natural world as blades of grass are to a field. The child knew it was unique and utterly original event or being that on the one hand was its own focus, and that on the other hand belonged to its own time and and season. In fact, children let little escape them, so that, again, they experiment constantly in an effort to discover not only the effect of their thoughts and intents and wishes upon others, but the degree to which others influence their own behavior. To that extent, they deal rather directly with probabilities in a way quite foreign to adults behavior.

In a fashion, they make quicker deductions than adults, and often truer ones, because they are not conditioned by a past of structured memory. Their subjective experience then brings them in rather direct contact with the methods by which events are formed.

cc89

Children understand the importance of symbols, and they use them constantly to protect themselves — not from their own reality but from the adult world. They constantly pretend, and they quickly learn that persistent in any one area will result in a physically-experienced version of the imagined activity. They also realize that they do not possess full freedom, either, for certain pretended situations will later happen in less faithful versions than the imagined ones. Others will seem almost entirely blocked, and never materialize.

Before children are acquainted with conventional ideas of guilt and punishment, they realize that it is easier to bring about good events, through wishing, than it is to bring about unhappy ones. The child carries with him or her the impetus and supporting energy provided him or her at birth from Conscious-mind-2, and he or she knows intuitively that desires conducive to his development “happen” easier than those that are not. His or her natural impulses naturally lead him or her toward the development of his body and mind, and he is aware of a cushioning effect and support as he acts in accordance with those inner impulses. The child is innately honest. When he gets sick he or she intuitively knows the reason why, and he or she knows quite well that he or she brought about the illness.

il7

Parents and physicians believe, instead, that the child is a victim, ill for no personal reason, but indisposed because of elements attacking him or her — either the outside environment, or [something] working against him or her from within. The child may be told: “You have a cold because you got your feet wet.” Or: “You caught the cold from Johnny or Buffy.” He may be told that he has a virus, so that it seems his or her body itself was invaded despite his or her will. He or she learns that such beliefs are acceptable. It is easier to go along than to be honest, particularly when honesty would often involve a kind of communication his parents might frown upon, or the expression of emotions that are quite unacceptable.

Mother’s little man or brave little girl can then stay at home, for example, courageously bearing up under an illness is the result of feelings that the parents would consider quite cowardly, or otherwise involves emotional realities that the parents simply would not understand. Gradually it becomes easier for the child to accept the parents’ assessment of the situation. Little by little the feelings and bodily reality, erode.

ph15

The child who gets the mumps with a large number of his classmates, however, knows he or she has his or her private reasons for jointing into such a mass biological reality, and usually the adults who “fall prey” to a flu epidemic has little conscious awareness of his or her own reason for such a situation. He or she doesn’t understand the mass suggestions involved, or his or her own reasons for accepting them. He or she is usually convinced instead that his or her body has been invaded by a virus despite his or her own personal approval or disapproval — despite his or her own personal approval or disapproval. He is therefore a victim, and his sense of personal power is eroded.

When a person recovers from such an ordeal, he or she usually grants his or her recovery to be the result of the medication he has been given. Or he or she may think that he was simply lucky — but he or she does not grant himself or herself to have any real power in such an affair. The recovery seems to occur to him or her, as the illness seemed to happen to him or her. Usually the patient cannot see that he or she brought about his or her own recovery, and was responsible for it, because he or she cannot admit that his or her own intents were responsible for his or her own illness. He or she cannot learn from his or her own experience, then, and each bout of illness will appear largely incomprehensible.

ct5

The individual some how could perceive the nature of reality on his or her own by virtue of innate capacities that belonged to the individual by right — capacities that were a part of man’s and woman’s heritage. In other words, there is a slim chance of opening doors of knowledge that had been closed, and we can decide to take that chance.

We can see that each person have chosen the events of his or her life in; one way or another, and the each person was not the victim but the creator of those events that were privately experienced or jointly encountered with others.

o41

The physical senses do not so much perceive concrete phenomena, but actually had a hand in the creation of events that were then perceived as actual.

No chance encounter, could produce consciousness

Or under any circumstances, create the conditions that would make consciousness possible.

c5t

If we think of our world with all of its great natural splendors as coming about initially though the auspices of chance — through an accident of cosmic proportions — then it certainly often seems that such a world can have no greater meaning. Its animation is seen as having no source outside itself. The myth of the great CHANCE ENCOUNTER, that is supposed to have brought forth life on our planet then presupposes, of course, an individual consciousness that is, in certain terms, alive by chance alone.

It is somewhat humorous that such a vital consciousness could even suppose itself to be the end product of inert elements that were themselves lifeless, but somehow managed to combine in such a way that our species attained fantasy, logic, vast organizational power, technologies, and civilizations. Our myths tell us that nature itself has no intent except survival. It cares little for the individual — only insofar as the individual helps the species to endure. In its workings, nature then appears to be impersonal, even though it so consists of individuals that it cannot be regarded otherwise.

cv6

Without the particular plants, animals, people, or even individual cells or viruses, nature has no meaning. Our physical universe, then, had a non-physical origin, in which it is still couched. In the same manner our individual consciousness has an origin in which it is still couched. Conscious-mind-2 represents the inner sphere of reality, the inner dimensions of existence, that gives our world its own characteristics. The energy and power that keeps us alive, that fuels our thoughts — and also the energy that lights our cities — all have their origins in Conscious-mind-2. The same energy that leaps into practical use when we turn on our television and computer also allows us to tune into the daily experienced events of our lives.

It would do us well if we kept Conscious-mind-2 in mind, and utilize it with a bit more confidence, and became alert again to those “coincidences” that always appear in current experience.

cc6y

The uncertainty principle, or the principle of indeterminacy (advanced by Heisenberg in 1927, and part of the theory of quantum mechanics), sets definite limits to the accuracy possible in measuring both the motion and position of atoms and elementary particles simultaneously; more importantly to my mind, for the purpose of this note, the uncertainty principle maintains that there is an interaction between the observer (with his instruments) and the object or quality being measured.

The complementarity principle (stated by Bohr in 1928) resolves the seeming paradox posed by contradictory experiments that show how light, for example, can be regarded as consisting of either waves or particles. Both experiments and conclusions are right — and mutually, exclusive; whichever result is obtained is due to the nature of the particular experiment.

cv776

I doubt if physicists in the 1920s were concerned about the psychological activity of atoms, molecules, or particles, although it seems that Heisenberg came close, when he considered the free work was rooted in strict causality, found a notion like the free will of an electron untenable, even though much earlier (in 1905) he had laid the foundation for quantum mechanics in his special theory of relativity.

The Main Myth

The main myth through which we interpret our experience, is the one that tells us that all perception and knowledge must come to us through the physical senses.

r2emy

This is the myth of the exteriorized consciousness — a consciousness that we are told is open-ended only so far as objective reality is concerned. It seems to be closed “at the other end,” which in those terms would represent our birth.

The consciousness of that myth can indeed have no origin, for the myth precludes anything but a physically-oriented and physically-mechanized consciousness. Not only could that consciousness have no existence before of after death, but obviously it could have no access to knowledge that was not physically acquired. It is this myth that hampers our understanding most of all, and that closes us off from the greater nature of those events with which we are most intimately concerned. That myth also makes our own involvement with mass events sometimes appear incomprehensible.

rr57

There seems to be no reason for many of them, simply because the intricate inner communication systems of consciousness go utterly unrecognized, generally speaking.

I am speaking largely to a Western audience, and so here I am using terms for a particular reason, to explain concepts in a way that will be understood. The inner ego is perfect as a term to suit my purposes. “Unconscious” is indeed conscious — and by conscious I mean that its reasoning is not irrational. Its methods are not chaotic, and its characteristics are not only equal to those of the known ego, but indeed are more resilient and knowledgeable.

rr7l

Conscious-mind-1 and 2 obviously represent not only different kinds of reality in normal terms, but two different kind of consciousness. To make this discussion as simple as possible for now, think of these two frameworks or states of consciousness as being connected by “undifferentiated areas” in which sleep, dreaming, and certain trance states have their activity. Those undifferentiated areas are involved in the constant translation of one kind of consciousness into the other, and with energy transferences. We constantly process those data that come to us in our private life, and that information includes bulletins from all over the world, through our news broadcasts and so forth.

The inner ego has access, to a much vaster amount of knowledge. It is aware not only of its own private position, as we are of ours, but it is also familiar with the mass events of its reality. It is intimately involved in the creation of our own private experience.

rrw34

The inner ego reasons, but its reasoning is not restricted to the cause-and-effect limitations that we apply to the reasoning process. The action of the inner ego within the wider sphere of Conscious-mind-2 explains many events and seeming coincidences that otherwise seem to make no sense within our world. Many realities within Conscious-mind-2 cannot suitably be explained as facts to us in Conscious-mind-1, simply because they involve psychological thickness that cannot be translated into facts as we think of them. These often appear in the symbolic language of the arts instead, and many of our dreams are translations in which the events of Conscious-mind-2 appear in symbolic form.

On any given day the events of our private lives fit within the larger patterns of world events, in which they have their context. On any given night the intimate events of our dream lives also exist in the greater context of the world’s dreams — in which they have their reality.

rr42

The consciousness that we have, as generally described in psychology, is in a strange fashion like the bright shiny surface that responds to sun or rain or temperature, and to its surroundings; but for all of that a psychological fruit that has no pulp or pits, but contains at its heart a vacancy. In those terms we experience only one half of our consciousness: the physically-attuned portion. Fruit trees have roots, but we assign no ground of being to this consciousness.

Jung’s collective unconscious was an attempt to give our world its psychological roots, but Jung could not perceive the clarity, organization, and deeper context in which that collective unconscious has its own existence. Reality as Conscious-mind-2 is organized in a different fashion than it is in the Conscious-mind-1 world, and the processes of reasoning are far quicker. In Conscious-mind-1 the reasoning processes work largely by deduction, and they must constantly check their own results against the seemingly concrete experience of physical events. The reasoning of the inner ego is involved with the creative invention of those experiences. It is involved with events in a context of a different kind, for its deals intimately with probabilities.

rrp8

[Each of ] us, with our beliefs and intents, tell the inner ego which of an infinite number of probable events we want to encounter. In dream state events from both frameworks are processed. The dream state involves not only a state of consciousness that exists between the two frameworks of reality, but also involves, in those terms, a connecting reality of its own. I would like to emphasize that to one degree or another all species of plant and animal life “dream.” The same applies to the “psychological activity” of atoms and molecules, and any “particle.”

There are intensities of behavior, then, in which the activity, the inside activity, of any being or particle is directed toward [the] physical force [that is] involved in the cooperative venture that causes our reality. There are variances, however, when such activity instead into interior nature of reality. We have an inner system of communication, then, in which the cells of all living things are connected. In those terms there is a continuum of consciousness.

e2

To really understand our own connection with the events we encounter privately, and in relationship to others, we must first become acquainted with that medium in which events themselves are formed.

What part, for example, does chance play in our life? Is it chance if we arrive too late to board a plane, for example — to find later that the plane crashed? Perhaps our late arrival was caused by “a chance meeting” with a friend at the last moment, or by a misplaced ticket, or by a traffic jam that seemingly had nothing to do with us at all.

e5

We may have become a part of the drama of a natural disaster, or avoided it as a result of other seemingly chance occurrences. What appears to us as chance or coincidence, however, is actually the result of the amazing organizations and communications active in the psychological reality of Conscious-mind-2. Again, we form our reality — but how? And how do private existences touch each other, resulting in world events?

ps4

This will not be a dry, intellectual exploration, because the intent itself will begin to trigger within our lives the emergence of hints and clues as to our own immersion in Conscious-mind-2’s creativity.

The Idea of Ether

The idea of ether or something like it, had been around since the time of the ancient Greeks. By the last decades of the 19th century, and in line with Newtonian physics, the ether was postulated as an invisible, tasteless, odorless substance that pervaded all unoccupied space, and served as the medium for the passage of electromagnetic waves of light and other kinds of radiant energy, like heat — just as the earth itself serve as the medium for the transmission of seismic waves, for instance.

e1

Late in the last century some very ingenious experiments failed to scientifically prove the existence of the ether, however, and the theory was finally dispensed with for good following Albert Einstein’s publication of his special theory of relativity in 1905.

p821

I think the idea of the ether is an excellent example of how man and woman has always attempted to posit or visualize in physical reality his or her innate knowledge of “Framed-mind 2,”– the unknown.

The Conscious-mind-2 is the medium in which our world exist

It represents the vaster psychological reality in which our own subjective life resides.

s2

That framework has been glimpsed through out history by many individuals, and given many names. If we visit a foreign country, however, we have a tendency to describe the entire nation in terms of the small area we have visited, though other portions may be quite different in geography, culture, and climate.

The individuals who have to one extent or another perceived Conscious-Mind-2 have, then, described it according to their own brief visits, taking it for granted “that the part was a representative sample of the whole.” Plato conceived [of] it as the world of ideals, seeing within it the perfect model behind each imperfect physical phenomenon.

j27

He thought of that realm as eternal and unchanging, a perfect but frozen composite that must indeed inspire men and women toward achievement on the one hand, and on the other reproach them for their failure, since their achievements must necessarily seem puny in contrast. Plato then saw Conscoious-Mind-2 as a splendid, absolute model in which all the works of man had their initial source. Man and woman, according to this concept, could not affect that ideal world one whit. He could, however, use it as a source of inspiration.

Some ancient religions put the existence of gods there, and saw the spirits of each living thing as existing primarily in that invisible medium of reality. Therefore, Conscious-Mind-2 has always been represented in one way or another as a source of our world. Christianity saw it as heaven, inhabited by “God the Father”, His Angels, the Saints, and [the] deceased faithful.

38

Once scientists theorized the ether as the medium in which the physical universe existed. Conascious-Mind-2 is the psychological medium in which the consciousness of the world exists. The word “ego” is much bandied about, and in many circles it has a poor reputation. It is, however, as I use it, a term meant to express the ordinarily conscious directive portion of the self. It is our conscious version of what we are. It is directed outward into the physical world. It is also aware, however, of some of our “unconscious” activities. It is the one we identify with, so it is aware of our dreams, for example, as we are, and it is quite conscious of the fact that its existence rests upon knowledge that it does not itself possess.

As we have an ego, fully conscious, directed toward the physical world, we also have what I call an inner ego, directed toward inner reality. We have, in other words, a potion of oneself that is fully conscious in Conscious-Mind-2. The ego in our ordinarily world, which again we will call Conscious-Mind-1, is uniquely equipped to deal with that environment. It manipulates with rules of cause and effect and consecutive moments. It deals with an objectified reality. It can stretch its capacities becoming far more aware of inner events than it is normally allowed to do, but its main purpose is to deal with the world of effects, to encounter events.

t7

The inner ego is fully conscious. It is a portion of us, however, that deals with the formation of events, that glories in a rather rambunctious and creative activity that our specifications of time and place physically preclude. The unconscious, so-called, is — and quite conscious, but in another realm of activity. There must be a psychological chamber between these two portions of the shelf, however — these seemingly undifferentiated areas, in which back-and-forth translations can occur. Dream periods provide that service, or course, so that in dreams the two egos can meet and merge to some extent, comparing notes like strangers who perhaps meet to some extent, comparing notes like strangers who perhaps meet on a train at night, and are amazed to discover, after some conversation, that they are indeed close relatives, each embarked upon the same journey though seemingly they travelled alone.

In those terms the undifferentiated area is actually filled with motion as psychological transitions and translations are made, until in dreams the two egos often merge into each other — so that sometimes we waken briefly with a sense of elation, or a feeling that in dreams we have met an old and valued friend.

s88d3

Our world is populated by individuals concentrating upon physical activities, dealing with events that are “finished products” — at least in usual terms. Our inner egos populate Conscious-Mind-2, and deal with the actual creation of those events that are then objectified. Since “the rules” of Conscious-M
ind-2 are different, that reality is not at all bound by our physical assumptions. It contains, therefore, the inner ego of each individual who has lived or will ever live upon the earth.

I am speaking of that framework now only as it applies to our world — not in its relationship to other realities. Conscious-Mind-2 is described as the heroic dimension. There is a great give-and-take between the two frameworks — our regular working one, Conscious-Mind-1, and this other more comprehensive reality. We need to understand the creative ramifications involved, for the prime work of our world is actually done in that other wider aspect of our existence.

h4qg

Physically we have at our fingertips, certain accumulations of knowledge, objectified through the passage of information verbally through the ages, in records or books, and through television. We use computers to help our process information, and we have a more or less direct access to physical knowledge. We acquired it through the use of our senses. There is systemized knowledge, where men and women have accumulated facts in one particular field, processing it in one way or another. Our own senses bring us information each moment, and that information is in a way already invisibly processed according to our own beliefs, desires, and intents.

We will ignore as information certain stimuli that another person, for example, will latch on to immediately. Even in our own world, then, our interests and desires serve as organizational processes that screen out certain information. The information available in Framed-mind-2 is in our terms infinite.

my54

It is the source of our world, so therefore it contains not only all knowledge physically available, but far more. I do not want to compare the inner ego with a computer in any way, for a computer is not creative, nor is it alive. We think of course of the life that we know as LIFE. It is, however, only the manifestation of what in those terms can only be called the greater life out of which our life springs. This is not to compare the reality that we know in derogative terms to the other-source existence, either, for our own world contains, as each other world does , a uniqueness and an originality that in those terms exists nowhere else — for no world of existence is like any other.

The inner ego is a portion of the shelf, for example — is the portion of our self — that is aware of our reincarnational activities. It is the part of us that exists outside of time, yet simultaneously lives in time. We form our own reality. The ego that we are aware of obviously could not form our own body for us, however, or grow our bones. It knows how to assess the conditions of the world. It makes deductions. Our reasoning is highly important, yet alone it cannot pump our blood or tell our eyes how to see.

s5

The inner ego does the actual work that brings about the events we have decided upon. In very simple terms, if we want to pick up a book, and then do so, we experience that events that occurred to bring the motion about. The inner ego directs those activities.

If we want to change our job, and hold that desire, a new job will come into our experience in precisely the same fashion, in that the inner events will be arranged by the inner ego. A body event involves the working of numerous muscles and joints and so forth. An event involving a job change concerns motion on the part of many people, and implies a network of communication on the part of all of the inner egos involved. Obviously, then, a mass physical event implies an inner system of communications of proportions that would put out technological communications to shame.

s23

We may then, unknowingly acquire an illness and recover, never aware of our malady, being healed because of a series of events that would seemingly have nothing to do with the illness itself — because in Conscious-Mind-2 the inner ego, knowing both the reason for the illness, and its cure, brought about those precise situations that remedied the condition. Such events happen automatically, when nothing hampers recovery at our end.

s63

The communication between the inner and outer egos should obviously be as clear and open as possible. As a general rule, the inner ego depends upon our assessment of physical events. Our involvement in the private aspects of our living, and our participation in mass events, has much to do with our estimation of the physical situation, and with our beliefs and desires regarding it. A very simple example: If we want to write a letter we do so. There is no conflict between our desires, beliefs, and the execution of the act, so the action itself flows smoothly. If for some reason or another, through a poor assessment of our reality, we believe that such an act is dangerous, then we will hamper the flow between the desire and the execution. The flow or creativity begun by the inner ego will be impeded.

The Christ figure Symbolizes our idea of God and his relationships

The Man we call Christ was actually composed of three individuals who were the physical manifestations of the same nonphysical entity: John the Baptist, St. Paul, and a man historically known as Christ. None of these were crucified. Their roles became blended and distorted in history.

jes

Growing from an infant to a full adult…

Was probably one of the most difficult, and yet the most easy of feats that we will ever accomplish in a life. As a child we identified with our own nature. We intuitively realized that our being was immersed in and a part of the process of growth.

il22

No amount of intellectual information, no accumulation of facts however vast, could give you the inner knowledge necessary to accomplish the physical events involved in that growth process. We learn to read, but the seeing itself is an accomplishment of far greater magnitude — one that seemingly happens all by itself. It happens because each of us is again, indeed a part of nature and of nature’s source.

In various ways our religions have always implied our relationship with nature’s source, even though they often divorced nature herself from any upon or another quite valid perception, but then distorted it, excluding anything else that did not seem to fit. “We are children of the universe.” This is an often-heard sentence — and yet the main point of the Christ story was not Christ’s death, but his birth, and the often-stated proposition that each person was indeed “a child of the father.”

mmi65

There are many later-appended references in the Bible, such as the fig tree story, in which nature is played down. Christ’s “father” was, however, the God who was indeed aware of every sparrow that fell, who knew of every creature’s existence, whatever its species or kind. The story of the shepherds and flocks comes much closer to Christ’s intent, where each creature looked out for the others.

The officials of the Roman Catholic Church altered many records — cleansing them, in their terms, of anything that might suggest pagan practices, or nature worship as they thought of it. In terms of our civilization, nature and spirit became divided so that we encounter the events of our lives largely in that context. To some degree or another, we must feel divorced from our bodies and from the events of nature. The great sweeps of emotional identification with nature itself do not sustain us, therefore. We study those processes as if we somehow stood apart from them.

wps1

To some extent our society’s beliefs allow us enough freedom so that most of us trust our bodies while they are growing toward adulthood. Then, however, many of us no longer rely often upon the processes of life with us. Certain scientific treatises often make us believe that the attainment of our adulthood has little purpose, except to insure the further existence of the species through parenthood — when nature is then quite willing to dispense with our services. We are quite simply told that we have no other purpose. The species itself must then appear to have no reason except a mindless determination to exist. The religions do insist that man has a purpose, yet in their own confusion they often speak as if that purpose must be achieved by denying the physical body in which man and woman have his or her life’s existence, or by “rising above” “gross, blunted,” earthly characteristics. In both cases man’s and woman’s nature, and nature in general, take short shrift.

my19

Such tales are myths. They do indeed have power and strength. In those terms they represent the darker side of myths, however — yet through their casts we presently view our world. We will interpret the private events of our lives, and the spectacular range of history, in the light of those assumptions about reality. They not only color our experience, but we create those events that more or less conform to those assumptions.

Those who “lose” their lives in natural disasters become victims of nature. We see in such stories examples of meaningless deaths, and further proof of nature’s indifference to man and woman. We may, on the other hand, see the vengeful hand of an angry God in such instances, where the deity once again use nature to bring man and woman to his or her knees. Man’s and woman’s nature is to live and to die. Death is not an affront to life, but means it continuation — not only inside the framework of nature as we understand it, but in terms of nature’s source. It is, of course, natural then to die.

myt

The natural contours of our psyche are quite aware of the inner sweep and flow of our life, and its relationship with every other creature alive. Intuitively, each person is born with the knowledge that he or she is not only worthwhile, but fits into the context of the universe in the most precise and beautiful of fashions. The most elegant timing in involved in each individual’s birth and death. The exquisite play of our own inner nature in general — and that identification leads us into deeper knowledge of our own part in nature’s source.
The myths upon which we base our lives so program our existence that often we verbally deny what we inwardly know. when people are hurt in a natural disaster, for example, they will often profess to have no idea at all for such involvement. They will ignore or deny the inner feelings that alone would give the event any meaning in their lives. The reasons for such involvement would be endless, or course — all valid, yet in each and every case, man/woman and nature in those terms would meet in an encounter that had meaning, from the largest global effects to the smallest, most private aspects of the individuals involved. We have made certain divisions because of our myths, or course, that make this kind of explanation extremely important and difficult. We think of rain or earthquakes as natural events, for example, while we do not consider thoughts or emotions as natural events in the same terms. Therefore it is difficult for us to see how there can be any valid interactions between, say, emotional states and physical ones.

p3

We might say: “Of course, I realize that the weather affects my mood,” yet it will occur to very few of us that our moods have any effect upon the weather. We have so concentrated upon the categorization, delineation, and exploration of the objective world that it surely seems to be “the only real one.” It seems to exert force or pressure against us, or to impinge upon us, or at least almost to happen by itself, so that we sometimes feel powerless against it. Our myths have given great energy to the outsideness of things.
In exasperation some of us see nature as good and enduring, filled with an innocence and joy, while on the other hand we envision man and woman as a bastard species, a blight upon the face of the earth, a creature bound to do everything wrong regardless of any strong good intent. Therefore we do not trust man’s or woman’s nature either.

t15

This myth finds great value in the larger processes of nature in general, and yet sees man alone as the villain of an otherwise edifying tale. A true identification with nature, however, would show glimpses of man’s and woman’s place in the context of his or her physical planet, and would bring to the forefront accomplishments that he/she has achieved almost without his/her knowing. I would like to mention some other issues, involving the individual’s connection either with natural disasters or with epidemics of one kind or another, that by definition concern large groups of people,


il73

We form our reality. The statement applies to the most minute and the most important of the events that we experience. Some people believe that they must be punished, and so they seek [out] unfortunate circumstances. They [go] to one event after another in which they meet retribution. They may seek out areas of the country in which natural disasters are frequent, or their behavior may be such that they attract from other people reactions of an explosive kind. Often, however, individuals use disasters quite for their own purposes, as an exteriorized force that brings their lives into clear focus. Some may be flirting with the idea of death, and choose their minds at the last moment.


rtht



Those involved in such disasters — the survivors — often use such “larger-than-life” circumstances in order to participate in affairs that seem to have greater import than those possessed by previous humdrum existences. They seek the excitement, whatever its consequences. They become a part of history to whatever extent. For once their private lives are identified with a greater source — and from it many derive new strength and vitality. Social barriers are dropped, economic positions forgotten. The range of private emotions is given greater, fuller, sweep.
To some extent or another man’s and woman’s desires and emotions merge with the physical aspects of nature as we understand it, so that such storms or disasters as as much the result of psychological activity as they are of weather conditions.
30px;”>
a

Obviously — whatever the appearances — storms, earthquakes, floods, are quite necessary to the well-being of the earth. Both man’s and woman’s and nature’s purposes are served, then, though generally speaking man’s and woman’s myths make him blind to those interactions. People’s thoughts and emotions always give clear clues whenever illness is involved, yet most people ignore such information. They censor their own thoughts. Many therefore “fall prey” to epidemics of one kind or another because they want to, though they might deny this quite vigorously.
I am speaking particularly of epidemics that are less than deadly, though danger is involved. In our times, hospitals, we must realize, are important parts of the community. They provide a social as well as a medical service. Many people are simply lonely, or overworked. Some are rebelling against commonly held ideas of competition. Flu epidemics become social excuses for much needed rest, therefore, and serve as face-saving devices so that the individuals can hide from themselves their inner difficulties. In a way, such epidemics provide their own kind of fellowship — giving common meeting grounds for those of disparate circumstances. The [epidemics] serve as accepted states of illness, in which people are given as excuse for the rest or quiet self-examination they desperately need but do not feel entitled to otherwise.

il77

I do not mean to assign any hint of accusation against those so involved, but mainly to state some of the reasons for such behavior. If we do not trust our nature, then any illness or indisposition will be interpreted as an onslaught against health. Our body faithfully reflects our inner psychological reality. The nature of our emotions means that in the course of a lifetime we will experience the full range of feelings. Our subjective state has variety. Sometimes sad or depressing thoughts provide a refreshing change of pace, leading us to periods of quiet reflection, and to a quieting of the body so that it rests.
Fears, sometimes even seemingly irrational ones, can serve to rouse the body if we have been too lethargic, or have been in a rut psychologically or physically. If we trusted our nature we would be able to trust such feelings, and following their own rhythms and routes they would change into others. Ideally even illnesses are a part of the body’s health, representing needed adjustments, and also following the needs of the subjective person at any given time. They are a part of the interplay between the body and mind, or spirit.

li78

The majority of my readers have come down with one or another disease usually considered very dangerous, and without ever knowing it, because the body healed itself normally and naturally. The disease was not labeled. It was not given recognition as a condition. Worries or fears were not aroused, yet the disease came and vanished.

In such instances natural healing processes occurred, for which the body is seldom given credit. Such healings do not just involve changes in the body, for example, for a physical healing can take place because of events that seem utterly disconnected.

my1124

Some portions of each individual is in direct contact with the very source of its own existence. Each individual is innately aware that help is available in every situation, and that information does not need to come through the physical senses alone. Many illnesses are cured, then, through quite natural methods that not only involve physical healings, but bring into play other events –events that have great bearing on the psychological elements that may be involved behind the scenes. For those interactions we will have to look to Frame-mind-2.

Let us take tours through psychological realities

Or tours through psychic lands rather than physical ones. Such journeys “Take no time” in our terms.

p66

We have a storm. Weathermen or weather women speak of local conditions and merging air currents. We are in a realm where consciousnesses merge. A constant state of growth, expansion, and development. We can travel to many great universities of the mind.

Much of this is difficult to explain, for information and knowledge is constantly transformed — almost completely reborn, so to speak, through characteristics that are inherently a part of thought itself. Knowledge is changed automatically through the auspices of each consciousness who perceives it. It is magnified and yet refined. It is a constant language, yet one that transforms itself. We can exchange with each other a more complicated system of reality than any computer could handle. We do not understand or perceive the ways in which our reality contributes to the foundation of the mass-world reality that we experience. Unconsciously, each individual participants in forming that world. The primary encounter must be a subjective inner one, and intersection of consciousnesses that is then physically experienced.

1

The encounters themselves occur in a Framed-mind-3 environment. That framework of course, again in terms of an analogy, exists another step away from our own Framed-mind-2. I do not want to get into a higher-or-lower hierarchy here, but the frameworks represent spheres of action. Our encounters initially take place, then, beyond the sphere that deals exclusively with either our physical world or the inner mental and psychic realm from which our present experience springs.

Like as motes of dust might be swept along with a brisk autumn wind from one area to another. We are carried above the land of our usual perception so that portions of us glimpse subjective states. These arouse our curiosity even when consciously we are not aware of perceiving them. That curiosity acts as impetus.

p19

Our intents and concerns, our interests, our needs and desires, our characteristics and abilities, directly influence our material, for they lead us to it to begin with.

We want to make the material workable in our world — a natural and quite understandable desire. The proof is in the pudding, and so forth. Yet of course we are also participators in an immense drama in which the main actions occur outside of our world, in those realms from which our world originated — and we are, foremost, natives of those other realms, as each individual is; each being is.

p51

Those realms are far from lonely, dark, and chaotic. They are also quite different from any concept of nirvana or nothingness. They are composed of ever-spiraling states of existence in which different kinds of consciousnesses meet and communicate. They are not impersonal realms, but are involved in the most highly intimate inter-actions. Those interactions exist about us all the while, and I would like us in our thoughts to aspire toward them, to try to stretch our perceptions enough so that we become at least somewhat aware of their existence.

These frameworks, while I speak of them separately, exist one within the other, and each one impinges upon the other. To some extent we are immersed in all realities.

pp86

If we could, try to sense this greater context in which we have our being. Our rewards will be astonishing. The emotional realization is what is important, of course, not simply an intellectual acceptance of the idea. Do not forget the vaster context. Which will trigger responses on our part, increasing still further the scope of knowledge that we can receive.

In our world knowledge must be translated into specifics, yet we also deal with emotional realities that cannot be so easily deciphered. In the atmosphere now, there are hints of those undecipherable yet powerful realities that will, in time, gradually be described in verbal terms that make sense to us.

p2

According to our understanding, our own comprehensions and perceptions will bring other clues, either in the waking or the dream state. Keep our minds open for them, but without any preconceived ideas of how they might appear. Development triggers certain psychic activity that then triggers further growth.

To some extent Framed-mind-1 and 2 is of course an example of an entire idea, for we receive a good deal of information of physical life. Still they must be colored by our ideas of what physical lives are.

p32

Even our concepts of creativity are necessarily influenced by Framed-mind-1 thinking, of course.

Acts of creativity best approach the workings of Framed-mind-2, for [those] acts always involve leaps of faith and inspiration, and the breaking of barriers.

p73

When we are writing, we draw upon associations, memories, and events that are known to us and others, that perhaps we had forgotten but that suddenly spring to mind in answer to our intent and following our associations. When an artist is painting a landscape, he might unconsciously compare hundreds of landscapes viewed in the past in multitudinous, seemingly forgotten hues that splash upon the grass or trees, or as he seeks for a new creative combination. Art is his or her focus so that he draws from Framed-mind-2 all of those pertinent data that are necessary for his or her painting. Not just technique is concerned, but the entire visual experience of his or her life.

Framed-mind-2 involves a far vaster creative activity, in which our life is the art involved — and all [of the] ingredients for its success are there, available. When we are creating a product or a work of art, the results will have much to do with our idea of what the product is, or what the work of art is — so our ideas about our life, or life itself, will also have much to do with our experience of it as a living art.

p23

If we believe in the laws of cause and effect, as accepted, or in the laws of polarity, as accepted, then we will be bound by those laws, for they will represent our artistic technique. We will believe that we must use them in order to, say, paint the living portrait of our life. We will therefore structure our experience, drawing to oneself from Framed-mind-2 only that which fits. We will not have the “technique” to attract other experience, and as long as we stick with one technique our life-pictures will more or less have a certain monotony.

Write and artist also bring more into his or her work than the simple ability to write or paint. In one way or another all of his or her experience is involved. When we pay attention to Framed-mind-1 primarily, It is as if we have learned to write simple sentences with one word neatly before the other. We have not really learned true expression. In our life we are writing sentences like “See Tommy run.” Our mind is not really dealing with concepts but with the simple perception of objects, so that little imagination is involved. We can express the location of objects in space, and we can communicate to others in similar fashion, confirming the physical obvious properties that others also perceive.

psy56u

In those terms, using our analogy, the recognition of Framed-mind-2 would bring us from that point to the production of great art, where words served to express not only the seen but the unseen — not simply facts but feelings and emotions — and where the words themselves escaped their consecutive patterns, sending the emotions into realms that quite defied both space and time.

Now and then people have such moments, and yet each private reality has its existence in an eternal creativity from which, our world springs.

p7

It is not as if that vaster reality were utterly closed to our perception, for it is not. To some extent it is everywhere apparent in each person’s private experience, and it is obviously stated in the very existence of our world itself. The religions, in one way or another, have always perceived it, although the attempt to interpret that reality in terms of the recognized facts of the world is bound to distort it.

Our world, then, is the result of a multidimensional creative venture, a work of art in terms almost impossible for us to presently understand, in which each person and creature, and each particle, plays a living part. Again, in Framed-mind-2 each event is known, form the falling of a leaf to the falling of a star, from the smallest insect’s experience on a summer day to the horrendous murder of an individual on a city street. Those events are not divorced from our reality, not thrust upon us, not apart from our experience. It often only seems to be because we so compartmentalize our own experience that we automatically separate ourselves from such knowledge.

4t

Creativity does not deal with compartments. It throws aside barriers. Even most people who are involved in creative work often apply their additional insights and knowledge only to their art, however — not to their lives. They fall back to cause and effect.

Framed-mind-1 life is, again, based on the idea that we have only so much energy, that we will wear out, and that a certain expenditure of energy will produce a given amount of work — in other words, that applied effort of a certain kind will produce the best results. In the same way, it is believed that the energy of the universe will die out. All of this presupposes “the fact” that no energy is inserted into the world. The source of the world would therefore seem no longer to exist, having worn itself out in the effort to produce physical phenomena. In the light of such thinking, Framed-mind-2 would be an impossibility.

p41

Instead, the energy of life is inserted constantly into our world, in a way that has nothing to do with our so-called physical laws. The universe expands as an idea does. The greater life of each creature exist in the framework that “originally” gave it birth, and in a greater manner of speaking each creature, regardless of its age, is indeed being constantly reborn. Couched in our terms of our world’s known reality, which deal with local properties of Framed-mind-2 as they have impact in our experience.

Men’s and Women’s private roles in the nature of mass events

We must first look into the medium in which events appear concrete and real. The great sweep of the events of nature can be understood only by looking into a portion of their reality that is not apparent to us. We want to examine, therefore, the inner power of natural occurrences.

my84

A scientist examining nature studies its exterior, observing the outsideness of nature. Even investigative work involving atoms and molecules, or [theoretical] faster-than-light particles, concern the particle nature of reality. The scientist does not usually look for nature’s heart. He or she certainly does not pursue the study of its soul.

All being is manifestation of energy — an emotional manifestation of energy. Man or woman can interpret the weather in terms of air pressure and wind currents. He or she can look to fault lines in an effort to understand earthquakes. All of this works at a certain level, to a certain degree. Man’s or woman’s psyche, however, is emotionally not only a part of his or her physical environment, but intimately connected with all of nature’s manifestations. Using the terms Framed-mind 2, man’s or woman’s identification with nature is a strongly-felt reality in Framed-mind 2. And there we must look for the answers regarding man’s or woman’s relationship with nature. There in Frame-mind 2 the nature of the psyche appears quite clearly, so that its sweeps and rhythms can be understood. The manifestations of physical energy follow emotional rhythms that cannot be ascertained with gadgets or instruments, however fine.

my91

Why is one killed and not another? Why does an earthquake disrupt an entire area? What is the relationship between the individual and such mass events of nature?

Before we can begin to consider such questions, we must take another look at our world, and ascertain its source, for surely its source and nature’s are the same. We make some distinctions between events and our interpretation of them.

my39

It certainly seems that our world is concrete, factual, definite, and that its daily life rests upon known events and facts. We make a clear distinction between fact and fantasy. We take it for granted as a rule that our current knowledge as a people rests upon scientific data, at least, that are unassailable. Certainly technological development appears to have been built most securely upon a body of concrete ideas.

The world’s ideas, fantasies, or myths may seem far divorced from current experience — yet all that we know or experience has its origin in that creative dimension of existence that I am terming Framed-mind 2. In a manner of speaking our factual world rises on a bed of fantasy, myth, an imagination, from which all of our detailed paraphernalia emerge. What then is myth, and what do I mean by the term?

my331

Myth is not a distortion of fact, but the womb through which fact must come. Myth involves an intrinsic understanding of the nature of reality, couched in imaginative terms, carrying power as strong as nature itself. Myth-making is a natural psychic characteristic, a psychic element that combines with other such elements to form a mythical representation of inner reality. That representation is then used as a model upon which our civilizations are organized, and also as a perceptual tool through whose lens we interpret the private events of our life in their historical context. For instance, while some might dismiss the story of primitive men and women separating from each other and living individually due to their emotional conflicts as a myth, they forget that this mere myth is something that might have laid the foundation for divorces in the modern world. Otherwise, there wouldn’t be professionals like a family lawyer bradford or institutions like courts or terms like “divorce” in the civilized world.

Remember that when we accept myths, we call them facts, or course, for they become so a part of our lives, of societies and our professions, that their basis seems self-apparent. Myths are vast psychic dramas, more truthful than facts. They provide an ever-enduring theater of reality. It must be clearly understood, then, that myths imply the nature of psychic events whose enduring reality exists in Framed-mind 2, and forms the patterns that are then interpreted in our world.

my156

If someone is caught in a natural disaster, the following questions might be asked: “Am I being punished by God, and for what reason? Is the disaster the result of God’s vengeance?” A scientist might ask instead: “With better technology and information, could we somehow have predicted the disaster, and saved many lives?” He or she might try to dissociate himself or herself from emotion, and to see the disaster simply as the result of a non personal nature that did not know or care what lay in its path.

In all cases, however, such situations instantly bring to mind questions of man’s or woman’s reality and course, his or her connections with God, his or her planet, and the universe. He interprets those questions according to his or her own beliefs.

my62

Myths are natural phenomena, rising from the psyche of man or woman as surely as giant mountain ranges emerge from the physical planet. Their deeper reality exists, whoever, in Framed-mind 2 as source material for the world that we know.

In those terms, the great religions of our civilizations rise from myths that change their characters through the centuries, even as mountain ranges rise and fall. We can see mountain ranges. It would be ridiculous to ignore their reality. We see our myths somewhat less directly, yet are apparent within all of our activities, and they form the inner structures of all or our civilizations with their multitudinous parts.

mmyy

In those terms, then, Christianity and our other religions are myths, rising in response to an inner knowledge that is too vast to be clothed by facts alone. In those terms also, our science is also quite mythical in nature. This may be more difficult for some or us to perceive since it appears to work so well. Others will be willing enough to see science in its mythical characteristics, but will be most reluctant to see religion as we know it in the same light. To some extent or another, however, all of these ideas program our interpretation of events.

In this discussion, we are more or less dealing with the events of nature as we understand it. It will seem obvious to some, that a natural disaster is caused by God’s vengeance, or is at least a divine reminder to repent, while others will take it for granted that such a catastrophe is completely neutral in character, impersonal and [quite] divorced from man’s and woman’s own emotional reality. The Christian scientist is caught in between. Because we divorce ourselves from nature, we are not able to understand its manifestations. Often myths get in the way. When myths become standardized, and too literal, when we begin to tie them too tightly to the world of facts, then we misread them entirely. When myths become most factual they are already becoming less real. Their power becomes constrained.

my33

Most people interpret the realities of their lives, their triumphs and failures, their health or illness, their fortune or misfortune, then, in the light of a mythical reality that is not understood as such. What is behind these myths, and what is their source of power?

my81

Facts are a very handy but weak brew of reality. They immediately consign certain kinds of experiences as real and others as not. The psyche, however, will not be so limited. It exists in a medium of reality, a realm of being in which all possibilities exist. It creates myths the way the ocean creates spray. Myths are originally psychic fabrications of such power and strength that whole civilizations can rise from their source. They involve symbols and know emotional validities that are then connected to the physical world, so that that world is never the same again. They cast their light over historical events because they are responsible for those events. They mix and merge the inner, unseen but felt, eternal psychic experience of man with the temporal events of his or her physical days, and form a combination that structures thoughts and beliefs from civilization to civilization. In Framed-mind 2 the interior power of nature is ever-changing. The dreams, hopes, aspirations and fears of man and woman interact in a constant motion that then forms the events of our world. That interaction includes not only man, of course, but the emotional reality of all earthly consciousnesses as well, from a microbe to a scholar, from a frog to a star. We interpret the phenomena of our world according to the mythic characteristics that we have accepted. We organize physical reality, then, through ideas validity. The physical body itself is quite capable of putting the world together in different fashions than the one that is familiar to us.

We divorce ourselves from nature and nature’s intents far more than the animals do. Nature in its stormy manifestations seems like an adversary. We must either look for reasons outside of ourselves to explain what seems to be nature’s ill intent at such times, or its utter lack of concern.

myu5

Science often says that nature care little for the individual, only for the species, so then we must often see ourselves as victims in a larger struggle for survival, in which our own intents do not carry even the puniest sway.

Video as a mass means of communal meditation

Using television as an analogy I will try to show the ways in which physical events are formed, and try to describe the many methods used by individuals in choosing those particular events that will be personally encountered.

t5

Not only does television actually serve as a mass means of communal meditation, but it also presents us with highly detailed, manufactured dreams, in which each viewer shares to some extent. We will use some distinction here, and so I am going to introduce the terms “Framed-mind 1” and “Framed-mind 2.” to make this discussion clear. Televisions are used for more and more purposes, such as playing video games and replaying footage for a security-camera-systems/home security camera alarm system and the technology is only going to get better and better as time goes on!

We will call the world as we physically experience it, Framed-mind 1. In Framed-mind 1, we watch television programs, for example. We have our choice of many channels. We have favorite programs. We follow certain scenes or actors. We watch all of these dramas, hardly understanding how it is that they appear on our screen to begin with. We are certain, however, that if we do buy a television set it will perform in an adequate fashion, whether or not we are familiar with electronics. This is why some people really enjoy custom controls/wholesale house-audio-video-installation because television is a useful medium.

t13

We switch from channel to channel with predictable results. The programming for Channel 9, for example, does not suddenly intrude on Channel 6. Even the actors themselves, taking part in such sagas, have but the remotest idea of events that are involved in order that their own images will appear on our television screen. Their jobs are to act, taking it for granted that the technicians are following through.

This is also true for streaming services like Netflix. If you enjoy streaming movies and TV shows, you might be interested to learn that there are ways to enjoy content that would not normally be available in your location based on geo-blocking software. As this make a website source link explains, a VPN can open up the international Netflix catalog, granting you access to movies and TV shows, regardless of which country you are in. This is hugely beneficial if you enjoy watching TV programs and films from abroad. Click web safety advice to discover how using a VPN could enhance your streaming experience.

Now somewhere there is a program director, who must take care of the entire programming. Shows must be done on time, actors assigned their roles. Our hypothetical director will know which actors are free, which actors prefer character roles, which ones are heroes or heroines, and which smiling Don Juan always gets the girl — and in general who plays the good guys and bad guys.

t8

There is no need in our outlining in detail the multitudinous events that must occur so that we can watch our favorite program. We flip the switch and there it is, while all of the background work is unknown to us. We take it for granted. Our job is simply to choose the programs of our choice on any evening. Many others are watching the same programs, of course, yet each person will react quite individually.

Now for a moment let us imagine that physical events occur in the same fashion — that we choose those which flash upon the screen of our experience. We are quite familiar with the events of our own life, for we are of course our own main hero or heroine, villain or victim, or whatever. As we do no know what happens in the television studio before we observe a program, however, so we do not know what happens in the creative framework of reality before we experience physical events. We will call that vast, “unconscious” mental and universal studio Framed-mind 2.

t24

We can turn off a program that offends us. We can choose to buy or not buy a product whose virtues are being praised. Television presents us with a mirror of our society. It reflects and re-reflects through millions or homes the giant dreams and fears, the hopes and terrors of events in the most private individual.

Television interacts with our lives, but it does not cause our lives. It does not cause the events that it depicts. With our great belief in technology, it often seems to many people that television causes violence, for example, or that it causes a love of over-materialism, or that it causes “loose morals.” Television reflects. In a manner of speaking it does not even distort, though it may reflect distortions. The writers and actors of television dramas are attuned to the “mass mind.” They are not leaders or followers. They are creative reflectors, acutely aware of the overall, generalized emotional and psychic patterns of the age.

t12

They also make choices as to which plays they will take part in. [Each has his or her} own favorite kind of role, even if the role be that of a maverick. To the actors, or course, their roles become strong parts of their personal experiences, while those who observe the plays take part largely as observers.

We are aware through our newspapers and magazines of the dramas, news broadcasts, or other programs that are presently being offered. In the same way we are aware, generally speaking, of the “programs” being physically presented in our own nation and throughout the world. We decide which of these adventures we want to take part in — and those we will experience in normal life, or in Framed-mind 1.

t6

The inner mechanisms that happen prior to our experience will take place in the vast mental studio of Framed-mind 2. There, all the details will be arranged, the seemingly chance encounters, for example, the unexplained coincidences that might have to occur before a given physical event takes place

On a conscious level, and with our conscious reserves alone, we could not keep our body alive an hour. We would not know how to do it, for our life flows through us automatically and spontaneously. We take the details for granted — the breathing, the inner mechanisms of nourishment and elimination, the circulation, and the maintenance of our psychological continuity. All of that is taken care of for us in what I have termed as Framed-mind 2.

t19

In that regard, certainly, everything works to our advantage. Indeed, often the more concerned we become with our body the less smoothly it functions. In the spontaneity of our body’s operation there is obviously a fine sense of order. When we turn on a television set the picture seems to come out of nowhere onto the screen — yet that picture is the result of order precisely focused. Actors visit casting agencies so that they know what plays need their services. In our dream we visit “casting agencies.” We are aware of the various plays being considered for physical production. In the dream state, then, often familiarize oneself with dramas that are of a probable nature. If enough interest is shown, if enough actors apply, if enough resources are accumulated, the play will go on. When we are in other than our normal conscious state, we visit that creative agency in which all physical productions must have their beginning. We meet with others, who for their own reasons are interested in the same kind of drama. Following our analogy, the technicians, the actors, the writers all assemble — only in this case the result will be a live event rather than a televised one There are disaster films being planned, educational programs, religious dramas. All of these will be encountered in full-blown physical reality.

Such events occur as a result of individual beliefs, desires, and intents. There is no such thing as a chance encounter. No death occurs by chance, nor any birth. In the creative atmosphere of Framed-mind 2, intents are known. In a manner of speaking, no act is private. Our communication systems bring to our living room notices of events that occur throughout the world. Yet that larger inner system of communication is far more powerful in scope, and each mental act is imprinted in the multidimensional screen of Framed-mind 2. That screen is available to all, and in other levels of consciousness, particularly in the sleep and dreaming stages, the events of that inner reality are as ever-present and easily accessible as physical events are when we are awake.

It is as if Framed-mind 2 contains an infinite information service, that instantly puts us in contact with whatever knowledge we require, that sets up circuits between us and others, that computes probabilities with blinding speed. Not with the impersonality of a computer, however, but with a loving intent that has our best purposes in mind — ours and also those of each other individual.
We cannot gain what we want at someone else’s detriment, then. We cannot use Framed-mind 2 to force an event upon another person. Certain prerequisites must be met, before a desired end can become physically experienced.

t29

The basic simultaneity of time is the most fascinating. That “spacious present” holds all events side by side, ready to be interpreted in cause-and-effect fashions by the organizational abilities of our more limited physical senses.

t14

“I have the simple, profound faith that anything oneself desire in this life can come to us from Framed-mind 2. There are no impediments in Framed-mind 2. Framed-mind 2 can creatively produce everything we desire to have in Framed-mind 1.”

The elderly are more susceptible to diseases

That susceptibility is a medical fact of life. It is a fact, however, without a basic foundation in the truth of man’s or woman’s biological reality. It is a fact brought about through suggestion. The doctors see the bodily results, which are quite definite, and then those results are taken as evidence.

n21

In a few isolated areas of the world even today, the old are not disease-ridden, nor their vital signs weaken They remain quite healthy until the time of death.

Their belief systems, therefore, we must admit, are quite practical. Nor are they surrounded by medical professions. We have what almost amounts to a social program for illness — the flu season. A mass meditation, it has an economic structure in back of it: The scientific and medical foundations are involved. Not only this, however, but the economic concerns, from the largest pharmacies to the tiniest drugstores, the supermarkets and the corner groceries all of these elements are involved.

n01

Pills, potions, and shots supposed to combat [colds and the] flu are given prominent displays, serving to remind those who might have missed them otherwise of the announcements [about] the coming time of difficulty. Commercials on television bring a new barrage, so that we can go from the hay fever season to the flu season without missing any personal medications.

A cough in June may be laughed off and quickly forgotten. A cough in the flu season, however, is far more suspect — and under such conditions one might think, particularly in the midst of a poor week: “Who wants to go out tomorrow anyhow?”

n090

We are literally expected to come down with the flu. It can serve as an excuse for not facing many kinds of problems. Many people are almost consciously aware of what they are doing. All they have to do is pay attention to the suggestions offered so freely by the society. The temperature does rise. Concern causes the throat to become dry. Dormant viruses — which up to now have done no harm –are activated.

Coats, gloves, and boot manufactures also push their wares. Yet in those categories there is more sanity, for their ads often stress wholesome activities, portraying the happy skier, the tramper through the woods in winter. Sometimes, however, they suggest that their ware will protect us against the flu and colds, and against the vulnerability of our nature.

nnn2

The inoculations themselves do little good overall, and they can be potentially dangerous, particularly when they are given to prevent an epidemic which has not in fact occurred. They may have specific value, but overall they are detrimental, confusing bodily mechanisms and setting off other biological reactions that might not show up, say, for some time.

The flu season intersects with the Christmas season, of course, when Christians are told to be merry and [wish] their fellows a happy return to the natural wonders of childhood, in thought at least.[They are also told] to pay homage to God. Christianity has become, however, a tangled sorry tale, its cohesiveness largely vanished. Such a religion becomes isolated from daily life. Many individuals cannot unify the various areas of their belief and feeling, and at Christmas the partially recognize the vast gulf the exists between their scientific beliefs and their religious beliefs. They find themselves unable to cope with such a mental and spiritual dilemma. A psychic depression often results, one that is deepened by the Christmas music and the commercial displays, by the religious reminders that the species is made in God’s image, and by the other reminders that the body so given is seemingly incapable of caring for itself and is a natural prey to disease and disaster.

n61

So the Christmas season carries a man’s and woman’s hopes in our society, and the flu season mirrors his fears and shows the gulf between the two.

The physician is also a private person, so I speak of him or her only in his or her professional capacity, for he or she usually does the best he or she can in the belief system that he or she shares with his or her fellows. Those beliefs do not exist alone, but are of course intertwined with religious and scientific ones, as separate as they might appear. Christianity has conventionally treated illness as the punishment of God, or as a trail sent by God, to be borne stoically. It has considered man and woman a sinful creature, flawed by original sin, forced to work by the sweat of his or her brow.

n55

Science has seen man and woman as an accidental product of an uncaring universe, a creature literally without a center of meaning, where consciousness was the result of a physical mechanism that only happened to come into existence, and that had no reality outside of the structure. Science has at least been consistent in the respect. Christianity, however, officially asks children of sorrow to be joyful and sinners to find a childlike purity; it asks them to love a God who one day will destroy the world, and who will condemn them to hell if they do not adore him.

Many people, caught between such conflicting beliefs, fall prey to physical ills during the Christmas season particularly. The churches and hospitals are often the largest buildings in any town, and the only ones on Sunday without recourse to city ordinances. We cannot divorce our private value systems form our health, and the hospitals often profit from the guilt that religions have instilled in their people.

n41

I am speaking now or religions so intertwined with social life and community ventures that all sense of basic religious integrity becomes lost. Man and woman is by nature a religious creature.

One of man’s and woman’s strongest attributes is religious feeling. It is the part of psychology most often overlooked. There is a natural religious knowledge with which we are born. The feeling is a biological spirituality translated into verbal terms. It says: “Life is a gift ( and not a curse). I am a unique, worthy creature in the natural world, which everywhere surrounds me, gives me sustenance, and reminds me of the greater source from which I myself and the world both emerge. My body is delightfully suited to its environment, and comes to me, from that unknown source which shows itself through all of the events of the physical world.”

n74

That feeling gives the organism the optimism, the joy, and the ever-abundant energy to grow. It encourages curiosity and creativity, and places the individual in a spiritual world and a natural one at once.

Organized religions are always attempts to redefine that kind of feeling in cultural terms. They seldom succeed because they become too narrow in their concepts, too dogmatic, and the cultural structures finally overweigh the finer substance within them.

n31

The more tolerant a religion is, the closer it comes to expressing those inner truths. The individual, however, has a private biological and spiritual integrity that is a part of man’s and woman’s heritage, and is indeed any creature’s right. Man and woman cannot mistrust his or her own nature and at the same time trust the nature of God, for God is his or her word for the source of his or her being — and if his or her being is tainted, then so must be his or her God.

Our private beliefs merge with those of others, and form our cultural reality. The distorted ideas of the medical profession or the scientists, or any other group, are not thrust upon us, therefore. They are the result of our mass beliefs — isolated in the form of separate disciplines. Medical men and women, for example, are often extremely unhealthy because they are so saddled with those health beliefs that their attention is concentrated in that area more than others not so involved. The idea of prevention is always based upon fear — for we do not want to prevent something that is joyful. Often, therefore, preventative medicine causes what it hopes to avoid. Not only does the idea [or prevention] continually promote the entire system of fear, but specific steps taken to prevent a disease in a body not already stricken, again, often set up reactions that bring about side effects that would occur if the disease had in fact been suffered.

n117

A specific disease will of course have its effects on other portions of the body as well, [effects] which have not been studied, or even known. Such inoculations, therefore, cannot take that into consideration. There are also cases where alterations occur after inoculation, so that for a while people actually become carriers of diseases, and can infect others.

There are individuals who very rarely get ill whether or not they are inoculated, and who are not sensitive in the health area. I am not implying, therefore, that all people react negatively to inoculations. In the most basic of terms, however, inoculations do no good, either, though i am aware that medical history would seem to contradict .

nnn7

At certain times, and more particularly at the birth of medical science in modern times, the belief in inoculation, if not by the populace then by the doctors, did possess the great strength of new suggestion and hope — but I am afraid that scientific medicine has caused as many new diseases as it has cured. When it saves lives, it does so because of the intuitive healing understanding of the physician, or because the patient is so impressed by the great efforts taken in his or her behalf, and therefore is convinced second handedly of his own worth.

Physicians, of course, are also constantly at the beck and call of many people who will take no responsibility at all for their own well-being, who will plead for operations that do not need. The physician is also visited by people who do not want to get well, and use the doctor and his or her methods as justification for further illness, saying, “The doctor is no good,” or “The medicine will not work,” therefore blaming the doctor for a way of life they have no intention of changing.

nnn78

The physician is also caught between his religious beliefs and his scientific beliefs. Sometimes these conflict, and sometimes they only serve to deepen his or her feelings that the body, left alone, will get any disease possible.

Again, we cannot separate our systems of values and our most intimate philosophical judgments from the other areas of our private or mass experience.

nnn786

In this country, our tax dollars go for many medical experiments and preventative-medicine drives — because we do not trust the good intent of our own bodies. In the same way, our government funds [also] go into military defenses to prevent war, because it we do not trust our own body’s good intent toward us, we can hardly trust any good intent on the part of our fellowmen.

In fact, then, preventative medicine and outlandish expenditures for preventative defense are quite similar. In each case there is the anticipation of disaster — in one case from the familiar body, which can be attacked by deadly diseases at any time, and is seemingly at least without defenses; and in the other case from the danger without: exaggerated, ever-threatening, and ever to be contended with.

nnn9

Disease must be combatted, fought against, assaulted, wiped out. In many ways the body becomes almost like an alien battleground, for many people trust it so little that it comes highly suspect. Man and woman then seems pitted against nature. Some people think of themselves as patients, as others, for example, might think of themselves as students. Such people are those who are apt to take preventative measures against whatever disease is in fashion or in season, and hence take the brunt or medicine’s unfortunate aspects, when there is no cause.

 

 

Even in one life a given memory is seldom a “true version” of a past event.

Events do not exist in the concrete, done-and finished versions about which we have been taught, then memory must also be a different story. Remember the creativity and the open-ended nature of events.

d15

The original happening is experienced from a different perspective on the a part of each person involved, of course, so that the event’s implications and basic meanings may differ according to the focus of each participant. That given event, in our terms happening for the first time, say, begins to “work upon” the participants. Each one brings to it his or her own background, temperament, and literally a thousand different colorations — so that the event, while shared by others, is still primarily original to each person.

The moment it occurs, it begins to change as it is filtered through all of those ingredients, and it is minutely altered furthermore by each succeeding event. The memory of an event, then, is shaped as much by the present as it is by the past. Association triggers memories, of course, and organizes memory events. It also helps color and form such events.

d4

We are used to a time structure, so that we remember something that happened at a particular time in the past. Usually we can place events in that fashion. There are neurological pockets, so to speak, so that biologically the body can place events as it perceives activity. Those neurological pulses are geared to the biological world we know.

In those terms, past or future-life memories usually remain like ghost images by contrast. Overall, this is necessary so that immediate body response can be focused in the time period we recognize. Other life memories are carried along, so to speak, beneath those other pulses — never, in certain terms, coming to rest so that they can be examined, but forming, say, the undercurrents upon which the memories of our current life ride.

d51

When such other-life memories do come to the surface, they are of course colored by it, and their rhythm is not synchronized. They are not tied into our nervous system as precisely as our regular memories. Our present gains its feelings of depth because of our past as we understand it. In certain terms, however, the future represents, say, another kind of depth that belongs to events. A root goes out in all directions. Events do also. But the roots of events go through our past, present, and future.

Often by purposefully trying to slow down our thought processes, or playfully trying to speed them up, we can become aware of memories from other lives — past or future. To some extent we allow other neurological impulses to make themselves known. There may often be a feeling of vagueness, because we have no ready-made scheme of time or place with which to structure such memories. Such exercises also involve us with the facts of the events of our own life, for we automatically are following probabilities from the point of our own focus.

d8

It would be most difficult to operate within our sphere of reality without the pretension of concrete, finished events. We form our past lives now in this life as surely as we form our future ones now also.

Simultaneously, each of our past and future selves dwell in their own way now, and for them the last sentence also applies. It is theoretically possible to understand much of this through an examination-in-depth of the events of our own life. Throwing away many taken-for-granted concepts, we can pick a memory. But try not to structure it — a most difficult task — for such structuring is by now almost automatic.

dd2

The memory, left alone, not structured, will shimmer, shake, take other forms, and transform itself before our [mental] eyes, so that its shape will seem like a psychological kaleidoscope through whose focus the other events of our life will also shimmer and change. Such a memory exercise can also serve to bring in other-life memories. Edges, corners, and reflections will appear, however, perhaps superimposed upon memories that we recognize as belonging to this life.

Our memories serve to organize our experience and again, follow recognized neurological sequences. Other-life memories from the future and past often bounce off of these with a motion too quick for us to follow.

dd78

In a quiet moment, off guard, we might remember an event from this life, but there may be a strange feeling to it, as if something about it, some sensation, does not fit into the time slot in which the event belongs. In such cases that [present-life] memory is often tinged by another, so that a future or past life memory shreds it cast upon the recalled event. There is a floating quality about one portion of the memory.

This happens more often than is recognized, because usually we simply discount the feeling of strangeness, and drop the part of the memory that does not fit. Such instances involve definite bleed-throughs, however. By being alert and catching such feelings, we can learn to use the floating part of the otherwise-recognizable memory as a focus. Through association that focus can then trigger further past or future recall. Clues also appear in the dreaming state, with greater frequency, because then we are already accustomed to that kind of floating sensation in which events can seem to happen in their own relatively independent context.

dd4

Dreams in which past and present are both involved are an example; also dreams in which the future and the past merge, and dreams in which time seems to be a changing ingredient.

In certain terms the past , present, and future [of our present life] are all compressed in any given moment of our experience.

d6

Any such moment is therefore a gateway into all of our existence. The events that we recognize as happening now are simply specific and objective, but the most minute elements in any given moment’s experience is also symbolic of other events and other times. Each moment is then like a mosaic, only in our current life history we follow but one color or pattern, and ignore the others. As I have mentions [in other blogs], we can indeed change the present to some extent by purposefully altering a memory event. That kind of synthesis can be used in many instances with many people.

Such an exercise is not some theoretical, esoteric, impractical method, but a very precise, volatile, and dynamic way of helping the present self by calming the fears of a past self. That past self is not hypothetical, either, but still exists, capable of being reached and of changing its reactions. We do not need a time machine to alter the past or future.

d81

Such a technique is highly valuable. Not only are memories not “dead,” they are themselves ever-changing. Many alter themselves almost completely without our notice. While the bare facts more or less the same, the entire meaning and interpretation of each version differs so drastically that those differences far out-weigh the similarities.

In most cases, however, people are not aware that memory changes in such a fashion, or that the events they think they recall are so different.

d2

The point is that past events grow. They are not finished. With that in mind, we can see that future lives are very difficult to explain from within our framework. A completed life in our terms is no more completed or done than any event. There is simply a cutoff point in our focus our framework, but it is as artificial as, basically, perspective is applied to painting.

dd1

It is not that the inner self is not aware of all of this, but it has already chosen a framework, or a given frame of existence, that emphasizes certain kinds of experiences over others.

 

Medical commercial are equally disease-promoting

Many, meaning to offer us relief through a product, instead actually promote the condition through suggestion, thereby generating a need for the product itself.

i23

Headache remedies are a case in point here. Nowhere do any medically-oriented commercial or public service announcements mention the body’s natural defenses, its integrity, vitality, or strength. Nowhere is our television or radio matter is any emphasis put upon the healthy are not carried out.

More and more foods, drugs, and natural environmental conditions are being added to the list of disease-causing elements. Different reports place dairy products, red meats, coffee, tea, eggs, and fats on the list. Generations before us managed to subsist on many such foods, and they were in fat promoted as additive to health. Indeed, man and woman almost seems to be allergic to his or her own natural environments, a prey to the weather itself.

b6b5h

It is true that our food contains chemicals it did not in years past. Yet within reason man is biologically capable of assimilating such material, and using them to his or her advantage. When man feels powerless, however, and in a state of generalized fear, he can even turn the most natural earthly ingredients against himself or herself. Our television, and our arts and sciences as well, add up to mass mediations. In our culture, at least, the educated in the literary arts provide us with novels featuring anti-heroes, and often portray an individual existence [as being] without meaning, in which no action is sufficient to mitigate, the private puzzlement or anguish.

i7

Many — not all — plotless novels or movies are the result of this belief in man and woman’s powerlessness. In that context no action is heroic, and man and woman is everywhere the victim of an alien universe. On the other hand our common, unlettered, violent television drama do indeed provide a service, for they imaginatively specify a generalized fear in a given situation, which is then resolved through drama. Individual action counts. The plots may be stereotyped or the acting horrendous, but in the most conventional terms the “good” man/woman wins. Such programs do indeed pick up the generalized fears of the nation, but they also present folk dramas — disdained by the intelligentsia — in which the common man or woman can portray heroic capabilities, act concisely toward a desired end, and triumph.

btb3

Those programs often portray our cultural world in exaggerated terms, and most resolution is indeed through violence. Yet our more educated beliefs lead us to an even more pessimistic picture, in which even the violent action of men and women who are driven to the extreme serves no purpose. The individual must feel that his/her actions count. He/she is driven to violent action only as a last resort — and illness often is the last resort.

Our television dramas, the cops-and-robbers shows, the spy productions, are simplistic, yet they relieve tension in a way that our public health announcements cannot do. The viewer can say: “Of course I feel panicky, unsafe, and frightened, because I live in such a violent world.” The generalized fear can find a reason [for its existence]. But the programs at least provide a resolution dramatically set, while the public health announcements continue to generate unease. Those mass meditations therefore reinforce negative conditions.

i25

In the overall, then, violent shows provide a service, in that they usually promote the sense of a man’s or woman’s individual power over a given set of circumstances. At best the public service announcements introduce the doctor as we take our car to a garage, to have its parts serviced. Our body is seen as a vehicle out of control, that needs constant scrutiny.

The doctor is like a biological mechanic, who knows our body far better than us. Now these medical beliefs are intertwined with our economic and cultural structures, so we cannot lay the blame upon medical men or women or their profession alone. Our economic well-being is also a part of our personal reality. Many dedicated doctors use medical technology with spiritual understanding, and they are themselves the victims of beliefs they hold.

rgr

If we do not buy headache potions, our uncle or our neighbor may be out of business and not able to support his family, and therefore lack the means to buy our wares. We cannot disconnect one area of life from another. En masse, our private beliefs form our cultural reality. Our society is not a thing in itself apart from us, but the result of the individual beliefs of each person in it. There is no stratum of society that we do not in one way or another affect. Our religions stress sin. Our medical professions stresses disease. Our orderly sciences stress the chaotic and accidental theories of creation. Our psychologies stress men and women as victims of their backgrounds. Our most advanced thinkers emphasize man’s and woman’s rape of the planet, or focus upon the future disaster that will overtake the world, or see men and women once again as victims of the stars. Many of our resurrected occult schools speak of a recommended death of desire, the annihilation of the ego, for the transmutation of physical elements to finer levels. In all such cases the clear spiritual and biological integrity of the individual suffers, and the precious immediacy of our moments is largely lost.

e21e12e

Earth life is seen as murky, a dim translation of greater existence, rather than portrayed as the unique, creative, living experience that is should be. The body becomes disoriented, sabotaged. The clear lines of communication between spirit and body become cluttered. Individually and en masses, diseases and conditions result that are meant to lead us into other realizations.

Unfortunate areas of private and mass experience

Suggestions for effective solutions? “We get what we concentrate upon.” Our mental images bring about their own fulfillment. These are ancient dictums, but we must understand the ways in which our mass communication systems amplify both the “positive and the negative” issues.

rere

Individually, and as a civilization, we have undermined our own feelings of safety; yet methods to reinforce those necessarily feelings of biological integrity and spiritual comprehension that can vastly increase our spiritual and physical existence.

Our beliefs have generated feelings of unworth. Having artificially separated ourselves from nature, we do not trust it, nut often experience it as as adversary. Our religions granted man a soul, while denying any to other species. Our bodies then were relegated to nature and our souls to god, who stood immaculately apart from His or Her creations.

888643

Our scientific beliefs tell us that our entire world happened accidentally. Our religions tell us that man and woman are sinful: The body is not to be trusted; the senses can lead us astray. In this maze of beliefs we have largely lost a sense of our own worth and purpose. A generalized fear and suspicion is generated, and life too often becomes stripped of any heroic qualities. The body cannot react to generalized fear and suspicion is generated, and life too often becomes stripped of any heroic qualities. The body cannot react to generalized threats. It is, therefore, put under constant strain in such circumstances, and seeks to specify the danger. It is geared to act in our protection. It builds up strong stresses, therefore, so that on many occasions a specific disease or threat situation is “manufactured” to rid the body of tension grown too strong to bear.

Many are familiar with private meditation, when concentration is focused in one particular area. There are many methods and schools of thought here, but a highly suggestive state of mind results, in which spiritual, mental, and physical goals are sought. It is impossible to mediate without a goal, for that intent is itself a purpose. Unfortunately, many of our public health programs, and commercial statements through the various media, provide us with mass meditations of a most deplorable kind. I refer to those in which the specific symptoms of various diseases are given, in which the individual is further told examine the body with those symptoms in mind. I also refer to those statements that just as unfortunately specify diseases for which the individual may experience no symptoms of an observable kind, but is cautioned that these disastrous physical events may be happening despite his or her feelings of good health. Here the generalized fears fostered by religious, scientific, and cultural beliefs are often given as blueprints of diseases in which a person can find a specific focus — the individual can say: “Of course, I feel listless, or panicky, or unsafe since I have such-and-such a disease.”

a

The breast cancer suggestions associated with self-examinations have caused more cancers than any treatments have cured. They involve intense meditations of the body, and adverse imagery that itself affects the bodily cells. Public health announcements about high blood pressure themselves raise the blood pressure of millions of television viewers.

bb

Our current ideas of preventive medicine, therefore, generate he very kind of fear that causes disease. They all undermine the individual’s sense of bodily security and increase stress while offering the body a specific, detailed disease plan. But most of all, they operate to increase the individual sense of alienation from the body, and to promote a sense of powerlessness and duality.

Animal has a sense of its own biological integrity; So does a child.

In all forms of life each individual is born into a world already provided for it, with circumstances favorable to its growth and development; a world in which its own existence rests upon and development; a world in which its own existence rests upon the equally valid existence of all other individuals and species, so that each contributes to nature’s whole.

a23

In that environment there is a cooperative sociability of a biological nature, that is understood by the animals in their way, and taken for granted by the young of our own species. The means are given so that the needs of the individual can be met. The granting of those needs furthers the development of the individual, its species, and by inference all others in the fabric of nature.

Survival , of course, is important, but it is not the prime purpose of a species, in that it is a necessary means by which that species can attain its main goals. Of course [a species] must survive to do so, but it will, however, purposefully avoid survival if the conditions are not practically favorable to maintain the quality of life or existence that it considered basic.

a12

A species that senses a lack of this quality can in one way or another destroy its offspring — not because they could not survive otherwise, but because the quality of that survival would bring about vast suffering, for example, so distorting the nature of life as to almost make a mockery of it. Each species seeks for the development of its abilities and capacities in a framework in which safety is a medium for action. Danger in that context exists under certain conditions clearly known to the animals, clearly defined: The prey of another animal does not fear the “hunter” when the hunter animal is full of belly, nor will the hunter then attack.

There are also emotional interactions among the animals that completely escape us, and biological mechanisms, so that animals felled as natural prey by other animals “understand” their part in nature. They do not anticipate death before it happens, however. The fatal act propels the consciousness out from the flesh, so that in those terms it is merciful.

a27

During their lifetimes animals in their natural state enjoy their vigor and accept their worth. They regulate their own births — and their own deaths. The quality of their lives is such that their abilities are challenged. They enjoy contrasts: that between rest and motion, heat and cold, being in direct contact with natural phenomena that everywhere quickens their experience. They will migrate is necessary to seek conditions more auspicious. They are aware of approaching natural disasters, and when possible will leave such areas. They will protect their own, and according to circumstances and conditions they will tend their own wounded. Even in contests between young and old males for control of a group, under natural conditions the loser is seldom killed. Dangers are pinpointed clearly so that bodily reactions are concise.

The animal knows he has the right to exist, and a place in the fabric of nature. This sense of biological integrity supports him or her.

ph91

Man and woman, on the other hand , have more to contend with. He or she must deal with beliefs and feelings often so ambiguous that no clear line of action seems possible. The body often does not know how to react. If we believe that the body is sinful, for example, we cannot expect to be happy, and health will most likely elude us, for our dark beliefs will blemish the psychological and biological integrity with which we were born.

The species is in a state of transition, one of many. This one began, generally speaking, when the species tried to step apart from nature in order to develop the unique kind of consciousness that is presently our own. That consciousness is not a finished product, however, but one meant to change, [to] evolve and develop. Certain artificial divisions were made along the way that must now be dispensed with.

a233

We must return, wiser creatures, to the nature that spawned us — not only as loving caretakers but as partners with the other species of the earth. We must discover once again the spirituality of our biological heritage. The majority of accepted beliefs — religious, scientific, and cultural — have tended to stress a sense of powerlessness, impotence, and impending doom — a picture in which man/woman and his/her world is an accidental production with little meaning, isolated yet seemingly ruled by a capricious God. Life is seen as “a valley of tears” — almost as a low-grade infection from which the soul can be cured only by death.

Religious, scientific, medical, and cultural communications stress the existence of danger, minimize the purpose of the species or of any individual member of it, or see mankind/womankind as the one erratic, half-insane member of an otherwise orderly realm of nature. Any or all of the above beliefs are held by various systems of thought. All of these, however, strain the individual’s biological sense of integrity, reinforce ideas of danger, and shrink the area of psychological safety that is necessary to maintain the quality possible in life. The body’s defense systems become confused to varying degrees.

a15

I do not intend to give a treatise upon the biological structures of the body and their inter-workings, but only to add such information in that line that is not currently known, and is otherwise important to the ideas I have in mind. I am far more concerned with more basic issues. The body’s defenses will take care of themselves if they are allowed to, and if the psychological air is cleared of the true “carriers” of disease.

The body’s defense system is automatic.

And yet to a certain degree it is a secondary rather than primary system, coming into mobilization as such only when the body is threatened.

ph55

The body’s main purpose is not only to survive but to maintain a quality of existence at certain levels, and that quality itself promotes health and fulfillment. A definite, biologically pertinent fear alerts the body, and allows it to react completely and naturally. We might be reading a newspaper headline, for example, as we cross a busy street. Long before we are consciously aware of the circumstances, our body might leap out of the path of an approaching car. The body is doing what it is supposed to do. Though consciously we were not afraid, there was a biologically pertinent fear that was acted upon.

If, however, we dwell mentally in a generalized environment of fear, the body is given no clear line of action, allowed no appropriate response. Look at it this way: An animal, not necessarily just a wild one in some native forest, but an ordinary dog or cat, reacts in a certain fashion. It is alert to everything in its environment. A cat does not anticipate danger from a penned dog four blocks away, however, nor bother wondering what would happen if that dog were to escape and find the cat’s cozy yard.

ph35

Many people, however, do not pay attention to everything in their environments, but through their beliefs concentrate only upon “the ferocious dog four blocks away.” That is, they do not respond to what is physically present or perceivable in either space or time, but instead [dwell] upon the threats that may or may not exist, ignoring at the same time other pertinent data that are immediately at hand.

The mind then signals threat — but a threat that is nowhere physically present, so that the body cannot clearly respond. It therefore reacts to a pseudo-threatening situation, and is caught between gears, so to speak, with resulting biological confusion. The body’s responses must be specific.

ph92

The overall sense of health, vitality, and resiliency is a generalized condition of contentment — brought about, however, by multitudinous specific responses. Left alone, the body can defend itself against any disease, but it cannot defend itself appropriately against an exaggerated general fear of disease on the individual’s part. It must mirror our own feelings and assessments. Usually, now, our entire medical systems literally generate as much disease as is cured — for we are filled with the fear of disease, overwhelmed by what seems to be the body’s propensity toward illness — and nowhere is the body’s vitality or natural defense system stressed.

Private disease, then, happens also in a social context. This context is the result of personal and mass beliefs that are intertwined at all cultural levels, and so to that extent serve private and public purposes.

ph39

The illnesses generally attributed to all different ages involved. Those of the elderly, again, fit in with our social and cultural beliefs, the structure of our family life. Old animals have their own dignity, and so should old men and women. Senility is a mental and physical epidemic — a needless one. We “catch” it because when we are young we believe that old people cannot perform. There are no inoculations against beliefs, so when young people with such beliefs grow old they become “victims.”

The kinds of diseases change through historical periods. Some become fashionable, others go out of style. All epidemics, however, are mass statements both biologically and psychically. They point to mass beliefs that have brought about certain physical conditions that are abhorrent at all levels. They often go hand-in-hand with war, and represent biological protests.

ph64

Whenever the conditions of life are such that its quality is threatened, there will be such a mass statement. The quality of life must be at certain level so that the individuals of a species — of any and all species — can develop. In our species the spiritual, mental and psychic abilities add a dimension that is biologically pertinent.

There simply must be, for example, a freedom to express ideas, an individual tendency, a worldwide social and political context in which each individual can develop his or her abilities and contribute to the species as a whole. Such a climate depends, however, upon many ideas not universally accepted — and yet the species is so formed that the biological importance of ideas cannot be stressed to strongly.

ph13

More and more, the quality of our lives is formed through the subjective realities of our feelings and mental constructions. Again, beliefs that foster despair are biologically destructive. They cause the physical system to shut down. If mass action against appalling social or political conditions is not effective, then other means are taken, and these are often in the guise of epidemics or natural disasters. The blight is wiped out in one way or another.

Such conditions, however, are the results of beliefs, which are mental, and so the most vital work must always be done in that area.

ph60

Side note:

Photosynthesis is the imperfectly understood process by which the green chlorophyll in plants uses the energy of sunlight to manufacture carbohydrates from water and carbon dioxide. This “stored sunlight” can then be used as food.

The body is a spiritual, psychic, and social statement, biologically spoken

It is obviously private, yet it cannot be concealed, in that “it is where you are,” in unusual terms.

u0=u

The individual body is what it is because it exists in the context of others like it. By this I mean that a given present body presupposes a biological past of like creatures. It presupposes contemporaries. If for example, one adult human being were perceived by an alien from another world, certain facts would be apparent. Even though such an alien came upon a lone member of our species in otherwise uninhabited land, the alien could make certain assumptions from the individual’s appearance and behavior.

If the “earthling” spoke, the alien would of course instantly know that we were communicating creatures, and in the vocal sounds recognize patterns that contained purpose and intent. To one extent or another, all creatures us language implying a far vaster sociobiological relationship than is usually supposed. From [the earthling’s] appearance the alien would be able to deduce — if it did not already know — the proportion of the various elements upon our planet; the being surmised from our method of locomotion, appendages, and the nature of our physical vision.

ffff

While each individual springs privately into the world at birth, then, each birth also represents quite literally an effort — a triumphant one — on the part of each member of each species, for the delicate balance of life requires for each birth quite precise conditions that no one species can guarantee alone, even to its own kind. The grain must grow. The animals must produce. The plants must do their part. Photosynthesis, in those terms reigns.

The seasons must retain some stability. The rains must fall, but not too much. The storms must rage, but not too devastatingly. Behind all of this lies a biological and psychic cooperative venture. All of this could be perceived by our hypothetical alien from one lone human individual.

b58

Cells possess “social” characteristics. They have a tendency to unite with others. They naturally communicate. They naturally want to move. In making such statements I am not personifying the cells, for the desire of communication and motion does not belong to man and woman, or even animals, alone. Man’s and woman’s desire to journey into other worlds is in its way as natural as the plant’s urge to turn its leaves toward the sun.

Man’s and woman’s physical world, with all of its civilizations and cultural aspects, and even with its technologies and sciences, basically represents the species’ innate drive to communicate, to move outward, to create, and to objectify sensed inner realities. The most private life imaginable is a very social affair. The most secluded recluse must still depend upon the biological sociability of not only his own body cells, but if the natural world with all of its creatures. The body, then, no matter how private, is also a public, social, biological statement. A spoken sentence has a certain structure in any language. It presupposes a mouth and a tongue, the kind of physical organization necessary; a mind; a certain kind of world in which sounds have meaning; and a very precise, quite practical knowledge of the nature of sounds, the combination of their patterns, the use of repetition, and a knowledge of the nervous system. Few possess such conscious knowledge, yet the majority speak quite well.

b78

In one way or another, therefore, it certainly seems that our body possesses a kind of quite pragmatic information, and acts upon it. We can express almost any idea that we want in vocal terms, even if we have hardly any conception at all of the way in which our own speech is executed.

The body is geared then to act. It is pragmatically practical, and above all it wants to explore and to communicate. Communication implies a social nature. The body has within it inherently everything necessary for its own defense. The body itself will tease the child to speak, to crawl and walk, to seek its fellows. Though biological communication the child’s cells are made aware of its physical environment, the temperature, air pressure, weather conditions, food supplies — and the body reacts to these conditions, making some adjustments with great rapidity.

b75

At cellular levels the world exists with a kind of social inter-change, in which the birth and death of cells are known to all others, and in which the death of a frog and a star gain equal weight. But at our level of activity our thoughts, feelings, and intents, however private, form part of the inner environment of communication. This inner environment is as pertinent and vital to the species’ well-being as is the physical one. It represents the psychic, mass bank of potential, even as the planet provides a physical bank of potential. When there is an earthquake in another area of the world, the land pass in our own country is in one way or another affected. When there are psychic earthquakes in other areas of the world, then we are also affected, and usually to the same degree.

In the same way, if one portion of our own body is injured, then other portions feel the effects of the wound. An earthquake can be a disaster in the area where it occurs, even though its existence corrects imbalances, and therefore promotes the life of the planet. Emergency actions are quite rigorous in the immediate area of an earthquake, and aid is sent in from other countries. When an area of the body “erupts,” there are also emergency measures taken locally, and aid sent from other portions of the body to afflicted parts.

b54

The physical eruption, while it may appear to be a disaster in the area of the disease, is also, however, a part of the body’s defense system, taken to insure the whole balance of the body. Biologically, illness therefore represents the overall body defense system at work.

Simply — without some illnesses, the body could not endure. First of all, the body must be in a state of constant change, making decisions far too fast for us to follow, adjusting hormonal levels, maintaining balances between all of its systems; not only in relationship to itself — the body — but to an environment that is also in constant change. At biological levels the body often produces its own “preventative medicine,” or “inoculations,” by seeking out, for example, new or foreign substances in its environment [that are] due to nature, science or technology; it assimilates such properties in small doses, coming down with an “illness” which, left alone, would soon vanish as the body utilized what it could [of it], or socialized “a seeming invader.”

b24

The person might feel indisposed, but in such ways the body assimilates and uses properties that would otherwise be called alien ones. It immunizes itself through such methods. The body, however, exists with the mind to contend with — and the mind produces an inner environment of concepts. The cells that compose the body do not try to make sense of the cultural world. They rely upon our interpretation, therefore, for the existence of threats of non-biological nature. So they depend upon our assessment.

If that assessment correlates with biological ones, we have a good working relationship with the body. It can react swiftly and clearly. When we sense threat or danger for which the body can find no biological correlation, even as through cellular communication it scans the environment physically, then it must rely upon our assessment and react to danger conditions. The body will, therefore, react to imagined dangers to some degree, as well as to those that are biologically pertinent. Its defense system often becomes overexerted as a result.

b334

The body is, therefore, quite well equipped to deal with its physical stance in the physical world, and its defense systems are unerring in the respect. Our conscious mind, however, directs our temporal perception and interprets that perception, organizing it into mental patterns. The body, again, must depend upon those interpretations. The biological basis of all life is a loving, divine and cooperative one, and presupposes a safe physical stance from which any member of any species feels actively free to seek out its needs and to communicate with others of its kind.

It is fashionable to believe that the animals do not possess imagination, but this is a quite erroneous belief. They anticipate mating, for example, before its time. They all learn through experience, and despite all of our concepts, learning is impossible without imagination at any level.

b73

In our terms, the imagination of the animals is limited. There’s is not merely confined to the elements of previous experience, however,. They can imagine events that have never happened to them. Man’s and woman’s abilities in this respect are far more complicated, for in his/her imagination he/she deals with probabilities. In any given period of time, with one physical body, he or she can anticipate or perform an infinitely vaster number of events — each one remaining probable until he or she activates it.

b51

The body, responding to his thoughts, feelings, and beliefs, has much more data to deal with, therefore, and must have a clear area in which concise action is possible.

Probing the brain of an idiot or genius will find only the physical matter of the brain itself.

Not one idea will be discovered residing in the brain cells. We can try to convey an idea, we can feel its effects, but we cannot see it as we can the chair. Only a fool would say that ideas were non-existent, however, or deny their importance.

We cannot find any given dream location, either, within the brain itself. The solid matter of our world is the result of the play of our senses upon an inner dimension of activity that exists as legitimately, and yet as tantalizing hidden, as an idea or a dream location.

hea2

It is easy for us to see that seeds bring forth the fruit of the earth, each [of] their own kind. No seed is identical to any other, yet generally speaking there are species that serve to unite them. We do not mistake an orange for a grape. In the same way ideas or thoughts form general patterns, bringing forth in our world certain kinds of events. In this respect our thoughts and feelings “seed” physical reality, bringing forth materializations.

We operate quite nicely politically, living in villages, townships, countries, states, and so forth, each with certain customs and local ordinances. These in no way affect the land itself. They are designations for practical purposes, and they imply organization of intent or affiliation at one level. They are political patterns, invisible but highly effective. There are, however, far more vigorous invisible mental patterns, into which the thoughts and feelings of humankind are organized — or, naturally, organize themselves.

5h5

Each person’s thoughts flow into formation, forming part of the earth’s psychic atmosphere. From that atmosphere flows the natural earthly patterns from which our seasons emerge with all of their variety and effects. We are never victims of natural disasters, though it may seem that we are, for we have our hand in forming them. We are creatively involved in the earth’s cycles. No one can be born for oneself, or die for oneself, and yet no birth or death is really an isolated event, but one in which the entire planet participates. In personal terms, again, each species is concerned not only with survival but with the quality of its life and experience.

In those terms, natural disasters ultimately end up righting a condition that earlier blighted the desired quality of life, so that adjustments were made.

ueujke7kj

The “victims” choose to participate in those conditions at spiritual, psychological, and biological levels. Many of those who are counted among the fatalities might otherwise die of extended illnesses, for example. At cellular levels such knowledge is available, and in one way or another imparted, often in dreams, to the individual. Consciousness comprehension need not follow, for many people know such things, and pretend not to know them at the same time.

Others have finished with their challenges; they want to die and are looking for an excuse — a face-saving device. However, those who choose such deaths want to die in terms of drama, in the middle of their activities, and are in a strange way filled with the exultant inner knowledge of life’s strength even at the point of death. At the last they identify with the power of nature that seemingly destroyed them.

be67

That identification often brings about in death — but not always — an added acceleration of consciousness, and involves such individuals in a kind of “group death experience,” where all of the victims more or less embark into another level of reality “at the same time.”

Those people were aware just beneath consciousness of the possibilities of such an event long before the disaster occurred, and could until the last moment choose to avoid the encounter. Animals know of weather conditions ahead of time, as old tales say. This perception is a biological part of our heritage also. The body is prepared, though consciously it seems we are ignorant.

egg4

There are innumerable relationships that exist between the interior environment of the body and the weather patterns. The ancient feelings of identification with storms are quite valid, and in that respect the “realism” of feelings is far superior to the realism of logic. When a person feels a part of a storm, those feelings speak a literal truth. Logic deals with exterior conditions, with cause-and-effect relationships. Intuitions deal with immediate experience of the most intimate nature, with subjective motions and activities that in our terms move far quicker than the speed of light, and with simultaneous events that our cause-and-effect level is far too slow to perceive.

In that regard also, the activities of the inner environment are too fast for us to follow intellectually. Our intuitions, however, can give us clues to such behavior. A country is responsible for its own droughts, earthquakes, floods, hurricanes — and for its own harvests and rich display of products, its industry and cultural achievements, and each of these elements is related to each other one.

be73

If the quality of life that is considered spiritually and biologically necessary fails, then adjustments occur. A political problem might be altered by a natural disaster if political means fail. On the other hand, the rousing creative energies of the people will emerge.

l1

Excellence will show itself through the arts, cultural creatively, technological or sociological accomplishments. The species tries to fulfill its great capacities. Each physical body in its own way is like the world. It has its own defenses and abilities, and each portion of it strives for a quality of existence that will bring to the smallest parts of it the spiritual and biological fulfillment of its own nature.

The self out grows the flesh.

Man’s and Woman’s physical relationship with nature

Environmental questions are being raised about human’s effects upon the world in which he or she lives. There is, however, an inner environment that connects all consciousnesses that dwell upon our planet, in whatever form. This mental or psychic — or in any case nonphysical — environment is ever in a state of flux and motion. That activity provides us with all exterior phenomena.

in12

Our sense perception, physically speaking, is a result of behavior on the part of organs that seem to us to have no reality outside on their relationship with us. Those organs are themselves composed of atoms and molecules with their own consciousnesses. They have, then, their own states of sensation and cognition. They work for us, allowing us to perceive physical reality.

Our ears certainly seem to be permanent appendages, and do our eyes. We say: “My eyes are blue,” or “My eyes are small.” The physical matter of those sense organs changes constantly, however, with us none the wiser. While our body appears quite dependable, solid, [and] steady, we are not aware of the constant interchanges that occur between it and the physical environment. It does not bother us one whit that the physical substance of our body is made up of completely different atoms and molecules than it was composed of seven years ago, [say], or that our familiar hands are actually innocent of any smallest smidgen of matter that composed them [even in recent times past].

in3

We perceive our body as solid. The very senses that make such a deduction are the result of the behavior of atoms and molecules literally coming together to form the organs, filling a pattern of flesh. All other objects that we perceive are formed in their own way in the same fashion.

The physical world that we recognize is made up of invisible patterns. These patterns are “plastic,” in that while they exist, their final form is a matter or probabilities directed by consciousness. Our senses perceive these patterns in their own ways. The patterns themselves can be “activated” in innumerable fashions. There is something out there to observe.

in4

Our sense apparatus determines what form that something will take, however. The mass world rises up before our eyes, but our eyes are part of that mass world. We cannot see our thoughts, so we do not realize that they have shape and form, even as, say, clouds do. There are currents of thoughts as there are currents of air, and the mental patterns of man’s and women’s feelings and thoughts rise up like flames from a fire, or steam from hot water, to fall like ashes or like rain.

All elements of the interior invisible environment work together, and they form the temporal weather patterns that are exteriorized mental states, presenting us locally and en masse, then with a physical version of man’s emotional states.

har331

The physical planet is obviously also ever-changing while it is operational or realistically or pragmatically relatively stable. The physical matter of the planet is also composed of literally infinite hoarders of consciousnesses — each experiencing its own reality while adding to the overall cooperative venture.

Natural disasters represent an understandably prejudiced concept, in which the vast creative and rejuvenating elements important to planetary life, and therefore to humankind, are ignored. The stability of the planet rests upon such changes and alterations, even as the body’s stability is dependent upon, say, the birth and death of the cells.

har2 5

It is quite obvious that people must die — not only because we would overpopulate our world into extinction but because the nature of consciousness requires new experience, challenge, and accomplishment. This is everywhere apparent in nature itself. If there were no death, we would have to invent it — for the context of the self-hood would be as limited as the experience of a great sculptor given but one hunk of stone.

The sculptor’s creation is pragmatically realistic, in that it exists as an object, and can be quite legitimately perceived as can our world. The sculptor’s statue, however, comes from the inner environment, the patterns of probabilities. These patterns are not them selves inactive. They are possessed by the desire to be-actualized. Behind all realities there are mental states. These always seek form, though again there are other forms than those we recognize.

har22

A chair is a chair for our purposes. As you read this blog you most probably lounge on a chair or couch or bench — all quite sturdy and real. The atoms and molecules within those chairs and couches are quite alert, though we do not grant them the quality of life. When children play ring-around-the-rosy, they form living circles in the air. In the game they enjoy the motion of their bodies, but they do not identify with those swirling circles. The atoms and molecules that make up a chair play a different kind of ring-around-the-rosy, and are involved in constant motion, forming a certain pattern that we perceive as a chair.

The difference in motion are so divergent that to us the chair, like our body, appears permanent. The atoms and molecules, like the children, enjoy their motion — solidly sketched in space from our perspective, however, with no “idea” that we consider that motion a chair, or so use it.

en00992

We perceive the atoms’ activity in that fashion. [Nevertheless] the agreement takes place at mental levels, and is never completely “set,” though it appears to be. No one perceives the same chair [all the time], though perhaps a given chair will seem to be “the same one” seen from different angles.

in7

The dance of the atoms and molecules is continuous in our area. In greater terms, any given chair is never the same chair. All of this must be taken into consideration when we discuss mass events.

We live in a community of thoughts and feelings also.

We live in a physical community, but we live first in a community of thoughts and feelings. There trigger our physical actions. They directly affect the behavior of our body. The experience of the animals is different, yet in their own ways animals have both individual intent and purpose. Their feelings are certainly as pertinent as ours. They dream, and in their way they reason.

be15

They do not “worry.” They do not anticipate disaster when no signs of it are apparent in their immediate environment. On their own they do not need preventative medicine. Pet animals are inoculated against diseases, however. In our society this almost becomes a necessity. In a “purely natural” setting we would not have as many living puppies or kittens. There are stages of physical existence, and in those terms nature knows what it is doing. When a species over-produces, the incidences of, say, epidemics grow. This applies to human populations as well as to the animals.

The quality of life is important above all. Newborn animals either die quickly and naturally, painlessly, before their consciousnesses are fully focused here, or are killed by their mothers — not because they are weak or unfit to survive, but because the [physical] conditions are not those that will produce the quality of life that makes survival “worthwhile.”

be7

The consciousness that became so briefly physical is not annihilated, however, but in our terms waits for better conditions.

There are also “trail runs” in human and animal species alike, in which peeks are taken, or glimpses, of physical life, and that is all. Epidemics sweeping through animal populations are also biological and psychic statements, then, in which each individual knows that only its own greatest fulfillment can satisfy the quality of life on an individual basis, and thus contribute to the mass survival of the species.

en3

Suffering is not necessarily good for the soul at all, and left alone natural creatures do not seek it. There is a natural compassion, a biological knowledge, so that the mother of an animal knows whether or not existing conditions will support the new offspring. Animals instinctively realize their relationship with the great forces of life. They will instinctively starve an offspring while its consciousness is still unfocused, rather than send it loose under adverse conditions

In a natural state, many children would die stillborn for the same reasons, or would be naturally aborted. There is a give-and-take between all elements of nature, so that such individuals often choose mothers, for example, who perhaps wanted the experience of pregnancy but not of birth — where they choose the experience of the fetus but not necessarily [that] of the child. Often in such cases these are “fragmented personalities,” wanting to taste physical reality, but not being ready to deal with it. Each case is individual, however, so these are general statements.

be2

Many children, who, it seems, should have died of disease, of “children epidemics,” nevertheless survive because of their different intents. The world of thought and feeling may be invisible, and yet it activates all physical systems with which we are acquainted.

Animals as well as men can indeed make social statements, that appear in a biological context. Animals as well as men can indeed make social statements, that appear in a biological context. Animals stricken by kitten and puppy diseases, for example, choose to die, pointing out the fact that the quality of their lives individually and en masses is vastly lacking. Their relationships with their own species is no longer in balance. They cannot use their full abilities or powers, nor are many of them given compensating elements in terms of a beneficial psychic relationship with man and woman — but instead are shunted aside, unwanted and unloved. An unloved animal does not want to live.

bod22

Love involves self-respect. The trust in individual biological zest and integrity. To that extent, in their way animal epidemics have the same causes as human ones.

Animals can indeed commit suicide. So can a race or a species. The dignity of a spirited life demands that a certain quality of experience be maintained.

88

The infamous “Black Death,” were (and still are) spread to man by fleas carrying a bacterium from infected rats. Other forms of affliction are carried by other rodents. The complicated interactions and communications involving all forms of life, man’s and woman’s deep dissatisfactions would have periodically helped trigger the resurgence of scourges like the plagues: In 3rd-century Rome, for instance, several thousand people were said to have died each day; estimates are that over a 20-year period in the 14th century three-quarters of the population of Europe and Asia perished; there was the great plague of London in 1665, and so forth.

Many can thankfully praise a given doctor for discovering a disease condition ‘in time.’ so that effective countering measures were taken and the disease was eliminated. We cannot know for sure, of course, what would have happened otherwise. To those people who wanted to die. If they did not die of the disease, they may have ‘fallen prey’ to an accident, or died in a war, or in a natural disaster.

b35

They may have been ‘cured’ whether or not they had treatment, and gone on to lead productive lives. We do not know. A man or woman who is ready to die, if saved from one disease will promptly get another, or find a way of fulfilling that desire. Our problem there rests with the will to live, and with the mechanisms of the psyche.

The English naturalist, Charles Darwin (1809-1882), maintained in his theory of organic evolution that all plants and animals develop from their own previous forms by inheriting minute variations through succeeding generations, with those forms best fitted to the environment being the ones most likely to survive.

nryn

Amazingly, another English naturalist, Alfred Wallace (1823-1882), independently developed a similar theory, and the two men had their work presented to science in the same paper in 1858. The next year Darwin published his The Origin of Species.

Epidemics are the result of mass suicide phenomenon on the parts of those involved.

Biological, sociological, or even economic factors may be involved, in that for a variety of reasons, and at different levels, whole groups of individual deaths amount to a mass statement.

On one level the deaths are a protest against the time in which they occur. Those involved have private reasons, however. The reasons, of course, vary from one individual to another, yet all involved “want their death to serve a purpose” beyond private concerns. Partially, then such deaths are meant to make the survivors question the conditions — for unconsciously the species well known there are reasons for such mass deaths that go beyond accepted beliefs.

In some historical periods the plight of the poor was so horrible, so unendurable, that outbreaks of the plague occurred, literally resulting in a complete destruction of large areas of the environment in which such social, political, and economic conditions existed. {Those} plagues took rich and poor alike, however, so the complacent well-to-do could see quite clearly, for example, that to some extent sanitary conditions, privacy, peace of mind, had to be granted to the poor alike, for the results of their dissatisfaction would have quite practical results. Those were deaths of protest.

Individually, each “victim” was to one extent or another a “victim” of apathy, despair, or hopelessness, which automatically lowered bodily defenses.

Not only do such states of mind lower the defenses, however, but they activate and change the body’s chemistries, alter its balances, and initiate disease conditions. Many viruses inherently capable of causing death, in normal conditions contribute to the overall health of the body, existing side by side as it were with other viruses, each contributing quite necessary activities that maintain bodily equilibrium.

If [certain viruses] are triggered, however, to higher activity or overproduction by mental states, they then become “deadly.” Physically they may be passed on in whatever manner is peculiar to a specific strain. Literally, individual mental problems of sufficient severity emerge as social, mass diseases.

The environment in which an outbreak occurs points at the political, sociological, and economic conditions that have evolved, causing such disorder. Often such outbreaks take place after ineffective political or social action — that is, after some unified mass social protest has failed, or is considered hopeless. They often occur also in wartime on the part of a populace [that] is against a given war in which [its] country is involved.

Initially there is a psychic contagion: Despair moves faster than a mosquito, or any outward carrier of a given disease. The mental state brings about the activation of a virus that is, in those terms, passive.

Despair may seem passive only because it feels that exterior action is hopelessness – but its fires rage inwardly, and that kind of contagion can leap from bed to bed and from heart to heart. It touches those, however, who are in the same state only, and to some extent it brings about an acceleration in which something can indeed be done in terms of group action.

Now if we believe in one life only, then such conditions will seem most disastrous, and in our terms they clearly are not pretty. Yet, though each victim in an epidemic may die his or her own death, that death becomes part of a mass social protest. The lives of intimate survivors are shale, and according to the extent of the epidemic the various elements of social life itself are disturbed, altered, rearranged. Sometimes such Epidemics are eventually responsible for the overthrow of governments, the loss of wars.

There are also even deeper biological connections with the heart of nature. We also are biological creatures. Our proud human consciousness rests on the vast “unconscious” integrity of our physical being. In that regard our consciousness is as natural as our toe. In terms of the species’ integrity our mental states are, then, highly important. Despair or apathy is a biological “enemy.” Social conditions, political state’s, economic polices, and even religious or philosophical frameworks that foster such mental states, bring about a biological retaliation. They act like fire applied to a plant.

The epidemic then serve many purposes — warning that certain conditions will not be tolerated. There is a biological outrage that will be continually expressed until the conditions are changed.

Even in the days of the great plagues in England there were those smitten who did not die, and there were those untouched by the disease who dealt with the sick and dying. Those survivors, who were actively involved, saw themselves in a completely different light than those who succumbed, however: They were those, untouched by despair, who saw themselves as effective rather than ineffective. Often they roused themselves from lives of previously unheroic situations, and then performed with great bravely. The horror of the conditions over-whelmed them where earlier they were not involved. The sight of the dying gave them visions of the meaning of life, and stirred new, [ideas] of sociological, political, and spiritual natures, so that in our terms the dead did not die in vain. Epidemics by their public nature speak of public problems — problems that sociologically threaten to sweep the individual to psychic disaster as the physical materialization does biologically.

These are the reasons also for the range or the limits of various epidemics — why they sweep through one area and leave another clear. Why one in the family will die and another survive — for in this mass venture, the individual still forms his or her private reality.

In our society scientific medical beliefs operate, and a kind of preventative medicine, in which procedures [of inoculation] are taken, bringing about in healthy individuals a minute disease condition that the gives disease this procedure might work quite well for those who believe in it. It is, however, the belief, and not the procedure, that works.

I am not recommending that we abandon the procedure when it obviously works for so many — yet you should understand why it bringing about the desired results.

Such medical technology is highly specific, however. We cannot be inoculated with the desire to live, or with the zest, delight, or contentment of the healthy animal. If we have decided to die, protected from one disease in such a manner, we will promptly come down with another, or have an accident. The immunization, while specifically effective, may only reinforce prior beliefs about the body’s ineffectiveness. It may appear that left alone the body would surely develop whatever disease might be “fashionable” at the time, so that the specific victory night result in the ultimate defeat as far as our beliefs are concerned.

We have our own medical systems, however. I do not mean to undermine them, since they are undermining themselves. Some of my statements clearly cannot be proven, in our terms, and appear almost sacrilegious. Yet throughout our history no man or woman has died who did not want to die, regardless of the state of medical technology. Specific diseases have certain symbolic meanings, varying with the times and the places.

There has been great discussion in past years about the survival of the fittest, in Darwinian terms, but little emphasis is placed upon the quality of life, or of survival of the fittest , or of survival itself; or in human terms, [there has been] little probing into question of what makes life worthwhile. Quite simply, if life is not worthwhile, no species will have a reason to continue.

Civilizations are literally social species. They die when those see no reason to live, yet they seed other civilizations. Our private mental states en masse bring about the mass cultural stance of our civilization. To some extent, then, the survival of our civilization is quite literally dependent upon the condition of each individual; and that condition is initially a spiritual, psychic state that gives birth to the physical organism. That organism is intimately connected to the natural biological state of each other person, and to each other living thing, or entity, however minute.

Despite all “realistic” pragmatic tales to the contrary, the natural state of life itself is one of joy, acquiescence with itself — a state in which action is effective, and the power to act is a natural right. We would see this quite clearly with plants, animals, and all other life if we were not so blinded by beliefs to the contrary. We would feel it in the activity of our bodies, in which the vital individual affirmation of our physical being. That activity naturally promotes health and vitality.

I am not speaking of some romanticized, “passive,” flogger, spiritual world, but of a clear reality without impediments, in which the opposite of despair and apathy resigns.

Dying is a biological necessity

Not only for the individual, but to insure the continued vitality of the species. Dying is spiritual and psychological necessity, for after a while the exuberant, ever-renewed energies of the spirit can no longer be translated into flesh.

Inherently, each individual knows that he or she must die physically in order to survive spiritually and psychically. As humans, this may not be an easy thought to have, but it is one that we all acknowledge. That is why we take out life insurance to cover ourselves, as we are aware that one day we will indeed die. The self outgrows the flesh. Particularly since the advent of Charles Darwin’s theories, the acceptance of the fact of death has come to imply a certain kind of weakness, for is it not said that only the strong survive?

dy7

To some degree, epidemics and recognized illnesses serve the sociological purpose of providing an acceptable reason for death — a face-saving device for those who have already decided to die. This does not mean that such individuals make a conscious decision to die, in our terms: But such decisions are often semi-conscious. It might be that those Individuals feel they have fulfilled their purposes — but such decisions may also be built upon a different kind of desire for survival than those understood in Darwinian terms.

It is not understood that before life an individual decides to live. A self is not simply the accidental personification of the body’s biological mechanism. Each person born desires to be born. He or she dies when that desire no longer operates. No epidemic or illness or natural disaster — or stray bullet from a murderer’s gun — will kill a person who does not want to die.

dy13

The desire for life has been most flaunted, yet human psychology has seldom dealt with the quite active desire for death. In its natural form this is not a morbid, frightened, neurotic, or cowardly attempt to escape life, but a definite, positive, “healthy” acceleration of the desire for survival, in which the individual strongly wants to leave physical life as once the child wanted to leave the parent’s home.

I am not speaking here of the desire for suicide, which involves a definite killing of the body by self-deliberate means — often of a violent nature. Ideally this desire for death, however, would simply involve the slowing of the body’s processes, the gradual disentanglement of psyche from flesh; or in other instances, according to individual characteristics, a sudden, natural stopping of the body’s processes.

dy17

Left alone, the self and the body are so entwined that the separation would be smooth. The body would automatically follow the wishes of the inner self. In the case of suicide, for example, the self is to some extent acting out of context with the body, which still has its own will to live.

I do not mean to imply guilt on the part of a person who takes his or her own life. In many cases, a more natural death would have ensued in any event as the result of “diseases.” Often for example, a person wanting to die originally intended to experience only a portion of earth life, say childhood. This purpose would be entwined with the parents intent. Such a son or daughter might be born, for instance, through a woman who wanted to experience childbirth but who did not necessarily want to encounter the years of child-raising, for her own reasons.

dy23

Such a mother would attract a consciousness who desired, perhaps, to re-experience childhood but not adulthood, or who might teach the mother lessons sorely needed. Such a child might naturally die at 10 or 12, or earlier. Yet the ministrations of science might keep the child alive far longer, until such a person [begins] encountering an adulthood thrust upon him or her, so to speak.

An automobile accident, suicide, or another kind of accident might result in death. The person might fall prey to an epidemic, but the smoothness of biological motion or psychological motion has been lost. I am not here condoning suicide, for too often in our society it is the unfortunate result of conflicting beliefs — and yet it is true to say that all deaths are suicide, and all births deliberate on the part of child and parent. To that extent, we cannot separate issues like a population explosion on the part of certain portions of the world, from epidemics, earthquakes, and other disasters.

However, deaths and injuries like say, an automobile accident as mentioned above, might happen to someone due to reasons like negligence of the automobile driver, or other unforeseen events. In such cases, the injured could decide to seek justice and use the Keating Law Firm or their likes in filing for compensation for the injury and trauma that they might have endured. It is always a trying time for a family to witness their loved ones in pain, and to seek any kind of remedy that they feel could somehow alleviate the same, is an option they can explore.

But that said, while we agree that death is a natural process that will come knocking on our door once our time on earth ends, it does not mean that the ones we leave behind in this world should be in pain. Opting for life insurance could be a way to ease their burden, at least financially. Be it for seniors, or the young ones, choosing insurance could be a plausible option to consider. One of the best things a person can do is secure life insurance so their next of kin is prepared for any type of unforeseen circumstance like an accident or health issue that may arise. Burying or cremating costs (in case of a death) could also be covered by Final Expense insurance, which is another possible option.

dy59

In wars, people automatically reproduce their kind to make up for those are killed, and when the race overproduces there will be automatic controls set upon the population. Yet these will in all ways fit the intents and purposes of the individuals involved.

dy21

People will die when they are ready to, following inner dictates and dynamics. A person ready to die will, despite any medication. A person who wants to live will seize upon the tiniest hope, and respond. The dynamics of health have nothing to do with inoculations. They reside in the consciousness of each being.

Thorns or Roses May Grow Within.

The individual will grow outward toward the world, encountering and forming a practical experience, traveling outward from his center in almost vine-like fashion, forming from the fabric of physical reality a conglomeration of pleasant or aesthetic, and unpleasant or prickly events.

dd7

The vine of experience in this analogy is formed in quite a natural fashion from “psychic” elements that are as necessary to psychological experience as sun, air, and water are to plants. But as the individual’s personal experience must be seen in the light of all of these issues, so mass events cannot be understood unless they are considered in a far greater context that unusual.

The question of epidemics, for example, cannot be answered from a biological standpoint alone. It involves great sweeping psychological attitudes on the part of many, and meets the needs and desires of those involved — needs which, in our terms, arise in a framework of religious, psychological and cultural realities that cannot be isolated from biological results.

b41

I have thus far stayed clear of many important and vital subjects, involving mass realities, because first of all the importance of the individual is to be stressed, and his or her power to form this or her private events. Only when the private nature of reality was emphasized sufficiently would show how the magnification of individual reality combines and enlarges to form vast mass reactions — such as, say, the initiation of an obviously new historical and cultural period; the rise or overthrow of an obviously new historical and cultural period; the rise or overthrow or governments; the birth of a new religion that sweeps all others before it; mass conversions; mass murders in the form of wars; the sudden sweep of deadly epidemics; the scourge of earthquakes, flood, or other disasters; the inexplicable appearance of periods of great art or architecture or technology.

devo6

There are no closed systems. This also means that in world terms, events spin like electrons, affecting all psychological and psychic systems as well as biological ones. It is true to say that each individual dies alone, for no one else can die that death. It is also true that part of the species dies with each death, and is reborn with each birth, and that each private death takes place within the greater context of the existence of the entire species. The death serves a purpose species-wise while it also serves the purposes of the individual, for no death comes unbidden.

An epidemic, for example, serves the purposes of each individual who is involved, while it also serves its own functions in the greater species framework.

devo435

When we consider epidemics to be the result of viruses, and emphasize their biological stances, then it seems that the solutions are very obvious: We learn the nature of each virus and develop an inoculation, giving [each member of] the populace a small dose of the disease so that a man’s or woman’s own body will combat it, and he or she will become immune.

The shortsightedness of such procedures is generally overlooked because of the definite short-term advantages. As a rule, for example, people inoculated against polio do not develop that disease. Using such procedures, tuberculosis has been largely conquered.

TH45

In the first place, the causes are not biological. Biology is simply the carrier of a “deadly intent.” In the second place, there is a difference between a virus produced in the laboratory and that inhabiting the body — a difference recognized by the body but not by our laboratory instruments.

In a way the body produces antibodies, and sets up natural immunization as a result of say, inoculation. But the body’s chemistry is also confused, for it “knows it is reacting to a disease that is not “a true disease,” but a biologically counterfeit intrusion.

e67

To that extent — the body’s biological integrity is contaminated. It may at the same time produce antibodies also, for example, to other “similar” diseases, and so overextend its defenses that the individual later comes down with another disease.

No person becomes ill unless that illness serves a psychic or psychological reason, so many people escape such complications. In the meantime, however, scientists and medical men and women find more and more viruses against which the population “must ” be inoculated. Each one is considered singly. There is a rush to develop a new inoculation against the newest virus. Much of this is on predictive basis: The scientists “predict” how many people might be “attacked” by, say, a virus that has caused a given number of deaths. Then as a preventative measure the populace is invited to the new inoculation.

88

Many people who would not get the disease in any case are then religiously inoculated with it. The body is exerted to use its immune system to the utmost, and sometimes, according to the inoculation, overextended [under such] conditions. Those individuals who have psychologically decided upon death will die in any case, of that disease or another, or of the side effects of the inoculation.

Inner reality and private experience give birth to all mass events. Man and woman cannot disentangle himself or herself from the natural context of his or her physical life. His or her culture, his or her religion, his or her psychologies, and his or her psychological nature together form the context within which both private and mass events occur. My discussions will be devoted to the nature of the great sweeping emotional, religious, or biological events that often seem to engulf the individual, or to lift him or her willy-nilly in their power.

qq4

What is the relationship between the individual and the gigantic mass motions of nature, of government, or even of religion? What about mass conversions? Mass hysteria? Mass healings, mass murder, and the individual?

 

Each of us possesses a unique, original stance in space and time, regardless of time’s relative existence.

That reality contributes to the experience of others. Only when we operate from our own stance can we help others to the best of our ability. To anticipate danger, or to imaginatively take on the troubles of others robs us of the very energy with which we could help them. I am not saying, therefore, to turn our eyes from the unfortunate conditions of the world. Practical help is needed in all areas of the human life. Yet it is far better, and more practical ultimately, to concentrate upon the beneficial elements of civilization — far better to organize our thoughts in areas of accomplishment than to make lists of man’s or woman’s deficiencies and lacks.

o12

Such a practice leads to feelings of helplessness and hopelessness, in which effective action seems impossible. Life possesses an exuberance. If this is cherished, nurtured, encouraged, then additional energy is generated that is not needed for the purposes of daily private life — a superabundance, that can be effectively directed in those areas of the world where help is most needed.

The strength, vitality, and effectiveness of thought is seldom considered. Though, we may say will not stop war — yet what do we think started such a war? Throughout history the downtrodden have often risen into power, using force, rebelling against their oppressors; and yet, learning little from that experience, they turn and become the new elite, the new power-holders. Their physical conditions may be completely changed, Now theirs, the offices of government, the wealth. Gone are the conditions that, it would seem, caused the uprising. Yet in retaliation they strike out, forming a new class of downtrodden who must in their turn rise and retaliate.

o5

Despite all appearances, conditions of an exterior nature do not cause wars, or poverty, or disease, or any of the unfortunate circumstances apparent in the world. Our beliefs form our reality. Our thoughts generate practical experience. When these change, conditions will change. To add our own energy, focus, and concentration of dire circumstances in other portions of the world does not help, but adds to, such situations.

To close our eyes to them in an ignorant fashion, to wash our hands of them, so to speak, is equally shortsighted. To pretend such situations do not exist, out of fear of them, will only bring the feared reality closer. It is far better to situate oneself firmly in our own reality, acknowledge it as our own, encourage our strength and creativity, and from that vantage point view those areas of the world or of our own society that need constructive help. Purposefully in our own life, in our daily dialogues with others, in our relationships through our groups or clubs, reinforce as well as we can the strength and abilities of others.

o6

That reinforcement will add to the personal power of all other individuals with whom those people come in contact. Find the beliefs responsible for the unfortunate conditions. Each individual should be able to assess his or her own reality realistically. There would be no need to arm a nation in advance against another nation’s anticipated — but imaginary — attack.

Personal grudges would not build up, so that men or women so fear further hurts that they attempt to hide from life or relationships, or shy away from contact with others. It is not virtuous to count our failings. Self-conscious righteousness can be a very narrow road. If each of us understood and perceived the graceful integrity of our own individuality, just as we try to perceive the beauty of all other natural creatures, then we would allow our own creativity greater reign. There is order in all elements of nature, and we are part of it.

o15

The greater sweep of the seasons represents the reaches of our soul. We will not attain spirituality by turning our eyes away from nature, or by trying to disentangle oneself from it. We will not “glimpse eternal life” by attempting to deny the life that we have now — for that life is our own unique path, and provides its own clues for us to follow.

All That Is vibrates with desire. The denial of desire will bring us only listlessness. Those who deny desire are the most smitten by it. Each of our lives are miniature and yet gigantic episodes, mortal and immortal at once, providing experiences that we form meaningfully, opening up dimensions of reality available to no one else, for no one can view existence from our standpoint. No one can be you but you. There are communications at other levels, but our experience of existence is completely original, to be treasured.

o13

No one from any psychological threshold, however vast, can write a book that defines the psyche, but only present hints and clues, words and symbols. The words and ideas stand for inner realities — that is, they are like piano keys striking other chords; chords that, hopefully, will be activated within the psyche of each person.

Each or us is couched now in the natural world, and world is couched in a reality from which nature emerges. The psyche’s roots are secure, nourishing it like a tree from the ground of being. The source of the psyche’s strength is within each individual, the invisible fabric of the person’s existence.

o17

Nature is luxurious and abundant in its expressions. The greater reality from which nature springs is evens more abundant, and within that multidimensional experience no individual is ignored, forgotten, dismissed, lost, or forsaken. A tree does not have to ask for nourishment for the ground or the sun, and so everything that we need is available to us in our practical experience. If we believe we are not worthy of nourishment, if we believe that life itself is dangerous, then our own beliefs make it impossible for us to fully utilize that available help. In large measure, since we are still alive, we are of course nourished. We cannot close out the vitality of our own being easily, and the vitality “squandered” on deeper bouts of depression is often greater than the energy used in creative pursuits. We are a portion of All That Is; therefore the universe leans in our direction. It gives. It rings with vitality. Then forsake beliefs that tell us otherwise. Seek within oneself — each of us — those feelings of exuberance that we have, even if they are only occasional, and encourage those events or thoughts that bring them about.

We cannot find our psyche by thinking of it as a separate thing, like a fine jewel in an eternal closet. We can only experience its strength and vitality by exploring the subjective reality that is our own, for it will lead us unerringly to that greater source of being that transcends both space and time.

o1

The overall stance of the species is largely maintained by the waking-sleeping patterns. In such a fashion, one large portion of the species focuses in physical reality while the other large portion holds a secure foothold in inner reality.

In inner reality we are working on the interior patterns that will form the next day’s realities, and providing probable previews of the future events. Waking and sleeping reality is therefore balanced in the world mind — not the world brain.

o14

However, the sleeping portion of the species represents the brain’s unconscious activities in the body — particularly when we think of the motion of all of the species’ action en masse in a given day. Those conscious motions have an unconscious basis. If we think of a mass world brain — one entity — then it must wake and sleep in patterns. If we think of mass daily action as performed by one gigantic being, then all of those conscious actions have unconscious counterparts, and a great intercommunication of an inner nervous system must take place.

Part of such brain would have to be awake all of the time, and part engaged in unconscious activity. This is what happens.

sl2

Diverse cultures are thus able to communicate as the cultural knowledge of various parts of the world is given to the sleeping portion of the entire organism. When they sleep, the waking nations add the day’s events to the world memory, and work out future probabilities.

When we are safely ensconced in a comfortable room…

In no present danger, our senses should assimilate it. It should be an easy enough accomplishment to look around us and see that we are in no danger.

Our conscious mind is meant to give our body an assessment of what I will call cultural conditions, for there are sophistications and specifications that in our terms consciousness alone can assess. If under conditions naturally safe in the terms of primary experience, we become overwhelmed by unsafe signals from secondary experience — that is, from our reading or whatever — we show lack of discrimination. We are not able to differentiate between the physically safe present situation, and the imagined which is perhaps unsafe, calling forth the alarms of danger.

en5

The body mechanisms become highly disoriented. The signals to the body are very contradictory, so that after a while, if such conditions continue, we can no longer tell whether we are in actual danger or imagined danger. Our mind then forces our body to be in a state of constant alert — but more unfortunately, we train ourselves to ignore our direct, sensual feedback in the present moment.

Our body then might say we are safe, and our senses show us that no danger is present — yet we have begun to rely so upon secondary experience that we do not trust our creature reactions.

en6

Because of man’s and woman’s great gift of imagination, however, the alarm signals not only invade a safe present moment, but go jangling into the future. To whatever extent, and in whatever fashion, each individual is therefore robbed of his of her beliefs in the personal ability to act meaningfully or with purpose in the present.

The body cannot act tomorrow, today. Its sense data must be clear. This resulting feeling of powerlessness to act leads to a state of hopelessness of varying degrees — and that mood does not tie itself to specific details, but pervades emotional life if it is allowed to. To whatever degree, the condemning, critical material too often becomes self-prophesying — for those who put merit on it allow it to cloud their reactions.

en91

In our terms, while we live, and in the most pertinent terms of intimate sensation, our reality must be what we perceive in the framework of our time, and what we create within that framework as it is experienced. therefore, I entreat not to behave as if man or woman is an imbecile, doomed to extinction, a dim-witted, half-crazy animal with a brain gone amuck.

None of the prophesied destruction man and woman so fears is a reality in our time; nor, for all of the critical prophets through the ages, and the forerunners of doom, has the creativity of man and woman destroyed its self in those terms.

en221

There are those who make careers of condemning the faults and failings of others, or of the species itself, and because of that attitude man and woman’s great energy and good intent remain invisible. Man and woman are in the process of becoming. His and her works are flawed — but they are the lawed apprentice works of a genius artist in the making, whose failures are indeed momentous and grotesque only in the light of his senses genius, whichever leads him or her and directs him or her onward.

When we are considering the future in our terms, constructive achievements are as realistic as destructive ones. In those terms, each year of man’s existence in fact justifies a more optimistic rather than pessimistic view. We cannot place man or woman’s good intent outside of the physical context, for outside of that context we do not have the creature that we know. We cannot say that nature is good, but spawned man and woman, which is a cancer upon it, for nature would have better sense.

cul2

We cannot say, either, The Nature — will destroy man and woman if he or she offends her or him, or The Nature — has little use for its own species, but only wants to promote Life– for Nature is within each member of each species; and without each member of each species, Nature — would be non-existent.

Because we are natural creatures, within us there is a natural state of being. That state can be an ever-present reservoir of peace, vitality, and understanding.

cul4

Whatever our scientist think, our body and our consciousness and our universe spring constantly into actualization. Therefore, through cultivating the clear experience of our own consciousness and being with time and with the moment as we feel it, we can draw upon the greater vitality and power that is available.

To do this, reply upon your immediate sense data, not secondary experience as described. That primary sense data, while pinpointed in the present, providing us with the necessary stance in time, still can open up to us the timelessness from which all time emerges, can bring us intuitive intimations, hinting at the true nature of the ever-present coming-to-be of the universe.

cul99

That kind of experience will let us glimpse the larger patterns of man’s and woman’s creativity, and our part in it. We have been taught to concentrate upon criticisms and faults in our society; and in our times it seems that everything will work out wrong — that left alone the world will run down, the universe will die, man and woman will destroy themselves; and these beliefs so infiltrate our behavior that they organize much of our experience and rob us of the benefits nature itself everywhere provides in direct primary experience.

Often then we ignore our senses’ reality in the world — the luxurious vitality and comfort of the daily moment — by exaggerating the importance of secondary experience as defined for this discussion.

iik87

The most negative projection or prophecy seems to be the most practical one; when we are reading of the world’s ills we say in all honesty, and with no humor: “How can I ignore the reality, the destructive reality, of the present?” In the most practical, immediate, mundane terms, however, we and our world are in the moment naturally and physically safe, as our bodily senses immediately perceive. In the most basic of bodily terms we are not reacting to present conditions.

This would be only too clear if we were physically experiencing the conditions about which we might be reading. If the world were falling down about our shoulders, we would only too clearly understand that “earlier” we were reacting to an imagined and not a real situation.

cul867kj

While disasters, imagined or encounter second-handedly, may in fact later occur, they are far different from physically encountered ones. We only add to their unfortunate nature by negatively brooding upon what might happen in the future, and we destroy our own stance. Our stance in time is highly important, for it is our practical base of operations.

We must trust our sense data in that regard. Otherwise we confuse our psychological and corporal stance, for the body cannot be in a situation of safety and danger at the same time. It wastes its resources fighting imaginary battles.

d24

To some people wars, poverty, murder, treachery, corruption, are primary experience and must be dealt with — as requiring immediate action. The body must react. Such persons are beaten up, or robbed. Those are immediate sense data, and in one way or another, they do react. However feebly, their point of power corresponds immediately with the point of danger.

We cannot react physically in the same way to projected or imagined dangers. Some install a security system like those from www.verisure for peace of mind, others keep a bat by their bedside or a pepper spray in their purse. Each of these solutions is for an anticipated danger, but when the danger comes? There seems to be no possible reaction. We are frustrated. We are meant to deal with our immediate, primary experience, and in so doing we take care of our responsibility. We are able to take action in our own experience, and therefore affect others. We do not have to be ignorant of wars in other corners of the world or close our eyes. But if we allow those experiences to over-cloud our present, valid intersection with reality, then we speak and act from a position not our own, and deny the world whatever benefits our own present version of reality might allow us to give.

cull7yiyf

The natural creature-validity of our senses must remain clear, and only then can we take full advantage of those intuitions and visions that must come through our own private intersection with space and time.

In those terms, the ever-actual integrity of nature everywhere surrounds us. It represents our direct experience. It offers comfort, creativity, and inspiration that we only impede if we allow the secondary experience to supersede our daily moment-to-moment encounter with the physical earth.

sl1

The sleeping and waking portions of life on earth.

A Tiger, following its nature is not evil

Looking at our own species we are often less kindly, less compassionate, less understanding. It is easy to condemn our own kind.

It may be difficult sometimes for us to understand, but our species means well. We understand that the tiger exists in a certain environment, and reacts according to his nature. So does man and woman. Even his or her atrocities are committed in a distorted attempt to reach what we consider good goals. He and she fails often to achieve the goals, or even to understand how his or her very methods prevent their attainment.

t5

He and she as indeed as blessed as the animals, however, and his or her failures are the results of his or her lack of understanding. He or she is directly faced with a far more complex conscious world than the other animals are, dealing particularly with symbols and ideas that are then projected out ward into reality, where they are to be tested. If they could be tested mentally in our context, there would be no need for physical human existence.

Too many complicated issues are connected here, so that I must at best simplify. It is as if man and woman said: “Now what about this idea? What can we do with it? What will happen if we toss it out into reality, physically? How far can we go with any of the great social, scientific, religious ideas that are so peculiarly the offshoots of man’s and woman’s mind?”

l212

If such issues could all be mentally worked out on some non-physical drawing board, again, the great challenge of physical existence would be neither necessary nor meaningful. How far, say, can nationalism be carried? To what extent can the world be treated as if it were external to man and woman, as an object? What can man or woman learn by treating the body as if it were a machine? As if it were a mirage? As if it were driven by blind instinct? As if it were possessed by a soul?

To some extent, these are all unique and creative ponderings that on the part of the animals alone would be considered the most curious and enlightening intellectual achievements. The animals must relate to the earth, and so must man and woman. As the animal must play, mate, hunt his prey or eat his berries within the physical context of sun, ground, trees, snow, hail and wind, so in a different way man and woman must pursue his/her ideas by clothing them in the elemental realities of earth, by perceiving them as events.

nb199

When he or she is destructive, man or woman does not seek to be destructive per se; but in a desire to achieve that which he or she thinks of as particular goal that to him or her is good, he or she forgets to examine the goodness of his or her methods.

One animal chasing and killing its prey serves the greater purpose of preserving the balance of nature, whether or not the animal is aware of this — and again, the animal’s intent is not evil. Man and woman consumes ideas. In so doing he or she contributes to a different kind of balance, of which he or she is usually unaware. But no man or woman truly acts out of pure intent to do wrong, or to be vicious. Storms rend the summer sky, sending forth thunder and lightening. Earthquakes may ravage the countryside. We may deeply regret the havoc worked, knowing that neither the storm nor the earthquake is evil. Not only did they have no wrong intent, but the overall conditions corrected the earth’s balance.

cr2

This requires some unique understanding. The destructive storms worked by mankind ultimately cannot be said to be any more evil than the earthquake. While man’s and woman’s works may often certainly appear destructive, we must not blame man’s or woman’s intent, nor must we ever make the error of confusing man and woman with their works. For many well-intentioned artists, with the best of intentions, produce at times shoddy works of art, all the more disappointing and deplorable to them because of the initial goodness of their intent.

Their lack of knowledge and techniques and methods then become quite plain. By concentrating too deeply upon the world of newspapers and the negative reports of man’s and woman’s actions, it is truly easy to lose sight of each man’s and each woman’s basic good intent.

lyl7

That intent may be confused, poorly executed, tangled amid conflicts of beliefs, strangled by the bloody hands of murders and wars — and yet no man or woman ever loses it. That represents the hope of the species, and it has ever remained lit, like a bright light within each member of the species; and that good intents is handed down through the generations. It is far more potent, that illumination, then any hates or national grudges that may also be passed along.

It is imperative, for any peace of mind, that we believe in that existence of man’s or woman’s innate good intent.

t7

It is shared by all of the other animals. Each animal knows that under certain conditions the other may fight or posture aggressively, or defend its nest. Each animal knows that in time of hunger it might be hunted by another. Except for those situations, however, the animals are not afraid of each other. They know that each other animal is of good intent.

We should grant our own species the same. We can collect books of man’s and woman’s failures. Why would anyone collect the worst works of any artist, and get pleasure in ripping them apart? Man and woman has produced some fine works: The high level of verbal communication, the multitudinous varieties of emotional interactions and of cultural exchange, the facility with exteriorization of ideas and concepts, the reaches of the imagination — all of these, and many others, are unique in the universe.

nb14

To identify man or woman with their poorest works is to purposefully seek out the mars, the mistakes, of fine artist, and then to condemn him or her. To do this is to condemn ourselves personally. If a scientist says consciousness is the result of chance, or Darwin’s theories say that basically man and woman is a triumphant son and daughter of murderers, many people object. If we say, however, that men and women are idiots, or that they are not worth the ground they walk upon, we are saying the same thing. For we must be concerned with this reality as we know it; in those terms, to condemn man or woman is to condemn the species as we know it, and the practical terms of our world.

To say that people can escape to another probability is pragmatically a cop-out — this is apart from the reality of probabilities, for I am speaking from our emotional viewpoint.

p1

Physically our body has a stance in space and time. Speaking of primary and secondary experience. Let us call primary experience that which exists immediately in sense terms in our moment of time — the contact of body with environment. Creating certain divisions there to make our discussion easier. Therefore, I will call secondary experience that information that comes to us through, say, reading, television, discussion with others, letters, and so forth.

The secondary kind of experience is largely symbolic. This should be clear. Reading about a war in the middle of a quiet sunny afternoon is not the same thing as being in the war, however vivid the description. Reading about the energy shortage is not the same as sitting in a cold house. Reading about the possible annihilation of man-womankind through nuclear destruction or other stupidities, while we are sitting calmly enough in our living room, is obviously far divorced from the actuality described in an article.

nb22

At the levels with which we are concerned, the body must primarily react to present, immediate, primary existence in space and time. At other levels it is equipped to handle many kinds of data, i.e. The precognition of cells. But the body depend on the conscious mind to give it a clear assessment of precise conditions of the space and time it occupies. It depends upon that knowledge.

The Origin of the “interior” universe from which the exterior one ever emerges

Here we must part company with treasured objectivity, and enter instead a mental domain, in which it is seen that contradictions are not errors; an inner domain, in which it is seen that contradictions at one level, for at another level they are seen to be no contradictions at all.

In science as it stands, it is necessary that self-contradictions do not arise. If a hypothesis is “proven true,” then it cannot be proven false — or, of course, it was never true to begin with.

nb21

In those terms, therefore, the universe either had “a Creator,” or it had none; or it came into being as stated in the Big Bang theory, and is either constantly expanding or it is not. Evolution exists or it does not. As a rule such theories are proven “true’ by the simple process of excluding anything else that seems contradictory, and so generally our scientific theories carry the weight of strong validity within their own frameworks.

In those frameworks we have made certain classifications that now appear quite obvious. Common sense upholds them, and it seems impossible to consider reality otherwise. Yet by their nature such categories structure our experience of reality itself to such an extent that any alternate ways of perceiving life seem not only untrustworthy, but completely impossible.

nb23

Our classifications of various species appear to us as the only logical kinds of divisions that could be made among living things. Quite the contrary is the case, however. That particular overall method of separation leads to such questions as: Which species came first, and which came later, and how did the various species merge — one from the other? Those questions are further brought about by our time classifications, without which they would be meaningless.

Our classifications in such respects set up exterior divisions. Now these serve as quite handy reference points, but basically speaking they in no way affect the natural experience of those various living creatures that we refer to as “other species.”

nb6

Our specializations work as long as we stay within the framework, though then we must wrestle with the questions that such divisions automatically entail. It is perhaps difficult for us to realize that these are written and verbalized categories that in no real manner tell us anything about the actual experience of other creatures — but only note habits, tendencies, and separations of the most exterior nature.

If our purpose is to comprehend what other living creatures perceive, then the methods we are using are at the best short-sighted, and at the worst they completely defeat our purpose. For example: No matter what information or data we receive as the result of animal experimentation or dissection for scientific purposes, and no matter how valuable the results appear to be, the consequences of such methods are so distorted that we comprehend less of life than we did before.

N12

Our present methods will simply bring us pat, manufactured results and answers. They will satisfy neither the intellect nor the soul. Since our universe springs from an inner one, and since that inner one pervades each nook and cranny of our own existence, we must look where we have not before — into reality of our own minds and emotions. We must look to the natural universe that we know. We must look with our intuitions and creative instincts at the creatures about us, seeing them not as other species with certain habits, not as inferior properties of the earth, to be dissected, but as living examples of the nature of the universe, in constant being and transformation.

We must study the quality of life, dare to follow the patterns of our own thoughts and emotions, and to ride that mobility, for in that mobility there are hints of the origin of the universe and of the psyche. The poet’s view of the universe and of nature is more scientific, then, than the scientist’s, for more of nature is comprehended.

nb8

The child, laughing with joy and awe at the sight of the first violet, understands far more in the deepest terms than a botanist who has long since forgotten the experience of perceiving one violet, though he has at his mental fingertips the names and classifications of all the world’s flowers. Information is not necessarily knowledge or comprehension.

Thoughts spring into out mind as the objective universe swims into reality — that is, in the same fashion. Diagramming sentences tells us little about the spoken language, and nothing about those miraculous physical and mental performances that allow us to speak — an so diagramming the species of the world is, in the same way, quite divorced from any true understanding.

nb7

The subjective feeling of our being, our intimate experience from moment-to-moment — these possess the same mysterious quality that it seems to us the universe possesses. We are mortal, and everywhere encounter evidence of that mortality, and yet within its framework our feelings and thoughts have a reality to us personally that transcends all such classifications. We know that physically we will die, yet each person at one time or another is secretly sure that he or she will not meet such a fate, and that life is somehow eternal.

Through such feelings the psyche breaks through all misconceptions, hinting at the nature of self and of the universe, and at that level there are no contradictions. There is no beginning or end to the psyche, either. We may say: “Granted” yet persist, saying: “In our terms, however, when did the world begin, and in what manner?” Yet the very attempt to place such an origin in time makes almost any answer distorted.

u11

The truth is that the answers lie in our own experience. They are implied in our own spontaneous behavior — that is, in the wondrous activity of our bodies and minds.

We walk well without having at our fingertips any conscious knowledge of the inner mechanism’s activity. We may have been told, or we may have read about the body’s anatomy, and the interaction of its parts. Yet whether or not we have such information, we walk quite well. Such data therefore do not help our walking performance any.

d23

For that matter, an athlete may have a great zest for motion and an impatience with reading, caring not what within the body makes it move as long as its performance is superb — within an invalid with great book knowledge about all of the body’s parts is quite unable to physically perform in a normal manner.

Our body knows how to walk. The knowledge is built-in and acted upon. The body knows how to heal itself, how to use its nourishment, how to replace its tissues, yet in our terms the body itself has no access to the kind of information the mind possesses. Being so ignorant, how does it perform so well?

d12

If it were scientifically inclined, the body would know that such spontaneous performance was impossible, for science cannot explain the reality of life itself in its present form, much less its origins.

Consciousness within the body knows that its existence is within the body’s context, and apart from it at the same time. In ordinary life during the day consciousness often takes a recess, so to speak — it daydreams, or otherwise experiences itself as somewhat apart from the body’s reality. At night, in sleep, the self’s consciousness takes longer, freer recesses from physical reality, and does this as spontaneously as the body itself walks. These experiences are not hypothetical. They happen to each person. On such occasions, each person is to some extent aware of a kind of comprehension that is not dependent upon the accumulation of data, but of a deeper kind if experience and direct encounter with the reality from which the world emerges.

w2

This is the kind of wordless knowledge the body possesses, that brings forth our physical motion and results in the spectacular preciseness of bodily response. It is, then, highly practical. In our terms, the same force that formed the world forms our subjective reality now, and is a source of the natural universe.

Exploring those realities lovingly will bring us into direct contact with inner dimensions of our being, providing intuitive understandings that are of great import.

w1

The motion of the universe appears in the motion of our own intimate experience, and in that seemingly most nebulous area the answers will be found.

Historical and cultural appears to be the only one objective world

With its history already written, its present, and hopefully its probable future.

It seems also that the future must be built upon that one known species or world past. Often it may simply sound like a figure of speech when we talk about probabilities. In many ways it may indeed appear to be almost outrageous to consider the possibility that “there is more than one earth,” or that there are many earths, each similar enough to be recognizable, yet each different in the most vital respects.

N126

This house exists. yet we may open the door on any given day to a probable world from our immediate standpoint, and never know the difference. This happens all the time, and I mean all the time.

We move through probabilities without knowing it. The transitions are literally invisible to us, though they may appear as trace elements in our dreams. As a diamond has many facets, so does our reality in that regard.

u13

Since our birth a probability has occurred that we could have followed, in which our wars did not happen. There is another probability in which the Second World War ended in nuclear destruction, and we did not enter one either. We chose “this” probable reality in order to ask certain questions about the nature of man or woman — seeing him or her where her or she wavered equally between creativity and destruction, knowledge and ignorance; but a point that contained potentials for the most auspicious kinds of development, in our eyes.

In a way, man and woman are trans-species at this point in probability. It is a time and a probability in which every bit of help is needed, and our talents, abilities, and prejudices made us both uniquely fitted for such a drama. At the same time, do not dwell too much upon that world situation, for a concentration upon our own nature and upon the physical nature of our world — the seasons, and so forth — allows us to refresh our own energy, and frees us to take advantage of that clear vision that is so necessary.

d21

We each also became involved in this probability to use it as a creative stimulus that would make us seek for a certain kind of understanding. There is always a creative give-and-take between the individual and his world. To some extent or another each of those involved in this probability chose it for their own reasons. Saying this, however, I also say that many leave this probability for another when they have learned and contributed.

u5

Sometimes we personally inhibit our dream recall because we do not want to take the time to remember and interpret the dreams. Knowing this, we may want to change ur ways.

When we ask about the beginning of a universe, we are speaking of a visible universe.

There is consciousness within each conceivable hypothetical point within the universe. There is therefore “an invisible universe” out of which the visible or objective universe springs.

I do not mean to overemphasize the point that this particular material is most difficult to explain, yet I can hardly stress the issue too strongly.

NONN

Our universe did not emerge at any one point, therefore, or with any one initial cell — but everywhere it began to exist at once, as the inner pulsations of the invisible universe reached certain intensities that “impregnated” the entire physical system simultaneously.

In this case, first of all light appeared. At the same time Electromagnetic Energy units became manifest, impinging from the invisible universe into definition. Again, because of the psychological strength of preconceived notions, I try to work around many of our concepts. Yet in much of this material is implied, but the implications must have passed on to the reader.

N2

For example, the universe expands as an idea does, and so the visible universe sprang into being in the same manner. The whole affair is quite complicated since — the world freshly springs into new creativity at each moment. No matter what our version of creativity, of the creation of the world, we are stuck with questions of where such energy came from, for it seems that unimaginable energy was released more or less at one time, and that this energy must then run out.

The same energy, however, still gives birth to the universe. In those terms, it is still being created. The Electromagnetic Energy units, impressing a probable physical field, contain within them the latent knowledge of all of the various species that can emerge under those conditions. The groupings “begin” in the invisible universe. We can say that it took untold centuries for the Electromagnetic Energy units “initially” to combine, form classifications of matter and various species; or we can say that this process happened at once. It is according to our relative position, but the physical universe was everywhere seeded, impregnated, simultaneously. On the other hand, this still happens, and there is no real “coming-in” point.

v11

We distinguish between consciousness and our own version, which we consider consciousness of self. When I speak of atoms and molecules having consciousness, I mean that they possess a consciousness of themselves as identities. I do not mean that they love or hate, in our terms, but that they are aware of their own separateness, and aware of the ways in which that separateness cooperates to form other organizations.

They are innately aware, in fact, of all such probable cooperative ventures, and imbued with the “drive” for value fulfillment. Every known species was inherently “present” with the overall impregnation of the visible universe, then.

v14

If the universe were a painting, for example, the painter would not have first painted darkness, then an explosion, then a cell, then the joining together of groups of cells into a simple organism, then that organism’s manipulation into others like it, or traced a pattern from an amoeba or a paramecium on upward — but he or she would have instead begun with a panel of light, an underpainting, in which all of the world’s organisms were included, though not in detail. Then in a creativity that came from the painting itself the colors would grow rich, the species attain their delineations, the winds blow and the seas move with the tides.

The motion and energy of the universe still come from within. I certainly realize that this is hardly a scientific statement — yet the moment the All That Is conceived of a physical universe it was invisibly created, endowed with creativity, and bound to emerge.

N6

Because each hypothetical, conceivable portion of the universe is conscious, the Planner is within the plan itself in the greatest of terms — perhaps basically inconceivable to us. There is of course no “outside” into which the invisible universe materialized, since all does indeed exist in a mental, psychic, or spiritual realm quite impossible to describe. To us our universe seems, now, objective and real, and it seems to us that at one time at least this was not the case, so we ask its creation and the evolution of the species. The answer has been couched in the terms in which the question if generally asked.

While we believe in and experience the passage of time, then such questions will naturally occur to us, and in that fashion. Within that framework they make sense. When we begin to question the nature of time itself, then the “when” of the universe is beside the point.

N9

Almost anyone will agree, I hope, that the universe is a most splendid example of creativity. Few would agree, however, that we can learn more about nature of the universe by examining our own creativity than we can by examining the world through instruments — and here is exquisite irony, for we create the instruments of creativity, even while at the same time we often spout theories that deny to man and woman all but most mechanical of reactions.

In other terms, the world comes to know itself, to discover itself, for the Planner left room for divine surprise, and the plan was nowhere foreordained; nor is there anywhere within it anything that corresponds to our survival-of-the-fittest theories.

N22

These are creative distortions on our part, directly related to specializations of consciousness that cut us off from the greater concourse existing at other levels between the species and the land. Again, consciousness everywhere pervades the universe, and is aware of all conditions. The balance of nature upon our planet is no chance occurrence, but the result of constant, instant computations on the part of each most minute consciousness, whether it forms part of a rock, a person, an animal, a plant. Each invisibly “holds space together,” whatever its station. This is a cooperative venture. Our own consciousness has its particular unique qualities, in that like other comparatively long-lived species, we associate our identity with our form far more rigidly. Other kinds of consciousness “leap in and out of forms” with greatest leeway. There is a biological understanding that exists, for example, when one animal kills another one for food. The consciousness of the prey leaves its body under the impetus of a kind of stimulus unknown to us.

v23

The natural interplay among the animals. This is not anywhere meant to justify the cruel slaughtering of animals by man and woman under many circumstances

 

There is no non-matter.

There is simply a point that we recognize as having the characteristics that we have ascribed to life, or living conditions — a point that meets the requirements that we have arbitrarily set.

There is no particular point at which life was inserted into nonliving matter. There is no point at which consciousness emerged. Consciousness is within the tiniest particle, whatever its life conditions seem to be, or however it might seem to lack those conditions we call living.

N1

In terms of continuity, we could say that life in the physical universe, on our planet, “began” spontaneously in a given number of species at the same time.

There were fully developed men — of full intellect, emotion, and will — living at the same time, in our terms, as those creatures supposed to be man’s evolutionary ancestors. Species have come and gone of which we have no knowledge. There are parallel developments. That is there were “apes” who attained their own “civilizations,” for example. They used tools. They were not men-to-be, nor did they evolve into men.

do25

It is erroneous to say that they did not develop. Or that their progress was stunned, for it was not. Their reality explored the ramifications of animal-hood in a completely different fashion. Their development paralleled man’s and woman’s in many respects, in that they lived simultaneously upon the earth, and shared the environment.

I have referred to them at various times as animal medicine men, for man and woman did learn from them. The impact of many of my statements of the past goes unrecognized, or perhaps the words sound pat, but there are other conditions of life that we do not perceive, sometimes because our time sequences are too different. Before the smallest cell appeared, in our terms, there was the consciousness that formed the cell.

dr5

Words do nearly forsake me, the semantic differences are so vast. If I say to you: “Life came from a dream,” such a statement sounds meaningless. Yet as our physical reality personally is largely dependent upon our dreaming state, and impossible without it, so in the same way the first cell was physically materialized and actual only because of its own inner reality of consciousness.

In those terms there was a point where consciousness impressed itself into matter through intent, or formed itself into matter. That “breakthrough” cannot be logically explained, but only compared to, say, an illumination — that is, a light everywhere occurring at once, that became a medium for life in our terms. It had nothing to do with the propensity of certain kinds of cells to reproduce, but with an overall illumination that set the conditions in which life as we think of it was possible — and at that imaginary hypothetical point, all species became latent.

bio1

There was no point at which consciousness was introduced, because consciousness was the illumination from which the first cells emerged. That illumination was everywhere then at every point aware of itself, and of the conditions formed by its presence. In our terms each species is aware of the conditions of each other species, and of the entire environment. In those terms the environment forms the species and the species forms the environment.

As hinted, there have been all kinds of species of animal-man, and man-animal, of which our sciences are not aware, and bones found thought to form, say, a man and an animal that were from the same creature. Afghanistan comes to mind, as a particularly lucrative environment.

dr183

Our own kind of conscious mind is splendid and unique. It causes us, however, to interpret all other kinds of life according to our own specifications and experience. The complex nature of other animal consciousness escapes us completely. And when we compare our technologies, learning, logical thought, cultures and arts with us understand of animal experience, there seems no doubt that we are superior and “the Flower of Evolution” — that all other kinds of life are topped by our existence.

We are closed to the intricate, voluptuous, sensuous, social experience of the animals, or even of the plants — not being able to perceive that different kind of biological emotion and belonging, that rich, sensual identification with earth, and cut off from a biologically oriented culture that is everywhere part and parcel of both plant and animal life.

www223e

We are a part of that also, but the conscious mind, with its own specifications, cannot manipulate with that kind of knowledge.

There have also been men and women — in our terms — more developed than us — in terms — for our ideas of development are highly erroneous. But topped us in technology, if that is our criterion.

dr42

I hesitate in many instances to say what I might, because it is so easy to misinterpret meanings; but when we ask what is the purpose of consciousness we take it for granted there must be one purpose — where the greater truth and creativity must be that consciousness itself cannot be aware of all of its own purposes, but ever discovers its own nature through its own manifestations.

To those who want easy answers, this is no answer. There is, I know, in heroic terms a love, a knowledge, a compassion, a creativity that can assigned to All That Is, which is within each creature. I know that each smallest “particle” of consciousness can never be broken down, and that each contains an infinite capacity for creativity and development — and that each is innately blessed.

cre

There is a design and a designer, but they are so combined, the one within and the one without, that it is impossible to separate them. The Creator is also within its creations, and the creations themselves are gifted with creativity.

It is often not enough, that deep emotional fears simply be realized once or twice.

Deep emotional fears must be encountered more or less directly. Otherwise the old habits allow such fears to be buried again.

f22

Fear’s released, give the solution to a deep emotional equation. For example, the realization emotionally that life is not given by the parent, but through the parent — by LIFE itself, or All That Is, and “with no strings attached.”

In dreams we can put this together. We cannot logically, mathematically explain such emotional reality.

f23

On some occasions long-term illnesses, for instance, are resolved suddenly through a dream. However, in most cases dreams prevent such chronic illnesses, providing through small therapeutics a constant series of minor but important personal revelations.

That is, dreams are the best preventative medicine. Some psychological difficulties need clear conscious light and understanding. Others, however, operate even without conscious participation, and those are often solved, or remedied, at the same level without interfering with the conscious mind. As the body handles many physical manipulations without our own conscious knowledge of what is being done, or how, so the workings of our own psychological systems often automatically solve “their own problems” through dreams of which we are not aware.

f2

We could not handle anything like complete dream recall. We are not consciously capable of dealing with the psychological depths and riches that activity reveals. For one thing, our concepts of time, realistically or practically speaking, as utilized, would become more difficult to maintain in normal life. This does not mean that far greater dream recall than we have is not to our advantage, because it certainly is. I merely want to explain why so many dreams are not recalled.

While the large proportion remain relatively hidden, however, the average person often meets with dream fragments just below the normal threshold of consciousness — not recognizing them as what they are — experiencing instead the impulse to do this or that on a given day; to eat this or that, or to refrain from something else. An easy enough example is the case where an individual with no memory [of such a dream] decides to cancel a plane trip on a given day, and later discovers that the plane crashed. The impulse to cancel may or may not seem to have an acceptable, rational explanation; that is, for no seeming reason, the individual may simply, impulsively, feel a premonition. On the other hand the impulse might appear as a normal, logical change of plan.

f29

We are taking it for granted that a forgotten dream stated the probable catastrophe. This information was unconsciously processed, the probability considered and rejected: Psychologically or physically, the person was not ready to die. Others with the same knowledge found that death was the accepted probability. This does not mean that any of those people could bear consciously knowing their own decisions — or could board that plane with the conscious consequences in mind.

Nor is such an inner decision forced upon the conscious personality, for in all such instances, the conscious personality has at various times come close to accepting the idea of death at the particular time in life.

f4

This does not mean that those people are committing suicide in the same way that a person does who takes his or her life — but the in a unique psychological manipulation they no longer hold the same claim to life as they had before. They “throw their lives to the Fates,” so to speak, saying not as they did before: “I will live,” but: “I will live or die as the Fates decide.”

They may use other terms than Fate, of course, but the vital, personal, direct, affirmative intent to live is not there. They are headed for another reality, and ready for it.

f12

The conscious mind, however, can only hold so much. Life as we know it could not exist if everything was conscious in those terms. The sweet parcel of physical existence, exists as much by merit of what it does not include as it does by merit of our experience. In important ways our dreams make our life possible by ordering our psychological life automatically, as our physical body is ordered automatically for us. We can make great strides by understanding and recalling dreams, and by consciously participating in them to a far greater degree. But we cannot become completely aware of our dreams in their entirety, and maintain our normal physical stance.

As a civilization we fail to reap dreams’ greater benefit, and the conscious mind is able to handle much more dream recall that we allow. Such training would add immeasurably to the dimensions of our life. Dreams educate us even in spatial relationships, and are far more related to the organism’s stance in the environment than is realized. The child learns spatial relationships in dreams.

fo8f

The mother did not give life. The life comes from All That IS, from the spirit of life itself, and is freely given — to be taken away by no one, or threatened by no one or no force, until that life fulfills its own purposes and decides to travel on.

Life is expression. It comes to be out of the force of itself, and no force stands against it or threatens it. Death in our terms certainly seems an end, but it is instead a translation of life into another form.

f45

There are verbal difficulties having to do with the definition of life. It appears that there is living matter and non-living matter, leading to such questions as: “How does non-living matter become living?”

The species has a physical past, And a psychological past

No experiences are ever lost. The most private event is still written in the mass psyche of the species. In terms of past, present and future. We can only understand some concepts when they are given in that fashion. Taking that for granted, then, we are each born with the conscious knowledge of what has come before. Our brain is far from an empty slate, waiting for the first imprint of experience; it is already equipped with complete “equations,” telling us who we are and where we have come from. Nor do we wipe that slate clean, symbolically speaking, before we write our life upon it. Instead, we draw upon what has gone before: the experiences of our ancestors, back — in our terms now — through time immemorial.

ph21

The individual is born equipped with his or her humanness, with certain propensities and leanings toward development. He or she knows what human voices sound like even before his or her ear physically hear those sounds. He or she is born wanting to form civilizations as, for example, beavers want to form dams.

Children’s dreams activate inner psychological mechanisms, and at a time when their age makes extensive physical knowledge of their world impossible. In dreams they are given information regarding that environment.

ph155

Physical feedback is of course necessary for development, and a child deprived of it will not fully mature. Yet the development of dreams follow inner patterns that activate the child’s growth, and stimulate its development. There are even key dreams in infancy that serve to trigger necessary hormonal functioning. The child crawls and walks in dreams before those acts are physically executed — the dreams serving as impetus for muscular coordination and development.

Language is practiced by infants in the dream state, and it is indeed that mental practice that result in children speaking sentences far more quickly than otherwise would seem possible. The dream world, then, develops faster than physical experience. For some time the child is more secure there. Without dreaming there would be no learning, nor would there be memory.

ph1

Events are processed in dreams; put in the necessary perspective,, sorted and arranged. This is done when the conscious mind is separated from direct involvement with physical events. Dreams serve to dull the impact of the day’s events just past, while the meaning of those activities sifts through the various levels of the personality, settling into compartments of intent and belief. Often the true impact of an event does not occur until it has been interpreted or re-experienced through a dream.

Because dreams follow paths of association, they break through time barriers, allowing the individual to mix, match, and compare events from different periods of his or her life. All of this is done somewhat in the way that child plays, through the formation of creative dream dramas in which the individual is free to play a million different roles and to examine the nature of probable events from the standpoint of “a game.”

ch79k

In play, children adopt certain rules and conditions “for a time.” The child can stop at any time. Innumerable play events can occur with varying intensity, yet generally speaking the results cease when the game is over. The child plays at being an adult, and is a child again when his or her parents call, so the effect of the game are not long lasting. Still, they are an important part of a child’s daily life, and they affect the way he or she relates to others. So in dreams, the events have effects only while dreaming. They do not practically intrude into waking hours — the attaching bear vanishes when we open our eyes; it does not physically chase us around the bedroom.

The great versatility of the species in its reaction to events is highly dependent upon this kind of dreaming capacity. The species tries out its probable reactions to probable events in the dream state, and hence is better prepared for action “in the future.”

p9

To some extent dreams are participated in by cellular consciousness also, for the cells have an equal interest in the individual’s psychic and body events. In a way dreams are of course composite behavior — mental and psychic games that suit the purposes of mind and body alike. Feedback from the physical environment may trigger an alarming dream that causes the individual to awaken.

Certain chemicals may affect dreaming by altering the cells’ reality. Many sleeping pills are detrimental, in that they inhibit the body’s natural response to its environment while an individual is sleeping , and deaden the intimate relationship between the dreaming mind and the sleeping body.

ph3

Because we have very limited ideas of what logic is, it seems to us that the dreaming self is not critical, or “logical”; yet it works with amazing discrimination, sifting data, sending some to certain portions of the body, and structuring memory. Sleeping pills also impede the critical functions of dreams that are so often overlooked. The facts are that dreams involve high acts of creativity. Theses are not only intuitively base, but formed with a logic far surpassing our ideas of that quality. These creative acts are then fitted together through associative processes that come together most precisely to form the dream events.

It should certainly be obvious that dreams are not passive events. Some rival physical events in intensity and even effect. They involve quite active coordination on the part of mind and body, and they bring to the individual experience otherwise unattainable.

phi9

Small amounts of ordinary stimulators, such as coffee or tea, taken before bed when we are already sleepy, have a beneficial effect in stimulating dream activity and aiding dream recall. Too large a serving, of course, could simply waken us, but small amounts taken if we are already drowsy allow us to take our conscious mind into the dream state more readily, where it can act as observer.

55y

A very small amount of alcohol can also serve. Anything that suppresses activity will also suppress our dreams. As is known, anyone deprived of sufficient dreaming will most likely begin to hallucinate while in the waking state, for too much experience has built up that needs processing. There are many secondary hormonal activities that take place in the dream state and at no other time. Even cellular growth and revitalization are accelerated while the body sleeps.

In play children often imaginatively interchange their sexes

The young selfhood is freer in its identification, and as yet has not been taught to identify its own personality with its sex exclusively.

ch1

In the dreams of children this same activity continues, so that the boy may have many dream experiences as a girl, and the girl as a boy. More than this, however, in children’s dreams as in their play activity, age variances are also frequent. The young child dreaming of its own future counterpart, for example, attains a kind of psychological projection into the future of its world. Adults censor many of their own dreams so that the frequent changes in sexual orientation are not remembered.

Play then at another game, and pretend that you are of opposite sex. Do this after an encounter in which the conventions of sex have a played a part. Ask your self how many of your current beliefs would be different if your sex was. If you are a parent, imagine that you are your mate, and in that role imaginatively consider your children.

chi4

Our beliefs about dreams color our memory and interpretation of them, so that at the point of waking, with magnificent psychological duplicity, we often make last minute adjustments that bring our dreams more in line with our conscious expectations. This sexual symbols usually attached to dream images are highly simplistic, for example. They program us to interpret our dreams in a given manner.

We do have a “dream memory” as a species, with certain natural symbols. There are individually experienced, with great variations. The studies done on men and women dreamers are already prejudiced, however, both by the investigators and by the dreamers themselves. Men remember “manly” dreams — generally speaking, now — while women in the same manner remember dreams that they believe suit their sex according to their beliefs.

chi8

People often program their waking memory in quite the same fashion. The psyche, again, not only has no one sexual identification, but it is the larger psychic and psychological bank or potentials from which all gradations of sexuality emerge. It is not sexual, and yet it is the combination of those richest ingredients considered to be male and female.

The human personality is therefore endowed sexually and psychologically with a freedom from strict sexual orientation. This has contributed to the survival of the species by not separating any of its mental or psychological abilities into two opposite camps. Except for the physical processes of reproduction, the species is free to arrange its psychological characteristics in whatever fashions it chooses. There is no inner programming that says otherwise.

chi9

In dreams this psychological complexity is more apparent. Because of programming, many people refrain from natural reactions of a most harmless nature, and these are often given expression in the dream state. Those dreams, however, are precisely the ones least remembered — the censoring is so habitual. The male’s aggressive tendencies, often taken as basic characteristics of the species itself, are a case in point. This is an exaggerated, learned aggressive response, not natural in those terms in our species, or as interpreted in any other species.

This artificial aggressiveness has nothing to do either, basically, with the struggle for survival. It is the direct result of the fact that the male has been taught to deny the existence within himself of certain basic emotions. This means that he denies a certain portion of his own humanity, and then is forced to overreact in expressing those emotions left open to him. The reasons for such a lopsided focus? The male chose to take upon himself a kind of specialization of consciousness that, carried too far, leads to a hard over-objectivity. Only in dreams in our time, in our society, is male free to cry unabashedly, to admit any kind of dependency, and only at certain occasions and usually in relative privacy is he allowed to express feelings of love.

r111

His rage turns outward as aggression. It is the highest idiocy, however, to project that artificial aggression outward upon the animal kingdom in general. Such beliefs invisibly affect all of our studies — and worse, they help us misread the activity in nature itself.

Those who imagine they look upon nature with the most objective or eyes are those whose subjective beliefs blind them most of all for they cannot see through their own misinterpretations. It has been said that statistics can be made to say two things at once, both contradictory; so the facts of nature can be read in completely different fashions as they are put together with the organizational abilities of the mind operating through the brain’s beliefs. The exterior core of dreams is also blemished to that degree, but the inner core of dreams provides a constant new influx of material, feedback, and insight from the psyche, so that the personality is not at the mercy of its exterior experience only — not confined to environmental feedback only, but ever provided with fresh intuitive data and direction.

cc1h1

Even is such dreams are not recalled, they circulate through the psychological system, so to speak. They are responsible for the inventiveness and creativity of the species, even bringing new comprehensions that can be used to bear upon the life of the physical world.

Consciousness is too creative to confine its activities in one direction

Consciousness enjoys its physical orientation. Dreams provide consciousness with its own creative play, therefore, when it need not be so practical or so “mundane,” allowing it to use its innate characteristics more freely.

double

Many people are aware of double or triple dreams, when they seem to have two or three simultaneous dreams.. Usually upon the point of awakening, such dreams suddenly telescope into one that is predominant, with the others taking subordinate positions, though the dreamer is certain that in the moment before the dream were equal in intensity. Such dreams are representative of the great creativity of consciousness, and hint of it ability to carry on more than one line of experience at one time without losing track or itself.

In Physical waking life, we must do one thing or another, generally speaking. Obviously I am simplifying, since we can eat an orange, watch television, scratch our foot, and yell at the dog — all more or less at the same time. We cannot, however, be in Boston and San Francisco at the same time, or be 21 years of age and 11 at the same time.

do8

In double dreams and triple dreams consciousness shows its transparent, simultaneous nature. Several lines of dream experience can be encountered at the same time, each complete in itself, but when the dreamer wakes to the fact, the experience cannot be neurologically translated; so one dream usually predominates, with the others more like ghost images.

There are too many varieties of such dreams to discuss here, but they all involve consciousness dispersing, yet retaining its identity, consciousness making loops with itself. Such dreams involve other sequences than the ones with which we are familiar. They hint at the true dimensions of consciousness that are usually unavailable to us, for we actually form our own historical world in the same manner, in that above all other experiences that one world is predominant, and played on the screen of our brain.

orr

Take a very simple event like eating of an orange. Playfully imagine how that event is interpreted by the cells of your body. How is the orange perceived? It might be directly felt by the tip of your finger, but are the cells in your feet aware of it? Do the cells in your knee know you are eating an orange?

Take all the time you want with this. Then explore your own conscious sense perceptions of the orange. Dwell on its taste, texture, odor, shape. Again, do this playfully, and take your time. Then let your own association flow in our mind. What does the orange remind you of? When did you first see or taste one? Have you ever seen oranges grow, or orange blossoms? What does the color remind you of?

ora

Then pretend you are having a dream that begins with the image of an orange. Follow the dream in your mind. Next, pretend that you are waking from the dream to realize that another dream was simultaneously occurring, and ask yourself quickly what the dream was. Followed in the same sequence given, the exercise will allow you to make loops with your own consciousness, so to speak, to catch it “coming and going.” And the last question — what else were you dreaming of? — Should bring an entirely new sequence of images and thoughts into your mind that were indeed happening at the same time as your daydream about the orange.

These feel and practice of these exercises are their important points — the manipulation of a creative consciousness. We exist outside of our present context, but such statements are meaningless, practically speaking, unless we give oneself some freedom to experience events outside of that rigid framework. These exercises alter our usual organizations, and hence allow us to encounter experience in a fresher fashion.

doube

A double dream is like the double life lived by some people who have two families — one in each town — and who seemingly manipulate separate series of events that other people would find most confusing. If the body can only follow certain sequences, still consciousness has inner depths of action that do not show on the surface line of experience. Double dreams are clues to such activity.

While each person generally follows a given strand of consciousness, and identifies with it as “myself,” there are other alternate lines beneath the surface. They are also quite as legitimately the same identity, but they are not focused upon because the body must have one clear, direct mode of action.

do14

These strands are like double dreams that continue. They are serve as a framework to the recognized self. In periods of stress or challenge the recognized self may sense these other strains of consciousness, and realize that a fuller experience is possible, a greater psychological thickness. On some occasions in the dream state the recognized self may then enlarge its perception enough to take advantage of these other portions of its own identity. Double or triple dreams may represent such encounters at times. Consciousness always seeks the richest, most creative form, while ever maintaining its own integrity. The imagination, playing, the arts and dreaming, allow it to enrich its activities by providing feedback other than that received in the physical environment itself.

Our memories, feelings, and emotions are connected to the body

It is as if the experience of our life were captured on a film. In this case the film would be the body tissue, the brain’s tissue. The experiences themselves, however, would exist independently of the film, which in any case could not capture their entirely.

In a manner of speaking the activity of our brain adjusts the speed with which we, as a physical creature, perceive life’s events. Theoretically, those events could be slowed down or run at a quicker pace. Again in a manner of speaking, the sound, vision, dimensional solidarity and so forth are “Dubbed in. ” The picture runs at the same speed, more or less. The physical senses chime in together to give us a dramatic sensual chorus, each “voice” keeping perfect time with all the other sensual patterns so that as a rule there is harmony and a sense of continuity, with no embarrassing lapses.

n111

The same applies to our thoughts, which if we bother to listen seem to come smoothly one after another, more or less following the sequence of exterior activity. The brain like the movie screen gives us a physical picture, in living stereo, of inner activities that nowhere themselves physically appear.

Our brain gives us a handy and quite necessary reference system with which to conduct corporal life. It puts together for us in their “proper” sequences events that could be experienced in many other ways, using other kinds of organization. The brain, of course, and other portions of the body, tune into our planet and connect us with numberless time sequences — molecular, cellular, and so forth — so that they are synchronized with the world’s events.

n119

The brain organizes activity and translates events, but it does not initiate them. Events have an electromagnetic reality that is then projected onto the brain for physical activation. Or instruments only pick up certain levels of the brain’s activity. They do not perceive the mind’s activity at all, except as it is imprinted onto the brain.

Even dreams are so imprinted. When one portion or one half of the brain is activated, for example, the corresponding portion of the other half is also activated, but at levels scientists do not perceive. It is ridiculous to call one side or the other of the brain dominant, for the full richness of the entire earth experience requires utilization of both halves, as does dreaming.

n114

In dreaming, however, the full sense-picture usually projected by the brain, and reinforced by bodily action, is not necessary. Those dream experiences often seem out of joint or out of focus in morning’s hindsight, or in retrospect, simply because they occur with a complexity that the brain could not handle in ordinary waking terms.

The body obviously must react in our official present; hence the brain neatly keeps its physical time sequences with spaced neural responses. The entire package of physical reality is dependent upon the senses’ data being timed — synchronized — giving the body an opportunity for precise action. In dreams the senses are not so restrained. Events from past, present, and future can be safely experienced, as can events that would be termed probable from our usual viewpoint, since the body, again, is not required to act upon them.

n12

Because of the brain’s necessary specifications, large portions of our own greater reality cannot appear through its auspices. The brain might consider such extracurricular activity as background noise or clutter that it could not decipher. It is the mind, then, as the brain’s non-physical counterpart, that decides what data will activate the brain in that regard. The so-called ancient portions of the brain among them the brainstem — limbic system contain “the mind’s memories.” Generally speaking, this means important data to which, however, no conscious attention need be given.

None could be given, because the information deals with time scales that the more “sophisticated” portions of the brain can no longer handle.

n21

The knowledge of the body’s own biological probabilities takes place at those ancient levels, and at those levels there is activity that results in a cellular communication existing between all species. The brain has built-in powers of adaptation to an amazing degree, so that innately one portion can take over for any other portion, and perform its activities as well as its own. Beliefs in what is possible and not possible often dull that facility, however. While the neural connections are specific, and while learned biological behavior dominates basically, the portions of the brain are innately inter-changeable, for they are directed by the mind’s action.

This is most difficult to explain, but the capacity for full conscious life is inherent in each portion of the body itself. Otherwise, in fact, it’s smooth synchronically would be impossible. The brain has abilities we do not use consciously because our beliefs prevent us from initiating the proper neural habits. Certain portions of the brain seem dominant only because of those neural habits that are adopted in any given civilization or time. But other cultures in our past have experienced reality quite differently as a result of encouraging different neural patterns, and putting experience together through other focuses.

ddedw3d1

Dreaming, for example, can be “brought into focus” in a far sharper fashion, so that at least some of those experiences can be consciously utilized. When this happens, we are consciously taking advantage of experience that is physically and logically extra-curricular.

We are bringing into our consciousness traces of events that have not been registered in the same way that waking events are by the brain. The dream events are partially brain-recorded, but the brain separates such experience from waking events. Dreams can provide us with experience that in a manner of speaking, at least, is not encountered in time. The dream itself is recorded by the brain’s time sequences, but in the dream itself there is a duration of time “that is timeless.”

dre7

Theoretically, certain dreams can give us a lifetime’s experience to draw upon, though the dream itself can take less than an hour in our time. In a way, dreams are the invisible thickness of our normal consciousness. They involve both portions of the brain. Many dreams do activate the brain in a ghostly fashion, sparking responses that are not practically pertinent in ordinary terms. That is, they do not require direct action but serve as anticipators of action, reminders to the brain to initiate certain actions in its future.

Dreams are so many-leveled that a full discussion requires an almost impossible verbal expertise. For while dreams do not necessitate action on the part of the whole body, and while the brain does not register the entire dream, the dream does serve to activate biological action — by releasing hormones, for example.

e13e

There are also what I will call body dreams. No consciousness, to whatever degree, is fully manifested in matter. There is always constant communication between all portions of the body, but when the conscious mind is diverted that activity often increases. Cellular consciousness at its own level then forms a body dream. These do not involve pictures or words, but are rather like the formations of electromagnetic intent, anticipating action to be taken, and these may then serve as initiators of therapeutic dreams, in which “higher” levels of consciousness are psychologically made aware of certain conditions.

Many problems, however, are anticipated through body dreams, and conditions cleared at that level alone.

We have inner senses that correlate with our physical ones

These, however, do not have to be trained to a particular space-time orientation.

When children dream, they utilize these inner senses as adults do, and then through dreaming they learn to translate such material into the precise framework of the exterior senses. Children’s games are always “in the present” — that is, they are immediately experienced, though the play events may involve the future or the past. The phrase “once upon a time” is strongly evocative and moving, even to adults, because children play with time in a way that adults have forgotten. If we want to sense the motion of our psyche, it is perhaps easiest to imagine a situation either in the past or the future, for this automatically moves our mental sense-perceptions in a new way. Children try to imagine what the world was like before they entered it. Do the same thing. The way you follow these directions can be illuminating, for the areas of activity we choose will tell us something about the unique qualities of our own consciousness. Adult games deal largely with manipulations in space, while children’s play, again, often involves variations in time. Look at a natural object, say a tree; if it is spring now, then imagine that we see it in the fall.

ch299

Alter your time orientation in other such exercises. This will automatically allow you to break away from too narrow a focus. It will to some extent break apart the rigid interlocking of your perception into reality as we have learned how to perceive it. Children can play so vividly that they might, for example, imagine themselves parched under a desert sun, though they are in the middle of the coolest air-conditioned living room. They are on the one hand completely involved in their activity, yet on the other hand they are quite aware of their “normal” environment. Yet the adult often fears that any such playful unofficial alteration of consciousness is dangerous, and becomes worried that the imagined situation will supersede the real one.

Through training, many adults have been taught that the imagination itself is suspicious. Such attitudes not only drastically impede any artistic creativity, but the imaginative creativity necessary to deal with the nature of physical events themselves.

i2

Man’s or woman’s creative alertness, his or her precise sensual focus in space and time, and his or her ability to react quickly to events, are of course all highly important characteristics. His or her imagination allowed him or her to develop the use of tools, and gave birth to his or her inventiveness. That imagination allows him or her to plan in the present for what might occur in the future.

This means that to some extent the imagination must operate outside of the senses’ precise orientation. For that reason, it is most freely used in the dream state. Basically speaking, imagination cannot be tied to practicalities, for when it is man or woman has only physical feedback. If that were all, then there would be no inventions. There is always additional information available other than that in the physical environment.

i6

These additional data come as a result of the brain’s high play as it experiments with the formation of events, using the inner senses that are not structured in time or space.

Put another time on. Just before you sleep, see yourself as you are, but living in a past or future century — or simply pretend that you were born 10 or 20 years earlier or later. Done playfully, such exercises will allow you a good subjective feel for your own inner existence as it is a part from the time context.

ree4

To encourage creativity, exert your imagination through breaking up your usual space-time focus. As you fall to sleep, imagine that you are in the same place, exactly in the same spot, but at some point in the distant past or future. What do you see, or hear? What is there?

For another exercise, imagine that you are in another part of the world entirely, but in present time, and ask yourself the same questions. For variety, in your mind’s eye follow your own activities of the previous day. Place your self a week ahead in time. Conduct your own variations of these exercises. What they will teach you cannot be explained, for they will provide a dimension of experience, a feeling about your self that may make sense only to you.

sasa343

They will teach us to find our own sensation of oneself, as divorced from the official context of reality, in which we usually perceive our being. Additionally, we will be better able to deal with current events, for our exercised imagination will bring information to us that will be increasingly valuable.

Do not begin by using your imagination only to solve current problems, for you will tie your creativity to them, and hamper it because of your beliefs about what is practical.

ewui6

Playfully done, these exercises will set into action other creative events. These will involve the utilization of some of the inner senses, for which we have no objective sense-correlations. We will understand situations better in daily life, because we will have activated inner abilities that allow us to subjectively perceive the reality of other people in away that children do.

There is an inner knack, allowing for greater sensitivity to the feelings of others than we presently acknowledge. That knack will be activated. Again, the powers of the brain come from the mind, so while we learn to center our consciousness in our body — and necessarily so — nevertheless our inner perceptions roam a far greater range. Before sleep, then, imagine your consciousness traveling down a road, or across the world — whatever you want. Forget you body. Do not try to leave it for this exercise. Tell yourself that you are imaginatively traveling.

w56t

If you have chosen a familiar destination, then imagine the houses you might pass. It is sometimes easier to choose an unfamiliar location, however, for then we are not tempted to test yourself as you go along by wondering whether or not the imagined scenes conform to your memory.

To one extent or another your consciousness will indeed be traveling. Again, a playful attitude is best. If you retain it, and remember children’s games then the affair will be entirely enjoyable; and even if you experience events that seem frightening, you will recognize them as belonging to the same category as the frightening events of a child’s game.

dres7

Children often scare themselves. A variety of reasons exist for such behavior. People often choose to watch horror films for the same reason. Usually the body and mind are bored, and actually seek out dramatic stress. Under usual conditions the body is restored — flushed out, so to speak — through the release of hormones that have been withheld, often through repressive habits.

The body will seek its release, and so will the mind. Dreams, or even daydreams of a frightening nature, can fulfill that purpose. The mind’s creative play often serves up symbolic events that result in therapeutic physical reactions, and also function as post-dream suggestions that offer hints as to remedial action.

tlt879

I mention this here simply to point out the similarity between some dreams and some children’s games, and to show that all dreams and all games are inherently involved with the creation and experience of events.

 

 

 

The brain is primarily an event-forming psycho-mechanism…

Through which consciousness operates. Its propensity for event-forming is obvious even in young children. By obvious, I mean active, when fantasies occur involving activities far beyond the physical abilities as they thus far developed.

Children’s dreams are more intense than those of adults because the brain is practicing its event-forming activities. These must be developed before certain physical faculties can be activated. Infants play in their dreams, performing physical actions beyond their present physical capacities. While external stimuli are highly important, the inner stimuli of dream play are even more so.

ch56w

Children practice using all of their senses in play-dreams, which then stimulate the senses themselves, and actually help ensure their coordination. In our terms, events are still plastic to young children, in that they have not as yet learned to apply our stringent structure. There is an interesting point connected with the necessity to coordinate the workings of the senses, in that before this process occurs there is no rigid placement of events. That placement is acquired. The uncoordinated child’s senses, for example, may actually hear words that will be spoken tomorrow, while seeing the person who will speak them today.

Focusing the senses in time and space is to some extent an acquired art, then — one that is of course necessary for precise physical manipulation. But before that focusing occurs, children, particularly in the dream state, enjoy an overall version of events that gradually becomes sharper and narrower in scope.

chk1

A certain amount of leeway in space and time lingers, for even biologically the child is innately equipped with a “forevision” that allows it some “unconscious” view of immediate future events that forewarn it, say, of danger. From this more plastic, looser experience, the child in dreams begins to choose more specific elements, and in so doing trains the senses themselves toward a more narrow sensitivity.

In periods of play the child actually often continues some games initiated quite naturally in the dream state. These include role-playing, and also games that quite simply involve physical muscular activity. All of this teaches a specification. In dreams the mind is free to play with events, and with their formation. The actualization of those events, however, requires certain practical circumstances. In play the children try out events initiated in the dream state, and “judge” these against the practical conditions. In such a way the child juggles probabilities, and also brings his physical structure precisely into line with a given niche of probability. Basically in dreaming the brain is not limited to physically encountered experience.

ch15

Mentally it can form an infinite number of events, and consciousness can take an infinite number of roles. The child may easily dream of being its own mother or father, sister or brother, the family dog, a fly, a soldier. In waking play the child will then try out those roles, and quickly see that they do not fit physical conditions.

Before a child has seen mountains it can dream of them. A knowledge of the planet’s environment is an unconscious portion of our heritage. We possess an unconscious environment, a given psychological world attuned to the physical one, and our learning takes place in it subjectively even as objectively we learn exterior manipulation.

ch3e

The imagination is highly involved with event-forming. Children’s imaginations prevent them from being too limited by their parent’s world. Waking or dreaming, children “pretend.” In their pretending they exercise their consciousness in a particularly advantageous way. While accepting a given reality for themselves, they nevertheless reserve the right, so to speak, to experiment with other “secondary” states of being. To some extent they become what they are pretending to be, and in so doing they also increase their own knowledge and experience. Left alone, children would learn how to cope with animals by pretending to be animals, for example. Through experiencing the animals’ reactions, they would understand how to react themselves.

ch211

In play, particularly, children try on any conceivable situation for size. In the dream state adults and children alike do the same thing, and many dreams are indeed a kind of play. The brain itself is never satisfied with one version of an event, but will always use the imagination to form other versions in an activity quite as spontaneous as play. It also practices forming events as the muscles practice motion.

bbbn

The brain seeks the richest form of an event. I am speaking specifically of the brain, as separated from the mind, to emphasize the point that these abilities are of creature-hood. The brain’s genius comes from the mind, which can be called the brain’s biophysical counterpart.

Physical events are the end products of non-physical properties

The formation of events is initially an emotional, psychic, or psychological function. Events are physical interpretations, conventionalized versions of inner perceptive experience that are then “coalesced” in space and time. Events are organized according to laws that involve, belief, intent, and the intensities with which these are entertained.

Events are attracted or repelled by us according to our loves, beliefs, intents, and purposes. Our world provides a theater in which certain events can or cannot occur. Wars, violence, disasters — these are obviously shared by many, and are a part of our shared psychological and physical environment.

ee31

Some people encounter war directly, however, in terms of hand-to-hand combat, or bombing. Others are only inconvenienced by it. Here the mass shared environment is encountered as physical reality according to individual belief, love, and intent. In the deepest meaning there is no such thing as a victim, either of war, poverty, or disease. This does not mean that war, poverty, and disease could not be combatted, for in the terms of conventional understanding it certainly appears that men and women are victims in many such cases. Therefore they behave like victims, and their beliefs reinforce such experience.

Our beliefs form our reality, and this means that our beliefs structure the events we experience.

ev21

Such experience then convinces us more thoroughly of the reality we perceive until a vicious circle is formed, in which all events mirror beliefs so perfectly that no leeway seems to appear between the two.

If this were really the case, however, mankind’s history would never change in any true regard. Alternate paths of experience — new possibilities and intuitive solutions — constantly appear in the dream state, so that man and woman’s learning is not simply dependent upon a feedback system that does not allow for the insertion of creative material. Dreaming then provides the species with learning experience not otherwise available, in which behavior and events can be judged against more developed and higher understanding that present in conventional daily reality at any level.

ev22

There may be, for example, complications arising from a person’s intents, loves, and desires that cause the individual to seek certain events that his of her very beliefs make impossible. Current experience will provide a dilemma in which desired goal seems impossible.

In such instances a dream, or a series of them, will often then alter the person’s beliefs in a way that could not otherwise occur, by providing new information. The same data might come in a state of inspiration, but it would in any case be the result of an acquisition of knowledge otherwise inaccessible. Love, purpose, belief, and intent — these shape our physical body and work upon it and with it even as at other levels cellular consciousness forms it.

eefgf

Love is a biological as well as a spiritual characteristic. Basically, love and creativity are synonymous. Love exists without an object. It is the impetus by which all being becomes manifest. Desire, love, intent, belief and purpose — these form the experience of our body and all the events it perceives. We cannot change one belief but it alters our body experience. The great give-and-take between biological and psychological integrity occurs constantly. Our thoughts are as active as our cells, and as important in maintaining our physical being.

Our thoughts are also as natural as our cells. Our thoughts propel us toward survival and growth also, and in the same way that cells do. If we find oneself in physical difficulties health-wise, we cannot say: “Why doesn’t my body stop me and assert its own wisdom?” Because in the truest sense there is no division between our thoughts and our body. Our thoughts multiply even as our cells do. Our thinking is meant to ensure our survival in those terms, as much as our body mechanism.

evvd7

The give-and-take between the two occurs largely in the dream state, where constant translations of data occur. Our thoughts and our body cells are reflected one in the other.

I am going to suggest a series of exercises. They should be regarded as creative exuberant games. They will acquaint us with our psyche, or our own greater experience of oneself, by helping us shift our attention to aspects of our own experience that usually escape our notice.

ch

The exercise will not work, however, in the way they are meant to if they are embarked upon with too serious an air or intent. They should be considered as creative play, though of a mental nature, and they actually consist of mental endeavors tried quite spontaneously by children. So they are not to be regarded as esoteric accomplishments. They represent the intent to discover once again the true transparent delight that we once felt in the manipulation of our own consciousness, as we looped and unlooped it like a child’s jumping rope.

The dream state is the source of all physical events, in that it provides the great creative framework from which we choose our daily actuality.

verhjj

Children quickly learn their parents that experience must be structured in a certain conventional pattern. In their own periods of imaginative play, however, children utilize dream events, or events perceived in dreams, while clearly realizing that these are not considered actual in the “real” world.

Physical play is pleasant, and accompanied by high imaginative activity. Muscles and mind are both exercised. The same kind of activity occurs in the child’s dream state as it learns to handle events before they are physically encountered. Intense dream activity is involved. Some dream events are more real to the child than some waking events are — not because the child does not understand the nature of experience, but because he or she is still so close to the emotional basis behind events. Some of the exercises will put us in touch with the ways events are formed.

yjj

Children’s play, creativity, and dreams all involve us with the birth of events in the most direct of fashions. The games that we play or habitually observe will, of course, tell us much about the kind of organization that occurs in our own experience. Overall, we organize events around certain emotions. These can be combative, in which there will always be good teams and bad teams, salvation or destruction, winning or losing.

add3d

The events of our life will follow a similar structure. Before conditioning, children’s play follows the love of performance, of body or imagination, for performance’s sake only; the expansion of mental or physical abilities. The most satisfying of events involve those characteristics. The exercises will have to do with the natural joyful manipulation of the imagination that children employ.

Perceived Events Come Packaged in Time Sequences

We are used to a certain kind of before-and-after order. When we build physical structures we pile brick upon brick. It may seem that psychological events have the same kind of structure, since after all we do perceive them in time.

w23

When we ask: “How are events formed?” We more or less expect an answer couched in those terms. The answer is not that simple. The origin of events lies in that creative, subjective realm of being with which we are usually least concerned. This state of dreaming provides an inner network of communication, that is its way far surpasses our technological communications. The inner network deals with another kind of perceptual organization entirely. A rose is a rose is a rose. In the dream state, however, a rose can be an orange, a song, a grave, or a child as well, and be ach equally.

p8

In dreams we deal with symbols of course. Yet symbols are simply examples of other kinds of quite “Objective” events. They are events that are what they seem to be, and they are equally events that do not “immediately” show themselves. One so-called event, therefore, may be a container of many others, while we only perceive its exterior face — and we call that face a symbol.

The other events within the symbol are as legitimate as the one event we perceive.

pui80;

Basically, events are not built one upon the other. They grow out of each other in a kind of spontaneous expansion, a profusion of creativity, while the conscious mind chooses which aspects to experience — and those aspects then become what we call an objective event.

Events obviously are not formed by our species alone, there is a level of the dream state in which all earth-tuned consciousnesses of all species and degrees come together. From our standpoint this represents a deep state of unconscious creativity — at the cellular levels particularly — by which all cellular life communicates and forms a vital biological network that provides the very basis for any “higher” experience at all.

pr3

What we call dreaming is obviously dependent upon this cellular communication, which distributes the life force throughout the planet. This formation of any psychological event therefore depends upon this inter-species relationship.

The psychological symbols with which we are familiar in natural terms rise up like smoke, inherent in cellular structure itself. In deepest terms animals and plants also possess symbols and react to them.

pr89

Symbols can be called psychic codes that are interpreted in infinite fashion according to the circumstances in which consciousness finds itself. Dream events “come together” in the same way that the universe does. Events, therefore, cannot be precisely defined. We can explore our own experience of an event, and that exploration itself alters the nature of the seemingly separate event that we began to investigate. We share, then, a mass dream experience as we share a mass waking world. Our daily experience is private and uniquely ours, yet it happens within the context of a shared environment. The same applies to the dream state.

Our dreams are also uniquely ours, yet they happen within a shared context, and environment in which the dreams of the world occur. In that context our own existence is “forever” assured. We are the physical event of oneself put into a given space and time, and because of the conditions of that framework, within it we automatically exclude other experience of our own selfhood. The greater event of oneself exists in a context that is beyond our usual perception of events. That greater portion of ourselves, however, forms the self that we know.

pr076

In dream state we step into a larger context to some extent. For that reason we also lose the special kind of precise orientation with which we are familiar. Yet we begin to sense, sometimes, the larger shape of events and the timeless nature of our own existence.

po980

Individually and en mass in the dream state we change the orientation of our consciousness, and deal with the birth of events which are only later-structured or physically experienced.

The Biological Cooperation of All Species Creates The NATURAL STRUCTURES OF THE EARTH

Consciousness itself is independent of any of the forms that it may at one time or another assume.

Therefore, at levels that would appear chaotic to us, there is a great mixing and merging of consciousness, a continual exchange of information, so to speak; an open-ended exploration of possibilities, from which in our terms events privately and en masse emerge.

st2

I am simply explaining the characteristics, aptitudes, abilities, and tendencies of Nature. There are so many different levels in what we call the dream state that they are impossible to list, except in stereotyped ways. This is particularly because some dream sequences involve biological comprehensions that are not literally translatable.

It has been truthfully said that the “unconscious” is intimately aware of the most minute details of our health, state of mind, and relationships. “It” is also aware of the state of the earth’s health — even of the familiar with the cultural climate also. Our recognized consciousness operates as it does because of immense information-gathering procedures, — procedures that unite all species. Biologically such information is coded, but that physical information, such as in the genes and chromosomes, can be altered through experience and mental activity in other species as well as our own.

stuct

On the one hand, dreaming on the part of animals — and men and women in particular — involves not only information processing, but information gathering. Dreaming prevents life from becoming closed-ended by opening sources of information not practically available in the waking state, and by providing feedback from other than the conventional world. Data gained through waking learning endeavor and experience are checked in dreaming, not only against physical experience, but are also processed according to those “biological” and “spiritual” data: Again that information is acquired as the sleeping consciousness disperses itself, in a manner or speaking, and merges with other consciousness of its own and other species while still retaining its overall identity. These [other consciousnesses] are dispersed in like manner.

In such ways each individual maintains a picture of the ever-changing physical and psychological mass environment. Physical events as we think of them could exist otherwise. Basically, information is experience. In dreams we attain the necessary information to form our lives. That state of sleep, therefore, is not simply the other side of our consciousness, but makes our waking life and culture possible.

nonnye8kiky

In rudimentary form children’s dreams also involve mathematical concepts, so that formal mathematical training falls on already fertile ground. The arts, sciences, agriculture — all of these reflect natural contours and tendencies inherent in man’s and woman’s mind, as general rather than specific attributes emerging first in the dream state, and then sparking specialized intellectual tendencies in the waking state.

Cities, therefore, existed in dream before the time of tribes. The dream state provides the impetus for growth, and opens up to the earth-tuned consciousness avenues of information for its physical survival.

w18

Because that state is also connected with waking life, we also take into it many of the elements of our daily existence, so that our recalled dreams are often cast in fairly conventionalized terms. As a rule we remember the dream’s outer veneer, or what it turns into as we approach our usual level of consciousness. In a dream we are basically aware of so many facets of an event that many of them must escape our waking memory. Yet any real education must take into consideration the learning processes within dreams, and no one can hope to glimpse the nature of the psyche without encouraging dream experience, recall, and the creative use of dream education in waking life.

 

The Multidimensional Theater

Pretend that you are a fine actor, playing in a multidimensional theater, so that each role you take attains a vitality far surpassing the creative powers of any ordinary play.

Each of us is embarked upon such an endeavor. We lose ourselves in our parts. We are involved in a kind of creative dilemma, since in a manner of speaking we confuse ourselves as the actor with the character we play so convincing that we are fooled.

thr1

We say: “I must maintain my individuality after death, ” as if after the play the actor playing Hamlet stayed in that role, refused to study other parts or go on in his career, and said: “I am Hamlet, forever bound to follow the dilemmas and the challenges of my way. I must upon maintaining my individuality.

In the dream sate the actors become aware to some extent of the parts they play, and sense the true personal identity that is behind the artist’s craft. It is important to remember that we impose a certain kind of “artificial” sense of exaggerated continuity even to the self we know. Our experience changes constantly, and so does the intimate context of our life — but we concentrate upon points of order, in our terms, that actually serve to scale down the context of our experience to make it more comprehensible. There are no such limits naturally set about our consciousness.

thew

We have a mass psychological environment that forms our worldly culture, and corresponds to a worldly stage set in which experience than occurs. Certain psychological conventions act as props. There are, then, more or less formal psychological arrangements that are used as reference points, or settings. We group our experience within those arrangements. They serve to shape mental events as we physically perceive them.

In our lifetimes our experience must be physically felt and interpreted. Despite this, however, events spring from a non-physical source. Our recalled dreams are already interpretations of other non-physical events.

the5

Putting it simply, our actual experience is far too vast for us to physically follow. Our particular kind of consciousness is the result of specialized focus within a particular area. We imagine it to be “absolute,” in that it seems to involve an all-exclusive state that includes our identity as we think of it — only we give it boundaries like a kingdom. It is, instead, a certain kind of organization that is indeed inviolate even while it in itself a portion of other kinds of consciousnesses, with their own points of focus. Our body itself is composed of self-aware organizations of consciousness that escape our notice and deal with perceptual material utterly alien to our own ways.

There are affiliations of a most “sophisticated” fashion that leap even the boundaries of the species. We look upon our cultural world with its art and manufacture, its cities, technology, and the cultivated use of the intellectual mind. We count our religions, sciences, archaeologies, and triumphs over the environment, and it seems to us that no other consciousness has wrought what man’s and woman’s has produced. Those “products” of our consciousness are indeed unique, creative, and form a characteristic mosaic that has its own beauty and elegance.

theru

There are organizations of consciousness, however, that leapfrog the species, that produce no arts or sciences per se — yet these together form the living body of the earth and the physical creatures thereon. Their products are the seas upon which we sail our ships, the skies through which our airplanes fly, the land upon which our cities sprawl, and the very reality that makes our culture, or any culture, possible.

Man and Woman are a part of that trans-species consciousness also, as are the plants and animals. Also, part of man’s and woman’s reality contributes to that trans-species organization, but he or she has not chosen to focus his or her practical daily consciousness in that direction, or to identify his or her individuality with it. As a result he or she does not understand that greater natural mobility he or she possesses, nor can he or she practically perceive the natural psychological gestalts of which he or she is a part, that form all of our natural — meaning physical — world.

th35

In dreams this relationship often is revealed. The truth behind such relationships is inherent in all God-Man, God-Woman, Animal-Man, or Animal-Woman legends and mythology. There are connections, then, between man, woman and the animals and the so-called gods, that hint at psychological and natural realities.

Any section of the land has an identity, so to speak, and I am not talking symbolically. Such identities represent the combined organizations of consciousness of land, man, woman, and animal, within any given realm. Simply enough put, there are as many kinds of consciousness as there particles, and these are combined in infinite fashions. In the dream sate some of that experience, otherwise closed to us, forms the background of the dream drama. Our consciousness is not one thing like a flashlight, that we possess. It is instead a literally endless conglomeration of points of consciousness, swarming together to form our validity — stamped, as it were, with our identity.

thea

Whether dispersed, concentrated in a tight grouping, appearing “alone” or flying through other larger swarms, that particular organization represents our identity.

Using an analogy, its “particles” could be dispersed throughout the universe, with galaxies between, yet the identity would be retained. So unknowingly, now, portions of our consciousness mix and merge with those of other species without jarring our own sense of individuality one whit — yet forming other psychological realities upon which we do not concentrate.

th2

In the dream state, animals, men, women, and plants merge their realities to some extent so that information belonging to one species is transferred to others in an inner communication and perception otherwise unknown in our world.

The workings of the inner psyche, And activity behind dreams.

Some experiences exist beyond the framework of verbalization or images, and deals basically with the nature and behavior of psychological and psychic energy.

We are are a personified energy source. We give birth to dream images of our own — hardly aware that we have done so, unconscious of the fact that we have provided impetus for a kind of psychological reality that quite escapes our notice. The dream stories we begin continue on their own. No dream is stillborn.

w453

Our own greater reality hovers about in each instant. If we knew in precise terminology how we grew physically from a fetus to an adult, if we could consciously follow that process, we would not necessarily be better off, but possibly hindered in our growth; for we would begin to question: “Am I doing it right?” The perfection of the process would make us ill at ease.

In the same way, a step-by-step illustration of the nature of the dream state might well make us too self-conscious. We would begin to question: “Am I dreaming right?”

ww1154

Many people are in awe of their dreams. They are afraid of anything they do not consciously control. Yet if we think of our dreams as extensions of our own experience in another context, then we can indeed learn to gain ease with them. We will recall them more easily, and as we do we will be able to maintain a sense of continuity between the waking and dream states.

As this happens the contours of our own psyche will appear more clearly. Those contours will not show themselves in terms of definite mathematical-like propositions, however, but will emerge through the techniques, symbols, feelings, and desires usually attributed to creativity.

w9k8k

The characteristics of creativity appear most clearly in children. Creativity implies abandon within a framework that is accepted for itself, and itself only.

If in our waking hours we playfully make up a dream for oneself, and then playfully interpret it without worrying about implications, but for itself only, we will unwittingly touch upon the nature of our own nightly dreaming. Our regular dreams and our “manufactured” ones will have much in common, and the process of manufacturing dreams will acquaint us with the alterations of consciousness that to a greater degree happen nightly. This is an excellent exercise. It is particularly beneficial for those who have a too-rigid mental framework.

wwwr3

The playfulness and creativity of dreams are vastly under-rated in most dream studies. Children often frighten themselves on purpose through games, knowing the game’s framework all the time. The bogeyman in the garden vanishes at the sound of the supper bell. The child returns to the safe universe of tea and biscuits. Dreams often serve the same purpose. Fears are encountered, but the dawn breaks. The dreamer awakes for breakfast. The fears, after all, are seen as groundless. This is not an explanation for all unpleasant dreams by any means, yet it is a reminder that not all such events are neurotic or indicative of future physical problems.

Man’s mind exuberantly plays with itself. In dreams it uses all those splendid energetic abilities freely, without the necessity for physical feedback, caution, or questioning. It seeks realities, giving birth to psychological patterns. It uses itself fully in mental activity in the same way that the kitten does in physical play.

w6

When we try to explore the psyche in deadly seriousness, it will always escape us. Our dreams can be interpreted as dramas, perhaps, but never as diagrams.

w8

Do not try to bring “dream interpretation” down to our level, but instead try to playfully enter that reality imaginatively, and allow our own waking consciousness to rise into a freer kind of interpretation of events, in which energy is not bounded by space, time, or limitations.

Psychological structures different from the ones we know.

The structures cannot directly perceive or experience our reality in their “present” form of organization. In a manner of speaking they are in the background, from which the foreground of our experience emerges. They appear in our dreams in various ways. They are like the cloth from which we are cut. They are forces which have no need of names except for our convenience.

Those psychological structures are also great energy activities, and as such are important initiators of events. They are seldom if ever physically materialized. Yet they are very responsive to the psychic needs of the people, and so they “appear” at various times in history with certain messages, in the same way that certain dreams might recur in a private mind.

sdds

In the most cosmic and most minute ways, physical experience springs from inner reality. Events are initiated from within and then appear without.

s6

In our dreams we often visit other such realities, but we have not learned to organize our perception, or direct it. If entities form the background of our own existence, so do entities like ourselves act as the background psychological structures in which other such organizations exist. There is always a give-and-take in all such relationships.

Creativity, dreams, and the actual formation of physical events.

At the same time understand our need for some kind of of precise terminology, even while we know that in certain terms the more “precise” we become for our our individual benefit, the more we may miss of greater issues that escape such boundaries. Also avoid many preconceptions that are connected with certain words.

Nevertheless,, in dreams we are intimately connected with the processes by which physical events are formed. Events, again, gain their characteristics from those significances that we place upon the universe as our own being impresses it with our beliefs, desires, and individual nature.

nonphys

As a continent does not exist alone, but also in relationship to other physical formations, so in our terms we form events so that they fit into a mass framework. We form our own reality. We do not form it isolated and alone, however. We are aware of other events and take them into consideration, for example, regardless of appearances. We cannot force another person to experience an event he or she rejects. Nor can anyone act in like manner against us. So-called good or bad events each faithfully follows the inner mechanics.

In order to become physical, probable events must meet certain conditions, as it were. They must fall into the proper time and space slots. There must be a psychological fit also, certain intensities reached in terms of desire, beliefs, or intent. By intensity I do not necessarily mean effort, vehement desire, or determined conscious intent. I mean instead the collection of certain intangible qualities, precisely focused toward physical activity.

noniuy

Physical events imply the collection of basically non-physical forces into an organization that exists initially outside of the time-space context. This is a psychological organization, consisting of a selection of chosen probable events. These wait in the wings, so to speak, for physical actualization. The final trigger for that actualization may come from the waking or dream states, but it will represent the final factor needed — the quickening of inspiration, desire, or purpose — that will suddenly activate the initial psychological organization as a physical occurrence.

The Electromagnetic Energy units are important because they exist in an electromagnetic sphere of activity, and they trigger certain responses in the brain and nervous system. Events themselves involve a steady condition of highly related fields of activity, however, that exist between the electromagnetic energy units, so to speak.

nn1

These fields involve psychological reactions, not physically perceivable, and yet as explosive in their way as a nuclear detonation. That is, these psychological activities “explode” into physical events by virtue of a transformation and a charge that allows purely mental acts to “break the time-space barrier” and emerge as realities in a physical world. In a way, the Electromagnetic Energy units occur on the furthest reaches of this activity. If an event where a physical craft such as a spaceship, the Electromagnetic Energy units would allow it to land in our world, but would not be the original propellants. Those propellants are psychic fields of interrelationship.

n2

Let us use an analogy. Pretend that you are a planet, as indeed in certain terms you are. You exist in a highly complicated and sophisticated universe. You know that space is filled with all kinds of inhabitants, and we all compare these space inhabitants to probable events. As a planet you have certain characteristics. Some space inhabitants would not be able to land under those conditions at all. The conditions represent your own psychological individuality. You send out messages to the stars because you are lonely, and events or visitors are one of your main methods of gaining experience and knowledge. To land their own rocket ships, space travelers must enter our atmosphere and use its conditions while maintaining their own integrity. They must also have their own reasons for such a visit.

Any physical events is something like the impact of a rocket ship entering our world from “somewhere else.” Thoughts often seem to swim in and out of our system of consciousness, and we barely notice. Events often appear and disappear in the same manner, yet they have impressed our reality. We have attracted them to one extent or another, and they have been attracted to us. Momentarily a field of relatedness is set up that is highly charged, one that provides an inner path by which probable events can flow into our area of recognized events.

nonw2

This path exists on psychological levels, and triggers our perceptive mechanisms, which then of course react and dutifully perceive. Our intent or purpose or belief is one of the main attractions. These serve as beams searching the universe, but the conditions of manifestation also exist. There must be a proper fit.

Our own universe is not isolated. It is simply the one that we perceive.

no9

There are in a basic sense other universes within the one that we recognize, and constantly happening in those universes are other events of which we are unaware. The universes exist one within the other, so to speak, and their events also one within the other, so that while any given event seems itself only in the terms that we recognize, it is a part of endless others that exist one within the other, and it is impossible at certain levels to separate the “portions.”

noyo8

Our daily life seems to give us little evidence of this. Our dreams, however, often contain this kind of interrelatedness. Because we perceive events in the way that we do, of course, we see the familiar physical universe. Dream events, not as precise in space and time, often serve as a framework through which some evidence of other universes can be glimpsed. No system is closed, so there are interactions, so to speak, between all universes. No psychological system is closed either, even while it retains an inviolate nature that is indestructible.

Dreams, then, operate as vast mass communicative networks, far more effective at certain levels of the psyche than, for example, television is at a physical level.

n1

The dream state can be used then as a psychological or psychic platform to view other realities, and to glimpse the inner mechanics by which non-physical events become actualized in our world.

Pre-dream states are actually one in which we are immersed, waking or sleeping.

Whether alive or dead. It involves conditions in which direct knowing primarily operates.

It is our natural state of being. In its larger aspects, then, nature involves states that include both life and death in far more expansive frameworks of reference.

dre4

This characterized perhaps most of all by more perceptive psychological organizations. In the pre-dream state we participate in such organizations, although we bring back home to our physical self — in the form of dreams — only data that can be recognized and used in physical terms. It is highly important to remember that our experience and knowledge grow at those other levels of actuality. Even during our physical lifetime our experience is not confined to conventional physical events alone. Those usual events arise from the creative impetus that occurs at these other levels.

I am not saying here that we have no conscious control over events, for they are formed by us in accordance with our feelings, beliefs, purposes, and intents.

dre443

The inner material that “makes events real” comes from these other sources, however. Most of us are not aware of this basic, mysterious nature of events, because it does not occur to us to study the inner fabric. The past and future of any given event provides a kind of thickness, a kind of depth-in-time. The probabilities of an event escape us in practical terms.

In the pre-dream state we directly encounter a reality in which those probabilities exist all at once to our perception. In a dazzling display we are aware of such events from infinite perspectives. Consciously we could not grasp such information, much less act upon it, nor could we maintain our particular, unique, psychological stance. We still take advantage of that level of being, however, using that immeasurable data as a basis to form the reality that we know.

dre6

To some extent our dreaming state is a connective between the kind of life we recognize and this far vaster dimension that is its source. Dreaming involves a far greater input of information than is realized, then — that is, we take in far more data when we are dreaming than when we are awake, although the data are of a different kind. We form our dreams in part from that information. The dreams themselves are further processed so that they become a fabric for recognizable waking events.

Dream dramas are highly complicated, artistic productions. On the one hand they represent other events of the pre-dream state, events beyond our comprehension in their “natural condition.” Such events are not lost, however, but translated into dreams as our own consciousness returns closer to its “home base.” Each aspect of a dream stands in coded form as a symbol for greater, undecipherable events.

drre2

The symbol are so precisely and accurately produced that they simultaneously serve as aspects relating to our intimate daily life as well. Since everyday events are formed in part as a result of such dream information, then each event of our physical life is also a symbol for another otherwise undecipherable event that occurs in those levels of the psyche in which our own being is immersed.

This in no way denies the validity of events as we think of them, for all of our physical activity immediately alters all other relationships at all levels of being. Most of us are familiar with inspiration on one form or another. People who are not writers or artists, or poets or musicians, often suddenly find themselves almost transformed for a brief period of time — suddenly struck by a poem or a song or a snatch of music, or by a sketch — that seems to come from nowhere, that seems to emerge outside of the context of usual thought patterns, and that brings with it an understanding, a joy, a compassion, or an artistic bent that seemingly did not exist a moment earlier. Where did the song or poem or music come from? Such individuals feel that they suddenly “know” in a direct manner. They experience knowledge that comes from within rather than information that comes from without.

dre12

The dream comes in the same fashion. We do not have to wonder about how to form a dream before we go to bed at night. We do not have to know any of the mechanisms involved, so dreaming often seems to “just happen” in the same way that an inspiration seems to just come.

Books have been written about the nature of dreams. Here are classic accounts of precognitive dreams, or prophetic dream involving saints and honored personages in the Bible. Yet each ream alters the physical world to some extent. A creative idea might lead to a book — certainly a physical-enough production. Dreams involve us with the most intimate mechanics by which physical events are formed. There are hormonal and chemical changes occurring in the body — often at minute but important levels — in direct response to dream experience. Our dreams then are tied into our biological makeup. There are also coded biological connections within dream images themselves that relate to cellular activity — not generally, but specifically.

dre15

Each dream object is chosen with the highest discrimination so that it serves as a symbol at many levels, and also sends pertinent messages to the individual cells and organs of our body as well.

 

 

No such thing as random motion.

There is no such thing as chaos. The universe, by what ever name and in whatever manifestation, attains its reality through ordered sequences of significances.

These are kept separate in various systems of actuality, while still combining in an overall fashion. We understand the cause-and-effect kind of order, but this is built upon the non-causal aspect of significances. In a way the dream that you recall are like numbered paintings, tailored to fit our own intents and purposes, fitting the contours of our mind so perfectly that we forget the larger experiences from which they were drawn.

b9

Physically and psychically the dream itself is the result of the most precise kind of calculation and activity, in which complicated dramas and interactions occur, often highly charged and intense, and yet cut off from the body’s full participation. These significances, then, involve from our end certain biological cues that regulate the intersection of psychological events with physical activity in time and space. Only when all conditions match our own highly specific requirements are the necessary cues activated to give us physical experience. To the extent in dreams we are “on hold,” involved with a range of action too wide to fit the contours of practical earth experience.

These significances set up their own codes, then, so that physical events must be coded in a certain fashion, and dreams in another. There is, then, what can be called a pre-dream state, or a state of experience from which the dream will be formed. Such experience will carry a different kind of code, further divorcing it from that acceptable intersection with bodily activity, space, and time.

ra1

Our physical events happen to us as us. In dreams we may experience an event seemingly as someone else, or we may find oneself in the past or future instead of the present. In waking life we have the family that we recognize, or group of friends, or profession, or what have you. In dreams we may find oneself married to someone else, or living an entirely different kind of life. In a way dreams are like variations of the theme of our life, though in reality our life is the theme we have chosen from those possible versions.

To some extent, however, dream events are like physical ones a good deal of the time. Our dream perceptions seem physical — we walk, run, eat, and perform other physical functions. There are actually many other conditions of existence, but for now we will speak of a pre-dream state, which is actually composed of several conditions of actuality. Here the physical aspects of events largely vanish, comparatively speaking, the farther away we go from the dream state into inner reality. It would seem to us that experience becomes broader but less specific, but such is not the case. Experience does become broader, but it changes in quality so that, for example, one moment in our terms of such experience would provide the working material for five years of dreams.

rr4

This is simply an analogy because we are steeped in that other reality constantly; but its illuminations and nature are transmitted to the self that we know through the formation of dreams, and in our terms, “it takes time to dream.” This larger experience, from which our dreams are finally formed, involves us in a kind of journey. Using another analogy, it is as if we joyfully leave the normal paraphernalia of usual life behind, and ride aboard or own greater psyche into vaster seas of experience.

yuj676

We leave behind the physical nature of events and go into those areas in which events are formed. In ways most difficult to describe, we encounter the universe in a more direct fashion, using inner senses that are far more ranging. Using our own indestructible validity as “bait,” we go forth to draw from the universe the raw material of experience. We are ourselves, yet at that level we are also a part of the universe from which that self springs, and its power and vitality are our own, to be uniquely focused. In our terms, we literally look backward and forward in time at our individual self and our civilization, seeing where they merge, and feeling the infinite connections, so that each event we choose as our own will also be chosen as a world event — participated in to whatever extent by others, and adding to the available experience of the species from which others can also draw.

A direct cognition is involved in which each consciousness knows what each other one is doing, its “position,” and the implications of its experience. The entire fabric and framework of time and reality at each point is ascertained, and the probabilities probed and understood.

eee1

All of this sounds very complicated. Yet in a different way that same processes occur at other levels, as in its way cellular consciousness perceives all of the probabilities concerned with physical survival in its most far-reaching complications. At this moment the cells within our body know the life conditions of any place on the planet, and compute these, ascertaining the ways in which they require action on the body’s part. Our cells are aware of the motion of the planets and of all circumstances regarding the body’s equilibrium, stability, and survival. The body is then formed constantly as the result of these computations.

In larger terms, in the pre-dream states we are aware of all of the activities of own greater psyche as it participates in — and contributes to — the infinite existence of psychic consciousness as we understand it, and becomes aware of the psychological realities that form the framework of its own stability.

eeee1

Events do not become physical, then, unless requirements are met, and certain codes activated.

Experiences at pre-dream levels occur at their own intensities. The knowledge is translated into information that is broken down in the dream state into more specific data, highly symbolized, suiting individual requirements and “run through the body” in a kind of ghostly trail fashion.

e52yt

It is then further processed into individual significances, drives, or intents, which convert it into the required codes that will then determine the nature of actualized waking events. Data must be of particular kinds of intensity before they register as physical matter, or are experience as physical events. Part of this processing occurs in the dream state, and creativity plays a large part into the preliminary process.

Events have nothing to do with cause and effect

This is apparent to some degree when we study dream events, for there the kind of continuity we are used to, connecting events, largely vanishes.

c7

Instead events are built up, so to speak, from significances. But let us forget that term for a moment and consider association, with which we are already familiar, since our stream of consciousness operates in that fashion. By its very nature each consciousness is a particular, peculiar, and unique focus of awareness which will experience any possible realities through its own characteristics.

It also “stamps” or “impresses” the universe with its own imprint. No portion of the universe is inactive or passive, regardless of its seeming organization or its seeming lack of organization. Each consciousness, then, impresses the universe in its own fashion. Its very existence sets up a kind of significance, in whose light the rest of the universe will be interpreted. The universe knows itself through such significances. Each consciousness is endowed with creativity of a multidimensional nature, so that it will seek to create as many possible realities for itself as it can, using its own significance as a focus to draw into its experience whatever events are possible for it from the universe itself. It will then attract events from the universe, even as its own existence imprints the universe as an event with the indelible stamp of its own nature.

c56

Put more simply from another viewpoint, each of us as we know ourselves has certain abilities and characteristics of our own. We experience reality through the cast of those abilities and characteristics, but we also stamp the universe with that particular imprint of individuality that is our own, and we attract those events that are suited to our nature and no other.

Significances fall or happen in certain patterns, and when these become very obvious they appear as cause and effect. They are simply heavy-handed significances. Our associative processes and habits are perhaps the closest examples that can give clues of how significances operates. Even then, associations deal with the passage of time, and basically significances do not. We might think of our aunt Rita, for example, and in a few moments the associative process might bring us images of periods in the past when we visited our aunt, of her friends and neighbors, the articles in her house, and episodes connected with our relationship.

c569

At the same time Aunt Rita, unbeknown to us, might pick up a blue vase, one that we had just seen in our mind as belonging on a shelf in her living room. Touching the vase, our aunt Rita might think of the person who gave it to her, now on the other side of the continent. That person, perhaps thinking of buying a present for someone, might settle upon a vase in a flash of inspiration, or suddenly begin humming a song with the name “Rita” in the title, or possibly even think of our aunt. If on the other hand any opposing associations existed anywhere along the line, the “chain” of association could be broken. The last lady might consider a vase, for example, but reject the idea. Because of the time element, it seems to us that the first episode caused the others, and that our first association concerning our aunt brought about the “following” events.

The inner significances, however, the associations, existed all at once, to be tuned in to at any point of time. They had their reality basically apart from time, even though they appeared with it.

c1

Actually the three sets of events could easily occur to the three people at once, and is no normal communication happened no one would be the wiser. The inner tapestry of events deals with just this kind of association. Emotional intensities and significances compose the nature of events. In dreams we work with the kind of intensities involved, exploring multitudinous significances. These are like charged emotional patterns, formed of our own higher personal emotions and intents.

c6

Using such significances as yardsticks, we accept or reject probable events. We imprint the universe with our own significance, and using that as a focus we draw from it, or attract, those events that fit our unique purposes and needs. In doing so, to some extent we multiply the creative possibilities of the universe, forming from it a personal reality that would otherwise be absent, in those terms; and in so doing we also add in an immeasurable fashion to the reality of all other consciousness by increasing the bank of reality from which all consciousness draws.

All probable events of our life exist at once, That are connected to the dream state.

Since our activities physically must be fitted into space-time framework, only a minimum of those probable events will physically occur.

euk67k6j

Those that do are chosen with great discrimination, dreams serving as one of the methods by which we ascertain the desirability of any given probable act. There is basically no difference at these other levels of existence between waking and dream events. Creatively, then, we organize our experience in such a fashion, with the conscious mind as we think of it also carrying its own responsibility. Those events that we do not accept as physical ones, however, also exist and join their own organizations. They do not simply fall away from our experience, but serve as focus points for events that do not concern us directly, while indirectly they form a definite psychological background. To a certain extent they become the invisible medium of experience from which our own specialized activities emerge, so that their nature is implied in our own life — and so that our life is implied in those other frameworks.

To that extent the dream also serves as a drama of interweaving probabilities, a springboard from which events emerge in all directions. Each aspect of a dream, while having personal meaning, is also our version of a symbol that stands for a corresponding kind of event, but in a different level of reality entirely.

edrt

If we numbered each aspect of a dream, then each number would be represent itself in a different numbered system entirely. The surface numbers, or the familiar ones, would still serve to explain the dream in the context of our own world. As we live in an obvious physical universe, sharing in its reality, so each or us exists in a far vaster psychological or psychic universe — surrounded by, supported by, and part of psychic universe entities infinite in their variety. Our smallest action affects their reality, as theirs does ours. To some extent in the dream state we can perceive such entities more clearly, as at night the stars become more apparent, physically speaking. Psychological realities cannot be compared in terms of size, or bigger or smaller, for that validity and brilliance of each existence carries a personalized intensity so unique that it overshadows and such considerations.

The life of a star, the life of a flower, are entirely different in our terms of duration, size, and characteristics; yet each exists in a validity of experience that ultimately makes such comparisons meaningless. In the same way, it does not help to compare our own consciousness to one of star-like psychological or psychic properties. The psychological mobility of consciousness, however, allows for an inner kind of communication impossible to verbalize, an interlocking spiritual and biological language by which experience is directly transmuted. Many of our dreams therefore are translations of events occurring in other levels of the greater psyche.

put0

There, events are not dependent upon time. We, on the other hand, must work with the time version of events. Dreams provide an elegant framework that allows us to break down timeless events, placing them properly in the context of our own world. This proper placements is quite dependent upon an inner knowledge of the “future.”

creat

The dreams are often a synthesis of past, present, and future, where one main event is used as a focus point around which “present” events will be collected.

Each person is aware of the intimate nature of dreams

Despite this, certain symbols seem to be fairly universal in our experience., however, while obviously of concern, do not touch upon the greater events behind dream activity, or begin to touch upon the mysterious psychological actions that are behind the perception of any event. Dreams are primarily events, of course. Their importance to us lies precisely in the similarities and differences that characterize them in contrast to waking events.

crerweyu

Behind all of these issues are far deeper considerations. The nature of creativity itself is involved, and the characteristics of energy without which no action is possible.

Basically, the psyche is a manifestation of pure energy in a particular form. It is very difficult to consider its experience outside of the framework familiar to us. We demand a certain preciseness of definition and terminology. That vocabulary automatically structures the information, of course. The psyche is a conglomeration of energy gestalts. To understand that we must realize that pure energy has such transforming pattern-forming propensities that it always appears as its manifestations. It becomes its “camouflages.”

pplohb

It may form particles, but it would be itself whether or not particles existed. In the most basic of terms, almost incomprehensible in our vocabulary, energy is not divided. There can be no portions or parts of it, because it is not an entity like a pie, to be cut or divided. For purposes of discussion, however, we must say that in our terms each smallest portion — each smallest unit of pure energy — contains within it the propelling force toward the formation of all possible variations of itself.

The smallest unit of pure energy, therefore, weighing nothing in our terms, containing within itself no mass, would hold within its own nature the propensity for the creation of matter in all of its forms, the impetus to create all possible universes. In those terms, energy cannot be considered without bringing to the forefront questions concerning the nature of God or All That Is, for the terms are synonymous.

dreew

We can say precisely that pure energy is everywhere within itself conscious, but the very words themselves somewhat distort the meaning, for I am speaking of a consciousness most difficult to describe.

Pure energy, or any “portion” of it, contains within itself the creative propensity toward individuation, so that within any given portion all individually conscious life is implied, created, sustained. Pure energy cannot be destroyed, and is “at every point” simultaneously being created. Our physical universe and laws give us little evidence of this kind of activity, for at the level the evidence shows us the appearance of time or decay. Our own psychological activity is the closet evidence we have, though we do not use it as such. Pure energy has no beginning or end. The psyche, our psyche, is being freshly created “at every point” of its existence. For that matter, despite all appearances, the physical universe was not born through some explosion of energy which is being dispersed, but is everywhere being created at all of its point “at each moment.”

dreerwe4r

The psyche’s basic experience, then, deals with a kind of activity that we cannot directly perceive, yet that existence is responsible for the events that we do perceive, and therefore acts as the medium in which our dreaming and waking events occur.

In that respect we cannot rip apart our events to find the reality behind them, for that reality is not so much a glue that holds events together, but is invisibly entwined within our own psychological being. There are obvious differences between what we think of as waking and dream events. We differentiate definitely between the two, making great efforts to see that they are neatly divided. In our world, conventional and practical sanity and physical manipulation are dependent upon our ability to discriminate, accepting as real only those events with which others more of less agree.

dreaddwd

These so-called real events, however, have changed radically through the ages. “Once” the gods walked the earth, and waged battles in the skies and seas. People who believed such things were considered sane — and were sane, for the accepted framework of events was far different from our own. In historic terms the changing nature of accepted events provides far more than, say, a history of civilization, but mirrors the every-creative nature of the psyche.

drea44

All of the elements of physical experience at any given time are present in the dream state. Practically speaking, however, the species accepts certain portions of dream reality as its so-called real events at any particular time, and about those specialized events it forms its “current” civilizations. Historically speaking, early men and women dreamed of airplanes and rocket ships. For that matter, their natural television operated better in some ways than our technological version, for their mental images allowed them to perceive events in neighboring areas or in other portions of the world. They could not simply press a button to bring this about, however. The psychic and biological mechanisms were there, permitting the species to know, particularly in time of stress or danger, what normally unperceived events might threaten survival. But in the dream state, then as now, all such issues were contemporary, acting as models from which the species then chose the practical events that formed its physical experience.

pur7or

To that extent a study of the dream state gives us some important insights as to to the nature of the psyche. In certain terms we are “prepackaged.” We always recognized one package of psychological reality as “us”. In basic terms we are always arriving by kind of, instantaneous mail into that package, however. We are unknowingly immersed in and a part of pure energy, being newly created in each moment, so that the energy of our atoms and molecules and or our physical universal is being replenished at every conceivable moment.

pui7

Our psyche is being drawn back into itself, into All That Is, and “out of itself” into our individuation, in psychological pulses or activity that have a correlation with the behavior of electrons in our world. In dream or sleep state, when we do not meet as directly with physical activity, there is the opportunity to learn more about the psyche by a study of dreams — those events that are so like and so dissimilar to our waking experience.

No event has a beginning or ending.

This is true of life. It is true of dream. The information is not practical in our terms, because it denies our direct experience. Upon request, however, and with some practice, we can suggest in the middle of a dream that it expand to its larger proportions. We would then experience one dream wrapped in another, or several occurring at one time — all involving aspects of a particular theme or probability, with each connected to the others, although to us the connections might not be apparent.

cree664444678oi

Each event of our life is contained within each other event. In the same way, each lifetime is contained in each other lifetime. The feeling of reality is “truer” then in the dream state. We can become consciously aware of our dreaming. We can also allow our “dream self” greater expression in the waking state. This can be done through techniques that are largely connected with creativity.

cyilfl

Creativity connects waking and dreaming selves merge to form constructs that belong equally to each reality. We cannot begin to understand how we form the physical events of our lives unless we understand the connections between creativity, dreams, play, and those events that form our waking hours. In one respect dramas are a kind of structured unconscious play. Our mind dreams in joyful pleasure at using itself, freed from the concerns of practical living. Dreams are the mind’s free play. The spontaneous activity, however, is at the same time training in the art of forming practical events.

crew4

Probabilities can be juggled, tried out without physical consequences. The mind follows its natural bents. It has far more energy than we allow it to use, and it releases this in great “fantasies” — fantasies from which we will choose facts that we will experience. At the same time dreaming is an art of the highest nature, in which all are proficient. There are structured dreams as there are structured games in waking life. There are mass dreams “attended by many.” There are themes, both mass and private, that serves as a basis of framework. Yet overall, the mind’s spontaneous activity continues because it enjoys its own activities.

 

Dream reality is closer to the true nature of events.

Dreams often seem chaotic because our point of reference is too small to contain the added dimensions of actuality. Again, in a manner of speaking, events are far more circular in nature. In dreams we can experience the past or future. Physical events are actually formed now, in our terms, because of the interactions between past and future, which are not separate in actuality, but only in our perception.

A dream is like the snap of a rubber band, but it is not the rubber band. We read newspapers and keep in constant physical communication with others of our kind. The news affect “future” events. Individuals and governments take such communications into consideration when they made their decisions. The newspapers are not the events they discuss, though they are their own kind of events. The written news story is actually composed of a group of symbols. Through reading we learn how to interpret these. If we watch news on television we have a larger view of given news event. When we are viewing a war in a newscast, however, we are still not watching people die. We are watching symbols translated into images that are then visually perceived. The images stand for the people, but they are not the people. The symbols carry the message, but they are not the event the depict.

dreadddedt

Some of our dreams are like newspaper stories, informing us of events that have happened in other portions of the psyche. Others are like the televised news picture, carrying perhaps more information about the event but still containing it.

Psychologically and physically, however, we send out dream bulletins all the while in a constant inner communication. On this level individual dreams help form mass reality, yet also to some extent arise from it in the same way that local weather conditions contribute to world weather conditions, while they are formed by them at the same time.

dreaaddeqwd

Our earth exists in the context of the physical universe. We exist in the context of our psyche. The events that we recognize as real are dependent upon all of the other events occurring within our psyche, even as the existence of the earth is dependent upon the other aspects of the physical universe.

Events as we understand them are only intrusions of multidimensional activities into space and time. Events are reflections of our dreams even a our dreams reflect the events we know; those we experienced, and those we anticipate in one way or another. In a manner of speaking, then, and without denying the great validity of our experience, events as we know them are but fragments of other happenings in which we are also intimately involved. The inner multidimensional shape of events occurs in a framework that we cannot structure, however, because as a rule we are not focused in that direction. We prefer to deal with activities that can be physically manipulated.

drea

The physical manipulation of events is indeed a psychological knack of considerable merit, in which consciousness and attention are exuberantly and wholeheartedly focused, bringing vitality and meaning to one relatively small range of activity.

I don’t mean to deny the validity of that experience, but to point out its specialized nature. By its nature, however, that precise specialization and tuning of consciousness in to space and time largely precludes other less-specialized encounters with realities. Dreams often present us with what seems to be an ambiguity, an opaqueness, since they lack the immediate impact of psychological activity with space and time. From our viewpoint it seems often that dreams are not events, or that they happen but do not happen. The lack of normal time and space intersections means that we cannot share our dreams with others in the way that we can share waking events. Nor can we remember dream events — or so it seems — as we do our normal conscious experience. In actual fact we remember consciously only certain highlighted events of our lives, and ordinary details of our days vanish as dreams seem to.

dreae3er1

We have a dream memory, of course, though we are not aware of it as a rule. There is a craft involved in the formation of events. We perform this craft well when dreaming. Events-making begins before our birth, and the dreams of unborn children and their mothers of merge. The dreams of those about to die often involve dream structures that already prepare them for future existence. In fact, towards death a great dream acceleration is involved as new probabilities are considered– a dream acceleration that provides psychic impetus for new birth.

The earth has an atmosphere we recognize.

In our limited space travel we take for granted the fact that different conditions will be met from those encountered upon our planet.

There are alterations taken into our calculations, so astronauts know ahead of time that they can expect to encounter weightlessness, for example. Our ideas and experience with space and matter, however, are determined by our own sense apparatus. What matters to us might be an “empty space” for being equipped in an entirely different fashion. Our conscious mind as we understand it is the “psychological structure” that deals with conditions on a physical basis. Sense data is served up, so to speak, more or less already packaged. The greater inner reality of the psyche, however, is as extensive as outer space seems to be.

1atmos

When information “falls” into our conscious mind from those vaster areas, then it also is changed as it travels through various levels of psychological atmosphere, until it finally lands or explodes in a series of images or thoughts.

We are bombarded with such “alien intrusions.” The focus of our consciousness blots these out while we are in a normal waking state. There are falling stars everywhere tumbling through the heavens, for example, though we only see some of these in the night sky. It is important during the day that a screening process be used, so that the precision of our actions can be maintained. Again, however, that fine precision rests upon an endless amount of information that impinges onto other levels of our psychological reality. That data then becomes the raw material, so to speak, from which our physical events are formed.

heal

In the dream state, with our body more or less safe and at rest, and without the necessity for precise action, those psychological intrusions become more apparent. Many of our dreams are like the tail end of a comet: Their real life is over, and we see the flash of their disappearance as they strike our own mental atmosphere and explode in a spark of dream images. They are transformed, therefore, as they travel through our own psychological atmosphere. We cannot perceive them in our own state — nor can they maintain their native state as they plunge through the far reaches of the psyche. They fall into patterns, forming themselves naturally into dream contents that fit the contours of our own minds. The resulting structure of the dream suits our reality and no other: As this intrusive matter falls, plummets, or shifts through the levels of our own psychological atmosphere, it is transformed by the conditions it meets.

layjkk

Raindrop patterns in a puddle follow certain laws having to do with the contours of the land, the weather, the nature of the rain, of the clouds, the height from which the raindrops fall, and the conditions operating in the nearby and far portions of the world. If we could properly understand all of that, then by looking into a single puddle we could tell the past and present weather conditions for the entire planet, and follow the probabilities in terms of storms, or volcanic eruptions. We cannot do this, of course, yet it is possible.

Dreams patter down into psychological puddles. They follow the contours of our psychological reality. They create ever-moving psychic patterns in our minds, rippling outward. The rain that hits our backyard as warm drops, soft and clear, may be hailing in areas far above our rooftop! But it might also come down to us, harming buildings, cars and humans alike – making us witness the glory of Mother Nature. While we look for hail damage repair for all the materialistic things near us, do we stop to wonder about the how Nature often represents us, in ways that we often tend to overlook? How often do we stop and think about the similarity between these ‘alien intrusions’ and our dreams – very much representing the raindrops – for at other “higher” levels they may have quite a different form indeed. As much as Nature leads us to specialist repair shops (similar to a body shop Lynchburg) to repair our damaged materialistic possessions, it also gives us the beauty of believing and witnessing how broken too, could look just as beautiful.

die57uj

There are gullies, hills, mountains, valleys, large continents, small islands upon the earth, and the falling rain fits itself to those contours. Our own thoughts, dreams intents, emotions, beliefs– these are the natural features of our mind, so that information, impinging upon our mental world, also follows those contours.

If there is a gully in our backyard, it will always collect the rain that falls. Our beliefs are like receptive areas — open basins — that we use to collect information. Intrusive data will often fall into such basins, taking on the contours, of course. Beliefs are ways of structuring reality. If we over-structure reality, however, then we will end up with a formal mental garden — whose precise display may be so rigidly structured that the natural aspect of the plants and the flowers is completely obscured. Even our dream information, then, will flow into structured patterns.

1qww2

We know that the natural world changes its form constantly. Objects, however, follow certain laws of a physical nature as we experience them, just as violets on the ground do not suddenly change into rocks.

These conditions, however, only exist at the conscious level of our perception. The larger psyche deals with the greater dimension of events, and the dream state itself is like a laboratory in which our waking reality is constructed. The physical earth is bombarded in the same way by phenomena important to out survival. In the laboratory of dreams this information is processed, collected, and finally formed into the dreams that we may or may not remember; dreams that are already translations of other events, shaped into forms that we recognize.

1aads

Each dream we remember is quite legitimate in the form in which we recall it, for the information has broken down, so to speak, fitting the contours of our own intents and purposes. But such a dream is also a symbol for another unrecalled event, a consciously unrecorded “falling star,” and a clue as to how any environment if formed.

Waking events happen and vanish quickly.

They are experienced directly with the senses fully participating, but for the instant involvement we give up larger dimensions of the same actions that exist, but beneath the senses’ active participation.

deqwefr

In dreams the preparations for experienced events take place, not only in the most minute details but in the larger context of the world scene. Events are connected one to the other in a psychic webwork that is far more effective than our physical technological system of communication. Here, reality codes are utilized. Knowledge is received and transmitted in electromagnetic patterns so that one pattern can carry far more units of information than anything we have technologically speaking. Each cell in the body does its part in picking up such signals and transmitting them. Some decoding also takes place at that level, so that pertinent information is sent where it belongs, physically speaking.

vanssi

Much information does not even reach the brain (the mind is aware of such data, however). In man or woman, the psychic-physical structure has at every moment a complete up-to-date picture of pertinent information about all events that will in any way affect the organism. All actions are taken with this information available. In the dream state such data become transformed, again, into pseudo-physical pictures — reflections of events that might occur, previews of probable sequences. These are flashed before a consciousness that momentarily focuses upon the inner rather the outer arena of reality.

Now these previews are played out not only for the mind but for the body as well. In sleep, each cell calculates the effect of various probable events upon its own reality. Computation are made so that the body’s entire response can be ascertained ahead of time, and the advantages and disadvantages weighed. The body participates in dreaming at the most minute levels.

Awwewee2e

The atoms and molecules themselves possess kinds of consciousness impossible for us to analyze, because the scales of our activities are so different. They are information-gathering processes, however, containing codified electromagnetic properties that slip between all of our devices. The atoms and molecules and all of the seemingly smaller “particles” within them are, again, information-carrying processes, and upon them depends our entire interpretation of the nature of events.

Cellularly-attuned consciousness generates dreams. Consciousness, riding on a molecular back, generates a physical reality and events suited to it.

drewee

Thought takes time, and exists by virtue of cellular composition. Consciousness not focused in cellular construction involves itself with a kind of direct cognition, involving comprehensions that come in a more circular fashion.

dddrw3

The creative act is our closest experience to direct cognition. While our consciousness thinks of itself in physical terms, whether we are living or dead, then we will still largely utilize thinking patterns with which we are familiar. Our consciousness is cellularly attuned in life, in that it perceives its own reality through cellular function that forms the bodily apparatus. The psyche is larger than that physically attuned consciousness, however. It is the larger context in which we exist. It is intertwined with our own reality as we think of it. On those occasions when we are able to to alter our focus momentarily, then the psyche’s greater experiences come into play. We are able to at least sense our existence apart from its cellular orientation. The experience, however, is circular, and therefore very difficult to verbalize or to organize into our normal patterns of information.

Language operates as a screening device.

Language enables us to communicate certain data while effectively blocking out other kinds.

When we speak a sentence we do not stop to consider all of the rules of grammar. We do not mentally diagram the sentence ahead of time. We simply speak more or less automatically. This involves the utmost precision, both mentally and physically. When we experience an event, we do not usually stop either to examine the rules of perception or to wonder what these are. We simply experience or perceive.

screebg

Those experienced events, however, are also the result of a screening process. They attain their focus, brilliance, and physical validity because they rise into prominence on the backs of other seemingly unperceived events. In dream state we work intimately with the “inner grammar” of events. In dreams we find the unspoken sentence and the physically unexperienced act. The skeletons of the inner workings of events are there more obvious. Actions are not yet fully fleshed out. The mechanics of our waking psychological behavior are brilliantly delineated. That state can be explored and utilized far more fully than it is, and should be. Yet there will always be a veil between the waking and sleeping consciousness, for while we are physical, the waking mind can only deal with so much information. It would simply forget what it cannot hold.

Our dreams affect our cellular reality, even as that reality is also largely responsible for the fact that we dream, in our terms, at all. Dreams are a natural “product” of cellularly tuned consciousness. As fire gives off light, cellularly tuned consciousness gives off dreams.

r79lr9l

Such a consciousness is at a state of being in which its reality generates more energy and power than it can physically express in its brilliant intersection with physical reality. The “sparks” generated by each instant of its existence cause additional experiences, perceptions, that will not fit in the known moment of the present — for by then in our terms that present has already vanished into the past. These events and responses continue to operate, however, particularly in the dream state where they do not interact directly with full physical experience, as waking events do. All of these parallel or alternate experiences are then used to construct the physical events that we recognize. We speak a sentence truly so that the end of it comes smoothly, though when we begin it we may not have known consciously what we were going to say. Some part of us knew the sentence’s beginning and end at once, however.

sooouk

In dreams we know the beginning and end of events in the same fashion. Any one action in our life is taken in context with all of the other events from our birth to our death. Now it seems to us that because we speak one sentence at any given time, rather than ten other possible versions of it, the sentence as spoken is the “correct” one. Its probable variations in grammar or tense or inflection escape us entirely. Yet unconsciously we may have tried out and discarded all of those, even though we have no memory of such experiences. So even in forming sentences we deal with probabilities, and to some extent that might be involved with each unspoken sentence.

Even as we speak our sentence with such fine conscious nonchalance, inner choices are still being made, as we unconsciously check our communications against events occurring outside us as we speak.

scre

So, while each action of our life is taken in context with all other actions of our life until our death, this does not mean that our death is predestined to occur at any given time. As we might change our sentence in the middle from one version to another without even being consciously aware of it, so as we live our life we also work with probabilities. We are the self who speaks the sentence, and we are the self who lives the life. We are larger than the sentence that we speak, and larger than the life we live.

TEGERGB

We cannot remember all of the sentences we spoke today. We may have a general idea of what we said. It certainly seems to us that we said one thing at any given time rather than something else. It also seems that witnesses would back us up. It certainly seems that waking events are more steady and dependable than dream events.

Information flows, at such a rate and in such quantities that we could not possibly process any but a small portion.

Our physical senses, act almost like a biological alphabet, allowing us to organize and perceive certain kinds of information from which we form the events of our world and the contours of our reality.

uno;

Our conscious knowledge rests upon an invisible, unspoken, psychological and physical language that provides the inner support for the communications and recognized happenings of conscious life. These inner languages are built up as cords, and cords are psychic organizational units from which, then, all alphabets are born. Alphabets imply cords, but cannot contain then , any more than English can contain Russian, French, Chinese, Tagalog, or any combination. If we try to speak English we cannot speak Chinese at the same time. One precludes the other, even while one implies the existence of the other, for to the degree all languages have some common roots.

uuirt

In a way events are like the spoken components of language, yet voiced in a living form — and not for example only sounded. These are based upon the sensual alphabet, which itself emerges from non-sensual cords. A sentence is built up as words, parts of speech, verbs, and adjectives, subjects and predicates, vowels and syllables, and underneath there is the entire structure that allows us to speak or read to begin with. To some extent, events are built up in the same fashion. We form and organize sentences, yet we speak on faith, with out actually knowing the methods involved in our speaking. So we only recognize the surface of that activity.

u6u

In the same way we form events, often without being aware that we do so. It seems that events happen as it seems words are spoken. We were taught how to construct sentences in school, and we learned how to speak from our elders. We were involved with event-making before the time of our birth. The psyche forms events in the same way that the ocean forms waves — except that the ocean’s waves are confined to its surface or to its basin, while the psyche’s events are instantly translated, and splash out into mass psychological reality. In waking life we meet the complete event, so to speak. We encounter events in the arena of waking consciousness. In the dream state, and at other levels of consciousness, we deal more directly with the formation of events. We are usually as unaware of this process as we are in normal practice of the ways in which we form our sentences, which seem to flow from us so automatically.

The psyche, as it is turned toward physical reality, is a creator of events, and through them it experiences its own reality as through our own speech we hear our voice.

uniy

In dreams, then, we are involved in the inner process by which physical events are formed. We deal with the psychological components of actions which we will, awake, form into the consecutive corporal “language” that results in the action of our days.

The events that we recognize as official have a unitary nature in time that precludes those probable versions of them, from which they arose — versions that appeared to one extent or another in the dream state. Again, if we speak the English sentence “I am here,” you cannot speak the Chinese version at the same time. In that regard, in our framework of action we choose to “speak” one event rather than another. Our formulation of events, however, does not simply reside in our unique psychological properties, of course, but is possible because of the corporal alphabet of the flesh.

utr65

Now as it is possible for any one human being to speak more than one language, it is also possible for us to put physical data together in other ways than those usually used. The body is capable then of putting together different languages of reality. In usual terms, for example, our body can only be in one place at one time, and our experience of events is determined in large measure by our body’s position. Yet there are biological mechanisms that allow us to send versions or patterns of our body outside of its prime position, and to perceive from those locations. In sleep and dream states we do this often, correlating the newly perceived data with usual sense information, and organizing it all without a qualm. For that matter, the preciseness of our flexibility, which gives us a broad base from which to form our secure focus.

Events emerge like spoken words, then, into our awareness. We speak, yet who speaks, and in our briefest phrase, what happen? The atoms and molecule within our vocal cords, and lungs and lips, do not understand one word of the language they allow us to speak so liquidly. Without their cooperation and awareness, however, not a word would be spoken.

unioo

Yet each of those nameless atoms and molecules cooperates in a vast venture, incomprehensible to us, that makes our speech possible, and our reality of events is built up from a “cord” of activity in which each spoken word has a history that stretches further back into the annals of time than the most ancient of fossils could remember. I am speaking in our terms of experience, for in each word spoken in our present, we evoke that past time, or we stimulate it into existence so that its reality and ours are coexistent.

In dreams even the past is in present tense. Events are everywhere forming. We make and remake the past as well as the future. We choose from those experiences certain ones as events in normal waking reality.

uu77-

While we can only speak one sentence at a time, and in but one language, and while that sentence must be sounded one vowel or syllable at a time, still it is the result of a kind of circular knowledge or experience in which the sentence’s beginning and end is known simultaneously. If the end of it were not known, the beginning could not be started so expertly.

uu97lfd

In the  same way the experienced event occurring in time is dependent upon a circular happening, in which beginning and end are entwined, not one occurring before the other, but coexistent.

The body reacts to information about the environment.

Information which we are not consciously concerned. That same information is highly important to the body’s integrity, however, and therefore to our own mental stance.

On cellular levels the body has a picture not only of its own present condition, but of all those aspects of the physical environment that affect its own condition. In its own codified fashion it is not only aware of local weather conditions, for example, but of all those world patterns of weather upon which the local area is dependent. It then prepares itself ahead of time to meet whatever challenges of adjustment will be necessary. It weighs probabilities; it reacts to pressures of various kinds.

bohu

We are aware of pressure through touch, but in another version of that sense entirely, the cells react to air pressure. The body knows to the most precise degree the measurements involving radiation of all kinds. At one level, the body itself has a picture of reality of its own, upon which our conscious reality must be based — and yet the body’s terms of recognition or knowledge exist in terms so alien to our conscious ones as to be incomprehensible. Our conscious order, therefore, rides upon this greater circular kind of knowledge.

Generally speaking, the psyche has the same kind of instant overall comprehension of psychological events and environments as our body has of physical ones. It is then aware of our overall psychological climate; locally, as it involves us personally, and in world terms.

borfikyu

Our actions take place with such seeming smoothness that we do not realize the order involved. A volcanic eruption in one corner of the world will ultimately affect the entire earth in varying degrees. An emotional eruption will do the same thing on another level, altering the local area primarily but also sending out its ripples into the mass psychological environment. The psyche’s picture of reality, then, would be equally incomprehensible to the conscious mind because of the intense focus upon singularity that our usual consciousness requires.

Our dreams often give us glimpses, however, of the psyche’s picture of reality in that regard.

bofydtu

We become aware of probabilities, as actions sometimes that seem to have no connection with our own, but which are still related to them in that greater scheme of interaction that ordinarily we do not comprehend.

When we grow from a baby to an adult we do not just grow tall: we grow all about oneself, adding weight and thickness as well. To some extent events “grow” in the same fashion, and from the inside out, as we do. In a dream we are closer to those stages in which events are born. In our terms they emerge from the future and from the past, and are given vitality because of creative tension that exists between what we think of as our birth and our death. We make sentences out of alphabet of our language. We speak these or write them, and use them to communicate. Events can be considered in the same fashion, as psychological sentences put together from the alphabet of the senses — experience sentences that are lived instead of written, formed into perceived history instead of just being penned, for example, into a book about history.

bodhut65du

Our language to some extent programs our experience. There is a language of the senses, however, that gives us biological perception, experience, and communication. It forms the nature of the events that we can perceive. It puts experience together so that it is physically felt. All of our written or verbal languages have to be based upon this biological “alphabet.” There is far greater leeway here than there is in any of our spoken or written languages.

bofik

I use the word “cord” to express the source out of which such languages spring. There are many correlations of course between our language and our body. Our spoken language is dependent upon our breath, and even written language is dependent upon the rapidity with which messages can leap the nerve endings. Biological cords then must be the source for physical languages, but the cords themselves arise from the psyche’s greater knowledge as it forms the physical mechanism to begin with.

derw4

Dreams are a language of the psyche, in which man’s and woman’s nature merges in time and out of it. Man and woman have sense experiences. He/she runs, though he or she lies in bed. He/she shouts though no word is spoken. He/she still has the language of the flesh, and yet that language is only opaquely connected with the body’s mechanisms. He/she deals with events, yet they do not happen in his or her bedroom, or necessarily in any place that he or she can find upon awakening.

We manage our subjective lives in a circular fashion

Pretend that the present moment is like a wheel, with our concentration at the hub. To maintain what we think of as time momentum, the hub is connected by spokes to the exterior circular framework. Otherwise the hub alone would get us nowhere, and our “moment” would not even give us a bumpy ride.

Our journey through time, however, seems to go smoothly: The wheel rolls ever forward. It can roll backward as well, but in our intentness we have a forward direction in mind, and to go backward would seem to divert us from our purpose.

cccfgnf

The forward motion brings us into the future, out of the past from which it seems we are emerging. So we plot a straight course, it seems, through time, never realizing in our analogy that the wheel’s circular motion allows us to transverse this ongoing road. The hub of the present, therefore, is held together by “spokes.” These have nothing to do with our ideas of cause and effect at all. Instead they refer to the circular motion of our own psyche as it seems to progress in time. Each present moment of our experience is dependent upon the future as well as the past, our death as well as our birth. Our birth and our death are built in, so to speak, together, one implied in the other.

We could not die unless we were the kind of creature who was born, nor could we have a present moment as we consider it. Our body is aware of the fact of its death at birth, and of its birth at its death, for all of its possibilities for action take place in the area between, Death is therefore as creative as birth, and as necessary for action and consciousness, in our terms.

ceec

It is not quite that simple, however, for we live in the midst of multitudinous small deaths and births all of the time, that are registered by the body and the psyche. Consciously we are usually unaware of them. Logical thought, using usual definitions, deals with cause and effect, and depends upon a straight sequence of time for its framework. It builds step upon step. It is woven into our language. According to logical thought and language we may say: “I am going to a party today because I was invited last week, and said I would attend.” That makes sense. We cannot say: “I am going to a party today because I am going to meet an individual there who will be very important to my life five years from now.” That does not make sense in terms of logical thought or language, for in the last example cause and effect would exist simultaneously — or worse, the effect would exist before the cause.

cirhr

On all other-than-normally conscious levels, however, we deal very effectively with probabilities. The cells maintain their integrity by choosing one probability above the others. The present hub of the wheel, therefore, is but one prominent present, operationally valid. Cause and effect as we think of them appear only because of the motion, the relative motion, of the wheel in our analogy.

cirth

When our eyes are on the road of time, therefore, we forget the circular motion of our being. When we dream or sleep, however, the world of cause and effect either vanishes or appears confused and chaotic. Normal night-time images are mixed and matched, so that combinations are formed quite different from those seen in the daylight. The known rules that govern the behavior of creatures and objects in dreams seem no longer to apply. Past, present, and future merge in a seemingly bizarre alliance in which, were we waking, we would lose all mental footing. The circular nature of the psyche to some extent makes its known. When we think of dreams we usually consider those aspects of it only, commenting on perhaps upon the strange activities, the odd juxtapositions and the strange character of dream life itself. Few are struck by the fact of their dream’s own order, or impressed by the ultimate restrain that allows such sometimes-spectacular events to occur in such a relatively restricted physical framework.

cccrr

For example, in a dream of 20 minutes, events that would ordinarily take years can be experienced. The body ages it’s 20 minutes of time, and that is all. In dreams, experience is peripheral, in that it dips into our time and touches it, leaving ripples; but the dream events themselves exist largely out of time. Dream experience is ordered in a circular fashion. Sometimes it never touches the hub of our present moment at all, as we think of it, as far as our memory is concerned; yet the dream is, and it is registered at all other levels of our existence, including the cellular.

drre34

We always translate experience into terms we can understand. Of course the translation is real. The dream as we recall it is already a translation, then, but an experienced one. As a language that we know is, dependent upon other languages, and implied pauses and silences, so the dream that we experience and recall is also one statement of the psyche, coming into prominence; but it is also dependent upon other events that we do not recall, and that our consciousness, as it now operates, must automatically translate into its own terms.
 

We have been taught dreams, are imaginary events.

In larger terms it is futile to question whether or not dreams are true, for they simply are. We do consider a dream true, however, if its events later occur in fact.

In the life of psyche a dream is no more or less “true,” whether or not it is duplicated in waking life. Dream events happen in a different context — one, we might say, of the imagination. Here we experience a valid reality that exists on its own, so to speak; one in which the psyche’s own language is given greater freedom.

derfwe4rf4

Some of us may try to remember our dreams, but none of us have to relate to dream reality as we must to physical life.

To some extent, however, we form physical events while we are dreaming. Then, freed from waking limitations, we process our experience, weigh it according to our own intents and purposes, correlate it with information so vast we could not be consciously aware of it. In most dreams we do not simply think of a situation. We imaginatively become part of it. It is real in every fashion except that of physical fact.

dreqa

When we meet with any fact, we encounter the tail end of a certain kind of creativity. The psyche, however, is responsible for bringing facts into existence. In that reality a so-called fact is equally true or equally false. The dream that we remember is already a translation of a deeper experience.

It is cast for us so that it bridges self. Dreams serve as dramas, transferring experience from one level of the psyche to another. In certain portions of sleep, our experience reaches into areas of being so vast that the dream is used to translate it for us.

drewww

The power to dream springs from that source. Dreaming is not a passive activity. It demands a peculiar and distinctive mixture of various kinds of consciousness, and the transformation of “nonphysical perception” into symbols and codes that will be sensually understood, though not directly experienced as in waking experienced as in waking experience.

We take dreaming for granted, yet it is the result of a characteristic ability that is responsible for the very subjective feeling that we call conscious life. Without it our normal consciousness would not be possible.

ddewefw

A spoken language is, again, dependent upon other languages that could possibly be spoken, and thus its sounds rise into prominence and order because of the silences and pauses between them; so our waking consciousness is dependent upon what we think of as sleeping or dreaming consciousness. It rises into prominence in somewhat the same fashion, riding upon other possible versions of itself; alert only because — in our terms — of hidden pauses within its alertness.

The ability to dream presupposes the existence of experience that is not defined as physical fact. It presupposes a far greater freedom in which objects appear or are dismissed with equal ease, a subjective framework in which the individual freely expresses what he or she will in the most direct of fashions, yet without physical contact in usual terms.

drweferf

The reality represents our origin, and is the natural environment in which the psyche resides. Our beliefs, cultural background, and to some extent our languages, set up barriers so that this dream dimension seems unreal to us. Even when we catch ourselves in the most vivid of dream adventures, or find ourselves traveling outside of our bodies while dreaming, we still do not give such experiences equal validity with waking ones.

Subjectively speaking, we are everywhere surrounded by our own greater reality, but we do not look in the right places. We have been taught not to trust our feelings, our dreams, or our imagination precisely because these do not often fit the accepted reality of facts.

deqwefr

They are the creators of facts, however. In no way do I mean to demean the intellect. It is here, however, that the tyranny of the fact world holds greatest sway. The intellect has been denied its wings. Its field of activity has been limited because we have given it only facts to go on.

Biologically, we are quite capable of dealing with dreaming and waking reality both, and of forming a far more effective synthesis in that regard. All of our creative impulses arise from that hidden dimension — the very impulses that formed our greatest cities, our technology, and the physical cement that binds our culturally organized world.

dwr3r

The creative impulses are behind our languages, yet often we use the languages to silence rather than free inner communication. There have always been rhythms in consciousness that are not historically obvious. At certain times some behavior has been primarily expressed in the waking state, and sometimes in the dream state. The emphasis is never static, but ever-changing. In some periods, then, the normal behavior was “more dreamlike,” while more specific developments occurred in the dream state, which was then the more clear or specified of the two. Men went to sleep to do their work, in other words, and the realm of dreams was considered more real than waking reality. Now the opposite is true.

Daily language deals with separations, divisions, and distinctions

To some extent our language organizes our feelings and emotions. The language of the psyche, however, has at its command many more symbols that can be combined in many more ways, say, than mere letters of an alphabet.

lljhgf

In daily language, objects have certain names. Obviously the names are not the objects, but symbols for them. Even these symbols, however, divide us as the perceiver from the rest of the world, which becomes objectified. We can ourselves understand far more about the nature of the psyche, for example, than we think we can. To do this, however, we must leave our daily language behind at least momentarily, and pay attention to our own feelings and imagination. Our language tells us that certain things are true, or facts, and that certain things are not. Many of our most vivid and moving feelings do not fit the facts of our language, so we disregard them.

laghth

These emotional experiences, however, often express the language of the psyche. It is not that an understanding of our psyche is beyond us: It is usually that we try to understand or experience it in one of the most difficult ways — Through the use of daily language.

The imagination belongs to the language of the psyche. For this reason it often gives experiences that conflict with the basic assumptions upon which daily language is based. Therefore the imagination is often considered suspect.

langyy

We might stand alone in our doorway, or in a field — or even on a street, surrounded by many people in a large city — look upward, suddenly struck by the great sweeping clouds above, and feel oneself a part of them. We might momentarily experience a great yearning or feel our own emotions suddenly filled with that same moving majesty, so that for an instant we and the sky seem to be one.

Mundane language tells us, as we think with its patterns, that our imagination is running away with us, for obviously we are one thing and the sky is another. Us and the sky do not equate — or as friend Spock would say: “It is not logical.” The feeling swiftly fades after bemusing us briefly. We might be spiritually refreshed, yet as a rule we would not consider the feeling to be a statement of any legitimate reality, or a representation of our psyche’s existence.

llagg

The emotions and the imagination, however, give us our closest contact with other portions of our own reality. They also liberate our intellect so that its powers are not limited by concepts it has been taught are true. Instead, such concepts are relatively true — operationally true. For example, the example, the physical laws that we are familiar with operate where we are. They are true, relatively speaking. In those terms we are one person physically objectified, staring upward in the scene just mentioned at an objectified sky. We weigh so many pounds, tilt our head at such-and-such an angle to peer upward at the skyscape, and physically speaking, we can be categorized.

In those terms the clouds could be physically measured, and shown to be so far above us — composed of, say, winds of a certain velocity, ready to pour down a precise amount of rain or whatever. Physically speaking then, obviously, we are separate from the clouds, and so in those terms our momentary experience of uniting with them would seem to be a lie — at least not factual, or “the product of our imagination.”

languuu

Instead, such an event is a direct expression of the psyche’s knowledge. It senses its quite legitimate identification with nature, exercises its mobility, and feel its own emotional power leap. Our emotions in such a case would be momentarily magnified — raised, say, to a higher power. There are multitudinous such examples that could be given, as in each day our psyche presents evidence of its own greater being — evidence that we are taught to overlook, or to dismiss because it is factual.

What is imaginary is not true: We are taught this as children. The imagination, however, brings us into connection with a different kind of truth, or a different framework in which experience can be legitimately perceived. The larger truths of the psyche exist in that dimension.

tuou7

From it we choose physical facts. Thoughts are real. Only some thoughts turn into physical actions, of course. Despite distorted versions of that last statement, however, there is still obviously a distant difference, say, between the though of adultery and its physical expression.

thoujt

We cannot treat thoughts and imagination in such a literal manner, nor in a large respect should we try to “guard our thoughts” as if they were herds of animals that we wanted to keep purely bred. Our thoughts do form our reality. If we do not fear them, however, they create their own balances. The psyche dwells in a reality so different from the world we usually recognize that there good and evil, as we think of them, are also seen to be as operationally or relatively true as the difference between the perceiver and the object perceived.

The physical world implies the existence of God

God’s existence also implies the existence of a physical world.

This statement implies the unstated, and the reverse also applies.

To deny the validity or importance of the individual is, therefore also to deny the importance or validity of God, for the two exist one within the other, and we cannot separate them.

From one end of reality we shout: “Where is God?” and from the other end the answer comes: “I am Me.” From the other end of reality, God goes shouting: “Who am I?” and finds himself in us. We are therefore a part of the source, and so is everything else manifest. Because God is, we are. Because we are, God is.

On a conscious level certainly we are not all that God is, for that is the unstated, un-manifest portion of oneself. Our being rides upon that unstated reality, as a letter of the alphabet rides upon the inner organizations that are implied by its existence. In those terms our unstated portions “reach backwards to Source called God,” as various languages can be traced back to their source. Master language can be compared to the historic gods. Each person alive is a part of the living God, supported in life by the magnificent power of nature, which is God, translated into the elements of the earth and the universe.

The language of the atoms and molecules in our own private way.

We mark the universe. We impress it, or “stamp” it, or imprint it with our own identity. Henceforth it always recognizes us as us and no other. We are known.

In larger terms, while we speak our own language, the universe also speaks “our” language as it constantly translates itself into our private perception. We live in our psyche somewhat in the same way that physically we dwell in the world.

atom

That world has many languages. Physically we are like one country within our psyche, with a language of our own. People are always searching for master language, or for one in particular out of which all others emerged. In a way, Latin is a master language. In the same manner people search for gods, or a God, out of which all psyche emerged. Here we are searching for the implied source, the unspoken, invisible “pause,” the inner organization that gives language or the self a vehicle of expression. Language finally become archaic. Some words are entirely forgotten in one language, but spring up in altered form in another. All of the earth’s languages, however, are united because of characteristic pauses and hesitations upon which the different sounds ride.

at4tt

Even the alterations of obvious pauses between languages make sense only because of an implied, unstated inner rhythm. The historic gods become equally archaic. Their differences are often obvious. When we are learning a language, great mystery seems involved. When we are learning about the nature of the psyche, an even greater aura of the unknown exists. The unknown portions of the psyche and its greater psyches out of which the self emerged — as for example Latin is a source for the Romance Languages.

atommewe

Using language, we speak with our fellows. We write histories and communications. Many books are meant to be read and never to be spoken aloud. Through written language, then, communication is vastly extended. In direct contact, however, we encounter not only the spoken language of another, but we are presented with the communicator’s person as well. Spoken language is embellished with smiles, frowns, or other gestures, and these add to the meaning of the spoken word.

Often when we read a book we silently mouth the words, as if to reinforce their symbolic content with a more emotional immediacy. The language of the psyche, however, is far richer and more varied. Its “words” spring alive. Its “verbs” really move, and do not simply signify, or stand for, motion.

aaaath

Its “nouns” become what they signify. Its declensions are multi-dimensional. It verbs and nouns can become interchangeable. In a way, the psyche is its own language. “At any given time,” all of its tenses are present tense. In other words, it has multitudinous tenses, all in the present, or it has multitudinous present tenses. Within it no “word” dies or becomes archaic. This language is experience. Psychically, then, we can and we cannot say that there is a source. The very fact that we question: “Is there a God, or a Source?” shows that we misunderstand the issues.

ati24t

In the same manner, when we ask: “Is there a master language?” it is apparent that we do not understand what language itself is. Otherwise we would know that language is dependent upon other implied ones; and that the two, or all of them, are themselves and yet inseparable, so closely connected that it is impossible to separate them even though our focus may be upon one language alone.

Awwewee2e

So the psyche and its source, or the individual and the God, are so inseparable and interconnected that an attempt to find one apart from the other automatically confuses the issue.

The existence of one person implies the existence of all others who have lived or will live.

Our own existence is implied therefore in everyone else’s and theirs is implied in us.

eeexggh

Languages gain their meaning largely from the pauses and hesitations between sounds. They obviously gain their meaning also because of the sounds not used, so that any one language also implies the existence of all others. To that extent, all other languages reside silently within any given spoken language. The same applies to language written upon a page. The written characters make sense because of their arrangement, and precisely because they are chosen over other characters that do not appear. In the same kind of manner, our focused existence is dependent upon all other existences that are not us presently. We are a part of them. We ride upon their existences, though we are primarily us and no other.

eexxy6yy6

The same applies, however, to every other person. Each of them becomes a primarily focus or identity within which all others are implied. In Ordinary terms, we do not “make ourselves.” We are like a living language spoken by someone who did not originate it — the language was there for us to use. The language in this case is a molecular one that speaks our physical being. The components of that language or the earth elements that form the body were already created when we were born, as the alphabet of our particular language was waiting to be used.

exyrh45

Our very physical life, then, implies a “source,” a life out of which the physical one emerges, — the implied, unspoken, immaterialized, unsounded vitality that supplied the ingredients for the physical, bodily, molecular “alphabet.” Our physical life therefore implies a non-physical one. We take our particular “language” so for granted, and use it so effortlessly, that we give no thought at all to the fact that it implies other languages also, or that it gains its meaning because of inner assumptions that are never spoken, or by the use of pauses in which no sounds are made. We live our lives in the same fashion.

ee

There are many languages, though most people speak one, or two, or three at most. Languages also have accents, each somewhat different while still maintaining the original integrity of any given language. To some extent we can learn to speak oneself with an accent, so to speak, in which case, still being oneself, we allow ourselves to take on some of the attributes of another “language.”

We can read the world in a different way, while still maintaining our own identity, or we can move into a different country of oneself that speaks our native language but with a different slant. We do this to some extent or another whenever we tune in to broadcasts to which we usually pay no attention. The news is slightly foreign, while it is still interpreted through the language that we know. We are getting a translation of reality.

exsssu

The psyche, always in a state of becoming, obviously has no precise boundaries. The existence of one, implies the existence of all, and so any one given psyche comes into prominence also because of the existence of the others upon which its reality rides. One television station exists in the same manner, for if one could not be tuned into, theoretically speaking, none could.

These inner communications, reach outward in all directions. Each identity has eternal validity within the psyche’s greater reality. At one level, any person contacting his or her own psyche can theoretically contact any other psyche. Life implies death, and death implies life — that is, in the terms of our world. In those terms life is a spoken element, while death is the unspoken but still-present element “beneath,” upon which life rides. Both are equally present.

exas2

To obtain knowledge consciously other than usually available, we pay attention to the pauses, to the implied elements in language, to any felt or sensed quality upon which the recognizable experiences of life reside. There are all kind of information available to us, but it must be perceived through our own focus or identity.

eeexxawd

All events occur at once — a difficult statement to understand. All identities occur at once also. Each event changes every other. Present ones alter past ones. Any one event implies the existence of probable events which do not “emerge,” which are not “spoken.” Physical world events therefore rest upon the existence of implied probable events. Different languages use sounds in their own peculiar manners, with their own rhythms, one emphasizing what another ignores. Other probabilities, therefore, emphasize events that are only implied in our reality, so that our physical events become the implied probable ones upon which other worlds reside.

We are part of the world, and yet we are oneself.

This does not confuse us, and we follow our own sense of identity without difficulty, even though we are everywhere surrounded by other individuals.

human

Using this as an analogy, we are a part of our psyche or our soul, dwelling within it, easily following our own sense of identity even though that psyche also contains other identities beside the one that we think of as our own. We draw sustenance from the world, and grow through its medium. We contribute our abilities and experience, helping to form the world’s civilization and culture. To some strong degree we bear the same kind of relationship to our own psyche.

Through ordinary methods of communication we are able to tell what is going on in other countries beside our own, even without traveling to them. News telecasts acquaint us with conditions around the world.

humtmt

Now there are also inner “broadcasts” going on constantly — to which, however, we are not consciously attuned. These keep us in constant touch with the other portions of our own psyche. We are so a part of the world that our slightest action contributes to its reality. Our breath changes the atmosphere. Our encounters with others alter the fabrics of their lives, and the lives of those who come in contact with them.

hu5

It is easy for us to see how the cells of the body form it — that is, we understand at least the cooperative nature of the cell’s activities. An alteration on the part of one cell immediately causes changes in the others, and brings about a difference in body behavior. It is somewhat more difficult for us to understand the ways in which our own actions and those of others combine to bring about world events. On the other hand, each individual alive on the planet at any given “time.” It may seem that the individual has little power. On the other hand, each individual alive is a necessary one. It is, each of our actions is so important, contributing to the experience of others whom we do not know, that each individual is like a center about which the world revolves.

If we did not do what we did today, for example, the entire world would be in some way different.

huiik7

Our acts ripple outward in ways that we do not understand, interacting with the experience of others, and hence forming world events. The most famous and the most anonymous person are connected through such a fabric, and an action seemingly small and innocuous can end up changing history as we understand it. In metaphysical terms, we have our being in our psyche or soul in somewhat the same manner. Identities are obviously psychic environments, primarily, rather than physical ones. Physical objects cannot move through each other, as a table cannot move through a chair. Mental events behave differently. They can mix and merge, move through each other while still maintaining their own focus. they can interact on psychic levels in the way that events do on physical levels, but without physical restrictions. Though we are a portion if our psyche, then, our identity is still inviolate. It will not be submerged or annihilated in a greater self. It carries a stamp — a divine mark — or its own integrity. It follows its own focus, and knows itself as itself, even while its own existence as itself may be but a portion of another “identity.”

suool7u

Moreover, there is nothing to stop it from exploring this other greater identity, or moving into it, so to speak. When this happens both identities are changed. In greater terms, the psyche or soul nowhere exists as a finished product or entity. On the other hand it is always becoming, and that becoming happens on the part of each of its own portions.

soul

Our very physical stance and existence are dependent upon portions of our psyche’s reality, or our soul’s existence, of which we are normally unaware. Those portions are also dependent upon our existence, however.

hummmstyj

We take our breathing, our moving, for granted, though they are unconsciously produced. In certain terms, however, “at one time” we had to learn how to do these things that we are not consciously concerned with. At still other levels of reality, activities that we now consciously claim as our own have — in those same terms and from another viewpoint — become unconscious, providing a psychic history from which other identities emerge, as it seems that our own identities emerge from unconscious bodily activity.

We read our own identities in a particular, specialized fashion.

Within our biological experience, however, plant, mineral, animal, and human consciousness intersect. They encounter each other. In the language of the self that we speak, these encounters are like the implied pauses in our verbal language. These other kinds of consciousness then form inner rhythms upon which we superimpose our own.

These encounters of consciousness go on constantly. They form their own kind of adjacent identities. We would call them subspecies of consciousness, perhaps, but they are really identities that operate in a trans-species fashion.

If we “read ourselves” sideways in such a manner, we would discover portions of our own consciousness stretching out across the entire fabric of the earth as we understand it — becoming a part of the earth’s material, even as those materials become part of the self that we recognize. Our consciousness would be far less hemmed in. Time would expand adjacently. We think of ourselves physically as “top dogs,” however, separate from the other species and kinds of life, so that in effect we limit our own experience of our psyche.

If we thought or felt in such a fashion, then we would appreciate the fact that biologically our body is ours by virtue of the mineral, plant and animal life from which it gains its sustenance. We would not feel imprisoned as we often do within one corporal form, for we would understand that the body itself maintains its relative stability because of its constant give-and-take with the materials of the earth that are themselves possessed of consciousness.

We could to some extent feel our body coming together and dispersing constantly, and understand how we hover within it without fearing our own annihilation upon its dismantlement.

When we ask: “Who am I?” we are trying to read oneself as if we were a simple sentence that we recognize is only one of many probable variations. Us and no other choose which experiences we want to actualize. We do this as spontaneously as we speak words. We take it for granted that a sentence begun will be finished. We are in the midst of speaking ourselves. The speaking, which is our life, seems to happen by itself, since we are not aware of keeping oneself alive. Our heart beats whether or not we understand anatomy.

We read oneself in too-narrow terms. Much of the pain connected with serious illness and death results because we have no faith in our own continuing reality. We fight pain because we have not learned to transcend it, or rather use it. We do not trust the natural consciousness of the body, so that when its ends nears — and such an end is inevitable — we do not trust the signals that the body gives, that are meant to free us.

Certain kinds of pain automatically eject consciousness from the body. Such pain cannot be verbalized, for it is a mixture of pain pleasure, a tearing free, and it automatically brings about an almost exhilarating release of consciousness. Such pain is also very brief. Under our present system, however, drugs are usually administered, in which case pain is somewhat minimized, but prolonged — not triggering the natural release mechanisms.

If we read our selves adjacently, we would build up confidence in the body, and in those cooperative consciousnesses that form it. We would have an intimate awareness of the body’s healing processes also. We would not fear death as annihilation, and would feel our own consciousness gently disentangle itself from those others that so graciously couched it.

Almost any question that we can ask of God, can be asked of the Psyche as well.

It seems to us that we know ourselves, but that we take the existence of our psyche on faith. At best, it often seems that we are all that we know of our psyche, and we will complain that we do not know oneself to begin with. When we say: “I want to find myself,” we usually take it for granted that there is a completed, done, finished version of oneself that we have mislaid somewhere. When we think of finding God, we often think in the same terms.

We are “around ourselves” all the time. We are ever becoming oneself. In a manner of speaking we are “composed” of those patterns of oneself that are everywhere coming together. We cannot help but be oneself. Biologically, mentally, and spiritually we are marked as apart from all others, and no cloak of conventionally can ever hide that unutterable uniqueness. We cannot help but be ourselves.

ffffffm

In a way, physically we are a molecular language that communicates to others, but a language with its own peculiarities, as if speaking an accepted tongue we spoke with a biological accent that carried its own flavor and meaning.

When we ask: “What is my psyche, or my soul, or who am I?” we are seeking of course for our own meaning as apart from what we already know about oneself. In that context, God and the psyche are constantly expanding– unutterable, and always becoming.

ffwf

We will question, most likely, “Becoming what?” for to us it usually seems that all motion tends toward a stat of completion of one kind or another. We think, therefore, in terms of becoming perfect, or becoming free. The word “becoming” by itself seems to leave us up in the air, so to speak, suspended without definitions. If I say: “You are becoming what you already are,” then my remark sounds meaningless, for if you already are, how can you become what is already accomplished? In larger terms, however, what we are is always vaster than our knowledge of oneself, for in physical life we cannot keep up with our own psychological and psychic activity.

In a way our bodies speak a biological language, but in those terms we are bilingual, to say the least. We deal with certain kinds of organizations. They can be equated with biological verbs, adjectives and nouns. These result in certain time sequences that can be compared to sentences, written and read from one side, say, to the other.

sfgwe

Pretend that our life’s experience is a page of a book that we write, read, and experience from top to bottom, left to right, sentence by sentence, paragraph by paragraph. That is the you that you know– the wold view that we understand. But other quite as legitimate “yous” may write, read, and experience the same page backwards, or read each letter downward and back up again, as we would a column of figures. Or others might mix and match the letters in entirely different fashions altogether, forming entirely different sentences. Still another, vaster you might be aware of all the different methods of experiencing that particular page, which is our life as we understand it.

We think that our own consciousness is the only logical culmination of our body’s reality. We read oneself in a certain accepted fashion. In the “entire book of life,” however, just physically speaking, there are interrelationships on adjacent levels that we do not perceive, as other portions of our own biological consciousness or biological language relate to the entire living fabric of the world. In physical terms we are alive because of substructures — psychic, spiritual, and biological — of which we have hardly any comprehension at all.

TEGERGB

These are implied, however, in the nature of our own consciousness, which could not exist otherwise as we know it. As language gains and attains its meaning not only by what is included in it, but also by what is excluded, so our consciousness attains its stability also by exclusions.

What we are is implied in the nature of what we are not. By the same token, we are what we are because of the existence of what we are not.

trgggg3

We read ourselves from the top of the page to the bottom, or from what we think of as the beginning to the end. Our greater reality, however, is read in terms of intensities, so that the psyche puts us together in a different way. The psyche does not mark time. To it the intense experiences of our life exist simultaneously. In our terms they would be the psyche’s present. The psyche deals with probable events, however, so some events– perhaps some that we dreamed of but did not materialize — are quite real to the psyche. They are far more real to it than most innocuous but definite physical events, as for example yesterday morning’s breakfast.

God and psyche

The inner events of the psyche compose the greater experience from which physical events arrive. They cast an aura that almost magically make our life our own. Even as two people encountered precisely the same events in their lives at precisely the same time, their experiences of reality would still hardly be approximately connected.

Before the birth of images and words, the world existed in different terms.

Images as we consider them had not taken the form that we recognize. It seems to us that visually, for example, the natural world must be put together or perceived in a certain fashion.

boyp

Whatever our language, we perceive trees, ,mountains, people, oceans. We never see a man merge with a tree, for example. This would be considered an hallucinatory image. Our visual data are learned and interpreted so that they appear as the only possible results of those data. Inner vision can confound us, because in our mind we often see images quite clearly that we would dismiss if our eyes were open. In the terms of which we are speaking, however, the young species utilized what I have called the “inner senses” to a far greater degree than we do. Visually, early man did not perceive the physical world in the way that seems natural to us.

When a man’s and woman’s consciousness, for example, blended with that of a tree, those data, became “visual” for others to perceive. When a man’s/woman’s consciousness merged with an animal’s that blending became visual data also.

dddrw3

In a manner of speaking, the brain put visual information together so that the visual contents of the world were not as stationary as they are now. We have learned to be highly specific in our physical sight and interpretations. Our mental vision holds hints as to data that could be, but are not visually, physically perceived. We have trained ourselves to react to certain visual cues which trigger our mental interpretations, and to ignore other variations.

These later can be described as too subtle. Yet actually they are no more subtle than those cues we acknowledge.

bori

Data, we say, are stored in the chromosomes, strung together in a certain fashion. Now biologically that is direct cognition. The inner senses perceive directly in the same fashion. To us, language means words. Words are always symbols for emotions or feelings, intents or desires. Direct cognition did not need the symbols. The first language, the initial language, did not involve images or words, but dealt with a free flow of directly cognitive material.

A man or woman, wondering what a tree was like, became one, and let his or her own consciousness flow into the tree. Man’s/woman’s consciousness mixed and merged with other kinds of consciousness with the great curiosity of love. A child did not simply look at an animal, but let its consciousness merge with the animal’s and so to some extent the animal looked out through the child’s eyes.

ddffse

In ways most difficult to explain, man and woman “absorbed” an animal’s spirit before he/she killed it, so that the spirit of the animal merged with his or her own. In using the animal’s flesh, then, the hunter believed that he or she was giving the animal a new focus of existence. He/she could draw on the animal’s strength, and therefore were one.

Our own kind of focus emerged from such a background, so that within ourselves we contain myriad consciousnesses of which we are unaware. Through our own particular focus, the consciousnesses of the natural world merged to form a synthesis in which, for example, symphonies can emerge. We act not only for ourselves, but also for other kinds of consciousness that we have purposefully forgotten. In following our own purposes, which are ours, we also serve the purposes of others we have forgotten.

dirr

In thinking our own private thoughts, we also add to a larger psychic and mental reality of which we are part. Our language program our perceptions, and limit our communications in certain terms, as much as they facilitate it.

A musician writing a symphony, however, does not use all of the notes that are available to him. He or she chooses and discriminates. His/her discrimination is based upon his/her knowledge of the information available, however. In the same way, our languages are based upon an inner knowledge of larger available communications. The “secrets” of language are not to be found, then, in the available sounds, accents, root words or syllables, but in the rhythms between the words; the pauses and hesitations; the flow with which the words are put together, and the unsaid inferences that connect verbal and visual data.

6690

As a species “We” sought certain kinds of experience. Individually, and as tribes or nations, we follow certain “progressions” — and yet in so doing we act also on the part of the whole of nature. We take into our bodies in transmuted form the consciousness of all the things we consume.

The consciousness then merge to perceive the world in a fashion we call our own. Through our eyes the beasts, vegetables, birds, and dust perceive the dawn and sunlight as we do — as us, and yet on the other hand our experience is our own.

tlt879

To some extent it is true to say that languages emerged as we began to lose direct communication with our own experience, and with that of others. Language is therefore a substitute for direct communication. The symbols of the words stand for our own or someone else’s experience, while protecting us or them from it at the same time.

y90y

Visual data as we perceive them amount to visual language; the images perceived are like visual words. An object is presented to our visual perception so that we can safely perceive it from the outside. Objects as we see them are also symbols.

Regardless of the Language

The sounds that we can make are dependent upon our physical structure, so that human language is composed of a certain limited number of sounds. Our physical construction is the result of inner molecular configurations, and the sounds we make are related to these.

Early man and woman felt a certain emotional magnification, that he/she felt, for example, the wind’s voice as his/her own. In a manner of speaking our languages, while expressing our individual intents and communications, also represent a kind of amplification arising from our molecular configurations. The wind makes certain sounds that are dependent upon the characteristics of the earth. The breath makes certain sounds that are dependent upon the characteristic of the body. There is a connection between alphabets and the molecular structure that composes our tissue. Alphabets then are natural keys also. Such natural keys have a molecular history. We form these keys also. Such natural keys have a molecular history. We form these keys into certain sound patterns that have particular meanings.

wgwwf

This provides us within a certain kind of communication, but it also allows a molecular expression that is natural at that level, and then used by us for our own purposes. I am not saying that molecules speak. I am saying that they are expressed through our speech, however — and that our speech represents an amplification of their existence. Through our words their reality is amplified, in the same way that man’s and woman’s emotions once found amplification through the physical elements.

Certain sounds are verbal replicas of molecular constructions, put together by us to form sentences in the same way, for example, that molecules are put together to form cells and tissue.

t34t4t

There are “inner sounds” that act like layers between tissues, that “coat molecules”, and these serve as a basis for exterior sound principles. These are also connected to rhythms in the body itself.

To some extent punctuation is sound that we do not hear, a pause that implies the presence of withheld sound. To some extent, then, language is as dependent upon the unspoken as the spoken, and the rhythm of silence as well as of sound. In that context, however, silence involves merely a pause of sound in which sound is implied but withheld. Inner sound deals primarily with that kind of relationship. Language is meaningful only because of the rhythm of the silence upon which it rides. Yet, to so many people, the language that we speak is, literally, foreign. However, millions of people every day are striving to learn our language, either through school classes such as German lessons in London or through other means such as the “Rosetta Stone”. And then, once they have put in the hard work and dedication, the way that we make sounds can also be understood by them too. Some people like to go to another country though to learn the language. This might mean that people go and become an au pair. As this way people can experience a new culture whilst also learning a new language. If this is something that interests you then you can check out something like “Cultural Care Au Pair” sites to give you a good idea of what happens on this sort of experience and how people can apply for it.

y54y45y5

Its meaning comes from the pauses between the sounds as much as it does from the sounds themselves. The flow of breath is obviously important, regulating the rhythm and the spacing of the words. The breath’s integrity arises directly from the proper give-and-take between cells the functioning of the tissues; and all that is the expression of molecular competence. That competence is obviously responsible for language, but beyond that it is intimately connected with the patterns of languages themselves, the construction of syntax, and even with the figures of speech used.

Again, we speak for ourselves; yet in doing so we speak a language that is not ours alone, but the result of inner communications too swift for us to follow, involving corporal and subjective realities alike. For this reason our language have meaning on several levels. The sounds we make have physical effects on our own and other bodies. There is a sound value, then, as apart from a meaning value.

mttttttt

The words we speak to someone else are in certain terms broken down by the listener to basic components, and understood at different levels. There are psychological interpretations made, and molecular ones. The sounds and their pauses will express emotional states, and reactions to these will alter the body’s condition to whatever degree.

..88o

The listener then breaks down the language. He builds up his own response. We have so connected words and images that language seems to consist of a sound for feelings and subjective states, and they had no subjects or predicates, nor even a sentence structure that we would recognize.

Our language must follow our perception, though the sound structure beneath need not. We say: “I am today, I was yesterday, and I will be tomorrow, ” yet some languages would find such utterances incomprehensible, and the words, “I am” would be used in all instances.

Channels of interrelatedness

Connecting all physical matter — channels through consciousness flows.

Man’s/woman’s identification with nature allowed him/her to utilize those inner channels. He/she could send his/her own consciousness swimming, so to speak, through many currents, in which other kinds of consciousness merged. The language of love is one basic language. Man/woman loved nature, identified with its many parts, and added to his/her own sense of being by joining into its power and identifying with its force.

inneeri,

It is not so much that “Man”/”Woman” personified the elements of nature as that he/she threw his or her personality into its elements and rode them, so to speak. Love incites the desire to know, and communicate with the beloved; so language began as man/woman tried to express his/her love for the natural world.

Initially language had nothing to do with words, and indeed verbal language emerged only when man or woman had lost a portion of his/her love, forgotten some of his or her identification with nature, so that he or she no longer understood its voice to be his/her also. In those early days man and woman possessed a gargantuan arena for the expression of his/her emotions. He or she did not symbolically rage with the storms, for example, but quite consciously identified with them to such a degree that he or she and his or her tribesman or tribeswoman merged with the wind and lightning, and became a part of the storm’ forces. They felt, and knew as well, that the storms would refresh the land, whatever their fury.

inrtert4

Because of such identification with nature, the death experience, as we understand it, was in no way considered an end. The mobility of consciousness was a fact of experience. The self was not considered to be stuck within the skin. The body was considered more or less like a friendly home or cave, kindly giving the self refuge but not confining it.

The language of love did not initially involve images, either. Images in the mind, as they are understood, emerged in their present form only when man or woman had, lost a portion of his or her love and identification, and forgotten how to identify with an image from its insides, and so began to view it from outside.

inttrree

In a way the language of love followed molecular roots — a sort of biological alphabet, though “alphabet” is far too limiting a term.

Each natural element had its own key system that interlocked with others, forming channels through which consciousness could flow from one kind of life to another. Man and woman understood himself/herself to be a separate entity, but one that was connected to all of nature. The emotional reaches of his/her subjective life, then, lept far beyond what we think of as private experience. Each person participating fully in a storm, for example, still participated in his or her own individual way. Yet the grandeur of the emotions was allowed full sway, and the seasons of the earth and the world were jointly felt.

bittrr

The language or the method of communication can best be described perhaps as direct cognition. Direct cognition is dependent upon a lover’s kind of identification, where what is known is known. At that stage no words or even images were needed. The wind outside and the breath were felt to be one and the same, so that the wind was the earth breathing out the breath that rose from the mouths of the living, spreading out through the earth’s body. Part of a man or woman went out with breath — therefore, man’s and woman’s consciousness could go wherever the wind traveled. A man or woman’s consciousness, traveling with the wind,became part of all places.

A person’s identity was private, in that man/her always knew who he/she was. He or her was so sure of his/her identity that he/she did not feel the need to protect it, so that he or her could expand his/her awareness in away now quite foreign to us.

natbhet

Take the English sentence: “I observe the tree.” If the original language had words, the equivalent would be: “as a tree, I observe myself.”

Or: “Taking on my tree nature, I rest in my shade.” Or even: “From my man/woman nature, I rest in the shade of my tree nature.” A man/woman did not so much stand at the shore looking down at the water, as he/she immersed his/her consciousness within it. Man’s or woman’s initial curiosity did not involve seeing, feeling, or touching the object’s nature as much as it involved a joyful psychic exploration in which he or she plunged his or her consciousness, rather than, say, his or her foot into the stream — though he or she did both.

intter

If that language I speak of had been verbal, man/woman never would have said: “The water flows through the valley.” Instead, the sentence would have read something like this: “Running over the rocks, my water self flows together with others in slippery union.” That translation is not the best, either. Man or woman did not designate his or her own as the only kind of consciousness by any means. He/she graciously thanked the tree the gave him or her shade, for example, and he/she understood that the tree retained its own identity even when it allowed his or her awareness to join with it.

In our terms, the use of language began as man and woman lost his/her kind of identification. I must stress, that the identification was not symbolic, but practical, daily expression. Nature spoke for man/woman and man/woman for nature.

intur

In a manner of speaking, the noun and the verb were one. The noun did not disappear, but expressed itself as the verb.

In a kind of emotional magnification unknown to us, each person’s private emotions were given an expression and release through nature’s changes — a release that was understood, and taken for granted. In the most profound of terms, weather conditions and the emotions are still highly related. The inner conditions cause the exterior climatic changes, though of course it now seems to you that it is the other way around.

natyet

We are robbed, then, or we rob ourselves, of one of the most basic kinds of expression, since we can no longer identify ourselves with the forces of nature. Man and woman wanted to pursue a certain kind of consciousness, however. In our terms, over a period of time he/she pulled his/her awareness in, so to speak; he/she no longer identified as he/she did before, and began to view objects through the object of his own body. He or she no longer merged his or her awareness, so that he/she learned to look as a tree as one object, where before he/she would have joined with it, and perhaps viewed his/her own standing body from the tree’s vantage point. It was then the mental images became important in usual terms — for he or she had understood these before, but in a different way, from the inside out.

birt55

Now he and she began to draw and sketch, and to learn how to build images in the mind that were connected to real exterior objects in the presently accepted manner. Now he/she walked, not simply for pleasure, but to gain the information he or she wanted, to cross distances that before his/her consciousness had freely traveled. So he or she needed primitive maps and signs. Instead of using whole images he/she used partial ones, fragments of circles or lines, to represent natural objects.

hyhghy

He/she had always made sounds that communicate emotions, intent, and sheer exuberance. When he/she became involved with sketched or drawn images, he or she began to imitate their form with the shape of his/her lips. The “O” was perfect, and represents one of his or her initial, deliberate sounds of verbalized language.

 

 

Consciousness is far more mobile

Operationally, we have focused ours primarily with the body. We cannot experience subjective behavior “from outside,” so this natural mobility of consciousness, which for example the animals have retained, is psychologically invisible to us.

wi5w6u

We think in terms of units and definitions, so even when we consider our own consciousness we think of it as “a thing,” or a unit — an invisible something that might be held in invisible hands perhaps. Instead consciousness is a particular quality of being. Each portion of “it” contains the whole, so theoretically as far as we are concerned, we can leave our body and be in it simultaneously. We are rarely aware of such experiences because we do not believe them possible, and it seems that even consciousness, particularly when individualized, must be in one place or another.

wihrh6

In those early times, then, consciousness was more mobile. Identity was more democratic. In a strange fashion this does not mean that individuality was weaker. Instead it was strong enough not to accept within its confines many divergent kinds of experience. A person then, looking out into the world of trees, waters and rock, wildlife and vegetation, literally felt that he/she was looking at the larger, materialized, subjective areas of personal selfhood.

winddfwe

To explore that exterior world was to explore the inner one. Such a person, however, walking through the forest, also felt that he or she was also a portion of the inner life of each rock or tree, materialized. yet there was no contradiction of identities.

wit34t

A man/woman might merge his/her own consciousness with a running stream, traveling in such a way for miles to explore the layout of the land. To do this he/she became part water in a kind of identification we can barely understand– but so did the water then become part of the man/woman.

wi56

We can imagine atoms and molecules forming objects with little difficulty. In the same way, however, portions of identified consciousness can also mix and merge, forming alliances.

 

Language of Love

It is almost commonplace to say that those who are in love can converse without words. Dramas and stories of all kinds have been written about the inner kind of communication that seems to take place between mother and children, sister and brother, or love and beloved.

loodlfiyl

Love itself seems to quicken the physical senses, so that even the most minute gestures attain additional significance and meaning. Myths and tales are formed in which those who love communicate, though one is dead while the other lives. The experience of love also deepens the joy of the moment, even while it seems to emphasize the briefness or morality. Though love’s expression brilliantly illuminates its instant, at the same time that momentary brilliance contains within it an intensity that defies time, and is somehow eternal.

In our world we identify as oneself only, and yet love can expand that identification to such an extent that the intimate awareness of another individual is often a significant portion of our own consciousness. We look outward at the world not only through our eyes, but also, to some extent at least, through the eyes of another. It is true to say, then, that a portion of us figuratively walks with this other person as he or she goes about separate from us in space.

loy,ty

All of this also applies to the animals to varying degrees. Even in animals groups, individuals are not concerned with personal survival, but with the survival of “family” members. Each individual in an animal group is aware of others’ situations. The expression of love is not confined to our own species, therefore, nor is tenderness, loyalty, or concern. Love indeed does have its own language — a basic nonverbal one with deep biological connotations. It is the initial basic language from which all others spring, for all languages’ purposes rise from those qualities natural to love’ expression — the desire to communicate, create, explore, and to join with the beloved. If you want to express your love for someone but you’re not sure what to say, search for inspirational-love-quotes-sayings, look at this site for some ideas.

Speaking historically in our terms, man and woman first identified with nature, and loved it, for he/she saw it as an extension of himself or herself even while he or she felt himself or herself a part of its expression. In exploring it he/she explored love, he/she identified also with all those portions of nature with which he/she came into contact. This love was biologically ingrained in him or her, and is even now biologically pertinent.

mo122

Physically and psychically the species is connected with all of nature. Man and woman did not live in fear, as is now supposed, nor in some idealized natural heaven. He/she lived at an intense peak of psychic and biological experience, and enjoyed a sense of creative excitement that in those terms only existed when the species was new.

Difficult to explain, for these concepts themselves exist beyond verbalization. Some seeming contradictions are bound to occur. In comparison with those times, however, children are now born ancient, for even biologically they carry with in themselves the memories of their ancestors. In those pristine ears, however, the species itself arose, in those terms, newly from the womb of timelessness into time.

mot47474

In deeper terms their existence still continues, with offshoots in all directions. The world that we know is one development in time, the one that we recognize. The species actually took many other routes unknown to us, unrecorded in our history fresh creativity still emerges at that “point.” In the reckoning that we accept, the species in its infancy obviously experienced selfhood in different terms from our own. Because this experience is so alien to our present concepts, and because it predated language as we understand it, it is most difficult to describe.

mo

Generally we experience the self as isolate from nature, and primarily enclosed within our skin. Early man/woman did not feel like an empty shell, and yet selfhood existed for him/her as much outside of the body as within it. There was a constant interaction. It is easy to say that such people could identify, say, with the trees, but an entirely different thing to try and explain what it would be like for a mother to become so a part of the tree underneath which her children played that she could keep track of them from the tree’s viewpoint, though she was herself far away.

All love is not Sexually oriented

Yet love naturally seeks expression, and one such expression is through sexual activities.

Although sexual activity is just one of the many different ways that humans can express love, it is usually one of the most popular.

After all, it is, in fact, our natural fascination with human sexuality that makes adult websites such as PornHub so beloved. As well as our willingness to explore our sexuality with each other through our sexual activity with the use of sex toys and other items that you can find at stores similar to “Adult Book Shops”.

loveeer

When love and sexuality are artificially divided, however, or considered as antagonistic to each other, then all kinds of problems arise. Permanent relationships become most difficult to achieve under such conditions, and often love finds little expression, while one of its most natural channels is closed off. Many children give their greatest expression of love to toys, dolls, or imaginary playmates, because so many stereotyped patterns have already limited other expressions. Their feelings toward parents become ambiguous as a result of the identification procedures thrust upon them. Love, sexuality, and play, curiously and explorative characteristics, merge in the child in a natural manner. Yet it soon learns that areas of exploration are limited even as far as its own body is concerned. The child is not free to contemplate its own parts. The body is early forbidden territory, so that he child feels it is wrong to love itself in any fashion.

Lang

Ideas of love, then, become highly distorted, and its expression also. We do not fight wars for the sake of the brotherhood of man, for example. People who are acquainted with undistorted versions of love in their relationships would find such a concept impossible. Men brought up to be ashamed of the “feminine” sides of their nature cannot be expected to love women. They will see in women instead the despised, feared, and yet charged aspects of their own reality, and behave accordingly in their relationships.

lifdl

Women taught to be frightened of the “masculine” sides of their nature cannot be expected to love men, either, and the same kind of behavior results.

lol6k6tk

The so-called war of the sexes originates in the artificial divisions that we have placed about the nature of the self. The psyche’s reality is beyond such misunderstandings. Its native language usually escapes us. It is closely connected with what can be loosely called the language of love.

Obsessed With Sexual Behavior

We Are Obsessed With Sexual behavior (like that found on porn videos) when we proclaim it evil or distasteful or debasing,hide it, and pretend that its is primarily “Animalistic.”

We are also obsessed with sexual behavior when we proclaim its merits in an exaggerated fashion from the marketplace. We are obsessed with sexual behavior, no wonder watch my girlfriend porn is prevalent . Our daily dose of Girlfriend porn is available at “Watch-my-gf” sex and is so popular, when we put tight, unrealistic bans upon its expression, and also when we set up just as unrealistic standards of active performance to which the normal person is expected to comply.

Sexual freedom, then, does not involve an enforced promiscuity in which young people, for example, are made to feel unnatural if their encounters with the other sex do not lead to bed. Sexual freedom is shown within dominant and submissive dynamics such as seen in “My Little Princess” this interesting article and other similar fetishes.

sexrtr9

We begin to program sexual activity when we divorce it from love and devotion. It is very easy then for church or state to claim and attract our uncentered loyalty and love, leaving us with the expression of a sexuality stripped of its deepest meanings.

I am not saying here that any given sexual performance is “wrong,” or meaningless, or debased if it is not accompanied by the sentiments of love and devotion. Of course, there can be acts of sexual expression found on PornHub and other adult websites that don’t actually have to be meaningless, but it doesn’t have to be romantic either. Over a period of time, however, the expression of sex will follow the inclination of the heart. These inclinations will color sexual expression, then. To that degree, it is “unnatural” to have sexual desire for someone whom you dislike or look down upon. The sexual ideas of domination and submission have no part in the natural life of our species, or that of the animals. We have interpret animal behavior according to our own beliefs.

sexyh56h

Dominance and submission have often been used in religious literature in periods when love and devotion were separated from sexuality. They became unified only through religious visions or experiences, for only God’s love was seen as “good enough” to justify a sexuality otherwise felt to be animalistic. Instead, the words “Domination” and Submission” have to do with areas of consciousness that to a certain extent was bent upon dominating nature. We considered this male in essence. The female principle then became connected with the earth and all those elements of its life over which we as a species hoped to gain power.

sust4t

God, therefore, became male. The love and devotion that might otherwise be connected with the facets of nature and the female principle had to be “snacthed away from” any natural attraction to sexuality. In such a way, religion, echoing our state of consciousness, was able to harness the powers of love and use them for purposes of domination. They became state-oriented. A man’s love and devotion was a political gain. Fervor was as important as a government’s treasury, for a state could count upon the devotion of its lieutenants in the same way that many fanatics will work without money for a cause.

sexyj5ju

Some people are naturally solitary. They want to live lone lives, and are content. Most, however, have a need for ending, close relationships. These provide both a psychic and social framework for personal growth, understanding, and development. It is an easy enough matter to shout to the skies: “I love my fellow men,” when on the other hand we form no strong, enduring relationship with others. It is easy to claim an equal love for all members of the species, but love itself requires an understanding that at our level of activity is based upon intimate experience. We cannot love someone we do not know — not unless we water down the definition of love so much that it becomes meaningless.

sx5ty5

To love someone, you must appreciate how that person differs from yourself and from others. We must hold that person in mind so that to some extent love is a kind of meditation — a loving focus upon another individual. Once you experience that kind of love we can translate it into other terms. The love itself spreads out, expands, so that we can then see others in love’s light.

sexwfwf

Love is naturally creative and explorative — that is, we want to creatively explore the aspects of the beloved one. Even characteristics that would otherwise appear as faults attain a certain loving significance. Because these are still attributes of the beloved attains prominence over all others.

bifuy,k

The span of a god’s love can perhaps equally hold within its vision the existences of all individuals at one time in an infinite loving glance that beholds each person, seeing each with all his or her peculiar characteristics and tendencies. Such a god’s glance would delight in each person’s difference from each other person. This would not be a blanket love, a soupy porridge of a glance in which individuality melted, but a love based on a full understanding of each individual. The emotion of love brings us closet to an understanding of the nature of All That Is. Love incites dedication, commitments. It specifies. We cannot, therefore, honestly insist that we love humanity and all people equally if we do not love one other person. If we do not love oneself, it is quite difficult to love another

The Church did not restrain the sexuality of its priests

Or the expression of sexuality in previous centuries as much as it tried to divorce the expression of love and devotion from sexuality.

chuiook

A high percentage of priests of the Middle Ages, for example, had illegitimate children. These were considered products of the weak and lustful flesh– bad enough, but considering man’s fallen state, understandable lapses. Such situations were overlooked, if not condoned, as long as a priest’s love and devotion still belonged to the Church and were not “squandered” upon the mother of such offspring.

The nuns were kept in subservient positions. Yet the nunneries also served as refugees for many women, who managed to educate themselves even under those conditions.

ch35t

A good number of nuns were of course carrying the seed of those priests, and bearing children who acted as servants in monasteries, sometimes, as well as in covenants. There were numerous rebellions on the part of nuns in various convents, however, for these women found themselves operating rather efficiently though in segregated surroundings. They began to question the entire framework of the Church and their position with it. Some left in groups, particularly in France and Spain, forming their own communities.

chreh

The Church, however, never really found a suitable method of dealing with its women, or with the intuitive elements of its own beliefs. Its fear of a goddess emerging was renewed each time another apparition of Virgin appeared in one corner or another of the world.

churf

There were also some women who passed as monks, living lives of a solitary nature and carrying on for years. No works bear their feminine names, for they used male ones. It goes without saying that lesbian and homosexual relationships flourished in such surroundings. The Church closed its eyes as long as the relationships were sexual in nature just like many of the sexual relations you’d find in shemale sex, only when love and devotion were diverted from the Church was there real concern. intellect and emotions became further divided then. This resulted of course in an overemphasis upon dogma– rules and the ritualization that had to be colorful and rich because it would be the one outlet allowed in which creativity could be handled. The Church believed that sexual experience belonged to the so-called lower or animal instincts, and so did usual human love. On the other hand, spiritual love and devotion could not be muddied by sexual expression that everyone could enjoy even lesbians, even if the church in the past didn’t always agree with this approach. So any normal strong relationship became a threat to the expression of piety.

Sexual Schism

Sexual schism begins when the male child is taught to identify exclusively with the father image, and the female child with the mother image. For male children, this includes being taught how to develop into mature men who can provide for their families and take on the male gender role. Male children are taught, within our society that, there are particular traits that should be followed, however, we have seen a misinterpretation of these traditional traits that are associated with being male. Luckily modern society is looking to redirect and redefine those traits to their original standing – see more at Alpha-Male-Traits. Although we are looking to right these wrongs we have to look at any issues that have come from these expectations.

Here we have a guilt insidiously incorporated into the growth process.

schirk

Children of either sex identify quite naturally with both parents, and any enforced method of exclusively directing the child to such a single identification is limiting. Under such conditions, feelings of guilt immediately begin to arise whenever such a child feels natural affiliations toward the other parent.

sch5g

The stronger those natural inclinations are, the more the child is directed to ignore them in our society, since certain characteristics, are considered exclusively male or female. The child is also coerced into ignoring or denying those portions of the personality the correspond with the sex it is being taught it cannot identify with. This squeezing of personality into a sexual mold begins early, then. Continuing guilt is generated because the child knows unerringly that its own reality transcends such simple orientation.

sdcht

The more able the child is to force such an artification, the greater its feelings of inner rebellion. The lack of a “suitable” father or mother image has “saved” more children than it has hurt. The psyche, with its great gifts, always feels thwarted and attempts to take countering measures. Our schools further continue the process, however, so that the areas of curiosity and learning become separated for males and females. The “she” within the male does indeed represent portions of his personality that are being unexpressed– not because of any natural predominance of mental or emotional characteristics over others, but because of artificial specializations. The same applies to the “male” within the female. We have accepted this version od personhood, in line with our ideas about the nature of consciousness. Those ideas are changing, and as they do the species must accept its true personhood. As this happens, our understanding will allow us to glimpse the nature of the reality of the gods we have recognized through the ages. We will no longer need to clothe them in limited sexual guises.

schirku

Our religious concepts will change considerable, and the images associated with them. Religion and government have has as uneasy alliance. Males ruled both (they still do), and yet those leading religious organizations at least recognized their intuitive base. They constantly tired to manipulate religion’s substructure in the same acceptable male ways that government leaders always use to inhibit and use the emotions.

schhh35

Hersey was considered female and subversive because it could threaten to destroy the framework set about the acceptable expression of religious fervor. The female elements in the Church were always considered suspect, and in the early times of Christianity there was some concern lest the Virgin become a goddess. There were offshoots of Christianity that did not survive, in which this was the case. Parallel developments in religion ad government always echo the state of consciousness and its purposes. “Pagan” Practices, giving far more leeway to sexual identification and expression, continued well into the 16th century, and the so-called occult underground heretical teachings tried to encourage the development of personal intuition.

schimm

Any true psychic development of personality, however, is bound to lead to an understanding of the nature of the psyche that is far too large for any such confusion of basic identity with sexuality. The concept of reincarnation itself clearly shows the change of sexual orientation, even while it is also expressed through a given sexual stance. To a good extent, sexual beliefs are responsible for the blocking-out of reincarnational awareness. Such “memory” would necessarily acquaint us with experiences most difficult to correlate with our current sexual roles. Those other-sex existences are present to the psyche unconsciously. They are a portion of our personality. In so specifically identifying with our sex, therefore, we also inhibit memories that might limit or destroy that identification.

We put sexual labels, on the intellect and the emotions, so that they seem like opposites.

We have tried to divide mental and emotional characteristics between the two sexes, forcing a stereotyped behavior. The males who was intuitive or artistically gifted in certain ways often therefore considered himself homosexual , whether or not he was, because his emotional and mental characteristics seem to fit the female rather than the male sex.

ssfef

The woman who had interests beyond those acceptable as feminine was often in the same position. Because the intellect and the emotions were considered so separately, however, attempts to express intuitive abilities often resulted in, and often do result in, “unreasonable” behavior.

se5

In certain circles now it is fashionable to deny the intellectual capacities in favor of feeling, sentiment, or intuitive actions. Intellectual concerns then become suspect, and recourse to reason is considered a failing. Instead, of course, intellectual and intuitive behavior should be beautifully blended. In the same way we have attempted to force the expression of love into purely– or exclusively–sexual orientation. All affectionate caress or kiss between members of the same sex is generally not considered proper. The taboos include most aspects of the sense of touch in connection with the human body.

sexgggggggggggg

Touching is considered so basically sexual similar to videos on websites such as X-Tube, that the most innocuous touching of any portion of the body by another person is considered potentially dangerous. Of course, touching can be explicitly sexual, as it usually is on places like strip clubs, but people often find it hard to separate the sexual from the basic emotional. On the one hand we are too specific in our use of the term “sexuality”; yet in another way, and in that context, we feel that any kind of affection must naturally lead to sexual expression, if given its way. Our beliefs make this sexual eventually appears as a fact of experience.

sexge

This also forces us to guard our emotional life very close. As a result, any show of love is to some extent inhibited unless it can legitimately find expression sexually. In many instances love itself seems wrong because it must imply sexual expression at times when such expression is not possible, or even desired. Some people have a great capacity for love, devotion, and loyalty, which would naturally seek expression in many diverse ways — through strong enduring friendships, devotion to causes in which they believe, through vocations in which they help others. They may not be particularly sexually oriented. This need not mean that they are inhibiting their sexuality though, as they could be expressing it personally by viewing sexual films uploaded to a website like X-Tube, while knowing they can express their love for someone in other ways. It is pathetic and ludicrous for them to believe that they must have intercourse frequently in their youth, or to set up standards of normality against which they must measure their sexual experience.

sexff

In fact, Western society has attempted to force all expression of love and devotion into sexual activity, or otherwise ban it entirely. Sexual performance is considered the one safe way of using the great potential of human emotions. When it seems to us that society is becoming licentious, in many ways it is most restrained and inhibited.

sexdfgg

It means that all options except sexual freedom have been denied. The great force of love and devotion is withdrawn from personal areas of individual creativity through purposeful work. It is being withdrawn from expression through government or law. It is being denied expression through meaningful personal relationships, and forced into a narrow expression through a sexuality that then will indeed become meaningless.

It has been said by some women working toward “equal rights” that the species has only used half of its potential by suppressing the abilities of women. In larger terms, however, each individual suffers whenever identity is defined primarily as a matter or sexual orientation.

sedxfs

Generally speaking, there will be a specific overall sexual orientation of a biological nature, but the mental and emotional human characteristics are simply not meted out according to sex. Such identification cuts the individual in half, so that each person uses but half of his or her potential. This causes a schism in all of our cultural activities.

sexwdwd

On the one hand many of us have been taught that sexaul expression is wrong, evil, or debasing. We have also been told that if we do not express our sexuality, we are displaying unnatural repression, and furthermore we are led to think that we must above all force ourselves to enjoy this ambiguous sexual nature. The old idea that good women do not enjoy sex has hardly disappeared. Yet women are taught that natural expressions of love, playful caresses, are inappropriate unless an immediate follow-through to a sexual climax is given. Men are taught to count their worth according to the strength of the sexual drive and its conquests. They are taught to inhibit the expression of love as a weakness, and yet to perform sexually as often as possible. In such a sexual climate there is little wonder that you become confused.

In ordinary life, we end up with sexual caricatures in practical existence.

We do not understand what true womanhood or true manhood is. We are forced instead to concentrate upon a shallow kind of diversity. As a result, the reflection of sexual schism taints all of our activities, but most of all it limits our psychological reality. For the younger generation now the reality is that from a young age they are being taught sexual expression through porn from sites like XXX sex videos.

or99999999

Since we value sexual performance in the most limited of terms, and use that largely as a focus of identity, then both our old and young also find themselves outside of our organizational frameworks. The young are more freewheeling in their thoughts before they accept sexual roles, and the old are more freewheeling in theirs because they have discarded their sexual roles. I did not say that old or young had no sexual expression– but that both groups did not identify their identities with their sexual roles. There are of course exceptions. If man or the woman is taught that identity is a matter of sexual performance, however, and that that performance must cease at a certain age, then the sense of identity is dependent upon such performance, then they will begin to perform as quickly as possible. They will squeeze their identity into sexual clothes, and the society will suffer because the great creative thrusts of growing intellect and intuitions will be divided at puberty, precisely when they are needed.

sexumkmk

Ideally, the adult male or female would rejoice in sexual expression and find an overall orientation, but would also bask in a greater psychological and psychic identity that experienced and expressed all of the great human capabilities of mind and heart, which splash over any artificial divisions.

We see in nature only what we want to see.

We provide ourselves with a pattern or model of nature that conforms with our beliefs.

n=A8U

Love and devotion are largely seen as female characteristics. Societies and organizations of church and state are seen as male. It is not so much that the male and the female be considered equal as it is that the male and female elements in each person should be released and expressed. Immediately, many of us may be annoyed or alarmed, thinking that of course I mean sexual expression. Of course, sexual expression can come in a lot of ways – self (with toys like a thrusting dildo or vibrators) and with another human. That is a portion of such expression. But I am speaking of releasing within each individual the great human characteristics and abilities that are often denied expression because they are assigned to the opposite sex.

5yhweh

In our present framework, because of the male-female specialization– the male orientation, the implication that the ego is male while the psyche is female– we force upon ourselves great divisions in which operationally the intellect seems separate from the Intuitions, and we set up a situation in which opposites seem to apply where there are none. When we think of a scientist, the majority of us will think of a male, an intellectual, an “objective” thinker who takes great pains not to be emotional, or to identify with the subject being examined or studied.

na35y

There seems to be a division between science and religion, for even organized religion has an intuitive basis. The male scientist is often ashamed of using his intuitions, for not only do they appear to be unscientific, but female as well. It is what others will think about his masculinity that such a man is concerned with. It be “illogical” is a scientific “crime” — not so much because it is an unscientific attribute, but because it is considered a feminine one. Science has followed the male orientation and become its epitome. Up until the present, science has consistently tried to do without the so-called feminine qualities. It has divorced knowledge from emotion, understanding from identification, and stressed sexuality over personhood.

natfu

To an extent, some people in the sciences manage to behind the so-called female and male characteristics. When they do so, seeming oppositions and male contradictions disappear. To whatever degree, more than their contemporaries, they do not allow sexual roles to blind them psychologically. Therefore they are more apt to combine reason and emotion, intuition and intellect, and in so doing invent theories that reconcile previous contradictions. They unify, expand, and create, rather than diversify.

bio265huj

Einstein was such a person in the sciences. While he was tainted to some extent by conventional sexual beliefs, he still felt his own personhood in such a way that he gladly took advantage of characteristics considered feminine. As a youngster particularly, he rebelled against male-oriented learning and orientation. This rebellion was was psychological — that is, he maintained an acceptable male orientation in terms of sexual activity, but he would not restrain his mind and soul with such nonsense. The world felt the result of his great intuitive abilities, and of his devotion.

Because of the world situation, and the overall male orientation of science, the result of his work were largely put to the uses of manipulation and control.

c1

Generally, reason and intellect are then considered male qualities, and the frameworks for civilization, science, and an organized world. The intuitions and the impulses are considered erratic, untrustworthy, feminine, and the impulses are be controlled. The world exists because of spontaneous order. Civilization began because of the impulse of people to be together. It grew spontaneously and came into order. We only see the outside of many processes because our objectified viewpoint does not allow us the identification that would show us more. It seems to us then that all systems sometime break down — become less orderly or fall into chaos.

gghrt

We apply this belief to physical systems and psychological ones. In terms of sex, we insist upon a picture that shows us a growth into a sexual identification into “sexual disorder.” It does not occur to us that the original premise or focus, the identification of identity with sexual nature, is “unnatural.” It is us, then, who form the entire framework from which our judgement is made. In many cases the person is truer to his or her own identity in childhood or old age, when greater individual freedom is allowed, and sexual roles are more flexible.

tyrw2

Any deep exploration of the self will lead into areas that will confound conventional beliefs about sexuality. We will discover an identity, a psychological and psychic identity, that is in our terms male and female, one in which those abilities of each sex are magnified, released, and expressed. They may not be so released in normal life, but we will meet the greater dimensions of our own reality, and at least in the dream state catch a glimpse of the self that transcends a one-sex orientation.

Such an encounter with the psyche is often met by great artists or writers, or by mystics. This kind of realization is necessary if we are to ever transcend the framework of seeming opposites in which our world is involved.

tannsq

The overly specific sexual orientation, then, reflects a basic division in consciousness. It not only separates a man from his own intuitions and emotions to some extent, or a woman from her own intellect, but it effectively provides a civilization in which mind and heart, fact and revelation, appear completely divorced. To some degree each person is at war with the psyche, for all of an individual’s human characteristics must be denied unless they fit in with those considered normal to the sexuall identity.

Humanity deals with different predominant themes at different times.

There may be minor interweaving ones, but the nature of personality, religion, politics, the family, and the arts– all of these are considered in the light of the predominating theme.

In unusual historic terms, humanity has been experimenting with its own unique kind of consciousness, and this necessitated an arbitrary division between the subject and the perceiver–nature and man/woman — and brought about a situation in which the species came to consider itself apart from the rest of existence.

thrhn52

What we think of as male/female ego-orientated characteristics are simply those human attributes that the species encourage, brought into the foreground, and stressed. Using those actually as guidelines, we have so far viewed our world and formed our cultures. There are some exceptions of note, but here I am speaking historically of the Western world with its Roman and Greek heritage. Our gods became masculine then; competitive. We saw the species pitted against nature, and man/woman pitted against man/woman. We consider the Greek tragedies great because they echo so firmly our own beliefs. Man/woman is seen in opposition in the most immediate fashion with his/her own father/mother. Family relationships become a mirror of those beliefs, which are then of course taken as statements of fact concerning the human condition. We thus have a very polarized male-female concept.

Those characteristics that we consider female are, then, those that did not predominate because they represented the sources of nature from which the species sought release. To some extent this was a true, creative, sexual drama, of high pretense, for in its own way the consciousness of the species was playing for high stakes, and the drama had to be believable.

pyt;go

It was seeking for a multiplication of consciousness, forming new offshoots from its own source. It had to pretend to dislike and disown that source in the same way that an adolescent may momentarily turn aside from its parents in order to encourage independence. Before the so-called flowering of Greek and Roman cultures, consciousness had not as yet made that specialization. There were gods and goddesses galore, and deities in whose natures the feminine and masculine characteristics merged. There were deities part human and part animal. The species, then, had not yet taken up the theme that has been predominant in Western culture.

theth

These changes first occurred in man’s/woman’s stories of the deities. As the species divorced itself from nature, so the animal gods began to vanish. Man/woman first changed his/her myths, and then altered the reality that reflected them.

Before then there were various kinds of divisions of labor, but great leeway in sexual expression. Children were a necessary part of the family, for a family was a band of people who belonged together, cooperating in the search for food and shelter.

bbb

Homosexual or lesbian relationships, as we term them, existed quite freely, and simultaneously. These were considered pertinent with or without sexual expression, and served as strong bonds of sisterhood and brotherhood.

lur86e

When we view the animal kingdom, we also do so through our specialized sexual beliefs, studying the behavior of the male and female, looking for patterns of aggressiveness, territorial jealousy, passivity, mothering instincts, or whatever. These specialities of interest make us blind to many larger dimensions of animal behavior. To some degree, the so-called mothering instinct belongs to male and female alike in any species that can be so designated. Animals have close friendships, with or without sexual expression, with members of the same sex. Love and devotion are not the prerogatives of one sex or one species, some humans exhibit the same conclusion when it comes to expressing their sexuality through massively various ways now that don’t even have to include other humans, such as people watching and enjoying websites like cartoon porn and others.

It was desirable in practical terms that a man have many wives.

So that is man died in battle his seed might be planted in many wombs– particularly in times when diseases struck men and women often in young adulthood.

I76I78

When physical conditions are adverse, such social traditions have often emerged. In times of overpopulation, so-called homosexual and lesbian tendencies come to the surface– but also there is the tendency to express love in other than physical ways, and the emergence of large social issues and challenges into which men and women can throw their energies. There are “lost” portions of the Bible having to do with sexuality, and with Christ’s beliefs concerning it, that were considered blasphemous and did not come down to us through history.

ut

It is natural to express love through sexual acts–natural and good. It is not natural to express love only through sexual acts, however. Many of Freud’s sexual ideas did not reflect man’s natural condition. The complexes and neuroses outlined and defined are products of our traditions and beliefs. We will naturally find some evidence for them in observed behavior. Many of the traditions do come from the Greeks, from the great Greek playwrights, who quite beautifully and tragically presented the quality of the psyche as it showed itself in the light of Grecian traditions.

The boy does not seek, naturally to “dethrone” the father. He seeks to emulate him; he seeks to be himself as fully as it seems to him that his father was himself. He hopes to go beyond himself and his own capabilities for himself and for his father.

cwc2

As a child he once thought that his father was immortal, in human terms– that he could do no wrong. The son tries to vindicate the father by doing no wrong himself, and perhaps by succeeding where it seems the father might have failed. It is much more natural for the male to try to vindicate the father than it is to destroy him, or envy him in negative terms.

mdfcv

The child is simply the male child. He is not jealous of the father with the mother, in the way that is often supposed. The male child does not possess an identity so focused upon its maleness. I am not saying that children do not have a sexual nature from birth. They simply do not focus upon their maleness or femaleness in the way that is supposed.

To the male child, the penis is something that belongs to him personally in the same way that an arm or leg does, or that his mouth or anus does. He does not consider it a weapon. He is not jealous of his father’s love for the mother, for he understands quite well that her love for him is just as strong. He does not wish to possess his mother sexually in the way that adults currently suppose. He does not understand those terms. He may at times be jealous of her attention, but this is not a sexual jealousy in conventionally understood terms. Our beliefs blind us to the sexual nature of children. They do enjoy their bodies. They are sexually aroused. The psychological connotations, however, are not those assigned to them by adults.

lufmjfu

The beliefs involving the son’s inherent rivalry with the father, and his need to overthrow him, follow instead patterns of culture and tradition, economic and social, rather than biological or psychological. Those ideas serve as handy explanations for behavior that is not inherent or biologically pertinent

 

Simply,love is the force out of which being comes.

Love seeks expression and creativity. Sexual expression (be it through pheromone massage oils, or sprays from or through sex toys) is one way that love seeks creativity. It is hardly the only way, however. Love finds expression through the arts, religion, play,and helpful actions toward others. It cannot be confined to sexual expression only, nor can rules be given as to how often normal adults should sexually express themselves. Whether they want to star in or watch twink porn videos or a heterosexual alternative, it is completely up to that unique person.

loojo

Many men, labeled homosexual by themselves and others, want to be fathers. Their belief and those of our society lead them to imagine that they must always be heterosexual or homosexual. Many feel a desire toward women that is also inhibited. Our male or female orientation limits us in ways that we do not understand. For example, in many cases, the gentle “homosexual” father has a better innate idea of manliness than a heterosexual male who believes that men must be cruel, insensitive, and competitive. These are both stereotyped images, however.

lofu

Love can be expressed quite legitimately through the arts. This does not mean that such a person is repressing sexuality in any given case, and stealing its energy for creative production — though, of course, this may be the case. Many natural artists in any field normally express love through such creative endeavors, rather than through sexual actions.

This does not mean that such persons never have sexual encounters that are enjoyable, and even of an enduring nature. It means that the thrust of their love is, overall, expressed through the production of art, through which it seeks a statement that speaks in other than corporal terms.

lon

A great artist in any field or in any time instinctively feels a private personhood that is greater than the particular sexual identity. As long as we equate identity with our sexuality, we will limit the potentials of the individual and of species. Each person will generally find it easier to operate as male or female, lesbian or homosexual, but each person is primarily biseuxal. Bisexuality implies parenthood as much as it implies lesbian or homosexual relationships. Again, here, sexual encounters are a natural part of love’s expression, but they are not the limit of love’s expression.

bi6jj

Many quite fine nonsexual relationships are denied, because of the connotations placed upon lesbianism or homosexuality. Many heterosexual relationships are also denied to persons labeled as not being heterosexual, by themselves or society. People so labeled often feel propelled out of sheer confusion to express their love only through sexual acts. They feel forced to imitate what they think the natural male or female is like, and on occasion end up with ludicrous caricatures. These caricatures infuriate those so imitated — because they carry such hints of truth, and point out so cleverly the exaggerations of maleness or femaleness that many heteroseuxals have clamped upon in their own natures.

Ideas about sexuality and the nature of the psyche.

Often paint a picture of very contradictory elements. The psyche and its relationship to sexuality affects our ideas of health and illness, creativity, and all of the ordinary areas of individual life.

In our terms, the psyche contains what we could consider male and female characteristics, while not being male or female itself.

sexumkmk

In those terms and in regard, the psyche is a bank from which sexual affiliations are drawn. Basically, however, there are no clear, set, human, psychological characteristics that belong to one sex or the other. Apart from most men seeming to enjoy and be aroused by the content and individuals featured over on X Tube. Again, this would lead to a pattern too rigid for the development of the species, and give us too-specialized behavior Patterns that would not allow us to cope as a species — particularly with the many varieties of social groupings possible. However, when it comes to sexual health it is important for both partners to take care of themselves or else they may develop a sexually transmitted infection. Throughout history, mankind has tried its best to combat STDs and STIs with the help of alternative solutions, you can even learn about “Hitler-make-sex-dolls.” Hitler’s incredible solutions to dealing with sexually transmitted diseases during Nazi Germany.

Our psychological tests show us only the current picture of males and females, brought up from infancy with particular sexual beliefs. These beliefs program the child from infancy, of course, so that it behaves in certain fashions in adulthood. The male seems to perform better at mathematical tasks, and so-called context, in value development and personal relationships. The male shows up better in the sciences, while the female is considered intuitional.

sextym

It is obvious this is learned behavior. We cannot teach a boy to be “the strong silent male type,” and then expect him to excel either verbally or in social relationships. You cannot expect a girl to show “strong. logical thought development” when she is taught that a woman is intuitional– that the intuitions are opposed to logic, and that she must be feminine, or non logical, at all costs. This is fairly obvious.

The child is not born a sponge, however, empty but ready to soak up knowledge. It is already soaked in knowledge. Some will come to the surface, so to speak, and be used consciously. Some will not. I am saying here that to some extent the child in the womb is aware of the mother’s beliefs and information, and that to some extent it is “programmed” to behave in a certain fashion, or to grow in a certain fashion as a result.

sesxu,m

Basically the species is relatively so freewheeling, with so many potentials, that it is necessary that the mother’s beliefs provide a kind of framework in the beginning, allowing the child to focus its abilities in desired directions. It knows ahead of time then the biological, spiritual, and social environment into which it is born. It is somewhat prepared to grow in a certain direction– a direction that is applicable and suited to its conditions.

Beliefs about the infant’s sexaul nature are of course a part of its advance programming. We are not speaking here of forced growth patterns, or of psychic or biological directions impressed upon it so that any later divergence from them causes inevitable stress or pain. The fact remains that the child receives patterns of behavior, gently nudging it to grow in certain directions. In normal learning, of course, both parents urge the child to behave in certain fashions.

sesxtuk

Beside this, however, certain general, learned patterns are biologically transmitted to the child through the genes. Certain kinds of knowledge are transmitted through the genes besides that generally known, having to do with cellular formation and so forth.

Survival of the human species, as it has developed, is a matter of belief far more than is understood– for certain beliefs are now built in. They become biologically pertinent and transmitted. I mean something else here besides, for example, a telepathic transmission: the translation of beliefs into physical codes that then become biological cues. [As a result], it then becomes easier for a boy to act in a given manner biologically than in another.

sexut,s

If women have felt that their biological survival depended upon the cultivation of certain attributes over others, for instance, then this information becomes chromosome data, as vital to the development of the new organism as any other physical data involving cellular structure.

The mother also provides the same kind of information to a male offspring. The father contributes his share in each case. Over the generations, then, certain characteristics appear to be quite naturally ,male or female, and these will vary to some extent according to the civilizations and world conditions. Each individual is highly unique, however, so these models for behavior will vary. They can indeed be changed in a generation, for the experience of each person alters the original information. This provides leeway that is important.

sxbna

The child, also, uses such information as a guide only; as a premise upon which it bases early behavior. As the mind develops, the child immediately begins to question the earthly assumptions. This questioning of basic premises is one of the greatest divisions between us and the animal world.

WEQ

The psyche then contains, again in our terms, female and male characteristics. These are put together, so to speak, in human personality with great leeway and in many proportions.

Love Is A Biological Necessity

A force operating to one degree or another in all biological life. Without love there is no physical commitments to life — no psychic hold.

lo8ll

Love exists whether or not it is sexually expressed, though it is natural for love to seek expression. Love implies loyalty. It implies commitment. This applies to lesbian and homosexual relationships as well as to heterosexual ones. Even when love seems to fade and people get divorced, most divorcees look on sites like Divorced SIngles to find a new love for their life because they still want to find their soulmate. In our society, however, identity is so related to sexual stereotypes that few people know themselves well enough to understand the nature of love, and to make any such commitments.

K8K

A transitory period is currently taking place, in which women seem to seek the promiscuous sexual freedom more generally granted men, this is being done in many different ways over the world, for instance, check out lesbian adult videos and how they can express sensual and sexual desires. It is believed that males are naturally promiscuous, aroused by sexual stimuli almost completely divorced from any complementary “deeper” response. The male, then, is thought to want sex whether or not he has any love response to the woman in question — or sometimes to desire her precisely because he doesn’t love her. This would explain why men love visiting websites like Live chat – because they provide arousal and sexual satisfaction without the “deeper” response. In such cases, sex becomes not an expression of love, but an expression of derision or scorn.

lo7

So women, accepting these ideas often, seek for a situation in which they too can feel to express their sexual desires openly, whether or not any love is involved. Yet loyalty is love’s partner, and the primates display such evidence in varying degrees. The male in particular has been taught to separate love and sex, so that a schizophrenic condition results that tears apart his psyche — in operational terms–as he lives his life.

The expression of sexuality is considered male, while the expression of love is not considered manly. To some extent or another, then, the male feels forced to divide the expression of his love from the expression of his sexuality. It would be disastrous for women to follow the same course.

a3rf2

This division has led to our major wars. This does not mean that men were alone responsible for wars. It does mean that the male so divorced himself from the common fountain of love and sex that the repressed energy came forth in these aggressive acts of cultural rape and death, instead of birth.

lur86e

When we look at the animal kingdom, we suppose that the male chooses blindly, led by “dumb’ instinct, so that in overall terms one female will do as well as any other. When we discover that a certain chemical or scent will attract a certain male insect, for example, we take it for granted that, that element is alone responsible for drawing the male to the female. We take it for granted, in other words, that individual differences do not apply in such cases so remote from our own reality.

lioy89l;

We simply are not able to understand the nature of such consciousnesses, and so we interpret their behavior according to our beliefs. This would be sad enough if we did not often use such distorted data to further define the nature of male and female behavior.

bi6jey

In so distorting our ideas of sex, we further limit the great capacities of human loyalty, which is always connected with live and love’s expression. Lesbian and homosexual relationships then are at best tenuous, overwrought with confused emotions, very seldom able to maintain a stability that allows for individual growth. Heterosexual relationships also break down, for identity of each partner becomes based upon sexual roles that may or may not apply to the individuals involved.

bi64j

Since we feel that sex is the only proper method of love’s expression, and yet also believe sex and love are divided, we are in a quandary. These sexual beliefs are also far more important in national relationships than we realize, for we attempt to take what we think of as a masculine stance as a nation. So, for example, does, Russia. India takes a feminine stance — in terms of our beliefs, now.

One small Note: a male with growths of any kind — kidney stones or ulcers, for example — has tendencies he considers feminine, and therefore “dependent,” of which he is ashamed. There is nothing to be ashamed of though when it comes to kidney stones, instead you should seek medical help as quickly as possible. You could check out something like this advanced urology to give you a better understanding of what to do next. However, with regards to the tendencies that he feels are feminine – in a mock biological ceremony, he gives birth to the extent that he produces within his body material that was not there before. In ulcers the stomach becomes the womb — blooded, giving birth to sores — his interpretation of a male’s “grotesque” attempt to express feminine characteristics.

Our psychological or biological sexuality

Our sexual characteristics represent a portion of our personhood. The type of woman you choose to spend time with at the erotic monkey reflects a part of you. They provide vital areas of expression, and focus points about which to group experience. Our sexual qualities are a part of our nature, but they do not define it. If you enjoy expressing your sexual side, there’s the best porn for you to enjoy.

pigt

Our beliefs so structure our experience individually and en masses, however, that evidential material contrary to those ideas shows itself but seldom, or in distorted or exaggerated form. It is quite natural, biologically and psychologically, to operate in certain fashions that are not acceptable in our society, and that seem to run counter to our picture of mankind’s history. In terms of our definitions, then, it is quite natural for some people to behave as males sexually and as females psychologically. It is quite “natural” for others to operate in a reverse fashion. You can see plenty of examples of this at websites similar to xxx porn. Sexual roles have been experimented with in a variety of videos.

ser2vr

This may seem difficult to understand, because we assign psychological characteristics to sexual affiliation, whichever it is. There will always be people who not necessarily be heterosexual at any given time.

The larger pattern of human personhood demands a bisexual affiliation that allows leeway in sexual encounters, This is why many people add xxx videos into the mix. Many a leeway that provides a framework in which individuals can express feelings, abilities, and characteristics that follow the natural inclines of the personal psyche rather that sexual stereotypes. I am not speaking here of anything so simple as merely allowing women more freedom, or relieving men from the conventional breadwinner’s role. I am certainly not talking about “open marriage” as it is currently understood, but of far greater issues. Before we can consider these, however, there are several points I would like to make.

ser34tt

There are biological possibilities, seldom activated in our present circumstances, that have some bearing upon the subject at hand.

Puberty comes at a certain time, triggered by deep mechanisms that are related to the state of the natural world, the condition of the species, and those cultural beliefs that in a certain sense we transpose upon the natural world. In other respects, our cultural environment is of course natural. The time that puberty come varies, then, and afterwards it is possible to parent a child. A time then comes when the period is over. During what is called the sexually active time; the larger dimensions of personhood become strictly narrowed into sexually stereotyped roles– and all aspects of identity that do not fit are ignored or denied. The fact is that few people fit those roles. They are largely the result of the interpretations of religion as conventionally understood. And the scientists, for all their seeming independence, often simply found new intellectually acceptable reasons for unconsciously held emotional beliefs.

serr4r

Biologically there is a period very rarely experienced, as jokingly suggested in the “sick jokes” about senility and second childhood. This particular latent biological ability shows itself only upon the rarest instances– because, for one thing, it represents a feat now scarcely desirable. Physically, however, the body is quite able to completely regenerate itself as it approaches old age. In deed, a quite legitimate second puberty is possible, in which the male’s seed is youthfully strong and vital, and the woman’s womb is pliable and able to bear. There are, I believe, Biblical tales of such births resulting.

sexer4rv

In times of over populations, this mechanism is hardly desirable, but it is a part of the species held in abeyance now, representing nature’s capabilities. In some areas of our world, isolated peoples live on past a hundred years, vital and strong, because they are untouched by our beliefs, and because they live in sympathy and accord with the world as they know and understand it. Occasionally such second puberties happen then, with resulting childbirth, as a small group attempts to maintain its own biological stance.

Usually the second puberty follows the same sexual orientation as the first, but not always– for it is quite possible for the new affiliation to be the opposite of the first. This is even rarer– but so does the species protect itself.

sexuuuuuuuuuuu

Though medical techniques some of our old people are kept alive long enough so that this process begins, appearing in distorted form, sometimes psychologically apparent but biologically frustrated. The second puberty is dead-ended, then. It has nowhere to go. It is not now biologically pertinent or needed.

Left alone, some of these people would die with a feeling of satisfaction. Kept alive through medical techniques, the physical mechanism continues its struggles to revitalize the body and bring about this second puberty– that naturally would only come about under different conditions, with the mind far more alert and the will unimpaired. Now, to some extent there is a connection between this innate, rarely observed second puberty and the development of cancer, in which growth is specifically apparent in an exaggerated manner.

se

In almost all such cases involving cancer, spiritual and psychic growth is being denied, or the individual feels that he or she can no longer grow properly in personal, psychic, terms. This attempt to grow then activates body mechanisms that result in the overgrowth of certain cells. The individual insists upon growing or upon death, and forces an artificial situation in which growth itself becomes physically disastrous.

This is because a blockage occurs. The individual wants to grow in terms of personhood, but is afraid of doing so. There are always individual variations that must be taken into consideration, but often such a person feels a martyr to his or her sex, imprisoned by it and unable to escape. This can obviously apply to cancers affecting sexual areas, but is often in the back ground of any such condition. Energy is being blocked because of problems that began– in our terms– with sexual questions in puberty. Energy is experience as sexual.

sexefewfwef

Now, old people who are considered senile or unmanageable are sometimes experiencing new burst’s of sexual activity for which no outlet is given. Beside this, they have lost their conventional sexual roles, in which they earlier expressed their energy.

se87ol

There are often hormonal changes occurring that go unnoticed. Many express a nervous, erratic type of behavior as they are aroused– some not only sexually but intellectually. The new adolescence never comes. The new puberty dies a slow death, for our society has no framework in which to understand it. And indeed it shows itself in a distorted fashion that can appear most grotesque.

Heterosexual love is one important expression of bisexuality, and sexually represents the reproductive abilities

Hetersexuality, however, rests upon the bisexual basis, and without man’s/woman’s Bi-sexual nature, the larger frameworks of the family– the clan, tribe, government, civilization– would be impossible.

Basically, then, man’s/woman’s inherent bisexuality provides the basis for the cooperation that makes physical survival, and any kind of cultural interaction, possible. If the “battle of the sexes” were as prevalent as supposed, and as natural and ferocious, then there literally would be no cooperation between males and females for any purpose. There would be constant state of battle against each other. If that was the case, it would be hard enough to procreate for survival reasons, nevermind humans have sexual intimacy for entertainment and pleasure like you’d see on a website like X-Tube or a similar adult porn site.

bi08tpt

In the natural biological flow of a person’s life, there are periods of varying intensities, in which love and its expression fluctuates, and tends toward different courses. There are also individual variations that are of great importance. These natural rhythms are seldom observed, however. Tendencies toward lesbianism or homosexuality in children are quite natural. They are so feared, however, that often just-as-natural leanings toward heterosexuality are blocked. Instead, the young person is stereotyped.

Individual inclinations toward creativity often emerge in a strong fashion in adolescence. If those drives in either sex do not conform in expression to those expected of the male or female, then such young persons become confused. The creative expression seems to be in direct contradiction to the sexual standards expected.

4

I am not saying that lesbianism and homosexuality are merely stages leading to heterosexaulity. I am saying that lesbianism, homosexuality, and heteroseuxlaity are valid expressions of man’s/woman’s bisexual nature.

Love and sexuality are not necessarily the same thing. The physical act of sex that you can see on sites like X-Tube is merely love in the physical form. Sex is love’s expression, but it is only one of love’s expressions. Sometimes it is quite “natural” to express love in another way. Because of the connotations of the word “sex,” however, it may seem to some of us that I am advocating a promiscuous sexual relationship with “no holes barred”, which many Porno Babes would be involved in, but as everyone does – they of course will have time for intimate and loving sexual acts.

aee2e2

Instead, I am saying that deeper bonds of biological and spiritual love lie at the basis of all personal and cultural relationships, a love that transcends our ideas of sexuality. Heterosexual love, as it is understood at least, gives us a family of parents and children–an important unit, about which other groups form. If only stereotyped ideas of female-male relationships operated, however, there would be no bond or stimulus great enough to forge one family to another. The antagonism between males would be too great. Competition between females would be too serve. Wars would wipe out struggling tribes before any traditions were formed.

In the social world as in the microscopic one, cooperation is paramount. Only a basic bisexuality could give the species the leeway necessary, and prevent stereotyped behavior of a kind that would hamper creativity and social commerce. That basic sexual nature allows us the fulfillment of individual abilities, so that the species does not fall into extinction. Man’s/woman’s recognition of his/her bisexual nature is, therefore, a must in his/her future.

bd9tg

There are, obvious differences between the sexes. They are insignificant, and appear large only because we concentrate so upon them. The great human qualities of love, strength, compassion, intellect and imagination do not belong to one sex or the other.

Only an understanding of this inherent bisexual nature will release those qualities in each individual, regardless of sex. Many women are comfortable with their bisexuality which is why they are invariably more than happy to invite a Escort to join them occasionally to spice things up in the bedroom with their husbands. Those same abilities are natural characteristics of people in each race, of course, yet we have consistently made the same kind of distinctions in racial terms as we have in sexual ones, so that certain races appear as feminine or masculine to us. We project our sexual beliefs outward upon the nations, then, and often the terminology of the nations and of wars is the same as that used to describe sex.

battle

We speak, for example, of domination and submission, of the master and the slave, of the rape of nation– terms used in war and sex alike.

ituj

Male and female are each members of the human race– or species– so these divisions were made in the species itself, by itself. They are the result of distinctions arising, as the species experimented with its line of consciousness, and brought into being the appearance of separation between itself and the rest of the natural world.

Battle of the sexes, is not “natural”

Nor, is fighting between members of the same sex. Even in the animal kingdom, for example, males do not fight to the death over the females when they are in their natural state.

When we examine animal behavior even in its most natural-seeming environment, for instance, we are not observing the basic behavior patterns of such creatures, because those relatively isolated areas exist in our world. Quite simply, we cannot have one or two or twenty officially-designated natural regions in which we observe animal activity and expect to find anything more than the current adaptation of those creatures– an adaptation that is superimposed upon their “Natural” reactions.

mumume

The balance of resources, animal travel patterns, migrations, weather conditions– all of these must be taken into consideration. Such isolated observation areas merely present us with a distorted picture of natural behavior, because the animals are also imprisoned within them. Civilization binds them round.

Other animals are kept out. The hunted and prey are highly regulated. All areas of animal behavior alter to fit the circumstances as much as possible, and this includes sexual activity. This is why we can watch porno on You Tube movies.

fbve

It is not natural, then, for men to fight over women. This is a purely culturally, learned behavior. In terms of history as we understand it, the species could not withstand such misapplied energy, nor could it have withstood such constant antagonism.

Each species is involved in a cooperative venture, upon which ultimately all earthly existence rests. We project our present beliefs backward into history, and we misinterpret many of the conditions that we observe in the natural world. This cooperation that I speak of is based on love, and that love has a biological as well as a spiritual basis. Our beliefs, for example, cause us to deny the existence of emotions in animals, and any instances of love among them are assigned to “blind” instinct. Some people hold these beliefs so close, that they apply it to themselves without even realizing they are doing so, for example, a man that often goes out trying to find different sexual partners every night, is technically denying their emotional capacity and looking for instant gratifications from their instincts to procreate when aroused. This might also be the case for those that instead view pornographic content from pages such as “Watch My Girlfriend” and others. Without emotion, sex has two important results, procreation, and pleasure, the thing is, we are not emotionless beings.

blind

To some extent the churches as well as the scientists are responsible, but priests and scientists are not some foreign people, thrust upon us. They represent various aspects of ourselves. The species developed its own kind of consciousness, as it found it necessary to isolate itself to some degree from its environment and the other creatures within it. As a result, the religions preached that only man has a soul and was dignified by emotional feelings. In its way science went along very nicely by postulating man in a mechanistic world, with each creature run by an impeccable machine of instinct, blind alike to pain or desire.

The love and cooperation that forms the basis of all life, however, shows itself in many ways. Sexuality represents one aspect, and an important one. In larger terms, it is natural for a man to love a man, and for a woman to love a woman, as it is to show love for the opposite sex. There is nothing wrong with expressing this love with the help of an escort guide. For that matter, it is more natural to be bisexual. Such is the “natural” nature of the species.

bbb

Instead, we have put love into very definite categories, so that its existence is right only under the most limited conditions. Love goes underground, but springs up in distorted forms and exaggerated tendencies. We have followed this course for different reasons at different times. Neither sex is to blame. Instead our sexual situation is simply another reflection of the state of our consciousness. As a species, presently at least in the Western world, we equate sex and love. We imagiune that sexaul expression is the only one natural to love. Love, in other words, must it seems express itself exclusively through the exploration, in one way or another, of the beloved’s sexual portions. So is that to say if you look behind, the official source of hot clips and videos you will see the adult actors and actresses fall in love when they find themselves on set for hours and hours pounding away at each other? No… Obviously not, so why is this a social construct.

ik87kk

This is hardly the only limitation placed upon Love’s expression, however. There are innumerable books written with instructions each proclaiming the said methods to be the proper ones. Certain kinds of orgasms are “the best.” Love’s expression is furthermore permitted only between members of the opposite sex. Generally speaking, these individuals must be more or less of the same age. There are other Taboos, involving racial restrictions, or cultural, social, and economic ones. If this were not enough, large segments of the population believe that sex is wrong to begin with– a spiritual debasement, allowed by God only so that the species can continue.

Since love and sex are equated, obvious conflicts arise. Mother love is the only category that is considered wholesome, and therefore nonsexual under most conditions. A father can feel very guilty about his love for his children, for he has been conditioned to believe that love is expressed only through sex, or else it is unmanly, while sex with one’s children is taboo.

mmy6h6h

Creativity rides the tides of love. When love is denied its natural expression, creativity suffers. Your belief lead you to suppose that a natural bisexuality would result in the death of the family, the destruction of morals, rampant sexual crimes, and the loss of sexual identity. I would say , however, that my last sentence, adequately describes our present situation. The acceptance of the species’ natural bisexuality would ultimately help solve not only those problems but many others, including the large instances of violence, and acts of murder. In our terms, however, and in our circumstances, there is not apt to be any easy transition.

w22246

The parent-child relationship has its own unique emotional structure, which survives even those distortions we have placed upon it, and its ancient integrity would not be weakened, but strengthened, if greater stress were laid upon our bisexual nature.

w554

Children would are far better if the ancient parental qualities were not so forcibly focused upon the mother. This in itself leads to more dependence upon the mother than is healthy, and forms an artificial allegiance between mother and child against the father.

Our beliefs about sex and our experience with it, makes us consider it in a limiting light

The psyche’s own knowledge, or course, is far more expansive. Alterations of consciousness, or attempts on the part of the individual to explore the inner self, may then easily display glimpses of a kind of sexuality that can appear to be deviant or unnatural.

Even when social scientists or biologists explore human sexuality, they do so from the framework of sexuality as it appears in our world. There are quite natural sexual variations, even involving reproduction, that are not now apparent in human behavior in any culture. Be it with people looking for sex or for more direct relations, these variations appear in our world on only fairly microscopic levels, or in the behavior of other species than our own.

s46jwj

When racial conditions require it, it is quite possible for an individual to both father and mother a child. In such cases, what you would call complete spontaneous sexual reverse or transformation would occur. Such processes are quite possible at microscopic levels, and inherent in the cellular structure. Even in our world, currently speaking, some individuals known as women could father their own children.

Some individuals known as men could give birth to a child fathered by the same person — could. The abilities are there.

aee2e2

The male-female, female orientation is not nearly as separate as it appears to be in our present experience. It is not nearly as tied to psychological characteristics as we suppose. Nor is it inherently focused in the particular age period in which it now shows itself. Puberty arrives, so to speak, but the time of its arrival varies according to the needs of the species, its conditions and beliefs. We are an individual for life. We operate as a reproducing individual, generally speaking, for only a portions of the time.

During that period, many elements come into play and are meant to make the process attractive to the individuals involved, and to their tribes, societies, or civilizations. A relatively strong “Sexual” identification is important under those circumstances — but an over-identification with them, before or afterward, can lead to stereotyped behavior, in which the greater needs and abilities of the individual are not allowed fulfillment.

t35h

All of this becomes very complicated because of our value judgements, which oftentimes seem to lack, all natural common sense. We cannot separate biology from our own belief systems. The interplay is too vital. If each act of intercourse were meant to produce a child, we would have overrun the planet before we began. Sexual activity is therefore also meant as enjoyment, as an expression of pure exuberance. The sexual experience is found to be a right of passage, and attribute it to health. It is healthy to explore our sexual needs, both personally and with others. Personal sexual exploration is seen as empowering to some, a way of becoming enlightened within the self. The use of sexual toys and fantasies is seen as a healthy way of experiencing sex with the use of sex toys and sex-machines becoming popular. A woman will often feel her most sexually active in the midst of the menstrual period, precisely when conception is least apt to occur. All kinds of taboos against sexual relations have been applied here, particularly in so-called native cultures. In those cultures, such taboos make good sense. Such peoples,building up the human stock, intuitively knew that the population would be increased if relations were restricted to periods when conception was most likely to occur. The blood was an obvious sign that the woman at her period was relatively “barren.” Her abundance was gone. It seemed to their minds that she was indeed “cursed” during that time.

Ego-consciousness — which has its own unique rewards. That psychological orientation will,lead the species to another, equally unique kind of consciousness.

ifuiy

When the process began, however, the deep power of nature had to be “controlled” so that the growing consciousness could see itself as apart from this natural source. Yet children, so necessary to the species, continued to spring from women’s wombs. Therefore the natural was most flagrant, observable, and undeniable. For that reason the species– and not the male alone — placed so many taboos about female behavior and sexuality. In “subduing” it’s own female elements, the species tried to gain some psychological distance from the great natural source from which it was, for its own reasons, trying to emerge.

In the world of our present experience, sexual differences are less apparent as we reach old age. Some women display what we think of as masculine characteristics, growing hair about their faces, speaking with heavier voices, or becoming angular; while some men speak with lighter, gentler tomes than ever before, and their faces grow smoother, and the contours of their bodies soften.

mcghmcm

Before there is the same kind of seeming ambiguity. We stress the importance of sexual identification, for it seems to you that a young child must know that it will grow up to be a man or woman, in the most precise of terms– toeing the line in the least particular.

The slightest deviation is looked upon with dismay, so that personal identity and worth are completely tied into identification with femaleness or maleness. Completely different characteristics, abilities, and performances are expected from those in each category. A male who does not feel himself fully male, therefore, does not trust his identity as a person. A woman doubtful of her complete femininity in the same manner does not trust the integrity of her personhood.

A lesbian or homosexual is on very shifting psychological ground, because the same interests and abilities that they feel most personally theirs are precisely those that mark them as sexual eccentrics.

4

These are simple enough examples, but the man who possesses interests considered feminine by our culture, who naturally wants to enter fields of interest considered womanly, experience drastic conflicts between his sense of personhood and identity– and his sexuality as it is culturally defined. The same, of course, applies to women.

Because of our exaggerated focus, we therefore become relatively blind to other aspects of “sexuality.” First of all, sexuality per se does not necessarily lead to intercourse. It can lead to acts that do not produce children. What we think of as lesbian or homosexual activity is quite natural sexual expression, biologically and psychologically, whether it be using a wide range of dildos or be without any other devices involved. In more “ideal” environments such activity would flourish to some extent, particularly before and after prime reproductive years.

sex

For those literal-minded , this does mean that such activity would predominate at such times. It does mean that not all sexual activity that can be seen on websites such as XXX Tube is meant to end in childbirth– which is a biological impossibility, and would represent planetary catastrophe. So the species is blessed, with many avenues for sexual expression. The strong focus that now predominates does inhibit the formation of certain kinds of friendships that would not necessarily at all result in seuxal activity.

Lesbiansim and homosexuality, as they are currently experienced, also represent exaggerated versions of natural inclinations, even as our epxeirenced version of hetersexuality is exaggerated.

THE CAVEMAN AND THE CAVEWOMAN had Far Less Sexual Specialization,Than now.

The family was a very cooperative unit. The basis of early society was cooperation, not competition. Familie grouped together. There were children of various ages in such a band all the time. When women were near birth, they performed those chores that could be done in the cave dwellings, or nearby, and also watched other young children; while the women who were not pregnant were off with the males, hunting or gathering food.

wgw

If a mother died, the father took over her responsibilities, the qualities of love and affection being quite as alive in him as in the female. After a woman bore, she nursed the child, taking it with her on food-gathering excursions, or sometimes letting other women in the group nurse the child. Often after childbirth, women immediately joined the hunting expeditions, and the fathers made clothing from animals’ hides at home. This allowed the male to rest after prolonged hunting activity, and meant that no adult , member of a family became over-exhausted. The work, then interchangeable.

2jjjjk

Children began food gathering and hunting as soon as they were able to– females as well as males– Led by the older children, going farther away as they progressed in strength. Qualities of inventiveness, curiosity, ingenuity, could not be delegated to one sex alone. The species could not have survived such a division.

,f,

We are so used to thinking in terms of mechanics, that it seems to us that uneducated people did not understand the connection between the sexual act of intercourse and childbirth. We are so used to one kind of explanation for childbirth, so familiar with one specific framework, that alternate explanations appear to be the height of nonsense. So it is fashionable to believe that early ,and did not understand the connection between intercourse and birth.

yyteh

Even the animals, however, understand without words or language the importance of their sexual behavior. Early man was hardly more ignorant. The male knew what he was doing even without textbooks that outlined the entire procedure. The female understood the connection between the child born and the sexual act.

e88l

It is the height of idiocy to imagine that because of the time taken in pregnancy, the female could not understand the child’s origin in intercourse. The body’s knowledge did not need a complicated language. For the matter, we literal interpretation of childbirth is by some standards a highly limited one. In our terms, it is technically correct.

arh6

But a child born to two parents is also an offspring of the earth, its tissues as surely a part of earth as any tree or flower, or burst of ocean spray. A human child, true; but an offspring in which the entire history of the earth is involved– a new creation arising not just from two parents, but from the entire gestalt of nature, from which the parents themselves once emerged; a private yet public affair in which the physical elements of earth become individualized; in which psyche and earth cooperate in a birth that is human, and in other terms, divine.

2edfc

Now: Historically speaking, early man in his way understood those connections far better than we do, and used language as he developed it to express first of all this miracle of birth. For he saw that he constantly replenished his kind, and that all other species were replenished in the same manner.

mu

There was always more land. No matter how fast he ran or how far he traveled, early man could not run out of land, or trees, or forests, or food supplies. If he came to a desert, he still knew that fertile lands were somewhere available, even if it was a matter of finding them. But the world itself seemed to have no end. It was literally a limitless world in a way most difficult for us to understand; for to us, the world has shrunk.

synu

This unlimited world constantly replenished itself. Children came from women’s wombs. Man was acquainted with death, and many children were stillborn, or were naturally aborted. This also, however, was in the natural order of things, and was done far more easily then than now. Then again humankind engage in sexual activities without the desire to recreate a lot easier now too, as seen on similar porn sites. All flower seeds do not fall on fertile ground and bring forth other flowers. The seeds that do not grow go [back] into the ground, forming the basis for other life.

8f8kk

Only those children perfectly attuned to their environment in time and space survived. This does not mean that the consciousness of a child was annihilated, for example, if it was naturally aborted, it did not develop.

dfrfw

While there was no mating period, still there was a close biological relationship between the species and the earth, so that women naturally conceived when situations of climate, food supplies, and other elements were beneficial.

33dseu46u

Biologically, the species knew ahead of time when droughts would appear, for example, and it automatically altered its rate of conception to compensate. Left alone, animals species do the same thing. In broad terms, early man was struck by the fact that all things seemed to reproduce themselves, and it was this fact that first caught his attention. Later he used what we think of as myths to explain this abundance. Yet those myths contained a kind of knowledge that escapes our literal, specific interpretations of sexual events. Such knowledge resides in the psyche, however. If we have any direct experience with our own psyche, then we will most likely find ourselves encountering some kind of events that will not easily fit with our own ideas about our sexual nature.

The him and The Her

Distorted ideas about sexaulity prevent many people from attaining any close connection with the inner experience that continually stirs beneath ordinary consciousness. It is a good idea, then, to look at the psyche and its relationship to sexual identity.

The psyche is not male or female. In our system of beliefs, however, it is often identified as feminine, along with the artistic productions that emerge from its creativity. In that context, the day hours and waking consciousness are thought of as masculine, along with the sun– while the nighttime, the moon, and the dreaming consciousness are considered feminine or passive. In the same manner, aggression is usually understood to be violent assertive action, male-oriented, while female elements are identified in terms of the nurturing principle.

wwww65w5

Physically speaking, we would have no males or females unless first we had individuals. We are each individuals first of all, then. After this, we are individuals of a specific sex, biologically speaking. The particular kind of focus that we have is responsible for the great significance we place upon male and female. Our hand and our foot have different functions. If we wanted to focus upon the differences in their behavior, we could build an entire culture based upon their diverse capabilities, functions and characteristics. Hands and feet are obviously equipment belonging to both sexes, however. Still, on another level the analogy is quite valid

The psyche is male and female, female and male; but when I say this I realize that we put our own definition upon those terms to begin with.

wynwy

Biologically, the sexual orientation is the method chosen for continuation of the species. Otherwise, however, no specific psychological characteristics of any kind are attached to that biological functioning. In our experience definite physical and psychological differences do exist. Those that do are the result of programming, and are not inherent– even biologically– in the species itself.

The validity of the species in fact was assured because it did not overspecialize in terms of sexuality. There was no fixed mating period, for example. Instead, the species could reproduce freely so that in the event of a catastrophe of any kind, it would not be so tied into rigid patterns that it might result in extinction.

w24r

The challenges and problems of the species were different from those of others. It needed additional safeguards. People may express their sexuality in more than one way – with themselves (using toys such as Realistic Sex Dolls or vibrators) and with another human. With this came a greater diversity in individual characteristics and behavior, so that no individual was bound to a strictly biological role. If that were true, the species never would have been concerned beyond the issues of physical survival, and such is not the case. The species could have survived quite well physically without philosophy, the arts, politics, religion, or even structured language. It could have followed completely different paths, those tied strictly to biological orientation.

There would have been no question of men performing so-called feminine tasks, or of women performing so-called masculine tasks, for there no leeway for that kind of individual action would have existed.

URIKYLR

For the matter, there is far greater leeway in the behavior of animals than we understand, for we interpret animal’s behavior according to our own beliefs. We interpret the past history of our species in the same manner. It seems to us that the female always tended to the offspring, for example, nursing them, that she was forced to remain close to home while the male fought off enemies or hunted for food. The ranging male, therefore, appears to have been much more curious and aggressive. There was instead a different kind of situation. Children do not come in litters. The family of the caveman was a far more “democratic” group that we suppose– men and women working side by side, children learning to hunt with both parents, women stopping to nurse a child along the way, the species standing apart from others because it was not ritualized in sexual behavior.

Except for the fact that males could not bear children, the abilities of the sexes were interchangeable. The male was usually heavier, a handy physical advantage in some areas– but the woman was lighter and could run faster.

d5tdc

Women were also somewhat lighter because they would bear the additional weight of a child. Even then, of course, there were variances, for many women are larger than smaller men. But the women could hunt as well as the men. If compassion, kindness, and gentleness were feminine characteristics only, then no male could be kind or compassionate because such feelings would not be biologically possible.

If our individuality was programmed by our biological sex, then it would be literally impossible for us to perform any action that was not sexually programmed. A woman cannot father a child, nor can a male bear one. Since we are otherwise free to perform other kinds of activity that we think of as sexually oriented, in those areas the orientation is cultural.

fi7j

We imagine, however, that the male is aggressive, active, logical-minded, inventive, outwardly oriented, a builder of civilizations. We identify the ego as, male. The unconscious therefore seems to be female, and the feminine characteristics are usually given as passive, intuitive, nurturing, creative, uninventive, concerned with preserving the status quo, disliking change. At the same time, we consider the intuitive elements rather frightening, as if they can explode to disrupt known patterns, dash– in unknown ways.

fii,

Males who are creatively gifted find themselves in some dilemma, for their rich, sensed creativity comes into direct conflict with their ideas of virility. Women who possess characteristics that are thought to be masculine have the same problem on the other side.

wwwww675j

In our terms the psyche is a repository of characteristics that operate in union, composed of male and female elements. The human psyche contains such patterns that can be put together in multitudinous ways. We have categorized human abilities so that it seems that we are men or women, or women and men primarily, and persons secondarily. Our personhood exists first, however. Our individuality gives meaning to our sex, and not the other way around.

The View From Above

Some time as you walk down a street, pretend that you are seeing the same scene from the sky in an airplane, yourself included. On another occasion, as you sit inside your house imagine that you are outside on the lawn or street. All of these exercises should be followed by a return to the present: We focus our attention outward in the present moments as clearly as possible, letting the sounds and sights of the physical situation come into our attention.

vrf

The exercises, will in fact, result in a clearer picture of the world, for they will facilitate the very motion of our perceptions, allowing us to perceive nuances in the physical situation that before would have escaped our notice. We will be dealing with practical direct experience. It will do us no good if we are simply intellectually aware, but practically ignorant. Therefore the exercises will be important because they will offer us evidence of our own greater perceptive abilities.

vbnfn

Continue to rely upon known channels of information, but implement these and begin to explore the unrecognized ones also available. What information do we have, for example, presently unknown to ourselves? Try your hand at predicting future events. In the beginning, it does not matter whether or not your predictions are “true.” We will be stretching your consciousness into areas usually unused. Do not put any great stake in your predictions, for it you do you will be very disappointed if they do not work out, and end the entire procedure.

vsvw4

If you continue, you will indeed discover that you are aware of some future events, when such knowledge is not available in usual terms. If you persist, then over a period of time you will discover that you do very well in certain areas, while in others you may fail miserably. There will be associative patterns that you follow successfully, leading toward “correct” precognitions. You will also discover that the emotions are highly involved in such procedures: You will perceive information that is significant to you for some reason. That significance will act like a magnet, attracting those data to you.

vr53

Now, in the normal course of events we attract experience in the same fashion. We anticipate events. We are aware of them before they happen, whether or not we ever succeed in conscious, predictions. We form our life, however, though the intimate inter-workings of our own conscious goals and beliefs.

vervr

While our future can on occasion be correctly perceived ahead of time by a gifted psychic, the future is too plastic for any kind of systematized framework. Free will is always involved. Yet many people are frightened of remembering dreams because they fear that a dream of disaster will necessarily be followed by such an event. The mobility of consciousness provides far greater freedom. In fact, such a dream can instead be used to circumnavigate such a probability.

vrvv

Only if we understand our own freedom in such areas will we allow ourselves to explore alternate states of consciousness, or the environment of dreams. Such exercises are not to be used to supersede the world we know, but to supplement it, to complete it, and to allow us to perceive its true dimensions.

veek

There is no need to divorce the waking and dreaming states in the particular fashion that currently operates– for they are complementary states, not opposite ones. A good deal of life’s normal dimensions are dependent upon our dream experience. Our entire familiarity with the world of symbols arises directly from the dreaming self.

In certain terms, language itself has its roots in the dreaming condition– and man/woman dreamed [that] he/she spoke long before language was born.

v

He/she dreamed of flying, and that impetus led to the physical inventions that made mechanical flight possible. I am not speaking symbolically here, but quite literally. The self is not confined to the body. This means that the consciousness has other methods of perceiving information, that even in physical life experience is not confined to what is sensed in usual terms. This remains fine theory, however, unless we allow ourselves enough freedom to experiment with other modes of perception.

Awake While Asleep

Suggest that instead as we falling to asleep, we will come into another kind of wakefulness. Try to imagine that you are awake when you sleep. On other occasions when we go to bed, lie down and settle yourself, but as you fall asleep imagine that you are awakening the next morning. I will not tell you what to look for. The doing of this exercise is important– not the results in usual terms.

a6th

There are different kinds of knowledge; so will this exercise bring us in contact with knowledge in another way. Done over a period of time, they will open up alternate modes of perception, so that we can view our experience from more than one standpoint. This means that our experience will itself change in quality. Sometimes when you are awake, and it is convenient, imagine that your present experience of the moment is a dream, and is highly symbolic. Then try to interpret it as such.

d8l8l

Who are the people? What do they represent? If that experience were a dream, what would it mean? And into what kind of waking life would you rise in the morning?

yjyj

The qualities of consciousness cannot be elucidated. This exercise will bring us in contact with other kinds of knowing, and acquaint us with different feelings of consciousness that are not familiar. Our consciousness itself will then have a different feel as the exercise is done. Certain questions that we may have asked may be answered in such a state, but not in ways that we can anticipate, nor can we necessarily translate the answers into known terms. The different modes of consciousness with which I hope to acquaint you are not alien, however. They are quite native, again, in dream states, and are always present as alternatives beneath usual awareness.

asw4554545

Certain aspects of Christianity were stressed over others

That dictum wa based upon the belief in a wicked self that needed to be disciplined and diverted into constructive activity. The belief in such an unsavory self stops many people from any exploration of the inner self– and, therefore, from any direct experience that will give them counter-evidence. If we are afraid of ourselves, if we are afraid of our own memories, we will block our associative processes, fearing for example that they will bring to light matters best forgotten– and usually sexual matters.

ifuiy

Sexuality is the only strong area of energy with which some people are connected, so it becomes the focus point for all of their beliefs about the self in general. In doing some of these exercises, we might come across images of masturbation, homosexual or lesbian encounters, or simply old sexual fantasies, and immediately backtrack because our beliefs may tell that these are evil.

In reality, however, is that society has moved on from shaming those who are open with intimacy and sex. It’s now more widely accepted. We don’t avoid conversations about sex, thousands of people own a remy lacroix pussy, there are loads of jokes about sex and self-pleasure in pop culture, there has been a rise of hookup apps like Tinder. Unfortunately, some people still feel shame for exploring this part of themselves despite not hurting themselves or others in the process.

d42d2

We will not remember, or want to remember, our own dreams for the same reason. Many people, therefore, tell themselves that they are very impatient to discover the nature and event of the psyche, and cannot understand why they meet with so little success. At the same time, such beliefs convince them that the self is evil. These beliefs must be weeded out. If we cannot honestly encounter the dimensions of our creaturehood, we surely cannot explore the greater dimensions of the psyche. This blocking of association, however, is a very important element that impedes many people. The psyche’s organizations are broader, and in their way more rational than most of our conscious beliefs about the self.

tet45t

Many individuals are afraid that they will be swept away by inner explorations, that insanity will overtake them, when instead the physical stance of the body and personality is firmly rooted in these alternate organizations. There is nothing wrong with the conscious mind. We have simply put a lid on it, allowing it to be only so conscious, and no more. We have said: “Here it is safe to be conscious, and here it is not.

i,

Many of us believe that it is safe to make a nuclear bomb, but that it is insane to use our dreams as another method of manipulating daily life; or that it is all right to be consciously aware of our viruses, wars, and disasters, but that it is not all right to be consciously aware of other portions of the self that could solve such problems.

uyldlf

The idea, then, is not to annihilate normal consciousness, but quite literally to expand it by bringing into its focus other levels of reality that is can indeed intrinsically perceive and utilize.

.guv.

Some exercises will necessitate variations of normal consciousness. Sometimes we may need to forget physical stimuli, or to amplify them, but nowhere stating that our mode of consciousness is wrong. It is limited, not by nature, but by our own beliefs and practice. We have not carried it far enough.

We experience ourselves in a certain way Topside

In order to take advantage of information at other levels of awareness, we must learn to experience those other organizational systems with which we are usually unfamiliar.

de32

Often the seeming meaningless of dreams is the result of our own ignorance of dream symbolism and organizational. For example: We may also misinterpret “revelatory” material because we try to structure it in reference to our ordinary conscious organizations. Many valuable and quite practical insights that could be utilized go astray, therefore. I am going to suggest, then, some simple exercises that will allow us to directly experience the “feel of our being” in a different way.

ie5

First of all, the various kinds of organizations used by the psyche can be compared at one level, at least, with different arts. Music is not better than the visual arts, for example. A sculpture, cannot be compared with a musical note. I am not saying, then, that one mode of organization is better than another. We have simply specialized in one of many arts of consciousness, and that one can be vastly enriched by knowledge and practice of the others.

First of all, these organization do not deal primarily with time at all, but with the emotions and associative processes. When we understand how our own associations work, then we will be in much better position to interpret our own dreams, for example, and finally to make as art of them.

butj7

There are several approaches to these exercises. The idea will be to experience emotions and events as much as possible outside of time sequences.

yrk

Cellular comprehension deals with probabilities and encompasses future and past, so at that level of activity time as we understand it does not exist. We are not consciously aware of such data, however. The psyche– at the other end of the scale, so to speak– is also free of time. Often, however, our own stream of consciousness leads us to think of events outside of their usual order. We may receive a letter from our Aunt Bessie, for example. In a matter of moments it may trigger us to think of events in out childhood, so that many mental images fly through our mind. We might wonder if our aunt will take an anticipated journey to Europe next year, and that thought might give birth to images of an imagined future. All of these thoughts and images will be colored by the emotions that are connected to the letter, and to all of the events with which we and or aunt have been involved.

t56k

I. The next time you find yourself in the middle of a like experience, with associations flowing freely, then become more area of what you’re doing. Try to sense the mobility involved. You will see that the events will not necessarily be structured according to usual time, but according to emotional content.

Thoughts of your own next birthday, for instance, may instantly lead you to think of past ones, or a series of birthday pictures may come to mind of your own twelfth birthday, your third, your seventh, in an order uniquely your own. That order will be determined by emotional associations– he same kind followed by the dreaming self.

jhnsy

What did you wear to work three days ago? What did you have for breakfast a week ago? Who sat next to you in kindergarten? What frightened you last? Are you afraid of sleep? Did your parents beat you? What did you do just after lunch yesterday? What color shoes did you wear three days ago? You remember only significant event or details. Your emotions trigger your memories, and they organize your associations. Your emotions are generated through your beliefs. They attach themselves so that certain beliefs and emotions seem almost synonymous.

tew

II. The next time an opportunity arises, and you recognize the presence of a fairly strong emotion in yourself, then let your association’s flow. Events and images will spring to mind in an out-of-time context. Some such remembered events will make sense to you. You will clearly see the connection between the emotion and event, but others will not be so obvious. Experience the events as clearly as you can. When you are finished, purposefully alter the sequence. Remember an event, and then follow it with the memory of one that actually came earlier. Pretend that the future one came before the past one.

tregh5

III. Now for another exercise. Imagine a very large painting, in which the most important events of your life are clearly depicted. First of all, see them as a series of scenes, arranged in small squares, to be viewed as you would, say, a comic-book page. The events must be of significance to you. If school graduation meant nothing, for example, do not paint it in. And, if it did mean something to you, then you can imagine yourself and your friends wearing your customized letterman jackets, holding the graduation frame, your parents cheering for you, and so on. Have the pictures begin at the upper left-hand corner, ending finally at the lower right-hand corner. Then completely switch the sequence, so that the earliest events are at the lower right-hand corner.

b68j

When you have done this, ask yourself which scene evokes the strongest emotional response. Tell yourself that it will become larger and larger, then mentally watch its size change. Certain dynamics are involved here, so that such a scene will also attract elements from other scenes. Allow those other scenes to break up, then. The main picture will attract elements from all of the others, until you end up with an entirely different picture– one made up of many of the smaller scenes, but united in an entirely new fashion. You must do this exercise, however, for simply reading about it will not give you the experience that comes from the actual exercise. Do it many times.

yujmfm

IV. Now: Consciously construct a dream. Tell yourself you are going to do so, and begin with the first thought or image that comes to mind. When you are finished with your daydream, then use free association to interpret it to yourself.

Some of us will meet with some resistance in these exercises. We will enjoy reading about them, but we will find all kind of excuses that prevent us from trying them ourselves. If we are honest, many of us will sense a reluctance, for certain qualities of consciousness are brought into play that run counter our usual conscious experience.

,fj

You might feel as if you are crossing your wires, so to speak, or stretching vaguely sensed psychic muscles. The purpose is not so much the perfect execution of such exercises as it is to involve us in a different mode of experience and of awareness that comes into being as we perform in the ways suggested. We have been taught not to mix, say, waking and dreaming conditions, not to daydream. We have been taught to focus all our attention clearly, ambitiously, energetically in a particular way– so daydreaming, or mixing and matching modes of consciousness, appears passive in a derogatory fashion, or inactive, or idle. “The devil finds work for idle hands”– an old Christian dictum.

 

We express very little of our entire personhood

This remark has nothing to do with our accepted concepts of the unconscious portions of the self. Our idea of the unconscious are so linked to our limited ideas of personhood as to be meaningless in this discussion. It is as if we used only one finger of one hand, and then said: “This is the proper expression of my personhood.” It is not just that there are other functions of the mind, unused, but that in those terms we have other minds. We have one brain, it is true, but we allow it to use only one station, or to identify itself only one mind of many.

848

It seems evident to us that one person has one mind. We identify with the mind we use. If we had another, then it would seem as if we must be someone else. A mind is a psychic pattern through which we interpret and form reality. We have physical limbs that we can see. We have minds that are invisible. Each one can organize reality in a different fashion. Each one deals with its own kind of knowledge.

bjryj46

These minds all work together to keep us alive through the physical structure of the brain. When we use all of these minds, then and only then do we become fully aware of our surroundings. We perceive reality more clearly than we do now, more sharply, brilliantly, and concisely. At the same time, however, we comprehend it directly. We comprehend what it is apart from our physical perception of it. We accept as ourselves those other states of consciousness native to our other minds. We achieve true personhood.

ooo8

In terms of history, some ancient races achieved such goals, but in our terms, so long ago that we cannot find evidence of their knowledge.

Through the centuries various individuals have come close, yet had no vehicle of expression that would have enabled the members of the species to understand. They possessed ,methods, but the methods presupposed or necessitated a knowledge the others did not possess.

tw4t

The dream and painting, are aspects of another kind of perception. A nonverbal comprehension that will, on another level, reorganize some of our beliefs. We can accelerate mentally to a certain degree, and find an additional energy source. Activate certain portions of the brain that connect it to another mind, that people do not as yet realize they possess.

The Other Ways Of Receiving Information Than Those We Take For Granted

There are other kinds of knowledge. These deal with organizations with which we are generally not familiar. It is not merely a matter of learning new methods to acquire knowledge, then, but a situation in which old methods must be momentarily set aside– along with the type of knowledge that is associated with them.

trannn

It is not a matter, either, of there simply being one other category of knowledge, for there are numerous other such categories, many of them biologically within our reach. Various so-called esoteric traditions provide certain methods that allow an individual to set aside accepted modes of perception, and offer patterns that may be used as containers for these other kinds of knowledge. Even these containers must necessarily shape the information received, however. Some such methods are very advantageous, yet they have also become too rigid and autocratic, allowing little room for deviation. Dogmas are then set up about them so that only a certain body of data is considered acceptable. The systems no longer have the flexibility that first gave them birth.

trw4ty

The kind of knowledge upon which we depend needs verbalization. It is very difficult for us to consider the accumulation of any kind of knowledge without the use of language as we understand it. Even our remembered dreams are often verbalized constructs. We may also use images, but these are familiar images, born of the educated and hence prejudiced perceptions. Those remembered dreams have meaning and are very valuable, but they are already organized for us to some extent, and out into a shape that we can somewhat recognize.

5tehh

Beneath those levels, however, we comprehend events in an entirely different fashion. These whole comprehensions are then packaged even in the dream state, and translated into unusual sense terms.

tr5yt34

Any information or knowledge must have a pattern if we are going to understand it at all. Information has nothing to do with words but an overall comprehension of the nature of, a direct knowing. Use one’s own abilities as a container. This direct kind of knowledge is available through desire, love, intent or belief.

tykj7k

Many kind of knowledge. Think of them as states of knowledge. Perception of any of these takes a consciousness attuned to each. In our “waking” condition. We can operate at many levels of consciousness at once, and deal therefore with different systems of knowledge. In our “dream” condition, or rather conditions, we form links of consciousness that combine these various systems, creatively forming them into new versions. “Waking” again, we become consciously aware of those activities, and use them to add to the dimensions of our usual state, creatively expanding our experience of reality. What we learn is transmitted automatically to others like us, and their knowledge is transmitted to us.

terg3

We are each consciously aware of these transmissions. In the terms usually familiar to us, we think of “the conscious mind.” In those terms, there are many conscious minds. We are so prejudiced, however, that we ignore information that we have been taught cannot be conscious. All of our experience, therefore, is organized according to our beliefs.

tergr

It is much more natural to remember our dreams than not to remember them. It is presently in the vogue to say that the conscious mind, as we consider it, deals with survival. It deals with survival only insofar as it promotes survival in our particular kind of society. In those terms, if we remembered our dreams, and if we benefited consciously from the knowledge, even our physical survival would be better assured.

te5t5

One level of dream life deals particularly with biological condition of the body, giving us not just hints of health difficulties, but the reasons for them and the ways to circumvent them. Information about the probable future is also given to help us make conscious choices. We have taught ourselves that we cannot be conscious in our dreams, whoever, because we interpret the word “conscious” so that it indicates only our own prejudiced concept. As a result, we do not have any culturally acceptable patterns that allow us to use our dreams competently.

ign

Trance states, daydreaming, hypnotism — these give us some hint of the various differences that can occur from the standpoint of waking consciousness. In each, reality appears in another fashion, and for that matter, different rules apply. In the dream state far greater variations occur. They key to the dream state, however, lies in the waking one as far as we are concerned. We must change our ideas about dreaming, alter our concepts about it, before we can begin to explore it. Otherwise our own waking prejudice will close the door.

We Are Born With The Inclination Towards Language

Language is implied in our physical structure. We are born with the inclination to learn and to explore. When we are conceived, there is already a complete pattern for our own physical body — a pattern that is definite enough to give us the recognizable kind of adult form, while variable enough to allow for literally infinite variations.

brhr

It would be idiotic of us to say that we were forced to become an adult, however. For one thing, at any given time we could end the process — and many do. In other words, because the pattern for development exists in our terms, this does not mean that each such development is not unique.

gxd

In our terms again, then, at any one earth time many such patterns exist. In greater respects however, all time is simultaneous, and so all such physical patterns exist at once.

In the psychic areas all patterns for knowledge, cultures, civilizations, personal and mass accomplishments, sciences, religions, technologies and arts, exist in the same fashion.

frwf

The private psyche, the part of us that we do not recognize, is aware of those patterns even as it is aware of private physical biological patterns about which it forms our image. Certain leanings, inclinations, and probabilities are present then in our biological structure, to be triggered or not according to our purposes and intents. We may personally have the ability to be a fine athlete, for example. Yet our inclinations and intents may carry us in a different direction, so that the necessary triggers are not activated. Each individual is gifted in a variety of ways. His or her own desires and beliefs activate certain abilities and ignore others.

LTFMCNX

The human species has built into it all the knowledge, information, and “data” that it can possibly need under any and all conditions. This heritage must be triggered psychically, however, as a physical mechanism such as a music is triggered through desire or intent.

a3g

This does not mean that we learn what in larger terms we already know; as for example, if we learn a skill. Without the triggering desire, the skill would not be developed; but even when we do learn a skill, we use it in our own unique way. Still, the knowledge of mathematics and the arts is a much within us as our genes are within us. We usually believe that all such information must come from outside of our self, however. Certainly mathematics formulas are not imprinted in the brain, yet they are inherent in the structure of the brain, and implied within its existence. Our own focus determines the information that is available to us.

i

The information, however, is extremely valuable, and knowledge on any kind of subject is available in just such a manner– but it is attained through desire and through intent.

This does not mean that any person, spontaneously, with no instruction, can suddenly become a great artist or writer or scientist. Even becoming a proofreader requires huge amounts of study and dedication. Whether you work for a large corporation, or if you work from home on a freelance basis, you still need plenty of talent and a passion for words. It does mean, however, that the species possesses within itself those inclinations which will flower. It means also that we are limiting the range of our knowledge by not taking advantage of such methods. It does not mean that in our terms all knowledge already exists, either, for knowledge automatically becomes individualized as we receive it, and hence, new.

khjdm,c

Our desire automatically attracts the kind of information we require, though we may or may not be aware of it.

t35t3

If we are gifted, and want to be a musician, for example, then we may literally learn while we are asleep, tuning in to the world views of other musicians, both alive and dead in our terms. When we are awake, we will receive inner hints, nudges or inspirations. We may still need to practice, but our practice will be largely in joy, and will not take as long as it might others. The reception of such information facilitates skill, and operates basically outside of time’s sequences.

rw

It seems almost heresy to suppose that such knowledge is available, for then what use is education? Yet education should serve to introduce a student to as many fields of endeavor as possible, so that he or she might recognize those that serve as natural triggers, opening skills or furthering development. The student will, then pick and choose. There are, or course, probable futures from the standpoint of our past. Future information is theoretically available there, just as the body’s future pattern of development was at our birth– and that certainly was practical.

WE EXPERIENCE DIRECT KNOWLEDGE, When We are In Touch With Our Psyche.

Direct knowledge is comprehension. When we are dreaming, we are experiencing direct knowledge about ourselves of about the world. We are comprehending our own being in a different way. When we are reading a book, we are experiencing indirect knowledge that may or may not lead to comprehension. Comprehension itself exists whether or not we have words– or even thoughts– to express it. We may comprehend the meaning of a dream without understanding it at all in verbal terms. Our ordinary thoughts may falter, or slip and slide around our inner comprehension without ever really coming close to expressing it.

drwer234r

Dreams deal with associations and with emotional validities that often do not seem to make sense in the usual world. No one can really give you a definition of the psyche. It must be experienced. Since its activities, wisdom and perception rise largely from another kind of reference, then we must often learn to interpret our encounter with the psyche to our usual self. One of the largest difficulties here is the issue of organization. In regular life, we organize our experience very neatly and push it into accepted patterns or channels, into preconceived ideas and beliefs. We tailor it to fit time sequences. The psyche’s organization follows no such learned predisposition. Its products can often appear chaotic simply because they splash over our accepted ideas about what experience is.

dddfrfw

Hints, that would increase practical, spiritual, and physical enjoyment and fulfillment in daily life. Experiences of the psyche splash outward into daylight. We can see the greater dimensions that touch ordinary living, and sense the psyche’s magic. The psyche’s events are very difficult to pin down in time. Some events could hardly be so pinpointed, and indeed seem to have no beginning or end.

ed4dd

Because we tie our experience so directly to time, we rarely allow ourselves any experiences, except in dreams, that seem to defy it. The psyche must be directly experienced.

dtwe4t

Each of our experiences, however, demonstrates the ways in which the psyche’s direct experiences defy our prosaic concepts of time, reality. And the orderly sequence of events. They serve to point up the differences between knowledge and comprehension, and emphasize the importance of desire and of the emotions.

We organize our experience in terms of time

Our usual stream of consciousness is also highly associative, however. Certain events in the present will remind us if past ones, for example, and sometimes our memory of the past will color present events.

trer

Association or not, physically we will remember events in time, with present moments nealy following past ones. The psyche deals largely with associative processes, however, as it organizes events through association. Time as such has little meaning in that framework. Associations are tied together, so to speak, by emotional experience. In a large manner, the emotions defy time.

The Stamp of Identity

Any word, simply by being thought, written or spoken, immediately implies a specification. In our daily reality it is very handy to distinguish one thing from another by giving each item a name. When we are dealing with subjective experience, however, definitions can often serve to limit rather than express a given experience. Obviously the psyche is not a thing. It does not have a beginning or ending. It cannot be seen or touched in normal terms. It is useless, therefore, to attempt any description of it through usual vocabulary, for our language, primarily allows us to identify physical rather than nonphysical experience.

bbe

I am not saying that words cannot be used to describe the psyche, but they cannot define it. It is futile to question: “What is the difference between my psyche and my soul, my entity and my greater being?” for all of these are terms used in an effort to express the greater portions or our own experience that we sense within ourselves. Our use of language may make us impatient for definitions. The psyche’s reality escapes all definitions, defies all categorizing, and shoves aside with exuberant creativity all attempts to wrap it up in a neat package.

hmnsyts

When we begin a physical journey, we feel oneself distinct from the land through which we travel. No matter how far we journey–on a motorcycle, in a car or plane, or on foot, by bicycle or camel, or truck or vessel, still we are the wanderer, and the land or ocean or desert in the environment through which we roam. When we begin our travels into our own psyche, however, everything changes. We are also the vehicle and the environment. We form the roads, our method of travel, the hills or mountains or oceans, as well as the hills, farms, and villages of the self, or of the psyche, as we go along.

t5t35t5t

When in colonial times men and women traveled westward across the continent of North America, many of then took it on faith that the land did indeed continue beyond–for example–towering mountains. When we travel as pioneers through our own reality, we create each blade of grass, each inch of land, each sunset and sunrise, each oasis, friendly cabin or enemy encounter as we go along.

irm

Now if we are looking for simple definitions to explain the psyche, I will be of no help. If we want to experience the splendid creativity of our own being, however, then we can use methods that will arouse our greatest adventuresomeness, our boldest faith in oneself, and paint pictures of our psyche that will lead us to experience even its broadest reaches, if we so desire. The psyche, then, is not a known land. It is simply an alien land, to which or through which we can travel. It is not a completed or nearly complete subjective universe already there for us to explore. It is, instead, an ever-forming state of being, in which our present sense of existence resides. We create it and it creates us.

twt4

It creates in physical terms that we recognize. On the other hand, we create physical time for our psyche, for without us there would be no experience of the seasons, their coming and their passing.

b35668

There would be no experience of the privacy of the moment, so if one portion of our being wants to rise above the solitary march of the moments, other parts of our psyche rush, delighted, into that particular time-focus that is our own. As we now desire to understand the timeless, infinite dimensions of our own greater existence, so “even now” multitudinous elements of that unearthly identity just as eagerly explore the dimensions of earth-being and creaturehood.

dfcm

Imagine the odd effects that might occur if we tried to take our watch or other timepiece into other levels of reality. Now, when we try to interpret our selfhood in other kinds of existence, the same surprises or distortions or alterations can seem to occur. When we attempt to understand our psyche, and define it into terms of time, then it seems that the idea of reincarnation makes sense. We think “Of course. My psyche lives many lives physically, one after the other. If my present experience is dictated by that in my childhood, then surely; my current life is a result of earlier ones.” And so we try to define the psyche in terms of time, and in so doing limit our understanding and even our experience of it.

tll

Let us try another analogy: You are an artist in the throes of inspiration. There is before you a canvas, and you are working in all areas of it at once. In your terms each part of the canvas could be a time period–say, a given century. You are trying to keep some kind of overall balance and purpose in mind, so when you make one brushstroke in any particular portion of this canvas, all the relationships within the entire area can change. No brushstroke is ever really wiped out, however, in this mysterious canvas of our analogy, but remains, further altering all the relationships at its particular level.

aset

These magical brushstrokes, however, are not simple representations of a flat surface, but alive, carrying within themselves all of the artist’s intent, but focused through the characteristics of each individual stroke.

b356y

If the artist paints a doorway, all of the sensed perspectives within it open, and add further dimensions of reality. Since this is our analogy, we can stretch it as far as we like–far further than any artist could stretch his canvas. Therefore, there is no need to limit ourselves. The canvas itself can change size and shape as the artist works. The people in the artist’s painting are not simple representations either– to stare back at him with forever-fixed glassy eyes, or ostentatious smiles, dressed in their best Sunday clothes. Instead, they can confront the artist and talk back. They can turn sideways in the painting and look at their companions, observe their environment, and even look out of the dimensions of the painting itself and question the artist

bst

Now the psyche in our analogy is both the painting and the artist, for the artist finds that all of the elements within the painting are portions of himself. More, as he looks about, our artist discovers that he is literally surrounded by other paintings that he is also producing. As he looks closer, he discovers that there is a still-greater masterpiece in which he appears as an artist creating the very same paintings that he begins to recognize.

bkmy

Our artist then realizes that all of the people he painted are also painting their own pictures, and moving about in their own realities in a way that even he cannot perceive.

bgderee

In a flash of insight it occurs to him that he has been painted — that there is another artist behind him from whom his own creativity springs, and he also begins to look out of the frame.

The greater dimensions of our being

Step aside from all conventionalized doctrines, and to some extent or another we are impatient to examine and experience the natural flowing nature that is our birthright. That birthright has long been clothed in symbols and mythologies.

be43

Consciousness forms symbols. It is not the other way around. Symbols are great exuberant playthings. We can build with then as we can with children’s blocks. We can learn from them, as once we piled alphabet blocks together in a stack at school. Symbols are as natural to our minds as trees are to the earth. There is a difference, however, between a story told to children about forests, and a real child in a real woods. Both the story and the woods becomes involved in its life cycle, treads upon leaves that fell yesterday, rests beneath trees far older than his or her memory, and looks up at night to see a moon that will soon disappear. Looking at an illustration of the woods may give a child some excellent imaginative experiences, but they will be of a different kind, and the child knows the difference.

bul

If we mistake the symbols for the reality, however, we will program our experience, and we will insist that each forest look like the pictures in our book. In other words, we will expect our own experiences with various portions of our psyche to be more of less the same. We will take our local laws with us, and we will try to tell psychic time with a wristwatch.

b376ju

We will have to use some of our terms however, particularly in the beginning. Other terms with which we are familiar, we will squeeze out of all recognition. The reality of our own being cannot be defined by anyone but us, and then our own definition must be understood as a reference point at best. The psychologist, the priest, the physicist, the philosopher or the guru, can explain our own psyche to us only insofar as those specialists can forget that they are specialists, and deal directly with the private psyche from which all specializations come.

The Earth is composed of many environments, so is the Psyche

As there are different continents, islands, mountains, seas, and peninsulas, so the psyche takes various shapes. If we live in one country, we often consider natives in other areas of the world as foreigners, while of course they see us in the same light. In those terms, the psyche contains many other levels of reality. From our point of view these might appear alien, and yet they are as much a part of our psyche as our motherland is a portion of the earth.

t5t43t

Different countries follow different kinds of constitutions, and even within any geographical area there may be various local laws followed by the populace. For example, if we are driving a car we may discover to our chagrin that the local speed limit in one small town is miles slower than in another. In the same manner, different portions of the psyche exist with their own local “laws,” their different kinds of “government.” They each possess their own characteristic geography.

t64

If we are traveling around the world, we have to make frequent time adjustments. When we travel through the psyche, we will also discover that our own time is automatically squeezed out of shape. If for a moment we try to imagine that we were able to carry our own time with us on such a journey, all packaged neatly in a wrist-watch, then we would be quite amazed at what would happen.

t5

As we approached the boundaries of certain psychic lands, the wristwatch would run backwards. As we entered other kingdoms of the psyche our watch would go faster or slower. Now, if time suddenly ran backward we would notice it. If it ran faster or slower enough, we would also notice the difference. If time ran backward very slowly, and according to the conditions, we might not be aware of the difference, because it would take so much “time” to get from the present moment to the one “before” it that we might be struck, instead, simply with the feeling that something was familiar, as if it had happened before.

tulk

In other lands of the psyche, however, even stranger events might occur. The watch itself might change shape, or turn heavy as a rock, or as light as a gas, so that we could not read the time at all. Or the hands might never move. Different portions of the psyche are familiar with all of those mentioned occurrences–because the psyche straddles any of the local laws that we recognize as “official,” and has within itself the capacity to deal with an infinite number of reality-experiences.

tuuioglkj

Obviously our physical body has capacities that few of us use to full advantage. But beyond this the species itself possesses the possibilities for adaptations that allow it to exist and persist in the physical environment under drastically varying circumstances. Hidden within the corporal biological structure there are latent specializations that would allow the species to continue, and that take into consideration any of the planetary changes that might occur for whatever reasons.

t34t

The psyche however, while being earth-tuned in our experience, also has many other systems of reality “to contend with.” Each psyche, then, contains within it the potentials, abilities, and powers that are possible, or capable of actualization under any conditions.

ttjg

The psyche, our psyche, can record and experience time backward, forward, or sideways through systems of alternate presents, of it can maintain its own integrity in a no-time environment. The psyche is the creator of time complexes. Theoretically, the most fleeting moment of our day can be prolonged endlessly. This would not be a static elongation, however, but a vivid delving into that moment, from which all time as we think of it, past and future and all its probabilities, might emerge.

PSYCHE STRUCTURe

The earth has structure. In those terms so does the psyche. We live in one particular area on the face of our planet, and we can only see so much of it at any given time–yet we take it for granted that the ocean exists even when we cannot feel its spray or see the tides.

f

And even if we live in a desert, we take it on faith that there are indeed great cultivated fields and torrents of rain. It is true that some of our faith is based on knowledge. Others have traveled where we have not, and television provides us with images. Despite this, however, our senses present us with only a picture of our immediate environment, unless they are cultivated in certain particular manners that are relatively unusual.

idf

We take it for granted that the earth has a history. In those terms, our own psyche has a history also. We have taught ourselves to look outward into physical reality, but the inward validity of our being cannot be found there– only its effects. We can turn on television and see a drama, but the inward mobility and experience of our psyche is mysteriously enfolded within all of those exterior gestures that allow us to turn on the television switch to begin with, and to make sense of the images presented. So the motion of our own psyche usually escapes us.

iyu

Where is the television drama before it appears on our channel–and where does it go afterwards? How can it exist one moment and be finished the next, and yet be replayed when the conditions are correct? If we understood the mechanics, we would know that the program obviously does not go anywhere. It simply is, while the proper conditions activate it for our attention. In the same way, we are alive whether or not we are playing on an earth “program.” We are, whether we are in time or out or it. Getting in touch with our own being as it exists outside of the context in which we are used to viewing it.

iriur

As we dwell in one particular city or town or village, we presently “live” in one small area of the psyche’s inner planet. We identify that area as our home, as our “I.” Mankind has learned to explore the physical environment, but has barely begun the greater inner journeys that will be embarked upon as the inner lands of the psyche are joyously and bravely explored. In those terms, there is a land of the psyche. However, this virgin territory is the heritage of each individual, and no domain is quite like any other. Yet there is indeed an inner commerce that occurs, and as the exterior continents rise from the inner commerce that occurs, and as the exterior continents rise from the inner structure of the earth, so the lands of the psyche emerge from an even greater invisible source.

PSYCHE: Conscious and Unconscious

We come into the condition we call life, and pass out of it. In between birth and death, we wonder at the nature of our own being. We search our experience and study official histories of the past, hoping to find their clues as to the nature of our own reality.

pgo

Our life seems synonymous with our consciousness. Therefore it appears that our knowledge of oneself grows gradually, as our self-consciousness develops from our birth. It appears, furthermore, that our consciousness will meet a death beyond which our self-consciousness will not survive. We may think longingly and with an almost hopeful nostalgia of the religion of our childhood, and remember a system of belief that ensured us of immortality. Yet most of us, yearn for some private and intimate assurances, and seek for some inner certainty that our own individuality is not curtly dismissed at death. Each person knows intuitively that his or her own experience somehow matter, and that there is a meaning, however obscured, that connects the individual with a greater creative pattern. Each person senses now and then a private purpose, and yet many are filled with frustration because that inner goal is not consciously known or clearly apprehended.

pto

When we were children we knew we were growing toward an adulthood. We were sustained by the belief in projected abilities–that is, we took it for granted that we were in the process of learning and growing. No matter what happened to us, we lived in a kind of rarefied psychic air, in which our being was charged and glowing. We knew we were in a state of becoming. The world, in those terms, is also in a state of becoming.

p89t9l

In private life and on the world stage, action is occurring all the time. It is easy to look at oneself or at the world, to see oneself and become so hypnotized by our present state that all change or growth seems impossible, or to see the world in the same manner.

p55tto

We do not remember our birth, as a rule. Certainly is seems that we do not remember the birth of the world. We had a history, however, before our birth — even as it seems to us that the world had a history before we were born.

pul78l

The sciences still keep secrets from each other. The physical sciences pretend that the centuries exist one after the other, while the physicists realize that time is not only relative to the perceiver, but that all events are simultaneous. The archeologists merrily continue to date the remains of “past” civilizations, never asking themselves what the past means — or saying: “This is the past relative to my point or perception.”

a3232

Astronomers speak of outer space and of galaxies that would dwarf our own. In the world that we recognize there are also wars and rumors of wars, prophets of destruction. Yet in spite of all, the private man or the private woman, unknown, anonymous to the world at large, stubbornly feels within a rousing, determined affirmation that says: “I am important. I have a purpose, even though I do not understand what it is. “My life that seems so insignificant and inefficient, is nevertheless of prime importance in some way that I do not recognize.”

c.fu.o

Though caught up in life of seeming frustration, obsessed with family problems, uneasy in sickness, defeated it seems for all practical purposes, some portion of each individual rouses against all disasters, all discouragements, and now and then at least glimpses a sense of enduring validity that cannot be denied. It is to that knowing portion of each individual I Speak to.

Flight of Geese and their “New” home

The view of sky sweeping over the hill makes it much easier to see the great flights of geese heading south for the winter. Twice a week in the daytime, and once at night, large flocks have passed over. On each occasion, we can hear them inside the house, then rushed into the yard. The geese seem to be more numerous on cloudy days and clear nights.

mumd

One late-afternoon gaggle reached nearly from horizon to horizon, in three long and very noisy V-formations. And always, one bird led each V, with the two sides of the bird ‘lettering’ trailing back quite unevenly–wobbling, flexing, shifting. What free sociable claques, I thought. Amazing, the way their honking carried back to me. I watched the geese fly toward the hills on the far side of the valley; I could still hear them even when they’d become practically invisible.

miydmc

In its way the nighttime visitation was even more mysterious, for that time I looked up at a starlit but moonless sky that didn’t have a cloud in sight–and heard this multitudinous sound moving across it. The night was chilly. All of the qualities of the birds’ flight were heightened for me by its very invisibility, for while I actually saw no geese at all, that sound was everywhere. And what guided, innate knowledge–or what? And I knew that no objective reasoning processes alone could explain their magnificent flight.

mirk

Some how the twice-yearly, north-south migrations of the geese have become symbols for me of the known and unknown qualities of life–sublime and indecipherable at the same time, enduring yet fleeting, and almost outside of the range of human events. For me, those migrations have become portents of the seasons and of the earth itself as it swings around “our” sun in great rhythms. The one consciousness (mine) stands in its body on the ground and looks up at the strange variations of itself represented by the geese. And wonders. In their own ways, do the geese wonder also? What kind of hidden interchange between species take place at such times? If the question could be answered, would all of reality in its unending mystery lie revealed before us?

ESP: Is more developed or consciously available in some individuals than in others.

But so is a “gift” for music, or baseball or whatever. I find it difficult to believe that many millions of people must wait for a handful of their “superior” peers–philosophers, scientists, psychologists, parapsychologists–to tell them it’s all right to believe in at least a few of the inner abilities that each of us possesses, to whatever degree. Obviously, numerous individuals simply refuse to wait for the official light or recognition to shine forth.

esd65j

That wait could be a very long one. Who is to help initiate meaningful changes in our psychological and social orders? Surely many people feel the necessity to turn aside from the selected dogmas of our time. Our world present definitions of personality are so limited as the conventional meaning implied by the term ESP.

esgge

Science is “objective” enough in its own terms of serial time and measurement, as it claims to be, but that eventually it must choose to look inward as thoroughly as it does outward. To me, much of the turmoil in the world results from our steadfast refusal to accept a major portion of our natural heritage. We project our inner knowledge “outward” in distorted fashion; thus on a global scale we thrash about with our problems of war, overpopulation, and dwindling natural resources, to name but a few.

er452r2

Each of us chose such a course at this time — but now, I think, a time of imperative change is necessary if we are to continue our progress as a species. A new blending of inner and outer consciousness’s — a new, more meaningful coalition of intellectual and intuitive abilities — will be the latest step in the process of “consciousness knowing itself”.

eemnm

There are bound to be significant clues as to the nature of the human animal: creative clues that can’t help but enlighten us in many — and sometimes unexpected–ways.

er35

Consciousness is more than encompassing enough to embrace all that we are, and everything that each of us can even remotely conceive of doing or being. Try as we might, we’ll not exhaust or annihilate consciousness: Whatever we accomplish as people will still leave room for — indeed, demand — further ramifications and development. And in the interim we can always look at nature with its innocent, spontaneous order to sustain us. We can at least observe, and enjoy, the behavior of other species with whom we share the world.

Reincarnational, counterparts, and probable selves, and families of consciousness, suggest the human personality.

Also hints of the invisible psychological thickness that fills out the physical event of the self in time.

m,ky

Following an intuitive and inner organization rather than a linear one, would arouse the creative revelatory characteristics of the psyche. The psyche’s deep resources evolve into timeless material. Like being reckless in the pursuit of the ideal.

NTHD

No one, whether that individual is a psychic, a mystic, a writer, a poet, or even if he/she combines all of those qualities, can encompass all of the incredible differences within the human species. It’s up to the multidimensional, multitudinous, over for billion multinational individuals on this planet to follow their own intuitions and seek answers in their personal ways.

mmm6um

We have much to learn about our inner and outer worlds that once an attempt is made to discuss those large issues, a host of questions arise.

Expand OR CUT DOWN the function of any family group, by deciding how precise oneself would be.

If one family deals with the nature of healing, then we can slice it down to the healing of a toe…an ear…an eye.

fammil7

The categories [healing, teaching, or whatever] are general descriptions of the families of consciousness. We can split them up also and make further distinctions, if we choose. we can cut those divisions down. They merely represent interpretations that we can understand in our reality. In the most mundane of terms, some families are travelers, and some prefer to stay at home. Characteristics of consciousness as it is embarked in physical form. These groups are not set up as divisions, but to understand that consciousness is diversified — that usually each of us falls, because we want to, into a certain family. And there we acquire friends, alliances, and counterparts.

r5t

Besides the physical relationships that each of us know, therefore, we have other brothers and sisters, mothers and others, on a psychic level; and to that degree, we are not alone. If we do not like the families that we have, we have others to choose from.

faf4f

Families fall generally into certain groups. In greater terms we can “cut the pie” however we want to, but we will still share an emotional and psychic feeling of belonging with the family of which we are part.

fa4r

Each of us may often come together, forming a counterpart relationship when it suits our purposes.

Thinking that our encounters with others are caused by chance…

Except for those we purposely bring about through choice, such as marriage partners. Yet, second thoughts make us question old assumptions; Granted the existence of counterparts to begin with, certainly their common goals, though differently expressed, would bring them together when possible. The same would apply to any group. So beneath such gatherings there would be hidden dynamics, psychological activities that could explain the behavior of crowds, political parties, and so forth.

de24

An individual reactions to a given idea or event can vary tremendously, form the most withdrawn behavior to the most explosive.

“SHIT” and “SOUL”

We apply the term in a derogatory manner to ourselves, and think: “I am full of shit.” And where does the great spectacular reality, the physical reality of our earth, spring from? Why is shit not considered sacred and blessed and glorious? We think of shit, unfortunately, as the antithesis of good; and when we play around it or with it, we think we are being childish at the best, and wicked at the worst.

sytjsyt

A child sits, perhaps three years old, with his finger stuck up his ass, feeling the shit that warmly runs down, and that child knows that shit is good. Then, give him credit!

hhgm

We think that the soul is a white wall nothing written upon it, and so our idea of sacrilege is to shit upon it, not realizing that the shit and the soul are one, and that the biological is spiritual; and that flowers grow from the shit of the earth. And in a true communion, all things of this life return to the earth, and are consumed and rise up again in a new life that is never destroyed or annihilated, though always changing form.

shtyt

So, when we shrink from such words or such meanings, why do we shrink? Because we do not trust the biology of our being or the integrity of our soul in flesh. We are people. We are made of the stuff of the earth, and the dust from the stars has formed into the shit that lies in piles — warm piles that come from the beasts and the creatures of the earth. And the shit fertilizes the flowers and the ground, and is a part of it.

suuumu

This does not mean that we should use such a word to make other people uncomfortable.

e

Our soul and our flesh are wedded together. One is not “better” than the other: Both are good. Both are, and we are both. The heritage of the earth, in our terms, is ancient and yet ever new, and when we write, we write with our intelligence and our wit. Yet if it were not that we shit once or twice a day, we would not be writing anything.

sutu

Yet when we laugh, we laugh because we still think the word is beneath us, and we are being sneaky or smart-alecky–or we think I am–by speaking so freely.

tew

When We say “soul,” we do not snicker.

Why isn’t the whole world reverberating with fantastic ideas?

How many people? Very few would take this amount of their camouflage time to deal with it. A peculiar set of abilities and interests is required for like this to be even partially successful, or accepted by the personalities involved. For many it would be difficult to maintain discipline and balance, while allowing for the necessary freedoms that are involved. That is, this is a controlled experiment, allowing oneself certain freedoms of control in some instance and not in others. This is no easy trick.

,.uo.

The slow accumulated body of knowledge has been taken into various religious and doctrines that have grown up about it until it is almost unrecognizable. Bits of it appear here and there, scattered, distorted, and misleading. It comes naked, and everyone must put clothing on it. This means it usually ends up as either nonsense armored dogma.

WNYN

Knowledge needs personalities who are not fanatics along any line–including scientific fanatics who would object as forcibly to the reincarantional data as religious fanatics would object to some of the other material.

ty3why

All religions are distortive. For that matter, much of our science is distortive. Both arrive at approximations, at best, of reality. Religion has been the cause of much prejudice and cruelty, but the bombs over Head are not caused by the Catholic Saint, Teresa showering down any roses. Science is apt to turn into another religion, if it has not done so already. The distortions in science and religion have been truly disastrous. Any fanaticism is vicious, one-sided, and limiting, causing an alarming shrinkage of focus that is explosive and dangerous.

The difference between probable realities and reincarnational ones.

According to our intent, our desire, and our beliefs, our ideas intersect with the reality that we know, with physical space and physical time — they become real, in historic terms. In other realities there are different historical terms. A war won here, with a treaty, is not won somewhere else, and there is a different treaty. Even wars seemingly won here are not nearly as clear-cut as would appear; we make history as we go along. We rewrite it as we go along. As records are lost, we do not even realize that we have rewritten the past.

terter

It does not serve our species’ purposes at this time to work with the mind–with telepathy, with feeling for the earth that we could have developed.

tert

We could have developed very well as a super-human. People chose to develop in a very different way. Therefore, that world-probability in which telepathy and clairvoyant would have been common, well-known facts of life, self-evident in any civilization– that probability became latent while the species followed another route.

teeee

There are points, where probabilities meet: intersections with space and time that occur in our minds while we change directions, where new probabilities that once lay latent suddenly emerge. And in terms of our civilization and our time, such a time is now.

te5

There is no knowledge, however! See what our mind learns from the words. See what we learn that is not in the words. Hear, because many of us like the sounds so well, the insects creeping across the forests of Europe and Africa. But hear also the voices of acknowledgement of our living cells as they grope and grow in the sacred continents of our own physical energy. See the oneness, and the ancient newness that is never repeated.

tey5

One sentence repeated is not the same sentence that it was before. One breath is not another. We are never repeated, and what we know is always new. Because we know it, and because we are the one who knows it, it is never what another one knows. So all knowledge is public–and scared. And ancient and new.

The rocks cannot speak words that we hear, and we do not listen when our cells speak to us. The archaeology of our own being.

Castles of our past and our future, and the mental civilizations that are our heritage and our birthright. Hear, then the fossilizing within our spirit speak.

When we communicate with the gracious ease with which those primitive people communicated, then we can call ourselves civilized.

As a member of the human species do we indeed see ourselves as supreme flower of history so far, yet when we can know what is going on clearly and concisely on the other side of the city, and communicate it also, then we will be as primitive and as civilized as some of those primitive people.

es4453525

Esoteric history has nothing to do with the people.

estet

The experience of the guru who sits in opulence, bejeweled and be-gowned, has nothing to do with the migrant worker who works in the field and whose belly is empty. And so it has been through the centuries.

esr53453

In our terms, our histories were not written by people who worked the earth. They were created by the priests and the elite, who made up their own histories to suit their purposes–to hold down the masses. Those histories never spoke of the vast, massive emotions and needs of the human beings involved, who listened, because their hearts and survival depended upon their doing so, to the voices that speak within the earth that your instruments even now cannot perceive. Those histories did not tell of the human beings who had to know what insects would crawl of fly from one end of a continent to another, so that they could be captured and roasted and eaten. They did not speak of the human beings who had to know what migrations of animals would roam through their land–and when and where, and at what phase of the moon–lest they starve.

esyt45yb

And so those people lifted up their minds and hearts and heard the voices of the earth speak to them, as they still do. The elite did not hear those voices. They wrote histories in which in their own memories they annihilated races of people with emotions as strong as real as theirs. The elite leave us records and methods, telling us of kings and queens, of gurus and prophets and gods, in whose eyes the masses of the people vanished. They learned techniques, but the techniques did not bring them magic, did not allow them to really hear and understand the voice of one leaf.

est5t

So forget all of the histories, and listen to our own thoughts, which are today alive and vital as those of any man/woman ever born, in whatever time. Forget the dusty old records and feel our reality in the movement as we are. In that moment can we hear the insects sweeping across the continents and the voices of the leaves speak, and feel their echoes in our blood– and that blood lives, beyond the time. It throbs beyond destiny, even as the masses of those people live beyond the beliefs of those gurus.

es42

The vitality of our present being, and the authenticity of oneself.

est57

The most sophisticated and the most primitive,with combination of the English words, in our terms, are understood by the proud intellect that rises above the shoulders so securely. Yet the sounds upon which those words ride are far more sophisticated than the language of which we are all so proud. For they are indeed the sounds of insects through the centuries, of stars swirling through the universe, of the blood pound through our veins.

este

Not to bow down before gurus and histories. More has to do with the mass beliefs that people chose at various times, and the different roads that were taken in our reality. Any road taken in our reality should–but does not–tell us one thing: By the very fact that we have chosen a particular road, we can be sure that other roads, entirely different, have been taken..

The “Brotherhood of Man,” or the “Womanhood of Women”

At any given time, the population of the earth is made up of counterparts. So when we kill an enemy, we are killing a version of oneself. For as we are members of a physical species, we are also members of a psychic kind of counterpart reality; and this membership straddles races or countries, or states or politics.

dedj

We form our history. We form our reality, and so no one is thrust into a position which first was not accepted as a challenge. So we work out our problems and challenges in whatever way we choose, historically. Identities intermix with others who may seem to be strangers, but others who speak with our own voice, others who communicate with us in their dreams as we communicate with them. We have comrades, and we come to this earth at a given time and place of our choice, and so do we reap and form the great challenges of our age.

flf

But the world is not filled with strangers, and so we get glimpses of counterparts of oneself who lived, in one particular era. In deeper terms that era still exists, and that is something we should not forget. For as we view a painting and it has a frame, so do we view the centuries and out separate frames around them.

Much could be written about the ageless conflicts the individual feels between society’s demands and his or her urges toward personal freedom. It seems to me that no matter what role in any life the individual decides upon before birth, that individual will carry consciousness’s innate drive toward personal expression– but still within the protection furnished by social organization.

Imagine a multi-dimensional Ferris wheel, each separated section being an Aspect self.

As our ‘seat’ approaches the ground level, we’re the Aspect who intersects with the space-time continuum, and life starts. But his/her Ferris wheel moves in every possible direction, and its spokes are ever-moving waves of energy, connecting the Aspects with the center source. Each other position intersect with a different kind of reality in which it is, in turn, immersed.

fer

How much of our species’ distorted, intuitive knowledge of probable realities may appear as myth and oddity in our camouflage universe? I’m thinking about androgyny, of course, which is the concept of both male and female in one, and/or of hermaphroditism, wherein a person or animal possesses the sexual organs of both the male and the female.

ferr

Glimpses into numerous instances in which blended masculine and feminine qualities are contained in the gods of our very ancient myths. The same principles of androgyny can be found in much of the literature of our own century. Whether scientific or not, myths may contain the deepest truths of all for our species, at least in conventional terms, the sources of those verities cold spring partly from other realities.

ff55

The present is the point of power. From it we proceed to show who we are — what ever our individual belief systems may be — stem from the brilliant focus of our physical, mental, and spiritual abilities in “present” experience.

Reason and emotion are natural counterparts

There is a kind of coincidence with all of the present points of power that exist between us and our “reincarnational” selves. There are even biological connections in terms of cellular “memory.”

erte

Those selves are different counterparts of oneself in creaturehood, experiencing bodily reality; but at the same time our organism itself shuts out the simultaneous nature of experience.

etbb

Quite literally, the “inner” self forms the body by magically transforming thoughts and emotions into physical counterparts.

t874k

Now whatever we think emotionally of another person, we send out a counterpart of oneself, beneath the intensity of matter, but a definite form.

to

The so-called laws of our camouflage physical universe do not apply to the inner universe. However, the laws of the inner universe apply to all camouflage universe. Some of these basic laws have counterparts known and accepted in various camouflage realities.

Nothing exists outside the psyche, that does not exist within it.

And there is no unknown world that does not have its psychological or psychic counterpart. To some extent or another, there are counterparts of all realities within our psyche.

at4r4

It is quite possible, for example, for several selves to occupy a body, and were this the norm it would be easily accepted. That implies another kind of multipersonhood, however, one actually allowing for the fulfillment of many abilities of various natures usually left unexpressed. It also implies a freedom and organization of consciousness that is unusual in our system of reality, and was not chosen there.

blktgkl

In some systems of physical existence, a multipersonhood is established, in which three or four “persons” emerge from the same inner self, each one utilizing to the best of its abilities those characteristic of its own. This presupposes a gestalt of awareness, however, in which each knows of the activities of the others, and participates; and we have a different version of mass consciousness.

sa332dde

In the systems in which evolution of consciousness has worked in that fashion, all faculties of body, and mind in one “lifetime” are beautifully utilized. Nor is there any ambiguity about identity. The individual would say, for example, “I am Joe, and Jane, and Jim. and Dave.” There are physical variations of a sexual nature, so that on all levels identity includes the male and female. Shadows of all such probabilities appear within our own system, as oddities. Anything apparent to whatever degree in our system is developed in another.

Astrologer-in-Spirit

One tiny, wicked hint! Each of us has a birthday that we recognize–one birth-date– but there are hidden variables, that do not apply in charts because we have not thought of them.

a3

In our terms only, these other counterparts are like latent patterns within our mind. Echoes. How many of us have actually thought of what the unconscious may be? Or, hear voices that we hear within our mind or heart? Are they ours? To what counterparts do they belong? And yet each of us, in our own identity, has the right to do precisely as we wish, and to form our own reality.

aa4r

Each of us will create the attributes of reality that interest us and work with them in our own way. If we want to study the nature of religion and do a good job of it, then we must be among other things a skeptic and a believer, and an Indian and a Jew, say. Otherwise we will not understand anything at all, and have a very lopsided picture. And we cannot know what it is like to be black in this culture, unless we are also white in it.

cr6jwa6j

Some physical counterparts can hate each other. The larger self, would be quite capable of seeking experience through its parts in every way imaginable. Although it might be difficult for us to understand, let alone accept, the whole self or entity must regard all of its counterparts as sublime facets of itself– no matter whether they loved, suffered, hated, or killed each other or “outsiders.” Within its great reaches it would transform its counterparts actions in ways that were, quite possibly, beyond our emotional and intellectual grasp. At the same time, the self would learn and be changed through the challenges and struggles of its human portions.

ed31331

The behavior among nations might be changed for the better if the idea of counterparts were understood, or at least considered–if, for instance, many of the individuals making up a country realized that they could actually be acting against portions of themselves [or of their whole selves] in the persons of the “enemy” country, and so modified the virulence of their feelings. The nations of the world would benefit greatly from even a small improvement in their relationships with each other. And if an individual strongly disliked a counterpart in another land, wouldn’t this quality of emotion be detrimentally reflected in the person doing the hating?

SIMULTANEOUS Lives

We can live more than one life at a time–in our terms now–but that is a loaded sentence. We are neurologically tuned in to one particular field of actuality that we recognize. In our terms and from our viewpoint only, messages from other existences live within us as ghost images with the cells, for the cells recognize more than we do on a conscious level. That is, for a brief time we might be able to perceive a portion of another existence.

sa332e

We could not be consciously aware of those other realities all of the time, and deal with the world that we know. We have several time and space tracks in operation at once, then, but we acknowledge only certain neurological messages physically. Yet there is more to the body than we perceive of it, and this is difficult to explain. If we can think of a multidimensional body existing at one time in various realities, and appearing differently within each one while still being whole, then we can get some glimpse of what is involved.

s7j

Being able to handle another reality while still being involved on this one. Neurologically, we cross messages. We are aware of ghost images that we usually do not recognize, and those were translated into ghost sense data.

sasere6

“Ghost images” are the result of the neurological changeover, and they are our particular symbol that this is occurring. Others will have symbols of their own.

a57578

Such pictures are there for any of us who want to view them. When we are ready to see them, we will. Many of us are not ready to meet those kinds of data, for a certain kind of finesse is required–a balance that we are learning. And each of us knows intuitively when we are open to such encounters.

mu..yu

There are, of course, future memories as well as past ones. When we think of reincarnation, we do so in terms of past lives. We are afraid to consider future lives because then we have to face the death that must be met first, in our terms. And so we never think of future selves, or how we might benefit from knowing them.

a567jjjju

Our world exists in different terms than those we recognize, and reincarnation is indeed a myth and a story that stands for something else entirely.

tt4t4

Each of us takes part in our world–and in our time as we understand it, and in our terms, all the creatures of the earth participate in the century. We work out creative challenges and possibilities. We are born into different races, into different cultures, with different–but the same–desire. There are many things that we are learning.

ALIEN: PLANES…

Fact is that beings from other planes have appeared among us, sometimes on purpose and sometimes completely by accident. As in some cases humans have quite accidentally blundered through the apparent curtain between our present and our past, so have beings blundered into the apparent division between one plane and another. Usually when they have done so they were invisible on our plane, as the few of us who fell into the past, or the apparent past, were invisible to the people of the past.

a46hw6

This sort of experience involves a sudden psychic awareness, straight from the entity, that all boundaries are for practical purposes only. However, there are indeed many kinds of science. There are a number of sciences dealing just with locomotion. Had the human species gone into certain mental disciplines as thoroughly as it has explored technological disciplines, its practical transportation system would be vastly different, and yet by this time even more practical than it is now. When I speak of science on another plane I may not speak of the plain old science that we know.

aa3ee

When sciences progress on various planes, then visitations become less accidental and more planned. Once the inhabitants of a plane have learned mental-science patterns, then they are to a great degree freed from the more regular camouflage [physical] patterns. This applies to “higher” planes than ours, generally speaking.

aasfj6

Many of the flying saucer appearances come from [such] a plane, [one] that is much more advanced in technological sciences than earth at this time. However, this is still not a mental-science plane. Therefore the camouflage paraphernalia appears, more or less visible, to our own astonishment. Now, so strong is this tendency for vitality to change from one apparent form to another, that what we have in our flying object is something that is actually, as we view it, not of our plane or of [whatever] plane of its origin. The atoms and molecules that structurally compose the UFO, and which are themselves formed by vitality, are more or less aligned according to the pattern of its own territory. Now as the craft enters our plane a distortion occurs. Its actual structure is caught in a dilemma of form, between transforming itself completely into earth’s particular camouflage pattern and retaining its original pattern. The earthly viewer attempts to correlate what he sees with what he supposedly knows or imagines possible in the universe.

asdq

What he/she sees is something between a horse and a dog, that resembles neither. The flying saucer retains what it can of its original structure and changes what it must. This accounts for many of the conflicting reports as to shape size, and color. The few times the craft shoots off at right angles, it has managed to retain functions ordinary to it in its particular habitat.

aa3

I don’t believe we have had any saucer landings for quite awhile, not physical landings in the usual sense of the word. These vehicles cannot stay on our plane for any length of time at all. The pressures that push against the saucer itself are tremendous. The struggle to be one thing or another is very great on any plane. To conform to the laws of a particular plane is a practical necessity, and at this time the flying saucer craft simply cannot afford to say betwixt and between for any indefinite period.

a64

What they do is take quick glimpses of our plane–and hold in mind that the saucer or cigar shape [often] seen on our plane is a bastard form having little relation to the structure as it is at home base.

a9yu

There are many things we do not know, like the inhabitants lives. And many things that can’t be explained to us, simply because they would be too alien now for our regular mode of thought.

a4455

One note along these lines. A plane–using our terms–is not necessarily a planet. A plane may be one planet, but a plane may also exist where no planet is. One planet may have several planes. Planes may also involve various aspects of apparent time–this particular matter being too difficult to go into right now.

a8768

Planes can and do intermix without the knowledge of the inhabitants of the particular planes involved. I want to get away from the idea of a plane being a place. It may be in some cases but is not always. A plane may be a time. A plane, believe it or not, may be only one iota of vitality that seems to exist by itself. A plane is something apparently divided from the rest of the universe for a time and for a reason. A plane may cease to be. A plane may spring up where there was none. A plane is formed for entities as patterns for fulfillment on various levels. A plane is a climate conducive to the development of unique and particular capacities and achievements. A plane is an isolation of elements where each one is given the most possible space in which to function.

as46uj

Planets have been used as planes and used again as other planes. A plane is not a cosmic location. It is oftentimes practical that entities or their various personalities visit one plane before another. This does not necessarily mean that one plane must be visited before another. A certain succession is merely more useful for the entity as a whole.

uuymy

In other terms, we could say that an entity visits all planes simultaneously, as it is possible for us to visit a certain state, country, and city at one time. We might also visit the states of sorrow and joy almost simultaneously, and experience both emotions in heightened form because of the almost immediate contrast between them.

tiot

In fact, the analogy of a plane with an emotional state is much more valid than that between a plane and a geographical state–particularly since emotional states take up no room.

 

Black holes consist of the remains of a very massive star

One star much larger than our own sun, for example, that’s suffered complete gravitational collapse after the death of its nuclear fires. Such an object is very small and unimaginably dense; within it, time and space are interchangeable. It’s also quite invisible, because its surface gravity is so enormous that not even light can escape from it. The possibility of light radiation from the “even horizon” of the black hole. So far just two black holes have been tentatively located, although many of them are believed to exist.

btb

 

Since the matter surrounding a black hole would also be drawn into it, some astrophysicists have suggested that this might emerge into another universe through its opposite–a white hole– where it would be seen as an extremely brilliant quasar, or quasi-stellar radio source. So there would be an exchange of matter-energy between universes or realities.

beb

Interestingly enough, several very distant quasars have been linked to certain observed faster-than-light effects, thus contradicting current physical theory that nothing can exceed the speed of light. For science this is a very uncomfortable situation that has yet to be resolved. But I’m sure that in scientific terms, there are many discoveries to be made in this area. The faster-than-light effects may be the results of observations that are simply not understood in some as-yet-unexplained way.

bebvbe

Earth experience as a White hole? What kind of a structured universe could explain both the inner and exterior worlds? If we consider the universe as a white hole–our exterior universe of sense–we at least have a theoretical framework that reconciles our inner and outer activity, our physical and spiritual or psychic experience; and the apparent dilemma between a simultaneous present in which all events happen at once, and our daily experience in which we seem to progress through time from birth to death.

bb53

A black hole is a white hole turned inside out. The holes, therefore, or coordination points [points of double reality, or where realities merge], are actually great accelerators that re-energize energy itself.

bld

Conscious “Units” can operate as minute but very powerful black holes and white holes.

bbbb46h

For various reasons (having to do with gravitational waves, mass, etcetera) many galaxies, including our own, could have been formed out of matter accumulating around black holes at their centers.

Chromesthesia: color hearing.

Within our system colors may be perceived as sound (chromesthesia, or’color hearing’). Their connections with human moods are only too apparent. Sound alone, entering the body, instantaneously changes it. Any perception instantly changes the perceiver. It also changes the thing perceived.

auhih551

Many people undergo some form of chromesthesia–that is, certain colors or color patterns are seen upon hearing certain sounds.

fefr4

A fantastic sound that’s imprisoned in a crystal, that speaks through light, that’s the essence of personality. An almost jewel-like colored sounds.

Sound, and various symbolic attributes of that phenomenon, are uniting factors.

Not only slow and fast sounds, but inner, audible and inaudible manifestations or translations of sound.

feer

My recent vision I’d had, involving a ladder-like series of doors opening and closing silently. Felt sound.

feetr

Basically, the physical body has the potential for perceiving stimuli on a generalized basis. By this I mean that although the eyes are for seeing, the ears for hearing, and so forth. The potentials of the physical body include the capacity to hear, for example, through any given portion of the bodily expanse. Sound, then, can be felt as well as heard, although in such cases we may say that the sound is heard in the depths of the tissues; this, however, being an analogy. Feeling sound, merely experienced from a different perspective.

Tachyons, are supposed faster-than light particles

In out-of-the-body states, consciousness can travel faster than light–often, in fact, instantaneously. Conscious “Units” moving faster than light. Super-speed entities. Some of these in our terms share the same space as our own universe. We simply would not perceive such particles as mass. And: there are many ranges and great varieties of such units, all existing beyond our perceivable reach.

sd4425t

Ordinarily we think of mass as meaning the bulk and or/weight of an object. In classical physics the amount of matter in a given object is measured according to its relation to inertia, which in turn is the tendency of matter to keep moving in the same direction, if moving, or to stay at rest if at rest. An object’s mass is arrived at through dividing its weight by the acceleration caused by gravity.

srr45

In his special theory of relativity, however, Albert Einstein showed that mass is a highly concentrated form of energy. Any object contains energy “on deposit” in its mass, then. The masses of colliding subatomic “particles,” for instance, can be transferred into both energy and new particles.

sd6776

In the physics of elementary particles, time reversal, or symmetry, is a basic concept. Conscious “Units”, can move forward or backward in time. But they can also , move into thresholds of time with which we are not familiar. The relationship involving electron spin and the direction, or flow, of time.

a Massive Tree CONTEMPLATION

Its a sort of super-relaxation; Almost profound, and mental and physical at once. A completely different thing than just yawing, even though I might be yawning.

5q5tg

The relaxation involves a curious sense of dropping down inwardly, of going slowly beneath the realities we usually recognize. It’s a smooth transition in which perception is slowed down top-wise, but deepened so that usually unperceived stimuli seem to rise from an underside of consciousness and bodily sensation. In that kid of relaxation the body itself perceives differently. Looking at a leaf while in that state, I easily feel myself as part of the leaf, and I think this is a biological as well as a psychic perception. At certain levels the body feels that way itself, although ordinarily we aren’t aware of it. Such relaxation, then is almost an extension of biological insight.

t4t3w

In conventional terms, atoms are regarded as the submicroscopic entities making up all objects and substances in our world. Each atom consists of a nucleus of protons, neutrons, and other subatomic particles, around all of which move a complicated system of much lighter electrons. (An atom of hydrogen, however, is made up of but one proton and one electron.) All is in balance: The number of positive charges on the nucleus equals the number of negatively charged electrons. Particle-wave duality involving the components of the atom.

Atoms combine to form molecules. If the assembled atoms are all alike, an element results; if two or more different kinds of atoms combine into molecules, a compound is created.

Atom’s Core Sound

The slow thing, represented by drawn-out sounds, is in the center of the atom. That’s surrounded by faster-than-light particles, represented by the real fast sounds. The center of this thing–whatever it is–is massive in terms of mass. I don’t know whether this means it’s heavy or not, but it’s tremendous in terms of mass–though it may be very small in size.

a88855

Everything is conscious, of course. Atoms and molecules, the whole thing. The massive part is the core. This core is, I believe, not discovered yet [by physicists], and it’s so slow to us that no motions is apparent. I don’t know whether this is an atom or not. We can call it a dead hole. Its motion in our terms is so slow as not to be observable, but in terms of time it’s backward motion.

c6mkk

This core is always surrounded by these faster-than-light particles. This is a structure, but it does cause a pulling-in or wrinkling effect where it appears. There are many of these, I think, in our galaxy as well as others. Nothing can be drawn through the dead hole, though, as things can be drawn through the black hole, because of [the dead hole’s] literally impenetrable mass. Now as with atoms alone, and all other such structures, these also exist as sound. Black holes and white holes do also. The sounds are actually characteristics that act as cohesive, characteristics automatically given off. The slower center portions of the dead holes themselves move backward into beginnings becoming heavier and heavier.

muiylll

In a way of speaking we could say these centers fall through space, but they really fall through the space of themselves. As they fall backward through themselves–the faster-than-light particles collapse in on top. The dead hole seems to swallow itself, with the real fast particles like a lid that gradually diminishes. From our point of view the hole is closed, say, once the faster-than-light particles follow the slower core backward into beginnings.

aaaa34556c

As the core goes backward–“in time,” however, it begins to accelerate. I don’t know how to put this. When it emerges in another universe, the faster-than-light particles have slowed down, and the core becomes faster than light. The dead hole is repeated in microscopic size. Before the emergence of the atom, as an analogy, we could say that the dead hole we’ve been talking about emerges as an atom in another universe. But it’s the stage before the appearance, or the stage from which an atom comes.

bbtb

 

Speaking of the dead hole in a galaxy, say ours, it emerges in what would be to us an atom of fantastic size, but the same thing happens on a different scale as far as the creation of matter is concerned within our own system.

at66yy4

Sound is connected here also, and each one of these phenomena has consciousness that does express itself, and is aware of the stages through which it passes. In certain terms, dead holes connect past, present; also future. In practical terms they have to do with the seeming permanence of an object. They are the invisible portions of the atom. There are giant-sized atoms, as well as the ones we are familiar with.

djg dxgc

Dead holes turn into live holes, where the motion and impetus, in our terms, would be toward the future. The core appears as matter-to-be.

Long sound

The moment point, the present, is the point of intersection between all existences and reality. All probabilities flow through it, though one of our moments may be experienced as centuries, or as a breath, in other probable realities of which we are part. There are systems in which a moment, from our standpoint, is made to endure for the life of a universe.
These are “side pools” of consciousness.
All consciousness has as-pects that are act-i-va-ted and ex-pressed in all idi-oms or real-i-ties.

The truth of dreaming is a science long forgotten.

Such an art, pursued, trains the mind in a new kind of consciousness–one that is equally at home in either [exterior or interior], well grounded and secure in each.

t78k

The Dream-Art Scientist, The True Mental Physicist, The Complete Physician–such designations represent the kind of training that could allow us to understand the unknown, and therefore the known reality, and so become aware of the blueprints that exist beyond the physical universe.

 

myuilr597

The inner atmospheric ‘waves’ have a certain regularity. They are more intense at certain times than others.

We are ‘reincarnated’ many times during one accepted lifetime.

There are often great challenges to which we respond. We pick these for our own reasons. In doing so we often change affiliations.

crete

Consciousness forms patterns of identities. They move faster than the speed of light. They can be in more than one place at one time. They can operate in a free wheeling fashion as identities in themselves, or as ‘psychological particles.’ They can also operate in a wavelike fashion, flowing through other such particles. They can form together into endless, infinite combinations, forming psychological gestalts. Certain portions of these gestalts can then operate as ‘psychological particles’ in time and space, while other portions operate in a wavelike manner outside of time and space. These represent the unconscious elements of the species, which become ‘particleized’ in physical existence.

 

As long as we think in terms off [subatomic] particles, and WAVES we are basically of track .

The idea of interrelated fields comes closer, of course, yet even here we are simply changing one kind of term for one like it, only slightly different. In all of these cases we are ignoring the reality of consciousness, and its gestalt formation and materialization. Until we perceive the innate consciousness behind any ‘visible’ or ‘invisible’ manifestations, then, we put a definite barrier to our own knowledge.

There is now real different between the concepts of fields and wave/particles.

My words I hope will not be used to begin a new dogma

My dogma is the sacrilegious one–that each of us is a good individual. There is nothing wrong with our emotions, or feelings, or being. When we know ourselves that we are joyfully–responsive, and being joyfully responsive, we can carry our society to the furthest reaches of its creativity.

 

The slightest perception alters every atom within the body

There are changes in the positive and negative atomic charges, alterations of movement inside the atoms in the smaller particles, a change in pulsation rate. The activity of atoms is actually caused by perceptive qualities. To begin with, atoms do not just move with themselves because they are atoms. The constant motion within them is caused by the unending perceptive nature of any consciousness, however minute in our terms.

a43fr

 

Each of the particles within the atom is perceptively aware of all the other particles within that same atom. They move in response to stimuli that come from other atoms. Each atom within a cell, for example, is aware of the activity of each of the other atoms there, and to some extent of the stimuli that come to the cell itself from outside of it.

aaf89

Perceptions in general physical terms usually seem to involve information picked up from an arbitrarily structure, of an event seemingly occurring in another structure outside of itself. In the entire act of perception, however, there is a oneness and a unity between the seemingly objectively perceived event and the perceiver.

a784

The entire act has its own electromagnetic reality, and the event is actually electromagnetic motion. The movement within the atoms, is therefore basically a part of the entire perceived event.

c7566

Egotistically, we make arbitrary designations of necessity, perceiving only portions of any given action, the ego attempting to separate itself from overall action, and to see itself as an entirely independent structure.

aasa8

To go into modern knowledge of the components of the atom can be a very complicated task, note that such particles are regarded as actually being packets of energy, or “probability patterns”, that can also manifest themselves as waves, both the particle and the wave aspects are legitimate in space-time. An atom, then, is composed of a “heavy” positively charged nucleus orbited by “lighter” negatively charged electrons.

aa5f

The electron is the lightest particle known to have mass and charge, and its internal structure – whatever it may be is unknown. The atomic nucleus is largely made up of more massive protons and neutrons, but investigation within the nucleus has either uncovered or produced many other subatomic particles as well – over 200 of these, some of them unstable, are presently known. All of the particles or probability patterns discussed here would be composed of the much , much smaller “units of consciousness”.

 

Clairvoyance (clear-seeing)

Is the paranormal perception of events or objects regardless of distance, and without the help from another mind. Telepathy is the communication of thoughts or emotions between minds, regardless of distance. In actuality, it’s often difficult to tell whether clairvoyance, telepathy, or both operate in any given instance.The use of these phenomena may be connected to the perception of the past or future.

The libido does not originate in the subconscious of personality.

It begins instead in the energy of the entity and inner self, and is directed by means of the inner senses–outward, so to speak, through the deepest layers of the individual subconscious mind, then through the outer or personal areas. Freud and Jung have probed into the personal subconscious. Jung saw glimpses of other depths, but that is all. There are rather unfortunate distortions occurring in his writings, as well as in Freud’s, since they did not understand the primary, cooperative nature of the libido. A friend was telling me that the Spanish Fly helps unlock a new libido level. They tell me its transcendent. They also add some horny goat weed powder to their diet to maintain this new level of libido.

de554tgh

The biological interdependence and cooperation among organism in our physical universe. The appearance of an individual into the physical realm is aided by the psychic collaboration of individuals on our plane. Almost at once the new libido takes up its adopted duty of maintaining the physical universe, along with all others. If it did not do so it would not exist for long. Cooperation on all levels is the necessary on all planes.

ytmndymn

Jung seems to offer more than Freud, in some aspects he has attempted much and his distortions are fairly important: Seeming to delve further and offering many significant results, Jung nevertheless causes conclusions, all the more hampering because if his scope.

yj

It is true that the outward manifestations of the libido are directed toward the physical world, but until its source is seen , not in the topmost subconscious layers of the individual, and not even in the racial subconscious but within the entity itself, then man will not know himself. Maybe he will try to discover himself through alluring content on television.

two

Basically, Jung feared such a journey because he felt it led only to the racial source, that anyone involved in such a study would end up in the bottleneck of a first womb – but there, there is an opening up into other realms, through which the libido also passed. Figuratively speaking, it squeezed itself through the bottleneck, and there is a lack of limitation on the other side.

ad3qr

Freud courageously probed into the individual topmost layers of the subconscious, and formed them deeper than even he suspected. These levels undifferentiated impulses acquired in the present life of an individual, but when these have been passed there are many discoveries still to be made. After that passage the diligent, consistent, intuitive, and flexible seeker-after-knowledge will find horizons of which Freud never dreamed. Freud merely touched the outer boundaries. Jung, with his eyes clouded by the turmoil set up by Freud, glimpsed some further regions, but poorly.

Anima and the Animus: Carl Jung (1875-1961)

The Swiss psychologist and psychiatrist, postulated that the unconscious of the male contains a female, archetypal (or typical, instinctive) figure called the “Anima”; the correlative male form in the unconscious of the female Jung called the “Animus.” I infer that the entity or whole self of each of us, regardless of our current , individual sexual orientation, contains its own counterbalancing male or female quality, whichever the case maybe. I suspect that an energy gestalt like the entity is much more aware than we can be of its “hidden” opposite-sex form or forms; for there may be many of them.

a64ujau

Ideas about the Anima and the Animus and other-sex qualities or personification within each of us actually represent memories of past lives. (Jung himself thought the questions of reincarnation, and of karma [or, roughly, destiny of fate], to be “obscure”–he couldn’t be sure of the existence of such phenomena.) The Anima and the Animus are highly charged psychically, and also appear in the dream state. They operate as compensations and reminders to prevent us from over-identifying oneself with our present physical body. The reality of the Anima and Animus is far deeper than Jung supposed. Symbolically speaking, the two together represent the whole self with its diverse abilities, desires, and characteristics. Personality as we know it cannot be understood unless the true meaning of the Anima and the Animus is taken into consideration.

aat

The libido is regarded as the sexual urge or instinct-positive, loving, psychic energy that shows itself in changing ways as the individual matures.

Pretend that we are some creature with two faces.

One face looks out upon one world and one looks upon another. Imagine further, this poor creature having a brain to go with each face, and that each brain interprets reality in terms of the world it looks upon. Yet the worlds are different, and more, the creatures are Siamese twins.

cr8k8k8

At the same time imagine that these creatures are really one creature, but with definite parts equipped to handle two entirely different worlds. The subconscious, therefore, in this ludicrous analogy, would exist between the two brains, and would enable the creature to operate as a single unit.

creyjy

At the same time–and this is the difficult part to explain–neither of the two faces would ever see the other world. They would not [usually] be aware of each other, and yet each would be fully self-conscious.

Condensed time is the time felt or experienced by the entity, while personalities ‘live’.

On a plane of physical materialization. To go into this a bit further, many men and women have said that life was a dream. They were true to the facts in one strong regard, and yet far afield as far as the main issue is concerned.

bswb

Individual life, or the life of the present individual, could be legitimately compared to the dream of an entity. While the individual suffers and enjoys his [or her] given number of years in the same manner that we are concerned with our own dreams. And as our dreams originate with us, arise from us, attain a seeming independence and have their ending with us, so an entity’s personalities arise from it, attain various degrees of independence, and return to it while never leaving it for an instant.

cgerg

The entity organizes its personalities and to some extent directs their activities while still allowing them what we would call free will. There exist infinities of diversity and opportunity for the personalities.

cefwqef

The entity itself does not have to keep constant check on its personalities, because in each one there is an inner self-conscious part that knows its origin. Some part of us knows exactly how much oxygen the lungs breathe, and how, much energy it takes to pace a floor, and this is the part of us. It is the self-conscious part that receives all inner data.

cori34r

The part that translates inner data sifts it down through the subconscious, which is a barrier and also a threshold to the present camouflage personality.The topmost part of the subconscious contains personal memories, that beneath these are racial memories, and so forth. Things are simply not layered in the way we think of them, but continuing with the necessary analogy, on the other side of (or beneath, to us) the racial memories, we no longer exist within our plane; we look out upon another with that face of this other self-conscious part of us. This part receives inner data, is in contact with the entity to some greater degree than we are in contact with our dreams, and actually directs all of the important functions that we think are either automatically or unconsciously controlled.

csn

When such abilities as telepathy occur, this telepathic function is carried on continually by this other self-conscious part of us; but as a rule we act upon those data without the knowledge of the conscious self with which we are familiar.

 

 

 

The excitement of living must come from each of us.

We come here to know ourselves, and that should always be our purpose. We are the people we search for. The dimensions of our reality are the important points.

err4

In certain terms, and in certain terms only, and speaking now as the psychological bridge personality, then what we perceive is a portion of the human mind, as we understand it, goes beyond the threshold of itself into other dimensions of actuality; then, as best it can, it translates what it learns, sees, and experiences. It goes out of itself– it launches itself on paths that it does not understand, taking journeys. One portion of each human personality is that free.

It is important in terms of our own understanding of ourselves and the nature of time.

ef42

Triggers are needed to initiate emergence into other worlds through the personality.The practical impetus of our need at the time, operates as the final emotional trigger–then we recall the circumstances.

ggffg

Each physical person operates as a particleized being, and particularly in terms of a wave. But identity, being itself inviolate, is on the other hand everchanging–and there is, in the larger framework of reality, no contradiction.

We are portions of an event that is taking place within the universe.

The universe is acquainted with all of its parts. When one part   of the universe speaks, then all of its parts speak. When one portion of the universe dies, all portions die– but in our terms, to get into the kind of life we know , we must exit from space and time so that we can re-enter it.

fut6

We call the conscious self the “focus personality,” since it’s focused in this physical [camouflage] reality. The focus personality is composed   of aspects of the “source self” [or entity]. Each aspect exists independently, in its own dimension of actuality, but the aspects’ combined attributes form basic components of the selves that we know. ‘Personagram”–an actual personality formed in the psyche at the intersection point of the focus personality with another aspect.

Multidimensional communications more is involved.

Information must be sifted through the payers of the medium’s personality. Any perception instantly alters the electromagnetic and neurological systems of the perceiver. It is a logistic contradiction to imagine, with our physical systems, that any perception can be trying to make it as clear as possible: Information automatically blends with, is intermingled with, and enmeshed with, the entire physical valid structure of the personality.

mu

Any perception is action; it changes that upon which it acts, and in so doing it is itself changed. The slightest perception alters every atom within our body. This in turn, sends out its ripples, so that as we know, the most minute action is felt everywhere.

ENTITIES ARE ETERNAL, Personalities are not static things.

They are not as nicely nor as neatly packaged out, one to a body, as our psychologists believe. They constantly change. They grow. They make decisions. They use the physical body fully, or they partially depart according to their own inner needs and development.

de53

When psychic gestalts are formed they are not static. They make different alliances until they find their place in a whole identity that severs their purposes, or are song enough to become indestructible. They are always becoming. they are not closed units.

Hand patterns

To be left-or right -handed has to do with inner mechanisms and brain patterns that come first, before the motions of the hands. Characteristically I operated in certain manners that resulted in the primary use of either hand.

hi676ri

The ego is not the most powerful or the most knowledgeable portion of the self. It is simply a well-specialize part of the personality, fully equipped to operate under certain circumstances. When those conditions no longer exist [after “death”], then other layers of the self take over the dominant position, and the personality realigns its psychological components. The ego does not disappear, however; it merely takes a back seat in some respects, as our own subconscious does during physical existence. The ego is under the control of what may loosely be called “the inner self.” The survival or nonphysical personality has somewhat the same relationship to the ego as the dreaming personality has to it in physical life.

h7u899m

When communication takes place between a survival personality and one who exists within the physical system, this involves a reshuffling on the part of the survival personality, where the ego is momentarily given greater reign. If this was not done, then in most cases communication would not be possible, just because the survival personality would have such difficulty impressing the personality who was still ego-oriented within the physical system.

d3

The nonphysical personality does not think of words, but experiences concepts in a much more direct manner. This sort of thing simply could not be understood by the physically focused individual. The survival personality’s inner self gives this reassembled ego ideas in the same way that, often, the subconscious gives the ego concepts in physical existence. This reassembled ego then attempts to perceive these insights in terms of sense perceptions, which are sent to the physical individual at the other end. Sometimes the communications are made directly, though they must be sifted through the subconscious of the one who is physical. When that person is trained along these lines, he or she helps in this process, and psychological framework, like a bridge, is erected that serves to connect the two personalities.

Off-shoots of the Twin entity.

The difference in time is but a camouflage distortion. This entity was a particularly strong one, and many of its egos have made the decision to turn into entities.

des5

When man realizes that he creates his own image now, he will not find it so startling to believe that he creates other images in other times. Only after such a basis [is established] will the idea of reincarnation achieve its natural validity, and only when it is understood that the subconscious, certain layers of it, is a link between the present personality and past ones, will the theory of reincarnation be accepted as fact.

de32a

Man sees not even half of the whole entity which is himself. It is true that on this journey, discipline, some caution and understanding, and much courage, is demanded. This as it should be. With a combination of intuitiveness, basic psychic facility, and yet integrated inner identities.

We can permit two personalities to exist side by side, so to speak. To coexist within oneself.

defqef

A deeper trance state would allow us to get less distorted information on such a test as this, initially, but results will improve, and such experiments will be helpful in that the various layers of the two personalities, will be seen in their operating procedures.

Learn very quickly through practice. The distortions that appeared are most helpful, in that they allow differentiate between our own communications and one’s own thoughts.

dd4f4f

In the future, tests will be worked out in whatever manner is needed.

Operate clairvoyantly. We usually obtain information in this manner. The ways in which that kind of material is received and interpreted, as this is very important.

When man realizes that he creates his own image now, he will not find it so startling to believe that he creates other images in other times.

Only after such a basis [is established] will the idea of reincarnation achieve its natural validity, and only when it is understood that the subconscious, certain layers of it, is a link between the present personality and past ones, will the theory of reincarnation be accepted as fact.

Man sees not not even half of the whole entity which is himself/herself.

Scientists have glimpsed the complications of the human body. They have scarcely glimpsed the complicated realities of the mind.

Beta waves: The official pulses of our civilization, giving precedence to official reality

We have little idea that the psyche is inherently able to seek its conscious experience from all of the known ranges, according to the kind of experience chosen at any given “time.”

b68j

Beta was not meant to carry the full weight of conscious activity, however, although its accelerating qualities can lead to initiations into “higher” realms of consciousness, where indeed the brain waves quicken. The other patterns (delta, theta, and alpha) are highly important to physical and mental stability, being very inter-wound with cellular consciousness. In cases usually call schizophrenic, the beta acceleration is not supported by the stabilizing attributes of the other known frequencies.

btrhw

If is possible, then, for a brain to register all of the known patterns at once, though our machines would note only the predominating rhythm.

bbrbw

A kind of inverted beta pattern, difficult to describe, often appears suddenly in the midst of the other ranges, driving through them. Accelerating consciousness to a high degree of creativity. The brain waves as they are known are separately registered segments of a greater “whole” kind of consciousness, and our machines are just as segmented, activity escapes them. They cannot note the rapidity with which we move through all the known patterns constantly. This behavior can be learned by anyone willing to take the time and effort. Some courage would also help.

bbt

We flash in and out of the reality that we know. In between one moment and the next of the waking day, there are, in our terms, long delta and theta waves that we cannot recognize. They are not recorded by our machines because quite literally they go in a different, “unofficial” direction. Each official waking brain wave is a peak in our world of a far deeper “wave” of other experience, and represents our points of continuity.

beta

Each beta wave rides atop the other patterns. In normal sleep, the “conscious” wave rides beneath the others, with the face of consciousness turned inward, so to speak. All the recognized characteristics of consciousness are “inverted,” probing other realities than the one we know. They are quite effective and lightning fast. In sleep the beta waves are not turned off–the “conscious” part of us, with its beta rhythms, is elsewhere.

btet

In my writing sessions the full range of brain waves are utilized as I understand them. Here, in a highly creative, disciplined, and yet spontaneous performance, a situation is set up in which knowledge is obtained from the known frequencies, combined so that consciousness can use itself more fully, reaching into many areas closed to one range of consciousness alone. The various diverse, unique characteristics of each level of awareness are given play. In a way this is like an accelerated, chosen, well organized “conscious” dream venture. Still being myself but, no longer myself, but me.

betyj

The most elemental portions of reality begin at the furthest reaches of our own reality. In sleep our ordinary brain waves as we understand them register a chaotic jungle or experience not normally processed. Biologically or psychically, there is little need for such disorientation. The normal waking consciousness, with its characteristic patterns, can indeed follow [into sleep]. A mixture of brain waves would result. Consciousness as we think of it expands tremendously under such conditions. We would follow our own pattern of continuity and understanding, weaving this into the sleep and dream states, forming a “new” pattern that triumphantly combines all, as to some extent this occurs often.

bet

In an ideal society, each brain wave would be utilized purposefully. We would go to sleep to solve certain problems. There is an overall general difference, nationally speaking–that is, people of various nations do differ to some extent in their prevalent brain frequencies. All in all, however, the beta has predominated, and has been expected to solve many problems unsuited to its own characteristics.

bbjmktj

Despite our reliance upon one range only, our world of consciousness draws heavily upon all of the known wave patterns, and from others of which we are unaware.

Altered states of Awareness

There are four recognized [electrical] brain waves, and in speed they range upward from 0 to 26 and more Hertz units, or cycles per second. These rhythms can vary somewhat, and are best thought of as areas of activity. Brain waves overlap. Very simply, delta brain waves are connected with dreamless sleep, theta with creativity and dreams, alpha with a relaxed alertness and changing consciousness; beta–the fastest–with concentration, and with an intense focus upon all of the challenges [and anxieties and stresses, many would say] faced in the ordinary daily world.

hgnd

Even if beta waves, then, seem to be the “official pulses” of our civilization, when aren’t we actually in a state of altered consciousness? For no matter which brain rhythm may predominate at any time, that state is certainly an altered one in relation to the other three. But more than this, why not call all actions of the brain “altered” when compared to the concept of the individual personality’s whole self or entity?

hgd

Highly creative people usually generate large amounts of theta and low-alpha waves pretty constantly while doing their thing. Measuring and recording brain waves is a complicated task, however; not only is it important which areas or lobes of the brain are monitored–if not all of them–but because of the mechanical limitations of the EEG itself much that goes on in the brain is necessarily missed. In addition, the two hemispheres of the individual brain often show variations in electrical energy states. But most importantly, I think, while the EEG can indicate broad categories of brain activity, it can hardly probe the participant’s very individual and subjective content of mind within this camouflage [physical] reality. The state of “EEG art” isn’t that advanced yet [if it ever will be].

The “City” we could start building in our individual and collective dream states

I am encouraging each human to focus joint energies in this direction. We will be dealing with symbols, yet we will learn that symbols are reality, for we are symbols of ourselves that live and speak. We do not think of ourselves as symbols [but] there is no symbol that does not have its individual life.

utnd

I speak of other theoretical realities. I challenge each human now to be as creative in another reality as we are in this one. And if it seems to us, because of our beliefs, that we are limited here, then I joyfully challenge each human to create a city, an environment, and perhaps a world, in which no such limitations occur. What kind of world would we create?

dfg

This knowledge speaks to us from the known and unknown desire that gives us our own birth, and that speaks to us from the tiniest, least-acknowledged thought that flies like a pigeon within our skulls. And in this moment of our reality, and in the desire of our being, do we even create All That Is. Bow down before no man, no woman, and no belief–but know we are indeed the creators.

ddfwef

For some of us the city will have  theater. For some of us it will not. For those of us who like theater, it will be like none we have ever seen. In it the actors and actresses will take the parts of beliefs–of fleshed beliefs–and the morality play, so to speak, will deal with the nature of beliefs and how they are enacted through the centuries as well as through the hours. that theater then will serve many purposes, even as each of us are exquisite performers, and have chosen the roles and beliefs that we have taken.

yujmfm

Now there are books programming out-of-body activity; millions of us are told that when we leave our body we will meet this demon or that demon, or this or that angry god. So, instead, we will form a free city to which those travelers can come, and where those who enter can read books about Buddhism if they prefer, or play at being Catholic. There will also be certain beloved traps set about the city, that will be of an enlightening nature. Now, you think there is nothing intrinsically impossible about building a platform in [dream} space? I am suggesting, then a platform in inner reality. It is as valid–far more valid–as an orbiting city in the sky, in physical terms, and it challenges our creative abilities much more. Humans need a good challenge, and its fun! Not because we should do it, but because we desire it. It is a great creative challenge that we can throw down to ourselves from our future.

ydkuykm

A beloved trap is one that we set for oneself. And so our city will be full of them. When we are tired of playing a Catholic priest, for example, we will fall into our own trap–in which our beliefs [as such a one] are suddenly worked out to their logical perfection, and we see what they mean.

ghjk

Now when children walk down streets, they count the cracks in the sidewalks. And so our city will have its own kind of tricky walks! There will be sidewalks within, and above and below sidewalks. But it is for each individual to decide which one he or she will follow.

“You make your own sidewalks,

And I make my own sidewalks.”

And so our city will simply have alternate sidewalks, and they will be beloved traps, set by each self.

fjh,

A true teacher allows us to learn from oneself. We enjoy the great vitality and exuberance of our reality, and our city will have joy and exuberance. Now  joy sounds quite acceptable, but our city will also have fun–which in many spiritual circles is not so acceptable.

dre

We can colonize an entire inner level of reality. To do so, we must give our best with dedication and joyful creativity. This will not be an imaginary city. It will have a greater reality than any physical city that we know, and it can, in its own way, shine with brighter lights in inner reality than any nighttime city display. I hope we will work at developing skills, in terms of the, dream-art-scientist.

We will not attain spirituality or a happy life by denying wisdom and experience of the flesh.

We can learn more from watching the animals than we can from a guru or a minister. But first we must divest ourselves of the idea our creaturehood is suspect. Our humanness did not emerge by refusing our animal heritage, but upon an extension of it.

eytn

I certainly believe that our physical existences and mental experiences are quite “real” in themselves. A good general question, I think, I would like to see discussed with ideas of the inviolate nature of the individual in mind,that has to do with the prevalence of ordinary, daily, conscious-mind thinking and perception throughout much of the world. In historical terms this situation has always existed for the human species and I think it applies almost equally in Eastern lands, especially among the political leaders and ruling classes within them.

ynn

Yet Buddhist belief, for instance, maintains that our perception of the world is not fundamental, but an illusion; our “ignorance” of this basic undifferentiated “suchness” then results in the division of reality into objects and ideas. But why call our generalized awareness an illusion, instead of regarding it as one of the innumerable manifestations that reality takes? No one is free of certain minimum physical needs or of self-oriented thought. Each nation strives to expand its technological base no matter what its philosophy may be. Would a widespread use of Eastern religions doctrines be more practical on our earth today, or self knowledge? Even given their undeniable accomplishments, why didn’t the Eastern countries create ages ago the immortal societies that could have served as models for those of the West to emulate–cultures and/or nations in which all the mundane human vicissitudes (in those terms) had been long understood and abolished: war, crime, poverty, ignorance, and disease?

ngfns

Certainly the species must be putting its conscious activities to long-term use, however, even with the endless conflicts and questions that grow out of such behavior. During the many centuries of our remembered history, those conflicts in themselves have been–and are–surely serving at least one of consciousness’s overall purposes, within our limits of understanding: to know itself more fully in those particular, differentiated ways.

 

Human personality has no limitations except those which it accepts.

There are no limits to its development or growth, if it will accept no limits. There are no boundaries to the self except those boundaries which the self arbitrarily creates and perpetuates. There is no veil through which human perception cannot see, except the veil of ignorance which is pulled down by the materialistic ego.

ukrur

That which appears empty, such as our space, is empty only for those who do not perceive, who are blind because they fear to perceive that which the ego cannot understand. The ego, however, is also capable of greater knowledge and potentiality and scope. It dwells in the physical universe, but it can indeed also is part of the personality and as such it can partake of sturdier, heartier, more vivid realities. The personality can dwell and does dwell in many worlds at once.

ukd6uk

The inquiring intuitions and the searching self, like summer winds, can travel in small and large spaces, can know of actualities that are more minute than pinheads and more massive than galaxies. The power and ability of the human personality, in a most practical manner, can be seen as unlimited.

The locations that appear to us in dreams

It is true that dream locations do not exist within our heads in the same way the physical streets exist within the place of cities. While we are within the context of a dream, however, the location appears to be immediate. In dreams we may walk down avenues which do not exist in physical terms. We receive data we would call sensual if we were awake. We hear, touch, taste, smell, and operate in a manner that we would call physical if we were awake. We walk, talk, act, work, play, while our actual bodies are at rest.

,fhj,fgu,

I can find any Main Street at any time I choose: for all practical purposes it is a permanent feature of any city. But I cannot return to a dream location anytime I choose. Can we say, then that dream locations are different from physical places in that we cannot return to them? Not quite, since in recurring dreams many of us do visit the same streets and houses with which we have become familiar in other dreams. If we cannot find dream locations when we are in the waking state, neither can we find physical locations when we are dreaming. There is good reason to suppose that we can return to various dream locations simply by suggesting we will do so before we go to sleep. So the dream world may possess an organized structure also, just as the physical world does, and one in which we all know our way very well–while we are sleeping.

fwecfqee

Such matters may at first seem far divorced from a discussion of the so-called spirit world. However, perhaps you can now see that we are much more than creatures composed of physical matter. Our intimate direct experience transcends physical reality as we know it. We are a mixture of corporeal substance and something else that we can only approach through subjective experience, a something that makes us what we are, and without which consciousness would be meaningless.

g764j

It makes no difference what we call this portion of our personalities, spirit, or soul, or mind. The point is that the most vital aspects of the self are not physically materialized.

jeduf

It is true, however, that clues to the existence of this portion of the human personality can be found in physical matter. Our emotions can be tampered with through the addition or subtraction of chemicals and hormones. To some extent our personalities can be manipulated. Even a subtle alteration in physical make-up will effect a change in our inner selves. But the fact remains that very significant experiences upon which our consciousness and identities depend are not physical in the usual terms.

hdjg

If this reality of ourselves is not contained within matter but only connected to it, then it is quite legitimate to say that we operate and exist in both physical and non-physical dimensions. At times we are more closely allied with the corporeal universe than at other times. In dreams, for example, we are less closely bound to the physical world than we are in the waking state. Our sensual apparatus is turned down low to the idling stage. We are maintained within the physical universe, but we limit our operations within it. It becomes as unreal to us as the dream state becomes when we are awake.

nunen

It is at least conceivable that the I of our dreams is but another aspect of our own identity; an I that continues now to exist as itself despite the ego’s manipulation of the physical universe; and an that will continue to exist after the alliance with physical matter is finished.

pt7rlftl

Consciousness is precisely that part of ourselves which does not exist as an object within the physical universe, and it is composed of those thoughts and emotions and dreams in which we realize ourselves most intimately.

 

Reality seems to have its being in some medium other than flesh and bone.

As a species we are composed of organic tissue, but none of us would deny the reality of our thoughts, for example, yet a thought is not a physical object like a glass that we can hold in our hands. When we try to examine a thought, we instantly change it. The original thought vanishes, to be replaced by a new one. We can only know what a thought is through our own inner experience.

ee3e3rf

Neither would we deny the validity of psychological insights or emotions or dreams. These are in no way concrete objects, yet they form an important part of our own consciousness. Such subjective experiences seem to be connected with physical matter, but they do not seem to be literally contained within it.tnsb

We say dreams exist “in our heads.” but certainly dreams are not in our heads in the same manner that physical tissue and blood vessels and bones are in our heads. A surgeon can probe into the brain tissue with a scalpel, but no physical examination or operation will disclose s dream or a thought or a psychological experience. No scalpel can cut into a dream as it can pierce the visible fibers inside our bony skulls. Then what do we actually mean when we assume that dreams and thoughts are inside our heads?

pyhlyt8o

The idea is based on the assumption that the human personality is limited by physical matter and held in bounds by the physical self. Therefore, anything belonging to the personality would have to exist within the physical organism. If we are purely physical creatures, then, we would still have to admit that we contained some things that were not physical; otherwise these thoughts and dreams inside of us would have to be physical also, and they are not.

r,md

Scientists have theorized that consciousness may be the result of the ways in which the body operates. Even if this were the whole story, and I do not believe it is, then we would still have to admit that part of our reality was not physical, but was born out of physical matter and could not be seen and touched. Nevertheless, because of this attitude we have the idea that reality is determined by physical existence only. (We consider valid only those things which can be judged so by the physical senses.)

ouut

It seems to make no difference that physicists have discovered that the senses themselves distort reality, and that we merely create patterns out of atoms and molecules, perceive these as objects and give them names. In general we still act as of physical reality were the only standard by which to measure experience.

ou6y

We can hardly refer to something which affects us deeply as unreal. We can say that an experience exists in some perspectives and not in others. Many dreams are as vivid as any waking experience, for example, and have as great an effect upon our personalities. The dream may not have a physical reality but it certainly has a psychological reality.

 

Consciousness is the direction in which the self looks.

Memories of past lives would not be handled by the outer ego, simply because this ego is too concerned with daily life in a physical reality to deal with extra information.

e56

We know too little about too many things to discount such a possibility as foolish or meaningless. We do not know enough about the human personality as it exists in the present to be able to say what it was or was not in the past. Even our idea of time itself is changing. Is it possible that in dreams we see glimpses of our past environments, streets and places we knew in previous lives.

eerrrtgbv

Dreams, key dream symbols, and reincarnation. Dreams are seen as containing information concerning past, present and future, with the key symbols so cunningly chosen by the inner ego that the same symbols make sense to all layers of the subconscious. One symbol, then, could refer to events from the present life and events of a past life, while also holding meaning for the future.

The electrical universe is far different from our idea of it.

Electricity as we perceive it within the physical system is merely like an echo emanation, or a sort of shadow image of these infinite varieties of pulsations. These pulsations give reality and actuality to many phenomena with which we are familiar, but which do not appear as tangible objects within our physical system.

miiuy

We have seen that all experiences is retained in electrically coded data within the cells, and the material of the cells forms about this coded experience. The ego as it continues to exist gradually builds up an electrical reality of its own as its experiences form into coded data within the cells.

m55

At any given point the ego is complete within electrical reality, as it is psychologically complete within the physical system. This includes, of course, the retention of its dreams as well as the retention of purely physical data.

mdf

The electrical system possesses many dimensions of reality that cannot be perceived within the physical system. So far our scientists have only been able to study electricity by observing the projections of it that are perceivable within their frames of reference. As their physical instruments become more sophisticated, they will be able to glimpse more of this reality. But since they will not be able to explain it within their known systems of references, many curious and distorted explanations of reported phenomena will be given.

mmhjdsj

It is most difficult to hint at the myriad complexity and dimension of the electrical actuality as it exists, when we consider that each of our own thoughts is composed of a unique intensity of impulse, shared by nothing else, and that this same may be said for every dream that you will have in our lifetime; and that all this experience is gathered together in particular ranges of intensities, again completely unique, codified; and this, the summation of all that you are, exists in one minute range or band of intensities. See how difficult it is to explain?

muy

All human beings are also in the same manner electrically composed and everything else, with few exceptions, within the physical field whether or not it exists within physical matter. Our physical filed is contained within its own unique range of intensities, a tiny band of electrical impulses a million times smaller than any one note picked out at random from the entire mass of musical composition that has been written or ever will be written. Yet as we know this is not not meant to give us a sense of futility, for uniqueness brings its own responsibility.

mmko

All motion is mental psychological motion, and all mental and psychological motion has electrical reality. The inner self moves by changing or moving through intensities from our physical field. Each new psychological experience opens up a new pulsation intensity, and gives greater actuality within the electrical system gives the result of moving through time within the physical system.

Electrical reality of a dream is decoded.

So that its effects are experienced not only by the brain, but in the furthest reaches of the most minute cells of the human body. Dream experiences, long forgotten, are forever contained as electrically coded data. If an effect is felt in any one portion of human experience, then you can be sure that it is felt in all other possible ways, whether or not such an effect is immediately obvious.

e45tth

Every effect of any kind, experienced by the human being, exists as a series of electrical signals and codes that in themselves form a pattern that is an electrical pattern.

cvghujio

They exist with the cells, or I should more properly say that the cells form about them. These electric coded signals then form about them. These electric coded signals then form electric counterparts of complete experience, as it has been felt by a given individual. That pattern is independent of the physical system, while residing in it. Each individual from birth on forms his own counterpart from built up, individual, continuous electric signals. At physical death his/her personality then exists in more or less complete form, and of course escapes the sort of ending that it would suffer if it were an integral part of the physical system.

e55

The electrical pattern is the personality, with all the experiences of earthly time. It can then join or partake of the inner self. Though the ego was adapted ordinarily by the inner self and was also a product of physical heredity and environment, it does not die, but its existence is changed from physical reality into electrical reality. It is still individual. No individuality is lost but becomes part of the inner self, and its experiences are added to the total experiences of the many personalities that have composed the inner self.

God knows itself through the flesh

God may know itself through a million or a thousand million other worlds, as so may I–but because this world is, and because I am alive in it, it is more than appearance, more than a shackle to be thrown aside. It is a privilege to be here, to look out with this unique focus, with these individual eyes; not to be blinded by cosmic vision, but to see this corner of reality which I form through the miraculous connections of soul and flesh.

n5

Cherish the gifts of the gods. Don’t be so anxious to throw your individuality back into their faces, saying, ‘I’m sick to death of myself and of my individuality; it burdens me.’ Even one squirrel’s consciousness, suddenly thrown into the body of another of its kind, would feel a sense of loss, encounter a strangeness, and know in the sacredness of its being that something was wrong. Wear your individuality proudly. It is the badge of our godhood. We are god living a life–being, desiring, creating. Through honoring oneself, we honor whatever it is God is, and become a conscious co-creator.

This passion for nonbeing, this denial of sensual life, that drives so many gurus and prophets

They speak out against desire while propelled by the overwhelming desire to lose themselves. They luxuriate in a kind of cosmic masturbation, titillating their psychic organisms into pitches of mindless excitement; cavorting in orgasms of self-surrender. They bask in a sort of universal steam bath that drives all impurities of individuality or creativity from their souls, leaving them immerses, supposedly forever, in a bliss beyond description; in which, indeed, their own experience disappears.

fj d

Thank God that some god managed to disentangle itself from such psychic oneness, if that’s what it’s  supposed to be. Thank God that some god loved itself enough to diversify, to create itself in a million different forms; to multiply, to explode its being inward and outward. Thank God that some god loved its own individuality enough to endow the least and the most, the greatest and the smallest, with its own unique being.

ghjui

The gurus say: ‘Give it all up.’ One of those we read about today counsels: ‘When you want to do one thing, do another instead. Do not do what you want to do, but what you should do.’ Never trust the self that you are, the gurus say, but the self that you should be. And that self is supposed to be dead to desire, beyond wanting or caring; yet paradoxically, this non-feeling leads to bliss. The gurus say that All That Is is within us, yet tell us not to trust oneself. If All That Is didn’t want appearances, we wouldn’t experience any! Yet appearances, the gurus say, are untruths, changing and therefore false.

gduu

Is my body an appearance, hence an untruth amid the truth which is changeless? Ah dear body, then, how lovely and blessed our untruth, which is senate and feels desire though the hollowest of bones. How blessed, bodies, leaping alive from the microscopic molecules that combine to walk down the autumn streets; assemble to form the sweet senses’ discrimination that perceives, for a time, the precise joy and unity of even one passing afternoon. The body’s untruth then, is holier than all truths, and if the body is an untruth then I hereby proclaim untruth, and truth and all the gurus’ truths as lies.

 

Atlantis, was actually a composite of three civilizations.

Atlantis is a myth in response to a truth. Plato picked up the Atlantis material himself, psychically.

Atlantis_lands

In his dialogues Timaeus and Critias, the Greek philosopher Plato [427?-347? b.c.] described how the fabled island continent of Atlantis sank beneath the ocean west of the Pillars of Hercules–the Strait of Gibraltar–some 12,000 years previously. Looking backward in time, Plato heard the story of Atlantis from his maternal uncle, Critias the Younger, who was told about it by his father, Critias the Elder, who heard about it through the works of the Athenian statesman and lawgivers, Solon, who had lived two centuries earlier [ 640-559 b.c.); and Solon got the story of Atlantis from Egyptian priests, who got it from—-? Whether Atlantis actually existed in historic terms, its location, the time of its suggested demise, and so forth, are of course points strongly contested by scholars, scientists, and others.

Perceptions of consciousness are not limited.

For example, that the consciousness of the tree is not as specifically focused as our own. To all intents and purposes, however, the tree is conscious of 50 years before and 50 years hence.

egy54

In sense of identity spontaneously goes beyond the change of its own form. It has no ego to cut the “I” identification short. Creatures without the compartment of the ego can easily follow their own identities beyond any changes of form. The inner self is aware of this integrity of identity, but the ego focused so securely in physical reality cannot afford this luxury.

Many scientist are agnostic or atheistic.

If science  represents the “search for the truth,” as it so often reminds us, then eventually it will contend with the kind of gifts she/he demonstrates. Subjective and objective abilities, working together, can create a whole greater than the sum of its parts.

The “Dream-Art Scientist”, “The True Mental Physicist,” and “The Complete Physician”

Quite literally, we live more than one life at a time. With earth being much older than its currently estimated age of 4.6 billions years.

The True Mental Physicist.

Such scientist in our future will be able to allow his/her consciousness to flow into the many open doors (of inner realities) that can be found with no instrument, but with the mind. To throw ones’ consciousness into small physical instruments (computer components, for instance), and perceive their inner activity at the level of, say, electrons. Tuned into his/her own “side-pools of consciousness,” his/her own “probable neurological materialization.”

The sort of “time” available to molecular consciousness

Biological precognition is firmly based in the chromosomes and genes, and reflected in the cells. The cell’s practically felt ‘Now” includes, then, what we think of as past and future, as simple conditions of Nowness. They maintain the body’s structure in our poised time only by manipulating themselves in a rich medium of probabilities. There is a constant give-and-take of communication between the cell as we know it in present time, and the cell as it ‘was’ in the past, or ‘will be.’

DNA, the “master molecule”, of the “basic building block” of life.

DNA is an essential component of the protoplasmic substance of which genes and chromosomes are formed in the cell nucleus, and governs the heredity of all living things.

lt

In microbiology, the first stages of exciting and controversial “genetic engineering” are at hand. This long-sought goal of science involved the very sophisticated recombination of DNA from such different life forms as plants and mammals, say, into new forms not seen on earth before. Such work has been called vital for the understanding of many things–the genetics of all species, the control of at least some diseases, great improvements in the quality of food, plants, and so forth. It’s also been called outright interference with the evolutionary constraints that prevent the interbreeding of species. Although risks may be present in DNA research, such as the unforeseen creation of new diseases, it seems that within strict safeguards recombinant techniques are here to stay.

mdf

Once again, however, it’s obvious that as a whole, science is far removed from the idea that each of us–whether that “us” is a human being or a molecule of DNA–creates our own reality. And what if we can learn to assemble sections of DNA from various life forms into new forms? To at least some extent such basic genetic substances would cooperate in the efforts at recombination: for no matter what kind of life developed, it would represent a gestalt of myriad consciousnesses, embarking upon unique explorations.

r,md

For centuries now–most of them obviously preceding Darwin–man/woman themselves has been playing the role of a designer through his/her creation of certain breeds of animals and hybrid plants. But we see now that man/woman is no longer content to bring about changes within species, as in cattle, for instance: With vast excitement he/she faces the challenge of “engineering” new kinds of life. Those urges are creative even when, as a designer, he/she goes against his/her own Darwinian concepts that there is no conscious plan involved in the design of his/her world.

The physical world that recognizes invisible patterns

These patterns are ‘plastic,’ in that while they exist, their final form is a matter of probabilities directed by consciousness. Our senses perceive these patterns in their own way. The patterns themselves can be ‘activated’ in innumerable fashions. There is something out there to observe.

yhashas

Our sense apparatus determines what form that something will take, however. The mass world rises up before our eyes, but our eyes are part of that mass world. We cannot see our thoughts, so we do not realize that they have shape and form, even as, say clouds do. There are currents of thought as there are currents of air, and the mental patterns of man/woman’s feelings and thoughts rise up like flames from a fire, or steam from hot water, to fall like ashes or like rain.

iyih

These patterns of probabilities themselves are not inactive. They are possessed by the desire to be-actualized. Behind all realities there are mental states. These always seek form, though again there are other forms than those we recognize.

 

“Naive Realism” with out-of-body travel (or “projection”)

I have read nothing about the two together, which surely be some very interesting material on such a possible relationship. Paradoxically, our perceptions while out-of-body can be more tenuously connected to temporal reality than usual, yet more acute at the same time. However, our use if naive realism must often govern what we allow ourselves to experience while consciousness is separated from the body. I also think some out-of-body travels, apparently to “alien” nonphysical realities, may actually be based instead upon interior bodily states or events. But there are times when the projecting consciousness, free of frameworks like naive realism, at least approaches truly different realities, or probabilities.

Evolutionary Thinking is challenged not only by questions of proteins synthesis, and energy/entropy

Equally insistent are the puzzles posed by the missing intermediate forms in the fossil record: Where are all the remnants of those creatures that linked birds, reptiles, cats, monkeys, and human beings? The hypothetical evolutionary tree of life demands that such in-between forms existed; it seems that by now paleontologists should have unearthed enough signs of them to make at least a modest case for their belief systems; the lack of scientific evidence is embarrassing. Since  my mind works that way, I could make minutely detailed drawings of a graduated series of such entities (gradualism being a basic premise in Charles Darwin’s theory), but would the creatures shown have been viable? Could they actually have existed for the necessary millennia while evolving into the species whose fossil remains have been discovered, or that live today? Evolutionists are serving goodly portions or speculation along with inadequate theory–or, really, hypothesis.

o7tk

It is truer to say that heredity operates from the future backward into the past, than it is to say that it operates from the past into the present. Neither statement would be precisely correct in any case, because our present is a poised balance affected as much by the probable future as the probable past.

ewwcf

In our terms–the phrase is necessary–the moment point, the present, is the point of interaction between all existences and reality. All probabilities flow through it, though one of our moment points may be experienced as centuries, or as a breath, in other probable realities of which we are a part.

o4rmrtty

All kinds of time–backward and forward–emerge from the basic unpredictable nature of consciousness, and are due to’series’ of significances.

contrary to DARWINISTic belief, MATHEMATICALLY…

…Enormous time spans (in the millions of years, say) will not aid in the chance formation of even the chemical precursors to life–the protein or nucleic acid molecules–but will instead   make their creation even less likely. For with time, the even distribution or equilibrium of matter increases, moving it away from the ordered sequences necessary to support life. Scientifically, in the closed system of our universe, the second law of thermodynamics and entropy eventually conquer all.

n7en

Nor can solar energy be thought of as the agent that directly turned nonliving matter into its living counterpart; in those terms, life required its inter-mediate molecules, which sunlight is not able to construct. Life needs protein in order to “be”, and to sustain it through metabolism–then it can use solar energy! Darwin’s theory that life arose by chance poses a basic contradiction: What made the protein that sustains the processes of life, before that life was present to make the protein?

nnnnnnn5ny

Many times in laboratory studies, substances called proteinoids (often misleadingly defined in dictionaries as “primitive proteins”) have been observed forming from amino acids, which are sub units of proteins. Some researchers think of proteinoids as the forerunners of the protein that life needs to ride true biological proteins and do not lead to life. I strongly object to being told that dead matter turns itself into living matter. Just how does this transformation come about?

A true Darwinist would find the statement “survival of the fittest,” to be anathema.

Psychic and religious ideas, then, despite many drawbacks, are far more important in terms of ‘evolution’ than is recognized. And I am telling you that so-called evolution and religion are closely connected. Consciousness always creates form, and not the other way around.

a734

We are biologically connected, chemically connected with the Earth that we know. How is it that as living creatures we’re made up of ingredients–atoms of iron, molecules of water, for instance–from a supposedly dead world? In the scientific view we’re utterly dependent upon that contradictory situation. No one denies the amazing structure or design of our physical universe, from the scale of subatomic particles on “up” (regardless of what cosmological theory is used to explain the universe’s  beginning). The study of design as one of the links between “living” and “nonliving” systems would certainly be a difficult challenge–but a most rewarding one, I think–for science. I have little idea of how the work would be carried out. Evidently it would lead from biology through microbiology to physics with, ultimately, a search that at  least approached electromagnetic energy units and units of consciousness. Both classes of “particles” are in actuality nonphysical; as best words can note, they have their realities on scales so minute that we cannot hope to detect then through our present technology.

ath5

Yet here we run into irony and paradox: Any scientist who considered the existence of electromagnetic energy units and units of consciousness would be called a heretic by his more conventional colleagues, for he would be acknowledging the possibility that all matter, being made up of such conscious entities, was living. From that viewpoint, at least, there would be no link through design to be discovered.

as6

I think it very interesting and revealing that several millennia before Darwin, man himself began playing the role of a designer within the framework of nature, through his selective breeding of animals and his hybridization of plants. These activities certainly represent evolution through conscious intent, guided by the same creature who insists that no sort of consciousness could have been responsible for the origin or development of “life,” let alone the “dead” matter of his/her planet. Not only that: We read that even now in his/her laboratories man or woman is trying hard to create some of that life itself. This is always done, of course, with the idea that the right combination of simple ingredients (water, methane, ammonia, ethanol.) in the test tube, stimulated by the right kind of energy under just the right conditions, will automatically  produce life. It’s confidently predicted that eventually at least one such experiment will succeed. I have yet to see in those accounts anything about the role consciousness will play in this truly miraculous conversion of dead matter into that of living. Perhaps those involved in the experiments fear that the idea of consciousness will impugn the scientific “purity” of their work.

 

Compare the second law of the inner universe with the second law of thermodynamics of our “Camouflage” physical sciences

Both deal with energy, yet to me they’re opposites. At the same time I see them as linked through our distorted perception of that inner reality, that “the so-called laws of our camouflage universe do not apply to inner universe. The three laws of thermodynamics, and how they define energy/heat relationships in our universe.

ttv

There are no closed systems, energy is constantly exchanged between then, regardless of whether such transfers can be detected. The second law of thermodynamics, on the other hand, tell us that our universe is a closed system–and that it’s fated to eventually run down because the amount of energy available for useful work is always decreasing, even though the supply of that energy is constant. A measure of this unavailable energy is called entropy.

tt3r

“Energy transformation” I can best express it intuitively: In physics, that well-known second law of thermodynamics may usually be so reliable for us, distorted as it is, just because of our limited physical interpretation as mediated by the central nervous system.

tefv

At the same time, it’s worth noting that the second law of thermodynamics is still questioned by some theoreticians–the idea being that it’s impossible to prove a scientific “truth” in each of an unlimited number of instances.

Souls in terms of Value Fulfillment to Cellular Growth in Physical Reality.

According to my interpretation of this sentence, it stops short of telling us that in our reality all species–man, animals, and plant life (and viruses and bacteria too, for that matter)–developed from a single primordial living source. Evolutionary theory maintains that such a source spontaneously came into being, riding upon various protein molecules (or certain other kinds of molecules) that had themselves chemically–and miraculously–evolved out of nonliving matter, then demonstrated the ability to duplicate themselves.

pro,

Proteins, for instance, are very complex chains of amino acids, and consist of nitrogen, oxygen, hydrogen, carbon, and or certain other elements. They exist in great variety in all animal and vegetable matter; in the body each protein supports a very definite function. But the the view that all life had a common origin, that by pure chance it originated on the earth–just once–without the aid of God, or any sort of designer, is today accepted by most scientist in biology and related disciplines. Such thinking stems from the work done in the 19th century by the English naturalist Charles Darwin and Alfred Wallace.

p897o

I believe that at most the “facts of evolution” make up a working hypothesis–or unproven proposition–only, for many of evolution’s tenets, especially those involving energy/entropy are open to serious challenge. There’s plenty of evidence around for changes occurring within species, but the “upward” transmission of one species into another has not been scientifically proven from the index fossil record, nor has it been experimentally verified. The arguments about evolution can get very technical.

One universe alone is basically nonsensical

Our reality must be seen in its relationship to others. Otherwise we are always caught in question like ‘How did the universe begin?’ or ‘When will it end?’ All systems are constantly being created.  There is no closed systems and the backward and forward, inward and outward motion of time are real.

“Camouflage” refers not only to our physical world as one of the forms( or camouflages) taken by basic reality, but to another kind ot time as well–the medium of successive moments the outer ego is used to, and in which our ordinary world exists.

hwh

“Electromagnetic Energy” units, exist just below the range of physical matter, and accrete in response to emotional intensity; eventually, they form physical objects.

“Conscious units” or ‘units of consciousness” Are not units of particles. There is a basic unit of consciousness that, expressed, will not be broken down.

 

A convergence, of the realities of science, nature, religion and, of course, mysticism.

By mysticism I mean simply the institutional penetration of our camouflage reality to achieve deeper understandings relative to our physical and mental environments. No matter what our individual orientations may be, collectively we do have overall purposes in the world we’ve created. This realization alone can be a transforming one; it can be a , most useful one in practical, everyday life as well. Within that sort of framework, the evolution in whatever way it may concern the development of ideas, planets, creatures, or anything else–make sense.

In science and religion we know little about our world and universe

…Its origins, and its amazing variety of forms, both “living” and “nonliving.” Our own limitations may have something to do with our attitudes. Be careful about believing science or religion when either one tells us it can explain our world, for each of those disciplines ignores too much. No matter what the source of this camouflage reality may be, our conscious lack of knowledge and understanding as we manipulate within it, through naive realism or any other system of belief or perception, ought to make us humble indeed; all arrogance should be transcended as we become more and more aware of the limitless beauty, complexity, and mystery that surrounds us, and of which we are a part. I don’t think it all came through chance. The mind can ask too many questions to be satisfied with mechanistic explanations, and nurturing that characteristic of dissatisfaction alone may be one of the most valuable contributions.

o8854

To me, even “ordinary” linear knowledge as it accumulates through the next century or two, not to mention over longer spans of time, is certain to severely modify or make obsolete many concepts about origins and evolution that today are dispensed by those in authority–and which most people accept unthinkingly.

or4imr

For some years now, organized religion as a whole has been suffering from loss of faith and members, stripped of its mysteries by science, which, with the best of intentions, offer in religion’s place a secular humanism–the belief that one doesn’t need blind faith in a god in order to be morally concerned for the common welfare; paradoxically, however, this concern is most of the time expressed in religious terms, or with religious feeling. Yet science too has experienced many failures in theory and technology, and knows a new humility; at least partly because of these failures, anti-intellectualism has grown noticeably in recent years. How technology and religion have found a way to coexist, helping each other and others to grow and develop. Science frequently tries to explain the gaps that religion has been unable to explain, and religion has done so in kind of science. This tandem has maintained both parts of the spectrum from the smallest atom to the biggest technology companies.

omermrdu5

I certainly am not turned on to realize that a major religion, for instance, teaches the “facts” of man’s basically corrupt and sinful nature; surely a religion in the best sense can offer beliefs superior to those! At the same time, I take note of the latest efforts of biological researchers to explain how, millions of years ago, a primitive DNA molecule could begin to manufacture the protein upon which life “rides,” and thus get around the contradiction: What made the protein that sustains the processes of life, before that life was present to make the protein? The scientist involved hope the new hypothesis will survive further tests and become “fact,” thus giving clues to the riddles of origins and evolution. How does one deal with new facts that undermine old facts, in whatever field of endeavor? Do we say that reality has changed? Upon examination, facts give.

Man appeared in several different ages–not from an animal ancestor in the way generally supposed

Their were men/women-animals, but they were not our stock. They did not “lead” to anything. They were species in their own right.

There were animal-men/women. The terms are for our convenience. In some species the animal-like tendencies predominated, in others the manlike and womanlike tendencies did so: Some were more like men and women, some more like animals. The Russian steppes had a particular giant-sized species. Some also i believe in Spain–that area.

a6j

There is considerable confusion, for that matter, as to geological ages as they are understood. Such species existed in many of these ages. Man and woman, as we think of him or her, shared the earth with the other creatures just mentioned. In those terms so-called modern man and woman, with our skull structure and so forth, existed alongside of the creatures now supposed to be his/her ancestors.

There was some rivalry among these groups as well as some cooperation. Several species, say, of modern man and woman died out. There was some mating among these groups–that is, among the groups in existence at any given time.

a7k

The brain capacities of our particular species have always been the same. Many of the man/woman-animal groups had their own communities. To us they may seem to have been limited, yet they combined animal and human characteristics beautifully, and they used tools quite well. In a manner of speaking they had the earth to themselves for many centuries, in that modern man and woman did not compete with them.

Both the man/women-animals and the animal-men/women were born with stronger instincts. They did not need long periods of protection as infants, but in animal fashion were physically more agile at younger ages than, say, human infants.

a64uj

The earth has gone through entire cycles unsuspected by our scientists. Modern man and woman, then, existed with other manlike and womanlike species, and appeared in many different places on the earth, and at different ages.

There were then also animal-men/women and man/women-animal civilizations of their kinds, and there were complete civilizations of modern man and woman, existing [long] before the ages now given for, say, the birth of writing(in 3100 b.c.)

Verbal difficulties with the definition of life

Because of the psychological strength of preconceived notions. Our kind of conscious mind is splendid and unique. It causes us, however, to interpret all other kinds of life according to our own specifications and experiences.

There is no such thing , in our terms, as nonliving matter. There is simply a point that we recognize as having the characteristics that we have arbitrarily ascribed to life, or living conditions. For there is no particular point at which life was inserted into nonliving matter.

d7

If we must speak in terms of continuity, which I regret, then in those terms we could say that life in the physical universe, on our planet, “began” spontaneously in a given number of species at the same time. Words do nearly forsake me, the semantic differences are so vast. In those terms there was a point where consciousness through intent, impressed itself into matter. That “breakthrough” cannot be logically explained, but only compared at once, that became a medium for life as we define it. It had nothing to do with the propensity of certain kinds of cells to reproduce–[all cells are] imbued with the set the conditions in which life was possible as we think of it; and at that imaginary, hypothetical point, all species became latent. The inner pulsations of the invisible universe reached certain intensities that “impregnated” the entire physical system simultaneously. That illumination was everywhere then at every point aware of itself, and of the conditions formed by its presence.

eeem,

At the same time, Electromagnetic Energy units became manifest. The universe expands as an idea does, and so the visible universe sprang into being in the same manner. The same energy that gave birth to the universe is, in those terms, still being created. The Electromagnetic Energy units contain within themselves the latent knowledge of all of the various species that can emerge under those conditions. It is according to our relative position. We can say that it took untold centuries for Electromagnetic Energy units to “initially” combine, forming classifications of matter and various species and of the entire environment. In those terms the environment forms the species and the species form the environment. There were fully developed men and women–that is, of full intellect, emotion, and will–living at the same time, in our terms, as those creatures supposed to be man’s and woman’s evolutionary ancestors

fg

However, as we begin to question the nature of time itself, then the “when” of the universe is beside the point. The motion and energy of the universe still comes from within. I certainly realize that this is hardly a scientific statement–yet the moment that All That Is conceived of a physical system it was invisibly created, endowed with creativity, and bound to emerge [into physical reality].

eeff

There is a design and a designer, but they are so combined, the one within the other, the one within and one without, that it is impossible to separate them. The creator is within its creations, and the creations themselves are gifted with creativity. The world comes to know itself, to discover itself, for the planner left room for divine surprise, and the plan was nowhere foreordained. Nor is there anywhere within it anything that corresponds to our “survival of the fittest” theories.

“Theory of Evolution”, has caused unfortunate beliefs.

For how can you look at ourselves with self-respect, with dignity or with joy, if we believe that we are the end product of forces in which the fittest survive? Being the fittest implies those given most to what would appear to be murderous intent–for we must survive at the expense of our fellows, be you leaf, frog, plant or animal.

We do not survive through  cooperation, according to that theory, and nature is not given a kind or creative intent, but a murderous one. And if we see ourselves as the end result of such a species, then how can we expect goodness or merit or creativity for oneself, or from others? How can we believe that we live in a safe universe when each species exists because it survives through claw, if it must hunt and kill out of murderous intent, as implied in the theories of evolution and of reality itself?

bio67

So when we think of our beliefs and who we are, we must also think of our species, and how we are told our species came to be. For your private beliefs are also based upon those theories, and the beliefs, culturally, of our times.

i4i

It is seldom that we really question our biological origins, what they mean, and how we interpret them. Are we physically composed of murderous cells, then each spontaneously out to get the others? If so, our physical being is more miraculous a product. If our cells did not cooperate so well, we would not be reading these words.As you read this, the cooperative, creative adventure within our bodies continues, and in terms of continuity reaches back prehistorically and into future. Because consciousness creates form with joy, there is no murder that you have not projected out of misunderstanding and ignorance of the nature of the consciousness.

nrns

Roots do not struggle to exist. One species does not fight against the others to live. Instead creativity emerges, and cooperatively the environments of the world is known and planned by all the species. What appears to be struggle and death to us at those levels is not, now, for the experience of consciousness itself is different there, as is the experience or our own cellular composition.

i67u

Our bodies knows how to walk. The knowledge is built in and acted upon. The body knows how to heal itself, how to use its nourishment, how to replace its tissues–yet in our terms the body itself has no access to the kind of information the mind possesses. Being so ignorant, how does it perform so well?

h66g

If it were scientifically inclined, the body would know that such spontaneous performance was impossible, for science cannot explain the reality of life itself in its present form, much less its origins. Consciousness within the body knows that its existence is within the body’s context, and apart from it at the same time.

Science wants only what Science believes

While postulating that life is basically meaningless or goal-less [DNA doesn’t care what its host looks like], science fights awfully hard to convince everyone that it’s right–thus attaching the most rigid kind of meaning or direction to its professional views! At the same time, in mathematical and biological detail much too complicated to go into, the author of many a scientific work favor of evolution has ended up by undermining, unwittingly, I’m sure, the very themes he or she so devoutly believes in.

nere

The brain’s great creative neocortex is held especially accountable for problems that may lead to humanity’s self-destruction.

the ordinary concept of evolution becomes very complex if one chooses to make it so

The process can be discussed from many viewpoints.

The members of each “pressure group,” whatever its orientation, want to see things their way–very human performances. Once it’s created, each school of thought takes upon itself, and often with great intellectual and emotional arrogance, the right to advance its own belief systems in the world at the expense of its rivals.

To imagine that an entire environment is an accident is intellectually outrageous and emotionally sterile.

To a molecule of DNA the conventional notion of evolution

Could such an entity grasp that idea, or even want to-might be hilarious indeed, given its own enhanced time scheme. Actually it would be more to the point if perhaps with the aid of hypnosis and or visualization, we tried from our giant-sized viewpoints to touch such minute consciousnesses with our own, and so extend our knowledge in unexpected ways. Some probable realities might be reached–potential conscious achievements that I think are already within the reach of certain gifted individuals. We each create our own reality, with all that that implies.

pt5,l

Our real challenge is knowing our own species, and others, may lie in our cultivating the ability to understand the interacting consciousnesses involved, rather than to search only for physical relationships supposedly created through evolutionary processes. The challenge is profound. The consciousnesses of numerous other species may be so different from ours, and miss the essences of others entirely. To give just two examples, at this time we are surely opaque to the seemingly endless search for value fulfillment that consciousness displays through the  “lowly” lung fish and the “unattractive” cockroach. Yet those entities are quite immune to our notions of evolution, and they explore time contexts in ways far beyond our current human comprehension. As far as science knows, both have existed with very little change for over 300 million years.

The Great biochemical differences among human beings at the molecular level

The  genetic structures of numerous proteins have been shown to be much more varied than was suspected. Even more pronounced are the differences among proteins between species. Each of us is seen to be truly unique–but at the same time those studying biological Darwinistic beliefs. Instead, I think that what has been learned so far offers only possible variations within the idea of evolution, for the talk is still about the origin of life out of non-life, followed by the climb up the scale of living complexity; most evolutionists think that natural selection, or the survival of the fittest, still applies.

bio56j

Any role that consciousness might play in such biochemical processes isn’t considered, of course, nor is there any sort of mystical comprehension of what we’re up to as creatures. No matter how beautifully man works out a hypothesis of theory, he still does so with out any thought of consciousness coming first. Through the habitual (and perhaps unwitting) use of naive realism, he projects his or her own basic creativity outsides of himself or herself or any of his or her parts. He also projects upon cellular components like genes and DNA learned concepts of “protection” and “selfishness”: DNA is said to care only about its own survival and “knowledge,” and not whether its host is man, plant, or animal. Only man would think to burden such pervasive parts of his or her own being, and those of other entities, with such negative concepts! I don’t believe the allegations, how could the very stuff controlling inheritance not care about the nature of what it created? DNA doesn’t deserve to be regarded in such a fashion, no matter how much we push it around through recombination techniques.

bioi

DNA has motives for its physical existence [units of consciousness or conscious units ] that considerably enlarge upon its assigned function as the “master molecule” of life as we know it. Deoxyribo-nucleic acid may exist within its host, whether man, plant, or animal–or bacteria or virus–in cooperative altruistic ventures with its carrier that are quite beside purely survival ones.Some of those goals, such as the exploration of concepts like the moment point, or probabilities [and reincarnation ], really defy our ordinary conscious perception. In terms we can more easily grasp, social relationships within and between species maybe explored, starting at that biochemical level and working “upward.” Basically, then the postulated deadly struggle for survival of the fittest, whether between man and molecules, say, or among members of the same species. We have consciousness seeking to know itself in as many ways as possible, while being aware all of the time, in those terms, of the forth-coming “death” of its medium of expression, DNA, and of DNA’s host, or “physical machine.”

flesh and blood creatures’, interior aspects of perception have physical counterparts.

But material awareness and bodily response to it would be impossible were it not for these internal web-works. I am saying that all exterior events, including our own bodies with their insides, all objects, all physical materialization, are the outside structure of inside ones that are composed of interior sound and invisible light, interwoven in electro-magnetic patterns.

igb;

Beneath temporal perception, then each object and event exists in these terms, in patterns that interact with each other. On a physical level we seem to be separated from everything it seems to be and it is an assumption that we usually take for granted.

There are few verbal equivalents for some explanations.

Naive Realism.

The philosophical concept could be considered any time, since proponents believe that it’s unconsciously involved in practically all of our daily activities. Simply put, naive realism teaches that our visual and bodily senses several to us an external world as it really is–that we “see” actual physical objects, for instance.  Disbelievers say that neurological evidence contradicts this theory; that from the neurological standpoint the events in our lives and within our bodies depend upon interpretation by the brain, that we can know nothing directly, but only experience transmitted through–and so “colored” by–the central nervous system. The perceptual time lag, caused by the limited speed of light, is also involved in objections to naive realism, or some mind-brain idea very much like it, is habitually used whether we’re considering evolution within a time-oriented camouflage universe, painting a picture, or running a house hold. And after many centuries, the debate over the relationship between mind and brain continues, if first the existence of the mind is even agreed upon!

b752h

We actually create the typical camouflage patterns of our own universe in the same manner that we form a pattern with our breath in a glass pane. I do not necessarily mean that we are the creators of the universe. I am merely saying that we are the creators of the physical world as we know it–and here in, lies a vast tale.

The precognitive abilities of a species

Biologists don’t see any evidence of it in their work. In evolutionary theory, such attributes violate not only the operation of chance mutation and the struggle for existence, but our ideas of consecutive time [which is associated with “naive realism”–the belief that things really as we perceive them to be]. Not that scientifically the concept of a far more flexible time–even a backward flow of time–is all that new. In atomic physics, for example, no special meaning or place is given to any particular moment, and fundamentally the past and future all but merge in the interactions of elementary particles–thus  at least approaching simultaneous time. At that level there’s change, or value fulfillment, but no evolution. To my way of thinking, if there’s value fulfillment there’s consciousness, expressed through Conscious Units, or units of consciousness.

srr

But to some degree many scientists outside physics regard such esoteric particle relationships as being of theoretical interest mainly within that discipline; the concepts aren’t seen as posing any threat to biology, zoology, or geology, for instance, nor do they tinker with naive realism. The biological sciences can cling to mechanistic theories of evolution by employing the conservative physics of cause and effect to support their conclusions while being aware, perhaps, of tenets of particle physics. Such “casual analysis” then proves itself over and over again. I’ve read the theory of evolution is used to prove the theory of evolution.

s5t

I find it very interesting, then, to consider that the theory of evolution is a creature of our coarser world of “physical” construction. Our ordinary, chosen sensual perceptions move us forward, within “the time system that the species adopted.” The moment point encompasses the seeming paradox through which consecutive time can be allowed expression within simultaneous time.

The experiments with man-animals didn’t work out

But the ghost memories of those probabilities still linger in our biological structure. The growth of ego-consciousness by itself set up both challenges and limitations. For many centuries there was no clear-cut differentiation between various aspects of man and animal, there were innumerable species of man-in-the-making in our terms.

Evolution does not exist as we think of it, in any kind of one-line ape-to-man sequence. No other species developed in that manner, either. Instead, there are parallel developments. Our time perception shows us but one slice of the whole cake, for instance.

2fd4

In thinking in terms of consecutive time, however, evolution does not march from the past into the future. Instead, precognitively the species is aware of those changes it wants to make, and from the “future” it alters the “present” state of the chromosomes and genes to bring about in the probable future the specific changes it desires. Both above and below our usual conscious focus, then, time is experienced in an entirely different fashion and is constantly manipulated, as we physically manipulate matter. If you’re wanting more information on how the human brain perceives time and the passage of time, take a look into and read the latest on slowing-down time perception, and how to slow time down to enjoy those moments that matter most to you.

Charles Darwin spent the last years, proving his theory of evolution, yet it had no real validity

It has a validity within very limited perspectives only; for consciousness does, indeed, evolve form. Form does not evolve consciousness. It is according to when we come into the picture, and what we choose to observe. Consciousness did not come from atoms and molecules scattered by chance through the universe.

In terms of the simultaneous nature of time and existence, know that the theory of evolution is as beautiful a tale as the theory of Biblical creation. Both are quite handy, and both are methods of telling stories, and both might seem to agree within their own systems, and yet, in larger respects they cannot be realities.

e353g

Within us, concepts and actions are one. We recognize this, but our mental lives are often built around concepts that , until recently, have been considered very modern and very ‘in,” such as the idea of evolution. In actuality, life bursts apart in all directions as consciousness does. There is no one steady stream of progress.

But why are the “expert dreamers” not more progressive?” We realize that our own progress as a civilization will, in our terms, come to a halt unless we advance in other directions. This is what our civilization is learning that we cannot rape our planet, that life did not begin as some isolated [substance] that in the great probabilities of existences met another [similar substance], and another, and then another, until a orgy, neither does consciousness exist as simple organisms separated by vast distances, but as a complicated gestalt.

 

The mind cannot be detected by our instruments

The mind does not take up space, and yet the mind is the value that gives power to the brain. The mind expands continuously both in individual terms and in terms of the species as a whole, and yet the mind takes up neither more nor less space, whether it be the mind of a flea or a man.

srr

The universe has no more to do with space in our terms than does the dream world.

Our ideas of space is some completely erroneous conception of an emptiness to be filled. Things–planets, stars, nebulae–come into being in this physical [camouflage] universe of ours, according to our latest theories, and this universe expands–pushed so that its sides bulge, so to speak the outer galaxies literally bursting into nowhere. True inner space is to the contrary vital energy, itself alive, possessing abilities of transformation, forming all existences, even the camouflage reality with which we are familiar, and which we attempt to probe so ineffectively.

s54541

This basic universe of which I speak expands constantly in terms of intensity and quality and value, in a way that has nothing to do with our idea of space. The basic universe beneath all camouflage does not have an existence in space at all, as we envision it. Space is a camouflage. This tinge of time is an attribute of the physical camouflage form only, and even then the relationship between time and ideas, and time and dreams, is a nebulous one, although in some instances parts of the inner universe may be glimpsed from the camouflage perspective of time; only, however, a small portion.

syjm

If the dream world, the mind, and inner universe do exist, but not in space, and if they do not exist basically in time, though they may be glimpsed through time, then our question will be: In what medium or in what manner do they exist, and without time, how can they be said to exist in duration? The basic universe exists behind all camouflage universes in the same manner, and taking up no space, that the mind exists behind the brain. The brain is a camouflage pattern. It takes up space. It exists in time, but the mind takes up no space and does not have its basic existence in time. Our camouflage universe, on the other hand, takes up space and exists in time.

Nevertheless the dream world, the mind, and the basic inner universe do exist, in what we can call the value climate of psychological reality. This is the medium. This takes the place of what we call space. It is a quality which makes all existences and consciousness possible. It is one of the most powerful principles behind or within the vitality that itself composes form itself all other phenomena.

sd333df

One of the main attributes of this value climate is spontaneity, which shows itself in the existence of the only sort of time that has any real meaning–that of the spacious present.

The spacious present does  not contradict the existence of a future as we conceive it. Now this may appear contradictory, but later I hope that we will understand this more clearly. The spacious present, while existing spontaneously, while happening simultaneously, still contains within it qualities of duration.

ss534v

Growth in our camouflage universe often involves the taking up of more space. Actually, in our inner universe, growth exists in terms of value or quality expansion, and does not–Imply any sort of space expansion. Nor does it imply, as growth does in our camouflage universe, a sort of projection into time.

If growth is one of the most necessary laws of our camouflage universe, value fulfillment corresponds to it in the inner-reality universe.

dtmdf

The so-called laws of our camouflage universe do not apply to the inner universe. They do not ever apply to other camouflage planes. However, the laws of the inner universe apply to all camouflage realities. Some of these basic laws have counterparts known and accepted in various camouflage realities. There are diverse manifestations of them, and names given to them.

These fundamental laws are followed on many levels in our own universe. So far the one given is value fulfillment. In our physical universe this rule is followed as physical growth. The entity follows it through the cycle of [simultaneous] reincarnations. The species of mankind, and all other species in our universe on our particular horizontal plane, follow this law [value fulfillment] under the auspices of evolution. In other camouflage realities, this law is carried through in different manners, and it is never ignored.

c555

The second law of the inner universe is energy transformation. This occurs constantly. Energy transformation and value fulfillment, both existing within the spacious present [or at once], add up to a durability that is at the same time spontaneous, and simultaneous.

c53753

Our third law is spontaneity, and despite all appearances of beginning and end, of death and decay, all consciousness exist in the spacious present, in a spontaneous manner, in simultaneous harmony; and yet within the spacious present there is also durability.

e42f

Durability if our fourth law. Durability within the framework of the spacious present would not exist were it not for the laws of value fulfillment and energy transformation. These make duration within the spacious present not only possible but necessary.

 

 

 

 

Practical reality is made up of events that seem entirely or relatively complete

While from another dimension it is apparent that our recognized events are simply portions of larger ones. Moving naturally, in a realm of greater dimensional events.

Seeing chunks of time, and also to some considerable extent view the probable actualizations of events and times.

2rtv4

An artist does the same thing in different terms, when he or she imagines the probable versions that a painting, or a book or a sculpture, for example, might take. The artist does not usually understand, however, that those probable art productions do literally exist; he or she perceives only the final, physically chosen work. Speaking simply, some of us are able to hold intact the nature of our own identities while following patterns of probable realities in which we also play a part.

In ways too difficult to explain, our probabilities are connected by certain themes, intents, purposes. Some of these appear as subsidiary interests in our own lives, for example. Others may well be recognized by us are unaware of them.

ssddfe3344

Consciousness is not dependent upon form, yet it always seeks to create form.

In a strange fashion, the word ‘invisibility’ has meaning only in our kind of world. There is no such thing as true psychological invisibility. The physical world is dependent upon the relationship of everything from electrons to molecules to mountain to oceans, and in the scheme of reality these are all interwoven with exquisite order, spontaneity, and a logic beyond any with which we are familiar.

ssswwamn

The counterpart idea is merely a small attempt to hint at that interrelationship–an interrelationship that of course includes all species and forms of life.

Lead us into a larger, more expansive way of looking at ourselves and the world

 

Several levels of consciousness are appealed to at once. The threads of human work are interwoven so that various portions of our consciousness are sent out, so to speak, on separate journeys of thought and imagination. Yet these side trips are also related. They intertwine, not only through the psychic organization, but because of the great uniting nature within the consciousness of each human.

Each human has journeyed to a new position within the psyche. Each person sets out upon a psychic pilgrimage through the unknown of his or her own consciousness and experience. No one can predict the destination.

yhshs

To the extent that we do not know oneself, we do not know our husband, or wife, or mother or father. To the extent that we do not know oneself, we do not know what God is. To the extent that we do not know oneself, we do not know what nature is. The unknown reality exists to the extent that we do not travel joyfully through the intimate lands of the psyche, to the extent that we do not directly experience our life as original, but accept labels put on it by others. The  unknown reality exists as a challenge an exciting endeavor, as each individual becomes consciously awake of intimate subjective feeling. Do not overlay the personal daily aspects of our life with preconceived ideas about who we are, what we are, where we are, why we are. Become aware of the original nature of any given moment as it exists for you.

Forget what we have been told about time and space. Refuse to accept ideas that limit the dimensions of our own natural being.The unknown reality is what we are.

The Unknown remains nebulous because it is consciously UNREALIZED

Exercise our own intuitive and mental capacities from a different viewpoint.

ursn

The unknown will become known to the extent that we form new questions, and forget the old frameworks in which answers and myth were automatically given in response. If the unknown is discovered, then many old questions will be seen as relatively meaningless, formed not after any intimate encounter with basic issues, but in response to old dogmas.

We are the unknown, to the extent that we do not recognize, realize, or experience the many facets of our own being. As always, I say that the answers lie within oneself, not in the exterior world.

e4v

Clues may indeed be found in the exterior world, however, because the exterior conditions mirror so perfectly our inner, individual and mass experience.

Do not look for neat answers or tidy solutions, for when we do our explanations and theories will always be too small. There is always an unknown reality to some extent, for the miracle of our being works outside of the kind of explanations that we so often seem to require.

fl76,

Our ready answers end up limiting our own experience, because we try to fit our subjective behavior into the cramped boot of preconceived ideas. Our experience creates new questions in the same way that a painter creates new paintings.

Answers pertaining to Atlantis, the Bermuda Triangle,UFO’s, and many other such questions. Those matters certainly seem pertinent in the framework of our experience and beliefs. We already have a great variety of explanations offered. Writers in many fields have produced books about such topics. By far the greater questions, however, are those pertaining to the unknown reality of the psyche, and those that relate to the kind of being who perceives in one way or another an Atlantis, A Bermuda Triangle, a UFO– for in greater terms, until we ask deeper questions about ourselves, these other experiences will remain mysterious. We cannot understand perceived events unless we understand who perceives them. We must learn more about the slant of our own consciousness before we are in a position to ask truly pertinent questions about the reality that we perceive.

Atlantis: ideas about the age of the earth are erroneous

There were intelligent human beings far earlier than is supposed; and because we assume a one-line kind of progression from an apelike creature to man, we ignore any evidence that shows to the contrary. There were highly developed human beings with elaborate civilizations, existing simultaneously with what we might call animal kingdoms–that is, more or less organized primeval animal tribes, possessing their own kind of ‘primitive’cultures.

Those animal kingdoms, some of them, utilized tools. Their senses were extremely acute, and their ‘cultures’ dealt with a kind of transmission of knowledge that made a highly complicated vocabulary unnecessary.

a4wv

Those species did not vie for domination of the earth, but simply shared the same general environment with the more sophisticated groupings beyond their own perimeters. There were many highly technical human cultures, but in our terms not on a global scale. The legend of Atlantis is actually based upon several such civilizations. No particular civilization is the basis, however. Apart from that, the legend as picked up, so to speak, by Plato was a precognition of the future probability, an image of an inner civilization of the mind actually projected outward into the future, where it would be used as a blueprint–the lost grandeur, as in other terms, Eden became the lost garden of paradise.

Some archaeological discoveries about the past are not discovered in our present because they do not exist yet. Now such concepts are difficult to explain, but in certain terms, the ruins of Atlantis have not been found because they have not been placed in past yet, from the future.

a2e

The future is probable. However, in our terms there are ruins of the civilizations that served as the ‘concrete’ basis for the one Atlantean legend. Those civilizations were scattered. the so-called ruins would not be found in any one place as expected. There are some beneath the Aegean Sea, and some beneath an offshoot of the Atlantic, and some beneath the Arctic, for the world had a different shape.

In far greater terms, time is simultaneous, so those civilizations exist along with our own. Our methods of dating the age of the earth are very misleading.

A4tb

In our terms, from our present we ‘plant’ images, tales, legends, ‘at any given time.’ That seem to come from the past, but are actually like ghost images from the future, for us to follow or disregard as we choose.

‘Atlantis and Garden of Eden’ are the same in that regard.

When we think that perhaps our species came from another planetary system, in time terms, then of course we are til dealing with old concepts. In our usual terms of thinking, the earth does not exist at all– not if we are considering it as a chunk of matter occupying a certain position in a physical cosmos. It is really futile to question whether the universe came from a big boom, or is constantly expanding, as an idea or a dream does. I am not saying the universe does not exist–only that it does not exist in the way that it seems to us

a44t.

All That Is creates its reality as it goes along. Each world has its own impetus, yet all are ultimately connected. The true dimensions of a divine creativity would be unendurable for any one consciousness of whatever import and so that splendor is infinitely dimensionalized worlds spiraling outward with each’moment’ of a cosmic breath; with the separation of worlds a necessity, and with individual and mass comprehension always growing at such a rate that All That Is multiplies itself at microseconds building both pasts and futures and other time scales we do not recognize. Each is a reality in itself, with its own potential as, and with no individual consciousness, however minute, ever lost.

a3rf2

In that kind of framework, Atlantis exists both in our past and future, a probable world that some of us will choose from a model placed in the past of our future- partially based upon fact, in our terms, but within its greatest validity lying in its possibilities.

Other Civilizations have gone our route

We call this our universe and our reality cause we form it. Within us also is the knowledge of other great experiments we are involved with. Some civilizations have failed, but the inhabitants of some earths have succeeded very well.

As we think of it, our future is not set. We can follow any road we choose, but–until we realize that as individuals we each form our own personal life, and have a part in the mass creation of reality–there is much learning ahead for us. This is a lesson we are meant to fully understand within physical reality.

wrths

We are meant to judge physical reality. We are meant to realize that it is a materialization of our thoughts and feelings and images, the the inner self forms that world. In our terms, we cannot be allowed to go into other dimensions until we have learned the great power of our thoughts and subjective feelings. So even when we think we destroy, we destroy nothing. And when we think we kill, we kill nothing. When we imagine that we can annihilate a reality, we can only assault it as we know it. The reality itself will continue to exist.

u d jd

Because we cannot follow a thought, we wonder where it has gone; has it fallen off some invisible cliff in our mind? But because we can no longer hold that thought in consciousness does not mean it no longer exists, that it does not have a reality of its own, for it does indeed. And if a world escapes us–if we cannot follow it and think is has been destroyed–then the same thing applies to the world as to the thought. It continues to live.

Our ideas of Atlantis are partially composed of future memories

They are psychic yearnings toward the ideal civilization–patterns within the psyche, even as each fetus has within it the picture of its own most ideal fulfillment toward which it grows.

Atlantis is a land that we want to inhabit, appearing in our literature, our dreams, and we fantasies, serving as an impetus for development. It is real and valid. In our terms it is not “yet” physical fact, but in some ways it is more real than any physical fact, for it is a psychic blueprint.

asaf3

It carries also, however, the imprint of our fears, for the tales say that Atlantis was destroyed. We place it in our past while it exists in our future. Not the destruction alone, but the entire pattern seen through the framework of our beliefs. Besides this, however, many civilizations have come and gone in somewhat the same manner, and the “myth” [of Atlantis] is based somewhat then on physical fact in our terms.

aaeddq

The species then moves into its own new houses. Atlantis is the  story of a future probability projected backward into an apparent past, of focus point for consciousness. At our level we think it is divided into areas of land and water–continents and oceans, islands and peninsulas, cities and woods–because that is all we perceive. our consciousness is tuned in to frequencies of perception that gives us that impression. A cat’s world, or an insect’s or a plant’s, are each far different, yet equally valid.

a43

As simply as I can explain, our planet is also “divided” into time and probability areas. So many civilizations exist at once, then, and there are certain bleed-throughs. in our terms some civilizations are real and perceivable, and some are not.

 

 

We move into new areas of the self all of the time

The species is now entering such a phase, a period in which it will come more into its own. Mankind will be entering its own new house, then–but the physical changes will be the results of interior ones and alterations in main lines of probabilities.

Christian theology sees the end of the world in certain terms with a grand God coming to reward the good and to punish the wicked. That system of belief allows for no other probability. Some see the end of the world coming as a greater disaster, or envision man finally ruining the planet. Others see periods of peace and advance–and each probability will happen “somewhere.” However, many, or their offspring will be involved in a new dimension of self-hood in which consciousness is fully explored and the potentials of the soul uncovered, at least to some extent.

imaxxmm

Human capabilities will be seen as what they are, and a great new period of development will occur, in which all concepts of self-hood and reality will be literally seen as “primitive superstition.” The species will actually move into a new kind of self-hood.

Theories of probabilities will be seen as practical, workable, psychological facts, giving leeway and freedom to the individual, who will no longer feel at the mercy of external events–but will realize instead that he or she is their initiator.

aweff

Now, we squeeze the great fruit of our self-hood into a tiny uneasy pulp, unaware of the sweetness of its juices or the variety of its seasons. We look at the outsides of ourselves, as if a peach were aware only of its skin. In the reality I foresee, people will become familiar with far greater aspects of themselves, and bring these into actualization. They will be in touch with their own decisions as they make them.

If they become ill, they will do so knowing they choose the condition in order to emphasize certain areas of development, or to minimize mothers. They will be aware of their options, consciously. The great strength and resiliency of the body will be much better understood; not because medical science makes spectacular discoveries–though it will–but because the mind’s alliance with the body will be seen more clearly.

3ttgf3

In this probability of which I speak, the species will begin to encounter the great challenge inherent in fulfilling the vast untouched potential of the human body and mind. In that probable reality, to which each of us belong to some extent, each persona will recognize his or her inherent power of action and decision, and feel an individual sense of belonging with the physical world that springs up in response to individual desire and belief.

 

We are not used to following our own thought processes.

We shut them off any time they do not conform to current beliefs about the nature of the self, or about reality in general. The deepest meanings of probabilities lie, however, precisely in their psychological import.

We have become so hypnotized by a one-level kind of thought that anything else seems impractical. We concentrate upon those decisions that we make, and disregard the processes involved. This has been carried to an extreme. Often we are so disconnected from those inner workings that our own decisions then appear to come from someplace else. We may be convinced that events happen to us, and are beyond our control, simply because we are so out of touch with oneself that we never catch the moments of our own decisions.

tsmt

Then we feel as if we are the pawns of fate, and the idea of probable actions seems like the sheerest nonsense. Each event seems inevitable. If this attitude is carried to excessive lengths, then it even appears that we have no hand at all in the making of our own reality. We will always feel oneself a victim.

The unknown reality is our psychic, spiritual and psychological one, and from it our physical experience springs.

cr35

That inner, all-pervasive existence become known to the extent that we grow more responsive to our own inner environment. This does not mean that we become entirely self-centered, blind to the rest of the world. It does not mean that we must meditate for hours, or study our own thought processes with such vigor that we ignore other activities. It simply means that we are aware of our own life as clearly as possible–in touch with our thought processes, aware of them but without overdue concern or over analysis. They are as much a part of our inner environment as trees are of our exterior world. There are different species of selves in the same fashion. There are different species of worlds. HZ

When we identify with only one particular level of our thought processes, however, the others–when we senses them–appear alien. We begin to feel threatened, determined to uphold our old ideas of selfhood. Plants grow many leaves. One leaf does not threaten the existence of others, and the plant is not jealous of its own foliage. So there is no need to protect our own individuality because it may send out other shoots into probable realities. This simply the self growing in different directions, spreading its seeds.

cjh,

It is obvious that when we move from one place to another we make alteration in space–but we alter time as well, and we set into motion a certain psychological impetus that reaches out to affect everyone we know. When a house is vacant all of the people in the neighborhood send out their own messages. To a certain extent any given inhabited area forms its own “entity.” This applies to the smallest neighborhood and to the greatest nation. Such messages are often encountered in the dream state. Empty houses are psychic vacancies that yearn to be filled. When we move, we move into other portions of our own selfhood.

 

Predicting behavior or events, are dealing with probabilities.

However,it seems to us that all action in the past is fixed and done, while behavior in the future alone is open to change–so the word “prediction” assume future action. Basically, the past is as a species, we are convinced that there is a one-line series of finished events behind us.

p00o

Time experience actually splashes out from the present to form an apparent past and future.

When we seemingly look backward into time, and construct a history, we do so by projecting our own prime series of events into the past as it is understood. Obviously we read the past from the present, but we also create it from the present as well. We accept certain data–our present recognized series of events–then use that series as a measuring stick, so to speak: It automatically rejects what does not fit. At certain levels of experience this make little difference. All data agree. No rough spots show.

We build smooth structures of beliefs, then look at reality using the beliefs like glasses–tinted ones. Opposing information will literally be invisible to us. It will be ignored or cast aside.

eetete

It has been fashionable to think in terms of straight-line evolution, for example. The accepted theory of evolution is highly simplistic. Our species did not come from one particular source. We have many cousins, so to speak. Some traces of that lineage remain in our time. However, when we look “backward” at the planet we actually try to predict behavior from the standpoint of the present.

We do this personally in our intimate lives to some degree also, as we view our earlier days. We blot out events that do not fit our present concept of oneself. They literally become nonexistent as far as we are concerned. In such fashion we block out aspects of our own reality–and consciously, at least, cut down on our choices.

e1

The species as we know it has within it, intrinsically, many abilities and characteristics that go unrecognized because we do not accept them as a part of our biological or spiritual heritage. Therefore they become latent and invisible, practically speaking. The same applies individually, when we deny ourselves the rich mixture of consciousness and experience that is available through a recognition of the manipulation of probable realities.

c2

We alter our experience in each instant, quite drastically. Each individual possesses far vaster opportunities for choice than are realized. We are denied tomorrow’s wisdom only because we believe time is a closed system. It is true that we are subject to birth and death, yet within that framework far greater dimensions of experience are possible than are usually experienced.

We are all counterparts of each other who are alive at any given earth time. By really understanding this we could come to terms with the ideas of brotherhood that religions have taught for so long.

 

 

Significant that we apply numbers to time…

But as thee are unrecognized spaces between numbers, there are unrecognized spaces (psychologically invisible) between or within moments, and some of the events of our bodies are ‘too small’ for us to follow, focused as we are in our prime series. These body events actually are ‘infinitesimal but infinite,’ following their own patterns that merge with ours.

ktykjyt

There are an infinite number of other ‘alternate’ compositions latent within the [first] note. They were quite as legitimate as the composition that were played, and added silent structure and pacing to the physically actualized music.

Link Logic and intuition:

This meditation uses both the logical, verbal part of your mind and the intuitive, visual part. By strengthening both parts of your mind and the connection between them, you can tap more of your personal power and enhance your ability to function on every level–psychically and rationally.

1. Before you begin, select a subject for your meditation. It should be something you can conceive of visually as well as verbally–an object, animals, place. You might choose something you’d like to gain insight into, although that’s not essential for this meditation to produce benefits. (Don’t choose a person, however.)

2. Sit in a place where you feel comfortable, and where you won’t be disturbed for at least ten minutes.

3. Closes your eyes and relax, using deep breathing exercises or whatever method you prefer.

4. When you feel calm and ready,bring to mind the word that expresses what you’ve opted to contemplate in this meditation: house, tree, lake, dog, tulip, chair, jacket, apple, or whatever you’ve chosen. Visualize the word itself, spelled out.

5. Hold the word in your mind for as long as you can.

6. When the letter begin to fade or your mind begins to wander, change to envisioning a picture of the object. See it as clearly as you can. Pay attention to details–shutters on the house, leaves on the tree, spots on the dog’s fur.

7. After a while shift back to seeing the world in your mind’s eye and hold this as long as possible.

8. Go back to picturing the object.

9. Continue shifting back and forth for ten minutes or so. Allow your mind to keep exploring the subject of your meditation in greater detail or expanding your observation of it more broadly.

10. notice feelings, insights, or impressions that arise during this process.

11. When you are ready, slowly bring your attention back to the present and open you eyes.

12. Record your experience in a journal, including any emotions, ideas, sensations, and/or information you received while meditating

Between each number in a given series is literally infinite space.

The infinitesimal becomes infinite.

In the same way the most infinitesimal self is infinite, and the most finite self, carried to the extremes of itself, is infinite. Each of us is part of an infinite self. That infinite self appears as a series of finite selves in our reality.

Beneath that perceived reality, however, each finite self, carried to its degree, is itself infinite: but there are different kinds of infinities. There are different varieties of psychological infinities that do not meet–that is that go off in their own infinite directions.

i67u

As long as we believe that as individuals we belong in any given series, we appear to ourselves as finite.

We think in terms of linear time, and the best we can do to imagine our deeper reality is to consider reincarnation in time. It is a matter of focus. We usually identify with the outside of ourselves, and with the outside of the world. We do not, for example, usually identify with the inside of our body with its organs, much less its cells or atoms–yet in that direction lies a certain kind if infinity.

ijtgj

If we would identify with our own psychological reality, following the inward structure of thoughts and feelings, we would discover an inward psychological infinity. These “infinities” would reach of course into both past or future, and into all probabilities–not simply straightforward into time, or backward.

There is literally an infinity in each moment we recognize, as numerically there is an “infinity” behind or within any prime number (3,97,863, etc) that we recognize.

iijed

There are infinite versions of oneself, but no one negates the others, and each is connected with the others, and aids and supports them. There are other kinds of psychological organizations also. In those term some have learned or is learning, to alternate a series–to bring information from one [neurological series] to another, so to speak.

However, none of this is apart from normal living.

The self can split off from itself without being less.It is NOT LIMITED.

This applies to all of us. Because we are usually so worried about preserving what we think of as our identity, we use terms like reincarnational selves or counterparts. If we would clearly see that there is no contradiction if I say that we are uniquely oneself, that our individuality has an indestructible validity that is never assailed, and when I also say that we are at the same time connected with other identities, each as sacredly inviolate as our own.

We are used to thinking of exterior organizational patterns. We might live in a city and a state and a country at one time, yet we do not think that our presence in one of these categories contradicts either of the other two. So we live amid psychic organizations, each having its own characteristics. We may consider oneself Indian though we live in America, or American though we live in Africa, or Chinese though we live in France, and we are quite able to retain our sense of individuality.

yhshs

So the psychic families, or families of consciousness, can be thought of as natives of inner countries of the mind, sharing heritages, purposes, and intents that may have little to do with the physical countries in which we live our surface lives. People are born in any month of the year in every country. All those in Norway are not born in January or August. In the same way, all the members of any given psychic family are spread across the earth, following inner patterns that may or may not relate to other issues as they are currently understood.

Certain families have a liking for certain months of birth, but no specific rules apply. There is indeed an inner kind of order that unites all of these issues; yet that inner order is not the result of laws, but of spontaneous creation, which flows into its own kinds of patterns. We see patterns at any given time and try to make laws of them.

fdukmf

I am trying to stretch our imaginations, and help us throw aside rigid concepts that literally blind us to the dimensions of our own reality. We are biologically equipped to perceive far more of that reality than we do.

We are not a miniature self, an adjunct to some superbeing, never to share fully in its reality. In those terms we are that superself–looking out of only one eye, or using one finger.

7hfg

Much of this is very difficult to verbalize. We are not subordinate to some giant consciousness. While we think in such terms, however. I must speak of reincarnational selves and counterparts, because we are afraid that if we climb out of what we think our identity is, then we will lose it.

The open flame, the source of cave heat, is evocative, and represents a closeness with the origins of light and life.

An open fire elicits certain responses from the cells that for instance, a furnace does not. the effect of the light plus the warmth on the skin is extremely healing. People sit by a fireplace in wintertime because it is unconsciously recognized that recuperative and therapeutic results occur. Simply put, the cells respond to fire-light in somewhat the same manner that flowers do to sunlight. The stimulation is much more than skin deep, however, and an open fire is cleansing. It even helps clear the blood.

f7n8h

Cavemen recognized this. I am not suggesting that we use our fireplaces instead of the furnace. I am saying that in wintertime there are definite health-value effects to be felt when we sit in front of an open fire. Two evenings a week would be quite effective.

mmmm8r

The proximity of so many trees also has considerable health value, and to those doing psychic or other creative work the effects are particularly conducive to a peaceful stat of mind. trees are great users and yet conservators of energy, and they automatically provide much vitality to areas in which they are plentiful. This is physically obvious in scientific terms. Besides that, however, the consciousnesses of trees are remarkably kind and enduring.

1wsxw

We think of dogs as friends of man, and we personify gods inhuman terms. We think of them sometimes as guardians. In those terms, now, trees are also guardians. They are attached to the people they know. You cannot put a leash on them and walk them around the block, yet trees form a protective barrier about, say, a home or a neighborhood. They are actively concerned. They have personalities–certainly to the same extent that dogs do, yet of an entirely different nature. They respond to us. The trees in a neighborhood are particularly friendly, strong, and protective, and they will help renew our energies.

cr66h

The air may be drier in a certain way. Ocean air is wet but it is healthy. River air is wet, but it may be healthy or unhealthy, according to the nature of the river, the land, and the attitude of the people. After a flood, the river air is felt to be a threat, and to many it is therefore unhealthy. Why do some people, after being flooded in one location, then move to another equally threatening environment.

 

The Borledim family deals primarily with parenthood.

These people are natural “earth parents.” that is they have the capacity to produce children who from a certain standpoint possess certain excellent characteristics. The children have brilliant minds, healthy bodies, and strong clear emotions.

While many people are working in specific areas, developing the intellect, for example, or the emotions of the body, these parents and their children produce offspring in which a fine balance is maintained.  No one aspect of ind or body is developed at the expense of another aspect.

nnojoj

The personalities possess a keen resiliency of both body and mind, and serve as a strong earth stock. It goes without saying that members of one family often marry into other families. Of course the same thing happens here. When this occurs new stability in inserted for this particular family acts as a source-stock, providing physical and mental strength. Physically speaking, these people often have many children, and usually the offspring do well in whatever area of life is chosen. Biologically speaking, they possess certain qualities that nullify “negative” codes in the genes. They are usually very healthy people, and marriage into this group can automatically end generations of so-called inherited weaknesses. ri,fm

These people (the Borledim) believe, then, in the natural goodness of sex, the body, and the family unit–however those attributes are understood in the physical society to which they belong. As a rule they possess an enchanting spontaneity, however, and all of their creative abilities go into the family group and the production of children. These are not rigid parents, though, blindly following conventions, but people who see family life as a fine living creative art, and children as masterpieces in flesh and blood. Far from devouring their offspring by an excess of overprotective care, they joyfully send their children out into the world, knowing that in their terms the masterpieces must complete themselves, and that they have helped with the underpainting.

sytkmtus

The Borledim are the stock that so far has always seen to it that our species continues despite catastrophes, and they are more or less equally distributed about the planet and in all nationalities. They are most like Sumari. They will usually seek fairly stable political situations in which to bear their children, as the Sumari will to produce art. They demand a certain amount of freedom for their children, however, and while they are not political activists, like the Sumari their ideas often spring to prominence before large social changes, and help initiate them. The one big difference is that the Sumari deal primarily with creativity and the arts, an often subordinate family life, while family thinks of offspring in the terms of living art; everything else is subordinated to that “ideal.”

,iydiy,

The Sumari of ten provide a cultural, spiritual, or artistic heritage for the species. This Borledim family provides a well-balanced earth stock–a heritage in terms of individuals. These people are kind, humorous, playful, filled with a lively compassion, but too wise for the “perverted” kind of compassion that breeds on other individuals weaknesses.

An Artist expects his paintings to be good–or, at least he or she should. These people expect their children to be well-balanced, healthy, spiritually keen, and so they are. We will find members of the Borledim family in almost any occupation, but the main consideration will be on the physical family unit.

rnsrns

These parents do not sacrifice themselves for the sake of their children. They understand too well the burden that is placed upon such offspring. Instead, the parents retain their own clear sense of identity and their individual characteristics, serving as clear examples to the children of loving, independent adults.

The Zuli family is involved mainly with the fulfillment of bodily activity.

These are the  athletes. In whatever field, they devote themselves to perfecting the capacities of the body, which in others usually lie latent.

rre

To some extent they serve as physical models. The vitality of creaturehood is demonstrated through the beauty, speed, elegance,and performance of the body itself. To some extent these people are perfectionists, and in their activities there are always hints of “super” achievement, as if even physically the species tries to go beyond itself. The members of this family actually serve to point out the unrealized capacity of the flesh–even as, for example, great Sumari artists might give clues as to the artistic abilities inherent, but not used, in the species as a whole. The members of this group deal, then, in performance. They are physical doers. They are also lovers of beauty as it is corporeally expressed.

cref3

Members of this (Zuli) family can often serve as models for the artist or the writer, but generally speaking they themselves transmit their energy through physical “arts” and performance. In our terms only, and historically speaking, they often appeared at the beginings of civilizations, where direct physical bodily manipulation within the environment was of supreme importance. Then, normal physical reactions were simply faster then they are now, even while normal body relaxation was deeper and more complete.

The Milumet family is composed of mystics.

Almost all of their energy is directed in an inward fashion, with no regard as to whether or not inner experience is translated in usual terms. These persons, for instance, may be utterly unknown, and usually are, for as a rule they care not a bit about explaining their interior activities to others–nor, for that matter, even to themselves. they are true innocents, and spiritual. They may be underdeveloped intellectually, by recognized standards, but this is simply because they do not direct their intellect to physical focus.

my7

Those belonging to this (Milumet) family will not be in positions pf any authority, generally speaking, for they will not concentrate that long on specific physical data. However, they may be found in our country precisely where we might not expect them to be: on some assembly lines that require simple repetitive action–in factories that do not required speed, however. They usually choose less industrialized countries, then, with a slower pace of life. They have simple, direct, childish mannerisms, and may appear to be stupid. They do not bother with the conventions.

myreb

Strangely enough, though, they may be excellent parents, particularly in less complicated societies than our own. In our terms, they are primitives wherever they appear. Yet they are deeply involved in nature, and in that respect they are more highly attuned psychically than most other people are.

Their private experiences are often of a most venturesome kind, and at that level they help nourish the psyche of mankind.

The Vold Family are primarily reformers.

They have excellent precognitive abilities, which of course means that at least unconsciously they understand the motion of probabilities. They can work in any field. In our terms it is as if they perceive the future motion or direction of an idea, a concept, or a structure. They then work with all of their minds to  bring the probability into physical reality.

rreei

In conventional terms they may appear to be great activists and revolutionaries, or they may seem to be impractical dreamers. They will be possessed by an idea of change and alteration, and will feel, at least, driven or compelled to make the idea a reality. They perform a very creative service as a rule, for social and political organizations can often become stagnant, and no longr serve the purposes of the large masses of people involved. Members of this (Vold) family may also initiate religious revolutions, of course. As a rule, however, they have one purpose in mind: to change the status quo in whatever the area of primary interest.

rdeg

It is already easy to see how the purpose of various families can intermesh, complement each other, and also conflict. Yet all in all, almost, they operate as systems of creative checks and balances.

The Tumold family is primarily devoted to healing.

This does not mean that these people may not be creative, or organizers, or teachers, such as those who have completed advanced yoga teacher training courses and learned about the benefits of yoga and its potential healing powers. But, it potentially means that the primary slant of their consciousness will be directed to healing. We might find them as doctors and nurses, while not usually as hospital administrators. However, they may be psychics, social workers, psychologists, artists, or in the religions. They may work of flowers shops. They may work on assembly lines, for that matter, but if so they will be healers by intent or temperament. If you’re looking into metaphysical healing powers for weight loss you could possibly check that site out for acupressure healing properties. I wish you well on getting to the weight you wish to!

CJMHH

I mention various professions or occupations to give clear examples, but a mechanic may belong to this Tumold group, or to any group. In this case the mechanic would have a healing effect on the customers, and he would fixing more than cars.

HHH5J

The healers might also appear as politicians, however, psychically healing the wounds of the nation. An artist of any kind, whose work is primarily meant to help, also belongs in this category. We will find some heads of state,and –particular in the past–some members of royal families who also belong to this group.

The Sumafi family, deals primarily with teaching.

The relationship with others if good, generally speaking. They may be gifted in any field, but their primary interest will be in passing on their knowledge or that of others. They are usually traditionalists, therefore, although they may be brilliant. In a way they are equally related to the family Gramada, and to the Sumari, for they stand between the organized system and the creative artist. They transmit “originality” without altering it, however, through the social structures.

I say that they(the Sumafi) do not alter the originality. Of course any interpretation of an event alters it, but generally they teach the disciplines while not creatively changing the content. As historians, for example, they pass down the dates of battles, and those dates are considered almost as immaculate facts, so that in the context of their training they see no point in questioning the validity of such information.

3kkk

In the Middle ages they faithfully copied manuscripts. they are custodians in a way. Again, there are infinite variations. Many music or art teachers belong in that category, where the arts are taught with a love of excellence, a stress upon technique–into which the artist, who is often a Sumari (although not always, by any means) can put his or her creativity.

The Gramada family, specializes in organization.

Sometimes its members follow immediately after a revolutionary social change. Their organizational tendencies are expressed in any area of life. They are behind art schools, for instance, though they may not be artists themselves. They may set up colleges, although they may or may not be scholars.

The founders of giant businesses often belong to this family, as do some politicians and statesmen. They are active, vital, and creatively aggressive. They know how to put other people’s ideas together. They often unite conflicting schools of thought into a more or less unifying structure. they are, then, often the founders of social systems. In most cases, for instance, our hospitals, school and religions, as organizations, are initiated by and frequently maintained by this group.

These people (the Gramada) have excellent abilities in putting together solitary concepts that might other wise go by the wayside. They are organizers of energy, directed toward effective social structures. They usually set up fairly stable, fairly reasonable governments, schools, fraternities, although they do not initiate the ideas behind those structures.

 

Sumari family have the capacity to reach out emotionally to others and empathize.

To some extent this feeling for humanity often deserves as an impetus for creative work.  Many of them also have a mystical sense of connection with nature. At the same time they can be relative isolationists, wanting to work in solitude.

cghjk

Various kinds of seemingly contradictory characteristics may appear, then. One Sumari may have many deeply rewarding personal relationships. Another might find friends a distraction. One Sumari might enjoy performing in front of an audience, while another might not even be able to bear the thought. Since each person is unique, the various Sumari characteristics will then appear quite differently. Some live in cities, basking in the emotional nearness of others, content with a few flowerpots for a reminder of nature’s beauty. Another might have a farm. In most cases, however, the slant of consciousness is primarily creative.

 

 

The Particular variations that one person might play are endless.

You cannot consciously begin to alter the framework of our life, unless we realize first of all that we form it.. The melody is our own. It is not inevitable, nor is it only tune that we can play.

To some extent we can actualize portions of our own unknown reality, and draw them into the experienced area of our life. There is an obvious relationship between one note and another in a musical composition. Now in terms of physical families and in larger terms of countries, there is a relationship between realities, which constantly change as the notes do. To some extent our reality is picked up by our contemporaries. they accept it or not according to the particular theme or focus of their lives.

comjmt

In those terms, we are not a part of any reality that is not our own. If we share it with others, it is because others are concerned with variations of the same theme. This applies in terms of world goals “at any given time.”

In certain terms, we are working with the challenge of how best to use the world’s resources. Some countries will overproduce. Others will underproduce. Contradictions seem to occur. Some people will be overfed while others starve; some sated with material conveniences, others relatively ignorant of them. These are variation of the same theme, we see. In overall terms contemporaries are working on the same group of challenges, though either oversupply or great lack might show itself at any particular place. Perhaps, however, the challenges could not be clearly delineated without those extravagances of degree.

cggtf7

As contemporaries, counterparts choose a particular time framework. The time format alone makes certain focuses clear, that in our terms could not be made in another context. What we learn in our present about industry–“progress”–and the equitable sharing of the earth’s products, could only be learned in a context in which industrialism was experienced as going too far, where technology was seen and known as a growing jeopardy.

In terms that are difficult to describe, the creative solutions will change the course of history in the past, so that variations are taken, and technology does not progress in the same way that it “has” in our experience.

cyb

We can change our past from the present. The same applies to civilizations.

 

There are many kinds of music. We could say: “Music is triumphant,” or “Music is tragic.”

We would understand that I am not contradicting myself. We would not say, “Why would anyone write a composition like Tchaikovsky. Why would a composer choose a somber mood? The music itself would have its own sweep and power, and would be beautiful beyond all concepts of good and evil manner, even a tragic composition of midst of the deepest emotions of tragedy, or even of defeat. In such cases the tragedy itself is chosen as an emotional framework upon which the psyche plays. The framework is not thrust upon its, but indeed chosen precisely because of its own characteristics–even those of despondency, perhaps.

m8787

Tasting those qualities to the utmost, from that framework the psyche probes the fires of vitality and being as experienced from that specific viewpoint, and the despondency can be more alive then an unprobed, barely experienced joy. In the same manner, certain individuals can do choose life experiences that involves great brings into experience, through comparison, the great vitality and thrust of being.

This does not mean that a tragic life is more vital than a happy, simple one. It just means that each individual is involved in an art of living. There are different themes instruments, melodies–but existence, like great art, cannot be confined to simple definitions.

,jh,,

From the outside, for instance, it might seem as if a young person dies because in one way or another he or she is dissatisfied with life itself. Certainly it is usually taken for granted that suicides are afraid of life. However, suicides and would-be suicides often have such a great literal lust for life that they constantly put it into jeopardy, so that they can experience what it is in heightened form. The same applies to many who follows dangerous professions. It is fashionable to suppose that these people have a death wish. Instead, many of them have an intensified life wish, so to speak. Certainly it seems destructive to others. To those people, however, the additional excitement is worth the risk. The risk, given them an intensified version of life.

This is obviously not the case with all suicides or would-be suicides,or all risk-takers. But those elements are there. A person who dies at 17 may have experienced much greater dimensions of living, in our terms, than someone who lives to be 82. Such people are not as unaware of those choices as it seems.

mhuu4545

This does not mean that we cannot alter our experience at any given point.

Back through the historical past. All counterparts alive as temporaries…

…form, together, a musical composition in what we think of as a present; and once the multidimensional song is struck then its past ripples out behind it, so to speak, and its future sings “ahead.” But the song is being  created from its beginning and its end simultaneously. In this case, however, it is as if each note has its own consciousness and is free to change its portion of the melody. Yet all are in the same overall composition, in “time,” so the time itself serves as the scale in which the[musical] number is written–chosen as a matter of organization, focus and framework.

In music the pauses are as important as the sounds. In fact, they serve to highlight the sounds, to frame them. The sounds are significant because of their placement within the pauses or silences. So the portions of our psyche that we recognize as oneself are significant and intimate and real, because of the inner pauses or silences that are not actualized, but are a part of our greater being.

musicrre

Now imagine a composition in which the pauses and the silences that we do not hear are sounded –and the notes that we hear are instead the unheard inner structure. There is an intuitive “definition” of probable and reincarantional selves, and counterparts, in relationship to the self that we know. We can change our own pacing, and add variations, or even begin an entirely new composition if we choose to. many people have done this in very simple, mundane ways by suddenly deciding to use abilities they had earlier ignored. a man of letters, for instance, at the age of 40 suddenly remembers his old love of carpentry, reads do-it-yourself manuals, and begins his own home repairs. After disdaining such relationship with earth and its goods, and this appreciation adds to words that before may have been as dry as ash.

mus55

In that case, there would be in another reality a carpenter of his equivalent with a latent love of words, unexpressed–and that individual would then begin to develop; reading books on how to write, perhaps, and taking up a hobby that would allow him to express in words his love of the land and its goods. The creativity of the psyche means that no one world or experience could contain it. There fore does it create the dimensions in which it then has its experiences.

Each portion, by what ever name contains within it the latent potentials of the whole. If the unknown reality exists, it is because we play one melody over and over and so identify oneself, while closing out, consciously at least, all of the other possible variations that we could add to that time.

 

 

Life as we know of it is far from being inflexible.

Returning to alternate compositions, we can at any time bring into our own life-composition elements from and “alternate” ones.

i57yh

Some people structure heir lives around their children, others around a career, or pleasure, or even pain. These are simply certain focuses that we choose, that direct our experience. We can add other focuses while still retaining our own identity–indeed, enriching it.

Sometimes we act as though one ability contradicts another. We think “I cannot be a good parent and a sexual partner to my mate at the same time.” To those who feel this way a definite contradiction seems implied. A woman might feel that the qualities of a mother almost stand in opposition to those of an exuberant sex mate at the same time.” To those who feel this way a definite contradictions seems implied. A woman might feel that the qualities of a mother almost stand in opposition to those of an exuberant sex mate. A man might imagine that fatherhood meant providing an excellent home and income. He might think that “aggressiveness,” competition, and emotional aloofness were required to perform that role. These would be considered in opposition to the qualities of love, understanding, and emotional support “required” of a husband. In actuality, of course, no such contradiction apply. In the same way, however, we often seem to feel that our identity is dependent upon a certain highly specific role, until other qualities quite out own seem threatening. They almost seem to be unself-like.

iutre

To some degree we feel the same way when we encounter the concept of probable selves, or of counterparts. It is as though we had an unlimited bank of abilities and characteristics from which to draw, and yet were afraid of doing so–fearing that any addiction could make us less instead of more. If all of this goes on personally as we choose one melody and call it oneself, then perhaps we can begin to see the mass creative aspects in terms of civilizations that seem to rise and fall.

Apple consciousness.

An apple can be red round, weigh so much, be good to eat, sit in a basket, but be natural on a tree. It can be tart or sweet. We can find one on the ground, or on the table, or in a pie. None of these things are contradictory to the nature of an apple. We do not ask: “How can an apple have color and be round at the same time?”
We can look at an apple and hold it in our hands, so it is obvious that its shape does not contradict its color. We see that an apple can be red or green or both. If I said: “Apples sit quietly on a table,” we would have to agree that such is sometimes the case. If I said: “Apples roll down grassy inclines,” we would again be forced to concede the point. It would be clear to us that none of these statements contradicted each other, for in different circumstances apples behave differently.
So far, we o not hold our consciousness in our hand, however. When I speak of the behavior of our psyche, then, we may wonder: “How can my psyche exist in more than one time at once?” It can do this just as an apples can be found on a table or on the ground or on the tree.

aspplk

 

The inside dimensions of consciousness cannot be so easily described, however. If we ask: How can i have reincarnational and probable selves at once?” , we are asking a question comparable to: “How can an apple have color and be round at the same time?”

Following this analogy, in the same way each psyche contains within it infinite notes, and each note is capable of its own endless creative variations. We follow one melody or oneself, and for some reason we seem to think that the true, full orchestra of oneself will some how drown us out.

apple

When speaking in terms of counterparts, then, or or reincarantional selves and probable selves, in the true symphony of our being we are violins, oboes, cymbals, harps–in other words, we are  living instrument through, which we play oneself. We are not an instrument upon which we are played. We are the composer and the symphony. We play ballards, classical pieces, lyrics, operas. One creative performance hoes not contradict the others.

Sumari characteristics do not exist in isolation.

To one extent or another, each family of consciousness carries within it the characteristics inherent in all families. There is, therefore, great diversity.

,mf,f

The Sumari abilities are highly creative ones, however. To a large extent they have been inhibited in our society. Each person can recognize his or her degree of Sumariness. The playful, creative elements of personality can then be released.These qualities are particularly important as they add to, temper, or enhance the primary characteristics of the other families of consciousness.

If you are a “reformer,” a “reformer by nature,” then the Sumari characteristics, brought to the surface, could help you temper your seriousness with play and humor, and actually assist you in achieving your reforms far easier then otherwise. each personality carries traces of other characteristics besides those of the family of consciousness to which he or she might belong. The creative aspects of the Sumari can be particularly useful if those aspects are encouraged in any personality, simply because their inventive nature throws light on all elements of experience.

cahrr

The psyche as we know it, then, is composed of a mixture of these families of consciousness. One is not superior to the others. They are just different, and they represent various ways of looking at physical life. The existence of psychic groupings, and the difference be tween probable and reincarnational selves, counterparts and families of consciousness. At times contradictions may seem to exist. We may wonder how we are us in the midst of such multitudinous psychic “variations.”

There is a connection between our counterparts and the families of consciousness.

As our brothers or sisters might belong to the same physical family, so generally are us and our counterparts part of the same psychic group of consciousness. Remember that these psychic groups are like natural formations into which consciousness seems to flow. Our own interests, desires, and abilities are not predetermined by our membership in a given psychic family.

ssddff

For example, we are not creatively playful because we are “Sumari” Instead, we join the Sumari grouping because we are creatively playful. The groupings of consciousness, then, are not to be equated with say, astrological houses.

Taking the Sumari as an example, there can be overly intent, ponderous, or simple dour Sumari who have not learned to use their creativity graciously, or with joy. Yet that joyful use of ability will be their intent. At particular periods of history, in our terms, different families may predominate.

The psychic groups, however, overlap physical and national ones. The Sumari are extremely independent, for instance, and as a rule we will not find hem born into countries with dictatorships. When they do so appear, their work may set a spark that brings about changes, but they seldom take joint political action. Their creativity is very threatening to such a society.

szsaa

However, the Sumari are practical in that they bring creative visions into physical reality, and try to live their lives accordingly. They are initiators, yet they make little attempt to preserve organizations, even ones they feel to be fairly beneficial. They are not lawbreakers by design or intent. They are not reformers in the society or culture. they are given to art, but in its broadest sense, trying to make an “art” of living, for example. They have been a part of most civilization, though they appeared in the Middle ages (A.D.476- A.D. 1450) least of all. They often come to full strength before great social changes. Others might build social structures from their work, for example, but the Sumari themselves, while pleased, will usually not be able to feel any intuitive sense of belonging with any structured group.

There is no correlation between the families of consciousness and bodily characteristics, however. many of the Sumari choose to be born in the springtime, but all those born in the spring are not Sumari, and no general rule applies there. They also have a liking for certain races, but again no specific rules apply. Many of the Irish, the Jews, the Spanish, and some lesser numbers of the French, for instance, are Sumari–though they appear in all races.

T78

Generally speaking, America has not been a Sumari nation, nor have the Scandinavian countries or England. Psychically speaking, the Sumari often very nicely arrange existences in which they are a minority–in a democracy, say, so that they can work at their art within a fairly stable political situation. They are not interested in government, yet they do rely upon it to that extent. They are apt to be self-reliant within that framework. Their recognized artistic abilities may predominate or be fairly minimal.

sssg55

Sumari is a state of mind, a slant of being. They are not fighters, nor will they generally advocate a violent overthrow of government or mores. They believe in the creativity of change, naturally occurring

Nevertheless, they are often part of the cultural underground simply because they are seldom conformers. A Sumari is very uncomfortable as a member of any large commercial venture, particularly if the work involves habitual or boring routine. They are not happy on assembly lines. They like to play with details– or to use them for creative purposes. They often go from one job or profession to another for that reason.

If we begin to look into the nature of oneself, and feel intuitively that we are  a Sumari, then we should look for a position in which we can use our inventiveness. Sumari enjoy theoretical mathematics, for example, yet make miserable bookkeepers.

ssssde

In the arts, Picasso was a Sumari. Many entertainers are Sumari. We seldom find then in politics. They are not usually historians.

There are few with any position within organized religions. Because of their feelings of self-reliance, however, we can find them as farmers, working intuitively with the land. They are equally divided between the sexes. In our society, whoever, Sumari qualities in the male have until lately been frowned upon to some degree.

 

Duplicate Thoughts……Impossible!

There are no duplicates. Yet, we may say, are not some thoughts duplicates?  The variations may indeed be slight, but variations are always present. A thought transmitted knowingly or unknowingly by A. is not precisely the same thought when it reaches receiver B.

The thought originally held by A. is still retained by A., yet a seemingly identical thought reaches B. A. has lost nothing. That is, in trying to send the thought, in trying to duplicate the thought, A. still retains it. So what is passed on to receiver B.? This is rather important, since an explanation will do much to account for the frequent difference that occurs in telepathic communications.

Whether o r not A. the sender, knowingly transmits this apparent duplicate, at the point of its transmission, the sender forms an electrical impulse pattern that is supposed to duplicate the original thought. But no such identical duplication is possible, as far as I know, within reality of any kind.

THHJH''

A side note: identical twins are hardly identical, for example.

As soon as the attempt is made to duplicate the thought, we find the attempt itself strains and pulls; the impulse changes minutely, or to a greater degree. The point I want to make is that any attempt at duplication actually forces the thought it is already a new thought, bearing great resemblance to the original. But it is not the original thought.

THNNN

Prime identities cannot be duplicated. Exact duplication is always an effect of insufficient knowledge. In some cases two thoughts may appear identical, but whether or not examination can show it, such exact duplication is impossible. Now when receiver B. receives a transmitted thought, he may react and interpret that part of the thought that is similar to the original.

He may , on the other hand, react to and interpret that portion of the thought that is not similar. He may react to and interpret the similarity of the difference. His reactions depend upon several circumstances, including the intensity of the electrical pulsations that compose the thought, and his own inner facility in reaching to particular ranges of intensities.

THEEE

Habitually, individuals establish overall frequencies that they are able to handle, for various reasons. An individual will therefore feel more at home operating within certain frequencies. The original thought is used as a pattern for the creation of a new electrical reality which may or may not be directed at any given receiver. It is obvious that the attempt to duplicate is present: were it not for this attempt to duplicate, then there would be little similarity between any separate identities.

The nature of the thought that is received by B. is determined by many factors. We shall consider but a few of these. These include the original intensity of the thought as A.; the familiarity or unfamiliarity of the range of frequencies that compose the thought to any intended receiver.

TP0;Y.HN

The receiver will understand and interpret in general the intensity range he is in the habit of using himself. Some, or a portion of the transmitted thought, may fall within his range and some may not. He may pick up the portions of the thought which are similar to the original thought which are similar to the original thought, in which case some scientific proof of sorts can be achieved. It can happen, however, that the dissimilarity is what falls within his particular accustomed range, in which case proof will be inadequate.

Emotions also possess an electrical reality. Thoughts formed and sent out within the impulse range of emotion often succeed because of the peculiar nature of the emotional electrical impulses themselves. They have a particularly strong electrical mass. They also usually fall within powerful intensities, for reasons. Thoughts formed under a strong emotional impetus will carry greater vividness, have a greater tendency toward duplication, and are apt to be interpreted with some success.

fhj

Also, all individuals have had familiarity with emotions as they exist within electrical intensities, and are accustomed to reacting to them. The whole process in instantaneous. However, the thought which is now an approximation of the original thought is changed once more by the receiver himself. He does not actually interpret the thought itself. He interpret the thought itself. He interprets its meaning and forms a new thought identity.

Action, the very action of transmission, alters the nature and electrical reality of the thought itself.

24t

Our imaginary sender A. does not transmit a given thought. He does not even send an exact duplicate. Nor does the receiver receive the thought in the same condition. The original thought is retained by A. A. forms a thought as nearly identical as possibilities allow it to be. This he transmits to B. But B. can’t receive the thought in its present condition, for the action of receiving a thought also changes it. He forms a thought as nearly identical as possible for him and interprets it.

aaaaa

Action can never be considered apart from that which is seemingly acted upon, for action becomes part of structure. Action begins from within and is a result of inner vitality inherent in all realities. Action is not alone. It is not an identity. ACTION IS A DIMENSION OF EXISTENCE.

 

The petty wars, even those still to be fought, are but dim memories, once vital but lost as nightmares in greater awakenings.

A nostalgic memory for lives come and gone, as we might for fond dreams barely recalled. They represent a present unique beyond telling, alive  in each consciousness, more important than we recognize. There are no real rules to be followed that will bring us into such an encounter with the present moment of reality–only a trust in the nature of our being. And that trust is within us whether or not we recognize it, for it gives us our present experience; and no matter how our mind questions, it rides securely in the great creativity of the soul.

kdjdu

That soul constantly creates the body, and each individual on the face of the earth at any given time places his or her trust in that reality. That feeling of certainty is the same that any plant knows. Any idea, creative insight, or dream, rides upon the same sure thrust.

The terms of being are the same in every place and every time.

They bring forth the greater comprehension of each self, or itself. For lives come and gone, as we might for fond dreams barely recalled.

gfnsntn

They represent a present unique beyond telling, alive in each consciousness, more important than we recognize. There are no real rules to be followed that will bring us into such an encounter with the present moment of reality– only a trust in the nature of our being. And that trust is within us whether or not we recognize it, for it gives us our present experience; and no matter how our mind questions, it rides security in the real creativity of the soul.

mag

That soul constantly creates the body, and each individual on the face of the earth at any given time places his or her trust in that reality. That feeling of certainty is the same that any plant knows. Any idea, creative insight, or dream, rides upon the same sure thrust.

Most of us live in our own world, with others of our kind.

Those of us who do not believe in war have not experienced it. It may have surrounded us, but we did not experience it. Those of us do not believe in greed have not suffered its “consequences.” If we still see it is because it is a part of our reality. if we are honestly not greedy, yet we see greed, then perhaps we are serving as an example to others–but we form our own reality.

There are more worlds than you suppose, and in our own private experience each of us contributes to the world that we know. We and our counterparts together form it. Our physical body alone is equipped to perceive far more than we presently allow it to. Physically we are a part of every  other person upon the earth, and we have a connection with each leaf and frog and nail.

umumum

We choose the city or state or country in which we live. No one forces us to stay here unless we are looking for an excuse to remain. So we choose psychic land to another as we can journey into other parts of the physical world. Some great travelers never left the country of their birth.

Michelangelo roamed the centuries, picking up visions and ideas as others might buy postcards, journeying from one country to a foreign land. His genius shows us what we are, and yet it is but a hint of the potential with which our species is endowed.

In the light of such ideals, surely seem wanting–yet our reality is one in which the greatest freedoms have been allowed. This means that we have given ourselves full range so that all probabilities could be explored, and none left out that were physically feasible.

This species gave itself no “preordained” taboos.

humdgg

The infinite ranges possible to human capabilities would be explored–and those who chose that route said, “we will trust that our creativity will find its own way, and if there are nightmares we will waken from them. We will even learn from them. We will dare to push aside the dimensions of being into those our humanity its meaning. And through the compassion that we have learned, will we be able to understand the divine errors that gave us the gift of our birth. Souls and molecules each are learning, each are forming realities, each are a part of a divinity in which each counterpart has a part to play.

 

The creator is not the master of his or her creations.

He or she is simply their creator, and he or her creates because he or she does not attempt to control.

When we try to control power or people, we always copy. To some extent the world copies itself, in that there are patterns. Those patterns are always changed to one extent or another, so that no object is ever a copy of another–though it may appear to be the same.

cre56yh

In our terms, the world is intensely different from one moment to another, with each smallest portion of consciousness choosing its reality from a field of infinite probabilities. Immense calculations, far beyond our conscious decisions as we think of them, are probable only because of the unutterable freedom that resides within minute worlds inside our skull– patterns of interrelationships, counterparts so cunningly woven that each is unique, freewheeling, and involved in an infinite cooperative venture so powerful that the atoms stay in certain forms, and the same stars shine in the sky.

cr64f

The familiar and strange are intimately connected in our most obvious, our simplest utterance. We are surrounded by miracles. Why, then, does the world so often seem dour and cruel? Why do our fellow beings, sometimes seem like unfeeling monsters–Frankenstein not of body but of mind, spiritual idiots, ignorant of any heritage of love or truth or even graceful beast-hood? Why does it seem to many of us that the race, the species, is doomed? Why do some of us feel, in our quiet moments, such a sentence just?

ejujdfju
We make our own reality.

 

The body is a miraculous organism, and we have barely learned the most simple of its structures.

We do not understand the properties of the soul or body, yet the body was given to us so that we could learn from it. The properties of the physical and  the earth are meant to lead us into the nature of the soul. We create physical reality, yet without knowing how we do , so that the wondrous structure of the earth itself is meant to lead us to question our own source. Nature as we understand it is meant to be our teacher. We are not its master.

n7fv

When we are in an airplane looking down upon the planet, then we see the mountain ranges and valleys, the rivers, plateaus, cities, fields and villages.

To some extent we realize that the world has physical contents, existing at one time yet varying in their characteristics. In those terms, the world is composed of its physical ingredients. That “package” is the only part of the picture that we see, however.

pppl,gk,t

Psychically, our world is composed of the contents of its consciousness. We have maps or continents and oceans, and in the entire view each portion is like a piece of a jigsaw puzzle, all fitting together perfectly, smoothly flowing into the natural structure of the world. So at any given time there is a world consciousness, a perfect jigsaw of awareness in which each identity, however large or small, has its part.

nyrted

There are earthquakes that erupt physically, and tracings are made of them. There are also inner earthquakes of consciousness from which the physical ones emerge–storms of mind or being,eruptions in which one segment of the world consciousness, repressed in one area , explodes in another.

55

If we could orbit our planet in a different kind of craft, we could view the psychic content of the world, seeing the world consciousness shining far more brilliantly than any lighted city. We could spot the point of intense activity, see the birth of new myths and the death of old ones as certainly as we might be able to see a mountain slide or a tidal wave. The physical portions of the earth are all related. So does consciousness form its own kind of inner structures from which, the physical ones emerge. We are indeed counterparts, then, each of the other. Yet as there is great variety to physical form, so counterparts follow a still more expansive inner freedom that finds an even greater diversity of characteristics.

 

A Group Of Cells Forms an Organ. A Group of Selves Form a Soul.

I am not telling you that each if us do not have a soul to call our own. We are a part of our soul. It belongs to you, and you to it.

Memories exist as patterns. In this life, each of us come together and part, come together and part again, forming a counterpart relationship when it suits our purposes, as streams of consciousness mix and merge, and then separate.

kjkekm

These counterparts are psychic, relationships, formations that in the deepest terms flow into historic time and out of it. Some, in our terms, last a lifetime. others represent psychic encounters that happens between two individuals at several points, say, but are not continuous. They may be no less intense, however.

In the unknown reality, we have inner affiliations. What are they?

It is up to us to discover to which one we belong. In any group the relationships indicate inner realizations and connections. The realities appear in each of our lives.

Now any group will show interrelationships. We can see then for ourselves. There is great diversity within the family of consciousness, as there is within any physical race, and there is also great variety within other psychic families.

in7

We choose to be born in a particular physical family, however, with our brothers and sisters, or as an only child. So, generally speaking, our counterparts are born in the same psychic family of our counterparts.

innfdg.

Now categories do not come first. Our individuality comes first. We have certain characteristics of our own. These place us in a certain position. As we are not a rock or a mineral, but a person, so our individuality places us in a particular family or species of consciousness. This represents our overall viewpoint of reality.

iumngnd

We like to be an initiator or a follower or a nourisher. We like to create variations on old systems, or we like to create new ones. We like to deal primarily with healing, or with information, or with physical data. We like to deal with sight, or sound, with dreams, or with translating inner data into the working psychic material of our society. So we choose a certain focus, as we choose ahead of time our physical family.

Certain members of a family often act out particular roles, for the family as a whole.

One might be the upstart, another the perfect achiever. Psychologists now often try to deal with the family as a whole, by allowing the different members to see how they may be exaggerating certain tendencies at the expense of others.

The upstart, for instance, may be displaying all of the bold aspects inhibited by other family members. Through this person the others may vicariously share the excitement or suspense of those experiences that are otherwise blocked. On the other hand the others may be completely hiding such impulses, while expressing faithfully the desires of other family members for “excellence” discipline. Now the same can apply to counterparts, and those in our experience can show to us, in exaggerated form, abilities of our own upon which we have not chosen to concentrate. We can learn much from our counterparts, therefore, and they from us. Those counterparts that we meet will be working, playing, and being more or less within our own culture. This does not mean that we are bits and pieces of some hypothetical whole self.

pl,jg

Pretend that the psyche is a plant sending out seeds of itself in many directions, each seed growing into a new plant in different conditions. Growing to plant-hood, those seeds send out further new variations. A handful of seeds from any tree might fall in the same backyard. Others might be blown for miles before they land.

phfm6

We usually live with our physical family, though this does not always apply; sometimes our ancestors come from various countries, so there is a physical lineage that we understand. There are often homecomings, were distant relatives return to the homestead. Now psychically the same applies in terms of counterparts. If we belong to any particular groups, often our closest counterparts will also be there. We will be a counterpart from their viewpoint, by the way. many political, civic, educational or religious groups are composed of counterparts.

ppk88

Conventional families are counterparts that form psychic families. They are family representations on another level. First of all, such groups have a built-in focus–political, civic, religious, sexual, or whatever. Certain members of the group express the repressed tendencies of others. Yet each is supported through a common sense of belonging, so that the group sometimes seems to have its own overall identity, in which each member plays a part. Anyone can discover this by examining the groups to which he or she belongs.

mumym

Now there are races, psychically speaking. There are also psychic counterparts of races–families of consciousness, so to speak–all related, yet having different overall characteristics or specialties.

Many of us have daydreams in which we actually see oneself as our counterparts, and portions of their lives sometimes come though to us as we go about our chores.

We pay little heed, however. We think that this is just our “imagination.” The unknown reality is alive in our own psyche. There are hints of it in all of our experience. We would not be alive, in our terms, if first we did not imagine oneself as we are. Play is, in fact, one of the most practical methods of survival, both individually and for the species. Within its framework lie the secrets of creativity, and within the secrets of creativity lie the secret of being.

c5vg

The life that we consider real represents one narrow stratum of even our physical experience. I am not speaking here of other realities that could add to that dimension. Play brings us a needed rest from our distorted concepts of selfhood, and many of the world’s finest inventions have come when the inventor was not concentrating upon work, but indulging in pastimes or play.

51

We are involved with some of our counterparts more or less directly, while others live in different lands, and are sometimes separated also in terms of age differences or culture–qualities with which we would find it difficult to relate. Intuitively, we know who the counterparts are in our daily experience. This does not mean that if we become consciously aware of such affiliations we must then feel it our responsibility to form a kind of culture of counterparts, or try and affect other people’s lives by reminding them of our relationship. We are each individual. Some of the people we dislike most heartily may be counterparts. Each of us may be exploring different aspects of the same overall challenge.

cuun

There is nothing esoteric about families. They represent the kind of relationships that we take for granted. The same applies to counterparts, except that we are not ordinarily familiar with the term or concept.

We keep searching for a new “ascended master,” or guru, to keep us in line and point out THE WAY.

In their own ways children are quite aware of their counterparts, and of, other portions of their individual realities. They relate to their counterparts in dreams. They sometimes see them as “invisible” companions. We dream of our own counterparts frequently, but we are so afraid of maintaining what we think of as the rational adult self that we ignore such communications.

suuookj

In certain circles, soul mates is the latest vogue. The idea is an old one; it is based upon the reality of counterparts, and presents another version of the theory. But, it is treated with an almost pompous seriousness. It is similar to the idea of twin flames, although there are some differences. Some would argue that the twin flames telepathy many twin flames share is a lot stronger than that of soul mates. Many of those who use the term soul mates do it to hide rather than to release their own joyful abilities. they spend time searching for their soul mates–but the search involves them in a pilgrimage for a kind of impossible communication with another, in which all division is lost, with the two then trying to join in a cementing oneness, suffocating all sense of play or creativity. We are not one part, or one half, of another soul, searching through the annals of time for our partner, undone until we are complete by our soul mate.

sdaf

When we become too intent to maintain our reality we lose it, for we deny the creativity upon which it rests.

I am not denying the importance of true reason. Certainly I am not telling us to ignore the intellect. But we do often ignore the playfulness of the intellect, and force it to become something less than it is.

Most people, are so utterly serious that they suspect their own creativity.

They expect that its products will be unreal or not valid in the physical world. yet there is a great correlation between what we think of as creativity, altered states of consciousness, play, and “spiritual” development.

nhnhn

When we create a poem or a song or a painting we are in a state of play, of enjoyment, of freedom. We intend to make something different, to produce a new version of reality. We create out of love, for the sake of the experience. At one time or another almost everyone has that kind of experience, but children have it often. They compose songs and music and paintings in their heads. They alter the focus of their consciousness frequently. They do not stop to ask whether or not the play is real or pertinent. Physically, play develops their body mechanisms. it also flexes the great capabilities of their minds.

,ed6e,md

When we think: “Life is earnest,” and decide to put away childish things, then often we lose sight of our own creativity and become a goal that must be attained. The goal is to be achieved through hard work, and as long as we believe this we do not understand what the spirit is.

c  mc

A natural analogy–plants do not work at developing their potential. They are not beautiful because they believe it is their responsibility to please our eye. They are beautiful because they love themselves and beauty. When we are so serious we almost always distort the nature of our own spirit as far as our understanding of it is concerned. We cannot let our guard down long enough to discover what it is. We keep looking for new rules or regulations, or methods of discipline.

Chromosomes are microscopic bodies into which the protoplasmic substance of a cell nucleus separating during cell division.

They carry the genes, the factors or units–‘blueprints’–that determine hereditary characteristics.

bd

There is consciousness in everything. Visible or invisible to us, each fragment,  of the universe has a consciousness of its own. Pain and pleasure, the strongest aspects of all consciousnesses, are experienced by every fragment, according to its degree. Differentiation is of course various, and it is in the degree of differentiation that consciousnesses are different.

3sssd

Reincarnation simply represents probabilities in a time context.

A third line supporting selfhood as we think of it is the reincarnational one.

This is somewhat like the ancestral line, and there are also reflections in the genes and chromosomes undetected by our scientists. The ancestral and reincarnational lines merge to some extent to form what we think of as our genetic patterns ahead of time, so to speak. Before this life we chose what we wished from those two main areas.

Reincarnational experience is also transmitted, then, and can be re-translated from a biological code-imprint into emotional awareness. However, as we are not our parents or our ancestors we are not our “reincarnational selves.”

l76

We cannot say that our ancestors, like some strange plants,were growing toward what we are, or that we are the sum of their experiences. They were, they are, themselves. We cannot say that we are the sum of our past reincarnational lives either, and for the same reasons. We cut off the knowledge of oneself, and so divisions seem to occur. We are somewhat like a plant that recognizes only one of its leaves at a time. A leaf feels its deeper reality as a part of the plant, and adds to its own sense of continuity, and even to its own sense of individuality. But we often pretend that we are some odd dangling leaf, with no roots, growing without a plant to support us.

All of the leaves now growing on this plant could be thought of as counterparts of each other, each alive and individual in one time, each contributing yet facing in different directions. As one leaf falls another takes its place, until next year the whole plant, still living, will have a completely new set of leaves–future reincarnational selves of this batch.

We are not plants, but the analogy is a simple one.

LLJJJ

There is a constant interaction in the plant, between its parts, that we do not perceive. The leaves now present are biologically valid, interrelating in our terms. Yet in time terms each leaf is also aware of the past history of the plant, and biologically they spring up from that “past.”

Each leaf seeks to express its leafhood as fully as possible. Leaves take in sun, which helps the plant itself grow (through photosynthesis). The development of the leaves, then, is very important to the plant’s own existence. The cells of the plant are kept in contact with the environment through the leaves’ experiences, and future probabilities are always taken into consideration. The smallest calculations involving light and dark are known. The life of the plant and its leaves cannot be separated.

hbm,mn

The plant has its own “idea” of itself, in which each of its leaves has its part. Yet each leaf has the latent capacities of the whole plant. Root one, for instance, and a new plant will grow.

k8dhejh

Selves have far greater freedom than leaves, but they can also root themselves of they choose–and they do. Reincarnational selves are like leaves that have left the plant, choosing a new medium of existence. In this analogy, the dropped leaves of the physical plant have fulfilled their own purpose to themselves as leaves, and to the plant. These selves, however, dropping from one branch of time,root themselves in another time and become new selves from which others will sprout.

The larger self, then seeds itself in time. In this process no identity is lost and no identity is the same, yet all are interrelated. So we can theoretically expand our consciousness to include the knowledge of our past lives, though those lives were ours and not ours. They have a common root, as next year’s leaves have a common root with the leaves now of the plant.

bnhmj

Such knowledge, however, would automatically affect those past lives. Ideas of cause and effect can hold us back here, because it seems to us that the leaves of next year come as an effect caused by this years’ leaves. To the plant and its innate creative pattern, however, all of its manifestations are one–and expression of itself, each portion, exists now. The same applies to the psyche. in that greater realm of reality there is creative interplay, and interrelationships between all aspects of selfhood.

No knowledge exists outside of consciousness.

In those terms, neutral data are not transferred through “living” vehicles. Whether physically materialized of not, knowledge is possessed by consciousness. It is always “individualized”, though not necessarily in our terms.

nnn

The information carried by the chromosomes is not general, but highly specific. It is codified data (itself alive) that contains within it the essence of ancestral knowledge–change that to ancestral experience–of specific ancestral experience. Biologically we do indeed carry within us, then, the memories of our particular ancestors. These form a partial basis for our subjective and physical existence, and provide the needed support for it.

Since one portion of our heritage is physical, in those terms, those memories can be translated again, back into emotional and psychological events, though usually they are not in our societies.

kof

To that extent the so-called past experience of our ancestors and of our species is concurrent with our own, biologically speaking. That is but one line, however, covered by the chromosomes. We have “another line” of existence that also serves as a support for the one that we presently recognize. It includes other interweaving physical relationships that bind us with all others upon our planet at the same adjacent level of time. That is, to some extent or another we are related to all of those alive upon the planet. We are time contemporaries. We will have a far closer relationship with some than with others. Some will be our counterparts. Many people who tend to feel deeply about various aspects of their life might want to make a podcast on streaming platforms (with the help of reliable companies such as Lower Street) for their listeners, to share and understand how the human experience and living a shared life affects us all on this planet.

That said, a lot of the relationships we share in our lives may or may not be closer to us than family relationships, but psychically speaking they will share a certain kind of history with us. We will also be connected through the physical framework of the earth in the large give-and-take of its space-time scheme.

Intimate realizations, had to be counter-balanced in line with certain purposes set by our species.

Even for that matter momentarily set aside so that other abilities and characteristics could emerge. The species sense of curiosity would not allow it to stay in any home territory for long, and so the sense of intimacy was purposely broken. It would become highly important again, however, when the planet was populated extensively, as it is now–only the original feeling of home area has to be extended over the face of the earth. The “absent” portions of the self are ready to emerge. The other, to us probable, lines of consciousness can now come into play.

gj,,d,

These different lines of focus will each show us other aspects of our own reality, as individuals and as a species.

Selfhood overspills with great luxurious outcroppings, yet we jealously guard against such creativity.

To a certain extent we do carry the knowledge of our forefathers within our [cells’] chromosomes, which present a pattern that is not rigid but flexible–one that in codified fashion endows us with the subjective living experience of those who, in our terms, have gone before. Some very old cultures have been aware of this. While being independent individuals their members also identified with their ancestors to some extent, accepting them as portions of their selfhoods. This does not mean that the individual self was less, but was more aware of its own reality. A completely different kind of focus was presented, in which the ancestors were understood to contribute to the “new” experience of the living; one in which the physically focused consciousness clearly saw itself as perceiving the world for itself, but also for all of those who had gone before– while realizing that in those terms he or she would contribute as well as the generation past.

AASDFDF

The animals were also accepted in the natural philosophy of selfhood as the individual plainly saw the living quality of consciousness. The characteristics of the animals were understood to continue “life,” adding their qualities to the experience of the self in a new way.

gbbb vb

The Human body would be used in earth’s great husbandry as, from it, dying and decaying new forms would arise. This was a give-and-take in which for instance, a jungle neighborhood was truly home, and all was a portion of the self psychically, spiritually, and physically.

,fgjh,g

Let those who will, laugh at tales of spirits turning into the trees–a simplistic theory, certainly, yet a symbolic statement in such societies: The dead were buried at home in the same close territory, to form in later times the very composition of the ground upon which religions grew. Again, our limited concepts of selfhood make what I am saying difficult for us to perceive.

wvfwerd

I am not saying, that the living consciousness of each individual returned to the earth literally, but that the physical material permeated and tamped with that consciousness did, and does. Even the cells retain knowledge of all of their affiliations. In physical terms the consciousness that we understand is based upon this.

Selfhood is poorer when it does not at least intuitively understand this heritage.

 

Our present idea of identity is maintained only because we grant as valid such small aspects of our own reality

In other words, our accepted concepts of selfhood would disappear if we ever allowed any significant subjective experience to intrude. “The Absent Self”– the absent or unknown self– is the portion of our own existence that we do not ordinarily perceive or accept, though there is within us a longing for it.

se

The breaking up of theories that have been long accepted, but that prevent us from perceiving the powerful nature of those absent portions of the self. As we focus upon certain details from a larger field of physical reality, so then we focus upon only the small portion of oneself that we consider “real.”

We carry within us, the deep knowledge of experience that in our terms would be prior, yet in our cells and our own deeper mind such information is current.

 

Albert Einstien’s special and general theories of relativity.

Within the overriding constancy of the speed of light, all phenomena in our camouflage reality– motion, velocity, mass, matter, time, space, gravitation, and so forth–are seen as relative to each other. Space and time, for instance, are not separate or uniform entities, but closely related intuitive “constructs” of consciousness; mass is a form of energy; motion is not absolute, but relative to the motion of something else; two observers, each moving at a different velocity relative to a common sequence of events, will perceive those events in different courses of time

d,d,df,

In its own way the dolphin (and the whale) grasp such phenomena– and without the aid of the very sophisticated written calculations and the physical instruments we humans use.

Dolphins and whales are geniuses, possessing the ability of abstract thought to a high degree.

Dolphins deal with an entirely different dimension of reality. There is as yet no method of communication that can allow us to perceive their concepts of selfhood, or their [collective] vision of existence. They are sensitive, self-aware individuals. They are altruistic. They understand the nature of relativity, and they are not higher or lower than our own species. They simply represent a different kind of selfhood.

dddggb

There is some relationship, at least in terms of our discussion, between the reality of the dolphins and the reality of the fetus. In our terms the fetus lives in primeval conditions, reminiscent of periods in the species’ past. It relates in its own way to its environment. Now for some consciousnesses this is sufficient. In our terms, for each of us, it was sufficient.

Dolphins and Whales are not only similar to certain species that lived on our own planet in the past, but representing bleed-throughs from probable realities in which water-dwelling mammals predominate.

Reality!

Walking down the street, we expect the trees to stay in their places, and not transform themselves into buildings. All of these assumptions are taken for granted in our physical journeys. We may find different customs and languages, yet even these will be accepted in the vast, overall, basic assumptions within whose boundaries physical life occurs. We are most certainly traveling through the private and mass psyche when we so much as walk down the street. The physical world seems objective and outside of oneself, however. The idea of such outsideness is one of the assumptions upon which we build that existence. Interior traveling is no more subjective, than a journey from New York to San Francisco. We are used to projecting all destinations outside of oneself. The idea of varied inward destinations, involving motion through time and space, therefore appears strange.
    Generally speaking, we have explored the physical planet enough so that we have a good idea of what to expect as we travel from country to country.
    Before a trip, we can produce travel folders that outline the attractions and characteristics of a certain locale. We are not traveling blind folded,therefore, and while any given journey may be new to us, we are not really a pioneer: The land has been mapped and there are few basic surprises.
    The inner lands have not been as well explored. To say the least, they lie in virgin territory as far as our conscious mind is concerned. Others have journeyed to some of these interior locales, but since they were indeed explorers they had to learn as they went along. Some, returning, provided guidebooks or travel folders, telling us what could be expected. We make our own reality. If we were from a foreign land and asked one person to give us a description for reality. The person might say “New York City is a frightful place in which crime is rampant, gangs roam the streets, murders and rapes are the norm, and people are not only impolite but ready to attack us at a moment’s notice. There are no trees. The air is polluted, and we can expect only violence. ” If we asked someone else, this individual might say instead: “New York City has the finest of museums, open-air concerts in some of the parks, fine sculpture, theater, and probably the greatest collection of books outside the Vatican. It has a good overall climate, a great mixture of cultures. In it, millions of people go their way daily in freedom. ” Both people would be speaking of their private beliefs, and would be colored by the individual focus from which each of them viewed that City.
    One person might be able to give us the city’s precise location in terms of latitude and longitude. The other might have no such knowledge, and say instead: “I take a plane at such-an-such a place, at such-and-such a time, giving New York City as my destination, and if I take the proper plane I always arrive there.
    Explorers traveling into inner reality, do not have the same kind of landmarks to begin with. Many have been so excited with their discoveries that they wrote guidebooks long before they even began to explore the inner landscape They did not understand that they found what they wanted to find, or that the seemingly objective phenomena originated in the reflections of the psyche.
   We may, for example, have read books numbering the “inner realms,” and telling us what we can expect to encounter in each. Many of these speak of lords or gods of the realm, or of demons. In a strange way these books do provide a service, for at certain levels we will find our own ideas materialized: and if we believe in demons then in those terms we will encounter them. The authors, however, suppose that the devils have a reality outside of our belief in them, and such is not the case. The demons simply represent a state of our own mind that is seemingly out there, objectified. Therefore, whatever methods the authors used to triumph over these demons is often given as proof not only of the demons’ reality but of each method’s effectiveness.
    Now if we read such books we may often program our activity along those lines, in the same way that a visitor to New York City might program experience of the city in terms of what he of she had been told existed there.
    That kind of structuring also does a disservice, however, for it prevents us from coming in contact with our own original concepts. there is no reason, for example, to encounter any demons or devils in any trance or out-of-body condition. In such cases our own hallucinations blind us to the environment within which they are projected. All of its dimensions are faithfully and instantly produced as experience when we learn to take our “normally alert” conscious mind with us; and when we are free of such limiting ideas, then at those levels we can glimpse the inner powers of our own psyche, and watch the interplay of beliefs and symbols as they are manifested before our eyes. Until we learn to do this we will most certainly have difficulty, for we will not be able to tell the difference between our projections and what is happening in the inner environment.
    Any exploration of inner reality must necessarily involve a journey through the psyche, and these effects can be thought of as atmospheric conditions, natural, at a certain stage, through which we pass as we continue.
    Our world, is the result of a certain focus of consciousness, without which that world cannot be perceived. The range of consciousness involved is obviously physically oriented, yet within it there are great varieties of consciousness, each experiencing that seemingly objective world from a private perspective. The physical environment is real in different terms to an animal, a fish, a man, or a rock, for example, and different portions of those forms. This is highly important.
    If an inhabitant from another reality outside of our own physical system entirely were to visit it, and if “his” or “her” intelligence was roughly of the same degree as our own, he or she would still have to learn to focus his or her consciousness into the same way that we do, more or less, in order to perceive our world. He or she would have to alter his or her native focus and turn it in a direction that was foreign to him or her. In this way he or she could “pick up our station.” There would be distortions, because even though he or she managed such manipulations he or she might not have the same kind of native physical structure as our own, or course, through which to receive and interpret those data his altered consciousness perceived.
    Our visitor would then be forced to translate that information as best he or she could through his or her own native structure, if it were to make any sense to his or her consciousness in its usual orientation. All realities are the result of certain unique focuses taken by consciousness. In those terms, there is no outside. The effect of objectivity are caused as the psyche projects its experience into inner dimensions that it has itself created
    Within, those frameworks are ever expanding, so that in our terms at least it seems that greater and greater distances are involved. Travel to any other land of physical reality must then involve alterations of consciousness.
   While all of our thoughts and feelings are “somewhat” materialized, only some of them become physical in our terms. They are then accepted as physical reality. They provide the basis for the physical events, objects, and phenomena upon which we all agree. Therefore our world has a stability that works well enough for daily concerns. At that point we are tuned in precisely on our “home station.” We ignore the ghost symbols or voices, the probable actions that also occur, but that are muffled in the clear tones of our accepted reality. When we begin to travel away from that home station, we become more aware of the other frequencies that are buried within it. We move through other frequencies, but to do this we must alter our own consciousness. The probable realities connected with our own system are like the suburbs, say, surrounding a main city. If for simplicity’s sake we think of other realities as different cities, then after we leave our own we would pass through the suburbs, then into he country, then after a time into other suburbs until we reached another metro-city. Each metropolis would represent a conglomeration of consciousnesses operating within an overall general frequency of clearest focus, a high point of psychic communication and exquisite focus in the given kind of reality unless we are tunes in to those particular frequencies, however, we could not pick up that reality. We might instead perceive the equivalent of jumbled sound or meaningless static, or jigsaw images. We might simply realize that some kind of activity was there, nut without being able to pinpoint it.